initial commit of ebook 4932HEADmain

11 files changed, 58072 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6833f05
--- /dev/null
+++ b/.gitattributes
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+* text=auto
+*.txt text
+*.md text
diff --git a/4932-0.txt b/4932-0.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..605defe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/4932-0.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,13929 @@
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of A Knight of the White Cross, by G.A. Henty
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: A Knight of the White Cross
+
+Author: G.A. Henty
+
+Release Date: January, 2004  [EBook #4932]
+Posting Date: April 13, 2009
+Last Updated: March 11, 2018
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: UTF-8
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK A KNIGHT OF THE WHITE CROSS ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Martin Robb
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+A KNIGHT OF THE WHITE CROSS
+
+
+By G.A. Henty
+
+
+
+
+PREFACE.
+
+
+MY DEAR LADS,
+
+The order of the Knights of St. John, which for some centuries played
+a very important part in the great struggle between Christianity and
+Mahomedanism, was, at its origin, a semi-religious body, its members
+being, like other monks, bound by vows of obedience, chastity, and
+poverty, and pledged to minister to the wants of the pilgrims who
+flocked to the Holy Places, to receive them at their great Hospital--or
+guest house--at Jerusalem, dedicated to St. John the Baptist, and to
+defend them on their passage to and from the sea, against attack by
+Moslems. In a comparatively short time the constitution of the order was
+changed, and the Knights Hospitallers became, like the Templars, a
+great military Order pledged to defend the Holy Sepulchre, and to war
+everywhere against the Moslems. The Hospitallers bore a leading share
+in the struggle which terminated in the triumph of the Moslems, and the
+capture by them of Jerusalem. The Knights of St. John then established
+themselves at Acre, but after a valiant defence of that fortress,
+removed to Crete, and shortly afterwards to Rhodes. There they fortified
+the town, and withstood two terrible sieges by the Turks. At the end
+of the second they obtained honourable terms from Sultan Solyman, and
+retiring to Malta established themselves there in an even stronger
+fortress than that of Rhodes, and repulsed all the efforts of the Turks
+to dispossess them. The Order was the great bulwark of Christendom
+against the invasion of the Turks, and the tale of their long struggle
+is one of absorbing interest, and of the many eventful episodes none
+is more full of incident and excitement than the first siege of Rhodes,
+which I have chosen for the subject of my story.
+
+Yours truly, G. A. Henty
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER I The King Maker
+
+
+A stately lady was looking out of the window of an apartment in the
+Royal Chateau of Amboise, in the month of June, 1470. She was still
+handsome, though many years of anxiety, misfortune, and trouble, had
+left their traces on her face. In the room behind her, a knight was
+talking to a lady sitting at a tambour frame; a lad of seventeen was
+standing at another window stroking a hawk that sat on his wrist,
+while a boy of nine was seated at a table examining the pages of an
+illuminated missal.
+
+“What will come of it, Eleanor?” the lady at the window said, turning
+suddenly and impatiently from it. “It seems past belief that I am to
+meet as a friend this haughty earl, who has for fifteen years been the
+bitterest enemy of my House. It appears almost impossible.”
+
+“'Tis strange indeed, my Queen; but so many strange things have befallen
+your Majesty that you should be the last to wonder at this. At any rate,
+as you said but yesterday, naught but good can come of it. He has done
+his worst against you, and one can scarce doubt that if he chooses he
+has power to do as much good for you, as in past times he has done you
+evil. 'Tis certain that his coming here shows he is in earnest, for
+his presence,--which is sure sooner or later to come to the ears of the
+Usurper,--will cause him to fall into the deepest disgrace.”
+
+“And yet it seemed,” the queen said, “that by marrying his daughter
+to Clarence he had bound himself more firmly than ever to the side of
+York.”
+
+“Ay, madam,” the knight said. “But Clarence himself is said to be alike
+unprincipled and ambitious, and it may well be that Warwick intended to
+set him up against Edward; had he not done so, such an alliance would
+not necessarily strengthen his position at Court.”
+
+“Methinks your supposition is the true one, Sir Thomas,” the queen said.
+“Edward cares not sufficiently for his brother to bestow much favour
+upon the father of the prince's wife. Thus, he would gain but little
+by the marriage unless he were to place Clarence on the throne. Then
+he would again become the real ruler of England, as he was until Edward
+married Elizabeth Woodville, and the House of Rivers rose to the first
+place in the royal favour, and eclipsed the Star of Warwick. It is no
+wonder the proud Earl chafes under the ingratitude of the man who owes
+his throne to him, and that he is ready to dare everything so that he
+can but prove to him that he is not to be slighted with impunity. But
+why come to me, when he has Clarence as his puppet?”
+
+“He may have convinced himself, madam, that Clarence is even less to
+be trusted than Edward, or he may perceive that but few of the Yorkists
+would follow him were he to declare against the Usurper, while assuredly
+your adherents would stand aloof altogether from such a struggle.
+Powerful as he is, Warwick could not alone withstand the united forces
+of all the nobles pledged to the support of the House of York. Thence,
+as I take it, does it happen that he has resolved to throw in his lot
+with Lancaster, if your Majesty will but forgive the evil he has done
+your House and accept him as your ally. No doubt he will have terms to
+make and conditions to lay down.”
+
+“He may make what conditions he chooses,” Queen Margaret said
+passionately, “so that he does but aid me to take vengeance on that
+false traitor; to place my husband again on the throne; and to obtain
+for my son his rightful heritage.”
+
+As she spoke a trumpet sounded in the courtyard below.
+
+“He has come,” she exclaimed. “Once again, after years of misery and
+humiliation, I can hope.”
+
+“We had best retire, madam,” Sir Thomas Tresham said. “He will speak
+more freely to your Majesty if there are no witnesses. Come, Gervaise,
+it is time that you practised your exercises.” And Sir Thomas, with his
+wife and child, quitted the room, leaving Queen Margaret with her son to
+meet the man who had been the bitterest foe of her House, the author of
+her direst misfortunes.
+
+For two hours the Earl of Warwick was closeted with the queen; then he
+took horse and rode away. As soon as he did so, a servant informed Sir
+Thomas and his wife that the queen desired their presence. Margaret was
+standing radiant when they entered.
+
+“Congratulate me, my friends,” she said. “The Star of Lancaster has
+risen again. Warwick has placed all his power and influence at our
+disposal. We have both forgiven all the past: I the countless injuries
+he has inflicted on my House, he the execution of his father and so many
+of his friends. We have both laid aside all our grievances, and we stand
+united by our hate for Edward. There is but one condition, and this I
+accepted gladly--namely, that my son should marry his daughter Anne.
+This will be another bond between us; and by all reports Anne is a
+charming young lady. Edward has gladly agreed to the match; he could
+make no alliance, even with the proudest princess in Europe, which would
+so aid him, and so strengthen his throne.”
+
+“God grant that your hopes may be fulfilled, madam,” the knight said
+earnestly, “and that peace may be given to our distracted country! The
+Usurper has rendered himself unpopular by his extravagance and by the
+exactions of his tax collectors, and I believe that England will gladly
+welcome the return of its lawful king to power. When does Warwick
+propose to begin?”
+
+“He will at once get a fleet together. Louis, who has privately brought
+about this meeting, will of course throw no impediment in his way; but,
+on the other hand, the Duke of Burgundy will do all in his power to
+thwart the enterprise, and will, as soon as he learns of it, warn
+Edward. I feel new life in me, Eleanor. After fretting powerless for
+years, I seem to be a different woman now that there is a prospect of
+action. I am rejoiced at the thought that at last I shall be able to
+reward those who have ventured and suffered so much in the cause of
+Lancaster.”
+
+“My hope is, madam, that this enterprise will be the final one,--that,
+once successful, our dear land will be no longer deluged with blood,
+and that never again shall I be forced to draw my sword against my
+countrymen.”
+
+“'Tis a good and pious wish, Sir Thomas, and heartily do I join in it.
+My married life has been one long round of trouble, and none more than I
+have cause to wish for peace.”
+
+“There is the more hope for it, madam, that these wars have greatly
+diminished the number of powerful barons. It is they who are the authors
+of this struggle; their rivalries and their ambitions are the ruin of
+England. Save for their retainers there would be no armies to place in
+the field; the mass of people stand aloof altogether, desiring only to
+live in peace and quiet. 'Tis the same here in France; 'tis the powerful
+vassals of the king that are ever causing trouble.”
+
+“'Tis so indeed, Sir Thomas. But without his feudal lords how could a
+king place an army in the field, when his dominions were threatened by a
+powerful neighbour?”
+
+“Then it would be the people's business to fight, madam, and I doubt not
+that they would do so in defence of their hearths and homes. Besides,
+the neighbour would no longer have the power of invasion were he also
+without great vassals. These great barons stand between the king and
+his subjects; and a monarch would be a king indeed were he able to rule
+without their constant dictation, and undisturbed by their rivalry and
+ambitions.”
+
+“That would be a good time indeed, Sir Thomas,” the queen said, with a
+smile; “but methinks there is but little chance of its coming about, for
+at present it seems to me that the vassals are better able to make or
+unmake kings, than kings are able to deprive the great vassals of
+power; and never since Norman William set foot in England were they more
+powerful than they are at present. What does my chance of recovering our
+throne rest upon? Not upon our right, but on the quarrel between Warwick
+and the House of Rivers. We are but puppets that the great lords play
+against each other. Did it depend upon my will, it should be as you
+say; I would crush them all at a blow. Then only should I feel really a
+queen. But that is but a dream that can never be carried out.”
+
+“Not in our time, madam. But perhaps it may come sooner than we expect;
+and this long war, which has destroyed many great families and weakened
+others, may greatly hasten its arrival. I presume until Warwick is ready
+to move naught will be done, your Majesty?”
+
+“That is not settled yet. Warwick spoke somewhat of causing a rising
+in the north before he set sail, so that a portion at least of Edward's
+power may be up there when we make our landing.”
+
+“It would be a prudent step, madam. If we can but gain possession of
+London, the matter would be half finished. The citizens are ever ready
+to take sides with those whom they regard as likely to win, and just as
+they shout at present 'Long live King Edward!' so would they shout 'Long
+live King Henry!' did you enter the town.”
+
+“This may perhaps change the thought that you have entertained, Sir
+Thomas, of making your son a Knight of St. John.”
+
+“I have not thought the matter over, madam. If there were quiet in the
+land I should, were it not for my vow, be well content that he should
+settle down in peace at my old hall; but if I see that there is still
+trouble and bloodshed ahead, I would in any case far rather that he
+should enter the Order, and spend his life in fighting the infidel than
+in strife with Englishmen. My good friend, the Grand Prior of the Order
+in England, has promised that he will take him as his page, and at
+any rate in the House of St. John's he will pass his youth in security
+whatsoever fate may befall me. The child himself already bids fair to
+do honour to our name, and to become a worthy member of the Order. He is
+fond of study, and under my daily tuition is making good progress in the
+use of his weapons.”
+
+“That is he,” the prince said, speaking for the first time, “It was but
+yesterday in the great hall downstairs he stood up with blunted swords
+against young Victor de Paulliac, who is nigh three years his senior. It
+was amusing to see how the little knaves fought against each other;
+and by my faith Gervaise held his own staunchly, in spite of Victor's
+superior height and weight. If he join the Order, Sir Thomas, I warrant
+me he will cleave many an infidel's skull, and will do honour to the
+langue of England.”
+
+“I hope so, prince,” the knight said gravely. “The Moslems ever gain in
+power, and it may well be that the Knights of St. John will be hardly
+pressed to hold their own. If the boy joins them it will be my wish that
+he shall as early as possible repair to Rhodes. I do not wish him to
+become one of the drones who live in sloth at their commanderies in
+England, and take no part in the noble struggle of the Order with the
+Moslem host, who have captured Constantinople and now threaten all
+Europe. We were childless some years after our marriage, and Eleanor and
+I vowed that were a son born to us he should join the Order of the White
+Cross, and dedicate his life to the defence of Christian Europe against
+the infidel. Our prayers for a son were granted, and Gervaise will enter
+the Order as soon as his age will permit him. That is why I rejoice at
+the grand prior's offer to take him as his page, for he will dwell in
+the hospital safely until old enough to take the first steps towards
+becoming a knight of the Order.”
+
+“I would that I had been born the son of a baron like yourself,” the
+prince said earnestly, “and that I were free to choose my own career.
+Assuredly in that case I too would have joined the noble Order and
+have spent my life in fighting in so grand a cause, free from all the
+quarrels and disputes and enmities that rend England. Even should I some
+day gain a throne, surely my lot is not to be envied. Yet, as I have
+been born to the rank, I must try for it, and I trust to do so worthily
+and bravely. But who can say what the end will be? Warwick has ever
+been our foe, and though my royal mother may use him in order to free my
+father, and place him on the throne, she must know well enough that he
+but uses us for his own ends alone, and that he will ever stand beside
+the throne and be the real ruler of England.”
+
+“For a time, Edward,” the queen broke in. “We have shown that we can
+wait, and now it seems that our great hope is likely to be fulfilled.
+After that, the rest will be easy. There are other nobles, well nigh as
+powerful as he, who look with jealousy upon the way in which he lords
+it, and be assured that they will look with a still less friendly eye
+upon him when he stands, as you say, beside the throne, once your father
+is again seated there. We can afford to bide our time, and assuredly it
+will not be long before a party is formed against Warwick. Until then
+we must bear everything. Our interests are the same. If he is content
+to remain a prop to the throne, and not to eclipse it, the memory of
+the past will not stand between us, and I shall regard him as the weapon
+that has beaten down the House of York and restored us to our own, and
+shall give him my confidence and friendship. If, on the other hand,
+he assumes too much, and tries to lord it over us, I shall seek other
+support and gather a party which even he will be unable successfully to
+withstand. I should have thought, Edward, that you would be even more
+glad than I that this long time of weary waiting for action is over, and
+that once again the banner of Lancaster will be spread to the winds.”
+
+“I shall be that, mother. Rather would I meet death in the field than
+live cooped up here, a pensioner of France. But I own that I should feel
+more joy at the prospect if the people of England had declared in our
+favour, instead of its being Warwick--whom you have always taught me to
+fear and hate--who thus comes to offer to place my father again on the
+throne, and whose goodwill towards us is simply the result of pique and
+displeasure because he is no longer first in the favour of Edward. It
+does not seem to me that a throne won by the aid of a traitor can be a
+stable one.”
+
+“You are a foolish boy,” the queen said angrily. “Do you not see that by
+marrying Warwick's daughter you will attach him firmly to us?”
+
+“Marriages do not count for much, mother. Another of Warwick's daughters
+married Clarence, Edward's brother, and yet he purposes to dethrone
+Edward.”
+
+The queen gave an angry gesture and said, “You have my permission to
+retire, Edward. I am in no mood to listen to auguries of evil at the
+present moment.”
+
+The prince hesitated for a moment as if about to speak, but with an
+effort controlled himself, and bowing deeply to his mother, left the
+room.
+
+“Edward is in a perverse humour,” the queen said in a tone of much
+vexation to Sir Thomas Tresham, when Gervaise had left the room.
+“However, I know he will bear himself well when the hour of trial
+comes.”
+
+“That I can warrant he will, madam; he has a noble character, frank and
+fearless, and yet thoughtful beyond his years. He will make, I believe,
+a noble king, and may well gather round him all parties in the state.
+But your Majesty must make excuses for his humour. Young people are
+strong in their likes and dislikes. He has never heard you speak aught
+but ill of Warwick, and he knows how much harm the Earl has done to your
+House. The question of expediency does not weigh with the young as with
+their elders. While you see how great are the benefits that will accrue
+from an alliance with Warwick, and are ready to lay aside the hatred of
+years and to forget the wrongs you have suffered, the young prince is
+unable so quickly to forget that enmity against the Earl that he has
+learnt from you.”
+
+“You are right, Sir Thomas, and I cannot blame Edward that he is unable,
+as I am, to forget the past. What steps would you advise that I myself
+should take? Shall I remain passive here, or shall I do what I can to
+rouse our partisans in England?”
+
+“I should say the latter, madam. Of course it will not do to trust to
+letters, for were one of these to fall into the wrong hands it might
+cause the ruin of Warwick's expedition; but I should say that a cautious
+message sent by word of mouth to some of our old adherents would be of
+great use. I myself will, if your Majesty chooses to entrust me with the
+mission, undertake to carry it out. I should take ship and land in the
+west, and would travel in the guise of a simple country gentleman,
+and call upon your adherents in all the western counties. It would be
+needful first to make out a list of the nobles who have shown themselves
+devoted to your cause, and I should bid these hold themselves and their
+retainers in readiness to take the field suddenly. I should say no word
+of Warwick, but merely hint that you will not land alone, but with a
+powerful array, and that all the chances are in your favour.”
+
+“But it would be a dangerous mission, Sir Thomas.”
+
+“Not greatly so, madam. My own estates lie in Sussex, and there would be
+but little chance of my recognition, save by your own adherents, who may
+have seen me among the leaders of your troops in battle; and even that
+is improbable. At present Edward deems himself so securely seated on
+the throne that men can travel hither and thither through the country
+without being questioned, and the Lancastrians live quietly with the
+Yorkists. Unless I were so unfortunate as to meet a Yorkist noble who
+knew that I was a banished man and one who had the honour of being in
+your Majesty's confidence, I do not think that any danger could possibly
+arise. What say you, wife?”
+
+“I cannot think that there is no danger,” Lady Tresham said; “but even
+so I would not say a word to hinder you from doing service to the cause.
+I know of no one else who could perform the mission. You have left my
+side to go into battle before now, and I cannot think that the danger
+of such an expedition can be as great as that which you would undergo
+in the field. Therefore, my dear lord, I would say no word now to stay
+you.”
+
+She spoke bravely and unfalteringly, but her face had paled when Sir
+Thomas first made the proposal, and the colour had not yet come back to
+her cheeks.
+
+“Bravely spoken, dame,” the queen said warmly. “Well, Sir Thomas, I
+accept your offer, and trust that you will not be long separated from
+your wife and son, who will of course journey with me when I go to
+England, where doubtless you will be able to rejoin us a few days after
+we land. Now let us talk over the noblemen and gentlemen in the west,
+upon whom we can rely, if not to join our banner as soon as it is
+spread, at least to say no word that will betray you.”
+
+Two days later Sir Thomas Tresham started on his journey, while the
+queen remained at Amboise eagerly awaiting the news that Warwick had
+collected a fleet, and was ready to set sail. Up to this point the Duke
+of Clarence had sided with Warwick against his brother, and had passed
+over with him to France, believing, no doubt, that if the Earl should
+succeed in dethroning Edward, he intended to place him, his son-in-law,
+upon the throne. He was rudely awakened from this delusion by Charles of
+Burgundy, who, being in all but open rebellion against his suzerain,
+the King of France, kept himself intimately acquainted with all that was
+going on. He despatched a female emissary to Clarence to inform him
+of the league Warwick had made with the Lancastrians, and the intended
+marriage between his daughter Anne and the young prince; imploring him
+to be reconciled with his brother and to break off his alliance with the
+Earl, who was on the point of waging war against the House of York.
+
+Clarence took the advice, and went over to England, where he made his
+peace with Edward, the more easily because the king, who was entirely
+given up to pleasure, treated with contempt the warnings the Duke
+of Burgundy sent him of the intended invasion by Warwick. And yet a
+moment's serious reflection should have shown him that his position was
+precarious. The crushing exactions of the tax gatherers, in order to
+provide the means for Edward's lavish expenditure, had already caused
+very serious insurrections in various parts of the country, and his
+unpopularity was deep and general. In one of these risings the royal
+troops had suffered a crushing defeat. The Earl Rivers, the father, and
+Sir John Woodville, one of the brothers, of the queen had, with the Earl
+of Devon, been captured by the rebels, and the three had been beheaded,
+and the throne had only been saved by the intervention of Warwick.
+
+Thus, then, Edward had every reason for fearing the result should the
+Earl appear in arms against him. He took, however, no measures whatever
+to prepare for the coming storm, and although the Duke of Burgundy
+despatched a fleet to blockade Harfleur, where Warwick was fitting out
+his expedition, and actually sent the name of the port at which the Earl
+intended to land if his fleet managed to escape from Harfleur, Edward
+continued carelessly to spend his time in pleasure and dissipation,
+bestowing his full confidence upon the Archbishop of York and the
+Marquis of Montague, both brothers of the Earl of Warwick.
+
+The elements favoured his enemies, for early in September the Duke of
+Burgundy's Fleet, off Harfleur, was dispersed by a storm, and Warwick,
+as soon as the gale abated, set sail, and on the 13th landed on the
+Devonshire coast. His force was a considerable one, for the French king
+had furnished him both with money and men; on effecting his landing
+he found no army assembled to oppose him. A few hours after his
+disembarkation, he was joined by Sir Thomas Tresham, who gave him the
+good news that the whole of the west was ready to rise, and that in a
+few days all the great landowners would join him with their retainers.
+This turned out to be the case, and Warwick, with a great array, marched
+eastward. Kent had already risen, and London declared for King
+Henry. Warwick, therefore, instead of marching thither, moved towards
+Lincolnshire, where Edward was with his army, having gone north to
+repress an insurrection that had broken out there at the instigation of
+Warwick.
+
+Lord Montague now threw off the mask, and declared for King Henry. Most
+of the soldiers followed him, and Edward, finding it hopeless to oppose
+Warwick's force, which was now within a short march of him, took ship
+with a few friends who remained faithful, and sailed for Holland.
+Warwick returned to London, where he took King Henry from the dungeon in
+the Tower, into which he himself had, five years before, thrown him, and
+proclaimed him king.
+
+On the day that this took place Dame Tresham arrived in London with her
+son. The queen had found that she could not for the present cross, as
+she was waiting for a large French force which was to accompany her.
+As it was uncertain how long the delay might last, she counselled her
+friend to join her husband. The revolution had been accomplished without
+the loss of a single life, with the exception of that of the Earl
+of Worcester, who was hated for his cruelty by the people. Edward's
+principal friends took refuge in various religious houses. The
+queen, her three daughters, and her mother, fled to the sanctuary at
+Westminster. All these were left unmolested, nor was any step taken
+against the other adherents of the House of York. Warwick was now
+virtually King of England. The king, whose intellect had always been
+weak, was now almost an imbecile, and Margaret of Anjou was still
+detained in France. Sir Thomas Tresham went down to his estates in Kent,
+and there lived quietly for some months. The Duke of Clarence had joined
+Warwick as soon as he saw that his brother's cause was lost; and as
+the Duke had no knowledge of his changed feelings towards him, he
+was heartily welcomed. An act of settlement was passed by Parliament
+entailing the Crown on Henry's son Edward, Prince of Wales, and in case
+of that prince's death without issue, on the Duke of Clarence. On the
+12th of March following (1471) Edward suddenly appeared with a fleet
+with which he had been secretly supplied by the Duke of Burgundy, and,
+sailing north, landed in the Humber. He found the northern population by
+no means disposed to aid him, but upon his taking a solemn oath that
+he had no designs whatever upon the throne, but simply claimed to be
+restored to his rights and dignities as Duke of York, he was joined by
+a sufficient force to enable him to cross the Trent. As he marched south
+his army speedily swelled, and he was joined by many great lords.
+
+Warwick had summoned Henry's adherents to the field, and marched
+north to meet him. When the armies approached each other, the Duke of
+Clarence, who commanded a portion of Henry's army, went over with his
+whole force to Edward, and Warwick, being no longer in a position to
+give battle, was obliged to draw off and allow Edward to march unopposed
+towards London. The citizens, with their usual fickleness, received him
+with the same outburst of enthusiasm with which, five months before,
+they had greeted the entry of Warwick. The unfortunate King Henry was
+again thrown into his dungeon in the Tower, and Edward found himself
+once more King of England.
+
+Sir Thomas Tresham, as soon as he heard of the landing of Edward, had
+hastened up to London. In his uncertainty how matters would go, he
+brought his wife and son up with him, and left them in lodgings, while
+he marched north with Warwick. As soon as the defection of Clarence
+opened the road to London, he left the Earl, promising to return in
+a few days, and rode to town, arriving there two days before Edward's
+entry, and, purchasing another horse, took his wife and son down to
+St. Albans, where leaving them, he rejoined Warwick. In a few days the
+latter had gathered sufficient forces to enable him to risk the fortunes
+of a battle, and, marching south, he encamped with his army on the
+common north of Barnet. Edward had come out to meet him, and the two
+armies slept on Easter Eve within two miles of each other.
+
+Late in the evening Clarence sent a messenger to the Earl, offering to
+mediate, but the offer was indignantly refused by Warwick.
+
+In the darkness, neither party was aware of the other's precise
+position. Warwick was much stronger than the king in artillery, and had
+placed it on his right wing. The king, in his ignorance of the enemy's
+position, had placed his troops considerably more to the right than
+those of Warwick's army. The latter, believing that Edward's line was
+facing his, kept up a heavy cannonade all night upon where he supposed
+Edward's left to be--a cannonade which was thus entirely futile.
+
+In the morning (April 14th) a heavy mist covered the country and
+prevented either force from seeing the other's dispositions. Warwick
+took the command of his left wing, having with him the Duke of Exeter.
+Somerset was in command of his centre, and Montague and Oxford of his
+right.
+
+Edward placed himself in the centre of his array, the Duke of Gloucester
+commanded on his right, and Lord Hastings on his left.
+
+Desirous, from his inferiority in artillery, to fight out the battle
+hand to hand, Edward, at six o'clock in the morning, ordered his
+trumpets to blow, and, after firing a few shots, advanced through the
+mist to attack the enemy. His misconception as to Warwick's position,
+which had saved his troops from the effects of the cannonade during the
+night, was now disadvantageous to him, for the Earl's right so greatly
+outflanked his left that when they came into contact Hastings found
+himself nearly surrounded by a vastly superior force. His wing fought
+valiantly, but was at length broken by Oxford's superior numbers, and
+driven out of the field. The mist prevented the rest of the armies from
+knowing what had happened on the king's left. Edward himself led
+the charge on Warwick's centre, and having his best troops under his
+command, pressed forward with such force and vehemence that he pierced
+Somerset's lines and threw them into confusion.
+
+Just as Warwick's right had outflanked the king's left, so his own
+left was outflanked by Gloucester. Warwick's troops fought with great
+bravery, and, in spite of the disaster to his centre, were holding their
+ground until Oxford, returning from his pursuit of the king's left, came
+back through the mist. The king's emblem was a sun, that of Oxford
+a star with streaming rays. In the dim light this was mistaken by
+Warwick's men for the king's device, and believing that Oxford was far
+away on the right, they received him with a discharge of arrows. This
+was at once returned, and a conflict took place. At last the mistake was
+discovered, but the confusion caused was irreparable. Warwick and
+Oxford each suspected the other of treachery, and the king's right still
+pressing on, the confusion increased, and the battle, which had been so
+nearly won by the Earl, soon became a complete defeat, and by ten in the
+morning Warwick's army was in full flight.
+
+Accounts differ as to the strength of the forces engaged, but it is
+probable that there was no great inequality, and that each party brought
+some fifteen thousand men into the field. The number of slain is also
+very uncertain, some historians placing the total at ten thousand,
+others as low as one thousand; but from the number of nobles who fell,
+the former computation is probably nearest to the truth. Warwick, his
+brother Montague, and many other nobles and gentlemen, were killed, the
+only great nobles on his side who escaped being the Earls of Somerset
+and Oxford; many were also killed on Edward's side, and the slaughter
+among the ordinary fighting men was greater than usual.
+
+Hitherto in the battles that had been fought during the civil war; while
+the leaders taken on the field were frequently executed, the common
+soldiers were permitted to return to their homes, as they had only
+been acting under the orders of their feudal superiors, and were not
+considered responsible for their acts. At Barnet, however, Edward,
+smarting from the humiliation he had suffered by his enforced flight
+from England, owing to the whole country declaring for his rival, gave
+orders that no quarter was to be granted. It was an anxious day at St.
+Albans, where many ladies whose husbands were with Warwick's army had,
+like Dame Tresham, taken up their quarters. It was but a few miles from
+the field of battle. In the event of victory they could at once join
+their husbands, while in case of defeat they could take refuge in the
+sanctuary of the abbey. Messengers the night before had brought the news
+that the battle would begin at the dawn of day, and with intense anxiety
+they waited for the news.
+
+Dame Tresham and her son attended early mass at the abbey, and had
+returned to their lodgings, when Sir Thomas rode up at full speed.
+His armour was dinted and his plume shorn away from his helmet. As he
+entered the house he was met by his wife, who had run downstairs as she
+heard his horse stop at the door. A glance at his face was sufficient to
+tell the news.
+
+“We have lost the day,” he said. “Warwick and Montague are both killed.
+All is lost here for the present. Which will you do, my love, ride with
+me to the West, where Queen Margaret will speedily land, if indeed she
+has not landed already, or take sanctuary here with the boy?”
+
+“I will go with you,” she said. “I would vastly rather do so.”
+
+“I will tell you more on the road,” he said. “There is no time to be
+lost now.”
+
+The woman of the house was called, and at once set her son to saddle
+the other horse and to give a feed to that of the knight. Dame Tresham
+busied herself with packing the saddlebags while her husband partook of
+a hasty meal; and ten minutes after his arrival they set off, Gervaise
+riding behind his father, while the latter led the horse on which his
+wife was mounted. A thick mist hung over the country.
+
+“This mist told against us in the battle, wife, for as we advanced our
+forces fell into confusion, and more than once friend attacked friend,
+believing that he was an enemy. However, it has proved an advantage to
+us now, for it has enabled great numbers to escape who might otherwise
+have been followed and cut down. I was very fortunate. I had left my
+horse at a little farmhouse two miles in the rear of our camp, and in
+the fog had but small hope of finding it; but soon after leaving the
+battlefield, I came upon a rustic hurrying in the same direction as
+myself, and upon questioning him it turned out that he was a hand on
+the very farm at which I had left the horse. He had, with two or three
+others, stolen out after midnight to see the battle, and was now making
+his way home again, having seen indeed but little, but having learned
+from fugitives that we had been defeated. He guided me to the farmhouse,
+which otherwise I should assuredly never have reached. His master was
+favourable to our party, and let the man take one of the cart horses, on
+which he rode as my guide until he had placed me upon the high road to
+St. Albans, and I was then able to gallop on at full speed.”
+
+“And Warwick and his brother Montague are both killed?”
+
+“Both. The great Earl will make and unmake no more kings. He has been a
+curse to England, with his boundless ambition, his vast possessions, and
+his readiness to change sides and to embroil the country in civil war
+for purely personal ends. The great nobles are a curse to the
+country, wife. They are, it is true, a check upon kingly ill doing and
+oppression; but were they, with their great arrays of retainers and
+feudal followers, out of the way, methinks that the citizens and yeomen
+would be able to hold their own against any king.”
+
+“Was the battle a hard fought one?”
+
+“I know but little of what passed, except near the standard of Warwick
+himself. There the fighting was fierce indeed, for it was against the
+Earl that the king finally directed his chief onslaught. Doubtless he
+was actuated both by a deep personal resentment against the Earl for the
+part he had played and the humiliation he had inflicted upon him, and
+also by the knowledge that a defeat of Warwick personally would be the
+heaviest blow that he could inflict upon the cause of Lancaster.”
+
+“Then do you think the cause is lost?”
+
+“I say not that. Pembroke has a strong force in Wales, and if the West
+rises, and Queen Margaret on landing can join him, we may yet prevail;
+but I fear that the news of the field of Barnet will deter many from
+joining us. Men may risk lands and lives for a cause which seems to
+offer a fair prospect of success, but they can hardly be blamed for
+holding back when they see that the chances are all against them.
+Moreover, as a Frenchwoman, it cannot be denied that Margaret has never
+been popular in England, and her arrival here, aided by French gold and
+surrounded by Frenchmen, will tell against her with the country people.
+I went as far as I could on the day before I left Amboise, urging her on
+no account to come hither until matters were settled. It would have been
+infinitely better had the young prince come alone, and landed in the
+West without a single follower. The people would have admired his trust
+in them, and would, I am sure, have gathered strongly round his banner.
+However, we must still hope for the best. Fortune was against us today:
+it may be with us next time we give battle. And with parties so equally
+divided throughout the country a signal victory would bring such vast
+numbers to our banners that Edward would again find it necessary to
+cross the seas.”
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II THE BATTLE OF TEWKESBURY
+
+
+Riding fast, Sir Thomas Tresham crossed the Thames at Reading before any
+news of the battle of Barnet had arrived there. On the third day after
+leaving St. Albans he reached Westbury, and there heard that the news
+had been received of the queen's landing at Plymouth on the very day on
+which her friends had been defeated at Barnet, and that she had already
+been joined by the Duke of Somerset, the Earl of Devon, and others, and
+that Exeter had been named as the point of rendezvous for her friends.
+As the Lancastrians were in the majority in Wiltshire and Somerset,
+there was no longer any fear of arrest by partisans of York, and after
+resting for a day Sir Thomas Tresham rode quietly on to Exeter, where
+the queen had already arrived.
+
+The battle of Barnet had not, in reality, greatly weakened the
+Lancastrian cause. The Earl of Warwick was so detested by the adherents
+of the Red Rose that comparatively few of them had joined him, and the
+fight was rather between the two sections of Yorkists than between York
+and Lancaster. The Earl's death had broken up his party, and York and
+Lancaster were now face to face with each other, without his disturbing
+influence on either side. Among those who had joined the queen was
+Tresham's great friend, the Grand Prior of St. John's. Sir Thomas took
+up his lodgings in the house where he had established himself. The queen
+was greatly pleased at the arrival of Dame Tresham, and at her earnest
+request the latter shared her apartments, while Gervaise remained with
+his father.
+
+“So this is the young Knight of St. John,” the prior said, on the
+evening of the arrival of Sir Thomas. “I would, Tresham, that I were at
+present at Rhodes, doing battle with the infidels, rather than engaged
+in this warfare against Englishmen and fellow Christians.”
+
+“I can well understand that,” Sir Thomas said.
+
+“I could not hold aloof here, Tresham. The vows of our Order by no means
+hinder us from taking part in the affairs of our own country. The rule
+of the Order is indeed against it, but the rule is constantly broken.
+Were it otherwise there could be no commanderies in this or any
+other country; we should have, on entering the Order, to abandon our
+nationality, and to form part of one community in the East. The Order
+is true to its oaths. We cannot defend the Holy Sepulchre, for that,
+for the present, is hopelessly lost; but we can and do wage war with
+the infidel. For this funds are necessary as well as swords, and our
+commanderies throughout Europe supply the funds by which the struggle is
+maintained, and, when it is needed, send out contingents to help those
+fighting in the East. It was from the neglect of this cardinal point
+that the Templars fell. Their commanderies amassed wealth and wide
+possessions, but unlike us the knights abstained altogether from
+fulfilling their vows, and ceased to resist the infidel. Therefore they
+were suppressed, and, with the general approval of Europe, a portion of
+their possessions was handed over to the knights of St. John. However,
+as I understand, it is your wish that as soon as the boy comes of age
+to wield arms he shall go to Rhodes and become an active member of the
+Order. This is indeed the rule with all neophytes, but having served
+a certain time they are then permitted to return and join one of the
+commanderies in their native countries.”
+
+“I do not wish that for Gervaise,” his father said; “at least, I wish
+him to remain at Rhodes until all the civil troubles are absolutely
+at an end here. My life has been ruined by them. Loving retirement and
+quiet, and longing for nothing so much as a life among my tenantry, I
+have almost from a boy been actively engaged in warfare or have been
+away as an exile. Here every one of gentle blood has been more or less
+mixed up in these civil broils. To few of us does it personally matter
+whether a member of the House of York or Lancaster sits on the throne,
+and yet we have been almost compelled to take sides with one or the
+other; and now, in my middle age I am on the eve of another battle
+in which I risk my life and fortune. If we win I gain naught but the
+satisfaction of seeing young Edward made King of England. If we lose I
+am going into exile again, or I may leave my wife a widow, and my child
+penniless.”
+
+“It is too true, Tresham; and as I am as likely to fall as you are, the
+child might be left without a protector as well as fatherless. However,
+against that I will provide. I will write a letter to Peter D'Aubusson,
+who is the real governor of Rhodes, for the Grand Master Orsini is so
+old that his rule is little more than nominal. At his death D'Aubusson
+is certain to be elected Grand Master. He is a dear friend of mine. We
+entered the Order the same year, and were comrades in many a fight with
+the Moslems, and I am quite sure that when I tell him that it is my last
+request of him, he will, in memory of our long friendship, appoint your
+son as one of the Grand Master's pages. As you know, no one, however
+high his rank, is accepted as a novice before the age of sixteen.
+After a year's probation he is received into the body of the Order as a
+professed knight, and must go out and serve for a time in Rhodes. After
+three years of active service he must reside two more at the convent,
+and can then be made a commander. There is but one exception to the
+rule--namely, that the pages of the grand master are entitled to
+the privilege of admission at the age of twelve, so that they become
+professed knights at thirteen. Your son is now but nine, you say, and
+we must remember that D'Aubusson is not yet Grand Master, and Orsini may
+live for some years yet. D'Aubusson, however, can doubtless get him to
+appoint the boy as one of his pages. But, in any case, there are three
+years yet to be passed before he can go out. Doubtless these he will
+spend under his mother's care; but as it is as well to provide against
+everything, I will furnish your dame with a letter to the knight who
+will probably succeed me as Grand Prior of the English langue, asking
+him to see to the care and education of the boy up to the time when he
+can proceed to Rhodes. We may hope, my dear Tresham, that there will be
+no occasion to use such documents, and that you and I may both be able
+personally to watch over his career. Still, it is as well to take every
+precaution. I shall, of course, give D'Aubusson full particulars about
+you, your vow, and your wishes.”
+
+“I thank you greatly, old friend,” Sir Thomas said. “It has taken a
+load off my mind. I shall leave him here with his mother when we march
+forward, and bid her, if ill befalls me, cross again to France, and then
+to keep Gervaise with her until she can bring herself to part with him.
+She has her jewels and a considerable sum of money which I accepted from
+the man who has been enjoying my estates for the last five years, in
+lieu of the monies that he had received during that time. Therefore, she
+will not lack means for some years to come. Besides, Queen Margaret has
+a real affection for her, and will, doubtless, be glad to have her with
+her again in exile.”
+
+“When I am old enough,” Gervaise said, suddenly looking up from a missal
+of the Grand Prior's which he had been examining, “I will chop off the
+head of the Duke of York, and bring mother back to England.”
+
+“You will be a valiant champion no doubt, my boy,” the prior said,
+laughing. “But that is just what your father does not want. Chop off the
+heads of as many infidels as you will, but leave Englishmen alone, be
+they dukes or commoners. It is a far more glorious career to be aiding
+to defend Europe against the Moslem than to be engaged in wars with your
+own countrymen. If the great lords will fight, let them fight it out
+themselves without our aid; but I hope that long before you become a
+man even they will be tired of these perpetual broils, and that some
+agreement may be arrived at, and peace reign in this unhappy land.”
+
+“Besides, Gervaise,” his father added, “you must bear in mind always
+that my earnest wish and hope is that you will become a champion of
+the Cross. I took a solemn vow before you were born that if a son were
+granted to me I would dedicate him to the service of the Cross, and if I
+am taken from you, you must still try to carry that oath into effect.
+I trust that, at any rate for some years after you attain manhood,
+you will expend your whole strength and powers in the defence of
+Christianity, and as a worthy knight of the Order of St. John. Too many
+of the knights, after serving for three years against the infidels,
+return to their native countries and pass the rest of their lives in
+slothful ease at their commanderies, save perhaps when at any great
+crisis they go out for a while and join in the struggle. Such is not the
+life I should wish you to lead. At the death of your mother and myself,
+you will have no family ties in England--nothing to recall you here. If
+the House of York succeeds in establishing itself firmly on the throne,
+my estates will be forfeited. Therefore, regard Rhodes as your permanent
+home, and devote your life to the Order. Beginning so young, you may
+hope to distinguish yourself--to gain high rank in it; but remember that
+though these are my wishes, they are not my orders, and that your career
+must be in your own hands.”
+
+“I will be a brave knight, father,” the boy said firmly.
+
+“That is right, my boy. Now go upstairs to your bed; it is already late.
+I do not regret my vow,” he went on, after Gervaise had left the room,
+“though I regret that he is my only son. It is singular that men should
+care about what comes after them, but I suppose it is human nature.
+I should have liked to think that my descendants would sit in the old
+house, and that men of my race and name would long own the estates. But
+doubtless it is all for the best; for at least I can view the permanent
+loss of my estates, in case the Yorkists triumph, without any poignant
+regret.”
+
+“Doubtless it is for the best, Tresham, and you must remember that
+things may not, even now, turn out as you think. A knight who has done a
+brave service does not find much difficulty in obtaining from the Pope
+a dispensation from his vows. Numbers of knights have so left the Order
+and have married and perpetuated their name. It is almost a necessity
+that it should be so, for otherwise many princes and barons would
+object to their sons entering the Order. Its object is to keep back the
+irruption of the Moslems, and when men have done their share of hard
+work no regret need be felt if they desire to leave the Order. Our
+founder had no thought of covering Europe with monasteries, and beyond
+the fact that it is necessary there should be men to administer our
+manors and estates, I see no reason why any should not freely leave when
+they reach the age of thirty or thirty-five, and indeed believe that it
+would strengthen rather than weaken us were the vows, taken at the age
+of seventeen, to be for fifteen years only.”
+
+“There is something in that,” the knight said thoughtfully. “However,
+that is far in the distance, and concerns me but little; still, I agree
+with you, for I see no advantage in men, after their time of usefulness
+to the Order is past, being bound to settle down to a monastic life if
+by nature and habit unsuited for it. There are some spirits who,
+after long years of warfare, are well content so to do, but there are
+assuredly others to whom a life of forced inactivity, after a youth and
+manhood spent in action, must be well nigh unendurable. And now tell me
+frankly what you think of our chances here.”
+
+“Everything depends upon time. Promises of aid have come in from all
+quarters, and if Edward delays we shall soon be at the head of an
+overwhelming force. But Edward, with all his faults and vices, is an
+able and energetic leader, and must be well aware that if he is to
+strike successfully he must strike soon. We must hope that he will not
+be able to do this. He cannot tell whether we intend to march direct to
+London, or to join Pembroke in Wales, or to march north, and until he
+divines our purpose, he will hardly dare to move lest we should, by some
+rapid movement, interpose between himself and London. If he gives us a
+month, our success is certain. If he can give battle in a fortnight, no
+one can say how the matter will end.”
+
+Edward, indeed, was losing no time. He stayed but a few days in London
+after his victory at Barnet, and on the 19th of April left for Windsor,
+ordering all his forces to join him there. The Lancastrians had
+endeavoured to puzzle him as to their intended movements by sending
+parties out in various directions; but as soon as he had gathered a
+force, numerically small, but composed of veteran soldiers, he hurried
+west, determined to bring on a battle at the earliest opportunity. The
+queen's advisers determined to move first to Wells, as from that point
+they could either go north or march upon London. Edward entered Abingdon
+on the 27th, and then, finding the Lancastrians still at Wells, marched
+to the northwest, by which means he hoped to intercept them if they
+moved north, while he would be able to fall back and bar their road
+to London if they advanced in that direction. He therefore moved to
+Cirencester, and waited there for news until he learned that they had
+visited Bristol and there obtained reinforcements of men and supplies of
+money and cannon, and had then started on the high road to Gloucester.
+
+He at once sent off messengers to the son of Lord Beauchamp, who held
+the Castle of Gloucester for him, assuring him that he was following at
+full speed, and would come to his aid forthwith. The messengers
+arrived in time, and when the queen, after a long march, arrived before
+Gloucester, she found the gates shut in her face. The governor had taken
+steps to prevent her numerous adherents in the town from rising on
+her behalf, and, manning the walls, refused to surrender. Knowing that
+Edward was coming up rapidly, it was evident that there was no time to
+spare in an attempt to take the town, and the queen's army therefore
+pressed on, without waiting, to Tewkesbury. Once across the river they
+would speedily be joined by the Earl of Pembroke, and Edward would be
+forced to fall back at once.
+
+By the time they reached the river, however, they were thoroughly
+exhausted. They had marched thirty-six miles without rest, along bad
+roads and through woods, and were unable to go farther. The queen urged
+that the river should be crossed, but the leaders of the force were of
+opinion that it was better to halt. Edward would be able to follow them
+across the river, and were he to attack them when in disorder, and
+still further wearied by the operation of making the passage, he would
+certainly crush them. Moreover, a further retreat would discourage the
+soldiers, and as a battle must now be fought, it was better to fight
+where they were, especially as they could choose a strong position. The
+queen gave way, and the army encamped on a large field in front of the
+town. The position was well calculated for defence, for the country
+around was so broken and intercepted with lanes and deep hedges and
+ditches, that it was extremely difficult of approach.
+
+In the evening Edward came up, his men having also marched some
+six-and-thirty miles, and encamped for the night within three miles of
+the Lancastrian position. The queen's troops felt confident of victory.
+In point of numbers they were superior to their antagonists, and had the
+advantage of a strong position. Sir Thomas Tresham had, as he proposed,
+left his wife and son at Exeter when the force marched away.
+
+“Do not be despondent, love,” he said to his weeping wife, as he bade
+her goodbye. “Everything is in our favour, and there is a good hope of a
+happy termination to this long struggle. But, win or lose, be assured it
+is the last time I will draw my sword. I have proved my fidelity to the
+House of Lancaster; I have risked life and fortune in their cause; but
+I feel that I have done my share and more, and whichever way Providence
+may now decide the issue of the struggle, I will accept it. If we lose,
+and I come scatheless through the fight, I will ride hither, and we will
+embark at Plymouth for France, and there live quietly until the time
+comes when Edward may feel himself seated with sufficient firmness on
+the throne to forgive past offences and to grant an amnesty to all who
+have fought against him. In any other case, dear, you know my wishes,
+and I bid you carry them out within twenty-four hours of your receiving
+news of a defeat, without waiting longer for my appearance.”
+
+As soon as it was light, Edward advanced to the attack. The Duke of
+Gloucester was in command of the vanguard. He himself led the centre,
+while the rear was commanded by the Marquis of Dorset and Lord Hastings.
+The most advanced division of Lancastrians was commanded by the Duke of
+Somerset and his brother. The Grand Prior of the Order of St. John and
+Lord Wenlock were stationed in the centre, the Earl of Devon with
+the reserve. Refreshed by their rest, the queen's troops were in good
+spirits. While awaiting the attack, she and the prince rode among the
+ranks, encouraging the men with fiery speeches, and promising large
+rewards to all in case of victory.
+
+Gloucester made his advance with great difficulty. The obstacles to his
+progress were so many and serious that his division was brought to
+a halt before it came into contact with the defenders. He therefore
+brought up his artillery and opened a heavy cannonade upon Somerset's
+position, supporting his guns with flights of arrows, and inflicting
+such heavy loss upon him that the duke felt compelled to take the
+offensive.
+
+Having foreseen that he might be obliged to do so, he had, early in the
+morning, carefully examined the ground in front of him, and had found
+some lanes by which he could make a flank attack on the enemy. Moving
+his force down these lanes, where the trees and hedges completely hid
+his advance from the Yorkists, he fell suddenly upon Edward's centre,
+which, taken by surprise at the unexpected attack, was driven in
+confusion up the hill behind it. Somerset was quick to take advantage
+of his success, and wheeling his men round fell upon the Duke of
+Gloucester's division, and was equally successful in his attack upon
+it. Had the centre, under Lord Wenlock, moved forward at once to his
+support, the victory would have been assured; but Wenlock lay inactive,
+and Somerset was now engaged in conflict with the whole of Edward's
+force. But even under these circumstances he still gained ground, when
+suddenly the whole aspect of the battle was changed.
+
+Before it began Edward had sent two hundred spearmen to watch a wood
+near the defenders' lines, as he thought that the Lancastrians might
+place a force there to take him in flank as he attacked their front. He
+ordered them, if they found the wood unoccupied, to join in the fight
+as opportunity might offer. The wood was unoccupied, and the spearmen,
+seeing the two divisions of their army driven backwards, and being
+thereby cut off from their friends, issued from the wood and, charging
+down in a body, fell suddenly upon Somerset's rear.
+
+Astounded and confused by an attack from such a quarter, and believing
+that it was an act of treachery by one of their own commanders,
+Somerset's men, who had hitherto been fighting with the greatest
+bravery, fell into confusion. Edward's quick eye soon grasped the
+opportunity, and rallying his troops he charged impetuously down upon
+the Lancastrians, seconded hotly by Gloucester and his division.
+
+The disorder in Somerset's lines speedily grew into a panic, and the
+division broke up and fled through the lanes to the right and left.
+Somerset, after in vain trying to stop the panic, rode furiously back
+into the camp, followed by his principal officers, and riding up to
+Lord Wenlock he cleft his head in two with a battleaxe. His resentment,
+although justified by the inactivity of this nobleman at such a crisis,
+was yet disastrous, as it left the centre without a leader, and threw
+it into a state of disorganization, as many must have supposed that
+Somerset had turned traitor and gone over to the enemy. Before any
+disposition could be made, Edward and Gloucester poured their forces
+into the camp, and the Lancastrians at once broke and fled. Many of
+their leaders took refuge in the church, an asylum which they deemed
+inviolable, and which the Lancastrians had honourably respected in their
+hour of triumph.
+
+Among them were the Duke of Somerset, the Grand Prior of the Order
+of St. John, Sir Humphrey Audely, Sir Gervis of Clifton, Sir William
+Gainsby, Sir William Cary, Sir Henry Rose, Sir Thomas Tresham, and seven
+esquires. Margaret of Anjou fell into the hands of the victors. As to
+the fate of the young prince, accounts differ. Some authorities say that
+he was overtaken and slain on the field, but the majority related that
+he was captured and taken before Edward, who asked him, “What brought
+you to England?” On his replying boldly, “My father's crown and mine own
+inheritance,” Edward struck him in the mouth with his gauntlet, and his
+attendants, or some say his brothers, at once despatched the youth with
+their swords.
+
+The king, with Gloucester and Clarence, then went to the church at
+Tewkesbury, where the knights had taken refuge, burst open the doors,
+and entered it. A priest, bearing the holy vessels, threw himself before
+the king, and would not move until he promised to pardon all who had
+taken sanctuary there. The king then retired, and trusting in the royal
+word, the gentlemen made no attempt to escape, although it is said that
+they could easily have done so. Two days later a party of soldiers by
+the king's orders broke into the church, dragged them from the foot of
+the altar, and beheaded them outside.
+
+The news of the issue of the fatal battle of Tewkesbury, the capture of
+the queen, and the death of the prince, was borne to Exeter by fugitives
+on the following day. Beyond the fact that the Earl of Devon and other
+nobles were known to have been killed, and Somerset with a party of
+knights had taken sanctuary, they could give no details as to the fate
+of individuals. In the deepest distress at the utter ruin of the cause,
+and in ignorance of the fate of her husband, who she could only hope was
+one of those who had gained sanctuary, Dame Tresham prepared for flight.
+This accomplished, she had only to wait, and sit in tearless anguish at
+the window, listening intently whenever a horseman rode past. All night
+her watch continued. Gervaise, who had cried himself to sleep, lay on
+a couch beside her. Morning dawned, and she then knew that her husband
+would not come, for had he escaped from the field he would long ere this
+have been with her. The messenger with the news had arrived at eight the
+previous morning, and, faithful to her husband's wishes, at that hour
+she ordered the horses to be brought round, and, joining a party
+of gentlemen who were also making for the coast, rode with them to
+Plymouth. Arrangements were at once made with the captain of a small
+ship in the port, and two days later they landed at Honfleur, where
+Sir Thomas had enjoined his wife to wait until she heard from him or
+obtained sure news of his fate.
+
+A week after her arrival the news was brought by other fugitives of the
+violation of the sanctuary by the king, and the murder of Somerset and
+the gentlemen with him, of whom Sir Thomas Tresham was known to have
+been one.
+
+The blow proved fatal to Dame Tresham. She had gone through many trials
+and misfortunes, and had ever borne them bravely, but the loss of her
+husband completely broke her down. Save to see his wishes concerning
+their son carried out, she had no longer any interest in life or any
+wish to live. But until the future of Gervaise was assured, her mission
+was unfulfilled. His education was her sole care; his mornings were
+spent at a monastery, where the monks instructed the sons of such of the
+nobles and gentry of the neighbourhood as cared that they should be able
+to read and write. In the afternoon he had the best masters in the town
+in military exercises. His evenings he spent with his mother, who strove
+to instill in him the virtues of patience, mercy to the vanquished, and
+valour, by stories of the great characters of history. She herself spent
+her days in pious exercises, in attending the services of the Church,
+and in acts of charity and kindness to her poorer neighbours. But her
+strength failed rapidly, and she was but a shadow of her former self
+when, two years and a half after her arrival at Honfleur, she felt that
+if she was herself to hand Gervaise over to the Order of St. John, she
+must no longer delay. Accordingly she took ship to London, and landing
+there made her way with him to the dwelling of the Order at Clerkenwell.
+It was in process of rebuilding, for in 1381 it had been first plundered
+and then burned by the insurgents under Wat Tyler. During the ninety
+years that had elapsed since that event the work of rebuilding had
+proceeded steadily, each grand prior making additions to the pile which,
+although not yet fully completed, was already one of the grandest and
+stateliest abodes in England.
+
+On inquiring for the grand prior, and stating that she had a letter
+of importance for him, Dame Tresham and her son were shown up to his
+apartment, and on entering were kindly and courteously received by him
+when informed that she was the widow of the late Sir Thomas Tresham.
+
+“I am the bearer of a letter for you, given into my hand by my husband's
+dear friend your predecessor,” she said, “a few days before his murder
+at Tewkesbury. It relates to my son here.”
+
+The grand prior opened the letter and read it.
+
+“Assuredly, madam, I will carry out the wishes here expressed,” he said.
+“They are, that I should forward at once the letter he has given you to
+Sir Peter D'Aubusson, and that until an answer is received from him, I
+should take care of the boy here, and see that he is instructed in all
+that is needful for a future knight of our Order. I grieve to see that
+you yourself are looking so ill.”
+
+“My course is well nigh run,” she said. “I have, methinks, but a few
+days to live. I am thankful that it has been permitted to me to carry
+out my husband's wishes, and to place my boy in your hands. That done,
+my work on earth is finished, and glad indeed am I that the time is at
+hand when I can rejoin my dear husband.”
+
+“We have a building here where we can lodge ladies in distress or need,
+Dame Tresham, and trust that you will take up your abode there.”
+
+“I shall indeed be thankful to do so,” she replied. “I know no one in
+London, and few would care to lodge a dying woman.”
+
+“We are Hospitallers,” the grand prior said. “That was our sole mission
+when we were first founded, and before we became a military order, and
+it is still a part of our sworn duty to aid the distressed.”
+
+A few minutes later Dame Tresham was conducted to a comfortable
+apartment, and was given into the charge of a female attendant. The next
+day she had another interview with the grand prior, to whom she handed
+over her jewels and remaining money. This she prayed him to devote to
+the furnishing of the necessary outfit for Gervaise. She spent the rest
+of the day in the church of the hospital, had a long talk with her son
+in the evening, giving him her last charges as to his future life and
+conduct, and that night, as if she had now fulfilled her last duty on
+earth, she passed away, and was found by her attendant lying with a look
+of joy and peacefulness on her dead face.
+
+Gervaise's grief was for a time excessive. He was nearly twelve years
+old, and had never until now been separated from her even for a day. She
+had often spoken to him of her end being near, but until the blow came
+he had never quite understood that it could be so. She had, on the night
+before her death, told him that he must not grieve overmuch for her, for
+that in any case they must have soon been sundered, and that it was
+far better that he should think of her as at rest, and happy, than as
+leading a lonely and sorrowful life.
+
+The grand prior, however, wisely gave him but little time to dwell upon
+his loss, but as soon as her funeral had taken place, handed him over
+to the knights who had the charge of the novices on probation, and
+instructed them in their military exercises, and of the chaplain who
+taught them such learning as was considered requisite for a knight of
+the Order.
+
+The knights were surprised at the proficiency the lad had already
+attained in the use of his weapons.
+
+“By St. Agatha,” one of them exclaimed, after the conclusion of his
+first lesson, “you have had good teachers, lad, and have availed
+yourself rarely of them. If you go on like this you will become a
+distinguished knight of our Order. With a few more years to strengthen
+your arms I warrant me you will bear your part well in your first tussle
+with the Moslem corsairs.”
+
+It fortunately happened that a party of knights were starting for Rhodes
+a few days after the admission of Gervaise to the Hospital, and the
+letter to Sir Peter D'Aubusson was committed to their charge. They were
+to proceed to Bordeaux by ship, then to journey by land to Marseilles,
+and thence, being joined by some French knights, to sail direct to
+Rhodes. Two months later an answer was received. D'Aubusson wrote to the
+grand prior saying that he would gladly carry out the last wishes of his
+dead friend, and that he had already obtained from the grand master the
+appointment of Gervaise Tresham as one of his pages, and begged that he
+might be sent out with the next party of knights leaving England. It
+was three months before such an opportunity occurred. During that time
+Gervaise remained at the house of St. John's studying diligently, and
+continuing his military exercises. These were severe; for the scions of
+noble houses, who hoped some day to distinguish themselves as knights,
+were put through many gymnastic exercises--were taught to spring on to
+a horse when clad in full armour, to wield heavy battleaxes, to run and
+climb, and to prepare themselves for all the possibilities of the mode
+of fighting of the day.
+
+Gervaise gained the encomiums, not only of his special preceptor, but of
+the various knights in the house, and of the grand prior himself, both
+for his strength and activity, and for the earnestness with which he
+worked. When the time approached for his leaving England, the grand
+prior ordered for him the outfit which would be necessary in his
+position as a page of the grand master. The dresses were numerous and
+rich, for although the knights of St. John wore over their armour the
+simple mantle of their order, which was a sleeveless garment of black
+relieved only by a white cross on the chest, they indulged in the finest
+and most costly armour, and in rich garments beneath their black mantles
+when not in armour.
+
+“I am well pleased with you, Gervaise,” the grand prior said, on the
+evening before he was to leave, “and I see in you the making of a
+valiant knight of the Order. Maintain the same spirit you have shown
+here; be obedient and reverent to your superiors; give your whole mind
+to your duties; strive earnestly during the three or four years that
+your pagedom will last, to perfect yourself in military exercises, that
+when the time comes for you to buckle on armour you will be able to bear
+yourself worthily. Remember that you will have to win your knighthood,
+for the Order does not bestow this honour, and you must remain a
+professed knight until you receive it at the hands of some distinguished
+warrior. Ever bear in mind that you are a soldier of the Cross. Avoid
+luxury, live simply and modestly; be not led away by others, upon whom
+their vows may sit but lightly; keep ever in your mind that you have
+joined the Order neither to gain fame nor personal advantage, but simply
+that you may devote the strength and the intelligence that God has given
+you to protect Christendom from the advance of the infidel. I shall
+hear of you from time to time from D'Aubusson, and feel sure that the
+expectations I have formed of you will be fulfilled.”
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III THE GRAND MASTER'S PAGE
+
+
+The grand prior had, in accordance with Dame Tresham's request, sent the
+steward of the house to one of the principal jewellers of the city who,
+as the Order were excellent customers, paid a good price for her jewels.
+After the payment for the numerous dresses required for the service as
+a page to the grand master, the grand prior handed the balance of the
+money Dame Tresham had brought with her, and that obtained by the sale
+of her jewels, to one of the knights under whose charge Gervaise was to
+travel, to be given by him to D'Aubusson for the necessities of
+Gervaise as a page. During their term of service the pages received
+no remuneration, all their expenses being paid by their families.
+Nevertheless, the post was considered so honourable, and of such great
+advantage to those entering the Order, that the appointments were
+eagerly sought after.
+
+The head of the party was Sir Guy Redcar, who had been a commander in
+England, but who was now relinquishing that post in order to take a high
+office in the convent at the Island. With him were four lads between
+seventeen and twenty who were going out as professed knights, having
+served their year of probation as novices at the grand priory. With
+these Gervaise was already acquainted, as they had lived, studied, and
+performed their military exercises together. The three eldest of these
+Gervaise liked much, but the youngest of the party, Robert Rivers, a
+relation of the queen, had always shown a very different spirit from
+the others. He was jealous that a member of one of the defeated and
+disinherited Lancastrian families should obtain a post of such honour
+and advantage as that of page to the grand master, and that thus,
+although five years younger, Gervaise should enter the Order on an
+equality with him.
+
+In point of strength and stature he was, of course, greatly superior
+to Gervaise; but he had been spoilt from his childhood, was averse
+to exercise, and dull at learning, and while Gervaise was frequently
+commended by his instructors, he himself was constantly reproved, and
+it had been more than once a question whether he should be received as
+a professed knight at the termination of his year of novitiate. Thus,
+while the other lads treated Gervaise kindly, and indeed made rather
+a pet of him, Robert Rivers ignored him as much as possible, and if
+obliged to speak to him did so with a pointed rudeness that more than
+once brought upon him a sharp reproof from his companions. Gervaise
+himself was but little affected by Robert's manner. He was of an
+exceptionally good tempered nature, and, indeed, was so occupied with
+his work and so anxious to satisfy his teachers, that Robert's ill
+humour passed almost unnoticed.
+
+The journey was performed without incident. During their passage across
+the south of France, Gervaise's perfect knowledge of the language gained
+for him a great advantage over his companions, and enabled him to be of
+much use to Sir Guy. They had fine weather during their passage up the
+Mediterranean, and in the day their leader gave them their first lessons
+in the management and discipline of a ship.
+
+“You will be nearly as much at sea as you are on land for the five years
+you must stay at the convent,” he said; “and it is essential to the
+education of a knight of our Order to know all things connected with the
+management of a ship, even to its building. We construct our own galleys
+at Rhodes, using, of course, the labour of slaves, but under our own
+superintendence; and it is even more essential to us to know how to
+fight on sea than on land. There is, too, you see, a rivalry among
+ourselves, for each langue has its duties, and each strives to perform
+more gallant deeds and to bring in more rich prizes than the others. We
+of England are among the smallest of the langues, and yet methinks we do
+a fair portion of the work, and gain fully our share of honour. There is
+no fear of your having much time on your hands, for it is quite certain
+that there will soon be open war between Mahomet and the Order. In spite
+of the nominal truce, constant skirmishes are taking place, so that, in
+addition to our fights with pirates, we have sometimes encounters with
+the sultan's galleys.
+
+“Seven years ago, a number of our Order took part in the defence
+of Lesbos, and lost their lives at its capture, and we have sure
+information that Mahomet is preparing for an attack on the Island. No
+doubt he thinks it will be an easy conquest, for in '57 he succeeded
+in landing eighteen thousand men on the Island, and in ravaging a large
+district, carrying off much booty. Since then, however, the defences of
+Rhodes have been greatly strengthened. Zacosta, our last grand master,
+laboured diligently to increase the fortifications, and, specially,
+built on one side of the entrance to the harbour a strong tower, called
+Fort St. Nicholas. Orsini has carried on the works, which have been
+directed by D'Aubusson, who is captain general of the forces of the
+Island, and who has deepened the ditches and built a wall on the sea
+front of the town six hundred feet in length and twenty feet in height,
+money being found by the grand master from his private purse.
+
+“At present we are not sure whether the great armament that Mahomet is
+preparing is intended for the capture of Negropont, which belongs to
+Venice, or of Rhodes. Unfortunately Venice and Rhodes are not good
+friends. In the course of our war with Egypt in '58 we captured from
+some Venetian vessels, in which they were travelling, several Egyptian
+merchants with a great store of goods. The Venetians protested that as
+the ships were theirs we had no right to interfere with our enemies who
+were travelling in them, and, without giving time for the question to
+be discussed, at once attacked our galleys, and sent a fleet against
+Rhodes. They landed on the Island, and not only pillaged the district
+of Halki, but, a number of natives having sought shelter in a cave, the
+Venetians blocked up the entrance with brushwood, set it on fire, and
+suffocated them all.
+
+“Shortly afterwards, another and larger fleet appeared off Rhodes, and
+demanded the restitution of the Egyptians and their merchandise. There
+was a great division of opinion in the council; but, seeing the great
+danger that threatened us both from the Turks at Constantinople and the
+Venetians, and that it was madness at such a time to engage in war with
+a Christian power, the grand master persuaded the council to accede to
+their request. There has never been any friendly feeling between Venice
+and ourselves since that time. Still, I trust that our common danger
+will reunite us, and that whether Negropont or Rhodes is attacked by the
+Moslems, we shall render loyal aid to each other.”
+
+There was great excitement among Gervaise and his companions when it was
+announced that Rhodes was in sight, and as they approached the town
+they gazed with admiration at the castle with its stately buildings, the
+palace of the grand master and the Hospital of St. John, rising above
+the lower town, the massive walls strengthened by projecting bastions,
+and the fortifications of the ports. Of these there were two, with
+separate entrances, divided from each other by a narrow tongue of land.
+At its extremity stood Fort St. Nicholas, which was connected by a
+strong wall running along the promontory to the town. The inner port,
+as it was called, was of greater importance, as it adjoined the town
+itself. It was defended in the first place by Fort St. Nicholas, and at
+the inner entrance stood the towers of St. John and St. Michael, one
+on either side. Into this the vessel was steered. There were many craft
+lying there, among them eight or ten of the galleys of the Order.
+
+“We will go first to the house of our langue,” Sir Guy said, “and tell
+them to send down slaves to fetch up our baggage; then I will take you,
+Gervaise, to Sir Peter D'Aubusson, and hand you over to his care.”
+
+On landing, Gervaise was surprised at the number of slaves who were
+labouring at the public works, and who formed no small proportion of the
+population in the streets. Their condition was pitiable. They were, of
+course, enemies of Christianity, and numbers of them had been pirates;
+but he could not help pitying their condition as they worked in the full
+heat of the sun under the vigilant eyes of numbers of overseers, who
+carried heavy whips, in addition to their arms. Their progress to the
+upper city was slow, for on their way they met many knights, of whom
+several were acquainted with Sir Guy; and each, after greeting
+him, demanded the latest news from England, and in return gave him
+particulars of the state of things at Rhodes.
+
+At last they arrived at the house of the English langue. The Order
+was divided into langues or nationalities. Of these there were
+eight--Provence, Auvergne, France, Italy, Germany, England, Aragon, and
+Castile and Portugal. The French element was by far the strongest. The
+Order had been founded in that country, and as it possessed no less than
+three langues, and held the greater part of the high official positions
+in the Order, it was only kept in check by the other langues acting
+together to demand their fair share of dignities. The grand master's
+authority was considerable, but it was checked by the council, which
+was composed of the bailiffs and knights of the highest order, known
+as Grand Crosses. Each langue had its bailiff elected by itself: these
+resided constantly at Rhodes. Each of these bailiffs held a high office;
+thus the Bailiff of Provence was always the grand commander of the
+Order. He controlled the expenditure, superintended the stores, and
+was governor of the arsenal. The Bailiff of Auvergne was the
+commander-in-chief of all the forces, army and navy. The Bailiff of
+France was the grand hospitaller, with the supreme direction of the
+hospitals and infirmaries of the Order, a hospital in those days
+signifying a guest house. The Bailiff of Italy was the grand admiral,
+and the Bailiff of England was chief of the light cavalry. Thus the
+difficulties and jealousies that would have arisen at every vacancy were
+avoided.
+
+In the early days of the Order, when Jerusalem was in the hands of the
+Christians, the care of the hospitals was its chief and most important
+function. Innumerable pilgrims visited Jerusalem, and these were
+entertained at the immense guest house of the Order. But with the loss
+of Jerusalem and the expulsion of the Christians from Palestine, that
+function had become of very secondary importance although there was
+still a guest house and infirmary at Rhodes, where strangers and the
+sick were carefully attended by the knights. No longer did these ride
+out to battle on their war horses. It was on the sea that the foe was
+to be met, and the knights were now sailors rather than soldiers. They
+dwelt at the houses of their respective langues; here they ate at a
+common table, which was supplied by the bailiff, who drew rations for
+each knight, and received, in addition, a yearly sum for the supply of
+such luxuries as were not included in the rations. The average number of
+knights residing in each of these langues averaged from a hundred to a
+hundred and fifty.
+
+It was not until some hours after his arrival that Sir Guy could find
+time to take Gervaise across to the house of the langue of Auvergne, to
+which D'Aubusson belonged. It was a larger and more stately pile than
+that of the English langue, but the arrangements were similar in all
+these buildings. In the English house Gervaise had not felt strange, as
+he had the companionship of his fellow voyagers; but as he followed
+Sir Guy through the spacious halls of the langue of Auvergne, where no
+familiar face met his, he felt more lonely than he had done since he
+entered the house at Clerkenwell.
+
+On sending in his name Sir Guy was at once conducted to the chamber
+occupied by D'Aubusson. The knight was seated at his table, examining
+some plans. The room was furnished with monastic simplicity, save that
+the walls were hung with rich silks and curtains captured from Turkish
+galleys.
+
+“Welcome back to us, Sir Guy,” D'Aubusson said, rising, and warmly
+shaking his visitor's hand. “I have been looking for your coming, for we
+need men with clear heads. Of strong arms and valiant spirits we have no
+lack; but men of judgment and discretion, who can be trusted to look at
+matters calmly and not to be carried away by passion, are welcome indeed
+to us. I was expecting you about this time, and when I heard that a ship
+had arrived from Marseilles I made inquiries, and was glad to find that
+you were on board.”
+
+“I am heartily glad to be back, D'Aubusson; I am sick of the dull life
+of a commandery, and rejoice at the prospect of stirring times again.
+This lad is young Tresham, who has come out in my charge, and for
+whom you have been good enough to obtain the post of page to the grand
+master.”
+
+“And no slight business was it to do so,” D'Aubusson said with a smile.
+“It happened there was a vacancy when the letter concerning him arrived,
+and had it been one of the highest offices in the Order there could not
+have been a keener contention for it. Every bailiff had his candidate
+ready; but I seldom ask for anything for members of my langue, and when
+I told the other bailiffs that it was to me a matter of honour to carry
+out the last request of my dead friend, they all gave way. You see, I am
+placed in a position of some little difficulty. The grand master is
+so enfeebled and crippled that he leaves matters almost entirely in
+my hands, and it would be an abuse of my position, and would excite no
+little jealousy, were I to use the power I possess to nominate friends
+of my own to appointments. It is only by the most rigid impartiality,
+and by dividing as fairly as possible all offices between the eight
+langues, that all continue to give me their support. As you know, we
+have had great difficulties and heartburnings here; but happily they
+have to a great extent been set at rest by forming a new langue of
+Castile and Portugal out of that of Aragon. This has given one more vote
+to the smaller langues, and has so balanced the power that of late the
+jealousies between us have greatly subsided, and all are working well
+together in face of the common danger. Well, young sir, and how like you
+the prospect of your pageship?”
+
+“I like it greatly, sir, but shall like still more the time when I can
+buckle on armour and take a share of the fighting with the infidels. I
+would fain, sir, offer to you my deep and humble thanks for the great
+kindness you have shown me in procuring me the appointment of page to
+the grand master.”
+
+The knight smiled kindly. “There are the less thanks due, lad, inasmuch
+as I did it not for you, but for the dear friend who wrote to me on your
+behalf. However, I trust that you will do credit to my nomination by
+your conduct here.”
+
+“There is a letter from our grand prior which I have brought to you,”
+ Sir Guy said. “He commended the lad to me warmly, and seems to be
+greatly pleased with his conduct.”
+
+D'Aubusson cut the silken string that bound the missive together, and
+read the letter.
+
+“He does indeed speak warmly,” he said, as he laid it down on the table.
+
+“He tells me that the lad, young as he was, had been well trained when
+he came, and that he worked with great diligence during the five months
+he was in the House, and displayed such skill and strength for his age,
+as to surprise his preceptors, who prophesied that he would turn out a
+stout swordsman, and would be a credit to the Order.”
+
+“He is well furnished with garments both for ordinary and state
+occasions,” Sir Guy said; “and in this packet are some sixty gold
+crowns, which are the last remains of his patrimony, and which I was to
+hand to you in order to pay the necessary expenses during his pageship.”
+
+“He could have done without that,” D'Aubusson said. “Recommended to me
+as he is, I would have seen that he lacked nothing, but was provided
+with all necessaries for his position. I will in the future take care
+that in all things he is on a par with his companions.” He touched a
+bell on the table, and a servitor entered.
+
+“Tell Richard de Deauville to come here,” he said.
+
+A minute later the hangings at the door were pushed aside, and a lad
+about a year older than Gervaise appeared, and, bowing deeply to the
+knight, stood in a respectful attitude, awaiting his orders.
+
+“Deauville, take this youth, Gervaise Tresham to your room. He is
+appointed one of the pages of the grand master. He is English, but he
+speaks French as well as you do, having lived in France for some years.
+Take him to your apartment and treat him kindly and well, seeing that he
+is a stranger and new to all here. Tomorrow he will go to the palace.”
+
+Gervaise bowed deeply to the two knights, and then followed the page.
+
+“I suppose you arrived in that ship which came in today,” the latter
+said, as soon as they had left the room. “You are in luck indeed to have
+obtained a pageship at the grand master's. You begin to count your time
+at once, while we do not begin to count ours until we are seventeen.
+Still, good luck may befall us yet, for if the grand master dies, Sir
+Peter is sure to be chosen to succeed him. Then, you see, we too shall
+be pages of the grand master.”
+
+“How many are there of you?”
+
+“Only De Lille and myself. Of course D'Aubusson will take on the grand
+master's present pages; but as there are five vacancies on an average
+every year, he will be able to find room for us among the number.”
+
+“Why, how many pages has the grand master?” Gervaise asked, in surprise.
+
+“Sixteen of them, so you may guess the duties are easy enough, as only
+two are generally employed, except, of course on solemn occasions.”
+
+“Are there any other English besides myself?”
+
+The boy shook his head. “There are eight belonging to the French
+langues; the others are Spaniards, Italians, or Germans. There, this is
+our room and this is De Lille. De Lille, this is the grand master's new
+page, Master Gervaise Tresham, and our lord says we are to treat him
+kindly and entertain him well until tomorrow, when he will go to the
+palace. He speaks our language, and has been some years in France.”
+
+“How came you to be there?” De Lille asked Gervaise.
+
+“My father was a Lancastrian, and my mother a great friend of our
+Queen Margaret of Anjou, and they were with her all the time she was in
+exile.”
+
+“How quarrelsome you English are!” De Lille said. “You seem to be always
+fighting among yourselves.”
+
+“I don't think,” Gervaise said, with a smile, “there is any love lost
+between Louis of France and the Duke of Burgundy, to say nothing of
+other great lords.”
+
+“No; you are right there. But though we talk a great deal about
+fighting, it is only occasionally that we engage in it.”
+
+The pages' room was a small one. It contained two pallets, which
+served as seats by day, and two wooden chests, in which they kept their
+clothes.
+
+Their conversation was interrupted by the ringing of a bell.
+
+“That is supper,” De Lille said, jumping up. “We will leave you here
+while we go down to stand behind our lord's chair. When the meal is over
+we will bring a pasty or something else good, and a measure of wine,
+and have our supper together up here; and we will tell the servitors to
+bring up another pallet for you. Of course, you can go down with us if
+you like.”
+
+“Thank you, I would much rather stay here. Every one would be strange to
+me, and having nothing to do I should feel in the way.”
+
+The boys nodded, and taking their caps ran off, while Gervaise, tired by
+the excitement of the day, lay down on the bed which a servant brought
+up a few minutes after they had left him, and slept soundly until their
+return.
+
+“I think I have been asleep,” he said, starting up when they entered the
+room again.
+
+“You look as if you had, anyhow,” De Lille laughed. “It was the best
+thing you could do. We have brought up supper. We generally sit down
+and eat after the knights have done, but this is much better, as you are
+here.” They sat down on the beds, carved the pasty with their daggers,
+and after they had finished Gervaise gladly accepted the proposal of the
+others to take a walk round the walls.
+
+They started from the corner of the castle looking down upon the spit of
+land dividing the two ports.
+
+“You see,” De Lille said, “there is a row of small islands across the
+mouth of the outer port, and the guns of St. Nicholas, and those on this
+wall, would prevent any hostile fleet from entering.”
+
+“I hardly see what use that port is, for it lies altogether outside the
+town, and vessels could not unload there.”
+
+“No. Still, it forms a useful place of refuge. In case a great fleet
+came to attack us, our galleys would lay up in the inner port, which
+would be cleared of all the merchant craft, as these would hamper the
+defence; they would, therefore, be sent round into the outer port, where
+they would be safe from any attack by sea, although they would doubtless
+be burnt did an army besiege the town.”
+
+Passing along the walls of the grand master's palace, which was a
+strongly fortified building, and formed a citadel that could be defended
+after the lower town and the rest of the castle had been taken, they
+came to the western angle of the fortifications.
+
+“You must know that each langue has charge of a separate part of the
+wall. From the foot of the mole of St. Nicholas to the grand master's
+palace it is in charge of France. On the line where we now are, between
+the palace and the gate of St. George, it is held by Germany. From that
+gate to the Spanish tower Auvergne is posted. England takes the wall
+between the Spanish tower and that of St. Mary. You defend only the
+lower storey of that tower, the upper part being held by Aragon, whose
+charge extends up to the gate of St. John. Thence to the tower of
+Italy--behind which lies the Jews' quarter--Provence is in charge, while
+the sea front thence to the mole of St. Nicholas, is held by Italy
+and Castile, each taking half. Not only have the langues the charge of
+defending each its portion of the wall, but of keeping it in order at
+all times; and I may say that nowhere is the wall better kept or more
+fairly decorated with carvings than where England holds.”
+
+“You have not told me who defends the palace itself.”
+
+“That is in charge of a force composed of equal numbers of picked
+knights from each langue.”
+
+Gervaise leant on the battlement and looked with admiration at the scene
+beyond. The land side was surrounded by hills, the ground rising
+very gradually from the foot of the walls. Every yard of ground was
+cultivated, and was covered with brilliant vegetation. Groves and
+orchards occurred thickly, while the slopes were dotted with chapels,
+summer houses--in which the natives of the city spent most of their time
+in the hot season--and other rustic buildings.
+
+“What a rich and beautiful country!” he said.
+
+“It is very pleasant to look at,” De Lille agreed. “But all this would
+be a sore disadvantage to us if the Turks were besieging us, for the
+groves and orchards would conceal their approaches, the walls and
+buildings would give them shelter, and our cannon would be of little use
+until they reached the farther side of the ditch. If the Turks come,
+I hear it is decided to level all the buildings and walls, and to chop
+down every tree.”
+
+“If they were to plant their cannon on the hills they would do us much
+harm,” Gervaise remarked.
+
+“The Turks are clumsy gunners they say,” Deauville replied, “and they
+would but waste their powder and ball at that distance, without making a
+breach in our walls.”
+
+“Even if they did, they could surely scarce pass that deep fosse,”
+ Gervaise said, looking down into the tremendous cutting in the solid
+rock that ran round the whole circuit of the walls; it was from forty
+to sixty feet deep, and from ninety to a hundred and forty feet wide. It
+was from this great cutting that the stones for the construction of the
+walls, towers, and buildings of the town had been taken, the work having
+been going on ever since the knights established themselves at Rhodes,
+and being performed by a host of captives taken in war, together with
+labour hired from neighboring islands. Upon this immense work the Order
+had expended no small proportion of their revenue since their capture
+of the island in 1310, and the result was a fortress that, under the
+conditions of warfare of that age, seemed almost impregnable; and this
+without any natural advantage of position.
+
+In addition to the five great towers or bastions, the wall was
+strengthened by square towers at short intervals. On looking down from
+the wall upon which the three pages were standing, on to the lower town,
+the view was a singular one. The houses were all built of stone, with
+flat roofs, after the manner of most Eastern cities. The streets were
+very narrow, and were crossed at frequent intervals by broad stone
+arches. These had the effect, not only of giving shelter from an enemy's
+fire, but of affording means by which troops could march rapidly across
+the town upon the roofs of the houses to reinforce the defenders of the
+wall, wherever pressed by the enemy. Thus the town from above presented
+the appearance of a great pavement, broken only by dark and frequently
+interrupted lines.
+
+“How different to the towns at home!” Gervaise exclaimed, as, after
+gazing long upon the beautiful country outside the walls, he turned and
+looked inward. “One would hardly know that it was a town at all.”
+
+“Yes, it is rather different to the view from the top of the tower of
+Notre Dame, which I ascended while I was staying in Paris. But this sort
+of building is best here; the thickness of the stone roofs keeps out
+the heat of the sun, and it is only when it is almost overhead that it
+shines down into the narrow streets. As you can see by the number of
+the people on the roofs, they use them as a resort in the evening. Then
+carpets are spread, and they receive visitors, and can talk to their
+neighbours over the low walls that separate the roofs. You can trace the
+divisions. Some of the house roofs are larger than others, but all are
+upon the same level; this being the regulation, in order that there
+might be free passage everywhere for the troops.”
+
+By the time they had made the circuit of the walls darkness had fallen,
+and concealed the martial features of the scene. Lights twinkled
+everywhere upon the stone terraces; the sound of lutes and other musical
+instruments came up softly on the still air, with the hum of talk and
+laughter. The sea lay as smooth as a mirror, and reflected the light of
+the stars, and the black hulls of the galleys and ships in the harbour
+lay still and motionless.
+
+Greatly pleased with his first experience of the city that was to be his
+future home, Gervaise returned, with his companions, to the auberge of
+Auvergne.
+
+The next morning the bailiff D'Aubusson bade Gervaise accompany him to
+the palace of the grand master. Here he introduced him to Orsini, an
+old and feeble man, who, after a few kind words, handed him over to the
+chamberlain, who, in turn, led him to the official who was in charge of
+the pages. That officer took him down to the courtyard, where four young
+knights were engaged in superintending the military exercises of the
+pages. The scene was exactly the same as that to which Gervaise had been
+accustomed at the House in London. Some of the lads were fighting with
+blunted swords, others were swinging heavy bars of iron, climbing ropes,
+or vaulting on to the back of a wooden horse. All paused as the official
+entered with his charge.
+
+“This is your new comrade, boys,” he said--“Master Gervaise Tresham, a
+member of the English langue. Be good comrades to him. By the reports I
+hear I am sure that you will find him a worthy companion.”
+
+The pages had been prepared to like the newcomer, for it was well known
+that he owed his appointment to the bailiff of Auvergne, who was the
+most popular of the officials of the Order, and who was already regarded
+as the grand master. His appearance confirmed their anticipation. His
+fair complexion and nut brown hair tinged with gold, cut somewhat short,
+but with a natural wave, contrasted with their darker locks and faces
+bronzed by the sun. There was an honest and frank look in his grey eyes,
+and an expression of good temper on his face, though the square chin and
+firm lips spoke of earnestness and resolution of purpose. The official
+took him round the circle and presented him first to the knights and
+then to each of his comrades.
+
+“You may as well join them in their exercises. In that way you will
+sooner become at home with them.”
+
+Gervaise at once laid down his mantle, removed his doublet, and then
+joined the others. There was but one half hour remaining before they
+broke off to go to dinner, which was at half past ten, but the time
+sufficed to show the young pages that this English lad was the equal
+of all--except two or three of the oldest--both in strength and in
+knowledge of arms. He could climb the rope with any of them, could vault
+on to the wooden horse with a heavy cuirass and backpiece on him, and
+held his own in a bout with swords against Conrad von Berghoff, who was
+considered the best swordplayer among them. As soon as the exercises
+were over all proceeded to the bath, and then to dinner. The meal was a
+simple one, but Gervaise enjoyed it thoroughly, for the table was loaded
+with an abundance of fruits of kinds altogether novel to him, and which
+he found delicious.
+
+The official in charge of them sat at the head of the table, and the
+meal was eaten in silence. After it was over and they had retired to
+their own rooms discipline was at an end, and they were free to amuse
+themselves as they liked. There were many questions to be asked and
+answered, but his display of strength and skill in the courtyard saved
+Gervaise from a good deal of the teasing to which a newcomer among a
+party of boys is always exposed.
+
+He, on his part, learnt that the duties of the pages were very light.
+Two only were on duty each day, being in constant attendance on the
+grand master, and accompanying him wherever he went. When he dined in
+public four of them waited on him at table, and one of them performed
+the duties of taster. If he returned to the palace after dark, six
+others lined the staircase with torches. On occasions of state ceremony,
+and at the numerous religious festivals, all were in attendance. By this
+time Gervaise's trunks had been brought over from the English auberge,
+where they had been conveyed from the ship, and his garments were taken
+out and inspected by his comrades, who all admitted that they were, in
+point of beauty of colour and material, and in fashion, equal to their
+own.
+
+“You will have to get one more suit, Gervaise,” one of the lads said.
+“At one or two of the grand ceremonies every year we are all dressed
+alike; that is the rule. On other occasions we wear what we choose, so
+that our garments are handsome, and I think it looks a good deal better
+than when we are dressed alike; though no doubt in religious processions
+that is more appropriate. De Ribaumont, our governor, will give orders
+for the supply of your state costume. He is a good fellow. Of course,
+he has to be rather strict with us; but so long as there is nothing done
+that he considers discreditable to our position, he lets us do pretty
+nearly as we like.
+
+“We have four hours a day at our military exercises, and two hours with
+the sub-chaplain, who teaches us our books and religious duties. The
+rest of our time we can use as we like, except that every day eight of
+us ride for two hours and practise with the lance; for although it is at
+sea we fight the Moslems, we are expected to become finished knights in
+all matters. These eight horses are kept for our service, and such as
+choose may at other times ride them. On Saturdays we are free from
+all our exercises; then some of us generally go on horseback for long
+excursions on the island, while others take boats and go out on the sea;
+one afternoon in the week we all make a trip in a galley, to learn our
+duties on board.”
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV A PROFESSED KNIGHT
+
+
+Gervaise was soon quite at home in the palace of the grand master, and
+his companions were, like other boys, of varying characters; but as all
+were of noble families, were strongly impressed with the importance of
+the Order and the honour of their own position, and were constantly
+in contact with stately knights and grave officials, their manners
+conformed to those of their elders; and even among themselves there was
+no rough fun, or loud disputes, but a certain courtesy of manner that
+was in accordance with their surroundings. This came naturally to
+Gervaise, brought up as he had been by his father and mother, and having
+at frequent intervals stayed with them for months at the various
+royal castles in which Margaret of Anjou and her son had been assigned
+apartments during their exile. Even at St. John's house the novices
+with whom he lived were all a good deal older than himself, and the
+discipline of the house was much more strict than that at Rhodes.
+
+He enjoyed both his exercises with the knights and the time spent
+with the sub-chaplain, no small proportion of the hours of study being
+occupied in listening to stories of chivalry; it being considered one of
+the most important parts of a knight's education that he should have a
+thorough acquaintance, not only with the laws of chivalry, but with the
+brave deeds both of former and of living knights, with the relations of
+the noble houses of Europe to each other, especially of the many great
+families whose members were connected with the Order of St. John.
+
+These matters formed, indeed, the main subject of their studies. All
+were taught to read and write, but this was considered sufficient in the
+way of actual instruction. The rules of the Order had to be committed
+to memory. Beyond this their reading consisted largely of the lives
+of saints, especially of those who distinguished themselves by their
+charity or their devotion to their vows of poverty, to both of which the
+members of the Order were pledged. Gervaise, however, could see around
+him no signs whatever of poverty on their part. It was true that they
+all lived and fed together in the auberges of their respective langues,
+and that they possessed no houses or establishments of their own; but
+the magnificence of their armour and attire, and the lavish expenditure
+of some upon their pleasures, contrasted strangely with the poverty
+to which they had vowed themselves. It was true that in many cases the
+means to support the expenditure was derived from the shares the knights
+received of the plunder acquired in their captures of Moslem ships; but
+undoubtedly many must have possessed large private means; the bailiffs,
+for example, although only required by the rules to place before the
+knights at their auberges the rations they received for them, with
+such luxuries as could be purchased by their yearly allowance for that
+purpose, expended annually very large sums in addition, and supplied
+their tables with every dainty, in order to gain popularity and goodwill
+among the members of the langue.
+
+Not only did the post of bailiff confer upon its owner a very high
+position at Rhodes, but it was a stepping stone to the most lucrative
+offices in their langues. The bailiffs at Rhodes had the right of
+claiming any of the grand priories or bailiwicks at home that might
+fall vacant, and the grand master was frequently chosen from among their
+number, as, by being present at Rhodes, they had many advantages in the
+way of making themselves popular among the electors. The emoluments of
+some of these provincial bailiwicks were large; and as the bailiffs at
+Rhodes were generally elected by seniority--although younger knights who
+had greatly distinguished themselves were sometimes chosen--they were
+usually glad to resign the heavy work and responsibility of their
+position at Rhodes, and to retire to the far easier position of a
+provincial bailiff. In the majority of cases, doubtless, the fortunes
+of the high officials were obtained from the money amassed when in
+possession of rich commanderies at home; but even this was assuredly
+incompatible with their vows of poverty.
+
+His hours of leisure Gervaise spent either on the water or in the
+saddle, and his love of exercise of all sorts excited the wonder and
+even the amusement of his companions, who for the most part preferred
+spending the time at their disposal in sleep, in idly looking out from
+a shaded room at what was going on outside, or in visits to friends and
+relations at the auberges of the langues to which they belonged. The
+natural consequence was, that by the time he reached the end of his
+three years' pageship, Gervaise was indisputably superior in strength,
+activity, and skill in military exercises, to any of his companions.
+The majority of these, after completing their time, returned to the
+headquarters of their langue at home, to pass their time there, until of
+an age to be eligible for the charge of a commandery obtained for them
+by family influence, which had no small share in the granting of these
+appointments. As it was known, however, that Gervaise intended to remain
+permanently in the Island, his progress was watched with particular
+attention by his instructors; and, seeing his own earnestness in the
+matter, they took special pains with his training. The bailiff of
+Auvergne continued to take much interest in him, inquiring often from
+the officers in charge of the pages, and from his instructors, of his
+conduct and progress, and occasionally sending for him to his auberge
+and talking with him as to his life and progress. Just before his
+pageship terminated, he said to him, “I was rather puzzled at first,
+Gervaise, as to what we should do with you when your term of office
+concluded, but I am so no longer, for, although you are some two years
+younger than the professed knights who come out here, you are better
+fitted than the majority to take your place in the naval expeditions,
+and to fight the Moslem pirates. I will see that you have your share of
+these adventures. All young knights are, as you know, obliged to make
+three voyages, but beyond that many of them do not care to share in
+the rough life at sea, and prefer the bustle, and, I grieve to say,
+the gaiety and pleasures of this city. For one, then, really eager
+to distinguish himself, the opportunities are frequent. When danger
+threatens, or heavy engagements are expected, every knight is desirous
+of bearing his part in the fray; but this is not the case when the work
+to be done consists of scouring the sea for weeks, without perchance
+coming across a single pirate. Of course, as soon as your pageship is
+over you will go to the English auberge, but I shall still keep my eye
+upon you, and shall do my best to help you to achieve distinction; and
+I shall take upon myself the providing of your arms and armour as a
+knight.”
+
+Accordingly, on the day on which his duties as a page terminated, two
+servitors of the auberge of Auvergne brought across to the palace a suit
+of fine armour and a sword, a battleaxe, a lance, and a dagger; also
+three complete suits of clothes, two of them for ordinary wear, and one
+for state occasions. The next day Gervaise took the oaths of the Order
+in the Church of St. John. The aged master himself received the vows,
+and formally inducted him as a professed knight of the Order, Peter
+D'Aubusson and the bailiff of the English langue acting as his sponsors,
+vouching that he was of noble blood and in all ways fitted to become
+a knight of Justice, this being the official title of the professed
+knights of the Order. Ten newly arrived novices were inducted at the
+same time, and the ceremony was a stately one, attended by a number of
+the knights from each langue, all in full armour.
+
+The ceremony over, Gervaise bore the title of Sir Gervaise Tresham;
+but this was an honorary rather than a real title, as the Order did not
+profess to bestow the honour of knighthood, and it was usual for its
+members to receive the accolade at the hands of secular knights. At the
+conclusion of the ceremony, he returned with the bailiff of the English
+langue to the auberge, and took up his quarters there. By his frequent
+visits he was well known to all the members, and in a day or two felt as
+much at home as he had done in the pages' room in the palace. A week was
+given to him before he was assigned to any special duty, and he was glad
+when he was told off as one of the knights who were to take their turn
+in superintending the work of the slaves employed in strengthening
+the fortifications, although he would rather that any other employment
+should have been assigned to him, because he felt deep pity for the
+unfortunate men who were engaged in the work.
+
+He knew well enough that if he himself were ever made prisoner by the
+Turks, his lot would be as hard and as hopeless as that of the Moslem
+captives; but this, although he often repeated it to himself in order to
+abate his feeling of commiseration, was but a poor satisfaction. He saw
+one side of the picture, and the other was hidden from him; and although
+he told himself that after slaving in a Turkish galley he would feel a
+satisfaction at seeing those who had been his tyrants suffering the same
+fate, he was well aware that this would not be the case, and that his
+own sufferings would only make him sympathise more deeply with those of
+others. He had found, soon after his arrival on the Island, that it was
+best to keep his feelings on this subject to himself. While the knights
+were bound, in accordance with their vows, to relieve sufferings of any
+kind among Christians, they seemed to regard their captives rather in
+the light of brute beasts than human beings. The slaves were struck on
+the smallest provocation, and even the killing of a slave was considered
+a very venial offence, and punished only because the slave was of value
+to the Order.
+
+It was true that edicts were from time to time published by the council,
+enjoining fair treatment of slaves, and it was specially ordered that
+those employed as servants in the auberges were not to be struck. The
+lot of these servants was, indeed, very much easier than that of
+those engaged on the public works, and such occupation was therefore
+considered a privilege, the servants being for the most part selected
+from among the captives of superior rank.
+
+For the next six months Gervaise worked at various duties in the town.
+He was employed for a fortnight in the infirmary, then for a while he
+was transferred to the galleys; but for the most part he was with the
+slaves working on the fortifications. At the end of that time he was,
+to his great delight, informed by the bailiff that he was one of the six
+knights of the langue told off to join a galley that was on the point
+of sailing. Among those going in her was Sir Ralph Harcourt, one of his
+companions on the journey from England.
+
+“So you are to go with us, Gervaise,” the young knight said, “to try
+your luck for the first time against the infidels. This is my third
+voyage, and I hope that it will be more fortunate than its predecessors,
+for, beyond picking up two or three small craft, which did not venture
+upon resistance, we gained neither honour nor booty. I regard you as
+having specially good fortune, and besides being glad that we shall
+be together, I expect that you will bring good luck to us, and that we
+shall meet with foes worth contending with. The corsairs have been very
+active of late, and have captured many prizes, while, on the other hand,
+our galleys have been unfortunate, and have but seldom come upon the
+miscreants.”
+
+“How many knights will there be on board?”
+
+“Forty. Aragon, like us, furnishes five, Germany ten, Portugal five,
+Auvergne ten, and Provence five. We shall be commanded by Sir Louis
+Ricord, a knight of Auvergne, and we could wish no better, for he has
+proved himself a good seaman and a brave captain. Two other galleys are
+to start with us. We are to cruise separately unless one gets news of a
+force so superior that he will need aid to attack it, when he will meet
+the others at a rendezvous agreed upon, and we shall work together.”
+
+“Who are the other three Englishmen?”
+
+“John Boswell, Marmaduke Lumley, and Adam Tedbond--all, as you know,
+brave knights and good companions.”
+
+That evening Gervaise received a message from D'Aubusson, requesting him
+to call at his auberge.
+
+“So you are going to sea, Sir Gervaise? I hear from your bailiff that
+you have been working to his satisfaction in the town.”
+
+“Yes, sir. I shall indeed be glad to change it for a life at sea. In
+truth, it is grievous to me to witness the sufferings of the slaves, and
+I would rather do any other work.”
+
+“They are far better off than the Christians who fall into the hands
+of the Turks,” the bailiff said; “and, moreover, it is because their
+countrymen are preparing to attack us that we are forced to use their
+labour in strengthening our fortifications. They have naught to complain
+of in the way of food. Still, I would myself gladly see their lot
+alleviated; but we could not afford to keep so great a number of
+captives in idleness; they must work for their living. Had it not been
+for their labour we could never have built and fortified the city. After
+all, they are little worse off than our serfs at home; they build our
+castles and till our land.”
+
+“It may be so, sir; but with us in England men are free, and it was,
+when I first came, strange to me to see them working under the fear of
+the whip. It is necessary, I know, that such work should be done, but I
+own that I shall be glad to be away from the sight of the poor wretches,
+pirates and enemies of the faith though they be.”
+
+“I can understand your feelings, and I too felt somewhat the same when
+I first came here. Nevertheless, there is work that must be done if the
+Order is not to be crushed by the infidels. Here are captives, for the
+most part malefactors, who have to be fed; and there is no injustice in
+their having, like all men, to give work for food. I have learnt to see
+this and recognise the necessity, though I would that the work could
+be obtained without the use of harshness and severity. We ourselves are
+prepared at any moment to sacrifice our lives for the good of the Order
+and for the great cause, and it would be wrong, nay, sinful, not to use
+the means that have been placed ready to our hand. Now, Sir Gervaise, I
+wish you a pleasant voyage. You will find the life somewhat hard, after
+your three years' residence at the palace, but this I know you will
+not mind. I have specially commended you to Ricord as one in whom I am
+personally interested, and from whom I hope great things in the future.
+Be brave; be resolute. From what you have said I need not say--be
+merciful. Fulfill all orders promptly and without question; bear
+yourself courteously to all; above all things, remember that you are a
+soldier, not only of the Order, but of the Cross.”
+
+The next day Gervaise embarked with his companions on board the galley.
+It was a long, low boat, similar to those in use by the Venetians and
+Genoese. It was rowed by fifty slaves, who slept at night on or beneath
+the benches they sat on by day. The knights occupied the great cabins
+in the poop. There were two tiers of these; the upper one contained the
+little cabin of the commander, while the rest of the space on this deck,
+and that below it, was used by the knights in common. In the upper cabin
+they took their meals, and a third of their number slept there, the
+remainder in the cabin below. A fourth of their number were, however,
+always on guard, lest any attempt at a rising or escape should be made
+by the galley slaves.
+
+On leaving the harbour the galley, with its two consorts, rowed north,
+and Gervaise learnt that they were to cruise between the mainland and
+the islands. Some of these were in the hands of the Turks, while others
+were still occupied by Greeks.
+
+Except when there was a formal and actual state of war, the Moslem and
+Christian islands remained in a state of neutrality, trading with
+each other and avoiding all unfriendly proceedings that would lead
+to struggles which would be fatal to the prosperity of both. The
+Archipelago, and indeed the whole of the eastern portion of the
+Mediterranean, was infested by pirates, fitted out, for the most part,
+on the mainland. These, when in force, openly kept the sea, attacking
+the Christian merchant ships, but when cruising alone they hid in
+unfrequented bays, or behind uninhabited islets, until they could pounce
+upon a passing ship whose size promised an easy capture. The Order of
+St. John furnished a maritime police, earning thereby the deep gratitude
+of Spain, France, and Italy. They were aided occasionally by the
+Venetians, but these, being frequently engaged in quarrels with their
+neighbours, did but a small share of this work, only sending their
+fleets to sea when danger threatened some of their possessions in the
+Levant.
+
+“This is delightful, Ralph,” Gervaise said, as they stood together on
+the poop, looking back at the receding city.
+
+“What a pleasant change it is from standing in the broiling sun watching
+those poor wretches toiling at the fortifications! There is only one
+drawback to my pleasure. I wish that we carried sails, and were moved
+along by the breeze, instead of by the exertions of the slaves.”
+
+“Much chance we should have of catching a pirate under such
+circumstances!” Ralph said, laughing. “You might as well set a tortoise
+to catch a hare.”
+
+“I don't say that we should not be obliged to carry rowers, Ralph; but
+all the prizes that have been brought in since I have been at Rhodes
+carry masts and sails, as well as oars, and, as I understand, for the
+most part cruise about under sail, and only use the oars when chasing or
+fleeing.”
+
+“That is so; because, you see, in most cases the crew themselves have
+to row, and I have no doubt if we had no slaves to do the work we should
+soon take to masts and sails also; but for speed the rowing galleys are
+the best, for unless a brisk wind were blowing, the mast and sails would
+but check her progress when the oars were out, and at any rate constrain
+her to travel only before the wind. I know your weakness about the
+slaves, Gervaise; but as we could neither build our fortifications
+nor row our galleys without them, I cannot go as far as you do in the
+matter, though I own that I am sometimes sorry for them. But you must
+remember that it is the fault of their people, and not of ours, that
+they are here.”
+
+“All that is true enough, Ralph, and I cannot gainsay you. Still I would
+rather that we were gliding along with sails instead of being rowed by
+slaves.”
+
+“At any rate, Gervaise, you will not see them ill treated, for I myself
+heard Ricord, just before we were starting, tell the slave overseers
+that so long as the rowers did fair work they were not to use their
+whips, and that only if we were in chase of a pirate were they to be
+urged to their utmost exertions.”
+
+“I am right glad to hear it, Ralph, and shall be able to enjoy the
+voyage all the more, now you have told me that such orders have been
+issued.”
+
+For a fortnight they cruised about among the islands. Several times
+boats rowed out from the shore to the galley with complaints of outrages
+by pirates under a notorious corsair named Hassan Ali, who had landed,
+burnt villages, killed many of the inhabitants, and carried off the rest
+as slaves; but no one could give any clue to aid them in their search
+for the corsairs. The time passed very pleasantly. There was no occasion
+for speed; often they lay all day in some bay, where they could approach
+near enough to the shore to lie in the shade of trees, while two or
+three of the knights ascended a hill and kept watch there for the
+appearance of any vessels of a suspicious character. One morning, after
+passing the night at anchor, Harcourt and Gervaise were despatched just
+before sunrise to take a look round before the galley got under way.
+From the top of the hill they had an uninterrupted view of the sea,
+studded with islands on all sides of them. Beyond a few fishing boats,
+looking like black specks on the glassy surface, no craft were in sight.
+They were about to return to the galley when, taking a last look round,
+Gervaise suddenly exclaimed, “Look, Ralph! There is smoke ascending from
+that island to the southwest. There was none just now.”
+
+“You mean from that bay, Gervaise? Yes, I see it; it is not more than a
+light mist.”
+
+“It is growing thicker,” Gervaise said, “and spreading. Maybe it is but
+a hut that has accidentally caught fire, but it seems to me that the
+smoke is rising from several points.”
+
+“I think you are right, Gervaise. Let us hurry down with the news. It
+may be that it is a village which has been attacked by pirates who have
+landed on the other side of the island during the night, for I can see
+no ships in the bay.”
+
+A few minutes' run and they stood on the shore.
+
+“Quick, men!” Ralph said to the rowers of the boat that had brought them
+ashore. “Row your hardest.”
+
+The slaves bent to their oars, and they were soon alongside the galley,
+which lay two or three hundred yards from the shore. Those on board had
+noticed the young knights running down the hill, and, marking the speed
+at which the boat was rowing, concluded at once that they must have
+observed one of the pirate's ships.
+
+“Do you see anything of them, Sir Ralph?” the commander shouted, as they
+came close.
+
+“We have seen no ships, Sir Louis, but there is smoke coming up from a
+bay in an island four or five miles away to the southwest. It seems to
+us that it is far too extensive a fire to be the result of an accident,
+for there was no smoke until within two or three minutes of the time we
+left, and before we started it was rising from several points, and we
+both think that it must come from a village that has been attacked by
+pirates.”
+
+The commander rapidly issued his orders, and in two or three minutes the
+anchor was weighed, the boat hoisted on deck, and the oars in motion.
+
+“Stretch to your oars!” Ricord shouted to the slaves. “Hitherto we have
+exacted no toil from you, but you have to work now, and woe be to him
+who does not put out his full strength.”
+
+Grateful for the unusual leniency with which they had been treated,
+the slaves bent to their oars, and the galley sped rapidly through the
+water. On rounding the end of the island there was an exclamation of
+satisfaction from the knights as they saw wreaths of white smoke rising
+from the distant island.
+
+“There can be no doubt that it is a village in flames,” Sir Louis said;
+“and from the suddenness with which it broke out, it is clear that it
+must have been fired at several points. You say you saw no craft near?”
+ he asked, turning to Harcourt.
+
+“There were none there, or from the top of the hill we should assuredly
+have made them out, Sir Louis.”
+
+“Then the pirates--if this be, as I hope, their work--must have landed
+at some other point on the island, and if they catch sight of us they
+may make for their ship and slip away, unobserved by us. Instead of
+rowing direct, therefore, we will make for that islet to the right, and
+row round behind it. There are two others almost adjoining it. Once past
+these, 'tis not more than half a mile to that island stretching away
+south. Once round that, we shall be beyond the one from which we see the
+smoke rising, and can come down on its southern side. The course will
+be double the distance that it would be if we took a straight line, but
+except when we cross from island to island we shall not be exposed to
+their view, and may fall upon their ships before the crews have returned
+from their work of plunder.”
+
+The knights fully agreed, and orders were given to the helmsman
+accordingly.
+
+“We must not over fatigue the rowers,” the commander said. “We may have
+a long chase if they have started before we get round.”
+
+He therefore gave orders to the slaves that, while they were to exert
+themselves to the utmost when crossing the open sea, they were to relax
+their efforts and to row within their strength while coasting along
+behind the islands. On board, everything was made in readiness for a
+fight: the knights buckled on their armour, the cooks set cauldrons of
+pitch over the fire, the cannoneers loaded her eight guns. It was an
+hour and a half after their start before they rounded the end of the
+last island. It extended a little farther to the south than did that to
+which they were making, and as they rounded the point, eager looks were
+cast in search of the pirate ships. No craft were, however, to be seen.
+
+“They must be in some bay or inlet,” the commander said; “they can
+hardly have left, for it would have taken them half an hour at least to
+cross the island with their booty and captives, and even if they made
+straight away after having fired the village, their ship could have gone
+no great distance, for we must have seen her if she put to sea--unless
+indeed they were anchored on the east of the island, and have sailed in
+that direction.”
+
+“Keep them rowing along steadily,” he said to the overseers of the
+slaves; “but do not press them too hard. We may have a chase yet, and
+need all their strength, for most of these pirates are fast craft, and
+if they should get a start of three or four miles, it will be a long row
+before we catch them.”
+
+They made straight for the island, and on nearing it coasted along its
+southern side. It was some three miles long, the shore being for the
+most part steep, but here and there falling gradually to the water's
+edge. Two or three little clusters of houses could be seen as they rowed
+along; one of these was on fire.
+
+“That is good,” Sir Louis exclaimed, as, on turning a point, they saw
+the flames. “That cannot have been lighted long, and we are pretty
+certain to come upon the vessels before the marauders have set sail.”
+
+Several inlets and small bays were passed, but all were empty. A few
+fishing boats lay on the shore, but there were no signs of life, as no
+doubt the people would, long since, have taken alarm and sought shelter
+in the woods. There was a sharp point just before they reached the
+southeastern extremity of the island, and as the galley shot past this,
+a shout of exultation rose from the knights, for, near the mouth of an
+inlet that now opened to their view, there lay four long, low vessels,
+above each of which floated the Moslem flag. A number of men were
+gathered on the shore near the ships, and heavily laden boats were
+passing to and fro.
+
+A yell of rage and alarm rose from the ships as the galley came into
+view. There was a stir and movement on the shore, and numbers of men
+leapt into the boats there, and started for the ships. These were some
+quarter of a mile away when first seen, and half that distance had been
+traversed when a puff of smoke shot out from the side of one of them,
+followed almost immediately by a general discharge of their cannon. One
+ball tore along the waist of the galley, killing six of the rowers, and
+several oars on both sides were broken. Two balls passed through the
+cabins in the poop. But there was no pause in the advance of the galley.
+The whips of the slave masters cracked, and the rowers whose oars were
+intact strained at them. There was no reply from the guns, but the
+knights raised loud the war cry of the Order, a war cry that was never
+heard without striking a thrill of apprehension among their Moslem foes.
+
+As they neared the pirate ships, the helm was put down, and the galley
+brought up alongside the largest of them and a broadside poured into
+her; then the knights, headed by their commander, leapt on to her deck.
+
+Although a number of the crew had not yet come off from shore, the
+Moslems still outnumbered their assailants, and, knowing that their
+consorts would soon come to their aid, they threw themselves in a body
+on the Christians. But in a hand-to-hand conflict like this, the knights
+of the Hospital were irresistible. Protected by their armour and long
+shields from the blows of their enemies' scimitars and daggers, their
+long, cross handled swords fell with irresistible force on turbaned head
+and coat-of-mail, and, maintaining regular order and advancing like a
+wall of steel along the deck, they drove the Moslems before them, and
+the combat would soon have terminated had not a shout been raised by
+one of the overseers of the slaves. One of the other ships had rowed
+alongside the galley, and the crew were already leaping on board it. At
+the same moment another ship came up alongside that they had boarded,
+while the fourth was maneuvering to bring up under her stern.
+
+“Sir John Boswell,” Sir Louis shouted, “do you and your countrymen, with
+the knights of Spain, finish with these miscreants; knights of Germany
+and Provence keep back the boarders; knights of Auvergne follow me,” and
+he leapt down into the galley.
+
+The English and Spanish knights redoubled their exertions. The Moslems
+endeavoured to rally, seeing that help was at hand, and that but a small
+body were now opposed to them, but their numbers availed little. The ten
+knights kept their line, and, hewing their way forward, pressed them so
+hotly that the Turks broke and sprang over the bulwarks into the sea.
+Then the knights looked round. A fierce fight was going on between those
+of Germany and Provence and the enemy, who strove desperately to board
+from the ship alongside. The other vessel was now almost touching the
+stern, and her crew were swarming to her side in readiness to leap on
+board as soon as the vessels touched.
+
+“We will keep them at bay there,” Sir John Boswell shouted. “Do you, Don
+Pedro, and your comrades, aid Ricord. When his foes are finished with,
+you can come back to help us.”
+
+Then, with the four English knights, he ran along the deck, and reached
+the stern just in time to hurl backwards the Moslems, who had already
+obtained a footing. For a time the five knights kept back the surging
+mass of their foes. The deck was wide enough for each to have fair play
+for his sword, and in vain the pirates strove to obtain a footing.
+
+At last Sir Marmaduke Lumley fell, severely wounded by an arrow from a
+Moslem marksman, and before the others could close the gap a score of
+pirates leapt on to the deck.
+
+“Fall back, comrades, fall back; but keep together!” Sir John Boswell
+shouted, as he cleft the skull of one of the pirate officers who sprang
+at him. “Sir Louis will soon finish his work, and be here to our aid.
+Ah!” he exclaimed, looking over his shoulder, as he retired a step,
+“Provence and Germany are overmatched too.”
+
+This was indeed the case. Stoutly as they fought the knights were unable
+to guard the whole of the line of bulwark, and the Moslems had already
+obtained a footing on the deck. The discipline of the knights stood them
+in good stead. Drawing closely together as they retreated, they made a
+stand on the opposite side of the deck, and were here joined by Sir John
+Boswell and his companions. They now formed a semicircle, each flank
+resting on the bulwark, and the pirates in vain endeavoured to break
+their line. Again and again they flung themselves upon the knights, only
+to be beaten off with heavy loss. At length a loud cheer arose from the
+galley, and Sir Louis Ricord, with the knights of Auvergne and Spain
+having cleared the galley of their foes, and carried the pirate that had
+grappled with her, sprang on to the deck of the ship, and fell upon
+the throng that were attacking the knights there, oblivious of what was
+going on elsewhere. At once the English knights and their comrades took
+the offensive, and fell upon their assailants who, at the sight of the
+reinforcement, for a moment stood irresolute. For a short time there was
+a fierce struggle; then the pirates sprang back to their two ships, and
+endeavoured to cast off the grapnels. But the knights followed hotly
+upon them, and, panic stricken now, the pirates sprang overboard. Many
+were drowned, but the greater part managed to swim to shore.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V SCOURGES OF THE SEA
+
+
+Breathless and faint from their tremendous exertions, the knights
+removed their helmets.
+
+“By St. Mary,” Sir Louis said, “this has been as hard a fight as I have
+ever been engaged in, and well may we be content with our victory! Well
+fought, my brave comrades! Each of these vessels must have carried twice
+our number at least, and we have captured four of them; but I fear the
+cost has been heavy.”
+
+Seven knights had fallen, struck down by sword, arrow, or thrust of
+spear. Of the rest but few had escaped unwounded, for, strong as was
+their armour, the keen Damascus blades of the Moslems had in many cases
+cut clean through it, and their daggers had found entry at points where
+the armour joined; and, now that the fight was over, several of the
+knights sank exhausted on the deck from loss of blood.
+
+But the dressing of wounds formed part of a knight of St. John's
+training. Those who were unwounded unbuckled the armour and bandaged the
+wounds. Others fetched wine and water from the galley. The chains of the
+galley slaves were removed, and these were set to clear the decks of the
+Moslem corpses. The anchors were dropped, for what little wind there
+was drifted them towards the shore. They had learned from a dying pirate
+that the vessels were part of the fleet of Hassan Ali, a fact that added
+to the satisfaction felt by the knights at their capture, as this man
+was one of the most dreaded pirates of the Levant. They learnt that he
+himself had not been present, the expedition being under the command of
+one of his lieutenants, who had fallen in the fight.
+
+“Now, comrades, let us in the first place take food; we have not broken
+our fast this morning. Then let us consider what had best be done, for
+indeed we have got as much in our hands as we can manage; but let us
+leave that till we eat and drink, for we are faint from want of food
+and from our exertions. But we shall have to eat what comes to hand, and
+that without cooking, for our servants all joined the pirates when they
+boarded us, and are either dead or are ashore there.”
+
+A meal was made of bread and fruit, and this with wine sufficed to
+recruit their energies.
+
+“It seems to me, comrades,” Sir Louis said, when all had finished, “that
+the first thing is to search the holds of these vessels and see what
+valuables are stored there. These may be all carried on board one ship,
+and the others must be burnt, for it is clear that, as there are four of
+them, we cannot take them to Rhodes; and even with one and our galley
+we should fare but ill, if we fell in with two or three more of Hassan's
+ships.”
+
+“But how about the pirates on shore, Sir Louis?” a knight asked. “There
+were very many who could not get off to their ships during the fight,
+and scores must have swum ashore. I should say that there must be full
+two hundred, and it will be a grievous thing for the islanders if we
+leave them there.”
+
+“It is certain,” the commander said, “that we are not strong enough
+to attack them, for were we to land, a party would have to be left on
+board, or the pirates might elude our search, seize some fishing boats,
+and regain possession. Certainly, we are in no position to divide our
+forces.”
+
+“Methinks,” Sir John Boswell said, “that the best plan would be to send
+a boat, manned with ten galley slaves, taking two or three of us to the
+rendezvous, to fetch hither the other two galleys. With their aid we
+might take all the four ships safe into port, after first clearing the
+island of these pirates. It is but forty miles away, and eight hours'
+rowing would take us there.”
+
+There was a general murmur of assent, for all wished that the trophies
+of their bravery should, if possible, be carried to Rhodes.
+
+“That will certainly be the best plan, Sir John, though it may detain us
+here for two or three days, or even more, for it is quite uncertain when
+the other two galleys may put in at the rendezvous. Will you yourself
+undertake the mission?”
+
+“With pleasure.”
+
+“How many will you take with you?”
+
+“Two will be sufficient, for we shall have no fighting to do, as we
+shall have to trust to our speed if we fall in with an enemy. I will
+take, with your permission, Sir Ralph Harcourt and Sir Gervaise Tresham,
+both of whom have today fought with distinguished bravery. Indeed, I
+owe my life to them, for more than once, when I was hotly pressed, they
+freed me from my assailants. Truly none bore themselves better in the
+fray than they did.”
+
+Three or four others joined in hearty commendations of the two young
+knights.
+
+“Indeed,” one said, “I was greatly surprised to see how Tresham bore
+himself. He is but a lad, with scarce, one would think, strength to hold
+his own in such a fray. It chanced that he was next to me in the circle,
+and for a time I kept my eye on him, thinking he might require my aid;
+but I soon saw that I need not trouble myself on his account, for he
+wielded his weapon as doughtily as the best knight of the Order could
+have done, and one of the proofs is that, while most of us bear marks of
+the conflict, he has escaped without scratch. I trust, Sir Louis, that
+when you give an account of the fighting you will specially mention that
+this, the youngest knight of the Order, bore himself as stoutly as any
+of them. I say this, Sir John, because, not being of your langue, I can
+speak more warmly than you can do of his skill and bravery.”
+
+“I thank you, De Boysey,” Sir John Boswell said, “and I am proud that
+my young countryman should have so gained your approbation. And now,”
+ he went on, “while the galley slaves are getting a meal--which they have
+right well earned today--I should like to see what there is under the
+hatches of these ships, so that I can give our comrades in the other
+galleys some idea of the value of this booty we have taken.”
+
+They rose from the table, and, going on board the prizes, lifted the
+hatches.
+
+“Beware!” De Boysey exclaimed, looking down into the hold, when the
+first hatch was taken off. “There are people below.”
+
+A chorus of cries followed his exclamation.
+
+“They are the voices of women and children,” Sir Louis exclaimed. “They
+must be captives.”
+
+This turned out to be so. In the holds of the four ships were found over
+a hundred and fifty women and children; these had been brought on board
+in the first boat loads by the pirates, and when the Christian galley
+had been seen coming round the point, had been thrust below, and the
+hatches thrown over them. They had heard the din of battle above, but
+knew not how the conflict had terminated, and, being afraid to cry out,
+had remained silent until, on the hatch being lifted, they had seen the
+figures of Christian knights standing in the bright sunshine. All had
+come from the village on the other side of the island. They related how
+the pirates had suddenly burst upon them, had slaughtered all the men,
+set fire to the village, and had driven them before them across the
+island to the ships. The poor creatures were delighted at their escape
+from slavery, but at the same time were full of grief at the loss of
+husbands, fathers, and sons.
+
+Some laughed, others cried; while some thanked God for their rescue
+others heaped imprecations upon the authors of their misfortunes.
+
+The knights explained to them that for a short time they must remain on
+board, as half the pirates were still on shore, but that aid would soon
+arrive that would enable them to clear the island.
+
+Half an hour later Sir John Boswell, with the two young knights, started
+in a rowing boat, manned by ten of the galley slaves. The wind had
+sprung up since the fight ceased, and as it was nearly astern, they
+anticipated that they would make a good passage, and be at the little
+islet, named as the place of rendezvous, before nightfall.
+
+Among the many bales of rich merchandise in the hold of the pirate
+vessels an abundance of wine had been discovered, and of this a tankard
+had been given to each of the slaves, by Sir Louis's orders, as a token
+of satisfaction at their work in the morning.
+
+They had gone some two miles when, from one of the inlets in the island
+they had left a large fishing boat was seen to issue out.
+
+“By St. George!” Sir John exclaimed, “that boat must be full of pirates.
+And if they see us, which they cannot help doing, and take it in their
+heads to chase us, we shall have a hard time of it.”
+
+The fishing boat for a few minutes kept along the coast, and then
+suddenly her course was altered, and her head directed towards their
+boat.
+
+“Now stretch to your oars,” Sir John, who spoke some Turkish, said to
+the slaves. “Keep ahead of that boat, and I promise you, on my honour as
+a Christian knight, that I will myself purchase your freedom as soon as
+we get to Rhodes.”
+
+With a shout of delight, the galley slaves bent to their oars, and the
+boat flew along at a greatly increased speed.
+
+“There is but small chance of our getting away,” Sir John said quietly.
+“At present we must be rowing as fast as they sail; but wind never
+tires, while there are limits to the powers of muscle and bone. If those
+fellows follow us--and I doubt not that they will, for they must be
+thirsting for vengeance--they will overtake us long before we get to the
+rendezvous; and even did we reach it, the chances are that we should not
+find either of the galleys there. We must hold on as long as we can,
+and as a last resource must run ashore. Unfortunately there are no large
+islands on our way. Nor have we any hope of assistance from our friends
+behind. The inlet looks east, and they will know nothing of our danger;
+nor, if they did, could they help us. The galley is short handed now,
+and there are the captured ships to look after, and the captives we
+rescued. We have only ourselves to depend on.”
+
+At the end of an hour's rowing the boat astern had gained little; but
+the exertions of the rowers were telling severely upon them. They were
+still doing their best, but their breath came in short gasps, the rowing
+was getting short and unsteady, and there was a sensible decrease in the
+speed of the boat. Three miles ahead of them was an islet about half
+a mile in diameter. In some parts it was covered with foliage, but
+elsewhere it was bare rock.
+
+“That must be our goal,” Sir John said. “They will be close to us by the
+time we get there.” Then he said to the rowers, “Stop for a minute to
+get breath. We will land at that islet ahead, and I shall hold to my
+promise if we get there in time. Those of you who like can remain in the
+boat until your countrymen come up; those who choose can leave the boat
+and hide yourselves as best you may. I leave the choice to yourselves.
+If we are overtaken and fall, I cannot keep my promise, and it will be
+best then for you to remain in the boat.”
+
+For three or four minutes the slaves bent forward over their oars; but
+as soon as Sir John gave the word they straightened themselves up and
+began rowing again. The rest had done them good, and they again fell
+into a long, steady stroke.
+
+“Shall we buckle on our armour again?” Sir Ralph Harcourt asked; for
+they had not put it on when they left the ship, as the heat was very
+great.
+
+“I think we had better don our mail shirts only. In climbing about that
+rock ahead of us, the less weight we carry the better, and with this
+heat I would rather fight unprotected than in casque and armour.
+Besides, there can be little doubt that, if they come upon us, it will
+be our last battle. That craft behind is crowded with men, and, armour
+or no armour, it will come to the same in the end. If it were not that
+we have a mission to fulfil, and that it is of all things important to
+send the galleys to aid our friends, I would say let us choose a spot
+at the foot of the rocks there, where they cannot attack us in the rear,
+and there fight it out as becomes knights of the Cross; but as it is our
+duty above all things to carry this message, we must strive to preserve
+our lives, and must, if we can, conceal ourselves from these paynims.”
+
+“What are you going to do?” Sir John asked the slaves, when they were
+within a quarter of a mile of the islet. “I should think, after we have
+left the boat, it will be best for you to sit quietly on your benches
+till our pursuers arrive.”
+
+“They would cut our throats at once, Sir Knight; they will be furious at
+our having given them so long a chase. Hassan Ali's men care little whom
+they slay, and, irritated by their misfortune, it will be naught to them
+whether we are Moslem or Christian. I, for one, shall take to the woods,
+and hide.”
+
+There was a chorus of assent among the other rowers.
+
+“I trust that you may escape,” the knight said. “It is for us they
+will be hunting, and if they catch and slay us they will not trouble to
+search the island further.”
+
+“It seems to me, Sir John,” Gervaise said, “that with the aid of these
+good fellows we may yet have a chance of escape.”
+
+“What is your plan, Sir Gervaise?”
+
+“I think, Sir John, that if, when we land, we climb straight up that
+hill, in full sight of the shore, the pirates, when they see us, will
+follow at once. The slaves should, therefore, be safe for a time if they
+hide in that wood to the left of the spot we are making for. Will you
+tell them to keep down by the water's edge among the bushes, and that
+after crossing that crest, we will try to make a dash round, so as to
+join them there. 'Tis probable that most of the pirates will start in
+pursuit of us, and if we and the slaves make a rush for the shore we may
+seize our boat, push off, and capture their craft, if there are but
+a few left on board, knock out a plank and scuttle her, and then row
+away.”
+
+“By St. George, your plan is a good one, Tresham! A right good scheme,
+and we will try it.”
+
+He at once translated what Gervaise had said to the rowers, by whom
+it was received with short exclamations of approval, for they were too
+breathless and exhausted for talk. Already they could hear the yells of
+the pirates, who, as the boat ran up on the beach were but a quarter of
+a mile behind.
+
+“Now, away for that wood!” Sir John cried, as he leapt ashore. “Now,
+comrades, for a climb up the hill!”
+
+It was a steep ascent, and more than once one had to be helped up by the
+others, and then in turn to assist them to get up beside him. Louder and
+louder rose the shouts of the pirates, but the knights did not glance
+back until they reached the top of the hill; then they turned and looked
+round. A swarm of men were climbing after them, and were already halfway
+up the cliff.
+
+“Heave them down!” Sir John exclaimed, pointing to some loose rocks, and
+set the example by lifting a great stone and hurling it over the edge.
+Harcourt and Gervaise at once did the same, and twenty or thirty rocks
+were speedily sent rolling down the steep ascent, and yells, shouts, and
+cries were heard below.
+
+“That will check them a bit. Now let us be off,” Sir John Boswell said,
+and they at once started. After crossing a hundred yards of bare rock
+they stood at the edge of another slope into a deep valley, beyond which
+rose the central hill of the island. The valley ran right across,
+and was filled with trees extending to the sea at either end. Running
+rapidly down, the knights were within the shelter of the wood before the
+Moslems had reached the brow behind them. A minute later they heard the
+shouts of their enemies. Once in the wood they turned to the left, and
+in a few minutes stood on the sea shore. It was a little bay some two
+hundred yards across, and at either point the cliffs rose abruptly from
+the water.
+
+“We shall have to swim round the point,” Sir John said.
+
+“Take off your mail shirts. We will make our way along the rocks as far
+as we can, and then drop them into the sea, otherwise they will know
+that we have taken to the water.”
+
+They hurried along the rocks, and were able to make their way to within
+fifty yards of the point; then, throwing their mail shirts into the sea,
+they plunged in. All knew the importance of getting round before any of
+the pirates, who would be searching the valley, came down on the shore,
+and they swam their hardest until they rounded the corner. The wood
+rang with the shouts of their pursuers, but no yell had risen from the
+water's edge. A hundred yards farther, and they were able to land, and
+were in a short time in the shelter of the trees that fringed the water
+to the point where they had left the boat. There was no longer any
+occasion for speed, and they made their way through the thick bushes and
+undergrowth quietly, until they recovered breath after their exertions.
+They had gone a few hundreds yards when from the bushes the slaves
+suddenly rose up.
+
+“All has gone well,” Sir John said to them in their own language. “The
+pirates are searching for us on the other side of the hill. There are
+not likely to be many of them left here. We shall soon be in possession
+of our boat again.”
+
+Followed by the slaves, they made their way forward until they stood at
+the edge of the wood. Five or six pirates were standing on the shore.
+
+“I expect they have been left there,” Harcourt said, “to prevent the
+slaves from carrying off the boat. They must have seen them run into the
+wood. They won't reckon on our being with them.”
+
+Drawing their swords, the three knights rushed out, followed by the
+slaves. They had but a hundred yards to run. The pirates, on seeing
+them, raised a yell and drew their scimitars; but the sight of the
+knights rushing upon them, when they had expected but a few unarmed
+rowers, was too much for their courage, and when their assailants were
+still fifty yards away they turned and fled. The fishing craft had been
+run ashore but a few yards from their boat.
+
+“Get her afloat, Harcourt, and bring her to the stern of the fisherman.
+Now, Tresham, follow me.”
+
+Sir John Boswell climbed up on to the fishing boat, which was a craft of
+some fifteen tons burden. She was entirely deserted, but the sail still
+hung from the yard, and a fire was burning on a stone hearth, raised on
+some logs of wood in the centre of the deck.
+
+“Look for something to stave in a plank, Tresham.”
+
+Gervaise leapt down into the hold. There were some nets and spare sails
+lying there, but nothing that would answer the purpose. He examined the
+planks. The boat was very strongly and roughly built.
+
+“There is nothing here, Sir John, that will do, and nothing short of a
+heavy sledge hammer would suffice to smash one of these planks.”
+
+“There are a lot of them coming down the hill, Tresham. We have not many
+minutes to spare, but we must disable the craft. They will soon be after
+us again; they have run her hard and fast here, but when they all come
+back they will soon get her off. Let us try one of these sweeps.”
+
+He lifted one of the heavy oars, and holding it upright he and Gervaise
+together tried to drive the handle through the bottom. Again and again
+they raised it and drove it down; but the plank was too strong, and too
+securely fastened to the timbers.
+
+“We must give it up,” the knight said, with a sigh. “Fortune has
+befriended us so far, Tresham, but she has deserted us at last. Another
+three minutes, and we shall have thirty or forty of them upon us.”
+
+At this moment the lad's eye fell upon the fire.
+
+“We shall manage yet,” he exclaimed, and, seizing a blazing brand, he
+jumped below and set fire to the sails stowed there; they were as dry as
+tinder, and the flame shot up at once.
+
+“That is good, Tresham,” the knight said; “but they will put it out
+before it has caught the boat.”
+
+“Not before it has burnt the sails,” Gervaise replied. “Now for this
+one,” and he applied the brand to the lower edge of the great sail.
+Without a word Sir John seized another brand, and fired the sail on the
+other side of the deck. The flames flashed up, and a wild yell of rage
+and alarm broke from the pirates, who were now rushing down towards the
+beach.
+
+“Now to the boat, Tresham; we have no time to lose if we would avoid
+being pounded with stones.”
+
+They dropped over the stern into the boat. The galley slaves dipped
+their oars into the water, and she shot away just as the foremost of the
+pirates reached the edge of the water. A few stones were thrown; but
+the pirates were so anxious about the craft, by which alone they could
+escape from the island, that the majority at once climbed on board.
+
+At a word from the knight, the slaves stopped rowing a hundred yards
+from the shore. The sail was already consumed, and the yard and the
+upper part of the mast were in flames. A dense smoke was rising from the
+hold, and the pirates were throwing buckets of water down into it. In a
+few minutes the smoke decreased.
+
+“I thought that they would be able to put it out; but, as far as we are
+concerned, it matters little. They have lost their sails, and as I saw
+but four sweeps, we can travel five miles to their one. If we find the
+galleys we will look in here on our way back, and if they have not left
+we will fire that craft more effectually, and then the pirates will be
+trapped, and we can leave them till we have fetched off Sir Louis
+and his prizes, and then have a grand hunt here. We took no prisoners
+before, and a hundred slaves will be a useful addition to our wall
+builders. Now, Tresham, I have to thank you warmly, for Harcourt and I
+doubly owe our lives to you. It was thanks to your quickness of wit that
+we regained our boat, for I would not have given a ducat for our chances
+had you not thought of that scheme. In the second place, we should
+assuredly have been overtaken again had it not been for your happy
+thought of crippling them by burning their sails. By St. George,
+Harcourt, this young countryman of ours is as quick and as ready of wit
+as he has shown himself a brave and gallant fighter! We have no lack of
+sturdy fighters; but the wit to devise and to seize upon the right thing
+in the moment of danger is vastly more rare. As for myself, I have no
+shame that this lad, who is young enough to be my son, should have thus,
+twice in a single hour, pointed out the way to safety. With sword and
+battleaxe I can, I trust, hold my own with any man; but my brain is dull
+when it comes to hatching schemes. If we live, we shall see Sir Gervaise
+one of the most distinguished knights of the Order.”
+
+“While I feel gratified indeed, as I may well be by your commendation,
+Sir John, I must, under your favour, say that you have given me a far
+greater degree of credit than is my due. There was the fire, and there
+was the sail, and the thought that the one would destroy the other was
+simply a natural one, which might have occurred to a child. As to the
+plan about the boat, seeing that there was the hill and the wood, it
+flashed upon me at once that we might make a circuit and come back to
+her.”
+
+“Just so, lad; but those thoughts did not flash upon my mind, nor upon
+that of Harcourt. It is just because those sort of ideas do flash upon
+the minds of some men, and not of others, that the first rise to the
+rank of distinguished commanders, while the others remain simple knights
+who would play their part in a charge or in the defence of a breach, but
+would be of no account as leaders.
+
+“Now row along steadily, men,” he went on, speaking to the slaves.
+“We are still in good time, for it was not an hour from the moment we
+touched the island to our departure from it, and much of that time we
+have gained by the speed with which you rowed before. At any rate, we
+shall make out the island before sunset, and whether we arrive there a
+little sooner or later matters little. Harcourt, hand me that wineskin
+and a goblet. A draught will do us good after our climb and swim, and
+these good fellows will be none the worse for a cup also.”
+
+Inspired with the hope of freedom, the slaves rowed steadily, and the
+sun had just set when they entered a little inlet in the rocky isle that
+was their place of rendezvous.
+
+“Thanks be to the saints!” Sir John exclaimed, as they reached the
+entrance. “There is Santoval's galley.”
+
+There was a stir on board the galley as the boat was seen approaching.
+The knights had put on their armour, which they had found still lying
+in the boat, the pirates, in their haste to pursue, having left her
+unexamined, while those who had remained on guard had abstained from
+touching anything until the return of their captain and comrades.
+
+“Whence come you, Sir John, and what is the news? No misfortune has
+befallen Ricord's galley, I hope?” the Spanish knight in command
+shouted, as the boat came near enough for him to recognize the features
+of its occupants.
+
+“All is well,” Sir John shouted back; “but we have taken more prizes
+than we can manage, though not without hard fighting. Seven knights have
+fallen, and at least ten others will not be able to buckle their armour
+on again for some time to come, so I have been sent here to beg your
+assistance; and it is well that it should be given speedily, for if more
+pirate vessels come up before you join, Ricord and his companions will
+be in a sorry plight.”
+
+By this time the boat had reached the side of the galley, and as Sir
+John and his two companions stepped on board, the knights crowded
+round to hear the details of the news. Exclamations of approval and
+satisfaction arose when Sir John related the incidents of the fight, and
+told them that the four vessels that had fallen into their hands formed
+part of Hassan Ali's fleet.
+
+“That is good news indeed, Boswell,” Don Santoval said; “and I would I
+had been there to take part in so gallant a fight. It is well you found
+us here, for with four prizes on hand, and with half his strength dead
+or disabled, Ricord must be in sore need of aid. We will start tomorrow
+morning at daybreak. As all the ships were taken, there is little fear
+of any of the other pirates hearing news of what has happened.”
+
+“I don't know,” Sir John replied. “There were, as I told you, some two
+hundred pirates left on the island. About half those, we know, seized a
+fishing boat and escaped, for they chased us, and we have had as narrow
+an escape from death as has ever fallen to my lot, though I have been
+in over a score of hard fought battles. The rest may well have taken
+another fishing boat and made off also, for we saw several craft along
+the shores of the island. If so, they may have made for Hassan Ali's
+rendezvous, wherever that may be, just as I made here, and by this time
+some of his ships may be on the way there.”
+
+“By St. Anthony, this alters the situation gravely!” Don Santoval said.
+“Fellow knights, we must lose no time in going to Ricord's assistance.
+The slaves have had a long row today, but they must start on another.
+Let them have a good meal to strengthen them, and a cup of wine each.
+Whatever their scruples at other times, they never refuse wine when
+there is heavy work to be done, knowing full well that a draught of it
+helps them mightily in their labours. Your men must have rowed well, Sir
+John, to have brought you here so quickly?”
+
+“I have promised them their freedom,” Sir John said; “and they shall
+have it, even if I have to pay their value into the treasury. As I told
+you, we were hotly pursued, for the craft with her sail went faster than
+we with our oars; and, knowing the importance of bringing the news here,
+I encouraged them by promising them their freedom, should we get away.
+Not only did they row right manfully, but they proved faithful in our
+extremity, and, when all seemed lost, stuck to us instead of deserting
+and joining the pirates.”
+
+“But how did you get away, Sir John, if their craft outsailed you?”
+
+“I owe my life entirely to the quick wit of my young countryman, Sir
+Gervaise Tresham here.” And Sir John then related the incidents of their
+adventure on the island, his narrative eliciting warm expressions of
+approval from the knights.
+
+“Of course, you will go with us, Boswell?” Don Santoval said, when the
+master of the slaves announced that these had eaten their meal, and were
+ready.
+
+“I must do so,” Sir John replied. “I want you, on your way, to look in
+at that island where we had so narrow an escape, and if we find their
+craft still there we can destroy it. The place is directly in our
+course; we shall, therefore, lose but little time in looking in. Of
+course, they may have gone as soon as they got their vessel afloat,
+but it is hardly likely. They would have no idea of my returning with
+a galley so soon, and will probably set to to make a dozen more oars
+before they start, for she had but four on board, which will scarce
+suffice to send her a mile an hour through the water. Therefore, I fancy
+they will not put off until tomorrow morning. If that is so, and we
+destroy their craft, they will be trapped in the islet, and on our
+return we can capture them all. I think of leaving Harcourt and Tresham
+in the boat, in order that when Piccolomini's galley comes in, they may
+direct him also to join us.”
+
+“He may be in at any moment; we met him three days since. He had
+captured a pirate, and sent her off under charge of ten of his knights.
+We agreed to meet him this evening; and as he is not here, he will
+probably be in the first thing in the morning.”
+
+Gervaise and Harcourt took their places in the boat again. The galley
+got up its anchor and started. Just as she reached the mouth of the
+inlet another galley rounded the point and nearly ran into her.
+
+“I am going to Ricord's assistance, Piccolomini,” Don Santoval shouted.
+
+“Is it urgent?” the commander of the galley shouted back. “We have had
+a very long row, and can go no farther, unless his strait is a very sore
+one.”
+
+“No. Come on in the morning. You will hear all the news from a boat
+lying two hundred yards astern. Two young English knights are waiting in
+her to give you the news. Ricord has made a fine capture. Row on, men.”
+ And the galley proceeded on her way, while the newcomer proceeded up the
+harbour.
+
+Harcourt and Gervaise at once went on board, and the former gave the
+Italian commander an account of the battle that had taken place, and
+the capture of the four pirate vessels. After the exclamations
+of satisfaction by the knights had ceased, he recounted their own
+adventures, which were heard with lively interest.
+
+“I hope indeed that Santoval will burn that fishing boat, and that we
+shall capture the pirates,” the commander said. “We have need of
+more slaves to carry out the works at Rhodes. Now, let us to supper,
+gentlemen, and then to sleep. In six hours we will be off again, for if
+some more of these villains have escaped and carried the news to Hassan
+Ali, our swords may be sorely needed by Ricord and Santoval tomorrow.”
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI KNIGHTED
+
+
+At three in the morning all on board the galley were astir. A ration
+of bread and meat was served out to the slaves, and the boat was soon
+afterwards under way. The rowers of the English knight's boat had been
+warmly commended by the commander and placed in charge of the overseer,
+with instructions that they were to be treated as free men. As soon as
+the galley slaves set to work, however, they seated themselves on
+the benches and double banked some of the oars, anxious to please the
+knights. With the exception of those whose turn it was to be on watch,
+most of the knights slept until daybreak.
+
+“At the rate we are rowing, Gervaise,” Harcourt said, as they went up
+on to the poop together, “it will not take us very long to join our
+friends. We are going through the water at fully six miles an hour; and
+as we have already been two hours under way, in another three we shall
+be there.”
+
+An hour and a half later they passed the island where they had landed.
+The two young knights pointed out to the others the valley into which
+they had descended, and the point round which they had swum. In a few
+minutes they caught sight of the landing place.
+
+“Look, Gervaise, there is something black showing just above the water.”
+
+“I see it. I think it is a line of timbers. There were certainly no
+rocks there when we ran ashore.”
+
+“Then Santoval must have found the craft still there and burnt her,” one
+of the knights standing by remarked, “and the pirates are caged up. It
+will take them some time to make a raft that will carry them to the next
+island, and before they can do that we shall be back again. I shall be
+sorry if they escape, for they are as ruthless a set of villains as sail
+the seas.”
+
+The galley had traversed half the remaining distance when the sound of
+a gun was faintly heard. For a moment there was an absolute hush on the
+poop; then three or four shots in rapid succession were heard.
+
+“Some more pirate ships must have come up,” the commander exclaimed.
+Then he shouted down to the slaves, “Row, men--row for your lives!
+Overseer, do not spare your lash if any hang back from their work.”
+
+The galley had been travelling fast before, but her speed greatly
+increased as the slaves rowed their hardest. Fast as she was travelling,
+the impatience of the knights was extreme. They walked up and down the
+deck, making vows of candles that should be burnt at the shrine of St.
+John if they arrived in time to take a share in the fight, stopping at
+times to listen to the sound of artillery, which was now so frequent as
+to show that a severe engagement was being fought. Many of the younger
+knights ran down to the waist and double banked the oars, and in a
+shorter time than it seemed possible the galley arrived at the mouth of
+the bay.
+
+A desperate fight was going on. Ricord's ship lay, idle and deserted,
+at anchor. Five pirate crafts surrounded Santoval's galley. Two of them
+were alongside of her; the others were raking her fore and aft with
+their shot. The young knights left the oars, sprang up to the poop and
+joined in the shout of encouragement raised by the others, and then,
+resuming their helmets and armour, stood ready to leap on board an enemy
+as soon as they reached her. Piccolomini directed the helmsman to lay
+him alongside one of the ships grappling with Santoval. As they came up,
+their galley's cannon poured their fire into her, and a moment later the
+knights sprang on board.
+
+In the din of battle their shout had been unheard. The pirates thronging
+the other side of their ship were intent only on overcoming the
+resistance of the knights, and even the discharge of cannon had not
+called their attention to their foe, until the latter, shouting the war
+cry of the Order, fell suddenly upon them. A panic at once seized them.
+Some were cut down almost unresistingly, but the great majority, running
+to the bow or stern, threw themselves overboard and swam to the other
+ships. The pirate ship on the other side of Santoval's galley instantly
+threw off the grapnels and thrust off from her side, and, immediately
+hauling in the sheets of the big sail, began at once to draw away, while
+her three consorts made for the mouth of the bay.
+
+“Back to your galley, comrades,” Piccolomini shouted, “or with this
+brisk wind they will escape us.”
+
+The knights at once crossed on to their own craft, the oars were got
+out, and the chase began. A minute or two later Don Santoval followed
+them, but soon gave up, as so large a number of the oars had been broken
+when the two pirate ships ran alongside him, that it would have been
+hopeless to pursue. The wind was blowing freshly, and was rapidly
+increasing in strength, so that, in spite of the efforts of the galley
+slaves, the pirates gradually drew away, running straight before
+the wind, and aiding the effects of the sails with oars. Seeing the
+hopelessness of the chase, Piccolomini abandoned it, after rowing for
+two miles, and returned to the island. The other two galleys were lying
+beside each other, and Piccolomini had his craft steered alongside them.
+
+“Thanks, Piccolomini, for arriving so opportunely,” Santoval, who was
+seated on the deck leaning against the bulwarks, said, as his fellow
+commander leapt on board, and came towards him.
+
+“Would that I had arrived sooner, Santoval, for I see that you have been
+grievously wounded!”
+
+“Ay. One of the paynims' cannonballs has carried off both my legs below
+the knee. The leech has been searing the wounds with a hot iron, and
+says that he thinks I shall get over it; but if so I fear that my
+fighting days are past, unless, indeed, I fight seated on a chair.
+However, I ought not to grumble. I have lost many brave comrades, and
+others are wounded more sorely than I am.”
+
+Sir Louis Ricord now joined them. He embraced Piccolomini warmly.
+
+“I never heard a more welcome shout, Piccolomini, than that which you
+gave when you fell upon the Moslems, for in truth the issue of the
+conflict was doubtful. I was delighted when this morning at daybreak
+Santoval's galley rowed in. We had all kept watch during the night,
+thinking the pirates might obtain boats and make an attack upon us; and,
+with but twenty of us fit to wield a sword, our position would have been
+a bad one, and at any rate they might have recaptured the prizes. We
+agreed that Santoval and his knights should land at once. This they did.
+Sir John Boswell had of course told me how his boat had been chased by
+a fishing craft, manned by a large number of the pirates, and that he
+feared the rest might similarly have escaped, and might have gone to
+bring some more of Hassan Ali's ships upon us.
+
+“As soon as Santoval landed, some of the natives came down and told him
+that there was not a pirate remaining there, the rest having started
+in another boat a few minutes after the one that had chased Boswell.
+Santoval left two of his men with orders to ascend to the highest spot
+on the island, and to keep watch, and then brought the rest off to
+his galley. Our first step was, of course, to send all the women and
+children ashore. Then we consulted as to what had best be done if the
+pirates should come back in force. We hoped, at any rate, that this
+would not happen until you arrived. We expected that you would be here
+before noon; but we decided that, should they get here before you, we
+from our galley would embark on Santoval's, as it was better to fight in
+one strongly manned boat than to divide our forces.
+
+“It was scarce half an hour after Santoval came down before the men left
+on the lookout appeared on the beach. On fetching them off, they told us
+that as soon as they reached the top of the hill they saw five vessels
+approaching with sails and oars, and that they would be here in half an
+hour at the outside. We at once abandoned my galley, brought the rowers
+and the wounded here, and prepared for the fight. As you saw, they ran
+their two biggest ships alongside us, and for two hours the fight went
+on. They were crowded with men, who in vain strove to get a footing on
+our decks. Had we only had these two to deal with, we should have had
+nothing to fear, heavily manned though they were; but the other three
+kept sailing backwards and forwards, discharging their guns into us as
+they passed, firing not only shot, but bags of bullets.
+
+“Their gunners were skilful, and, as you see, they have completely
+riddled our poop. Twenty knights have been killed, and eleven others are
+sorely wounded. Scarce one has escaped unscathed. You may guess, then,
+how welcome was your aid, which we had not expected for another three
+hours. We were on the point of abandoning the waist and gathering on the
+poop, which we could still have defended for a considerable time, when,
+as if dropped from the skies, you fell upon the pirates, and turned the
+tables. How is it that you were here so early?”
+
+“We started at three o'clock, instead of waiting for daybreak. It
+seemed, from the story of the two young knights, that it was possible
+you might be attacked early, and, crippled as your command was, and with
+four prizes on your hands, I deemed it best to come on as soon as the
+rowers had had a few hours' rest.”
+
+“It is well that you did so; it would have been a grievous affair had
+two of our galleys been captured by the pirates. It would have been a
+blow to the prestige of the Order, and would have brought such strength
+to Hassan Ali and other pirate leaders that nothing short of sending out
+a fleet would have recovered our ascendancy; and as every ducat we
+can spare has to be spent on the fortifications, it would have been a
+misfortune indeed had we been obliged to fit out such an expedition at
+present.”
+
+“Who have fallen, Sir Louis?”
+
+“Five more of the knights of my galley--Pierre des Vignes, Raoul de
+Montpelier, Ernest Schmidt, Raymond Garcia, and Albert Schenck. Here is
+the list of the knights of Santoval's galley.”
+
+“'Tis a long list, and a sad one,” Piccolomini said, after reading
+the names. “With the seven who fell in your first fight, twenty-seven
+knights have fallen, all brave comrades. Truly, we can ill spare such
+a loss. It is true there are five prizes to show for it, and we have
+struck Hassan Ali a blow that will resound through the Levant; but the
+cost is heavy.”
+
+“It is indeed,” Ricord agreed. “The four vessels are well filled with
+rich spoil that the scoundrels had gathered, and I doubt not the one you
+captured is equally rich. Still, had they been ten times as valuable,
+the booty would be dearly purchased at such a price.”
+
+There was now a consultation among the leaders, and it was agreed that
+six knights should be placed in each of the captured ships, with ten of
+the galley slaves to work the sails, the others being equally divided
+between the three galleys. They were, in the first place, to row to the
+island where the pirates were imprisoned, and to slay or capture the
+whole of them; afterwards they were to make direct for Rhodes; with
+so numerous a fleet there was no fear of their being attacked. The
+arrangements took but a short time to complete. An hour later they left
+the port, the three galleys rowing ahead, while the five prizes, under
+easy sail, followed them.
+
+Sir John Boswell had been wounded, but not so seriously as to altogether
+disable him, and he was in command of one of the prizes, having Sir
+Adam Tedbond, Harcourt, Gervaise, and a German knight, with him. Sir
+Marmaduke Lumley, who, after the first fight was over, was found, to the
+surprise and pleasure of his comrades, to be still living, was, with the
+rest of the wounded, on board one of the galleys. Two of the pirates
+had fallen dead across him, and in the ardour of their attack on the
+knights, he had lain there unnoticed until the return of Sir Louis and
+his comrades had driven the pirates overboard. The leech was of opinion
+that he might yet recover from his wound.
+
+On arriving at the island, sixty of the knights disembarked. The woods
+near the shore were first searched, but were found untenanted. They were
+about to advance up the hill when a man appeared on the crest above them
+waving a white flag. He was told to come down, and on his arrival said
+that he was sent by his companions to offer to surrender, on the promise
+that their lives should be spared. The knights were well pleased to be
+saved the trouble of a long search through the woods, and the messenger
+left at once to acquaint the pirates that their terms were accepted. In
+a short time some eighty men made their way down the hill. On reaching
+the beach they were disarmed, divided equally between the galleys, and
+distributed among the rowers, filling up the places of those who had
+been killed by the fire of the Moslems, and of the men drafted into the
+prizes. They begged for food and water before they began work, and, on
+being questioned, admitted that their surrender was due principally
+to the fact that they had been unable to find food of any sort on the
+island, and that after searching all over it no spring of water could be
+discovered.
+
+“In that case,” Sir John Boswell said, “I have no doubt they have all
+surrendered. I before thought it probable that a good many of them would
+have remained hidden, trusting to be able to make a raft after we
+had left, and so get away, believing rightly enough that we should be
+disinclined to search every foot of the island for them. As it is, I
+doubt not, all are here.”
+
+The little fleet anchored that night at the rendezvous, and after two
+more days' rowing reached Rhodes, where the appearance of the three
+galleys, followed by their five prizes, was greeted with great
+acclamation. The news, however, that twenty-seven knights had fallen,
+and that thirteen or fourteen others were very gravely wounded, damped
+the satisfaction that every one had at first felt. D'Aubusson came
+down as soon as they reached the mole, and was greatly affected when he
+received Ricord's report.
+
+“It is an unfortunate loss indeed, Sir Louis,” he said, “though it may
+be that the victory is not too dearly purchased. I do not speak of the
+captured ships, nor of the spoil they contain, nor even of the slaves
+you have brought us, welcome though all may be, but of the effect that
+the defeat and capture of these craft of Hassan Ali's will have. It is
+plain that the preparations the sultan is making, and the belief that
+Rhodes is doomed, have so encouraged the infidels that they are becoming
+really formidable at sea. This blow will show them that the Order has
+yet power to sweep the sea of pirates. Since, however, this adventure
+has taught us that a single leader like Hassan sails with at least nine
+ships under his orders, it is clear that in future our galleys must not
+adventure singly among the islands. It was fortunate indeed that first
+Santoval, and then Piccolomini, arrived to your assistance. How was it
+that they happened to come up so opportunely?”
+
+“Sir John Boswell, with Ralph Harcourt and Gervaise Tresham; went in
+a boat to the rendezvous we had arranged, and reached it after an
+adventure, which I will leave Sir John to tell himself. I may say that
+the two young knights named had in our encounter both obtained very high
+credit amongst us all for the valour with which they fought. No one bore
+himself more stoutly, and I am glad to take this early opportunity of
+bringing their conduct before your notice. As you will learn from Sir
+John, Gervaise Tresham afterwards showed a quickness of wit that was the
+means of saving the lives of those with him, and I may say also of all
+with me, for had they failed to reach the rendezvous we should have
+fallen easy victims to the five ships Hassan Ali brought against us.”
+
+Sending for Sir John Boswell, the grand prior heard from him the details
+of his adventure in the boat.
+
+“I am right glad to hear you speak so warmly of Tresham, Sir John, for I
+regard him as my special protege, and am pleased indeed to find that at
+this outset of his career he has proved himself not only a brave knight,
+but full of resource, and quick at invention. I think, Sir John, that
+these two young knights have shown themselves well worthy of receiving
+the honour of secular knighthood.”
+
+“Assuredly they have,” Sir John agreed.
+
+“Then, Sir John, will you bestow it upon them? The Order, as an Order,
+does not bestow the honour, but its members do not forfeit their right
+as knights to bestow it individually, and none among us are more worthy
+of admitting them to your rank than yourself.”
+
+“I would gladly do it, Sir Peter; but the honour would come far better
+from yourself, and would not only be more highly prized by them, but
+would be of greater value in the eyes of others. I am but a simple
+knight commander of the Order, and my name would scarce be known beyond
+its ranks. But to be knighted by one whose name is known and honoured
+throughout Europe would give them a standing wherever they went, and
+place them on a level with the best.”
+
+“If that is your opinion, Boswell, I will myself undertake it, and
+will do it at once; it were better done here than at a conclave of the
+Order--now, when they are fresh from the battle. Let the knights be
+summoned from the other galleys at once.”
+
+In a few minutes the whole of the knights were assembled on the poop of
+the galley.
+
+“Friends, and brother knights,” D'Aubusson said. “First, in the name
+of the Order, I have to thank you all most heartily for the brave deeds
+that you have performed, and for the fresh honour you have won for it.
+Every man has, as I learn from the three commanders, borne himself as
+a true and valiant knight, ready to give his life in the cause of the
+Order and of humanity. Two names have been specially brought before me
+by commander Ricord, and by the good knight Sir John Boswell; they are
+those of two young companions who, though knights of our Order, have not
+yet received secular knighthood, and this, in the opinion of these
+two knights, they have right worthily won. Sir Ralph Harcourt and Sir
+Gervaise Tresham, step forward.”
+
+The two young knights, colouring with pleasure at this unexpected
+honour, removed their helmets, and stood with bowed heads before the
+grand prior. D'Aubusson went on, turning to the knights around him, “I
+am about, comrades, to undertake the office of knighting them. Sir
+Louis Ricord and Sir John Boswell stand as their sponsors. But before I
+proceed I would ask you all whether you, too, approve, and hold that Sir
+Ralph Harcourt and Sir Gervaise Tresham have proved themselves worthy of
+the honour of secular knighthood at my hands?”
+
+There was a general reply in the affirmative, the answer of the
+survivors of Ricord's crew being specially emphatic. The grand prior
+drew his sword, and the two young knights knelt before him, their
+sponsors standing beside them.
+
+“Sir Ralph Harcourt, you have now been four years a knight of this
+Order, but hitherto you have had no opportunity of drawing sword against
+the infidels. Now that the chance has come, you have proved yourself a
+true and valiant brother of the Order, and well worthy of the secular
+accolade. It is in that capacity that I now knight you. It is not the
+grand prior of Auvergne, but Sir Peter D'Aubusson, of the grand cross of
+St. Louis, who now bestows upon you the honour of secular knighthood.”
+ He touched him lightly with the sword. He then turned to Gervaise.
+
+“You, Sir Gervaise Tresham, are young indeed to receive the honour of
+secular knighthood; but valour is of no age, and in the opinion of
+your commanders, and in that of your comrades, you have proved yourself
+worthy of the honour. You have shown too, that, as Sir John Boswell has
+related to me, you are not only brave in action, but able, in the moment
+of danger, to plan and to execute. You were, he tells me, the means of
+saving his life and that of your comrade, and, by thus enabling him to
+bear to the place of rendezvous the news of Sir Louis's danger, were
+also the means of saving the lives of Sir Louis and his companions,
+and of bringing home in safety the prizes he had taken. With such a
+beginning it is easy to foresee that you will win for yourself some day
+a distinguished position in the ranks of the Order, and are most worthy
+of the honour I now bestow upon you.” And he touched him with his sword.
+
+The two young knights rose to their feet, bowed deeply to D'Aubusson,
+and then retired, with their sponsors. They were at once surrounded by
+the knights, who shook them by the hand, and warmly congratulated
+them upon the honour that had befallen them, receiving equally warm
+congratulations on their arrival at the auberge of the langue.
+
+The five prizes turned out, when their cargoes were landed, to be much
+more valuable than the cursory examination made by the knights had
+warranted them in expecting. They contained, indeed, an accumulation of
+the most valuable contents of the prizes taken by the pirates for a long
+time previously; and as these desperadoes preyed upon Turkish
+commerce as well as Christian, the goods consisted largely of Eastern
+manufactures of all kinds. Costly robes, delicate embroidery, superb
+carpets, shawls, goldsmiths' work, and no small amount of jewels, were
+among the spoil collected, and the bulk of the merchandise captured was,
+two days later, despatched in galleys to Genoa and Marseilles, to be
+sold for the benefit of the Order.
+
+D'Aubusson without hesitation carried out Sir John Boswell's promise to
+the slaves who had rowed his boat. They were not only set at liberty,
+but were each presented with a sum of money, and were placed on board a
+galley, and landed on the mainland.
+
+The English knights were all proud of the honour that had been won by
+their young countrymen, the only exception being Robert Rivers, who was
+devoured with jealousy at their advancement. He did not openly display
+his feelings, for the reports not only of Sir John Boswell, but of the
+other two English knights, were so strong that he dared not express
+his discontent. He himself had twice been engaged with pirates, but
+had gained no particular credit, and indeed had, in the opinion of his
+comrades, been somewhat slack in the fray. He was no favourite in the
+auberge, though he spared no pains to ingratiate himself with the senior
+knights, and had a short time before been very severely reprimanded by
+the bailiff for striking one of the servants.
+
+“I have more than once had to reprove you for your manners to the
+servants,” the bailiff said. “You will now be punished by the septaine;
+you will fast for seven days, on Wednesday and Friday you will receive
+bread and water only, and will be confined to the auberge for that
+period. The next time that I have reason to complain of you, I shall
+bring the matter before the grand master, and represent to him that it
+were best to send you home, since you cannot comport yourself to the
+servants of the auberge as befits a knight of the Order. We have always
+borne the reputation of being specially kind to our servants, and it
+is intolerable that one, who has been but a short time only a professed
+knight, should behave with a hauteur and insolence that not even the
+oldest among us would permit himself. There is not one of the servants
+here who was not in his own country of a rank and station equal, if not
+superior, to your own; and though misfortune has fallen upon them, they
+are to be pitied rather than condemned for it. In future, you are to
+give no order whatever to the servants, nor to address them, save when
+at meals you require anything. If you have any complaints to make of
+their conduct to you, you will make them to me, and I will inquire into
+the matter; and if I find they have failed in their duty they will be
+punished. I shall keep my eye upon you in the future. There are other
+faults that I have observed in you. More than once I have heard you
+address Sir Gervaise Tresham in a manner which, were not duelling
+forbidden by our rules, might bring about bloodshed; and from what I
+have seen when I have been watching the exercises, he is as much your
+superior in arms as he is in manner and disposition.”
+
+This reproof had greatly subdued Robert Rivers; and as he felt that
+any display of his jealousy of Gervaise would be resented by the
+other knights, and might result in serious consequences to himself, he
+abstained from any exhibition of it when they returned to the auberge,
+although he could not bring himself to join in the congratulations
+offered to them. The next day, however, when he was talking to Ralph
+Harcourt, he remarked, “From what I hear, Harcourt, D'Aubusson praised
+young Tresham very highly. It seems to me that there was nothing at all
+out of the way in what he did, and it was very unfair that he should be
+selected for higher praise than yourself.”
+
+“It was not unfair at all,” Ralph said warmly, for he was of a generous
+nature, and incapable of the base feeling of envy. “Tresham did a great
+deal more than I did. When we saw the pirate boat gaining so fast upon
+us, it seemed to Sir John Boswell, as well as to myself, that there was
+scarce a chance of escape, and that all we could do was to choose a spot
+on which to make a stand, and then to sell our lives as dearly as we
+could. I could see that Sir John was scanning the hill for a spot where
+we could best defend ourselves. As to hiding on so small an island, with
+a hundred men eager for our blood searching for us, it was well nigh
+impossible. It was Tresham's suggestion alone that saved our lives and
+enabled us to fetch succour to Sir Louis. Sir John, who is an old and
+tried soldier, said that for quickness and merit of conception, the
+oldest knight in the Order could not have done better; and he is not
+one to praise unduly. I am four years older than Gervaise Tresham, but
+I tell you that were he named tomorrow commander of a galley, I would
+willingly serve under him.”
+
+“Well, well, you need not be angry, Harcourt, I have nothing to say
+against Tresham. No doubt he had a happy thought, which turned out well;
+but I cannot see that there was anything wonderful in it, and it seemed
+to me unfair that one who is a mere boy should receive higher praise
+than yourself, who, as I heard Sir John and Sir Adam Tedbond say last
+night at the refectory, bore yourself right gallantly.”
+
+“I did my best,” Ralph said shortly; “but there was small credit in that
+when we were fighting for our lives. The most cowardly beast will fight
+under such circumstances. When you see a Moslem rushing at you, scimitar
+in hand, and know that if you do not cut him down he will cut you down,
+you naturally strike as hard and as quickly as you can. You have never
+liked Gervaise, Rivers. I am sure I don't know why, but you always speak
+in a contemptuous sort of tone about him. True, it does him no harm,
+but it certainly does you no good. For what reason should you feel a
+contempt for him? Although so much younger, he is a better swordsman and
+a better rider than you are. He is liked by every one in the auberge,
+which is more than can be said of yourself; he is always good tempered,
+and is quiet and unassuming. What on earth do you always set yourself
+against him for?”
+
+“I do not know that I do set myself against him,” Rivers said sullenly.
+“I own to having no great liking for him, which is natural enough,
+seeing that his father was a Lancastrian, while we are Yorkists; but it
+is not pleasant to see so much made of a boy, merely because D'Aubusson
+has favoured him.”
+
+“I am certain,” Harcourt said hotly, “that such an idea has never
+occurred to any one but yourself. Sir Peter is a great man and will soon
+be our grand master, but at present he is but grand prior of the langue
+of Auvergne, and whether he favours Tresham or not is a matter that
+concerns none of us. Gervaise is liked by us for his own good qualities.
+He bears himself, as a young knight should do, respectfully towards his
+seniors, and is ever ready to do a service to any one. No one has
+ever seen him out of temper; he is always kind and considerate to the
+servants, and when in command of parties of slaves at the public works
+never says a harsh word to them, but treats them as if they were human
+beings, and not brute beasts. Besides, though he is more skilful than
+any of us with his sword, or indeed at any of the military exercises, he
+is unassuming, and has no particle of pride or arrogance. It is for
+all these things that he is liked, and the friendship of D'Aubusson
+has naught whatever to do with it. It is not only D'Aubusson who has
+prophesied that he will rise to a distinguished rank in the Order.
+Boswell and Ricord both said the same, and I for one thoroughly believe
+it. Is there one among us under the age of twenty--and I might go
+farther--who has already won such credit for himself? One who when but
+sixteen can make his mark in an Order like ours is certain to rise to
+high office, and you and I may, before many years are over, be proud to
+serve under him.”
+
+“That I will never do,” Rivers said fiercely. “I would rather go and
+bury myself for life in the smallest commandery in England.”
+
+“That may be,” Harcourt retorted, his temper also roused, “But possibly
+you might prefer that to fighting under any other leader.”
+
+“That is a reflection on my courage, Sir Ralph Harcourt, I shall lay
+this matter before the bailiff.”
+
+“You can do as you like,” Harcourt said disdainfully, “But I don't think
+you will benefit by your pains.”
+
+When his temper cooled down Rivers acknowledged to himself the truth of
+what Harcourt said. He was not in the favour of the bailiff, while both
+Harcourt and Tresham stood at the present moment high in his estimation.
+Any complaint would lead to an inquiry into the matter that had led
+to the former's words, and even if Harcourt were reprimanded for using
+them, he himself would assuredly not gain in the estimation of the
+knights. Harcourt himself thought no more of the matter, though he
+laughingly told Gervaise that Rivers was by no means gratified at their
+both attaining the honour of secular knighthood, which virtually placed
+them over his head.
+
+“He is not a nice fellow,” Gervaise said. “But naturally it must be
+galling to him, and to a good many others who have not yet had the
+chance of distinguishing themselves. I think it is very good of them
+that they are all so kind and cordial. Of course it is otherwise with
+you, who are as old as most of the other professed knights serving here;
+but with me it is quite different, and as Rivers, somehow, has never
+been very friendly with me, of course it is doubly galling to him. I
+hope he will soon get an opportunity of winning his spurs too.”
+
+“That is just like you, Tresham. If I were in your place, I should
+have no good wishes for a fellow who has never lost an opportunity of
+annoying me, and that without the smallest cause of offence on my part.”
+
+“I am sure you would not wish him ill, Harcourt. You would make
+allowance for him just as I do, and feel that if he had had the same
+opportunities he would have obtained the same credit and honours.”
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII A FIRST COMMAND
+
+
+The first news that the knights heard on their return from their
+expedition was that the Grand Master Orsini was seriously ill, and that,
+at his advanced age, the doctors feared there was little hope of his
+rallying. Gervaise felt a keen regret on hearing that the kind and
+gentle old man, who had been for three years his master, was at the
+point of death. Nevertheless, it was generally felt among the knights
+that, in view of the dangers that threatened Rhodes, it was for the good
+of the Order that a strong and capable man, whom all respected, and who
+possessed their entire confidence, should at such a time be invested
+with absolute power.
+
+D'Aubusson had, indeed, for some years been the real head of the
+community, but every question had, if only as a matter of form, to
+be referred to the grand master, in order to obtain his approval and
+signature. In the state of feebleness to which he had for some months
+past fallen, much time was frequently lost before he could be made to
+understand the questions referred to him. Moreover, orders of D'Aubusson
+could be appealed against, his views thwarted, and his authority
+questioned; and it was therefore felt that, much as they all respected
+the old grand master, it would be an advantage to the Order when the
+supreme authority passed into the hands of D'Aubusson.
+
+Four days after the return of the expedition Orsini died. A few hours
+later the grand council was convened, and D'Aubusson unanimously
+elected grand master of the Order. The ceremony of the funeral of his
+predecessor was an imposing one. Every knight of the Order in Rhodes was
+present, together with a number of the leading natives of the Island;
+and although Gervaise had, since his arrival on the Island, seen many
+stately ceremonies, this far surpassed anything he had previously
+beheld.
+
+Gervaise had, at one of his first interviews with D'Aubusson after his
+arrival at the Island, been advised by him to acquire some knowledge of
+Turkish.
+
+“There are but few knights of the Order who speak the language,” he
+said. “As a rule, while young men are ready to devote any amount of time
+to acquiring dexterity in all martial exercises, they will bestow no
+labour in obtaining knowledge that may be fully as useful to them as
+skill in arms. In our dealings with the Turks, one or other party has
+to employ an interpreter, and it is often by no means certain that these
+men convey the full meaning of the speeches they translate. Again, we
+have large numbers of Turkish slaves, and it is highly to be desired
+that the knights should be able to give their orders to these men in
+their own language. Lastly, a knight who has been taken prisoner by the
+Turks--and even the bravest might meet with such a misfortune--would
+find it an alleviation of his lot, and might be able to plan and carry
+out his escape, did he speak Turkish well. I should strongly counsel you
+to acquire a knowledge of the tongue.”
+
+Gervaise had intended to follow the advice of the grand prior, but the
+duties of his office as page, and the time required for his military
+exercises and his studies with the chaplain, had rendered it well nigh
+impossible, during the first three years, to turn his attention to
+learning Turkish. As soon as his pageship was at an end, and he found
+that his duties included supervision of Turkish slaves, he felt the want
+of a knowledge of the language, and from that time devoted an hour a day
+to its study, employing one of the servants of the auberge, who was a
+man of rank and education at home, to instruct him.
+
+While he conscientiously spent this amount of time at the work, it was
+the most disagreeable portion of this day's labour. The events, however,
+that had taken place during the expedition had impressed him greatly
+with the utility of a knowledge of Turkish, for had it not been for Sir
+John Boswell's possessing some acquaintance with the language, it would
+have been impossible to communicate with the rowers of their boat, or
+to have arranged the plan by which they had escaped the pirates. He had
+then and there determined that as soon as he returned to Rhodes he would
+take the matter up in a very different spirit to that in which he before
+approached it. He had on the way home spoken to Sir John, who had highly
+approved of the determination.
+
+“I myself, when I was a young knight of eighteen, was taken captive,
+twenty-six years ago, at the time when the Egyptian fleet appeared
+before Rhodes. Our galleys advanced to attack them, but under cover of
+night they retired, and proceeding to the mainland took shelter under
+the guns of a Turkish fort. We attacked them there; it was a desperate
+engagement, but without any decisive advantage on either side. We lost
+no less than sixty knights, the Egyptians seven hundred men; and their
+fleet returned to Egypt. I and three others who were left wounded on the
+deck of one of their ships we had boarded, but failed to capture, were
+carried to Egypt, and remained there captive for six months, when we
+were ransomed by the Order.
+
+“During that time I learnt enough of their language, which is akin to
+Turkish, to be able to make myself understood and to understand what was
+said to me. I have kept up that much for intercourse with the slaves
+and servants at Rhodes, and have found it very useful. I consider, then,
+that you will do well to acquire their tongue; it will be useful not
+only to yourself, but to others, and when we get back I will, if you
+like, ask the bailiff to free you from all duty in order that you may
+devote yourself to it.”
+
+The head of the langue at once granted Sir John's request.
+
+“I would,” he said, “that more of our young knights would give a portion
+of their time to study; but most of them look to returning home when
+their term of service here has expired. Many think only of amusement,
+and all imagine that advancement is best achieved by valour. Tresham has
+already distinguished himself very greatly; so much so, that I think
+it would be well if he did not go on another expedition for a time, but
+stayed here while others have the opportunity of doing the same. Were we
+to send him out with the next galleys that start, I should be accused of
+favouritism, and the lad, who is now deservedly popular with all, would
+be regarded with envy, and possibly even with dislike.
+
+“At the same time, after what he has done I should have difficulty in
+refusing, were he to volunteer to sail in the next galley that sets out.
+The desire, then, on his part to learn Turkish is in all ways opportune.
+It will, too, in the long run be of great advantage to him in the Order,
+will give him weight, and bring him into prominence. I do not think
+there are six in the Order who can fairly translate a Turkish document;
+there are but two who could write a reply in the same language. Inform
+him, then, that from the present time he will be excused from all work,
+except, of course, to join in ceremonials when all are required to be
+present; and if you, Sir John, will pick out from among the servitors
+here one who is well instructed and educated, and capable of writing as
+well as reading his language, I will similarly relieve him of all other
+work, and place him at the disposal of young Tresham. Tell the lad that
+I hope he will persevere until he obtains a complete knowledge of the
+tongue. You can mention to him what I have said as to my opinion of the
+advantage the knowledge of it will be to him in the Order.”
+
+Gervaise accordingly devoted himself to study. His instructor was a Turk
+of fine presence. He had been a large landowner in Syria, and held
+a high official position in the province, but had been captured in a
+galley on his way to Constantinople, whither he was proceeding on an
+official mission. He was delighted with his new post. Gervaise, both as
+the youngest member of the community, and from the kind manner in
+which he always spoke to the servants,--all of whom had acquired some
+knowledge of English,--was a general favourite among them, and the Turk
+was glad that he was to be thrown with him. Still more he rejoiced at
+being appointed his instructor, as it relieved him from all menial work
+which, although preferable to that to which the bulk of the slaves were
+condemned, yet galled his spirit infinitely.
+
+Now that he had entered upon the work with the approbation of his
+superior, and a conviction of its great utility, Gervaise set to work
+with the same zeal and ardour which he had exhibited in his military
+exercises. During the heat of the day he sat in the shade reading and
+writing with his instructor. In the cool of the morning and afternoon
+he walked with him on the walls, or in the country beyond them. After
+sunset he sat with him in an unfrequented corner of the roof, all the
+time conversing with him, either of his own country, or that of his
+instructor.
+
+At first this was difficult, and he had to eke out the Turkish words
+he had acquired with English; but it was not long before there was no
+necessity for this. His intercourse for ten or twelve hours a day with
+this Turk, and the pains taken by his instructor, caused him to acquire
+the language with extreme rapidity. Of course, he had to put up with
+a great deal of banter from the younger knights upon his passion for
+study. Sometimes they pretended that his mania, as they considered it,
+arose from the fact that he was determined to become a renegade, and was
+fitting himself for a high position in the Turkish army. At other times
+they insisted that his intention was to become a Turkish dervish, or to
+win a great Turkish heiress and settle in Syria. But as he always bore
+their banter good temperedly, and was ready occasionally to join them in
+the sport when assaults-at-arms were carried on, they soon became tired
+of making fun of him.
+
+After nine months' constant work, the young knight's studies were
+abruptly stopped by the receipt of a letter from the Pasha of Syria,
+offering a considerable sum for the ransom of his instructor. The
+request was at once acceded to, as it was the policy of the knights to
+accept ransoms for their prisoners, both because the sums so gained
+were useful, and because they were themselves compelled sometimes to pay
+ransom for members of the Order. Suleiman Ali was, it was arranged, to
+be put on board an Egyptian craft bound for Acre, a safe conduct having
+been sent for the vessel and her crew, and for a knight, who was to
+receive the ransom from the pasha.
+
+“At any rate, Sir Gervaise,” the Turk said, when the young knight
+expressed great regret at his leaving them, “our position as instructor
+and pupil would have come to an end shortly. For the last three months
+there has been but little teaching between us; we have talked, and that
+has been all, save that for a short time each day you read and wrote.
+But there has been little to teach. You speak the native language now
+as fluently as I do, and would pass anywhere as a Syrian, especially
+as there are slight differences of speech in the various provinces. I
+believe that in Syria you would not be suspected of being anything but
+a native, and assuredly you would be taken for a Syrian elsewhere.
+You have learnt enough, and it would be but a waste of time for you, a
+knight and a soldier, to spend another day in study.”
+
+On the following day Gervaise was, to his surprise, sent for by the
+grand master. Except on the occasion of a few public ceremonies, he
+had not seen D'Aubusson since he had been elected to his present
+high dignity, and the summons to attend at the palace therefore came
+unexpectedly.
+
+“We have become quite strangers, Tresham,” the grand master said
+cordially when he entered. “I have not forgotten you, and have several
+times questioned your bailiff concerning you. He tells me that you
+have become quite an anchorite, and that, save at your meals and for an
+occasional bout-at-arms, you are seldom to be seen. I was glad to
+hear of your devotion to study, and thought it better to leave you
+undisturbed at it. Yesterday evening I sent for your instructor. He is
+a man of influence in Syria, and I wished to learn how he was affected
+towards us, now that he is about to return there. We talked for some
+time, and I then asked him what progress you had made, and was surprised
+and pleased to find that in his opinion you could pass anywhere as a
+native, and that you were perfectly capable of drawing up and writing
+any document I might desire to send to the sultan or any of his
+generals. This is far more than I had expected, and shows how earnestly
+you must have worked. Your knowledge may prove of much assistance to the
+Order, and believe me, the time you have spent in acquiring it may prove
+of much greater advantage to you in your career than if you had occupied
+it in performing even the most valiant deeds, and that at some future
+time it will ensure your appointment to a responsible office here. It
+was partly to assure you of my approbation that I sent for you, partly
+to inform you that I have appointed you to proceed with Suleiman Ali as
+the knight in charge of the vessel, and to receive the ransom agreed on,
+upon your handing him over. The office is an honourable one and one of
+trust, and it is the first fruits of the advantages you will gain by
+your knowledge of Turkish. No, do not thank me. I am selecting you
+because you are better fitted than any knight I can spare for the
+mission, and also, I may say, because the choice will be pleasing
+to Suleiman Ali, whose goodwill I am desirous of gaining. Before now
+Turkish provinces have thrown off their allegiance to the sultan. They
+have, I must admit, been usually reconquered, but such might not be
+always the case; and if such an event happened in Syria, this man's
+influence and goodwill might be of great advantage to us, as it might
+well suit us to ally ourselves with Syria against Constantinople. I am
+glad to say that I found him at least as well disposed as any man could
+be who had been some years in slavery. He admitted that, for a slave,
+he had been kindly and gently treated, and added that any unpleasant
+memories he might have retained had been obliterated by the nine months
+of pleasant companionship spent with you.”
+
+When Gervaise returned to dinner at the auberge, and informed Ralph
+Harcourt and the other young knights that he had been appointed to take
+charge of the vessel in which Suleiman Ali was to be conveyed to
+Acre, the statement was at first received with incredulity. It seemed
+incredible that the youngest knight in the langue should be chosen for
+such a mission, involving as it did a separate command. Even the older
+knights, when the news was passed down the table, were surprised.
+
+“I must say that I am astonished at the grand master's choice. Sir
+Gervaise Tresham doubtless distinguished himself greatly some months
+since, but from that time he has not been out with the galleys, or,
+indeed, done anything that would seem to recommend him for so marked a
+favour as a separate command.”
+
+“I don't know, Wingate,” Sir John Boswell said. “It seems to me that
+when a young knight of seventeen eschews all pleasure, refrains from
+volunteering for service at sea, and spends his whole time in study, he
+does distinguish himself, and that very greatly. Of the three or four
+hundred young knights here I doubt if one other would have so acted.
+Certainly, none to my knowledge have done so. Yet I do not suppose
+that D'Aubusson selected him for this duty as a reward for so much self
+denial and study, but because by that self denial and study he is more
+fitted for it than any of us here, save some three or four knights in
+the other langues, all of whom are in too high a position to be employed
+in so unimportant a duty. He can speak Turkish--not a few score of
+words and sentences such as I can, but, as Suleiman Ali tells me, like a
+native. Were one of us chosen for this mission, it would be necessary to
+send an interpreter with him; and every one knows how hard it is to do
+business in that manner. It seems to me that the grand master has acted
+wisely in putting aside all question of seniority, and employing the
+knight who is better suited than any other for it.”
+
+“You are right, Boswell,” the bailiff said. “I really have been
+astonished at the manner in which Tresham has given himself up to study.
+It would have been a natural thing had he, after gaining so much credit,
+been anxious and eager to gain more. When you spoke to me about his
+determination to learn Turkish, I thought he would speedily tire of it,
+and that when the next galley sailed, his name would be among the list
+of volunteers for the service. I am sure, comrades, that there are few,
+if any, among us who would not infinitely prefer fighting the Moslems
+to spending our whole time in learning their language; and I for one
+consider the fact that he has for nine months laboured so incessantly
+and assiduously that he has come, as Boswell says, to speak it like
+a native, is even more to his credit than the deed for which he was
+knighted.”
+
+This conversation took place at the upper end of the table, and was not
+heard at the lower end where the younger knights were seated.
+
+“I am not chosen from favour,” Gervaise said hotly, to one of his
+companions who had asserted that this was so. “I am simply chosen
+because I can speak Turkish.”
+
+“How much Turkish can you speak?” one of them laughed. Gervaise turned
+to the Turkish servant behind them, and said, in his language, “Hassan,
+Sir Giles Trevor wishes to know how well I speak Turkish. You have heard
+me talking with Suleiman Ali. Will you give him your opinion about it?”
+
+The man turned gravely to Sir Giles Trevor.
+
+“My lord,” he said, in English, “Sir Gervaise Tresham, he speaks Turkish
+same as I do. If he dress up in Turk clothes I suppose him Turk, not
+know he Christian by his speech.”
+
+Exclamations of surprise broke from the young knights.
+
+“Well, you have earned the appointment, Tresham,” Ralph Harcourt said
+heartily. “You always told me when I asked you that you were getting on,
+but I had not the least idea that you were getting on like this. And can
+you read and write the Turkish language?”
+
+“Well enough for practical purposes, Ralph. At any rate, I wrote a
+complimentary letter this morning from the grand master to the governor
+of Syria, and the bailiff of Spain, who was, as you know, for ten years
+a prisoner among the Turks, read it through at D'Aubusson's request,
+to see that there was no error in it, and was good enough to pass it
+without alteration.”
+
+“I would give a good deal,” Sir Giles Trevor said, “if I could follow
+your example, and shut myself up for nine months with an infidel to
+study his language; but I could not do it if my life depended on it. I
+should throw myself off the wall at the end of the first fortnight.”
+
+“I don't pretend that I can do what Tresham has done,” Ralph Harcourt
+said. “I always hated our lessons with the chaplain, who gave me the
+character of having the thickest head of any of his pupils; but I
+vow”--and he kissed the handle of his dagger--“I will spend half an hour
+a day in trying to learn something of Turkish. Of course, I know that
+such time will not be enough to learn a great deal; but if one could get
+up just enough to be able to give orders to the slaves, to question
+the captain of a vessel one has captured, and to make them understand
+a little, if by bad luck one fell into their hands, it would be quite
+enough for me. I am sure sometimes one is quite at a loss how to pass
+the hours when the sun is at its hottest, and if one tried one ought to
+be able to pick up a little without much trouble. Look at the servants;
+there is not one of them but speaks a little English. And if an infidel
+can learn enough English to get on with, without any regular study, I
+can't see why we shouldn't be able to learn enough Turkish in the same
+way.”
+
+Two or three of the other young knights declared that they too would
+devote a short time during the heat of the day to learning Turkish, and
+they agreed to begin together forthwith with one of the servants, who
+spoke English most fluently. Robert Rivers was not present, for he had
+returned to England six months before, to take up his residence at the
+House in Clerkenwell, in order that he might bring to bear the interest
+of his many powerful friends to secure for him an appointment as
+commander of one of the estates of the Order in England. His departure
+had caused general satisfaction among the other knights, whom his
+arrogance and ill temper had frequently irritated. Gervaise especially
+was glad at his leaving the Island, for after he received the honour
+of knighthood, Rivers made a point of always addressing him with an
+affectation of deference and respect that often tried his temper to the
+utmost.
+
+“It is well that Rivers has gone,” Ralph said, laughing, “for I don't
+know how he would have supported the chagrin your appointment would have
+given him. He was devoured with jealousy as it was, but this would have
+been a trial beyond bearing.”
+
+“I am heartily glad he has gone,” Gervaise said gravely. “I have put up
+with a great deal from him, but I don't think I could have stood much
+more. If our vows had not forbidden our fighting I should have called
+him to account long ago; but the only thing else to do was for me
+to lodge a formal complaint before the bailiff, of his continually
+offensive bearing and manner, which I could not bring myself to do, and
+indeed there was no special matter that would have seemed to justify me,
+no single speech that in itself would warrant such grave action on my
+part. I used to wish over and over again that we could but meet in some
+quiet spot in England, both unarmed, and could there settle the matter
+in good English fashion, with our fists, or even with a couple of
+quarterstaffs.”
+
+The others laughed.
+
+“That would be a very unknightly form of contest.”
+
+“I care not for that,” Gervaise replied. “It would be a very
+satisfactory one anyhow, and quite serious enough for the occasion. His
+sneers and petty insults were not sufficient to justify the drawing of
+blood, and there has been enough of that shed for the last twenty years
+in England without two brother knights betaking themselves to their
+swords against each other. But a sound thrashing would have done neither
+of us harm, and if it had fallen to his lot to get the largest share of
+it, it might have done him some good.”
+
+“He thinks he is sure of an appointment,” one of the others said, “but
+he has been so frequently in trouble here that it is likely that the
+official report, which is always sent home to the grand prior when the
+knights return to England, will be so unfavourable that even the most
+powerful influence will fail to obtain him a post. If so, we may have
+him back here again, especially if the Turks carry out their threat of
+assailing us, for an appeal will be made to all the grand priors for
+knights to aid in the defence.”
+
+That evening Gervaise went again to the palace to receive final
+instructions.
+
+“The craft in which you are to travel is an Egyptian trader. As at
+present war has not been formally declared between us and the sultan,
+peaceful traders, as you know, carry on their avocations unmolested
+either by the warships of the Turks or by ours; they do not enter our
+ports without a special permit, and the crews are never allowed to land,
+in order that no detailed account of our fortifications may be taken
+to the sultan. Moreover, brawls might arise between them and the native
+population, or they might aid slaves to escape. However, you will be
+altogether safe from interference from Turkish war vessels, and if
+overhauled by one of them the safe conduct will be sufficient to prevent
+interference with you. But it is not so with pirates. They will plunder
+their own countrymen as readily as they will Christians, and the safe
+guard of the governor of Syria will be of no use whatever to you. In
+this consists the danger of your mission. I cannot send one of our war
+galleys on such an errand, and if there are not enough knights on board
+to beat off any pirate, the fewer there are the better. I hear that
+the craft is a fast sailor, and as the crew will be as anxious to avoid
+pirates as you, they will do their best to escape. I leave it to you to
+take any route. You can either sail hence direct for Acre, or you can
+coast along the shores of Anatolia and Syria, lying up at night in bays.
+
+“Should you be overtaken I do not think it would be of any use for you
+to disguise yourself, for some of the crew would be sure to denounce
+you. Should the worst happen, and you are captured by pirates, you will
+of course in the first place show them your safe conduct, and if I find
+that you do not return I shall send at once to the governor of Syria,
+complaining of your capture when furnished with his safeguard, and
+requesting him to order a search for you to be made at every port on the
+coast, with instructions that you are to be at once released, and either
+sent to him for return hither, or placed on board a craft bound for any
+Christian port; while you, on your part, will endeavour to acquaint
+the Turkish authorities with the fact that you have been seized while
+travelling with a safe conduct from the governor of Syria.
+
+“But, more than from any efforts on your part or mine, I rely upon
+Suleiman Ali, who will, I am sure, as soon as he is set on shore, lose
+no time in acquainting the pasha of your capture, and in calling upon
+him to interfere in your favour. In that case, the worst that could
+befall you would be a temporary detention, unless, indeed, the pirates
+should take you to Egypt. As that country is friendly with us at
+present, since Egypt dreads the ever increasing power of the Turks, it
+will be but a question of ransom, for I have secret agents there who
+will inform me without delay of the arrival of a Christian captive.”
+
+“I understand, sir, and will do my best in the matter. If I am captured
+I trust that an opportunity of escape will soon present itself, for I
+should, if taken, conceal from my captors the fact that I understand
+their language, and should thus, if I could evade my guard, have every
+chance of escaping, as in a native dress I could meet and converse with
+those hunting for me, without their having a suspicion of my being the
+white slave for whom they were in search.”
+
+“Once at Acre you will be safe. But do not land unless it is absolutely
+necessary, for you might fall a victim to the fanaticism of its
+inhabitants, and no knight has ever set foot on shore there since the
+ill fated day when the Moslems wrested it from us, bathed the ruined
+walls with the best blood of our Order and the Templars', and destroyed
+the last hope of our ever recovering the Holy Sepulchre.”
+
+The next morning at daybreak Gervaise and Suleiman Ali went on board the
+Egyptian trader, and sailed for Acre. The current of opinion had changed
+at the auberge when the knights came to think over the mission on which
+Gervaise was about to start, and the slight feeling of jealousy with
+which the younger knights had received the news was entirely dissipated.
+While it did not seem to them that there was any chance of his
+distinguishing himself, they perceived, as they thought it over, the
+considerable danger there was of capture by pirates, and Ralph and some
+of his companions came down to the mole to see him off, with feelings in
+which envy bore no part whatever.
+
+“I see now, Gervaise, that it is truly no holiday excursion on which you
+are starting. I should envy you greatly were you going in command of an
+armed galley, prepared to beat off any craft that might try to overhaul
+you; but, going alone as you are, it is a very different thing. Should
+pirates meet you, you could offer no resistance, and your position would
+be a perilous one indeed. However, I think you are born to good luck,
+and am confident that your patron saint will look after you, and
+therefore expect to see you back here in a fortnight's time at the
+outside.”
+
+“I hope so with all my heart, Ralph. It will be no fault of mine if I
+tarry.”
+
+“Will you keep the open sea, or skirt the land, Tresham?” one of the
+others asked.
+
+“I shall keep the open sea. The grand master left me to choose my
+course; but I think there is more danger by the coast--where pirates may
+be hiding in unfrequented bays, in readiness to pounce upon a passing
+craft--than in the open sea, where we should have at least the advantage
+that we could not be taken by surprise, and might make a race of it. But
+the sun will be up in a few minutes, and my orders were to set out at
+sunrise, so I must say goodbye at once.”
+
+As soon as the vessel was under way, Gervaise took a seat on the poop by
+the side of Suleiman Ali, and related to him the conversation he had had
+with the grand master.
+
+“The risk that you will run has not escaped me,” the Turk said, “and
+indeed, I now regret that you were chosen as my escort. I almost wish
+that my son had not purchased my freedom at the present time, since it
+involves the risk of you losing yours. There is no doubt that the sea
+swarms with pirates; the sultan is too busy with his own struggles for
+Empire to bestow any attention upon so small a matter. The pashas and
+the officers of the ports have not the power, even had they the will,
+to put down piracy in their districts, and indeed are, as often as not,
+participators in the spoils. Your Order, which, years back, scoured the
+seas so hotly that piracy well nigh ceased, have now for forty years
+been obliged to turn their attention chiefly to their own defence. They
+possess a comparatively small fleet of galleys, and their wealth is
+expended on their fortress.
+
+“What with Egypt and the sultan their hands are too full for them to act
+as the police of the sea, and the consequence is that from every port,
+bay, and inlet, pirate craft set out--some mere rowboats, some, like
+those under the command of Hassan Ali, veritable fleets. Thus the
+humblest coasters and the largest merchant craft go alike in fear of
+them, and I would that the sultan and Egypt and your Order would for two
+or three years put aside their differences, and confine their efforts to
+sweeping the seas of these pests, to storming their strongholds, and to
+inflicting such punishment upon them as that, for a very long time to
+come, peaceful merchants might carry on their trade without fear.
+
+“I heard you tell the captain that he was to steer straight for Acre,
+and I think you are right in avoiding the coast, where the most harmless
+looking fishing boat may carry a crowd of pirates hidden in her hold. At
+the same time, if you will take my advice you will head much more to
+the south, so as to be out of the regular track of ships making from
+Constantinople or the islands to Acre. You may meet pirates anywhere,
+but they are assuredly thicker along the more frequented routes. The
+safest plan of all would probably be to bear south, and strike the
+Egyptian coast well to the east of the mouth of the Nile. Thence, till
+you get to Palestine, the country is utterly barren and uninhabited,
+while, running up the coast to Palestine, there are, save at Jaffa, no
+ports to speak of until you arrive at Acre; and besides, the inhabitants
+there, even if pirates, would not venture to disregard the pasha's
+safe conduct. I do not by any means say that such a course would be
+absolutely safe. You may meet with vessels on your way south, and
+doubtless some of them cruise off the barren coast I speak of, to
+intercept traders to and from Egypt and Acre, and other Syrian ports;
+for the trade carried on is considerable, and, although of the same
+religion, the Turks are disposed to view the Egyptians as enemies rather
+than as friends, and would have even less hesitation in plundering them
+than in robbing their own countrymen.”
+
+“I think that your suggestion is a good one, and will follow it, at any
+rate. The course is a good deal longer, but that is comparatively of
+little moment. The great thing is to carry you safely to Acre.”
+
+“And to get back with equal safety,” Suleiman said, with a smile.
+
+“That is quite as important in my eyes; in fact, of the two, I would far
+rather that we were captured on our voyage thither, for in that case I
+might be able to arrange for the ransom of both of us.”
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII AN EVENING AT RHODES
+
+
+Suleiman Ali's advice was carried out. It added considerably to the
+length of the voyage; but they saw only one doubtful craft. She was
+lying close inshore under the shadow of the sand hills, and they did
+not see her until she hoisted her sails and shot out from the land. They
+were, however, three miles distant from the land at the time, and the
+wind was blowing from the north; consequently the pirate was dead to
+leeward. Every sail was set at once on board the trader, and, being a
+fast sailor, she maintained her position until nightfall. The wind then
+dropped, and just as the light faded they could see that the vessel
+behind them had put out her sweeps. The trader kept up her sails until
+certain that she could be no longer seen; then the canvas was lowered,
+and the crew took to the boats and towed her due north.
+
+The night was fortunately a dark one, and those watching anxiously from
+the deck of the trader were unable to discern her pursuer as she passed
+behind them. As soon as they were well assured that she must have
+gone on, the boats were got in, the sails hoisted again, and, taking
+advantage of every light flaw of wind, they proceeded on their course.
+In the morning the sails of the galley could be seen on the horizon, but
+the distance was too great for her to take up the pursuit again with any
+chance of success, and the trader continued her course to Acre without
+seeing more of her.
+
+As soon as the trader entered the port, the Egyptian captain went on
+shore, taking with him a copy of the safe conduct and the letter from
+the grand master to the pasha. Going to the residence of the governor,
+he handed these to him, saying that he had on board Aga Suleiman Ali,
+and a knight who was charged to deliver him up on payment of the ransom.
+
+“I have been expecting you,” the governor said. “I have received a
+letter from the pasha, stating that he had written to the grand master
+respecting the ransom of the aga, and sending me the amount which
+Suleiman's son had offered. The young man was not of age when his father
+was captured, but he is so now, and was therefore able to raise the
+sum required. I will go down to the port with you myself, hand over
+the ransom, and welcome Suleiman, whom I know well, back from his
+captivity.”
+
+The transfer was speedily made; a heavy purse was handed to Gervaise,
+and Suleiman was a free man.
+
+“Send me word, if you can, when you return to Rhodes,” the latter said,
+as he bade farewell to the young knight. “I shall be anxious until I
+hear. Fortune was with us as we sailed hither, but it may desert you
+on your return. Should aught befall you, tell your captors that if they
+bring you to me I will pay any ransom that they could, in fairness,
+require. Should they refuse to do this, send, if possible, a messenger
+to me, and on receipt of your message I will send a trusty man to
+purchase your freedom. You have treated me as a friend and an equal, and
+a friend I shall always remain.”
+
+The vessel was to remain four days in port, to discharge her cargo and
+take in another, and Suleiman had talked of remaining at Acre until she
+sailed, but Gervaise protested strongly against this.
+
+“You have your family, from whom you have been so long separated,
+awaiting your return with anxiety, and I pray you to make no stay on my
+account. I am well content to remain on board here, and to look at the
+city which has so often been the theatre of great deeds--which Richard
+the Lion Heart captured, and which so many of the Hospitallers died to
+defend. I was charged by the grand master not to land, and indeed I feel
+myself that it would be an act of folly to do so. There are doubtless
+many on shore who have relatives and friends now working as slaves among
+us, and some of these might well seek to avenge them by slaying one of
+the Order. I feel your kindness, but it would be a pain to me to know
+that you were lingering here on my account, when you must be longing to
+embrace your children.”
+
+The four days passed rapidly. Gervaise had, at the suggestion of the
+governor, laid aside the mantle and insignia of the Order.
+
+“If you do not do so,” he said, “I must place a strong guard of soldiers
+on board, in order to ensure that the pasha's safeguard is not violated.
+Sailors are a turbulent race, and were you recognised here they might
+make a tumult, and slay you before a word of what was going on reached
+me. In any case I shall place two soldiers on board until you leave the
+port.”
+
+On the morning of the fifth day the sails were got up, and the vessel
+sailed out from the port. Fortune again favoured them, and they reached
+Rhodes without any adventure. Gervaise went at once to the palace, and
+handed over the purse of gold to the treasurer. He then sent up his name
+to the grand master, and was immediately conducted to his room.
+
+“I am glad to see you back, Tresham. I have been uneasy about you. Have
+you fulfilled your mission without adventure?”
+
+“Without any adventure, sir, save that we were once chased by a pirate
+on our way east, but escaped in the darkness. Save for that, the voyage
+has been wholly uneventful. I have received the ransom, and handed the
+purse to your treasurer.”
+
+“I am glad that your first command has turned out so well. I will see
+that you do not lack employment; and the fact that you are able to act
+as interpreter will ensure you a welcome on any galley. At present,
+however, it is not my intention to send out many cruisers. Every life
+now is precious, and no amount of spoil that can be brought in will
+counter balance the loss of those who fall. However, I may find some
+mission on which you can be employed. I know that you love an active
+life; and as, for nine months, you have put a rein on your inclinations,
+and have devoted yourself wholly to study, so that you might be of
+greater use to the Order, you have a good right to any employment in
+which your knowledge can be utilised.”
+
+On his arrival at the auberge, Gervaise was very heartily greeted by the
+younger knights.
+
+“I told you you were born lucky, Gervaise,” Ralph Harcourt said. “There
+has been more than one wager made that you would be captured; but I,
+for my part, was confident that your good fortune would not desert you.
+Still, though not surprised, we are delighted to see you again. Now tell
+us about your voyage.”
+
+Gervaise gave a brief account of the adventure with the pirate, and then
+described the visit of the governor to the ship.
+
+“Did he say anything to you?”
+
+“He was courteous and solemn; just the sort of man you would fancy a
+Turkish governor should be. He looked a little surprised when I accosted
+him in Turkish, but asked no questions at the time, though I daresay he
+inquired afterwards of Suleiman how I came to speak the language. The
+only time he actually said anything was when he requested that I would
+not wear the mantle of the Order while in port, as sailors were a
+turbulent race, and it might lead to an attack upon me; and as he was
+responsible to the pasha that his safe conduct should be respected, it
+would be necessary, if I declined to follow his advice, to keep a strong
+body of soldiers on board. As this would have been a horrible nuisance,
+especially as I wanted to enjoy in quiet the view of the city, with its
+castle and walls, I acceded at once to his request, which seemed to me
+a reasonable one. He did send two soldiers on board, but they remained
+down in the waist, and did not interfere with my pleasure in any way.”
+
+“Next to Jerusalem, how I should like to see Acre!” Ralph Harcourt
+exclaimed. “It is, of all other cities, the most closely connected with
+our Order. We helped to win it, and we were the last to defend it.
+We have heard so much about the fortress, and it has been so often
+described to me, that I know the situation of every bastion--at least,
+as it was when we left it, though I know not what changes the Turks may
+since have made.”
+
+“That I know not, Ralph. Of course, I only saw the seafront, and it was
+upon the land side that the attack was made. We know that the breaches
+were all repaired long ago, and it is said that the place is stronger
+than ever. From the port all was solid and massive. It is indeed a grand
+and stately fortress. Here we have done all that was possible to make
+Rhodes impregnable, but nature did nothing for us; there nature has done
+everything, and the castle looks as if it could defy the assaults of an
+army, however large. And indeed, it was not wrested from us by force.
+The knights, when the city walls were stormed and the town filled with
+their foes fought their way down to the water's edge and embarked there,
+for they were reduced to a mere handful; and however strong a castle may
+be, it needs hands to defend it. Still, it well nigh moved me to tears
+to see the Turkish banner waving over it, and to think how many tens
+of thousands of Christian soldiers had died in the effort to retain the
+holy places, and had died in vain.”
+
+“I wonder whether the Turks will ever be forced to relinquish their hold
+of the holy places?”
+
+“Who can tell, Sir Giles?” the bailiff, who had come up to the group
+unobserved, said quietly. “Certainly not in our time--not until the
+Moslem power, which threatens not only us, but all Europe, has crumbled
+to dust. So long as Acre remains in their power there is no hope. I say
+not but that by a mighty effort of all Christendom, Palestine might be
+wrested from the infidels, as it was wrested before; but the past shows
+us that while men or nations can be stirred to enthusiasm for a time,
+the fire does not last long, and once again the faithful few would be
+overwhelmed by the odds that would be brought against them, while Europe
+looked on impassive, if not indifferent. No, knights; the utmost that
+can be hoped for, is that the tide of Moslem invasion westward may be
+stayed. At present we are the bulwark, and as long as the standard of
+our Order waves over Rhodes so long is Europe safe by sea. But I foresee
+that this cannot last: the strongest defences, the stoutest hearts,
+and the bravest of hearts, cannot in the long run prevail against
+overpowering numbers. As at Acre, we may repel assault after assault,
+we may cause army after army to betake themselves again to their ships;
+but, as a rock is overwhelmed by the rising tide, so must Rhodes succumb
+at last, if left by Europe to bear alone the brunt of Moslem invasion.
+All that men can do we shall do. As long as it is possible to resist,
+we shall resist. When further resistance becomes impossible, we shall, I
+trust, act as we did before.
+
+“We were driven from Palestine, only to fortify ourselves at Rhodes.
+If we are driven from Rhodes, we shall, I feel assured, find a home
+elsewhere, and again commence our labours. The nearer we are to Europe
+the more hope there is that Christendom will aid us, for they will more
+generally understand that our defeat would mean the laying open of the
+shores of the Mediterranean, from Turkey to Gibraltar, to the invasion
+of the Moslems. However, comrades, this is all in the future. Our share
+is but in the present, and I trust the flag of the Order will float over
+Rhodes as long, at least, as the lifetime of the youngest of us, and
+that we may bequeath the duty of upholding the Cross untarnished to
+those who come after us; and we can then leave the issue in God's
+hands.”
+
+All listened respectfully to the words of their leader, although his
+opinion fell like cold water upon the fiery zeal and high hopes of his
+hearers. The possibility of their losing Rhodes had never once entered
+into the minds of the majority of them. It was likely that ere long they
+might be called upon to stand a siege, but, acquainted as they were with
+the strength of the place--its deep and seemingly impassable moat, its
+massive walls, and protecting towers and bastions--it had seemed to them
+that Rhodes was capable of withstanding all assaults, however numerous
+the foe, however oft repeated the invasion. The bailiff was, as all
+knew, a man of dauntless courage, of wide experience and great judgment,
+and that he should believe that Rhodes would, although not in their
+time, inevitably fall, brought home to them for the first time the fact
+that their fortress was but an outpost of Europe, and one placed so
+distant from it that Christendom, in the hour of peril, might be unable
+to furnish them with aid. As the bailiff walked away, there was silence
+for a short time, and then Sir Giles Trevor said cheerfully, “Well, if
+it lasts our time we need not trouble our heads as to what will take
+place afterwards. As the bailiff says, our duty is with the present, and
+as we all mean to drive the Turks back when they come, I do not see that
+there is any occasion for us to take it to heart, even if it be fated
+that the Moslems shall one day walk over our tombs. If Christendom
+chooses to be supine, let Christendom suffer, say I. At any rate, I am
+not going to weep for what may take place after I am turned into dust.”
+
+“That sounds all very well, Sir Giles,” Ralph Harcourt said, “and I have
+no argument to advance against it, though I am sure there is much to be
+said; but if the bailiff, or the chaplain, or indeed any of the elders,
+had heard you say so, I have no doubt you would have had a fitting
+reply.”
+
+Sir Giles tossed his head mockingly. “I shall fight neither better nor
+worse, friend Harcourt, because it may be that someday the Moslems are,
+as the bailiff seems to think, destined to lord it here. I have only
+promised and vowed to do my best against the Moslems, and that vow only
+holds good as long as I am in the flesh; beyond that I have no concern.
+But what are we staying here for, wasting our time? It is the hour for
+those of us who are going, to be starting for the ball given by Signor
+Succhi; as he is one of the richest merchants in the town, it will be a
+gay one, and there is no lack of fair faces in Rhodes. It is a grievous
+pity that our elders all set their will against even the younger members
+of the community joining in a dance. It was not one of the things I
+swore to give up. However, here in Rhodes there is no flying in the face
+of rules.”
+
+Three or four of the other young knights were also going.
+
+“What are you thinking of doing, Gervaise?” Harcourt asked.
+
+“I have nothing particular to do, Ralph, except that, first of all, I
+must write a letter to Suleiman Ali and hand it to the bailiff, praying
+him to send it off by the first vessel that may put in here on her way
+to Acre. If I do not do it now it may be neglected, and I promised to
+write directly I got here. I will not be half an hour, and after that I
+shall be ready to do anything you like.”
+
+In less than that time, indeed, he rejoined Ralph. “Now what shall we
+do with ourselves? What do you say to a stroll through the streets? I am
+never tired of that.”
+
+“I like better to go by way of the roofs, Gervaise. The streets are
+badly lit, and although they are busy enough in some quarters, they are
+so narrow that one gets jostled and pushed. On the terraces everything
+is quiet. You have plenty of light and music, and it is pleasant to
+see families sitting together and enjoying themselves; and if one is
+disposed for a cup of wine or of cool sherbet, they are delighted to
+give it, for they all are pleased when one of us joins a group. I have
+quite a number of acquaintances I have made in this way while you have
+been working away at your Turkish.”
+
+“Very well,” Gervaise said. “If such is your fancy, Ralph, let us take
+one of the paths across the roofs. I might walk there twenty years by
+myself without making an acquaintance, and I do not pledge myself to
+join in these intimacies of yours. However, I shall be quite content to
+amuse myself by looking on at the scene in general, while you are paying
+your visits and drinking your sherbet.”
+
+“There are plenty of fair girls among the Rhodians,” Ralph said, with a
+smile; “and though we are pledged to celibacy we are in no way bound to
+abstain from admiration.”
+
+Gervaise laughed.
+
+“Admire as much as you like, Ralph, but do not expect me to do so. I
+have scarcely as much as spoken to a woman since I entered the House in
+London, and I should have no idea what to say to a young girl.”
+
+“But it is part of the education of a true knight to be courteous to
+women. It is one of the great duties of chivalry. And you must remember
+that we are secular knights, as well knights of the Order.”
+
+“The work of the Order is quite sufficient for me at present, Ralph. In
+time I may come to like the society of women, to admire their beauty,
+and possibly even to wear the colour of some one, for that seems to be
+the fashion; though why we, who are bound to celibacy, should admire one
+woman more than another I cannot understand.”
+
+They had by this time descended from the castle, and were taking their
+way along one of the broad paths that led over the flat roofs of the
+houses by means of the bridges thrown across the streets.
+
+“These are some acquaintances of mine,” Ralph said, stopping at one of
+the walls, some three feet high, that bordered the path.
+
+Beyond was an enclosure of some fifty feet square. Clumps of shrubs and
+flowers, surrounded by stonework some eight or ten inches high enclosing
+the earth in which they grew, were scattered here and there. Lamps were
+hung to cords stretched above it, while others were arranged among the
+flowers. In the centre a large carpet was spread, and on this some eight
+or ten persons were seated on cushions. A girl was playing a lute, and
+another singing to her accompaniment. She stopped abruptly when her eye
+fell upon the figures of the two young knights.
+
+“There is Sir Ralph Harcourt, father!” she exclaimed in Italian, which
+was the language most used on the Island, and spoken with more or less
+fluency by all the knights, among whom it served as a general medium of
+communication. “Are you waiting to be invited in, Sir Knight?” she
+went on saucily. “I thought that by this time you would know you were
+welcome.”
+
+“Your tongue runs too fast, child,” her father said, as he rose and
+walked across to Ralph. “You are welcome, Sir Ralph, very welcome. I
+pray you enter and join us.”
+
+“I will do so with pleasure, Signor Vrados, if you will also extend your
+hospitality to my friend Sir Gervaise Tresham.”
+
+“Most gladly,” the merchant said. “I pray him to enter.”
+
+The two knights passed through the gate in the wall. All rose to their
+feet as they went up to the carpet, and greeted Ralph with a warmth
+which showed that he was a favourite. He introduced Gervaise to them.
+
+“I wonder that I do not know your face, Sir Knight,” the merchant's
+wife said. “I thought I knew all the knights of the Order by sight, from
+seeing them either at the public ceremonies, or observing them pass in
+the streets.”
+
+“For the last nine months Sir Gervaise has been an anchorite. He has
+been learning Turkish, and has so devoted himself to the study that even
+I have scarce caught sight of him, save at meals. As for walking in the
+streets, it is the last thing he would think of doing. I consider myself
+a good and conscientious young knight, but I am as nothing in that
+respect to my friend. I used to look upon him as my little brother, for
+we were at the House of the Order in London together. He is four years
+younger than I am, and you know four years between boys makes an immense
+difference. Now the tables are turned, and I quite look up to him.”
+
+“You will believe as much as you like, Signora, of what Sir Ralph says,”
+ Gervaise laughed. “As you have, he says, known him for some time,
+you must by this time have learnt that his word is not to be taken
+literally.”
+
+“We learned that quite early in our acquaintance,” the girl who had
+first noticed them said, with an affectation of gravity. “I always tell
+him that I cannot believe anything he says, and I am grateful to you,
+Sir Knight, for having thus borne evidence to the quickness of my
+perception.”
+
+By this time the servants had brought some more cushions, and on these
+Ralph and Gervaise seated themselves. Wine, sherbet, and cakes, were
+then handed round. The master of the house placed Gervaise on his right
+hand, as a stranger.
+
+“You have been among our islands, Sir Gervaise? But indeed, I need not
+ask that, since I know that you and Sir Ralph were knighted together for
+your valour in that affair with the ships of Hassan Ali. We come from
+Lesbos. It is now eighty years since my family settled in Rhodes, and we
+have seen it grow from a small place to a great fortress.”
+
+“'Tis a wonderful place,” Gervaise said. “I know nothing of the
+fortresses of Europe, but it seems to me that no other can well be
+stronger than this--that is, among places with no natural advantages.”
+
+“The knights have always had an abundance of slaves,” the merchant said;
+“so many that they have not only had sufficient for their work here, but
+have been able to sell numbers to European potentates. Yes, Rhodes is
+wonderfully strong. That great fosse would seem as if it could defy the
+efforts of an army to cross; and yet the past has shown that even the
+strongest defences, held with the greatest bravery, can be carried by
+generals with immense armies, and careless how they sacrifice them so
+that they do but succeed. Look at Acre, for example.”
+
+“I was looking at it five days ago,” Gervaise said, “and thinking that
+it was beyond the might of man to take.”
+
+“Do you mean that you were at Acre?” the merchant asked, with surprise.
+
+“Yes. I went there to hand over a captive who had been ransomed. Of
+course I had a safe conduct, and I was glad indeed of the opportunity of
+seeing so famous a fortress.”
+
+“You were fortunate indeed, Sir Knight, and it was, if you will pardon
+my saying so, singular that so young a knight should have been chosen.
+Assuredly, even the senior knights of the Order would rejoice at the
+opportunity of beholding a fortress so intimately connected with the
+past history of the Order.”
+
+“It was due entirely to my being able to speak Turkish,” Gervaise said.
+“As my friend Sir Ralph was mentioning, I have been studying hard, and
+can now speak the language fluently; and as this was a necessity on
+such a mission, and the few knights who can so speak it are all in high
+office, and could hardly be asked to undertake so unimportant a service,
+I was selected.”
+
+“And you really speak Turkish well? It is an accomplishment that few,
+save Greeks subject to Turkey, possess. Do you intend, may I ask, to
+make Rhodes your home? I ask because I suppose you would not have taken
+this labour had you intended shortly to return to England.”
+
+“Yes; I hope to remain here permanently. I know that the first step
+towards promotion here is generally a commandery at home, but I did not
+enter the Order with any idea of gaining office or dignity. I desire
+simply to be a knight of the Cross, and to spend my life in doing
+faithful service to the Order.”
+
+“A worthy ambition indeed, and one that, so far as my experience goes,
+very few knights entertain. I see yearly scores of young knights depart,
+no small proportion of whom never place foot on Rhodes again, although
+doubtless many of them will hasten back again as soon as the danger of
+an assault from the Turks becomes imminent. You see, we who dwell here
+under the protection of the Order naturally talk over these things among
+ourselves; and although, in the matter of fortifications, all will admit
+that enormous efforts have been made to render the town secure, it is
+clear that in the matter of knights to defend them there is very much
+left to be desired. It is all very well to say that the knights from all
+parts of Europe would flock hither to defend it; but the journey would
+be a long one, and would occupy much time, and they would probably
+not receive news that the Turks had sailed until the place was already
+invested. Then it would be difficult, if not altogether impossible, for
+ships with reinforcements to make their way through the Turkish fleet,
+and to enter the port. To man the walls properly would need a force five
+times as numerous as that which is now here. I recognise the valour
+of your knights; they have accomplished wonders. But even they cannot
+accomplish impossibilities. For a time they could hold the walls; but
+as their number became reduced by the fire of the Turkish cannon and the
+battles at the breaches, they would at last be too weak any longer
+to repel the onslaughts of foes with an almost unlimited supply of
+soldiers.”
+
+“That is true enough,” Gervaise admitted; “and to my mind it is shocking
+that four-fifths at least of the Order, pledged to oppose the infidels,
+should be occupied with the inglorious work of looking after the manors
+and estates of the society throughout Europe, while one-fifth, at most,
+are here performing the duties to which all are sworn. Of the revenues
+of the estates themselves, a mere fraction finds its way hither. Still,
+I trust that the greater part of the knights will hasten here as soon as
+danger becomes imminent, without waiting for the news that the Turkish
+armament has actually set forth.”
+
+For an hour the two young knights remained on the roof, Gervaise talking
+quietly with the merchant, while his companion laughed and chatted with
+the ladies and friends of their host. After they had left, with the
+promise that it would not be long before they repeated their visit,
+Ralph bantered Gervaise on preferring the society of the merchant to
+that of his daughters.
+
+“I found him a pleasant and very well informed man, Ralph, and enjoyed
+my talk with him just as you enjoyed talking nonsense to his daughters
+and listening to their songs. Who was the man sitting next to the eldest
+daughter?”
+
+“He doesn't belong to Rhodes, but is a Greek from one of the islands,
+though I did not catch from which. I don't know whether he is a relative
+of the family, or a business connection of the merchant's, or a stranger
+who has brought a letter of introduction to him. Nothing was said on
+that head; why do you ask?”
+
+“I don't like the man's face; he is a handsome fellow, but has a crafty
+expression. He did not say much, but it seemed to me that at times, when
+he appeared to be sitting carelessly sipping his sherbet, he was really
+trying to listen to what Vrados was saying to me. He could not do
+so, for we were on the other side of the circle, and were speaking in
+somewhat low tones, while the rest of you were chatting and laughing.”
+
+“What should he want to listen for, most sapient knight?”
+
+“That I can't tell, Ralph; but I am certain that he was trying to
+listen.”
+
+“Well, as you were no doubt both talking more sensibly than most of us,”
+ Ralph laughed, “he certainly showed his discernment.”
+
+“I daresay I am wrong,” Gervaise said quietly; “but you know we have our
+spies at Constantinople, and probably the sultan has his spies here; and
+the idea occurred to me that perhaps this man might be one of them.”
+
+“Well, I am bound to say, Gervaise,” Ralph said, a little irritably,
+“I have never heard so grave an accusation brought on such insufficient
+evidence--or rather, as far as I can see, without a shadow of evidence
+of any kind. We drop in upon a man who is one of our most respected
+merchants, whose family has been established here many years, whose
+interests must be the same as those of the Order; and because a guest of
+his does not care to take any active part in my joking with the girls,
+and because you imagine that there is a cunning expression on his face,
+you must straightway take it into your head that he must be a spy.”
+
+“Excuse me, Ralph, I simply said that the idea occurred to me that he
+might be a spy, which is a very different thing to my accusing him of
+being one. I am ready to admit that the chances are infinitely greater
+that he is an honest trader or a relation of the merchant, and that his
+presence here is perfectly legitimate and natural, than that he should
+be a spy. Still, there is a chance, if it be but one out of a thousand,
+that he may be the latter. I don't think that I am at all of a
+suspicious nature, but I really should like to learn a little about
+this man. I do not mean that I am going to try to do so. It would be an
+unworthy action to pry into another's business, when it is no concern of
+one's own. Still, I should like to know why he is here.”
+
+Ralph shrugged his shoulders.
+
+“This comes of living the life of a hermit, Gervaise. Other people meet
+and talk, and enjoy what society there is in the city, without troubling
+their heads for a moment as to where people come from or what their
+business is here, still less whether they are spies. Such ideas do not
+so much as occur to them, and I must say that I think the sooner you
+fall into the ways of other people the better.”
+
+“There is no harm done,” Gervaise said composedly. “I am not thinking
+of asking our bailiff to order him to be arrested on suspicion. I only
+remarked that I did not like the man's face, nor the way in which, while
+he pretended to be thinking of nothing, he was trying to overhear what
+we were saying. I am quite willing to admit that I have made a mistake,
+not in devoting myself to Turkish, but in going to the merchant's with
+you this evening. I have had no experience whatever of what you call
+society, and, so far from it giving me pleasure to talk to strangers,
+especially to women, it seems to me that such talk is annoying to me,
+at any rate at present. When I get to your age, possibly my ideas may
+change. I don't for a moment wish to judge you or others; you apparently
+enjoy it, and it is a distraction from our serious work. I say simply
+that it is an amusement which I do not understand. You must remember
+that I entered the Order in consequence of a solemn vow of my dead
+father, that I regard the profession we make as a very serious one, and
+that my present intention is to devote my life entirely to the Order and
+to an active fulfilment of its vows.”
+
+“That is all right, Gervaise,” Ralph said good temperedly. “Only I think
+it would be a pity if you were to turn out a fanatic. Jerusalem and
+Palestine are lost, and you admit that there is really very little
+chance of our ever regaining them. Our duties, therefore, are changed,
+and we are now an army of knights, pledged to war against the infidels,
+in the same way as knights and nobles at home are ever ready to engage
+in a war with France. The vow of poverty is long since obsolete. Many of
+our chief officials are men of great wealth, and indeed, a grand master,
+or the bailiff of a langue, is expected to spend, and does spend, a sum
+vastly exceeding his allowance from the Order. The great body of knights
+are equally lax as to some of their other vows, and carry this to a
+length that, as you know, has caused grave scandal. But I see not that
+it is in any way incumbent on us to give up all the pleasures of life.
+We are a military Order, and are all ready to fight in defence of
+Rhodes, as in bygone days we were ready to fight in defence of the Holy
+Sepulchre. Kings and great nobles have endowed us with a large number of
+estates, in order to maintain us as an army against Islam; and as such
+we do our duty. But to affect asceticism is out of date and ridiculous.”
+
+“I have certainly no wish to be an ascetic, Ralph. I should have no
+objection to hold estates, if I had them to hold. But I think that at
+present, with the great danger hanging over us, it would be better
+if, in the first place, we were all to spend less time in idleness or
+amusement, and to devote all our energies to the cause. I mean not only
+by fighting when the time comes for fighting, but by endeavouring in
+every way to ward off danger.”
+
+“When I see danger, I will do my best to ward it off, Gervaise; but I
+cannot go about with my nose in the air, snuffing danger like a hunting
+dog in pursuit of game. At any rate, I will not bother you to accompany
+me on my visits in future.”
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX WITH THE GALLEY SLAVES
+
+
+Gervaise, on consideration, was obliged to own to himself that Ralph was
+right in saying that he had no ground whatever for suspicion against
+the Greek he had met at Signor Vrados's; and he could see no means of
+following the matter up. It would not, he felt, be honourable to go
+again to the merchant's house, and to avail himself of his hospitality,
+while watching his guest. He determined to dismiss the matter from
+his mind, and had, indeed, altogether done so when, a week later, it
+suddenly recurred to his memory.
+
+A party of slaves, under the escort of overseers and in charge of a
+knight who had been with them at their work on the fortifications, were
+passing along the street on their way back to barracks. It was already
+dusk, and as Gervaise was going the same way as they were, he stood
+aside in a doorway to let them pass. He was on the point of stepping out
+to follow them, when he saw a man, who had been standing in the shadow
+of the wall, fall in with their ranks, and, as he walked engaged in an
+earnest conversation with one of the slaves. He kept beside him for a
+hundred yards or so, then passed something into the slave's hand, and
+turned abruptly down a side opening. There were but few people about,
+and in the growing darkness the action of the man passed unobserved by
+the overseers. Gervaise, thinking the occurrence a strange one, turned
+down the same lane as the man.
+
+He slackened his pace until the latter was fifty yards ahead, so that he
+would not, had he looked round, have been able to perceive that it was
+a knight who was behind him. After passing through several streets, the
+man turned into a refreshment house. The door stood open, and as the
+place was brightly lit up, Gervaise, pausing outside, was able to see
+what was going on inside. The man he had followed was on the point
+of seating himself at one of the tables, and as he did so Gervaise
+recognised him as the Greek he had met at the merchant's house. He at
+once walked on a short distance, and then paused to think.
+
+The vague suspicions he had before entertained as to the man now
+recurred with double force; he was certainly in communication with one
+or more of the slaves, and such communication, so secretly effected,
+could be for no good purpose. So far, however, there was nothing he
+could tax the man with. He would probably deny altogether that he had
+spoken to any of the slaves, and Gervaise could not point out the one
+he had conversed with. At any rate, nothing could be done now, and he
+required time to think what steps he could take to follow up the matter.
+He resolved, however, to wait and follow the Greek when he came out.
+After a few minutes he again repassed the door, and saw that the man was
+engaged in earnest conversation with another. After considering for
+a time, Gervaise thought that it would be best for him to follow this
+other man when he left, and ascertain who he was, rather than to keep
+a watch on the movements of the Greek, who, as likely as not, would now
+return to the merchant's.
+
+He walked several times up and down the street, until at last he saw the
+two men issue out together. They stopped for a moment outside, and
+then, after exchanging a few words, separated, the Greek going in the
+direction of the quarter in which lay the house of Vrados, while the
+other walked towards Gervaise. The latter passed him carelessly, but
+when the man had gone nearly to the end of the street, he turned and
+followed him. He could see at once that he was a lay brother of the
+Order. This class consisted of men of an inferior social position to the
+knights; they filled many of the minor offices, but were not eligible
+for promotion. Following for ten minutes, Gervaise saw him approach one
+of the barracks, or prisons, occupied by the slaves. He knocked at the
+door, and, upon its being opened, at once entered.
+
+The matter had now assumed a much more serious aspect. This young Greek,
+a stranger to Rhodes, was in communication not only with some of the
+slaves, but with a prison official, and the matter appeared so grave to
+Gervaise that, after some deliberation, he thought it was too important
+for him to endeavour to follow out alone, and that it was necessary to
+lay it before the bailiff. Accordingly, after the evening meal he went
+up to Sir John Kendall, and asked if he could confer with him alone on
+a matter over which he was somewhat troubled. The bailiff assented at
+once, and Gervaise followed him to his private apartment.
+
+“Now, what is this matter, Sir Gervaise?” he asked pleasantly. “Nothing
+serious, I trust?”
+
+“I don't know, Sir John. That is a matter for your consideration; but
+it seems to me of such importance that it ought to be brought to your
+knowledge.”
+
+The face of the bailiff grew more grave, and, seating himself in a
+chair, he motioned to Gervaise to do the same.
+
+“Now, let me hear what it is,” he said.
+
+Gervaise told his story simply. A slight smile passed across the
+bailiff's face as he mentioned that he had met the Greek on the roof
+of the house of Signor Vrados, and had not liked the expression of his
+face.
+
+“Vrados has some fair daughters, has he not?” he asked.
+
+“Yes, sir; but I know little of them. That is the only visit that I ever
+paid there, or, indeed, to the house of any one in the town.”
+
+Sir John's face grew grave again as Gervaise recounted how he had seen
+the man enter into communication with a slave; and he frowned heavily
+when he heard of his meeting afterwards with one of the prison officers.
+
+“In truth, Sir Gervaise,” he said, after a pause, “this seems to be a
+right serious matter, and you have done wisely in informing me of what
+you have seen. Assuredly there is mischief of some sort in the wind. The
+question is how to get to the bottom of it. Of course, the grand master
+might order the arrest of this Greek and of the prison officer, but
+you may be sure that neither would commit himself unless torture were
+applied; and I, for one, have no belief in what any man says under such
+circumstances. The most honest man may own himself a traitor when racked
+with torture, and may denounce innocent men. It is at best a clumsy
+device. What think you of the matter?”
+
+“I have hardly thought it over yet, Sir John; and certainly no plan has
+yet occurred to me.”
+
+“Well, think it over, Sir Gervaise. It is not likely that a few days
+will make any difference. But I will take measures to see that this
+Greek does not sail away from the Island at present, and will speak to
+the port master about it. I will myself give the matter consideration,
+but as you have shown yourself so quick witted in following up the
+matter so far, I rely upon you more than myself to carry it farther.
+There may possibly be some simple explanation of the matter. He may come
+from an island where the Turks are masters, and has, perhaps, brought a
+message from some relatives of a slave; as to the talk with the prison
+officer, it may be wholly innocent. If we should find that it is so we
+will keep this matter to ourselves, if possible, or we shall get finely
+laughed at by our comrades for having run upon a false scent. If, on the
+other hand, the matter should turn out to be serious, you will assuredly
+get great credit for having discovered it. Therefore, turn it over in
+your mind tonight, and see if you can arrive at some scheme for seeing
+further into it before we take any steps.”
+
+In the morning Gervaise again called upon Sir John Kendall.
+
+“Well, Sir Gervaise, I hope that you have hit upon some scheme for
+getting to the bottom of this matter. I confess that I myself, though I
+have had a sleepless night over it, have not been able to see any
+method of getting to the root of the affair, save by the application of
+torture.”
+
+“I do not know whether the plan I have thought of will commend itself to
+your opinion, sir, but I have worked out a scheme which will, I think,
+enable us to get to the bottom of the matter. I believe that a galley is
+expected back from a cruise today or tomorrow. Now, sir, my idea is that
+I should go on board a small craft, under the command of a knight upon
+whose discretion and silence you can rely, such as, for example, Sir
+John Boswell, and that we should intercept the galley. Before we board
+her I should disguise myself as a Turkish slave, and as such Sir John
+should hand me over to the officer in command of the galley, giving him
+a letter of private instructions from you as to my disposal. If they
+have other slaves on board I would ask that I should be kept apart from
+them, as well as from the rowers of the galley. On being landed I should
+be sent to the prison where I saw the officer enter last night, and the
+slaves and rowers should be distributed among the other prisons. Thus,
+then, the slaves I should be placed with would only know that I had
+arrived in the galley with other slaves captured by it. I have no doubt
+I should be able to maintain my assumed character, and should in a short
+time be taken into the confidence of the others, and should learn what
+is going on. It would be well, of course, that none of the officials
+of the prison should be informed as to my true character, for others,
+besides the one I saw, may have been bribed to participate in whatever
+plot is going on.”
+
+“And do you mean to say, Sir Gervaise, that you, a knight of the Order,
+are willing to submit to the indignity of being treated as a slave? To
+keep up the disguise long enough to be taken into the confidence of the
+plotters, you might have to stay there for some time; and if the prison
+officials believe you to be but an ordinary slave, you will be put to
+work either on the walls or in one of the galleys.”
+
+“I am ready to do anything for the benefit of the Order, and the safety
+of Rhodes, that will meet with your approval,” Gervaise replied. “It
+will no doubt be unpleasant, but we did not enter the Order to do
+pleasant things, but to perform certain duties, and those duties
+necessarily involve a certain amount of sacrifice.”
+
+“Do you think you would be able to maintain the character? Because
+you must remember that if detected you might be torn in pieces by the
+slaves, before the officers could interfere to protect you.”
+
+“I feel sure that I can do so, Sir John.”
+
+“What story would you tell them?”
+
+“I would say that I had come from Syria, and sailed from Acre in a
+trader, which is perfectly true, and also that I was taken off the ship
+I was on by a galley--which would not be altogether false, as I crossed
+one as I landed. I think there would be very little questioning, for I
+should pretend to be in a state of sullen despair, and give such short
+answers to questions that I should soon be left alone.”
+
+“The scheme is a good one, Sir Gervaise, though full of danger and
+difficulty. If you are ready to render this great service to the Order,
+I willingly accept the sacrifice you offer to make. I will send one of
+my slaves down into the town to buy garments suitable for you, and also
+stains for your skin. It will, of course, be necessary for you to shave
+a portion of your head in Turkish fashion. I will also see Sir John
+Boswell, and ask him to arrange for a craft to be ready to start at
+noon. The galley is not expected in until evening, but of course she may
+arrive at any moment now. Come here again in an hour's time, and I will
+have the clothes ready for you.”
+
+“May I suggest, sir, that they should be those appropriate to a small
+merchant? This might seem to account for my not being placed with the
+other slaves who may be on board the galley, as it would be supposed
+that I was set apart in order that I should be sent to one of the
+auberges as a servant; and my afterwards being herded with the others
+would be explained by its being found that there was no opening for
+me in such a capacity. I should think there would be no difficulty in
+obtaining such a suit, as garments of all kinds are brought here in
+prizes, and are bought up by some of the Greek merchants, who afterwards
+find opportunities of despatching them by craft trading among the
+islands.”
+
+Just before noon Gervaise walked down to the port with Sir John Boswell,
+a servant following with a bundle.
+
+“It seems to me a hare brained scheme, lad,” Sir John, who had just
+joined him, said, as they issued from the auberge; “though I own, from
+what the bailiff tells me, that there must be some treacherous plot on
+hand, and when that is the case it is necessary that it should be probed
+to the bottom. But for a knight to go in the disguise of an infidel
+slave seems to me to be beyond all bounds.”
+
+“If one is ready to give one's life for the Order, Sir John, surely one
+need not mind a few weeks' inconvenience. I shall, at any rate, be no
+worse off than you were when serving as a Turkish slave.”
+
+“Well, no, I don't know that you will,” Sir John replied doubtfully.
+“But that was from necessity, and not from choice; and it is, moreover,
+an accident we are all exposed to.”
+
+“It is surely better to do a thing of one's own free will than because
+one is forced to do it, Sir John?”
+
+The knight was silent. He was a stout fighting man, but unused to
+argument.
+
+“Well,” he said, after a long pause, “I can only hope that it will turn
+out all right, and promise that if you are strangled in prison, I will
+see that every slave who had a hand in it shall be strung up. I have
+told Kendall frankly that if I were in his place I would not permit you
+to try such a venture. However, as I could think of no other plan by
+which there would be a chance of getting to the bottom of this matter,
+my words had no effect with him. I should not have so much cared if the
+officers of the gaol knew who you were; but I can see that if there is
+treachery at work this would defeat your object altogether. What do you
+suppose this rascal Greek can be intending?”
+
+“That I cannot say, Sir John. He may be trying to get an exact plan of
+the fortifications, or he may be arranging some plan of communication by
+which, in case of siege, news of our condition and of the state of our
+defences may be conveyed to the Turkish commander.”
+
+By this time they had reached the port, and embarked at once on a
+trading vessel belonging to one of the merchants, from whom Sir John
+had readily obtained her use for a day or two. Her sails were hoisted
+at once, and she rowed out from the port. Having proceeded some three
+or four miles, they lowered her sails, and lay to in the course a galley
+making for the port would take. A sailor was sent up to the masthead to
+keep a lookout. Late in the afternoon he called down that he could make
+out a black speck some twelve miles away. She carried no sails, and he
+judged her to be a galley.
+
+“It will be dark before she comes along,” Sir John Boswell said. “You
+can hoist your sails, captain, and return to within half a mile of the
+port, or she may pass us beyond hailing distance.”
+
+Gervaise at once retired to the cabin that had been set aside for their
+use, and proceeded to disguise himself. An hour later Sir John came
+down. He looked at Gervaise critically.
+
+“You are all right as far as appearances go. I should take you anywhere
+for a young Turk. Your clothes are not too new, and are in accordance
+with the tale you are going to tell, which is that you are the son of
+a Syrian trader. If, as Suleiman says, you speak Turkish well enough to
+pose as a native, I think you ought to be able to pass muster. How long
+will that dye last? Because if it begins to fade they will soon suspect
+you.”
+
+“It will last a fortnight; at least, so Sir John Kendall says. But he
+has arranged that if at the end of ten days I have not succeeded in
+finding out anything, he will send down to the prison, and under the
+pretence that he wants to ask me some questions about what ransom my
+father would be likely to pay for me, he will have me up to the auberge,
+and there I can dye myself afresh.”
+
+“How are you to communicate with him in case of need?”
+
+“His servant Ahmet, who got the things for me, is to come down every
+morning, and to be near the door of the prison at the hour when the
+slaves are taken out to work. If I have aught to communicate I am to
+nod twice, and Sir John Kendall will send down that evening to fetch me,
+instead of waiting until it is time for me to renew my dye.”
+
+“What is going to be said to Harcourt and the others to account for your
+absence?”
+
+“The bailiff will merely say that he has suddenly sent me away by ship,
+on a private mission. They may wonder, perhaps, but none of them will
+venture to ask him its nature.”
+
+“Well, I must say that you seem to have made all your arrangements
+carefully, Tresham, and I hope it will turn out well. I was against
+the scheme at first, but I own that I do not see now why it should not
+succeed; and if there is any plot really on hand, you may be able to get
+to the bottom of it.”
+
+It was an hour after darkness had completely fallen when the regular
+beat of oars was heard. The ship's boat was already in the water, and
+Gervaise, wrapped up in his mantle, followed Sir John out of his cabin
+and descended with him into the boat, which was at once rowed towards
+the approaching galley. Sir John hailed it as it came along.
+
+“Who is it calls?” a voice said.
+
+“It is I--Sir John Boswell. Pray take me on board, Sir Almeric. It is a
+somewhat special matter.”
+
+The order was given, the galley slaves ceased rowing, and the boat ran
+alongside. Gervaise unclasped his mantle and gave it to Sir John, and
+then followed him on board.
+
+“I congratulate you on your return, and on your good fortune in having,
+as your letter stated, made a prosperous voyage,” Sir John said, as he
+shook hands with the commander of the galley.
+
+“I would speak a word with you aside,” he added in a low voice.
+
+Sir Almeric moved with him a few paces from the other knights.
+
+“I am sent here by our bailiff, Sir Almeric. I have a Turkish prisoner
+here with me who is to be landed with those you have taken. There are
+special reasons for this, which I need not now enter into. Will you let
+him sit down here by the helm? My instructions are that he is not to
+mingle with the other slaves; and as there are reasons why it is wished
+that his coming on board in this manner shall not be known to them, I
+myself am to take him up to one of the prisons, or at least to hand him
+over to the officer sent down from that prison to take up the captives
+allotted to it. The matter is of more importance than it seems to be,
+or, as you may imagine, I should not be charged to intercept you on such
+an errand.”
+
+“Of course, I don't understand anything about it, Sir John, but will do
+as you ask me.”
+
+He went to where Gervaise had crouched down by the bulwark, beckoned him
+to follow, and, walking aft, motioned to him to sit down there. Then
+he returned to Sir John, and joined the other knights, who were all too
+anxious to learn the latest news--who had left the island, and who had
+come to it since they sailed--to interest themselves in any way with
+the figure who had gone aft, supposing him, indeed, to be Sir John's
+servant, the lantern suspended over the poop giving too feeble a light
+for his costume to be noted.
+
+A quarter of an hour later they anchored in the harbour. Some of the
+knights at once went ashore to their respective auberges, but Sir
+Almeric and a few others remained on board until relieved of their
+charge in the morning, an account being sent on shore of the number of
+captives that had been brought in. No thought was given to Gervaise, who
+slept curled up on the poop. Sir John Boswell passed the night on board.
+In the morning an officer came off with a list of the prisons to which
+the slaves were to be sent. Sir John Kendall had seen the officer
+charged with the distribution, who had, at his request, not included the
+prison of St. Pelagius in the list.
+
+A message, however, had been sent to that prison, as well as to the
+others, for an officer to attend at the landing stage. In the morning
+Sir John went ashore in one of the boats conveying the slaves, of whom
+some forty had been captured. Gervaise followed him into the boat, and
+took his seat by the others, who were too dispirited at the fate which
+had befallen them to pay any attention to him.
+
+When he landed, Sir John asked which was the officer from St. Pelagius.
+One stepped forward.
+
+“This is the only slave for you,” he said, pointing to Gervaise. “He is
+of a better class than the rest, and in the future may be he will do for
+a servitor at one of the auberges, but none have at present occasion for
+one, and so he is to go to you. He says that his father is a merchant,
+and will be ready to pay a ransom for him; but they all say that, and we
+must not heed it overmuch. As he seems a smart young fellow, it may be
+that he will be sent to one of the auberges later on; but at present,
+at any rate, you can put him with the rest, and send him out with the
+gangs.”
+
+“He is a well built young fellow, Sir John,” the officer remarked, “and
+should make a good rower in a galley. I will put him in the crew of the
+St. Elmo. Follow me,” he said, in Turkish, to Gervaise, and then led the
+way up to the prison. On entering he crossed a courtyard to a door which
+was standing open. Within was a vaulted room, some forty feet long by
+twenty wide; along each side there were rushes strewn thickly.
+
+“The others have just started to their work,” he said, “so that for
+today you can sleep.”
+
+After he had left, Gervaise looked with some disgust at the rushes, that
+had evidently been for weeks unchanged.
+
+“I would rather have the bare stones, if they were clean,” he muttered
+to himself. “However, it can't be helped.”
+
+He presently strolled out into the courtyard, where some other slaves,
+disabled by illness or injuries, were seated in the sun. Gervaise walked
+across to them, and they looked listlessly up at him as he approached.
+
+“You are a newcomer,” one said, as he came up. “I saw you brought in,
+but it didn't need that. By the time you have been here a week or two,
+your clothes will be like ours,” and he pointed to his ragged garments.
+“When did you arrive? Are there no others coming up here?”
+
+“The galley came in last night,” Gervaise said, “but they did not land
+us until this morning. I wish they had killed me rather than that I
+should have been brought here to work as a slave.”
+
+“One always thinks so at first,” the man said. “But somehow one clings
+to life. We shall die when Allah wills it, and not before.”
+
+“What is the matter with your foot?” Gervaise asked.
+
+“I was with the gang quarrying stones, and a mass of rock fell upon it.
+I have been in the infirmary for weeks, and I own that the Christian
+dogs treated me well. A slave has his value, you see. I am nearly cured
+now, but I shall never walk well again. I expect they will put me in one
+of their accursed galleys.”
+
+“How long have you been here?”
+
+“Seven years; it seems a lifetime. However, there is hope yet. They
+don't tell us much, but we hear things sometimes, and they say that the
+sultan is going to sweep them out of Rhodes as they were swept out of
+Acre. When will it be?”
+
+“I know not. I am from Syria, but even there they are making
+preparations. The sultan has had troubles in the East, and that has
+delayed him, but he will be here before long, and then we shall see. It
+will be our turn then.”
+
+“It will, indeed!” one of the others exclaimed. “Oh, to see these dogs
+brought down, and suffering as we have suffered, toiling at oars in one
+of our galleys, or at the fortifications of one of our castles! It will
+make amends for all our suffering. Had you a hard fight with them?”
+
+“No. We were but a small craft, and it was vain to attempt resistance. I
+would gladly have fought, but the sailors said it would only throw away
+their lives. There was but little on board, and they allowed the vessel
+to go free with those of the sailors who were too old to be made useful
+for hard work.”
+
+No further questions were asked. The men seemed to have no interest save
+in their own misery, and Gervaise soon left them, and, sitting down in a
+shady corner, presently dropped off to sleep.
+
+In the evening all came in from their various work. The officer man who
+had brought Gervaise in went up to the overseer of the galley slaves
+and informed him that he had told off the new slave--pointing to
+Gervaise--to his gang.
+
+“He was brought in by the galley that arrived last night,” he said; “he
+was the only slave sent up here. I hear that he had been set aside to be
+appointed a servitor, but there are no vacancies, so they sent him here
+till one should occur; and I was ordered to make him useful in other
+ways in the meantime.”
+
+“I am two or three hands short,” the overseer said. “I wish now I had
+sent in an application yesterday, for if I had done so, no doubt they
+would have sent me some more men. However, this fellow will make up an
+even number, and he is strong and active, though at present he looks
+sulky enough under his bad fortune.”
+
+A few of the slaves spoke to Gervaise as they were waiting for food to
+be brought them, but the majority dropped upon the rushes, too exhausted
+with toil and heat to feel an interest in anything. The food consisted
+of rye bread, with thin broth, brought in a great iron vessel. Each
+slave had a horn, which was used for soup or water, and which, when done
+with, he had, by the rule enforced among themselves, to take out to the
+fountain in the courtyard and wash, before it was added to the pile in
+the corner of the room.
+
+The cool of the evening aided the meal in restoring the energies of the
+slaves. Several gathered round Gervaise, and asked questions as to what
+he knew of the prospects of an early invasion of Rhodes; but as soon as
+the officer left the room, closing and locking the door after him,
+the slaves became for the most part silent. A few men sat in groups
+together, talking in undertones, but the greater number threw themselves
+down on the rushes, either to sleep or to think alone. Gervaise was
+struck by the manner in which most of them lay, without making the
+slightest movement, so long as there was light to enable him to make out
+their figures. He himself addressed two or three of them, as they lay
+with their eyes wide open, asking questions with reference to the work;
+but in no case did he receive any reply. The men seemed altogether
+unconscious of being addressed, being absorbed in the thought of their
+far distant homes and families which they might never see again.
+
+Gervaise walked a few times up and down the room, and as he approached
+a silence fell each time upon the groups of men talking together. More
+than once a figure rose soon afterwards from the ground, and, as he came
+along again, asked him a few questions about himself. As soon as it was
+dark, he lay down in a vacant space on the rushes. Shortly afterwards
+talking ceased altogether, and there was quiet in the vaulted room. With
+the first gleam of daylight they were astir, and, when the doors were
+opened, poured out into the courtyard, where all had a wash at the
+fountain. Half an hour later, a meal, precisely similar to that of the
+previous evening, was served out; then the overseers called over the
+muster roll, the gangs were made up, and each, under its officer,
+started for its work.
+
+Gervaise, with the men of his room, proceeded down to the port, and
+at once took their seats on the benches of the galley, one foot being
+chained to a ring in the deck, the other to that of a companion at the
+oar. The slaves were more cheerful now. As there was no work to do at
+present, they were allowed to talk, and an occasional laugh was heard,
+for the sun and brightness of the day cheered them. Many, after years
+of captivity, had grown altogether reckless, and it was among these
+that there was most talking; the younger men seemed, for the most part,
+silent and moody.
+
+“You will get accustomed to it,” the man next to Gervaise said
+cheeringly. “When I first came here, it seemed to me that I could not
+support the life for a month--that the fate was too dreadful to be
+borne, and that death would be most welcome; but, like the rest, I
+became accustomed to it in time. After all, the work is no harder than
+one would do at home. There is no stint of food, and it is no worse than
+one would have, were one labouring in the fields. Were it not for the
+loss of those we love, it would be nothing; and in time one gets over
+even that. I have long ago told myself that if they are not dead, at
+least they are dead to me. They have their livings to get, and cannot
+be always mourning, and I have tried to forget them, as they must have
+forgotten me.”
+
+“Do you work hard?” Gervaise asked.
+
+“No. We who are in the galleys are regarded by the others with envy.
+Sometimes--often, indeed--we have naught to do all day. We bask in the
+sun, we talk, we sleep, we forget that we are slaves. But, generally, we
+go out for an hour or two's exercise; that is well enough, and keeps us
+strong and in health. Only when we are away on voyages is the work hard.
+Sometimes we row from morning to night; but it is only when they are in
+chase of another craft that we have really to exert ourselves greatly.
+Then it is terrible. We may be doing our best, our very best, and yet to
+the impatient knights it seems that we might do more. Then they shout to
+the overseer, and he lays his whip on our backs without mercy. Then we
+row until sometimes we drop, senseless, off the benches. But this, you
+understand, is not very often; and though the work on a cruise is long,
+it is not beyond our strength. Besides, when we are away in the galley
+there is always hope. The galley may meet with four or five of our
+ships, and be captured, or a storm may arise and dash her upon the
+shore; and though many would lose their lives, some might escape,
+and each man, in thinking of it, believes that he will be one of the
+fortunate ones.
+
+“Take my advice: always look cheerful if you can; always put your hand
+on the oar when the order is given, and row as if you were glad to be at
+work again; and always make a show, as if you were working your
+hardest. Never complain when you are struck unjustly, and always speak
+respectfully to the overseer. In that way you will find your life much
+easier than you would think. You will be chosen for small boat service;
+and that is a great thing, as we are not chained in the small boats.
+Some men are foolish and obstinate, but, so far from doing any good,
+this only brings trouble on themselves; they come in for punishment
+daily, they are closely watched, and their lives made hells for them.
+Even as a help to escape it pays best to be cheerful and alert. We all
+think of escape, you know, though it is seldom indeed that a chance ever
+comes to any of us. It is the one thing except death to look forward to,
+and there is not a man among us who does not think of it scores of times
+a day; but, small as the chance is, it is greatest for those who behave
+best. For instance, it is they only who man small boats; and when a
+small boat rows ashore, it is always possible that the guard may be
+careless--that he will keep the boat at the landing place, instead of
+pushing off at once into deep water, as he ought to do--and that in this
+way a chance will, sooner or later, come for springing ashore and making
+a dash for liberty.”
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X. A PLOT DISCOVERED.
+
+
+The conversation between Gervaise and his fellow slave was interrupted
+by the arrival at the side of the quay of a party of knights. Silence
+instantly fell upon the slaves; all straightened themselves up to the
+oars, and prepared for a start. Among the knights who took their places
+on the poop Gervaise saw with amusement his friend Ralph. He had no fear
+of a recognition, for the darkly stained skin and the black hair had so
+completely altered him that when he had looked at himself in a mirror,
+after the application of the dye, he was surprised to find that he would
+not have known it to be his own face. Ralph was in command of the party,
+which consisted of young knights who had but recently arrived at Rhodes;
+and as it was the first time he had been appointed as instructor,
+Gervaise saw that he was greatly pleased at what he rightly regarded as
+promotion.
+
+The galley at once pushed off from the wharf, and rowed out of the
+port. The work was hard; but as the slaves were not pressed to any
+extraordinary exertions, Gervaise did not find it excessive. He
+congratulated himself, however, that the stain was, as he had been
+assured, indelible, save by time, for after a few minutes' exercise he
+was bathed in perspiration. As the galley had been taken out only that
+instruction might be given to the young knights, the work was frequently
+broken.
+
+Sometimes they went ahead at full speed for a few hundred yards, as if
+to chase an adversary; then they would swerve aside, the slaves on one
+side rowing, while those on the other backed, so as to make a rapid
+turn. Then she lay for a minute or two immovable, and then backed water,
+or turned to avoid the attack of an imaginary foe. Then for an hour she
+lay quiet, while the knights, divesting themselves of their mantles and
+armour, worked one of the guns on the poop, aiming at a floating
+barrel moored for the purpose a mile out at sea. At eleven o'clock they
+returned to the port. Bread and water were served out to the slaves, and
+they were then permitted to lie down and sleep, the galley being moored
+under the shadow of the wall.
+
+At four o'clock another party of knights came down, and the work was
+similar to that which had been performed in the morning. At seven
+o'clock the slaves were taken back to their barracks.
+
+“Well, what do you think of your work?” one of the slaves asked
+Gervaise, as they ate their evening meal.
+
+“It would not be so bad if it was all like that.”
+
+“No. But I can tell you that when you have to row from sunrise to
+sunset, with perhaps but one or two pauses for a few minutes, it is
+a different thing altogether, especially if the galley is carrying
+despatches, and speed is necessary. Then you get so worn out and
+exhausted, that you can scarce move an oar through the water, until you
+are wakened up by a smart as if a red hot iron had been laid across your
+shoulders. It is terrible work then. The whip cracks every minute across
+some one's back; you are blinded by exhaustion and rage, and you feel
+that you would give the world if you could but burst your chain, rush on
+your taskmasters, and strike, if only one blow, before you are killed.”
+
+“It must be terrible,” Gervaise said. “And do you never get loose, and
+fall upon them?”
+
+The man shook his head.
+
+“The chains are too strong, and the watch too vigilant,” he said. “Since
+I came here I have heard tales of crews having freed themselves in the
+night, and fallen upon the Christians, but for my part I do not believe
+in them. I have thought, as I suppose every one of us has thought, how
+such a thing could be done; but as far as I know no one has hit on a
+plan yet. Now and then men have managed to become possessed of a file,
+and have, by long and patient work, sawn through a chain, and have,
+when a galley has been lying near our own shore, sprung overboard
+and escaped; but for every attempt that succeeds there must be twenty
+failures, for the chains are frequently examined, and woe be to the man
+who is found to have been tampering with his. But as to a whole gang
+getting free at once, it is altogether impossible, unless the key of
+the pad locks could be stolen from an overseer, or the man bribed into
+aiding us.”
+
+“And that, I suppose, is impossible?” Gervaise said.
+
+“Certainly, impossible for us who have no money to bribe them with, but
+easy enough if any one outside, with ample means, were to set about it.
+These overseers are, many of them, sons of Turkish mothers, and have
+no sympathy, save that caused by interest, with one parent more than
+another. Of course, they are brought up Christians, and taught to hold
+Moslems in abhorrence, but I think many of them, if they had their free
+choice, would cross to the mainland. Here they have no chance of ever
+being aught but what they are--overseers of slaves, or small prison
+officials. They are despised by these haughty knights, and hated by us,
+while were they to reach the mainland and adopt their mothers' religion,
+everything would be open to them. All followers of the Prophet have
+an equal chance, and one may be a soldier today, a bey tomorrow, and
+a pasha a year hence, if he be brave, or astute, or capable in any way
+beyond his fellows. Men like these warders would be sure to make their
+way.
+
+“They cannot have gathered much during their service, therefore the
+offer of a large sum of money would find plenty among them eager to earn
+it. But, you see, they are but the inferiors. On our voyages on board
+the galley, the knights inspect our fetters twice a day, and the keys
+are kept in the commander's cabin. For an hour or two, when we are not
+on a long passage, the padlocks are unfastened, in order that we may
+jump over and bathe, and exercise our limbs; but at this time the
+knights are always on guard, and as we are without arms we are
+altogether powerless. It is the same thing here. The senior warders, who
+all belong to the Order, although of an inferior grade, come round, as
+you have seen, to examine our fetters, and themselves lock and bar the
+doors. If one or two of these could be corrupted, escape would be easy
+enough.”
+
+“But is it impossible to do this?” Gervaise asked eagerly. “My father
+has money, and would I know be ready, if I could communicate with him,
+to pay a handsome sum, if sure that it would result in my obtaining my
+freedom.”
+
+The man nodded significantly.
+
+“There may be other means of doing it,” he said. “Perhaps it will not be
+long before you hear of it. You seem a stout fellow, and full of spirit,
+but, as yet, anything that may be going on is known but to a few, and
+will go no further until the time comes that all may be told. I think
+not so badly of men of our faith as to believe that any one would betray
+the secret for the sake of obtaining his own freedom and a big reward;
+but secrets, when known by many, are apt to leak out. A muttered word or
+two in sleep, or the ravings of one down with fever, might afford ground
+for suspicion, and torture would soon do the rest. I myself know nothing
+of the secret, but I do know that there is something going on which, if
+successful, will give us our freedom. I am content to know no more until
+the time comes; but there are few, save those engaged in the matter,
+that know as much as this, and you can see that it is better it should
+be so. Look at that man opposite; he has been here fifteen years; he
+seldom speaks; he does his work, but it is as a brute beast--despair has
+well nigh turned him into one. Think you that if such a man as that were
+to know that there is hope, he would not be so changed that even the
+dullest would observe it? I see you are a brisk young fellow, and I say
+to you, keep up your courage. The time is nearer than you think when you
+will be free from these accursed shackles.”
+
+Each morning, as he went out to work with his gang, Gervaise saw the
+servant from the auberge standing near; but he made no sign. He was
+satisfied that his suspicions had been justified, and that he was not
+leading this life in vain, but he thought it better to wait until the
+week passed, and he was taken away to have his colour renewed, than to
+make a sign that might possibly rouse the suspicions of his comrades. On
+the eighth morning, when the door of the room was unlocked, the overseer
+said--“Number 36, you will remain here. You are wanted for other work.”
+
+After the gang had left the prison, the overseer returned.
+
+“I am to take you up to the English auberge. The knight who handed
+you over to me when you landed, told me that you might be wanted as a
+servitor; and as it is he who has sent down, it may be that a vacancy
+has occurred. If so, you are in luck, for the servitors have a vastly
+better time of it than the galley slaves, and the English auberge has
+the best reputation in that respect. Come along with me.”
+
+The English auberge was one of the most handsome of the buildings
+standing in the great street of the Knights. Its architecture was Gothic
+in its character, and, although the langue was one of the smallest of
+those represented at Rhodes, it vied with any of them in the splendour
+of its appointments. Sir John Boswell was standing in the interior
+courtyard.
+
+“Wait here for a few minutes,” he said to the overseer. “The bailiff
+will himself question the slave as to his accomplishments; but I fancy
+he will not be considered of sufficient age for the post that is vacant.
+However, if this should not be so, I shall no doubt find a post to fit
+him ere long, for he seems a smart young fellow, and, what is better, a
+willing one, and bears himself well under his misfortunes.”
+
+Then he motioned to Gervaise to follow him to the bailiff's apartments.
+
+“Well, Sir Gervaise,” Sir John Kendall exclaimed, as the door closed
+behind him, “have you found aught to justify this cruel penance you have
+undertaken?”
+
+“As to the penance, Sir John, it has been nothing unsupportable. The
+exercise is hard enough, but none too hard for one in good health and
+strength, and, save for the filth of the chamber in which we are shut
+up at night, and the foul state of the rushes on which we lie, I
+should have naught to complain of. No, I have as yet heard nothing of a
+surety--and yet enough to show me that my suspicions were justified, and
+that there is a plot of some sort on foot,” and he related to the two
+knights the conversation he had had with the galley slave.
+
+“By St. George!” the bailiff said, “you have indeed been justified in
+your surmises, and I am glad that I attached sufficient importance to
+your suspicions to let you undertake this strange enterprise. What think
+you, Sir John Boswell?”
+
+“I think with you, that Sir Gervaise has fully justified his insistence
+in this matter, which I own I considered to be hare brained folly. What
+is to be done next, Sir Gervaise?”
+
+“That is what I have been turning over in my mind. You see, I may have
+little warning of what is going to take place. I may not hear of it
+until we are locked up for the night and the affair is on the point of
+taking place, and it will, of course, be most needful that I shall be
+able to communicate with you speedily.”
+
+“That, of course, is of vital importance,” the bailiff said. “But how is
+it to be managed?”
+
+“That is what I cannot exactly see, Sir John. An armed guard remains in
+our room all night. But, in the first place, he might be himself in the
+plot, and if not, the slaves would almost certainly overpower him and
+kill him, as a preliminary to the work of knocking off their chains.”
+
+“Is there a window to the room? At least, of course there is a window,
+but is it within your reach?”
+
+“There are six small loopholes--one on each side of the door, and two in
+each of the side walls; they are but four inches across and three feet
+in length, and there are two crossbars to each; they are four feet from
+the floor.”
+
+“At any rate, they are large enough for your arm to pass through, Sir
+Gervaise, and you might drop a strip of cloth out.”
+
+“Certainly I could, Sir John. I could easily hide a piece of white
+cotton a yard or so long in my clothes, scanty as these are, and could
+certainly manage, unobserved, to drop it outside the window.”
+
+“Then the rest is for us to contrive, Boswell. We must have some one
+posted in the yard of the prison, with instructions to go every ten
+minutes throughout the night to see if a strip of white cotton has been
+dropped out. When he finds it he must go at once to William Neave, the
+governor. He is a sturdy Englishman, and there is no fear of his having
+been bribed to turn traitor; but it were well to take no one into
+our confidence. I think we cannot do better than employ Ahmet on this
+business, as he already knows that Sir Gervaise is masquerading there.
+We will have William Neave up here presently. Tell him that for certain
+reasons we wish Ahmet to pass the night for the present in the prison,
+and arrange with him on what excuse we can best bestow him there without
+exciting suspicion. At any rate, Sir Gervaise, that is our affair.”
+
+He went to a closet and took out a white mantle, tore a strip off the
+bottom, and gave it to Gervaise.
+
+“It would be best not to keep you here any longer,” he said, “so renew
+your stain while I speak. As soon as you learn the details of the plot,
+you will drop this out from the loophole on the right hand side of the
+door; that is to say, the one on your right, standing inside. If the
+affair is not to come off at once, it were best for you to proceed as
+before. Ahmet will be outside when you go out with your gang, and on
+your nodding to him we will make some excuse to take you away on your
+return. I say this because if you see that the affair, whatever it is,
+is not imminent, you might think it better to remain with them longer,
+so as to learn their plans more fully, instead of having the thing put a
+stop to at once.”
+
+“I understand, Sir John; but, as I have said, I do not think we should
+all be told until the blow is ready to be struck, as they would be
+afraid that some one might inform against them, if time and opportunity
+were granted them.”
+
+“I think so too, Sir Gervaise. This afternoon we will call upon the
+grand master, for we have no means of knowing how serious or how
+extended this plot may be; it may include only the crew of a single
+galley, and, on the other hand, the whole of the slaves may be
+implicated in it. It is evident, therefore, that the matter is too
+serious to be kept any longer from his knowledge.”
+
+Three more days passed. On the third evening, after the allowance of
+broth and bread had been consumed, and the door was closed and locked
+upon them for the night, three or four of the galley slaves, after
+talking eagerly together, beckoned to the others to gather round them
+at the end of the room farthest from the door. Two of them took up arms
+full of the bedding, and stuffed it into the side windows. Gervaise
+saw, in the dim light, a look of intense excitement on the faces of the
+slaves. It had been vaguely known among them that a plot was in hand,
+although but few had been admitted into the confidence of the leaders.
+Hitherto all had feared that it concerned only a small number, but
+the preparations now made to insure that they should not be overheard,
+showed that, whatever the plan might be, all were to share in it.
+
+“Thanks be to Allah, the All Powerful,” one of the men began, “my lips
+are unsealed, and I can tell you the great news that our hour for escape
+from bondage is at hand! We need not fear the warder there,” he went on,
+as several eyes were turned apprehensively towards the guard, who, with
+his spear beside him, was leaning carelessly against the wall at the
+farther end, looking through the window into the courtyard; “he is
+with us. You must know that for the last two months an agent from
+Constantinople has been on the Island, and has been engaged in arranging
+this affair. Two of our taskmasters belonging to the Order have been
+bribed by large sums of money, and several of the overseers, who are
+half of our blood, have eagerly embraced the prospect of returning
+to their mothers' country, and of avowing openly their belief in our
+religion. These, again, have bought over many of the guards, ours
+included, and tonight all will be ready for action. Those not of our
+party will be killed without ceremony. Duplicate keys have been made of
+all the padlocks of the fetters; the guards who are with us have each
+one of them, the others will have been slipped into the hands of one man
+in each gang as they returned tonight from work. The overseers who are
+in the plot will, at midnight, go quietly round and unlock the doors,
+and remove the bars from the outside. We have, therefore, only to
+overcome the eight or ten men who patrol the prison; and as we shall
+have the arms of the guards, some thirty in number, we shall make quick
+work of them.
+
+“The two guards at the outside gates must, of course, be killed.
+Duplicates of the keys have been made, and will be hidden in a spot
+known to some of our party, close to the gate. Thus we have but to issue
+out and rush down, in a body, to the port. I and another are to take the
+arms of our guard, and two others are told off in each room to do the
+same. That will give us sixty armed men. We shall make very short work
+of the guards at the gate leading into the port. Then twenty of us are
+to run along the mole to Fort St. Nicholas, twenty to the Tower of St.
+Michael, and twenty to that of St. John. There will be, at the most, but
+three or four men keeping watch at each fort, and thus we shall have in
+our possession the three forts commanding the entrance to the harbour.
+There are, as you know, six galleys manned by crews from our prison
+there. The crew of each galley will embark upon it, and man the oars;
+the rest will divide themselves among the galleys. Before starting, we
+shall seize and set fire to all other galleys and ships in the port. The
+gangs in four of the rooms have been told off specially for this duty.
+Before firing them, they are to take out such provisions as they may
+find, and transport them to the galleys. We who take the forts are
+provided with hammers and long nails, to drive down the vent holes of
+the cannon; when we have done this, we are to wait until one of the
+galleys fetches us off. Ten minutes should be ample time for all there
+is to be done, and even if the alarm is given at once, we shall be
+away long before the knights can be aroused from sleep, buckle on their
+armour, and get down to the port.”
+
+Exclamations of delight and approbation burst from his hearers.
+
+“Then it is only we of this prison who are in the plot?” one said.
+
+“Yes. In the first place, it would have been too dangerous to attempt to
+free all. In the second, the galleys would not carry them; we shall be
+closely packed as it is, for there are over a thousand here. I hear that
+there was a talk of freeing all, and that we, instead of embarking at
+first, should make for the other prisons, burst open the doors, and
+rescue the others; but by the time we could do so the knights would
+be all in arms, and our enterprise would fail altogether, for as but a
+small proportion of us can obtain weapons, we could not hope to overcome
+them. Were it not for the strong wall that separates their quarter from
+the town, we might make straight for their houses and slay them before
+the alarm could be given. As it is, that would be impossible, and
+therefore the plan will be carried out as I have told you. The loss of
+all their galleys and of over one thousand slaves will be a heavy blow
+for them. Great pains have been taken to prevent confusion when we reach
+the port. The men in each room have been instructed as to the galleys on
+which they are to embark. As for you, you know precisely what is to be
+done; you will simply take your places, and then wait until all are on
+board. No galley is to push out from the wharf until the last man of
+those employed in burning the ships has returned, with the provisions
+found in them. Then the order will be given by the man who has arranged
+all this, and the six galleys will put out together.
+
+“One is to row to each of the forts to carry off the party that will
+have been engaged in silencing its cannon. Our galley is to row to St.
+Nicholas, and take off the twenty men I shall lead there. There is no
+possibility of failure. Everything has, you see, been arranged. One of
+the overseers who is in the plot walked by my side as we returned from
+the port, and gave me the instructions, and all the others will have
+been told in the same way, or else by the guards in charge of them.”
+ The gang now broke up into little groups, talking excitedly over the
+unlooked for news, and exulting over the speedy advent of liberty.
+Gervaise strolled carelessly to the window, and dropped out the white
+strip of stuff. It was now quite dark, and there was no fear of any one
+observing the movement. Then he joined the others. After an hour and
+a half had passed he heard footsteps approaching the door. There was a
+pause; then the outside bars were taken down, and a key turned in the
+lock. A deep silence fell on the slaves. Then a voice called, “Number
+36!”
+
+“What is it?” replied Gervaise, without raising himself from his seat on
+the bedding. “I have done my share of work today, and earned my night's
+sleep.”
+
+“It is a knight from the English auberge; he has come to fetch you. It
+seems that you are to go there as a servitor.”
+
+“What a cursed fortune,” Gervaise muttered, in Turkish, “just when a
+road to freedom is open! I have a good mind to say I am ill, and cannot
+go till the morning.”
+
+“No, no!” one of the others exclaimed. “They would only drag you out,
+and when they saw that there was naught the matter with you, would
+suspect that there must be some reason why you did not want to go,
+when, as every one knows, the position of the servitors is in every way
+preferable to ours.”
+
+“Now then, why are you delaying?” a voice said sharply, and a warder
+entered with a lighted torch. “Get up, you lazy hound! It will be worse
+for you if I have to speak again.”
+
+“I am coming,” Gervaise grumbled. “I was just asleep.”
+
+He rose, as if reluctantly, and went forward. The warder gave him an
+angry push, followed him out, and locked and barred the door after him.
+
+“I suppose this is the right man?” Sir John Boswell said.
+
+“This is Number 36, Sir Knight, the same who was taken over to your
+auberge the other day,” and he held the light close to Gervaise's face.
+
+“Yes, that is the man. Follow me,” he added, in Turkish. The gate of
+the courtyard was unbarred, and they passed out unquestioned. Sir John
+strolled on ahead. Gervaise followed him a pace or two behind. Not until
+they had passed through the gate of the castle did Sir John turn.
+
+“I have not spoken to you,” he said, “as we may have been watched. Keep
+your news until we reach the auberge.”
+
+Upon entering it they went up at once to Sir John Kendall's apartments.
+
+“Well, Sir Gervaise, the strip of cotton was brought to us safely. What
+is your news?”
+
+“It is very serious, Sir John, and I have been in terrible anxiety since
+I dropped it out, lest it should not come to hand in time. As it is,
+you have till midnight to make your preparations.” He then repeated the
+statement made by the galley slave.
+
+“By my faith,” Sir John Kendall exclaimed, “this is a pretty plot
+indeed! And had it succeeded, as it certainly would have done but for
+your vigilance, it would have been a heavy blow to us. The burning of
+all our galleys would have crippled us sorely, and the loss of over
+a thousand slaves would have been a serious one indeed, when we so
+urgently require them for completing our defences. Get rid of those
+clothes at once, Sir Gervaise, and don your own. We must go straight
+to the grand master. You will find your clothes and armour in the next
+room. I had them taken there as soon as your token was brought me.”
+
+In a few minutes Gervaise returned in his usual attire, and with his
+armour buckled on. The two knights were already in their coats of
+mail, and leaving the auberge they went to the grand master's palace.
+A servitor had already been sent to D'Aubusson to inform him that they
+were coming, and he advanced to meet them as they entered.
+
+“Welcome, Sir Gervaise!” he said. “Whether your news be good or bad,
+whether you have found that it is a general rising of the slaves that
+is intended, or a plot by which a handful of slaves may seize a boat
+and escape, the gratitude of the Order is no less due to you for the
+hardships and humiliations you have undergone on its behalf.”
+
+“It concerns but one prison: that of St. Pelagius.”
+
+“The largest of them,” the grand master put in.
+
+“The whole of the slaves there are to be liberated at twelve o'clock
+tonight, are to seize the three water towers and to spike the guns, to
+burn all the shipping in the harbour, to make off with six galleys, and
+destroy the rest.”
+
+“By St. John!” D'Aubusson exclaimed, “this is indeed a serious matter.
+But tell me all about it. There must be treachery indeed at work for
+such a scheme to be carried out.”
+
+Gervaise now told him all the details he had learned.
+
+“So two of the Order, though but of the inferior grade, are in the
+plot?” the grand master said; “and several of the overseers? One of the
+villains is, of course, the man you saw this Greek talking with. We
+must get hold of the other if we can. As to the slaves, now that we have
+warning, there is an end of the matter, though without such warning they
+would surely have succeeded, for the plans are well laid, and they would
+have been at sea before we could have gathered in any force at the port.
+If it were not that it would cost the lives of many of the warders and
+of the prison guards, I should say we ought to take post outside the
+gate, for we should then catch the traitors who are to accompany them.
+As it is, we must be beforehand with them. A hundred men will be more
+than ample for our purpose. Do you take fifty of your knights, Sir John
+Kendall, and I will draw fifty of those of Auvergne. At eleven o'clock
+we will meet at the gate leading down into the town, and will march to
+the private entrance of the governor's house. I will go in first with a
+few of you, tell him what we have discovered, and post guards to prevent
+any one from leaving his house. Then, having admitted the others, we
+will go quietly out and place a party at each door of the overseers'
+house, with orders to seize any who may come out. The rest, in small
+parties, will then go round the prison, and, entering each room, show
+the slaves that their plot has been discovered. This we must do to save
+the lives of the guards who may be faithful to their trust. As to the
+higher officials engaged in the affair, we must obtain their names from
+the overseers or slaves. It is not likely that the two traitors will
+quit their houses, as they will leave the matter in the hands of the
+overseers, who, as you say, intend to first open the doors, and then to
+accompany the slaves in their escape. Do not warn the knights until it
+is nearly time to start, Sir John. The less stir made the better, for no
+one can say whether they may not have suborned some of the servitors to
+send instant news of any unusual movements in any of the auberges.”
+
+At half past ten Sir John Kendall went round among the knights and bade
+fifty of them arm themselves quietly, and proceed, one by one, down to
+the gate, and there await orders. Up to this time Gervaise had remained
+in the bailiff's room, so as to avoid the questioning that would take
+place, and he went down to the gate with the bailiff and Sir John
+Boswell.
+
+The knights assembled rapidly. None were aware of the reason for which
+they had been called out at such an hour, and there was a buzz of talk
+and conjecture until Sir John Kendall arrived. He was followed by four
+of the servants, who at once lighted the torches they carried, when
+he proceeded to go through the roll, and found that the muster was
+complete. Many of the knights had gazed in some surprise at Gervaise,
+whose dark complexion altogether concealed his identity, and it was
+supposed that he must be some newly arrived knight, though none had
+heard that any ship had entered the harbour that day.
+
+Two or three minutes later fifty knights of the langue of Auvergne
+came down, headed by the grand master himself, whose appearance greatly
+heightened the surprise of the English knights. The torches were now
+extinguished, the gate thrown open, and the party descended into the
+town. Gervaise had purposely fallen in by the side of Harcourt.
+
+“You are but newly arrived, Sir Knight?” the latter said, as they moved
+off.
+
+“Not so very newly, Ralph,” Gervaise replied.
+
+“What! is it you, Gervaise?” Harcourt exclaimed, with a start of
+surprise. “Why, I did not know you, though I looked hard at you in the
+torch light. What have you done with yourself? Where have you been? Do
+you know what all this is about?”
+
+“I cannot tell you now, Ralph. You must be content to know that I have
+been in prison, and working in the galleys.”
+
+“The saints defend us! Why, what on earth had you done to entail such
+punishment as that? It is an outrage. The grand master and the council
+have the right to expel a knight from the Order after due trial and
+investigation, but not to condemn him to such penalties as the galleys.
+It is an outrage upon the whole Order, and I would say so to the grand
+master himself.”
+
+“There was no outrage in it, Ralph. Wait until you hear the whole story.
+That I have not disgraced you, you may judge from the fact that I am in
+the armour and mantle of the Order, and that, as you saw, I came down
+with Sir John Kendall himself.”
+
+There were no people about in the streets, though the lights still
+burned on a few of the roofs. For a short distance the knights marched
+down towards the port, and then turned down a street to the right. After
+a few minutes' marching they halted under a high wall which all knew to
+be that of the prison of St. Pelagius. Six knights were posted at the
+main entrance, with orders that none should be allowed to leave the
+prison, and that any persons who came up to the gate were to be at once
+seized and made prisoners.
+
+The rest marched on to a small door leading into the governor's house.
+Here they were halted, and told to wait till called in; six knights of
+England, and as many of Auvergne, being told off to accompany the grand
+master and Sir John Kendall. A note had been sent to the governor,
+informing him that the grand master intended to visit the prison at
+eleven o'clock, but that the matter was to be kept an absolute secret;
+and that the governor himself was to be down at the gate to admit him.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XI IN COMMAND OF A GALLEY
+
+
+William Neave, the governor of the prison, looked astonished indeed
+when, upon his opening the door, the grand master and the bailiff of
+the English langue, with the twelve knights behind them, entered. He had
+been puzzled when, four days before, he had received an order from
+the grand master that Ahmet, a servitor in the auberge of the English
+langue, should be permitted to pass the night in his house, with
+authority to move freely and without question, at any hour, in the
+courtyard of the gaol, and to depart at any hour, secretly and without
+observation, by the private gate. Still more had he been surprised when
+he received the message that the grand master would pay him a secret
+visit at eleven o'clock at night.
+
+“Let no word be spoken until we are in your apartments,” D'Aubusson said
+in a low voice, as he entered. “But first lead four of these knights and
+post them so that none can enter the gaol from the house. If there are
+more than four doors or windows on that side, you must post a larger
+number. It is imperative that there shall be no communication whatever
+between your servants and the gaol.”
+
+As soon as this was done, the rest of the party were taken to the
+governor's rooms.
+
+“I can now explain to you all,” the grand master said, “the reason of
+our presence here. I have learned that at twelve tonight there will be
+a general rising of the slaves in this prison, and that, aided by
+treachery, they will free themselves from their fetters, overpower and
+slay such of the guards in their rooms as have not been bribed, throw
+open the gates, make their way down to the port, burn all the shipping
+there, and make off in the six galleys manned by them, having first
+overpowered the sentries in the three forts commanding the entrance, and
+spiked the guns.”
+
+Exclamations of astonishment burst from the knights, who now, for the
+first time, learnt the reason of their being called out. The governor
+listened with an expression of stupefaction.
+
+“With all deference to your Highness,” he said hesitatingly, “it seems
+to me that some one must have been deceiving you with this tale. It is
+altogether incredible that such a plot should have been hatched without
+a whisper of the matter coming to my ears. It could only be possible
+were there, not one but many, traitors among the officials; if this is
+so, then indeed am I a dull ass, and unfit for my duty here, of which
+I shall pray you to relieve me, and to order such punishment as the
+council may deem just to be allotted to me for having so signally been
+hoodwinked.”
+
+“My news is sure,” the grand master said; “but I deem not that you are
+in any way to blame in the matter. The plot has been matured, not as
+a consequence of any laxity of discipline in the prison, but from
+deliberate treachery, against which no mortal being can guard. The
+traitors are two of the officials who, being members of the Order, none
+would suspect of connivance in such a deed. With them are several--I
+know not how many--under officials, warders, and guards; all these have
+been bribed by an emissary from Constantinople, now in the town, and
+who is doubtless furnished with large means. It is well, indeed, for the
+Order, that this terrible act of treachery has been discovered in time
+to prevent the plot from coming to a head, for the loss of all our
+galleys, to say nothing of the disgrace of having been thus bearded by
+slaves, would be a very heavy blow to it.
+
+“Now that the house is safely guarded, William Neave, you can admit
+the rest of the knights, who are waiting outside. Then you will, in the
+first place, conduct a party, and post them so that they may arrest,
+as they come out to perform their share of the work, all officials,
+warders, and guards, of whatever rank. When you have posted knights to
+carry out this--and I need not say that the operation must be performed
+as silently as possible, for it is above all things necessary that
+the men concerned shall have no suspicion that their plot has been
+discovered--you will conduct other parties to the various rooms occupied
+by the slaves. The guards on duty inside will be made prisoners. The
+doors will then be locked and barred as before. The appearance of the
+knights and the arrest of the guards will be sufficient to show the
+slaves that their plot has been discovered, and there will be no fear of
+their making any attempt to carry it into execution. I will myself post
+the main body of the knights in the courtyard. The arrest of the guards
+is to be carried out at once, as all those not concerned in the plot
+would be killed when the hour comes for the rising. Therefore this part
+of the business must be carried out immediately. I should not, however,
+lead the guards away to a cell, for the less tramping of feet the
+better. Therefore I shall place two knights in each room, and beg them
+to remain inside in charge until the traitors outside are secured.”
+
+The knights outside were now marched up. The grand master ordered half
+those of Auvergne to go round to the main gate, which would be opened
+for them by the governor; they were to enter quietly, and remain in a
+body close to it until they received further orders. Sir John Kendall
+told off the rest of the knights to the various duties of watching the
+houses occupied by the officials and warders, and of entering the prison
+rooms and remaining in them on guard. The governor, with his private
+servants, bearing a supply of torches, was to lead them to the various
+cells, and unlock the doors. The knights were enjoined to move as
+noiselessly as possible, and to avoid all clashing of arms against
+armour.
+
+The governor produced a number of cloths intended to be served out to
+the slaves. Strips of these were cut off and wrapped round the feet of
+the English knights, so as to deaden the sound of their boots on the
+stone pavement. Then, accompanied by the grand master and Sir John
+Kendall, he went the round of the cells.
+
+In some of these the slaves were found standing up in an attitude of
+eager expectation, which, as the door opened, and the light of the
+torches showed a party of knights, changed into one of terror and
+consternation. Scarce a word was spoken. The guard was ordered to
+lay down his arms, and to take one of the torches. Two knights placed
+themselves, one on each side of him, with drawn swords. The door was
+again locked and barred, and the party proceeded to the next cell. In
+less than a quarter of an hour this part of the work was finished,
+and D'Aubusson, Sir John Kendall, and the governor, then took up their
+station with a party of knights who, concealed behind a buttress, were
+watching the doors of the officials' houses.
+
+Ten minutes later one of these doors was heard to open, and five dark
+figures came noiselessly out. They were allowed to go a short distance,
+in order to see if any others followed; but as no others came out, the
+governor stepped forward.
+
+“Whither are you going, at this time of night?” he asked. There was a
+momentary pause, a few hasty words were exchanged, then the five men
+rushed towards him with bared swords or knives; but before they reached
+him the knights poured out from their hiding place.
+
+“We are betrayed,” one of the men shouted in Turkish. “Fight to the
+last. Better be killed than tortured and executed.” With a yell of fury
+and despair, they rushed upon the knights. So desperate was their attack
+that the latter were forced to use their swords, which indeed, burning
+with rage at the treachery of these men, they were not backward in
+doing, and in less than a minute the five traitors lay, with cloven
+heads, dead on the pavement.
+
+“It is as well so,” D'Aubusson said, looking sternly down upon them;
+“perhaps better so, since it has saved us the scandal of their trial.
+We might have learned more from them, but we have learnt enough, since,
+doubtless, they have no accomplices among the warders, or they would
+have been with them. Now we will deal with the arch traitors. There is
+no need for further concealment; the noise of this fray will assuredly
+have been heard by them, for they will be listening for the sounds that
+would tell them the slaves had been liberated.”
+
+Followed by the knights, he went to the door of the house occupied
+by the overseers, all of whom were members of the lower branch of the
+Order. It was indeed evident that an alarm had been given there, for
+lights appeared at the windows. As they opened the door and entered the
+hall, several half-dressed men rushed down the stairs with drawn swords,
+two of them carrying torches in their left hands. As the light fell
+upon the figures of the grand master and the knights, they paused in
+astonishment.
+
+“There is treachery at work in the prison,” D'Aubusson said quietly. “I
+pray you to collect your comrades and to assemble here at once.”
+
+In a minute or two some twenty officials were gathered in the hall.
+
+“Are all here?” D'Aubusson asked the governor.
+
+The latter counted the men.
+
+“There are two short,” he said--“Pietro Romano and Karl Schumann. They
+occupy the same room. Go and fetch them down, four of you.”
+
+The four men nearest to the stairs at once went up with two torches.
+They returned in a minute.
+
+“The door is fastened on the inside, and we can obtain no response.”
+
+“Fetch an axe and break it in,” the grand master ordered. “Sir John
+Boswell, do you, with some other knights, take post without; they may
+attempt to escape by the window, though, as we hold the gates, it would
+avail them little. Sir Gervaise Tresham, do you follow us.”
+
+Gervaise, who had been placed with the party watching the house,
+followed the grand master and governor upstairs. A few blows with an axe
+splintered the door; its fastenings gave way, and they entered the room.
+The window was open, and two figures lay prostrate on the ground near
+it.
+
+“I half expected this,” the grand master said. “They were listening
+there. The conflict in the yard told them that the plot had been
+discovered, and as they saw us approaching the house, they dared not
+meet the punishment of their crimes, and have fallen by their own
+daggers. Put a torch close to their faces. Sir Gervaise, do you
+recognise in either of these men the official you saw in conversation
+with the Greek?”
+
+Gervaise stepped forward and examined the men's faces.
+
+“This is the man,” he said, pointing to one of them. “I marked him so
+closely that I cannot be mistaken.”
+
+“That is Pietro Romano,” the governor said; “he was an able officer,
+but discontented with his position and given to quarrelling with his
+comrades.”
+
+“Have a hole dug and bury them in the prison,” D'Aubusson said; “they
+have been false to their vows, and false to their religion. They have
+chosen their own mode of death; let them be buried like dogs, as they
+are. But let a careful search be made of their garments and of this
+room. It may be that they have some documents concealed which may be of
+use to us.”
+
+The grand master then descended to the hall.
+
+“Members of the Order,” he said to the overseers, “your guilty
+companions have met death by their own hands, as the others concerned
+in this plot have met theirs by the swords of the knights. It were well
+that this matter were not spoken of outside the prison. The attempt has
+been detected, and has failed; but were it talked of, it might incite
+others to repeat the attempt, and possibly with better success. Now,”
+ he went on, turning to the governor, “our work is done here. Call up
+the other warders. Let them take the men now prisoners in the rooms, and
+place them in a dungeon. Let fresh men be placed on guard, and let all
+the knights gather in the courtyard.”
+
+When this was done, and all the knights again assembled, D'Aubusson
+said, “Our work is nearly done, brothers. The traitors are all dead, and
+the revolt is at an end. It remains but to capture the author of this
+attempt; but I believe he is already in our hands. I have given an
+accurate description of him to Da Veschi, who has taken four knights
+with him, and they probably will catch him down at the port; if not, he
+will be arrested the first thing in the morning. As to the slaves, they
+will be so utterly cowed by the discovery, that there will be no fear of
+their repeating the attempt. I have ordered the officials of the prison
+to say naught in the town of what has taken place. There can, however,
+be no concealment among ourselves. I shall, of course, lay the whole
+matter before the council. The fact that a strong body of knights has,
+at so late an hour, started on some unknown mission is, of course,
+already known in the auberges of Auvergne and England. No concealment
+of the facts is therefore possible. It is the most serious attempt at a
+revolt of the slaves that has ever taken place, and will be a warning
+to us that more vigilance must be exercised. As it is, we have only been
+saved from the loss of our galleys and slaves by the acuteness of one of
+the youngest of our knights, who, in the first place, noted a suspicious
+occurrence which would have been passed by without attracting a moment's
+thought by ninety-nine out of a hundred men. He laid the matter before
+his bailiff, Sir John Kendall, who accepted his offer to disguise
+himself as a slave, to enter the prison under circumstances that would
+excite no suspicions among the others, and to live and work among them
+in order to ascertain whether there was any plot on hand. This task--a
+painful one, as you may imagine--he carried out, and for two weeks he
+rowed as a galley slave. His lot was as hard as that of the others, for,
+as he had reason to believe that some of the officials were concerned in
+the plot, it was necessary that all should be kept in ignorance that
+he was other than he seemed to be. Thanks to his perfect knowledge of
+Turkish, he was able to carry his mission through with complete success,
+and to obtain full particulars of the plot we have tonight crushed.
+The knight who has performed this inestimable service is Sir Gervaise
+Tresham, of the English langue. The action he has performed will be
+noted in the annals of the Order as an example of intelligence and of
+the extreme of self sacrifice, as well as of courage; for his life would
+have been assuredly forfeited had the slaves entertained the slightest
+suspicion of his real character.”
+
+There was a murmur of acclamation among the knights. Not one of them but
+would have freely risked his life in the service of the Order, but there
+were few who would not have shrunk from the idea of living as a slave
+among the slaves, sharing their tasks, and subject to the orders of men
+of inferior rank and often brutal manners.
+
+The knights now returned to their auberges. It was past midnight, but
+at the English house the lamps and flambeaux were lighted in the great
+hall. The servitors were called up, wine placed on the table, and the
+knights discussed the incidents of the evening.
+
+When the meal had concluded, Sir John Kendall said, “Brother knights,
+when the grand master bestowed the honour of secular knighthood upon
+this young comrade of ours, he predicted that he would rise to high
+distinction in the Order. I think you will all agree with me that the
+prediction is already in a fair way of being fulfilled, and that the
+services he has rendered to the Order justify us, his comrades of the
+English langue, in feeling proud of him. I drink, brothers, to his
+health.”
+
+A loud shout rose from the assembled knights, for upon the return of the
+party who had been away, the rest of those at the auberge had hastily
+robed themselves and descended to the hall to gather the news. When the
+shout had died away, and the wine cups were emptied, Gervaise, who was
+sitting on Sir John Kendall's right hand, would gladly have retained his
+seat, but the bailiff told him that he must say a few words, and after
+standing in embarrassed silence for a minute he said, “Sir John Kendall,
+and brother knights, I can only say that I am very sensible of the
+kindness with which you have been pleased to regard what seems to me
+after all to have been a very ordinary affair. I saw a man, whom I knew
+to be a stranger in the Island, speaking surreptitiously to a slave,
+and afterwards saw him conversing with a prison officer. That naturally
+struck me as curious, and I followed the officer, to see to which prison
+he belonged. Any one would have thought, as I did, that such a thing was
+strange, if not suspicious, and the only way to find out whether there
+was anything in it was to mix with the slaves; as I spoke Turkish
+well enough to do so I asked Sir John Kendall's permission to disguise
+myself. He gave me every assistance, and I shared their lot for a
+fortnight. There was no very great hardship in that--certainly nothing
+to merit the praise that Sir John Kendall has been kind enough to bestow
+on me. Nevertheless, I am very glad to have gained your good opinion and
+very grateful to him and to you for drinking to my health.”
+
+Then he sat down abruptly.
+
+Sir John Kendall now rose, and the knights, following his example,
+betook themselves to their dormitories.
+
+The next morning notices were sent by the grand master to the bailiffs
+of the auberges, and the knights of the grand cross who happened to
+be in the Island, to assemble in council. Messages were also sent to
+Gervaise, requesting him to repair at the same hour to the palace, as
+the council would probably require his attendance.
+
+“Oh dear! I wish this was all over,” he said to Ralph, as the latter
+assisted him to buckle on his armour.
+
+“I don't see anything to sigh about,” Ralph said. “I think that you are
+the most fortunate fellow in the world. I do not say that you have not
+well deserved it, because it is the tremendous way you worked at Turkish
+and gave up everything else that has enabled you to do this. Still,
+there was luck in your noticing that villain talking to the galley
+slaves, and then to one of the officers of the prison. Of course, as the
+grand master said last night, it isn't one in a thousand who would have
+thought anything more about it, and I am sure I shouldn't; so that, and
+all the rest, is entirely your own doing. Still, it was a piece of
+luck that you noticed him talking with a slave. Don't think I envy you,
+Gervaise; I don't a bit, and I feel as much as any one that you have
+well deserved the honour you have obtained. Still, you know, it is a
+sort of consolation to me that luck had a little--just a little--to do
+with it.”
+
+“In my opinion luck had everything to do with it,” Gervaise said
+heartily, “and I feel downright ashamed at there being such a fuss made
+over it. It was bad enough before, merely because I had hit on a
+plan for our escape from those pirates, but this is worse, and I feel
+horribly nervous at the thought of having to appear before the grand
+master and the council.”
+
+“Well, that brown dye will hide your blushes, Gervaise. I can only say
+I wish that I was in your place. By-the-bye, have you heard that they
+caught that rascal Greek last night?”
+
+“No, I have not heard anything about it.”
+
+“Yes. The knights hid themselves behind a pile of goods on the wharf.
+There was no one about, so far as they could see, but soon after twelve
+they saw a figure come up on to the deck of a fishing boat moored by the
+quay. It was the Greek; he stood there for a minute or two listening,
+and then went down again; he did this five or six times, and at one
+o'clock they saw him throw up his arms, as if in despair; he stepped
+ashore, and was about to make his way up into the town when they rushed
+out and seized him. There is no doubt as to what his fate will be. I am
+sorry to say that I hear my friend Vrados has been arrested; but there
+can be no doubt about his loyalty, and he will assuredly be able
+to explain to the satisfaction of the council how this man became a
+resident at his house.”
+
+“I am sorry I met him there, Ralph. It is a very unpleasant thing to
+have gone to a house, to have been received kindly, and then to be the
+means of bringing trouble upon it.”
+
+“Yes. I feel that a little myself, because I took you there; and yet I
+cannot regret it, for if you had not seen him and taken an objection to
+him, you might not have noticed him particularly when he spoke to one of
+the galley slaves. It is certainly curious that you should have doubted
+the man, for I have met him there several times, and even after your
+visit with me I could see nothing in him to justify your dislike.”
+
+Gervaise went up to the palace, and while waiting in the great hall
+until summoned before the council he was warmly accosted by several
+knights,--some of whom were quite strangers to him,--who all joined in
+congratulating him on the immense service he had done to the Order. It
+was upwards of an hour before he was called in.
+
+“The council have received, Sir Gervaise Tresham,” the grand master
+said, “full details from Sir John Kendall of the manner in which you
+first discovered, and have since followed up the daring plot by which
+the slaves at St. Pelagius were to have risen, slain the guards who were
+faithful, spiked the cannon in the three water forts, burnt the merchant
+shipping, carried off six galleys and burnt the rest, and in their
+name I thank you for having saved the Order from a great calamity. The
+members of the council agree with me that you have shown an amount of
+discernment of the highest kind, and that you are worthy of exceptional
+favour and reward for your conduct. I therefore in my own name appoint
+you to the commandery of our manor of Maltby in Lincolnshire, which,
+having fallen vacant, is in my gift; and I release it from the usual
+payment of the first year's revenue. Knowing that you desire to
+establish yourself here, the council have, at my request, decided to
+make an exception to the general rule that a knight, on promotion to a
+commandery, must return and take charge of it in two years from the time
+the grant is made to him. The commandery will therefore be administered
+by the senior of the knights attached to it.
+
+“The council, on their part, have requested the bailiff of Auvergne, as
+grand master of the Fleet, to appoint you to the command of the galley
+now building, and approaching completion. This he has consented to
+do, feeling, as we all feel, that although such an appointment is
+unprecedented for a young knight, yet in the present case such an
+exception may well be made. I may add that the Admiral has--in
+order that no knight greatly your senior should be placed under your
+command--determined that he will appoint to it only young knights, who
+will, we are assured, gladly serve under one who has so distinguished
+himself, feeling certain that, under his command, they will have ample
+opportunities against the infidels to prove themselves worthy of the
+Order. I may add, also, that the bailiffs of all the langues promise
+that they will select from among the young knights such as may seem best
+fitted for such service, by their skill in warlike exercises, by their
+ready obedience to orders, and good conduct. And I foresee that the
+spirit of emulation, and the desire to show that, though still but
+professed knights, they are capable of performing as valiant deeds as
+their elders, will make the galley under your command one of the most
+successful in the Order.
+
+“As you are aware, it is a stringent rule, which even in so exceptional
+a case we should not be justified in breaking, that a knight must reside
+in the Island for five years previous to being promoted to a commandery.
+It is now two months more than that time since you were received as page
+to the late grand master, and in promoting you to a commandery I have
+not, therefore, broken the rule. You may retire, Sir Gervaise.”
+
+Gervaise, overwhelmed by the unlooked for honours thus bestowed upon
+him, bowed deeply to the grand master and the members of the council,
+and then retired from the chamber. He passed out of the palace by a side
+door, so as to avoid being accosted by the knights in the great hall,
+and took his way out on to the ramparts, where he walked up and down for
+a considerable time before returning to the auberge. He felt no hilarity
+at his promotion. He had never entertained any ambition for rising to
+high office in the Order, but had hoped only to perform his duty as a
+true knight, to fight against the infidels, and some day, if need be, to
+die for the Order. The commandery was, he knew, a rich one, and as
+its chief he would draw a considerable revenue from the estate. This
+afforded him no pleasure whatever, except inasmuch as it would enable
+him, in his new command of the galley, to keep a handsome table, and to
+entertain well the knights who served under him.
+
+It seemed to him, however, that the reward and honours were so far
+beyond his deserts that he felt almost humiliated by their bestowal. The
+responsibility, too, was great. Would these young knights, the youngest
+of whom could be but a year his junior, serve willingly under his
+orders? And, above all, would they be able to emulate the deeds of
+experienced warriors, and would the galley worthily maintain the fame of
+the Order?
+
+At the end of two hours he was joined by Ralph Harcourt.
+
+“I have been looking for you everywhere, Gervaise. You seemed to have
+disappeared mysteriously. None had marked you leave the council chamber,
+or knew where you had gone; and after searching everywhere I remembered
+your fondness for walks upon the walls, so I climbed to the top of
+St. John's tower and thence espied you. Well, I congratulate you most
+heartily on the honours that have fallen to your share, especially that
+of the command of a new galley.”
+
+“It is too much altogether, Ralph. I feel ashamed at being thus thrust
+into a post that ought to be given to a knight of age and experience.
+How can I expect a number of young knights, of whom well nigh all must
+be my seniors in age, to obey me as they would an older man?”
+
+“What has age to do with it?” Ralph said. “You have shown that you have
+a head to think, and, as you before proved, you have an arm to strike.
+Why, every young knight in the Order must feel proud that one of their
+own age has gained such honour. It raises them all in their own esteem,
+and you will see that you will get the pick among all the professed
+knights, and of a good many who have finished their profession, and are
+serving here in the hope of some day getting promotion to a commandery.
+Not such an one as you have got; that, in the ordinary course of things,
+does not fall to a knight until he is well on in years, and has served
+in many commanderies of smaller value. I can tell you, directly Sir John
+Kendall came back and told us that you had been appointed commander of
+the new galley, and that it was to be manned wholly by young knights,
+there was not one of those serving their profession in the auberge who
+did not beg Sir John to put down his name for it; and ten or twelve
+others, myself among them, who have obtained full knighthood also.”
+
+“You don't mean to say that you have put down your name to serve under
+me, Ralph? It would be monstrous.”
+
+“I see nothing monstrous in it, Gervaise. As I said just now, years have
+nothing to do with it, and, putting aside our friendship, I would rather
+serve under you than under many knights old enough to be your father. I
+don't know whether I shall have the luck to be one of the chosen, as Sir
+John said that there were to be only seven from each langue, which will
+make forty-nine--with yourself fifty. If I am chosen--and, knowing
+our friendship, I hope that the bailiff will let me go with you--it is
+likely enough I may be named your lieutenant, as I shall be the only one
+beside yourself who is a secular knight, and am, therefore, superior in
+rank to the rest.”
+
+“That would be pleasant indeed, Ralph, though I would rather that you
+had been made commander and I lieutenant; but at any rate, with you
+to support me, I shall feel less oppressed by the thought of my
+responsibility.”
+
+As Ralph had declared would be the case, the young knights in the other
+auberges were as anxious as those of England to be enrolled among the
+crew of the new galley, and the bailiffs had some trouble in choosing
+among the aspirants. Very few were selected outside the rank of
+professed knights, and as great pains were taken to comply with the
+grand master's wishes that only young knights of good conduct and
+disposition, and distinguished by their proficiency in warlike
+exercises, should be chosen, the crew was in every way a picked one.
+Most of them had made one or two of the three months' voyages in
+the galleys, though comparatively few had had the good fortune to be
+absolutely engaged with the Moslem pirates.
+
+To the great satisfaction of himself and Gervaise, Ralph Harcourt
+was nominated lieutenant of the galley. The fact that so many had
+volunteered impressed all those who were chosen with the sense that it
+was at once an honour and a piece of good fortune to be selected, and
+all were determined that the boy galley, as the elder knights laughingly
+termed it, should do honour to the Order.
+
+It was a fortnight before she was launched. Gervaise had heard, with
+great satisfaction, that it had been decided by the council that no
+punishment should be inflicted upon the slaves for their share in the
+intended rising at St. Pelagius. All were guilty, and there was no means
+of saying who had taken prominent parts in the plot. The council felt
+that it was but natural that they should grasp at the prospect of
+freedom, for they themselves would have done the same had they been
+captives of the infidels. Even the warders and guards were allowed to
+go unpunished, although their offence was a much more serious one. Those
+who could have named the men who had accepted bribes were dead, and the
+lesson had been so severe a one that there was no probability of any
+again turning traitors. The author of the rising had been publicly
+executed. Seeing the hopelessness of denial, he had boldly avowed his
+share in the matter, and had acknowledged that he was acting as agent
+for the sultan, and had been supplied with ample funds before leaving
+Constantinople.
+
+He declared that he was absolutely unable to give any names whatever of
+those concerned in the plot, save those of the two overseers, as these
+had undertaken the work of suborning the warders and guards, though he
+admitted that he had on several occasions spoken to slaves as the gangs
+were on their way back to the prison, and had told them to be prepared
+to take part in a plan that was on foot for their rescue from slavery.
+The torture had not been, as was then the usual custom, applied to
+extort information; partly because his story was probable, still more
+because the grand master and council did not wish that more publicity
+should be given to the affair, and were glad that it should be allowed
+to drop without any further trial of the delinquents. In the city
+generally it was only known that a plot had been discovered for the
+liberation and escape of some of the slaves; and, outside the members of
+the Order, none were aware of its extent and dangerous character. To the
+satisfaction of Gervaise and Ralph, Vrados was able to produce letters
+and documents that satisfied the council that he had been deceived as to
+the character of the Greek, and was wholly innocent in the matter.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XII THE BOY GALLEY
+
+
+Among those most pleased at the appointment of Gervaise to the command
+of the galley was Sir John Boswell. Ever since the adventure with the
+pirates, the knight had exhibited an almost fatherly interest in him;
+had encouraged him in his studies, ridden with him on such occasions as
+he had permitted himself a short holiday, and had, whenever they were
+together, related to him stories of war, sieges, battles, and escapes,
+from which he thought the young knight might gain lessons for his future
+guidance.
+
+“I doubt, Gervaise,” he said one day, as they were riding quietly along
+the road, “whether our plan of life is altogether the best. We were
+founded, you know, simply as a body of monks, bound to devote ourselves
+solely to the care of the sick, and to give hospitality to pilgrims in
+Palestine. Now this was monkish work, and men who devoted themselves
+solely to such a life of charity as that in our Hospital at Jerusalem,
+might well renounce all human pleasures; but when the great change
+was made by Master Raymond du Puy, and from a nursing body we became a
+brotherhood in arms, it seems to me that the vows of celibacy were no
+longer needful or desirable. The crusaders were, many of them, married
+men, but they fought no worse for that. It would have been far better,
+methinks, had we been converted into an Order pledged to resist the
+infidel, but without the vows of poverty and of celibacy, which have
+never been seriously regarded.
+
+“The garrison here might be composed, as indeed it is now, principally
+of young knights, of those who have not cared to marry, and of the
+officers of the Order whose wives and families might dwell here with
+them. This would have many advantages. Among others, the presence of so
+many ladies of rank would have the excellent effect of discountenancing
+and repressing extravagances and dissolute habits, which are but too
+common, and are a shame to the Order. Knights possessing commanderies
+throughout Europe would be no worse stewards for being married men, and
+scandals, such as contributed largely to the downfall of the Templars,
+would be avoided.
+
+“The sole vow necessary, so far as I can see, would be that knights
+should remain unmarried and disposable at all times for service until
+ten years after making their profession, and that afterwards they should
+ever be ready to obey the summons to arms, on occasions when the safety
+of Rhodes, or the invasion of any Christian country by the Moslems,
+rendered their services needful, when they would come out just as the
+knights of Richard the Lion Heart went out as crusaders. I have spent
+half my life since I joined the Order in commanderies at home, and a
+dull life it was, and I was glad enough to resign my last command and
+come out here. Had I been able to marry, I might now have had a son of
+your age, whose career I could watch and feel a pride in. My life would
+have been far happier in England, and in all respects I should be a
+better man than I am now. Methinks it would strengthen rather than
+weaken the Order. As a fighting body we should be in no way inferior
+to what we are now, and we should be more liked and more respected
+throughout Europe, for naturally the sight of so many men leading a
+luxurious life in commanderies causes a feeling against them.”
+
+“But I suppose, Sir John, that there is no great difficulty in obtaining
+a dispensation from our vows?”
+
+“In this, as in all other matters, everything depends upon interest or
+money. Of course, dispensations are not common; but doubtless any knight
+when he had served his term of active service could, especially if
+his request were backed by the grand master, obtain from the Pope
+a dispensation of his vows. If he had a commandery it would make a
+vacancy, and give the grand prior, or the grand master, or the council,
+in whosoever's gift it might be, an opportunity of rewarding services or
+of gratifying some powerful family.”
+
+“I agree with you that it would have been much better, Sir John. I can
+understand that monks, ever living a quiet life apart from the world,
+should be content so to continue; but among a body of warlike knights
+there must be many who, in time, must come to regret the vows they took
+when boys. The cadet of a noble family might, by the death of elder
+brothers, come to be the head of a great family, the ruler over wide
+domains. Surely it would be desirable that such a man should be able to
+marry and have heirs.”
+
+“Doubtless it could be managed in such cases, Gervaise, but it is a pity
+that it should have to be managed. I can see no reason in the world why
+a knight, after doing ten years of service here, should not be free
+to marry, providing he takes a vow to render full service to the Order
+whenever called upon to do so. Already the vow of poverty is everywhere
+broken. Already, in defiance of their oaths, too many knights lead idle
+and dissolute lives. Already, knights, when in their own countries,
+disregard the rule that they shall draw sword in no cause save that of
+the Holy Sepulchre, and, like other knights and nobles, take part in
+civil strife or foreign wars. All this is a scandal, and it were better
+by far to do away with all oaths, save that of obedience and willingness
+to war with the infidel, than to make vows that all men know are
+constantly and shamelessly broken.
+
+“I am fond of you, Gervaise. I am proud of you, as one who has brought
+honour to our langue, and who, in time, will bring more honour. I am
+glad that, so far as there can be between a young knight and one of
+middle age, there is a friendship between us. But see what greater
+pleasure it would give to my life were you my son, for whom I could
+lay by such funds as I could well spare, instead of spending all my
+appointments on myself, and having neither kith nor kin to give a sigh
+of regret when the news comes that I have fallen in some engagement with
+the infidels. I often think of all these things, and sometimes talk them
+over with comrades, and there are few who do not hold, with me, that it
+would be far better that we should become a purely military Order, like
+some of the military Orders in the courts of the European sovereigns,
+than remain as we are, half monk, half soldier--a mixture that, so far
+as I can see, accords but badly with either morality or public repute.
+
+“However, I see no chance of such a change coming, and we must be
+content to observe our vows as well as may be, so long as we are willing
+to remain monks and try to obtain dispensation from our vows should we
+desire to alter our mode of life. We ought either to have remained monks
+pure and simple, spending our lives in deeds of charity, a life which
+suits many men, and against which I should be the last to say anything,
+or else soldiers pure and simple, as were the crusaders, who wrested
+the Holy Sepulchre from the hands of the infidels. At present, Gervaise,
+your vocation lies wholly in the way of fighting, but it may be that the
+time will come when you may have other aims and ambitions, and when the
+vows of the Order will gall you.”
+
+“I hope not, Sir John,” Gervaise said earnestly.
+
+“You are young yet,” the knight replied, with an indulgent smile. “Some
+day you may think differently. Now,” he went on, changing the subject
+abruptly, “when will your galley be ready?”
+
+“This is my last ride, Sir John. The shipwrights will have finished
+tomorrow, and the next day we shall take possession of her, and begin to
+practise, so that each man shall know his duties, and the galley slaves
+learn to row well, before we have orders to sail. I wish you were going
+with us, Sir John.”
+
+“I should like it, lad, in many respects. It does one good to see the
+enthusiasm of young men, and doubtless you will be a merry party.
+But, on the other hand, unless I mistake, you will be undertaking wild
+adventures, and my time for these is well nigh passed. When the Turk
+comes here, if he ever comes--and of that I have little doubt--I
+shall be ready to take my full share of the fighting; but I shall seek
+adventures no longer, and shall go no more to sea. Next only to the
+bailiff, I am the senior of our auberge, and--but this is between
+ourselves, lad--am like to succeed to the grand priory of England when
+it becomes vacant, and if not I shall, as the grand master has told me,
+have the offer of the next high office vacant in the palace.”
+
+Two days later Gervaise and his company of young knights went down to
+the port to take part in the launch of the new galley. This was the
+occasion of a solemn ceremony, the grand master and a large number of
+knights being present. A religious service first took place on her
+poop, and she was named by the grand master the Santa Barbara. When the
+ceremony was over, Gervaise was solemnly invested with the command of
+the galley by the grand marshal of the navy; then the shores were struck
+away, and the galley glided into the water, amid the firing of guns, the
+blowing of trumpets, and the cheers of the spectators who had gathered
+at the port to witness the ceremony.
+
+The next morning a gang of galley slaves were marched down. A third of
+these had been drawn from the crews of other galleys, their places being
+supplied by new hands. The remainder were taken from the men employed
+on the fortifications. Three weeks were occupied in teaching the rowers
+their work, and getting them well together. They were a fine crew, for
+the governor of St. Pelagius, grateful to Gervaise for the discovery of
+the plot, had ordered the overseers to pick out from the various gangs
+men specially suited by age and strength for the work.
+
+The dye by this time had entirely worn off his face, and although his
+hair was still several shades darker than of old, it differed even more
+widely from the ebon hue that it had been when he was in prison. Thus,
+although he recognised three or four men upon the benches who had been
+fellow occupants of his cell, he had no fear whatever of their detecting
+in the commander of the galley their late companion in misfortune.
+
+Only a portion of the knights had been out each day while the crew were
+learning to row, as there was but little for them to learn. The galley
+carried no sails, and the knights were soldiers rather than sailors, and
+fought on the deck of their ship, as if defending a breach, or storming
+one held by the enemy. Moreover, as all of them had already made one or
+more voyages, they were accustomed to such duties as they would have to
+discharge on board.
+
+All were glad when an order was published for the galley to sail. On the
+eve of departure Gervaise was sent for by the grand master. The general
+of the galleys was with him when Gervaise entered the room. The bailiff
+of Auvergne always held the position of grand marshal, and the bailiff
+of Italy that of second in command, with the title of grand admiral.
+These officials, however, as heads of their respective langues, had many
+other duties to perform, and it was only on great occasions that they
+took any practical share in the work of which they were nominally heads.
+The real control in all naval questions rested with the general of the
+galleys, who was elected by the council, but on the nomination of the
+grand master.
+
+His power when at sea with the fleet was absolute. He could suspend any
+officer from duty, and had unquestioned power of life and death over
+the crews. He had been frequently on board the galley since she had been
+launched, and had been pleased with the attention paid by Gervaise to
+his duties, and with the ready manner in which the young knights carried
+out his orders.
+
+“Sir Gervaise Tresham,” he said, “it is usual, as you know, to appoint
+each galley to a certain cruising ground, to which it is confined during
+its three months' absence. At present there is a galley on each of these
+stations, and as the last relief took place but a month since, it is
+better that they should remain at the stations allotted to them. I
+have therefore, after consultation with his Highness the grand master,
+decided to give you a free hand. You are as likely to meet with pirates
+in one quarter as in another, and you will pick up from vessels you
+may overhaul news of their doings, which will enable you to direct your
+course to the point where you will be most useful.”
+
+“In the first place, however, you will proceed to the coast of Tunis.
+Visconti's galley is already there, but the coast swarms with corsairs,
+and we have had many complaints as to their depredations. The Court of
+Spain has twice represented to us lately that the pirates have grown
+so bold that vessels have been carried off, even when coasting from one
+Spanish port to another. Visconti is specially watching the coast near
+Tunis, and you will therefore perhaps do better to proceed farther west,
+for every village from Tunis to Tangier is little better than a nest
+of pirates. I should imagine that you will find ample employment there
+during your three months' cruise. When I say that you are free to
+choose your own cruising ground, I do not mean that you should go up the
+Levant, or to the east of the Mediterranean, but that you are not bound
+to keep close along the African coast, but may, should you obtain any
+information to warrant your doing so, seek the pirates along the shores
+of Spain, Sardinia, Corsica, or Sicily.
+
+“I need not warn you to act with prudence as well as courage, for you
+have proved that you possess both qualities. Do not allow yourself to
+be carried away by the impetuosity of your knights; it is more often
+the duty of a commander to restrain than to encourage his crew, and with
+such young blood as you have under your command the necessity will be
+greater than usual. Be kind to your slaves, but be ever watchful;
+yet this I need not tell you. Maintain a strict but not over severe
+discipline. You are all knights and comrades of the Order, and equals
+when on shore, but on board you are the captain and they are your
+soldiers. I have this afternoon had a meeting of your knights, and have
+urged upon them very strongly that, having volunteered to serve under
+you, they must obey your orders as promptly and willingly as if you were
+the senior knight of the Order, and that it behooves them specially
+upon the present occasion, when the crew is composed entirely of young
+knights, to show themselves worthy of the honour that has been done to
+them by entrusting a galley of the Order to their charge. I told them
+I should regard your report of their individual conduct with the same
+attention and respect with which I should that of any other commander,
+and that they might greatly make or mar their future prospects in the
+Order by their conduct during the cruise. I am convinced, from what I
+know of you, that you will exercise no undue harshness, but will act
+with tact and discretion, as well as firmness.”
+
+“I will try to do so, your Excellency. I feel that it is a heavy
+responsibility and will spare no pains to justify the unmerited honour
+that has been bestowed upon me.”
+
+“You have seen that the taking in of stores is complete, and that
+nothing is wanting for the voyage?”
+
+“Yes, sir. I stood by while the overseer of stores checked off every
+sack and barrel as it came on board. The water is to be brought off this
+evening, and as I was unable to be present, Sir Ralph Harcourt is there
+to count the barrels and see that all are full.”
+
+“Goodbye, Sir Gervaise,” the grand master said, as the interview
+terminated.
+
+“Hitherto you have given me, from the time you reached the Island,
+naught but reason for satisfaction at my nomination of you as page,
+and I have no fear that you will fail this time. Remember that valour,
+however great, cannot prevail against overpowering odds. You had a
+lesson of that when you served under Ricord, though finally the affair
+turned out well. I do not say, don't attempt desperate undertakings, but
+don't attempt impossible ones. Be careful of the lives of your knights.
+Remember that ere long every sword may be of the utmost consequence in
+the defence of Rhodes, and that even the capture of pirates may be too
+dearly purchased; but that, at the same time, the honour of the flag
+of the Order must be upheld at all hazards. Ah!” he broke off, seeing
+a slight smile on the young knight's face, “you think my orders
+contradictory? It may be so; but you know what I mean, and I fear not
+that you will blunder in carrying them out. Be prudent, and yet not
+over prudent. I mean, be not rash, unless there are such benefits to be
+obtained as would justify great risk in obtaining them.”
+
+On returning to the auberge, Gervaise had a long chat with Ralph.
+
+“I think the admiral's talk with us this afternoon had an excellent
+effect, Gervaise. I do not say that every one was not before disposed
+to obey you in all things, willingly and cheerfully; but he put it so
+strongly to them that they had volunteered specially for service in this
+galley, knowing well who was to be its commander, and the circumstance
+that the crew was to consist solely of young knights, and had therefore
+specially pledged their honour so to act that the enterprise should be
+in all respects a successful one. To render it so, obedience was even
+a greater necessity than valour. This was the most important of all the
+vows taken by the knights of the Order, and it was only by the strictest
+and most unquestioning obedience on the part of all to the orders of
+their superiors, that the work of a vast community could be carried
+on. Passing over the fact that you were their superior in rank, both as
+being a secular knight and a knight commander of the Order, you had
+been specially appointed by the grand master and council, as well as
+by himself, and that they bestowed upon you while at sea, and in
+the absence of any officers of superior rank, their full powers and
+authority. You were, in fact, their representative and agent, and
+therefore to be regarded with the same deference and respect that would
+be due to the oldest knight similarly placed. 'Lastly,' he said, in a
+less serious tone, 'you must remember that this is an experiment, and,
+as some think, a somewhat rash one. Never before did a galley, manned
+entirely from among the youngest of our knights, put to sea; and you may
+be sure that, unless successful, the experiment is not likely to be ever
+repeated. You have been selected from among many other candidates, and
+you have not only to justify the choice, but to uphold the reputation
+and honour of the young knights of your Order, by all of whom your
+doings will be regarded with special interest, as reflecting credit not
+only upon yourselves individually, but as representatives and champions
+of them all.'
+
+“I could see that his words had a great effect. He had placed me beside
+him, and I marked their faces as he spoke. Each face lit up at his
+appeal, and I do not think there was one but silently registered a vow
+to do all in his power to prove himself worthy of the confidence placed
+in him and his companions by the grand master and admiral. I had before
+no shadow of fear that everything would not go well. I knew almost all
+of them personally, and if I myself had had the selection from among
+the whole body of knights in the convent, I could not have made a choice
+that would have suited me better. It seems to me that in each auberge
+the bailiff has endeavoured to pick out the seven young knights whom he
+considered would most worthily support the honour of the langue. Still,
+confident as I was before, I feel more so now, after the admiral's
+address to us.”
+
+“I had no fear either, Ralph, though doubtless the admiral's words
+will carry great weight with them. It was thoughtlessness rather than
+anything else that I dreaded; but now that the admiral himself has
+spoken to them, there is no fear that anything will occur to give us
+trouble. I have particularly noticed that when we have been on board,
+and have been laughing and chatting together before we got under way,
+their manner changed directly the first order was given, and that all
+the commands were carried out with as much goodwill and alacrity as if
+they were under Ricord himself.”
+
+On the following morning the knights all went on board the Santa
+Barbara. Their baggage was carried down by slaves, and by the personal
+servants from each auberge who were to go as their attendants during
+the voyage. The grand master had advanced Gervaise a sum equal to half a
+year's income of his commandery, and with this he had purchased a stock
+of the best wines, and various other luxuries, to supplement the rations
+supplied from the funds of the Order to knights when at sea. Gervaise
+had to go round early to the admiral to sign the receipt for stores and
+to receive his final orders in writing. All were, therefore, on board
+before him and, when he arrived, were drawn up in military order to
+receive him.
+
+Every knight was in full armour, and as, at a word from Ralph, they
+drew their swords and saluted the young commander, Gervaise felt with a
+thrill of pleasure and of confidence that with such a following he
+need not fear any encounter with a pirate force, unless in overwhelming
+numbers.
+
+The young knights were all, with the exception only of Ralph Harcourt,
+between the ages of seventeen and nineteen, and their young faces, free
+in most cases even from the suspicion of a moustache, looked almost
+those of boys. But there was no mistaking the ardour and enthusiasm in
+their faces, and the lack of breadth and weight, that years alone would
+give to them, was compensated by skill in their weapons, acquired by
+long and severe training, and by the activity and tireless energy of
+youth.
+
+“Knights and comrades,” Gervaise said as, after walking through the
+double line to the end of the poop he turned and faced them, “I am
+proud indeed to command so gallant a body of knights. The success of our
+expedition depends upon you rather than upon me, and as I feel assured
+of your warm cooperation I have no fear as to what the result will be,
+if Dame Fortune will but favour us by throwing in our way some of those
+scourges of the sea in search of whom we are about to set out. Many of
+us have already encountered them, and, fighting side by side with older
+knights, have borne our share of the work, while those who have not done
+so will, I am sure, do equally well when the opportunity arrives. We
+shall not this voyage have the encouragement and confidence inspired by
+the presence of those who have long and valiantly borne the standard of
+the Order; but, on the other hand, we have to show that we are worthy
+of the confidence reposed in us, and that the young knights of the Order
+can be trusted to emulate the deeds of those who have rendered the name
+of the Hospitallers a terror to the infidel.”
+
+A shout of approbation greeted the close of his address. Gervaise then
+walked forward to the end of the poop, and looked down upon the slaves,
+who, with their oars out, were awaiting the order to row.
+
+“Men,” he said in Turkish, “it is my desire that, while it is necessary
+that you should do your work, your lot shall be no heavier than can be
+avoided. You will not be taxed beyond your powers, save when the enemy
+is in sight, or there is supreme need for haste, but then you must be
+called upon for your utmost exertions. I wish your work to be willing.
+I abhor the use of the lash, and so long as each man does his fair quota
+of work, I have given the strictest orders that it shall never be used.
+I have, at my own cost, made provision that your daily rations shall be
+improved while under my command. Meat will be served out to you daily,
+when it can be obtained, and for those of you who hold that the strict
+tenets of your religion may be relaxed while engaged in such severe
+labour, a ration of wine will also be served out; and such other
+indulgences as are compatible with the discipline and safety of the
+ship, will also be granted to you.”
+
+There was a murmur of gratitude among the slaves. Gervaise then gave the
+order to row, and the galley started on her voyage. The knights had now
+fallen out from their ranks, and were soon laughing and talking gaily.
+Being all of noble families and knightly rank, there was, except when on
+actual duty, a tone of perfect equality and good fellowship prevailing
+among them. French was the common language, for as the Order was of
+French foundation, and three of the seven langues belonged to that
+country, most of the high dignitaries being chosen from their ranks,
+it was natural that the French language should be the general medium of
+communication between them.
+
+Until noon the slaves rowed steadily and well. Work was then stopped,
+for there was scarce a breath of wind stirring the water. Even under the
+awning that had, as the sun gained power, been erected over the poop,
+the heat was oppressive. The knights had all divested themselves of
+their armour, and most of them retired below for a siesta. As soon as
+the slaves stopped rowing, an awning, which Gervaise had purchased,
+and which was rolled up under the break of the poop, was, to their
+astonishment, drawn over them.
+
+“Don't you think you are spoiling your slaves, Sir Gervaise?” one of the
+Spanish knights asked doubtfully.
+
+“On the contrary, Sir Pedro, I hope that I am improving them. You have
+not worked as a galley slave, but I have, and I can assure you that I
+used to feel the hours when we were lying broiling in the sun, doing
+nothing, much more trying than those during which I was at work. I used
+to be quite giddy and sick with the heat, and on getting out the
+oars again had scarce strength to work them. But this is not the most
+important point. In port the slaves always sleep in the prison, but at
+sea they must rest on their benches; and to do so with clothes soaked
+with the heavy dew must be a severe trial, and most prejudicial to the
+health. The awning cost but a few ducats, and I reckon that, putting
+aside the comfort to the slaves, it will be very speedily repaid by
+their better health and capacity for labour. When away in the galley
+with Sir Louis Ricord, I used to feel the greatest pity for the
+unfortunate wretches when at daybreak, in their drenched clothes, and
+shivering with cold and wet, they rose to commence their work. I then
+took a vow that if ever I should come to command a galley I would
+provide an awning for the slaves.”
+
+Two or three of the knights standing by expressed their warm approval
+of what Gervaise said. There was, in those days, but little of that
+sentiment of humanity that is now prevalent, and slaves were everywhere
+regarded as mere beasts of burden rather than as human beings. When,
+however, they had the question put to them, as Gervaise had done, they
+were ready to give a hearty agreement, although it was the utilitarian
+rather than the humanitarian side of the question that recommended it
+to them. After three hours' rest the journey was renewed, and just
+at nightfall the galley anchored off an islet lying to the north of
+Carpathos.
+
+While the servants were laying the tables along the poop for the
+evening meal, Gervaise went down to see that his orders were carried out
+regarding the food for the slaves. They were already eating their
+bread and meat with an air of satisfaction that showed how warmly they
+appreciated the unusual indulgence, while there were few indeed who did
+not hold up their drinking horns as a servant passed along between the
+benches with a skin of wine. Gervaise spoke to many of them.
+
+“Ah, my lord,” one of them said, “if we were always treated like this,
+slavery would be endurable. For ten years have I rowed in Christian
+galleys, but never before has an awning been spread to keep off the sun
+or the dew. We shall not forget your kindness, my lord, and will row our
+hardest right cheerfully when you call upon us for an effort.”
+
+There was a murmur of assent from the galley slaves around.
+
+“May Allah be merciful to you, as you are merciful to us!” another slave
+exclaimed. “The blessing of those whom you regard as infidels can at
+least do you no harm.”
+
+“On the contrary, it can do me good,” Gervaise said. “The God you
+Moslems and we Christians worship is, I believe, the same, though under
+another name.”
+
+Gervaise had, indeed, during his long conversations with Suleiman Ali,
+often discussed with him the matter of his faith, and had come, in
+consequence, to regard it in a very different light to that in which it
+was viewed by his companions. There was faith in one God at the
+bottom of both Mohammedanism and Christianity. The Mohammedans held
+in reverence the lawgivers and prophets of the Old Testament, and even
+regarded Christ Himself as being a prophet. They had been grievously led
+away by Mahomet, whom Gervaise regarded as a false teacher; but as he
+had seen innumerable instances of the fidelity of the Moslems to their
+creed, and the punctuality and devotion with which the slaves said their
+daily prayers, exposed though they were to the scorn and even the anger
+of their taskmasters, he had quite lost, during his nine months
+of constant association with Suleiman Ali, the bigoted hatred of
+Mohammedanism so universal at the time. He regarded Moslems as foes to
+be opposed to the death; but he felt that it was unfair to hate them for
+being hostile to Christianity, of which they knew nothing.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIII THE FIRST PRIZES
+
+
+After leaving the slaves, Gervaise joined his companions on the poop.
+They were engaged in an animated discussion as to whether it was
+advisable to grant indulgences to slaves. The majority approved of the
+steps Gervaise had taken, but some asserted that these concessions would
+only lead them to look for more, and would create discontent among the
+crews of other galleys not so favoured.
+
+“Well, comrades,” said Gervaise, “I think that so far I am better
+qualified than any of you to give an opinion; but it may be that it will
+fall to the lot of some of you to be a slave in Turkish hands. In that
+case, I can affirm with certainty, that you will keenly appreciate any
+alleviation, however small, of your lot. You must remember that the one
+feeling of the slave is dull despair. Death is the only relief he has
+to look forward to. Do you think that a man so feeling can do his best,
+either at an oar or at any other kind of work? I am sure it would not be
+so in my case. But if you brighten his life a little, and show him
+that he is not regarded as merely a brute beast, and that you take some
+interest in him, he will work in a different spirit. Even viewed from a
+merely monetary point of view it must pay well to render him as content
+as possible with his lot. You know how great is the mortality among the
+slaves--how they pine away and die from no material malady that can be
+detected, but simply from hopelessness and weariness of life, aided,
+undoubtedly, in the case of the galley slaves, by sleeping in the damp
+night air after an exposure all day to the full heat of the sun. This
+brings an answer to your second objection. Undoubtedly it might cause
+discontent among the slaves of other galleys when they hear that others
+are treated better than themselves. But I hope that if, on our return,
+we bring back all our slaves in good condition and health, the contrast
+between their appearance and that of the slaves in most other galleys
+will be so marked that the admiral may consider it would be well to
+order awnings to be fixed to all the vessels of the Order, and even to
+grant to all slaves, when away on voyages, the little indulgences I
+have given them here. The expense would be very trifling, and it would
+certainly add a great deal to the average life of a slave, and would
+render him capable of better work. There is another advantage. If
+the Turks learn that their countrymen in our hands are treated with a
+certain amount of kindness and consideration, it might lead them to act
+similarly to those of our Order who may be unfortunate enough to fall
+into their hands.”
+
+“There is a great deal in what you say, Sir Gervaise,” one of the
+knights, who had before taken the opposite point of view, said. “There
+is no reason why our galley should not be a model one, and though, like
+enough, the seniors will laugh at our making innovations, D'Aubusson
+is a reformer, and will certainly support anything that he sees to be
+beneficial, from whatever quarter it comes.”
+
+Supper was now served, and the young knights were well pleased with the
+entertainment provided for them. It was the principal meal of the day.
+Their fast was broken by a glass of wine, a manchet of bread, and fruit
+soon after rising. At eleven o'clock they sat down to a more substantial
+meal; but in that climate the heat was at that hour considerable, and as
+there were duties to be performed, there was no sitting long at table.
+At supper the day's work was over, their appetite was sharpened by the
+cool evening breeze, and the meal was hearty and prolonged. After it was
+concluded, several of the knights brought up from below viols and other
+instruments of music; for the ability to accompany the voice with such
+an instrument was considered an essential part of the education of a
+knight.
+
+For some hours the songs and romances, so popular at the time, were sung
+in the various languages represented on board; then the knights, one by
+one, went down to their sleeping places, until only the seven knights of
+the langue of Auvergne, who were to watch the first night, remained on
+deck. Five of these wrapped themselves in their mantles and lay down on
+the benches. One of the others descended to the waist, walked along the
+plank between the lines of sleeping slaves, and took up his place in
+the bow, while the other paced up and down the poop, the fall of
+his footsteps being the only sound to break the silence that reigned
+throughout the ship.
+
+In the morning, as soon as the knights had all taken a plunge in the
+sea, the oars were got out, and the galley proceeded on her way. Passing
+through the islands and skirting the southern shore of Greece, she
+continued her course west. Malta was sighted, but they did not put in
+there. Pantellaria was passed, and in a fortnight after leaving Rhodes,
+Cape Bon, at the entrance to the bay of Tunis, was sighted. Until Greece
+was left behind them, the nights had generally been spent in small
+ports, where supplies of fresh meat, fish, and fruit, were obtainable.
+So far no incident had marked the voyage. The weather had continued
+fine, and they had heard nothing, from ships they had fallen in with,
+of any Moslem pirates having been seen. A few hours, however, after
+sighting the coast of Africa, a dark object was seen ahead.
+
+“It is a ship of some sort,” Ralph said; “but her masts have gone. It
+may be that she is a merchantman that has been captured and sacked by
+the Moorish pirates.”
+
+Orders were given to the rowers to quicken their pace, and in little
+over an hour they were alongside the hull. As soon as the vessels were
+close enough for those on the poop of the galley to look down on to
+the deck of the other craft, it was seen that Ralph's suppositions were
+correct. Two bodies lay stretched upon it. One was crushed under the
+fallen mast; the other lay huddled up in a heap, a cannon ball having
+almost torn him asunder. The knights leapt on to the deck as soon as the
+galley ran alongside. Gervaise made first for the man lying beneath the
+mast; as he came up to him, the sailor opened his eyes and murmured,
+“Water!” Gervaise called out to one of the servants to bring water from
+the galley, and, as soon as it came, poured some between the man's lips,
+and the knights by their united efforts lifted the mast from across his
+body. It was evident, however, that he had but a short time to live,
+and the dew of death was on his face. After a few minutes he rallied a
+little, and looked gratefully at his rescuers.
+
+“You have been attacked by pirates,” Gervaise said. “Was there one
+galley, or two?”
+
+“Three galleys,” the man replied in a faint whisper.
+
+“Do you know where they were from?”
+
+“Tripoli.”
+
+“How long ago?”
+
+“It was about three hours after sunrise when we saw them coming up,” the
+man said, his voice gaining in strength, as some wine they gave him took
+effect. “It was useless to fight, and I hauled down our flag, but in
+spite of that one of the pirates fired a broadside, and one of the
+shot hit the mast and brought it down, and I was crushed under it. They
+boarded us, took off all the crew as captives, and emptied the hold; I
+knew that I was done for, and begged them to kill me; but they paid
+no attention. I know a little of their language, and as I lay there I
+caught something of what they were saying; they are bound for the Island
+of Sardinia, where they have a rendezvous, and are to join a great
+gathering of their consorts. I don't know the name of the place, but it
+is on the east coast. More water!”
+
+Gervaise knelt to pour some water between his lips, when he gave a
+sudden cry, a shudder ran through his frame, and he was dead.
+
+“Let us return on board, gentlemen,” Gervaise said, rising to his feet.
+“We can do nothing here.”
+
+As soon as he regained the deck of the galley, he signed to Ralph to
+follow him below.
+
+“Now, Ralph,” he said, “this is one of those cases in which we have to
+decide whether we ought or ought not to be prudent. From what that poor
+fellow said, the pirates have about five hours' start of us, and as they
+can have no idea that they are pursued, we can doubtless overtake them
+before they reach Sardinia. The question is, ought we to pursue them at
+once, or ought we to coast along until we find Visconti's galley? Three
+of these Tripoli pirates, crowded as they always are with men, would
+prove serious opponents, yet we might engage them with a fair hope of
+victory. But we may be seriously disabled in the fight, and should be,
+perhaps, unable to carry the news to Genoa that there are many pirate
+ships gathering on the coast of Sardinia to prey upon their commerce.”
+
+“We might be days, or even weeks, before we light upon Visconti's
+galley, Gervaise, and even when we found it, he might not consider
+himself justified in leaving the coast where he is stationed. Besides,
+while we are spending our time looking for him, the pirates will be
+committing terrible depredations. It must be a big expedition, under
+some notorious pirate, or they would never venture so far north.”
+
+“Then you think that I should be justified in pursuing them alone. It is
+a fearful responsibility to have to decide.”
+
+“I think so, Gervaise. There is no saying what misfortunes might happen
+if we did not venture to do so.”
+
+“Very well then, so be it. But before deciding finally on so grave a
+matter, I will lay it before the company.”
+
+“There is no doubt as to what their decision will be,” Ralph said, with
+a smile.
+
+“Perhaps not, Ralph; but as they will be called upon to risk their lives
+in a dangerous enterprise, it is as well that they should have a say in
+the matter.”
+
+When they returned on to the poop, there was an expression of eagerness
+and excitement on the faces of the young knights which showed how
+anxiously they had been awaiting the result of the conference below.
+Gervaise stepped on to a bench, and motioned to them to close up round
+him.
+
+“Comrades,” he said, “although the responsibility of whatever course may
+be taken must rest upon my shoulders, yet I think it but right that,
+as a general before a battle often calls a council of war to assist him
+with its advice, so I should lay before you the two courses open to us,
+and ask your opinion upon them. Sir Ralph Harcourt and I are of one mind
+in the matter, but as the decision is a grave one we should be loath to
+act upon it without your concurrence.”
+
+He then repeated the alternatives as he had laid them before Ralph.
+“Now,” he went on, “as you see, there is grave danger, and much risk
+in the one course; but if successful its advantages are obvious. On
+the other hand, the second plan is more sure, more prudent, and more in
+accordance with the instructions I have received. I ask you to let me
+know frankly your opinion on the subject. If your view agrees with ours,
+although it will not relieve me from the responsibility of deciding,
+it will at least, in the event of things turning out badly, be a
+satisfaction to know that the course had your approval, and that it was
+your desire, as well as ours, that we should undertake it. First, then,
+let all who are in favour of following the pirates go to the starboard
+side of the deck, while those who are in favour of joining Visconti, and
+laying this serious matter we have discovered before him, move to the
+larboard side.”
+
+There was a rush of the knights to the right, and not one moved to the
+other side.
+
+“Your decision is the same as ours,” Gervaise said. “To the north, then!
+If there is great peril in the adventure, there is also great honour to
+be gained.”
+
+The knights gave a shout of satisfaction at finding that their choice
+was also that of the officers.
+
+“Lay her head to the north,” Gervaise said to the pilot. Then he went
+to the end of the poop, and ordered the slaves to row on. “Row a long,
+steady stroke, such as you can maintain for many hours. We have a long
+journey before us, and there is need for haste. Now is the time for
+willing work.”
+
+The oars dipped into the water, and the galley was soon moving along
+at a much faster pace than that at which they had performed the journey
+from Rhodes. The slaves had not, from their benches, been able to see
+what had passed on board the dismantled vessel, but from the order and
+the change of course, they had no doubt that the knights had obtained
+some clue to the direction taken by the corsairs who had captured and
+sacked the ship.
+
+“There is but little wind,” Gervaise said to Ralph, “and their sails
+will be of slight use to them; therefore we shall go fully three feet to
+their two. It is quite possible that we may not catch sight of them,
+for we cannot tell exactly the course they will take. We shall steer for
+Cape Carbonara, which is some hundred and thirty miles distant. If we
+do not see them by the time we get there, we shall be sure that we have
+passed them on the way, unless, indeed, a strong wind should spring up
+from the south. However, I hope that we shall catch sight of them before
+that, for we shall be able from our lookout to discover their masts and
+sails some eight or ten miles away, while they will not be able to see
+us until we are within half that distance. They cannot be more than
+twenty miles away now, for the light breeze will aid them but little,
+and as they will see no occasion for haste, they will not be rowing at
+their full power, with so long a passage before them.”
+
+Already, indeed, one of the knights had perched himself on the seat at
+the top of a low mast some fifteen feet above the poop, that served as a
+lookout.
+
+“You can see nothing yet, I suppose, Cairoli?”
+
+“No; the line of sea is clear all round.”
+
+It was indeed some four hours before the knight on the lookout cried
+that he could make out three dark specks on the horizon. Gervaise at
+once ascended to the lookout, by the ladder that was fixed against the
+post.
+
+“They are making to the left of the course we are taking. Turn her head
+rather more to the west. That will do. They are directly ahead now.” He
+then came down to the deck again. “I would that we had seven or eight
+more hours of daylight, Ralph, instead of but three at the outside.
+However, as we know the course they are taking, we are not likely to
+miss them, for as we shall not be near enough for them to make us out
+before the sun sets, there will be no chance of their changing it. Do
+you think they will row all night?”
+
+“I should not think so. If the land were nearer they might keep on until
+they make it, but as they have had no wind since daylight, they will lie
+on their oars until morning. You see, at sunset they will still be some
+eighty miles from Cape Carbonara, and the slaves could not possibly row
+that distance without rest; so that if we keep on we may take them by
+surprise.”
+
+“That is what I have been thinking, Ralph, but it would be well not to
+attack them until nearly daybreak. We should capture one galley easily
+enough; but the others, being ignorant of our force, might make off in
+different directions, and we might lose both of them. If, on the other
+hand, we could fall upon them a short time before daylight, we should be
+able to keep them in sight, and, even if they separated, they would soon
+come together and continue their course, or, as I hope, when they see
+that we are alone, bear up and fight us. I think that our best plan will
+be to row on until it is dark, then give the slaves six hours' rest, and
+after that go on quietly. If we can make them out, which we may do if
+they have lights on board, we will stop, and wait until it is the hour
+to attack them. If we miss them, we will row on to Sardinia and lie up,
+as we proposed, until they come along.”
+
+“I think that will be a very good plan, Gervaise.”
+
+Before sunset the three pirate ships could be clearly made out from the
+deck, but the pilot judged them to be fully ten miles away. Half an hour
+later the slaves were told to cease rowing. Gervaise had ordered the
+cooks to prepare them a good meal, and this was at once served, together
+with a full ration of wine. As soon as they had consumed it, they were
+told to lie down and sleep, as at one o'clock the galley would be again
+under way.
+
+The knights' supper was served below, as lights on the poop might be
+made out, should a lookout be placed by the corsairs in their tops.
+
+“We had better follow the example of the galley slaves,” Gervaise said,
+rising as soon as the meal was finished, “and, with the exception of
+Spain, who is on watch, turn in to sleep till we are off again. All of
+you will, of course, don your armour on rising.”
+
+At the appointed hour the galley was again under way. There was not a
+breath of air, and before starting, pieces of cloth were wrapped round
+the oars at the rowlocks to deaden the sound, which might otherwise have
+been heard at a considerable distance on so still a night. After an hour
+and a half's rowing, the knight on the lookout said that he could see a
+light some distance ahead. The pilot, an experienced old sailor, joined
+him, and speedily descended to the poop again.
+
+“It is a ship's light,” he said. “I should say that it was a lantern on
+board the ship of the captain of the expedition, and is shown to enable
+the other two to keep near him. I cannot say how far it is away, for
+I do not know at what height it hangs above the water; but I should
+imagine, from the feebleness of the light, that it must be some two
+miles distant.”
+
+As soon as the light had been noticed, the slaves had been ordered to
+cease rowing, and they were now told that they would not be required
+again for fully two hours. When the first gleam of dawn appeared in
+the east they were called to their work again. The lantern was still
+burning, and, in a quarter of an hour, the knights on the poop were
+able, in the broadening light, to make out three shadowy forms some
+two miles ahead of them. They decreased this distance by more than half
+before they could discern any signs of life or motion on board. Then
+a sudden stir was apparent; they could hear shouts from one vessel to
+another, oars were thrust out, and an effort made to get the heads of
+the ships in the same direction, so as to catch the light breeze that
+had just sprung up.
+
+The moment he saw that the galley was discovered, Gervaise shouted down
+to the slaves to row their hardest, and told the pilot to steer for the
+ship farthest to the east. She was some four or five hundred yards from
+her nearest consort, and the same distance separated that vessel from
+the third craft.
+
+“We shall have time to carry her, Ralph, before the others come to her
+assistance, and they will only arrive one at a time. If we were to lie
+alongside the middle craft, which is probably that of the chief, as it
+is she that has the light burning, we might have the other two upon us
+before we had done with her, for she is evidently the largest, and most
+likely the strongest handed, of them.”
+
+The leader of the pirates evidently saw that there was no chance of
+evading the fight. A flag was run up to the masthead of his ship, and
+the three vessels began to endeavour to turn, so as to meet the galley.
+The operation, however, took some time. In the confusion, orders were
+misunderstood, and instead of all the slaves on one side rowing whilst
+those on the other side backed, all order was lost, and long before the
+craft for which the galley was making had got round, the latter was upon
+her.
+
+“Shall I ram her, Sir Gervaise?” the pilot asked.
+
+“No; we might damage ourselves; besides, I do not want to sink her.
+Sheer away the oars on one side!”
+
+The galley carried eight guns--three on each side of the poop, and two
+forward; and these had been loaded with small pieces of iron. A few
+shots had been fired by the pirates, but, owing to the confusion that
+prevailed on board, the guns were discharged so hurriedly that the shot
+either flew overhead or passed wide of the galley. Excited as the young
+knights were, and eager for the fray, a general laugh broke out as the
+galley swept along by the pirate ship, breaking many of her oars, and
+hurling all the slaves who manned them backwards off their benches. A
+moment later the guns poured their iron contents among the pirates who
+clustered thickly on the forecastle and poop, and as the vessels grated
+together the knights sprang on board the corsair.
+
+The members of the English langue had each been provided with short
+pieces of rope, and before joining their companions in the fray they
+lashed the vessels together, side by side. The fight was a very short
+one. France and Auvergne, led by Ralph Harcourt, boarded at the bow, the
+other five langues at the poop; and so impetuous was their onset that
+the pirates, who had still scarce recovered from their surprise at being
+hastily aroused from sleep to repel the attack of the foe who had so
+suddenly sprung out from the darkness upon them, offered but a feeble
+resistance. Many threw themselves overboard, and swam to the ship
+nearest to them; others were cut down; and the rest flung away their
+arms, and cried for quarter.
+
+All who did so were, without the loss of a minute's time, thrown down
+into the hold of their ship, and the hatches secured over them. It had
+before been arranged that Ralph should take the command of the corsair,
+having with him France, Auvergne, and Germany. As soon, therefore, as
+the captives were fastened below, Gervaise called the knights of the
+other four langues back to the deck of the galley. The lashings were
+cast off, she was pushed from the side of the prize, and the oars were
+got out. There was no time to be lost, for the largest of the three
+pirate ships, which had, directly it was seen that her consort
+was captured, poured two heavy broadsides into the prize, was now
+approaching--rowing but slowly, however, for the third vessel to come
+up.
+
+She was but a hundred yards away when the galley swept round the bow of
+the prize and advanced to meet her. As she did so, Ralph discharged the
+eight guns of the prize, which he had at once reloaded, into the bow of
+the corsair, the shot raking the crowded deck from end to end. When but
+a few yards distant, the two bow guns of the galley poured in a shower
+of missiles, and a moment later she ran alongside the pirate, the poop
+guns, as before, preparing the way for the boarders. But no sooner had
+they leapt on deck than they were met by the pirates, headed by their
+captain.
+
+Gervaise had specially charged the knights not to allow themselves to
+be carried away by their ardour. “We are sure to be greatly outnumbered,
+and, when we first spring on board, we must cut our way across the deck,
+and then form ourselves in a double or treble line across it, and, so
+fighting, gradually force them before us.”
+
+This, in spite of the efforts of the pirates, was accomplished, and,
+once formed, the corsairs strove in vain to break through the wall
+of steel. For a time, however, no forward movement could be made, so
+furious were the attacks upon them, led by the pirate chief. Several
+times breaches were made in the front rank, but the knights behind each
+time bore back the assault, and restored the line. The knights had won
+their way half along the poop when a yell of exultation rose from the
+corsairs as the third of their vessels rowed up on the other side of the
+galley, and her crew sprang on board it. Gervaise called the knights of
+the second line from their places, and ranged them along the bulwark, to
+prevent the Moors from boarding from the poop of the galley.
+
+Then for a moment he looked round. The prize was creeping up, and was a
+length or two away, coming up alongside. Its approach was also noticed
+by the pirates, who, with wild shouts, flung themselves upon their
+opponents. Gervaise sprang forward to take the place of a young Italian
+knight, who staggered back, with his helmet cleft by a heavy blow from
+the keen yataghan of the pirate captain. The corsair, shouting his war
+cry of “Allah!” sprang with the bound of a wild cat upon Gervaise; his
+weapon descended on his uplifted guard, and shore right through the
+stout blade. With a shout of triumph, the corsair raised his arm to
+repeat the blow; but Gervaise in turn sprang forward, and struck with
+all his force with the pommel of his sword on the forehead of his
+opponent. The latter fell as if shot, his weapon dropping from his hand
+beside him.
+
+Dismayed at the fall of their leader, his followers recoiled for a
+moment. Another tall pirate sprang forward to take his place, and,
+shouting to them to follow, was about to throw himself upon Gervaise,
+when a gun crashed out close alongside. A storm of iron swept away the
+front line of Moors, and the shout of “St. John!” “St. John!” rose above
+the din. It was one of the bow guns of the prize, and as she swept along
+gun after gun poured its contents among the pirates.
+
+“Do you clear the galley, Ralph. We can manage here now,” Gervaise said,
+as Ralph leapt on board. The latter, followed by his party of knights,
+rushed across the poop, and sprang on to the galley among the pirates,
+who had been striving in vain to break through the line of defenders.
+Gervaise called to his party to follow him, and, taking the offensive,
+fell upon the remnant of the corsairs who still held the forward end of
+the poop.
+
+The discharge of the cannon at such close quarters had wrought terrible
+havoc among them, and the pirates, with but slight resistance, turned,
+and either ran down the ladder or leapt into the water. The knights
+followed them forward among the benches of the rowers, who cheered
+loudly in many tongues as they passed them. At the forecastle the Moors
+made another stand, but the knights forced their way up, and in two
+minutes all was over.
+
+“Now to the aid of our comrades!” Gervaise shouted, as the last of the
+corsairs was struck down.
+
+Ralph's party had indeed cleared the poop of the galley, but they in
+vain endeavoured to climb up on to that of the third pirate ship, whose
+superior height gave a great advantage to its defenders. Gervaise leapt
+down on to the bow of the galley, followed by the knights, and then ran
+aft until he could climb into the waist of the pirate. So intent were
+the corsairs upon defending the poop that they did not see what was
+going on elsewhere, and Gervaise had obtained a fair footing before he
+was noticed. Then a number of men ran down and attacked his party. But
+it was too late, for the whole of the knights had, by this time, leaped
+on board. Their assailants were forced back, and, pressing close upon
+them, the knights gained the poop before the main body of the pirates
+were aware of their coming.
+
+Warned by the shouts and shrieks of their comrades that they had been
+taken in the rear, the Moslems who were defending the side of the poop
+wavered for a moment. Ralph took advantage of their hesitation, and
+sprang on board, his companions pouring in after him. There was a
+stern and desperate fight. The Moslems fought with the fury of despair,
+disdaining to ask or accept quarter. A few leapt overboard, preferring
+death by drowning to that by the swords of the Christians; but the great
+majority died fighting to the last. A shout of triumph rose from the
+knights as the last of the Moslems fell.
+
+The first impulse of all of them was to take off their helmets in order
+to breathe the fresh air, and for a while they all stood panting from
+their exertions.
+
+“Nobly and gallantly done, comrades!” Gervaise exclaimed. “This is
+indeed a victory of which we have all a right to be proud. Now, the
+first thing is to free the slaves of their shackles; there are many
+white faces among them. Let our langue look after the wounded, while the
+released captives clear the decks of the bodies of the fallen pirates.”
+
+It took an hour's hard work to knock off the chains of the slaves. The
+greater portion of them were Christians--Greeks, Italians, Spaniards,
+and French, who had been captured in various raids by the corsairs; and
+among them were the crew of the ship that had been overhauled by the
+galley on the previous day. Besides these, there were a few Moslems who
+had been sentenced to labour in the galleys for various crimes.
+
+Among the Christians, the joy at their liberation was intense. Some
+laughed, some cried, others were too overcome to speak coherently. Among
+the rest were found, to the intense pleasure of their rescuers, three
+knights of the Order who had for years been missing. They had been taken
+prisoners on an island at which the galley to which they belonged
+had touched. Many of the knights had landed, and three of them, all
+belonging to the langue of Italy, had wandered away from the rest, and
+had not returned. A search had been made for them, and it was discovered
+that a struggle had taken place. As there were no marks of blood, it
+was supposed that they were suddenly pounced upon by a party of hidden
+marauders, who had been watching them from some hiding place, and had
+thrown themselves upon the knights before they had had time to draw
+their swords. Following the trail by bushes broken down, and plants
+crushed under foot, it was found to lead to a creek on the other side
+of the island. Here there were signs that a craft had been anchored,
+as there were the ashes of fires, fragments of food, and other matters,
+scattered about on the shore. Hours had passed before the knights had
+been missed, and therefore the craft in which they had been carried off
+was long out of sight. Letters were written by the grand master to
+the Pasha of Syria, to the Emperor of Egypt, and to the Bey of Tunis,
+offering to ransom the knights, but all replied that they were unaware
+of any such captives having been landed.
+
+An attempt had then been made to ascertain whether they had been carried
+to Tripoli; but the bey had little authority over the various tribesmen
+along the coast, and only replied that no such captives had been sold in
+the city. Thus all hope of ransoming them had died away, and their names
+were inscribed in the list of those who had fallen into the hands of the
+infidels, but of whose subsequent fate no clue could be obtained.
+
+All were greatly emaciated, and their faces showed signs of the
+sufferings they had undergone. The young knights were all familiar
+with their names, but personally none had known them, for they had been
+carried off two or three months before Gervaise and Ralph Harcourt had
+arrived at Rhodes.
+
+All three had struggled desperately to break their chains while the
+fight was going on, and had, as soon as the contest was decided, risen
+to their feet and shouted the battle cry of the Order; then, overcome by
+their emotions, they sank down upon their benches, and remained as if
+in a stupor until the knights, who had hurried first to them, struck
+off their fetters. Then the three men grasped each other's hands, while
+tears streamed down their cheeks.
+
+“It is no dream, comrades,” one of them said, in a hoarse voice. “We are
+free again. Let us first return thanks to God for our release, and then
+we can thank these our brothers.”
+
+The three knights knelt at the benches where they had toiled and
+suffered, and hid their faces in their hands. No sounds came from their
+lips, but their stifled sobs and the heaving of their naked shoulders,
+seamed and scarred by the strokes of their taskmasters' whips, told
+the young knights, who stood unhelmeted and silent around, how deep was
+their emotion. Then they rose.
+
+“I am Fabricius Caretto,” one said; “this is Giacomo Da Vinci; this
+Pietro Forzi: all knight commanders of the Order, and now for six years
+prisoners in the hands of these corsairs. Assuredly no one would know
+us, so changed are we.” He looked round inquiringly for a familiar face.
+“Your commander must surely be a comrade of ours?”
+
+“We know all your names,” Gervaise said, coming forward, “though none
+of us reached the convent until after your capture. I have the honour
+to command this galley. My name is Gervaise Tresham, and I have for my
+lieutenant Sir Ralph Harcourt. All of us, glad as we are at the capture
+we have effected of these three corsairs, are still more pleased that we
+should have been the means of rescuing three noble knights of our Order
+from captivity. Now, I pray you first of all to accompany me on
+board the galley, where we will do all we can to make you forget the
+sufferings you have gone through. After you have bathed, and reclad
+yourselves, I will present to you the knights my comrades, amongst whom
+are seven of your own langue. Three of these I will tell off to see to
+your comfort, for, as you will understand, I have my hands full indeed
+at present.”
+
+“First, before all things, Sir Knight, let me express to you all our
+deep gratitude and our admiration of the gallant deed that you have
+accomplished in thus, single handed, capturing three vessels belonging
+to the fiercest and most dreaded of the corsairs of Tripoli. God bless
+you all, sirs”--and his voice broke again--“for the deed you have done,
+and for bringing us out of this living hell!”
+
+Gervaise called to three of the Italian knights, and, followed by them
+and the released captives, led the way to the galley. Here he left them
+in charge of their countrymen. “Give them each a draught of old Cyprus,
+and something to eat,” he said aside to one of the knights; “they sorely
+need refreshment before aught else, for, as you see, they are well nigh
+dazed with this unlooked for change. I will put out clothes enough
+for one of them; the others you must supply for the present from your
+stores. Now I must be off.”
+
+There was indeed much to be done. Four of the knights were told off to
+attend upon the most urgent cases among their own wounded. Only two of
+their number had been killed outright, but there were four serious cases
+among the wounded, while eight or ten others had received wounds that
+required bandaging and attending to. As fast as the slaves' fetters
+were struck off, food and wine were given to them, together with such
+garments as could be found at the moment. Then the bodies of the fallen
+pirates were thrown overboard, while the wounded were attended to, and
+the released Christians were divided equally between the three prizes.
+To each of these the knights of one of the langues were told off, the
+seniors being appointed to the command. There were in all some ninety
+Christian captives on board the three ships. Thus each vessel had a
+complement of seven knights and thirty Christians, and to these were
+added ten of the thirty Moslems found at the oars, and fifteen of the
+pirates to whom quarter had been given.
+
+It was past noon before all these arrangements had been made, and during
+the time so occupied, the ships lay idly side by side, drifting slowly
+before the wind, the sails having been lowered as soon as the struggle
+was over. Up to this time, the knights had been too busily engaged to
+think of food, but they were right glad when they were summoned to a
+meal on board the galley.
+
+Gervaise found the three knights in the cabin, dressed in the usual
+attire of the Order. They presented a very different appearance, indeed,
+to that which they wore when he had first seen them. They had bathed,
+and combed their matted hair, which was alone sufficient to transform
+them, but the feeling that they were once more free men, and knights of
+an honoured Order, had done even more to effect the change; and although
+they looked thin and worn, the martial bearing had come back naturally
+as they donned their knightly robes and buckled on swords.
+
+“I am glad to see that you are better,” Gervaise said, as he went up to
+greet them. “Twenty years seem to have dropped off your shoulders since
+this morning.”
+
+“We are not the same men, Sir Gervaise. We were slaves, and are now
+free. We were Christian dogs; now we are Christian knights. We were
+subject to scoffs and blows; now, thank God, we have swords to strike
+with, and though as yet our arms may not have regained their full
+strength, we could at least bear a share in a fray. Our comrades have
+been telling us somewhat of how this wonderful thing has come about,
+and have been explaining what at first filled us with surprise, that a
+galley should be manned solely by young knights, of whom their commander
+is one of the youngest. We can testify, at least, that had the grand
+master been himself in command, and his crew composed of veteran
+knights, he could have done no better.”
+
+“We were fortunate in taking them so much by surprise that the first of
+their ships fell into our hands before her consorts could come to her
+assistance; and her guns did us good service in our struggle with the
+others.”
+
+“The matter was well arranged, as well as gallantly fought,” one of the
+other knights said. “Had you first fallen foul of the chief's galley,
+it would have gone hard with you, for his crew were so strong that you
+could scarce have overcome them before the other two vessels came up to
+his assistance.”
+
+“Now let us to our meal,” Gervaise said.
+
+The three knights were placed at the head of the table by him, and it
+was pleasant to see how they enjoyed their food.
+
+“I can scarce persuade myself that I am not dreaming,” Caretto said.
+“Sometimes, when lying at night, wet through with the damp air, I have
+wondered to myself whether I could ever have lived thus, and whether
+I should ever exchange my hard bread and water for what seemed to me
+fabulous luxuries, though at the time one had taken them as a matter of
+course. You cannot tell how strange it feels to me to come back to the
+old life again.”
+
+“You will soon be accustomed to it,” Gervaise said, with a smile, “and
+then you will look upon your captivity as a dream, just as you then
+regarded your past life.”
+
+“I suppose, Sir Gervaise,” Pietro Forzi said, “that you will sail direct
+for Rhodes with your prizes?”
+
+“No indeed,” Gervaise replied. “At the same time that we learned, from a
+dying man left on board the ship the pirates captured yesterday, of
+the course they had taken, and were so enabled to follow them, we also
+learned that they were on their way to join a corsair fleet that was
+collecting at some point on the eastern side of Sardinia, with the
+intention of sweeping the coast of Italy. It was this, rather than the
+capture of these three vessels, that induced us to disobey the general
+instructions we had been given to cruise along the northern coast of
+Africa, and determined us to push north to give warning along the coast
+from Naples to Genoa of the danger that threatened, and, if possible, to
+enable Genoa to fit out her galleys to encounter the corsairs. That duty
+has still to be fulfilled, though I fear that Genoa will be able to
+do little, for of late she has been engaged in a long civil struggle
+between her great families, and has taken but a small part in maritime
+affairs. However, we can at least warn her, as well as Naples, Pisa,
+and other towns, and may possibly find some opportunity for ourselves
+striking another blow against the pirates.”
+
+“If so, certainly we shall be glad to accompany you, if you will allow
+us to serve under you; for nothing would please us so much as the
+opportunity of paying off a small share of the vengeance we owe them.
+But of course, if you would rather, we will sail for Rhodes in the
+prizes.”
+
+“I am not thinking of sending them to Rhodes at present,” Gervaise said.
+“It seems to me that we may be able, in some way, to utilise them to
+advantage. They have their sails, and rowers for the oars. There will
+be, in each, besides seven knights of the Order, thirty men who, like
+yourselves, must feel willing to strike a blow at their late oppressors.
+I need hardly say that I shall be glad indeed to have the company and
+aid of three such well known knights of the Order, and would, could I
+do so, gladly resign my command into your experienced hands. But this
+I cannot do, and, anticipating that you would be willing to join us in
+this expedition, I have been thinking how I could best utilise your aid.
+I have thought that, if you would accept the positions, I would appoint
+one of you to each of the prizes, to act, not as its commander, but as
+the leader of the band of released captives. Most of them are sailors,
+of course, and with them you could work the guns and give effective aid
+to the little party of knights in any actual fight.”
+
+The three knights all exclaimed that they would gladly accept the posts
+he offered them.
+
+“The idea is a capital one, Sir Gervaise; and, as long as it does
+not come to close fighting, the three ships should be able to render
+efficient aid to your galley in any encounter. They will be, at any
+rate, a match for their own number of pirate ships,” Caretto said.
+
+As soon as the meal concluded, the Moslem captives were questioned one
+by one as to the rendezvous at which the pirate fleet was to assemble;
+all, however, protested that the place was known only to the three
+commanders, all of whom had fallen in the fight.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIV THE CORSAIR FLEET
+
+
+An hour later all was ready for a start. The knights of the langues of
+France, Germany, and Spain went on board their respective ships, as did
+the three parties of released captives, with the knights who were to
+command them, while the rowers took their seats on the benches, shackled
+with the chains that had recently held the Christians. The wind was from
+the south, and with sails and oars the prizes were able to keep fairly
+abreast of the galley. With a few short intervals of rest, the slaves
+continued their work all night, until, shortly before daybreak, land was
+seen ahead, and the pilot at once pronounced it to be Cape Carbonara.
+
+“A good landfall, Gervaise,” Ralph said. “The pilot has done right well.
+I suppose you mean to anchor when you get there?”
+
+“Certainly, Ralph. The slaves will have rowed nearly eighteen hours,
+with only two hours' rest. They must have some hours, at least, of sleep
+before we go on. As you and I have been up all night, we will turn in
+also. We will send a boat ashore to try and find out from the natives
+they may come across whether any vessels, bearing the appearance of
+Moorish corsairs, have been seen passing up the coast, and also to find
+out what bays and inlets there are where they would be likely to anchor.
+Some of the Italian knights had best go with the boat, for though I
+believe these people speak a different dialect to those of the mainland,
+they would have more chance of understanding them than any of the
+others.”
+
+The sun had risen when the little fleet came to an anchor close to the
+cape. A boat was at once prepared to go ashore, and Gervaise begged
+Fabricius Caretto, the senior of the rescued Italian knights, to
+endeavour to find out whether a swift sailing craft of some kind could
+be hired. If so, he was to secure her on any terms, and come off in her
+at once to the galley.
+
+Gervaise had already talked the matter over with Ralph, and they agreed
+that a strongly manned craft of this kind would go faster than any of
+those they had taken, and that, moreover, it would be a pity to weaken
+their force by sending one of the prizes away. Having seen them off,
+Gervaise retired to the cabin and threw himself down for a short sleep,
+leaving the knights who had been off watch during the night, to see
+that all went well. In two hours he was roused. A native craft had come
+alongside with Sir Fabricius Caretto.
+
+“I think she is just the craft for us,” the knight said, as Gervaise
+came on deck. “She belongs to a large fishing village just round the
+point to the left. There were several boats there, but the villagers all
+said that this was the speediest vessel anywhere along the coast. She
+belongs to two brothers, who, with four men, constitute her regular
+crew; but I have arranged for twelve others to go in her, in order that
+they may row her along at a good pace if the wind falls light.”
+
+“Are your companions come off yet?”
+
+“No; but we can hoist a flag for their recall.”
+
+“Do so. I shall be greatly obliged if you will undertake this mission to
+the seaports. It needs one of name and rank to speak with the nobles and
+officials authoritatively.”
+
+“I will gladly do so, Sir Gervaise. Give me your instructions, and you
+can rely upon my carrying them out.”
+
+“I thank you greatly, Sir Fabricius, and shall be glad if you will take
+with you any two of the knights you may select. I have to write letters
+for you to deliver to the authorities at Naples, Pisa, and Genoa. I
+shall write but briefly, and leave you to explain matters more fully. I
+shall merely say that I have intelligence of the arrival here of a fleet
+of Moorish corsairs, of whose strength I am ignorant, but that assuredly
+their intention is to make a raid on the commerce of the coast, and
+perhaps to land at unprotected places. At Ostia, after warning the
+authorities to send orders along the coast for the inhabitants to be on
+their guard, pray them to carry word at once to Rome, and request his
+Holiness the Pope to order some armed galleys to put to sea as soon
+as possible. Beg them at Naples and Pisa to do the same thing. But of
+course it is from Genoa that we must hope for the most assistance.
+
+“In each place you will, if possible, see the syndic himself, and such
+of his council as can be got quickly together. The moment you have done
+all you can at Genoa sail for the Island of Madalena, which lies off the
+northeastern point of the island. There you will either find us, or a
+boat with a message where to direct your course. I think perhaps it will
+be best to omit Naples--it will save you fully a day, if not two, to do
+so. Pray them at Ostia to send off news down the coast, or to request
+the papal authorities to despatch mounted messengers. 'Tis likely that,
+at first, at any rate, the corsairs will try the narrower waters to the
+north. From here to Ostia is nigh two hundred miles, and if the wind is
+brisk you may arrive there tomorrow afternoon, and start again at night,
+arriving at Pisa before noon on the following day; while, allowing for
+four or five hours to ascend the river there, you may be at Genoa next
+morning.
+
+“Three hours should suffice to gather from the authorities what force
+they can despatch, and as soon as you have learned this, embark again
+and sail south. You may reach Madalena in two days. Thus, at the
+earliest, it must be from six to seven days before you can bring us the
+news there; if you meet with calms or foul winds you may be well nigh
+double that time. If at Ostia you can get a faster craft than this, hire
+it, or take a relay of fresh rowers. I will furnish you with means when
+I give you the letters.”
+
+In less than half an hour Gervaise was on deck again. The boat had
+returned with the other Italian knights. An ample store of provisions
+had been placed on board the Sperondra, both for the crew and for the
+three knights, and, without a minute's delay, these took their places on
+board, the great sails were hoisted, and the craft glided rapidly away.
+
+“The villagers spoke truly as to her speed,” Ralph said, as they looked
+after her. “Even with this light wind, she is running fully six miles an
+hour, and as, by the look of the sky, there will be more of it soon, she
+will make the run to Ostia well within the time we calculated.”
+
+Gervaise now questioned the other Italian knights as to what information
+they had gained.
+
+They said the peasants had told them that several strange craft, using
+both oars and sails, had been noticed passing northwards, and that so
+strong was the opinion that these were either Algerines or Tunisians
+that, for the last three or four days, none of the fishing craft had
+ventured to put to sea. They were able to tell but little as to the
+bays along the coastline, which they described as very rugged and
+precipitous. Five or six little streams ran, they knew, down from
+the mountains. They thought the most likely places for corsairs to
+rendezvous would be in a deep indentation north of Cape Bellavista, or
+behind Cape Comino. If not at these places, they might meet in the great
+bay at whose entrance stands Tavolara Island, and that beyond, there
+were several deep inlets on the northeastern coast of the Island.
+Gervaise had a consultation with Ralph.
+
+“The first thing is to find out where these corsairs have their meeting
+place, Ralph; and this must be done without their catching sight of the
+galley or of the prizes, which some of them would be sure to recognise.”
+
+Ralph nodded.
+
+“It is a difficult question, Gervaise. Of course, if we had a boat
+speedy enough to row away from the corsairs it would be easy enough; but
+with wind and oars they go so fast that no boat could escape them.”
+
+“That is quite certain, Ralph; and therefore, if it is done by a boat,
+it must be by one so small and insignificant that they would pay but
+little attention to it if they caught sight of it. My idea is that we
+should take our own little boat, which is a fast one, paint it black, to
+give it the appearance of a fisherman's boat, and hire a couple of good
+rowers from the village. This, with one knight dressed as a fisherman,
+should go ahead of us, and explore every inlet where ships could be
+sheltered. We would follow ten miles behind. When we get near the places
+where the natives think the fleet is likely to be, the boat must go on
+at night, while we anchor. In that way they ought to be able to discover
+the corsairs, while themselves unseen, and to gain some idea of their
+numbers and the position in which they are anchored, and bring us back
+news.”
+
+“Shall I go myself, Gervaise?”
+
+“I could not spare you, Ralph. The risk of capture does not seem to me
+to be great, but there certainly is a risk, and I dare not part with
+you. It had better be an Italian, because there will doubtless be an
+opportunity of landing at villages and questioning the inhabitants,
+therefore we will send Fosco. If there are some eight or ten corsairs
+gathered in any of these bays the news is sure to travel along the
+shore, and we may get some tidings in that way. The first thing is to
+send off to the village again to fetch two young fishermen; they must
+be active fellows, strong, and possessed of some courage. I will ask da
+Vinci to go himself and select them. While he is away we will paint our
+boat black, and make ready for her to start at once; the sooner she is
+off the better.”
+
+The Italian knight at once undertook the mission, and started for the
+shore. Fosco, who had been chosen principally because he was light of
+frame, as well as very shrewd and intelligent, was then called up, and
+his mission explained to him. He was delighted at having been selected.
+Gervaise took him down to the cabin, and they consulted the maps with
+which the galley was furnished.
+
+“You will row on to Muravera; it is some twenty miles from here. You
+see, the village lies at the mouth of a river. As soon as you arrive
+there, you will land and find out whether there is any report of
+Moorish pirates having been seen along the coast. We shall be there this
+evening, and you will come on board and report. Next day you will get to
+Lunasei, which is about five miles on this side of Cape Bellavista, and
+they will certainly know there if the pirates are lying behind the cape.
+If they are so, you will row back to meet us; if they are not, you will
+remain there until we come up in the evening. Remember that, should you
+on either day be seen and chased, and you find they are overtaking you,
+you will make for the shore, land, and conceal yourselves. We shall keep
+along near the coast, and as we pass you can come down to the water's
+edge and signal to us to take you off. Now you had better disguise
+yourself, so as to be in readiness to start as soon as da Vinci
+comes off with the men. You will only need to take a small stock of
+provisions, as each night you can replenish them here.”
+
+An hour later da Vinci came off with two stalwart young fishermen. The
+little boat had already been painted, and it was lowered at once; Fosco
+stepped into it, and started.
+
+Two hours later the prizes got up sail, and, accompanied by the galley,
+coasted quietly along the shore, arriving, late in the afternoon, at
+Muravera. Fosco at once came on board.
+
+“There is no news here beyond that which we gained this morning, Sir
+Gervaise,” he said. “Strange ships have certainly been seen sailing
+north, but they did not approach the coast.”
+
+A similar report was given at Lunasei; there were certainly no corsairs
+lying behind Cape Bellavista, or news would assuredly have reached the
+village. At Orosei, next day, the report was the same; there were no
+strange ships at Cape Comino. They had been warned overnight that
+the coast beyond the cape was so precipitous, that there would be no
+villages at which to make inquiries, and arranged with Fosco that the
+ships should anchor north of the cape, and that he should go on at once
+to inspect the next bay. If he found ships there, he was to return at
+once; if not, he was, at daybreak, to land at one of the villages in the
+bay, and to make inquiries.
+
+No news was brought in by him during the night.
+
+“It is evident the pirates are not in the bay, Gervaise,” Ralph said, as
+they came on deck at daybreak.
+
+“Yes; and I am glad of it. It is a large bay, and if the Genoese send
+half a dozen galleys, some of the pirates might still escape, while the
+next bays are deeper and narrower, and it would be more easy to entrap
+them all. I have all along thought it most probable that they would
+rendezvous there. The maps show no villages for many miles round, and
+they might lie there for weeks without so much as a shepherd getting
+sight of them from the cliffs. Moreover, it is the nearest point for
+cutting off ships coming down between Corsica and the mainland, and they
+can, besides, snap up those proceeding from the south to Marseilles, as
+these, for the most part, pass between Sardinia and Corsica.”
+
+At eight o'clock the boat was seen coming round the point.
+
+“Any news, Fosco?” Gervaise asked, as it approached the galley.
+
+“None, Sir Gervaise. They have heard nothing of pirates, nor seen
+anything of them.”
+
+Exclamations of disappointment broke from the knights.
+
+“That makes it all the more likely,” Gervaise said, “that they are
+lying in one of the inlets to the north. You see, lower down they kept
+comparatively close to the shore, being careless who might notice them;
+but as they approached their rendezvous, they would be more careful, and
+might either pass along at night, or keep far out. If they had not been
+anxious to conceal their near presence, they would have been likely to
+put into this bay in search of plunder and captives; for Tempe, one of
+the largest of the Sardinian towns, lies but a short distance away, and
+there must be a considerable amount of traffic.”
+
+“There are four or five small craft lying there,” Fosco, who had by this
+time stepped on board, put in, “and a considerable number of fishing
+boats. When I came upon the ships in the dark, I thought at first that
+I had lighted on the pirates, but on letting the boat drift closely by
+them I soon saw they were not corsair galleys.”
+
+“Shall we get up anchor and go into the bay?” Ralph asked.
+
+“It were safer not to do so, Ralph. Possibly one of the craft lying
+there might be presently captured by them, and they might learn from her
+crew of the presence of a galley of the Order there. Therefore I think
+it best to remain where we are till nightfall, and then to proceed and
+anchor on the north side of the Island of Madalena, if we can find a
+sheltered cove where we could not be seen either from the land or by
+passing ships.”
+
+During the day there was a good deal of discussion among the knights
+as to whether the corsairs might not already have sailed away. It was
+evident that if all their ships had arrived, there would be no motive
+for delay. Three ships they knew would never join them, and others might
+have been detained, from some cause or another. There could be no doubt
+that the pirates had already ample force for capturing as many merchant
+vessels as they might come across. But it might be intended to carry out
+some more daring project--to sack and burn towns along the coast, carry
+off the leading people for ransom, and fill the vessels with slaves--the
+attack being made simultaneously on several unprotected towns. A vast
+amount of plunder could thus be reaped, together with captives of even
+greater money value. Were this their plan, they would doubtless delay
+until all those who had promised to join in the expedition had arrived.
+The balance of opinion, then, was that the corsairs were still in
+hiding.
+
+By daybreak next morning they were moored in a sheltered little bay to
+the north of Madalena, the galley lying inside the prizes, so as to be
+concealed as much as possible from view of any craft that might happen
+to pass the mouth of the bay. Fosco started as soon as darkness fell in
+the evening, and returned early in the morning.
+
+“They are there,” he shouted, as he neared the galley, “hidden in a deep
+inlet that runs into one of the narrow bays.”
+
+“How many are there of them?”
+
+“Seventeen or eighteen, I could not say which. They are all moored side
+by side.”
+
+By this time Fosco's boat had reached the galley.
+
+“You have done well indeed,” Gervaise said, as the young knight ascended
+to the poop. “Now give us a full account of what you have seen.”
+
+“As you know, Sir Gervaise, the bay opposite this island splits up into
+two, running a long way inland, like the fangs of a great tooth. I had,
+of course, no difficulty in finding the entrance to the bay itself, as
+it is but a short distance across the strait. I steered first for the
+left hand shore, and kept close along under the shadow of the cliffs,
+which, in many cases, rise almost straight out from the water. We rowed
+very quietly, fearing to run against a rock; for although it was light
+enough to see across the water, and to make out any craft that might be
+anchored there, it was very dark along the foot of the cliffs. There was
+no need for haste, as I knew I had plenty of time to explore both arms
+of the bay, and to be back here before day began to break.
+
+“We rowed up to the end of the inlet, and then, having assured ourselves
+that it was empty, came down the other side, and turned up the western
+arm. We had got some distance along when I fancied I heard voices,
+and so let the boat drift along, only dipping the oars in the water
+occasionally. I could make out no signs whatever of the corsairs, when
+suddenly we came upon a break in the cliffs. It was only some fifty
+yards across, and here a creek came in at right angles to the shore.
+I could have given a shout of pleasure as I looked up it, for there a
+score of lights were burning above a dark mass, and we could hear the
+sound of talking and laughter. It was but a glimpse I caught, for the
+men at once backed water, and we were soon round the corner again.
+
+“Up till then the fishermen had been ready enough to go where I wanted,
+but the sight of that clump of galleys regularly scared them, and they
+wanted to row straight away; but of course I pointed out to them that
+they had taken pay to do this thing, and that they had to do it. They
+said that if caught they would be either killed or made slaves of, and
+I could not contradict them, but said that, in the first place, as I was
+ready to run the risk, there was no reason why they shouldn't do so, and
+in the second, there was no chance whatever of their being taken, as,
+if discovered, we should get so long a start that we could either escape
+them altogether or run the boat ashore at some point where the trees
+came down to the water's edge, carry the boat up and hide it, and then
+move up into the hills until the corsairs had gone.
+
+“We waited there three or four hours, looking round the point
+occasionally. At the end of that time all was quiet. Two or three of
+the lanterns still burned, but there was no sign of life or movement on
+their decks. After waiting another half hour to ensure the crews being
+asleep, we rowed quietly up the creek, keeping within an oar's length of
+the rocks. There was not much to see; the galleys lay two abreast, and
+as there was no space between them, I supposed the whole were lashed
+together. There were eight of them on the side we went along, but I
+think there were only seven on the other side. As I thought it did not
+much matter whether there were fifteen or sixteen, and as the men were
+in a state of horrible fright, we turned and went back again, and I own
+I felt very glad myself when we got round the point without an alarm
+being given. We came quietly out, and it was fortunate we did so, for we
+had not gone a quarter of a mile when we heard the sound of oars, and,
+lying silently under the cliff, we saw two large galleys row past us.”
+
+“It is a strong force, Gervaise,” Ralph said, as they paced up and down
+the poop together. “Probably in each of those galleys are eighty or a
+hundred men, in addition to the rowers. It is evident that unless Genoa
+sends us help we shall not be able to interfere with their plans.”
+
+“I don't know, Ralph. I think we may injure them sorely, though we might
+not be able to defeat them altogether. I want you tonight to take one of
+the prizes, and row round to the bay we passed, and there to buy three
+coasting vessels and six or eight fishing boats. Get as much pitch,
+oil, and other combustibles, as you can purchase in the villages on
+the shore. If you can engage a score of fishermen to man them, all the
+better. My idea is that if Caretto returns with news that the Genoese
+have no galleys ready for sea, we must do what we can to injure these
+corsairs. If we smear these craft you are going to fetch with pitch and
+oil, and fill the holds with combustibles, and so turn them into fire
+ships, we may at least do the pirates a tremendous lot of harm. When we
+get to the mouth of this inlet, we could have the fire ships rowed in by
+three or four men in each, they having a boat behind in which to escape
+as soon as the boats are lighted. The sight of a dozen craft coming
+down on them in flames would cause a terrific panic, for, moored closely
+together, as they are, if one took fire there would be little chance
+of the others escaping. Of course, we should add to the confusion by
+opening a fire with all our guns, and could hope to capture some at
+least of them as they tried to make their way out.”
+
+“It is a grand idea, Gervaise; a splendid idea! It would be a terrific
+blow to the Moors, and would make the sea safe from them for a long
+time.”
+
+“When you buy the other things, Ralph, get a quantity of black cloth--it
+matters not how coarse, or of what material; and also some white. As
+soon as you come back with it, all hands shall set to work to make the
+stuff up into mantles of the Order, with the white cross. We will put
+these on to the Christians in the prizes, and the Moors will suppose
+that they are attacked by four of the galleys of the Order. If you can
+get some more arms and some iron headpieces, all the better.”
+
+“I will do what I can, Gervaise; the arms will certainly be wanted,
+for those we found on the decks were sufficient only to arm half the
+Christians. As to the steel caps, that will not matter so much, as in
+the darkness and confusion the sight of the mantles will be quite enough
+to convince the corsairs that we are all knights of the Order. By the
+way, Gervaise, we have not yet looked into the holds of the prizes.”
+
+“That is so, Ralph; we knew, of course, that as the ships had but
+just started we should find nothing in them save the cargo of that
+unfortunate craft they captured.”
+
+On searching they found, as they had expected, that the cargo of the
+captured ship had been of no great value. It consisted of wine, olive
+oil, and grain. These were all useful, for the number of mouths to be
+fed was considerable, and heavy inroads had already been made on the
+stores of the galley. The rowers of the four vessels were at once set to
+work to crush the grain between flat stones brought from the shore, and
+an ample supply of coarse flour for their use for at least a fortnight
+was obtained before sunset.
+
+As soon as darkness fell, Ralph and two of the French knights started
+in one of the prizes. Late on the following afternoon a sail was seen
+coming from the north, and before the sun set they were able to make
+her out to be the craft in which Caretto had sailed. The anchor of
+the galley was at once got up, and she rowed out to meet the boat and
+conduct her into the little bay. It was almost dark when they came
+within hailing distance.
+
+“What news do you bring, Sir Fabricius?”
+
+“Bad news, I regret to say. I do not think that Genoa will be able to
+send out any galleys for at least a fortnight. There have been civil
+dissensions, and fighting between rival factions, and in consequence her
+ships are all dismantled and laid up. Crews will have to be collected
+for them, repairs executed, and officers chosen; a fortnight will be the
+earliest time in which they can be here. Pisa has no war galleys, and
+unless the Pope sends some out directly he gets the news, the corsairs
+will have it their own way. Have you discovered them?”
+
+“Yes; they lie but a few miles from here. There were fifteen or sixteen
+of them two days ago, and two others joined them that night. You have
+lost no time indeed. We had scarce begun to expect you, Sir Fabricius,”
+ he added, as the knight and his two comrades stepped on board.
+
+“I have done my best,” the knight said angrily. “But I am in a rage with
+my ill success. All I have accomplished is that no merchant vessels will
+put to sea at present. At Ostia they would only send off a message to
+Rome, to ask for orders. At Pisa the authorities at first treated my
+story as a fiction, and, I believe, took me for an impostor; but on the
+news spreading, some knights came forward and recognised me. Then we had
+a meeting of the council. All talked, wrangled, and protested. They said
+that it was absurd to suppose that they could, at a moment's notice, fit
+out ships to cope with a fleet of corsairs; and their sole idea was to
+man the forts, and to repel an attack. However, mounted messengers
+were sent off at once, up and down the coast, to give warning to the
+inhabitants of the towns to put themselves into a posture of defence,
+and to the villagers to fly with their wives and families into the
+interior as soon as they saw galleys of doubtful appearance approaching.
+I was there but four hours, and then started for Genoa.”
+
+“There was almost a panic there too, as the members of the council were
+mostly merchants, and were filled with dismay for the safety of their
+ships and goods at sea. Of course, there was no thought that the
+corsairs, however strong, would venture an attack upon Genoa itself.
+I told them that you had captured three of the corsairs with a single
+galley, and that if they could send you ten others you would probably be
+able to make head against the pirates; but, as I have told you, Genoa
+is at peace with all the world; her war galleys are laid up, and most of
+them would need repair and recaulking before they would be fit to send
+to sea. Although they maintained that no more than a week should elapse
+before they would be ready to sail I am right sure that it will be
+double that time before they are fitted out.
+
+“Of course, in Genoa I was well known, though my family estates lie near
+Mantua, and my acquaintances flocked round me and urged me to stay until
+the galleys were ready for sea. This I would not hear of, and, six hours
+after my arrival, started again. We made the voyage to Corsica at a good
+speed, but since then we have had the oars constantly out to help the
+sails. The men have well earned their pay, I can assure you. It is
+enough to make one mad with rage to think that these pirates will be
+able to harry the coast of Italy at their pleasure; for there can
+be little chance that they will abide quiet much longer at this
+rendezvous.”
+
+“It is annoying, indeed,” Gervaise agreed; and a murmur of
+disappointment ran round the assembled knights. “However, we have the
+consolation that we have done all we could, and I am sure that we shall
+do so in the future.”
+
+Gervaise had charged Ralph to say nothing about the object of his
+mission, and the general supposition was that he had sailed to endeavour
+to purchase some bullocks, as the supply of meat was nearly exhausted.
+Ralph himself had let drop a few words to this effect, and had indeed
+been charged by Gervaise to bring off a few oxen if they could be
+obtained without loss of time. Gervaise was on deck at midnight, and
+soon afterwards the beat of oars was heard. It was a still night,
+and one of the knights on watch remarked to him, “It seems to me, Sir
+Gervaise, that the sound is a confused one, and that there must be
+several vessels rowing. Shall I call up our companions? It may be that
+it is the pirate fleet coming out.”
+
+“You need not do that,” Gervaise replied. “I am expecting Sir Ralph to
+bring back with him some fishing boats, for which I think I can find a
+use. We should have heard before this if the corsairs had been putting
+out. Fosco is in his boat watching the mouth of the inlet, and would
+have started with the news had there been any stir on board their
+galleys.”
+
+It was a quarter of an hour before a number of dark objects entered the
+little bay. As soon as they did so, they ceased rowing, and the splashes
+of the anchors as they fell into the water were heard. Then came the
+sound of a boat's oars, and Ralph was soon alongside.
+
+“I see that you have succeeded, Ralph.”
+
+“There is no fear of failing when one is ready to pay the full value of
+what one wants to get. I have bought three coasters and eight fishing
+boats, and have a sufficient store of pitch and oil, with plenty of
+straw and faggots. There was no difficulty in getting men to come with
+me. As soon as they heard that a fleet of eighteen Moorish galleys was
+in the next bay, they were ready enough to aid in any plan for their
+destruction, for they knew well enough that some of them would be sure
+to make raids all along the coast, sacking and burning, and carrying off
+men, women, and children, as slaves. I said I only wanted two men for
+each craft, but so many were willing to come that I have some thirty
+more than the number I asked for, and we can divide these among us. They
+are strong, active looking fellows.”
+
+“We will keep them here then, Ralph. You see, there are one-and-twenty
+of our knights in the three prizes, and as we lost two in the
+capture, and four others are not fit to put on armour, we have but
+six-and-twenty, and the addition will be very welcome. What are they
+armed with?”
+
+“They have bows and arrows, and long pikes and axes.”
+
+“Good. Have you managed to collect any more arms?”
+
+“Yes. The people are all charcoal burners and woodmen in winter, and
+I was therefore able to get together some thirty or forty axes and
+hatchets, which will be ample, with the arms we took from the Moors, to
+equip the ninety Christians.”
+
+“I think we can depend upon these for fighting, Ralph.”
+
+“I don't think there is any doubt about that. A few of them are pretty
+well worn out with labour and suffering, but all have gained strength
+and spirits greatly in the past week, and you may be sure that they
+will fight to the death rather than run the risk of another turn in the
+galleys.”
+
+“And have you got the stuff to make the mantles?”
+
+“Yes. There was plenty of the coarse black cloth which they wear in
+summer--in winter, of course, they are clad in sheepskins; and I have
+sufficient white cotton cloth to make the crosses.”
+
+“We have only one thing to wish for now, Ralph, and that is, that the
+corsairs may not take it into their heads to sail tomorrow. Fosco will
+bring me news at daybreak, and we will at once send another boat off to
+watch the mouth of the bay when he leaves it. If they sail, we cannot
+venture to attack them as long as they keep together, the odds are far
+too heavy, and our only plan will be to follow them at a distance, when
+we can just keep their upper sails in sight, and then to attack any
+detachment that may separate from the main body.”
+
+“I hope it will not come to that, Gervaise. It would be hard indeed,
+when you have devised such a splendid plan, and we have got everything
+ready to carry it out, if they were to give us the slip. Do the others
+know anything about it yet?”
+
+“No. I thought it better to keep silence till tomorrow. No doubt some of
+the galley slaves understand enough of one or other of our languages
+to gather what is on foot. Besides, their late captives might, in their
+satisfaction at the thought of revenge, say enough to them to let them
+know that an attack on their fleet was intended, and one of them might,
+in some way, free himself from his irons and swim ashore. We know there
+is a small fishing village across the island, and there would be no
+difficulty in stealing a boat and making off with the news. I do not say
+that the risk is great; still, it were better not to throw away even
+a chance. The knights have all turned in in a very gloomy mood, for
+Caretto has returned with news that there is no hope of assistance from
+Genoa for a fortnight, and it seemed, therefore, that all our pains had
+been thrown away. And now we may as well turn in until daylight.”
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XV A SPLENDID EXPLOIT
+
+
+Gervaise was up again at dawn. He was amused at the wonder of the
+knights, as they came up one by one, at the sight of the little fleet
+anchored outside them. As soon as it was fairly daylight, he sent off to
+the three prizes to request all the knights to come on board the galley.
+When all were assembled there he said, “You are all aware, comrades,
+that Sir Fabricius Caretto has brought news that the galleys at Genoa
+are all laid up, and that it will be a fortnight before they can put to
+sea. Long before that, the corsairs will assuredly be ravaging all the
+villages and small towns along the coast of Italy, unless we can prevent
+their doing so. It would be simple madness to try to attack them at sea;
+of that I feel sure you are all conscious. It would be only throwing
+away our lives and our galley.”
+
+There was a murmur of assent among the knights. They were ready for any
+encounter in which there was a chance, however faint, of success; but
+all saw that for a single galley to attack one of the largest corsair
+fleets that had ever set out, would be nothing short of insanity. Their
+leader's words, however, seemed to show that he had some plan in his
+mind by which he hoped to strike a blow at the enemy, and all listened
+eagerly for what was coming.
+
+“We have heard from our comrade Fosco that their ships lie moored in two
+lines, side by side in a narrow inlet. He has returned this morning with
+the news that they are still there. He thinks that three or four more
+have arrived during the last two days, and it is probable they are
+waiting for the three we captured to join them. Tonight it is my
+intention to attack them, but not by rowing in and boarding them, for
+that would be hopeless. Yesterday Sir Ralph Harcourt went, as you are
+aware, to fetch provisions. But this was a part only of the object of
+his trip. He has, as you see, brought back eleven craft with him; these,
+I may tell you, are laden with combustibles--pitch, oil, straw, and
+faggots. They will be rowed and towed to the inlet tonight, set on fire,
+and launched against the pirates.”
+
+An enthusiastic cheer broke from the knights. They saw at once that,
+lying as the corsairs were, side by side, the destruction of many of
+them was certain.
+
+“He has also brought fishermen,” Gervaise went on, “two or three of whom
+will go in each fire ship, having a boat towing behind, in which they
+will escape as soon as the craft are alongside the galleys. The galley
+and the three prizes will take their post at the mouth of the inlet.
+The fire of our guns will add to the confusion among the pirates, and we
+shall endeavour to fall upon any galleys that may extricate themselves
+from the mass, and try to make their escape. Sir Ralph has brought back
+materials for making ninety mantles of the Order, for the Christians on
+board the three prizes, and thirty fishermen to bring the crew of our
+galley up to its full strength. The light of the flames will suffice
+to show the pirates that, as they will believe, four vessels, manned
+by knights of the Order, are barring the entrance. Many will, we may
+calculate, jump overboard and swim ashore rather than face us, and we
+shall be able, at any rate, to capture three or four of their craft,
+for, as they come out, one by one, we can all close round them; and with
+nearly fifty knights, ninety released captives, burning for vengeance,
+and some fifty or sixty fishermen, for those from the fire ships will,
+of course, join us--we shall make short work of them, and may even hope
+to entirely destroy their fleet.”
+
+Again a joyous shout rose from the knights. This would indeed be an
+exploit that all might be proud to share in, and, breaking the ranks in
+which they had stood while Gervaise addressed them, they crowded round
+him with exclamations of enthusiasm and devotion.
+
+“Now,” he said, as soon as silence was a little restored, “the knights
+of the langues on board the prizes will send at once to the coaster on
+the left of the other two. Sir Ralph will go there now, and supply each
+with materials for making the mantles for the Christians; he has brought
+thread, and fish bone needles. You will see that the stuff is cut up
+into suitable lengths, and handed over to your crews, and that each man
+makes up his mantle. There can be but little sewing required for these
+sleeveless gowns, nor need it be carefully done. The great thing is that
+the white crosses shall be conspicuous. As soon as you have set them
+to work, you will examine the state of the arms, see how many more are
+needed to complete the list, and then send off to Sir Ralph, who will
+furnish as many as are required: the fishermen have brought their
+own weapons. See that the slaves are all well fed today, and, before
+evening, inspect well their fetters, so that you may be free from all
+anxiety as to an attempt by them to escape during the conflict.
+
+“The rest of you will go on board these native craft, and see that
+the combustibles are fairly distributed among them, the wood and straw
+soaked with pitch and oil, as also the sails and ropes, and that the
+decks are well coated; this is a most important duty. Get some torches
+made also, so that there shall be two on board each craft; these are to
+be lighted the last thing before we get to the point, and will be thrown
+down into the straw and faggots in the hold, by the fishermen when they
+get close to the corsairs. All this can be prepared before our morning
+meal, and when you assemble here I hope to receive your reports that
+everything is in readiness. One of the other coasters has some bullocks
+on board. Sir Ralph will send one to each of the prizes, and one to us.
+They had better be killed and cut up at once, in order that the crews
+may have two good meals today of fresh meat. See that the galley slaves
+have their share.”
+
+No time was lost in carrying out the orders. Ralph, as soon as the
+cloth, arms, and meat were distributed, went round in a boat to see that
+the combustibles were properly laid for firing, and everything done to
+insure that the flames should spread rapidly. The Sards shared in
+the work, and rations and wine were distributed to them; and when the
+knights sat down to their meal on board the galley, they were able to
+report that everything was in perfect readiness, and that the work of
+sewing the mantles was making good progress.
+
+The day passed slowly to the young knights, all of whom were burning
+with excitement at the thought of the coming fray. The released
+Christians were no less exultant at the prospect of taking vengeance for
+the sufferings they had so long endured, and the scene on board all four
+ships was most animated.
+
+After talking it over with Ralph, Gervaise told off three more of the
+knights to each of the prizes, so that there should be ten on board
+each. This reduced the strength on board the galley to seventeen; but as
+they would have the assistance of a strong band of Sards they considered
+this to be ample, under the circumstances. It was arranged that the
+galley, with one of the prizes, should close with the first corsair that
+came out, and that the other two prizes should attack the second. After
+capturing these, they were to assist each other as circumstances might
+dictate. Gervaise strongly impressed upon the knights in command of each
+prize that they were not, single handed, to attack a corsair unless one
+of their consorts was near, and free to give assistance.
+
+“We must run no risk of a reverse,” he said. “We are certain of
+destroying many of their vessels and of breaking up their fleet, and it
+is far better that a few should escape than that we should run the risk
+of losing ten of our number, to say nothing of those we have rescued
+from captivity. In the excitement of the fight this order must be
+strictly borne in mind. Our victory must be marred by no misfortune
+brought on by headstrong rashness. The corsairs are bound to be very
+strongly manned, and ten knights, even aided by such assistance as
+they may get from the Christians, might find themselves altogether over
+matched against a crowd of desperate men.”
+
+As soon as it was dusk the anchors were drawn up, and the fleet got
+under way. They proceeded but slowly, for the wind was light, and the
+fishing boats moved heavily through the water. There was, however, no
+occasion for speed, for Gervaise did not wish to commence the attack
+until past midnight. The guns had all been loaded before starting, and a
+pile of ammunition was placed near each. Presently the wind nearly died
+out, and the galley and prizes then took the coasters and fishing craft
+in tow. It was nearly one o'clock when they got within half a mile of
+the inlet. The tow ropes were then thrown off, the fishermen got out
+sweeps, and the galley led the way, the fire ships followed in a body,
+and the three prizes brought up the rear. The oars had all been muffled,
+and slowly they made their way, until Fosco, who was standing next to
+Gervaise on board the galley, said that the point just ahead marked the
+entrance to the inlet. They then stopped rowing until the fire ships
+were all close up.
+
+These were, as had previously been arranged, in two lines. Five fishing
+boats, each manned by four men and having its small boat in tow behind
+it, formed the first line; the three coasters, each with six men at the
+oars, and the three other fishing boats, formed the second. The torches
+were now lighted. Ralph took his place in the centre boat of the first
+line; Gervaise went on board one of the coasters, and the order was
+given to the men to row. What wind there was was favourable, blowing
+from the northwest, and therefore right into the inlet. Scarcely had the
+first boats reached the entrance when a shout was heard.
+
+“Row, men, your hardest now!” Ralph shouted; the Sards bent to their
+oars, and the five boats advanced rapidly towards the corsairs. As they
+did so, a babel of shouts and cries rose from the dark mass of ships,
+which swelled into a tumult of alarm as on Ralph's order, “Throw your
+torches into the straw!” a flash of flame leapt up from each boat. Five
+more strokes, and they were alongside the two outside ships. As they
+crashed heavily into them, the men leapt from their seats and sprang
+over into the small boats, threw off the painters, and rowed astern,
+opening on either hand to allow the second line of fire ships to pass.
+These, by Gervaise's directions, divided, and three bore along on either
+side of the corsairs, and then ran in among them, throwing grapnels to
+fasten the fire ships alongside. Then, as the flames sprang up from the
+holds, the crews betook themselves to their boats, and rowed out of the
+inlet.
+
+By the time they reached the galley and prizes, the eleven fire ships
+were a mass of flame, which was spreading to the corsairs. Lying packed
+together as these were, the confusion was terrible. Numbers of men
+endeavoured to push off the fire ships, but it was too late; others
+tried to extricate their galleys from the mass, throwing off the
+hawsers, and striving with hand and oar to push their vessels out of the
+line. As soon as the boats were alongside the galley, the guns of the
+four vessels opened fire with grape into the crowded ships, now lit up
+by the flames as clearly as at noontide, while the battle cry of the
+Order sounded high above the din.
+
+“Nothing can save the ships near this end of the line,” Ralph said, “but
+some of those behind may make their way out between the others and the
+rocks. I can see that some of them there are lowering their yards and
+sails to prevent their catching fire as they pass.”
+
+The knights distributed among the guns worked them incessantly,
+directing their fire chiefly against the outside ships, so as to hinder
+the crews in their endeavours to arrest the progress of the flames; but
+they were soon able to fire impartially into the mass. As the heat of
+the flames drove the pirates back, scores of men leapt overboard, and
+made for the shore. Presently, two or three ships were seen making their
+way along the narrow line of water on either side of the flaming group
+in front. As the first advanced, the galley and one of the prizes rowed
+a short distance forward to meet it. Its deck was crowded with men,
+among whom a discharge of the cannon from both ships created terrible
+slaughter.
+
+A moment afterwards they closed with it, one on either side, and the
+knights, the released captives, and the Sards, sprang down on to its
+deck. The fight lasted but a minute. Appalled by the disaster that had
+befallen them, by the terrible effect of the broadsides, poured in at a
+few yards' distance, and by the sight of so many of the dreaded warriors
+of the Cross, some of the corsairs threw down their arms and flung
+themselves on the deck or into the hold, crying for quarter; those who
+resisted fell either under the swords of the knights, the vengeful axes
+of the late captives, or the pikes of the Sards; but the great bulk,
+leaping from the bow or stern, swam ashore.
+
+“Back to your ships!” Gervaise shouted, the moment resistance ceased.
+“Leave her floating here; she will help to block the way.”
+
+Six vessels alone managed to make their escape from the blazing mass of
+ships, and all of these were captured almost as easily as the first had
+been. As soon as it seemed that all the remainder were involved in
+the flames, boats were lowered and sent on board the prizes to take
+possession. Save for the wounded on the decks, they were entirely
+deserted by their crews, as those who had run below, as soon as they
+found that their captors had left the vessels, dropped into the water,
+and made their way, either by swimming or with the assistance of oars,
+to the shore. There remained only the slaves, chained to their benches.
+A few of these had been killed by the broadsides; but the guns had been
+aimed at the poops and forecastles, where the corsairs were clustered
+together, and consequently the number of galley slaves who had fallen
+was comparatively small.
+
+In none of the galleys was the proportion of Christians anything like so
+large as that in the three prizes first taken, the greater portion being
+men of inland tribes who had been captured in warfare, or malefactors
+who, instead of being executed, had been sold to the corsairs.
+Nevertheless, in the six galleys some seventy Christians were found,
+and at once freed. It was terrible to think that in the galleys that had
+been destroyed a large number of Christians must have perished in the
+flames, and Gervaise expressed bitter regret that he had not considered
+that his attack by fire ships must necessarily involve the loss of so
+many Christian lives.
+
+“It can't be helped,” Ralph said, as Gervaise poured out his feelings to
+him. “To very many of them death must have been welcome, and if we had
+not attacked them as we did, and they had sailed for Italy, hundreds,
+if not thousands, of Christians would have been killed, and as many more
+carried away into captivity; so, you see, the balance is all in favour
+of the course we adopted.”
+
+Gervaise admitted this, but nevertheless his regret at the fate of
+so many unfortunate captives quite overpowered for the time his
+satisfaction at the complete success that had been achieved. The victory
+had been almost a bloodless one on the part of the assailants. A few of
+the knights had received wounds. Two among the Christian crews had been
+killed, and four Sards; while two score had received wounds more or less
+serious, as, unlike the knights, they had no defensive armour. While
+waiting for daylight to appear, all their wounds were dressed and
+bandaged by the knights.
+
+In the morning the captured galleys were towed out, and anchored a short
+distance away, and then Gervaise rowed up to the head of the inlet,
+followed by the other three ships. They found that eleven of the
+corsairs had been burnt, and to their satisfaction, they discovered four
+uninjured galleys lying there, deserted, save by the slaves.
+
+Seeing the fate of their comrades who had first issued out, the
+commanders had, instead of trying to escape, rowed quietly to the head
+of the inlet, the movement being covered by the flame and smoke, and had
+there landed, having laden themselves with stores for their support on
+shore. This was a great satisfaction to the knights, for not only did
+it swell the list of prizes, but it reduced by over thirty the number of
+Christian slaves who had perished in the flames. Taking the galleys
+in tow, they rowed out of the inlet, whose banks were strewn with half
+charred timbers, oars, and relics of the fight.
+
+As soon as they had anchored by the side of their first prizes, a
+council was held on board the Santa Barbara. It was clearly impossible
+to take thirteen prizes to Rhodes, for there would be but three or four
+knights to each, and were they to fall in with but one Moorish pirate,
+they might suffer great disaster, while, should they meet with a storm,
+they would fare badly indeed, as they could not depend upon the rescued
+Christians for the management of the sails and oars in heavy weather. At
+the same time, all were most anxious that the prizes should be carried
+to Rhodes. Never, save as the result of some great battle, had such a
+fleet of captured galleys been brought in, and the knights were prepared
+to endure all dangers rather than part with one of them. Finally, after
+much discussion, it was determined that they should make for Genoa. From
+thence the rescued captives would be able to find their way to their
+homes. The great majority were Italians and Spaniards; the former could
+proceed by land or sea to their respective homes, while the Spaniards
+would have no long time to wait before a vessel of their own nationality
+entered the port, even if one were not lying there when they arrived.
+Moreover, in any case it would be necessary to despatch a vessel to
+Genoa, in order that it might be known that the danger was averted, and
+that there was no longer any necessity for getting the galleys ready for
+sea.
+
+The chief ostensible reason, however, for going to Genoa was that there
+would be no difficulty in engaging as many sailors as might be necessary
+to take the prizes to Rhodes. Underlying all the arguments was another
+reason which Ralph laughingly stated.
+
+“It is all very well to bring forward one argument after another, but
+not one of you has the courage to say what I am sure all of you have
+at the bottom of your hearts. You know very well that you want to go to
+Genoa to enjoy a triumph. The Rhodians are all very well, but there are
+very many more fair faces at Genoa. Fie, Sir Knights! Such a spirit is
+little in accordance with the vows of the Order. Are we not bound to
+humility? And here you are all longing for the plaudits of the nobles
+and ladies of Genoa!”
+
+Some of the young knights laughed, others coloured hotly.
+
+“They need not be ashamed of the feeling,” Caretto said. “Is it not the
+ardent desire of all true knights to do gallant deeds, and do they not
+value above all things the guerdon of applause from the fair eyes of
+ladies. Your comrades have performed the gallant deeds, and well deserve
+the reward. Now, Sir Gervaise, if not for this reason, at any rate for
+the others that have been brought forward, I suppose we are all agreed
+that we sail for Genoa. For our part we are heartily glad that such
+is your decision. We, and the young knights of our langue, have many
+friends there, and in their name I am sure I can promise you a reception
+as hearty and sincere as that which we shall ourselves receive.”
+
+It was settled that the rescued captives should be divided equally
+among the thirteen prizes, and that three knights should go in each. The
+Moorish captives were also divided equally among them, to aid with the
+sails, and to row a few oars, in case of a dead calm setting in. The
+commands were distributed according to seniority, the three rescued
+Italian knights remaining on board the Santa Barbara with Gervaise.
+
+The Sards were anxious to return to their villages, in order to carry
+the news that several hundreds of Moorish pirates had landed.
+
+“We shall have great trouble with them,” one of the young fishermen,
+who spoke a little Italian, said to Gervaise. “There are always a great
+number of swine, and herds of goats, up among the forests on the hills.
+We must send up and drive in as many of these as possible, and of course
+we shall send messengers to Tempe; but it will need a very large force
+to combat these pirates, who will be able to come down and plunder
+and destroy, and then retire to the hills, whence it will be hard to
+dislodge them.”
+
+“I am sorry indeed that such trouble should have been caused to you,”
+ Gervaise replied; “but I am afraid that I can give you no assistance.”
+
+“We shall hunt them down in time,” the Sard said confidently.
+
+“There are many villages scattered about Tempe, and what with us
+fishermen, and the woodmen and charcoal burners, we shall soon get a
+strong body together. Besides, we know the mountains, and they do not.”
+
+“I should say that you had best avoid a pitched battle with them, but
+keep on harassing them by night and day, cutting off all who separate
+themselves from the main body, until at last they are completely worn
+out.”
+
+“We shall deal with them, Sir Knight. We are all hunters, for there are
+wild boars and stags in the forest, and wolves too, and wild sheep on
+the higher mountains. Every man among us can use his bow skillfully, and
+wield pike and hatchet. The hunt will not be unprofitable, either, for
+we can get a good price for all we take alive, to work in the mines.”
+
+An hour later one of the galleys started with the Sards for their
+villages in the bay of Tempe. After landing them, she was to rejoin the
+rest of the fleet at their former anchorage at Madalena. By nightfall
+all were gathered there, and the next morning they set out for Genoa.
+The wind was light; but in their anxiety to return home as soon as
+possible the released captives all volunteered to take their former
+places on the benches, and the vessels were kept going at a fair rate
+of speed. Two days' rowing took them to Bastia, where their approach
+created unbounded excitement until the banner of the Order was seen
+floating from the stern of the Santa Barbara, while smaller flags, that
+had been hastily manufactured, flew from the mastheads of the thirteen
+prizes. Even then the inhabitants feared to put out, believing that
+the flags were but a ruse, and numbers of them fled at once, with their
+families and valuables, to the mountains. It was not until a boat was
+lowered, and Ralph, accompanied by three or four other knights, rowed
+ashore, that the panic was allayed.
+
+As soon as it was understood that the galley of the knights had not only
+captured the thirteen corsairs, but had destroyed eleven others, and had
+thus annihilated a fleet that was intended to prey upon the commerce
+of Italy, and ravage the western coast, the alarm was succeeded by the
+wildest enthusiasm. By the time Ralph had obtained the fresh meat and
+stores he came ashore to purchase, the greater part of the population
+were gathered on the shore, and a flotilla of boats put out with him,
+filled with picturesquely dressed men and women. Some carried flags,
+others green boughs, while the ladies had bouquets and baskets of fruit.
+The galley was the first attraction, and, mounting her sides, the ladies
+presented their offerings of fruit, while the men cheered, and waved
+their hats; many musicians came out in the boats, and these played on
+bagpipes and three-reeded flutes a succession of airs peculiar to the
+island.
+
+Gervaise received his visitors on the poop. These were at first
+altogether incredulous when told that it was the lad before them who
+had commanded the galley, had performed such a remarkable feat, and had
+freed them from a terrible danger. The youth of the knights of the Order
+no less surprised them, and had not Gervaise assured them that it was
+altogether contrary to the rules of the Order for a knight to allow
+himself to be embraced, many of the ladies would have taken this form
+of showing their enthusiasm and gratitude. The next morning the fleet
+started for Genoa. The wind was much stronger than it had been on the
+previous day, and it was therefore unnecessary for the oars to be put
+out, except, indeed, on board the galley. There, at nightfall, the
+Christians relieved the slaves for some hours at their benches, and the
+next morning the circle of hills round Genoa, with the city nestling at
+their feet on the water's edge, and climbing for some distance up their
+slopes, was in view. Caretto at once suggested that it would be well to
+signal to the fleet to lie to.
+
+“If we do not do so,” he said, “they will assuredly think that it is the
+corsair fleet advancing to attack and burn the vessels in port, and you
+may be saluted as you approach by a shower of cannonballs. If you will
+permit me, Sir Gervaise, I will go forward in one of the prizes and
+explain matters, and will return here in a short time.”
+
+“Thank you, Sir Fabricius. As such mischance as you mention might indeed
+very well occur, we will lower sail and lie here until you return.”
+
+While Caretto was away, the knights and crews breakfasted, and the
+former put on their armour and gayest attire, in readiness for the
+landing. Gervaise, although with much inward vexation, considered it
+necessary to do the same.
+
+“I do wish,” he said to Ralph, who was smiling at his rueful face, “that
+you could for today take my place, and let me pass as lieutenant.”
+
+“I should not mind at all, Gervaise. But you must put up with the
+disagreeables as well as the advantages of being commander, and must
+submit to be honoured and feted here, as well as getting no end of
+credit at Rhodes. You will have the satisfaction of well deserving it,
+for I am sure the plan of attacking them with fire ships would never
+have occurred to any one else, and if it had not been for that, we
+should have had the mortification of seeing them sail off without being
+able to move a finger to interfere with them.”
+
+“If one were fighting for fame and honour, all that would be true
+enough; but members of an Order, whose sole object is to defend
+Christendom from the Moslems, should strive only to do their duty, and
+care nothing for such things as honour and glory.”
+
+“Human nature is human nature, and I don't see any reason why one should
+despise honour and glory when they come to one in the course of duty.
+I fancy you will think so too, Gervaise, in course of time. I am quite
+sure that among the fifty knights, there is not one who does not feel
+well content that he has not only done his duty to the Order, but has
+gained a share in the credit and honour that will certainly be given to
+all who have taken a part in so crushing a defeat of the corsairs. As
+for myself, I do not for a moment pretend that I am not sensible of the
+fact that, as second in command of the galley, my chances of obtaining
+promotion in the Order are very greatly improved.”
+
+It was nearly two hours before Caretto returned.
+
+“It was well indeed that I went in,” he said to Gervaise, “for I found
+the city in an uproar. The alarm bells of the churches were calling all
+citizens to arms, and troops were being hurried down to the forts and
+batteries. Rumour had of course exaggerated the strength of the fleet,
+and half the population believed that the safety of the city itself was
+menaced by the approach of a mighty squadron. As soon as my news was
+bruited abroad, and they learned that the fleet consisted solely of
+prizes captured from the Moors by a galley of the Order, alarm quickly
+changed into delight, the sharp, angry clang of the bells was succeeded
+by peals of gladness, and the joy of the citizens at being relieved from
+the cloud of anxiety that had hung over the city since my last visit,
+was unbounded. I went at once to the council chamber, where I found many
+of the leading citizens already assembled, having been summoned in hot
+haste as soon as our approach was made out. At first they were almost
+incredulous when I told them that every ship of the pirate fleet had
+been either destroyed or captured, and that the fleet in the offing
+consisted entirely of your galley and the thirteen corsairs she had
+captured. As soon as they really grasped the fact, they sent off
+messengers to the churches to order the joy bells to be rung, and to the
+dockyard to arrest all work upon the galleys. Then I had to give them a
+short account of the surprise and destruction of the corsair fleet, and
+finally they begged me to ask you to delay your entry to the port for
+a couple of hours, in order that they might have time to prepare a
+suitable reception for you.”
+
+“I suppose there is no help for it,” Gervaise said. “Is there anything
+that we ought to do?”
+
+“I should decorate the galley with all the flags on board: should set
+every one to work to make great flags with the cross of the Order to
+hoist to the masthead of the prizes, instead of the little things that
+are now flying; and under them we will hoist the flags of the corsairs,
+among which are those of Tripoli, Tunis, and Algiers. I do not know that
+there is aught else we can do.”
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVI FESTIVITIES
+
+
+At last the fleet, headed by the galley, to which all the knights had
+returned, rowed towards the port. A gun flashed out from the fort at
+its entrance, and at once those from all the other batteries responded;
+bells pealed out again, and a confused roar of cheering broke from the
+crowds occupying every spot from which a view of the harbour could be
+obtained. The ships in the port were all decked with flags, and the
+front windows and balconies of every house were hung with tapestries and
+bright curtains. As soon as the galley entered the port, a state barge,
+flying the flag of the Republic, advanced to meet her from the wharf.
+As she approached, Ralph gave orders for the oars to be laid in, and
+the barge was soon alongside. The knights were already ranged along
+the poop, and, accompanied by Ralph and Caretto, Gervaise moved to the
+gangway to receive the visitors. At their head was Battista Fragoso, the
+doge, in his robe of state, and following him were a body of the highest
+nobles of Genoa, all brilliant in gala costume.
+
+“This, my lord duke,” Caretto said, “is Sir Gervaise Tresham, a knight
+commander of our Order, and the commander of this, their galley. He has
+before, as you may well believe from his appointment to so honourable a
+post, highly distinguished himself, but what he has before accomplished
+is far surpassed by the brilliant action that he has now achieved. He
+has won a victory that not only reflects the highest honour upon the
+Order, but is an inestimable service to Italy, and has freed her from a
+corsair fleet that would have been a scourge to her, both at sea and to
+the towns and villages along the coast. Not only has he, with the brave
+knights under his orders, annihilated the corsair fleet, burning eleven
+of their galleys, and capturing thirteen others, but he has restored
+to freedom no less than two hundred Christian captives, among them the
+cavaliers Giacomo da Vinci, Pietro Forzi, and myself.”
+
+“In the name of the Republic, Sir Gervaise Tresham, and I may say in
+that of all Italy, I thank you most heartily for the splendid service
+that you have rendered us. It would have seemed to me well nigh
+incredible that a single galley, even if commanded and manned by the
+most famous knights of your great Order, should have accomplished so
+extraordinary a feat. Still more strange is it that it should have been
+performed by so young a knight, with a crew composed, as Sir Fabricius
+Caretto has told us, of knights chosen from among the youngest of the
+Order.”
+
+“You give far more credit to us, your Highness, than we deserve,”
+ Gervaise replied. “Three of the ships were indeed captured in fair
+fight, but we caught the rest asleep and massed together as to be
+incapable of successful resistance, and they fell easy victims to the
+fire ships we launched against them. Any credit that is due to me is
+shared equally by my subcommander here, Sir Ralph Harcourt, and indeed
+by every knight of my company.”
+
+“This, doubtless, may be so, Sir Gervaise,” the doge said, with a slight
+smile, “but it is to the head that plans, rather than to the hand that
+strikes, that such success as you have achieved is due; and the credit
+of this night attack is, as the cavalier Caretto tells me, wholly yours,
+for until you issued your final orders it seemed to him, and to the two
+good knights his companions, that there was naught to do but to remain
+in port and watch this corsair fleet sail away to carry out its work of
+destruction.”
+
+By this time they had reached the poop of the galley. Gervaise now
+called forward the knights one by one, and presented them to the doge,
+who expressed to them all the gratitude felt by himself and the whole of
+the citizens of Genoa for the service they had rendered to the Republic.
+This ceremony being over, the knights broke up their ranks and conversed
+for a few minutes with those who had come on board with the doge. The
+latter then took his place in the barge with his companions, inviting
+Gervaise and Ralph to accompany him. As the barge left the side of the
+galley, which followed closely behind her, the guns again thundered
+out their welcome, and a roar of greeting rose from the inhabitants. On
+landing, the party waited until the knights had joined them, and
+then proceeded up the street to the ducal palace, amidst enthusiastic
+cheering from the crowd that lined the road, occupied the windows and
+balconies, and even scrambled on the housetops, the ladies waving their
+handkerchiefs and scarves.
+
+At the palace were assembled all the municipal authorities, and the
+congratulations given on board were here repeated. After this there was
+a great banquet, at which Gervaise was placed on the right hand of the
+doge, who, at the conclusion of the feast, called upon the assembled
+guests to drink to the health of the knights of St. John, who had saved
+the commerce and seacoast of Italy from the greatest danger that had
+menaced them since the days when the Northern rovers had desolated the
+shores of the Mediterranean. The toast was drunk with enthusiasm, and
+Gervaise then replied with a few words of thanks for the honour done to
+himself and his comrades.
+
+The party then left the banqueting hall for the great reception rooms,
+where the wives and daughters of all the nobles and principal citizens
+of Genoa were assembled. Most of the young knights, belonging as
+they did to noble families, and accustomed from childhood to courtly
+ceremonies and festivities, were quite at home here. Caretto, his two
+companions, and their six Italian comrades, speedily introduced them,
+and each was soon surrounded by a group of ladies, anxious to hear from
+his lips the details of the exploits of the galley.
+
+“But how is it that you are all so young, Sir Ralph?” one of the ladies,
+to whom Harcourt had been introduced as the second in command, asked
+him, when he had finished his account of the capture of the galleys.
+“We heard from those who met you on landing, that all your comrades were
+young, but we were filled with surprise when you entered the room, for
+many of them are but lads.”
+
+“You may say that all of us are but lads, Countess. I am the oldest of
+the party, and am but little over twenty-two, but few of the others are
+over nineteen; they are all professed knights of the Order, who, as you
+doubtless know, come out to Rhodes when only sixteen. Some, of course,
+do not join until later, but I think that all here entered at the
+earliest age permitted, and almost all had served in two or three
+voyages in the galleys before they were appointed to the Santa Barbara.
+The reason why so young a crew was chosen was that our commander was
+also young. He had done such exceptional service to the Order that he
+was appointed to the command of a galley, and he has, as all will allow,
+well justified the choice. It was because it was deemed inexpedient
+to place knights many years his senior under his command, and partly,
+perhaps, to encourage the younger knights, by giving them an exceptional
+opportunity of distinguishing themselves, that the crew was chosen
+entirely from their ranks. I was selected as second in command because
+Gervaise and I had been special friends when we came out from England in
+the same ship, and had before fought side by side against the Moslems.”
+
+“I see that you wear gilded spurs, Sir Ralph,” another lady said; “you
+must therefore be a dubbed knight?”
+
+“Yes; I had the good fortune to be knighted by D'Aubusson himself, at
+the same time that Sir Gervaise was also so honoured. It was for an
+affair with the Turkish pirates. It was Gervaise who really won the
+honour, for I had no share in the affair, save that of doing my best in
+the fight.”
+
+“And who could do more?” the countess queried.
+
+“Gervaise could do more, Countess, as was shown in that attack on the
+corsairs by means of fire ships. He has a head to plan, and, in the case
+I speak of, a happy thought of his not only saved the lives of ourselves
+and Sir John Boswell, but, indirectly, was the means of preventing two
+of our galleys being captured by the corsairs.”
+
+“Which is Sir Gervaise?” one of the ladies asked.
+
+Ralph smiled.
+
+“Look round the hall, signoras, and see if any of you can pick him out
+from the rest of us.”
+
+The ladies looked round the hall.
+
+“There are only about twenty here; the rest are in the other rooms. Do
+not set us to work guessing, if he is not in sight, Sir Ralph.”
+
+“Oh yes, he is in sight. Now do each of you fix on the one you think
+most accords with your ideas of what a knight, brave in action and wise
+and prudent in council, would be like.”
+
+The six ladies each fixed on one of the young knights.
+
+“You are all wrong,” said Ralph.
+
+“How can we choose?” the countess said laughingly, “when none of them
+resemble our ideal hero? Most of them are pleasant and courtly looking
+youths, but as yet there is scarce a vestige of hair on their faces,
+and one could not fancy any of them as the destroyer of the fleet of
+corsairs.”
+
+“Do you see the one speaking to the elderly lady in the recess?”
+
+“Yes; she is the wife of Fragoso. You do not mean to say that that lad
+is the commander of the galley? Why, he looks the youngest of you all.”
+
+“He is between seventeen and eighteen, and there are several others who
+are no older. Yes, that is Sir Gervaise, Knight Commander of the Order
+of St. John.”
+
+“But how can he possibly have served his time as a professed knight?”
+
+“He was one of the grand master's pages, and his time in that service
+counted just as it would have done had he entered as a professed knight;
+and at fifteen, therefore, he stood in the same position as those three
+or four years older than himself. He speaks Turkish as well as our own
+tongue, and, as I told you, we received the accolade at the hands of the
+grand master, a year and a half ago. He is now a knight commander, and
+will assuredly one day occupy one of the highest posts in the Order.”
+
+“You do not speak as if you were jealous, Sir Ralph; and yet methinks
+it cannot be pleasant for you all to have one younger than yourselves
+placed at your head.”
+
+“I do not think there is one of us who so feels,” Ralph said earnestly.
+“In the first place, he has performed excellent service; in the next
+place, even those who did not know him before, have felt, since we
+started, that he is a born leader. Then, too, we regard with pride one
+who has brought credit upon the younger members of the Order. Moreover,
+we all owe our posts in the galley to the fact that he was chosen for
+its command. It is a difficult position for him to fill, but he has
+managed so that, while all obey his orders as cheerfully and willingly
+as if he were a veteran, when off duty we regard him as one of
+ourselves.”
+
+“You are a staunch friend, Sir Ralph.”
+
+“I am a staunch friend of Sir Gervaise, Countess, for the more I know of
+him the more I care for him. He well deserves the promotion and honour
+that have fallen to his share.”
+
+“Will you bring him across here to us, Sir Ralph? I want to talk to
+this hero of yours, and I am sure that my daughter is longing to be
+introduced to him.”
+
+Ralph waited until Gervaise was disengaged, and then brought him across,
+and, after introducing him, moved away at once, leaving Gervaise to be
+interrogated by the ladies.
+
+“You must be accustomed to festivities, Sir Gervaise, for we have just
+heard that you were one of the grand master's pages?”
+
+“I am accustomed to them, signora; but that is not at all the same thing
+as liking them.”
+
+The reply was given so earnestly that all the ladies smiled.
+
+“Your taste is quite exceptional. Do you mean to say that you would
+rather be on board your galley than here?”
+
+“It would not be polite,” Gervaise said, with a laugh, “if I were to say
+that I would infinitely rather be on board; but indeed I have not, like
+most of my comrades, been brought up in court or castle. Until the day I
+joined the Order, we led the lives of exiles. My father belonged to the
+defeated party in England, and, save for a few months when the cause to
+which he was attached was triumphant, we lived quietly on the estates
+he had recovered, our life being one of care and anxiety. So, you see,
+I had no training in gaiety and pleasure. At Rhodes there are state
+receptions and religious pageants, but a meeting such as this, is, of
+course, impossible in a convent; and since I was eleven years old I
+think I have only once spoken to a woman. So you can well understand,
+signora, that I feel awkward in speech, and I pray you to make allowance
+for my ignorance of the language of courtesy, such as would naturally be
+expected in a knight, even though belonging to a religious Order.”
+
+“There is naught to make allowance for,” the countess said gently.
+“Women can appreciate simple truth, and are not, as men seem to think,
+always yearning for compliments. Those who are most proficient in
+turning phrases are not often among those foremost in battle, or wisest
+in council, and I can tell you that we women value deeds far higher than
+words. Sir Fabricius Caretto is a cousin of mine, and has this afternoon
+been speaking so highly of you to me and my young daughter here, that I
+am glad indeed to make your acquaintance. How long do you intend to stay
+in Genoa?”
+
+“No longer than it will take me to engage men to carry the prizes to
+Rhodes. I am afraid that sounds rude,” he broke off, as he noticed a
+smile on the faces of the ladies.
+
+“Not rude,” said the countess; “though most knights would have put it
+differently, and said that their duty compelled them to leave as soon as
+the prizes could be manned. But it comes to the same thing. Of
+course, you will remain the guest of the doge as long as you are
+here; otherwise, it would have given us the greatest pleasure to have
+entertained you. My cousin is, of course, staying with us, and you see
+we all feel a very deep obligation to you. He has been so long a slave
+among the Moors, that we had almost come to hope death had freed him
+from his fetters; so you may imagine our pleasure when he arrived here
+so suddenly ten days ago. We were expecting that he would remain with us
+for some time, but he says that he must first go back to Rhodes, after
+which he will ask for leave, and return here. We have a banquet tomorrow
+evening to celebrate his return, and earnestly hoped that you would be
+present, but, since you say that you do not care for such gaieties,
+we shall, if you prefer it, be glad if you will come to join us at our
+family meal at twelve.”
+
+“Thank you, countess, I should very greatly prefer it, and it will give
+me real pleasure to come.”
+
+“Your friend, Sir Ralph Harcourt, has been telling us how you have
+destroyed the corsair fleet that has been so alarming us. He, too, is an
+Englishman, though he speaks Italian well.”
+
+“Yes, he speaks it a great deal better than I do,” Gervaise said. “He is
+a dear friend of mine, and it is, indeed, chiefly owing to his support
+and influence that I have been able to manage so pleasantly and well in
+the command of a body of young knights, most of whom are my seniors.”
+
+“He tells us that you speak Turkish?”
+
+“Yes; I thought that it would be very useful, and spent nearly a year in
+acquiring it, the bailiff of my langue being kind enough to relieve
+me of all other duties. I was fortunate enough to find in one of the
+servants of the auberge a well educated and widely informed Turk, who
+was a very pleasant companion, as well as an excellent instructor, and I
+learnt much from him besides his language. The knowledge of Turkish has
+already proved to me most useful, and was indeed the means by which
+I obtained both my commandery and my appointment as captain of the
+galley.”
+
+“Perhaps you will tell us the story tomorrow; that is, if it is too long
+to tell us now?”
+
+“It is indeed much too long; but if it will interest you I shall be glad
+to recount it tomorrow.”
+
+The next day Gervaise went to the palace of the Countess Da Forli. She
+was a widow with no children, except Claudia, the young daughter who
+had accompanied her to the fete the evening before. Caretto, and four
+or five relations of the family, were the only guests beside himself. It
+was a quiet and sociable meal, and served with less ceremony than usual,
+as the countess wished to place Gervaise as much as possible at his
+ease. During the meal but little was said about the affair with the
+pirates, Caretto telling them some of his experiences as a captive.
+
+“It is well, Claudia,” he said, laughing, “that you did not see me at
+the time I was rescued, for I was such a scarecrow that you would never
+have been able to regard me with due and proper respect afterwards. I
+was so thin that my bones almost came through my skin.”
+
+“You are thin enough now, cousin,” the girl said.
+
+“I have gained so much weight during the last ten days that I begin to
+fear that I shall, ere long, get too fat to buckle on my armour. But,
+bad as the thinness was, it was nothing to the dirt. Moreover, I was
+coming near to losing my voice. There was nothing for us to talk about
+in our misery, and often days passed without a word being exchanged
+between Da Vinci, Forzi, and myself. Do you know I felt almost more
+thankful for the bath and perfumes than I did for my liberty. I was able
+at once to enjoy the comfort of the one, while it was some time before
+I could really assure myself that my slavery was over, and that I was a
+free man again.”
+
+“And now, Sir Gervaise,” the countess said, when the meal was over, “it
+is your turn. Claudia is longing to hear your story, and to know how you
+came to be in command of a galley.”
+
+“And I am almost as anxious,” Caretto said. “I did not like to ask the
+question on board the galley, and have been looking forward to learning
+it when I got to Rhodes. I did, indeed, ask the two knights who
+accompanied me on my mission here, but they would only tell me that
+every one knew you had performed some very great service to the Order,
+and that it concerned some intended rising among the slaves, the details
+being known to only a few, who had been, they understood, told that it
+was not to be repeated.”
+
+“It was a very simple matter,” Gervaise said, “and although the grand
+master and council were pleased to take a very favourable view of it,
+it was, in fact, a question of luck, just as was the surprise of the
+corsairs. There is really no secret about it--at least, except in
+Rhodes: there it was thought best not to speak of it, because the fact
+that the attempt among the slaves was almost successful, might, if
+generally known, encourage others to try to escape, and perhaps with
+greater success. I told you last night, Countess, that I had only once
+before in the last six or seven years spoken to a woman, and it was on
+that occasion that the adventure, so far as I was concerned, had its
+commencement.”
+
+He then, beginning at his visit with Ralph Harcourt to the Greek
+merchant and his family on the roof of the house, recounted the
+suspicions he had entertained, the manner in which they were confirmed,
+and the method by which he had discovered the plot for the rising. He
+was interrupted several times when he attempted to abbreviate the story,
+or to omit some of the details, and there were exclamations of surprise
+at his proposal to personate a Turkish prisoner, and to share the lot of
+the slaves in their prison, and on the benches of the galley.
+
+“I had no idea, Sir Gervaise,” Caretto said, when he had concluded,
+“that you too had been a galley slave, and I understand now the care
+you showed to render the lot of the rowers as easy as possible. It was
+a splendid scheme, and well carried out. Indeed, I no longer wonder
+that you were appointed to the command of a galley, and received a rich
+commandery in England at the hands of the grand master himself. What
+think you, Countess; did I speak too highly in his favour?”
+
+“Not one jot, cousin. Why, Sir Gervaise, it seems to me that you have
+been born two centuries too late, and that you should have been a knight
+errant, instead of being sworn to obey orders, and bound to celibacy.
+Do you wear no lady's favour in your helm? I know that not a few of your
+Order do so.”
+
+“As I have said, Countess, I know no ladies who would bestow favours
+upon me; in the second place, I am but eighteen, and it would be
+ridiculous for me to think of such matters; lastly, it seems to me that,
+being vowed to the Order, I can desire no other mistress.”
+
+Claudia, who had listened with rapt attention to the story, whispered in
+her mother's ear. The latter smiled.
+
+“It seems to me, Sir Gervaise,” she went on, “that after what you have
+done for Italy there are many fair maidens who would feel it an honour
+that their colours should be borne by one who has shown himself so
+valiant a knight. You see, a gage of this kind does not necessarily mean
+that there is any deep feeling between the knight who bears it and the
+lady who bestows it; it shows only that she, on her part, feels it an
+honour that her gage should be worn by a distinguished knight, and, on
+his part, that he considers it as somewhat more than a compliment, and
+wears it as a proof of regard on the part of one whose good opinion at
+least he values. It is true that among secular knights it may mean even
+more than this, but it ought not to mean more among knights of an Order
+like yours, pledged to devote their lives to a lofty and holy aim. My
+daughter Claudia whispers to me that she would deem it an honour indeed
+if you would wear her token, accepting it in the spirit in which I have
+spoken. She is fourteen now, and, as you know, a maid of fourteen here
+is as old as one of sixteen or seventeen in your country.”
+
+Gervaise turned to the girl, who was standing by her mother's chair,
+looking earnestly at him. He had noticed her the evening before; she had
+asked no questions, but had listened so intently that he had felt
+almost embarrassed. Claudia's was a very bright face, and yet marked by
+firmness and strength. He turned his eyes again to the countess.
+
+“I never thought of wearing a woman's favour,” he said; “but if your
+daughter will bestow one upon me, I shall be proud to wear it, and trust
+that I may carry it unstained. I shall feel honoured indeed that one so
+fair, and, as I am sure by her face, so deserving of all the devotion
+that a knight of our Order can give, has thought me worthy of being one
+of those on whom she could bestow so high a favour, with the confidence
+that it would be ever borne with credit and honour.”
+
+“What shall I give him, mother?” Claudia asked the countess, without a
+shadow of the embarrassment with which Gervaise had spoken.
+
+“Not a kerchief, Claudia. In the rough work of the knights, it could
+not be kept without spot or stain. Moreover, if I judge Sir Gervaise
+rightly, methinks he would prefer some token that he could wear without
+exciting attention and remark from his comrades. Go, fetch him any of
+your jewels you may think fit.”
+
+“Then I will give him this,” the girl said; and unfastening a thin gold
+chain she wore round her neck, she pulled up a heart shaped ornament, in
+pink coral set in gold and pearls.
+
+Her mother uttered a low exclamation of dissent.
+
+“I know, mother; it was your last gift, and I prize it far beyond
+anything I have; therefore, it is all the more fit to be my token.” Then
+she turned to Gervaise, and went on, without the slightest tremor in her
+voice, or accession of colour in her cheeks. “Sir Gervaise Tresham, I
+bestow upon you this my favour, and shall deem it an honour indeed to
+know that it is borne by one so brave and worthy. You said that you
+would be glad to be one of those who bore my favours. You will be more
+than that, for I vow to you that while you live no other knight shall
+wear a favour of mine.”
+
+“Claudia!” her mother said disapprovingly.
+
+“I know what I am saying, mother. I have often wondered why maidens
+should so carelessly bestow their favours upon every knight who begged
+for them, and have said to myself that when my time came I would grant
+it but once, and only then to one whom I deemed worthy of it in all
+ways--one in whose loyalty and honour I could trust implicitly, and who
+would regard it as something sacred, deeming it an honour to wear it,
+as being the pledge of my trust and esteem. Kneel, Sir Gervaise, while I
+fasten this round your neck.”
+
+Gervaise took out the small brooch, that fastened the collar of his
+silken doublet, and then knelt on one knee. The girl fastened the clasp
+round his neck, and as he rose he hid the heart beneath the doublet, and
+fastened the collar.
+
+“Lady Claudia,” he said earnestly, “I accept your favour in the spirit
+in which you bestow it. So long as I live I shall prize and value it
+beyond any honour I may gain, and as I feel it next to my heart, it will
+ever recall to me that you gave it me as a pledge of your esteem and
+trust, and I will strive to the utmost so to bear myself that I may be
+worthy of the gift.”
+
+None of the others spoke while the little ceremony was being performed.
+Caretto glanced at the countess with an amused smile, but the latter
+looked grave, and somewhat vexed. However, she made an effort to dispel
+the cloud on her face, and, when Gervaise ceased speaking, said, “This
+has been a somewhat more serious business than I intended, Sir Gervaise.
+But do not think that I regret in any way the course it has taken; 'tis
+well for a maiden on the threshold of womanhood that she should place
+before herself a lofty ideal, and that she should entertain a warm
+feeling of friendship for one worthy of it. So also it is good for a
+young knight to know that he has the trust and confidence of a pure and
+innocent maiden; such a knowledge will aid him to be in all ways true to
+the vows he has taken, and to remember always that he is bound to be not
+only a valiant knight of his Order, but a sincere soldier of the Cross.”
+
+Then she went on more lightly. “Have you heard, Sir Gervaise, that there
+is a question of making you a noble of Genoa?”
+
+“No, indeed,” Gervaise replied, in great surprise; “such an idea never
+entered into my thoughts.”
+
+“Nevertheless, I know that it was spoken of last night, and although it
+has not yet been finally settled, and will not be until the council meet
+this afternoon, I should not tell you if I did not think that it was as
+good as agreed upon; and I am pleased to be the first to whisper to
+you that it is intended to bestow upon you an honour that is jealously
+guarded and seldom granted, even to crowned heads, unless as a token of
+gratitude for some signal service done to the Republic.”
+
+“I should feel most honoured and most grateful, Countess, for so
+extraordinary a favour, did I feel that I had done any extraordinary
+action to merit it. There can be no doubt that the destruction of the
+corsairs has saved Genoa and all the maritime towns from immense loss
+by damage to their trade, and by the raids that would have been made at
+various points on the coast. But I cannot see that the mere fact that we
+have destroyed their fleet merits any marked honour. They were caught in
+a trap, and half of them burned, and this might have been done equally
+as well by the Sardinian fishermen, unarmed, and without our aid. As to
+the fighting, it was of small account. The first three craft we captured
+offered a much stouter resistance, and we lost two of our number; but
+in the other affair no knight was killed, or even seriously wounded, and
+believe me, Countess, I feel absolutely ashamed at the fuss that is made
+over it. It seems to me that I am a sort of impostor, obtaining credit
+under false pretences.”
+
+“No man is a fair judge of his own actions, Sir Gervaise,” Caretto said.
+“A man may believe himself a Solon, or a Roland; others may consider him
+as a fool, or an empty braggart; and it must be taken that the general
+opinion of the public is the judgment from which there is no appeal.
+It is not the mob of Genoa only who regard the services that you have
+rendered as extraordinary, but it is the opinion of the councillors and
+authorities of the Republic, and of those who, like myself, have borne
+our share in warfare, that not only is the service great, but that it is
+due to the singular ability with which you, in command of only a single
+galley, have wholly destroyed or captured the fleet that threatened
+our commerce. As our councillors, therefore, all competent judges, are
+unanimous in their opinion that you have deserved the highest honours
+that Genoa can bestow upon you, it is useless for you to set up your
+own opinion to the contrary. Take the good things that fall to you, Sir
+Gervaise, and be thankful. It is seldom that men obtain more honours
+than they deserve, while it very often happens that they deserve far
+more than they obtain. Fortune has doubtless some share in every man's
+career; but when it is not once, but several times, that a knight gains
+special credit for deeds he has performed, we may be sure that fortune
+has less to do with the matter than his personal merits. Three times
+have you earned special credit; upon the first occasion, the grand
+master--no mean judge of conduct and character--deemed you worthy of
+secular knighthood, an honour which has not, in my memory, been bestowed
+at Rhodes upon any young knight; on the second, you were promoted to the
+command of a galley, though never before has such a command been given
+to any, save knights of long experience; and now, for the third time,
+the councillors of one of the greatest of Italian cities are about to do
+you honour. It is good to be modest, Sir Gervaise, and it is better to
+underestimate than to overrate one's own merits, but it is not well to
+carry the feeling to an extreme. I am quite sure that in your case your
+disclaimer is wholly sincere and unaffected; but take my advice, accept
+the honours the world may pay you as not undeserved, determining only in
+your mind that if you deem them excessive, you will at least do all
+in your power to show that they are not ill bestowed. You will not, I
+trust, take my counsel amiss.”
+
+“On the contrary, Sir Fabricius,” Gervaise said warmly. “I am really
+but a boy yet, though by good fortune pushed strangely forward, and I
+am glad indeed to receive council from a knight of vastly greater
+experience than myself and, in future, however much I may be conscious
+in my own mind that anything I have done is greatly overrated, I will at
+least abstain from protest. And now, Countess, I must pray you to excuse
+me. I know that Sir Ralph Harcourt is, before this, down at the dockyard
+waiting my coming to engage sailors.”
+
+“You will come tomorrow at the same time, I hope, Sir Gervaise. As
+Claudia's sworn knight we have now a claim upon you, and for the short
+time that you remain here you must regard this as your home, although
+you must necessarily remain the guest of the doge.”
+
+“He is a fine young fellow, indeed,” Caretto said, after Gervaise
+had left. “There is no affectation about his modesty, and he really
+considers that this success he has gained is solely a stroke of good
+fortune. Of course, I have been asking many questions about him of the
+young knights of his own langue, Harcourt among them. They tell me that
+he is always in earnest in everything he undertakes. He is without a
+rival among the younger knights of the convent in his skill in arms, and
+for strength and activity in all exercises; he seems to care nothing
+for the ordinary amusements in which they join at Rhodes, and for nine
+months was scarcely ever seen by those in the auberge, save when they
+gathered for meals, so continuously did he work to acquire a perfect
+command of Turkish. How thoroughly he succeeded is evident from the fact
+that he was able to live among the galley slaves without exciting any
+suspicions in their minds that he was other than he pretended to be, a
+Syrian captive. That he is brave goes without saying, though perhaps
+no braver than the majority of his companions. The extraordinary thing
+about him is that although, as he himself says, little more than a boy,
+he has the coolness to plan, and the head to carry out, schemes that
+would do credit to the most experienced captain. He is already a credit
+to the Order, and, should he live, will assuredly rise to the highest
+offices in it, and may even die its grand master. In the stormy times
+that are coming on, there will be ample opportunities for him still
+further to distinguish himself, and to fulfil the singular promise of
+his youth. That he possesses great tact, as well as other qualities,
+is shown by the enthusiasm with which his companions regard him. In no
+case, among those to whom I have spoken, have I discerned the smallest
+jealousy of him. The tact that is needed to stand thus among fifty young
+knights, almost all his seniors in age, will assuredly enable him later
+on to command the confidence and affection of older men.”
+
+When the other guests had left, and Caretto only remained, the countess
+turned to Claudia. “You went too far, Claudia. I was willing enough,
+when you asked me, that you should bestow a favour upon him. Most young
+knights wear such a favour, which may be a sign of devotion, but which
+far more frequently is a piece of gallantry. In the case of a knight
+hospitaller it can only be the latter; it is in his case merely a sign
+that he has so distinguished himself that some maiden feels a pride that
+her gift should be carried into battle by him, and, on his part, that he
+too is proud of the gift so bestowed by one whose goodwill he prizes.
+In that way I was willing that you should grant him your favour. But
+the manner in which you gave it was far more serious than the occasion
+warranted, and your promise to grant no similar favour to another as
+long as he lived, surprised, and, I may almost say, shocked me. You are,
+according to our custom here, considered almost a woman, and had not
+Sir Gervaise belonged to a religious Order, and were he of a presuming
+disposition, he might well have gathered a meaning from your words far
+beyond what you intended, and have even entertained a presumptuous hope
+that you were not indifferent to his merits. In the present case, of
+course, no harm is done; still, methinks that it would be far better had
+the words been unspoken. Your cousin here will, I am sure, agree with
+me.”
+
+Caretto did not speak, but stood playing with his moustache, waiting for
+Claudia's reply. The girl had stood with downcast eyes while her mother
+was speaking.
+
+“I only expressed what I felt, mother,” she said, after a pause, “and I
+do not think that Sir Gervaise Tresham is likely to misunderstand me.
+It seems to me that never among those whom I have met have I seen one
+so worthy. No praises can be higher than those with which my cousin has
+spoken of him. He has rescued him, whom we dearly love, from slavery;
+he has saved Genoa from great disaster, and many towns and villages from
+plunder and ruin. I do indeed feel proud that such a knight should wear
+my gage, and, were there no other reason, I should be unwilling that, so
+long as he carried it, another should possess a similar one from me. I
+am sure that Sir Gervaise will have felt that this was the meaning of my
+words; I wished him to see that it was not a favour lightly given by a
+girl who might, a few weeks hence, bestow a similar one upon another,
+but was a gage seriously given of the honour in which I held him.”
+
+“Very well said, Claudia,” Caretto broke in, before the countess could
+reply. “I warrant me the young knight will not misunderstand your gift,
+and that he will prize it highly and carry it nobly. He is not one of
+those who will boast of a favour and display it all times, and, except
+perhaps to his friend Sir Ralph Harcourt, I will wager he never tells a
+soul who was its donor.”
+
+When Claudia shortly afterwards left the room, he said to the countess,
+“Excuse me for breaking in, Agatha, but I felt that it was much better
+to agree with her, and not to make overmuch of the matter; she is just
+of an age to make some one a hero, and she could hardly have chosen a
+better subject for her worship. In the first place, he is a knight
+of St. John; in the second, he is going away in a few days, perhaps
+tomorrow, and may never cross her path again. The thought of him will
+prevent her fancy from straying for a time, and keep her heart whole
+until you decide on a suitor for her hand.”
+
+“Nevertheless, I would rather that it had not been so. Claudia is not
+given to change, and this may last long enough to cause trouble when I
+bring forward the suitor you speak of.”
+
+“Well, in any case it might be worse,” Caretto said philosophically.
+And then, with a smile in answer to her look of inquiry, “Knights of the
+Order have, ere now, obtained release from their vows.”
+
+“Fabricius!” the countess exclaimed, in a shocked voice.
+
+“Yes, I know, Agatha, that the child is one of the richest heiresses
+in Italy, but for that very reason it needs not that her husband should
+have wide possessions. In all other respects you could wish for no
+better. He will assuredly be a famous knight; he is the sort of man to
+make her perfectly happy; and, lastly, you know I cannot forget that I
+owe my liberation from slavery to him. At any rate, Agatha, as I said
+before, he may never cross her path again, and you may, a year or two
+hence, find her perfectly amenable to your wishes.”
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVII CAPTURED
+
+
+Upon the following day the doge requested Gervaise to accompany him to
+a meeting of the council. Upon entering the grand hall he found not only
+the members of the council assembled in their robes of office, but a
+large gathering of the nobles and principal citizens of Genoa, together
+with the knights of the galley whom, under Ralph Harcourt's orders,
+Gervaise found, to his surprise, drawn up in order across the Hall.
+Here, in the name of the Republic, Battista Fragoso announced to him
+that, by the unanimous decision of the council, he had been elected
+a noble of Genoa; an honour, he added, on only one or two previous
+occasions in the history of the Republic bestowed upon any but of
+princely rank, but which he had nobly earned by the great service he
+had rendered to the State. His name was then inscribed in the book
+containing the names and titles of the nobles of Genoa. Next, Battista
+Fragoso presented him with a superb suit of Milanese armour, as his own
+personal gift, and then with a casket of very valuable jewels, as the
+gift of the city of Genoa. Each presentation was accompanied by the
+plaudits of the assembly, and by the no less warm acclamations of the
+knights. Ralph was then called forward, and presented with a suit of
+armour but little inferior to that given to Gervaise, and each knight
+received a heavy gold chain of the finest workmanship of Genoa.
+
+Two days later the preparations for departure were complete, and a
+sufficient number of men were engaged to man the prizes. This charge,
+also, Genoa took upon itself, and put on board much stronger crews than
+Gervaise deemed necessary for the navigation of the ships. The weather
+was fine and the wind favourable, and a quick passage was made to
+Rhodes. When the harbour was in sight, the ships were ordered to proceed
+in single file, the galley leading the way with a huge banner of the
+Order floating from her stern, and smaller flags on staffs at each side.
+It was not until they passed by the two forts guarding the entrance that
+the flags fluttering at the mastheads of the prizes afforded to those
+on shore an intimation of the event that had taken place, and even then
+none supposed that this fleet of prizes had been taken by the one galley
+that headed them.
+
+As the Santa Barbara slowly rowed up the harbour, the State barge of
+the grand master put off to meet it, and D'Aubusson, with a party of
+knights, soon stepped on board.
+
+“Welcome back, Sir Gervaise! although I little expected to see you
+return so soon. What is the meaning of this procession that follows you?
+By their rig and appearance they are Moors, but how they come to be thus
+sailing in your wake is a mystery to us all.”
+
+“They are Moors, your Excellency; they form part of an expedition fitted
+out by the corsairs of Algiers, Tripoli, Tunis, and other piratical
+strongholds, for the purpose of destroying the commerce and ravaging the
+coasts of Western Italy. Fortunately, we fell in with a ship that had
+been plundered by three of them on their way north, and learned from the
+dying captain, who was the only one of her crew left with life on board,
+the direction they were taking, and something of the nature of the
+expedition. We pursued the three galleys, came up with them, had the
+good fortune to capture them, and then had the delight of finding among
+their rowers the noble knights, Fabricius Caretto, Giacomo Da Vinci, and
+Pietro Forzi.”
+
+The grand master, and the knights with him, uttered an exclamation of
+joy, and, as the three knights named stepped forward, embraced them with
+the liveliest pleasure.
+
+“My dear Caretto,” the grand master exclaimed, “it is almost a
+resurrection, for we have all long mourned you as dead; and your return
+to us at the present time is indeed fortunate; for upon whose judgment
+and aid could I better rely than those of my old comrade in arms?” Then,
+turning to Gervaise, he went on: “It was a daring and brilliant exploit
+indeed, Sir Gervaise, and in due time honour shall be paid to you and
+your brave companions, to whom and to you I now tender the thanks of the
+Order. But tell me the rest briefly, for I would fain hear from these
+noble knights and old friends the story of what has befallen them.”
+
+“My tale is a very brief one, your Highness. The Cavalier Caretto sailed
+at once in a swift craft from the south of Sardinia, to carry warnings
+to the cities on the coast of Italy of the danger that threatened them,
+and in order that some war galleys might be despatched by Genoa to meet
+the corsair fleet. During his absence we discovered the little inlet in
+which the pirates lay hidden, waiting doubtless the arrival of the three
+ships we had captured, to commence operations. On the return of the
+knight with the news that it would be at least a fortnight before Genoa
+could fit out any galleys, and fearing that the pirates might at any
+moment put to sea, we procured some small Sardinian craft, and fitted
+them as fire ships; with the captives we had rescued, and some Sard
+fishermen, we manned the three prizes, distributing the knights between
+them, and at night launched the fire ships against the corsairs, whose
+ships were crowded together. Eleven of them were burnt; six we captured
+as they endeavoured to make their way out, and took possession of four
+others whose crews had run them ashore and deserted them. None escaped.”
+
+Exclamations of astonishment and almost of incredulity broke from the
+knights.
+
+“And is it possible, Sir Gervaise, that these thirteen vessels that
+follow you are all prizes captured by your galley alone?”
+
+“It is, as I have the honour to tell your Highness. But their capture,
+except in the case of the first three, was due almost solely to good
+fortune and to the position in which we found them, almost incapable of
+defence.”
+
+“What think you, knights and comrades?” the grand master said to his
+companions. “There were some of you who deemed it rash to entrust a
+galley to so young a commander and so youthful a crew. What say you now?
+Never in the annals of the Order has such a sight been witnessed as that
+of thirteen prizes being brought in by a single galley, to say naught
+of eleven others destroyed. Caretto, you and your comrades must have had
+some share in this marvellous victory.”
+
+“By no means,” the Italian replied; “beyond having the honour of aiding
+to carry out the orders of Sir Gervaise Tresham, the commander of the
+galley. The plan was wholly of his own devising, its execution solely
+due to his arrangement of the details, and that without the slightest
+suggestion on the part of myself or my comrades. I will presently
+narrate to you the whole story; it will come better from my lips than
+from those of Sir Gervaise, whose disposition is to wholly underestimate
+the merit of the action he has performed. But I must also bear
+testimony, not only to the bravery displayed by Sir Gervaise, Sir Ralph
+Harcourt, his lieutenant, and every one of the knights his crew, but
+to the admirable discipline, order, and good fellowship on board the
+galley, which would have done credit to the most experienced commander
+and to the most veteran knights of the Order.”
+
+The grand master paused a moment, and then said in a loud voice, “Sir
+Gervaise Tresham, Sir Ralph Harcourt, and knights of the seven langues
+of the Order--As yet I can hardly appreciate the full extent of the
+service that you have rendered. I thanked you but now for the capture of
+three corsairs; but what can I say when I learn that you have destroyed
+or taken a whole fleet? I invite you all to a banquet that I shall hold
+tonight, where the Cavalier Caretto will relate to us all the details of
+this marvellous exploit.”
+
+Within a few minutes after the return of the grand master and his party
+ashore, the flags of the Order were run up to the flagstaffs of every
+fort and bastion: the bells of the churches chimed out a triumphant
+peal, and a salute was fired from the guns of the three water forts,
+while along the wall facing the port, the townspeople waved numberless
+gay flags as a welcome to the galley. Most of the knights went ashore
+at once, but Gervaise, under the excuse that he wished to see that
+everything was in order before landing, remained on board until it was
+time to go to the banquet, being sure that by that time the knights
+would have fully told the story at their respective auberges, and that
+there would be no more questions to answer. The banquet differed but
+little from that at Genoa, and Gervaise was heartily glad when it was
+over.
+
+The next day the grand master sent for him.
+
+“If I judge rightly, Sir Gervaise, the thing that will best please you
+at present, is an order to put to sea again at once, to conclude the
+usual period of service of the galley.”
+
+“It is indeed,” Gervaise replied earnestly. “But I should be glad, sir,
+if you will allow that the time should begin to count afresh from our
+present start. We have really had but a short period of service, for we
+wasted a week at Genoa, and ten days on our journey back here, so that
+we have had really no more than a month's active service.”
+
+“Yes, if you count only by time,” D'Aubusson said, with a smile.
+“Reckoning by results, you have done a good five years' cruise. However,
+so small a request can certainly be granted. The places of the two
+knights who were killed, and of four others whose wounds are reported
+to me as being too severe for them to be fit for service for some time,
+shall be filled up at once from the langues to which each belonged. You
+will cruise among the Western islands, whence complaints have reached us
+of a corsair who has been plundering and burning. Sometimes he is heard
+of as far north as Negropont, at others he is off the south of the
+Morea; then, again, we hear of him among the Cyclades. We have been
+unwilling to despatch another galley, for there is ample employment for
+every one here. After the blow you have struck on the Moorish corsairs,
+they are likely to be quiet for a little. You had best, therefore, try
+for a time if you cannot come across this pirate. You must let me know
+how much you paid for the vessels you used as fire ships, and to the
+Sards; this is an expense chargeable to the general service. I may tell
+you that to me it is due that no recognition of your exploits, such as
+that which Genoa bestowed upon you, will be made. At the council this
+morning it was urged that some signal mark of honour should be granted;
+but I interposed, saying that you had already received exceptional
+promotion, and that it would not be for your good, or that of the
+Order, for so young a knight to be raised to an official position of
+a character usually held by seniors, and that I was perfectly sure
+you would prefer remaining in command of your galley to any promotion
+whatever that would retain you on the Island.”
+
+“Indeed I should, your Highness. I wish to gain experience and to do
+service to the Order, and so far from pleasing me, promotion would
+trouble and distress me, and, could it have been done, I would most
+gladly have sent home the prizes, instead of going to Genoa, and would
+myself have continued the cruise.”
+
+“So the Cavalier Caretto told me,” the grand master replied. “Very well,
+then. In three days you shall set out again. The admiral tells me that
+never before has a galley returned with the slaves in such good health
+and condition, and that unquestionably your plan of erecting an awning
+to shelter them from the midday heat and the night dews has had a
+most beneficial effect on their health; he has recommended its general
+adoption.”
+
+Three days later the Santa Barbara again left port, and was soon upon
+her station. For some weeks she cruised backwards and forwards along the
+coast and among the islands. They often heard of the pirate ship, but
+all their efforts to find her were unavailing.
+
+One evening there were signs of a change of weather, and by morning it
+was blowing a furious gale from the north; in spite of the efforts of
+the rowers, the galley narrowly escaped being driven ashore; but she at
+last gained the shelter of an island, and anchored under its lee, the
+slaves being utterly worn out by continuous exertion. As soon as the
+gale abated they again put to sea, and, after proceeding for some miles,
+saw a ship cast up on shore. Some people could be made out on board of
+her, and a white flag was raised.
+
+“She must have been driven ashore during the gale,” Gervaise said. “We
+will row in to within a quarter of a mile of her and see what we can do
+for them.”
+
+As soon as the anchor was dropped a boat was lowered.
+
+“I will go myself, Ralph, for I shall be glad to set my foot on shore
+again. There must be people on the island; I wonder none of them have
+come to the aid of those poor fellows. I suppose the villages are on the
+other side of the island, and they have not yet heard of the wreck.”
+
+Gervaise asked three of the knights to accompany him, and the boat,
+rowed by galley slaves, was soon on its way. All were glad at the change
+afforded to the monotony of their life on board, and at the prospect of
+a scamper on shore.
+
+There were but five or six men to be seen on the deck of the wreck, and
+these had, as the boat approached, come down to the rocks as if to meet
+those who came to their aid; but as the knights leapt out, they threw
+themselves suddenly upon them with knives and scimitars that had
+hitherto been concealed beneath their garments, while at the same moment
+a crowd of men appeared on the deck of the ship, and, leaping down, ran
+forward with drawn swords. Two of the knights fell dead before they had
+time to draw their weapons. The third shook off his two assailants,
+and for a minute kept them both at bay; but others, rushing up, cut him
+down.
+
+Gervaise had received a slight wound before he realised what was
+happening. He snatched his dagger from its sheath, and struck down one
+assailant; but ere he could raise it to strike again, another leapt on
+to his back, and clung there until the rest rushed up, when he shouted,
+“Take him alive! take him alive!” and, throwing down their weapons, half
+a dozen of the pirates flung themselves upon Gervaise, and strove
+to pull him to the ground, until at last, in spite of his desperate
+resistance, they succeeded in doing so. His armour was hastily stripped
+off, his hands and feet bound, and then at the orders of the pirate who
+had leapt on his back, and who was evidently the captain, half a dozen
+men lifted him on to their shoulders. As they did so four guns from the
+galley flashed out, and the balls flew overhead. The pirates, who had
+already begun to quarrel over the armour and arms of the fallen knights,
+at once took to their heels, followed by the galley slaves from the
+boat.
+
+“Make haste,” the captain said to the men carrying Gervaise.
+
+“They are lowering their boats; we must be under way before they come
+up.”
+
+In a minute or two Gervaise was set down on his feet, the cords round
+his legs were cut, and he was made to hurry along with his captors. In
+a short time an inlet was reached, and here Gervaise saw, to his
+mortification, the pirate craft for which the Santa Barbara had in vain
+been searching. As soon as the party were all on board, the ropes by
+which she was moored to two trees were thrown off; the great sails
+hoisted, and she sailed boldly out. Although the gale had entirely
+abated, there was still a brisk wind blowing, and it was evident to the
+captain of the corsair that under such circumstances he could outsail
+the galley that had long been searching for him; when, therefore,
+the Santa Barbara came in sight, just as he and his crew had finished
+stripping the wreck of its contents, the idea had occurred to him to
+attempt to entice some of the knights to land.
+
+As soon as the vessel was under way he abused his followers hotly for
+not having obeyed his orders to capture the knights without bloodshed;
+but they pleaded that it was as much as they had been able to do to
+capture Gervaise in that way, and that they could never have overcome
+the four together, before the boats would have had time to come from the
+ship.
+
+Gervaise had been told to sit down with his back to a mast and in this
+position he could, when the vessel heeled over to the breeze, obtain a
+view of the sea. It was with a feeling of bitter mortification and rage
+that he saw the galley lying but half a mile away, as the corsair issued
+from the inlet. A moment later he heard a gun fired, and saw the signal
+hoisted to recall the boats.
+
+“If the wind had been favourable,” the captain said to his mate, “we
+would have borne down upon her, and could have reached and captured her
+before the boats got back, for you may be sure that they have landed
+almost all their men. However, we can't get there against the wind, and
+we will now say goodbye to them.”
+
+Gervaise knew well that at the pace they were running through the water
+the galley would have no chance whatever of overtaking her, and that,
+ere the knights came on board again, she would be already two or three
+miles away. A point of land soon concealed the galley from view, and
+when he caught sight of her, as she rounded the point, she was but a
+speck in the distance.
+
+They passed several islands in the course of the day, changing their
+direction to a right angle to that which they had at first pursued, as
+soon as they were hidden from the sight of the galley by an intervening
+island. As night came on they anchored in a little bay on the coast of
+the Morea. The sails being furled, the sailors made a division of the
+booty they had captured on the island, and of the portable property
+found on board the wreck. A gourd full of water was placed to Gervaise's
+lips by one of the men of a kinder disposition than the rest. He drank
+it thankfully, for he was parched with thirst excited by the pain caused
+by the tightness with which he had been bound.
+
+He slept where he sat. All night four men remained on guard, although
+from what he heard they had no fear whatever of being overtaken. In
+the morning his arms were unbound, and they stripped off his tunic and
+shirt. They had evidently respect for his strength, for before loosing
+his arms they tightly fastened his ankles together. The removal of his
+shirt exposed Claudia's gift to view.
+
+“Take that from him and give it to me,” the captain said. As the two men
+approached, Gervaise seized one in each hand, dashed them against
+each other, and hurled them on the deck. But the exertion upset his
+equilibrium, and after making a vain effort to recover it, he fell
+heavily across them. The captain stooped over him, and, before he could
+recover himself, snatched the chain from his neck.
+
+“You are a stout fellow,” he said, laughing, “and will make a fine
+slave. What have you got here that you are ready to risk your life
+for?” He looked at the little chain and its pendant with an air of
+disappointment. “'Tis worth but little,” he said, showing it to his
+mate. “I would not give five ducats for it in the market. It must be a
+charm, or a knight would never carry it about with him and prize it so
+highly. It may be to things like this the Christians owe their luck.”
+
+“It has not brought him luck this time,” the mate observed with a laugh.
+
+“Even a charm cannot always bring good luck, but at any rate I will try
+it;” and he put it round his neck just as Gervaise had worn it. The
+latter was now unbound, and permitted to move about the deck. The
+strength he had shown in the struggle on shore, and the manner in which
+he had hurled, bound as he was, two of their comrades to the deck, had
+won for him the respect of his captors, and he was therefore allowed
+privileges not granted to the seamen of the vessel that had had the ill
+fortune to be cast on shore so close to the spot where the corsair
+was hiding. These had been seized, driven to the ship, and having been
+stripped of the greater portion of their clothes, shut down in the hold.
+
+Although angry that but one out of the four who landed had been
+captured, the captain was in a good humour at having tricked his
+redoubtable foes, and was disposed to treat Gervaise with more
+consideration than was generally given to captives. The latter had not
+spoken a word of Turkish from the time he was captured, and had shaken
+his head when first addressed in that language. No suspicion was
+therefore entertained that he had any knowledge of it, and the Turks
+conversed freely before him.
+
+“Where think you we had better sell him?” the mate asked the captain,
+when Gervaise was leaning against the bulwark watching the land, a short
+quarter of a mile away. “He ought to fetch a good ransom.”
+
+“Ay, but who would get it? You know how it was with one that Ibrahim
+took two years ago. First there were months of delay, then, when the
+ransom was settled, the pasha took four-fifths of it for himself, and
+Ibrahim got far less than he would have done had he sold him as a slave.
+The pashas here, and the sultans of the Moors, are all alike; if they
+once meddle in an affair they take all the profit, and think they do
+well by giving you a tithe of it. There are plenty of wealthy Moors who
+are ready to pay well for a Christian slave, especially when he is a
+good looking young fellow such as this. He will fetch as much as all
+those eight sailors below. They are only worth their labour, while
+this youngster will command a fancy price. I know a dozen rich Moors in
+Tripoli or Tunis who would be glad to have him; and we agreed that we
+would run down to the African coast for awhile, for that galley has been
+altogether too busy of late for our comfort, and will be all the more
+active after this little affair; besides, people in these islands have
+got so scared that one can't get within ten miles of any of them now
+without seeing their signal smokes rising on the hills, and finding,
+when they land, the villages deserted and stripped of everything worth
+carrying away.”
+
+This news was a disappointment to Gervaise. He had calculated that he
+would be sold at one of the Levant ports, and had thought that with his
+knowledge of Turkish he should have no great difficulty in escaping
+from any master into whose hands he might fall, and taking his chance of
+either seizing a fishing boat, or of making his way in a trading ship to
+some district where the population was a mixed one, and where trade was
+winked at between the merchants there, and those at some of the Greek
+towns. To escape from Tunis or Tripoli would be far more difficult;
+there, too, he would be beyond the reach of the good offices of Suleiman
+Ali, who would, he was sure, have done all in his power to bring about
+his release. Of one thing he was determined: he would not return to
+Rhodes without making every possible effort to recover Claudia's gage,
+as he considered it absolutely incumbent on him as a knight to guard, as
+something sacred, a gift so bestowed. The fancy of the corsair to
+retain the jewel as a charm he regarded as a piece of the greatest good
+fortune. Had it been thrown among the common spoil, he would never have
+known to which of the crew it had fallen at the division, still less
+have traced what became of it afterwards; whereas now, for some time, at
+any rate, it was likely to remain in the captain's possession.
+
+Had it not been for that, he would have attempted to escape at the first
+opportunity, and such an opportunity could not fail to present itself
+ere long, for he had but to manage to possess himself of Moslem garments
+to be able to move about unquestioned in any Turkish town. When it
+became dark he was shut up in the hold, which was, he found, crowded
+with captives, as, in addition to the crew of the wreck, between forty
+and fifty Greeks, for the most part boys and young girls, had been
+carried off from the villages plundered. It was pitch dark below,
+although the scuttle had been left open in order to allow a certain
+amount of air to reach the captives; Gervaise, therefore, felt his way
+about cautiously, and lay down as soon as he found a clear space. Save
+an occasional moan or curse, and the panting of those suffering from the
+heat and closeness of the crowded hold, all was still. The majority
+of the captives had been some time in their floating prison, and
+their first poignant grief had settled down into a dull and despairing
+acceptance of their fate; the sailors, newly captured, had for hours
+raved and cursed, but, worn out by their struggle with the elements, and
+their rage and grief, they had now fallen asleep.
+
+It was long before Gervaise dozed off. He was furious with himself for
+having fallen into the trap; if he had, as he said to himself, lain off
+the beach in the boat, and questioned the supposed shipwrecked sailors,
+their inability to reply to him would have at once put him on his guard;
+as it was, he had walked into the snare as carelessly and confidently as
+a child might have done. Even more than his own captivity, he regretted
+the death of his three comrades, which he attributed to his own want
+of care. The next morning he was again allowed on deck. The vessel was
+under way, and her head was pointing south. To his surprise some of the
+crew gave him a friendly greeting; he was unable to understand a manner
+so at variance with their hatred to the Christians, until one of them
+said to him in a mixture of Greek and Italian, “We have heard from
+our countrymen who were in the boat with you, that they received much
+kindness at your hands, and that of all the Christians they had served
+under, you were the kindest master. Therefore, it is but right now Allah
+has decreed that you in turn should be a slave to the true believers,
+that you should receive the same mercy you gave to Moslems when they
+were in your power.”
+
+The captain came up as the man was speaking. He talked for a time to the
+sailor, who then turned again to Gervaise. “The captain says that he is
+told you were the commander of that galley; he has questioned the eight
+men separately, and they all tell the same story: and yet he cannot
+understand how so young a man should command a galley manned by warriors
+famous for their deeds of arms, even among us who are their foes.”
+
+“This galley was an exception,” Gervaise replied; “the knights on
+board were all young, as they could be better spared than those more
+experienced, at a time when your sultan is known to be preparing for an
+attack on Rhodes.”
+
+The captain was silent for a minute when this was interpreted to him; he
+had at the time noticed and wondered at the youth of the four knights,
+and the explanation seemed to him a reasonable one.
+
+“I wish I had known it,” he said after a pause; “for had I done so, I
+would have fought and captured her yesterday; I have half a mind to go
+back and seek her now.”
+
+He called up one of the ex slaves who was a native of Tripoli, and who
+had now taken his place as a member of the crew, and asked him a number
+of questions. Gervaise felt uncomfortable while the man was answering.
+Fortunately, his rowers had agreed to say nothing whatever of the
+destruction of the corsair fleet, of which no word had as yet reached
+the pirates, deeming that, in their anger at the news, the pirates might
+turn upon them for the part that they had, however involuntarily, borne
+in it.
+
+As soon as he perceived that the captain entertained the idea of
+returning to engage the galley, the man felt that if he were to avoid
+a return into captivity he must deter him from taking such a step. He
+therefore, in answer to his questions as to the strength of the crew of
+the galley and the fighting powers of the knights, reported the capture
+of the three vessels. The captain listened almost incredulously to his
+statement, and, calling up another two of the men, questioned them also
+as to the occurrence. Having heard them, he turned away and paced the
+deck, in evident anger; however, he gave no instructions for a change of
+course, and, to the great satisfaction of the eight rescued slaves, the
+vessel continued her course southward.
+
+As they neared the African coast, Gervaise kept an eager lookout, in
+hopes that Visconti's galley might appear in sight. The captain's temper
+had not recovered from the effect of the news of the capture of three
+Moorish vessels by the galley commanded by Gervaise, and the latter,
+seeing the mood he was in, kept forward so as to avoid coming in contact
+with him. He had early taken the opportunity of saying to one of the
+released galley slaves, “I pray you, if you have any feeling of kindness
+towards me for the efforts I made to alleviate your condition, say
+no word of my knowledge of Turkish, and ask the others also to remain
+silent on this point.”
+
+The man had nodded, and the request was observed by them all.
+
+The captain's irritation showed itself in his treatment of the other
+captives. These were brought up every day from the hold, and kept on
+deck until dark, as the price they would fetch in the slave market in
+Tripoli would depend greatly upon their health and appearance; but when
+the captain came near them he several times struck them brutally, if
+they happened to be in his way. Gervaise had the greatest difficulty in
+restraining his indignation, and, indeed, only did so because he felt
+that his interference would but make things worse for them. When at last
+the ship cast anchor off Tripoli, the captain ordered the boats to be
+lowered. As he walked towards the gangway, he happened to push against
+one of the captives, a Greek girl of some ten years of age. With an
+angry exclamation he struck her to the deck. Gervaise sprang forward.
+
+“You brute!” he exclaimed in English. “I have a good mind to throw you
+overboard, and will do so the next time you strike one of these children
+without cause.”
+
+Infuriated by Gervaise's interference and threatening attitude, the
+corsair drew his long knife; but before he could strike, Gervaise caught
+his wrist; the knife fell from his hand, and Gervaise kicked it through
+the open gangway into the sea. The captain shouted to his men to seize
+the Christian, but the young knight's blood was up now. The first
+man who came at him he seized by the sash round his waist, and threw
+overboard; the two next he stretched on the deck with blows from his
+clenched fist. Some of the others now drew their weapons, but the
+captain shouted to them to sheath them.
+
+“Fools!” he yelled. “Is it not enough that your cowardice has already
+cost us the lives of three knights, whose capture would have brought us
+a big sum? Throw him down and bind him. What! are fifty of you afraid of
+one unarmed man? No wonder these Christians capture our ships, if this
+is the mettle of our crews!”
+
+Goaded by his words, the men made a general rush upon Gervaise, and, in
+spite of his desperate efforts, threw him on to the deck and bound him;
+then the captain, seizing a heavy stick in his left hand, his right
+being still powerless, showered blows upon him until Gervaise almost
+lost consciousness. “Throw some water over the dog,” the corsair said,
+as he threw down the stick, panting with his exertions; and then,
+without waiting to see if his order was obeyed, he took his place in the
+boat, and was rowed ashore.
+
+As soon as he had left, three or four of the ex galley slaves carried
+Gervaise into the shade of the sail. The sailors, several of whom
+bore signs of the late struggle, looked on sullenly, but offered no
+opposition when the men took off the ropes and raised him into a sitting
+posture against the mast. He had not entirely lost consciousness, and
+was now fast recovering himself.
+
+“Is there anything we can do for you?” one of the men asked in Italian.
+
+“No I shall soon be all right again, although I am bruised all over, and
+shall be stiff for a day or two. You had best leave me now, or you will
+incur the enmity of these fellows.”
+
+Gervaise was indeed bruised from his neck to his heels. Even in
+his passion the pirate had avoided striking him on the head, as a
+disfiguring mark on the face would diminish his value. Sitting there, he
+congratulated himself that he had been beaten with a stick and not
+with a whip; a stick is a weapon, and he did not feel the same sense of
+dishonour that he would have experienced had he been beaten with a
+whip. That such might be his lot in slavery he recognised. The backs of
+Caretto and his two companions were seamed with the marks inflicted
+by the gang master's whip, and he could scarce hope to escape the same
+treatment; but at present he hardly felt a slave. There was another
+reflection that to some extent mitigated the pain of his bruises;
+the pirate captain held his treasured gage, and it was his fixed
+determination to recover it. The man had at first in a rough way treated
+him fairly, and had allowed him more liberty than the other captives,
+and he would have felt reluctant to take extreme measure against him to
+recover the gage. Now he was not only free from any sense of obligation,
+but had a heavy score to settle with him.
+
+After a time he got up and walked stiffly and painfully up and down
+the deck, knowing that this was the best plan to prevent the limbs
+from stiffening. The corsair did not return until night set in; he was
+accompanied by an Arab, whose dress and appearance showed that he was
+a person of importance. The other slaves had all been sent below, but
+Gervaise still remained on deck, as the mate had not cared to risk
+another conflict by giving him orders in the absence of the captain. As
+the pirate stepped on deck he ordered some torches to be brought.
+
+“This is the Christian I spoke of,” he said to the Arab, pointing to
+Gervaise, who was leaning carelessly against the bulwark.
+
+“He is, as you see, capable of hard work of any kind; his strength is
+prodigious, for it took ten of my best men to bind him this morning.”
+
+“Why did you wish to bind him?” the Arab asked coldly; “you told me that
+although so strong he was of a quiet disposition, and would make a good
+household slave.”
+
+“I struck a slave girl who stood in my way,” the captain said, “and he
+came at me so suddenly that I had to call upon the men to bind him. He
+threw one of them overboard, and with his naked hands knocked down two
+others; and, as I have told you, it took all the efforts of eight or ten
+more before they could overcome him.”
+
+The Arab took a torch from one of the sailors, walked across to
+Gervaise, who was naked from the waist upwards, his upper garments
+having been torn into shreds in the struggle, and examined him closely.
+
+“And then you beat him,” he said, turning to the captain.
+
+“Certainly I beat him. Do you think that a slave is to mutiny on board
+my ship, and escape unpunished?”
+
+The Arab, without replying, again inspected Gervaise.
+
+“You ask a large sum for him,” he said.
+
+“I should ask twice as much,” the captain replied, “if it were not for
+the regulation that one slave from each cargo brought in belongs to the
+sultan, and his officers would as a matter of course choose this fellow,
+for the others are merely such as are sold in the market every day. This
+man is one of the accursed Order of Rhodes, and would fetch a ransom
+many times greater than the sum I ask for him, only I have not the time
+to wait for months until the affair could be arranged.”
+
+“And, moreover, Hassan,” the Arab said grimly, “it has doubtless not
+escaped you that as the Sultan of Turkey is fitting out an expedition
+to destroy the community of Rhodes, the chance of their ransoming their
+comrade is a very slight one.”
+
+“Threatened men live long,” the captain said. “The sultan has been
+talking of attacking them for years, and something has always happened
+to prevent his carrying out his intention. It may be the same again.”
+
+“I will take him,” the Arab said shortly. “Here is a purse with the sum
+you named; count it, and see that it is right.” As he stood apart while
+the pirate counted out the money, the eight released slaves came up in a
+body, and one of them, bowing low before the merchant, said,
+
+“My lord, we have long been slaves of the Christian knights at Rhodes,
+and have worked in their galleys. We were rescued the other day when
+this knight was taken prisoner. Our life has been a hard one. We have
+borne toil, and hardship, and blows, the heat of the sun by day, and the
+damp by night, but we would humbly represent to you that since we were
+placed in the galley commanded by this knight our lot has been made
+bearable by his humanity and kindness. He erected an awning to shade us
+from the sun's rays, and to shelter us from the night dews. He provided
+good food for us. He saw that we were not worked beyond our strength,
+and he forbade us being struck, unless for good cause. Therefore, my
+lord, now that misfortune has fallen upon him, we venture to represent
+to you the kindness with which he has treated us, in the hope that it
+may please you to show him such mercy as he showed to us.”
+
+“You have done well,” the Arab said, “and your words shall not be
+forgotten. When you land tomorrow, inquire for the house of Isaac
+Ben Ibyn. You are doubtless penniless, and I may be able to obtain
+employment for those of you who may stop at Tripoli, and to assist those
+who desire to take passage to their homes elsewhere. We are commanded to
+be grateful to those who befriend us, and as you have shown yourselves
+to be so, it is right that I, an humble servant of the Great One, should
+in His name reward you.”
+
+Motioning to Gervaise to follow him, the Arab stepped into his boat.
+Gervaise turned to the men, and said in Italian, “Thanks, my friends,
+you have well discharged any debt that you may think you owe me. Will
+you tell that villain”--and he pointed to the captain threateningly--“I
+warn him that some day I will kill him like a dog!” Then, turning, he
+stepped into the bow of the boat, and the two men who rowed it at once
+pushed off.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVIII A KIND MASTER
+
+
+When the boat reached the shore the Arab handed a long bernouse to
+Gervaise, signed to him to pull the hood well over his head, and then
+led the way through the streets until he stopped at a large house,
+standing in a quiet quarter of the town. He struck on the door with his
+hand, and it was at once opened by a black slave.
+
+“Call Muley,” the Arab said.
+
+The slave hurried away, and returned in a minute with a man somewhat
+past middle age, and dressed in a style that indicated that he was a
+trusted servant.
+
+“Muley,” his master said, “I have bought this Christian who has been
+brought in by Hassan the corsair. He is one of the knights who are the
+terrors of our coasts, but is, from what I hear, of a kind and humane
+disposition. I am told that he was a commander of one of their galleys,
+and though I should not have believed it had I only Hassan's word, I
+have heard from others that it was so. My wife has long desired to have
+a Christian slave, and as Allah has blessed my efforts it was but right
+that I should gratify her, though in truth I do not know what work I
+shall set him to do at present. Let him first have a bath, and see that
+he is clad decently, then let him have a good meal. I doubt if he has
+had one since he was captured. He has been sorely beaten by the corsair,
+and from no fault of his own, but only because he opposed the man's
+brutality to a child slave. If any of his wounds need ointment, see that
+he has it. When all is ready, bring him to the door of my apartments, in
+order that I may show to my wife that I have gratified her whim.”
+
+Then he motioned to Gervaise to follow Muley, who was the head of his
+household. Gervaise resisted the impulse to thank his new master, and
+followed in silence.
+
+He was first taken to a bathroom, furnished with an abundance of hot and
+cold water. Muley uttered an exclamation as, on Gervaise throwing off
+his bernouse, he saw that his flesh was a mass of bruises. After filling
+the bath with hot water, he motioned to Gervaise to get in, and lie
+there until he returned. It was some time before he came back, bringing
+a pot of ointment and some bandages. It was only on the body that the
+wounds needed dressing, for here the blows had fallen on the naked skin.
+When he had dressed them, Muley went out and returned with some Turkish
+garments, consisting of a pair of baggy trousers of yellow cotton, a
+white shirt of the same material, and a sleeveless jacket of blue cloth
+embroidered with yellow trimming; a pair of yellow slippers completed
+the costume. Muley now took him into another room, where he set before
+him a dish of rice with a meat gravy, a large piece of bread, and a
+wooden spoon.
+
+Gervaise ate the food with a deep feeling of thankfulness for the fate
+that had thrown him into such good hands. Then, after taking a long
+draught of water, he rose to his feet and followed Muley into the
+entrance hall. The latter stopped at a door on the opposite side,
+knocked at it, and then motioned to Gervaise to take off his slippers.
+The door was opened by the Arab himself.
+
+“Enter,” he said courteously, and led Gervaise into an apartment where
+a lady and two girls were sitting on a divan. They were slightly veiled;
+but, as Gervaise afterwards learnt, Ben Ibyn was not a Moor, but a
+Berber, a people who do not keep their women in close confinement as
+do the Moors, but allow them to go abroad freely without being entirely
+muffled up.
+
+“Khadja,” the merchant said, “this is the Christian slave I purchased
+today. You have for a long time desired one, but not until now have I
+found one who would, I thought, satisfy your expectations. What think
+you of him?”
+
+“He is a noble looking youth truly, Isaac, with his fair, wavy hair, his
+grey eyes, and white skin; truly, all my neighbours will envy me such
+a possession. I have often seen Christian slaves before, but they have
+always been broken down and dejected looking creatures; this one bears
+himself like a warrior rather than a slave.”
+
+“He is a warrior; he is one of those terrible knights of Rhodes whose
+very name is a terror to the Turks, and whose galleys are feared even
+by our boldest corsairs. He must be of approved valour, for he was
+commander of one of these galleys.”
+
+The girls looked with amazement at Gervaise. They had often heard tales
+of the capture of ships that had sailed from Tripoli, by the galleys
+of the Christian knights, and had pictured those fierce warriors as of
+almost supernatural strength and valour. That this youth, whose upper
+lip was but shaded with a slight moustache, should be one of them,
+struck them as being almost incredible.
+
+“He does not look ferocious, father,” one of them said. “He looks
+pleasant and good tempered, as if he could injure no one.”
+
+“And yet this morning, daughter, he braved, unarmed, the anger of Hassan
+the corsair, on the deck of his own ship; and when the pirate called
+upon his men to seize him he threw one overboard, struck two more on to
+the deck, and it needed eight men to overpower him.”
+
+“I hope he won't get angry with us!” the younger girl exclaimed.
+Gervaise could not suppress a laugh, and then, turning to the merchant,
+said in Turkish, “I must ask your pardon for having concealed from you
+my knowledge of your tongue. I kept the secret from all on board the
+corsair, and meant to have done the same here, deeming that if none knew
+that I spoke the language it would greatly aid me should I ever see
+an opportunity of making my escape; but, Ben Ibyn, you have behaved so
+kindly to me that I feel it would not be honourable to keep it a secret
+from you, and to allow you and the ladies to talk freely before me,
+thinking that I was altogether ignorant of what you were saying.”
+
+“You have acted well and honourably,” Ben Ibyn said, putting a hand on
+his shoulder kindly. “We have heard much of the character of the Order,
+and that though valiant in battle, your knights are courteous and
+chivalrous, deeming a deceitful action to be unworthy of them, and
+binding themselves by their vows to succour the distressed and to be
+pitiful to the weak. We have heard that our wounded are tended by
+them in your hospitals with as much care as men of their own race and
+religion, and that in many things the knights were to be admired even by
+those who were their foes. I see now that these reports were true, and
+that although, as you say, it might be of advantage to you that none
+should know you speak Arabic, yet it is from a spirit of honourable
+courtesy you have now told us that you do so.
+
+“I did not tell you, wife,” he went on, turning to her, “that the reason
+why he bearded Hassan today was because the corsair brutally struck a
+little female captive; thus, you see, he, at the risk of his life, and
+when himself a captive, carried out his vows to protect the defenceless.
+And now, wife, there is one thing you must know. For some time, at any
+rate, you must abandon the idea of exciting the envy of your friends by
+exhibiting your Christian captive to them. As you are aware, the sultan
+has the choice of any one slave he may select from each batch brought
+in, and assuredly he would choose this one, did it come to his ears,
+or to the ears of one of his officers, that a Christian knight had been
+landed. For this reason Hassan sold him to me for a less sum than
+he would otherwise have demanded, and we must for some time keep his
+presence here a secret. My idea is that he shall remain indoors until
+we move next week into our country house, where he will be comparatively
+free from observation.”
+
+“Certainly, Isaac. I would not on any account that he should be handed
+over to the sultan, for he would either be put into the galleys or have
+to labour in the streets.”
+
+“I will tell Muley to order the other slaves to say nothing outside
+of the fresh arrival, so for the present there is no fear of its being
+talked about in the town. Hassan will, for his own sake, keep silent
+on the matter. I have not yet asked your name,” he went on, turning to
+Gervaise.
+
+“My name is Gervaise Tresham; but it will be easier for you to call me
+by my first name only.”
+
+“Then, Gervaise, it were well that you retired to rest at once, for I am
+sure that you sorely need it.” He touched a bell on the table, and told
+Muley, when he appeared, to conduct Gervaise to the place where he was
+to sleep, which was, he had already ordered, apart from the quarters of
+the other slaves.
+
+“The young fellow is a mass of bruises,” Ben Ibyn said to his wife, when
+the door closed behind Gervaise. “Hassan beat him so savagely, after
+they had overpowered and bound him, that he well nigh killed him.”
+
+An exclamation of indignation burst from the wife and daughters.
+
+“Muley has seen to his wounds,” he went on, “and he will doubtless be
+cured in a few days. And now, wife, that your wish is gratified, and I
+have purchased a Christian slave for you, may I ask what you are going
+to do with him?”
+
+“I am sure I do not know,” she said in a tone of perplexity. “I had
+thought of having him to hand round coffee when my friends call, and
+perhaps to work in the garden, but I did not think that he would be
+anything like this.”
+
+“That is no reason why he should not do so,” Ben Ibyn said. “These
+Christians, I hear, treat their women as if they were superior beings,
+and feel it no dishonour to wait upon them; I think you cannot do better
+than carry out your plan. It is certain there is no sort of work that
+he would prefer to it; therefore, let it be understood that he is to be
+your own personal attendant, and that when you have no occasion for his
+services, he will work in the garden. Only do not for the present let
+any of your friends see him; they would spread the news like wildfire,
+and in a week every soul in the town would know that you had a good
+looking Christian slave, and the sultan's officer would be sending for
+me to ask how I obtained him. We must put a turban on him. Any one who
+caught a glimpse of that hair of his, however far distant, would know
+that he was a Frank.”
+
+“We might stain his face and hands with walnut juice,” Khadja said, “he
+would pass as a Nubian. Some of them are tall and strong.”
+
+“A very good thought, wife; it would be an excellent disguise. So shall
+it be.” He touched the bell again. “Tell Muley I would speak with him.
+Muley,” he went on, when the steward appeared, “have you said aught to
+any of the servants touching the Christian?”
+
+“No, my lord; you gave me no instructions about it, and I thought it
+better to wait until the morning, when I could ask you.”
+
+“You did well. We have determined to stain his skin, and at present he
+will pass as a Nubian. This will avoid all questions and talk.”
+
+“But, my lord, they will wonder that he cannot speak their tongue.”
+
+“He must pass among them as a mute; but indeed he speaks Arabic as well
+as we do, Muley.”
+
+The man uttered an exclamation of surprise.
+
+“He had intended to conceal his knowledge,” Ben Ibyn went on, “which
+would have been politic; but when he found that my intentions were kind,
+he told us that he knew our tongue, and now revealed his knowledge, as
+he thought it would be dishonourable to listen to our talk, leaving us
+under the impression that he could not understand us.”
+
+“Truly these Christians are strange men,” Muley said. “This youth, who
+has not yet grown the hair on his face, is nevertheless commander of a
+war galley. He is ready to risk his life on behalf of a slave, and can
+strike down men with his unarmed hand; he is as gentle in his manner as
+a woman; and now it seems he can talk Arabic, and although it was in his
+power to keep this secret he tells it rather than overhear words that
+are not meant for his ear. Truly they are strange people, the Franks.
+I will prepare some stain in the morning, my lord, and complete his
+disguise before any of the others see him.”
+
+The next morning Muley told Gervaise that his master thought that it
+would be safer and more convenient for him to pass as a dumb Nubian
+slave. Gervaise thought the plan an excellent one; and he was soon
+transformed, Muley shaving that part of the hair that would have shown
+below the turban, and then staining him a deep brownish black, from the
+waist upwards, together with his feet and his legs up to his knee, and
+darkening his eyebrows, eyelashes, and moustache.
+
+“Save that your lips lack the thickness, and your nose is straighter
+than those of Nubians, no one would doubt but that you were one of that
+race; and this is of little consequence, as many of them are of mixed
+blood, and, though retaining their dark colour, have features that in
+their outline resemble those of the Arabs. Now I will take you to Ben
+Ibyn, so that he may judge whether any further change is required before
+the servants and slaves see you.”
+
+“That is excellent,” the merchant said, when he had carefully inspected
+Gervaise, “I should pass you myself without recognizing you. Now you can
+take him into the servants' quarters, Muley, and tell them that he is a
+new slave whom I have purchased, and that henceforth it will be his
+duty to wait upon my wife, to whom I have presented him as her special
+attendant, and that he will accompany her and my daughters when they go
+abroad to make their purchases or visit their friends. Give some reason,
+if you can think of one, why you have bestowed him in a chamber separate
+from the rest.”
+
+Gervaise at once took up his new duties, and an hour later, carrying a
+basket, followed them into the town. It was strange to him thus to be
+walking among the fanatical Moors, who, had they known the damage that
+he had inflicted upon their galleys, would have torn him in pieces.
+None gave him, however, more than a passing look. Nubian slaves were
+no uncommon sight in the town, and in wealthy Moorish families were
+commonly employed in places of trust, and especially as attendants in
+the harems. The ladies were now as closely veiled as the Moorish women,
+it being only in the house that they followed the Berber customs.
+Gervaise had learnt from Muley that Ben Ibyn was one of the
+richest merchants in Tripoli, trading direct with Egypt, Syria, and
+Constantinople, besides carrying on a large trade with the Berber
+tribes in the interior. He returned to the house with his basket full
+of provisions, and having handed these over to the cook, he went to the
+private apartments, as Khadja had requested him to do. Here she and
+her daughters asked him innumerable questions as to his country and its
+customs, and then about Rhodes and the Order to which he belonged.
+Their surprise was great when they heard that the knights were bound to
+celibacy.
+
+“But why should they not marry if they like? Why should they not have
+wives, children, and homes like other people?” Khadja asked.
+
+“It is that they may devote their whole lives to their work. Their home
+is the convent at Rhodes, or at one of the commanderies scattered over
+Europe, where they take charge of the estates of the Order.”
+
+“But why should they not marry then, Gervaise? At Rhodes there might be
+danger for women and children, but when they return to Europe to take
+charge of the estates, surely they would do their duty no worse for
+having wives?”
+
+Gervaise smiled.
+
+“I did not make the rules of the Order, lady, but I have thought myself
+that although, so long as they are doing military work at the convent,
+it is well that they should not marry, yet there is no good reason why,
+when established in commanderies at home, they should not, like other
+knights and nobles, marry if it so pleases them.”
+
+In the evening the merchant returned from his stores, which were
+situated down by the port. Soon after he came in he sent for Gervaise.
+“There is a question I had intended to ask you last night,” he said,
+“but it escaped me. More than two months since there sailed from this
+port and others many vessels--not the ships of the State, but corsairs.
+In all, more than twenty ships started, with the intention of making a
+great raid upon the coast of Italy. No word has since been received of
+them, and their friends here are becoming very uneasy, the more so as we
+hear that neither at Tunis nor Algiers has any news been received. Have
+you heard at Rhodes of a Moorish fleet having been ravaging the coast of
+Italy?”
+
+“Have you any friends on board the ships that sailed from here, or any
+interest in the venture, Ben Ibyn?”
+
+The merchant shook his head. “We Berbers,” he said, “are not like the
+Moors, and have but little to do with the sea, save by the way of trade.
+For myself, I regret that these corsair ships are constantly putting
+out. Were it not for them and their doings we might trade with the ports
+of France, of Spain, and Italy, and be on good terms with all. There is
+no reason why, because our faiths are different, we should be constantly
+fighting. It is true that the Turks threaten Europe, and are even now
+preparing to capture Rhodes; but this is no question of religion. The
+Turks are warlike and ambitious; they have conquered Syria, and war with
+Egypt and Persia; but the Moorish states are small, they have no thought
+of conquest, and might live peaceably with Europe were it not for the
+hatred excited against them by the corsairs.”
+
+“In that case I can tell you the truth. Thirteen of those ships were
+taken into Rhodes as prizes; the other eleven were burnt. Not one of the
+fleet escaped.”
+
+Exclamations of surprise broke from Ben Ibyn, his wife, and daughters.
+
+“I am astonished, indeed,” the merchant said. “It was reported here that
+the Genoese galleys were all laid up, and it was thought that they would
+be able to sweep the seas without opposition, and to bring home vast
+spoil and many captives, both from the ships they took and from many of
+the villages and small towns of the coast. How came such a misfortune to
+happen to them? It will create consternation here when it is known, for
+although it was not a state enterprise, the sultan himself and almost
+all the rich Moors embarked money in the fitting out of the ships, and
+were to have shares in the spoil taken. How happened it that so strong a
+fleet was all taken or destroyed, without even one vessel being able to
+get away to carry home the news of the disaster?”
+
+“Fortune was against them,” Gervaise said. “Three ships on their way
+up were captured by a galley of our Order, and her commander having
+obtained news of the whereabouts of the spot where the corsairs were to
+rendezvous, found them all lying together in a small inlet, and launched
+against them a number of fishing boats fitted out as fire ships. The
+corsairs, packed closely together, were unable to avoid them, and, as
+I told you, eleven of their ships were burnt, four were run ashore to
+avoid the flames, while six, trying to make their way out, were captured
+by the galley, aided by the three prizes that were taken and which the
+knights had caused to be manned by Sards.”
+
+“The ways of Allah the All Seeing are wonderful,” the merchant said.
+“It was indeed a marvellous feat for one galley thus to destroy a great
+fleet.”
+
+“It was the result of good fortune rather than skill and valour,”
+ Gervaise said.
+
+“Nay, nay; let praise be given where it is due. It was a marvellous
+feat; and although there is good or bad fortune in every event, such a
+deed could not have been performed, and would not even have been thought
+of, save by a great commander. Who was the knight who thus with one
+galley alone destroyed a strongly manned fleet, from which great things
+had been looked for?”
+
+Gervaise hesitated. “It was a young knight,” he said, “of but little
+standing in the Order, and whose name is entirely unknown outside its
+ranks.”
+
+“By this time it must be well known,” Ben Ibyn said; “and it will soon
+be known throughout Christendom, and will be dreaded by every Moor. What
+was it?”
+
+Gervaise again hesitated.
+
+“I would not have told you the story at all, Ben Ibyn, had I supposed
+you would have cared to inquire into the matter. Of course, I will tell
+you the name if you insist upon it, but I would much rather you did not
+ask.”
+
+“But why?” the merchant asked, in surprise. “If I hear it not from you,
+I shall assuredly hear it ere long from others, for it will be brought
+by traders who are in communication with Italy. I cannot understand why
+you should thus hesitate about telling me the name of this commander.
+When known it will doubtless be cursed by thousands of Moorish wives and
+mothers; but we Berbers are another race. None of our friends or kindred
+were on board the fleet; and we traders have rather reason to rejoice,
+for, in the first place, so severe a lesson will keep the corsairs in
+their ports for a long time; and in the second, had the fleet succeeded
+according to general expectation, so great a store of European goods
+would have been brought home that the market would have been glutted,
+and the goods in our storehouses would have lost all their value. What
+reason, then, can you possibly have in refusing to tell me the name of
+the commander who has won for himself such credit and glory?”
+
+Gervaise saw that Ben Ibyn was seriously annoyed at what he deemed his
+unaccountable obstinacy.
+
+“I will tell you, Ben Ibyn, rather than excite your displeasure, though
+I would much have preferred not to do so, for you speak so much more
+highly of the affair than it merits. I had myself the honour of being in
+command of that galley.”
+
+The ladies broke into exclamations of surprise, while the merchant
+regarded him with grave displeasure.
+
+“I had thought you truthful,” he said; “but this passes all belief. Dost
+tell me that a beardless youth could with one galley overcome a great
+fleet, commanded by the most noted captains on our coast?”
+
+“I thought that you would not believe me,” Gervaise said quietly; “and,
+therefore, would have much preferred to keep silence, knowing that I had
+no means of supporting my claim. That was not the only reason; the other
+was, that already a great deal too much has been said about an affair
+in which, as I have told you, I owed everything to good fortune, and am
+heartily sick of receiving what I consider altogether undue praise. Ah!”
+ he exclaimed suddenly, “the thought has just occurred to me of a way by
+which you can obtain confirmation of my story; and, as I value your good
+opinion and would not be regarded as a boaster and a liar, I entreat you
+to take it. I heard you tell the eight men who were rowers in my boat
+when I was captured, to call upon you today, that you might do something
+for them.”
+
+“They came this morning to my store,” the merchant said. “They told
+me their wishes. I promised them that I would make inquiry about ships
+sailing East; and they are to come to me again tomorrow.”
+
+“Then, sir, I beseech you to suffer me to go down with you to your
+stores and meet them there. The galley of which I was in command at the
+time I was captured is the same as that in which a few weeks before I
+fought the corsairs, and these eight men were with me at that time.
+I begged them for my sake to maintain an absolute silence as to that
+affair, and I have no doubt that they have done so, for in the fury
+the news would excite, they might fall victims to the first outburst,
+though, of course, wholly innocent of any share in the misfortune.
+Did you question them without my being present, they might still keep
+silent, fearing to injure me. But if, before you begin to do so, I tell
+them that they can speak the truth with reference to me, they will, I am
+sure, confirm my story, incredible as it may now appear to you.”
+
+“That is a fair offer,” the merchant said gravely, “and I accept it,
+for it may be that I have been too hasty, and I trust it may prove so. I
+would rather find myself to be in fault than that the esteem with which
+you have inspired me should prove to be misplaced. We will speak no
+further on the subject now. I have not yet asked you how it is that you
+come to speak our language so well.”
+
+Gervaise related how he had studied with Suleiman Ali, and had escorted
+him to Syria and received his ransom.
+
+“I had hoped,” he said, “that the corsair would have taken me to Syria,
+for there I could have communicated with Suleiman, who would, I am sure,
+have given me such shelter and aid as he was able, in the event of my
+making my escape from slavery and finding myself unable to leave by
+sea.”
+
+The next day Gervaise went with Ben Ibyn to his stores. The eight
+men arrived shortly afterwards, and the merchant, in the presence
+of Gervaise, questioned them as to whether they knew anything of a
+misfortune that was said to have befallen some ships that had sailed
+for the coast of Italy. The men, surprised at the question, glanced at
+Gervaise, who said, “Tell Ben Ibyn the truth; it will do neither you nor
+me any harm, and will be mentioned by him to no one else.”
+
+Accordingly the story was told. Ben Ibyn listened gravely.
+
+“It was the will of Allah,” he said, when it was concluded. “I have
+wronged you, Gervaise, but your tale seemed too marvellous to be true.
+
+“Do not speak of this to others;” he went on to the eight men. “Now as
+to yourselves. For the four of you who desire to return to Syria I have
+taken passage in a trader that sails tomorrow and will touch at Joppa
+and Acre. Here is money to provide yourselves with garments and to carry
+you to your homes. For you,” he said to two who were natives of the
+town, “I can myself find employment here, and if your conduct is good,
+you will have no reason to regret taking service with me. The two of
+you who desire to go to Smyrna I will give passage there in a ship which
+will sail next week; in the meantime, here is money for your present
+wants.”
+
+Two days later the merchant's family moved to his house two miles
+outside the town, and here Gervaise remained for six months. His life
+was not an unpleasant one; he was treated with great kindness by the
+merchant and his wife, his duties were but slight, and he had no more
+labour to perform in the garden than he cared to do. Nevertheless, he
+felt that he would rather have fallen into the hands of a less kind
+master, for it seemed to him that it would be an act almost of treachery
+to escape from those who treated him as a friend; moreover, at the
+country house he was not in a position to frame any plans for escape,
+had he decided upon attempting it, nor could he have found out when
+Hassan made one of his occasional visits to the port.
+
+One evening the merchant returned from the town accompanied by one of
+the sultan's officers and four soldiers. Ben Ibyn was evidently much
+depressed and disturbed; he told Muley as he entered, to fetch Gervaise.
+When the latter, in obedience to the order, came in from the garden, the
+officer said in Italian, “It having come to the ears of the sultan my
+master that the merchant Ben Ibyn has ventured, contrary to the law,
+to purchase a Christian slave brought secretly into the town, he has
+declared the slave to be forfeited and I am commanded to take him at
+once to the slaves' quarter.”
+
+“I am at the sultan's orders,” Gervaise said, bowing his head. “My
+master has been a kind one, and I am grateful to him for his treatment
+of me.”
+
+Gervaise, although taken aback by this sudden change in his fortunes,
+was not so cast down as he might otherwise have been; he would now be
+free to carry out any plan for escape that he might devise, and by his
+being addressed in Italian it was evident to him that his knowledge
+of Turkish was unsuspected. When among the other slaves he had always
+maintained his character of a mute; and it was only when alone in his
+master's family that he had spoken at all. He had no doubt that his
+betrayal was due to one of the gardeners, who had several times shown
+him signs of ill will, being doubtless jealous of the immunity he
+enjoyed from hard labour, and who must, he thought, have crept up and
+overheard some conversation; but in that case it was singular that
+the fact of his knowledge of Turkish had not been mentioned. Gervaise
+afterwards learned that Ben Ibyn had been fined a heavy sum for his
+breach of the regulations.
+
+He was now placed between the soldiers, and marched down to the town,
+without being allowed to exchange a word with the merchant. On his
+arrival there he was taken to the slaves' quarter; here his clothes were
+stripped from him, and he was given in their place a ragged shirt and
+trousers, and then turned into a room where some fifty slaves were
+lying. Of these about half were Europeans, the rest malefactors who had
+been condemned to labour.
+
+The appearance of all was miserable in the extreme; they were clothed in
+rags, and the faces of the Europeans had a dull, hopeless look that told
+alike of their misery and of their despair of any escape from it. They
+looked up listlessly as he entered, and then an Italian said, “Cospetto,
+comrade; but I know not whether your place is with us, or with the
+Moslems across there. As far as colour goes I should put you down as a
+Nubian; but your hair is of a hue that consorts but badly with that of
+your flesh.”
+
+“I am an Englishman,” Gervaise replied; “but I have been passing under a
+disguise which has unfortunately been detected, so you see here I am.”
+
+The mystery explained, his questioner had no further interest in the
+matter, and Gervaise, picking out a vacant place on the stone floor, sat
+down and looked round him. The room, although large, was roughly built,
+and had doubtless been erected with a view to its present purpose. There
+were only a few windows; and these were small, strongly barred, and
+twelve feet above the floor.
+
+“Not easy to get out of them,” Gervaise said to himself “at least, not
+easy without aid; and with these Moslems here it is clear that nothing
+can be done.”
+
+They were roused at daybreak next morning, and were taken out to their
+work under the guard of six armed Moors, two overseers, provided with
+long whips, accompanied them. The work consisted of cleaning the streets
+and working on the roads, and at times of carrying stones for the use of
+the masons employed in building an addition to the palace of the sultan.
+This was the work to which the gang was set that morning, and it was not
+long before the vigour with which Gervaise worked, and the strength he
+displayed in moving the heavy stones, attracted the attention of the
+overseers and of the head of the masons.
+
+“That is a rare good fellow you have got there, that black with the
+curious hair,” the latter said. “What is the man? I never saw one like
+him.”
+
+“He is a Christian,” one of the overseers said. “He was smuggled into
+the town and sold to Ben Ibyn the Berber, who, to conceal the matter,
+dyed him black; but it got to the ears of the sultan, and he had him
+taken from the Berber, and brought here; I have no doubt the merchant
+has been squeezed rarely.”
+
+“Well, that is a good fellow to work,” the other said. “He has just
+moved a stone, single handed, that it would have taken half a dozen of
+the others to lift. I wish you would put him regularly on this job; any
+one will do to sweep the streets; but a fellow like that will be of real
+use here, especially when the wall rises a bit higher.”
+
+“It makes no difference to me,” the overseer said. “I will give orders
+when I go down that he shall be always sent up with whichever gang comes
+here.”
+
+The head mason, who was the chief official of the work, soon saw that
+Gervaise not only possessed strength, but knowledge of the manner in
+which the work should be done.
+
+Accustomed as he had been to direct the slaves at work on the
+fortifications at Rhodes, he had learned the best methods of moving
+massive stones, and setting them in the places that they were to occupy.
+At the end of the day the head mason told one of the slaves who spoke
+Italian to inquire of Gervaise whether he had ever been employed on
+such work before. Gervaise replied that he had been engaged in the
+construction of large buildings.
+
+“I thought so,” the officer said to the overseer; “the way he uses his
+lever shows that he knows what he is doing. Most of the slaves are worth
+nothing; but I can see that this fellow will prove a treasure to us.”
+
+Gervaise returned to the prison well satisfied with his day's work. The
+labour, hard though it was, was an absolute pleasure to him. There was,
+moreover, nothing degrading in it, and while the overseers had plied
+their whips freely on the backs of many of his companions, he had not
+only escaped, but had, he felt, succeeded in pleasing his masters. The
+next morning when the gangs were drawn up in the yard before starting
+for work, he was surprised at being ordered to leave the one to which
+he belonged and to fall in with another, and was greatly pleased when he
+found that this took its way to the spot at which they were at work on
+the previous day.
+
+At the end of the week, when the work of the day was finished, the head
+mason came down to the prison and spoke to the governor; a few minutes
+afterwards Gervaise was called out. The governor was standing in the
+courtyard with an interpreter.
+
+“This officer tells me that you are skilled in masonry,” the governor
+said, “and has desired that you shall be appointed overseer of the gang
+whose duty it is to move the stones, saying he is sure that with half
+the slaves now employed you would get as much work done as at present.
+Have you anything to say?”
+
+“I thank you, my lord, and this officer,” Gervaise replied. “I will do
+my best; but I would submit to you that it would be better if I could
+have the same slaves always with me, instead of their being changed
+every day; I could then instruct them in their work. I would also submit
+that it were well to pick men with some strength for this labour, for
+many are so weak that they are well nigh useless in the moving of heavy
+weights; and lastly, I would humbly submit to you that if men are to
+do good work they must be fed. This work is as heavy as that in the
+galleys, and the men there employed receive extra rations to strengthen
+them; and I could assuredly obtain far better results if the gang
+employed upon this labour were to receive a somewhat larger supply of
+food.”
+
+“The fellow speaks boldly,” the governor said to the head mason, when
+the reply was translated.
+
+“There is reason in what he says, my lord. Many of the slaves, though
+fit for the light labour of cleaning the streets, are of very little use
+to us, and even the whip of the drivers cannot get more than a momentary
+effort from them. If you can save twenty-five men's labour for other
+work, it will pay to give more food to the other twenty-five. I should
+let this man pick out his gang. He has worked in turn with all of them,
+and must know what each can do; besides, it is necessary that he should
+have men who can understand his orders.”
+
+Gervaise accordingly was allowed to pick out his gang; and he chose
+those whom he had observed to be the strongest and most handy at the
+work.
+
+“You will be responsible,” the governor said to him, “for the masons
+being supplied with stone, and if you fail you will be punished and put
+to other labour.”
+
+So far from there being any falling off in the work, the head mason
+found that, even though the walls began to rise and the labour of
+transporting the stones into their positions became greater, the masons
+were never kept standing. The men, finding their position improved,
+both in the matter of food and in the immunity they enjoyed from blows,
+worked cheerfully and well. Gervaise did not content himself with
+giving orders, but worked at the heaviest jobs, and, little by little,
+introduced many of the appliances used by the skilled masons of Rhodes
+in transporting and lifting heavy stones. Gradually his own position
+improved: he was treated as an overseer, and was permitted to sleep
+under an arcade that ran along one side of the yard, instead of being
+confined in the close and stifling cell. His dye had long since worn
+off.
+
+One day as he was going up with his gang under charge of the usual
+guards to the building, he saw Hassan, who grinned maliciously.
+
+“Ah, ah, Christian dog!” he said; “you threatened me, and I have not
+forgotten it. The last time I was here I made it known to an officer of
+the sultan that Ben Ibyn had a Christian slave who had been smuggled
+in; and here you are. I hope you like the change. Look, I have still got
+your amulet, and it has brought me better luck than it did you. I have
+been fortunate ever since, and no money could buy it from me.”
+
+He had been walking close to Gervaise as he spoke, and one of the guards
+pushed him roughly aside.
+
+Time passed on. One day on his return from work a well dressed Moor met
+him as the gang broke up in the courtyard.
+
+“I have permission to speak to you,” he said to Gervaise, and drew him
+aside. “Know, O Christian, that I have received a letter from Suleiman
+Ali, of Syria. He tells me that he has heard from Ben Ibyn, the Berber,
+that you are a slave, and has asked me to inquire of the sultan the
+price that he will take for your ransom, expressing his willingness to
+pay whatever may be demanded, and charging me to defray the sum and to
+make arrangements by which you may return to Europe. This I am willing
+to do, knowing Suleiman Ali by report as a wealthy man and an honourable
+one. I saw the sultan yesterday. He told me that I should have an answer
+this morning as to the ransom that he would take. When I went to him
+again today, he said that he had learnt from the governor of the prison
+and from the head mason that you were almost beyond price, that you had
+been raised to the position of superintendent of the slaves employed in
+the building of his palace, and that you were a man of such skill that
+he would not part with you at any price until the work was finished.
+After that he would sell you; but he named a price threefold that at
+which the very best white slave in Tripoli would be valued. However,
+from the way in which Suleiman Ali wrote, I doubt not that he would pay
+it, great as it is, for he speaks of you in terms of affection, and I
+would pay the money could you be released at once. As it is, however,
+I shall write to him, and there will be ample time for an answer to be
+received from him before the building is finished.”
+
+“Truly I am deeply thankful to my good friend, Suleiman Ali; but for
+reasons of my own I am not desirous of being ransomed at present,
+especially at such a cost, which I should feel bound in honour to repay
+to him; therefore, I pray you to write to him, saying that while I thank
+him from my heart for his kindness, I am not able to avail myself of it.
+In the first place, I am well treated here, and my position is not an
+unpleasant one; secondly, the sum required for ransom is altogether
+preposterous; thirdly, I am not without hopes that I may some day find
+other means of freeing myself without so great a sacrifice; and lastly,
+that I have a reason which I cannot mention, why, at present, I would
+not quit Tripoli, even were I free tomorrow. You can tell him that this
+is the reason which, most of all, weighs with me. Do not, however, I
+pray you, let the sultan know that I have refused to be ransomed, for
+he might think I was meditating an escape, and would order extra
+precautions to be taken to prevent my doing so. Will you also see Ben
+Ibyn, and thank him from me for having written to Suleiman Ali on my
+behalf?”
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIX ESCAPE
+
+
+Gradually a greater amount of liberty was given to Gervaise. Escape
+from Tripoli was deemed impossible, especially as he was supposed to be
+entirely ignorant of Arabic. He was, indeed, scarcely regarded now as a
+slave by the head mason, and instead of being clad in rags was dressed
+like other overseers. He was no longer obliged to walk with the gang to
+and from the palace, and was at last granted permission to go into the
+town for an hour or two after his work was over, instead of returning
+direct to the prison. The first time this permission was given to him
+he placed himself on the road by which Ben Ibyn would leave the town,
+choosing a quiet spot where the meeting would not be observed. Gervaise
+had for some time taken to staining his face, hands, and legs with
+walnut juice, beginning with a weak solution, and very gradually
+increasing the strength until he had reached a shade approximating to
+that of the lighter coloured portion of the population. The head mason
+had on one occasion noticed it, and said, “The sun is darkening your
+skin, Gervaise, until you might verily pass as a Moor.”
+
+Gervaise detected an expression of doubt in the tone the officer had
+spoken to the interpreter, and replied at once, “It is not altogether
+the sun. Since I have obtained permission to come to my work alone,
+I have taken to slightly darkening my skin, in order to go to and fro
+unmolested, and free from the insults that the boys and beggars hurl at
+Christians.”
+
+The master mason nodded approvingly when the answer was translated to
+him.
+
+“It is a wise step,” he said; “for truly the hatred of Christians is
+very strong among the lower classes, especially since it became known
+that the galleys that sailed from here nearly two years ago were, with
+all the fleet from which so much was expected, utterly destroyed. It is
+well, then, that you should pass unnoticed, for were there a tumult in
+the street you might lose your life, and I should lose the best labour
+overseer I have ever had.”
+
+Thus, then, as Gervaise walked through the streets on the first occasion
+of obtaining his liberty, he attracted no attention whatever. When he
+saw Ben Ibyn approaching he stepped out to meet him. The merchant looked
+in his face, but for a moment failed to recognise him, then he exclaimed
+suddenly, “It is Gervaise! Ah, my son, I am indeed rejoiced to see
+you. We have spoken of you so often at home, and sorely did my wife and
+daughters grieve when you were torn from us. I did not dare to send any
+message to you, for the sultan pretended great anger against me, and
+used the opportunity to squeeze me hardly; but I have frequently made
+inquiries about you, and was glad indeed to find that even in prison you
+received promotion; had it been otherwise--had I found that you were
+in misery--I would have endeavoured, whatever the risk, to aid you to
+escape.”
+
+“I have indeed nothing to complain of, and was sorry to learn that you
+had suffered on my account. Have you ever learned how it came about that
+I was denounced?”
+
+“No, indeed; I would have given much to know, and assuredly the dog,
+whoever he was, should have been made to suffer.”
+
+“It was Hassan. The villain met me when I was with the gang, and boasted
+that it was he who had sent me there. He had told the news to some
+official, who had, of course, repeated it to the sultan; doubtless he
+concealed his own share in the matter, otherwise he too would, next time
+he returned here, have had to pay for his part in it.”
+
+“I will make him pay more heavily than the sultan would,” Ben Ibyn said
+sternly; “I will speak to my friends among the merchants, and henceforth
+no Berber will buy aught from him; and we have hitherto been his best
+customers. But let us not waste our time in speaking of this wretch. How
+comes it that you are walking freely in the streets of Tripoli? I can
+see that your face is stained, although you are no longer a Nubian.”
+
+Gervaise told him how it was that he was free to walk in the city after
+his work was done.
+
+“I shall now,” he went on, “be able to carry out any plan of escape that
+may occur to me; but before I leave, as I shall certainly do ere long,
+I mean to settle my score with Hassan, and I pray you to send one of
+the men who were with me in the galley, and whom you took into your
+employment, directly you hear that his ship is in harbour. Do not give
+him either a note or a message: bid him simply place himself in the
+road between the prison gate and the palace, and look fixedly at me as I
+pass. I shall know it is a signal that Hassan is in the port.”
+
+“Can I aid you in your flight? I will willingly do so.”
+
+“All that I shall need is the garb of a peasant,” Gervaise said. “I
+might buy one unnoticed; but, in the first place, I have no money, and
+in the second, when it is known that I have escaped, the trader might
+recall the fact that one of the slave overseers had purchased a suit of
+him.”
+
+“The dress of an Arab would be the best,” the merchant said. “That I
+will procure and hold in readiness for you. On the day when I send
+you word that Hassan is here, I will see that the gate of my garden is
+unbarred at night, and will place the garments down just behind it. You
+mean, I suppose, to travel by land?”
+
+“I shall do so for some distance. Were I to steal a boat from the port,
+it would be missed in the morning, and I be overtaken. I shall therefore
+go along the coast for some distance and get a boat at one of the
+villages, choosing my time when there is a brisk wind, and when I may
+be able to get well beyond any risk of being overtaken. Now, Ben Ibyn, I
+will leave you; it were better that we should not meet again, lest some
+suspicion might fall upon you of having aided in my escape. I cannot
+thank you too much for all your past kindness, and shall ever bear a
+grateful remembrance of yourself and your family.”
+
+“Perhaps it were better so,” Ben Ibyn said; “for if the Moors can find
+any excuse for plundering us, they do so. Have you heard the news that
+the Sultan of Turkey's expedition for the capture of Rhodes is all but
+complete, and will assuredly sail before many weeks have passed?”
+
+“I have not heard it,” Gervaise replied; “and trust that I may be in
+time to bear my share in the defence. However, the blow has been so
+often threatened that it may be some time before it falls.”
+
+“May Allah bless you, my son, and take you safely back to your friends!
+Be assured that you shall have notice as soon as I know that Hassan has
+returned, and you shall have the bundle with all that is needful, behind
+my gate.”
+
+Another two months passed. Gervaise looked in vain for Ben Ibyn's
+messenger as he went to and from the palace, and chafed terribly at the
+delay, when, for aught he knew, the Turkish fleet might already have
+brought Mahomet's army to Rhodes. At last, as he came back from work, he
+saw with intense satisfaction one of the men, whose face he recognised,
+leaning carelessly against the wall. The man gave no sign of
+recognition, but looked at him earnestly for a minute, and then
+sauntered off up the street. Gervaise went up into the town as usual,
+walked about until it became quite dark, and then went to the gate that
+led into the merchant's garden. He found that it was unfastened,
+and, opening it, he went in and closed it behind him. As he did so he
+started, for a voice close by said,
+
+“Master, it is I, the messenger whom you saw two hours since. Ben Ibyn
+bade me say that he thought you might require some service, and, knowing
+that I could be trusted, bade me wait for you here. He thought that you
+might possibly need a messenger to Hassan.”
+
+“The very thing,” Gervaise exclaimed. “I have been puzzling myself in
+vain as to how I could get speech with him in some quiet place; but
+with your assistance that will be easy; but first let me put on this
+disguise.”
+
+This was easily effected, even in the dark. A loose flowing robe of
+white cotton, girt in at the waist, a long bernouse with hood to cover
+the head, a sash with a dagger, and a scimitar, completed the disguise.
+
+“Here is a pouch,” the man said, “with money for your journey, and
+a long sword, which he says you can hang at your back beneath your
+bernouse.”
+
+Gervaise gave an exclamation of pleasure. By its length and weight he
+was sure that the weapon must have been the property of a Christian
+knight.
+
+“Shall I carry the message this evening?” the man asked. “It is early
+still, and it were best that you should not linger in the city, where
+there is sure to be a strict search for you in the morning.”
+
+“But perhaps he may recognise your face?”
+
+“It is blackened, my lord, and I am dressed as you were when with Ben
+Ibyn.”
+
+“Let us settle our plans, then, before we sally out from here; we could
+not find a safer place for talking. What message, think you, would be
+the most likely to tempt Hassan to come ashore? You do not know what
+spoil he has brought?”
+
+“No; besides, if a merchant wanted to buy he would go on board to
+inspect Hassan's wares. We must have something to sell. It must be
+something tempting, and something that must be disposed of secretly. I
+might tell him that my employer--and I would mention some merchant whose
+name would carry weight with him--has received from the interior a large
+consignment of slaves, among whom are three or four girls, who would
+fetch high prices in Egypt, and as he believes they have been captured
+from a tribe within the limits of the sultan's territory, he is anxious
+to get rid of them, and will either dispose of them all cheaply in a
+lot, or will hand them over to him to take to Egypt to sell, giving him
+a large commission for carrying them there and disposing of them.”
+
+“I do not like tempting even an enemy by stories that are untrue,”
+ Gervaise said doubtfully.
+
+“I have no scruples that way,” the man said, with a laugh; “and it is I
+who shall tell the story, and not you.”
+
+Gervaise shook his head.
+
+“Could you not say that you came from one who owes him a heavy debt and
+desires to pay him?”
+
+“I do not think that would bring him ashore. Hassan doubtless trades for
+ready money, and must be well aware that no one here can be greatly in
+his debt. No, my lord; leave the matter in my hands. I will think of
+some story before I go on board that will fetch him ashore. But first we
+must settle where I am to bring him; there are some deserted spots near
+the wall on the east side of the town.”
+
+“I know where you mean,” Gervaise agreed; “let us go in that direction
+at once, for the sooner you are off the better.”
+
+In half an hour a spot was fixed on, near some huts that had fallen into
+ruin. Here Gervaise seated himself on a sand heap, while the man hurried
+away. The moon had just risen, it being but three days since it was at
+its full. The night was quiet; sounds of music, laughter, and occasional
+shouts came faintly from the town. Seated where he was, Gervaise could
+see the port and the ships lying there. Half an hour later he saw a boat
+row off to one of them, which he had already singled out, from its size
+and general appearance, as being that of Hassan; ten minutes later he
+saw it returning. At that distance separate figures could not be made
+out, but it seemed to him that it loomed larger than before, and he
+thought that certainly one, if not more, persons, were returning with
+his messenger. Presently he heard men approaching; then Hassan's voice
+came distinctly to his ears.
+
+“How much farther are you going to take me? Remember, I warned you that
+unless I found that my journey repaid me, it would be bad for you.”
+
+“It is but a few yards farther, my lord. There is my master the sheik of
+the Beni Kalis awaiting you.”
+
+Gervaise rose to his feet as Hassan and two of his crew came up.
+
+“Now,” the former said roughly, “where have you bestowed these captives
+you want to sell me?”
+
+“Will you please to follow me into this courtyard?” Gervaise said.
+He had, while waiting, reconnoitred the neighbourhood, and found an
+enclosure with the walls still perfect, and had determined to bring
+Hassan there, in order to prevent him from taking to flight. Hassan
+entered it unsuspectingly, followed by his two men. Gervaise fell back
+a little, so as to place himself between them and the entrance. Then he
+threw back the hood of his bernouse.
+
+“Do you recognise me, Hassan?” he said sternly. “I am the captive whom
+you beat almost to death. I told you that some day I would kill you;
+but even now I am willing to forgive you and to allow you to depart in
+peace, if you will restore the amulet you took from me.”
+
+The corsair gave a howl of rage.
+
+“Christian dog!” he exclaimed. “You thought to lead me into a trap,
+but you have fallen into one yourself. You reckoned that I should come
+alone; but I suspected there was something hidden behind the story of
+that black, and so brought two of my crew with me. Upon him, men! Cut
+him down!” So saying, he drew his scimitar, and sprang furiously upon
+Gervaise. The latter stepped back into the centre of the gateway, so as
+to prevent the men, who had also drawn their swords, passing to attack
+him from behind. He had undone the clasp of his bernouse, and allowed it
+to fall to the ground as he addressed Hassan, and his long sword flashed
+in the moonlight as the corsair sprang forward.
+
+Hassan was a good swordsman, and his ferocious bravery had rendered him
+one of the most dreaded of the Moorish rovers. Inferior in strength to
+Gervaise, he was as active as a cat, and he leapt back with the spring
+of a panther, avoiding the sweeping blow with which Gervaise had hoped
+to finish the conflict at once; the latter found himself therefore
+engaged in a desperate fight with his three assailants. So furiously did
+they attack him that, foot by foot, he was forced to give ground. As he
+stepped through the gateway one of the pirates sprang past him, but as
+he did so, a figure leapt out from beyond the wall, and plunged a dagger
+into his back, while at the same moment, by cutting down another pirate,
+Gervaise rid himself of one of his assailants in front; but as he did
+so, he himself received a severe wound on the left shoulder from Hassan,
+who, before he could again raise his weapon, sprang upon him, and tried
+to hurl him to the ground.
+
+Gervaise's superior weight saved him from falling, though he staggered
+back some paces; then his heel caught against a stone, and he fell,
+dragging Hassan to the ground with him. Tightly clasped in each other's
+arms, they rolled over and over. Gervaise succeeded at last in getting
+the upper hand, but as he did so Hassan twisted his right arm free,
+snatched the dagger from Gervaise's girdle, and struck furiously at him.
+Gervaise, who had half risen to his knees, was unable to avoid the
+blow, but threw himself forward, his weight partly pinning the corsair's
+shoulders to the ground, and the blow passed behind him, inflicting but
+a slight wound in the back; then, with his right hand, which was now
+free, he grasped Hassan by the throat with a grip of iron. The pirate
+struggled convulsively for a moment, then his left hand released his
+grasp of his opponent's wrist. A minute later Gervaise rose to his feet:
+the pirate was dead.
+
+Gervaise stooped and raised the fallen man's head from the ground, felt
+for the chain, pulled up Claudia's gage, and placed it round his own
+neck; then he turned to his guide.
+
+“I have to thank you for my life,” he said, holding out his hand to him.
+“It would have gone hard with me if that fellow had attacked me from
+behind. I had not bargained for three of them.”
+
+“I could not help it, my lord. It was not until Hassan had stepped down
+into the boat that I knew he was going to take any one with him; then he
+suddenly told two of his men to take their places by him, saying to me,
+as he did so, 'I know not whether this message is a snare; but mind,
+if I see any signs of treachery, your life at any rate will pay the
+forfeit.' I knew not what to do, and indeed could do nothing; but,
+knowing my lord's valour, I thought that, even against these odds, you
+might conquer with such poor aid as I could give you.”
+
+“It was not poor aid at all,” Gervaise said heartily. “Greatly am I
+indebted to you, and sorry indeed am I, that I am unable to reward you
+now for the great service that you have rendered me.”
+
+“Do not trouble about that, my lord. I am greatly mistaken if I do not
+find in the sashes of these three villains sufficient to repay me amply
+for my share in this evening's work. And now, my lord, I pray you to
+linger not a moment. The gates of the town shut at ten o'clock, and it
+cannot be long from that hour now. But first, I pray you, let me bind up
+your shoulder; your garment is soaked with blood.”
+
+“Fortunately my bernouse will hide that; but it were certainly best to
+staunch the blood before I start, for it would be hard for me to get at
+the wound myself.”
+
+The man took one of the sashes of the corsairs, tore it into strips, and
+bandaged the wound; then with another he made a sling for the arm. As
+he took off the sashes a leather bag dropped from each, and there was a
+chink of metal. He placed them in his girdle, saying, “I shall have time
+to count them when I get back.”
+
+Gervaise sheathed his sword, and put on the bernouse, pulling the hood
+well over his head; then, with a few more words of thanks, started for
+the gate, leaving the man to search Hassan's girdle.
+
+The gate was a quarter of a mile distant. Gervaise passed through with
+the usual Arabic salutation to the sentry, and with difficulty repressed
+a shout of exultation as he left Tripoli behind him.
+
+Following the coast road he walked till daylight; then he left it and
+lay down among the sand hills for five or six hours. He calculated that
+no pursuit would be begun until midday. His absence was not likely to be
+noticed until the gangs began work in the morning, when an alarm would
+be given. The sentries at the gates on the previous evening would
+be questioned, and when it was found that no one answering to his
+description had passed out before these were closed, there would be
+a rigid search throughout the city and port. The vessels would all
+be examined, and the boatmen questioned as to whether any craft was
+missing. Not until the search proved absolutely fruitless would it be
+seriously suspected that he had, either by passing through the gates in
+disguise, or by scaling the walls, made for the interior. None knew that
+he could speak Arabic, and it would be so hopeless an undertaking for
+any one unacquainted with the language to traverse the country without
+being detected, that the Moors would be slow to believe that he had
+embarked upon such adventure. However, when all search for him in the
+town and in the vessels in the port proved fruitless, doubtless mounted
+men would be despatched in all directions; some would take the coast
+roads, while others would ride into the interior to warn the head men of
+the villages to be on the lookout for an escaped slave.
+
+After a sleep of five hours, Gervaise pursued his journey. He had walked
+for eight hours, and calculated that he must be fully thirty miles from
+Tripoli, and that not until evening would searchers overtake him. After
+walking four miles he came to a large village. There he purchased a bag
+of dates, sat down on a stone bench by the roadside to eat them, and
+entered into conversation with two or three Moors who sauntered up. To
+these he represented that he belonged to a party of his tribe who had
+encamped for the day at a short distance from the village in order
+to rest their horses before riding into Tripoli, whither they were
+proceeding to exchange skins of animals taken in the chase, and some
+young horses, for cotton clothes, knives, and other articles of barter
+with the tribes beyond them.
+
+After quenching his thirst at a well in front of the mosque, he retraced
+his steps until beyond the village, then struck out into the country,
+made a detour, came down into the road again, and continued his journey
+eastward. He walked until nightfall, and then again lay down.
+
+He was now fully fifty miles from Tripoli, and hoped that he was beyond
+the point to which horsemen from that town would think of pursuing their
+search. It was likely that they would not have gone beyond the village
+at which he had halted on the previous day; for when they learned from
+the inhabitants that no stranger, save an Arab, had entered it, they
+would content themselves with warning the head man to be on the watch
+for any stranger unable to speak their tongue, and would not consider it
+necessary to push their steps farther.
+
+For four days Gervaise continued his journey. At each village through
+which he passed he added to his stock of dates, until he had as many
+as he could carry under his bernouse without attracting observation. He
+also purchased a large water bottle, which he slung round his neck.
+
+All this time the sea lay to his left like a sheet of glass, and he
+knew that until a change of weather occurred, it was useless for him
+to attempt to escape by boat. On the fifth day there were signs of a
+change. He saw a dark line far out at sea; it came across the water
+rapidly, and presently a gentle breeze began to blow from the northwest;
+it gradually increased in strength, and when, in the afternoon, he
+stopped at a village, the waves were breaking upon the shore.
+
+After repeating his usual story, he sauntered down to the water's edge.
+There were several boats hauled up, and a hundred yards out two or three
+larger craft were lying at anchor. He entered into conversation with
+some of the fishermen, and his questions as to the boats led them to
+believe him altogether ignorant of the sea. The craft were, they told
+him, used sometimes for fishing, but they often made voyages to towns
+along the coast with dates and other produce. Each boat carried a single
+short mast, to the top of which was attached a long tapering spar, on
+which the sail was furled.
+
+Gervaise knew that these small feluccas were generally fast sailors and
+fair sea boats, and resolved to seize one of them, trusting that when
+once the sail was shaken out he would be able to manage it single
+handed. Accustomed to boats, he picked out that which he thought would
+be the fastest, and then walked away for half a mile, and lay down to
+sleep until the village was silent for the night. He had with him some
+oaten cakes he had bought there, a string of fish he had purchased from
+the boatmen, and with these and the dates he thought he could manage
+for four or five days at least. As to water, he could only hope that he
+should find a supply on board the boat. When he judged it to be about
+ten o'clock he went down to the shore again, took off his clothes and
+made them into a bundle; then, wading out into the water to within fifty
+yards of the felucca, swam off to it, towing the bundle behind him.
+
+He had no difficulty in climbing on board, and after dressing himself in
+the clothes he had worn at Tripoli, and had kept on underneath the Arab
+attire, he pulled the head rope until the craft was nearly over the
+anchor. He then loosened the line that brailed up the sail, got the
+stone that served as an anchor on board, hauled the sheet aft, and took
+his place at the tiller. The wind had dropped a good deal with the sun,
+but there was still sufficient air to send the light craft fast through
+the water. He steered out for a time, and then, when he thought himself
+a good mile from the shore, headed east. By the appearance of the water
+as it glanced past, he thought that he must be making from five to six
+miles an hour, and when the sun rose at five o'clock, believed that he
+was nearly forty miles on his way. He now fastened the tiller with a
+rope and proceeded to overhaul the craft.
+
+It was decked over forward only, and he crept into the cabin, which was
+little more than three feet high. The first thing his eye lit on was a
+bulky object hanging against the side, and covered with a thick black
+blanket of Arab manufacture. Lifting this, he saw, as he expected, that
+the object beneath it was a large waterskin well filled; the blanket had
+evidently been placed over it to keep it cool when the sun streamed down
+on the deck above it. There was also a large bag of dates, and another
+of flat cakes, and he guessed that these had all been put on board the
+evening before, in readiness for a start in the morning. This relieved
+him of his chief anxiety, for he had been unable to think of any plan
+for replenishing his supply, or to concoct a likely tale that, were he
+obliged to go on shore, would account for his being alone in a craft of
+that size.
+
+The wind increased again after sunrise, and being unable to reef the
+sail single handed he managed partially to brail it up. All day the
+craft flew along with the wind on the quarter, making six or seven miles
+an hour; and he felt that by morning he would be well beyond pursuit. On
+the run he passed several craft engaged in fishing, but these gave him
+no uneasiness. He had in the morning, with some old sails he found,
+constructed three rough imitations of human figures, one with the Arab
+dress and another with the bernouse, and had placed them against the
+bulwarks, so that at a short distance it would appear that there were
+three men on board. Feeling confident that the deception would not be
+noticed, he kept his course without swerving, and passed some of the
+fishing boats within hailing distance, waving his hand and shouting the
+usual Arab salutation to their crews.
+
+During the day he contented himself with eating some dates and an
+oatmeal cake or two; but at sunset he added to this two or three fish
+that he had split open and hung up to dry in the sun and wind. There was
+charcoal on board, and a flat stone served as a hearth in the bottom of
+the boat, but he had no means of lighting a fire, for this the fishermen
+would have brought off when they came on board in the morning. After he
+had finished his meal and taken his place again at the tiller he
+altered his course. Hitherto he had been steering to the south of east,
+following the line of coast, but he now saw before him the projecting
+promontory of Cape Mezurata, which marks the western entrance of the
+great Gulf of Sydra; and he now directed his course two points north
+of east, so as to strike the opposite promontory, known as Grenna, more
+than a hundred miles away. The wind fell much lighter, and he shook out
+the sail to its full extent. All night he kept at his post, but finding
+the wind perfectly steady he lashed the tiller so as to keep the boat's
+head in the direction in which he was steering, and dozed for some
+hours, waking up occasionally to assure himself that she was keeping her
+course.
+
+At sunrise he indulged in a wash in sea water, and felt freshened and
+revived. He now kept a sharp lookout for distant sails, for he was out
+of the ordinary course a coaster would take, and would have attracted
+the attention of any corsair coming out from the land; the sea, however,
+remained clear of ships. All day the felucca made rapid progress, for
+although the wind freshened, Gervaise did not lessen sail as before,
+being now accustomed to the boat and confident of her powers. As soon
+as the wind died away again after sunset, he lay down for a good sleep,
+feeling this was an absolute necessity, and knowing that before morning
+he should be obliged to keep a sharp lookout for land. He slept longer
+than he had intended, for the day was breaking when he opened his eyes.
+He sprang to his feet, and saw the land stretching ahead of him at a
+distance, as he thought, of some fifteen miles, and at once put the helm
+down and bore more to the north.
+
+He judged, from what he had heard on the coast, that he must be nearly
+off Cape Tejones, behind which lies the town of Bengasi, and was
+confirmed in the belief on finding half an hour later that the coast,
+which had run nearly north and south, trended sharply away to the
+northeast. All day long he kept about the same distance from the land,
+and at night, instead of keeping on his course, brailed up the sail
+entirely, and allowed the vessel to drift, as he knew that before
+morning he should lose the coast if he continued as he was going. He
+slept without moving until daylight, and then saw, to his satisfaction,
+by means of landmarks he had noticed the evening before, that the boat
+had drifted but a few miles during the night. As the day went on, he saw
+that the coastline was now east and west, and felt that he must be off
+the most northerly point of the promontory; he accordingly laid his
+course to the northeast, which would take him close to Cape Saloman, the
+most easterly point of Crete, and from two hundred and fifty to three
+hundred miles distant.
+
+For twenty-four hours he sailed quietly on, the wind dropping lighter
+and lighter; then it suddenly died out altogether; for some hours there
+was not a breath to stir the surface of the water, and the heat was
+stifling. Gervaise slept for some time; when he awoke the same stillness
+reigned, but there was a change in the appearance of the sky; its
+brightness was dulled by a faint mist, while, although the sea was of
+a glassy smoothness, there was an imperceptible swell that caused the
+felucca to sway uneasily. Gervaise had sufficient experience of the
+Levant to know that these signs were ominous of a change, and he at
+once set to work to prepare for it. Although he saw that it would be
+difficult for him unaided to hoist the long spar back into its place,
+he decided to lower it. This was not difficult, as its weight brought it
+down on to the deck as soon as he slackened the halliards; he unhooked
+it from the block, and then lashed the sail securely to it. When he had
+done this he looked round. A bank of dark clouds lay across the horizon
+to the northwest, and in a short time he could see that this was rising
+rapidly.
+
+Before taking down the spar and sail, he had deliberated as to whether
+it would be better to run before the coming gale or to lie to, and had
+decided on the latter alternative, as, were it to continue to blow long,
+he might be driven on to the Egyptian coast. Moreover, the felucca's
+bow was much higher out of water than the stern, and he thought that she
+would ride over the waves with greater safety than she would did they
+sweep down upon her stern.
+
+He had heard that the Greeks, when caught in a sudden gale in small
+boats, often lashed the oars together, threw them overboard with a rope
+attached, and rode to them safely through a sea that would otherwise
+have overwhelmed them. After much consideration as to what had best be
+done, he took the anchor rope, which was some sixty yards in length,
+fastened one end to each end of the spar, and then lashed the middle of
+the rope to the bow of the felucca; then, using an oar as a lever, he
+with great labour managed to launch the spar over the bow, with the sail
+still attached to it.
+
+When he had completed this, he looked round at the state of the weather.
+The clouds had risen so fast that their edge was nearly overhead,
+spanning the sky like a great arch. Ahead of him it seemed almost as
+black as night. He had not been out in many of the gales that at times
+sweep the eastern waters of the Mediterranean with terrible violence,
+but had seen enough of them to know that it was no ordinary one that he
+was about to encounter. He looked over the bow; the spar at present was
+lying in contact with the stem. With an oar he pushed it across so as to
+be at right angles with the craft, and then, there being nothing else to
+do, sat down and waited for the storm to burst. In a short time he
+heard a dull moaning sound, a puff of wind struck the boat, but in a few
+seconds died out; it was sufficient to give the light craft stern way,
+and she drifted backwards, the rope tightening, until the spar lay
+across her bows, and some twenty yards away.
+
+The dull moaning had grown louder; and now ahead of him he saw a white
+line. It approached with extraordinary rapidity. Knowing the fury with
+which it would burst upon him, he leapt down, and stood at the entrance
+to the cabin, with his head just above the deck. With a deafening roar
+the wind struck the boat, which staggered as if she had on her full
+course struck on a rock, while a shower of spray flew over her. Half
+blinded and deafened, Gervaise crawled into the cabin, closed the door,
+and lay down there; whatever happened, there was nothing he could do. He
+was soon conscious that the spar and sail were doing their work, for
+the boat still lay head to wind. The noise overhead and around was
+deafening; above the howl of the wind could be heard the creaking of the
+timbers, and the boat seemed to shiver as each fresh gust struck her.
+
+In half an hour he looked out again. There was, as yet, but little sea;
+the force of the wind seemed to flatten the water, and the instant a
+wave lifted its head it was cut off as if by a knife, and carried
+away in spray. The boat herself was moving rapidly through the water,
+dragging the spar behind her, and Gervaise almost trembled at the
+thought of the speed at which she would have flown along had it not been
+for the restraint of the floating anchor. Gradually the sea got up, but
+the light craft rode easily over it, and Gervaise, after commending
+his safety to God, lay down, and was soon fast asleep. In spite of the
+motion of the vessel, he slept soundly for many hours. When he awoke he
+opened the cabin door and looked out. A tremendous sea was running, but
+he thought the wind, although so strong that he could scarce lift his
+head above the shelter of the bulwark, was less violent than it had
+been when it first broke upon him. He saw to his satisfaction that the
+felucca breasted the waves lightly, and that although enveloped in spray
+she took no green water over the bows.
+
+The spar and sail acted not only as a floating anchor, but as a
+breakwater, and the white crested waves, which came on as if they
+would break upon the boat, seemed robbed of half their violence by
+the obstruction to their course, and passed under the felucca without
+breaking. For forty-eight hours the gale continued; at the end of
+that time it ceased almost as suddenly as it had begun. The sun shone
+brightly out, the clouds cleared entirely away. It was some hours before
+the sea went down sufficiently for Gervaise to attempt to get the spar
+on deck again. It was a heavy task, taxing his strength to the utmost,
+but after a deal of labour it was got on board, and then raised to its
+position at the masthead; the sail was shaken out, and the felucca again
+put on her course.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XX BELEAGUERED
+
+
+One morning towards the end of May, 1480, Sir John Boswell was standing
+with some other knights on St. Stephen's Hill, near the city, having
+hurried up as soon as a column of smoke from a bonfire lighted by the
+lookout there, gave the news that the Turkish fleet was at last in
+sight. A similar warning had been given a month previously, but the
+fleet had sailed past the island, being bound for Phineka, which was the
+rendezvous where Mahomet's great armament was to assemble. There could
+be but little doubt that the long expected storm was this time about to
+burst. The fleet now seen approaching numbered a hundred and sixty
+large ships, besides a great number of small craft, conveying a force
+variously estimated at from seventy to a hundred thousand men.
+
+“'Tis a mighty fleet,” Sir John said; “and the worst of it is that we
+know there are more to follow; still, I doubt not we shall send them
+back defeated. Our defences are all complete; our recent peace with
+Egypt has enabled us to fill up our magazines with provisions of all
+kinds; the inhabitants of the Island have had ample warning to move
+into the town, carrying with them everything of value; so the Turks
+will obtain but little plunder, and will be able to gather no means of
+subsistence on the island, as every animal has been driven within the
+walls, and even the unripe corn has been reaped and brought in. However
+long the siege lasts, we need be in no fear of being reduced to sore
+straits for food. Look over there. There is a small craft under sail,
+and it comes not from the direction of Phineka. See! one of the Turkish
+galleys has separated from the rest and is making off in that direction.
+It may be that the little craft contains one or two of our comrades who
+are late in coming to join us.”
+
+“It may well be so, Sir John, for they have been straggling in by twos
+and threes for the last month.”
+
+“I will get the grand master's leave to put out in one of the galleys,”
+ Sir John said, “for, by the way they are bearing, the Turks will cut the
+little craft off before she can gain the port.”
+
+He hurried to D'Aubusson, who was standing a short distance apart from
+the others, gazing at the Turkish fleet. A minute later he was running
+down the hill to the town, accompanied by three or four other knights;
+they made direct for the outer port, where two galleys were lying in
+readiness, leapt on board one of them, which already contained its quota
+of knights, and at once rowed out of the port. Just as they did so the
+Turkish galley fired a gun.
+
+“I fear we shall be too late,” Sir John said; “the Turk is gaining fast
+on the other craft, whatever she may be. There goes another gun. Row
+your hardest!” he shouted down to the slaves.
+
+The Turkish ship did not fire again; the wind was light, and they were
+going two feet through the water to every one sailed by the other craft.
+The galley from Rhodes was still half a mile away when the Turk was
+close to the boat that was trying to escape. Sir John and the knights
+chafed as they saw they would be too late.
+
+“I can't make out why the boat did not use her oars,” the former said.
+“Of course, she could not have kept away from the galley, but if she had
+rowed it would have made some difference, and we might have been nearly
+up.”
+
+“I can only see one man on board of her, Sir John,” one of the younger
+knights said; and two or three others murmured that they were of the
+same opinion.
+
+“The others must be lying down; she cannot have less than from fifteen
+to twenty men. The Turk is close alongside. They still hold on. There!
+She has gone about and escaped the attempt to run her down. Now she is
+heading for us again! Brave fellows! brave fellows!” Sir John exclaimed,
+while a cheer broke from those around him; “but they have done
+for themselves. They must have seen us coming out, and if they had
+surrendered might have hoped to have been retaken. Their chance of
+getting quarter was truly not great, for expecting--as the Turks
+do--to carry off both us and all the inhabitants of the Island, a dozen
+fishermen would have seemed to them scarcely worth keeping. However, by
+holding on they have thrown away any chance they may have had. The Turks
+are alongside; they are leaping down into the little craft. Ah! Two more
+galleys have just left their fleet, and are heading here.”
+
+“See, Sir John,” one of the knights exclaimed, “there is a single man
+standing in the bow of that craft: he is facing the Moors alone. See how
+they crowd there; you can see the weapons flashing in the sun. They have
+to press past the mast to get at him, and as yet he seems to hold them
+all at bay.”
+
+“He has chosen his post well, D'Urville. The number of his assailants
+prevents the archers on the Turkish craft using their bows. Fire those
+bow guns!” he shouted to the knights forward: “Take steady aim at the
+galley. It will distract their attention.”
+
+“Nobly done indeed!” one of the other knights shouted. “I have seen him
+strike down four of the Turks.”
+
+“Row, men, row! 'Tis useless!” Sir John muttered, as he clenched the
+hilt of his sword. “Useless! A Roland could not long maintain so unequal
+a fight.”
+
+A groan broke from those around him as suddenly the dark mass of the
+assailants made a forward move, and the single figure was lost to sight.
+It was but for an instant; a moment later the crowd separated, and a man
+was seen to spring overboard.
+
+“They will riddle him with their spears when he comes up; we shall have
+nothing to do but to avenge him. To your stations, comrades! It is our
+turn now, and we have no time to lose, for the other two Turks will
+be up in twenty minutes, and I had orders not to fight if it could be
+avoided: but we must take this fellow.”
+
+Five minutes later the galley ran alongside the Turk, to which those who
+had captured the boat had already hastily returned. The ships discharged
+their guns into each other, and then, as the galley ran alongside, the
+knights tried to leap on board of her. They were opposed by a dense mass
+of Turks, for in addition to her usual crew the Moslem was crowded with
+troops. For three or four minutes the knights tried, but in vain, to get
+a footing on board; then Sir John shouted to them to forbear, and gave
+orders to the rowers at once to push off. A cloud of arrows swept across
+the poop as they did so; but for the most part these fell harmless from
+the armour of the knights. For a time the cannon on both sides continued
+to fire, but as the Christians increased their distance it gradually
+ceased.
+
+They had gone but a hundred yards from the Turk when a head appeared
+over the stern railing of the poop, and a figure swung itself on to the
+deck. The man was attired in Turkish garments, but his head was bare,
+and the exclamation, “A Christian!” broke from the knights.
+
+The man strode up to Sir John Boswell.
+
+“You used to say you would make matters even with me some day, Sir John,
+and you have more than kept your word.”
+
+Sir John fell back a pace in astonishment, and then with a shout, “By
+St. George, it is Tresham!” threw his arms round Gervaise's neck, while
+the knights thronged round with exclamations of satisfaction.
+
+“And it was you whom we saw keep the Turks at bay for three good minutes
+single handed,” Sir John said, holding Gervaise at arm's length to gaze
+into his face. “Truly it seemed well nigh impossible that any one who
+was like to be on that craft could have performed so doughty a deed. And
+how did you escape?”
+
+“It was simple enough,” Gervaise replied. “As soon as I dived I turned
+and swam along under the boat and came up by the stern, and then held on
+by the rudder, sheltered from their sight. I saw that the galley would
+be up in five minutes, and had no fear of their wasting time to look for
+me. Directly you came alongside her I dived again, and rose under your
+stern. I did not think that you would be able to take her, for all their
+craft are crowded with troops; so I contented myself with holding on
+until you were out of reach of their arrows, and then I climbed up.”
+
+“I am delighted to see you again, Gervaise. I was feeling very sore at
+the moment, and I know the others felt the same, at being obliged to
+sheer off without making a capture; but the grand master's orders were
+strict. We noted your craft pursued by the Turks, and I asked leave to
+take out a galley to cut her off. He said, 'Take one, Sir John, but do
+not adventure an attack against the Turk unless she is likely to fall
+an easy prize to you. Her capture would be of little benefit to us, and
+would be dearly purchased at the cost of a knight's life. Therefore,
+as soon as we engaged her, and I found that she was full of troops and
+could not be captured without heavy loss, and that two of her consorts
+might arrive before we accomplished it, it was plainly my duty to
+abandon the attempt, although, you may guess, it went sorely against
+the grain to give the order, especially as I knew that a host would be
+looking on from St. Stephen's Hill. However, your rescue more than makes
+up for our failure; and thankful indeed am I that I made the suggestion
+that we should put out to save that little craft, though I thought it
+contained but a few fishermen or some coasting sailors, who had, in
+ignorance that the Turks were at hand, tried to enter Rhodes. One of
+those looking on with me did, indeed, suggest that she might have on
+board a knight or two coming to join us, but I did not give the matter a
+second thought.”
+
+“And how go things, Sir John? And how are old friends?”
+
+“Ralph Harcourt and, I think, all your comrades in the Santa Barbara,
+except the three who fell by your side when you were captured, are well,
+and at present on the Island, as, for the last two years, none have been
+allowed to depart. As to other matters, they go not so well as one could
+wish. The commanderies have not responded to our call for aid as they
+should have done. For this, however, they are not altogether to blame,
+for we have been so often threatened with attack, and have so frequently
+applied for aid in money or men, that they must have begun to doubt
+whether the danger was really imminent. In other respects we are well
+prepared. We have obtained large stores of provisions from Egypt, and
+shall have no ground for uneasiness on that score. The defences have
+been greatly strengthened, and no one fears that we shall not be able
+to beat off an attack. We have destroyed the principal buildings outside
+the walls, though it would have been better could we have gone much
+further in this direction. And now let us have your adventures and
+escape.”
+
+“'Tis a long story, Sir John, and I must pray you to let me defer it for
+a time. In the first place, I have two or three wounds that I shall be
+glad to have bandaged.”
+
+“Why did you not say so at once?” Sir John exclaimed. “In those dark
+clothes, soaked with water as they are, I did not see the bloodstains;
+but I ought to have looked for them, for surely no one could have gone
+through that fight--altogether unprotected with armour too--without
+being wounded. Come below, and we will attend to them.”
+
+“Also order me some wine and food, Sir John; I have touched nothing save
+water for twenty-four hours, and before that fasted somewhat strictly.”
+
+By the time Gervaise's wounds, which were not severe, had been bandaged,
+and he had eaten a hasty meal, the galley was alongside the mole,
+between the two harbours.
+
+He was provided with some clothes, and went with Sir John straight to
+the English auberge, where the knight insisted that he should at once
+lie down.
+
+“I will report your return to D'Aubusson, and will tell him it is by my
+orders that you are resting. Your wounds are not very deep, but you must
+have lost a good deal of blood, and were you to exert yourself now,
+and be pestered with questions, it would probably bring on an attack
+of fever. There is nothing to do at present, for it must be some days
+before they can land and bring up their guns.”
+
+Gervaise obeyed the orders not unwillingly, for he felt that he was
+really weak, and was greatly worn out by want of sleep. Sir John
+Kendall, at Boswell's request, issued orders that he was on no account
+whatever to be disturbed, and that no one was to enter his room unless
+he sounded the bell placed by the bedside. Gervaise indeed, falling off
+to sleep a few minutes after he had lain down, did not awake until the
+following morning. Having no idea that he had slept more than two or
+three hours, he sounded the bell in order to inquire whether Ralph had
+returned to the auberge. He was surprised to find his friend had just
+risen, and that he himself had been asleep some eighteen hours!
+
+A few minutes later Ralph hurried into the room.
+
+“Thank God that you are back again, Gervaise!” he said, as he grasped
+the hand of his friend. “I did not return until late in the evening,
+having been at work with a large body of slaves at the fortifications;
+and you may guess what joy I felt at the news. You are changed a good
+deal.”
+
+“I don't suppose you will think so at the end of a day or two, Ralph. I
+lost a good deal of blood yesterday, and have been on short rations; but
+I shall very soon pick up again.”
+
+“They will bring you some broth and wine directly, Gervaise. Early as
+it is, the grand master has already sent down to inquire as to your
+health.”
+
+“I will reply in person as soon as I have had a meal and dressed.”
+
+“And I suppose we must all wait to hear what you have been doing until
+you return, Gervaise?”
+
+“I suppose so, Ralph. Of course it is a long story; but I must tell you
+at once that there is nothing very exciting in it, and that it differed
+little from that of others who have been prisoners among the Moors, save
+that I was strangely fortunate, and suffered no hardships whatever. And
+now I want to ask you about clothes. Have my things been sold, or are
+they still in the store?”
+
+“No; the question was raised but a short time since. It was mooted, by
+the way, by that old enemy of yours, Robert Rivers, who returned
+here some three months ago with a batch of knights from the English
+commanderies. Sir John Boswell answered him roundly, I can tell you, and
+said that they should be kept, were it for another fifty years, for
+that he would wager his life that you would sooner or later make your
+escape.”
+
+“I am sorry that fellow has returned, Ralph. Has he got a commandery
+yet?”
+
+“No; I believe that Sir John Kendall sent home so bad a report of him,
+that even the great influence of his family has not sufficed to obtain
+his appointment, and that he has been merely the assistant at one of
+the smaller manors. Sir John Boswell told me in confidence that he
+understood that Rivers did not at first volunteer to come out in
+response to the appeal of the grand master, but that the grand prior
+informed him that unless he took this opportunity of retrieving his
+character, he might give up all hope of ever obtaining advancement. Ah,
+here is your breakfast.”
+
+An hour later Gervaise presented himself at the palace, clothed in the
+suit of armour that had been given to him by Genoa. Although he was
+engaged with several members of the council at the time, the grand
+master ordered him to be at once admitted as soon as he heard that he
+was in attendance.
+
+“Welcome back, Sir Gervaise Tresham,” he said warmly, as he entered. “We
+all rejoice greatly at your return, and I consider it a happy omen for
+the success of our defence that so brave and distinguished a knight
+should at the last moment have arrived to take a share in it.”
+
+The others present all shook Gervaise cordially by the hand, and
+congratulated him on his return.
+
+“You must dine with me this evening,” D'Aubusson went on, “and tell us
+the story of your captivity and escape. At present, as you may suppose,
+we have too many matters on hand to spare time for aught that is not
+pressing and important. You will need a few days' rest before you are
+fit for active service, and by that time we will settle as to what post
+will best suit you.”
+
+Twice that day had Gervaise to recount his adventures, the first time to
+Sir John Kendall and the knights of his auberge, the second to the grand
+master. Most of the leading members of the Order were assembled at
+the palace, and, among others, he was introduced to the Viscount de
+Monteuil, the elder brother of D'Aubusson, one of the most famous
+leaders of the day. He had brought with him a considerable body of
+retainers, and, although not a member of the Order, had offered his
+services in defence of the town. The council had gratefully accepted the
+offer, and had unanimously named him Commander of the Forces. Many other
+knights and soldiers had come from different parts of Europe, animated
+alike by the desire to aid in the defence of Christendom against the
+advance of the Moslems, and to gain credit and honour by taking part in
+a siege that was sure to be a desperate one.
+
+“My brother has already spoken of you to me, Sir Gervaise,” the viscount
+said, when the young knight was presented to him; “although indeed there
+was no occasion for him to do so, since the name of the knight who
+two years ago saved the commerce of Italy from ruin, and with a single
+galley destroyed or captured a great fleet of over twenty Barbary
+pirates, and thus for a time put a stop to the depredations of the
+infidels, is known throughout Europe. By the way, I am the bearer of a
+message to you. I took ship at Genoa on my way hither, and stayed two or
+three days there while she was being got ready for sea. Knowing that I
+was bound hither, a certain very beautiful young lady of noble family,
+to whom I had the honour of being introduced, prayed me that if you
+should by any chance have escaped from captivity--and she said that she
+was convinced that you would, when you heard that Rhodes was threatened,
+assuredly endeavour to escape and to come hither to take a share in the
+defence--I was to tell you that she trusted you still bore her gage, and
+that she, on her part, had held fast to the promise she made you.”
+
+“I still have her gage, Viscount; for though I was for a long time
+deprived of it, I succeeded in regaining it when I made my escape,”
+ Gervaise said quietly; and De Monteuil at once turned the conversation
+to another topic.
+
+Gervaise found that no attempt was to be made to take the offensive
+against the Turks, and that they were to be permitted to advance against
+the city without interference. Many of the more fiery spirits among the
+knights chafed at this prohibition. The records of the past showed that
+armies as large as that of Mahomet had suffered defeat at the hands
+of bodies of knights no stronger than that gathered for the defence of
+Rhodes. D'Aubusson, however, knew that between the undisciplined hordes
+that gathered in countless numbers to oppose the crusaders, and the
+troops of Mahomet, well trained in warfare, who had borne his standard
+victoriously in numerous battles, there was but little comparison. They
+were commanded, too, by Paleologus, a general of great capacity. Under
+such circumstances, although victory might be possible, the chances of
+defeat would be far greater, and while victory could be only won at a
+great sacrifice of life, defeat would mean annihilation to the garrison,
+and the loss of the city upon whose fortifications such an enormous
+amount of money and labour had been expended.
+
+On the other hand, he felt perfectly confident that the city could be
+successfully defended, and that at a cost of life far less than would
+be attained by a victory in the open field, while the blow that would
+be inflicted upon the prestige and power of the enemy, by being
+ignominiously compelled to retire to their ships, after the failure of
+all their attacks, would be as great as if their army had been defeated
+in the field. Therefore the grand master, with the full assent of his
+leaders, turned a deaf ear to the entreaties of the younger knights,
+that they might be allowed to make a sortie. He calmly waited behind
+the formidable defences he had for the past ten years been occupied in
+perfecting, in anticipation of the assault of the Moslem host.
+
+Accordingly, after disembarking at their leisure, the Turkish army moved
+forward, and took their post upon St. Stephen's Hill. From this eminence
+they commanded a full view of the town, the hills sloping gently down
+to the foot of the walls. In later times the first care of a general
+commanding the defence would have been to construct formidable works
+upon this commanding position. But the cannon of that period were so
+cumbrous and slowly worked, and so inaccurate in their aim, that the
+advantage of occupying a position that would prevent an enemy from
+firing down into a town was considered to be more than counterbalanced
+by the weakening of the garrison by the abstraction of the force
+required to man the detached work, and by the risk of their being
+surrounded and cut off without the garrison of the town being able to
+aid them.
+
+That the defence of St. Stephen's Hill was considered unnecessary for
+the safety of Rhodes is shown by the fact that no attempt had been made
+to fortify it when, forty years later, the Moslems again besieged the
+city.
+
+There was no shadow of apprehension felt by the garrison of Rhodes
+as the great array of their foes was seen moving on to the hill, and
+preparing to pitch its camp. On the summit was the great tent of the
+pasha; round this were the marquees of the other commanders, while the
+encampments of the troops stretched far away along the upper slopes of
+the hill.
+
+Previous to the despatch of the expedition, the sultan had made
+preparations for aiding his arms by treachery. The agent he had sent
+to propose a temporary truce had, during his stay on the Island, made
+himself thoroughly acquainted with the outline of the works. A very
+accurate plan of them had also been obtained from an inhabitant of
+Rhodes, who had abandoned Christianity and taken service with the Turks.
+
+In addition to this he had arranged with a renegade German, known as
+Maitre Georges, a man of very great ability as an artilleryman and
+engineer, to desert to the city, and there do all in his power to assist
+the besiegers, both by affording them information and by giving bad
+advice to the besieged. On the day after Paleologus, who was himself a
+renegade Greek, had established his camp, he sent in a herald to summon
+the city to surrender, at the same time making lavish promises that the
+lives and property of the native population should be respected, and
+that they should be allowed to continue to reside there, to enjoy the
+full exercise of their religion and of all other rights they possessed.
+The pasha had no real hope that the knights would obey the summons,
+but he thought that he might excite a spirit of disaffection among the
+townspeople that would, when the crisis came, greatly hamper the efforts
+of the defenders.
+
+The Rhodians, however, were well satisfied with the rule of the Order.
+The knights, although belonging to the Catholic Church, had allowed the
+natives of the Island, who were of the Greek faith, perfect freedom in
+the exercise of their religion, and their rule, generally, had been
+fair and just. The wealth and prosperity of the Island had increased
+enormously since their establishment there, and the population had no
+inclination whatever to change their rule for that of the Turks. The
+summons to surrender being refused, the enemy made a reconnaissance
+towards the walls.
+
+D'Aubusson had no longer any reason for checking the ardour of the
+knights, and a strong body of horsemen, under the command of De
+Monteuil, sallied out and drove the Turks back to their camp.
+
+Maitre Georges, who was acting as the military adviser of the pasha, saw
+at once that the weakest point of the defence was Fort St. Nicholas, at
+the extremity of the mole along the neck of land dividing the outer from
+the inner port. At a short distance away, on the opposite side of the
+port, stood the church of St. Anthony, and in the gardens of the church
+a battery was at once erected. The garden was but three hundred yards
+from St. Nicholas, and the danger that would arise from the construction
+of the battery was at once perceived, and an incessant fire opened upon
+it from the guns on the wall round the grand master's palace. Numbers of
+the workmen were killed, but the erection of the battery was pushed on
+night and day, and ere long three of the immense cannon that had been
+brought from Constantinople,--where sixteen of them had been cast under
+the direction of Maitre Georges--were placed in position. These cannon
+were eighteen feet in length, and carried stone balls of some twenty-six
+inches in diameter.
+
+Before these were ready to open fire, Gervaise had entirely regained his
+health and strength. The grand master, being unwilling to appoint him to
+a separate command over the heads of knights many years his senior, had
+attached him to his person in the capacity of what would now be called
+an aide-de-camp.
+
+“I know, Gervaise, that I can rely upon your coolness and discretion. I
+cannot be everywhere myself, and I want you to act as my eyes in places
+where I cannot be. I know that the knights, so far as bravery and
+devotion are concerned, will each and every one do his best, and will
+die at their posts before yielding a foot; but while fighting like
+paladins they will think of naught else, and, however hardly pressed,
+will omit to send to me for reinforcements. Nay, even did they think
+of it, they probably would not send, deeming that to do so would be
+derogatory, and might be taken as an act of cowardice. Now, it is
+this service that I shall specially look for from you. When a post is
+attacked, I shall, when my presence is required elsewhere, send you to
+represent me. I do not, of course, wish you to interfere in any way in
+the conduct of the defence, in which you will take such share as you
+can; but you are specially to observe how matters go, and if you see
+that the knights are pressed and in sore need of assistance to enable
+them to hold the post, you will at once bring the news to me, and I will
+hurry there with reinforcements.”
+
+No post could have been more in accordance with the desire of Gervaise,
+for the portion of the wall defended by the English langue was far
+removed from the point selected by the Turks for their first attack, the
+sea front being defended half by the langue of Italy, and half by that
+of Castile. Fort St. Nicholas was under the command of the Cavalier
+Caretto, and as soon as the Turkish battery was completed, Gervaise
+went down there with an order from the grand master that he was for the
+present to consider himself as forming part of the garrison. This
+was pleasant for both Caretto and himself, for the Italian knight had
+conceived a strong friendship for the young Englishman, and had rejoiced
+greatly at his return from captivity, but had been so much occupied with
+his duty of placing the castle in all respects in a state of defence,
+that he had had no opportunity for a private conversation with him since
+his return to Rhodes.
+
+Gervaise, on his part, was no less pleased. Caretto had shown so much
+tact after his release from the Moors, and had so willingly aided him
+in any capacity allotted to him, without in the slightest degree
+interposing his council unasked, that Gervaise had come to like him
+greatly, even before their arrival at Genoa. Circumstances there had
+brought them closely together, and their friendship had been cemented
+during their voyage to Rhodes. Caretto had gone back to Italy, where
+he had a commandery, a few days after Gervaise had sailed on his last
+voyage, and had only returned to Rhodes three months before Gervaise
+escaped from captivity.
+
+“This is turning the tables,” Caretto said, with a laugh, when Gervaise
+presented the grand master's order. “I was under your command last time,
+and now it seems that you are to be under mine. I suppose you applied
+to come here, in order to have a fresh opportunity of distinguishing
+yourself. I heard that you had been placed on D'Aubusson's own staff.”
+
+“Yes, and am on it still; and it is by his orders and not by my own
+solicitation that I am here. I will tell you what my duties are. The
+grand master knows the commanders of posts have their hands so full
+that they will have no time for sending complete reports to him, and he
+considers, moreover, that they might, in some cases, however pressed,
+hesitate to ask for aid until too late for reinforcements to be brought
+up. My duty will be to let the grand master know how matters are going,
+and to send to him at once if it seems to me that help is needed. I
+should, of course, always send for reinforcements, at the request of a
+commander; but it is only in the event of his being too busy in the heat
+of the fray to think of aught but resisting an attack, that I should
+exercise my own judgment in the matter.”
+
+Caretto nodded.
+
+“It is a good thought of D'Aubusson's. When one is in the thick of a
+fight in a breach, with the Moslems swarming round, it does not occur to
+one to draw out of the fray to send off messages. For myself, I shall be
+glad indeed to have that matter off my mind, though it is not every one
+I should care to trust with such a responsibility. Some might send off
+for aid when it was not needed, others might delay so long that help
+might come too late; but with one so cool headed as yourself I should
+not fear any contingency. And now, as I am not busy at present, let us
+have a comfortable talk as to what has happened since we met last. I was
+at the banquet at the grand master's on the night when you related your
+adventures. You had certainly much to tell, but it seems to me for some
+reason or other you cut short certain details, and I could not see why,
+as there seemed no prospect of escape open to you, you did not accept
+the offer of Suleiman Ali to ransom you.”
+
+“I saw no chance of escape at the moment, but I did not doubt that I
+could get away from the town whenever I chose, although it was not
+clear how I should proceed afterwards. It was for this opportunity I
+was waiting, and I felt sure that, with my knowledge of the language, it
+would come sooner or later. In the next place, my captors had fixed
+an exorbitant sum for my ransom, and I did not wish to impose upon the
+generosity of Suleiman. There was another reason--a private one.”
+
+“You don't mean to say that you had fallen in love with a Moorish
+damsel, Sir Gervaise?” Caretto laughed.
+
+“For shame, Cavalier! As if a Christian knight would care for a Moslem
+maiden, even were she as fair as the houris of their creed!”
+
+“Christian knights have done so before now,” Caretto laughed, greatly
+amused at the young knight's indignation, “and doubtless will do so
+again. Well, I suppose I must not ask what the private matter was,
+though it must have been something grave indeed to lead you, a slave,
+to reject the offer of freedom. I know that when I was rowing in their
+galleys, no matter of private business that I can conceive would have
+stood in my way for a single moment, had a chance of freedom presented
+itself.”
+
+“It was a matter of honour,” Gervaise said gravely, “and one of which I
+should speak to no one else; but as you were present at the time, there
+can, I think, be no harm in doing so. At the time that I was captured, I
+was stripped of everything that I had upon me, and, of course, with the
+rest, of the gage which the Lady Claudia had given me, and which hung
+round my neck where she had placed it. It was taken possession of by the
+captain of the pirates, who, seeing that it bore no Christian emblem,
+looked upon it as a sort of amulet. I understood what he was saying,
+but, as I was desirous that my knowledge of Turkish should not be
+suspected, I said nothing. I was very glad that he so regarded it, for
+had he taken it to be an ordinary trinket, he might have parted with it,
+and I should never have been able to obtain a clue as to the person to
+whom he sold it. As it was, he put it round his neck, with the remark
+that it might bring him better luck than had befallen me. He told me
+jeeringly months afterwards that it had done so, and that he would never
+part with it. Given me as it was, I felt that my honour was concerned in
+its recovery, and that, should I ever meet Lady Claudia again, I should
+feel disgraced indeed, if, when she asked whether I still bore her gage,
+I had to confess that it was lost.”
+
+“But lost from no fault of your own,” Caretto put in.
+
+“The losing was not indeed from any fault of my own, and had the pirate
+thrown it into the sea I should have held myself free from disgrace; but
+as it was still in existence, and I knew its possessor, I was bound in
+honour to recover it. At the time Suleiman Ali's messenger arrived the
+corsair was away, and there was no saying when his ship would return;
+therefore, I decided at once not to accept the offer of freedom. Had it
+not been for that, I own that I should have done so, for I knew that
+I could repay Suleiman from the revenues of my commandery, which would
+have accumulated in my absence; but if I had had to wait ten years
+longer to regain the gage, I felt that I was in honour bound to do so.
+It was, in fact, some six months before the corsair put into that port
+again. The moment he did so I carried out the plans I had long before
+determined upon. I obtained a disguise from Ben Ibyn, and by a ruse
+succeeded in inducing the pirate to meet me outside the town, believing
+that I was an Arab chief who wished to dispose of some valuable slave
+girls he had brought in. I had with me one of my old galley slaves, who
+had been taken into Ben Ibyn's employment; and when the pirate came up
+with two of his crew, and furiously attacked me as soon as I threw off
+my disguise, it would have gone hard with me had he not stood by me, and
+killed one of them who was about to attack me in the rear. I slew the
+other and Hassan, and the gage is in its place again.”
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXI THE FORT OF ST. NICHOLAS
+
+
+“Well, you have proved indeed,” Caretto said, when Gervaise finished his
+story, “that you are worthy of the bestowal of a gage by a fair damsel.
+I do not think that many knights, however true they might be to the
+donor, would have suffered months of slavery in order to regain a token,
+lost by no fault or carelessness of their own; and no lady could have
+blamed or held them in any way dishonoured by the loss.”
+
+“I had a message by the Viscount De Monteuil from Lady Claudia the other
+day, saying that she trusted I had kept her gage. I can assure you that
+the six months of slavery were cheaply purchased by the pleasure I felt
+that I still possessed it; and I was glad, too, to learn that I had not
+been forgotten by her.”
+
+“Of that you may well assure yourself, Tresham; my commandery is not far
+from Genoa, and I was frequently with her, but never without her drawing
+me aside and asking me if I had heard any news of you, and talking over
+with me the chances there might be of your escape. I can tell you that
+there are not a few young nobles of Genoa who would give much to be
+allowed as you are to carry her gage, or wear her colours. You should
+see her now; you would scarce know her again, so altered and improved is
+she; there is no fairer face in all Italy.”
+
+“I hope some day to meet her again,” Gervaise replied; “although I own
+to knowing it were better that I should not do so. Until she gave me her
+gage I had scarcely noticed her. I have, as you know, no experience of
+women, and had so much on my mind at the time, what with the fuss they
+were making about us, and the question of getting the prizes here, that
+in truth I paid but slight attention to the fair faces of the dames of
+Genoa. But the gracious and earnest way in which, though scarce more
+than a child, she gave me her gage, and vowed that no other knight
+should possess one so long as I lived, struck me so greatly that I own
+I gave the matter much more thought than was right or becoming in one
+of our Order. The incident was much more gratifying to me than all
+the honour paid me by the Republic, and during the long months of
+my captivity it has recurred to me so frequently that I have in vain
+endeavoured to chase it from my thoughts, as sinful thus to allow myself
+constantly to think of any woman. Do not mistake me, Sir Fabricius. I
+am speaking to you as to a confessor, and just as I have kept her amulet
+hidden from all, so is the thought of her a secret I would not part with
+for my life. I do not for a moment deceive myself with the thought that,
+beyond the fact that her gift has made her feel an interest in me and my
+fate, she has any sentiment in the matter: probably, indeed, she looks
+back upon the gift as a foolish act of girlish enthusiasm that led her
+into making a promise that she now cannot but find unpleasantly binding;
+for it is but natural that among the young nobles of her own rank and
+country there must be some whom she would see with pleasure wearing her
+colours.”
+
+Caretto looked at him with some amusement.
+
+“Were you not bound by your vows as a knight of the Order, how would you
+feel in the matter?”
+
+“I should feel worse,” Gervaise said, without hesitation. “I have
+oftentimes thought that over, and I see that it is good for me I am so
+bound. It does not decrease my chances, for, as I know, there are no
+chances; but it renders it more easy for me to know that it is so.”
+
+“But why should you say that you have no chances, Tresham?”
+
+“Because it is easy to see that it is so. I am, save for my commandery
+and prospects in the Order, a penniless young knight, without home or
+estate, without even a place in my country, and that country not hers. I
+know that it is not only sinful, but mad, for me to think so frequently
+of her, but at least I am not mad enough to think that I can either win
+the heart or aspire to the hand of one who is, you say, so beautiful,
+and who is, moreover, as I know, the heiress to wide estates.”
+
+“'There was a squire of low degree, Loved the king's daughter of
+Hungarie,'” Caretto sang, with a laugh. “You are not of low degree,
+but of noble family, Gervaise. You are not a squire, but a knight, and
+already a very distinguished one; nor is the young lady, though she be a
+rich heiress, a king's daughter.”
+
+“At any rate, the squire was not vowed to celibacy. No, no, Sir
+Fabricius, it is a dream, and a pleasant one; but I know perfectly well
+that it is but a dream, and one that will do me no harm so long as I
+ever bear in mind that it is so. Many a knight of the Order before me
+has borne a lady's gage, and carried it valiantly in many a fight, and
+has been no less true to his vows for doing so.”
+
+“Upon the contrary, he has been all the better a knight, Gervaise; it
+is always good for a knight, whether he belongs to the Order or not, to
+prize one woman above all others, and to try to make himself worthy of
+his ideal. As to the vow of celibacy, you know that ere now knights have
+been absolved from their vows, and methinks that, after the service
+you have rendered to Italy by ridding the sea of those corsairs, his
+Holiness would make no difficulty in granting any request that you might
+make him in that or any other direction. I don't know whether you are
+aware that, after you sailed from here, letters came from Rome as well
+as from Pisa, Florence, and Naples, expressive of the gratitude felt
+for the services that you had rendered, and of their admiration for the
+splendid exploit that you had performed.”
+
+“No; the grand master has had his hands so full of other matters that
+doubtless an affair so old escaped his memory. Indeed, he may have
+forgotten that I sailed before the letters arrived.”
+
+“Do not forget to jog his memory on the subject, for I can tell you that
+the letters did not come alone, but were each accompanied by presents
+worthy of the service you rendered. But as to the vows?”
+
+“As to the vows, I feel as I said just now, that I would not free myself
+of them if I could, for, being bound by them, I can the more easily and
+pleasantly enjoy my dream. Besides, what should I do if I left the Order
+without home, country, or means, and with naught to do but to sell my
+sword to some warlike monarch? Besides, Caretto, I love the Order,
+and deem it the highest privilege to fight against the Moslems, and to
+uphold the banner of the Cross.”
+
+“As to that, you could, like De Monteuil and many other knights here,
+always come out to aid the Order in time of need. As to the vows, I am
+not foolish enough to suppose that you would ask to be relieved from
+them, until you had assured yourself that Claudia was also desirous that
+you should be free.”
+
+“It is absurd,” Gervaise said, almost impatiently. “Do not let us talk
+any more about it, Caretto, or it will end by turning my head and making
+me presumptuous enough to imagine that the Lady Claudia, who only saw
+me for three or four days, and that while she was still but a girl, has
+been thinking of me seriously since.”
+
+“I do not know Claudia's thoughts,” Caretto remarked drily, “but I
+do know that last year she refused to listen to at least a score of
+excellent offers for her hand, including one from a son of the doge
+himself, and that without any reasonable cause assigned by her, to the
+great wonderment of all, seeing that she does not appear to have any
+leaning whatever towards a life in a nunnery. At any rate, if at some
+future time you should pluck up heart of grace to tell her you love her,
+and she refuses you, you will at least have the consolation of knowing
+that you are not the only one, by a long way, whose suit has been
+rejected. And now as to our affairs here. Methinks that tomorrow that
+battery will open fire upon us. It seems completed.”
+
+“Yes, I think they are nearly ready,” Gervaise said, turning his mind
+resolutely from the subject they had been discussing. “From the palace
+wall I saw, before I came down here, large numbers of men rolling huge
+stones down towards the church. Our guns were firing steadily; but could
+they load them ten times as fast as they do, they would hardly be able
+to stop the work, so numerous are those engaged upon it.”
+
+“Yes we shall soon learn something of the quality of their artillery.
+The tower is strong enough to resist ordinary guns, but it will soon
+crumble under the blows of such enormous missiles. Never have I seen or
+heard in Europe of cannon of such size; but indeed, in this matter the
+Turks are far ahead of us, and have, ever since cannon were first cast,
+made them of much larger size than we in Europe have done. However,
+there is one comfort; they may destroy this fort, but they have still
+to cross the water, and this under the fire of the guns on the palace
+walls; when they once land, their great battery must cease firing, and
+we shall be able to meet them on equal terms in the breach. Fight
+as hard as they may, I think we can hold our own, especially as
+reinforcements can come down to us more quickly than they can be brought
+across the water.”
+
+The next morning, at daybreak, the deep boom of a gun announced to the
+city that the great battering cannon had begun their work. In the fort
+the sleeping knights sprang to their feet at the concussion that seemed
+to shake it to its centre. They would have rushed to the walls, but
+Caretto at once issued orders that no one should show himself on the
+battlements unless under special orders.
+
+“There is nothing whatever to be done until the Turks have breached the
+wall, and are ready to advance to attack us. Every sword will be needed
+when that hour comes, and each man owes it to the Order to run no
+useless risk, until the hour when he is required to do his share of the
+fighting.”
+
+The time required to reload the great cannon was considerable, but at
+regular intervals they hurled their heavy missiles against the wall,
+the distance being so short that every ball struck it. After some twenty
+shots had been fired, Caretto, accompanied by Gervaise, went out by a
+small gate on the eastern side of the tower, and made their way round
+by the foot of the wall to see what effect the shots had produced on the
+solid masonry.
+
+Caretto shook his head.
+
+“It is as I feared,” he said. “No stones ever quarried by man could long
+resist such tremendous blows. In some places, you see, the stones are
+starred and cracked, in others the shock seems to have pulverised the
+spot where it struck; but, worse, still, the whole face of the wall
+is shaken. There are cracks between the stones, and some of these are
+partly bulged out and partly driven in. It may take some time before
+a breach is effected, but sooner or later the wall will surely be
+demolished.”
+
+“I will go up and make my report to the grand master.”
+
+“Do so, Gervaise. I almost wonder that he has not himself come down to
+see how the wall is resisting.”
+
+Gervaise, on reaching the palace, heard that D'Aubusson was at present
+engaged in examining no less a person than Maitre Georges, the right
+hand of Paleologus, who had soon after daybreak presented himself before
+the wall on the other side of the town, declaring that he had left the
+Turkish service, and craving to be admitted. News had been sent at once
+to D'Aubusson, who despatched two of the senior knights, with orders to
+admit him and receive him with all honour. This had been done, and
+the grand master, with some of his council, were now closeted with
+the newcomer. Several of the knights were gathered in the courtyard,
+discussing the event. There was no question that if the renegade came in
+good faith, his defection would be a serious blow to the assailants,
+and that his well known skill and experience would greatly benefit the
+defenders.
+
+“For my part,” Sir John Boswell, who formed one of the detachment which
+the English langue, as well as all the others, contributed to form the
+garrison of the palace said, “I would have hung the fellow up by the
+neck over the gateway, and he should never have set foot within the
+walls. Think you that a man who has denied his faith and taken service
+with his enemies is to be trusted, whatever oaths he may take?”
+
+“You must remember, Boswell,” another said, “that hitherto Georges has
+not fought against Christians, but has served Mahomet in his wars with
+other infidels. I am not saying a word in defence of his having become a
+renegade; yet even a renegade may have some sort of heart, and now that
+he has been called upon to fight against Christians he may well have
+repented of his faults, and determined to sacrifice his position and
+prospects rather than aid in the attack on the city.”
+
+“We shall see. As for me, I regard a renegade as the most contemptible
+of wretches, and have no belief that they have either a heart or
+conscience.”
+
+When Maitre Georges came out from the palace, laughing and talking with
+the two knights who had entered with him, it was evident that he was
+well pleased with his reception by the grand master, who had assigned
+to him a suite of apartments in the guest house. In reality, however,
+D'Aubusson had no doubt that his object was a treacherous one, and that,
+like Demetrius, who had come under the pretence of bringing about a
+truce, his object was to find out the weak points and to supply the
+Turks with information. Georges had, in his conversation with him, laid
+great stress on the strength of the Turkish army, the excellent quality
+of the troops, and the enormous battering train that had been prepared.
+But every word he spoke but added to the grand master's suspicions; for
+if the man considered that the capture of the city was morally certain,
+it would be simply throwing away his life to enter it as a deserter.
+
+The grand master was, however, too politic to betray any doubt of
+Georges' sincerity. Were he treated as a traitor, Paleologus might
+find another agent to do the work. It was, therefore, better to feign
+a belief in his story, to obtain all the information possible from him,
+and at the same time to prevent his gaining any knowledge of affairs
+that would be of the slightest use to the Turks. Instructions were
+therefore given to the two knights that, while Georges was to be treated
+with all courtesy, he was to be strictly watched, though in such a
+manner that he should be in ignorance of it, and that, whenever he
+turned his steps in the direction of those parts of the defences where
+fresh works had been recently added and preparations made of which it
+was desirable the Turks should be kept in ignorance, he was to be met,
+as if by accident, by one of the knights told off for the purpose, and
+his steps diverted in another direction.
+
+Georges soon made himself popular among many of the knights, who had no
+suspicions of his real character. He was a man of exceptional figure,
+tall, strong, splendidly proportioned, with a handsome face and gallant
+bearing. He was extremely well informed on all subjects, had travelled
+widely, had seen many adventures, was full of anecdote, and among
+the younger knights, therefore, he was soon regarded as a charming
+companion. His very popularity among them aided D'Aubusson's plans, as
+Georges was generally the centre of a group of listeners, and so had but
+few opportunities of getting away quietly to obtain the information he
+sought. Gervaise delivered his report to the grand master.
+
+“I am free now,” D'Aubusson said, “and will accompany you to St.
+Nicholas. I have been detained by the coming of this man Georges. He
+is a clever knave, and, I doubt not, has come as a spy. However, I have
+taken measures that he shall learn nothing that can harm us. No lives
+have been lost at the tower, I hope?”
+
+“No, sir; Caretto has forbidden any to show themselves on the walls.”
+
+“He has done well. This is no time for rash exposure, and where there is
+naught to be gained, it is a grave fault to run risks.”
+
+On arriving at the end of the mole, D'Aubusson, accompanied by Caretto,
+made an investigation of the effect of the Turks' fire.
+
+“'Tis worse than I expected,” he said. “When we laid out our
+fortifications the thought that such guns as these would be used against
+them never entered our minds. Against ordinary artillery the walls would
+stand a long battering; but it is clear that we shall have to depend
+more upon our swords than upon our walls for our defence. Fortunately,
+although the Turks have indeed chosen the spot where our walls are most
+open to the assaults of their battery, they have to cross the water to
+attack the breach when it is made, and will have to fight under heavy
+disadvantage.”
+
+“Tresham was last night saying to me, that it seemed to him it would not
+be a difficult matter for one who spoke Turkish well, to issue at night
+on the other side of the town, and to make his way round to the battery,
+disguised of course as a Turkish soldier, and then, mixing with the
+artillery men, to drive a spike into one of the touch holes. He said
+that he would gladly volunteer for the task.”
+
+D'Aubusson shook his head decidedly. “It would be too dangerous; and
+even were a spike driven in, the Turks would have no great difficulty
+in extracting it, for the tubes are so big that a man might crawl in and
+drive the spike up from the inside. Moreover, could one or more of the
+guns be disabled permanently, others would be brought down and set in
+their place, so that nothing would be gained but a very short delay,
+which would be of no advantage to us, and certainly would in no way
+justify the risking of the life of so distinguished a young knight.”
+
+The bombardment of St. Nicholas continued for some days. A breach was
+fast forming in the wall, and a slope composed of the fallen rubbish
+extended from the front of the breach to the water's edge. The grand
+master was frequently on the spot, and as this was at present the sole
+object of attack, the garrison was strengthened by as many knights as
+could be sheltered within its walls. At night the shattered masonry
+that had fallen inside was carried out, and with it a new work thrown
+up across the mole, to strengthen the defence on that side, should the
+enemy land between the town and the fort. Small batteries were planted
+wherever they could sweep the approaches to the breach, and planks
+studded with nails were sunk in the shallow water of the harbour, to
+impede the progress of those who might attempt to swim or wade across.
+For the time, therefore, the functions of Gervaise were in abeyance, and
+he laboured with the rest of the garrison at the defences.
+
+At daybreak on the 9th of June, a great number of vessels and boats,
+crowded with soldiers, bore down on St. Nicholas. As they approached,
+every gun on the fortifications that could be brought to bear upon them
+opened fire; but in a dense mass they advanced. Some made their way to
+the rocks and landed the soldiers there; others got alongside the mole;
+but the majority grounded in the shallow water of the harbour, and
+the troops, leaping out, waded to the foot of the breach. On its crest
+D'Aubusson himself had taken up his station. Beside him stood Caretto,
+and around them the most distinguished knights of the Order. With wild
+shouts the Turks rushed up the breach, and swarmed thickly up the ruined
+masonry until, at its summit, they encountered the steel clad line of
+the defenders. For hours the terrible struggle continued. As fast as the
+head of the Turkish column broke and melted away against the obstacle
+they tried in vain to penetrate, fresh reinforcements took the place
+of those who had fallen, and in point of valour and devotion the Moslem
+showed himself a worthy antagonist of the Christian. It was not only
+at the breach that the conflict raged. At other points the Turks, well
+provided with ladders, fixed them against the walls, and desperately
+strove to obtain a footing there. From the breach clouds of dust rose
+from under the feet of the combatants, mingling with the smoke of
+the cannon on the ramparts, the fort, and Turkish ships, and at times
+entirely hid from the sight of the anxious spectators on the walls of
+the town and fortress, and of the still more numerous throng of Turks
+on St. Stephen's Hill, the terrible struggle that continued without a
+moment's intermission.
+
+The combatants now fought in comparative silence. The knights, exhausted
+and worn out by their long efforts beneath the blazing sun, still showed
+an unbroken front; but it was only occasionally that the battle cry of
+the Order rose in the air, as a fresh body of assailants climbed up the
+corpse strewn breach. The yell of the Moslems rose less frequently;
+they sacrificed their lives as freely and devotedly as those who led the
+first onset had done; but as the hours wore on, the assurance of victory
+died out, and a doubt as to whether it was possible to break through the
+line of their terrible foes gained ground. D'Aubusson himself, although,
+in spite of the remonstrances of the knights, always in the thickest
+of the fray, was yet ever watchful, and quickly perceived where the
+defenders were hotly pressed, and where support was most needed.
+Gervaise fought by his side, so that, when necessary, he could carry his
+orders to a little body of knights, drawn up in reserve, and despatch
+them to any point where aid was needed. The cannon still continued their
+fire on both sides. A fragment of one of the stone balls from a basilisk
+struck off D'Aubusson's helmet. He selected another from among the
+fallen knights, and resumed his place in the line. Still the contest
+showed no signs of terminating. The Turkish galleys ever brought up
+reinforcements, while the defenders grew fewer, and more exhausted.
+During a momentary pause, while a fresh body of Turks were landing,
+Gervaise said to the grand master,
+
+“If you will give me leave, sir, I will go out at the watergate, swim
+up the inner harbour, and in a very short time turn a few of the craft
+lying there into fire ships, and tow them out with a couple of galleys.
+At any rate, we can fire all these craft that have grounded, and create
+a panic among the others.”
+
+“Well thought of, Gervaise! I will write an order on one of my tablets.
+Do you take my place for a minute.” Withdrawing behind the line, the
+grand master sat down on a fragment of stone, and, drawing a tablet
+from a pouch in his girdle, he wrote on it, “In all things carry out
+the instructions of Sir Gervaise Tresham: he is acting by my orders and
+authority, and has full power in all respects.”
+
+He handed the slip of parchment to Gervaise, who hurried to the water
+gate in the inner harbour, threw off his helmet and armour, issued out
+at the gate, and plunged into the sea. He swam out some distance, in
+order to avoid the missiles of the Turks, who were trying to scale the
+wall from the mole, and then directed his course to St. Michael's, which
+guarded the inner entrance to the fort. He had fastened the parchment
+in his hair, and as some of the garrison of the tower, noticing his
+approach, came down to assist him, he handed it to them and was at once
+taken to the commander of St. Michael, answering as he went the anxious
+questions as to how matters stood at the breach.
+
+“Aid is sorely needed. The Turks have gained no foot of ground as
+yet, but many of the knights are killed and most of the others utterly
+exhausted with heat and labour. Unless aid reaches them speedily, the
+tower, with all its defenders, will be lost.”
+
+The instant the commander knew what was required, he bade six of the
+knights embark with Gervaise in a boat moored behind the tower, and row
+up the harbour to the spot where the shipping was all massed together,
+protected by the high ground of the fortress from the Turkish fire.
+Gervaise waved his hand, as he neared the end of the harbour, to the
+officer on the walls, and while the six knights who were with him ran
+off to tell the master of the galleys to prepare two of them to leave
+the port instantly, Gervaise explained to the officer in charge of the
+wall at that point the plan that he was charged to carry out, and asked
+for twenty knights to assist him.
+
+“It will leave us very weak along here,” the officer said. “Then let me
+have ten, and send for another ten from other parts of the wall. Here is
+the grand master's order, giving me full power and authority, and it is
+all important that no single moment shall be wasted.”
+
+“You shall have twenty of mine,” the officer said, “and I will draw ten
+from the langue next to us to fill their places.”
+
+In a few minutes the quay was a scene of bustle and activity. Gervaise
+picked out ten of the smallest vessels; the knights went among the other
+ships, seized all goods and stores that would be useful as combustibles,
+and compelled the crews to carry them on board the craft chosen as fire
+ships. Then barrels were broken open, old sails and faggots saturated
+with oil and pitch, and in little more than a quarter of an hour after
+his arrival, Gervaise had the satisfaction of seeing that the ten boats
+were all filled with combustibles, and ready to be set on fire. He now
+called for volunteers from the sailors, and a number of them at once
+came forward, including many of the captains. He placed one of these in
+command of each fire ship, and gave him four of the sailors.
+
+“The galleys will tow you out,” he said, “and take you close to the
+enemy's ships. We shall range you five abreast, and when I give the
+word, the one at the end of the line will steer for the nearest Turk,
+and, with oars and poles, get alongside. The captain will then light the
+train of powder in the hold, throw the torch among the straw, and see
+that, if possible, the men fasten her to the Turk; but if this cannot
+be done, it is not essential, for in the confusion the enemy will not
+be able to get out of the way of the fire ship as it drives down against
+her. At the last moment you will take to your boats and row back here.
+We will protect you from the assaults of any of the Turkish ships.”
+
+Having made sure that all the captains understood the orders, Gervaise
+took command of one of the galleys, the senior knight going on board
+the other. The ten fire ships were now poled out until five were ranged
+abreast behind each craft; Gervaise requested the commander of the other
+galley to lie off the point of St. Nicholas until he had got rid of his
+five fire ships, then to advance and launch his craft against the Turks.
+The smoke of the guns lay so heavy on the water, and the combatants were
+so intent upon the struggle at the breach, that Gervaise steered his
+galley into the midst of the Turkish vessels laden with troops ready
+to disembark, without attracting any notice; then, standing upon the
+taffrail, he signalled to the two outside boats to throw off their ropes
+and make for the Turkish ship nearest to them. This they did, and it was
+not until a sheet of flame rose alongside, that the enemy awoke to the
+sense of danger.
+
+The other three fire ships were almost immediately cast off. Two of them
+were equally successful, but the Turks managed to thrust off the third.
+She drifted, however, through the shipping, and presently brought
+up alongside one of the vessels fast aground. With but ten knights,
+Gervaise could not attack one of the larger vessels, crowded with
+troops; but there were many fishing boats that had been pressed into the
+service, and against one of these Gervaise ordered the men to steer the
+galley. A shout to the rowers made them redouble their efforts. A yell
+of dismay arose from the Turkish troops as they saw the galley bearing
+down upon them, and frantic efforts were made to row out of her way.
+These were in vain, for her sharp prow struck them amidships, cutting
+the boat almost in two, and she sank like a stone, the galley, without a
+pause, making for another boat.
+
+Looking back, Gervaise saw that his consort was already in the midst of
+the Turks, among whom the wildest confusion prevailed, each ship trying
+to extricate herself from the mass, upon which the batteries of the
+fortress now concentrated their efforts. Two fresh columns of flame
+had already shot up, and satisfied that all was going well, Gervaise
+continued his attack upon the smaller craft, six of whom were overtaken
+and sunk. Three or four of the larger vessels endeavoured to lay
+themselves alongside the galley, but her speed was so superior to theirs
+that she easily evaded the attempts, and, sweeping round, rejoined
+the other galley which had just issued from among the Turks, who were
+already in full retreat. The defenders of St. Nicholas, reanimated by
+the sight of the discomfiture of the Turkish fleet, with a loud shout
+rushed down from the spot which they had held for so many hours, drove
+their assailants before them, and flung themselves upon the crowd
+assembled at the foot of the breach.
+
+These had already suffered terribly from the fire of the batteries.
+Again and again they had striven to storm the mound of rubbish, and had
+each time been repulsed, with the loss of their bravest leaders. Seeing
+themselves abandoned by the ships, a panic seized them, and as the
+knights rushed down upon them they relinquished all thoughts of
+resistance, and dashed into the shallow water. Many were drowned in the
+attempt to swim across the deep channel in the middle, some succeeded,
+while others made their escape in the boats in which they had been
+brought ashore from the ships.
+
+The struggle was over. The two galleys made for the breach, and the
+knights leapt out as soon as the boats grounded, and, wading ashore,
+joined the group that had so long and gallantly sustained the unequal
+fight. Fatigue, exhaustion, and wounds, were forgotten in the triumph
+of the moment, and they crowded round the grand master and Caretto, to
+whose joint exertions the success of the defence was so largely due.
+
+“Do not thank me, comrades,” D'Aubusson said. “No man has today fought
+better than the rest. Every knight has shown himself worthy of the fame
+of our Order. The meed of praise for our success is first due to Sir
+Gervaise Tresham. At the moment when I began to doubt whether we could
+much longer withstand the swarms of fresh foes who continued to pour
+against us, while we were overcome by heat and labour, Sir Gervaise, who
+had throughout been fighting at my side, offered to swim into the port,
+to fit out a dozen of the merchant craft there as fire ships, and to tow
+them round into the midst of the Turkish vessels behind the two galleys
+that were lying ready for service. I remembered how he had before
+destroyed the corsair fleet at Sardinia with fire ships, and the
+proposal seemed to me as an inspiration sent from Heaven, at this moment
+of our great peril. I wrote him an order, giving him full authority to
+act in my name, and in a time that seemed to me incredibly short I saw
+him round the point with the fire ships in tow. You saw, as well as
+I did, how completely the plan was carried out. Ten or twelve of the
+Turkish ships are a mass of flames, and besides these I noted that
+the galley ran down and destroyed several smaller craft filled with
+soldiers. The panic in the ships spread to the troops on shore, and
+rendered the last part of our task an easy one. I say it from my heart
+that I consider it is to Sir Gervaise Tresham that we owe our success,
+and that, had it not been for his happy thought, the sun would have gone
+down on our dead bodies lying on the summit of the breach, and on the
+Turkish flag waving over the fort of St. Nicholas.”
+
+Until now none of the defenders of the breach had known how what seemed
+to them an almost miraculous change in the fortune of the fight had come
+about, and they thronged round Gervaise, shaking his hand, and many of
+them warmly embracing him, according to the custom of the time.
+
+“It was but natural that the idea should occur to me,” he said, “having
+before successfully encountered them with fire ships; and as all on
+shore, and especially these knights, aided me with all their power, it
+took but a brief time to get the boats in readiness for burning. Much
+credit, too, is due to the merchant captains and sailors who volunteered
+to take charge of the fire ships and to manoeuver them alongside the
+Turks.”
+
+The grand master and the knights who had borne the brunt of the battle
+now retired along the mole to the town, bearing with them their most
+seriously wounded comrades, and assisting those whose wounds were less
+severe. The twenty knights who had manned the two galleys remained in
+the fort. Caretto continued in command, as, although he had suffered
+several wounds, he refused to relinquish his post. Gervaise, who
+had,--thanks partly to his skill with his weapons, but still more to
+the temper of the splendid suit of armour presented to him by
+Genoa,--escaped without a scratch, volunteered to remain with him until
+next morning, his principal motive for making the request being his
+desire to escape from further congratulations and praise for the success
+of his plan. After Caretto's wounds had been dressed by the knights, and
+he and Gervaise had partaken of some food and wine, which they greatly
+needed, Caretto was persuaded to lie down for a time, the knights
+promising to bring him word at once if they perceived any movement
+whatever on the part of the enemy. Gervaise remained with him, feeling,
+now the excitement was over, that he sorely needed rest after his
+exertions in the full heat of the summer sun.
+
+“It has been a great day, Gervaise,” Caretto said, “and I only hope that
+when again I go into battle with the infidel, I shall have you at hand
+to come forward at the critical moment with some master stroke to secure
+victory. Claudia will be pleased indeed when she hears how the knight
+who bears her gage has again distinguished himself. She will look on the
+gay and idle young fops of Genoa with greater disdain than ever. Now you
+need not say anything in protest, the more so as I feel grievously weak,
+and disposed for sleep.”
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXII THE STRUGGLE AT THE BREACH
+
+
+Two hours later Caretto and Gervaise were roused by the arrival of a
+hundred knights in place of the previous garrison; these bore the news
+that the pasha had sent in a flag of truce to ask for an armistice until
+sundown, to enable him to carry off for burial the bodies of those who
+had fallen in the attack. The request had been willingly granted; but
+D'Aubusson had at the same time thought it well to send down a strong
+reinforcement to the garrison to prevent any attempt at treachery on the
+part of the Turks.
+
+“I have seldom heard pleasanter news,” Caretto said; “for just as I fell
+asleep I was wondering how we were to rid ourselves of the corpses of
+the infidels. By tomorrow the place would have become unbearable; and
+though, living, the Turks could not turn us out of the tower, they would
+when dead speedily have rid the place of us.”
+
+In half an hour a number of Moslem vessels were seen approaching.
+Caretto did not wish the Turks to imagine that he doubted their good
+faith, and while directing the main body of knights to remain in
+concealment near the breach, he placed two on sentry duty on the crest
+of the ruins, and, with four other knights and Gervaise, went down in
+complete armour to salute the officer in command of the burying party,
+as he landed from the boats. The ships anchored a short distance out,
+and a number of boats rowed from them to the shore. As the Turkish
+officer landed, Caretto saluted him, and said in Arabic,
+
+“I give you courteous greeting, Sir. When the cannon cease to sound and
+swords are sheathed, there is no longer animosity between brave men; and
+no braver than those whose bodies lie stretched there, breathed the air
+of heaven. If, sir, I and the knights with me do not uncover our heads,
+it is from no want of respect for the dead, but solely because we dare
+not stand bareheaded under the fierce rays of the sun.”
+
+The Turk answered with equal courtesy, complimenting the knights on
+their defence.
+
+“Had I not seen it with my own eyes,” he said, “I should have deemed it
+altogether impossible that so small a number of men could thus for hours
+have withstood the attacks of some of the best of the sultan's troops.
+Tales have come down to us from our fathers of the marvellous prowess
+of the knights of your Order, and how at Smyrna, at Acre, and elsewhere,
+they performed such feats of valour that their name is still used by
+Turkish mothers as a bugbear to frighten their children. But the stories
+have always seemed to me incredible; now I perceive they were true, and
+that the present members of the Order in no way fall short of the valour
+of their predecessors.”
+
+The knights remained with the Turkish commander and some of his officers
+while the work of collecting and carrying away the dead was performed,
+the conversation on their side being supported by Caretto and Gervaise.
+No less than seven hundred bodies were carried down to the boats,
+besides a great many wounded by the artillery fire. None were, however,
+found breathing among the great pile of dead at the upper part of the
+breach, for the axes and double handed swords of the knights had, in
+most of the cases, cleft through turban and skull.
+
+“This represents but part of our loss,” the Turkish commander said
+sadly, as the last party came down with their burdens to the boats.
+“At least as many more must have perished in the sea, either in their
+endeavours to escape when all was lost, in the destruction of their
+vessels by fire, by the shot from your batteries, or by being run down
+by your galleys. Ah, Sir Knight, if it had not been for the appearance
+of your fire ships, methinks the matter might have ended differently.”
+
+“In that I altogether agree with you,” Caretto said. “We were indeed,
+well nigh spent, and must have soon succumbed had it not been that the
+fire ships arrived to our rescue. You have a fair right to claim that
+the victory would have remained in your hands, had not those craft gone
+out and snatched it from you.”
+
+Then, with salutes on both sides, the Turks took their places in the
+boats, and the knights returned to the fort. As soon as darkness came
+on, a large body of slaves were marched down from the town, and, under
+the direction of the knights, laboured all night at the mound, removing
+great quantities of the fallen stones and rubbish in a line halfway up
+it, and piling them above so as to form a scarp across the mound that
+would need ladders to ascend. Another party worked at the top of the
+mound, and there built up a wall eight feet high. The work was completed
+by daylight, and the knights felt that they were now in a position to
+resist another attack, should Paleologus again send his troops to the
+assault.
+
+The night had passed quietly. There was a sound of stir and movement in
+the Turkish battery, but nothing that would excite the suspicion of a
+large body of troops being in motion. When it became light it was seen
+that the Turkish ships had sailed away to their previous anchorage on
+the other side of the Island, and although at considerable intervals
+the great cannon hurled their missiles against the fort, it was evident
+that, for the time at least, the attack was not to be pressed at that
+point. A fresh body of slaves, however, came down from the town to
+relieve those who had been all night at work, and the repair of the
+defences was continued, and with greater neatness and method than had
+been possible in the darkness.
+
+At eight o'clock the bells of St. John's Church gave notice that a
+solemn service of thanksgiving for the repulse of the enemy was about
+to be held. Notice had been sent down early to the tower; and all the
+knights who could be spared, without too greatly weakening the garrison,
+went up to attend it; the service was conducted with all the pomp and
+ceremony possible, and after it was over a great procession was formed
+to proceed to the shrine, where a picture of the Virgin held in special
+reverence by the Order was placed.
+
+As it wound through the streets in splendid array, the grand master and
+officials in all their robes of state, the knights in full armour and
+the mantles of the Order, while the inhabitants in gala costume lined
+the streets, windows, and housetops, the ladies waving scarves and
+scattering flowers down on the knights, the roar of great cannon on the
+south side of the city showed that the Turks had commenced the attack in
+another quarter. Without pausing, the procession continued its way, and
+it was not until the service in the chapel had been concluded that any
+steps were taken to ascertain the direction of the attack. As soon as it
+was over, the knights hastened to the walls. During the night the
+Turks had transported their great basilisks, with other large pieces of
+artillery, from the camp to the rising ground on the south side of the
+city, and had opened fire against the wall covering the Jews' quarter,
+and at the same time against the tower of St. Mary on the one hand and
+the Italian tower on the other.
+
+From other commanding spots huge mortars were hurling great fragments of
+rock and other missiles broadcast into the town. The portion of the wall
+selected for the attack showed that the Turks had been well informed by
+their spies of the weak points of the defence. The wall behind which the
+Jews' quarter lay, was, to all appearance, of thick and solid masonry;
+but this was really of great age, having formed part of the original
+defences of the town, before the Order had established itself there.
+The masonry, therefore, was ill fitted to resist the huge balls hurled
+against it by the basilisks. The langue of Provence was in charge of
+this part of the wall, and, leaving them for the present to bear the
+brunt of the storm, the grand master sent the knights who could be
+spared, to assist the inhabitants to erect shelters against the storm of
+missiles falling in the town.
+
+Sheds with sharply sloping roofs, constructed of solid timber, were
+built against the inner side of the walls, and beneath these numbers of
+the inhabitants found refuge. The work was performed with great celerity
+by the inhabitants, aided by the gangs of slaves, and in two or three
+days the townspeople were all in shelter, either in these sheds, in the
+vaults of the churches, or in other strongly constructed buildings.
+
+Among the missiles hurled into the town were balls filled with Greek
+fire, but the houses being entirely built of stone, no conflagrations
+of importance were caused by them, as a band of knights was organised
+specially to watch for these bombs, and whenever one of them was seen to
+fall, they hurried from their lookout to the spot, with a gang of slaves
+carrying baskets of earth and buckets of water, and quenched the flames
+before they had made any great headway.
+
+The roar of the bombardment was almost continuous, and was heard at
+islands distant from Rhodes, telling the inhabitants how the battle
+between the Christians and the Moslems was raging.
+
+It was not long before the wall in the front of the Jews' quarter began
+to crumble, and it was soon evident that it must, ere many days, succumb
+to the storm of missiles hurled against it. D'Aubusson lost no time in
+making preparations to avert the danger. He ordered all the houses in
+rear of the wall to be levelled; a deep semicircular ditch was then dug,
+and behind this a new wall, constructed of the stones and bricks from
+the houses destroyed, was built, and backed with an earthen rampart of
+great thickness and solidity.
+
+The work was carried on with extraordinary rapidity. The grand master
+himself set the example, and, throwing aside his robes and armour,
+laboured with pick and shovel like the commonest labourer. This excited
+the people to the highest pitch of enthusiasm, and all classes threw
+themselves into the task. Knights and slaves, men, women, and children,
+and even the inmates of the convents and nunneries, aided in the work,
+and when at last the outer wall fell, and the Turks thought that success
+was at hand, the pasha saw with astonishment and dismay that entry to
+the city was still barred by a work as formidable as that which he had
+destroyed at an enormous expenditure of ammunition. There was now a
+short breathing time for the besieged; but the depression which the
+failure of their efforts excited among the Turks, was shortly dispelled
+by the arrival of a ship, with a despatch from Constantinople, in which
+the pasha was informed that the sultan himself was about to proceed to
+Rhodes with a reinforcement of a hundred thousand men, and a fresh park
+of artillery.
+
+Paleologus had some doubts as to whether the report was true or was
+merely intended to stimulate him to new efforts for the speedy capture
+of the place. Knowing well that the grand master was the heart and soul
+of the defence, and that the failure of the assault was mainly due
+to his energy and ability, he determined to resort to the weapon so
+frequently in use in Eastern warfare--that of assassination. To this
+end he employed two men, one a Dalmatian, the other an Albanian; these
+presented themselves before the walls as deserters, and as there was no
+reason for suspecting their tale, they were admitted within the gates,
+and welcomed as having escaped from enforced service. They soon spread
+the tale of the speedy coming of the sultan with vast reinforcements,
+and as the pasha had on the previous day caused salutes to be fired,
+and other demonstrations to be made, the news was readily credited, and
+caused the greatest dismay among the defenders.
+
+Some of the knights of the Italian and Spanish langues believed the
+prospect of a successful defence against so enormous a force was
+absolutely hopeless, and determined to put pressure upon D'Aubusson to
+treat for surrender before it became too late. They opened negotiations
+with an Italian named Filelfo, one of D'Aubusson's secretaries, who
+undertook to lay their opinion before the grand master. D'Aubusson at
+once summoned the knights concerned in the matter before him. They found
+him with several members of the council.
+
+“Sir Knights,” he said, “I have heard from my secretary your opinions
+in the matter of a surrender, and since you are in such terror of the
+Moslem sultan, you have my full permission to leave the town; and, more
+than that, I will myself secure your safe departure, which might be
+imperilled if your comrades or even the inhabitants of the town came to
+learn that you had advocated surrender; but,” he went on, changing his
+tone from that of sarcasm to sternness, “if you remain with us, see that
+the word surrender never again passes your lips, and be assured that,
+should you continue your intrigues, in that direction, you shall meet
+with the fate you so justly deserve.”
+
+Overwhelmed by the grand master's accusation and sternness, the Italian
+and Spanish knights threw themselves on their knees and implored him to
+grant them an early opportunity of retrieving their fault by battle with
+the infidel. Feeling that the lesson had been sufficiently severe, and
+that henceforth there would be no renewal of intrigues for a surrender,
+D'Aubusson forgave them, and promised them a place in the van when next
+the Moslems attacked. The incident was not without its advantage, for
+the two pretended deserters, believing that Filelfo, who had also fallen
+under the displeasure of the grand master, would be ready to join in the
+conspiracy against his life, approached him. Filelfo, who was greatly
+attached to D'Aubusson, saw by their manner that they wished to engage
+him in some intrigue, and, feigning great resentment and anger at
+his disgrace, led them on until they divulged the entire plot for
+D'Aubusson's assassination, and made brilliant offers to him if he would
+afford them facilities for carrying it out, producing, in proof of their
+power to do so, a letter of the pasha, authorising them to make such
+promises in his name.
+
+Filelfo at once divulged the whole plot to D'Aubusson. The two men were
+immediately arrested, tried by the council, and sentenced to death. They
+were not, however, formally executed, for the populace, obtaining news
+of their treachery, broke in upon their guards, and tore them to
+pieces. Foiled in his attempt on the life of the grand master, the pasha
+prepared for a renewal of the attack, and it was not long before the
+knights on the lookout at the church of St. John perceived that the fort
+of St. Nicholas was again to be the scene of the attack. It was ere long
+discovered that a large number of men were busy some distance along the
+shore in building a long structure, that could only be intended for a
+floating bridge. Among the sailors who had aided in the attack with the
+fire ships were several men belonging to an English trader in the port.
+All who had done so had been handsomely rewarded for their conduct, and
+five of the Englishmen had afterwards gone to the English auberge and
+had asked to be enrolled for service against the Turks, as they were
+weary of remaining on board in idleness when there was work to be done.
+Their offer had been accepted, and they had, in common with all the
+sailors in the port, laboured at the construction of the inner wall.
+When that was completed, Sir John Boswell, under whose special charge
+they had been placed, said to Gervaise, “I think that I cannot do better
+than send these men down to St. Nicholas. It is probable that now the
+Turks see that they can do nothing at the new breach, they may try again
+there. Sailors are accustomed to night watches, and there are many of
+our knights who are not used to such work, and can be better trusted to
+defend a breach than to keep a vigilant watch at night. Will you take
+these men down to Caretto, and tell him that he can sleep soundly if
+he has a couple of them on watch? One of them, Roger Jervis, who is the
+mate of their ship, can speak some Italian, and as he is in command of
+them, Caretto will find no trouble in making them understand him.”
+
+St. Nicholas had now been put into a fair state of defence, as a party
+had been kept steadily at work there. Gervaise had not been to the tower
+since the morning after the assault, and saw with satisfaction how
+much had been done to render it secure. He found that Caretto was fast
+recovering from his wounds.
+
+“As it seems probable, Sir Fabricius,” he said, after the first
+greetings to the knight, “that the Turks will favour you with another
+visit, I have brought you five watchdogs. They are countrymen of mine,
+and were among those who navigated the fire ships the other day. Sir
+John Boswell has sent them down; they are, of course, accustomed to
+keep watch at night. One of them is mate of their vessel, and will be in
+command of them; he speaks a little Italian, and so will understand any
+orders you may give him. I have been speaking to him as we came down; he
+will divide his men into two watches, and will himself be on guard all
+night. Will you assign them some quiet place where they can sleep in the
+daytime? They can erect a shelter with a piece of sail cloth and a few
+bits of board, and they will, of course, be furnished with food.”
+
+“I shall be very glad to have them, for I am always restless at night,
+lest those on watch should close their eyes. You see, they have quite
+made up their minds that this fort will not be attacked again, and so
+are less inclined to be vigilant than they would be, did they think that
+an attack was impending.”
+
+Now that there was reason to believe that St. Nicholas might again be
+attacked, Gervaise was frequently there with orders or inquiries from
+the grand master. A number of vessels in the harbour were fitted up as
+fire ships, so as to be in readiness when the attack came. He was about
+to start early one morning when he saw Roger Jervis coming up with a
+heavy anchor on his shoulder.
+
+“Why, what are you bringing that up here for?” he asked. “Have you been
+diving; for I see your clothes are dripping with water?”
+
+“Ay, ay, sir, I have been in the water, and that Italian commander
+told me to come straight up here to tell the grand master all about the
+story; and right glad am I to have met you, for I should have made but
+a poor fist of it alone; I don't know more of their lingo than just to
+talk a few words of it.”
+
+“Then you had better tell me the story before I take you in.”
+
+“Well, it was like this, Sir Knight: I had Hudson and Jeffreys posted
+upon the wall, and I thought I would take a turn down on the rocks, for
+it was a dark night, and you can see much farther when you are by the
+edge of the water than you can when you are at the masthead. I sat there
+for an hour, and was thinking that it was about time to go up and turn
+out the other watch, when I saw something dark upon the water. It wasn't
+a ship, that was certain, and if it was a boat there wasn't any one in
+it; but it was too dark to make quite sure what it was. I watched it for
+a time, though I did not think much of the thing, taking it for a boat
+that had got adrift, or maybe a barrel from one of the Turkish ships.
+Presently I made out that it was a good bit nearer than when I first saw
+it.
+
+“That puzzled me. There is no tide to speak of in these seas, and there
+was no wind moving about. I could make out now that it was a boat,
+though a very small one, but certainly there was no one rowing it. It
+looked a very strange craft, and as I saw by the way it was bearing that
+it would come ashore about five or six fathoms from where I was sitting,
+I slid quietly off the rock, put my sword down by me handy for action,
+and waited. Presently the boat came up alongside the rock, and a fellow
+stood up from behind the stern. I was glad to see him, for I had begun
+to think that there was witchcraft in the thing moving along by itself,
+but I can tell you I was savage with myself for not having guessed there
+was a man swimming behind and pushing it on.
+
+“He stooped over the boat, and took something heavy out; then he felt
+about among the rocks under the water, and then laid the thing down
+there, and seemed to me to be settling it firm. I had half a mind to
+jump up and let fly at him, but then I thought it would be better to let
+him finish what he was doing, and go off with the idea that no one had
+seen him. So I kept hid until he started again. He waded a short way
+before he had to swim, and I could see that as he went he was paying out
+a rope over the stern. It was clear enough now what he had been up to:
+he had been fixing an anchor. What he did it for, or what use it could
+be to him, I could not say, but it was certain that he would not take
+all that trouble, with the chance of being knocked on the head, for
+nothing; so I waited for a bit till he had got out of sight, and over to
+the other side of the port.
+
+“Then I got up and felt about, and, chancing to get my foot under the
+rope, went right over into the water. After that you may guess I was not
+long in finding the anchor. I unknotted the rope from it and carried it
+ashore; then it struck me that the Turks might take it into their heads
+to give a pull on it in the morning, and if they did; they would find
+out that their game, whatever it was, had been found out; so I got hold
+of a stone of about twenty pound weight, and fastened the rope's end
+round it. That was enough to prevent the rope getting slack and make
+them think that it was still fast to the anchor; but, of course, if they
+pulled hard on it it would come home directly. I went and reported the
+matter the first thing this morning to the governor. He seemed to think
+that it was important, and told me to bring the anchor up to the grand
+master, who would get one of the English knights to find out all about
+it; for he could not make out much of what I said.”
+
+“It is very important,” Gervaise said, “and you behaved very wisely in
+the matter, and have rendered a great service by your discovery. I will
+take you in at once to the grand master.”
+
+Still bearing the anchor, the sailor followed Gervaise into an apartment
+where D'Aubusson was taking council with some of the senior knights.
+
+“Pardon my interrupting your Highness,” Gervaise said; “but the matter
+is so important that I knew you would listen to it, however occupied you
+were.” And he then repeated the narrative of the sailor's discovery.
+
+“This is indeed of the highest importance,” D'Aubusson said, “and the
+knowledge that it gives us may enable us to defeat an attempt, that
+might otherwise have proved our ruin. You see, knights, it solves the
+question that we were just discussing. We agreed that this long floating
+bridge that they have been constructing, was intended to enable them to
+cross the outer port and again attack St. Nicholas; and yet it seemed to
+us that even by night our batteries would be able to keep up such a fire
+on the boats, towing the head of the bridge across, as to render it well
+nigh impossible for them to get it over. Now you see what their plan is.
+With the aid of this rope, the end of which they think is firmly fixed
+on our side, they mean to haul the bridge across, and that so silently
+that they hope to be upon us almost before we have time to don our
+armour. We shall now be fully prepared, and need have no fear of the
+result.”
+
+There could now be little doubt that the attack would be made without
+loss of time, especially as the Turks believed that they could get
+their bridge across unseen. The fire ships--which were altogether more
+formidable than those Gervaise had improvised--were ordered to be made
+ready for action. This being arranged, the admiral left the council
+at once, that no time should be lost in getting them in readiness.
+D'Aubusson then turned to the English sailor.
+
+“You have rendered us a great service indeed by your vigilance, and
+showed great prudence by allowing the Turk to believe that he had
+accomplished his mission unsuspected. Had he thought he had been
+observed, some other plan would have been adopted. For so great a
+service it is meet that a great reward should be given.”
+
+He then took a bag from the hands of one of his secretaries, whom he
+had sent to fetch it, while they were discussing the matter of the fire
+ships.
+
+“Here are two hundred golden crowns,” he added, handing the bag to the
+seaman. “With these you can either settle on shore, or can build a
+stout ship and pursue your calling. Should you do so, call her the St.
+Nicholas, in remembrance of the gratitude of the Order of St. John for
+your having saved that fort from the Turks.”
+
+Astonished and delighted at the reward, which represented a very large
+sum in those days, the sailor stammered his thanks, and added, “I hope
+tonight that if I again have charge of a fire ship, I may be able to do
+more to prove to your Highness how grateful I am for the gift.”
+
+Throughout the day preparations for the defence of St. Nicholas went on
+unceasingly. Gangs of men, as usual, worked in the breach; but, as it
+was deemed advisable that there should be no outward show of activity
+that would lead the Turks to suspect that their design had been
+discovered, neither reinforcements of men nor munitions were sent along
+the mole; everything being taken out by boats, which, rowing closely
+along under the wall, were hidden from the view of the Turks. Barrels
+of Greek fire and pitch, cauldrons for heating the latter, a store of
+firewood, great balls of cotton steeped in oil and turpentine, sheaves
+of darts, spikes on short staves, that were, after darkness fell, to be
+thrust in among the fallen masonry to form a chevaux-de-frise--these,
+and all other matters that the ingenuity of the defenders could suggest,
+were landed at the water gate of the fort, while the garrison was
+strengthened by the addition of a large number of knights. Stores
+of ammunition were collected in readiness at all the batteries that
+commanded the mouth of the outer port, and by sunset D'Aubusson felt
+that everything that was possible had been done to meet the impending
+storm.
+
+At midnight the Turkish preparations were complete. The attack by the
+bridge was to be assisted by a large number of boats and other craft,
+and many armed galleys were also brought up to destroy or tow away
+the defenders' fire ships. Paleologus himself was down by the shore
+directing the preparations. Some of his best troops were placed upon the
+floating bridge, and, when all was ready, the order was given to pull
+upon the rope. No sooner, however, did the strain come upon it than
+there was a jerk, the rope slackened, and it was at once evident that
+the anchor had been discovered and the well laid plan disconcerted.
+Paleologus was furious, but, believing that the attack he had arranged
+would still be irresistible, he ordered a number of boats to take the
+bridge in tow, while a still larger force was to make a direct attack
+upon the breach. The movement was to be conducted as silently as
+possible until it was discovered, and then a dash forward was to be
+made.
+
+It was two o'clock before the fresh arrangements were completed and
+the boats put out. They had gone but a short distance when the anxious
+watchers in St. Nicholas learnt by the dull, confused sound that came
+across the water, that the attack was, in spite of the failure of the
+plan to take the bridge silently across, to be persevered in. A cannon
+was at once fired to give notice to the other batteries to be in
+readiness, and as soon as the dark mass of boats was made out the guns
+of the fort opened a destructive fire upon them, and a moment later were
+seconded by those from the fortress; these, however, were at present
+being fired almost at random, as the Turkish boats could not be made out
+at that distance. Now that all need for concealment was at an end, the
+Turkish war cry rose shrilly in the air, and the boatmen bent to their
+oars. The great cannon at St. Anthony's Church hurled their tremendous
+missiles at the tower, seconded by the fire of a number of other pieces
+that had in the darkness been brought down almost to the water's edge.
+
+As before, the boats swept up to the foot of the breach, the Turks
+leaped out, and, undismayed by the storm of shot, climbed up to the
+assault. The short ladders that they had brought with them enabled them
+to surmount the escarpments so laboriously made, and with loud shouts
+of “Allah!” they flung themselves upon the defenders on the crest of
+the breach. Here they were met by a line even more difficult to break
+through than before. The knights were ranged three deep; those in the
+front were armed with swords and battleaxes, while those in the other
+two lines thrust their spears out between the swordsmen, covering them
+with a hedge of steel points. Others in the rear brought up buckets of
+blazing pitch and Greek fire, and, advancing through gaps left for the
+purpose, hurled the buckets down into the struggling mass on the slope.
+There the fire not only carried death among the assailants, but the
+lurid flames enabled the batteries to direct their shot with terrible
+effect upon the breach, the crowded boats at its foot, and the bridge
+which was, with immense labour, presently got into position.
+
+It was not long before fresh light was thrown upon the scene, as the
+fire ships, issuing out from the inner harbour, burst into columns of
+flame, and, towed by boats, came into action. They were convoyed by
+the two galleys, each with a full complement of knights, and these soon
+became engaged in a fierce fight with the Turkish vessels that bore down
+to arrest the course of the fire ships. The scene was indeed a terrible
+one, the roar of cannon, the shouts of the combatants, the screams of
+the poor wretches upon whom the terrible Greek fire fell, the clash of
+arms and the shouts and cries of the Turks as they pressed across the
+bridge, united in a din that thrilled with horror the spectators, both
+in the city and on St. Stephen's Hill.
+
+Several of the Turkish galleys, in their efforts to arrest the approach
+of the fire ships towards the bridge, became themselves involved in the
+flames; but they were so far successful that when daylight broke the
+bridge was still intact and the combat at the breach continued to rage
+with determination and fury on both sides. The Turks there were led by
+a brave young prince named Ibrahim, a near relative of the sultan, with
+whom he was a great favourite, and he was ever in the front line of
+the assailants, his splendid bravery animating the soldiers to continue
+their efforts. As the daylight broadened out, however, the light enabled
+the Christian gunners to aim with far greater accuracy than had before
+been possible, and, concentrating their fire upon the bridge,
+across which reinforcements continued to press to the support of the
+assailants, they succeeded in sinking so many of the boats that it was
+no longer passable.
+
+Next they turned their fire upon the Turkish galleys, four of which they
+sank. Shortly afterwards, a ball struck the gallant young leader of the
+Turks, who, although previously several times wounded, had continued to
+fight in the front line. He fell dead, and his followers, disheartened
+by his fall and by the destruction of the bridge, at once abandoned
+their efforts, and rushed down to the foot of the breach. The terrible
+scene enacted at the repulse of the previous attack was now repeated.
+The concentrated fire of the guns of the defenders carried destruction
+into the crowded mass. Some gained the boats that still remained
+uninjured, and rowed for the opposite shore; the greater number rushed
+into the water and strove to recross it either by swimming or by the aid
+of the debris of the shattered boats. Their total loss was greater even
+than that suffered by them in the first attack, between two and three
+thousand being either killed or drowned, among them a number of their
+best officers. The amount of spoil, in the form of rich jewels and
+costly gold ornaments, found on the bodies of the dead piled on the
+breach, was very great.
+
+For three days after this terrible repulse the Turks were inactive,
+the pasha remaining shut up in his tent, refusing to see any one, or to
+issue orders. At the end of that time he roused himself from his stupor
+of grief and disappointment, and, abandoning the idea of any further
+attack upon the point that had cost him so dearly, he ordered the troops
+to move round and renew the attack upon the wall in front of the Jews'
+quarter, and commence the construction of a battery on the edge of the
+great ditch facing the retrenchment behind the breach before effected.
+The knights of Italy and Spain determined to seize the opportunity
+of retrieving the disgrace that had fallen upon them. At night they
+descended into the deep cutting, carrying across their ladders, and,
+silently mounting the opposite side, rushed with loud shouts into the
+unfinished battery. The Turks there, taken utterly by surprise, made but
+a slight resistance; a few were immediately cut down, and the rest fled
+panic stricken.
+
+The knights at once set the woodwork of the battery on fire, hurled the
+guns down into the ditch, and then returned triumphantly into the town,
+the dashing feat completely reinstating them in the good opinion of the
+grand master and their comrades.
+
+The incident showed the pasha that he must neglect no precautions, and,
+accordingly, he commenced his works at a distance from the walls, and
+pushed his approaches regularly forward until he again established
+a battery on the site of that from which his troops had been so
+unceremoniously ejected. While forming the approaches, the workmen
+had been constantly harassed by the fire from the guns on the walls,
+suffering considerable loss of life; but their numerical superiority was
+so vast that the loss in no way affected the plans of the pasha.
+
+As soon as the battery was completed, gangs of men, accustomed to mining
+operations, set to work in its rear to drive sloping passages downwards,
+opening into the face of the great cutting, and through these vast
+quantities of earth and stones were poured, so as to afford a passage
+across it, the depth being largely diminished by the great pile of
+rubbish that had already fallen from the breached wall. This novel mode
+of attack was altogether unexpected. The knights had regarded the fosse
+that had been cut at such an enormous expenditure of labour as forming
+an altogether impassable obstruction, and were dismayed at seeing the
+progress made in filling it up. D'Aubusson himself, full of resources as
+he was, saw that the defence was seriously threatened, unless some plan
+of meeting this unexpected danger could be devised.
+
+He consulted Maitre Georges; but the latter could make no suggestion;
+his only advice being the erection of a battery at a spot where it
+was almost self evident that it could be of no utility whatever.
+Other circumstances combined to render the suspicions D'Aubusson had
+entertained of the good faith of the renegade almost a certainty.
+Georges was seized, tried, and put to torture, and under this owned that
+he had been sent into the town for the purpose of betraying it; and he
+was, the same day, hung in the great square. His guilt must always be
+considered as uncertain. There was no proof against him, save his
+own confession; and a confession extorted by torture is of no value
+whatever. There are certainly many good grounds for suspicion, but it
+is possible that Georges really repented his apostacy, and acted in good
+faith in deserting the standard of Paleologus. He was undoubtedly a man
+of altogether exceptional ability and acquirements, and even the knights
+who have written accounts of the siege do justice to the fascination of
+his manner and the charm of his conversation.
+
+D'Aubusson now set to work in another direction to counteract the
+efforts of the Turks. He erected an immense wooden catapult, which threw
+huge pieces of rock into the midst of the Turkish works, crushing down
+the wooden screens erected to hide their approaches, breaking in the
+covered ways, and causing great loss of life among the besiegers. At
+the same time galleries were driven below the breach, opening into the
+ditch, where their exits were concealed by masses of rubbish. Through
+these strong working parties issued out at night, and carried away up
+the passages the rocks and other materials that the Turks had, during
+the day, brought, with immense labour, from a distance to the shoot. The
+materials so carried away were piled up behind the retrenchment, greatly
+adding to its thickness and strength.
+
+For some days the Turks observed, to their astonishment, that the road
+they were constructing across the ditch was diminishing instead of
+increasing in bulk, and at length it became so evident that the garrison
+were in some way removing the materials, that the pasha determined to
+deliver the assault before the heap was so far diminished as to become
+impassable. His former defeats had, however, taught him that success
+could not be always calculated upon, however good its prospect might
+appear; and although he had no real hope that the defenders would
+yield, he sent a formal summons for them to do so. This was refused with
+disdain, and preparations were at once made for the assault.
+
+The pasha promised to his soldiers the sack of the town and all the
+booty captured, and so assured were they of success that sacks were
+made to carry off the plunder. Stakes, on which the knights, when taken
+prisoners, were to be impaled, were prepared and sharpened, and each
+soldier carried a coil of rope with which to secure his captive.
+
+Before ordering the assault, the way was prepared for it by a terrible
+fire from every siege gun of the Turks. This was kept up for twenty-four
+hours, and so tremendous was the effect that the knights were unable
+to remain on the ramparts. The Turkish troops moved into position for
+attack, their movements being covered by the roar of the guns, and soon
+after sunrise on the 22nd of July the signal was given, and at a number
+of different points the Turks rushed to the assault. All these attacks,
+save that on the breach, were merely feints, to distract the attention
+of the garrison, and to add to the confusion caused by this sudden and
+unexpected onslaught. The pasha's plans were well designed and carried
+out; the knights, unable to keep their places on the ramparts under the
+storm of missiles, had retired to shelter behind the walls. There was no
+thought of an instant assault, as they considered that this would not be
+delivered until the new wall behind the breach had been demolished.
+
+Consequently, the rush of the Turks found the defenders altogether
+unprepared. Swarming across the mass of debris in the ditch, they
+ascended the breach without opposition, and their scaling ladders were
+placed against the new wall before the knights could hurry up to its
+defence. Even before the alarm was given in the town, the Turkish
+standard was waving on the parapet, and the Moslems were crowding on
+to the wall in vast numbers. The suddenness of the attack, the complete
+surprise, the sound of battle at various points around the walls, caused
+for a time confusion and dismay among the knights charged with the
+defence of the wall facing the breach. Roused by the uproar, the
+inhabitants of the town rushed up to their roofs to ascertain what
+was happening, and their cries of wild terror and alarm at seeing the
+Turkish banner on the walls added to the confusion. D'Aubusson sprang
+up from the couch, on which he had thrown himself in full armour, at the
+first sound of the alarm, and, sending off messages to all the auberges
+to summon every man to the defence, ran down into the town, followed by
+a small party of knights.
+
+Rushing through the streets, now filled with half dressed people wild
+with terror, he reached the foot of the wall, whose summit was crowded
+with the enemy, and saw in an instant that all was lost unless they
+could be driven thence without delay. The effect of his presence was
+instantaneous. The knights, hitherto confused and dismayed, rallied at
+once, and prepared for the desperate undertaking. The bank on the inside
+was almost perpendicular, and those charged with its defence had used
+two or three ladders for ascending to the rampart. These were at once
+seized and planted against the wall.
+
+The position of the contending parties was now reversed; the Christians
+were the assailants, the Turks the defenders. D'Aubusson himself was
+the first to ascend. Covering his head with his shield, he mounted the
+rampart; but ere he could gain a footing on the top he was severely
+wounded and hurled backwards. Again he made the attempt, but was again
+wounded and thrown down. Once more he mounted, and this time made good
+his footing. A moment later, Gervaise, who had accompanied him from the
+palace, stood beside him. Animated with the same spirit as his leader,
+he threw himself recklessly against the Turks, using a short, heavy
+mace, which in a melee was far more useful than the long sword.
+Scimitars clashed upon his helmet and armour; but at every blow he
+struck a Turk fell, and for each foot he gained a knight sprang on to
+the wall and joined him. Each moment their number increased, and the war
+cry of the Order rose louder and fiercer above the din. The very number
+of the Turks told against them. Crowded together as they were they could
+not use their weapons effectually, and, pressing fiercely upon them, the
+knights drove them back along the wall on either hand, hurling them down
+into the street or over the rampart. On so narrow a field of battle the
+advantage was all on the side of the knights, whose superior height and
+strength, and the protection afforded by their armour, rendered them
+almost invincible, nerved as they were with fury at the surprise that
+had overtaken them, and the knowledge that the fate of the city depended
+upon their efforts. After a quarter of an hour's desperate conflict the
+Turks were driven down the partial breach effected in the wall by the
+last bombardment, and the Christians were again the masters of their
+ramparts. Paleologus, however, hurried up reinforcements, headed by
+a band of janissaries, whose valour had decided many an obstinate
+conflict. Before ordering them to advance, he gave instructions to
+a company of men of approved valour to devote all their efforts to
+attacking D'Aubusson himself, whose mantle and rich armour rendered him
+a conspicuous object among the defenders of the breach. Advancing to the
+attack, the janissaries burst through the mass of Turks still continuing
+the conflict, and rushed up the breach. Then the chosen band, separating
+from the rest, flung themselves upon the grand master, the suddenness
+and fury of their attack isolating him and Gervaise from the knights
+around.
+
+Surrounded as he was by foes, already suffering from two severe wounds
+and shaken by his falls from the ladder, the grand master yet made a
+valiant defence in front, while Gervaise, hurling his mace into the face
+of one of his assailants, and drawing his two handed sword, covered him
+from the attack from behind. D'Aubusson received two more severe wounds,
+but still fought on. Gervaise, while in the act of cutting down an
+assailant, heard a shout of triumph from behind, and, looking round, he
+saw the grand master sinking to the ground from another wound. With a
+cry of grief and fury Gervaise sprang to him, receiving as he did so
+several blows on his armour and shield intended for the fallen knight,
+and, standing across him, showered his blows with such strength and
+swiftness that the janissaries shrank back before the sweep of the
+flashing steel. More than one who tried to spring into close quarters
+fell cleft to the chin, and, ere his assailants could combine for
+a general rush, a body of knights, who had just beaten off their
+assailants, fell upon the ranks of the janissaries with a force and fury
+there was no withstanding, and the chosen troops of the sultan for the
+first time broke and fled.
+
+Excited almost to madness by the sight of their beloved master stretched
+bleeding on the ground, the knights dashed down the breach in eager
+pursuit. This action was decisive of the fate of the struggle. The panic
+among the janissaries at once spread, and the main body of troops, who
+had hitherto valiantly striven to regain the advantage snatched from
+them, now lost heart and fled in confusion. But their escape was barred
+by the great body of reinforcements pressing forward across the heap of
+rubbish that formed the breach over the deep ditch. Maddened by fear,
+the fugitives strove to cut a way through their friends. The whole of
+the defenders of the breach now fell upon the rear of the struggling
+mass, hewing them down almost without resistance, while the cannon from
+the walls and towers kept up an unceasing fire until the last survivors
+of what had become a massacre, succeeded in gaining their works beyond
+the ditch, and fled to their camp. From every gateway and postern the
+knights now poured out, and, gathering together, advanced to the attack
+of St. Stephen's Hill. They met with but a faint resistance. The greater
+portion of the disorganised troops had made no pause at their camp, but
+had continued their headlong flight to the harbour, where their ships
+were moored, Paleologus himself, heartbroken and despairing at his
+failure, sharing their flight. The camp, with all its rich booty and
+the great banner of the pasha, fell into the hands of the victors, who,
+satisfied with their success, and exhausted by their efforts, made no
+attempt to follow the flying foe, or to hinder their embarkation; for
+even now the Turks, enormously outnumbering them as they did, might be
+driven by despair to a resistance so desperate as once again to turn the
+tide of victory.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIII THE REWARD OF VALOUR
+
+
+Gervaise knew nothing at the time of the final result of the battle, for
+as soon as the knights had burst through the circle of his opponents,
+he sank insensible on the body of the grand master. When he came to
+himself, he was lying on a bed in the hospital of the Order. As soon
+as he moved, Ralph Harcourt, who was, with other knights, occupied
+in tending the wounded, came to his bedside. “Thank God that you are
+conscious again, Gervaise! They told me that it was but faintness and
+loss of blood, and that none of your wounds were likely to prove mortal,
+and for the last twelve hours they have declared that you were asleep:
+but you looked so white that I could not but fear you would never wake
+again.”
+
+“How is the grand master?” Gervaise asked eagerly. Ralph shook his head.
+
+“He is wounded sorely, Gervaise, and the leech declares that one at
+least of his wounds is mortal; still, I cannot bring myself to believe
+that so great a hero will be taken away in the moment of victory, after
+having done such marvels for the cause not only of the Order, but of all
+Christendom.”
+
+“Then you beat them back again from the breach?” Gervaise said.
+
+“That was not all. They were in such confusion that we sallied out,
+captured their camp, with the pasha's banner and an enormous quantity of
+spoil, and pursued them to their harbour. Then we halted, fearing that
+they might in their desperation turn upon us, and, terribly weakened as
+we were by our losses, have again snatched the victory from our grasp.
+So we let them go on board their ships without interference, and this
+morning there is not a Turkish sail in sight. The inhabitants are well
+nigh mad with joy. But elated as we are at our success, our gladness is
+sorely damped by the state of the grand master, and the loss of so many
+of our comrades, though, indeed, our langue has suffered less than any
+of the others, for the brunt of the attacks on St. Nicholas and the
+breach did not fall upon us, still we lost heavily when at last we
+hurried up to win back the wall from them.”
+
+“Who have fallen?” Gervaise asked.
+
+“Among the principal knights are Thomas Ben, Henry Haler, Thomas
+Ploniton, John Vaquelin, Adam Tedbond, Henry Batasbi, and Henry Anlui.
+Marmaduke Lumley is dangerously wounded. Of the younger knights, some
+fifteen have been killed, and among them your old enemy Rivers. He died
+a coward's death, the only one, thank God, of all our langue. When
+the fray was thickest Sir John Boswell marked him crouching behind the
+parapet. He seized him by the gorget, and hauled him out, but his knees
+shook so that he could scarcely walk, and would have slunk back when
+released. Sir John raised his mace to slay him as a disgrace to the
+Order and our langue, when a ball from one of the Turkish cannon cut him
+well nigh in half, so that he fell by the hands of the Turks, and not by
+the sword of one of the Order he had disgraced. Fortunately none, save
+half a dozen knights of our langue, saw the affair, and you may be sure
+we shall say nothing about it; and instead of Rivers' name going down to
+infamy, it will appear in the list of those who died in the defence of
+Rhodes.”
+
+“May God assoil his soul!” Gervaise said earnestly. “'Tis strange that
+one of gentle blood should have proved a coward. Had he remained at
+home, and turned courtier, instead of entering the Order, he might have
+died honoured, without any one ever coming to doubt his courage.”
+
+“He would have turned out bad whatever he was,” Ralph said
+contemptuously; “for my part, I never saw a single good quality in him.”
+
+Long before Gervaise was out of hospital, the glad tidings that
+D'Aubusson would recover, in spite of the prognostications of the leech,
+spread joy through the city, and at about the same time that Gervaise
+left the hospital the grand master was able to sit up. Two or three days
+afterwards he sent for Gervaise.
+
+“I owe my life to you, Sir Gervaise,” he said, stretching out his thin,
+white hand to him as he entered. “You stood by me nobly till I fell,
+for, though unable to stand, I was not unconscious, and saw how
+you stood above me and kept the swarming Moslems at bay. No knight
+throughout the siege has rendered such great service as you have done.
+Since I have been lying unable to move, I have thought of many things;
+among them, that I had forgotten to give you the letters and presents
+that came for you after you sailed away. They are in that cabinet;
+please bring them to me. There,” he said, as Gervaise brought a bulky
+parcel which the grand master opened, “this letter is from the Holy
+Father himself. That, as you may see from the arms on the seal, is from
+Florence. The others are from Pisa, Leghorn, and Naples. Rarely, Sir
+Gervaise, has any potentate or knight earned the thanks of so many great
+cities. These caskets accompanied them. Sit down and read your letters.
+They must be copied in our records.”
+
+Gervaise first opened the one from the Pope. It was written by his own
+hand, and expressed his thanks as a temporal sovereign for the great
+benefit to the commerce of his subjects by the destruction of the
+corsair fleet, and as the head of the Christian Church for the blow
+struck at the Moslems. The other three letters were alike in character,
+expressing the gratitude of the cities for their deliverance from the
+danger, and of their admiration for the action by which a fleet was
+destroyed with a single galley. Along with the letter from Pisa was
+a casket containing a heavy gold chain set with gems. Florence sent a
+casket containing a document bestowing upon him the freedom of the city,
+and an order upon the treasury for five thousand ducats that had been
+voted to him by the grand council of the Republic; while Ferdinand, King
+of Naples, bestowed on him the grand cross of the Order of St. Michael.
+
+“The armour I had hung up in the armoury, where it has been carefully
+kept clean. I guessed what it was by the weight of the case when it
+came, and thought it best to open it, as it might have got spoilt by
+rust. It is a timely gift, Sir Gervaise, for the siege has played havoc
+with the suit Genoa gave you; it is sorely battered, dinted, and broken,
+and, although you can doubtless get it repaired, if I were you I would
+keep it in its present state as a memorial--and there could be no
+prouder one--of the part you bore in the siege. I have seen Caretto
+this morning. He sails for Genoa tomorrow, where he will, I hope, soon
+recover his strength, for the wounds he received at St. Nicholas have
+healed but slowly. He said”--and a momentary smile crossed the grand
+master's face--“that he thought a change might benefit you also, for he
+was sure that the air here had scarce recovered from the taint of
+blood. Therefore, here is a paper granting you three months' leave. His
+commandery is a pleasant one, and well situated on the slopes of the
+hills; and the fresh air will, doubtless, speedily set you up. I should
+like nothing better than a stay there myself, but there is much to do to
+repair the damages caused by the siege, and to place the city in a state
+of defence should the Turks again lay siege to it; and methinks Mahomet
+will not sit down quietly under the heavy reverse his troops have met
+with.”
+
+“But I should be glad to stay here to assist in the work, your
+Highness.”
+
+“There are plenty of knights to see to that,” D'Aubusson replied, “and
+it will be long before you are fit for such work. No, I give my orders
+for you to proceed with Caretto to Genoa--unless, indeed, you would
+prefer to go to some other locality to recruit your strength.”
+
+“I would much rather go with Sir Fabricius, your Highness, than to any
+place where I have no acquaintances. I have a great esteem and respect
+for him.”
+
+“He is worthy of it; there is no nobler knight in the Order, and, had
+I fallen, none who could more confidently have been selected to fill
+my place. He has an equally high opinion of you, and spoke long and
+earnestly concerning you.”
+
+A fortnight later the ship carrying the two knights arrived at Genoa.
+
+“I will go ashore at once, Gervaise,” Caretto said. “I know not whether
+my cousin is in the city or on her estate; if the former, I will stay
+with her for a day or two before going off to my commandery, and of
+course you will also be her guest. I hope she will be here, for methinks
+we shall both need to refit our wardrobes before we are fit to appear in
+society.”
+
+“Certainly I shall,” Gervaise agreed; “for, indeed, I find that my gala
+costume suffered a good deal during my long absence; and, moreover,
+although I have not increased in height, I have broadened out a good
+deal since I was here two years ago.”
+
+“Yes; you were a youth then, Gervaise, and now you are a man, and one
+of no ordinary strength and size. The sun of Tripoli, and your labours
+during the siege, have added some years to your appearance. You are, I
+think, little over twenty, but you look two or three years older. The
+change is even greater in your manner than in your appearance; you were
+then new to command, doubtful as to your own powers, and diffident with
+those older than yourself. Now for two years you have thought and acted
+for yourself, and have shown yourself capable of making a mark even
+among men like the knights of St. John, both in valour and in fitness to
+command. You saved St. Nicholas, you saved the life of the grand master;
+and in the order of the day he issued on the morning we left, granting
+you three months' leave for the recovery of your wounds, he took the
+opportunity of recording, in the name of the council and himself, their
+admiration for the services rendered by you during the siege, and his
+own gratitude for saving his life when he lay helpless and surrounded by
+the Moslems--a testimony of which any knight of Christendom might well
+feel proud.”
+
+It was three hours before Caretto returned to the ship.
+
+“My cousin is at home, and will be delighted to see you. I am sorry that
+I have kept you waiting so long, but at present Genoa, and, indeed,
+all Europe, is agog at the news of the defeat of the Turks, and Italy
+especially sees clearly enough that, had Rhodes fallen, she would have
+been the next object of attack by Mahomet; therefore the ladies would
+not hear of my leaving them until I had told them something at least of
+the events of the siege, and also how it came about that you were there
+to share in the defence. I see that you are ready to land; therefore,
+let us be going at once. Most of the people will be taking their siesta
+at present, and we shall get through the streets without being mobbed;
+for I can assure you that the mantle of the Order is just at present
+in such high favour that I had a hard task to wend my way through the
+streets to my cousin's house.”
+
+On arriving at the palace of the Countess of Forli, Gervaise was
+surprised at the change that had taken place in the Lady Claudia. From
+what Caretto had said, he was prepared to find that she had grown out of
+her girlhood, and had altered much. She had, however, changed even more
+than he had expected, and had become, he thought, the fairest woman that
+he had ever seen. The countess greeted him with great cordiality; but
+Claudia came forward with a timidity that contrasted strangely with
+the outspoken frankness he remembered in the girl. For a time they all
+chatted together of the events of the siege, and of his captivity.
+
+“The news that you had been captured threw quite a gloom over us, Sir
+Gervaise,” the countess said. “We at first consoled ourselves with the
+thought that you would speedily be ransomed; but when months passed
+by, and we heard that all the efforts of the grand master had failed to
+discover where you had been taken, I should have lost all hope had it
+not been that my cousin had returned after an even longer captivity
+among the Moors. I am glad to hear that you did not suffer so many
+hardships as he did.”
+
+“I am in no way to be pitied, Countess,” Gervaise said lightly. “I had a
+kind master for some months, and was treated as a friend rather than as
+a slave; afterwards, I had the good fortune to be made the head of
+the labourers at the buildings in the sultan's palace, and although I
+certainly worked with them, the labour was not greater than one could
+perform without distress, and I had naught to complain of as to my
+condition.”
+
+After talking for upwards of an hour, the countess told Caretto that she
+had several matters on which she needed his counsel, and retired with
+him to the next room of the suite opening from the apartment in which
+they had been sitting. For a minute or two the others sat silent, and
+then Claudia said,
+
+“You have changed much since I saw you last, Sir Gervaise. Then it
+seemed to me scarcely possible that you could have performed the feat of
+destroying the corsair fleet; now it is not so difficult to understand.”
+
+“I have widened out a bit, Lady Claudia. My moustache is really a
+moustache, and not a pretence at one; otherwise I don't feel that I have
+changed. The alteration in yourself is infinitely greater.”
+
+“I, too, have filled out,” she said, with a smile. “I was a thin girl
+then--all corners and angles. No, I don' t want any compliments, of
+which, to tell you the truth, I am heartily sick. And so,” she went
+on in a softer tone, “you have actually brought my gage home! Oh, Sir
+Gervaise,”--and her eyes filled with tears--“my cousin has told me! How
+could you have been so foolish as to remain voluntarily in captivity,
+that you might recover the gage a child had given you?”
+
+“Not a child, Lady Claudia. A girl not yet a woman, I admit; yet it
+was not given in the spirit of a young girl, but in that of an earnest
+woman. I had taken a vow never to part with it, as you had pledged
+yourself to bestow no similar favour upon any other knight. I was
+confident that you would keep your vow; and although in any case, as
+a true knight, I was bound to preserve your gift, still more so was I
+bound by the thought of the manner in which you had presented it to me.”
+
+“But I could not have blamed you--I should never have dreamt of blaming
+you,” she said earnestly, “for losing it as you did.”
+
+“I felt sure, Lady Claudia, that had it been absolutely beyond my power
+to regain it you would not have blamed me; but it was not beyond my
+power, and that being so had I been obliged to wait for ten years,
+instead of two, I would not have come back to you without it. Moreover,
+you must remember that I prized it beyond all things. I had often
+scoffed at knights of an order like ours wearing ladies' favours. I had
+always thought it absurd that we, pledged as we are, should thus declare
+ourselves admirers of one woman more than another. But this seemed to me
+a gage of another kind; it was too sacred to be shown or spoken of, and
+I only mentioned it to Caretto as he cross questioned me as to why I
+refused the offer of ransom; and should not have done so then, had he
+not been present when it was bestowed. I regarded it not as a lightly
+given favour, the result of a passing fancy by one who gave favours
+freely, but as a pledge of friendship and as a guerdon for what I had
+done, and therefore, more to be honoured than the gifts of a Republic
+freed from a passing danger. Had you then been what you are now, I might
+have been foolish enough to think of it in another light, regardless of
+the fact that you are a rich heiress of one of the noblest families in
+Italy, and I a knight with no possessions save my sword.”
+
+“Say not so, Sir Gervaise,” she said impetuously. “Are you not a knight
+on whom Genoa and Florence have bestowed their citizenship, whom the
+Holy Father himself has thanked, who has been honoured by Pisa, and
+whom Ferdinand of Naples has created a Knight of the Grand Cross of St.
+Michael, whom the grand master has singled out for praise among all the
+valiant knights of the Order of St. John, who, as my cousin tells me,
+saved him and the fort he commanded from capture, and who stood alone
+over the fallen grand master, surrounded by a crowd of foes. How can you
+speak of yourself as a simple knight?”
+
+Then she stopped, and sat silent for a minute, while a flush of colour
+mounted to her cheeks.
+
+“Give me my gage again, Sir Gervaise,” she said gently. In silence
+Gervaise removed it from his neck, wondering greatly what could be her
+intention. She turned it over and over in her hand.
+
+“Sir Knight,” she said, “this was of no great value in my eyes when I
+bestowed it upon you; it was a gage, and not a gift. Now it is to me of
+value beyond the richest gem on earth; it is a proof of the faith and
+loyalty of the knight I most esteem and honour, and so in giving it to
+you again, I part with it with a pang, for I have far greater reason to
+prize it than you can have. I gave it you before as a girl, proud that
+a knight who had gained such honour and applause should wear her favour,
+and without the thought that the trinket was a heart. I give it to you
+now as a woman, far prouder than before that you should wear her gage,
+and not blind to the meaning of the emblem.”
+
+Gervaise took her hand as she fastened it round his neck, and kissed
+it; then, still holding it, he said, “Do you know what you are doing,
+Claudia? You are raising hopes that I have never been presumptuous
+enough to cherish.”
+
+“I cannot help that,” she said softly. “There is assuredly no
+presumption in the hope.”
+
+He paused a moment.
+
+“You would not esteem me,” he said, holding both her hands now, “were
+I false to my vows. I will return to Rhodes tomorrow, and ask the grand
+master to forward to the Pope and endorse my petition, that I may be
+released from my vows to the Order. I cannot think that he or the Holy
+Father will refuse my request. Then, when I am free, I can tell you how
+I love and honour you, and how, as I have in the past devoted my life to
+the Order, so I will in the future devote it to your happiness.”
+
+The girl bowed her head.
+
+“'Tis right it should be so,” she said. “I have waited, feeling in my
+heart that the vow I had given would bind me for life, and I should be
+content to wait years longer if needs be. But I am bound by no vows, and
+can acknowledge that you have long been the lord of my life, and that
+so long as you wore the heart I had given you, so long would I listen to
+the wooing of no other.”
+
+“I fear that the Countess, your mother--” Gervaise began, but she
+interrupted him.
+
+“You need not fear,” she said. “My mother has long known, and knowing
+also that I am not given to change, has ceased to importune me to listen
+to other offers. Her sole objection was that you might never return from
+captivity. Now that you have come back with added honours, she will
+not only offer no objection, but will, I am sure, receive you gladly,
+especially as she knows that my cousin Sir Fabricius, for whom she has
+the greatest affection, holds you in such high esteem.”
+
+Six months later Gervaise again landed at Genoa, after having stayed
+at Rome for a few days on his way back. D'Aubusson had expressed no
+surprise at his return to Rhodes, or at the request he made.
+
+“Caretto prepared me for this,” he said, smiling, “when he asked me if
+you might accompany him to Genoa. The Order will be a loser, for you
+would assuredly have risen to the grand priorage of your langue some
+day. But we have no right to complain; you have done your duty and more,
+and I doubt not that should Mahomet again lay siege to Rhodes, we may
+count on your hastening here to aid us?”
+
+“That assuredly you may, sir. Should danger threaten, my sword will be
+as much at the service of the Order as if I were still a member of it.”
+
+“I by no means disapprove,” D'Aubusson went on, “of knights leaving us
+when they have performed their active service, for in civil life they
+sometimes have it in their power to render better service to the
+Order than if passing their lives in the quiet duties of a provincial
+commandery. It will be so in your case: the lady is a great heiress,
+and, as the possessor of wide lands, your influence in Northern Italy
+may be very valuable to us, and in case of need you will, like my
+brother De Monteuil, be able to bring a gathering of men-at-arms to our
+aid. Have no fear that the Pope will refuse to you a release from your
+vows. My recommendation alone would be sufficient; but as, moreover, he
+is himself under an obligation to you, he will do so without hesitation.
+Since you have been away, your friend Harcourt has been appointed a
+commander of a galley, and Sir John Boswell, being incapacitated by
+the grievous wounds he received during the siege, has accepted a rich
+commandery in England, and sailed but two days since to take up his
+charge. By the way, did you reply to those letters expressing your
+thanks and explaining your long silence?”
+
+“Yes, your Highness, I wrote the same evening you gave them to me.”
+
+“That is right. The money voted you by Florence will be useful to you
+now, and there is still a sum sent by your commandery owing to you by
+the treasury. I will give you an order for it. However rich an heiress a
+knight may win, 'tis pleasant for him to have money of his own; not that
+you will need it greatly, for, among the presents you have received, the
+jewels are valuable enough for a wedding gift to a princess.”
+
+Gervaise was well received at Rome, and the Pope, after reading the
+grand master's letter, and learning from him his reason for wishing
+to leave the Order, without hesitation granted him absolution from his
+vows. A few months later there was a grand wedding at the cathedral of
+Genoa, the doge and all the nobles of the Republic being present.
+
+Ralph Harcourt and nine other young knights had accompanied Gervaise
+from Rhodes by the permission, and indeed at the suggestion, of the
+grand master, who was anxious to show that Gervaise had his full
+approval and countenance in leaving the Order. Caretto, who had been
+appointed grand prior of Italy, had brought the knights from all the
+commanderies in the northern republics to do honour to the occasion,
+and the whole, in their rich armour and the mantles of the Order, made a
+distinguishing feature in the scene.
+
+The defeat of the Turks created such enthusiasm throughout Europe that
+when the grand prior of England laid before the king letters he had
+received from the grand master and Sir John Kendall, speaking in the
+highest terms of the various great services Gervaise had rendered to the
+Order, Edward granted his request that the act of attainder against Sir
+Thomas Tresham and his descendants should be reversed and the estates
+restored to Gervaise. The latter made, with his wife, occasional
+journeys to England, staying a few months on his estates in Kent; and as
+soon as his second son became old enough, he sent him to England to
+be educated, and settled the estate upon him. He himself had but few
+pleasant memories of England; he had spent indeed but a very short time
+there before he entered the house of the Order in Clerkenwell, and that
+time had been marked by constant anxiety, and concluded with the loss
+of his father. The great estates that were now his in Italy demanded his
+full attention, and, as one of the most powerful nobles of Genoa, he had
+come to take a prominent part in the affairs of the Republic.
+
+He was not called upon to fulfil his promise to aid in the defence of
+Rhodes, for the death of Mahomet just at the time when he was preparing
+a vast expedition against it, freed the Island for a long time from
+fear of an invasion. From time to time they received visits from Ralph
+Harcourt, who, after five years longer service at Rhodes, received a
+commandery in England. He held it a few years only, and then returned to
+the Island, where he obtained a high official appointment.
+
+In 1489 Sir John Boswell became bailiff of the English langue, and Sir
+Fabricius Caretto was in 1513 elected grand master of the Order, and
+held the office eight years, dying in 1521.
+
+When, in 1522, forty-two years after the first siege, Rhodes was again
+beleaguered, Gervaise, who had, on the death of the countess, become
+Count of Forli, raised a large body of men-at-arms, and sent them, under
+the command of his eldest son, to take part in the defence. His third
+son had, at the age of sixteen, entered the Order, and rose to high rank
+in it.
+
+The defence, though even more obstinate and desperate than the first,
+was attended with less success, for after inflicting enormous losses
+upon the great army, commanded by the Sultan Solyman himself, the town
+was forced to yield; for although the Grand Master L'Isle Adam, and
+most of his knights, would have preferred to bury themselves beneath
+the ruins rather than yield, they were deterred from doing so, by the
+knowledge that it would have entailed the massacre of the whole of
+the inhabitants, who had throughout the siege fought valiantly in the
+defence of the town. Solyman had suffered such enormous losses that he
+was glad to grant favourable conditions, and the knights sailed away
+from the city they had held so long and with such honour, and afterwards
+established themselves in Malta, where they erected another stronghold,
+which in the end proved an even more valuable bulwark to Christendom
+than Rhodes had been. There were none who assisted more generously and
+largely, by gifts of money, in the establishment of the Order at Malta
+than Gervaise. His wife, while she lived, was as eager to aid in the
+cause as he was himself, holding that it was to the Order she owed her
+husband. And of all their wide possessions there were none so valued by
+them both, as the little coral heart set in pearls that she, as a girl,
+had given him, and he had so faithfully brought back to her.
+
+
+THE END
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+End of Project Gutenberg's A Knight of the White Cross, by G.A. Henty
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK A KNIGHT OF THE WHITE CROSS ***
+
+***** This file should be named 4932-0.txt or 4932-0.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        http://www.gutenberg.org/4/9/3/4932/
+
+Produced by Martin Robb
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase “Project
+Gutenberg”), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+http://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  “Project Gutenberg” is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (“the Foundation”
+ or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase “Project Gutenberg” appears, or with which the phrase “Project
+Gutenberg” is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase “Project Gutenberg” associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+“Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, “Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.”
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+“Defects,” such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the “Right
+of Replacement or Refund” described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+http://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at http://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit http://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
+To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     http://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
diff --git a/4932-0.zip b/4932-0.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a384239
--- /dev/null
+++ b/4932-0.zip
diff --git a/4932-h.zip b/4932-h.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3e1a46e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/4932-h.zip
diff --git a/4932-h/4932-h.htm b/4932-h/4932-h.htm
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..83809dd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/4932-h/4932-h.htm
@@ -0,0 +1,15523 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+
+<!DOCTYPE html
+   PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN"
+   "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd" >
+
+<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" lang="en">
+  <head>
+    <title>
+      A Knight of the White Cross, by G.A. Henty
+    </title>
+    <style type="text/css" xml:space="preserve">
+
+    body { margin:5%; background:#faebd0; text-align:justify}
+    P { text-indent: 1em; margin-top: .25em; margin-bottom: .25em; }
+    H1,H2,H3,H4,H5,H6 { text-align: center; margin-left: 15%; margin-right: 15%; }
+    hr  { width: 50%; text-align: center;}
+    .foot { margin-left: 20%; margin-right: 20%; text-align: justify; text-indent: -3em; font-size: 90%; }
+    blockquote {font-size: 97%; font-style: italic; margin-left: 10%; margin-right: 10%;}
+    .mynote    {background-color: #DDE; color: #000; padding: .5em; margin-left: 10%; margin-right: 10%; font-family: sans-serif; font-size: 95%;}
+    .toc       { margin-left: 10%; margin-bottom: .75em;}
+    .toc2      { margin-left: 20%;}
+    div.fig    { display:block; margin:0 auto; text-align:center; }
+    div.middle { margin-left: 20%; margin-right: 20%; text-align: justify; }
+    .figleft   {float: left; margin-left: 0%; margin-right: 1%;}
+    .figright  {float: right; margin-right: 0%; margin-left: 1%;}
+    .pagenum   {display:inline; font-size: 70%; font-style:normal;
+               margin: 0; padding: 0; position: absolute; right: 1%;
+               text-align: right;}
+    pre        { font-style: italic; font-size: 90%; margin-left: 10%;}
+
+</style>
+  </head>
+  <body>
+<pre xml:space="preserve">
+
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of A Knight of the White Cross, by G.A. Henty
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: A Knight of the White Cross
+
+Author: G.A. Henty
+
+Release Date: April 13, 2009 [EBook #4932]
+Last Updated: March 11, 2018
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: UTF-8
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK A KNIGHT OF THE WHITE CROSS ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Martin Robb, and David Widger
+
+
+
+
+
+
+</pre>
+    <p>
+      <br /><br />
+    </p>
+    <h1>
+      A KNIGHT OF THE WHITE CROSS
+    </h1>
+    <p>
+      <br /><br />
+    </p>
+    <h2>
+      By G.A. Henty
+    </h2>
+    <p>
+      <br /> <br />
+    </p>
+    <hr />
+    <p>
+      <br /> <br />
+    </p>
+    <blockquote>
+      <p class="toc">
+        <big><b>CONTENTS</b></big>
+      </p>
+      <p>
+        <br /> <a href="#link2H_PREF"> PREFACE. </a><br /><br /> <a
+        href="#link2HCH0001"> CHAPTER I. </a>&nbsp;&nbsp;THE KING MAKER <br /><br />
+        <a href="#link2HCH0002"> CHAPTER II. </a>&nbsp;&nbsp;THE BATTLE OF
+        TEWKESBURY <br /><br /> <a href="#link2HCH0003"> CHAPTER III. </a>&nbsp;&nbsp;THE
+        GRAND MASTER'S PAGE <br /><br /> <a href="#link2HCH0004"> CHAPTER IV. </a>&nbsp;&nbsp;A
+        PROFESSED KNIGHT <br /><br /> <a href="#link2HCH0005"> CHAPTER V. </a>&nbsp;&nbsp;SCOURGES
+        OF THE SEA <br /><br /> <a href="#link2HCH0006"> CHAPTER VI. </a>&nbsp;&nbsp;KNIGHTED
+        <br /><br /> <a href="#link2HCH0007"> CHAPTER VII. </a>&nbsp;&nbsp;A FIRST
+        COMMAND <br /><br /> <a href="#link2HCH0008"> CHAPTER VIII. </a>&nbsp;&nbsp;AN
+        EVENING AT RHODES <br /><br /> <a href="#link2HCH0009"> CHAPTER IX. </a>&nbsp;&nbsp;WITH
+        THE GALLEY SLAVES <br /><br /> <a href="#link2HCH0010"> CHAPTER X. </a>&nbsp;&nbsp;A
+        PLOT DISCOVERED <br /><br /> <a href="#link2HCH0011"> CHAPTER XI. </a>&nbsp;&nbsp;IN
+        COMMAND OF A GALLEY <br /><br /> <a href="#link2HCH0012"> CHAPTER XII.
+        </a>&nbsp;&nbsp;THE BOY GALLEY <br /><br /> <a href="#link2HCH0013">
+        CHAPTER XIII. </a>&nbsp;&nbsp;THE FIRST PRIZES <br /><br /> <a
+        href="#link2HCH0014"> CHAPTER XIV. </a>&nbsp;&nbsp;THE CORSAIR FLEET
+        <br /><br /> <a href="#link2HCH0015"> CHAPTER XV. </a>&nbsp;&nbsp;A
+        SPLENDID EXPLOIT <br /><br /> <a href="#link2HCH0016"> CHAPTER XVI. </a>&nbsp;&nbsp;FESTIVITIES
+        <br /><br /> <a href="#link2HCH0017"> CHAPTER XVII. </a>&nbsp;&nbsp;CAPTURED
+        <br /><br /> <a href="#link2HCH0018"> CHAPTER XVIII. </a>&nbsp;&nbsp;A
+        KIND MASTER <br /><br /> <a href="#link2HCH0019"> CHAPTER XIX. </a>&nbsp;&nbsp;ESCAPE
+        <br /><br /> <a href="#link2HCH0020"> CHAPTER XX. </a>&nbsp;&nbsp;BELEAGUERED
+        <br /><br /> <a href="#link2HCH0021"> CHAPTER XXI. </a>&nbsp;&nbsp;THE
+        FORT OF ST. NICHOLAS <br /><br /> <a href="#link2HCH0022"> CHAPTER XXII.
+        </a>&nbsp;&nbsp;THE STRUGGLE AT THE BREACH <br /><br /> <a
+        href="#link2HCH0023"> CHAPTER XXIII. &nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</a>&nbsp;&nbsp;THE
+        REWARD OF VALOUR <br /><br />
+      </p>
+    </blockquote>
+    <p>
+      <br /> <br />
+    </p>
+    <hr />
+    <p>
+      <br /> <br /> <a name="link2H_PREF" id="link2H_PREF">
+      <!--  H2 anchor --> </a>
+    </p>
+    <h2>
+      PREFACE.
+    </h2>
+    <p>
+      MY DEAR LADS,
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The order of the Knights of St. John, which for some centuries played a
+      very important part in the great struggle between Christianity and
+      Mahomedanism, was, at its origin, a semi-religious body, its members
+      being, like other monks, bound by vows of obedience, chastity, and
+      poverty, and pledged to minister to the wants of the pilgrims who flocked
+      to the Holy Places, to receive them at their great Hospital&mdash;or guest
+      house&mdash;at Jerusalem, dedicated to St. John the Baptist, and to defend
+      them on their passage to and from the sea, against attack by Moslems. In a
+      comparatively short time the constitution of the order was changed, and
+      the Knights Hospitallers became, like the Templars, a great military Order
+      pledged to defend the Holy Sepulchre, and to war everywhere against the
+      Moslems. The Hospitallers bore a leading share in the struggle which
+      terminated in the triumph of the Moslems, and the capture by them of
+      Jerusalem. The Knights of St. John then established themselves at Acre,
+      but after a valiant defence of that fortress, removed to Crete, and
+      shortly afterwards to Rhodes. There they fortified the town, and withstood
+      two terrible sieges by the Turks. At the end of the second they obtained
+      honourable terms from Sultan Solyman, and retiring to Malta established
+      themselves there in an even stronger fortress than that of Rhodes, and
+      repulsed all the efforts of the Turks to dispossess them. The Order was
+      the great bulwark of Christendom against the invasion of the Turks, and
+      the tale of their long struggle is one of absorbing interest, and of the
+      many eventful episodes none is more full of incident and excitement than
+      the first siege of Rhodes, which I have chosen for the subject of my
+      story.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Yours truly, G. A. Henty
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      <a name="link2HCH0001" id="link2HCH0001">
+      <!--  H2 anchor --> </a>
+    </p>
+    <div style="height: 4em;">
+      <br /><br /><br /><br />
+    </div>
+    <h2>
+      CHAPTER I The King Maker
+    </h2>
+    <p>
+      A stately lady was looking out of the window of an apartment in the Royal
+      Chateau of Amboise, in the month of June, 1470. She was still handsome,
+      though many years of anxiety, misfortune, and trouble, had left their
+      traces on her face. In the room behind her, a knight was talking to a lady
+      sitting at a tambour frame; a lad of seventeen was standing at another
+      window stroking a hawk that sat on his wrist, while a boy of nine was
+      seated at a table examining the pages of an illuminated missal.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;What will come of it, Eleanor?&rdquo; the lady at the window said, turning
+      suddenly and impatiently from it. &ldquo;It seems past belief that I am to meet
+      as a friend this haughty earl, who has for fifteen years been the
+      bitterest enemy of my House. It appears almost impossible.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;'Tis strange indeed, my Queen; but so many strange things have befallen
+      your Majesty that you should be the last to wonder at this. At any rate,
+      as you said but yesterday, naught but good can come of it. He has done his
+      worst against you, and one can scarce doubt that if he chooses he has
+      power to do as much good for you, as in past times he has done you evil.
+      'Tis certain that his coming here shows he is in earnest, for his
+      presence,&mdash;which is sure sooner or later to come to the ears of the
+      Usurper,&mdash;will cause him to fall into the deepest disgrace.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;And yet it seemed,&rdquo; the queen said, &ldquo;that by marrying his daughter to
+      Clarence he had bound himself more firmly than ever to the side of York.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Ay, madam,&rdquo; the knight said. &ldquo;But Clarence himself is said to be alike
+      unprincipled and ambitious, and it may well be that Warwick intended to
+      set him up against Edward; had he not done so, such an alliance would not
+      necessarily strengthen his position at Court.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Methinks your supposition is the true one, Sir Thomas,&rdquo; the queen said.
+      &ldquo;Edward cares not sufficiently for his brother to bestow much favour upon
+      the father of the prince's wife. Thus, he would gain but little by the
+      marriage unless he were to place Clarence on the throne. Then he would
+      again become the real ruler of England, as he was until Edward married
+      Elizabeth Woodville, and the House of Rivers rose to the first place in
+      the royal favour, and eclipsed the Star of Warwick. It is no wonder the
+      proud Earl chafes under the ingratitude of the man who owes his throne to
+      him, and that he is ready to dare everything so that he can but prove to
+      him that he is not to be slighted with impunity. But why come to me, when
+      he has Clarence as his puppet?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;He may have convinced himself, madam, that Clarence is even less to be
+      trusted than Edward, or he may perceive that but few of the Yorkists would
+      follow him were he to declare against the Usurper, while assuredly your
+      adherents would stand aloof altogether from such a struggle. Powerful as
+      he is, Warwick could not alone withstand the united forces of all the
+      nobles pledged to the support of the House of York. Thence, as I take it,
+      does it happen that he has resolved to throw in his lot with Lancaster, if
+      your Majesty will but forgive the evil he has done your House and accept
+      him as your ally. No doubt he will have terms to make and conditions to
+      lay down.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;He may make what conditions he chooses,&rdquo; Queen Margaret said
+      passionately, &ldquo;so that he does but aid me to take vengeance on that false
+      traitor; to place my husband again on the throne; and to obtain for my son
+      his rightful heritage.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      As she spoke a trumpet sounded in the courtyard below.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;He has come,&rdquo; she exclaimed. &ldquo;Once again, after years of misery and
+      humiliation, I can hope.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;We had best retire, madam,&rdquo; Sir Thomas Tresham said. &ldquo;He will speak more
+      freely to your Majesty if there are no witnesses. Come, Gervaise, it is
+      time that you practised your exercises.&rdquo; And Sir Thomas, with his wife and
+      child, quitted the room, leaving Queen Margaret with her son to meet the
+      man who had been the bitterest foe of her House, the author of her direst
+      misfortunes.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      For two hours the Earl of Warwick was closeted with the queen; then he
+      took horse and rode away. As soon as he did so, a servant informed Sir
+      Thomas and his wife that the queen desired their presence. Margaret was
+      standing radiant when they entered.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Congratulate me, my friends,&rdquo; she said. &ldquo;The Star of Lancaster has risen
+      again. Warwick has placed all his power and influence at our disposal. We
+      have both forgiven all the past: I the countless injuries he has inflicted
+      on my House, he the execution of his father and so many of his friends. We
+      have both laid aside all our grievances, and we stand united by our hate
+      for Edward. There is but one condition, and this I accepted gladly&mdash;namely,
+      that my son should marry his daughter Anne. This will be another bond
+      between us; and by all reports Anne is a charming young lady. Edward has
+      gladly agreed to the match; he could make no alliance, even with the
+      proudest princess in Europe, which would so aid him, and so strengthen his
+      throne.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;God grant that your hopes may be fulfilled, madam,&rdquo; the knight said
+      earnestly, &ldquo;and that peace may be given to our distracted country! The
+      Usurper has rendered himself unpopular by his extravagance and by the
+      exactions of his tax collectors, and I believe that England will gladly
+      welcome the return of its lawful king to power. When does Warwick propose
+      to begin?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;He will at once get a fleet together. Louis, who has privately brought
+      about this meeting, will of course throw no impediment in his way; but, on
+      the other hand, the Duke of Burgundy will do all in his power to thwart
+      the enterprise, and will, as soon as he learns of it, warn Edward. I feel
+      new life in me, Eleanor. After fretting powerless for years, I seem to be
+      a different woman now that there is a prospect of action. I am rejoiced at
+      the thought that at last I shall be able to reward those who have ventured
+      and suffered so much in the cause of Lancaster.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;My hope is, madam, that this enterprise will be the final one,&mdash;that,
+      once successful, our dear land will be no longer deluged with blood, and
+      that never again shall I be forced to draw my sword against my
+      countrymen.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;'Tis a good and pious wish, Sir Thomas, and heartily do I join in it. My
+      married life has been one long round of trouble, and none more than I have
+      cause to wish for peace.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;There is the more hope for it, madam, that these wars have greatly
+      diminished the number of powerful barons. It is they who are the authors
+      of this struggle; their rivalries and their ambitions are the ruin of
+      England. Save for their retainers there would be no armies to place in the
+      field; the mass of people stand aloof altogether, desiring only to live in
+      peace and quiet. 'Tis the same here in France; 'tis the powerful vassals
+      of the king that are ever causing trouble.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;'Tis so indeed, Sir Thomas. But without his feudal lords how could a king
+      place an army in the field, when his dominions were threatened by a
+      powerful neighbour?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Then it would be the people's business to fight, madam, and I doubt not
+      that they would do so in defence of their hearths and homes. Besides, the
+      neighbour would no longer have the power of invasion were he also without
+      great vassals. These great barons stand between the king and his subjects;
+      and a monarch would be a king indeed were he able to rule without their
+      constant dictation, and undisturbed by their rivalry and ambitions.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;That would be a good time indeed, Sir Thomas,&rdquo; the queen said, with a
+      smile; &ldquo;but methinks there is but little chance of its coming about, for
+      at present it seems to me that the vassals are better able to make or
+      unmake kings, than kings are able to deprive the great vassals of power;
+      and never since Norman William set foot in England were they more powerful
+      than they are at present. What does my chance of recovering our throne
+      rest upon? Not upon our right, but on the quarrel between Warwick and the
+      House of Rivers. We are but puppets that the great lords play against each
+      other. Did it depend upon my will, it should be as you say; I would crush
+      them all at a blow. Then only should I feel really a queen. But that is
+      but a dream that can never be carried out.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Not in our time, madam. But perhaps it may come sooner than we expect;
+      and this long war, which has destroyed many great families and weakened
+      others, may greatly hasten its arrival. I presume until Warwick is ready
+      to move naught will be done, your Majesty?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;That is not settled yet. Warwick spoke somewhat of causing a rising in
+      the north before he set sail, so that a portion at least of Edward's power
+      may be up there when we make our landing.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It would be a prudent step, madam. If we can but gain possession of
+      London, the matter would be half finished. The citizens are ever ready to
+      take sides with those whom they regard as likely to win, and just as they
+      shout at present 'Long live King Edward!' so would they shout 'Long live
+      King Henry!' did you enter the town.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;This may perhaps change the thought that you have entertained, Sir
+      Thomas, of making your son a Knight of St. John.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I have not thought the matter over, madam. If there were quiet in the
+      land I should, were it not for my vow, be well content that he should
+      settle down in peace at my old hall; but if I see that there is still
+      trouble and bloodshed ahead, I would in any case far rather that he should
+      enter the Order, and spend his life in fighting the infidel than in strife
+      with Englishmen. My good friend, the Grand Prior of the Order in England,
+      has promised that he will take him as his page, and at any rate in the
+      House of St. John's he will pass his youth in security whatsoever fate may
+      befall me. The child himself already bids fair to do honour to our name,
+      and to become a worthy member of the Order. He is fond of study, and under
+      my daily tuition is making good progress in the use of his weapons.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;That is he,&rdquo; the prince said, speaking for the first time, &ldquo;It was but
+      yesterday in the great hall downstairs he stood up with blunted swords
+      against young Victor de Paulliac, who is nigh three years his senior. It
+      was amusing to see how the little knaves fought against each other; and by
+      my faith Gervaise held his own staunchly, in spite of Victor's superior
+      height and weight. If he join the Order, Sir Thomas, I warrant me he will
+      cleave many an infidel's skull, and will do honour to the langue of
+      England.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I hope so, prince,&rdquo; the knight said gravely. &ldquo;The Moslems ever gain in
+      power, and it may well be that the Knights of St. John will be hardly
+      pressed to hold their own. If the boy joins them it will be my wish that
+      he shall as early as possible repair to Rhodes. I do not wish him to
+      become one of the drones who live in sloth at their commanderies in
+      England, and take no part in the noble struggle of the Order with the
+      Moslem host, who have captured Constantinople and now threaten all Europe.
+      We were childless some years after our marriage, and Eleanor and I vowed
+      that were a son born to us he should join the Order of the White Cross,
+      and dedicate his life to the defence of Christian Europe against the
+      infidel. Our prayers for a son were granted, and Gervaise will enter the
+      Order as soon as his age will permit him. That is why I rejoice at the
+      grand prior's offer to take him as his page, for he will dwell in the
+      hospital safely until old enough to take the first steps towards becoming
+      a knight of the Order.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I would that I had been born the son of a baron like yourself,&rdquo; the
+      prince said earnestly, &ldquo;and that I were free to choose my own career.
+      Assuredly in that case I too would have joined the noble Order and have
+      spent my life in fighting in so grand a cause, free from all the quarrels
+      and disputes and enmities that rend England. Even should I some day gain a
+      throne, surely my lot is not to be envied. Yet, as I have been born to the
+      rank, I must try for it, and I trust to do so worthily and bravely. But
+      who can say what the end will be? Warwick has ever been our foe, and
+      though my royal mother may use him in order to free my father, and place
+      him on the throne, she must know well enough that he but uses us for his
+      own ends alone, and that he will ever stand beside the throne and be the
+      real ruler of England.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;For a time, Edward,&rdquo; the queen broke in. &ldquo;We have shown that we can wait,
+      and now it seems that our great hope is likely to be fulfilled. After
+      that, the rest will be easy. There are other nobles, well nigh as powerful
+      as he, who look with jealousy upon the way in which he lords it, and be
+      assured that they will look with a still less friendly eye upon him when
+      he stands, as you say, beside the throne, once your father is again seated
+      there. We can afford to bide our time, and assuredly it will not be long
+      before a party is formed against Warwick. Until then we must bear
+      everything. Our interests are the same. If he is content to remain a prop
+      to the throne, and not to eclipse it, the memory of the past will not
+      stand between us, and I shall regard him as the weapon that has beaten
+      down the House of York and restored us to our own, and shall give him my
+      confidence and friendship. If, on the other hand, he assumes too much, and
+      tries to lord it over us, I shall seek other support and gather a party
+      which even he will be unable successfully to withstand. I should have
+      thought, Edward, that you would be even more glad than I that this long
+      time of weary waiting for action is over, and that once again the banner
+      of Lancaster will be spread to the winds.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I shall be that, mother. Rather would I meet death in the field than live
+      cooped up here, a pensioner of France. But I own that I should feel more
+      joy at the prospect if the people of England had declared in our favour,
+      instead of its being Warwick&mdash;whom you have always taught me to fear
+      and hate&mdash;who thus comes to offer to place my father again on the
+      throne, and whose goodwill towards us is simply the result of pique and
+      displeasure because he is no longer first in the favour of Edward. It does
+      not seem to me that a throne won by the aid of a traitor can be a stable
+      one.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;You are a foolish boy,&rdquo; the queen said angrily. &ldquo;Do you not see that by
+      marrying Warwick's daughter you will attach him firmly to us?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Marriages do not count for much, mother. Another of Warwick's daughters
+      married Clarence, Edward's brother, and yet he purposes to dethrone
+      Edward.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The queen gave an angry gesture and said, &ldquo;You have my permission to
+      retire, Edward. I am in no mood to listen to auguries of evil at the
+      present moment.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The prince hesitated for a moment as if about to speak, but with an effort
+      controlled himself, and bowing deeply to his mother, left the room.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Edward is in a perverse humour,&rdquo; the queen said in a tone of much
+      vexation to Sir Thomas Tresham, when Gervaise had left the room. &ldquo;However,
+      I know he will bear himself well when the hour of trial comes.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;That I can warrant he will, madam; he has a noble character, frank and
+      fearless, and yet thoughtful beyond his years. He will make, I believe, a
+      noble king, and may well gather round him all parties in the state. But
+      your Majesty must make excuses for his humour. Young people are strong in
+      their likes and dislikes. He has never heard you speak aught but ill of
+      Warwick, and he knows how much harm the Earl has done to your House. The
+      question of expediency does not weigh with the young as with their elders.
+      While you see how great are the benefits that will accrue from an alliance
+      with Warwick, and are ready to lay aside the hatred of years and to forget
+      the wrongs you have suffered, the young prince is unable so quickly to
+      forget that enmity against the Earl that he has learnt from you.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;You are right, Sir Thomas, and I cannot blame Edward that he is unable,
+      as I am, to forget the past. What steps would you advise that I myself
+      should take? Shall I remain passive here, or shall I do what I can to
+      rouse our partisans in England?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I should say the latter, madam. Of course it will not do to trust to
+      letters, for were one of these to fall into the wrong hands it might cause
+      the ruin of Warwick's expedition; but I should say that a cautious message
+      sent by word of mouth to some of our old adherents would be of great use.
+      I myself will, if your Majesty chooses to entrust me with the mission,
+      undertake to carry it out. I should take ship and land in the west, and
+      would travel in the guise of a simple country gentleman, and call upon
+      your adherents in all the western counties. It would be needful first to
+      make out a list of the nobles who have shown themselves devoted to your
+      cause, and I should bid these hold themselves and their retainers in
+      readiness to take the field suddenly. I should say no word of Warwick, but
+      merely hint that you will not land alone, but with a powerful array, and
+      that all the chances are in your favour.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;But it would be a dangerous mission, Sir Thomas.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Not greatly so, madam. My own estates lie in Sussex, and there would be
+      but little chance of my recognition, save by your own adherents, who may
+      have seen me among the leaders of your troops in battle; and even that is
+      improbable. At present Edward deems himself so securely seated on the
+      throne that men can travel hither and thither through the country without
+      being questioned, and the Lancastrians live quietly with the Yorkists.
+      Unless I were so unfortunate as to meet a Yorkist noble who knew that I
+      was a banished man and one who had the honour of being in your Majesty's
+      confidence, I do not think that any danger could possibly arise. What say
+      you, wife?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I cannot think that there is no danger,&rdquo; Lady Tresham said; &ldquo;but even so
+      I would not say a word to hinder you from doing service to the cause. I
+      know of no one else who could perform the mission. You have left my side
+      to go into battle before now, and I cannot think that the danger of such
+      an expedition can be as great as that which you would undergo in the
+      field. Therefore, my dear lord, I would say no word now to stay you.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      She spoke bravely and unfalteringly, but her face had paled when Sir
+      Thomas first made the proposal, and the colour had not yet come back to
+      her cheeks.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Bravely spoken, dame,&rdquo; the queen said warmly. &ldquo;Well, Sir Thomas, I accept
+      your offer, and trust that you will not be long separated from your wife
+      and son, who will of course journey with me when I go to England, where
+      doubtless you will be able to rejoin us a few days after we land. Now let
+      us talk over the noblemen and gentlemen in the west, upon whom we can
+      rely, if not to join our banner as soon as it is spread, at least to say
+      no word that will betray you.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Two days later Sir Thomas Tresham started on his journey, while the queen
+      remained at Amboise eagerly awaiting the news that Warwick had collected a
+      fleet, and was ready to set sail. Up to this point the Duke of Clarence
+      had sided with Warwick against his brother, and had passed over with him
+      to France, believing, no doubt, that if the Earl should succeed in
+      dethroning Edward, he intended to place him, his son-in-law, upon the
+      throne. He was rudely awakened from this delusion by Charles of Burgundy,
+      who, being in all but open rebellion against his suzerain, the King of
+      France, kept himself intimately acquainted with all that was going on. He
+      despatched a female emissary to Clarence to inform him of the league
+      Warwick had made with the Lancastrians, and the intended marriage between
+      his daughter Anne and the young prince; imploring him to be reconciled
+      with his brother and to break off his alliance with the Earl, who was on
+      the point of waging war against the House of York.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Clarence took the advice, and went over to England, where he made his
+      peace with Edward, the more easily because the king, who was entirely
+      given up to pleasure, treated with contempt the warnings the Duke of
+      Burgundy sent him of the intended invasion by Warwick. And yet a moment's
+      serious reflection should have shown him that his position was precarious.
+      The crushing exactions of the tax gatherers, in order to provide the means
+      for Edward's lavish expenditure, had already caused very serious
+      insurrections in various parts of the country, and his unpopularity was
+      deep and general. In one of these risings the royal troops had suffered a
+      crushing defeat. The Earl Rivers, the father, and Sir John Woodville, one
+      of the brothers, of the queen had, with the Earl of Devon, been captured
+      by the rebels, and the three had been beheaded, and the throne had only
+      been saved by the intervention of Warwick.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Thus, then, Edward had every reason for fearing the result should the Earl
+      appear in arms against him. He took, however, no measures whatever to
+      prepare for the coming storm, and although the Duke of Burgundy despatched
+      a fleet to blockade Harfleur, where Warwick was fitting out his
+      expedition, and actually sent the name of the port at which the Earl
+      intended to land if his fleet managed to escape from Harfleur, Edward
+      continued carelessly to spend his time in pleasure and dissipation,
+      bestowing his full confidence upon the Archbishop of York and the Marquis
+      of Montague, both brothers of the Earl of Warwick.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The elements favoured his enemies, for early in September the Duke of
+      Burgundy's Fleet, off Harfleur, was dispersed by a storm, and Warwick, as
+      soon as the gale abated, set sail, and on the 13th landed on the
+      Devonshire coast. His force was a considerable one, for the French king
+      had furnished him both with money and men; on effecting his landing he
+      found no army assembled to oppose him. A few hours after his
+      disembarkation, he was joined by Sir Thomas Tresham, who gave him the good
+      news that the whole of the west was ready to rise, and that in a few days
+      all the great landowners would join him with their retainers. This turned
+      out to be the case, and Warwick, with a great array, marched eastward.
+      Kent had already risen, and London declared for King Henry. Warwick,
+      therefore, instead of marching thither, moved towards Lincolnshire, where
+      Edward was with his army, having gone north to repress an insurrection
+      that had broken out there at the instigation of Warwick.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Lord Montague now threw off the mask, and declared for King Henry. Most of
+      the soldiers followed him, and Edward, finding it hopeless to oppose
+      Warwick's force, which was now within a short march of him, took ship with
+      a few friends who remained faithful, and sailed for Holland. Warwick
+      returned to London, where he took King Henry from the dungeon in the
+      Tower, into which he himself had, five years before, thrown him, and
+      proclaimed him king.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      On the day that this took place Dame Tresham arrived in London with her
+      son. The queen had found that she could not for the present cross, as she
+      was waiting for a large French force which was to accompany her. As it was
+      uncertain how long the delay might last, she counselled her friend to join
+      her husband. The revolution had been accomplished without the loss of a
+      single life, with the exception of that of the Earl of Worcester, who was
+      hated for his cruelty by the people. Edward's principal friends took
+      refuge in various religious houses. The queen, her three daughters, and
+      her mother, fled to the sanctuary at Westminster. All these were left
+      unmolested, nor was any step taken against the other adherents of the
+      House of York. Warwick was now virtually King of England. The king, whose
+      intellect had always been weak, was now almost an imbecile, and Margaret
+      of Anjou was still detained in France. Sir Thomas Tresham went down to his
+      estates in Kent, and there lived quietly for some months. The Duke of
+      Clarence had joined Warwick as soon as he saw that his brother's cause was
+      lost; and as the Duke had no knowledge of his changed feelings towards
+      him, he was heartily welcomed. An act of settlement was passed by
+      Parliament entailing the Crown on Henry's son Edward, Prince of Wales, and
+      in case of that prince's death without issue, on the Duke of Clarence. On
+      the 12th of March following (1471) Edward suddenly appeared with a fleet
+      with which he had been secretly supplied by the Duke of Burgundy, and,
+      sailing north, landed in the Humber. He found the northern population by
+      no means disposed to aid him, but upon his taking a solemn oath that he
+      had no designs whatever upon the throne, but simply claimed to be restored
+      to his rights and dignities as Duke of York, he was joined by a sufficient
+      force to enable him to cross the Trent. As he marched south his army
+      speedily swelled, and he was joined by many great lords.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Warwick had summoned Henry's adherents to the field, and marched north to
+      meet him. When the armies approached each other, the Duke of Clarence, who
+      commanded a portion of Henry's army, went over with his whole force to
+      Edward, and Warwick, being no longer in a position to give battle, was
+      obliged to draw off and allow Edward to march unopposed towards London.
+      The citizens, with their usual fickleness, received him with the same
+      outburst of enthusiasm with which, five months before, they had greeted
+      the entry of Warwick. The unfortunate King Henry was again thrown into his
+      dungeon in the Tower, and Edward found himself once more King of England.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Sir Thomas Tresham, as soon as he heard of the landing of Edward, had
+      hastened up to London. In his uncertainty how matters would go, he brought
+      his wife and son up with him, and left them in lodgings, while he marched
+      north with Warwick. As soon as the defection of Clarence opened the road
+      to London, he left the Earl, promising to return in a few days, and rode
+      to town, arriving there two days before Edward's entry, and, purchasing
+      another horse, took his wife and son down to St. Albans, where leaving
+      them, he rejoined Warwick. In a few days the latter had gathered
+      sufficient forces to enable him to risk the fortunes of a battle, and,
+      marching south, he encamped with his army on the common north of Barnet.
+      Edward had come out to meet him, and the two armies slept on Easter Eve
+      within two miles of each other.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Late in the evening Clarence sent a messenger to the Earl, offering to
+      mediate, but the offer was indignantly refused by Warwick.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      In the darkness, neither party was aware of the other's precise position.
+      Warwick was much stronger than the king in artillery, and had placed it on
+      his right wing. The king, in his ignorance of the enemy's position, had
+      placed his troops considerably more to the right than those of Warwick's
+      army. The latter, believing that Edward's line was facing his, kept up a
+      heavy cannonade all night upon where he supposed Edward's left to be&mdash;a
+      cannonade which was thus entirely futile.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      In the morning (April 14th) a heavy mist covered the country and prevented
+      either force from seeing the other's dispositions. Warwick took the
+      command of his left wing, having with him the Duke of Exeter. Somerset was
+      in command of his centre, and Montague and Oxford of his right.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Edward placed himself in the centre of his array, the Duke of Gloucester
+      commanded on his right, and Lord Hastings on his left.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Desirous, from his inferiority in artillery, to fight out the battle hand
+      to hand, Edward, at six o'clock in the morning, ordered his trumpets to
+      blow, and, after firing a few shots, advanced through the mist to attack
+      the enemy. His misconception as to Warwick's position, which had saved his
+      troops from the effects of the cannonade during the night, was now
+      disadvantageous to him, for the Earl's right so greatly outflanked his
+      left that when they came into contact Hastings found himself nearly
+      surrounded by a vastly superior force. His wing fought valiantly, but was
+      at length broken by Oxford's superior numbers, and driven out of the
+      field. The mist prevented the rest of the armies from knowing what had
+      happened on the king's left. Edward himself led the charge on Warwick's
+      centre, and having his best troops under his command, pressed forward with
+      such force and vehemence that he pierced Somerset's lines and threw them
+      into confusion.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Just as Warwick's right had outflanked the king's left, so his own left
+      was outflanked by Gloucester. Warwick's troops fought with great bravery,
+      and, in spite of the disaster to his centre, were holding their ground
+      until Oxford, returning from his pursuit of the king's left, came back
+      through the mist. The king's emblem was a sun, that of Oxford a star with
+      streaming rays. In the dim light this was mistaken by Warwick's men for
+      the king's device, and believing that Oxford was far away on the right,
+      they received him with a discharge of arrows. This was at once returned,
+      and a conflict took place. At last the mistake was discovered, but the
+      confusion caused was irreparable. Warwick and Oxford each suspected the
+      other of treachery, and the king's right still pressing on, the confusion
+      increased, and the battle, which had been so nearly won by the Earl, soon
+      became a complete defeat, and by ten in the morning Warwick's army was in
+      full flight.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Accounts differ as to the strength of the forces engaged, but it is
+      probable that there was no great inequality, and that each party brought
+      some fifteen thousand men into the field. The number of slain is also very
+      uncertain, some historians placing the total at ten thousand, others as
+      low as one thousand; but from the number of nobles who fell, the former
+      computation is probably nearest to the truth. Warwick, his brother
+      Montague, and many other nobles and gentlemen, were killed, the only great
+      nobles on his side who escaped being the Earls of Somerset and Oxford;
+      many were also killed on Edward's side, and the slaughter among the
+      ordinary fighting men was greater than usual.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Hitherto in the battles that had been fought during the civil war; while
+      the leaders taken on the field were frequently executed, the common
+      soldiers were permitted to return to their homes, as they had only been
+      acting under the orders of their feudal superiors, and were not considered
+      responsible for their acts. At Barnet, however, Edward, smarting from the
+      humiliation he had suffered by his enforced flight from England, owing to
+      the whole country declaring for his rival, gave orders that no quarter was
+      to be granted. It was an anxious day at St. Albans, where many ladies
+      whose husbands were with Warwick's army had, like Dame Tresham, taken up
+      their quarters. It was but a few miles from the field of battle. In the
+      event of victory they could at once join their husbands, while in case of
+      defeat they could take refuge in the sanctuary of the abbey. Messengers
+      the night before had brought the news that the battle would begin at the
+      dawn of day, and with intense anxiety they waited for the news.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Dame Tresham and her son attended early mass at the abbey, and had
+      returned to their lodgings, when Sir Thomas rode up at full speed. His
+      armour was dinted and his plume shorn away from his helmet. As he entered
+      the house he was met by his wife, who had run downstairs as she heard his
+      horse stop at the door. A glance at his face was sufficient to tell the
+      news.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;We have lost the day,&rdquo; he said. &ldquo;Warwick and Montague are both killed.
+      All is lost here for the present. Which will you do, my love, ride with me
+      to the West, where Queen Margaret will speedily land, if indeed she has
+      not landed already, or take sanctuary here with the boy?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I will go with you,&rdquo; she said. &ldquo;I would vastly rather do so.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I will tell you more on the road,&rdquo; he said. &ldquo;There is no time to be lost
+      now.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The woman of the house was called, and at once set her son to saddle the
+      other horse and to give a feed to that of the knight. Dame Tresham busied
+      herself with packing the saddlebags while her husband partook of a hasty
+      meal; and ten minutes after his arrival they set off, Gervaise riding
+      behind his father, while the latter led the horse on which his wife was
+      mounted. A thick mist hung over the country.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;This mist told against us in the battle, wife, for as we advanced our
+      forces fell into confusion, and more than once friend attacked friend,
+      believing that he was an enemy. However, it has proved an advantage to us
+      now, for it has enabled great numbers to escape who might otherwise have
+      been followed and cut down. I was very fortunate. I had left my horse at a
+      little farmhouse two miles in the rear of our camp, and in the fog had but
+      small hope of finding it; but soon after leaving the battlefield, I came
+      upon a rustic hurrying in the same direction as myself, and upon
+      questioning him it turned out that he was a hand on the very farm at which
+      I had left the horse. He had, with two or three others, stolen out after
+      midnight to see the battle, and was now making his way home again, having
+      seen indeed but little, but having learned from fugitives that we had been
+      defeated. He guided me to the farmhouse, which otherwise I should
+      assuredly never have reached. His master was favourable to our party, and
+      let the man take one of the cart horses, on which he rode as my guide
+      until he had placed me upon the high road to St. Albans, and I was then
+      able to gallop on at full speed.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;And Warwick and his brother Montague are both killed?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Both. The great Earl will make and unmake no more kings. He has been a
+      curse to England, with his boundless ambition, his vast possessions, and
+      his readiness to change sides and to embroil the country in civil war for
+      purely personal ends. The great nobles are a curse to the country, wife.
+      They are, it is true, a check upon kingly ill doing and oppression; but
+      were they, with their great arrays of retainers and feudal followers, out
+      of the way, methinks that the citizens and yeomen would be able to hold
+      their own against any king.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Was the battle a hard fought one?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I know but little of what passed, except near the standard of Warwick
+      himself. There the fighting was fierce indeed, for it was against the Earl
+      that the king finally directed his chief onslaught. Doubtless he was
+      actuated both by a deep personal resentment against the Earl for the part
+      he had played and the humiliation he had inflicted upon him, and also by
+      the knowledge that a defeat of Warwick personally would be the heaviest
+      blow that he could inflict upon the cause of Lancaster.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Then do you think the cause is lost?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I say not that. Pembroke has a strong force in Wales, and if the West
+      rises, and Queen Margaret on landing can join him, we may yet prevail; but
+      I fear that the news of the field of Barnet will deter many from joining
+      us. Men may risk lands and lives for a cause which seems to offer a fair
+      prospect of success, but they can hardly be blamed for holding back when
+      they see that the chances are all against them. Moreover, as a
+      Frenchwoman, it cannot be denied that Margaret has never been popular in
+      England, and her arrival here, aided by French gold and surrounded by
+      Frenchmen, will tell against her with the country people. I went as far as
+      I could on the day before I left Amboise, urging her on no account to come
+      hither until matters were settled. It would have been infinitely better
+      had the young prince come alone, and landed in the West without a single
+      follower. The people would have admired his trust in them, and would, I am
+      sure, have gathered strongly round his banner. However, we must still hope
+      for the best. Fortune was against us today: it may be with us next time we
+      give battle. And with parties so equally divided throughout the country a
+      signal victory would bring such vast numbers to our banners that Edward
+      would again find it necessary to cross the seas.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      <a name="link2HCH0002" id="link2HCH0002">
+      <!--  H2 anchor --> </a>
+    </p>
+    <div style="height: 4em;">
+      <br /><br /><br /><br />
+    </div>
+    <h2>
+      CHAPTER II THE BATTLE OF TEWKESBURY
+    </h2>
+    <p>
+      Riding fast, Sir Thomas Tresham crossed the Thames at Reading before any
+      news of the battle of Barnet had arrived there. On the third day after
+      leaving St. Albans he reached Westbury, and there heard that the news had
+      been received of the queen's landing at Plymouth on the very day on which
+      her friends had been defeated at Barnet, and that she had already been
+      joined by the Duke of Somerset, the Earl of Devon, and others, and that
+      Exeter had been named as the point of rendezvous for her friends. As the
+      Lancastrians were in the majority in Wiltshire and Somerset, there was no
+      longer any fear of arrest by partisans of York, and after resting for a
+      day Sir Thomas Tresham rode quietly on to Exeter, where the queen had
+      already arrived.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The battle of Barnet had not, in reality, greatly weakened the Lancastrian
+      cause. The Earl of Warwick was so detested by the adherents of the Red
+      Rose that comparatively few of them had joined him, and the fight was
+      rather between the two sections of Yorkists than between York and
+      Lancaster. The Earl's death had broken up his party, and York and
+      Lancaster were now face to face with each other, without his disturbing
+      influence on either side. Among those who had joined the queen was
+      Tresham's great friend, the Grand Prior of St. John's. Sir Thomas took up
+      his lodgings in the house where he had established himself. The queen was
+      greatly pleased at the arrival of Dame Tresham, and at her earnest request
+      the latter shared her apartments, while Gervaise remained with his father.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;So this is the young Knight of St. John,&rdquo; the prior said, on the evening
+      of the arrival of Sir Thomas. &ldquo;I would, Tresham, that I were at present at
+      Rhodes, doing battle with the infidels, rather than engaged in this
+      warfare against Englishmen and fellow Christians.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I can well understand that,&rdquo; Sir Thomas said.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I could not hold aloof here, Tresham. The vows of our Order by no means
+      hinder us from taking part in the affairs of our own country. The rule of
+      the Order is indeed against it, but the rule is constantly broken. Were it
+      otherwise there could be no commanderies in this or any other country; we
+      should have, on entering the Order, to abandon our nationality, and to
+      form part of one community in the East. The Order is true to its oaths. We
+      cannot defend the Holy Sepulchre, for that, for the present, is hopelessly
+      lost; but we can and do wage war with the infidel. For this funds are
+      necessary as well as swords, and our commanderies throughout Europe supply
+      the funds by which the struggle is maintained, and, when it is needed,
+      send out contingents to help those fighting in the East. It was from the
+      neglect of this cardinal point that the Templars fell. Their commanderies
+      amassed wealth and wide possessions, but unlike us the knights abstained
+      altogether from fulfilling their vows, and ceased to resist the infidel.
+      Therefore they were suppressed, and, with the general approval of Europe,
+      a portion of their possessions was handed over to the knights of St. John.
+      However, as I understand, it is your wish that as soon as the boy comes of
+      age to wield arms he shall go to Rhodes and become an active member of the
+      Order. This is indeed the rule with all neophytes, but having served a
+      certain time they are then permitted to return and join one of the
+      commanderies in their native countries.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I do not wish that for Gervaise,&rdquo; his father said; &ldquo;at least, I wish him
+      to remain at Rhodes until all the civil troubles are absolutely at an end
+      here. My life has been ruined by them. Loving retirement and quiet, and
+      longing for nothing so much as a life among my tenantry, I have almost
+      from a boy been actively engaged in warfare or have been away as an exile.
+      Here every one of gentle blood has been more or less mixed up in these
+      civil broils. To few of us does it personally matter whether a member of
+      the House of York or Lancaster sits on the throne, and yet we have been
+      almost compelled to take sides with one or the other; and now, in my
+      middle age I am on the eve of another battle in which I risk my life and
+      fortune. If we win I gain naught but the satisfaction of seeing young
+      Edward made King of England. If we lose I am going into exile again, or I
+      may leave my wife a widow, and my child penniless.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It is too true, Tresham; and as I am as likely to fall as you are, the
+      child might be left without a protector as well as fatherless. However,
+      against that I will provide. I will write a letter to Peter D'Aubusson,
+      who is the real governor of Rhodes, for the Grand Master Orsini is so old
+      that his rule is little more than nominal. At his death D'Aubusson is
+      certain to be elected Grand Master. He is a dear friend of mine. We
+      entered the Order the same year, and were comrades in many a fight with
+      the Moslems, and I am quite sure that when I tell him that it is my last
+      request of him, he will, in memory of our long friendship, appoint your
+      son as one of the Grand Master's pages. As you know, no one, however high
+      his rank, is accepted as a novice before the age of sixteen. After a
+      year's probation he is received into the body of the Order as a professed
+      knight, and must go out and serve for a time in Rhodes. After three years
+      of active service he must reside two more at the convent, and can then be
+      made a commander. There is but one exception to the rule&mdash;namely,
+      that the pages of the grand master are entitled to the privilege of
+      admission at the age of twelve, so that they become professed knights at
+      thirteen. Your son is now but nine, you say, and we must remember that
+      D'Aubusson is not yet Grand Master, and Orsini may live for some years
+      yet. D'Aubusson, however, can doubtless get him to appoint the boy as one
+      of his pages. But, in any case, there are three years yet to be passed
+      before he can go out. Doubtless these he will spend under his mother's
+      care; but as it is as well to provide against everything, I will furnish
+      your dame with a letter to the knight who will probably succeed me as
+      Grand Prior of the English langue, asking him to see to the care and
+      education of the boy up to the time when he can proceed to Rhodes. We may
+      hope, my dear Tresham, that there will be no occasion to use such
+      documents, and that you and I may both be able personally to watch over
+      his career. Still, it is as well to take every precaution. I shall, of
+      course, give D'Aubusson full particulars about you, your vow, and your
+      wishes.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I thank you greatly, old friend,&rdquo; Sir Thomas said. &ldquo;It has taken a load
+      off my mind. I shall leave him here with his mother when we march forward,
+      and bid her, if ill befalls me, cross again to France, and then to keep
+      Gervaise with her until she can bring herself to part with him. She has
+      her jewels and a considerable sum of money which I accepted from the man
+      who has been enjoying my estates for the last five years, in lieu of the
+      monies that he had received during that time. Therefore, she will not lack
+      means for some years to come. Besides, Queen Margaret has a real affection
+      for her, and will, doubtless, be glad to have her with her again in
+      exile.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;When I am old enough,&rdquo; Gervaise said, suddenly looking up from a missal
+      of the Grand Prior's which he had been examining, &ldquo;I will chop off the
+      head of the Duke of York, and bring mother back to England.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;You will be a valiant champion no doubt, my boy,&rdquo; the prior said,
+      laughing. &ldquo;But that is just what your father does not want. Chop off the
+      heads of as many infidels as you will, but leave Englishmen alone, be they
+      dukes or commoners. It is a far more glorious career to be aiding to
+      defend Europe against the Moslem than to be engaged in wars with your own
+      countrymen. If the great lords will fight, let them fight it out
+      themselves without our aid; but I hope that long before you become a man
+      even they will be tired of these perpetual broils, and that some agreement
+      may be arrived at, and peace reign in this unhappy land.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Besides, Gervaise,&rdquo; his father added, &ldquo;you must bear in mind always that
+      my earnest wish and hope is that you will become a champion of the Cross.
+      I took a solemn vow before you were born that if a son were granted to me
+      I would dedicate him to the service of the Cross, and if I am taken from
+      you, you must still try to carry that oath into effect. I trust that, at
+      any rate for some years after you attain manhood, you will expend your
+      whole strength and powers in the defence of Christianity, and as a worthy
+      knight of the Order of St. John. Too many of the knights, after serving
+      for three years against the infidels, return to their native countries and
+      pass the rest of their lives in slothful ease at their commanderies, save
+      perhaps when at any great crisis they go out for a while and join in the
+      struggle. Such is not the life I should wish you to lead. At the death of
+      your mother and myself, you will have no family ties in England&mdash;nothing
+      to recall you here. If the House of York succeeds in establishing itself
+      firmly on the throne, my estates will be forfeited. Therefore, regard
+      Rhodes as your permanent home, and devote your life to the Order.
+      Beginning so young, you may hope to distinguish yourself&mdash;to gain
+      high rank in it; but remember that though these are my wishes, they are
+      not my orders, and that your career must be in your own hands.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I will be a brave knight, father,&rdquo; the boy said firmly.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;That is right, my boy. Now go upstairs to your bed; it is already late. I
+      do not regret my vow,&rdquo; he went on, after Gervaise had left the room,
+      &ldquo;though I regret that he is my only son. It is singular that men should
+      care about what comes after them, but I suppose it is human nature. I
+      should have liked to think that my descendants would sit in the old house,
+      and that men of my race and name would long own the estates. But doubtless
+      it is all for the best; for at least I can view the permanent loss of my
+      estates, in case the Yorkists triumph, without any poignant regret.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Doubtless it is for the best, Tresham, and you must remember that things
+      may not, even now, turn out as you think. A knight who has done a brave
+      service does not find much difficulty in obtaining from the Pope a
+      dispensation from his vows. Numbers of knights have so left the Order and
+      have married and perpetuated their name. It is almost a necessity that it
+      should be so, for otherwise many princes and barons would object to their
+      sons entering the Order. Its object is to keep back the irruption of the
+      Moslems, and when men have done their share of hard work no regret need be
+      felt if they desire to leave the Order. Our founder had no thought of
+      covering Europe with monasteries, and beyond the fact that it is necessary
+      there should be men to administer our manors and estates, I see no reason
+      why any should not freely leave when they reach the age of thirty or
+      thirty-five, and indeed believe that it would strengthen rather than
+      weaken us were the vows, taken at the age of seventeen, to be for fifteen
+      years only.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;There is something in that,&rdquo; the knight said thoughtfully. &ldquo;However, that
+      is far in the distance, and concerns me but little; still, I agree with
+      you, for I see no advantage in men, after their time of usefulness to the
+      Order is past, being bound to settle down to a monastic life if by nature
+      and habit unsuited for it. There are some spirits who, after long years of
+      warfare, are well content so to do, but there are assuredly others to whom
+      a life of forced inactivity, after a youth and manhood spent in action,
+      must be well nigh unendurable. And now tell me frankly what you think of
+      our chances here.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Everything depends upon time. Promises of aid have come in from all
+      quarters, and if Edward delays we shall soon be at the head of an
+      overwhelming force. But Edward, with all his faults and vices, is an able
+      and energetic leader, and must be well aware that if he is to strike
+      successfully he must strike soon. We must hope that he will not be able to
+      do this. He cannot tell whether we intend to march direct to London, or to
+      join Pembroke in Wales, or to march north, and until he divines our
+      purpose, he will hardly dare to move lest we should, by some rapid
+      movement, interpose between himself and London. If he gives us a month,
+      our success is certain. If he can give battle in a fortnight, no one can
+      say how the matter will end.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Edward, indeed, was losing no time. He stayed but a few days in London
+      after his victory at Barnet, and on the 19th of April left for Windsor,
+      ordering all his forces to join him there. The Lancastrians had
+      endeavoured to puzzle him as to their intended movements by sending
+      parties out in various directions; but as soon as he had gathered a force,
+      numerically small, but composed of veteran soldiers, he hurried west,
+      determined to bring on a battle at the earliest opportunity. The queen's
+      advisers determined to move first to Wells, as from that point they could
+      either go north or march upon London. Edward entered Abingdon on the 27th,
+      and then, finding the Lancastrians still at Wells, marched to the
+      northwest, by which means he hoped to intercept them if they moved north,
+      while he would be able to fall back and bar their road to London if they
+      advanced in that direction. He therefore moved to Cirencester, and waited
+      there for news until he learned that they had visited Bristol and there
+      obtained reinforcements of men and supplies of money and cannon, and had
+      then started on the high road to Gloucester.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      He at once sent off messengers to the son of Lord Beauchamp, who held the
+      Castle of Gloucester for him, assuring him that he was following at full
+      speed, and would come to his aid forthwith. The messengers arrived in
+      time, and when the queen, after a long march, arrived before Gloucester,
+      she found the gates shut in her face. The governor had taken steps to
+      prevent her numerous adherents in the town from rising on her behalf, and,
+      manning the walls, refused to surrender. Knowing that Edward was coming up
+      rapidly, it was evident that there was no time to spare in an attempt to
+      take the town, and the queen's army therefore pressed on, without waiting,
+      to Tewkesbury. Once across the river they would speedily be joined by the
+      Earl of Pembroke, and Edward would be forced to fall back at once.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      By the time they reached the river, however, they were thoroughly
+      exhausted. They had marched thirty-six miles without rest, along bad roads
+      and through woods, and were unable to go farther. The queen urged that the
+      river should be crossed, but the leaders of the force were of opinion that
+      it was better to halt. Edward would be able to follow them across the
+      river, and were he to attack them when in disorder, and still further
+      wearied by the operation of making the passage, he would certainly crush
+      them. Moreover, a further retreat would discourage the soldiers, and as a
+      battle must now be fought, it was better to fight where they were,
+      especially as they could choose a strong position. The queen gave way, and
+      the army encamped on a large field in front of the town. The position was
+      well calculated for defence, for the country around was so broken and
+      intercepted with lanes and deep hedges and ditches, that it was extremely
+      difficult of approach.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      In the evening Edward came up, his men having also marched some
+      six-and-thirty miles, and encamped for the night within three miles of the
+      Lancastrian position. The queen's troops felt confident of victory. In
+      point of numbers they were superior to their antagonists, and had the
+      advantage of a strong position. Sir Thomas Tresham had, as he proposed,
+      left his wife and son at Exeter when the force marched away.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Do not be despondent, love,&rdquo; he said to his weeping wife, as he bade her
+      goodbye. &ldquo;Everything is in our favour, and there is a good hope of a happy
+      termination to this long struggle. But, win or lose, be assured it is the
+      last time I will draw my sword. I have proved my fidelity to the House of
+      Lancaster; I have risked life and fortune in their cause; but I feel that
+      I have done my share and more, and whichever way Providence may now decide
+      the issue of the struggle, I will accept it. If we lose, and I come
+      scatheless through the fight, I will ride hither, and we will embark at
+      Plymouth for France, and there live quietly until the time comes when
+      Edward may feel himself seated with sufficient firmness on the throne to
+      forgive past offences and to grant an amnesty to all who have fought
+      against him. In any other case, dear, you know my wishes, and I bid you
+      carry them out within twenty-four hours of your receiving news of a
+      defeat, without waiting longer for my appearance.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      As soon as it was light, Edward advanced to the attack. The Duke of
+      Gloucester was in command of the vanguard. He himself led the centre,
+      while the rear was commanded by the Marquis of Dorset and Lord Hastings.
+      The most advanced division of Lancastrians was commanded by the Duke of
+      Somerset and his brother. The Grand Prior of the Order of St. John and
+      Lord Wenlock were stationed in the centre, the Earl of Devon with the
+      reserve. Refreshed by their rest, the queen's troops were in good spirits.
+      While awaiting the attack, she and the prince rode among the ranks,
+      encouraging the men with fiery speeches, and promising large rewards to
+      all in case of victory.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Gloucester made his advance with great difficulty. The obstacles to his
+      progress were so many and serious that his division was brought to a halt
+      before it came into contact with the defenders. He therefore brought up
+      his artillery and opened a heavy cannonade upon Somerset's position,
+      supporting his guns with flights of arrows, and inflicting such heavy loss
+      upon him that the duke felt compelled to take the offensive.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Having foreseen that he might be obliged to do so, he had, early in the
+      morning, carefully examined the ground in front of him, and had found some
+      lanes by which he could make a flank attack on the enemy. Moving his force
+      down these lanes, where the trees and hedges completely hid his advance
+      from the Yorkists, he fell suddenly upon Edward's centre, which, taken by
+      surprise at the unexpected attack, was driven in confusion up the hill
+      behind it. Somerset was quick to take advantage of his success, and
+      wheeling his men round fell upon the Duke of Gloucester's division, and
+      was equally successful in his attack upon it. Had the centre, under Lord
+      Wenlock, moved forward at once to his support, the victory would have been
+      assured; but Wenlock lay inactive, and Somerset was now engaged in
+      conflict with the whole of Edward's force. But even under these
+      circumstances he still gained ground, when suddenly the whole aspect of
+      the battle was changed.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Before it began Edward had sent two hundred spearmen to watch a wood near
+      the defenders' lines, as he thought that the Lancastrians might place a
+      force there to take him in flank as he attacked their front. He ordered
+      them, if they found the wood unoccupied, to join in the fight as
+      opportunity might offer. The wood was unoccupied, and the spearmen, seeing
+      the two divisions of their army driven backwards, and being thereby cut
+      off from their friends, issued from the wood and, charging down in a body,
+      fell suddenly upon Somerset's rear.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Astounded and confused by an attack from such a quarter, and believing
+      that it was an act of treachery by one of their own commanders, Somerset's
+      men, who had hitherto been fighting with the greatest bravery, fell into
+      confusion. Edward's quick eye soon grasped the opportunity, and rallying
+      his troops he charged impetuously down upon the Lancastrians, seconded
+      hotly by Gloucester and his division.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The disorder in Somerset's lines speedily grew into a panic, and the
+      division broke up and fled through the lanes to the right and left.
+      Somerset, after in vain trying to stop the panic, rode furiously back into
+      the camp, followed by his principal officers, and riding up to Lord
+      Wenlock he cleft his head in two with a battleaxe. His resentment,
+      although justified by the inactivity of this nobleman at such a crisis,
+      was yet disastrous, as it left the centre without a leader, and threw it
+      into a state of disorganization, as many must have supposed that Somerset
+      had turned traitor and gone over to the enemy. Before any disposition
+      could be made, Edward and Gloucester poured their forces into the camp,
+      and the Lancastrians at once broke and fled. Many of their leaders took
+      refuge in the church, an asylum which they deemed inviolable, and which
+      the Lancastrians had honourably respected in their hour of triumph.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Among them were the Duke of Somerset, the Grand Prior of the Order of St.
+      John, Sir Humphrey Audely, Sir Gervis of Clifton, Sir William Gainsby, Sir
+      William Cary, Sir Henry Rose, Sir Thomas Tresham, and seven esquires.
+      Margaret of Anjou fell into the hands of the victors. As to the fate of
+      the young prince, accounts differ. Some authorities say that he was
+      overtaken and slain on the field, but the majority related that he was
+      captured and taken before Edward, who asked him, &ldquo;What brought you to
+      England?&rdquo; On his replying boldly, &ldquo;My father's crown and mine own
+      inheritance,&rdquo; Edward struck him in the mouth with his gauntlet, and his
+      attendants, or some say his brothers, at once despatched the youth with
+      their swords.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The king, with Gloucester and Clarence, then went to the church at
+      Tewkesbury, where the knights had taken refuge, burst open the doors, and
+      entered it. A priest, bearing the holy vessels, threw himself before the
+      king, and would not move until he promised to pardon all who had taken
+      sanctuary there. The king then retired, and trusting in the royal word,
+      the gentlemen made no attempt to escape, although it is said that they
+      could easily have done so. Two days later a party of soldiers by the
+      king's orders broke into the church, dragged them from the foot of the
+      altar, and beheaded them outside.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The news of the issue of the fatal battle of Tewkesbury, the capture of
+      the queen, and the death of the prince, was borne to Exeter by fugitives
+      on the following day. Beyond the fact that the Earl of Devon and other
+      nobles were known to have been killed, and Somerset with a party of
+      knights had taken sanctuary, they could give no details as to the fate of
+      individuals. In the deepest distress at the utter ruin of the cause, and
+      in ignorance of the fate of her husband, who she could only hope was one
+      of those who had gained sanctuary, Dame Tresham prepared for flight. This
+      accomplished, she had only to wait, and sit in tearless anguish at the
+      window, listening intently whenever a horseman rode past. All night her
+      watch continued. Gervaise, who had cried himself to sleep, lay on a couch
+      beside her. Morning dawned, and she then knew that her husband would not
+      come, for had he escaped from the field he would long ere this have been
+      with her. The messenger with the news had arrived at eight the previous
+      morning, and, faithful to her husband's wishes, at that hour she ordered
+      the horses to be brought round, and, joining a party of gentlemen who were
+      also making for the coast, rode with them to Plymouth. Arrangements were
+      at once made with the captain of a small ship in the port, and two days
+      later they landed at Honfleur, where Sir Thomas had enjoined his wife to
+      wait until she heard from him or obtained sure news of his fate.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      A week after her arrival the news was brought by other fugitives of the
+      violation of the sanctuary by the king, and the murder of Somerset and the
+      gentlemen with him, of whom Sir Thomas Tresham was known to have been one.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The blow proved fatal to Dame Tresham. She had gone through many trials
+      and misfortunes, and had ever borne them bravely, but the loss of her
+      husband completely broke her down. Save to see his wishes concerning their
+      son carried out, she had no longer any interest in life or any wish to
+      live. But until the future of Gervaise was assured, her mission was
+      unfulfilled. His education was her sole care; his mornings were spent at a
+      monastery, where the monks instructed the sons of such of the nobles and
+      gentry of the neighbourhood as cared that they should be able to read and
+      write. In the afternoon he had the best masters in the town in military
+      exercises. His evenings he spent with his mother, who strove to instill in
+      him the virtues of patience, mercy to the vanquished, and valour, by
+      stories of the great characters of history. She herself spent her days in
+      pious exercises, in attending the services of the Church, and in acts of
+      charity and kindness to her poorer neighbours. But her strength failed
+      rapidly, and she was but a shadow of her former self when, two years and a
+      half after her arrival at Honfleur, she felt that if she was herself to
+      hand Gervaise over to the Order of St. John, she must no longer delay.
+      Accordingly she took ship to London, and landing there made her way with
+      him to the dwelling of the Order at Clerkenwell. It was in process of
+      rebuilding, for in 1381 it had been first plundered and then burned by the
+      insurgents under Wat Tyler. During the ninety years that had elapsed since
+      that event the work of rebuilding had proceeded steadily, each grand prior
+      making additions to the pile which, although not yet fully completed, was
+      already one of the grandest and stateliest abodes in England.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      On inquiring for the grand prior, and stating that she had a letter of
+      importance for him, Dame Tresham and her son were shown up to his
+      apartment, and on entering were kindly and courteously received by him
+      when informed that she was the widow of the late Sir Thomas Tresham.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I am the bearer of a letter for you, given into my hand by my husband's
+      dear friend your predecessor,&rdquo; she said, &ldquo;a few days before his murder at
+      Tewkesbury. It relates to my son here.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The grand prior opened the letter and read it.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Assuredly, madam, I will carry out the wishes here expressed,&rdquo; he said.
+      &ldquo;They are, that I should forward at once the letter he has given you to
+      Sir Peter D'Aubusson, and that until an answer is received from him, I
+      should take care of the boy here, and see that he is instructed in all
+      that is needful for a future knight of our Order. I grieve to see that you
+      yourself are looking so ill.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;My course is well nigh run,&rdquo; she said. &ldquo;I have, methinks, but a few days
+      to live. I am thankful that it has been permitted to me to carry out my
+      husband's wishes, and to place my boy in your hands. That done, my work on
+      earth is finished, and glad indeed am I that the time is at hand when I
+      can rejoin my dear husband.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;We have a building here where we can lodge ladies in distress or need,
+      Dame Tresham, and trust that you will take up your abode there.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I shall indeed be thankful to do so,&rdquo; she replied. &ldquo;I know no one in
+      London, and few would care to lodge a dying woman.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;We are Hospitallers,&rdquo; the grand prior said. &ldquo;That was our sole mission
+      when we were first founded, and before we became a military order, and it
+      is still a part of our sworn duty to aid the distressed.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      A few minutes later Dame Tresham was conducted to a comfortable apartment,
+      and was given into the charge of a female attendant. The next day she had
+      another interview with the grand prior, to whom she handed over her jewels
+      and remaining money. This she prayed him to devote to the furnishing of
+      the necessary outfit for Gervaise. She spent the rest of the day in the
+      church of the hospital, had a long talk with her son in the evening,
+      giving him her last charges as to his future life and conduct, and that
+      night, as if she had now fulfilled her last duty on earth, she passed
+      away, and was found by her attendant lying with a look of joy and
+      peacefulness on her dead face.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise's grief was for a time excessive. He was nearly twelve years old,
+      and had never until now been separated from her even for a day. She had
+      often spoken to him of her end being near, but until the blow came he had
+      never quite understood that it could be so. She had, on the night before
+      her death, told him that he must not grieve overmuch for her, for that in
+      any case they must have soon been sundered, and that it was far better
+      that he should think of her as at rest, and happy, than as leading a
+      lonely and sorrowful life.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The grand prior, however, wisely gave him but little time to dwell upon
+      his loss, but as soon as her funeral had taken place, handed him over to
+      the knights who had the charge of the novices on probation, and instructed
+      them in their military exercises, and of the chaplain who taught them such
+      learning as was considered requisite for a knight of the Order.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The knights were surprised at the proficiency the lad had already attained
+      in the use of his weapons.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;By St. Agatha,&rdquo; one of them exclaimed, after the conclusion of his first
+      lesson, &ldquo;you have had good teachers, lad, and have availed yourself rarely
+      of them. If you go on like this you will become a distinguished knight of
+      our Order. With a few more years to strengthen your arms I warrant me you
+      will bear your part well in your first tussle with the Moslem corsairs.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      It fortunately happened that a party of knights were starting for Rhodes a
+      few days after the admission of Gervaise to the Hospital, and the letter
+      to Sir Peter D'Aubusson was committed to their charge. They were to
+      proceed to Bordeaux by ship, then to journey by land to Marseilles, and
+      thence, being joined by some French knights, to sail direct to Rhodes. Two
+      months later an answer was received. D'Aubusson wrote to the grand prior
+      saying that he would gladly carry out the last wishes of his dead friend,
+      and that he had already obtained from the grand master the appointment of
+      Gervaise Tresham as one of his pages, and begged that he might be sent out
+      with the next party of knights leaving England. It was three months before
+      such an opportunity occurred. During that time Gervaise remained at the
+      house of St. John's studying diligently, and continuing his military
+      exercises. These were severe; for the scions of noble houses, who hoped
+      some day to distinguish themselves as knights, were put through many
+      gymnastic exercises&mdash;were taught to spring on to a horse when clad in
+      full armour, to wield heavy battleaxes, to run and climb, and to prepare
+      themselves for all the possibilities of the mode of fighting of the day.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise gained the encomiums, not only of his special preceptor, but of
+      the various knights in the house, and of the grand prior himself, both for
+      his strength and activity, and for the earnestness with which he worked.
+      When the time approached for his leaving England, the grand prior ordered
+      for him the outfit which would be necessary in his position as a page of
+      the grand master. The dresses were numerous and rich, for although the
+      knights of St. John wore over their armour the simple mantle of their
+      order, which was a sleeveless garment of black relieved only by a white
+      cross on the chest, they indulged in the finest and most costly armour,
+      and in rich garments beneath their black mantles when not in armour.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I am well pleased with you, Gervaise,&rdquo; the grand prior said, on the
+      evening before he was to leave, &ldquo;and I see in you the making of a valiant
+      knight of the Order. Maintain the same spirit you have shown here; be
+      obedient and reverent to your superiors; give your whole mind to your
+      duties; strive earnestly during the three or four years that your pagedom
+      will last, to perfect yourself in military exercises, that when the time
+      comes for you to buckle on armour you will be able to bear yourself
+      worthily. Remember that you will have to win your knighthood, for the
+      Order does not bestow this honour, and you must remain a professed knight
+      until you receive it at the hands of some distinguished warrior. Ever bear
+      in mind that you are a soldier of the Cross. Avoid luxury, live simply and
+      modestly; be not led away by others, upon whom their vows may sit but
+      lightly; keep ever in your mind that you have joined the Order neither to
+      gain fame nor personal advantage, but simply that you may devote the
+      strength and the intelligence that God has given you to protect
+      Christendom from the advance of the infidel. I shall hear of you from time
+      to time from D'Aubusson, and feel sure that the expectations I have formed
+      of you will be fulfilled.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      <a name="link2HCH0003" id="link2HCH0003">
+      <!--  H2 anchor --> </a>
+    </p>
+    <div style="height: 4em;">
+      <br /><br /><br /><br />
+    </div>
+    <h2>
+      CHAPTER III THE GRAND MASTER'S PAGE
+    </h2>
+    <p>
+      The grand prior had, in accordance with Dame Tresham's request, sent the
+      steward of the house to one of the principal jewellers of the city who, as
+      the Order were excellent customers, paid a good price for her jewels.
+      After the payment for the numerous dresses required for the service as a
+      page to the grand master, the grand prior handed the balance of the money
+      Dame Tresham had brought with her, and that obtained by the sale of her
+      jewels, to one of the knights under whose charge Gervaise was to travel,
+      to be given by him to D'Aubusson for the necessities of Gervaise as a
+      page. During their term of service the pages received no remuneration, all
+      their expenses being paid by their families. Nevertheless, the post was
+      considered so honourable, and of such great advantage to those entering
+      the Order, that the appointments were eagerly sought after.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The head of the party was Sir Guy Redcar, who had been a commander in
+      England, but who was now relinquishing that post in order to take a high
+      office in the convent at the Island. With him were four lads between
+      seventeen and twenty who were going out as professed knights, having
+      served their year of probation as novices at the grand priory. With these
+      Gervaise was already acquainted, as they had lived, studied, and performed
+      their military exercises together. The three eldest of these Gervaise
+      liked much, but the youngest of the party, Robert Rivers, a relation of
+      the queen, had always shown a very different spirit from the others. He
+      was jealous that a member of one of the defeated and disinherited
+      Lancastrian families should obtain a post of such honour and advantage as
+      that of page to the grand master, and that thus, although five years
+      younger, Gervaise should enter the Order on an equality with him.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      In point of strength and stature he was, of course, greatly superior to
+      Gervaise; but he had been spoilt from his childhood, was averse to
+      exercise, and dull at learning, and while Gervaise was frequently
+      commended by his instructors, he himself was constantly reproved, and it
+      had been more than once a question whether he should be received as a
+      professed knight at the termination of his year of novitiate. Thus, while
+      the other lads treated Gervaise kindly, and indeed made rather a pet of
+      him, Robert Rivers ignored him as much as possible, and if obliged to
+      speak to him did so with a pointed rudeness that more than once brought
+      upon him a sharp reproof from his companions. Gervaise himself was but
+      little affected by Robert's manner. He was of an exceptionally good
+      tempered nature, and, indeed, was so occupied with his work and so anxious
+      to satisfy his teachers, that Robert's ill humour passed almost unnoticed.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The journey was performed without incident. During their passage across
+      the south of France, Gervaise's perfect knowledge of the language gained
+      for him a great advantage over his companions, and enabled him to be of
+      much use to Sir Guy. They had fine weather during their passage up the
+      Mediterranean, and in the day their leader gave them their first lessons
+      in the management and discipline of a ship.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;You will be nearly as much at sea as you are on land for the five years
+      you must stay at the convent,&rdquo; he said; &ldquo;and it is essential to the
+      education of a knight of our Order to know all things connected with the
+      management of a ship, even to its building. We construct our own galleys
+      at Rhodes, using, of course, the labour of slaves, but under our own
+      superintendence; and it is even more essential to us to know how to fight
+      on sea than on land. There is, too, you see, a rivalry among ourselves,
+      for each langue has its duties, and each strives to perform more gallant
+      deeds and to bring in more rich prizes than the others. We of England are
+      among the smallest of the langues, and yet methinks we do a fair portion
+      of the work, and gain fully our share of honour. There is no fear of your
+      having much time on your hands, for it is quite certain that there will
+      soon be open war between Mahomet and the Order. In spite of the nominal
+      truce, constant skirmishes are taking place, so that, in addition to our
+      fights with pirates, we have sometimes encounters with the sultan's
+      galleys.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Seven years ago, a number of our Order took part in the defence of
+      Lesbos, and lost their lives at its capture, and we have sure information
+      that Mahomet is preparing for an attack on the Island. No doubt he thinks
+      it will be an easy conquest, for in '57 he succeeded in landing eighteen
+      thousand men on the Island, and in ravaging a large district, carrying off
+      much booty. Since then, however, the defences of Rhodes have been greatly
+      strengthened. Zacosta, our last grand master, laboured diligently to
+      increase the fortifications, and, specially, built on one side of the
+      entrance to the harbour a strong tower, called Fort St. Nicholas. Orsini
+      has carried on the works, which have been directed by D'Aubusson, who is
+      captain general of the forces of the Island, and who has deepened the
+      ditches and built a wall on the sea front of the town six hundred feet in
+      length and twenty feet in height, money being found by the grand master
+      from his private purse.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;At present we are not sure whether the great armament that Mahomet is
+      preparing is intended for the capture of Negropont, which belongs to
+      Venice, or of Rhodes. Unfortunately Venice and Rhodes are not good
+      friends. In the course of our war with Egypt in '58 we captured from some
+      Venetian vessels, in which they were travelling, several Egyptian
+      merchants with a great store of goods. The Venetians protested that as the
+      ships were theirs we had no right to interfere with our enemies who were
+      travelling in them, and, without giving time for the question to be
+      discussed, at once attacked our galleys, and sent a fleet against Rhodes.
+      They landed on the Island, and not only pillaged the district of Halki,
+      but, a number of natives having sought shelter in a cave, the Venetians
+      blocked up the entrance with brushwood, set it on fire, and suffocated
+      them all.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Shortly afterwards, another and larger fleet appeared off Rhodes, and
+      demanded the restitution of the Egyptians and their merchandise. There was
+      a great division of opinion in the council; but, seeing the great danger
+      that threatened us both from the Turks at Constantinople and the
+      Venetians, and that it was madness at such a time to engage in war with a
+      Christian power, the grand master persuaded the council to accede to their
+      request. There has never been any friendly feeling between Venice and
+      ourselves since that time. Still, I trust that our common danger will
+      reunite us, and that whether Negropont or Rhodes is attacked by the
+      Moslems, we shall render loyal aid to each other.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      There was great excitement among Gervaise and his companions when it was
+      announced that Rhodes was in sight, and as they approached the town they
+      gazed with admiration at the castle with its stately buildings, the palace
+      of the grand master and the Hospital of St. John, rising above the lower
+      town, the massive walls strengthened by projecting bastions, and the
+      fortifications of the ports. Of these there were two, with separate
+      entrances, divided from each other by a narrow tongue of land. At its
+      extremity stood Fort St. Nicholas, which was connected by a strong wall
+      running along the promontory to the town. The inner port, as it was
+      called, was of greater importance, as it adjoined the town itself. It was
+      defended in the first place by Fort St. Nicholas, and at the inner
+      entrance stood the towers of St. John and St. Michael, one on either side.
+      Into this the vessel was steered. There were many craft lying there, among
+      them eight or ten of the galleys of the Order.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;We will go first to the house of our langue,&rdquo; Sir Guy said, &ldquo;and tell
+      them to send down slaves to fetch up our baggage; then I will take you,
+      Gervaise, to Sir Peter D'Aubusson, and hand you over to his care.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      On landing, Gervaise was surprised at the number of slaves who were
+      labouring at the public works, and who formed no small proportion of the
+      population in the streets. Their condition was pitiable. They were, of
+      course, enemies of Christianity, and numbers of them had been pirates; but
+      he could not help pitying their condition as they worked in the full heat
+      of the sun under the vigilant eyes of numbers of overseers, who carried
+      heavy whips, in addition to their arms. Their progress to the upper city
+      was slow, for on their way they met many knights, of whom several were
+      acquainted with Sir Guy; and each, after greeting him, demanded the latest
+      news from England, and in return gave him particulars of the state of
+      things at Rhodes.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      At last they arrived at the house of the English langue. The Order was
+      divided into langues or nationalities. Of these there were eight&mdash;Provence,
+      Auvergne, France, Italy, Germany, England, Aragon, and Castile and
+      Portugal. The French element was by far the strongest. The Order had been
+      founded in that country, and as it possessed no less than three langues,
+      and held the greater part of the high official positions in the Order, it
+      was only kept in check by the other langues acting together to demand
+      their fair share of dignities. The grand master's authority was
+      considerable, but it was checked by the council, which was composed of the
+      bailiffs and knights of the highest order, known as Grand Crosses. Each
+      langue had its bailiff elected by itself: these resided constantly at
+      Rhodes. Each of these bailiffs held a high office; thus the Bailiff of
+      Provence was always the grand commander of the Order. He controlled the
+      expenditure, superintended the stores, and was governor of the arsenal.
+      The Bailiff of Auvergne was the commander-in-chief of all the forces, army
+      and navy. The Bailiff of France was the grand hospitaller, with the
+      supreme direction of the hospitals and infirmaries of the Order, a
+      hospital in those days signifying a guest house. The Bailiff of Italy was
+      the grand admiral, and the Bailiff of England was chief of the light
+      cavalry. Thus the difficulties and jealousies that would have arisen at
+      every vacancy were avoided.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      In the early days of the Order, when Jerusalem was in the hands of the
+      Christians, the care of the hospitals was its chief and most important
+      function. Innumerable pilgrims visited Jerusalem, and these were
+      entertained at the immense guest house of the Order. But with the loss of
+      Jerusalem and the expulsion of the Christians from Palestine, that
+      function had become of very secondary importance although there was still
+      a guest house and infirmary at Rhodes, where strangers and the sick were
+      carefully attended by the knights. No longer did these ride out to battle
+      on their war horses. It was on the sea that the foe was to be met, and the
+      knights were now sailors rather than soldiers. They dwelt at the houses of
+      their respective langues; here they ate at a common table, which was
+      supplied by the bailiff, who drew rations for each knight, and received,
+      in addition, a yearly sum for the supply of such luxuries as were not
+      included in the rations. The average number of knights residing in each of
+      these langues averaged from a hundred to a hundred and fifty.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      It was not until some hours after his arrival that Sir Guy could find time
+      to take Gervaise across to the house of the langue of Auvergne, to which
+      D'Aubusson belonged. It was a larger and more stately pile than that of
+      the English langue, but the arrangements were similar in all these
+      buildings. In the English house Gervaise had not felt strange, as he had
+      the companionship of his fellow voyagers; but as he followed Sir Guy
+      through the spacious halls of the langue of Auvergne, where no familiar
+      face met his, he felt more lonely than he had done since he entered the
+      house at Clerkenwell.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      On sending in his name Sir Guy was at once conducted to the chamber
+      occupied by D'Aubusson. The knight was seated at his table, examining some
+      plans. The room was furnished with monastic simplicity, save that the
+      walls were hung with rich silks and curtains captured from Turkish
+      galleys.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Welcome back to us, Sir Guy,&rdquo; D'Aubusson said, rising, and warmly shaking
+      his visitor's hand. &ldquo;I have been looking for your coming, for we need men
+      with clear heads. Of strong arms and valiant spirits we have no lack; but
+      men of judgment and discretion, who can be trusted to look at matters
+      calmly and not to be carried away by passion, are welcome indeed to us. I
+      was expecting you about this time, and when I heard that a ship had
+      arrived from Marseilles I made inquiries, and was glad to find that you
+      were on board.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I am heartily glad to be back, D'Aubusson; I am sick of the dull life of
+      a commandery, and rejoice at the prospect of stirring times again. This
+      lad is young Tresham, who has come out in my charge, and for whom you have
+      been good enough to obtain the post of page to the grand master.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;And no slight business was it to do so,&rdquo; D'Aubusson said with a smile.
+      &ldquo;It happened there was a vacancy when the letter concerning him arrived,
+      and had it been one of the highest offices in the Order there could not
+      have been a keener contention for it. Every bailiff had his candidate
+      ready; but I seldom ask for anything for members of my langue, and when I
+      told the other bailiffs that it was to me a matter of honour to carry out
+      the last request of my dead friend, they all gave way. You see, I am
+      placed in a position of some little difficulty. The grand master is so
+      enfeebled and crippled that he leaves matters almost entirely in my hands,
+      and it would be an abuse of my position, and would excite no little
+      jealousy, were I to use the power I possess to nominate friends of my own
+      to appointments. It is only by the most rigid impartiality, and by
+      dividing as fairly as possible all offices between the eight langues, that
+      all continue to give me their support. As you know, we have had great
+      difficulties and heartburnings here; but happily they have to a great
+      extent been set at rest by forming a new langue of Castile and Portugal
+      out of that of Aragon. This has given one more vote to the smaller
+      langues, and has so balanced the power that of late the jealousies between
+      us have greatly subsided, and all are working well together in face of the
+      common danger. Well, young sir, and how like you the prospect of your
+      pageship?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I like it greatly, sir, but shall like still more the time when I can
+      buckle on armour and take a share of the fighting with the infidels. I
+      would fain, sir, offer to you my deep and humble thanks for the great
+      kindness you have shown me in procuring me the appointment of page to the
+      grand master.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The knight smiled kindly. &ldquo;There are the less thanks due, lad, inasmuch as
+      I did it not for you, but for the dear friend who wrote to me on your
+      behalf. However, I trust that you will do credit to my nomination by your
+      conduct here.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;There is a letter from our grand prior which I have brought to you,&rdquo; Sir
+      Guy said. &ldquo;He commended the lad to me warmly, and seems to be greatly
+      pleased with his conduct.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      D'Aubusson cut the silken string that bound the missive together, and read
+      the letter.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;He does indeed speak warmly,&rdquo; he said, as he laid it down on the table.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;He tells me that the lad, young as he was, had been well trained when he
+      came, and that he worked with great diligence during the five months he
+      was in the House, and displayed such skill and strength for his age, as to
+      surprise his preceptors, who prophesied that he would turn out a stout
+      swordsman, and would be a credit to the Order.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;He is well furnished with garments both for ordinary and state
+      occasions,&rdquo; Sir Guy said; &ldquo;and in this packet are some sixty gold crowns,
+      which are the last remains of his patrimony, and which I was to hand to
+      you in order to pay the necessary expenses during his pageship.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;He could have done without that,&rdquo; D'Aubusson said. &ldquo;Recommended to me as
+      he is, I would have seen that he lacked nothing, but was provided with all
+      necessaries for his position. I will in the future take care that in all
+      things he is on a par with his companions.&rdquo; He touched a bell on the
+      table, and a servitor entered.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Tell Richard de Deauville to come here,&rdquo; he said.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      A minute later the hangings at the door were pushed aside, and a lad about
+      a year older than Gervaise appeared, and, bowing deeply to the knight,
+      stood in a respectful attitude, awaiting his orders.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Deauville, take this youth, Gervaise Tresham to your room. He is
+      appointed one of the pages of the grand master. He is English, but he
+      speaks French as well as you do, having lived in France for some years.
+      Take him to your apartment and treat him kindly and well, seeing that he
+      is a stranger and new to all here. Tomorrow he will go to the palace.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise bowed deeply to the two knights, and then followed the page.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I suppose you arrived in that ship which came in today,&rdquo; the latter said,
+      as soon as they had left the room. &ldquo;You are in luck indeed to have
+      obtained a pageship at the grand master's. You begin to count your time at
+      once, while we do not begin to count ours until we are seventeen. Still,
+      good luck may befall us yet, for if the grand master dies, Sir Peter is
+      sure to be chosen to succeed him. Then, you see, we too shall be pages of
+      the grand master.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;How many are there of you?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Only De Lille and myself. Of course D'Aubusson will take on the grand
+      master's present pages; but as there are five vacancies on an average
+      every year, he will be able to find room for us among the number.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Why, how many pages has the grand master?&rdquo; Gervaise asked, in surprise.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Sixteen of them, so you may guess the duties are easy enough, as only two
+      are generally employed, except, of course on solemn occasions.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Are there any other English besides myself?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The boy shook his head. &ldquo;There are eight belonging to the French langues;
+      the others are Spaniards, Italians, or Germans. There, this is our room
+      and this is De Lille. De Lille, this is the grand master's new page,
+      Master Gervaise Tresham, and our lord says we are to treat him kindly and
+      entertain him well until tomorrow, when he will go to the palace. He
+      speaks our language, and has been some years in France.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;How came you to be there?&rdquo; De Lille asked Gervaise.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;My father was a Lancastrian, and my mother a great friend of our Queen
+      Margaret of Anjou, and they were with her all the time she was in exile.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;How quarrelsome you English are!&rdquo; De Lille said. &ldquo;You seem to be always
+      fighting among yourselves.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I don't think,&rdquo; Gervaise said, with a smile, &ldquo;there is any love lost
+      between Louis of France and the Duke of Burgundy, to say nothing of other
+      great lords.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;No; you are right there. But though we talk a great deal about fighting,
+      it is only occasionally that we engage in it.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The pages' room was a small one. It contained two pallets, which served as
+      seats by day, and two wooden chests, in which they kept their clothes.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Their conversation was interrupted by the ringing of a bell.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;That is supper,&rdquo; De Lille said, jumping up. &ldquo;We will leave you here while
+      we go down to stand behind our lord's chair. When the meal is over we will
+      bring a pasty or something else good, and a measure of wine, and have our
+      supper together up here; and we will tell the servitors to bring up
+      another pallet for you. Of course, you can go down with us if you like.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Thank you, I would much rather stay here. Every one would be strange to
+      me, and having nothing to do I should feel in the way.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The boys nodded, and taking their caps ran off, while Gervaise, tired by
+      the excitement of the day, lay down on the bed which a servant brought up
+      a few minutes after they had left him, and slept soundly until their
+      return.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I think I have been asleep,&rdquo; he said, starting up when they entered the
+      room again.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;You look as if you had, anyhow,&rdquo; De Lille laughed. &ldquo;It was the best thing
+      you could do. We have brought up supper. We generally sit down and eat
+      after the knights have done, but this is much better, as you are here.&rdquo;
+       They sat down on the beds, carved the pasty with their daggers, and after
+      they had finished Gervaise gladly accepted the proposal of the others to
+      take a walk round the walls.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      They started from the corner of the castle looking down upon the spit of
+      land dividing the two ports.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;You see,&rdquo; De Lille said, &ldquo;there is a row of small islands across the
+      mouth of the outer port, and the guns of St. Nicholas, and those on this
+      wall, would prevent any hostile fleet from entering.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I hardly see what use that port is, for it lies altogether outside the
+      town, and vessels could not unload there.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;No. Still, it forms a useful place of refuge. In case a great fleet came
+      to attack us, our galleys would lay up in the inner port, which would be
+      cleared of all the merchant craft, as these would hamper the defence; they
+      would, therefore, be sent round into the outer port, where they would be
+      safe from any attack by sea, although they would doubtless be burnt did an
+      army besiege the town.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Passing along the walls of the grand master's palace, which was a strongly
+      fortified building, and formed a citadel that could be defended after the
+      lower town and the rest of the castle had been taken, they came to the
+      western angle of the fortifications.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;You must know that each langue has charge of a separate part of the wall.
+      From the foot of the mole of St. Nicholas to the grand master's palace it
+      is in charge of France. On the line where we now are, between the palace
+      and the gate of St. George, it is held by Germany. From that gate to the
+      Spanish tower Auvergne is posted. England takes the wall between the
+      Spanish tower and that of St. Mary. You defend only the lower storey of
+      that tower, the upper part being held by Aragon, whose charge extends up
+      to the gate of St. John. Thence to the tower of Italy&mdash;behind which
+      lies the Jews' quarter&mdash;Provence is in charge, while the sea front
+      thence to the mole of St. Nicholas, is held by Italy and Castile, each
+      taking half. Not only have the langues the charge of defending each its
+      portion of the wall, but of keeping it in order at all times; and I may
+      say that nowhere is the wall better kept or more fairly decorated with
+      carvings than where England holds.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;You have not told me who defends the palace itself.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;That is in charge of a force composed of equal numbers of picked knights
+      from each langue.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise leant on the battlement and looked with admiration at the scene
+      beyond. The land side was surrounded by hills, the ground rising very
+      gradually from the foot of the walls. Every yard of ground was cultivated,
+      and was covered with brilliant vegetation. Groves and orchards occurred
+      thickly, while the slopes were dotted with chapels, summer houses&mdash;in
+      which the natives of the city spent most of their time in the hot season&mdash;and
+      other rustic buildings.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;What a rich and beautiful country!&rdquo; he said.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It is very pleasant to look at,&rdquo; De Lille agreed. &ldquo;But all this would be
+      a sore disadvantage to us if the Turks were besieging us, for the groves
+      and orchards would conceal their approaches, the walls and buildings would
+      give them shelter, and our cannon would be of little use until they
+      reached the farther side of the ditch. If the Turks come, I hear it is
+      decided to level all the buildings and walls, and to chop down every
+      tree.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;If they were to plant their cannon on the hills they would do us much
+      harm,&rdquo; Gervaise remarked.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;The Turks are clumsy gunners they say,&rdquo; Deauville replied, &ldquo;and they
+      would but waste their powder and ball at that distance, without making a
+      breach in our walls.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Even if they did, they could surely scarce pass that deep fosse,&rdquo;
+       Gervaise said, looking down into the tremendous cutting in the solid rock
+      that ran round the whole circuit of the walls; it was from forty to sixty
+      feet deep, and from ninety to a hundred and forty feet wide. It was from
+      this great cutting that the stones for the construction of the walls,
+      towers, and buildings of the town had been taken, the work having been
+      going on ever since the knights established themselves at Rhodes, and
+      being performed by a host of captives taken in war, together with labour
+      hired from neighboring islands. Upon this immense work the Order had
+      expended no small proportion of their revenue since their capture of the
+      island in 1310, and the result was a fortress that, under the conditions
+      of warfare of that age, seemed almost impregnable; and this without any
+      natural advantage of position.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      In addition to the five great towers or bastions, the wall was
+      strengthened by square towers at short intervals. On looking down from the
+      wall upon which the three pages were standing, on to the lower town, the
+      view was a singular one. The houses were all built of stone, with flat
+      roofs, after the manner of most Eastern cities. The streets were very
+      narrow, and were crossed at frequent intervals by broad stone arches.
+      These had the effect, not only of giving shelter from an enemy's fire, but
+      of affording means by which troops could march rapidly across the town
+      upon the roofs of the houses to reinforce the defenders of the wall,
+      wherever pressed by the enemy. Thus the town from above presented the
+      appearance of a great pavement, broken only by dark and frequently
+      interrupted lines.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;How different to the towns at home!&rdquo; Gervaise exclaimed, as, after gazing
+      long upon the beautiful country outside the walls, he turned and looked
+      inward. &ldquo;One would hardly know that it was a town at all.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Yes, it is rather different to the view from the top of the tower of
+      Notre Dame, which I ascended while I was staying in Paris. But this sort
+      of building is best here; the thickness of the stone roofs keeps out the
+      heat of the sun, and it is only when it is almost overhead that it shines
+      down into the narrow streets. As you can see by the number of the people
+      on the roofs, they use them as a resort in the evening. Then carpets are
+      spread, and they receive visitors, and can talk to their neighbours over
+      the low walls that separate the roofs. You can trace the divisions. Some
+      of the house roofs are larger than others, but all are upon the same
+      level; this being the regulation, in order that there might be free
+      passage everywhere for the troops.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      By the time they had made the circuit of the walls darkness had fallen,
+      and concealed the martial features of the scene. Lights twinkled
+      everywhere upon the stone terraces; the sound of lutes and other musical
+      instruments came up softly on the still air, with the hum of talk and
+      laughter. The sea lay as smooth as a mirror, and reflected the light of
+      the stars, and the black hulls of the galleys and ships in the harbour lay
+      still and motionless.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Greatly pleased with his first experience of the city that was to be his
+      future home, Gervaise returned, with his companions, to the auberge of
+      Auvergne.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The next morning the bailiff D'Aubusson bade Gervaise accompany him to the
+      palace of the grand master. Here he introduced him to Orsini, an old and
+      feeble man, who, after a few kind words, handed him over to the
+      chamberlain, who, in turn, led him to the official who was in charge of
+      the pages. That officer took him down to the courtyard, where four young
+      knights were engaged in superintending the military exercises of the
+      pages. The scene was exactly the same as that to which Gervaise had been
+      accustomed at the House in London. Some of the lads were fighting with
+      blunted swords, others were swinging heavy bars of iron, climbing ropes,
+      or vaulting on to the back of a wooden horse. All paused as the official
+      entered with his charge.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;This is your new comrade, boys,&rdquo; he said&mdash;&ldquo;Master Gervaise Tresham,
+      a member of the English langue. Be good comrades to him. By the reports I
+      hear I am sure that you will find him a worthy companion.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The pages had been prepared to like the newcomer, for it was well known
+      that he owed his appointment to the bailiff of Auvergne, who was the most
+      popular of the officials of the Order, and who was already regarded as the
+      grand master. His appearance confirmed their anticipation. His fair
+      complexion and nut brown hair tinged with gold, cut somewhat short, but
+      with a natural wave, contrasted with their darker locks and faces bronzed
+      by the sun. There was an honest and frank look in his grey eyes, and an
+      expression of good temper on his face, though the square chin and firm
+      lips spoke of earnestness and resolution of purpose. The official took him
+      round the circle and presented him first to the knights and then to each
+      of his comrades.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;You may as well join them in their exercises. In that way you will sooner
+      become at home with them.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise at once laid down his mantle, removed his doublet, and then
+      joined the others. There was but one half hour remaining before they broke
+      off to go to dinner, which was at half past ten, but the time sufficed to
+      show the young pages that this English lad was the equal of all&mdash;except
+      two or three of the oldest&mdash;both in strength and in knowledge of
+      arms. He could climb the rope with any of them, could vault on to the
+      wooden horse with a heavy cuirass and backpiece on him, and held his own
+      in a bout with swords against Conrad von Berghoff, who was considered the
+      best swordplayer among them. As soon as the exercises were over all
+      proceeded to the bath, and then to dinner. The meal was a simple one, but
+      Gervaise enjoyed it thoroughly, for the table was loaded with an abundance
+      of fruits of kinds altogether novel to him, and which he found delicious.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The official in charge of them sat at the head of the table, and the meal
+      was eaten in silence. After it was over and they had retired to their own
+      rooms discipline was at an end, and they were free to amuse themselves as
+      they liked. There were many questions to be asked and answered, but his
+      display of strength and skill in the courtyard saved Gervaise from a good
+      deal of the teasing to which a newcomer among a party of boys is always
+      exposed.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      He, on his part, learnt that the duties of the pages were very light. Two
+      only were on duty each day, being in constant attendance on the grand
+      master, and accompanying him wherever he went. When he dined in public
+      four of them waited on him at table, and one of them performed the duties
+      of taster. If he returned to the palace after dark, six others lined the
+      staircase with torches. On occasions of state ceremony, and at the
+      numerous religious festivals, all were in attendance. By this time
+      Gervaise's trunks had been brought over from the English auberge, where
+      they had been conveyed from the ship, and his garments were taken out and
+      inspected by his comrades, who all admitted that they were, in point of
+      beauty of colour and material, and in fashion, equal to their own.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;You will have to get one more suit, Gervaise,&rdquo; one of the lads said. &ldquo;At
+      one or two of the grand ceremonies every year we are all dressed alike;
+      that is the rule. On other occasions we wear what we choose, so that our
+      garments are handsome, and I think it looks a good deal better than when
+      we are dressed alike; though no doubt in religious processions that is
+      more appropriate. De Ribaumont, our governor, will give orders for the
+      supply of your state costume. He is a good fellow. Of course, he has to be
+      rather strict with us; but so long as there is nothing done that he
+      considers discreditable to our position, he lets us do pretty nearly as we
+      like.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;We have four hours a day at our military exercises, and two hours with
+      the sub-chaplain, who teaches us our books and religious duties. The rest
+      of our time we can use as we like, except that every day eight of us ride
+      for two hours and practise with the lance; for although it is at sea we
+      fight the Moslems, we are expected to become finished knights in all
+      matters. These eight horses are kept for our service, and such as choose
+      may at other times ride them. On Saturdays we are free from all our
+      exercises; then some of us generally go on horseback for long excursions
+      on the island, while others take boats and go out on the sea; one
+      afternoon in the week we all make a trip in a galley, to learn our duties
+      on board.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      <a name="link2HCH0004" id="link2HCH0004">
+      <!--  H2 anchor --> </a>
+    </p>
+    <div style="height: 4em;">
+      <br /><br /><br /><br />
+    </div>
+    <h2>
+      CHAPTER IV A PROFESSED KNIGHT
+    </h2>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise was soon quite at home in the palace of the grand master, and his
+      companions were, like other boys, of varying characters; but as all were
+      of noble families, were strongly impressed with the importance of the
+      Order and the honour of their own position, and were constantly in contact
+      with stately knights and grave officials, their manners conformed to those
+      of their elders; and even among themselves there was no rough fun, or loud
+      disputes, but a certain courtesy of manner that was in accordance with
+      their surroundings. This came naturally to Gervaise, brought up as he had
+      been by his father and mother, and having at frequent intervals stayed
+      with them for months at the various royal castles in which Margaret of
+      Anjou and her son had been assigned apartments during their exile. Even at
+      St. John's house the novices with whom he lived were all a good deal older
+      than himself, and the discipline of the house was much more strict than
+      that at Rhodes.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      He enjoyed both his exercises with the knights and the time spent with the
+      sub-chaplain, no small proportion of the hours of study being occupied in
+      listening to stories of chivalry; it being considered one of the most
+      important parts of a knight's education that he should have a thorough
+      acquaintance, not only with the laws of chivalry, but with the brave deeds
+      both of former and of living knights, with the relations of the noble
+      houses of Europe to each other, especially of the many great families
+      whose members were connected with the Order of St. John.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      These matters formed, indeed, the main subject of their studies. All were
+      taught to read and write, but this was considered sufficient in the way of
+      actual instruction. The rules of the Order had to be committed to memory.
+      Beyond this their reading consisted largely of the lives of saints,
+      especially of those who distinguished themselves by their charity or their
+      devotion to their vows of poverty, to both of which the members of the
+      Order were pledged. Gervaise, however, could see around him no signs
+      whatever of poverty on their part. It was true that they all lived and fed
+      together in the auberges of their respective langues, and that they
+      possessed no houses or establishments of their own; but the magnificence
+      of their armour and attire, and the lavish expenditure of some upon their
+      pleasures, contrasted strangely with the poverty to which they had vowed
+      themselves. It was true that in many cases the means to support the
+      expenditure was derived from the shares the knights received of the
+      plunder acquired in their captures of Moslem ships; but undoubtedly many
+      must have possessed large private means; the bailiffs, for example,
+      although only required by the rules to place before the knights at their
+      auberges the rations they received for them, with such luxuries as could
+      be purchased by their yearly allowance for that purpose, expended annually
+      very large sums in addition, and supplied their tables with every dainty,
+      in order to gain popularity and goodwill among the members of the langue.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Not only did the post of bailiff confer upon its owner a very high
+      position at Rhodes, but it was a stepping stone to the most lucrative
+      offices in their langues. The bailiffs at Rhodes had the right of claiming
+      any of the grand priories or bailiwicks at home that might fall vacant,
+      and the grand master was frequently chosen from among their number, as, by
+      being present at Rhodes, they had many advantages in the way of making
+      themselves popular among the electors. The emoluments of some of these
+      provincial bailiwicks were large; and as the bailiffs at Rhodes were
+      generally elected by seniority&mdash;although younger knights who had
+      greatly distinguished themselves were sometimes chosen&mdash;they were
+      usually glad to resign the heavy work and responsibility of their position
+      at Rhodes, and to retire to the far easier position of a provincial
+      bailiff. In the majority of cases, doubtless, the fortunes of the high
+      officials were obtained from the money amassed when in possession of rich
+      commanderies at home; but even this was assuredly incompatible with their
+      vows of poverty.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      His hours of leisure Gervaise spent either on the water or in the saddle,
+      and his love of exercise of all sorts excited the wonder and even the
+      amusement of his companions, who for the most part preferred spending the
+      time at their disposal in sleep, in idly looking out from a shaded room at
+      what was going on outside, or in visits to friends and relations at the
+      auberges of the langues to which they belonged. The natural consequence
+      was, that by the time he reached the end of his three years' pageship,
+      Gervaise was indisputably superior in strength, activity, and skill in
+      military exercises, to any of his companions. The majority of these, after
+      completing their time, returned to the headquarters of their langue at
+      home, to pass their time there, until of an age to be eligible for the
+      charge of a commandery obtained for them by family influence, which had no
+      small share in the granting of these appointments. As it was known,
+      however, that Gervaise intended to remain permanently in the Island, his
+      progress was watched with particular attention by his instructors; and,
+      seeing his own earnestness in the matter, they took special pains with his
+      training. The bailiff of Auvergne continued to take much interest in him,
+      inquiring often from the officers in charge of the pages, and from his
+      instructors, of his conduct and progress, and occasionally sending for him
+      to his auberge and talking with him as to his life and progress. Just
+      before his pageship terminated, he said to him, &ldquo;I was rather puzzled at
+      first, Gervaise, as to what we should do with you when your term of office
+      concluded, but I am so no longer, for, although you are some two years
+      younger than the professed knights who come out here, you are better
+      fitted than the majority to take your place in the naval expeditions, and
+      to fight the Moslem pirates. I will see that you have your share of these
+      adventures. All young knights are, as you know, obliged to make three
+      voyages, but beyond that many of them do not care to share in the rough
+      life at sea, and prefer the bustle, and, I grieve to say, the gaiety and
+      pleasures of this city. For one, then, really eager to distinguish
+      himself, the opportunities are frequent. When danger threatens, or heavy
+      engagements are expected, every knight is desirous of bearing his part in
+      the fray; but this is not the case when the work to be done consists of
+      scouring the sea for weeks, without perchance coming across a single
+      pirate. Of course, as soon as your pageship is over you will go to the
+      English auberge, but I shall still keep my eye upon you, and shall do my
+      best to help you to achieve distinction; and I shall take upon myself the
+      providing of your arms and armour as a knight.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Accordingly, on the day on which his duties as a page terminated, two
+      servitors of the auberge of Auvergne brought across to the palace a suit
+      of fine armour and a sword, a battleaxe, a lance, and a dagger; also three
+      complete suits of clothes, two of them for ordinary wear, and one for
+      state occasions. The next day Gervaise took the oaths of the Order in the
+      Church of St. John. The aged master himself received the vows, and
+      formally inducted him as a professed knight of the Order, Peter D'Aubusson
+      and the bailiff of the English langue acting as his sponsors, vouching
+      that he was of noble blood and in all ways fitted to become a knight of
+      Justice, this being the official title of the professed knights of the
+      Order. Ten newly arrived novices were inducted at the same time, and the
+      ceremony was a stately one, attended by a number of the knights from each
+      langue, all in full armour.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The ceremony over, Gervaise bore the title of Sir Gervaise Tresham; but
+      this was an honorary rather than a real title, as the Order did not
+      profess to bestow the honour of knighthood, and it was usual for its
+      members to receive the accolade at the hands of secular knights. At the
+      conclusion of the ceremony, he returned with the bailiff of the English
+      langue to the auberge, and took up his quarters there. By his frequent
+      visits he was well known to all the members, and in a day or two felt as
+      much at home as he had done in the pages' room in the palace. A week was
+      given to him before he was assigned to any special duty, and he was glad
+      when he was told off as one of the knights who were to take their turn in
+      superintending the work of the slaves employed in strengthening the
+      fortifications, although he would rather that any other employment should
+      have been assigned to him, because he felt deep pity for the unfortunate
+      men who were engaged in the work.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      He knew well enough that if he himself were ever made prisoner by the
+      Turks, his lot would be as hard and as hopeless as that of the Moslem
+      captives; but this, although he often repeated it to himself in order to
+      abate his feeling of commiseration, was but a poor satisfaction. He saw
+      one side of the picture, and the other was hidden from him; and although
+      he told himself that after slaving in a Turkish galley he would feel a
+      satisfaction at seeing those who had been his tyrants suffering the same
+      fate, he was well aware that this would not be the case, and that his own
+      sufferings would only make him sympathise more deeply with those of
+      others. He had found, soon after his arrival on the Island, that it was
+      best to keep his feelings on this subject to himself. While the knights
+      were bound, in accordance with their vows, to relieve sufferings of any
+      kind among Christians, they seemed to regard their captives rather in the
+      light of brute beasts than human beings. The slaves were struck on the
+      smallest provocation, and even the killing of a slave was considered a
+      very venial offence, and punished only because the slave was of value to
+      the Order.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      It was true that edicts were from time to time published by the council,
+      enjoining fair treatment of slaves, and it was specially ordered that
+      those employed as servants in the auberges were not to be struck. The lot
+      of these servants was, indeed, very much easier than that of those engaged
+      on the public works, and such occupation was therefore considered a
+      privilege, the servants being for the most part selected from among the
+      captives of superior rank.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      For the next six months Gervaise worked at various duties in the town. He
+      was employed for a fortnight in the infirmary, then for a while he was
+      transferred to the galleys; but for the most part he was with the slaves
+      working on the fortifications. At the end of that time he was, to his
+      great delight, informed by the bailiff that he was one of the six knights
+      of the langue told off to join a galley that was on the point of sailing.
+      Among those going in her was Sir Ralph Harcourt, one of his companions on
+      the journey from England.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;So you are to go with us, Gervaise,&rdquo; the young knight said, &ldquo;to try your
+      luck for the first time against the infidels. This is my third voyage, and
+      I hope that it will be more fortunate than its predecessors, for, beyond
+      picking up two or three small craft, which did not venture upon
+      resistance, we gained neither honour nor booty. I regard you as having
+      specially good fortune, and besides being glad that we shall be together,
+      I expect that you will bring good luck to us, and that we shall meet with
+      foes worth contending with. The corsairs have been very active of late,
+      and have captured many prizes, while, on the other hand, our galleys have
+      been unfortunate, and have but seldom come upon the miscreants.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;How many knights will there be on board?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Forty. Aragon, like us, furnishes five, Germany ten, Portugal five,
+      Auvergne ten, and Provence five. We shall be commanded by Sir Louis
+      Ricord, a knight of Auvergne, and we could wish no better, for he has
+      proved himself a good seaman and a brave captain. Two other galleys are to
+      start with us. We are to cruise separately unless one gets news of a force
+      so superior that he will need aid to attack it, when he will meet the
+      others at a rendezvous agreed upon, and we shall work together.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Who are the other three Englishmen?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;John Boswell, Marmaduke Lumley, and Adam Tedbond&mdash;all, as you know,
+      brave knights and good companions.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      That evening Gervaise received a message from D'Aubusson, requesting him
+      to call at his auberge.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;So you are going to sea, Sir Gervaise? I hear from your bailiff that you
+      have been working to his satisfaction in the town.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Yes, sir. I shall indeed be glad to change it for a life at sea. In
+      truth, it is grievous to me to witness the sufferings of the slaves, and I
+      would rather do any other work.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;They are far better off than the Christians who fall into the hands of
+      the Turks,&rdquo; the bailiff said; &ldquo;and, moreover, it is because their
+      countrymen are preparing to attack us that we are forced to use their
+      labour in strengthening our fortifications. They have naught to complain
+      of in the way of food. Still, I would myself gladly see their lot
+      alleviated; but we could not afford to keep so great a number of captives
+      in idleness; they must work for their living. Had it not been for their
+      labour we could never have built and fortified the city. After all, they
+      are little worse off than our serfs at home; they build our castles and
+      till our land.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It may be so, sir; but with us in England men are free, and it was, when
+      I first came, strange to me to see them working under the fear of the
+      whip. It is necessary, I know, that such work should be done, but I own
+      that I shall be glad to be away from the sight of the poor wretches,
+      pirates and enemies of the faith though they be.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I can understand your feelings, and I too felt somewhat the same when I
+      first came here. Nevertheless, there is work that must be done if the
+      Order is not to be crushed by the infidels. Here are captives, for the
+      most part malefactors, who have to be fed; and there is no injustice in
+      their having, like all men, to give work for food. I have learnt to see
+      this and recognise the necessity, though I would that the work could be
+      obtained without the use of harshness and severity. We ourselves are
+      prepared at any moment to sacrifice our lives for the good of the Order
+      and for the great cause, and it would be wrong, nay, sinful, not to use
+      the means that have been placed ready to our hand. Now, Sir Gervaise, I
+      wish you a pleasant voyage. You will find the life somewhat hard, after
+      your three years' residence at the palace, but this I know you will not
+      mind. I have specially commended you to Ricord as one in whom I am
+      personally interested, and from whom I hope great things in the future. Be
+      brave; be resolute. From what you have said I need not say&mdash;be
+      merciful. Fulfill all orders promptly and without question; bear yourself
+      courteously to all; above all things, remember that you are a soldier, not
+      only of the Order, but of the Cross.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The next day Gervaise embarked with his companions on board the galley. It
+      was a long, low boat, similar to those in use by the Venetians and
+      Genoese. It was rowed by fifty slaves, who slept at night on or beneath
+      the benches they sat on by day. The knights occupied the great cabins in
+      the poop. There were two tiers of these; the upper one contained the
+      little cabin of the commander, while the rest of the space on this deck,
+      and that below it, was used by the knights in common. In the upper cabin
+      they took their meals, and a third of their number slept there, the
+      remainder in the cabin below. A fourth of their number were, however,
+      always on guard, lest any attempt at a rising or escape should be made by
+      the galley slaves.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      On leaving the harbour the galley, with its two consorts, rowed north, and
+      Gervaise learnt that they were to cruise between the mainland and the
+      islands. Some of these were in the hands of the Turks, while others were
+      still occupied by Greeks.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Except when there was a formal and actual state of war, the Moslem and
+      Christian islands remained in a state of neutrality, trading with each
+      other and avoiding all unfriendly proceedings that would lead to struggles
+      which would be fatal to the prosperity of both. The Archipelago, and
+      indeed the whole of the eastern portion of the Mediterranean, was infested
+      by pirates, fitted out, for the most part, on the mainland. These, when in
+      force, openly kept the sea, attacking the Christian merchant ships, but
+      when cruising alone they hid in unfrequented bays, or behind uninhabited
+      islets, until they could pounce upon a passing ship whose size promised an
+      easy capture. The Order of St. John furnished a maritime police, earning
+      thereby the deep gratitude of Spain, France, and Italy. They were aided
+      occasionally by the Venetians, but these, being frequently engaged in
+      quarrels with their neighbours, did but a small share of this work, only
+      sending their fleets to sea when danger threatened some of their
+      possessions in the Levant.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;This is delightful, Ralph,&rdquo; Gervaise said, as they stood together on the
+      poop, looking back at the receding city.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;What a pleasant change it is from standing in the broiling sun watching
+      those poor wretches toiling at the fortifications! There is only one
+      drawback to my pleasure. I wish that we carried sails, and were moved
+      along by the breeze, instead of by the exertions of the slaves.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Much chance we should have of catching a pirate under such
+      circumstances!&rdquo; Ralph said, laughing. &ldquo;You might as well set a tortoise to
+      catch a hare.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I don't say that we should not be obliged to carry rowers, Ralph; but all
+      the prizes that have been brought in since I have been at Rhodes carry
+      masts and sails, as well as oars, and, as I understand, for the most part
+      cruise about under sail, and only use the oars when chasing or fleeing.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;That is so; because, you see, in most cases the crew themselves have to
+      row, and I have no doubt if we had no slaves to do the work we should soon
+      take to masts and sails also; but for speed the rowing galleys are the
+      best, for unless a brisk wind were blowing, the mast and sails would but
+      check her progress when the oars were out, and at any rate constrain her
+      to travel only before the wind. I know your weakness about the slaves,
+      Gervaise; but as we could neither build our fortifications nor row our
+      galleys without them, I cannot go as far as you do in the matter, though I
+      own that I am sometimes sorry for them. But you must remember that it is
+      the fault of their people, and not of ours, that they are here.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;All that is true enough, Ralph, and I cannot gainsay you. Still I would
+      rather that we were gliding along with sails instead of being rowed by
+      slaves.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;At any rate, Gervaise, you will not see them ill treated, for I myself
+      heard Ricord, just before we were starting, tell the slave overseers that
+      so long as the rowers did fair work they were not to use their whips, and
+      that only if we were in chase of a pirate were they to be urged to their
+      utmost exertions.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I am right glad to hear it, Ralph, and shall be able to enjoy the voyage
+      all the more, now you have told me that such orders have been issued.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      For a fortnight they cruised about among the islands. Several times boats
+      rowed out from the shore to the galley with complaints of outrages by
+      pirates under a notorious corsair named Hassan Ali, who had landed, burnt
+      villages, killed many of the inhabitants, and carried off the rest as
+      slaves; but no one could give any clue to aid them in their search for the
+      corsairs. The time passed very pleasantly. There was no occasion for
+      speed; often they lay all day in some bay, where they could approach near
+      enough to the shore to lie in the shade of trees, while two or three of
+      the knights ascended a hill and kept watch there for the appearance of any
+      vessels of a suspicious character. One morning, after passing the night at
+      anchor, Harcourt and Gervaise were despatched just before sunrise to take
+      a look round before the galley got under way. From the top of the hill
+      they had an uninterrupted view of the sea, studded with islands on all
+      sides of them. Beyond a few fishing boats, looking like black specks on
+      the glassy surface, no craft were in sight. They were about to return to
+      the galley when, taking a last look round, Gervaise suddenly exclaimed,
+      &ldquo;Look, Ralph! There is smoke ascending from that island to the southwest.
+      There was none just now.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;You mean from that bay, Gervaise? Yes, I see it; it is not more than a
+      light mist.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It is growing thicker,&rdquo; Gervaise said, &ldquo;and spreading. Maybe it is but a
+      hut that has accidentally caught fire, but it seems to me that the smoke
+      is rising from several points.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I think you are right, Gervaise. Let us hurry down with the news. It may
+      be that it is a village which has been attacked by pirates who have landed
+      on the other side of the island during the night, for I can see no ships
+      in the bay.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      A few minutes' run and they stood on the shore.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Quick, men!&rdquo; Ralph said to the rowers of the boat that had brought them
+      ashore. &ldquo;Row your hardest.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The slaves bent to their oars, and they were soon alongside the galley,
+      which lay two or three hundred yards from the shore. Those on board had
+      noticed the young knights running down the hill, and, marking the speed at
+      which the boat was rowing, concluded at once that they must have observed
+      one of the pirate's ships.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Do you see anything of them, Sir Ralph?&rdquo; the commander shouted, as they
+      came close.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;We have seen no ships, Sir Louis, but there is smoke coming up from a bay
+      in an island four or five miles away to the southwest. It seems to us that
+      it is far too extensive a fire to be the result of an accident, for there
+      was no smoke until within two or three minutes of the time we left, and
+      before we started it was rising from several points, and we both think
+      that it must come from a village that has been attacked by pirates.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The commander rapidly issued his orders, and in two or three minutes the
+      anchor was weighed, the boat hoisted on deck, and the oars in motion.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Stretch to your oars!&rdquo; Ricord shouted to the slaves. &ldquo;Hitherto we have
+      exacted no toil from you, but you have to work now, and woe be to him who
+      does not put out his full strength.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Grateful for the unusual leniency with which they had been treated, the
+      slaves bent to their oars, and the galley sped rapidly through the water.
+      On rounding the end of the island there was an exclamation of satisfaction
+      from the knights as they saw wreaths of white smoke rising from the
+      distant island.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;There can be no doubt that it is a village in flames,&rdquo; Sir Louis said;
+      &ldquo;and from the suddenness with which it broke out, it is clear that it must
+      have been fired at several points. You say you saw no craft near?&rdquo; he
+      asked, turning to Harcourt.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;There were none there, or from the top of the hill we should assuredly
+      have made them out, Sir Louis.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Then the pirates&mdash;if this be, as I hope, their work&mdash;must have
+      landed at some other point on the island, and if they catch sight of us
+      they may make for their ship and slip away, unobserved by us. Instead of
+      rowing direct, therefore, we will make for that islet to the right, and
+      row round behind it. There are two others almost adjoining it. Once past
+      these, 'tis not more than half a mile to that island stretching away
+      south. Once round that, we shall be beyond the one from which we see the
+      smoke rising, and can come down on its southern side. The course will be
+      double the distance that it would be if we took a straight line, but
+      except when we cross from island to island we shall not be exposed to
+      their view, and may fall upon their ships before the crews have returned
+      from their work of plunder.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The knights fully agreed, and orders were given to the helmsman
+      accordingly.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;We must not over fatigue the rowers,&rdquo; the commander said. &ldquo;We may have a
+      long chase if they have started before we get round.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      He therefore gave orders to the slaves that, while they were to exert
+      themselves to the utmost when crossing the open sea, they were to relax
+      their efforts and to row within their strength while coasting along behind
+      the islands. On board, everything was made in readiness for a fight: the
+      knights buckled on their armour, the cooks set cauldrons of pitch over the
+      fire, the cannoneers loaded her eight guns. It was an hour and a half
+      after their start before they rounded the end of the last island. It
+      extended a little farther to the south than did that to which they were
+      making, and as they rounded the point, eager looks were cast in search of
+      the pirate ships. No craft were, however, to be seen.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;They must be in some bay or inlet,&rdquo; the commander said; &ldquo;they can hardly
+      have left, for it would have taken them half an hour at least to cross the
+      island with their booty and captives, and even if they made straight away
+      after having fired the village, their ship could have gone no great
+      distance, for we must have seen her if she put to sea&mdash;unless indeed
+      they were anchored on the east of the island, and have sailed in that
+      direction.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Keep them rowing along steadily,&rdquo; he said to the overseers of the slaves;
+      &ldquo;but do not press them too hard. We may have a chase yet, and need all
+      their strength, for most of these pirates are fast craft, and if they
+      should get a start of three or four miles, it will be a long row before we
+      catch them.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      They made straight for the island, and on nearing it coasted along its
+      southern side. It was some three miles long, the shore being for the most
+      part steep, but here and there falling gradually to the water's edge. Two
+      or three little clusters of houses could be seen as they rowed along; one
+      of these was on fire.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;That is good,&rdquo; Sir Louis exclaimed, as, on turning a point, they saw the
+      flames. &ldquo;That cannot have been lighted long, and we are pretty certain to
+      come upon the vessels before the marauders have set sail.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Several inlets and small bays were passed, but all were empty. A few
+      fishing boats lay on the shore, but there were no signs of life, as no
+      doubt the people would, long since, have taken alarm and sought shelter in
+      the woods. There was a sharp point just before they reached the
+      southeastern extremity of the island, and as the galley shot past this, a
+      shout of exultation rose from the knights, for, near the mouth of an inlet
+      that now opened to their view, there lay four long, low vessels, above
+      each of which floated the Moslem flag. A number of men were gathered on
+      the shore near the ships, and heavily laden boats were passing to and fro.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      A yell of rage and alarm rose from the ships as the galley came into view.
+      There was a stir and movement on the shore, and numbers of men leapt into
+      the boats there, and started for the ships. These were some quarter of a
+      mile away when first seen, and half that distance had been traversed when
+      a puff of smoke shot out from the side of one of them, followed almost
+      immediately by a general discharge of their cannon. One ball tore along
+      the waist of the galley, killing six of the rowers, and several oars on
+      both sides were broken. Two balls passed through the cabins in the poop.
+      But there was no pause in the advance of the galley. The whips of the
+      slave masters cracked, and the rowers whose oars were intact strained at
+      them. There was no reply from the guns, but the knights raised loud the
+      war cry of the Order, a war cry that was never heard without striking a
+      thrill of apprehension among their Moslem foes.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      As they neared the pirate ships, the helm was put down, and the galley
+      brought up alongside the largest of them and a broadside poured into her;
+      then the knights, headed by their commander, leapt on to her deck.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Although a number of the crew had not yet come off from shore, the Moslems
+      still outnumbered their assailants, and, knowing that their consorts would
+      soon come to their aid, they threw themselves in a body on the Christians.
+      But in a hand-to-hand conflict like this, the knights of the Hospital were
+      irresistible. Protected by their armour and long shields from the blows of
+      their enemies' scimitars and daggers, their long, cross handled swords
+      fell with irresistible force on turbaned head and coat-of-mail, and,
+      maintaining regular order and advancing like a wall of steel along the
+      deck, they drove the Moslems before them, and the combat would soon have
+      terminated had not a shout been raised by one of the overseers of the
+      slaves. One of the other ships had rowed alongside the galley, and the
+      crew were already leaping on board it. At the same moment another ship
+      came up alongside that they had boarded, while the fourth was maneuvering
+      to bring up under her stern.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Sir John Boswell,&rdquo; Sir Louis shouted, &ldquo;do you and your countrymen, with
+      the knights of Spain, finish with these miscreants; knights of Germany and
+      Provence keep back the boarders; knights of Auvergne follow me,&rdquo; and he
+      leapt down into the galley.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The English and Spanish knights redoubled their exertions. The Moslems
+      endeavoured to rally, seeing that help was at hand, and that but a small
+      body were now opposed to them, but their numbers availed little. The ten
+      knights kept their line, and, hewing their way forward, pressed them so
+      hotly that the Turks broke and sprang over the bulwarks into the sea. Then
+      the knights looked round. A fierce fight was going on between those of
+      Germany and Provence and the enemy, who strove desperately to board from
+      the ship alongside. The other vessel was now almost touching the stern,
+      and her crew were swarming to her side in readiness to leap on board as
+      soon as the vessels touched.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;We will keep them at bay there,&rdquo; Sir John Boswell shouted. &ldquo;Do you, Don
+      Pedro, and your comrades, aid Ricord. When his foes are finished with, you
+      can come back to help us.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Then, with the four English knights, he ran along the deck, and reached
+      the stern just in time to hurl backwards the Moslems, who had already
+      obtained a footing. For a time the five knights kept back the surging mass
+      of their foes. The deck was wide enough for each to have fair play for his
+      sword, and in vain the pirates strove to obtain a footing.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      At last Sir Marmaduke Lumley fell, severely wounded by an arrow from a
+      Moslem marksman, and before the others could close the gap a score of
+      pirates leapt on to the deck.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Fall back, comrades, fall back; but keep together!&rdquo; Sir John Boswell
+      shouted, as he cleft the skull of one of the pirate officers who sprang at
+      him. &ldquo;Sir Louis will soon finish his work, and be here to our aid. Ah!&rdquo; he
+      exclaimed, looking over his shoulder, as he retired a step, &ldquo;Provence and
+      Germany are overmatched too.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      This was indeed the case. Stoutly as they fought the knights were unable
+      to guard the whole of the line of bulwark, and the Moslems had already
+      obtained a footing on the deck. The discipline of the knights stood them
+      in good stead. Drawing closely together as they retreated, they made a
+      stand on the opposite side of the deck, and were here joined by Sir John
+      Boswell and his companions. They now formed a semicircle, each flank
+      resting on the bulwark, and the pirates in vain endeavoured to break their
+      line. Again and again they flung themselves upon the knights, only to be
+      beaten off with heavy loss. At length a loud cheer arose from the galley,
+      and Sir Louis Ricord, with the knights of Auvergne and Spain having
+      cleared the galley of their foes, and carried the pirate that had grappled
+      with her, sprang on to the deck of the ship, and fell upon the throng that
+      were attacking the knights there, oblivious of what was going on
+      elsewhere. At once the English knights and their comrades took the
+      offensive, and fell upon their assailants who, at the sight of the
+      reinforcement, for a moment stood irresolute. For a short time there was a
+      fierce struggle; then the pirates sprang back to their two ships, and
+      endeavoured to cast off the grapnels. But the knights followed hotly upon
+      them, and, panic stricken now, the pirates sprang overboard. Many were
+      drowned, but the greater part managed to swim to shore.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      <a name="link2HCH0005" id="link2HCH0005">
+      <!--  H2 anchor --> </a>
+    </p>
+    <div style="height: 4em;">
+      <br /><br /><br /><br />
+    </div>
+    <h2>
+      CHAPTER V SCOURGES OF THE SEA
+    </h2>
+    <p>
+      Breathless and faint from their tremendous exertions, the knights removed
+      their helmets.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;By St. Mary,&rdquo; Sir Louis said, &ldquo;this has been as hard a fight as I have
+      ever been engaged in, and well may we be content with our victory! Well
+      fought, my brave comrades! Each of these vessels must have carried twice
+      our number at least, and we have captured four of them; but I fear the
+      cost has been heavy.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Seven knights had fallen, struck down by sword, arrow, or thrust of spear.
+      Of the rest but few had escaped unwounded, for, strong as was their
+      armour, the keen Damascus blades of the Moslems had in many cases cut
+      clean through it, and their daggers had found entry at points where the
+      armour joined; and, now that the fight was over, several of the knights
+      sank exhausted on the deck from loss of blood.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      But the dressing of wounds formed part of a knight of St. John's training.
+      Those who were unwounded unbuckled the armour and bandaged the wounds.
+      Others fetched wine and water from the galley. The chains of the galley
+      slaves were removed, and these were set to clear the decks of the Moslem
+      corpses. The anchors were dropped, for what little wind there was drifted
+      them towards the shore. They had learned from a dying pirate that the
+      vessels were part of the fleet of Hassan Ali, a fact that added to the
+      satisfaction felt by the knights at their capture, as this man was one of
+      the most dreaded pirates of the Levant. They learnt that he himself had
+      not been present, the expedition being under the command of one of his
+      lieutenants, who had fallen in the fight.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Now, comrades, let us in the first place take food; we have not broken
+      our fast this morning. Then let us consider what had best be done, for
+      indeed we have got as much in our hands as we can manage; but let us leave
+      that till we eat and drink, for we are faint from want of food and from
+      our exertions. But we shall have to eat what comes to hand, and that
+      without cooking, for our servants all joined the pirates when they boarded
+      us, and are either dead or are ashore there.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      A meal was made of bread and fruit, and this with wine sufficed to recruit
+      their energies.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It seems to me, comrades,&rdquo; Sir Louis said, when all had finished, &ldquo;that
+      the first thing is to search the holds of these vessels and see what
+      valuables are stored there. These may be all carried on board one ship,
+      and the others must be burnt, for it is clear that, as there are four of
+      them, we cannot take them to Rhodes; and even with one and our galley we
+      should fare but ill, if we fell in with two or three more of Hassan's
+      ships.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;But how about the pirates on shore, Sir Louis?&rdquo; a knight asked. &ldquo;There
+      were very many who could not get off to their ships during the fight, and
+      scores must have swum ashore. I should say that there must be full two
+      hundred, and it will be a grievous thing for the islanders if we leave
+      them there.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It is certain,&rdquo; the commander said, &ldquo;that we are not strong enough to
+      attack them, for were we to land, a party would have to be left on board,
+      or the pirates might elude our search, seize some fishing boats, and
+      regain possession. Certainly, we are in no position to divide our forces.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Methinks,&rdquo; Sir John Boswell said, &ldquo;that the best plan would be to send a
+      boat, manned with ten galley slaves, taking two or three of us to the
+      rendezvous, to fetch hither the other two galleys. With their aid we might
+      take all the four ships safe into port, after first clearing the island of
+      these pirates. It is but forty miles away, and eight hours' rowing would
+      take us there.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      There was a general murmur of assent, for all wished that the trophies of
+      their bravery should, if possible, be carried to Rhodes.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;That will certainly be the best plan, Sir John, though it may detain us
+      here for two or three days, or even more, for it is quite uncertain when
+      the other two galleys may put in at the rendezvous. Will you yourself
+      undertake the mission?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;With pleasure.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;How many will you take with you?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Two will be sufficient, for we shall have no fighting to do, as we shall
+      have to trust to our speed if we fall in with an enemy. I will take, with
+      your permission, Sir Ralph Harcourt and Sir Gervaise Tresham, both of whom
+      have today fought with distinguished bravery. Indeed, I owe my life to
+      them, for more than once, when I was hotly pressed, they freed me from my
+      assailants. Truly none bore themselves better in the fray than they did.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Three or four others joined in hearty commendations of the two young
+      knights.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Indeed,&rdquo; one said, &ldquo;I was greatly surprised to see how Tresham bore
+      himself. He is but a lad, with scarce, one would think, strength to hold
+      his own in such a fray. It chanced that he was next to me in the circle,
+      and for a time I kept my eye on him, thinking he might require my aid; but
+      I soon saw that I need not trouble myself on his account, for he wielded
+      his weapon as doughtily as the best knight of the Order could have done,
+      and one of the proofs is that, while most of us bear marks of the
+      conflict, he has escaped without scratch. I trust, Sir Louis, that when
+      you give an account of the fighting you will specially mention that this,
+      the youngest knight of the Order, bore himself as stoutly as any of them.
+      I say this, Sir John, because, not being of your langue, I can speak more
+      warmly than you can do of his skill and bravery.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I thank you, De Boysey,&rdquo; Sir John Boswell said, &ldquo;and I am proud that my
+      young countryman should have so gained your approbation. And now,&rdquo; he went
+      on, &ldquo;while the galley slaves are getting a meal&mdash;which they have
+      right well earned today&mdash;I should like to see what there is under the
+      hatches of these ships, so that I can give our comrades in the other
+      galleys some idea of the value of this booty we have taken.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      They rose from the table, and, going on board the prizes, lifted the
+      hatches.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Beware!&rdquo; De Boysey exclaimed, looking down into the hold, when the first
+      hatch was taken off. &ldquo;There are people below.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      A chorus of cries followed his exclamation.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;They are the voices of women and children,&rdquo; Sir Louis exclaimed. &ldquo;They
+      must be captives.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      This turned out to be so. In the holds of the four ships were found over a
+      hundred and fifty women and children; these had been brought on board in
+      the first boat loads by the pirates, and when the Christian galley had
+      been seen coming round the point, had been thrust below, and the hatches
+      thrown over them. They had heard the din of battle above, but knew not how
+      the conflict had terminated, and, being afraid to cry out, had remained
+      silent until, on the hatch being lifted, they had seen the figures of
+      Christian knights standing in the bright sunshine. All had come from the
+      village on the other side of the island. They related how the pirates had
+      suddenly burst upon them, had slaughtered all the men, set fire to the
+      village, and had driven them before them across the island to the ships.
+      The poor creatures were delighted at their escape from slavery, but at the
+      same time were full of grief at the loss of husbands, fathers, and sons.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Some laughed, others cried; while some thanked God for their rescue others
+      heaped imprecations upon the authors of their misfortunes.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The knights explained to them that for a short time they must remain on
+      board, as half the pirates were still on shore, but that aid would soon
+      arrive that would enable them to clear the island.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Half an hour later Sir John Boswell, with the two young knights, started
+      in a rowing boat, manned by ten of the galley slaves. The wind had sprung
+      up since the fight ceased, and as it was nearly astern, they anticipated
+      that they would make a good passage, and be at the little islet, named as
+      the place of rendezvous, before nightfall.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Among the many bales of rich merchandise in the hold of the pirate vessels
+      an abundance of wine had been discovered, and of this a tankard had been
+      given to each of the slaves, by Sir Louis's orders, as a token of
+      satisfaction at their work in the morning.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      They had gone some two miles when, from one of the inlets in the island
+      they had left a large fishing boat was seen to issue out.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;By St. George!&rdquo; Sir John exclaimed, &ldquo;that boat must be full of pirates.
+      And if they see us, which they cannot help doing, and take it in their
+      heads to chase us, we shall have a hard time of it.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The fishing boat for a few minutes kept along the coast, and then suddenly
+      her course was altered, and her head directed towards their boat.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Now stretch to your oars,&rdquo; Sir John, who spoke some Turkish, said to the
+      slaves. &ldquo;Keep ahead of that boat, and I promise you, on my honour as a
+      Christian knight, that I will myself purchase your freedom as soon as we
+      get to Rhodes.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      With a shout of delight, the galley slaves bent to their oars, and the
+      boat flew along at a greatly increased speed.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;There is but small chance of our getting away,&rdquo; Sir John said quietly.
+      &ldquo;At present we must be rowing as fast as they sail; but wind never tires,
+      while there are limits to the powers of muscle and bone. If those fellows
+      follow us&mdash;and I doubt not that they will, for they must be thirsting
+      for vengeance&mdash;they will overtake us long before we get to the
+      rendezvous; and even did we reach it, the chances are that we should not
+      find either of the galleys there. We must hold on as long as we can, and
+      as a last resource must run ashore. Unfortunately there are no large
+      islands on our way. Nor have we any hope of assistance from our friends
+      behind. The inlet looks east, and they will know nothing of our danger;
+      nor, if they did, could they help us. The galley is short handed now, and
+      there are the captured ships to look after, and the captives we rescued.
+      We have only ourselves to depend on.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      At the end of an hour's rowing the boat astern had gained little; but the
+      exertions of the rowers were telling severely upon them. They were still
+      doing their best, but their breath came in short gasps, the rowing was
+      getting short and unsteady, and there was a sensible decrease in the speed
+      of the boat. Three miles ahead of them was an islet about half a mile in
+      diameter. In some parts it was covered with foliage, but elsewhere it was
+      bare rock.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;That must be our goal,&rdquo; Sir John said. &ldquo;They will be close to us by the
+      time we get there.&rdquo; Then he said to the rowers, &ldquo;Stop for a minute to get
+      breath. We will land at that islet ahead, and I shall hold to my promise
+      if we get there in time. Those of you who like can remain in the boat
+      until your countrymen come up; those who choose can leave the boat and
+      hide yourselves as best you may. I leave the choice to yourselves. If we
+      are overtaken and fall, I cannot keep my promise, and it will be best then
+      for you to remain in the boat.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      For three or four minutes the slaves bent forward over their oars; but as
+      soon as Sir John gave the word they straightened themselves up and began
+      rowing again. The rest had done them good, and they again fell into a
+      long, steady stroke.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Shall we buckle on our armour again?&rdquo; Sir Ralph Harcourt asked; for they
+      had not put it on when they left the ship, as the heat was very great.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I think we had better don our mail shirts only. In climbing about that
+      rock ahead of us, the less weight we carry the better, and with this heat
+      I would rather fight unprotected than in casque and armour. Besides, there
+      can be little doubt that, if they come upon us, it will be our last
+      battle. That craft behind is crowded with men, and, armour or no armour,
+      it will come to the same in the end. If it were not that we have a mission
+      to fulfil, and that it is of all things important to send the galleys to
+      aid our friends, I would say let us choose a spot at the foot of the rocks
+      there, where they cannot attack us in the rear, and there fight it out as
+      becomes knights of the Cross; but as it is our duty above all things to
+      carry this message, we must strive to preserve our lives, and must, if we
+      can, conceal ourselves from these paynims.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;What are you going to do?&rdquo; Sir John asked the slaves, when they were
+      within a quarter of a mile of the islet. &ldquo;I should think, after we have
+      left the boat, it will be best for you to sit quietly on your benches till
+      our pursuers arrive.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;They would cut our throats at once, Sir Knight; they will be furious at
+      our having given them so long a chase. Hassan Ali's men care little whom
+      they slay, and, irritated by their misfortune, it will be naught to them
+      whether we are Moslem or Christian. I, for one, shall take to the woods,
+      and hide.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      There was a chorus of assent among the other rowers.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I trust that you may escape,&rdquo; the knight said. &ldquo;It is for us they will be
+      hunting, and if they catch and slay us they will not trouble to search the
+      island further.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It seems to me, Sir John,&rdquo; Gervaise said, &ldquo;that with the aid of these
+      good fellows we may yet have a chance of escape.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;What is your plan, Sir Gervaise?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I think, Sir John, that if, when we land, we climb straight up that hill,
+      in full sight of the shore, the pirates, when they see us, will follow at
+      once. The slaves should, therefore, be safe for a time if they hide in
+      that wood to the left of the spot we are making for. Will you tell them to
+      keep down by the water's edge among the bushes, and that after crossing
+      that crest, we will try to make a dash round, so as to join them there.
+      'Tis probable that most of the pirates will start in pursuit of us, and if
+      we and the slaves make a rush for the shore we may seize our boat, push
+      off, and capture their craft, if there are but a few left on board, knock
+      out a plank and scuttle her, and then row away.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;By St. George, your plan is a good one, Tresham! A right good scheme, and
+      we will try it.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      He at once translated what Gervaise had said to the rowers, by whom it was
+      received with short exclamations of approval, for they were too breathless
+      and exhausted for talk. Already they could hear the yells of the pirates,
+      who, as the boat ran up on the beach were but a quarter of a mile behind.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Now, away for that wood!&rdquo; Sir John cried, as he leapt ashore. &ldquo;Now,
+      comrades, for a climb up the hill!&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      It was a steep ascent, and more than once one had to be helped up by the
+      others, and then in turn to assist them to get up beside him. Louder and
+      louder rose the shouts of the pirates, but the knights did not glance back
+      until they reached the top of the hill; then they turned and looked round.
+      A swarm of men were climbing after them, and were already halfway up the
+      cliff.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Heave them down!&rdquo; Sir John exclaimed, pointing to some loose rocks, and
+      set the example by lifting a great stone and hurling it over the edge.
+      Harcourt and Gervaise at once did the same, and twenty or thirty rocks
+      were speedily sent rolling down the steep ascent, and yells, shouts, and
+      cries were heard below.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;That will check them a bit. Now let us be off,&rdquo; Sir John Boswell said,
+      and they at once started. After crossing a hundred yards of bare rock they
+      stood at the edge of another slope into a deep valley, beyond which rose
+      the central hill of the island. The valley ran right across, and was
+      filled with trees extending to the sea at either end. Running rapidly
+      down, the knights were within the shelter of the wood before the Moslems
+      had reached the brow behind them. A minute later they heard the shouts of
+      their enemies. Once in the wood they turned to the left, and in a few
+      minutes stood on the sea shore. It was a little bay some two hundred yards
+      across, and at either point the cliffs rose abruptly from the water.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;We shall have to swim round the point,&rdquo; Sir John said.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Take off your mail shirts. We will make our way along the rocks as far as
+      we can, and then drop them into the sea, otherwise they will know that we
+      have taken to the water.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      They hurried along the rocks, and were able to make their way to within
+      fifty yards of the point; then, throwing their mail shirts into the sea,
+      they plunged in. All knew the importance of getting round before any of
+      the pirates, who would be searching the valley, came down on the shore,
+      and they swam their hardest until they rounded the corner. The wood rang
+      with the shouts of their pursuers, but no yell had risen from the water's
+      edge. A hundred yards farther, and they were able to land, and were in a
+      short time in the shelter of the trees that fringed the water to the point
+      where they had left the boat. There was no longer any occasion for speed,
+      and they made their way through the thick bushes and undergrowth quietly,
+      until they recovered breath after their exertions. They had gone a few
+      hundreds yards when from the bushes the slaves suddenly rose up.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;All has gone well,&rdquo; Sir John said to them in their own language. &ldquo;The
+      pirates are searching for us on the other side of the hill. There are not
+      likely to be many of them left here. We shall soon be in possession of our
+      boat again.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Followed by the slaves, they made their way forward until they stood at
+      the edge of the wood. Five or six pirates were standing on the shore.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I expect they have been left there,&rdquo; Harcourt said, &ldquo;to prevent the
+      slaves from carrying off the boat. They must have seen them run into the
+      wood. They won't reckon on our being with them.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Drawing their swords, the three knights rushed out, followed by the
+      slaves. They had but a hundred yards to run. The pirates, on seeing them,
+      raised a yell and drew their scimitars; but the sight of the knights
+      rushing upon them, when they had expected but a few unarmed rowers, was
+      too much for their courage, and when their assailants were still fifty
+      yards away they turned and fled. The fishing craft had been run ashore but
+      a few yards from their boat.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Get her afloat, Harcourt, and bring her to the stern of the fisherman.
+      Now, Tresham, follow me.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Sir John Boswell climbed up on to the fishing boat, which was a craft of
+      some fifteen tons burden. She was entirely deserted, but the sail still
+      hung from the yard, and a fire was burning on a stone hearth, raised on
+      some logs of wood in the centre of the deck.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Look for something to stave in a plank, Tresham.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise leapt down into the hold. There were some nets and spare sails
+      lying there, but nothing that would answer the purpose. He examined the
+      planks. The boat was very strongly and roughly built.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;There is nothing here, Sir John, that will do, and nothing short of a
+      heavy sledge hammer would suffice to smash one of these planks.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;There are a lot of them coming down the hill, Tresham. We have not many
+      minutes to spare, but we must disable the craft. They will soon be after
+      us again; they have run her hard and fast here, but when they all come
+      back they will soon get her off. Let us try one of these sweeps.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      He lifted one of the heavy oars, and holding it upright he and Gervaise
+      together tried to drive the handle through the bottom. Again and again
+      they raised it and drove it down; but the plank was too strong, and too
+      securely fastened to the timbers.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;We must give it up,&rdquo; the knight said, with a sigh. &ldquo;Fortune has
+      befriended us so far, Tresham, but she has deserted us at last. Another
+      three minutes, and we shall have thirty or forty of them upon us.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      At this moment the lad's eye fell upon the fire.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;We shall manage yet,&rdquo; he exclaimed, and, seizing a blazing brand, he
+      jumped below and set fire to the sails stowed there; they were as dry as
+      tinder, and the flame shot up at once.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;That is good, Tresham,&rdquo; the knight said; &ldquo;but they will put it out before
+      it has caught the boat.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Not before it has burnt the sails,&rdquo; Gervaise replied. &ldquo;Now for this one,&rdquo;
+       and he applied the brand to the lower edge of the great sail. Without a
+      word Sir John seized another brand, and fired the sail on the other side
+      of the deck. The flames flashed up, and a wild yell of rage and alarm
+      broke from the pirates, who were now rushing down towards the beach.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Now to the boat, Tresham; we have no time to lose if we would avoid being
+      pounded with stones.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      They dropped over the stern into the boat. The galley slaves dipped their
+      oars into the water, and she shot away just as the foremost of the pirates
+      reached the edge of the water. A few stones were thrown; but the pirates
+      were so anxious about the craft, by which alone they could escape from the
+      island, that the majority at once climbed on board.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      At a word from the knight, the slaves stopped rowing a hundred yards from
+      the shore. The sail was already consumed, and the yard and the upper part
+      of the mast were in flames. A dense smoke was rising from the hold, and
+      the pirates were throwing buckets of water down into it. In a few minutes
+      the smoke decreased.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I thought that they would be able to put it out; but, as far as we are
+      concerned, it matters little. They have lost their sails, and as I saw but
+      four sweeps, we can travel five miles to their one. If we find the galleys
+      we will look in here on our way back, and if they have not left we will
+      fire that craft more effectually, and then the pirates will be trapped,
+      and we can leave them till we have fetched off Sir Louis and his prizes,
+      and then have a grand hunt here. We took no prisoners before, and a
+      hundred slaves will be a useful addition to our wall builders. Now,
+      Tresham, I have to thank you warmly, for Harcourt and I doubly owe our
+      lives to you. It was thanks to your quickness of wit that we regained our
+      boat, for I would not have given a ducat for our chances had you not
+      thought of that scheme. In the second place, we should assuredly have been
+      overtaken again had it not been for your happy thought of crippling them
+      by burning their sails. By St. George, Harcourt, this young countryman of
+      ours is as quick and as ready of wit as he has shown himself a brave and
+      gallant fighter! We have no lack of sturdy fighters; but the wit to devise
+      and to seize upon the right thing in the moment of danger is vastly more
+      rare. As for myself, I have no shame that this lad, who is young enough to
+      be my son, should have thus, twice in a single hour, pointed out the way
+      to safety. With sword and battleaxe I can, I trust, hold my own with any
+      man; but my brain is dull when it comes to hatching schemes. If we live,
+      we shall see Sir Gervaise one of the most distinguished knights of the
+      Order.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;While I feel gratified indeed, as I may well be by your commendation, Sir
+      John, I must, under your favour, say that you have given me a far greater
+      degree of credit than is my due. There was the fire, and there was the
+      sail, and the thought that the one would destroy the other was simply a
+      natural one, which might have occurred to a child. As to the plan about
+      the boat, seeing that there was the hill and the wood, it flashed upon me
+      at once that we might make a circuit and come back to her.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Just so, lad; but those thoughts did not flash upon my mind, nor upon
+      that of Harcourt. It is just because those sort of ideas do flash upon the
+      minds of some men, and not of others, that the first rise to the rank of
+      distinguished commanders, while the others remain simple knights who would
+      play their part in a charge or in the defence of a breach, but would be of
+      no account as leaders.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Now row along steadily, men,&rdquo; he went on, speaking to the slaves. &ldquo;We are
+      still in good time, for it was not an hour from the moment we touched the
+      island to our departure from it, and much of that time we have gained by
+      the speed with which you rowed before. At any rate, we shall make out the
+      island before sunset, and whether we arrive there a little sooner or later
+      matters little. Harcourt, hand me that wineskin and a goblet. A draught
+      will do us good after our climb and swim, and these good fellows will be
+      none the worse for a cup also.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Inspired with the hope of freedom, the slaves rowed steadily, and the sun
+      had just set when they entered a little inlet in the rocky isle that was
+      their place of rendezvous.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Thanks be to the saints!&rdquo; Sir John exclaimed, as they reached the
+      entrance. &ldquo;There is Santoval's galley.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      There was a stir on board the galley as the boat was seen approaching. The
+      knights had put on their armour, which they had found still lying in the
+      boat, the pirates, in their haste to pursue, having left her unexamined,
+      while those who had remained on guard had abstained from touching anything
+      until the return of their captain and comrades.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Whence come you, Sir John, and what is the news? No misfortune has
+      befallen Ricord's galley, I hope?&rdquo; the Spanish knight in command shouted,
+      as the boat came near enough for him to recognize the features of its
+      occupants.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;All is well,&rdquo; Sir John shouted back; &ldquo;but we have taken more prizes than
+      we can manage, though not without hard fighting. Seven knights have
+      fallen, and at least ten others will not be able to buckle their armour on
+      again for some time to come, so I have been sent here to beg your
+      assistance; and it is well that it should be given speedily, for if more
+      pirate vessels come up before you join, Ricord and his companions will be
+      in a sorry plight.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      By this time the boat had reached the side of the galley, and as Sir John
+      and his two companions stepped on board, the knights crowded round to hear
+      the details of the news. Exclamations of approval and satisfaction arose
+      when Sir John related the incidents of the fight, and told them that the
+      four vessels that had fallen into their hands formed part of Hassan Ali's
+      fleet.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;That is good news indeed, Boswell,&rdquo; Don Santoval said; &ldquo;and I would I had
+      been there to take part in so gallant a fight. It is well you found us
+      here, for with four prizes on hand, and with half his strength dead or
+      disabled, Ricord must be in sore need of aid. We will start tomorrow
+      morning at daybreak. As all the ships were taken, there is little fear of
+      any of the other pirates hearing news of what has happened.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I don't know,&rdquo; Sir John replied. &ldquo;There were, as I told you, some two
+      hundred pirates left on the island. About half those, we know, seized a
+      fishing boat and escaped, for they chased us, and we have had as narrow an
+      escape from death as has ever fallen to my lot, though I have been in over
+      a score of hard fought battles. The rest may well have taken another
+      fishing boat and made off also, for we saw several craft along the shores
+      of the island. If so, they may have made for Hassan Ali's rendezvous,
+      wherever that may be, just as I made here, and by this time some of his
+      ships may be on the way there.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;By St. Anthony, this alters the situation gravely!&rdquo; Don Santoval said.
+      &ldquo;Fellow knights, we must lose no time in going to Ricord's assistance. The
+      slaves have had a long row today, but they must start on another. Let them
+      have a good meal to strengthen them, and a cup of wine each. Whatever
+      their scruples at other times, they never refuse wine when there is heavy
+      work to be done, knowing full well that a draught of it helps them
+      mightily in their labours. Your men must have rowed well, Sir John, to
+      have brought you here so quickly?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I have promised them their freedom,&rdquo; Sir John said; &ldquo;and they shall have
+      it, even if I have to pay their value into the treasury. As I told you, we
+      were hotly pursued, for the craft with her sail went faster than we with
+      our oars; and, knowing the importance of bringing the news here, I
+      encouraged them by promising them their freedom, should we get away. Not
+      only did they row right manfully, but they proved faithful in our
+      extremity, and, when all seemed lost, stuck to us instead of deserting and
+      joining the pirates.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;But how did you get away, Sir John, if their craft outsailed you?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I owe my life entirely to the quick wit of my young countryman, Sir
+      Gervaise Tresham here.&rdquo; And Sir John then related the incidents of their
+      adventure on the island, his narrative eliciting warm expressions of
+      approval from the knights.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Of course, you will go with us, Boswell?&rdquo; Don Santoval said, when the
+      master of the slaves announced that these had eaten their meal, and were
+      ready.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I must do so,&rdquo; Sir John replied. &ldquo;I want you, on your way, to look in at
+      that island where we had so narrow an escape, and if we find their craft
+      still there we can destroy it. The place is directly in our course; we
+      shall, therefore, lose but little time in looking in. Of course, they may
+      have gone as soon as they got their vessel afloat, but it is hardly
+      likely. They would have no idea of my returning with a galley so soon, and
+      will probably set to to make a dozen more oars before they start, for she
+      had but four on board, which will scarce suffice to send her a mile an
+      hour through the water. Therefore, I fancy they will not put off until
+      tomorrow morning. If that is so, and we destroy their craft, they will be
+      trapped in the islet, and on our return we can capture them all. I think
+      of leaving Harcourt and Tresham in the boat, in order that when
+      Piccolomini's galley comes in, they may direct him also to join us.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;He may be in at any moment; we met him three days since. He had captured
+      a pirate, and sent her off under charge of ten of his knights. We agreed
+      to meet him this evening; and as he is not here, he will probably be in
+      the first thing in the morning.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise and Harcourt took their places in the boat again. The galley got
+      up its anchor and started. Just as she reached the mouth of the inlet
+      another galley rounded the point and nearly ran into her.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I am going to Ricord's assistance, Piccolomini,&rdquo; Don Santoval shouted.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Is it urgent?&rdquo; the commander of the galley shouted back. &ldquo;We have had a
+      very long row, and can go no farther, unless his strait is a very sore
+      one.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;No. Come on in the morning. You will hear all the news from a boat lying
+      two hundred yards astern. Two young English knights are waiting in her to
+      give you the news. Ricord has made a fine capture. Row on, men.&rdquo; And the
+      galley proceeded on her way, while the newcomer proceeded up the harbour.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Harcourt and Gervaise at once went on board, and the former gave the
+      Italian commander an account of the battle that had taken place, and the
+      capture of the four pirate vessels. After the exclamations of satisfaction
+      by the knights had ceased, he recounted their own adventures, which were
+      heard with lively interest.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I hope indeed that Santoval will burn that fishing boat, and that we
+      shall capture the pirates,&rdquo; the commander said. &ldquo;We have need of more
+      slaves to carry out the works at Rhodes. Now, let us to supper, gentlemen,
+      and then to sleep. In six hours we will be off again, for if some more of
+      these villains have escaped and carried the news to Hassan Ali, our swords
+      may be sorely needed by Ricord and Santoval tomorrow.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      <a name="link2HCH0006" id="link2HCH0006">
+      <!--  H2 anchor --> </a>
+    </p>
+    <div style="height: 4em;">
+      <br /><br /><br /><br />
+    </div>
+    <h2>
+      CHAPTER VI KNIGHTED
+    </h2>
+    <p>
+      At three in the morning all on board the galley were astir. A ration of
+      bread and meat was served out to the slaves, and the boat was soon
+      afterwards under way. The rowers of the English knight's boat had been
+      warmly commended by the commander and placed in charge of the overseer,
+      with instructions that they were to be treated as free men. As soon as the
+      galley slaves set to work, however, they seated themselves on the benches
+      and double banked some of the oars, anxious to please the knights. With
+      the exception of those whose turn it was to be on watch, most of the
+      knights slept until daybreak.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;At the rate we are rowing, Gervaise,&rdquo; Harcourt said, as they went up on
+      to the poop together, &ldquo;it will not take us very long to join our friends.
+      We are going through the water at fully six miles an hour; and as we have
+      already been two hours under way, in another three we shall be there.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      An hour and a half later they passed the island where they had landed. The
+      two young knights pointed out to the others the valley into which they had
+      descended, and the point round which they had swum. In a few minutes they
+      caught sight of the landing place.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Look, Gervaise, there is something black showing just above the water.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I see it. I think it is a line of timbers. There were certainly no rocks
+      there when we ran ashore.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Then Santoval must have found the craft still there and burnt her,&rdquo; one
+      of the knights standing by remarked, &ldquo;and the pirates are caged up. It
+      will take them some time to make a raft that will carry them to the next
+      island, and before they can do that we shall be back again. I shall be
+      sorry if they escape, for they are as ruthless a set of villains as sail
+      the seas.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The galley had traversed half the remaining distance when the sound of a
+      gun was faintly heard. For a moment there was an absolute hush on the
+      poop; then three or four shots in rapid succession were heard.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Some more pirate ships must have come up,&rdquo; the commander exclaimed. Then
+      he shouted down to the slaves, &ldquo;Row, men&mdash;row for your lives!
+      Overseer, do not spare your lash if any hang back from their work.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The galley had been travelling fast before, but her speed greatly
+      increased as the slaves rowed their hardest. Fast as she was travelling,
+      the impatience of the knights was extreme. They walked up and down the
+      deck, making vows of candles that should be burnt at the shrine of St.
+      John if they arrived in time to take a share in the fight, stopping at
+      times to listen to the sound of artillery, which was now so frequent as to
+      show that a severe engagement was being fought. Many of the younger
+      knights ran down to the waist and double banked the oars, and in a shorter
+      time than it seemed possible the galley arrived at the mouth of the bay.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      A desperate fight was going on. Ricord's ship lay, idle and deserted, at
+      anchor. Five pirate crafts surrounded Santoval's galley. Two of them were
+      alongside of her; the others were raking her fore and aft with their shot.
+      The young knights left the oars, sprang up to the poop and joined in the
+      shout of encouragement raised by the others, and then, resuming their
+      helmets and armour, stood ready to leap on board an enemy as soon as they
+      reached her. Piccolomini directed the helmsman to lay him alongside one of
+      the ships grappling with Santoval. As they came up, their galley's cannon
+      poured their fire into her, and a moment later the knights sprang on
+      board.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      In the din of battle their shout had been unheard. The pirates thronging
+      the other side of their ship were intent only on overcoming the resistance
+      of the knights, and even the discharge of cannon had not called their
+      attention to their foe, until the latter, shouting the war cry of the
+      Order, fell suddenly upon them. A panic at once seized them. Some were cut
+      down almost unresistingly, but the great majority, running to the bow or
+      stern, threw themselves overboard and swam to the other ships. The pirate
+      ship on the other side of Santoval's galley instantly threw off the
+      grapnels and thrust off from her side, and, immediately hauling in the
+      sheets of the big sail, began at once to draw away, while her three
+      consorts made for the mouth of the bay.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Back to your galley, comrades,&rdquo; Piccolomini shouted, &ldquo;or with this brisk
+      wind they will escape us.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The knights at once crossed on to their own craft, the oars were got out,
+      and the chase began. A minute or two later Don Santoval followed them, but
+      soon gave up, as so large a number of the oars had been broken when the
+      two pirate ships ran alongside him, that it would have been hopeless to
+      pursue. The wind was blowing freshly, and was rapidly increasing in
+      strength, so that, in spite of the efforts of the galley slaves, the
+      pirates gradually drew away, running straight before the wind, and aiding
+      the effects of the sails with oars. Seeing the hopelessness of the chase,
+      Piccolomini abandoned it, after rowing for two miles, and returned to the
+      island. The other two galleys were lying beside each other, and
+      Piccolomini had his craft steered alongside them.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Thanks, Piccolomini, for arriving so opportunely,&rdquo; Santoval, who was
+      seated on the deck leaning against the bulwarks, said, as his fellow
+      commander leapt on board, and came towards him.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Would that I had arrived sooner, Santoval, for I see that you have been
+      grievously wounded!&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Ay. One of the paynims' cannonballs has carried off both my legs below
+      the knee. The leech has been searing the wounds with a hot iron, and says
+      that he thinks I shall get over it; but if so I fear that my fighting days
+      are past, unless, indeed, I fight seated on a chair. However, I ought not
+      to grumble. I have lost many brave comrades, and others are wounded more
+      sorely than I am.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Sir Louis Ricord now joined them. He embraced Piccolomini warmly.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I never heard a more welcome shout, Piccolomini, than that which you gave
+      when you fell upon the Moslems, for in truth the issue of the conflict was
+      doubtful. I was delighted when this morning at daybreak Santoval's galley
+      rowed in. We had all kept watch during the night, thinking the pirates
+      might obtain boats and make an attack upon us; and, with but twenty of us
+      fit to wield a sword, our position would have been a bad one, and at any
+      rate they might have recaptured the prizes. We agreed that Santoval and
+      his knights should land at once. This they did. Sir John Boswell had of
+      course told me how his boat had been chased by a fishing craft, manned by
+      a large number of the pirates, and that he feared the rest might similarly
+      have escaped, and might have gone to bring some more of Hassan Ali's ships
+      upon us.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;As soon as Santoval landed, some of the natives came down and told him
+      that there was not a pirate remaining there, the rest having started in
+      another boat a few minutes after the one that had chased Boswell. Santoval
+      left two of his men with orders to ascend to the highest spot on the
+      island, and to keep watch, and then brought the rest off to his galley.
+      Our first step was, of course, to send all the women and children ashore.
+      Then we consulted as to what had best be done if the pirates should come
+      back in force. We hoped, at any rate, that this would not happen until you
+      arrived. We expected that you would be here before noon; but we decided
+      that, should they get here before you, we from our galley would embark on
+      Santoval's, as it was better to fight in one strongly manned boat than to
+      divide our forces.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It was scarce half an hour after Santoval came down before the men left
+      on the lookout appeared on the beach. On fetching them off, they told us
+      that as soon as they reached the top of the hill they saw five vessels
+      approaching with sails and oars, and that they would be here in half an
+      hour at the outside. We at once abandoned my galley, brought the rowers
+      and the wounded here, and prepared for the fight. As you saw, they ran
+      their two biggest ships alongside us, and for two hours the fight went on.
+      They were crowded with men, who in vain strove to get a footing on our
+      decks. Had we only had these two to deal with, we should have had nothing
+      to fear, heavily manned though they were; but the other three kept sailing
+      backwards and forwards, discharging their guns into us as they passed,
+      firing not only shot, but bags of bullets.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Their gunners were skilful, and, as you see, they have completely riddled
+      our poop. Twenty knights have been killed, and eleven others are sorely
+      wounded. Scarce one has escaped unscathed. You may guess, then, how
+      welcome was your aid, which we had not expected for another three hours.
+      We were on the point of abandoning the waist and gathering on the poop,
+      which we could still have defended for a considerable time, when, as if
+      dropped from the skies, you fell upon the pirates, and turned the tables.
+      How is it that you were here so early?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;We started at three o'clock, instead of waiting for daybreak. It seemed,
+      from the story of the two young knights, that it was possible you might be
+      attacked early, and, crippled as your command was, and with four prizes on
+      your hands, I deemed it best to come on as soon as the rowers had had a
+      few hours' rest.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It is well that you did so; it would have been a grievous affair had two
+      of our galleys been captured by the pirates. It would have been a blow to
+      the prestige of the Order, and would have brought such strength to Hassan
+      Ali and other pirate leaders that nothing short of sending out a fleet
+      would have recovered our ascendancy; and as every ducat we can spare has
+      to be spent on the fortifications, it would have been a misfortune indeed
+      had we been obliged to fit out such an expedition at present.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Who have fallen, Sir Louis?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Five more of the knights of my galley&mdash;Pierre des Vignes, Raoul de
+      Montpelier, Ernest Schmidt, Raymond Garcia, and Albert Schenck. Here is
+      the list of the knights of Santoval's galley.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;'Tis a long list, and a sad one,&rdquo; Piccolomini said, after reading the
+      names. &ldquo;With the seven who fell in your first fight, twenty-seven knights
+      have fallen, all brave comrades. Truly, we can ill spare such a loss. It
+      is true there are five prizes to show for it, and we have struck Hassan
+      Ali a blow that will resound through the Levant; but the cost is heavy.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It is indeed,&rdquo; Ricord agreed. &ldquo;The four vessels are well filled with rich
+      spoil that the scoundrels had gathered, and I doubt not the one you
+      captured is equally rich. Still, had they been ten times as valuable, the
+      booty would be dearly purchased at such a price.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      There was now a consultation among the leaders, and it was agreed that six
+      knights should be placed in each of the captured ships, with ten of the
+      galley slaves to work the sails, the others being equally divided between
+      the three galleys. They were, in the first place, to row to the island
+      where the pirates were imprisoned, and to slay or capture the whole of
+      them; afterwards they were to make direct for Rhodes; with so numerous a
+      fleet there was no fear of their being attacked. The arrangements took but
+      a short time to complete. An hour later they left the port, the three
+      galleys rowing ahead, while the five prizes, under easy sail, followed
+      them.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Sir John Boswell had been wounded, but not so seriously as to altogether
+      disable him, and he was in command of one of the prizes, having Sir Adam
+      Tedbond, Harcourt, Gervaise, and a German knight, with him. Sir Marmaduke
+      Lumley, who, after the first fight was over, was found, to the surprise
+      and pleasure of his comrades, to be still living, was, with the rest of
+      the wounded, on board one of the galleys. Two of the pirates had fallen
+      dead across him, and in the ardour of their attack on the knights, he had
+      lain there unnoticed until the return of Sir Louis and his comrades had
+      driven the pirates overboard. The leech was of opinion that he might yet
+      recover from his wound.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      On arriving at the island, sixty of the knights disembarked. The woods
+      near the shore were first searched, but were found untenanted. They were
+      about to advance up the hill when a man appeared on the crest above them
+      waving a white flag. He was told to come down, and on his arrival said
+      that he was sent by his companions to offer to surrender, on the promise
+      that their lives should be spared. The knights were well pleased to be
+      saved the trouble of a long search through the woods, and the messenger
+      left at once to acquaint the pirates that their terms were accepted. In a
+      short time some eighty men made their way down the hill. On reaching the
+      beach they were disarmed, divided equally between the galleys, and
+      distributed among the rowers, filling up the places of those who had been
+      killed by the fire of the Moslems, and of the men drafted into the prizes.
+      They begged for food and water before they began work, and, on being
+      questioned, admitted that their surrender was due principally to the fact
+      that they had been unable to find food of any sort on the island, and that
+      after searching all over it no spring of water could be discovered.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;In that case,&rdquo; Sir John Boswell said, &ldquo;I have no doubt they have all
+      surrendered. I before thought it probable that a good many of them would
+      have remained hidden, trusting to be able to make a raft after we had
+      left, and so get away, believing rightly enough that we should be
+      disinclined to search every foot of the island for them. As it is, I doubt
+      not, all are here.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The little fleet anchored that night at the rendezvous, and after two more
+      days' rowing reached Rhodes, where the appearance of the three galleys,
+      followed by their five prizes, was greeted with great acclamation. The
+      news, however, that twenty-seven knights had fallen, and that thirteen or
+      fourteen others were very gravely wounded, damped the satisfaction that
+      every one had at first felt. D'Aubusson came down as soon as they reached
+      the mole, and was greatly affected when he received Ricord's report.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It is an unfortunate loss indeed, Sir Louis,&rdquo; he said, &ldquo;though it may be
+      that the victory is not too dearly purchased. I do not speak of the
+      captured ships, nor of the spoil they contain, nor even of the slaves you
+      have brought us, welcome though all may be, but of the effect that the
+      defeat and capture of these craft of Hassan Ali's will have. It is plain
+      that the preparations the sultan is making, and the belief that Rhodes is
+      doomed, have so encouraged the infidels that they are becoming really
+      formidable at sea. This blow will show them that the Order has yet power
+      to sweep the sea of pirates. Since, however, this adventure has taught us
+      that a single leader like Hassan sails with at least nine ships under his
+      orders, it is clear that in future our galleys must not adventure singly
+      among the islands. It was fortunate indeed that first Santoval, and then
+      Piccolomini, arrived to your assistance. How was it that they happened to
+      come up so opportunely?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Sir John Boswell, with Ralph Harcourt and Gervaise Tresham; went in a
+      boat to the rendezvous we had arranged, and reached it after an adventure,
+      which I will leave Sir John to tell himself. I may say that the two young
+      knights named had in our encounter both obtained very high credit amongst
+      us all for the valour with which they fought. No one bore himself more
+      stoutly, and I am glad to take this early opportunity of bringing their
+      conduct before your notice. As you will learn from Sir John, Gervaise
+      Tresham afterwards showed a quickness of wit that was the means of saving
+      the lives of those with him, and I may say also of all with me, for had
+      they failed to reach the rendezvous we should have fallen easy victims to
+      the five ships Hassan Ali brought against us.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Sending for Sir John Boswell, the grand prior heard from him the details
+      of his adventure in the boat.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I am right glad to hear you speak so warmly of Tresham, Sir John, for I
+      regard him as my special protege, and am pleased indeed to find that at
+      this outset of his career he has proved himself not only a brave knight,
+      but full of resource, and quick at invention. I think, Sir John, that
+      these two young knights have shown themselves well worthy of receiving the
+      honour of secular knighthood.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Assuredly they have,&rdquo; Sir John agreed.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Then, Sir John, will you bestow it upon them? The Order, as an Order,
+      does not bestow the honour, but its members do not forfeit their right as
+      knights to bestow it individually, and none among us are more worthy of
+      admitting them to your rank than yourself.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I would gladly do it, Sir Peter; but the honour would come far better
+      from yourself, and would not only be more highly prized by them, but would
+      be of greater value in the eyes of others. I am but a simple knight
+      commander of the Order, and my name would scarce be known beyond its
+      ranks. But to be knighted by one whose name is known and honoured
+      throughout Europe would give them a standing wherever they went, and place
+      them on a level with the best.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;If that is your opinion, Boswell, I will myself undertake it, and will do
+      it at once; it were better done here than at a conclave of the Order&mdash;now,
+      when they are fresh from the battle. Let the knights be summoned from the
+      other galleys at once.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      In a few minutes the whole of the knights were assembled on the poop of
+      the galley.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Friends, and brother knights,&rdquo; D'Aubusson said. &ldquo;First, in the name of
+      the Order, I have to thank you all most heartily for the brave deeds that
+      you have performed, and for the fresh honour you have won for it. Every
+      man has, as I learn from the three commanders, borne himself as a true and
+      valiant knight, ready to give his life in the cause of the Order and of
+      humanity. Two names have been specially brought before me by commander
+      Ricord, and by the good knight Sir John Boswell; they are those of two
+      young companions who, though knights of our Order, have not yet received
+      secular knighthood, and this, in the opinion of these two knights, they
+      have right worthily won. Sir Ralph Harcourt and Sir Gervaise Tresham, step
+      forward.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The two young knights, colouring with pleasure at this unexpected honour,
+      removed their helmets, and stood with bowed heads before the grand prior.
+      D'Aubusson went on, turning to the knights around him, &ldquo;I am about,
+      comrades, to undertake the office of knighting them. Sir Louis Ricord and
+      Sir John Boswell stand as their sponsors. But before I proceed I would ask
+      you all whether you, too, approve, and hold that Sir Ralph Harcourt and
+      Sir Gervaise Tresham have proved themselves worthy of the honour of
+      secular knighthood at my hands?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      There was a general reply in the affirmative, the answer of the survivors
+      of Ricord's crew being specially emphatic. The grand prior drew his sword,
+      and the two young knights knelt before him, their sponsors standing beside
+      them.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Sir Ralph Harcourt, you have now been four years a knight of this Order,
+      but hitherto you have had no opportunity of drawing sword against the
+      infidels. Now that the chance has come, you have proved yourself a true
+      and valiant brother of the Order, and well worthy of the secular accolade.
+      It is in that capacity that I now knight you. It is not the grand prior of
+      Auvergne, but Sir Peter D'Aubusson, of the grand cross of St. Louis, who
+      now bestows upon you the honour of secular knighthood.&rdquo; He touched him
+      lightly with the sword. He then turned to Gervaise.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;You, Sir Gervaise Tresham, are young indeed to receive the honour of
+      secular knighthood; but valour is of no age, and in the opinion of your
+      commanders, and in that of your comrades, you have proved yourself worthy
+      of the honour. You have shown too, that, as Sir John Boswell has related
+      to me, you are not only brave in action, but able, in the moment of
+      danger, to plan and to execute. You were, he tells me, the means of saving
+      his life and that of your comrade, and, by thus enabling him to bear to
+      the place of rendezvous the news of Sir Louis's danger, were also the
+      means of saving the lives of Sir Louis and his companions, and of bringing
+      home in safety the prizes he had taken. With such a beginning it is easy
+      to foresee that you will win for yourself some day a distinguished
+      position in the ranks of the Order, and are most worthy of the honour I
+      now bestow upon you.&rdquo; And he touched him with his sword.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The two young knights rose to their feet, bowed deeply to D'Aubusson, and
+      then retired, with their sponsors. They were at once surrounded by the
+      knights, who shook them by the hand, and warmly congratulated them upon
+      the honour that had befallen them, receiving equally warm congratulations
+      on their arrival at the auberge of the langue.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The five prizes turned out, when their cargoes were landed, to be much
+      more valuable than the cursory examination made by the knights had
+      warranted them in expecting. They contained, indeed, an accumulation of
+      the most valuable contents of the prizes taken by the pirates for a long
+      time previously; and as these desperadoes preyed upon Turkish commerce as
+      well as Christian, the goods consisted largely of Eastern manufactures of
+      all kinds. Costly robes, delicate embroidery, superb carpets, shawls,
+      goldsmiths' work, and no small amount of jewels, were among the spoil
+      collected, and the bulk of the merchandise captured was, two days later,
+      despatched in galleys to Genoa and Marseilles, to be sold for the benefit
+      of the Order.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      D'Aubusson without hesitation carried out Sir John Boswell's promise to
+      the slaves who had rowed his boat. They were not only set at liberty, but
+      were each presented with a sum of money, and were placed on board a
+      galley, and landed on the mainland.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The English knights were all proud of the honour that had been won by
+      their young countrymen, the only exception being Robert Rivers, who was
+      devoured with jealousy at their advancement. He did not openly display his
+      feelings, for the reports not only of Sir John Boswell, but of the other
+      two English knights, were so strong that he dared not express his
+      discontent. He himself had twice been engaged with pirates, but had gained
+      no particular credit, and indeed had, in the opinion of his comrades, been
+      somewhat slack in the fray. He was no favourite in the auberge, though he
+      spared no pains to ingratiate himself with the senior knights, and had a
+      short time before been very severely reprimanded by the bailiff for
+      striking one of the servants.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I have more than once had to reprove you for your manners to the
+      servants,&rdquo; the bailiff said. &ldquo;You will now be punished by the septaine;
+      you will fast for seven days, on Wednesday and Friday you will receive
+      bread and water only, and will be confined to the auberge for that period.
+      The next time that I have reason to complain of you, I shall bring the
+      matter before the grand master, and represent to him that it were best to
+      send you home, since you cannot comport yourself to the servants of the
+      auberge as befits a knight of the Order. We have always borne the
+      reputation of being specially kind to our servants, and it is intolerable
+      that one, who has been but a short time only a professed knight, should
+      behave with a hauteur and insolence that not even the oldest among us
+      would permit himself. There is not one of the servants here who was not in
+      his own country of a rank and station equal, if not superior, to your own;
+      and though misfortune has fallen upon them, they are to be pitied rather
+      than condemned for it. In future, you are to give no order whatever to the
+      servants, nor to address them, save when at meals you require anything. If
+      you have any complaints to make of their conduct to you, you will make
+      them to me, and I will inquire into the matter; and if I find they have
+      failed in their duty they will be punished. I shall keep my eye upon you
+      in the future. There are other faults that I have observed in you. More
+      than once I have heard you address Sir Gervaise Tresham in a manner which,
+      were not duelling forbidden by our rules, might bring about bloodshed; and
+      from what I have seen when I have been watching the exercises, he is as
+      much your superior in arms as he is in manner and disposition.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      This reproof had greatly subdued Robert Rivers; and as he felt that any
+      display of his jealousy of Gervaise would be resented by the other
+      knights, and might result in serious consequences to himself, he abstained
+      from any exhibition of it when they returned to the auberge, although he
+      could not bring himself to join in the congratulations offered to them.
+      The next day, however, when he was talking to Ralph Harcourt, he remarked,
+      &ldquo;From what I hear, Harcourt, D'Aubusson praised young Tresham very highly.
+      It seems to me that there was nothing at all out of the way in what he
+      did, and it was very unfair that he should be selected for higher praise
+      than yourself.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It was not unfair at all,&rdquo; Ralph said warmly, for he was of a generous
+      nature, and incapable of the base feeling of envy. &ldquo;Tresham did a great
+      deal more than I did. When we saw the pirate boat gaining so fast upon us,
+      it seemed to Sir John Boswell, as well as to myself, that there was scarce
+      a chance of escape, and that all we could do was to choose a spot on which
+      to make a stand, and then to sell our lives as dearly as we could. I could
+      see that Sir John was scanning the hill for a spot where we could best
+      defend ourselves. As to hiding on so small an island, with a hundred men
+      eager for our blood searching for us, it was well nigh impossible. It was
+      Tresham's suggestion alone that saved our lives and enabled us to fetch
+      succour to Sir Louis. Sir John, who is an old and tried soldier, said that
+      for quickness and merit of conception, the oldest knight in the Order
+      could not have done better; and he is not one to praise unduly. I am four
+      years older than Gervaise Tresham, but I tell you that were he named
+      tomorrow commander of a galley, I would willingly serve under him.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Well, well, you need not be angry, Harcourt, I have nothing to say
+      against Tresham. No doubt he had a happy thought, which turned out well;
+      but I cannot see that there was anything wonderful in it, and it seemed to
+      me unfair that one who is a mere boy should receive higher praise than
+      yourself, who, as I heard Sir John and Sir Adam Tedbond say last night at
+      the refectory, bore yourself right gallantly.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I did my best,&rdquo; Ralph said shortly; &ldquo;but there was small credit in that
+      when we were fighting for our lives. The most cowardly beast will fight
+      under such circumstances. When you see a Moslem rushing at you, scimitar
+      in hand, and know that if you do not cut him down he will cut you down,
+      you naturally strike as hard and as quickly as you can. You have never
+      liked Gervaise, Rivers. I am sure I don't know why, but you always speak
+      in a contemptuous sort of tone about him. True, it does him no harm, but
+      it certainly does you no good. For what reason should you feel a contempt
+      for him? Although so much younger, he is a better swordsman and a better
+      rider than you are. He is liked by every one in the auberge, which is more
+      than can be said of yourself; he is always good tempered, and is quiet and
+      unassuming. What on earth do you always set yourself against him for?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I do not know that I do set myself against him,&rdquo; Rivers said sullenly. &ldquo;I
+      own to having no great liking for him, which is natural enough, seeing
+      that his father was a Lancastrian, while we are Yorkists; but it is not
+      pleasant to see so much made of a boy, merely because D'Aubusson has
+      favoured him.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I am certain,&rdquo; Harcourt said hotly, &ldquo;that such an idea has never occurred
+      to any one but yourself. Sir Peter is a great man and will soon be our
+      grand master, but at present he is but grand prior of the langue of
+      Auvergne, and whether he favours Tresham or not is a matter that concerns
+      none of us. Gervaise is liked by us for his own good qualities. He bears
+      himself, as a young knight should do, respectfully towards his seniors,
+      and is ever ready to do a service to any one. No one has ever seen him out
+      of temper; he is always kind and considerate to the servants, and when in
+      command of parties of slaves at the public works never says a harsh word
+      to them, but treats them as if they were human beings, and not brute
+      beasts. Besides, though he is more skilful than any of us with his sword,
+      or indeed at any of the military exercises, he is unassuming, and has no
+      particle of pride or arrogance. It is for all these things that he is
+      liked, and the friendship of D'Aubusson has naught whatever to do with it.
+      It is not only D'Aubusson who has prophesied that he will rise to a
+      distinguished rank in the Order. Boswell and Ricord both said the same,
+      and I for one thoroughly believe it. Is there one among us under the age
+      of twenty&mdash;and I might go farther&mdash;who has already won such
+      credit for himself? One who when but sixteen can make his mark in an Order
+      like ours is certain to rise to high office, and you and I may, before
+      many years are over, be proud to serve under him.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;That I will never do,&rdquo; Rivers said fiercely. &ldquo;I would rather go and bury
+      myself for life in the smallest commandery in England.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;That may be,&rdquo; Harcourt retorted, his temper also roused, &ldquo;But possibly
+      you might prefer that to fighting under any other leader.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;That is a reflection on my courage, Sir Ralph Harcourt, I shall lay this
+      matter before the bailiff.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;You can do as you like,&rdquo; Harcourt said disdainfully, &ldquo;But I don't think
+      you will benefit by your pains.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      When his temper cooled down Rivers acknowledged to himself the truth of
+      what Harcourt said. He was not in the favour of the bailiff, while both
+      Harcourt and Tresham stood at the present moment high in his estimation.
+      Any complaint would lead to an inquiry into the matter that had led to the
+      former's words, and even if Harcourt were reprimanded for using them, he
+      himself would assuredly not gain in the estimation of the knights.
+      Harcourt himself thought no more of the matter, though he laughingly told
+      Gervaise that Rivers was by no means gratified at their both attaining the
+      honour of secular knighthood, which virtually placed them over his head.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;He is not a nice fellow,&rdquo; Gervaise said. &ldquo;But naturally it must be
+      galling to him, and to a good many others who have not yet had the chance
+      of distinguishing themselves. I think it is very good of them that they
+      are all so kind and cordial. Of course it is otherwise with you, who are
+      as old as most of the other professed knights serving here; but with me it
+      is quite different, and as Rivers, somehow, has never been very friendly
+      with me, of course it is doubly galling to him. I hope he will soon get an
+      opportunity of winning his spurs too.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;That is just like you, Tresham. If I were in your place, I should have no
+      good wishes for a fellow who has never lost an opportunity of annoying me,
+      and that without the smallest cause of offence on my part.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I am sure you would not wish him ill, Harcourt. You would make allowance
+      for him just as I do, and feel that if he had had the same opportunities
+      he would have obtained the same credit and honours.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      <a name="link2HCH0007" id="link2HCH0007">
+      <!--  H2 anchor --> </a>
+    </p>
+    <div style="height: 4em;">
+      <br /><br /><br /><br />
+    </div>
+    <h2>
+      CHAPTER VII A FIRST COMMAND
+    </h2>
+    <p>
+      The first news that the knights heard on their return from their
+      expedition was that the Grand Master Orsini was seriously ill, and that,
+      at his advanced age, the doctors feared there was little hope of his
+      rallying. Gervaise felt a keen regret on hearing that the kind and gentle
+      old man, who had been for three years his master, was at the point of
+      death. Nevertheless, it was generally felt among the knights that, in view
+      of the dangers that threatened Rhodes, it was for the good of the Order
+      that a strong and capable man, whom all respected, and who possessed their
+      entire confidence, should at such a time be invested with absolute power.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      D'Aubusson had, indeed, for some years been the real head of the
+      community, but every question had, if only as a matter of form, to be
+      referred to the grand master, in order to obtain his approval and
+      signature. In the state of feebleness to which he had for some months past
+      fallen, much time was frequently lost before he could be made to
+      understand the questions referred to him. Moreover, orders of D'Aubusson
+      could be appealed against, his views thwarted, and his authority
+      questioned; and it was therefore felt that, much as they all respected the
+      old grand master, it would be an advantage to the Order when the supreme
+      authority passed into the hands of D'Aubusson.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Four days after the return of the expedition Orsini died. A few hours
+      later the grand council was convened, and D'Aubusson unanimously elected
+      grand master of the Order. The ceremony of the funeral of his predecessor
+      was an imposing one. Every knight of the Order in Rhodes was present,
+      together with a number of the leading natives of the Island; and although
+      Gervaise had, since his arrival on the Island, seen many stately
+      ceremonies, this far surpassed anything he had previously beheld.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise had, at one of his first interviews with D'Aubusson after his
+      arrival at the Island, been advised by him to acquire some knowledge of
+      Turkish.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;There are but few knights of the Order who speak the language,&rdquo; he said.
+      &ldquo;As a rule, while young men are ready to devote any amount of time to
+      acquiring dexterity in all martial exercises, they will bestow no labour
+      in obtaining knowledge that may be fully as useful to them as skill in
+      arms. In our dealings with the Turks, one or other party has to employ an
+      interpreter, and it is often by no means certain that these men convey the
+      full meaning of the speeches they translate. Again, we have large numbers
+      of Turkish slaves, and it is highly to be desired that the knights should
+      be able to give their orders to these men in their own language. Lastly, a
+      knight who has been taken prisoner by the Turks&mdash;and even the bravest
+      might meet with such a misfortune&mdash;would find it an alleviation of
+      his lot, and might be able to plan and carry out his escape, did he speak
+      Turkish well. I should strongly counsel you to acquire a knowledge of the
+      tongue.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise had intended to follow the advice of the grand prior, but the
+      duties of his office as page, and the time required for his military
+      exercises and his studies with the chaplain, had rendered it well nigh
+      impossible, during the first three years, to turn his attention to
+      learning Turkish. As soon as his pageship was at an end, and he found that
+      his duties included supervision of Turkish slaves, he felt the want of a
+      knowledge of the language, and from that time devoted an hour a day to its
+      study, employing one of the servants of the auberge, who was a man of rank
+      and education at home, to instruct him.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      While he conscientiously spent this amount of time at the work, it was the
+      most disagreeable portion of this day's labour. The events, however, that
+      had taken place during the expedition had impressed him greatly with the
+      utility of a knowledge of Turkish, for had it not been for Sir John
+      Boswell's possessing some acquaintance with the language, it would have
+      been impossible to communicate with the rowers of their boat, or to have
+      arranged the plan by which they had escaped the pirates. He had then and
+      there determined that as soon as he returned to Rhodes he would take the
+      matter up in a very different spirit to that in which he before approached
+      it. He had on the way home spoken to Sir John, who had highly approved of
+      the determination.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I myself, when I was a young knight of eighteen, was taken captive,
+      twenty-six years ago, at the time when the Egyptian fleet appeared before
+      Rhodes. Our galleys advanced to attack them, but under cover of night they
+      retired, and proceeding to the mainland took shelter under the guns of a
+      Turkish fort. We attacked them there; it was a desperate engagement, but
+      without any decisive advantage on either side. We lost no less than sixty
+      knights, the Egyptians seven hundred men; and their fleet returned to
+      Egypt. I and three others who were left wounded on the deck of one of
+      their ships we had boarded, but failed to capture, were carried to Egypt,
+      and remained there captive for six months, when we were ransomed by the
+      Order.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;During that time I learnt enough of their language, which is akin to
+      Turkish, to be able to make myself understood and to understand what was
+      said to me. I have kept up that much for intercourse with the slaves and
+      servants at Rhodes, and have found it very useful. I consider, then, that
+      you will do well to acquire their tongue; it will be useful not only to
+      yourself, but to others, and when we get back I will, if you like, ask the
+      bailiff to free you from all duty in order that you may devote yourself to
+      it.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The head of the langue at once granted Sir John's request.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I would,&rdquo; he said, &ldquo;that more of our young knights would give a portion
+      of their time to study; but most of them look to returning home when their
+      term of service here has expired. Many think only of amusement, and all
+      imagine that advancement is best achieved by valour. Tresham has already
+      distinguished himself very greatly; so much so, that I think it would be
+      well if he did not go on another expedition for a time, but stayed here
+      while others have the opportunity of doing the same. Were we to send him
+      out with the next galleys that start, I should be accused of favouritism,
+      and the lad, who is now deservedly popular with all, would be regarded
+      with envy, and possibly even with dislike.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;At the same time, after what he has done I should have difficulty in
+      refusing, were he to volunteer to sail in the next galley that sets out.
+      The desire, then, on his part to learn Turkish is in all ways opportune.
+      It will, too, in the long run be of great advantage to him in the Order,
+      will give him weight, and bring him into prominence. I do not think there
+      are six in the Order who can fairly translate a Turkish document; there
+      are but two who could write a reply in the same language. Inform him,
+      then, that from the present time he will be excused from all work, except,
+      of course, to join in ceremonials when all are required to be present; and
+      if you, Sir John, will pick out from among the servitors here one who is
+      well instructed and educated, and capable of writing as well as reading
+      his language, I will similarly relieve him of all other work, and place
+      him at the disposal of young Tresham. Tell the lad that I hope he will
+      persevere until he obtains a complete knowledge of the tongue. You can
+      mention to him what I have said as to my opinion of the advantage the
+      knowledge of it will be to him in the Order.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise accordingly devoted himself to study. His instructor was a Turk
+      of fine presence. He had been a large landowner in Syria, and held a high
+      official position in the province, but had been captured in a galley on
+      his way to Constantinople, whither he was proceeding on an official
+      mission. He was delighted with his new post. Gervaise, both as the
+      youngest member of the community, and from the kind manner in which he
+      always spoke to the servants,&mdash;all of whom had acquired some
+      knowledge of English,&mdash;was a general favourite among them, and the
+      Turk was glad that he was to be thrown with him. Still more he rejoiced at
+      being appointed his instructor, as it relieved him from all menial work
+      which, although preferable to that to which the bulk of the slaves were
+      condemned, yet galled his spirit infinitely.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Now that he had entered upon the work with the approbation of his
+      superior, and a conviction of its great utility, Gervaise set to work with
+      the same zeal and ardour which he had exhibited in his military exercises.
+      During the heat of the day he sat in the shade reading and writing with
+      his instructor. In the cool of the morning and afternoon he walked with
+      him on the walls, or in the country beyond them. After sunset he sat with
+      him in an unfrequented corner of the roof, all the time conversing with
+      him, either of his own country, or that of his instructor.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      At first this was difficult, and he had to eke out the Turkish words he
+      had acquired with English; but it was not long before there was no
+      necessity for this. His intercourse for ten or twelve hours a day with
+      this Turk, and the pains taken by his instructor, caused him to acquire
+      the language with extreme rapidity. Of course, he had to put up with a
+      great deal of banter from the younger knights upon his passion for study.
+      Sometimes they pretended that his mania, as they considered it, arose from
+      the fact that he was determined to become a renegade, and was fitting
+      himself for a high position in the Turkish army. At other times they
+      insisted that his intention was to become a Turkish dervish, or to win a
+      great Turkish heiress and settle in Syria. But as he always bore their
+      banter good temperedly, and was ready occasionally to join them in the
+      sport when assaults-at-arms were carried on, they soon became tired of
+      making fun of him.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      After nine months' constant work, the young knight's studies were abruptly
+      stopped by the receipt of a letter from the Pasha of Syria, offering a
+      considerable sum for the ransom of his instructor. The request was at once
+      acceded to, as it was the policy of the knights to accept ransoms for
+      their prisoners, both because the sums so gained were useful, and because
+      they were themselves compelled sometimes to pay ransom for members of the
+      Order. Suleiman Ali was, it was arranged, to be put on board an Egyptian
+      craft bound for Acre, a safe conduct having been sent for the vessel and
+      her crew, and for a knight, who was to receive the ransom from the pasha.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;At any rate, Sir Gervaise,&rdquo; the Turk said, when the young knight
+      expressed great regret at his leaving them, &ldquo;our position as instructor
+      and pupil would have come to an end shortly. For the last three months
+      there has been but little teaching between us; we have talked, and that
+      has been all, save that for a short time each day you read and wrote. But
+      there has been little to teach. You speak the native language now as
+      fluently as I do, and would pass anywhere as a Syrian, especially as there
+      are slight differences of speech in the various provinces. I believe that
+      in Syria you would not be suspected of being anything but a native, and
+      assuredly you would be taken for a Syrian elsewhere. You have learnt
+      enough, and it would be but a waste of time for you, a knight and a
+      soldier, to spend another day in study.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      On the following day Gervaise was, to his surprise, sent for by the grand
+      master. Except on the occasion of a few public ceremonies, he had not seen
+      D'Aubusson since he had been elected to his present high dignity, and the
+      summons to attend at the palace therefore came unexpectedly.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;We have become quite strangers, Tresham,&rdquo; the grand master said cordially
+      when he entered. &ldquo;I have not forgotten you, and have several times
+      questioned your bailiff concerning you. He tells me that you have become
+      quite an anchorite, and that, save at your meals and for an occasional
+      bout-at-arms, you are seldom to be seen. I was glad to hear of your
+      devotion to study, and thought it better to leave you undisturbed at it.
+      Yesterday evening I sent for your instructor. He is a man of influence in
+      Syria, and I wished to learn how he was affected towards us, now that he
+      is about to return there. We talked for some time, and I then asked him
+      what progress you had made, and was surprised and pleased to find that in
+      his opinion you could pass anywhere as a native, and that you were
+      perfectly capable of drawing up and writing any document I might desire to
+      send to the sultan or any of his generals. This is far more than I had
+      expected, and shows how earnestly you must have worked. Your knowledge may
+      prove of much assistance to the Order, and believe me, the time you have
+      spent in acquiring it may prove of much greater advantage to you in your
+      career than if you had occupied it in performing even the most valiant
+      deeds, and that at some future time it will ensure your appointment to a
+      responsible office here. It was partly to assure you of my approbation
+      that I sent for you, partly to inform you that I have appointed you to
+      proceed with Suleiman Ali as the knight in charge of the vessel, and to
+      receive the ransom agreed on, upon your handing him over. The office is an
+      honourable one and one of trust, and it is the first fruits of the
+      advantages you will gain by your knowledge of Turkish. No, do not thank
+      me. I am selecting you because you are better fitted than any knight I can
+      spare for the mission, and also, I may say, because the choice will be
+      pleasing to Suleiman Ali, whose goodwill I am desirous of gaining. Before
+      now Turkish provinces have thrown off their allegiance to the sultan. They
+      have, I must admit, been usually reconquered, but such might not be always
+      the case; and if such an event happened in Syria, this man's influence and
+      goodwill might be of great advantage to us, as it might well suit us to
+      ally ourselves with Syria against Constantinople. I am glad to say that I
+      found him at least as well disposed as any man could be who had been some
+      years in slavery. He admitted that, for a slave, he had been kindly and
+      gently treated, and added that any unpleasant memories he might have
+      retained had been obliterated by the nine months of pleasant companionship
+      spent with you.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      When Gervaise returned to dinner at the auberge, and informed Ralph
+      Harcourt and the other young knights that he had been appointed to take
+      charge of the vessel in which Suleiman Ali was to be conveyed to Acre, the
+      statement was at first received with incredulity. It seemed incredible
+      that the youngest knight in the langue should be chosen for such a
+      mission, involving as it did a separate command. Even the older knights,
+      when the news was passed down the table, were surprised.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I must say that I am astonished at the grand master's choice. Sir
+      Gervaise Tresham doubtless distinguished himself greatly some months
+      since, but from that time he has not been out with the galleys, or,
+      indeed, done anything that would seem to recommend him for so marked a
+      favour as a separate command.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I don't know, Wingate,&rdquo; Sir John Boswell said. &ldquo;It seems to me that when
+      a young knight of seventeen eschews all pleasure, refrains from
+      volunteering for service at sea, and spends his whole time in study, he
+      does distinguish himself, and that very greatly. Of the three or four
+      hundred young knights here I doubt if one other would have so acted.
+      Certainly, none to my knowledge have done so. Yet I do not suppose that
+      D'Aubusson selected him for this duty as a reward for so much self denial
+      and study, but because by that self denial and study he is more fitted for
+      it than any of us here, save some three or four knights in the other
+      langues, all of whom are in too high a position to be employed in so
+      unimportant a duty. He can speak Turkish&mdash;not a few score of words
+      and sentences such as I can, but, as Suleiman Ali tells me, like a native.
+      Were one of us chosen for this mission, it would be necessary to send an
+      interpreter with him; and every one knows how hard it is to do business in
+      that manner. It seems to me that the grand master has acted wisely in
+      putting aside all question of seniority, and employing the knight who is
+      better suited than any other for it.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;You are right, Boswell,&rdquo; the bailiff said. &ldquo;I really have been astonished
+      at the manner in which Tresham has given himself up to study. It would
+      have been a natural thing had he, after gaining so much credit, been
+      anxious and eager to gain more. When you spoke to me about his
+      determination to learn Turkish, I thought he would speedily tire of it,
+      and that when the next galley sailed, his name would be among the list of
+      volunteers for the service. I am sure, comrades, that there are few, if
+      any, among us who would not infinitely prefer fighting the Moslems to
+      spending our whole time in learning their language; and I for one consider
+      the fact that he has for nine months laboured so incessantly and
+      assiduously that he has come, as Boswell says, to speak it like a native,
+      is even more to his credit than the deed for which he was knighted.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      This conversation took place at the upper end of the table, and was not
+      heard at the lower end where the younger knights were seated.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I am not chosen from favour,&rdquo; Gervaise said hotly, to one of his
+      companions who had asserted that this was so. &ldquo;I am simply chosen because
+      I can speak Turkish.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;How much Turkish can you speak?&rdquo; one of them laughed. Gervaise turned to
+      the Turkish servant behind them, and said, in his language, &ldquo;Hassan, Sir
+      Giles Trevor wishes to know how well I speak Turkish. You have heard me
+      talking with Suleiman Ali. Will you give him your opinion about it?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The man turned gravely to Sir Giles Trevor.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;My lord,&rdquo; he said, in English, &ldquo;Sir Gervaise Tresham, he speaks Turkish
+      same as I do. If he dress up in Turk clothes I suppose him Turk, not know
+      he Christian by his speech.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Exclamations of surprise broke from the young knights.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Well, you have earned the appointment, Tresham,&rdquo; Ralph Harcourt said
+      heartily. &ldquo;You always told me when I asked you that you were getting on,
+      but I had not the least idea that you were getting on like this. And can
+      you read and write the Turkish language?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Well enough for practical purposes, Ralph. At any rate, I wrote a
+      complimentary letter this morning from the grand master to the governor of
+      Syria, and the bailiff of Spain, who was, as you know, for ten years a
+      prisoner among the Turks, read it through at D'Aubusson's request, to see
+      that there was no error in it, and was good enough to pass it without
+      alteration.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I would give a good deal,&rdquo; Sir Giles Trevor said, &ldquo;if I could follow your
+      example, and shut myself up for nine months with an infidel to study his
+      language; but I could not do it if my life depended on it. I should throw
+      myself off the wall at the end of the first fortnight.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I don't pretend that I can do what Tresham has done,&rdquo; Ralph Harcourt
+      said. &ldquo;I always hated our lessons with the chaplain, who gave me the
+      character of having the thickest head of any of his pupils; but I vow&rdquo;&mdash;and
+      he kissed the handle of his dagger&mdash;&ldquo;I will spend half an hour a day
+      in trying to learn something of Turkish. Of course, I know that such time
+      will not be enough to learn a great deal; but if one could get up just
+      enough to be able to give orders to the slaves, to question the captain of
+      a vessel one has captured, and to make them understand a little, if by bad
+      luck one fell into their hands, it would be quite enough for me. I am sure
+      sometimes one is quite at a loss how to pass the hours when the sun is at
+      its hottest, and if one tried one ought to be able to pick up a little
+      without much trouble. Look at the servants; there is not one of them but
+      speaks a little English. And if an infidel can learn enough English to get
+      on with, without any regular study, I can't see why we shouldn't be able
+      to learn enough Turkish in the same way.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Two or three of the other young knights declared that they too would
+      devote a short time during the heat of the day to learning Turkish, and
+      they agreed to begin together forthwith with one of the servants, who
+      spoke English most fluently. Robert Rivers was not present, for he had
+      returned to England six months before, to take up his residence at the
+      House in Clerkenwell, in order that he might bring to bear the interest of
+      his many powerful friends to secure for him an appointment as commander of
+      one of the estates of the Order in England. His departure had caused
+      general satisfaction among the other knights, whom his arrogance and ill
+      temper had frequently irritated. Gervaise especially was glad at his
+      leaving the Island, for after he received the honour of knighthood, Rivers
+      made a point of always addressing him with an affectation of deference and
+      respect that often tried his temper to the utmost.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It is well that Rivers has gone,&rdquo; Ralph said, laughing, &ldquo;for I don't know
+      how he would have supported the chagrin your appointment would have given
+      him. He was devoured with jealousy as it was, but this would have been a
+      trial beyond bearing.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I am heartily glad he has gone,&rdquo; Gervaise said gravely. &ldquo;I have put up
+      with a great deal from him, but I don't think I could have stood much
+      more. If our vows had not forbidden our fighting I should have called him
+      to account long ago; but the only thing else to do was for me to lodge a
+      formal complaint before the bailiff, of his continually offensive bearing
+      and manner, which I could not bring myself to do, and indeed there was no
+      special matter that would have seemed to justify me, no single speech that
+      in itself would warrant such grave action on my part. I used to wish over
+      and over again that we could but meet in some quiet spot in England, both
+      unarmed, and could there settle the matter in good English fashion, with
+      our fists, or even with a couple of quarterstaffs.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The others laughed.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;That would be a very unknightly form of contest.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I care not for that,&rdquo; Gervaise replied. &ldquo;It would be a very satisfactory
+      one anyhow, and quite serious enough for the occasion. His sneers and
+      petty insults were not sufficient to justify the drawing of blood, and
+      there has been enough of that shed for the last twenty years in England
+      without two brother knights betaking themselves to their swords against
+      each other. But a sound thrashing would have done neither of us harm, and
+      if it had fallen to his lot to get the largest share of it, it might have
+      done him some good.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;He thinks he is sure of an appointment,&rdquo; one of the others said, &ldquo;but he
+      has been so frequently in trouble here that it is likely that the official
+      report, which is always sent home to the grand prior when the knights
+      return to England, will be so unfavourable that even the most powerful
+      influence will fail to obtain him a post. If so, we may have him back here
+      again, especially if the Turks carry out their threat of assailing us, for
+      an appeal will be made to all the grand priors for knights to aid in the
+      defence.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      That evening Gervaise went again to the palace to receive final
+      instructions.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;The craft in which you are to travel is an Egyptian trader. As at present
+      war has not been formally declared between us and the sultan, peaceful
+      traders, as you know, carry on their avocations unmolested either by the
+      warships of the Turks or by ours; they do not enter our ports without a
+      special permit, and the crews are never allowed to land, in order that no
+      detailed account of our fortifications may be taken to the sultan.
+      Moreover, brawls might arise between them and the native population, or
+      they might aid slaves to escape. However, you will be altogether safe from
+      interference from Turkish war vessels, and if overhauled by one of them
+      the safe conduct will be sufficient to prevent interference with you. But
+      it is not so with pirates. They will plunder their own countrymen as
+      readily as they will Christians, and the safe guard of the governor of
+      Syria will be of no use whatever to you. In this consists the danger of
+      your mission. I cannot send one of our war galleys on such an errand, and
+      if there are not enough knights on board to beat off any pirate, the fewer
+      there are the better. I hear that the craft is a fast sailor, and as the
+      crew will be as anxious to avoid pirates as you, they will do their best
+      to escape. I leave it to you to take any route. You can either sail hence
+      direct for Acre, or you can coast along the shores of Anatolia and Syria,
+      lying up at night in bays.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Should you be overtaken I do not think it would be of any use for you to
+      disguise yourself, for some of the crew would be sure to denounce you.
+      Should the worst happen, and you are captured by pirates, you will of
+      course in the first place show them your safe conduct, and if I find that
+      you do not return I shall send at once to the governor of Syria,
+      complaining of your capture when furnished with his safeguard, and
+      requesting him to order a search for you to be made at every port on the
+      coast, with instructions that you are to be at once released, and either
+      sent to him for return hither, or placed on board a craft bound for any
+      Christian port; while you, on your part, will endeavour to acquaint the
+      Turkish authorities with the fact that you have been seized while
+      travelling with a safe conduct from the governor of Syria.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;But, more than from any efforts on your part or mine, I rely upon
+      Suleiman Ali, who will, I am sure, as soon as he is set on shore, lose no
+      time in acquainting the pasha of your capture, and in calling upon him to
+      interfere in your favour. In that case, the worst that could befall you
+      would be a temporary detention, unless, indeed, the pirates should take
+      you to Egypt. As that country is friendly with us at present, since Egypt
+      dreads the ever increasing power of the Turks, it will be but a question
+      of ransom, for I have secret agents there who will inform me without delay
+      of the arrival of a Christian captive.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I understand, sir, and will do my best in the matter. If I am captured I
+      trust that an opportunity of escape will soon present itself, for I
+      should, if taken, conceal from my captors the fact that I understand their
+      language, and should thus, if I could evade my guard, have every chance of
+      escaping, as in a native dress I could meet and converse with those
+      hunting for me, without their having a suspicion of my being the white
+      slave for whom they were in search.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Once at Acre you will be safe. But do not land unless it is absolutely
+      necessary, for you might fall a victim to the fanaticism of its
+      inhabitants, and no knight has ever set foot on shore there since the ill
+      fated day when the Moslems wrested it from us, bathed the ruined walls
+      with the best blood of our Order and the Templars', and destroyed the last
+      hope of our ever recovering the Holy Sepulchre.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The next morning at daybreak Gervaise and Suleiman Ali went on board the
+      Egyptian trader, and sailed for Acre. The current of opinion had changed
+      at the auberge when the knights came to think over the mission on which
+      Gervaise was about to start, and the slight feeling of jealousy with which
+      the younger knights had received the news was entirely dissipated. While
+      it did not seem to them that there was any chance of his distinguishing
+      himself, they perceived, as they thought it over, the considerable danger
+      there was of capture by pirates, and Ralph and some of his companions came
+      down to the mole to see him off, with feelings in which envy bore no part
+      whatever.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I see now, Gervaise, that it is truly no holiday excursion on which you
+      are starting. I should envy you greatly were you going in command of an
+      armed galley, prepared to beat off any craft that might try to overhaul
+      you; but, going alone as you are, it is a very different thing. Should
+      pirates meet you, you could offer no resistance, and your position would
+      be a perilous one indeed. However, I think you are born to good luck, and
+      am confident that your patron saint will look after you, and therefore
+      expect to see you back here in a fortnight's time at the outside.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I hope so with all my heart, Ralph. It will be no fault of mine if I
+      tarry.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Will you keep the open sea, or skirt the land, Tresham?&rdquo; one of the
+      others asked.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I shall keep the open sea. The grand master left me to choose my course;
+      but I think there is more danger by the coast&mdash;where pirates may be
+      hiding in unfrequented bays, in readiness to pounce upon a passing craft&mdash;than
+      in the open sea, where we should have at least the advantage that we could
+      not be taken by surprise, and might make a race of it. But the sun will be
+      up in a few minutes, and my orders were to set out at sunrise, so I must
+      say goodbye at once.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      As soon as the vessel was under way, Gervaise took a seat on the poop by
+      the side of Suleiman Ali, and related to him the conversation he had had
+      with the grand master.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;The risk that you will run has not escaped me,&rdquo; the Turk said, &ldquo;and
+      indeed, I now regret that you were chosen as my escort. I almost wish that
+      my son had not purchased my freedom at the present time, since it involves
+      the risk of you losing yours. There is no doubt that the sea swarms with
+      pirates; the sultan is too busy with his own struggles for Empire to
+      bestow any attention upon so small a matter. The pashas and the officers
+      of the ports have not the power, even had they the will, to put down
+      piracy in their districts, and indeed are, as often as not, participators
+      in the spoils. Your Order, which, years back, scoured the seas so hotly
+      that piracy well nigh ceased, have now for forty years been obliged to
+      turn their attention chiefly to their own defence. They possess a
+      comparatively small fleet of galleys, and their wealth is expended on
+      their fortress.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;What with Egypt and the sultan their hands are too full for them to act
+      as the police of the sea, and the consequence is that from every port,
+      bay, and inlet, pirate craft set out&mdash;some mere rowboats, some, like
+      those under the command of Hassan Ali, veritable fleets. Thus the humblest
+      coasters and the largest merchant craft go alike in fear of them, and I
+      would that the sultan and Egypt and your Order would for two or three
+      years put aside their differences, and confine their efforts to sweeping
+      the seas of these pests, to storming their strongholds, and to inflicting
+      such punishment upon them as that, for a very long time to come, peaceful
+      merchants might carry on their trade without fear.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I heard you tell the captain that he was to steer straight for Acre, and
+      I think you are right in avoiding the coast, where the most harmless
+      looking fishing boat may carry a crowd of pirates hidden in her hold. At
+      the same time, if you will take my advice you will head much more to the
+      south, so as to be out of the regular track of ships making from
+      Constantinople or the islands to Acre. You may meet pirates anywhere, but
+      they are assuredly thicker along the more frequented routes. The safest
+      plan of all would probably be to bear south, and strike the Egyptian coast
+      well to the east of the mouth of the Nile. Thence, till you get to
+      Palestine, the country is utterly barren and uninhabited, while, running
+      up the coast to Palestine, there are, save at Jaffa, no ports to speak of
+      until you arrive at Acre; and besides, the inhabitants there, even if
+      pirates, would not venture to disregard the pasha's safe conduct. I do not
+      by any means say that such a course would be absolutely safe. You may meet
+      with vessels on your way south, and doubtless some of them cruise off the
+      barren coast I speak of, to intercept traders to and from Egypt and Acre,
+      and other Syrian ports; for the trade carried on is considerable, and,
+      although of the same religion, the Turks are disposed to view the
+      Egyptians as enemies rather than as friends, and would have even less
+      hesitation in plundering them than in robbing their own countrymen.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I think that your suggestion is a good one, and will follow it, at any
+      rate. The course is a good deal longer, but that is comparatively of
+      little moment. The great thing is to carry you safely to Acre.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;And to get back with equal safety,&rdquo; Suleiman said, with a smile.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;That is quite as important in my eyes; in fact, of the two, I would far
+      rather that we were captured on our voyage thither, for in that case I
+      might be able to arrange for the ransom of both of us.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      <a name="link2HCH0008" id="link2HCH0008">
+      <!--  H2 anchor --> </a>
+    </p>
+    <div style="height: 4em;">
+      <br /><br /><br /><br />
+    </div>
+    <h2>
+      CHAPTER VIII AN EVENING AT RHODES
+    </h2>
+    <p>
+      Suleiman Ali's advice was carried out. It added considerably to the length
+      of the voyage; but they saw only one doubtful craft. She was lying close
+      inshore under the shadow of the sand hills, and they did not see her until
+      she hoisted her sails and shot out from the land. They were, however,
+      three miles distant from the land at the time, and the wind was blowing
+      from the north; consequently the pirate was dead to leeward. Every sail
+      was set at once on board the trader, and, being a fast sailor, she
+      maintained her position until nightfall. The wind then dropped, and just
+      as the light faded they could see that the vessel behind them had put out
+      her sweeps. The trader kept up her sails until certain that she could be
+      no longer seen; then the canvas was lowered, and the crew took to the
+      boats and towed her due north.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The night was fortunately a dark one, and those watching anxiously from
+      the deck of the trader were unable to discern her pursuer as she passed
+      behind them. As soon as they were well assured that she must have gone on,
+      the boats were got in, the sails hoisted again, and, taking advantage of
+      every light flaw of wind, they proceeded on their course. In the morning
+      the sails of the galley could be seen on the horizon, but the distance was
+      too great for her to take up the pursuit again with any chance of success,
+      and the trader continued her course to Acre without seeing more of her.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      As soon as the trader entered the port, the Egyptian captain went on
+      shore, taking with him a copy of the safe conduct and the letter from the
+      grand master to the pasha. Going to the residence of the governor, he
+      handed these to him, saying that he had on board Aga Suleiman Ali, and a
+      knight who was charged to deliver him up on payment of the ransom.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I have been expecting you,&rdquo; the governor said. &ldquo;I have received a letter
+      from the pasha, stating that he had written to the grand master respecting
+      the ransom of the aga, and sending me the amount which Suleiman's son had
+      offered. The young man was not of age when his father was captured, but he
+      is so now, and was therefore able to raise the sum required. I will go
+      down to the port with you myself, hand over the ransom, and welcome
+      Suleiman, whom I know well, back from his captivity.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The transfer was speedily made; a heavy purse was handed to Gervaise, and
+      Suleiman was a free man.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Send me word, if you can, when you return to Rhodes,&rdquo; the latter said, as
+      he bade farewell to the young knight. &ldquo;I shall be anxious until I hear.
+      Fortune was with us as we sailed hither, but it may desert you on your
+      return. Should aught befall you, tell your captors that if they bring you
+      to me I will pay any ransom that they could, in fairness, require. Should
+      they refuse to do this, send, if possible, a messenger to me, and on
+      receipt of your message I will send a trusty man to purchase your freedom.
+      You have treated me as a friend and an equal, and a friend I shall always
+      remain.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The vessel was to remain four days in port, to discharge her cargo and
+      take in another, and Suleiman had talked of remaining at Acre until she
+      sailed, but Gervaise protested strongly against this.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;You have your family, from whom you have been so long separated, awaiting
+      your return with anxiety, and I pray you to make no stay on my account. I
+      am well content to remain on board here, and to look at the city which has
+      so often been the theatre of great deeds&mdash;which Richard the Lion
+      Heart captured, and which so many of the Hospitallers died to defend. I
+      was charged by the grand master not to land, and indeed I feel myself that
+      it would be an act of folly to do so. There are doubtless many on shore
+      who have relatives and friends now working as slaves among us, and some of
+      these might well seek to avenge them by slaying one of the Order. I feel
+      your kindness, but it would be a pain to me to know that you were
+      lingering here on my account, when you must be longing to embrace your
+      children.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The four days passed rapidly. Gervaise had, at the suggestion of the
+      governor, laid aside the mantle and insignia of the Order.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;If you do not do so,&rdquo; he said, &ldquo;I must place a strong guard of soldiers
+      on board, in order to ensure that the pasha's safeguard is not violated.
+      Sailors are a turbulent race, and were you recognised here they might make
+      a tumult, and slay you before a word of what was going on reached me. In
+      any case I shall place two soldiers on board until you leave the port.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      On the morning of the fifth day the sails were got up, and the vessel
+      sailed out from the port. Fortune again favoured them, and they reached
+      Rhodes without any adventure. Gervaise went at once to the palace, and
+      handed over the purse of gold to the treasurer. He then sent up his name
+      to the grand master, and was immediately conducted to his room.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I am glad to see you back, Tresham. I have been uneasy about you. Have
+      you fulfilled your mission without adventure?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Without any adventure, sir, save that we were once chased by a pirate on
+      our way east, but escaped in the darkness. Save for that, the voyage has
+      been wholly uneventful. I have received the ransom, and handed the purse
+      to your treasurer.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I am glad that your first command has turned out so well. I will see that
+      you do not lack employment; and the fact that you are able to act as
+      interpreter will ensure you a welcome on any galley. At present, however,
+      it is not my intention to send out many cruisers. Every life now is
+      precious, and no amount of spoil that can be brought in will counter
+      balance the loss of those who fall. However, I may find some mission on
+      which you can be employed. I know that you love an active life; and as,
+      for nine months, you have put a rein on your inclinations, and have
+      devoted yourself wholly to study, so that you might be of greater use to
+      the Order, you have a good right to any employment in which your knowledge
+      can be utilised.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      On his arrival at the auberge, Gervaise was very heartily greeted by the
+      younger knights.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I told you you were born lucky, Gervaise,&rdquo; Ralph Harcourt said. &ldquo;There
+      has been more than one wager made that you would be captured; but I, for
+      my part, was confident that your good fortune would not desert you. Still,
+      though not surprised, we are delighted to see you again. Now tell us about
+      your voyage.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise gave a brief account of the adventure with the pirate, and then
+      described the visit of the governor to the ship.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Did he say anything to you?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;He was courteous and solemn; just the sort of man you would fancy a
+      Turkish governor should be. He looked a little surprised when I accosted
+      him in Turkish, but asked no questions at the time, though I daresay he
+      inquired afterwards of Suleiman how I came to speak the language. The only
+      time he actually said anything was when he requested that I would not wear
+      the mantle of the Order while in port, as sailors were a turbulent race,
+      and it might lead to an attack upon me; and as he was responsible to the
+      pasha that his safe conduct should be respected, it would be necessary, if
+      I declined to follow his advice, to keep a strong body of soldiers on
+      board. As this would have been a horrible nuisance, especially as I wanted
+      to enjoy in quiet the view of the city, with its castle and walls, I
+      acceded at once to his request, which seemed to me a reasonable one. He
+      did send two soldiers on board, but they remained down in the waist, and
+      did not interfere with my pleasure in any way.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Next to Jerusalem, how I should like to see Acre!&rdquo; Ralph Harcourt
+      exclaimed. &ldquo;It is, of all other cities, the most closely connected with
+      our Order. We helped to win it, and we were the last to defend it. We have
+      heard so much about the fortress, and it has been so often described to
+      me, that I know the situation of every bastion&mdash;at least, as it was
+      when we left it, though I know not what changes the Turks may since have
+      made.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;That I know not, Ralph. Of course, I only saw the seafront, and it was
+      upon the land side that the attack was made. We know that the breaches
+      were all repaired long ago, and it is said that the place is stronger than
+      ever. From the port all was solid and massive. It is indeed a grand and
+      stately fortress. Here we have done all that was possible to make Rhodes
+      impregnable, but nature did nothing for us; there nature has done
+      everything, and the castle looks as if it could defy the assaults of an
+      army, however large. And indeed, it was not wrested from us by force. The
+      knights, when the city walls were stormed and the town filled with their
+      foes fought their way down to the water's edge and embarked there, for
+      they were reduced to a mere handful; and however strong a castle may be,
+      it needs hands to defend it. Still, it well nigh moved me to tears to see
+      the Turkish banner waving over it, and to think how many tens of thousands
+      of Christian soldiers had died in the effort to retain the holy places,
+      and had died in vain.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I wonder whether the Turks will ever be forced to relinquish their hold
+      of the holy places?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Who can tell, Sir Giles?&rdquo; the bailiff, who had come up to the group
+      unobserved, said quietly. &ldquo;Certainly not in our time&mdash;not until the
+      Moslem power, which threatens not only us, but all Europe, has crumbled to
+      dust. So long as Acre remains in their power there is no hope. I say not
+      but that by a mighty effort of all Christendom, Palestine might be wrested
+      from the infidels, as it was wrested before; but the past shows us that
+      while men or nations can be stirred to enthusiasm for a time, the fire
+      does not last long, and once again the faithful few would be overwhelmed
+      by the odds that would be brought against them, while Europe looked on
+      impassive, if not indifferent. No, knights; the utmost that can be hoped
+      for, is that the tide of Moslem invasion westward may be stayed. At
+      present we are the bulwark, and as long as the standard of our Order waves
+      over Rhodes so long is Europe safe by sea. But I foresee that this cannot
+      last: the strongest defences, the stoutest hearts, and the bravest of
+      hearts, cannot in the long run prevail against overpowering numbers. As at
+      Acre, we may repel assault after assault, we may cause army after army to
+      betake themselves again to their ships; but, as a rock is overwhelmed by
+      the rising tide, so must Rhodes succumb at last, if left by Europe to bear
+      alone the brunt of Moslem invasion. All that men can do we shall do. As
+      long as it is possible to resist, we shall resist. When further resistance
+      becomes impossible, we shall, I trust, act as we did before.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;We were driven from Palestine, only to fortify ourselves at Rhodes. If we
+      are driven from Rhodes, we shall, I feel assured, find a home elsewhere,
+      and again commence our labours. The nearer we are to Europe the more hope
+      there is that Christendom will aid us, for they will more generally
+      understand that our defeat would mean the laying open of the shores of the
+      Mediterranean, from Turkey to Gibraltar, to the invasion of the Moslems.
+      However, comrades, this is all in the future. Our share is but in the
+      present, and I trust the flag of the Order will float over Rhodes as long,
+      at least, as the lifetime of the youngest of us, and that we may bequeath
+      the duty of upholding the Cross untarnished to those who come after us;
+      and we can then leave the issue in God's hands.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      All listened respectfully to the words of their leader, although his
+      opinion fell like cold water upon the fiery zeal and high hopes of his
+      hearers. The possibility of their losing Rhodes had never once entered
+      into the minds of the majority of them. It was likely that ere long they
+      might be called upon to stand a siege, but, acquainted as they were with
+      the strength of the place&mdash;its deep and seemingly impassable moat,
+      its massive walls, and protecting towers and bastions&mdash;it had seemed
+      to them that Rhodes was capable of withstanding all assaults, however
+      numerous the foe, however oft repeated the invasion. The bailiff was, as
+      all knew, a man of dauntless courage, of wide experience and great
+      judgment, and that he should believe that Rhodes would, although not in
+      their time, inevitably fall, brought home to them for the first time the
+      fact that their fortress was but an outpost of Europe, and one placed so
+      distant from it that Christendom, in the hour of peril, might be unable to
+      furnish them with aid. As the bailiff walked away, there was silence for a
+      short time, and then Sir Giles Trevor said cheerfully, &ldquo;Well, if it lasts
+      our time we need not trouble our heads as to what will take place
+      afterwards. As the bailiff says, our duty is with the present, and as we
+      all mean to drive the Turks back when they come, I do not see that there
+      is any occasion for us to take it to heart, even if it be fated that the
+      Moslems shall one day walk over our tombs. If Christendom chooses to be
+      supine, let Christendom suffer, say I. At any rate, I am not going to weep
+      for what may take place after I am turned into dust.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;That sounds all very well, Sir Giles,&rdquo; Ralph Harcourt said, &ldquo;and I have
+      no argument to advance against it, though I am sure there is much to be
+      said; but if the bailiff, or the chaplain, or indeed any of the elders,
+      had heard you say so, I have no doubt you would have had a fitting reply.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Sir Giles tossed his head mockingly. &ldquo;I shall fight neither better nor
+      worse, friend Harcourt, because it may be that someday the Moslems are, as
+      the bailiff seems to think, destined to lord it here. I have only promised
+      and vowed to do my best against the Moslems, and that vow only holds good
+      as long as I am in the flesh; beyond that I have no concern. But what are
+      we staying here for, wasting our time? It is the hour for those of us who
+      are going, to be starting for the ball given by Signor Succhi; as he is
+      one of the richest merchants in the town, it will be a gay one, and there
+      is no lack of fair faces in Rhodes. It is a grievous pity that our elders
+      all set their will against even the younger members of the community
+      joining in a dance. It was not one of the things I swore to give up.
+      However, here in Rhodes there is no flying in the face of rules.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Three or four of the other young knights were also going.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;What are you thinking of doing, Gervaise?&rdquo; Harcourt asked.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I have nothing particular to do, Ralph, except that, first of all, I must
+      write a letter to Suleiman Ali and hand it to the bailiff, praying him to
+      send it off by the first vessel that may put in here on her way to Acre.
+      If I do not do it now it may be neglected, and I promised to write
+      directly I got here. I will not be half an hour, and after that I shall be
+      ready to do anything you like.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      In less than that time, indeed, he rejoined Ralph. &ldquo;Now what shall we do
+      with ourselves? What do you say to a stroll through the streets? I am
+      never tired of that.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I like better to go by way of the roofs, Gervaise. The streets are badly
+      lit, and although they are busy enough in some quarters, they are so
+      narrow that one gets jostled and pushed. On the terraces everything is
+      quiet. You have plenty of light and music, and it is pleasant to see
+      families sitting together and enjoying themselves; and if one is disposed
+      for a cup of wine or of cool sherbet, they are delighted to give it, for
+      they all are pleased when one of us joins a group. I have quite a number
+      of acquaintances I have made in this way while you have been working away
+      at your Turkish.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Very well,&rdquo; Gervaise said. &ldquo;If such is your fancy, Ralph, let us take one
+      of the paths across the roofs. I might walk there twenty years by myself
+      without making an acquaintance, and I do not pledge myself to join in
+      these intimacies of yours. However, I shall be quite content to amuse
+      myself by looking on at the scene in general, while you are paying your
+      visits and drinking your sherbet.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;There are plenty of fair girls among the Rhodians,&rdquo; Ralph said, with a
+      smile; &ldquo;and though we are pledged to celibacy we are in no way bound to
+      abstain from admiration.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise laughed.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Admire as much as you like, Ralph, but do not expect me to do so. I have
+      scarcely as much as spoken to a woman since I entered the House in London,
+      and I should have no idea what to say to a young girl.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;But it is part of the education of a true knight to be courteous to
+      women. It is one of the great duties of chivalry. And you must remember
+      that we are secular knights, as well knights of the Order.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;The work of the Order is quite sufficient for me at present, Ralph. In
+      time I may come to like the society of women, to admire their beauty, and
+      possibly even to wear the colour of some one, for that seems to be the
+      fashion; though why we, who are bound to celibacy, should admire one woman
+      more than another I cannot understand.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      They had by this time descended from the castle, and were taking their way
+      along one of the broad paths that led over the flat roofs of the houses by
+      means of the bridges thrown across the streets.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;These are some acquaintances of mine,&rdquo; Ralph said, stopping at one of the
+      walls, some three feet high, that bordered the path.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Beyond was an enclosure of some fifty feet square. Clumps of shrubs and
+      flowers, surrounded by stonework some eight or ten inches high enclosing
+      the earth in which they grew, were scattered here and there. Lamps were
+      hung to cords stretched above it, while others were arranged among the
+      flowers. In the centre a large carpet was spread, and on this some eight
+      or ten persons were seated on cushions. A girl was playing a lute, and
+      another singing to her accompaniment. She stopped abruptly when her eye
+      fell upon the figures of the two young knights.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;There is Sir Ralph Harcourt, father!&rdquo; she exclaimed in Italian, which was
+      the language most used on the Island, and spoken with more or less fluency
+      by all the knights, among whom it served as a general medium of
+      communication. &ldquo;Are you waiting to be invited in, Sir Knight?&rdquo; she went on
+      saucily. &ldquo;I thought that by this time you would know you were welcome.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Your tongue runs too fast, child,&rdquo; her father said, as he rose and walked
+      across to Ralph. &ldquo;You are welcome, Sir Ralph, very welcome. I pray you
+      enter and join us.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I will do so with pleasure, Signor Vrados, if you will also extend your
+      hospitality to my friend Sir Gervaise Tresham.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Most gladly,&rdquo; the merchant said. &ldquo;I pray him to enter.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The two knights passed through the gate in the wall. All rose to their
+      feet as they went up to the carpet, and greeted Ralph with a warmth which
+      showed that he was a favourite. He introduced Gervaise to them.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I wonder that I do not know your face, Sir Knight,&rdquo; the merchant's wife
+      said. &ldquo;I thought I knew all the knights of the Order by sight, from seeing
+      them either at the public ceremonies, or observing them pass in the
+      streets.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;For the last nine months Sir Gervaise has been an anchorite. He has been
+      learning Turkish, and has so devoted himself to the study that even I have
+      scarce caught sight of him, save at meals. As for walking in the streets,
+      it is the last thing he would think of doing. I consider myself a good and
+      conscientious young knight, but I am as nothing in that respect to my
+      friend. I used to look upon him as my little brother, for we were at the
+      House of the Order in London together. He is four years younger than I am,
+      and you know four years between boys makes an immense difference. Now the
+      tables are turned, and I quite look up to him.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;You will believe as much as you like, Signora, of what Sir Ralph says,&rdquo;
+       Gervaise laughed. &ldquo;As you have, he says, known him for some time, you must
+      by this time have learnt that his word is not to be taken literally.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;We learned that quite early in our acquaintance,&rdquo; the girl who had first
+      noticed them said, with an affectation of gravity. &ldquo;I always tell him that
+      I cannot believe anything he says, and I am grateful to you, Sir Knight,
+      for having thus borne evidence to the quickness of my perception.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      By this time the servants had brought some more cushions, and on these
+      Ralph and Gervaise seated themselves. Wine, sherbet, and cakes, were then
+      handed round. The master of the house placed Gervaise on his right hand,
+      as a stranger.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;You have been among our islands, Sir Gervaise? But indeed, I need not ask
+      that, since I know that you and Sir Ralph were knighted together for your
+      valour in that affair with the ships of Hassan Ali. We come from Lesbos.
+      It is now eighty years since my family settled in Rhodes, and we have seen
+      it grow from a small place to a great fortress.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;'Tis a wonderful place,&rdquo; Gervaise said. &ldquo;I know nothing of the fortresses
+      of Europe, but it seems to me that no other can well be stronger than this&mdash;that
+      is, among places with no natural advantages.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;The knights have always had an abundance of slaves,&rdquo; the merchant said;
+      &ldquo;so many that they have not only had sufficient for their work here, but
+      have been able to sell numbers to European potentates. Yes, Rhodes is
+      wonderfully strong. That great fosse would seem as if it could defy the
+      efforts of an army to cross; and yet the past has shown that even the
+      strongest defences, held with the greatest bravery, can be carried by
+      generals with immense armies, and careless how they sacrifice them so that
+      they do but succeed. Look at Acre, for example.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I was looking at it five days ago,&rdquo; Gervaise said, &ldquo;and thinking that it
+      was beyond the might of man to take.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Do you mean that you were at Acre?&rdquo; the merchant asked, with surprise.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Yes. I went there to hand over a captive who had been ransomed. Of course
+      I had a safe conduct, and I was glad indeed of the opportunity of seeing
+      so famous a fortress.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;You were fortunate indeed, Sir Knight, and it was, if you will pardon my
+      saying so, singular that so young a knight should have been chosen.
+      Assuredly, even the senior knights of the Order would rejoice at the
+      opportunity of beholding a fortress so intimately connected with the past
+      history of the Order.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It was due entirely to my being able to speak Turkish,&rdquo; Gervaise said.
+      &ldquo;As my friend Sir Ralph was mentioning, I have been studying hard, and can
+      now speak the language fluently; and as this was a necessity on such a
+      mission, and the few knights who can so speak it are all in high office,
+      and could hardly be asked to undertake so unimportant a service, I was
+      selected.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;And you really speak Turkish well? It is an accomplishment that few, save
+      Greeks subject to Turkey, possess. Do you intend, may I ask, to make
+      Rhodes your home? I ask because I suppose you would not have taken this
+      labour had you intended shortly to return to England.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Yes; I hope to remain here permanently. I know that the first step
+      towards promotion here is generally a commandery at home, but I did not
+      enter the Order with any idea of gaining office or dignity. I desire
+      simply to be a knight of the Cross, and to spend my life in doing faithful
+      service to the Order.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;A worthy ambition indeed, and one that, so far as my experience goes,
+      very few knights entertain. I see yearly scores of young knights depart,
+      no small proportion of whom never place foot on Rhodes again, although
+      doubtless many of them will hasten back again as soon as the danger of an
+      assault from the Turks becomes imminent. You see, we who dwell here under
+      the protection of the Order naturally talk over these things among
+      ourselves; and although, in the matter of fortifications, all will admit
+      that enormous efforts have been made to render the town secure, it is
+      clear that in the matter of knights to defend them there is very much left
+      to be desired. It is all very well to say that the knights from all parts
+      of Europe would flock hither to defend it; but the journey would be a long
+      one, and would occupy much time, and they would probably not receive news
+      that the Turks had sailed until the place was already invested. Then it
+      would be difficult, if not altogether impossible, for ships with
+      reinforcements to make their way through the Turkish fleet, and to enter
+      the port. To man the walls properly would need a force five times as
+      numerous as that which is now here. I recognise the valour of your
+      knights; they have accomplished wonders. But even they cannot accomplish
+      impossibilities. For a time they could hold the walls; but as their number
+      became reduced by the fire of the Turkish cannon and the battles at the
+      breaches, they would at last be too weak any longer to repel the
+      onslaughts of foes with an almost unlimited supply of soldiers.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;That is true enough,&rdquo; Gervaise admitted; &ldquo;and to my mind it is shocking
+      that four-fifths at least of the Order, pledged to oppose the infidels,
+      should be occupied with the inglorious work of looking after the manors
+      and estates of the society throughout Europe, while one-fifth, at most,
+      are here performing the duties to which all are sworn. Of the revenues of
+      the estates themselves, a mere fraction finds its way hither. Still, I
+      trust that the greater part of the knights will hasten here as soon as
+      danger becomes imminent, without waiting for the news that the Turkish
+      armament has actually set forth.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      For an hour the two young knights remained on the roof, Gervaise talking
+      quietly with the merchant, while his companion laughed and chatted with
+      the ladies and friends of their host. After they had left, with the
+      promise that it would not be long before they repeated their visit, Ralph
+      bantered Gervaise on preferring the society of the merchant to that of his
+      daughters.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I found him a pleasant and very well informed man, Ralph, and enjoyed my
+      talk with him just as you enjoyed talking nonsense to his daughters and
+      listening to their songs. Who was the man sitting next to the eldest
+      daughter?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;He doesn't belong to Rhodes, but is a Greek from one of the islands,
+      though I did not catch from which. I don't know whether he is a relative
+      of the family, or a business connection of the merchant's, or a stranger
+      who has brought a letter of introduction to him. Nothing was said on that
+      head; why do you ask?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I don't like the man's face; he is a handsome fellow, but has a crafty
+      expression. He did not say much, but it seemed to me that at times, when
+      he appeared to be sitting carelessly sipping his sherbet, he was really
+      trying to listen to what Vrados was saying to me. He could not do so, for
+      we were on the other side of the circle, and were speaking in somewhat low
+      tones, while the rest of you were chatting and laughing.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;What should he want to listen for, most sapient knight?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;That I can't tell, Ralph; but I am certain that he was trying to listen.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Well, as you were no doubt both talking more sensibly than most of us,&rdquo;
+       Ralph laughed, &ldquo;he certainly showed his discernment.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I daresay I am wrong,&rdquo; Gervaise said quietly; &ldquo;but you know we have our
+      spies at Constantinople, and probably the sultan has his spies here; and
+      the idea occurred to me that perhaps this man might be one of them.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Well, I am bound to say, Gervaise,&rdquo; Ralph said, a little irritably, &ldquo;I
+      have never heard so grave an accusation brought on such insufficient
+      evidence&mdash;or rather, as far as I can see, without a shadow of
+      evidence of any kind. We drop in upon a man who is one of our most
+      respected merchants, whose family has been established here many years,
+      whose interests must be the same as those of the Order; and because a
+      guest of his does not care to take any active part in my joking with the
+      girls, and because you imagine that there is a cunning expression on his
+      face, you must straightway take it into your head that he must be a spy.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Excuse me, Ralph, I simply said that the idea occurred to me that he
+      might be a spy, which is a very different thing to my accusing him of
+      being one. I am ready to admit that the chances are infinitely greater
+      that he is an honest trader or a relation of the merchant, and that his
+      presence here is perfectly legitimate and natural, than that he should be
+      a spy. Still, there is a chance, if it be but one out of a thousand, that
+      he may be the latter. I don't think that I am at all of a suspicious
+      nature, but I really should like to learn a little about this man. I do
+      not mean that I am going to try to do so. It would be an unworthy action
+      to pry into another's business, when it is no concern of one's own. Still,
+      I should like to know why he is here.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Ralph shrugged his shoulders.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;This comes of living the life of a hermit, Gervaise. Other people meet
+      and talk, and enjoy what society there is in the city, without troubling
+      their heads for a moment as to where people come from or what their
+      business is here, still less whether they are spies. Such ideas do not so
+      much as occur to them, and I must say that I think the sooner you fall
+      into the ways of other people the better.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;There is no harm done,&rdquo; Gervaise said composedly. &ldquo;I am not thinking of
+      asking our bailiff to order him to be arrested on suspicion. I only
+      remarked that I did not like the man's face, nor the way in which, while
+      he pretended to be thinking of nothing, he was trying to overhear what we
+      were saying. I am quite willing to admit that I have made a mistake, not
+      in devoting myself to Turkish, but in going to the merchant's with you
+      this evening. I have had no experience whatever of what you call society,
+      and, so far from it giving me pleasure to talk to strangers, especially to
+      women, it seems to me that such talk is annoying to me, at any rate at
+      present. When I get to your age, possibly my ideas may change. I don't for
+      a moment wish to judge you or others; you apparently enjoy it, and it is a
+      distraction from our serious work. I say simply that it is an amusement
+      which I do not understand. You must remember that I entered the Order in
+      consequence of a solemn vow of my dead father, that I regard the
+      profession we make as a very serious one, and that my present intention is
+      to devote my life entirely to the Order and to an active fulfilment of its
+      vows.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;That is all right, Gervaise,&rdquo; Ralph said good temperedly. &ldquo;Only I think
+      it would be a pity if you were to turn out a fanatic. Jerusalem and
+      Palestine are lost, and you admit that there is really very little chance
+      of our ever regaining them. Our duties, therefore, are changed, and we are
+      now an army of knights, pledged to war against the infidels, in the same
+      way as knights and nobles at home are ever ready to engage in a war with
+      France. The vow of poverty is long since obsolete. Many of our chief
+      officials are men of great wealth, and indeed, a grand master, or the
+      bailiff of a langue, is expected to spend, and does spend, a sum vastly
+      exceeding his allowance from the Order. The great body of knights are
+      equally lax as to some of their other vows, and carry this to a length
+      that, as you know, has caused grave scandal. But I see not that it is in
+      any way incumbent on us to give up all the pleasures of life. We are a
+      military Order, and are all ready to fight in defence of Rhodes, as in
+      bygone days we were ready to fight in defence of the Holy Sepulchre. Kings
+      and great nobles have endowed us with a large number of estates, in order
+      to maintain us as an army against Islam; and as such we do our duty. But
+      to affect asceticism is out of date and ridiculous.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I have certainly no wish to be an ascetic, Ralph. I should have no
+      objection to hold estates, if I had them to hold. But I think that at
+      present, with the great danger hanging over us, it would be better if, in
+      the first place, we were all to spend less time in idleness or amusement,
+      and to devote all our energies to the cause. I mean not only by fighting
+      when the time comes for fighting, but by endeavouring in every way to ward
+      off danger.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;When I see danger, I will do my best to ward it off, Gervaise; but I
+      cannot go about with my nose in the air, snuffing danger like a hunting
+      dog in pursuit of game. At any rate, I will not bother you to accompany me
+      on my visits in future.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      <a name="link2HCH0009" id="link2HCH0009">
+      <!--  H2 anchor --> </a>
+    </p>
+    <div style="height: 4em;">
+      <br /><br /><br /><br />
+    </div>
+    <h2>
+      CHAPTER IX WITH THE GALLEY SLAVES
+    </h2>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise, on consideration, was obliged to own to himself that Ralph was
+      right in saying that he had no ground whatever for suspicion against the
+      Greek he had met at Signor Vrados's; and he could see no means of
+      following the matter up. It would not, he felt, be honourable to go again
+      to the merchant's house, and to avail himself of his hospitality, while
+      watching his guest. He determined to dismiss the matter from his mind, and
+      had, indeed, altogether done so when, a week later, it suddenly recurred
+      to his memory.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      A party of slaves, under the escort of overseers and in charge of a knight
+      who had been with them at their work on the fortifications, were passing
+      along the street on their way back to barracks. It was already dusk, and
+      as Gervaise was going the same way as they were, he stood aside in a
+      doorway to let them pass. He was on the point of stepping out to follow
+      them, when he saw a man, who had been standing in the shadow of the wall,
+      fall in with their ranks, and, as he walked engaged in an earnest
+      conversation with one of the slaves. He kept beside him for a hundred
+      yards or so, then passed something into the slave's hand, and turned
+      abruptly down a side opening. There were but few people about, and in the
+      growing darkness the action of the man passed unobserved by the overseers.
+      Gervaise, thinking the occurrence a strange one, turned down the same lane
+      as the man.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      He slackened his pace until the latter was fifty yards ahead, so that he
+      would not, had he looked round, have been able to perceive that it was a
+      knight who was behind him. After passing through several streets, the man
+      turned into a refreshment house. The door stood open, and as the place was
+      brightly lit up, Gervaise, pausing outside, was able to see what was going
+      on inside. The man he had followed was on the point of seating himself at
+      one of the tables, and as he did so Gervaise recognised him as the Greek
+      he had met at the merchant's house. He at once walked on a short distance,
+      and then paused to think.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The vague suspicions he had before entertained as to the man now recurred
+      with double force; he was certainly in communication with one or more of
+      the slaves, and such communication, so secretly effected, could be for no
+      good purpose. So far, however, there was nothing he could tax the man
+      with. He would probably deny altogether that he had spoken to any of the
+      slaves, and Gervaise could not point out the one he had conversed with. At
+      any rate, nothing could be done now, and he required time to think what
+      steps he could take to follow up the matter. He resolved, however, to wait
+      and follow the Greek when he came out. After a few minutes he again
+      repassed the door, and saw that the man was engaged in earnest
+      conversation with another. After considering for a time, Gervaise thought
+      that it would be best for him to follow this other man when he left, and
+      ascertain who he was, rather than to keep a watch on the movements of the
+      Greek, who, as likely as not, would now return to the merchant's.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      He walked several times up and down the street, until at last he saw the
+      two men issue out together. They stopped for a moment outside, and then,
+      after exchanging a few words, separated, the Greek going in the direction
+      of the quarter in which lay the house of Vrados, while the other walked
+      towards Gervaise. The latter passed him carelessly, but when the man had
+      gone nearly to the end of the street, he turned and followed him. He could
+      see at once that he was a lay brother of the Order. This class consisted
+      of men of an inferior social position to the knights; they filled many of
+      the minor offices, but were not eligible for promotion. Following for ten
+      minutes, Gervaise saw him approach one of the barracks, or prisons,
+      occupied by the slaves. He knocked at the door, and, upon its being
+      opened, at once entered.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The matter had now assumed a much more serious aspect. This young Greek, a
+      stranger to Rhodes, was in communication not only with some of the slaves,
+      but with a prison official, and the matter appeared so grave to Gervaise
+      that, after some deliberation, he thought it was too important for him to
+      endeavour to follow out alone, and that it was necessary to lay it before
+      the bailiff. Accordingly, after the evening meal he went up to Sir John
+      Kendall, and asked if he could confer with him alone on a matter over
+      which he was somewhat troubled. The bailiff assented at once, and Gervaise
+      followed him to his private apartment.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Now, what is this matter, Sir Gervaise?&rdquo; he asked pleasantly. &ldquo;Nothing
+      serious, I trust?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I don't know, Sir John. That is a matter for your consideration; but it
+      seems to me of such importance that it ought to be brought to your
+      knowledge.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The face of the bailiff grew more grave, and, seating himself in a chair,
+      he motioned to Gervaise to do the same.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Now, let me hear what it is,&rdquo; he said.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise told his story simply. A slight smile passed across the bailiff's
+      face as he mentioned that he had met the Greek on the roof of the house of
+      Signor Vrados, and had not liked the expression of his face.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Vrados has some fair daughters, has he not?&rdquo; he asked.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Yes, sir; but I know little of them. That is the only visit that I ever
+      paid there, or, indeed, to the house of any one in the town.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Sir John's face grew grave again as Gervaise recounted how he had seen the
+      man enter into communication with a slave; and he frowned heavily when he
+      heard of his meeting afterwards with one of the prison officers.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;In truth, Sir Gervaise,&rdquo; he said, after a pause, &ldquo;this seems to be a
+      right serious matter, and you have done wisely in informing me of what you
+      have seen. Assuredly there is mischief of some sort in the wind. The
+      question is how to get to the bottom of it. Of course, the grand master
+      might order the arrest of this Greek and of the prison officer, but you
+      may be sure that neither would commit himself unless torture were applied;
+      and I, for one, have no belief in what any man says under such
+      circumstances. The most honest man may own himself a traitor when racked
+      with torture, and may denounce innocent men. It is at best a clumsy
+      device. What think you of the matter?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I have hardly thought it over yet, Sir John; and certainly no plan has
+      yet occurred to me.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Well, think it over, Sir Gervaise. It is not likely that a few days will
+      make any difference. But I will take measures to see that this Greek does
+      not sail away from the Island at present, and will speak to the port
+      master about it. I will myself give the matter consideration, but as you
+      have shown yourself so quick witted in following up the matter so far, I
+      rely upon you more than myself to carry it farther. There may possibly be
+      some simple explanation of the matter. He may come from an island where
+      the Turks are masters, and has, perhaps, brought a message from some
+      relatives of a slave; as to the talk with the prison officer, it may be
+      wholly innocent. If we should find that it is so we will keep this matter
+      to ourselves, if possible, or we shall get finely laughed at by our
+      comrades for having run upon a false scent. If, on the other hand, the
+      matter should turn out to be serious, you will assuredly get great credit
+      for having discovered it. Therefore, turn it over in your mind tonight,
+      and see if you can arrive at some scheme for seeing further into it before
+      we take any steps.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      In the morning Gervaise again called upon Sir John Kendall.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Well, Sir Gervaise, I hope that you have hit upon some scheme for getting
+      to the bottom of this matter. I confess that I myself, though I have had a
+      sleepless night over it, have not been able to see any method of getting
+      to the root of the affair, save by the application of torture.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I do not know whether the plan I have thought of will commend itself to
+      your opinion, sir, but I have worked out a scheme which will, I think,
+      enable us to get to the bottom of the matter. I believe that a galley is
+      expected back from a cruise today or tomorrow. Now, sir, my idea is that I
+      should go on board a small craft, under the command of a knight upon whose
+      discretion and silence you can rely, such as, for example, Sir John
+      Boswell, and that we should intercept the galley. Before we board her I
+      should disguise myself as a Turkish slave, and as such Sir John should
+      hand me over to the officer in command of the galley, giving him a letter
+      of private instructions from you as to my disposal. If they have other
+      slaves on board I would ask that I should be kept apart from them, as well
+      as from the rowers of the galley. On being landed I should be sent to the
+      prison where I saw the officer enter last night, and the slaves and rowers
+      should be distributed among the other prisons. Thus, then, the slaves I
+      should be placed with would only know that I had arrived in the galley
+      with other slaves captured by it. I have no doubt I should be able to
+      maintain my assumed character, and should in a short time be taken into
+      the confidence of the others, and should learn what is going on. It would
+      be well, of course, that none of the officials of the prison should be
+      informed as to my true character, for others, besides the one I saw, may
+      have been bribed to participate in whatever plot is going on.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;And do you mean to say, Sir Gervaise, that you, a knight of the Order,
+      are willing to submit to the indignity of being treated as a slave? To
+      keep up the disguise long enough to be taken into the confidence of the
+      plotters, you might have to stay there for some time; and if the prison
+      officials believe you to be but an ordinary slave, you will be put to work
+      either on the walls or in one of the galleys.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I am ready to do anything for the benefit of the Order, and the safety of
+      Rhodes, that will meet with your approval,&rdquo; Gervaise replied. &ldquo;It will no
+      doubt be unpleasant, but we did not enter the Order to do pleasant things,
+      but to perform certain duties, and those duties necessarily involve a
+      certain amount of sacrifice.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Do you think you would be able to maintain the character? Because you
+      must remember that if detected you might be torn in pieces by the slaves,
+      before the officers could interfere to protect you.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I feel sure that I can do so, Sir John.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;What story would you tell them?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I would say that I had come from Syria, and sailed from Acre in a trader,
+      which is perfectly true, and also that I was taken off the ship I was on
+      by a galley&mdash;which would not be altogether false, as I crossed one as
+      I landed. I think there would be very little questioning, for I should
+      pretend to be in a state of sullen despair, and give such short answers to
+      questions that I should soon be left alone.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;The scheme is a good one, Sir Gervaise, though full of danger and
+      difficulty. If you are ready to render this great service to the Order, I
+      willingly accept the sacrifice you offer to make. I will send one of my
+      slaves down into the town to buy garments suitable for you, and also
+      stains for your skin. It will, of course, be necessary for you to shave a
+      portion of your head in Turkish fashion. I will also see Sir John Boswell,
+      and ask him to arrange for a craft to be ready to start at noon. The
+      galley is not expected in until evening, but of course she may arrive at
+      any moment now. Come here again in an hour's time, and I will have the
+      clothes ready for you.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;May I suggest, sir, that they should be those appropriate to a small
+      merchant? This might seem to account for my not being placed with the
+      other slaves who may be on board the galley, as it would be supposed that
+      I was set apart in order that I should be sent to one of the auberges as a
+      servant; and my afterwards being herded with the others would be explained
+      by its being found that there was no opening for me in such a capacity. I
+      should think there would be no difficulty in obtaining such a suit, as
+      garments of all kinds are brought here in prizes, and are bought up by
+      some of the Greek merchants, who afterwards find opportunities of
+      despatching them by craft trading among the islands.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Just before noon Gervaise walked down to the port with Sir John Boswell, a
+      servant following with a bundle.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It seems to me a hare brained scheme, lad,&rdquo; Sir John, who had just joined
+      him, said, as they issued from the auberge; &ldquo;though I own, from what the
+      bailiff tells me, that there must be some treacherous plot on hand, and
+      when that is the case it is necessary that it should be probed to the
+      bottom. But for a knight to go in the disguise of an infidel slave seems
+      to me to be beyond all bounds.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;If one is ready to give one's life for the Order, Sir John, surely one
+      need not mind a few weeks' inconvenience. I shall, at any rate, be no
+      worse off than you were when serving as a Turkish slave.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Well, no, I don't know that you will,&rdquo; Sir John replied doubtfully. &ldquo;But
+      that was from necessity, and not from choice; and it is, moreover, an
+      accident we are all exposed to.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It is surely better to do a thing of one's own free will than because one
+      is forced to do it, Sir John?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The knight was silent. He was a stout fighting man, but unused to
+      argument.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Well,&rdquo; he said, after a long pause, &ldquo;I can only hope that it will turn
+      out all right, and promise that if you are strangled in prison, I will see
+      that every slave who had a hand in it shall be strung up. I have told
+      Kendall frankly that if I were in his place I would not permit you to try
+      such a venture. However, as I could think of no other plan by which there
+      would be a chance of getting to the bottom of this matter, my words had no
+      effect with him. I should not have so much cared if the officers of the
+      gaol knew who you were; but I can see that if there is treachery at work
+      this would defeat your object altogether. What do you suppose this rascal
+      Greek can be intending?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;That I cannot say, Sir John. He may be trying to get an exact plan of the
+      fortifications, or he may be arranging some plan of communication by
+      which, in case of siege, news of our condition and of the state of our
+      defences may be conveyed to the Turkish commander.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      By this time they had reached the port, and embarked at once on a trading
+      vessel belonging to one of the merchants, from whom Sir John had readily
+      obtained her use for a day or two. Her sails were hoisted at once, and she
+      rowed out from the port. Having proceeded some three or four miles, they
+      lowered her sails, and lay to in the course a galley making for the port
+      would take. A sailor was sent up to the masthead to keep a lookout. Late
+      in the afternoon he called down that he could make out a black speck some
+      twelve miles away. She carried no sails, and he judged her to be a galley.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It will be dark before she comes along,&rdquo; Sir John Boswell said. &ldquo;You can
+      hoist your sails, captain, and return to within half a mile of the port,
+      or she may pass us beyond hailing distance.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise at once retired to the cabin that had been set aside for their
+      use, and proceeded to disguise himself. An hour later Sir John came down.
+      He looked at Gervaise critically.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;You are all right as far as appearances go. I should take you anywhere
+      for a young Turk. Your clothes are not too new, and are in accordance with
+      the tale you are going to tell, which is that you are the son of a Syrian
+      trader. If, as Suleiman says, you speak Turkish well enough to pose as a
+      native, I think you ought to be able to pass muster. How long will that
+      dye last? Because if it begins to fade they will soon suspect you.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It will last a fortnight; at least, so Sir John Kendall says. But he has
+      arranged that if at the end of ten days I have not succeeded in finding
+      out anything, he will send down to the prison, and under the pretence that
+      he wants to ask me some questions about what ransom my father would be
+      likely to pay for me, he will have me up to the auberge, and there I can
+      dye myself afresh.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;How are you to communicate with him in case of need?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;His servant Ahmet, who got the things for me, is to come down every
+      morning, and to be near the door of the prison at the hour when the slaves
+      are taken out to work. If I have aught to communicate I am to nod twice,
+      and Sir John Kendall will send down that evening to fetch me, instead of
+      waiting until it is time for me to renew my dye.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;What is going to be said to Harcourt and the others to account for your
+      absence?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;The bailiff will merely say that he has suddenly sent me away by ship, on
+      a private mission. They may wonder, perhaps, but none of them will venture
+      to ask him its nature.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Well, I must say that you seem to have made all your arrangements
+      carefully, Tresham, and I hope it will turn out well. I was against the
+      scheme at first, but I own that I do not see now why it should not
+      succeed; and if there is any plot really on hand, you may be able to get
+      to the bottom of it.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      It was an hour after darkness had completely fallen when the regular beat
+      of oars was heard. The ship's boat was already in the water, and Gervaise,
+      wrapped up in his mantle, followed Sir John out of his cabin and descended
+      with him into the boat, which was at once rowed towards the approaching
+      galley. Sir John hailed it as it came along.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Who is it calls?&rdquo; a voice said.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It is I&mdash;Sir John Boswell. Pray take me on board, Sir Almeric. It is
+      a somewhat special matter.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The order was given, the galley slaves ceased rowing, and the boat ran
+      alongside. Gervaise unclasped his mantle and gave it to Sir John, and then
+      followed him on board.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I congratulate you on your return, and on your good fortune in having, as
+      your letter stated, made a prosperous voyage,&rdquo; Sir John said, as he shook
+      hands with the commander of the galley.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I would speak a word with you aside,&rdquo; he added in a low voice.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Sir Almeric moved with him a few paces from the other knights.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I am sent here by our bailiff, Sir Almeric. I have a Turkish prisoner
+      here with me who is to be landed with those you have taken. There are
+      special reasons for this, which I need not now enter into. Will you let
+      him sit down here by the helm? My instructions are that he is not to
+      mingle with the other slaves; and as there are reasons why it is wished
+      that his coming on board in this manner shall not be known to them, I
+      myself am to take him up to one of the prisons, or at least to hand him
+      over to the officer sent down from that prison to take up the captives
+      allotted to it. The matter is of more importance than it seems to be, or,
+      as you may imagine, I should not be charged to intercept you on such an
+      errand.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Of course, I don't understand anything about it, Sir John, but will do as
+      you ask me.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      He went to where Gervaise had crouched down by the bulwark, beckoned him
+      to follow, and, walking aft, motioned to him to sit down there. Then he
+      returned to Sir John, and joined the other knights, who were all too
+      anxious to learn the latest news&mdash;who had left the island, and who
+      had come to it since they sailed&mdash;to interest themselves in any way
+      with the figure who had gone aft, supposing him, indeed, to be Sir John's
+      servant, the lantern suspended over the poop giving too feeble a light for
+      his costume to be noted.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      A quarter of an hour later they anchored in the harbour. Some of the
+      knights at once went ashore to their respective auberges, but Sir Almeric
+      and a few others remained on board until relieved of their charge in the
+      morning, an account being sent on shore of the number of captives that had
+      been brought in. No thought was given to Gervaise, who slept curled up on
+      the poop. Sir John Boswell passed the night on board. In the morning an
+      officer came off with a list of the prisons to which the slaves were to be
+      sent. Sir John Kendall had seen the officer charged with the distribution,
+      who had, at his request, not included the prison of St. Pelagius in the
+      list.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      A message, however, had been sent to that prison, as well as to the
+      others, for an officer to attend at the landing stage. In the morning Sir
+      John went ashore in one of the boats conveying the slaves, of whom some
+      forty had been captured. Gervaise followed him into the boat, and took his
+      seat by the others, who were too dispirited at the fate which had befallen
+      them to pay any attention to him.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      When he landed, Sir John asked which was the officer from St. Pelagius.
+      One stepped forward.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;This is the only slave for you,&rdquo; he said, pointing to Gervaise. &ldquo;He is of
+      a better class than the rest, and in the future may be he will do for a
+      servitor at one of the auberges, but none have at present occasion for
+      one, and so he is to go to you. He says that his father is a merchant, and
+      will be ready to pay a ransom for him; but they all say that, and we must
+      not heed it overmuch. As he seems a smart young fellow, it may be that he
+      will be sent to one of the auberges later on; but at present, at any rate,
+      you can put him with the rest, and send him out with the gangs.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;He is a well built young fellow, Sir John,&rdquo; the officer remarked, &ldquo;and
+      should make a good rower in a galley. I will put him in the crew of the
+      St. Elmo. Follow me,&rdquo; he said, in Turkish, to Gervaise, and then led the
+      way up to the prison. On entering he crossed a courtyard to a door which
+      was standing open. Within was a vaulted room, some forty feet long by
+      twenty wide; along each side there were rushes strewn thickly.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;The others have just started to their work,&rdquo; he said, &ldquo;so that for today
+      you can sleep.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      After he had left, Gervaise looked with some disgust at the rushes, that
+      had evidently been for weeks unchanged.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I would rather have the bare stones, if they were clean,&rdquo; he muttered to
+      himself. &ldquo;However, it can't be helped.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      He presently strolled out into the courtyard, where some other slaves,
+      disabled by illness or injuries, were seated in the sun. Gervaise walked
+      across to them, and they looked listlessly up at him as he approached.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;You are a newcomer,&rdquo; one said, as he came up. &ldquo;I saw you brought in, but
+      it didn't need that. By the time you have been here a week or two, your
+      clothes will be like ours,&rdquo; and he pointed to his ragged garments. &ldquo;When
+      did you arrive? Are there no others coming up here?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;The galley came in last night,&rdquo; Gervaise said, &ldquo;but they did not land us
+      until this morning. I wish they had killed me rather than that I should
+      have been brought here to work as a slave.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;One always thinks so at first,&rdquo; the man said. &ldquo;But somehow one clings to
+      life. We shall die when Allah wills it, and not before.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;What is the matter with your foot?&rdquo; Gervaise asked.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I was with the gang quarrying stones, and a mass of rock fell upon it. I
+      have been in the infirmary for weeks, and I own that the Christian dogs
+      treated me well. A slave has his value, you see. I am nearly cured now,
+      but I shall never walk well again. I expect they will put me in one of
+      their accursed galleys.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;How long have you been here?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Seven years; it seems a lifetime. However, there is hope yet. They don't
+      tell us much, but we hear things sometimes, and they say that the sultan
+      is going to sweep them out of Rhodes as they were swept out of Acre. When
+      will it be?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I know not. I am from Syria, but even there they are making preparations.
+      The sultan has had troubles in the East, and that has delayed him, but he
+      will be here before long, and then we shall see. It will be our turn
+      then.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It will, indeed!&rdquo; one of the others exclaimed. &ldquo;Oh, to see these dogs
+      brought down, and suffering as we have suffered, toiling at oars in one of
+      our galleys, or at the fortifications of one of our castles! It will make
+      amends for all our suffering. Had you a hard fight with them?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;No. We were but a small craft, and it was vain to attempt resistance. I
+      would gladly have fought, but the sailors said it would only throw away
+      their lives. There was but little on board, and they allowed the vessel to
+      go free with those of the sailors who were too old to be made useful for
+      hard work.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      No further questions were asked. The men seemed to have no interest save
+      in their own misery, and Gervaise soon left them, and, sitting down in a
+      shady corner, presently dropped off to sleep.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      In the evening all came in from their various work. The officer man who
+      had brought Gervaise in went up to the overseer of the galley slaves and
+      informed him that he had told off the new slave&mdash;pointing to Gervaise&mdash;to
+      his gang.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;He was brought in by the galley that arrived last night,&rdquo; he said; &ldquo;he
+      was the only slave sent up here. I hear that he had been set aside to be
+      appointed a servitor, but there are no vacancies, so they sent him here
+      till one should occur; and I was ordered to make him useful in other ways
+      in the meantime.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I am two or three hands short,&rdquo; the overseer said. &ldquo;I wish now I had sent
+      in an application yesterday, for if I had done so, no doubt they would
+      have sent me some more men. However, this fellow will make up an even
+      number, and he is strong and active, though at present he looks sulky
+      enough under his bad fortune.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      A few of the slaves spoke to Gervaise as they were waiting for food to be
+      brought them, but the majority dropped upon the rushes, too exhausted with
+      toil and heat to feel an interest in anything. The food consisted of rye
+      bread, with thin broth, brought in a great iron vessel. Each slave had a
+      horn, which was used for soup or water, and which, when done with, he had,
+      by the rule enforced among themselves, to take out to the fountain in the
+      courtyard and wash, before it was added to the pile in the corner of the
+      room.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The cool of the evening aided the meal in restoring the energies of the
+      slaves. Several gathered round Gervaise, and asked questions as to what he
+      knew of the prospects of an early invasion of Rhodes; but as soon as the
+      officer left the room, closing and locking the door after him, the slaves
+      became for the most part silent. A few men sat in groups together, talking
+      in undertones, but the greater number threw themselves down on the rushes,
+      either to sleep or to think alone. Gervaise was struck by the manner in
+      which most of them lay, without making the slightest movement, so long as
+      there was light to enable him to make out their figures. He himself
+      addressed two or three of them, as they lay with their eyes wide open,
+      asking questions with reference to the work; but in no case did he receive
+      any reply. The men seemed altogether unconscious of being addressed, being
+      absorbed in the thought of their far distant homes and families which they
+      might never see again.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise walked a few times up and down the room, and as he approached a
+      silence fell each time upon the groups of men talking together. More than
+      once a figure rose soon afterwards from the ground, and, as he came along
+      again, asked him a few questions about himself. As soon as it was dark, he
+      lay down in a vacant space on the rushes. Shortly afterwards talking
+      ceased altogether, and there was quiet in the vaulted room. With the first
+      gleam of daylight they were astir, and, when the doors were opened, poured
+      out into the courtyard, where all had a wash at the fountain. Half an hour
+      later, a meal, precisely similar to that of the previous evening, was
+      served out; then the overseers called over the muster roll, the gangs were
+      made up, and each, under its officer, started for its work.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise, with the men of his room, proceeded down to the port, and at
+      once took their seats on the benches of the galley, one foot being chained
+      to a ring in the deck, the other to that of a companion at the oar. The
+      slaves were more cheerful now. As there was no work to do at present, they
+      were allowed to talk, and an occasional laugh was heard, for the sun and
+      brightness of the day cheered them. Many, after years of captivity, had
+      grown altogether reckless, and it was among these that there was most
+      talking; the younger men seemed, for the most part, silent and moody.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;You will get accustomed to it,&rdquo; the man next to Gervaise said cheeringly.
+      &ldquo;When I first came here, it seemed to me that I could not support the life
+      for a month&mdash;that the fate was too dreadful to be borne, and that
+      death would be most welcome; but, like the rest, I became accustomed to it
+      in time. After all, the work is no harder than one would do at home. There
+      is no stint of food, and it is no worse than one would have, were one
+      labouring in the fields. Were it not for the loss of those we love, it
+      would be nothing; and in time one gets over even that. I have long ago
+      told myself that if they are not dead, at least they are dead to me. They
+      have their livings to get, and cannot be always mourning, and I have tried
+      to forget them, as they must have forgotten me.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Do you work hard?&rdquo; Gervaise asked.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;No. We who are in the galleys are regarded by the others with envy.
+      Sometimes&mdash;often, indeed&mdash;we have naught to do all day. We bask
+      in the sun, we talk, we sleep, we forget that we are slaves. But,
+      generally, we go out for an hour or two's exercise; that is well enough,
+      and keeps us strong and in health. Only when we are away on voyages is the
+      work hard. Sometimes we row from morning to night; but it is only when
+      they are in chase of another craft that we have really to exert ourselves
+      greatly. Then it is terrible. We may be doing our best, our very best, and
+      yet to the impatient knights it seems that we might do more. Then they
+      shout to the overseer, and he lays his whip on our backs without mercy.
+      Then we row until sometimes we drop, senseless, off the benches. But this,
+      you understand, is not very often; and though the work on a cruise is
+      long, it is not beyond our strength. Besides, when we are away in the
+      galley there is always hope. The galley may meet with four or five of our
+      ships, and be captured, or a storm may arise and dash her upon the shore;
+      and though many would lose their lives, some might escape, and each man,
+      in thinking of it, believes that he will be one of the fortunate ones.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Take my advice: always look cheerful if you can; always put your hand on
+      the oar when the order is given, and row as if you were glad to be at work
+      again; and always make a show, as if you were working your hardest. Never
+      complain when you are struck unjustly, and always speak respectfully to
+      the overseer. In that way you will find your life much easier than you
+      would think. You will be chosen for small boat service; and that is a
+      great thing, as we are not chained in the small boats. Some men are
+      foolish and obstinate, but, so far from doing any good, this only brings
+      trouble on themselves; they come in for punishment daily, they are closely
+      watched, and their lives made hells for them. Even as a help to escape it
+      pays best to be cheerful and alert. We all think of escape, you know,
+      though it is seldom indeed that a chance ever comes to any of us. It is
+      the one thing except death to look forward to, and there is not a man
+      among us who does not think of it scores of times a day; but, small as the
+      chance is, it is greatest for those who behave best. For instance, it is
+      they only who man small boats; and when a small boat rows ashore, it is
+      always possible that the guard may be careless&mdash;that he will keep the
+      boat at the landing place, instead of pushing off at once into deep water,
+      as he ought to do&mdash;and that in this way a chance will, sooner or
+      later, come for springing ashore and making a dash for liberty.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      <a name="link2HCH0010" id="link2HCH0010">
+      <!--  H2 anchor --> </a>
+    </p>
+    <div style="height: 4em;">
+      <br /><br /><br /><br />
+    </div>
+    <h2>
+      CHAPTER X. A PLOT DISCOVERED.
+    </h2>
+    <p>
+      The conversation between Gervaise and his fellow slave was interrupted by
+      the arrival at the side of the quay of a party of knights. Silence
+      instantly fell upon the slaves; all straightened themselves up to the
+      oars, and prepared for a start. Among the knights who took their places on
+      the poop Gervaise saw with amusement his friend Ralph. He had no fear of a
+      recognition, for the darkly stained skin and the black hair had so
+      completely altered him that when he had looked at himself in a mirror,
+      after the application of the dye, he was surprised to find that he would
+      not have known it to be his own face. Ralph was in command of the party,
+      which consisted of young knights who had but recently arrived at Rhodes;
+      and as it was the first time he had been appointed as instructor, Gervaise
+      saw that he was greatly pleased at what he rightly regarded as promotion.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The galley at once pushed off from the wharf, and rowed out of the port.
+      The work was hard; but as the slaves were not pressed to any extraordinary
+      exertions, Gervaise did not find it excessive. He congratulated himself,
+      however, that the stain was, as he had been assured, indelible, save by
+      time, for after a few minutes' exercise he was bathed in perspiration. As
+      the galley had been taken out only that instruction might be given to the
+      young knights, the work was frequently broken.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Sometimes they went ahead at full speed for a few hundred yards, as if to
+      chase an adversary; then they would swerve aside, the slaves on one side
+      rowing, while those on the other backed, so as to make a rapid turn. Then
+      she lay for a minute or two immovable, and then backed water, or turned to
+      avoid the attack of an imaginary foe. Then for an hour she lay quiet,
+      while the knights, divesting themselves of their mantles and armour,
+      worked one of the guns on the poop, aiming at a floating barrel moored for
+      the purpose a mile out at sea. At eleven o'clock they returned to the
+      port. Bread and water were served out to the slaves, and they were then
+      permitted to lie down and sleep, the galley being moored under the shadow
+      of the wall.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      At four o'clock another party of knights came down, and the work was
+      similar to that which had been performed in the morning. At seven o'clock
+      the slaves were taken back to their barracks.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Well, what do you think of your work?&rdquo; one of the slaves asked Gervaise,
+      as they ate their evening meal.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It would not be so bad if it was all like that.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;No. But I can tell you that when you have to row from sunrise to sunset,
+      with perhaps but one or two pauses for a few minutes, it is a different
+      thing altogether, especially if the galley is carrying despatches, and
+      speed is necessary. Then you get so worn out and exhausted, that you can
+      scarce move an oar through the water, until you are wakened up by a smart
+      as if a red hot iron had been laid across your shoulders. It is terrible
+      work then. The whip cracks every minute across some one's back; you are
+      blinded by exhaustion and rage, and you feel that you would give the world
+      if you could but burst your chain, rush on your taskmasters, and strike,
+      if only one blow, before you are killed.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It must be terrible,&rdquo; Gervaise said. &ldquo;And do you never get loose, and
+      fall upon them?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The man shook his head.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;The chains are too strong, and the watch too vigilant,&rdquo; he said. &ldquo;Since I
+      came here I have heard tales of crews having freed themselves in the
+      night, and fallen upon the Christians, but for my part I do not believe in
+      them. I have thought, as I suppose every one of us has thought, how such a
+      thing could be done; but as far as I know no one has hit on a plan yet.
+      Now and then men have managed to become possessed of a file, and have, by
+      long and patient work, sawn through a chain, and have, when a galley has
+      been lying near our own shore, sprung overboard and escaped; but for every
+      attempt that succeeds there must be twenty failures, for the chains are
+      frequently examined, and woe be to the man who is found to have been
+      tampering with his. But as to a whole gang getting free at once, it is
+      altogether impossible, unless the key of the pad locks could be stolen
+      from an overseer, or the man bribed into aiding us.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;And that, I suppose, is impossible?&rdquo; Gervaise said.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Certainly, impossible for us who have no money to bribe them with, but
+      easy enough if any one outside, with ample means, were to set about it.
+      These overseers are, many of them, sons of Turkish mothers, and have no
+      sympathy, save that caused by interest, with one parent more than another.
+      Of course, they are brought up Christians, and taught to hold Moslems in
+      abhorrence, but I think many of them, if they had their free choice, would
+      cross to the mainland. Here they have no chance of ever being aught but
+      what they are&mdash;overseers of slaves, or small prison officials. They
+      are despised by these haughty knights, and hated by us, while were they to
+      reach the mainland and adopt their mothers' religion, everything would be
+      open to them. All followers of the Prophet have an equal chance, and one
+      may be a soldier today, a bey tomorrow, and a pasha a year hence, if he be
+      brave, or astute, or capable in any way beyond his fellows. Men like these
+      warders would be sure to make their way.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;They cannot have gathered much during their service, therefore the offer
+      of a large sum of money would find plenty among them eager to earn it.
+      But, you see, they are but the inferiors. On our voyages on board the
+      galley, the knights inspect our fetters twice a day, and the keys are kept
+      in the commander's cabin. For an hour or two, when we are not on a long
+      passage, the padlocks are unfastened, in order that we may jump over and
+      bathe, and exercise our limbs; but at this time the knights are always on
+      guard, and as we are without arms we are altogether powerless. It is the
+      same thing here. The senior warders, who all belong to the Order, although
+      of an inferior grade, come round, as you have seen, to examine our
+      fetters, and themselves lock and bar the doors. If one or two of these
+      could be corrupted, escape would be easy enough.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;But is it impossible to do this?&rdquo; Gervaise asked eagerly. &ldquo;My father has
+      money, and would I know be ready, if I could communicate with him, to pay
+      a handsome sum, if sure that it would result in my obtaining my freedom.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The man nodded significantly.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;There may be other means of doing it,&rdquo; he said. &ldquo;Perhaps it will not be
+      long before you hear of it. You seem a stout fellow, and full of spirit,
+      but, as yet, anything that may be going on is known but to a few, and will
+      go no further until the time comes that all may be told. I think not so
+      badly of men of our faith as to believe that any one would betray the
+      secret for the sake of obtaining his own freedom and a big reward; but
+      secrets, when known by many, are apt to leak out. A muttered word or two
+      in sleep, or the ravings of one down with fever, might afford ground for
+      suspicion, and torture would soon do the rest. I myself know nothing of
+      the secret, but I do know that there is something going on which, if
+      successful, will give us our freedom. I am content to know no more until
+      the time comes; but there are few, save those engaged in the matter, that
+      know as much as this, and you can see that it is better it should be so.
+      Look at that man opposite; he has been here fifteen years; he seldom
+      speaks; he does his work, but it is as a brute beast&mdash;despair has
+      well nigh turned him into one. Think you that if such a man as that were
+      to know that there is hope, he would not be so changed that even the
+      dullest would observe it? I see you are a brisk young fellow, and I say to
+      you, keep up your courage. The time is nearer than you think when you will
+      be free from these accursed shackles.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Each morning, as he went out to work with his gang, Gervaise saw the
+      servant from the auberge standing near; but he made no sign. He was
+      satisfied that his suspicions had been justified, and that he was not
+      leading this life in vain, but he thought it better to wait until the week
+      passed, and he was taken away to have his colour renewed, than to make a
+      sign that might possibly rouse the suspicions of his comrades. On the
+      eighth morning, when the door of the room was unlocked, the overseer said&mdash;&ldquo;Number
+      36, you will remain here. You are wanted for other work.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      After the gang had left the prison, the overseer returned.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I am to take you up to the English auberge. The knight who handed you
+      over to me when you landed, told me that you might be wanted as a
+      servitor; and as it is he who has sent down, it may be that a vacancy has
+      occurred. If so, you are in luck, for the servitors have a vastly better
+      time of it than the galley slaves, and the English auberge has the best
+      reputation in that respect. Come along with me.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The English auberge was one of the most handsome of the buildings standing
+      in the great street of the Knights. Its architecture was Gothic in its
+      character, and, although the langue was one of the smallest of those
+      represented at Rhodes, it vied with any of them in the splendour of its
+      appointments. Sir John Boswell was standing in the interior courtyard.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Wait here for a few minutes,&rdquo; he said to the overseer. &ldquo;The bailiff will
+      himself question the slave as to his accomplishments; but I fancy he will
+      not be considered of sufficient age for the post that is vacant. However,
+      if this should not be so, I shall no doubt find a post to fit him ere
+      long, for he seems a smart young fellow, and, what is better, a willing
+      one, and bears himself well under his misfortunes.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Then he motioned to Gervaise to follow him to the bailiff's apartments.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Well, Sir Gervaise,&rdquo; Sir John Kendall exclaimed, as the door closed
+      behind him, &ldquo;have you found aught to justify this cruel penance you have
+      undertaken?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;As to the penance, Sir John, it has been nothing unsupportable. The
+      exercise is hard enough, but none too hard for one in good health and
+      strength, and, save for the filth of the chamber in which we are shut up
+      at night, and the foul state of the rushes on which we lie, I should have
+      naught to complain of. No, I have as yet heard nothing of a surety&mdash;and
+      yet enough to show me that my suspicions were justified, and that there is
+      a plot of some sort on foot,&rdquo; and he related to the two knights the
+      conversation he had had with the galley slave.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;By St. George!&rdquo; the bailiff said, &ldquo;you have indeed been justified in your
+      surmises, and I am glad that I attached sufficient importance to your
+      suspicions to let you undertake this strange enterprise. What think you,
+      Sir John Boswell?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I think with you, that Sir Gervaise has fully justified his insistence in
+      this matter, which I own I considered to be hare brained folly. What is to
+      be done next, Sir Gervaise?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;That is what I have been turning over in my mind. You see, I may have
+      little warning of what is going to take place. I may not hear of it until
+      we are locked up for the night and the affair is on the point of taking
+      place, and it will, of course, be most needful that I shall be able to
+      communicate with you speedily.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;That, of course, is of vital importance,&rdquo; the bailiff said. &ldquo;But how is
+      it to be managed?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;That is what I cannot exactly see, Sir John. An armed guard remains in
+      our room all night. But, in the first place, he might be himself in the
+      plot, and if not, the slaves would almost certainly overpower him and kill
+      him, as a preliminary to the work of knocking off their chains.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Is there a window to the room? At least, of course there is a window, but
+      is it within your reach?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;There are six small loopholes&mdash;one on each side of the door, and two
+      in each of the side walls; they are but four inches across and three feet
+      in length, and there are two crossbars to each; they are four feet from
+      the floor.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;At any rate, they are large enough for your arm to pass through, Sir
+      Gervaise, and you might drop a strip of cloth out.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Certainly I could, Sir John. I could easily hide a piece of white cotton
+      a yard or so long in my clothes, scanty as these are, and could certainly
+      manage, unobserved, to drop it outside the window.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Then the rest is for us to contrive, Boswell. We must have some one
+      posted in the yard of the prison, with instructions to go every ten
+      minutes throughout the night to see if a strip of white cotton has been
+      dropped out. When he finds it he must go at once to William Neave, the
+      governor. He is a sturdy Englishman, and there is no fear of his having
+      been bribed to turn traitor; but it were well to take no one into our
+      confidence. I think we cannot do better than employ Ahmet on this
+      business, as he already knows that Sir Gervaise is masquerading there. We
+      will have William Neave up here presently. Tell him that for certain
+      reasons we wish Ahmet to pass the night for the present in the prison, and
+      arrange with him on what excuse we can best bestow him there without
+      exciting suspicion. At any rate, Sir Gervaise, that is our affair.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      He went to a closet and took out a white mantle, tore a strip off the
+      bottom, and gave it to Gervaise.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It would be best not to keep you here any longer,&rdquo; he said, &ldquo;so renew
+      your stain while I speak. As soon as you learn the details of the plot,
+      you will drop this out from the loophole on the right hand side of the
+      door; that is to say, the one on your right, standing inside. If the
+      affair is not to come off at once, it were best for you to proceed as
+      before. Ahmet will be outside when you go out with your gang, and on your
+      nodding to him we will make some excuse to take you away on your return. I
+      say this because if you see that the affair, whatever it is, is not
+      imminent, you might think it better to remain with them longer, so as to
+      learn their plans more fully, instead of having the thing put a stop to at
+      once.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I understand, Sir John; but, as I have said, I do not think we should all
+      be told until the blow is ready to be struck, as they would be afraid that
+      some one might inform against them, if time and opportunity were granted
+      them.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I think so too, Sir Gervaise. This afternoon we will call upon the grand
+      master, for we have no means of knowing how serious or how extended this
+      plot may be; it may include only the crew of a single galley, and, on the
+      other hand, the whole of the slaves may be implicated in it. It is
+      evident, therefore, that the matter is too serious to be kept any longer
+      from his knowledge.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Three more days passed. On the third evening, after the allowance of broth
+      and bread had been consumed, and the door was closed and locked upon them
+      for the night, three or four of the galley slaves, after talking eagerly
+      together, beckoned to the others to gather round them at the end of the
+      room farthest from the door. Two of them took up arms full of the bedding,
+      and stuffed it into the side windows. Gervaise saw, in the dim light, a
+      look of intense excitement on the faces of the slaves. It had been vaguely
+      known among them that a plot was in hand, although but few had been
+      admitted into the confidence of the leaders. Hitherto all had feared that
+      it concerned only a small number, but the preparations now made to insure
+      that they should not be overheard, showed that, whatever the plan might
+      be, all were to share in it.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Thanks be to Allah, the All Powerful,&rdquo; one of the men began, &ldquo;my lips are
+      unsealed, and I can tell you the great news that our hour for escape from
+      bondage is at hand! We need not fear the warder there,&rdquo; he went on, as
+      several eyes were turned apprehensively towards the guard, who, with his
+      spear beside him, was leaning carelessly against the wall at the farther
+      end, looking through the window into the courtyard; &ldquo;he is with us. You
+      must know that for the last two months an agent from Constantinople has
+      been on the Island, and has been engaged in arranging this affair. Two of
+      our taskmasters belonging to the Order have been bribed by large sums of
+      money, and several of the overseers, who are half of our blood, have
+      eagerly embraced the prospect of returning to their mothers' country, and
+      of avowing openly their belief in our religion. These, again, have bought
+      over many of the guards, ours included, and tonight all will be ready for
+      action. Those not of our party will be killed without ceremony. Duplicate
+      keys have been made of all the padlocks of the fetters; the guards who are
+      with us have each one of them, the others will have been slipped into the
+      hands of one man in each gang as they returned tonight from work. The
+      overseers who are in the plot will, at midnight, go quietly round and
+      unlock the doors, and remove the bars from the outside. We have,
+      therefore, only to overcome the eight or ten men who patrol the prison;
+      and as we shall have the arms of the guards, some thirty in number, we
+      shall make quick work of them.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;The two guards at the outside gates must, of course, be killed.
+      Duplicates of the keys have been made, and will be hidden in a spot known
+      to some of our party, close to the gate. Thus we have but to issue out and
+      rush down, in a body, to the port. I and another are to take the arms of
+      our guard, and two others are told off in each room to do the same. That
+      will give us sixty armed men. We shall make very short work of the guards
+      at the gate leading into the port. Then twenty of us are to run along the
+      mole to Fort St. Nicholas, twenty to the Tower of St. Michael, and twenty
+      to that of St. John. There will be, at the most, but three or four men
+      keeping watch at each fort, and thus we shall have in our possession the
+      three forts commanding the entrance to the harbour. There are, as you
+      know, six galleys manned by crews from our prison there. The crew of each
+      galley will embark upon it, and man the oars; the rest will divide
+      themselves among the galleys. Before starting, we shall seize and set fire
+      to all other galleys and ships in the port. The gangs in four of the rooms
+      have been told off specially for this duty. Before firing them, they are
+      to take out such provisions as they may find, and transport them to the
+      galleys. We who take the forts are provided with hammers and long nails,
+      to drive down the vent holes of the cannon; when we have done this, we are
+      to wait until one of the galleys fetches us off. Ten minutes should be
+      ample time for all there is to be done, and even if the alarm is given at
+      once, we shall be away long before the knights can be aroused from sleep,
+      buckle on their armour, and get down to the port.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Exclamations of delight and approbation burst from his hearers.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Then it is only we of this prison who are in the plot?&rdquo; one said.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Yes. In the first place, it would have been too dangerous to attempt to
+      free all. In the second, the galleys would not carry them; we shall be
+      closely packed as it is, for there are over a thousand here. I hear that
+      there was a talk of freeing all, and that we, instead of embarking at
+      first, should make for the other prisons, burst open the doors, and rescue
+      the others; but by the time we could do so the knights would be all in
+      arms, and our enterprise would fail altogether, for as but a small
+      proportion of us can obtain weapons, we could not hope to overcome them.
+      Were it not for the strong wall that separates their quarter from the
+      town, we might make straight for their houses and slay them before the
+      alarm could be given. As it is, that would be impossible, and therefore
+      the plan will be carried out as I have told you. The loss of all their
+      galleys and of over one thousand slaves will be a heavy blow for them.
+      Great pains have been taken to prevent confusion when we reach the port.
+      The men in each room have been instructed as to the galleys on which they
+      are to embark. As for you, you know precisely what is to be done; you will
+      simply take your places, and then wait until all are on board. No galley
+      is to push out from the wharf until the last man of those employed in
+      burning the ships has returned, with the provisions found in them. Then
+      the order will be given by the man who has arranged all this, and the six
+      galleys will put out together.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;One is to row to each of the forts to carry off the party that will have
+      been engaged in silencing its cannon. Our galley is to row to St.
+      Nicholas, and take off the twenty men I shall lead there. There is no
+      possibility of failure. Everything has, you see, been arranged. One of the
+      overseers who is in the plot walked by my side as we returned from the
+      port, and gave me the instructions, and all the others will have been told
+      in the same way, or else by the guards in charge of them.&rdquo; The gang now
+      broke up into little groups, talking excitedly over the unlooked for news,
+      and exulting over the speedy advent of liberty. Gervaise strolled
+      carelessly to the window, and dropped out the white strip of stuff. It was
+      now quite dark, and there was no fear of any one observing the movement.
+      Then he joined the others. After an hour and a half had passed he heard
+      footsteps approaching the door. There was a pause; then the outside bars
+      were taken down, and a key turned in the lock. A deep silence fell on the
+      slaves. Then a voice called, &ldquo;Number 36!&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;What is it?&rdquo; replied Gervaise, without raising himself from his seat on
+      the bedding. &ldquo;I have done my share of work today, and earned my night's
+      sleep.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It is a knight from the English auberge; he has come to fetch you. It
+      seems that you are to go there as a servitor.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;What a cursed fortune,&rdquo; Gervaise muttered, in Turkish, &ldquo;just when a road
+      to freedom is open! I have a good mind to say I am ill, and cannot go till
+      the morning.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;No, no!&rdquo; one of the others exclaimed. &ldquo;They would only drag you out, and
+      when they saw that there was naught the matter with you, would suspect
+      that there must be some reason why you did not want to go, when, as every
+      one knows, the position of the servitors is in every way preferable to
+      ours.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Now then, why are you delaying?&rdquo; a voice said sharply, and a warder
+      entered with a lighted torch. &ldquo;Get up, you lazy hound! It will be worse
+      for you if I have to speak again.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I am coming,&rdquo; Gervaise grumbled. &ldquo;I was just asleep.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      He rose, as if reluctantly, and went forward. The warder gave him an angry
+      push, followed him out, and locked and barred the door after him.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I suppose this is the right man?&rdquo; Sir John Boswell said.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;This is Number 36, Sir Knight, the same who was taken over to your
+      auberge the other day,&rdquo; and he held the light close to Gervaise's face.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Yes, that is the man. Follow me,&rdquo; he added, in Turkish. The gate of the
+      courtyard was unbarred, and they passed out unquestioned. Sir John
+      strolled on ahead. Gervaise followed him a pace or two behind. Not until
+      they had passed through the gate of the castle did Sir John turn.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I have not spoken to you,&rdquo; he said, &ldquo;as we may have been watched. Keep
+      your news until we reach the auberge.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Upon entering it they went up at once to Sir John Kendall's apartments.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Well, Sir Gervaise, the strip of cotton was brought to us safely. What is
+      your news?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It is very serious, Sir John, and I have been in terrible anxiety since I
+      dropped it out, lest it should not come to hand in time. As it is, you
+      have till midnight to make your preparations.&rdquo; He then repeated the
+      statement made by the galley slave.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;By my faith,&rdquo; Sir John Kendall exclaimed, &ldquo;this is a pretty plot indeed!
+      And had it succeeded, as it certainly would have done but for your
+      vigilance, it would have been a heavy blow to us. The burning of all our
+      galleys would have crippled us sorely, and the loss of over a thousand
+      slaves would have been a serious one indeed, when we so urgently require
+      them for completing our defences. Get rid of those clothes at once, Sir
+      Gervaise, and don your own. We must go straight to the grand master. You
+      will find your clothes and armour in the next room. I had them taken there
+      as soon as your token was brought me.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      In a few minutes Gervaise returned in his usual attire, and with his
+      armour buckled on. The two knights were already in their coats of mail,
+      and leaving the auberge they went to the grand master's palace. A servitor
+      had already been sent to D'Aubusson to inform him that they were coming,
+      and he advanced to meet them as they entered.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Welcome, Sir Gervaise!&rdquo; he said. &ldquo;Whether your news be good or bad,
+      whether you have found that it is a general rising of the slaves that is
+      intended, or a plot by which a handful of slaves may seize a boat and
+      escape, the gratitude of the Order is no less due to you for the hardships
+      and humiliations you have undergone on its behalf.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It concerns but one prison: that of St. Pelagius.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;The largest of them,&rdquo; the grand master put in.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;The whole of the slaves there are to be liberated at twelve o'clock
+      tonight, are to seize the three water towers and to spike the guns, to
+      burn all the shipping in the harbour, to make off with six galleys, and
+      destroy the rest.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;By St. John!&rdquo; D'Aubusson exclaimed, &ldquo;this is indeed a serious matter. But
+      tell me all about it. There must be treachery indeed at work for such a
+      scheme to be carried out.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise now told him all the details he had learned.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;So two of the Order, though but of the inferior grade, are in the plot?&rdquo;
+       the grand master said; &ldquo;and several of the overseers? One of the villains
+      is, of course, the man you saw this Greek talking with. We must get hold
+      of the other if we can. As to the slaves, now that we have warning, there
+      is an end of the matter, though without such warning they would surely
+      have succeeded, for the plans are well laid, and they would have been at
+      sea before we could have gathered in any force at the port. If it were not
+      that it would cost the lives of many of the warders and of the prison
+      guards, I should say we ought to take post outside the gate, for we should
+      then catch the traitors who are to accompany them. As it is, we must be
+      beforehand with them. A hundred men will be more than ample for our
+      purpose. Do you take fifty of your knights, Sir John Kendall, and I will
+      draw fifty of those of Auvergne. At eleven o'clock we will meet at the
+      gate leading down into the town, and will march to the private entrance of
+      the governor's house. I will go in first with a few of you, tell him what
+      we have discovered, and post guards to prevent any one from leaving his
+      house. Then, having admitted the others, we will go quietly out and place
+      a party at each door of the overseers' house, with orders to seize any who
+      may come out. The rest, in small parties, will then go round the prison,
+      and, entering each room, show the slaves that their plot has been
+      discovered. This we must do to save the lives of the guards who may be
+      faithful to their trust. As to the higher officials engaged in the affair,
+      we must obtain their names from the overseers or slaves. It is not likely
+      that the two traitors will quit their houses, as they will leave the
+      matter in the hands of the overseers, who, as you say, intend to first
+      open the doors, and then to accompany the slaves in their escape. Do not
+      warn the knights until it is nearly time to start, Sir John. The less stir
+      made the better, for no one can say whether they may not have suborned
+      some of the servitors to send instant news of any unusual movements in any
+      of the auberges.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      At half past ten Sir John Kendall went round among the knights and bade
+      fifty of them arm themselves quietly, and proceed, one by one, down to the
+      gate, and there await orders. Up to this time Gervaise had remained in the
+      bailiff's room, so as to avoid the questioning that would take place, and
+      he went down to the gate with the bailiff and Sir John Boswell.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The knights assembled rapidly. None were aware of the reason for which
+      they had been called out at such an hour, and there was a buzz of talk and
+      conjecture until Sir John Kendall arrived. He was followed by four of the
+      servants, who at once lighted the torches they carried, when he proceeded
+      to go through the roll, and found that the muster was complete. Many of
+      the knights had gazed in some surprise at Gervaise, whose dark complexion
+      altogether concealed his identity, and it was supposed that he must be
+      some newly arrived knight, though none had heard that any ship had entered
+      the harbour that day.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Two or three minutes later fifty knights of the langue of Auvergne came
+      down, headed by the grand master himself, whose appearance greatly
+      heightened the surprise of the English knights. The torches were now
+      extinguished, the gate thrown open, and the party descended into the town.
+      Gervaise had purposely fallen in by the side of Harcourt.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;You are but newly arrived, Sir Knight?&rdquo; the latter said, as they moved
+      off.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Not so very newly, Ralph,&rdquo; Gervaise replied.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;What! is it you, Gervaise?&rdquo; Harcourt exclaimed, with a start of surprise.
+      &ldquo;Why, I did not know you, though I looked hard at you in the torch light.
+      What have you done with yourself? Where have you been? Do you know what
+      all this is about?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I cannot tell you now, Ralph. You must be content to know that I have
+      been in prison, and working in the galleys.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;The saints defend us! Why, what on earth had you done to entail such
+      punishment as that? It is an outrage. The grand master and the council
+      have the right to expel a knight from the Order after due trial and
+      investigation, but not to condemn him to such penalties as the galleys. It
+      is an outrage upon the whole Order, and I would say so to the grand master
+      himself.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;There was no outrage in it, Ralph. Wait until you hear the whole story.
+      That I have not disgraced you, you may judge from the fact that I am in
+      the armour and mantle of the Order, and that, as you saw, I came down with
+      Sir John Kendall himself.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      There were no people about in the streets, though the lights still burned
+      on a few of the roofs. For a short distance the knights marched down
+      towards the port, and then turned down a street to the right. After a few
+      minutes' marching they halted under a high wall which all knew to be that
+      of the prison of St. Pelagius. Six knights were posted at the main
+      entrance, with orders that none should be allowed to leave the prison, and
+      that any persons who came up to the gate were to be at once seized and
+      made prisoners.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The rest marched on to a small door leading into the governor's house.
+      Here they were halted, and told to wait till called in; six knights of
+      England, and as many of Auvergne, being told off to accompany the grand
+      master and Sir John Kendall. A note had been sent to the governor,
+      informing him that the grand master intended to visit the prison at eleven
+      o'clock, but that the matter was to be kept an absolute secret; and that
+      the governor himself was to be down at the gate to admit him.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      <a name="link2HCH0011" id="link2HCH0011">
+      <!--  H2 anchor --> </a>
+    </p>
+    <div style="height: 4em;">
+      <br /><br /><br /><br />
+    </div>
+    <h2>
+      CHAPTER XI IN COMMAND OF A GALLEY
+    </h2>
+    <p>
+      William Neave, the governor of the prison, looked astonished indeed when,
+      upon his opening the door, the grand master and the bailiff of the English
+      langue, with the twelve knights behind them, entered. He had been puzzled
+      when, four days before, he had received an order from the grand master
+      that Ahmet, a servitor in the auberge of the English langue, should be
+      permitted to pass the night in his house, with authority to move freely
+      and without question, at any hour, in the courtyard of the gaol, and to
+      depart at any hour, secretly and without observation, by the private gate.
+      Still more had he been surprised when he received the message that the
+      grand master would pay him a secret visit at eleven o'clock at night.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Let no word be spoken until we are in your apartments,&rdquo; D'Aubusson said
+      in a low voice, as he entered. &ldquo;But first lead four of these knights and
+      post them so that none can enter the gaol from the house. If there are
+      more than four doors or windows on that side, you must post a larger
+      number. It is imperative that there shall be no communication whatever
+      between your servants and the gaol.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      As soon as this was done, the rest of the party were taken to the
+      governor's rooms.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I can now explain to you all,&rdquo; the grand master said, &ldquo;the reason of our
+      presence here. I have learned that at twelve tonight there will be a
+      general rising of the slaves in this prison, and that, aided by treachery,
+      they will free themselves from their fetters, overpower and slay such of
+      the guards in their rooms as have not been bribed, throw open the gates,
+      make their way down to the port, burn all the shipping there, and make off
+      in the six galleys manned by them, having first overpowered the sentries
+      in the three forts commanding the entrance, and spiked the guns.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Exclamations of astonishment burst from the knights, who now, for the
+      first time, learnt the reason of their being called out. The governor
+      listened with an expression of stupefaction.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;With all deference to your Highness,&rdquo; he said hesitatingly, &ldquo;it seems to
+      me that some one must have been deceiving you with this tale. It is
+      altogether incredible that such a plot should have been hatched without a
+      whisper of the matter coming to my ears. It could only be possible were
+      there, not one but many, traitors among the officials; if this is so, then
+      indeed am I a dull ass, and unfit for my duty here, of which I shall pray
+      you to relieve me, and to order such punishment as the council may deem
+      just to be allotted to me for having so signally been hoodwinked.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;My news is sure,&rdquo; the grand master said; &ldquo;but I deem not that you are in
+      any way to blame in the matter. The plot has been matured, not as a
+      consequence of any laxity of discipline in the prison, but from deliberate
+      treachery, against which no mortal being can guard. The traitors are two
+      of the officials who, being members of the Order, none would suspect of
+      connivance in such a deed. With them are several&mdash;I know not how many&mdash;under
+      officials, warders, and guards; all these have been bribed by an emissary
+      from Constantinople, now in the town, and who is doubtless furnished with
+      large means. It is well, indeed, for the Order, that this terrible act of
+      treachery has been discovered in time to prevent the plot from coming to a
+      head, for the loss of all our galleys, to say nothing of the disgrace of
+      having been thus bearded by slaves, would be a very heavy blow to it.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Now that the house is safely guarded, William Neave, you can admit the
+      rest of the knights, who are waiting outside. Then you will, in the first
+      place, conduct a party, and post them so that they may arrest, as they
+      come out to perform their share of the work, all officials, warders, and
+      guards, of whatever rank. When you have posted knights to carry out this&mdash;and
+      I need not say that the operation must be performed as silently as
+      possible, for it is above all things necessary that the men concerned
+      shall have no suspicion that their plot has been discovered&mdash;you will
+      conduct other parties to the various rooms occupied by the slaves. The
+      guards on duty inside will be made prisoners. The doors will then be
+      locked and barred as before. The appearance of the knights and the arrest
+      of the guards will be sufficient to show the slaves that their plot has
+      been discovered, and there will be no fear of their making any attempt to
+      carry it into execution. I will myself post the main body of the knights
+      in the courtyard. The arrest of the guards is to be carried out at once,
+      as all those not concerned in the plot would be killed when the hour comes
+      for the rising. Therefore this part of the business must be carried out
+      immediately. I should not, however, lead the guards away to a cell, for
+      the less tramping of feet the better. Therefore I shall place two knights
+      in each room, and beg them to remain inside in charge until the traitors
+      outside are secured.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The knights outside were now marched up. The grand master ordered half
+      those of Auvergne to go round to the main gate, which would be opened for
+      them by the governor; they were to enter quietly, and remain in a body
+      close to it until they received further orders. Sir John Kendall told off
+      the rest of the knights to the various duties of watching the houses
+      occupied by the officials and warders, and of entering the prison rooms
+      and remaining in them on guard. The governor, with his private servants,
+      bearing a supply of torches, was to lead them to the various cells, and
+      unlock the doors. The knights were enjoined to move as noiselessly as
+      possible, and to avoid all clashing of arms against armour.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The governor produced a number of cloths intended to be served out to the
+      slaves. Strips of these were cut off and wrapped round the feet of the
+      English knights, so as to deaden the sound of their boots on the stone
+      pavement. Then, accompanied by the grand master and Sir John Kendall, he
+      went the round of the cells.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      In some of these the slaves were found standing up in an attitude of eager
+      expectation, which, as the door opened, and the light of the torches
+      showed a party of knights, changed into one of terror and consternation.
+      Scarce a word was spoken. The guard was ordered to lay down his arms, and
+      to take one of the torches. Two knights placed themselves, one on each
+      side of him, with drawn swords. The door was again locked and barred, and
+      the party proceeded to the next cell. In less than a quarter of an hour
+      this part of the work was finished, and D'Aubusson, Sir John Kendall, and
+      the governor, then took up their station with a party of knights who,
+      concealed behind a buttress, were watching the doors of the officials'
+      houses.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Ten minutes later one of these doors was heard to open, and five dark
+      figures came noiselessly out. They were allowed to go a short distance, in
+      order to see if any others followed; but as no others came out, the
+      governor stepped forward.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Whither are you going, at this time of night?&rdquo; he asked. There was a
+      momentary pause, a few hasty words were exchanged, then the five men
+      rushed towards him with bared swords or knives; but before they reached
+      him the knights poured out from their hiding place.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;We are betrayed,&rdquo; one of the men shouted in Turkish. &ldquo;Fight to the last.
+      Better be killed than tortured and executed.&rdquo; With a yell of fury and
+      despair, they rushed upon the knights. So desperate was their attack that
+      the latter were forced to use their swords, which indeed, burning with
+      rage at the treachery of these men, they were not backward in doing, and
+      in less than a minute the five traitors lay, with cloven heads, dead on
+      the pavement.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It is as well so,&rdquo; D'Aubusson said, looking sternly down upon them;
+      &ldquo;perhaps better so, since it has saved us the scandal of their trial. We
+      might have learned more from them, but we have learnt enough, since,
+      doubtless, they have no accomplices among the warders, or they would have
+      been with them. Now we will deal with the arch traitors. There is no need
+      for further concealment; the noise of this fray will assuredly have been
+      heard by them, for they will be listening for the sounds that would tell
+      them the slaves had been liberated.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Followed by the knights, he went to the door of the house occupied by the
+      overseers, all of whom were members of the lower branch of the Order. It
+      was indeed evident that an alarm had been given there, for lights appeared
+      at the windows. As they opened the door and entered the hall, several
+      half-dressed men rushed down the stairs with drawn swords, two of them
+      carrying torches in their left hands. As the light fell upon the figures
+      of the grand master and the knights, they paused in astonishment.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;There is treachery at work in the prison,&rdquo; D'Aubusson said quietly. &ldquo;I
+      pray you to collect your comrades and to assemble here at once.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      In a minute or two some twenty officials were gathered in the hall.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Are all here?&rdquo; D'Aubusson asked the governor.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The latter counted the men.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;There are two short,&rdquo; he said&mdash;&ldquo;Pietro Romano and Karl Schumann.
+      They occupy the same room. Go and fetch them down, four of you.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The four men nearest to the stairs at once went up with two torches. They
+      returned in a minute.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;The door is fastened on the inside, and we can obtain no response.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Fetch an axe and break it in,&rdquo; the grand master ordered. &ldquo;Sir John
+      Boswell, do you, with some other knights, take post without; they may
+      attempt to escape by the window, though, as we hold the gates, it would
+      avail them little. Sir Gervaise Tresham, do you follow us.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise, who had been placed with the party watching the house, followed
+      the grand master and governor upstairs. A few blows with an axe splintered
+      the door; its fastenings gave way, and they entered the room. The window
+      was open, and two figures lay prostrate on the ground near it.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I half expected this,&rdquo; the grand master said. &ldquo;They were listening there.
+      The conflict in the yard told them that the plot had been discovered, and
+      as they saw us approaching the house, they dared not meet the punishment
+      of their crimes, and have fallen by their own daggers. Put a torch close
+      to their faces. Sir Gervaise, do you recognise in either of these men the
+      official you saw in conversation with the Greek?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise stepped forward and examined the men's faces.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;This is the man,&rdquo; he said, pointing to one of them. &ldquo;I marked him so
+      closely that I cannot be mistaken.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;That is Pietro Romano,&rdquo; the governor said; &ldquo;he was an able officer, but
+      discontented with his position and given to quarrelling with his
+      comrades.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Have a hole dug and bury them in the prison,&rdquo; D'Aubusson said; &ldquo;they have
+      been false to their vows, and false to their religion. They have chosen
+      their own mode of death; let them be buried like dogs, as they are. But
+      let a careful search be made of their garments and of this room. It may be
+      that they have some documents concealed which may be of use to us.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The grand master then descended to the hall.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Members of the Order,&rdquo; he said to the overseers, &ldquo;your guilty companions
+      have met death by their own hands, as the others concerned in this plot
+      have met theirs by the swords of the knights. It were well that this
+      matter were not spoken of outside the prison. The attempt has been
+      detected, and has failed; but were it talked of, it might incite others to
+      repeat the attempt, and possibly with better success. Now,&rdquo; he went on,
+      turning to the governor, &ldquo;our work is done here. Call up the other
+      warders. Let them take the men now prisoners in the rooms, and place them
+      in a dungeon. Let fresh men be placed on guard, and let all the knights
+      gather in the courtyard.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      When this was done, and all the knights again assembled, D'Aubusson said,
+      &ldquo;Our work is nearly done, brothers. The traitors are all dead, and the
+      revolt is at an end. It remains but to capture the author of this attempt;
+      but I believe he is already in our hands. I have given an accurate
+      description of him to Da Veschi, who has taken four knights with him, and
+      they probably will catch him down at the port; if not, he will be arrested
+      the first thing in the morning. As to the slaves, they will be so utterly
+      cowed by the discovery, that there will be no fear of their repeating the
+      attempt. I have ordered the officials of the prison to say naught in the
+      town of what has taken place. There can, however, be no concealment among
+      ourselves. I shall, of course, lay the whole matter before the council.
+      The fact that a strong body of knights has, at so late an hour, started on
+      some unknown mission is, of course, already known in the auberges of
+      Auvergne and England. No concealment of the facts is therefore possible.
+      It is the most serious attempt at a revolt of the slaves that has ever
+      taken place, and will be a warning to us that more vigilance must be
+      exercised. As it is, we have only been saved from the loss of our galleys
+      and slaves by the acuteness of one of the youngest of our knights, who, in
+      the first place, noted a suspicious occurrence which would have been
+      passed by without attracting a moment's thought by ninety-nine out of a
+      hundred men. He laid the matter before his bailiff, Sir John Kendall, who
+      accepted his offer to disguise himself as a slave, to enter the prison
+      under circumstances that would excite no suspicions among the others, and
+      to live and work among them in order to ascertain whether there was any
+      plot on hand. This task&mdash;a painful one, as you may imagine&mdash;he
+      carried out, and for two weeks he rowed as a galley slave. His lot was as
+      hard as that of the others, for, as he had reason to believe that some of
+      the officials were concerned in the plot, it was necessary that all should
+      be kept in ignorance that he was other than he seemed to be. Thanks to his
+      perfect knowledge of Turkish, he was able to carry his mission through
+      with complete success, and to obtain full particulars of the plot we have
+      tonight crushed. The knight who has performed this inestimable service is
+      Sir Gervaise Tresham, of the English langue. The action he has performed
+      will be noted in the annals of the Order as an example of intelligence and
+      of the extreme of self sacrifice, as well as of courage; for his life
+      would have been assuredly forfeited had the slaves entertained the
+      slightest suspicion of his real character.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      There was a murmur of acclamation among the knights. Not one of them but
+      would have freely risked his life in the service of the Order, but there
+      were few who would not have shrunk from the idea of living as a slave
+      among the slaves, sharing their tasks, and subject to the orders of men of
+      inferior rank and often brutal manners.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The knights now returned to their auberges. It was past midnight, but at
+      the English house the lamps and flambeaux were lighted in the great hall.
+      The servitors were called up, wine placed on the table, and the knights
+      discussed the incidents of the evening.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      When the meal had concluded, Sir John Kendall said, &ldquo;Brother knights, when
+      the grand master bestowed the honour of secular knighthood upon this young
+      comrade of ours, he predicted that he would rise to high distinction in
+      the Order. I think you will all agree with me that the prediction is
+      already in a fair way of being fulfilled, and that the services he has
+      rendered to the Order justify us, his comrades of the English langue, in
+      feeling proud of him. I drink, brothers, to his health.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      A loud shout rose from the assembled knights, for upon the return of the
+      party who had been away, the rest of those at the auberge had hastily
+      robed themselves and descended to the hall to gather the news. When the
+      shout had died away, and the wine cups were emptied, Gervaise, who was
+      sitting on Sir John Kendall's right hand, would gladly have retained his
+      seat, but the bailiff told him that he must say a few words, and after
+      standing in embarrassed silence for a minute he said, &ldquo;Sir John Kendall,
+      and brother knights, I can only say that I am very sensible of the
+      kindness with which you have been pleased to regard what seems to me after
+      all to have been a very ordinary affair. I saw a man, whom I knew to be a
+      stranger in the Island, speaking surreptitiously to a slave, and
+      afterwards saw him conversing with a prison officer. That naturally struck
+      me as curious, and I followed the officer, to see to which prison he
+      belonged. Any one would have thought, as I did, that such a thing was
+      strange, if not suspicious, and the only way to find out whether there was
+      anything in it was to mix with the slaves; as I spoke Turkish well enough
+      to do so I asked Sir John Kendall's permission to disguise myself. He gave
+      me every assistance, and I shared their lot for a fortnight. There was no
+      very great hardship in that&mdash;certainly nothing to merit the praise
+      that Sir John Kendall has been kind enough to bestow on me. Nevertheless,
+      I am very glad to have gained your good opinion and very grateful to him
+      and to you for drinking to my health.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Then he sat down abruptly.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Sir John Kendall now rose, and the knights, following his example, betook
+      themselves to their dormitories.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The next morning notices were sent by the grand master to the bailiffs of
+      the auberges, and the knights of the grand cross who happened to be in the
+      Island, to assemble in council. Messages were also sent to Gervaise,
+      requesting him to repair at the same hour to the palace, as the council
+      would probably require his attendance.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Oh dear! I wish this was all over,&rdquo; he said to Ralph, as the latter
+      assisted him to buckle on his armour.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I don't see anything to sigh about,&rdquo; Ralph said. &ldquo;I think that you are
+      the most fortunate fellow in the world. I do not say that you have not
+      well deserved it, because it is the tremendous way you worked at Turkish
+      and gave up everything else that has enabled you to do this. Still, there
+      was luck in your noticing that villain talking to the galley slaves, and
+      then to one of the officers of the prison. Of course, as the grand master
+      said last night, it isn't one in a thousand who would have thought
+      anything more about it, and I am sure I shouldn't; so that, and all the
+      rest, is entirely your own doing. Still, it was a piece of luck that you
+      noticed him talking with a slave. Don't think I envy you, Gervaise; I
+      don't a bit, and I feel as much as any one that you have well deserved the
+      honour you have obtained. Still, you know, it is a sort of consolation to
+      me that luck had a little&mdash;just a little&mdash;to do with it.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;In my opinion luck had everything to do with it,&rdquo; Gervaise said heartily,
+      &ldquo;and I feel downright ashamed at there being such a fuss made over it. It
+      was bad enough before, merely because I had hit on a plan for our escape
+      from those pirates, but this is worse, and I feel horribly nervous at the
+      thought of having to appear before the grand master and the council.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Well, that brown dye will hide your blushes, Gervaise. I can only say I
+      wish that I was in your place. By-the-bye, have you heard that they caught
+      that rascal Greek last night?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;No, I have not heard anything about it.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Yes. The knights hid themselves behind a pile of goods on the wharf.
+      There was no one about, so far as they could see, but soon after twelve
+      they saw a figure come up on to the deck of a fishing boat moored by the
+      quay. It was the Greek; he stood there for a minute or two listening, and
+      then went down again; he did this five or six times, and at one o'clock
+      they saw him throw up his arms, as if in despair; he stepped ashore, and
+      was about to make his way up into the town when they rushed out and seized
+      him. There is no doubt as to what his fate will be. I am sorry to say that
+      I hear my friend Vrados has been arrested; but there can be no doubt about
+      his loyalty, and he will assuredly be able to explain to the satisfaction
+      of the council how this man became a resident at his house.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I am sorry I met him there, Ralph. It is a very unpleasant thing to have
+      gone to a house, to have been received kindly, and then to be the means of
+      bringing trouble upon it.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Yes. I feel that a little myself, because I took you there; and yet I
+      cannot regret it, for if you had not seen him and taken an objection to
+      him, you might not have noticed him particularly when he spoke to one of
+      the galley slaves. It is certainly curious that you should have doubted
+      the man, for I have met him there several times, and even after your visit
+      with me I could see nothing in him to justify your dislike.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise went up to the palace, and while waiting in the great hall until
+      summoned before the council he was warmly accosted by several knights,&mdash;some
+      of whom were quite strangers to him,&mdash;who all joined in
+      congratulating him on the immense service he had done to the Order. It was
+      upwards of an hour before he was called in.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;The council have received, Sir Gervaise Tresham,&rdquo; the grand master said,
+      &ldquo;full details from Sir John Kendall of the manner in which you first
+      discovered, and have since followed up the daring plot by which the slaves
+      at St. Pelagius were to have risen, slain the guards who were faithful,
+      spiked the cannon in the three water forts, burnt the merchant shipping,
+      carried off six galleys and burnt the rest, and in their name I thank you
+      for having saved the Order from a great calamity. The members of the
+      council agree with me that you have shown an amount of discernment of the
+      highest kind, and that you are worthy of exceptional favour and reward for
+      your conduct. I therefore in my own name appoint you to the commandery of
+      our manor of Maltby in Lincolnshire, which, having fallen vacant, is in my
+      gift; and I release it from the usual payment of the first year's revenue.
+      Knowing that you desire to establish yourself here, the council have, at
+      my request, decided to make an exception to the general rule that a
+      knight, on promotion to a commandery, must return and take charge of it in
+      two years from the time the grant is made to him. The commandery will
+      therefore be administered by the senior of the knights attached to it.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;The council, on their part, have requested the bailiff of Auvergne, as
+      grand master of the Fleet, to appoint you to the command of the galley now
+      building, and approaching completion. This he has consented to do,
+      feeling, as we all feel, that although such an appointment is
+      unprecedented for a young knight, yet in the present case such an
+      exception may well be made. I may add that the Admiral has&mdash;in order
+      that no knight greatly your senior should be placed under your command&mdash;determined
+      that he will appoint to it only young knights, who will, we are assured,
+      gladly serve under one who has so distinguished himself, feeling certain
+      that, under his command, they will have ample opportunities against the
+      infidels to prove themselves worthy of the Order. I may add, also, that
+      the bailiffs of all the langues promise that they will select from among
+      the young knights such as may seem best fitted for such service, by their
+      skill in warlike exercises, by their ready obedience to orders, and good
+      conduct. And I foresee that the spirit of emulation, and the desire to
+      show that, though still but professed knights, they are capable of
+      performing as valiant deeds as their elders, will make the galley under
+      your command one of the most successful in the Order.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;As you are aware, it is a stringent rule, which even in so exceptional a
+      case we should not be justified in breaking, that a knight must reside in
+      the Island for five years previous to being promoted to a commandery. It
+      is now two months more than that time since you were received as page to
+      the late grand master, and in promoting you to a commandery I have not,
+      therefore, broken the rule. You may retire, Sir Gervaise.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise, overwhelmed by the unlooked for honours thus bestowed upon him,
+      bowed deeply to the grand master and the members of the council, and then
+      retired from the chamber. He passed out of the palace by a side door, so
+      as to avoid being accosted by the knights in the great hall, and took his
+      way out on to the ramparts, where he walked up and down for a considerable
+      time before returning to the auberge. He felt no hilarity at his
+      promotion. He had never entertained any ambition for rising to high office
+      in the Order, but had hoped only to perform his duty as a true knight, to
+      fight against the infidels, and some day, if need be, to die for the
+      Order. The commandery was, he knew, a rich one, and as its chief he would
+      draw a considerable revenue from the estate. This afforded him no pleasure
+      whatever, except inasmuch as it would enable him, in his new command of
+      the galley, to keep a handsome table, and to entertain well the knights
+      who served under him.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      It seemed to him, however, that the reward and honours were so far beyond
+      his deserts that he felt almost humiliated by their bestowal. The
+      responsibility, too, was great. Would these young knights, the youngest of
+      whom could be but a year his junior, serve willingly under his orders?
+      And, above all, would they be able to emulate the deeds of experienced
+      warriors, and would the galley worthily maintain the fame of the Order?
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      At the end of two hours he was joined by Ralph Harcourt.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I have been looking for you everywhere, Gervaise. You seemed to have
+      disappeared mysteriously. None had marked you leave the council chamber,
+      or knew where you had gone; and after searching everywhere I remembered
+      your fondness for walks upon the walls, so I climbed to the top of St.
+      John's tower and thence espied you. Well, I congratulate you most heartily
+      on the honours that have fallen to your share, especially that of the
+      command of a new galley.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It is too much altogether, Ralph. I feel ashamed at being thus thrust
+      into a post that ought to be given to a knight of age and experience. How
+      can I expect a number of young knights, of whom well nigh all must be my
+      seniors in age, to obey me as they would an older man?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;What has age to do with it?&rdquo; Ralph said. &ldquo;You have shown that you have a
+      head to think, and, as you before proved, you have an arm to strike. Why,
+      every young knight in the Order must feel proud that one of their own age
+      has gained such honour. It raises them all in their own esteem, and you
+      will see that you will get the pick among all the professed knights, and
+      of a good many who have finished their profession, and are serving here in
+      the hope of some day getting promotion to a commandery. Not such an one as
+      you have got; that, in the ordinary course of things, does not fall to a
+      knight until he is well on in years, and has served in many commanderies
+      of smaller value. I can tell you, directly Sir John Kendall came back and
+      told us that you had been appointed commander of the new galley, and that
+      it was to be manned wholly by young knights, there was not one of those
+      serving their profession in the auberge who did not beg Sir John to put
+      down his name for it; and ten or twelve others, myself among them, who
+      have obtained full knighthood also.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;You don't mean to say that you have put down your name to serve under me,
+      Ralph? It would be monstrous.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I see nothing monstrous in it, Gervaise. As I said just now, years have
+      nothing to do with it, and, putting aside our friendship, I would rather
+      serve under you than under many knights old enough to be your father. I
+      don't know whether I shall have the luck to be one of the chosen, as Sir
+      John said that there were to be only seven from each langue, which will
+      make forty-nine&mdash;with yourself fifty. If I am chosen&mdash;and,
+      knowing our friendship, I hope that the bailiff will let me go with you&mdash;it
+      is likely enough I may be named your lieutenant, as I shall be the only
+      one beside yourself who is a secular knight, and am, therefore, superior
+      in rank to the rest.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;That would be pleasant indeed, Ralph, though I would rather that you had
+      been made commander and I lieutenant; but at any rate, with you to support
+      me, I shall feel less oppressed by the thought of my responsibility.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      As Ralph had declared would be the case, the young knights in the other
+      auberges were as anxious as those of England to be enrolled among the crew
+      of the new galley, and the bailiffs had some trouble in choosing among the
+      aspirants. Very few were selected outside the rank of professed knights,
+      and as great pains were taken to comply with the grand master's wishes
+      that only young knights of good conduct and disposition, and distinguished
+      by their proficiency in warlike exercises, should be chosen, the crew was
+      in every way a picked one. Most of them had made one or two of the three
+      months' voyages in the galleys, though comparatively few had had the good
+      fortune to be absolutely engaged with the Moslem pirates.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      To the great satisfaction of himself and Gervaise, Ralph Harcourt was
+      nominated lieutenant of the galley. The fact that so many had volunteered
+      impressed all those who were chosen with the sense that it was at once an
+      honour and a piece of good fortune to be selected, and all were determined
+      that the boy galley, as the elder knights laughingly termed it, should do
+      honour to the Order.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      It was a fortnight before she was launched. Gervaise had heard, with great
+      satisfaction, that it had been decided by the council that no punishment
+      should be inflicted upon the slaves for their share in the intended rising
+      at St. Pelagius. All were guilty, and there was no means of saying who had
+      taken prominent parts in the plot. The council felt that it was but
+      natural that they should grasp at the prospect of freedom, for they
+      themselves would have done the same had they been captives of the
+      infidels. Even the warders and guards were allowed to go unpunished,
+      although their offence was a much more serious one. Those who could have
+      named the men who had accepted bribes were dead, and the lesson had been
+      so severe a one that there was no probability of any again turning
+      traitors. The author of the rising had been publicly executed. Seeing the
+      hopelessness of denial, he had boldly avowed his share in the matter, and
+      had acknowledged that he was acting as agent for the sultan, and had been
+      supplied with ample funds before leaving Constantinople.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      He declared that he was absolutely unable to give any names whatever of
+      those concerned in the plot, save those of the two overseers, as these had
+      undertaken the work of suborning the warders and guards, though he
+      admitted that he had on several occasions spoken to slaves as the gangs
+      were on their way back to the prison, and had told them to be prepared to
+      take part in a plan that was on foot for their rescue from slavery. The
+      torture had not been, as was then the usual custom, applied to extort
+      information; partly because his story was probable, still more because the
+      grand master and council did not wish that more publicity should be given
+      to the affair, and were glad that it should be allowed to drop without any
+      further trial of the delinquents. In the city generally it was only known
+      that a plot had been discovered for the liberation and escape of some of
+      the slaves; and, outside the members of the Order, none were aware of its
+      extent and dangerous character. To the satisfaction of Gervaise and Ralph,
+      Vrados was able to produce letters and documents that satisfied the
+      council that he had been deceived as to the character of the Greek, and
+      was wholly innocent in the matter.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      <a name="link2HCH0012" id="link2HCH0012">
+      <!--  H2 anchor --> </a>
+    </p>
+    <div style="height: 4em;">
+      <br /><br /><br /><br />
+    </div>
+    <h2>
+      CHAPTER XII THE BOY GALLEY
+    </h2>
+    <p>
+      Among those most pleased at the appointment of Gervaise to the command of
+      the galley was Sir John Boswell. Ever since the adventure with the
+      pirates, the knight had exhibited an almost fatherly interest in him; had
+      encouraged him in his studies, ridden with him on such occasions as he had
+      permitted himself a short holiday, and had, whenever they were together,
+      related to him stories of war, sieges, battles, and escapes, from which he
+      thought the young knight might gain lessons for his future guidance.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I doubt, Gervaise,&rdquo; he said one day, as they were riding quietly along
+      the road, &ldquo;whether our plan of life is altogether the best. We were
+      founded, you know, simply as a body of monks, bound to devote ourselves
+      solely to the care of the sick, and to give hospitality to pilgrims in
+      Palestine. Now this was monkish work, and men who devoted themselves
+      solely to such a life of charity as that in our Hospital at Jerusalem,
+      might well renounce all human pleasures; but when the great change was
+      made by Master Raymond du Puy, and from a nursing body we became a
+      brotherhood in arms, it seems to me that the vows of celibacy were no
+      longer needful or desirable. The crusaders were, many of them, married
+      men, but they fought no worse for that. It would have been far better,
+      methinks, had we been converted into an Order pledged to resist the
+      infidel, but without the vows of poverty and of celibacy, which have never
+      been seriously regarded.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;The garrison here might be composed, as indeed it is now, principally of
+      young knights, of those who have not cared to marry, and of the officers
+      of the Order whose wives and families might dwell here with them. This
+      would have many advantages. Among others, the presence of so many ladies
+      of rank would have the excellent effect of discountenancing and repressing
+      extravagances and dissolute habits, which are but too common, and are a
+      shame to the Order. Knights possessing commanderies throughout Europe
+      would be no worse stewards for being married men, and scandals, such as
+      contributed largely to the downfall of the Templars, would be avoided.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;The sole vow necessary, so far as I can see, would be that knights should
+      remain unmarried and disposable at all times for service until ten years
+      after making their profession, and that afterwards they should ever be
+      ready to obey the summons to arms, on occasions when the safety of Rhodes,
+      or the invasion of any Christian country by the Moslems, rendered their
+      services needful, when they would come out just as the knights of Richard
+      the Lion Heart went out as crusaders. I have spent half my life since I
+      joined the Order in commanderies at home, and a dull life it was, and I
+      was glad enough to resign my last command and come out here. Had I been
+      able to marry, I might now have had a son of your age, whose career I
+      could watch and feel a pride in. My life would have been far happier in
+      England, and in all respects I should be a better man than I am now.
+      Methinks it would strengthen rather than weaken the Order. As a fighting
+      body we should be in no way inferior to what we are now, and we should be
+      more liked and more respected throughout Europe, for naturally the sight
+      of so many men leading a luxurious life in commanderies causes a feeling
+      against them.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;But I suppose, Sir John, that there is no great difficulty in obtaining a
+      dispensation from our vows?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;In this, as in all other matters, everything depends upon interest or
+      money. Of course, dispensations are not common; but doubtless any knight
+      when he had served his term of active service could, especially if his
+      request were backed by the grand master, obtain from the Pope a
+      dispensation of his vows. If he had a commandery it would make a vacancy,
+      and give the grand prior, or the grand master, or the council, in
+      whosoever's gift it might be, an opportunity of rewarding services or of
+      gratifying some powerful family.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I agree with you that it would have been much better, Sir John. I can
+      understand that monks, ever living a quiet life apart from the world,
+      should be content so to continue; but among a body of warlike knights
+      there must be many who, in time, must come to regret the vows they took
+      when boys. The cadet of a noble family might, by the death of elder
+      brothers, come to be the head of a great family, the ruler over wide
+      domains. Surely it would be desirable that such a man should be able to
+      marry and have heirs.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Doubtless it could be managed in such cases, Gervaise, but it is a pity
+      that it should have to be managed. I can see no reason in the world why a
+      knight, after doing ten years of service here, should not be free to
+      marry, providing he takes a vow to render full service to the Order
+      whenever called upon to do so. Already the vow of poverty is everywhere
+      broken. Already, in defiance of their oaths, too many knights lead idle
+      and dissolute lives. Already, knights, when in their own countries,
+      disregard the rule that they shall draw sword in no cause save that of the
+      Holy Sepulchre, and, like other knights and nobles, take part in civil
+      strife or foreign wars. All this is a scandal, and it were better by far
+      to do away with all oaths, save that of obedience and willingness to war
+      with the infidel, than to make vows that all men know are constantly and
+      shamelessly broken.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I am fond of you, Gervaise. I am proud of you, as one who has brought
+      honour to our langue, and who, in time, will bring more honour. I am glad
+      that, so far as there can be between a young knight and one of middle age,
+      there is a friendship between us. But see what greater pleasure it would
+      give to my life were you my son, for whom I could lay by such funds as I
+      could well spare, instead of spending all my appointments on myself, and
+      having neither kith nor kin to give a sigh of regret when the news comes
+      that I have fallen in some engagement with the infidels. I often think of
+      all these things, and sometimes talk them over with comrades, and there
+      are few who do not hold, with me, that it would be far better that we
+      should become a purely military Order, like some of the military Orders in
+      the courts of the European sovereigns, than remain as we are, half monk,
+      half soldier&mdash;a mixture that, so far as I can see, accords but badly
+      with either morality or public repute.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;However, I see no chance of such a change coming, and we must be content
+      to observe our vows as well as may be, so long as we are willing to remain
+      monks and try to obtain dispensation from our vows should we desire to
+      alter our mode of life. We ought either to have remained monks pure and
+      simple, spending our lives in deeds of charity, a life which suits many
+      men, and against which I should be the last to say anything, or else
+      soldiers pure and simple, as were the crusaders, who wrested the Holy
+      Sepulchre from the hands of the infidels. At present, Gervaise, your
+      vocation lies wholly in the way of fighting, but it may be that the time
+      will come when you may have other aims and ambitions, and when the vows of
+      the Order will gall you.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I hope not, Sir John,&rdquo; Gervaise said earnestly.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;You are young yet,&rdquo; the knight replied, with an indulgent smile. &ldquo;Some
+      day you may think differently. Now,&rdquo; he went on, changing the subject
+      abruptly, &ldquo;when will your galley be ready?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;This is my last ride, Sir John. The shipwrights will have finished
+      tomorrow, and the next day we shall take possession of her, and begin to
+      practise, so that each man shall know his duties, and the galley slaves
+      learn to row well, before we have orders to sail. I wish you were going
+      with us, Sir John.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I should like it, lad, in many respects. It does one good to see the
+      enthusiasm of young men, and doubtless you will be a merry party. But, on
+      the other hand, unless I mistake, you will be undertaking wild adventures,
+      and my time for these is well nigh passed. When the Turk comes here, if he
+      ever comes&mdash;and of that I have little doubt&mdash;I shall be ready to
+      take my full share of the fighting; but I shall seek adventures no longer,
+      and shall go no more to sea. Next only to the bailiff, I am the senior of
+      our auberge, and&mdash;but this is between ourselves, lad&mdash;am like to
+      succeed to the grand priory of England when it becomes vacant, and if not
+      I shall, as the grand master has told me, have the offer of the next high
+      office vacant in the palace.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Two days later Gervaise and his company of young knights went down to the
+      port to take part in the launch of the new galley. This was the occasion
+      of a solemn ceremony, the grand master and a large number of knights being
+      present. A religious service first took place on her poop, and she was
+      named by the grand master the Santa Barbara. When the ceremony was over,
+      Gervaise was solemnly invested with the command of the galley by the grand
+      marshal of the navy; then the shores were struck away, and the galley
+      glided into the water, amid the firing of guns, the blowing of trumpets,
+      and the cheers of the spectators who had gathered at the port to witness
+      the ceremony.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The next morning a gang of galley slaves were marched down. A third of
+      these had been drawn from the crews of other galleys, their places being
+      supplied by new hands. The remainder were taken from the men employed on
+      the fortifications. Three weeks were occupied in teaching the rowers their
+      work, and getting them well together. They were a fine crew, for the
+      governor of St. Pelagius, grateful to Gervaise for the discovery of the
+      plot, had ordered the overseers to pick out from the various gangs men
+      specially suited by age and strength for the work.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The dye by this time had entirely worn off his face, and although his hair
+      was still several shades darker than of old, it differed even more widely
+      from the ebon hue that it had been when he was in prison. Thus, although
+      he recognised three or four men upon the benches who had been fellow
+      occupants of his cell, he had no fear whatever of their detecting in the
+      commander of the galley their late companion in misfortune.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Only a portion of the knights had been out each day while the crew were
+      learning to row, as there was but little for them to learn. The galley
+      carried no sails, and the knights were soldiers rather than sailors, and
+      fought on the deck of their ship, as if defending a breach, or storming
+      one held by the enemy. Moreover, as all of them had already made one or
+      more voyages, they were accustomed to such duties as they would have to
+      discharge on board.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      All were glad when an order was published for the galley to sail. On the
+      eve of departure Gervaise was sent for by the grand master. The general of
+      the galleys was with him when Gervaise entered the room. The bailiff of
+      Auvergne always held the position of grand marshal, and the bailiff of
+      Italy that of second in command, with the title of grand admiral. These
+      officials, however, as heads of their respective langues, had many other
+      duties to perform, and it was only on great occasions that they took any
+      practical share in the work of which they were nominally heads. The real
+      control in all naval questions rested with the general of the galleys, who
+      was elected by the council, but on the nomination of the grand master.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      His power when at sea with the fleet was absolute. He could suspend any
+      officer from duty, and had unquestioned power of life and death over the
+      crews. He had been frequently on board the galley since she had been
+      launched, and had been pleased with the attention paid by Gervaise to his
+      duties, and with the ready manner in which the young knights carried out
+      his orders.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Sir Gervaise Tresham,&rdquo; he said, &ldquo;it is usual, as you know, to appoint
+      each galley to a certain cruising ground, to which it is confined during
+      its three months' absence. At present there is a galley on each of these
+      stations, and as the last relief took place but a month since, it is
+      better that they should remain at the stations allotted to them. I have
+      therefore, after consultation with his Highness the grand master, decided
+      to give you a free hand. You are as likely to meet with pirates in one
+      quarter as in another, and you will pick up from vessels you may overhaul
+      news of their doings, which will enable you to direct your course to the
+      point where you will be most useful.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;In the first place, however, you will proceed to the coast of Tunis.
+      Visconti's galley is already there, but the coast swarms with corsairs,
+      and we have had many complaints as to their depredations. The Court of
+      Spain has twice represented to us lately that the pirates have grown so
+      bold that vessels have been carried off, even when coasting from one
+      Spanish port to another. Visconti is specially watching the coast near
+      Tunis, and you will therefore perhaps do better to proceed farther west,
+      for every village from Tunis to Tangier is little better than a nest of
+      pirates. I should imagine that you will find ample employment there during
+      your three months' cruise. When I say that you are free to choose your own
+      cruising ground, I do not mean that you should go up the Levant, or to the
+      east of the Mediterranean, but that you are not bound to keep close along
+      the African coast, but may, should you obtain any information to warrant
+      your doing so, seek the pirates along the shores of Spain, Sardinia,
+      Corsica, or Sicily.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I need not warn you to act with prudence as well as courage, for you have
+      proved that you possess both qualities. Do not allow yourself to be
+      carried away by the impetuosity of your knights; it is more often the duty
+      of a commander to restrain than to encourage his crew, and with such young
+      blood as you have under your command the necessity will be greater than
+      usual. Be kind to your slaves, but be ever watchful; yet this I need not
+      tell you. Maintain a strict but not over severe discipline. You are all
+      knights and comrades of the Order, and equals when on shore, but on board
+      you are the captain and they are your soldiers. I have this afternoon had
+      a meeting of your knights, and have urged upon them very strongly that,
+      having volunteered to serve under you, they must obey your orders as
+      promptly and willingly as if you were the senior knight of the Order, and
+      that it behooves them specially upon the present occasion, when the crew
+      is composed entirely of young knights, to show themselves worthy of the
+      honour that has been done to them by entrusting a galley of the Order to
+      their charge. I told them I should regard your report of their individual
+      conduct with the same attention and respect with which I should that of
+      any other commander, and that they might greatly make or mar their future
+      prospects in the Order by their conduct during the cruise. I am convinced,
+      from what I know of you, that you will exercise no undue harshness, but
+      will act with tact and discretion, as well as firmness.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I will try to do so, your Excellency. I feel that it is a heavy
+      responsibility and will spare no pains to justify the unmerited honour
+      that has been bestowed upon me.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;You have seen that the taking in of stores is complete, and that nothing
+      is wanting for the voyage?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Yes, sir. I stood by while the overseer of stores checked off every sack
+      and barrel as it came on board. The water is to be brought off this
+      evening, and as I was unable to be present, Sir Ralph Harcourt is there to
+      count the barrels and see that all are full.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Goodbye, Sir Gervaise,&rdquo; the grand master said, as the interview
+      terminated.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Hitherto you have given me, from the time you reached the Island, naught
+      but reason for satisfaction at my nomination of you as page, and I have no
+      fear that you will fail this time. Remember that valour, however great,
+      cannot prevail against overpowering odds. You had a lesson of that when
+      you served under Ricord, though finally the affair turned out well. I do
+      not say, don't attempt desperate undertakings, but don't attempt
+      impossible ones. Be careful of the lives of your knights. Remember that
+      ere long every sword may be of the utmost consequence in the defence of
+      Rhodes, and that even the capture of pirates may be too dearly purchased;
+      but that, at the same time, the honour of the flag of the Order must be
+      upheld at all hazards. Ah!&rdquo; he broke off, seeing a slight smile on the
+      young knight's face, &ldquo;you think my orders contradictory? It may be so; but
+      you know what I mean, and I fear not that you will blunder in carrying
+      them out. Be prudent, and yet not over prudent. I mean, be not rash,
+      unless there are such benefits to be obtained as would justify great risk
+      in obtaining them.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      On returning to the auberge, Gervaise had a long chat with Ralph.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I think the admiral's talk with us this afternoon had an excellent
+      effect, Gervaise. I do not say that every one was not before disposed to
+      obey you in all things, willingly and cheerfully; but he put it so
+      strongly to them that they had volunteered specially for service in this
+      galley, knowing well who was to be its commander, and the circumstance
+      that the crew was to consist solely of young knights, and had therefore
+      specially pledged their honour so to act that the enterprise should be in
+      all respects a successful one. To render it so, obedience was even a
+      greater necessity than valour. This was the most important of all the vows
+      taken by the knights of the Order, and it was only by the strictest and
+      most unquestioning obedience on the part of all to the orders of their
+      superiors, that the work of a vast community could be carried on. Passing
+      over the fact that you were their superior in rank, both as being a
+      secular knight and a knight commander of the Order, you had been specially
+      appointed by the grand master and council, as well as by himself, and that
+      they bestowed upon you while at sea, and in the absence of any officers of
+      superior rank, their full powers and authority. You were, in fact, their
+      representative and agent, and therefore to be regarded with the same
+      deference and respect that would be due to the oldest knight similarly
+      placed. 'Lastly,' he said, in a less serious tone, 'you must remember that
+      this is an experiment, and, as some think, a somewhat rash one. Never
+      before did a galley, manned entirely from among the youngest of our
+      knights, put to sea; and you may be sure that, unless successful, the
+      experiment is not likely to be ever repeated. You have been selected from
+      among many other candidates, and you have not only to justify the choice,
+      but to uphold the reputation and honour of the young knights of your
+      Order, by all of whom your doings will be regarded with special interest,
+      as reflecting credit not only upon yourselves individually, but as
+      representatives and champions of them all.'
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I could see that his words had a great effect. He had placed me beside
+      him, and I marked their faces as he spoke. Each face lit up at his appeal,
+      and I do not think there was one but silently registered a vow to do all
+      in his power to prove himself worthy of the confidence placed in him and
+      his companions by the grand master and admiral. I had before no shadow of
+      fear that everything would not go well. I knew almost all of them
+      personally, and if I myself had had the selection from among the whole
+      body of knights in the convent, I could not have made a choice that would
+      have suited me better. It seems to me that in each auberge the bailiff has
+      endeavoured to pick out the seven young knights whom he considered would
+      most worthily support the honour of the langue. Still, confident as I was
+      before, I feel more so now, after the admiral's address to us.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I had no fear either, Ralph, though doubtless the admiral's words will
+      carry great weight with them. It was thoughtlessness rather than anything
+      else that I dreaded; but now that the admiral himself has spoken to them,
+      there is no fear that anything will occur to give us trouble. I have
+      particularly noticed that when we have been on board, and have been
+      laughing and chatting together before we got under way, their manner
+      changed directly the first order was given, and that all the commands were
+      carried out with as much goodwill and alacrity as if they were under
+      Ricord himself.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      On the following morning the knights all went on board the Santa Barbara.
+      Their baggage was carried down by slaves, and by the personal servants
+      from each auberge who were to go as their attendants during the voyage.
+      The grand master had advanced Gervaise a sum equal to half a year's income
+      of his commandery, and with this he had purchased a stock of the best
+      wines, and various other luxuries, to supplement the rations supplied from
+      the funds of the Order to knights when at sea. Gervaise had to go round
+      early to the admiral to sign the receipt for stores and to receive his
+      final orders in writing. All were, therefore, on board before him and,
+      when he arrived, were drawn up in military order to receive him.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Every knight was in full armour, and as, at a word from Ralph, they drew
+      their swords and saluted the young commander, Gervaise felt with a thrill
+      of pleasure and of confidence that with such a following he need not fear
+      any encounter with a pirate force, unless in overwhelming numbers.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The young knights were all, with the exception only of Ralph Harcourt,
+      between the ages of seventeen and nineteen, and their young faces, free in
+      most cases even from the suspicion of a moustache, looked almost those of
+      boys. But there was no mistaking the ardour and enthusiasm in their faces,
+      and the lack of breadth and weight, that years alone would give to them,
+      was compensated by skill in their weapons, acquired by long and severe
+      training, and by the activity and tireless energy of youth.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Knights and comrades,&rdquo; Gervaise said as, after walking through the double
+      line to the end of the poop he turned and faced them, &ldquo;I am proud indeed
+      to command so gallant a body of knights. The success of our expedition
+      depends upon you rather than upon me, and as I feel assured of your warm
+      cooperation I have no fear as to what the result will be, if Dame Fortune
+      will but favour us by throwing in our way some of those scourges of the
+      sea in search of whom we are about to set out. Many of us have already
+      encountered them, and, fighting side by side with older knights, have
+      borne our share of the work, while those who have not done so will, I am
+      sure, do equally well when the opportunity arrives. We shall not this
+      voyage have the encouragement and confidence inspired by the presence of
+      those who have long and valiantly borne the standard of the Order; but, on
+      the other hand, we have to show that we are worthy of the confidence
+      reposed in us, and that the young knights of the Order can be trusted to
+      emulate the deeds of those who have rendered the name of the Hospitallers
+      a terror to the infidel.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      A shout of approbation greeted the close of his address. Gervaise then
+      walked forward to the end of the poop, and looked down upon the slaves,
+      who, with their oars out, were awaiting the order to row.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Men,&rdquo; he said in Turkish, &ldquo;it is my desire that, while it is necessary
+      that you should do your work, your lot shall be no heavier than can be
+      avoided. You will not be taxed beyond your powers, save when the enemy is
+      in sight, or there is supreme need for haste, but then you must be called
+      upon for your utmost exertions. I wish your work to be willing. I abhor
+      the use of the lash, and so long as each man does his fair quota of work,
+      I have given the strictest orders that it shall never be used. I have, at
+      my own cost, made provision that your daily rations shall be improved
+      while under my command. Meat will be served out to you daily, when it can
+      be obtained, and for those of you who hold that the strict tenets of your
+      religion may be relaxed while engaged in such severe labour, a ration of
+      wine will also be served out; and such other indulgences as are compatible
+      with the discipline and safety of the ship, will also be granted to you.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      There was a murmur of gratitude among the slaves. Gervaise then gave the
+      order to row, and the galley started on her voyage. The knights had now
+      fallen out from their ranks, and were soon laughing and talking gaily.
+      Being all of noble families and knightly rank, there was, except when on
+      actual duty, a tone of perfect equality and good fellowship prevailing
+      among them. French was the common language, for as the Order was of French
+      foundation, and three of the seven langues belonged to that country, most
+      of the high dignitaries being chosen from their ranks, it was natural that
+      the French language should be the general medium of communication between
+      them.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Until noon the slaves rowed steadily and well. Work was then stopped, for
+      there was scarce a breath of wind stirring the water. Even under the
+      awning that had, as the sun gained power, been erected over the poop, the
+      heat was oppressive. The knights had all divested themselves of their
+      armour, and most of them retired below for a siesta. As soon as the slaves
+      stopped rowing, an awning, which Gervaise had purchased, and which was
+      rolled up under the break of the poop, was, to their astonishment, drawn
+      over them.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Don't you think you are spoiling your slaves, Sir Gervaise?&rdquo; one of the
+      Spanish knights asked doubtfully.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;On the contrary, Sir Pedro, I hope that I am improving them. You have not
+      worked as a galley slave, but I have, and I can assure you that I used to
+      feel the hours when we were lying broiling in the sun, doing nothing, much
+      more trying than those during which I was at work. I used to be quite
+      giddy and sick with the heat, and on getting out the oars again had scarce
+      strength to work them. But this is not the most important point. In port
+      the slaves always sleep in the prison, but at sea they must rest on their
+      benches; and to do so with clothes soaked with the heavy dew must be a
+      severe trial, and most prejudicial to the health. The awning cost but a
+      few ducats, and I reckon that, putting aside the comfort to the slaves, it
+      will be very speedily repaid by their better health and capacity for
+      labour. When away in the galley with Sir Louis Ricord, I used to feel the
+      greatest pity for the unfortunate wretches when at daybreak, in their
+      drenched clothes, and shivering with cold and wet, they rose to commence
+      their work. I then took a vow that if ever I should come to command a
+      galley I would provide an awning for the slaves.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Two or three of the knights standing by expressed their warm approval of
+      what Gervaise said. There was, in those days, but little of that sentiment
+      of humanity that is now prevalent, and slaves were everywhere regarded as
+      mere beasts of burden rather than as human beings. When, however, they had
+      the question put to them, as Gervaise had done, they were ready to give a
+      hearty agreement, although it was the utilitarian rather than the
+      humanitarian side of the question that recommended it to them. After three
+      hours' rest the journey was renewed, and just at nightfall the galley
+      anchored off an islet lying to the north of Carpathos.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      While the servants were laying the tables along the poop for the evening
+      meal, Gervaise went down to see that his orders were carried out regarding
+      the food for the slaves. They were already eating their bread and meat
+      with an air of satisfaction that showed how warmly they appreciated the
+      unusual indulgence, while there were few indeed who did not hold up their
+      drinking horns as a servant passed along between the benches with a skin
+      of wine. Gervaise spoke to many of them.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Ah, my lord,&rdquo; one of them said, &ldquo;if we were always treated like this,
+      slavery would be endurable. For ten years have I rowed in Christian
+      galleys, but never before has an awning been spread to keep off the sun or
+      the dew. We shall not forget your kindness, my lord, and will row our
+      hardest right cheerfully when you call upon us for an effort.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      There was a murmur of assent from the galley slaves around.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;May Allah be merciful to you, as you are merciful to us!&rdquo; another slave
+      exclaimed. &ldquo;The blessing of those whom you regard as infidels can at least
+      do you no harm.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;On the contrary, it can do me good,&rdquo; Gervaise said. &ldquo;The God you Moslems
+      and we Christians worship is, I believe, the same, though under another
+      name.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise had, indeed, during his long conversations with Suleiman Ali,
+      often discussed with him the matter of his faith, and had come, in
+      consequence, to regard it in a very different light to that in which it
+      was viewed by his companions. There was faith in one God at the bottom of
+      both Mohammedanism and Christianity. The Mohammedans held in reverence the
+      lawgivers and prophets of the Old Testament, and even regarded Christ
+      Himself as being a prophet. They had been grievously led away by Mahomet,
+      whom Gervaise regarded as a false teacher; but as he had seen innumerable
+      instances of the fidelity of the Moslems to their creed, and the
+      punctuality and devotion with which the slaves said their daily prayers,
+      exposed though they were to the scorn and even the anger of their
+      taskmasters, he had quite lost, during his nine months of constant
+      association with Suleiman Ali, the bigoted hatred of Mohammedanism so
+      universal at the time. He regarded Moslems as foes to be opposed to the
+      death; but he felt that it was unfair to hate them for being hostile to
+      Christianity, of which they knew nothing.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      <a name="link2HCH0013" id="link2HCH0013">
+      <!--  H2 anchor --> </a>
+    </p>
+    <div style="height: 4em;">
+      <br /><br /><br /><br />
+    </div>
+    <h2>
+      CHAPTER XIII THE FIRST PRIZES
+    </h2>
+    <p>
+      After leaving the slaves, Gervaise joined his companions on the poop. They
+      were engaged in an animated discussion as to whether it was advisable to
+      grant indulgences to slaves. The majority approved of the steps Gervaise
+      had taken, but some asserted that these concessions would only lead them
+      to look for more, and would create discontent among the crews of other
+      galleys not so favoured.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Well, comrades,&rdquo; said Gervaise, &ldquo;I think that so far I am better
+      qualified than any of you to give an opinion; but it may be that it will
+      fall to the lot of some of you to be a slave in Turkish hands. In that
+      case, I can affirm with certainty, that you will keenly appreciate any
+      alleviation, however small, of your lot. You must remember that the one
+      feeling of the slave is dull despair. Death is the only relief he has to
+      look forward to. Do you think that a man so feeling can do his best,
+      either at an oar or at any other kind of work? I am sure it would not be
+      so in my case. But if you brighten his life a little, and show him that he
+      is not regarded as merely a brute beast, and that you take some interest
+      in him, he will work in a different spirit. Even viewed from a merely
+      monetary point of view it must pay well to render him as content as
+      possible with his lot. You know how great is the mortality among the
+      slaves&mdash;how they pine away and die from no material malady that can
+      be detected, but simply from hopelessness and weariness of life, aided,
+      undoubtedly, in the case of the galley slaves, by sleeping in the damp
+      night air after an exposure all day to the full heat of the sun. This
+      brings an answer to your second objection. Undoubtedly it might cause
+      discontent among the slaves of other galleys when they hear that others
+      are treated better than themselves. But I hope that if, on our return, we
+      bring back all our slaves in good condition and health, the contrast
+      between their appearance and that of the slaves in most other galleys will
+      be so marked that the admiral may consider it would be well to order
+      awnings to be fixed to all the vessels of the Order, and even to grant to
+      all slaves, when away on voyages, the little indulgences I have given them
+      here. The expense would be very trifling, and it would certainly add a
+      great deal to the average life of a slave, and would render him capable of
+      better work. There is another advantage. If the Turks learn that their
+      countrymen in our hands are treated with a certain amount of kindness and
+      consideration, it might lead them to act similarly to those of our Order
+      who may be unfortunate enough to fall into their hands.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;There is a great deal in what you say, Sir Gervaise,&rdquo; one of the knights,
+      who had before taken the opposite point of view, said. &ldquo;There is no reason
+      why our galley should not be a model one, and though, like enough, the
+      seniors will laugh at our making innovations, D'Aubusson is a reformer,
+      and will certainly support anything that he sees to be beneficial, from
+      whatever quarter it comes.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Supper was now served, and the young knights were well pleased with the
+      entertainment provided for them. It was the principal meal of the day.
+      Their fast was broken by a glass of wine, a manchet of bread, and fruit
+      soon after rising. At eleven o'clock they sat down to a more substantial
+      meal; but in that climate the heat was at that hour considerable, and as
+      there were duties to be performed, there was no sitting long at table. At
+      supper the day's work was over, their appetite was sharpened by the cool
+      evening breeze, and the meal was hearty and prolonged. After it was
+      concluded, several of the knights brought up from below viols and other
+      instruments of music; for the ability to accompany the voice with such an
+      instrument was considered an essential part of the education of a knight.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      For some hours the songs and romances, so popular at the time, were sung
+      in the various languages represented on board; then the knights, one by
+      one, went down to their sleeping places, until only the seven knights of
+      the langue of Auvergne, who were to watch the first night, remained on
+      deck. Five of these wrapped themselves in their mantles and lay down on
+      the benches. One of the others descended to the waist, walked along the
+      plank between the lines of sleeping slaves, and took up his place in the
+      bow, while the other paced up and down the poop, the fall of his footsteps
+      being the only sound to break the silence that reigned throughout the
+      ship.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      In the morning, as soon as the knights had all taken a plunge in the sea,
+      the oars were got out, and the galley proceeded on her way. Passing
+      through the islands and skirting the southern shore of Greece, she
+      continued her course west. Malta was sighted, but they did not put in
+      there. Pantellaria was passed, and in a fortnight after leaving Rhodes,
+      Cape Bon, at the entrance to the bay of Tunis, was sighted. Until Greece
+      was left behind them, the nights had generally been spent in small ports,
+      where supplies of fresh meat, fish, and fruit, were obtainable. So far no
+      incident had marked the voyage. The weather had continued fine, and they
+      had heard nothing, from ships they had fallen in with, of any Moslem
+      pirates having been seen. A few hours, however, after sighting the coast
+      of Africa, a dark object was seen ahead.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It is a ship of some sort,&rdquo; Ralph said; &ldquo;but her masts have gone. It may
+      be that she is a merchantman that has been captured and sacked by the
+      Moorish pirates.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Orders were given to the rowers to quicken their pace, and in little over
+      an hour they were alongside the hull. As soon as the vessels were close
+      enough for those on the poop of the galley to look down on to the deck of
+      the other craft, it was seen that Ralph's suppositions were correct. Two
+      bodies lay stretched upon it. One was crushed under the fallen mast; the
+      other lay huddled up in a heap, a cannon ball having almost torn him
+      asunder. The knights leapt on to the deck as soon as the galley ran
+      alongside. Gervaise made first for the man lying beneath the mast; as he
+      came up to him, the sailor opened his eyes and murmured, &ldquo;Water!&rdquo; Gervaise
+      called out to one of the servants to bring water from the galley, and, as
+      soon as it came, poured some between the man's lips, and the knights by
+      their united efforts lifted the mast from across his body. It was evident,
+      however, that he had but a short time to live, and the dew of death was on
+      his face. After a few minutes he rallied a little, and looked gratefully
+      at his rescuers.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;You have been attacked by pirates,&rdquo; Gervaise said. &ldquo;Was there one galley,
+      or two?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Three galleys,&rdquo; the man replied in a faint whisper.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Do you know where they were from?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Tripoli.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;How long ago?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It was about three hours after sunrise when we saw them coming up,&rdquo; the
+      man said, his voice gaining in strength, as some wine they gave him took
+      effect. &ldquo;It was useless to fight, and I hauled down our flag, but in spite
+      of that one of the pirates fired a broadside, and one of the shot hit the
+      mast and brought it down, and I was crushed under it. They boarded us,
+      took off all the crew as captives, and emptied the hold; I knew that I was
+      done for, and begged them to kill me; but they paid no attention. I know a
+      little of their language, and as I lay there I caught something of what
+      they were saying; they are bound for the Island of Sardinia, where they
+      have a rendezvous, and are to join a great gathering of their consorts. I
+      don't know the name of the place, but it is on the east coast. More
+      water!&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise knelt to pour some water between his lips, when he gave a sudden
+      cry, a shudder ran through his frame, and he was dead.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Let us return on board, gentlemen,&rdquo; Gervaise said, rising to his feet.
+      &ldquo;We can do nothing here.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      As soon as he regained the deck of the galley, he signed to Ralph to
+      follow him below.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Now, Ralph,&rdquo; he said, &ldquo;this is one of those cases in which we have to
+      decide whether we ought or ought not to be prudent. From what that poor
+      fellow said, the pirates have about five hours' start of us, and as they
+      can have no idea that they are pursued, we can doubtless overtake them
+      before they reach Sardinia. The question is, ought we to pursue them at
+      once, or ought we to coast along until we find Visconti's galley? Three of
+      these Tripoli pirates, crowded as they always are with men, would prove
+      serious opponents, yet we might engage them with a fair hope of victory.
+      But we may be seriously disabled in the fight, and should be, perhaps,
+      unable to carry the news to Genoa that there are many pirate ships
+      gathering on the coast of Sardinia to prey upon their commerce.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;We might be days, or even weeks, before we light upon Visconti's galley,
+      Gervaise, and even when we found it, he might not consider himself
+      justified in leaving the coast where he is stationed. Besides, while we
+      are spending our time looking for him, the pirates will be committing
+      terrible depredations. It must be a big expedition, under some notorious
+      pirate, or they would never venture so far north.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Then you think that I should be justified in pursuing them alone. It is a
+      fearful responsibility to have to decide.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I think so, Gervaise. There is no saying what misfortunes might happen if
+      we did not venture to do so.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Very well then, so be it. But before deciding finally on so grave a
+      matter, I will lay it before the company.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;There is no doubt as to what their decision will be,&rdquo; Ralph said, with a
+      smile.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Perhaps not, Ralph; but as they will be called upon to risk their lives
+      in a dangerous enterprise, it is as well that they should have a say in
+      the matter.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      When they returned on to the poop, there was an expression of eagerness
+      and excitement on the faces of the young knights which showed how
+      anxiously they had been awaiting the result of the conference below.
+      Gervaise stepped on to a bench, and motioned to them to close up round
+      him.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Comrades,&rdquo; he said, &ldquo;although the responsibility of whatever course may
+      be taken must rest upon my shoulders, yet I think it but right that, as a
+      general before a battle often calls a council of war to assist him with
+      its advice, so I should lay before you the two courses open to us, and ask
+      your opinion upon them. Sir Ralph Harcourt and I are of one mind in the
+      matter, but as the decision is a grave one we should be loath to act upon
+      it without your concurrence.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      He then repeated the alternatives as he had laid them before Ralph. &ldquo;Now,&rdquo;
+       he went on, &ldquo;as you see, there is grave danger, and much risk in the one
+      course; but if successful its advantages are obvious. On the other hand,
+      the second plan is more sure, more prudent, and more in accordance with
+      the instructions I have received. I ask you to let me know frankly your
+      opinion on the subject. If your view agrees with ours, although it will
+      not relieve me from the responsibility of deciding, it will at least, in
+      the event of things turning out badly, be a satisfaction to know that the
+      course had your approval, and that it was your desire, as well as ours,
+      that we should undertake it. First, then, let all who are in favour of
+      following the pirates go to the starboard side of the deck, while those
+      who are in favour of joining Visconti, and laying this serious matter we
+      have discovered before him, move to the larboard side.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      There was a rush of the knights to the right, and not one moved to the
+      other side.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Your decision is the same as ours,&rdquo; Gervaise said. &ldquo;To the north, then!
+      If there is great peril in the adventure, there is also great honour to be
+      gained.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The knights gave a shout of satisfaction at finding that their choice was
+      also that of the officers.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Lay her head to the north,&rdquo; Gervaise said to the pilot. Then he went to
+      the end of the poop, and ordered the slaves to row on. &ldquo;Row a long, steady
+      stroke, such as you can maintain for many hours. We have a long journey
+      before us, and there is need for haste. Now is the time for willing work.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The oars dipped into the water, and the galley was soon moving along at a
+      much faster pace than that at which they had performed the journey from
+      Rhodes. The slaves had not, from their benches, been able to see what had
+      passed on board the dismantled vessel, but from the order and the change
+      of course, they had no doubt that the knights had obtained some clue to
+      the direction taken by the corsairs who had captured and sacked the ship.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;There is but little wind,&rdquo; Gervaise said to Ralph, &ldquo;and their sails will
+      be of slight use to them; therefore we shall go fully three feet to their
+      two. It is quite possible that we may not catch sight of them, for we
+      cannot tell exactly the course they will take. We shall steer for Cape
+      Carbonara, which is some hundred and thirty miles distant. If we do not
+      see them by the time we get there, we shall be sure that we have passed
+      them on the way, unless, indeed, a strong wind should spring up from the
+      south. However, I hope that we shall catch sight of them before that, for
+      we shall be able from our lookout to discover their masts and sails some
+      eight or ten miles away, while they will not be able to see us until we
+      are within half that distance. They cannot be more than twenty miles away
+      now, for the light breeze will aid them but little, and as they will see
+      no occasion for haste, they will not be rowing at their full power, with
+      so long a passage before them.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Already, indeed, one of the knights had perched himself on the seat at the
+      top of a low mast some fifteen feet above the poop, that served as a
+      lookout.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;You can see nothing yet, I suppose, Cairoli?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;No; the line of sea is clear all round.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      It was indeed some four hours before the knight on the lookout cried that
+      he could make out three dark specks on the horizon. Gervaise at once
+      ascended to the lookout, by the ladder that was fixed against the post.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;They are making to the left of the course we are taking. Turn her head
+      rather more to the west. That will do. They are directly ahead now.&rdquo; He
+      then came down to the deck again. &ldquo;I would that we had seven or eight more
+      hours of daylight, Ralph, instead of but three at the outside. However, as
+      we know the course they are taking, we are not likely to miss them, for as
+      we shall not be near enough for them to make us out before the sun sets,
+      there will be no chance of their changing it. Do you think they will row
+      all night?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I should not think so. If the land were nearer they might keep on until
+      they make it, but as they have had no wind since daylight, they will lie
+      on their oars until morning. You see, at sunset they will still be some
+      eighty miles from Cape Carbonara, and the slaves could not possibly row
+      that distance without rest; so that if we keep on we may take them by
+      surprise.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;That is what I have been thinking, Ralph, but it would be well not to
+      attack them until nearly daybreak. We should capture one galley easily
+      enough; but the others, being ignorant of our force, might make off in
+      different directions, and we might lose both of them. If, on the other
+      hand, we could fall upon them a short time before daylight, we should be
+      able to keep them in sight, and, even if they separated, they would soon
+      come together and continue their course, or, as I hope, when they see that
+      we are alone, bear up and fight us. I think that our best plan will be to
+      row on until it is dark, then give the slaves six hours' rest, and after
+      that go on quietly. If we can make them out, which we may do if they have
+      lights on board, we will stop, and wait until it is the hour to attack
+      them. If we miss them, we will row on to Sardinia and lie up, as we
+      proposed, until they come along.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I think that will be a very good plan, Gervaise.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Before sunset the three pirate ships could be clearly made out from the
+      deck, but the pilot judged them to be fully ten miles away. Half an hour
+      later the slaves were told to cease rowing. Gervaise had ordered the cooks
+      to prepare them a good meal, and this was at once served, together with a
+      full ration of wine. As soon as they had consumed it, they were told to
+      lie down and sleep, as at one o'clock the galley would be again under way.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The knights' supper was served below, as lights on the poop might be made
+      out, should a lookout be placed by the corsairs in their tops.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;We had better follow the example of the galley slaves,&rdquo; Gervaise said,
+      rising as soon as the meal was finished, &ldquo;and, with the exception of
+      Spain, who is on watch, turn in to sleep till we are off again. All of you
+      will, of course, don your armour on rising.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      At the appointed hour the galley was again under way. There was not a
+      breath of air, and before starting, pieces of cloth were wrapped round the
+      oars at the rowlocks to deaden the sound, which might otherwise have been
+      heard at a considerable distance on so still a night. After an hour and a
+      half's rowing, the knight on the lookout said that he could see a light
+      some distance ahead. The pilot, an experienced old sailor, joined him, and
+      speedily descended to the poop again.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It is a ship's light,&rdquo; he said. &ldquo;I should say that it was a lantern on
+      board the ship of the captain of the expedition, and is shown to enable
+      the other two to keep near him. I cannot say how far it is away, for I do
+      not know at what height it hangs above the water; but I should imagine,
+      from the feebleness of the light, that it must be some two miles distant.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      As soon as the light had been noticed, the slaves had been ordered to
+      cease rowing, and they were now told that they would not be required again
+      for fully two hours. When the first gleam of dawn appeared in the east
+      they were called to their work again. The lantern was still burning, and,
+      in a quarter of an hour, the knights on the poop were able, in the
+      broadening light, to make out three shadowy forms some two miles ahead of
+      them. They decreased this distance by more than half before they could
+      discern any signs of life or motion on board. Then a sudden stir was
+      apparent; they could hear shouts from one vessel to another, oars were
+      thrust out, and an effort made to get the heads of the ships in the same
+      direction, so as to catch the light breeze that had just sprung up.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The moment he saw that the galley was discovered, Gervaise shouted down to
+      the slaves to row their hardest, and told the pilot to steer for the ship
+      farthest to the east. She was some four or five hundred yards from her
+      nearest consort, and the same distance separated that vessel from the
+      third craft.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;We shall have time to carry her, Ralph, before the others come to her
+      assistance, and they will only arrive one at a time. If we were to lie
+      alongside the middle craft, which is probably that of the chief, as it is
+      she that has the light burning, we might have the other two upon us before
+      we had done with her, for she is evidently the largest, and most likely
+      the strongest handed, of them.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The leader of the pirates evidently saw that there was no chance of
+      evading the fight. A flag was run up to the masthead of his ship, and the
+      three vessels began to endeavour to turn, so as to meet the galley. The
+      operation, however, took some time. In the confusion, orders were
+      misunderstood, and instead of all the slaves on one side rowing whilst
+      those on the other side backed, all order was lost, and long before the
+      craft for which the galley was making had got round, the latter was upon
+      her.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Shall I ram her, Sir Gervaise?&rdquo; the pilot asked.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;No; we might damage ourselves; besides, I do not want to sink her. Sheer
+      away the oars on one side!&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The galley carried eight guns&mdash;three on each side of the poop, and
+      two forward; and these had been loaded with small pieces of iron. A few
+      shots had been fired by the pirates, but, owing to the confusion that
+      prevailed on board, the guns were discharged so hurriedly that the shot
+      either flew overhead or passed wide of the galley. Excited as the young
+      knights were, and eager for the fray, a general laugh broke out as the
+      galley swept along by the pirate ship, breaking many of her oars, and
+      hurling all the slaves who manned them backwards off their benches. A
+      moment later the guns poured their iron contents among the pirates who
+      clustered thickly on the forecastle and poop, and as the vessels grated
+      together the knights sprang on board the corsair.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The members of the English langue had each been provided with short pieces
+      of rope, and before joining their companions in the fray they lashed the
+      vessels together, side by side. The fight was a very short one. France and
+      Auvergne, led by Ralph Harcourt, boarded at the bow, the other five
+      langues at the poop; and so impetuous was their onset that the pirates,
+      who had still scarce recovered from their surprise at being hastily
+      aroused from sleep to repel the attack of the foe who had so suddenly
+      sprung out from the darkness upon them, offered but a feeble resistance.
+      Many threw themselves overboard, and swam to the ship nearest to them;
+      others were cut down; and the rest flung away their arms, and cried for
+      quarter.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      All who did so were, without the loss of a minute's time, thrown down into
+      the hold of their ship, and the hatches secured over them. It had before
+      been arranged that Ralph should take the command of the corsair, having
+      with him France, Auvergne, and Germany. As soon, therefore, as the
+      captives were fastened below, Gervaise called the knights of the other
+      four langues back to the deck of the galley. The lashings were cast off,
+      she was pushed from the side of the prize, and the oars were got out.
+      There was no time to be lost, for the largest of the three pirate ships,
+      which had, directly it was seen that her consort was captured, poured two
+      heavy broadsides into the prize, was now approaching&mdash;rowing but
+      slowly, however, for the third vessel to come up.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      She was but a hundred yards away when the galley swept round the bow of
+      the prize and advanced to meet her. As she did so, Ralph discharged the
+      eight guns of the prize, which he had at once reloaded, into the bow of
+      the corsair, the shot raking the crowded deck from end to end. When but a
+      few yards distant, the two bow guns of the galley poured in a shower of
+      missiles, and a moment later she ran alongside the pirate, the poop guns,
+      as before, preparing the way for the boarders. But no sooner had they
+      leapt on deck than they were met by the pirates, headed by their captain.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise had specially charged the knights not to allow themselves to be
+      carried away by their ardour. &ldquo;We are sure to be greatly outnumbered, and,
+      when we first spring on board, we must cut our way across the deck, and
+      then form ourselves in a double or treble line across it, and, so
+      fighting, gradually force them before us.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      This, in spite of the efforts of the pirates, was accomplished, and, once
+      formed, the corsairs strove in vain to break through the wall of steel.
+      For a time, however, no forward movement could be made, so furious were
+      the attacks upon them, led by the pirate chief. Several times breaches
+      were made in the front rank, but the knights behind each time bore back
+      the assault, and restored the line. The knights had won their way half
+      along the poop when a yell of exultation rose from the corsairs as the
+      third of their vessels rowed up on the other side of the galley, and her
+      crew sprang on board it. Gervaise called the knights of the second line
+      from their places, and ranged them along the bulwark, to prevent the Moors
+      from boarding from the poop of the galley.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Then for a moment he looked round. The prize was creeping up, and was a
+      length or two away, coming up alongside. Its approach was also noticed by
+      the pirates, who, with wild shouts, flung themselves upon their opponents.
+      Gervaise sprang forward to take the place of a young Italian knight, who
+      staggered back, with his helmet cleft by a heavy blow from the keen
+      yataghan of the pirate captain. The corsair, shouting his war cry of
+      &ldquo;Allah!&rdquo; sprang with the bound of a wild cat upon Gervaise; his weapon
+      descended on his uplifted guard, and shore right through the stout blade.
+      With a shout of triumph, the corsair raised his arm to repeat the blow;
+      but Gervaise in turn sprang forward, and struck with all his force with
+      the pommel of his sword on the forehead of his opponent. The latter fell
+      as if shot, his weapon dropping from his hand beside him.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Dismayed at the fall of their leader, his followers recoiled for a moment.
+      Another tall pirate sprang forward to take his place, and, shouting to
+      them to follow, was about to throw himself upon Gervaise, when a gun
+      crashed out close alongside. A storm of iron swept away the front line of
+      Moors, and the shout of &ldquo;St. John!&rdquo; &ldquo;St. John!&rdquo; rose above the din. It was
+      one of the bow guns of the prize, and as she swept along gun after gun
+      poured its contents among the pirates.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Do you clear the galley, Ralph. We can manage here now,&rdquo; Gervaise said,
+      as Ralph leapt on board. The latter, followed by his party of knights,
+      rushed across the poop, and sprang on to the galley among the pirates, who
+      had been striving in vain to break through the line of defenders. Gervaise
+      called to his party to follow him, and, taking the offensive, fell upon
+      the remnant of the corsairs who still held the forward end of the poop.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The discharge of the cannon at such close quarters had wrought terrible
+      havoc among them, and the pirates, with but slight resistance, turned, and
+      either ran down the ladder or leapt into the water. The knights followed
+      them forward among the benches of the rowers, who cheered loudly in many
+      tongues as they passed them. At the forecastle the Moors made another
+      stand, but the knights forced their way up, and in two minutes all was
+      over.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Now to the aid of our comrades!&rdquo; Gervaise shouted, as the last of the
+      corsairs was struck down.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Ralph's party had indeed cleared the poop of the galley, but they in vain
+      endeavoured to climb up on to that of the third pirate ship, whose
+      superior height gave a great advantage to its defenders. Gervaise leapt
+      down on to the bow of the galley, followed by the knights, and then ran
+      aft until he could climb into the waist of the pirate. So intent were the
+      corsairs upon defending the poop that they did not see what was going on
+      elsewhere, and Gervaise had obtained a fair footing before he was noticed.
+      Then a number of men ran down and attacked his party. But it was too late,
+      for the whole of the knights had, by this time, leaped on board. Their
+      assailants were forced back, and, pressing close upon them, the knights
+      gained the poop before the main body of the pirates were aware of their
+      coming.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Warned by the shouts and shrieks of their comrades that they had been
+      taken in the rear, the Moslems who were defending the side of the poop
+      wavered for a moment. Ralph took advantage of their hesitation, and sprang
+      on board, his companions pouring in after him. There was a stern and
+      desperate fight. The Moslems fought with the fury of despair, disdaining
+      to ask or accept quarter. A few leapt overboard, preferring death by
+      drowning to that by the swords of the Christians; but the great majority
+      died fighting to the last. A shout of triumph rose from the knights as the
+      last of the Moslems fell.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The first impulse of all of them was to take off their helmets in order to
+      breathe the fresh air, and for a while they all stood panting from their
+      exertions.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Nobly and gallantly done, comrades!&rdquo; Gervaise exclaimed. &ldquo;This is indeed
+      a victory of which we have all a right to be proud. Now, the first thing
+      is to free the slaves of their shackles; there are many white faces among
+      them. Let our langue look after the wounded, while the released captives
+      clear the decks of the bodies of the fallen pirates.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      It took an hour's hard work to knock off the chains of the slaves. The
+      greater portion of them were Christians&mdash;Greeks, Italians, Spaniards,
+      and French, who had been captured in various raids by the corsairs; and
+      among them were the crew of the ship that had been overhauled by the
+      galley on the previous day. Besides these, there were a few Moslems who
+      had been sentenced to labour in the galleys for various crimes.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Among the Christians, the joy at their liberation was intense. Some
+      laughed, some cried, others were too overcome to speak coherently. Among
+      the rest were found, to the intense pleasure of their rescuers, three
+      knights of the Order who had for years been missing. They had been taken
+      prisoners on an island at which the galley to which they belonged had
+      touched. Many of the knights had landed, and three of them, all belonging
+      to the langue of Italy, had wandered away from the rest, and had not
+      returned. A search had been made for them, and it was discovered that a
+      struggle had taken place. As there were no marks of blood, it was supposed
+      that they were suddenly pounced upon by a party of hidden marauders, who
+      had been watching them from some hiding place, and had thrown themselves
+      upon the knights before they had had time to draw their swords. Following
+      the trail by bushes broken down, and plants crushed under foot, it was
+      found to lead to a creek on the other side of the island. Here there were
+      signs that a craft had been anchored, as there were the ashes of fires,
+      fragments of food, and other matters, scattered about on the shore. Hours
+      had passed before the knights had been missed, and therefore the craft in
+      which they had been carried off was long out of sight. Letters were
+      written by the grand master to the Pasha of Syria, to the Emperor of
+      Egypt, and to the Bey of Tunis, offering to ransom the knights, but all
+      replied that they were unaware of any such captives having been landed.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      An attempt had then been made to ascertain whether they had been carried
+      to Tripoli; but the bey had little authority over the various tribesmen
+      along the coast, and only replied that no such captives had been sold in
+      the city. Thus all hope of ransoming them had died away, and their names
+      were inscribed in the list of those who had fallen into the hands of the
+      infidels, but of whose subsequent fate no clue could be obtained.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      All were greatly emaciated, and their faces showed signs of the sufferings
+      they had undergone. The young knights were all familiar with their names,
+      but personally none had known them, for they had been carried off two or
+      three months before Gervaise and Ralph Harcourt had arrived at Rhodes.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      All three had struggled desperately to break their chains while the fight
+      was going on, and had, as soon as the contest was decided, risen to their
+      feet and shouted the battle cry of the Order; then, overcome by their
+      emotions, they sank down upon their benches, and remained as if in a
+      stupor until the knights, who had hurried first to them, struck off their
+      fetters. Then the three men grasped each other's hands, while tears
+      streamed down their cheeks.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It is no dream, comrades,&rdquo; one of them said, in a hoarse voice. &ldquo;We are
+      free again. Let us first return thanks to God for our release, and then we
+      can thank these our brothers.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The three knights knelt at the benches where they had toiled and suffered,
+      and hid their faces in their hands. No sounds came from their lips, but
+      their stifled sobs and the heaving of their naked shoulders, seamed and
+      scarred by the strokes of their taskmasters' whips, told the young
+      knights, who stood unhelmeted and silent around, how deep was their
+      emotion. Then they rose.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I am Fabricius Caretto,&rdquo; one said; &ldquo;this is Giacomo Da Vinci; this Pietro
+      Forzi: all knight commanders of the Order, and now for six years prisoners
+      in the hands of these corsairs. Assuredly no one would know us, so changed
+      are we.&rdquo; He looked round inquiringly for a familiar face. &ldquo;Your commander
+      must surely be a comrade of ours?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;We know all your names,&rdquo; Gervaise said, coming forward, &ldquo;though none of
+      us reached the convent until after your capture. I have the honour to
+      command this galley. My name is Gervaise Tresham, and I have for my
+      lieutenant Sir Ralph Harcourt. All of us, glad as we are at the capture we
+      have effected of these three corsairs, are still more pleased that we
+      should have been the means of rescuing three noble knights of our Order
+      from captivity. Now, I pray you first of all to accompany me on board the
+      galley, where we will do all we can to make you forget the sufferings you
+      have gone through. After you have bathed, and reclad yourselves, I will
+      present to you the knights my comrades, amongst whom are seven of your own
+      langue. Three of these I will tell off to see to your comfort, for, as you
+      will understand, I have my hands full indeed at present.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;First, before all things, Sir Knight, let me express to you all our deep
+      gratitude and our admiration of the gallant deed that you have
+      accomplished in thus, single handed, capturing three vessels belonging to
+      the fiercest and most dreaded of the corsairs of Tripoli. God bless you
+      all, sirs&rdquo;&mdash;and his voice broke again&mdash;&ldquo;for the deed you have
+      done, and for bringing us out of this living hell!&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise called to three of the Italian knights, and, followed by them and
+      the released captives, led the way to the galley. Here he left them in
+      charge of their countrymen. &ldquo;Give them each a draught of old Cyprus, and
+      something to eat,&rdquo; he said aside to one of the knights; &ldquo;they sorely need
+      refreshment before aught else, for, as you see, they are well nigh dazed
+      with this unlooked for change. I will put out clothes enough for one of
+      them; the others you must supply for the present from your stores. Now I
+      must be off.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      There was indeed much to be done. Four of the knights were told off to
+      attend upon the most urgent cases among their own wounded. Only two of
+      their number had been killed outright, but there were four serious cases
+      among the wounded, while eight or ten others had received wounds that
+      required bandaging and attending to. As fast as the slaves' fetters were
+      struck off, food and wine were given to them, together with such garments
+      as could be found at the moment. Then the bodies of the fallen pirates
+      were thrown overboard, while the wounded were attended to, and the
+      released Christians were divided equally between the three prizes. To each
+      of these the knights of one of the langues were told off, the seniors
+      being appointed to the command. There were in all some ninety Christian
+      captives on board the three ships. Thus each vessel had a complement of
+      seven knights and thirty Christians, and to these were added ten of the
+      thirty Moslems found at the oars, and fifteen of the pirates to whom
+      quarter had been given.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      It was past noon before all these arrangements had been made, and during
+      the time so occupied, the ships lay idly side by side, drifting slowly
+      before the wind, the sails having been lowered as soon as the struggle was
+      over. Up to this time, the knights had been too busily engaged to think of
+      food, but they were right glad when they were summoned to a meal on board
+      the galley.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise found the three knights in the cabin, dressed in the usual attire
+      of the Order. They presented a very different appearance, indeed, to that
+      which they wore when he had first seen them. They had bathed, and combed
+      their matted hair, which was alone sufficient to transform them, but the
+      feeling that they were once more free men, and knights of an honoured
+      Order, had done even more to effect the change; and although they looked
+      thin and worn, the martial bearing had come back naturally as they donned
+      their knightly robes and buckled on swords.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I am glad to see that you are better,&rdquo; Gervaise said, as he went up to
+      greet them. &ldquo;Twenty years seem to have dropped off your shoulders since
+      this morning.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;We are not the same men, Sir Gervaise. We were slaves, and are now free.
+      We were Christian dogs; now we are Christian knights. We were subject to
+      scoffs and blows; now, thank God, we have swords to strike with, and
+      though as yet our arms may not have regained their full strength, we could
+      at least bear a share in a fray. Our comrades have been telling us
+      somewhat of how this wonderful thing has come about, and have been
+      explaining what at first filled us with surprise, that a galley should be
+      manned solely by young knights, of whom their commander is one of the
+      youngest. We can testify, at least, that had the grand master been himself
+      in command, and his crew composed of veteran knights, he could have done
+      no better.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;We were fortunate in taking them so much by surprise that the first of
+      their ships fell into our hands before her consorts could come to her
+      assistance; and her guns did us good service in our struggle with the
+      others.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;The matter was well arranged, as well as gallantly fought,&rdquo; one of the
+      other knights said. &ldquo;Had you first fallen foul of the chief's galley, it
+      would have gone hard with you, for his crew were so strong that you could
+      scarce have overcome them before the other two vessels came up to his
+      assistance.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Now let us to our meal,&rdquo; Gervaise said.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The three knights were placed at the head of the table by him, and it was
+      pleasant to see how they enjoyed their food.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I can scarce persuade myself that I am not dreaming,&rdquo; Caretto said.
+      &ldquo;Sometimes, when lying at night, wet through with the damp air, I have
+      wondered to myself whether I could ever have lived thus, and whether I
+      should ever exchange my hard bread and water for what seemed to me
+      fabulous luxuries, though at the time one had taken them as a matter of
+      course. You cannot tell how strange it feels to me to come back to the old
+      life again.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;You will soon be accustomed to it,&rdquo; Gervaise said, with a smile, &ldquo;and
+      then you will look upon your captivity as a dream, just as you then
+      regarded your past life.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I suppose, Sir Gervaise,&rdquo; Pietro Forzi said, &ldquo;that you will sail direct
+      for Rhodes with your prizes?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;No indeed,&rdquo; Gervaise replied. &ldquo;At the same time that we learned, from a
+      dying man left on board the ship the pirates captured yesterday, of the
+      course they had taken, and were so enabled to follow them, we also learned
+      that they were on their way to join a corsair fleet that was collecting at
+      some point on the eastern side of Sardinia, with the intention of sweeping
+      the coast of Italy. It was this, rather than the capture of these three
+      vessels, that induced us to disobey the general instructions we had been
+      given to cruise along the northern coast of Africa, and determined us to
+      push north to give warning along the coast from Naples to Genoa of the
+      danger that threatened, and, if possible, to enable Genoa to fit out her
+      galleys to encounter the corsairs. That duty has still to be fulfilled,
+      though I fear that Genoa will be able to do little, for of late she has
+      been engaged in a long civil struggle between her great families, and has
+      taken but a small part in maritime affairs. However, we can at least warn
+      her, as well as Naples, Pisa, and other towns, and may possibly find some
+      opportunity for ourselves striking another blow against the pirates.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;If so, certainly we shall be glad to accompany you, if you will allow us
+      to serve under you; for nothing would please us so much as the opportunity
+      of paying off a small share of the vengeance we owe them. But of course,
+      if you would rather, we will sail for Rhodes in the prizes.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I am not thinking of sending them to Rhodes at present,&rdquo; Gervaise said.
+      &ldquo;It seems to me that we may be able, in some way, to utilise them to
+      advantage. They have their sails, and rowers for the oars. There will be,
+      in each, besides seven knights of the Order, thirty men who, like
+      yourselves, must feel willing to strike a blow at their late oppressors. I
+      need hardly say that I shall be glad indeed to have the company and aid of
+      three such well known knights of the Order, and would, could I do so,
+      gladly resign my command into your experienced hands. But this I cannot
+      do, and, anticipating that you would be willing to join us in this
+      expedition, I have been thinking how I could best utilise your aid. I have
+      thought that, if you would accept the positions, I would appoint one of
+      you to each of the prizes, to act, not as its commander, but as the leader
+      of the band of released captives. Most of them are sailors, of course, and
+      with them you could work the guns and give effective aid to the little
+      party of knights in any actual fight.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The three knights all exclaimed that they would gladly accept the posts he
+      offered them.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;The idea is a capital one, Sir Gervaise; and, as long as it does not come
+      to close fighting, the three ships should be able to render efficient aid
+      to your galley in any encounter. They will be, at any rate, a match for
+      their own number of pirate ships,&rdquo; Caretto said.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      As soon as the meal concluded, the Moslem captives were questioned one by
+      one as to the rendezvous at which the pirate fleet was to assemble; all,
+      however, protested that the place was known only to the three commanders,
+      all of whom had fallen in the fight.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      <a name="link2HCH0014" id="link2HCH0014">
+      <!--  H2 anchor --> </a>
+    </p>
+    <div style="height: 4em;">
+      <br /><br /><br /><br />
+    </div>
+    <h2>
+      CHAPTER XIV THE CORSAIR FLEET
+    </h2>
+    <p>
+      An hour later all was ready for a start. The knights of the langues of
+      France, Germany, and Spain went on board their respective ships, as did
+      the three parties of released captives, with the knights who were to
+      command them, while the rowers took their seats on the benches, shackled
+      with the chains that had recently held the Christians. The wind was from
+      the south, and with sails and oars the prizes were able to keep fairly
+      abreast of the galley. With a few short intervals of rest, the slaves
+      continued their work all night, until, shortly before daybreak, land was
+      seen ahead, and the pilot at once pronounced it to be Cape Carbonara.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;A good landfall, Gervaise,&rdquo; Ralph said. &ldquo;The pilot has done right well. I
+      suppose you mean to anchor when you get there?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Certainly, Ralph. The slaves will have rowed nearly eighteen hours, with
+      only two hours' rest. They must have some hours, at least, of sleep before
+      we go on. As you and I have been up all night, we will turn in also. We
+      will send a boat ashore to try and find out from the natives they may come
+      across whether any vessels, bearing the appearance of Moorish corsairs,
+      have been seen passing up the coast, and also to find out what bays and
+      inlets there are where they would be likely to anchor. Some of the Italian
+      knights had best go with the boat, for though I believe these people speak
+      a different dialect to those of the mainland, they would have more chance
+      of understanding them than any of the others.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The sun had risen when the little fleet came to an anchor close to the
+      cape. A boat was at once prepared to go ashore, and Gervaise begged
+      Fabricius Caretto, the senior of the rescued Italian knights, to endeavour
+      to find out whether a swift sailing craft of some kind could be hired. If
+      so, he was to secure her on any terms, and come off in her at once to the
+      galley.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise had already talked the matter over with Ralph, and they agreed
+      that a strongly manned craft of this kind would go faster than any of
+      those they had taken, and that, moreover, it would be a pity to weaken
+      their force by sending one of the prizes away. Having seen them off,
+      Gervaise retired to the cabin and threw himself down for a short sleep,
+      leaving the knights who had been off watch during the night, to see that
+      all went well. In two hours he was roused. A native craft had come
+      alongside with Sir Fabricius Caretto.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I think she is just the craft for us,&rdquo; the knight said, as Gervaise came
+      on deck. &ldquo;She belongs to a large fishing village just round the point to
+      the left. There were several boats there, but the villagers all said that
+      this was the speediest vessel anywhere along the coast. She belongs to two
+      brothers, who, with four men, constitute her regular crew; but I have
+      arranged for twelve others to go in her, in order that they may row her
+      along at a good pace if the wind falls light.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Are your companions come off yet?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;No; but we can hoist a flag for their recall.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Do so. I shall be greatly obliged if you will undertake this mission to
+      the seaports. It needs one of name and rank to speak with the nobles and
+      officials authoritatively.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I will gladly do so, Sir Gervaise. Give me your instructions, and you can
+      rely upon my carrying them out.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I thank you greatly, Sir Fabricius, and shall be glad if you will take
+      with you any two of the knights you may select. I have to write letters
+      for you to deliver to the authorities at Naples, Pisa, and Genoa. I shall
+      write but briefly, and leave you to explain matters more fully. I shall
+      merely say that I have intelligence of the arrival here of a fleet of
+      Moorish corsairs, of whose strength I am ignorant, but that assuredly
+      their intention is to make a raid on the commerce of the coast, and
+      perhaps to land at unprotected places. At Ostia, after warning the
+      authorities to send orders along the coast for the inhabitants to be on
+      their guard, pray them to carry word at once to Rome, and request his
+      Holiness the Pope to order some armed galleys to put to sea as soon as
+      possible. Beg them at Naples and Pisa to do the same thing. But of course
+      it is from Genoa that we must hope for the most assistance.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;In each place you will, if possible, see the syndic himself, and such of
+      his council as can be got quickly together. The moment you have done all
+      you can at Genoa sail for the Island of Madalena, which lies off the
+      northeastern point of the island. There you will either find us, or a boat
+      with a message where to direct your course. I think perhaps it will be
+      best to omit Naples&mdash;it will save you fully a day, if not two, to do
+      so. Pray them at Ostia to send off news down the coast, or to request the
+      papal authorities to despatch mounted messengers. 'Tis likely that, at
+      first, at any rate, the corsairs will try the narrower waters to the
+      north. From here to Ostia is nigh two hundred miles, and if the wind is
+      brisk you may arrive there tomorrow afternoon, and start again at night,
+      arriving at Pisa before noon on the following day; while, allowing for
+      four or five hours to ascend the river there, you may be at Genoa next
+      morning.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Three hours should suffice to gather from the authorities what force they
+      can despatch, and as soon as you have learned this, embark again and sail
+      south. You may reach Madalena in two days. Thus, at the earliest, it must
+      be from six to seven days before you can bring us the news there; if you
+      meet with calms or foul winds you may be well nigh double that time. If at
+      Ostia you can get a faster craft than this, hire it, or take a relay of
+      fresh rowers. I will furnish you with means when I give you the letters.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      In less than half an hour Gervaise was on deck again. The boat had
+      returned with the other Italian knights. An ample store of provisions had
+      been placed on board the Sperondra, both for the crew and for the three
+      knights, and, without a minute's delay, these took their places on board,
+      the great sails were hoisted, and the craft glided rapidly away.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;The villagers spoke truly as to her speed,&rdquo; Ralph said, as they looked
+      after her. &ldquo;Even with this light wind, she is running fully six miles an
+      hour, and as, by the look of the sky, there will be more of it soon, she
+      will make the run to Ostia well within the time we calculated.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise now questioned the other Italian knights as to what information
+      they had gained.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      They said the peasants had told them that several strange craft, using
+      both oars and sails, had been noticed passing northwards, and that so
+      strong was the opinion that these were either Algerines or Tunisians that,
+      for the last three or four days, none of the fishing craft had ventured to
+      put to sea. They were able to tell but little as to the bays along the
+      coastline, which they described as very rugged and precipitous. Five or
+      six little streams ran, they knew, down from the mountains. They thought
+      the most likely places for corsairs to rendezvous would be in a deep
+      indentation north of Cape Bellavista, or behind Cape Comino. If not at
+      these places, they might meet in the great bay at whose entrance stands
+      Tavolara Island, and that beyond, there were several deep inlets on the
+      northeastern coast of the Island. Gervaise had a consultation with Ralph.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;The first thing is to find out where these corsairs have their meeting
+      place, Ralph; and this must be done without their catching sight of the
+      galley or of the prizes, which some of them would be sure to recognise.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Ralph nodded.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It is a difficult question, Gervaise. Of course, if we had a boat speedy
+      enough to row away from the corsairs it would be easy enough; but with
+      wind and oars they go so fast that no boat could escape them.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;That is quite certain, Ralph; and therefore, if it is done by a boat, it
+      must be by one so small and insignificant that they would pay but little
+      attention to it if they caught sight of it. My idea is that we should take
+      our own little boat, which is a fast one, paint it black, to give it the
+      appearance of a fisherman's boat, and hire a couple of good rowers from
+      the village. This, with one knight dressed as a fisherman, should go ahead
+      of us, and explore every inlet where ships could be sheltered. We would
+      follow ten miles behind. When we get near the places where the natives
+      think the fleet is likely to be, the boat must go on at night, while we
+      anchor. In that way they ought to be able to discover the corsairs, while
+      themselves unseen, and to gain some idea of their numbers and the position
+      in which they are anchored, and bring us back news.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Shall I go myself, Gervaise?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I could not spare you, Ralph. The risk of capture does not seem to me to
+      be great, but there certainly is a risk, and I dare not part with you. It
+      had better be an Italian, because there will doubtless be an opportunity
+      of landing at villages and questioning the inhabitants, therefore we will
+      send Fosco. If there are some eight or ten corsairs gathered in any of
+      these bays the news is sure to travel along the shore, and we may get some
+      tidings in that way. The first thing is to send off to the village again
+      to fetch two young fishermen; they must be active fellows, strong, and
+      possessed of some courage. I will ask da Vinci to go himself and select
+      them. While he is away we will paint our boat black, and make ready for
+      her to start at once; the sooner she is off the better.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The Italian knight at once undertook the mission, and started for the
+      shore. Fosco, who had been chosen principally because he was light of
+      frame, as well as very shrewd and intelligent, was then called up, and his
+      mission explained to him. He was delighted at having been selected.
+      Gervaise took him down to the cabin, and they consulted the maps with
+      which the galley was furnished.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;You will row on to Muravera; it is some twenty miles from here. You see,
+      the village lies at the mouth of a river. As soon as you arrive there, you
+      will land and find out whether there is any report of Moorish pirates
+      having been seen along the coast. We shall be there this evening, and you
+      will come on board and report. Next day you will get to Lunasei, which is
+      about five miles on this side of Cape Bellavista, and they will certainly
+      know there if the pirates are lying behind the cape. If they are so, you
+      will row back to meet us; if they are not, you will remain there until we
+      come up in the evening. Remember that, should you on either day be seen
+      and chased, and you find they are overtaking you, you will make for the
+      shore, land, and conceal yourselves. We shall keep along near the coast,
+      and as we pass you can come down to the water's edge and signal to us to
+      take you off. Now you had better disguise yourself, so as to be in
+      readiness to start as soon as da Vinci comes off with the men. You will
+      only need to take a small stock of provisions, as each night you can
+      replenish them here.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      An hour later da Vinci came off with two stalwart young fishermen. The
+      little boat had already been painted, and it was lowered at once; Fosco
+      stepped into it, and started.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Two hours later the prizes got up sail, and, accompanied by the galley,
+      coasted quietly along the shore, arriving, late in the afternoon, at
+      Muravera. Fosco at once came on board.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;There is no news here beyond that which we gained this morning, Sir
+      Gervaise,&rdquo; he said. &ldquo;Strange ships have certainly been seen sailing north,
+      but they did not approach the coast.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      A similar report was given at Lunasei; there were certainly no corsairs
+      lying behind Cape Bellavista, or news would assuredly have reached the
+      village. At Orosei, next day, the report was the same; there were no
+      strange ships at Cape Comino. They had been warned overnight that the
+      coast beyond the cape was so precipitous, that there would be no villages
+      at which to make inquiries, and arranged with Fosco that the ships should
+      anchor north of the cape, and that he should go on at once to inspect the
+      next bay. If he found ships there, he was to return at once; if not, he
+      was, at daybreak, to land at one of the villages in the bay, and to make
+      inquiries.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      No news was brought in by him during the night.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It is evident the pirates are not in the bay, Gervaise,&rdquo; Ralph said, as
+      they came on deck at daybreak.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Yes; and I am glad of it. It is a large bay, and if the Genoese send half
+      a dozen galleys, some of the pirates might still escape, while the next
+      bays are deeper and narrower, and it would be more easy to entrap them
+      all. I have all along thought it most probable that they would rendezvous
+      there. The maps show no villages for many miles round, and they might lie
+      there for weeks without so much as a shepherd getting sight of them from
+      the cliffs. Moreover, it is the nearest point for cutting off ships coming
+      down between Corsica and the mainland, and they can, besides, snap up
+      those proceeding from the south to Marseilles, as these, for the most
+      part, pass between Sardinia and Corsica.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      At eight o'clock the boat was seen coming round the point.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Any news, Fosco?&rdquo; Gervaise asked, as it approached the galley.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;None, Sir Gervaise. They have heard nothing of pirates, nor seen anything
+      of them.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Exclamations of disappointment broke from the knights.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;That makes it all the more likely,&rdquo; Gervaise said, &ldquo;that they are lying
+      in one of the inlets to the north. You see, lower down they kept
+      comparatively close to the shore, being careless who might notice them;
+      but as they approached their rendezvous, they would be more careful, and
+      might either pass along at night, or keep far out. If they had not been
+      anxious to conceal their near presence, they would have been likely to put
+      into this bay in search of plunder and captives; for Tempe, one of the
+      largest of the Sardinian towns, lies but a short distance away, and there
+      must be a considerable amount of traffic.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;There are four or five small craft lying there,&rdquo; Fosco, who had by this
+      time stepped on board, put in, &ldquo;and a considerable number of fishing
+      boats. When I came upon the ships in the dark, I thought at first that I
+      had lighted on the pirates, but on letting the boat drift closely by them
+      I soon saw they were not corsair galleys.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Shall we get up anchor and go into the bay?&rdquo; Ralph asked.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It were safer not to do so, Ralph. Possibly one of the craft lying there
+      might be presently captured by them, and they might learn from her crew of
+      the presence of a galley of the Order there. Therefore I think it best to
+      remain where we are till nightfall, and then to proceed and anchor on the
+      north side of the Island of Madalena, if we can find a sheltered cove
+      where we could not be seen either from the land or by passing ships.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      During the day there was a good deal of discussion among the knights as to
+      whether the corsairs might not already have sailed away. It was evident
+      that if all their ships had arrived, there would be no motive for delay.
+      Three ships they knew would never join them, and others might have been
+      detained, from some cause or another. There could be no doubt that the
+      pirates had already ample force for capturing as many merchant vessels as
+      they might come across. But it might be intended to carry out some more
+      daring project&mdash;to sack and burn towns along the coast, carry off the
+      leading people for ransom, and fill the vessels with slaves&mdash;the
+      attack being made simultaneously on several unprotected towns. A vast
+      amount of plunder could thus be reaped, together with captives of even
+      greater money value. Were this their plan, they would doubtless delay
+      until all those who had promised to join in the expedition had arrived.
+      The balance of opinion, then, was that the corsairs were still in hiding.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      By daybreak next morning they were moored in a sheltered little bay to the
+      north of Madalena, the galley lying inside the prizes, so as to be
+      concealed as much as possible from view of any craft that might happen to
+      pass the mouth of the bay. Fosco started as soon as darkness fell in the
+      evening, and returned early in the morning.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;They are there,&rdquo; he shouted, as he neared the galley, &ldquo;hidden in a deep
+      inlet that runs into one of the narrow bays.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;How many are there of them?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Seventeen or eighteen, I could not say which. They are all moored side by
+      side.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      By this time Fosco's boat had reached the galley.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;You have done well indeed,&rdquo; Gervaise said, as the young knight ascended
+      to the poop. &ldquo;Now give us a full account of what you have seen.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;As you know, Sir Gervaise, the bay opposite this island splits up into
+      two, running a long way inland, like the fangs of a great tooth. I had, of
+      course, no difficulty in finding the entrance to the bay itself, as it is
+      but a short distance across the strait. I steered first for the left hand
+      shore, and kept close along under the shadow of the cliffs, which, in many
+      cases, rise almost straight out from the water. We rowed very quietly,
+      fearing to run against a rock; for although it was light enough to see
+      across the water, and to make out any craft that might be anchored there,
+      it was very dark along the foot of the cliffs. There was no need for
+      haste, as I knew I had plenty of time to explore both arms of the bay, and
+      to be back here before day began to break.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;We rowed up to the end of the inlet, and then, having assured ourselves
+      that it was empty, came down the other side, and turned up the western
+      arm. We had got some distance along when I fancied I heard voices, and so
+      let the boat drift along, only dipping the oars in the water occasionally.
+      I could make out no signs whatever of the corsairs, when suddenly we came
+      upon a break in the cliffs. It was only some fifty yards across, and here
+      a creek came in at right angles to the shore. I could have given a shout
+      of pleasure as I looked up it, for there a score of lights were burning
+      above a dark mass, and we could hear the sound of talking and laughter. It
+      was but a glimpse I caught, for the men at once backed water, and we were
+      soon round the corner again.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Up till then the fishermen had been ready enough to go where I wanted,
+      but the sight of that clump of galleys regularly scared them, and they
+      wanted to row straight away; but of course I pointed out to them that they
+      had taken pay to do this thing, and that they had to do it. They said that
+      if caught they would be either killed or made slaves of, and I could not
+      contradict them, but said that, in the first place, as I was ready to run
+      the risk, there was no reason why they shouldn't do so, and in the second,
+      there was no chance whatever of their being taken, as, if discovered, we
+      should get so long a start that we could either escape them altogether or
+      run the boat ashore at some point where the trees came down to the water's
+      edge, carry the boat up and hide it, and then move up into the hills until
+      the corsairs had gone.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;We waited there three or four hours, looking round the point
+      occasionally. At the end of that time all was quiet. Two or three of the
+      lanterns still burned, but there was no sign of life or movement on their
+      decks. After waiting another half hour to ensure the crews being asleep,
+      we rowed quietly up the creek, keeping within an oar's length of the
+      rocks. There was not much to see; the galleys lay two abreast, and as
+      there was no space between them, I supposed the whole were lashed
+      together. There were eight of them on the side we went along, but I think
+      there were only seven on the other side. As I thought it did not much
+      matter whether there were fifteen or sixteen, and as the men were in a
+      state of horrible fright, we turned and went back again, and I own I felt
+      very glad myself when we got round the point without an alarm being given.
+      We came quietly out, and it was fortunate we did so, for we had not gone a
+      quarter of a mile when we heard the sound of oars, and, lying silently
+      under the cliff, we saw two large galleys row past us.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It is a strong force, Gervaise,&rdquo; Ralph said, as they paced up and down
+      the poop together. &ldquo;Probably in each of those galleys are eighty or a
+      hundred men, in addition to the rowers. It is evident that unless Genoa
+      sends us help we shall not be able to interfere with their plans.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I don't know, Ralph. I think we may injure them sorely, though we might
+      not be able to defeat them altogether. I want you tonight to take one of
+      the prizes, and row round to the bay we passed, and there to buy three
+      coasting vessels and six or eight fishing boats. Get as much pitch, oil,
+      and other combustibles, as you can purchase in the villages on the shore.
+      If you can engage a score of fishermen to man them, all the better. My
+      idea is that if Caretto returns with news that the Genoese have no galleys
+      ready for sea, we must do what we can to injure these corsairs. If we
+      smear these craft you are going to fetch with pitch and oil, and fill the
+      holds with combustibles, and so turn them into fire ships, we may at least
+      do the pirates a tremendous lot of harm. When we get to the mouth of this
+      inlet, we could have the fire ships rowed in by three or four men in each,
+      they having a boat behind in which to escape as soon as the boats are
+      lighted. The sight of a dozen craft coming down on them in flames would
+      cause a terrific panic, for, moored closely together, as they are, if one
+      took fire there would be little chance of the others escaping. Of course,
+      we should add to the confusion by opening a fire with all our guns, and
+      could hope to capture some at least of them as they tried to make their
+      way out.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It is a grand idea, Gervaise; a splendid idea! It would be a terrific
+      blow to the Moors, and would make the sea safe from them for a long time.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;When you buy the other things, Ralph, get a quantity of black cloth&mdash;it
+      matters not how coarse, or of what material; and also some white. As soon
+      as you come back with it, all hands shall set to work to make the stuff up
+      into mantles of the Order, with the white cross. We will put these on to
+      the Christians in the prizes, and the Moors will suppose that they are
+      attacked by four of the galleys of the Order. If you can get some more
+      arms and some iron headpieces, all the better.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I will do what I can, Gervaise; the arms will certainly be wanted, for
+      those we found on the decks were sufficient only to arm half the
+      Christians. As to the steel caps, that will not matter so much, as in the
+      darkness and confusion the sight of the mantles will be quite enough to
+      convince the corsairs that we are all knights of the Order. By the way,
+      Gervaise, we have not yet looked into the holds of the prizes.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;That is so, Ralph; we knew, of course, that as the ships had but just
+      started we should find nothing in them save the cargo of that unfortunate
+      craft they captured.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      On searching they found, as they had expected, that the cargo of the
+      captured ship had been of no great value. It consisted of wine, olive oil,
+      and grain. These were all useful, for the number of mouths to be fed was
+      considerable, and heavy inroads had already been made on the stores of the
+      galley. The rowers of the four vessels were at once set to work to crush
+      the grain between flat stones brought from the shore, and an ample supply
+      of coarse flour for their use for at least a fortnight was obtained before
+      sunset.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      As soon as darkness fell, Ralph and two of the French knights started in
+      one of the prizes. Late on the following afternoon a sail was seen coming
+      from the north, and before the sun set they were able to make her out to
+      be the craft in which Caretto had sailed. The anchor of the galley was at
+      once got up, and she rowed out to meet the boat and conduct her into the
+      little bay. It was almost dark when they came within hailing distance.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;What news do you bring, Sir Fabricius?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Bad news, I regret to say. I do not think that Genoa will be able to send
+      out any galleys for at least a fortnight. There have been civil
+      dissensions, and fighting between rival factions, and in consequence her
+      ships are all dismantled and laid up. Crews will have to be collected for
+      them, repairs executed, and officers chosen; a fortnight will be the
+      earliest time in which they can be here. Pisa has no war galleys, and
+      unless the Pope sends some out directly he gets the news, the corsairs
+      will have it their own way. Have you discovered them?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Yes; they lie but a few miles from here. There were fifteen or sixteen of
+      them two days ago, and two others joined them that night. You have lost no
+      time indeed. We had scarce begun to expect you, Sir Fabricius,&rdquo; he added,
+      as the knight and his two comrades stepped on board.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I have done my best,&rdquo; the knight said angrily. &ldquo;But I am in a rage with
+      my ill success. All I have accomplished is that no merchant vessels will
+      put to sea at present. At Ostia they would only send off a message to
+      Rome, to ask for orders. At Pisa the authorities at first treated my story
+      as a fiction, and, I believe, took me for an impostor; but on the news
+      spreading, some knights came forward and recognised me. Then we had a
+      meeting of the council. All talked, wrangled, and protested. They said
+      that it was absurd to suppose that they could, at a moment's notice, fit
+      out ships to cope with a fleet of corsairs; and their sole idea was to man
+      the forts, and to repel an attack. However, mounted messengers were sent
+      off at once, up and down the coast, to give warning to the inhabitants of
+      the towns to put themselves into a posture of defence, and to the
+      villagers to fly with their wives and families into the interior as soon
+      as they saw galleys of doubtful appearance approaching. I was there but
+      four hours, and then started for Genoa.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;There was almost a panic there too, as the members of the council were
+      mostly merchants, and were filled with dismay for the safety of their
+      ships and goods at sea. Of course, there was no thought that the corsairs,
+      however strong, would venture an attack upon Genoa itself. I told them
+      that you had captured three of the corsairs with a single galley, and that
+      if they could send you ten others you would probably be able to make head
+      against the pirates; but, as I have told you, Genoa is at peace with all
+      the world; her war galleys are laid up, and most of them would need repair
+      and recaulking before they would be fit to send to sea. Although they
+      maintained that no more than a week should elapse before they would be
+      ready to sail I am right sure that it will be double that time before they
+      are fitted out.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Of course, in Genoa I was well known, though my family estates lie near
+      Mantua, and my acquaintances flocked round me and urged me to stay until
+      the galleys were ready for sea. This I would not hear of, and, six hours
+      after my arrival, started again. We made the voyage to Corsica at a good
+      speed, but since then we have had the oars constantly out to help the
+      sails. The men have well earned their pay, I can assure you. It is enough
+      to make one mad with rage to think that these pirates will be able to
+      harry the coast of Italy at their pleasure; for there can be little chance
+      that they will abide quiet much longer at this rendezvous.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It is annoying, indeed,&rdquo; Gervaise agreed; and a murmur of disappointment
+      ran round the assembled knights. &ldquo;However, we have the consolation that we
+      have done all we could, and I am sure that we shall do so in the future.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise had charged Ralph to say nothing about the object of his mission,
+      and the general supposition was that he had sailed to endeavour to
+      purchase some bullocks, as the supply of meat was nearly exhausted. Ralph
+      himself had let drop a few words to this effect, and had indeed been
+      charged by Gervaise to bring off a few oxen if they could be obtained
+      without loss of time. Gervaise was on deck at midnight, and soon
+      afterwards the beat of oars was heard. It was a still night, and one of
+      the knights on watch remarked to him, &ldquo;It seems to me, Sir Gervaise, that
+      the sound is a confused one, and that there must be several vessels
+      rowing. Shall I call up our companions? It may be that it is the pirate
+      fleet coming out.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;You need not do that,&rdquo; Gervaise replied. &ldquo;I am expecting Sir Ralph to
+      bring back with him some fishing boats, for which I think I can find a
+      use. We should have heard before this if the corsairs had been putting
+      out. Fosco is in his boat watching the mouth of the inlet, and would have
+      started with the news had there been any stir on board their galleys.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      It was a quarter of an hour before a number of dark objects entered the
+      little bay. As soon as they did so, they ceased rowing, and the splashes
+      of the anchors as they fell into the water were heard. Then came the sound
+      of a boat's oars, and Ralph was soon alongside.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I see that you have succeeded, Ralph.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;There is no fear of failing when one is ready to pay the full value of
+      what one wants to get. I have bought three coasters and eight fishing
+      boats, and have a sufficient store of pitch and oil, with plenty of straw
+      and faggots. There was no difficulty in getting men to come with me. As
+      soon as they heard that a fleet of eighteen Moorish galleys was in the
+      next bay, they were ready enough to aid in any plan for their destruction,
+      for they knew well enough that some of them would be sure to make raids
+      all along the coast, sacking and burning, and carrying off men, women, and
+      children, as slaves. I said I only wanted two men for each craft, but so
+      many were willing to come that I have some thirty more than the number I
+      asked for, and we can divide these among us. They are strong, active
+      looking fellows.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;We will keep them here then, Ralph. You see, there are one-and-twenty of
+      our knights in the three prizes, and as we lost two in the capture, and
+      four others are not fit to put on armour, we have but six-and-twenty, and
+      the addition will be very welcome. What are they armed with?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;They have bows and arrows, and long pikes and axes.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Good. Have you managed to collect any more arms?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Yes. The people are all charcoal burners and woodmen in winter, and I was
+      therefore able to get together some thirty or forty axes and hatchets,
+      which will be ample, with the arms we took from the Moors, to equip the
+      ninety Christians.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I think we can depend upon these for fighting, Ralph.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I don't think there is any doubt about that. A few of them are pretty
+      well worn out with labour and suffering, but all have gained strength and
+      spirits greatly in the past week, and you may be sure that they will fight
+      to the death rather than run the risk of another turn in the galleys.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;And have you got the stuff to make the mantles?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Yes. There was plenty of the coarse black cloth which they wear in summer&mdash;in
+      winter, of course, they are clad in sheepskins; and I have sufficient
+      white cotton cloth to make the crosses.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;We have only one thing to wish for now, Ralph, and that is, that the
+      corsairs may not take it into their heads to sail tomorrow. Fosco will
+      bring me news at daybreak, and we will at once send another boat off to
+      watch the mouth of the bay when he leaves it. If they sail, we cannot
+      venture to attack them as long as they keep together, the odds are far too
+      heavy, and our only plan will be to follow them at a distance, when we can
+      just keep their upper sails in sight, and then to attack any detachment
+      that may separate from the main body.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I hope it will not come to that, Gervaise. It would be hard indeed, when
+      you have devised such a splendid plan, and we have got everything ready to
+      carry it out, if they were to give us the slip. Do the others know
+      anything about it yet?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;No. I thought it better to keep silence till tomorrow. No doubt some of
+      the galley slaves understand enough of one or other of our languages to
+      gather what is on foot. Besides, their late captives might, in their
+      satisfaction at the thought of revenge, say enough to them to let them
+      know that an attack on their fleet was intended, and one of them might, in
+      some way, free himself from his irons and swim ashore. We know there is a
+      small fishing village across the island, and there would be no difficulty
+      in stealing a boat and making off with the news. I do not say that the
+      risk is great; still, it were better not to throw away even a chance. The
+      knights have all turned in in a very gloomy mood, for Caretto has returned
+      with news that there is no hope of assistance from Genoa for a fortnight,
+      and it seemed, therefore, that all our pains had been thrown away. And now
+      we may as well turn in until daylight.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      <a name="link2HCH0015" id="link2HCH0015">
+      <!--  H2 anchor --> </a>
+    </p>
+    <div style="height: 4em;">
+      <br /><br /><br /><br />
+    </div>
+    <h2>
+      CHAPTER XV A SPLENDID EXPLOIT
+    </h2>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise was up again at dawn. He was amused at the wonder of the knights,
+      as they came up one by one, at the sight of the little fleet anchored
+      outside them. As soon as it was fairly daylight, he sent off to the three
+      prizes to request all the knights to come on board the galley. When all
+      were assembled there he said, &ldquo;You are all aware, comrades, that Sir
+      Fabricius Caretto has brought news that the galleys at Genoa are all laid
+      up, and that it will be a fortnight before they can put to sea. Long
+      before that, the corsairs will assuredly be ravaging all the villages and
+      small towns along the coast of Italy, unless we can prevent their doing
+      so. It would be simple madness to try to attack them at sea; of that I
+      feel sure you are all conscious. It would be only throwing away our lives
+      and our galley.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      There was a murmur of assent among the knights. They were ready for any
+      encounter in which there was a chance, however faint, of success; but all
+      saw that for a single galley to attack one of the largest corsair fleets
+      that had ever set out, would be nothing short of insanity. Their leader's
+      words, however, seemed to show that he had some plan in his mind by which
+      he hoped to strike a blow at the enemy, and all listened eagerly for what
+      was coming.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;We have heard from our comrade Fosco that their ships lie moored in two
+      lines, side by side in a narrow inlet. He has returned this morning with
+      the news that they are still there. He thinks that three or four more have
+      arrived during the last two days, and it is probable they are waiting for
+      the three we captured to join them. Tonight it is my intention to attack
+      them, but not by rowing in and boarding them, for that would be hopeless.
+      Yesterday Sir Ralph Harcourt went, as you are aware, to fetch provisions.
+      But this was a part only of the object of his trip. He has, as you see,
+      brought back eleven craft with him; these, I may tell you, are laden with
+      combustibles&mdash;pitch, oil, straw, and faggots. They will be rowed and
+      towed to the inlet tonight, set on fire, and launched against the
+      pirates.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      An enthusiastic cheer broke from the knights. They saw at once that, lying
+      as the corsairs were, side by side, the destruction of many of them was
+      certain.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;He has also brought fishermen,&rdquo; Gervaise went on, &ldquo;two or three of whom
+      will go in each fire ship, having a boat towing behind, in which they will
+      escape as soon as the craft are alongside the galleys. The galley and the
+      three prizes will take their post at the mouth of the inlet. The fire of
+      our guns will add to the confusion among the pirates, and we shall
+      endeavour to fall upon any galleys that may extricate themselves from the
+      mass, and try to make their escape. Sir Ralph has brought back materials
+      for making ninety mantles of the Order, for the Christians on board the
+      three prizes, and thirty fishermen to bring the crew of our galley up to
+      its full strength. The light of the flames will suffice to show the
+      pirates that, as they will believe, four vessels, manned by knights of the
+      Order, are barring the entrance. Many will, we may calculate, jump
+      overboard and swim ashore rather than face us, and we shall be able, at
+      any rate, to capture three or four of their craft, for, as they come out,
+      one by one, we can all close round them; and with nearly fifty knights,
+      ninety released captives, burning for vengeance, and some fifty or sixty
+      fishermen, for those from the fire ships will, of course, join us&mdash;we
+      shall make short work of them, and may even hope to entirely destroy their
+      fleet.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Again a joyous shout rose from the knights. This would indeed be an
+      exploit that all might be proud to share in, and, breaking the ranks in
+      which they had stood while Gervaise addressed them, they crowded round him
+      with exclamations of enthusiasm and devotion.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Now,&rdquo; he said, as soon as silence was a little restored, &ldquo;the knights of
+      the langues on board the prizes will send at once to the coaster on the
+      left of the other two. Sir Ralph will go there now, and supply each with
+      materials for making the mantles for the Christians; he has brought
+      thread, and fish bone needles. You will see that the stuff is cut up into
+      suitable lengths, and handed over to your crews, and that each man makes
+      up his mantle. There can be but little sewing required for these
+      sleeveless gowns, nor need it be carefully done. The great thing is that
+      the white crosses shall be conspicuous. As soon as you have set them to
+      work, you will examine the state of the arms, see how many more are needed
+      to complete the list, and then send off to Sir Ralph, who will furnish as
+      many as are required: the fishermen have brought their own weapons. See
+      that the slaves are all well fed today, and, before evening, inspect well
+      their fetters, so that you may be free from all anxiety as to an attempt
+      by them to escape during the conflict.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;The rest of you will go on board these native craft, and see that the
+      combustibles are fairly distributed among them, the wood and straw soaked
+      with pitch and oil, as also the sails and ropes, and that the decks are
+      well coated; this is a most important duty. Get some torches made also, so
+      that there shall be two on board each craft; these are to be lighted the
+      last thing before we get to the point, and will be thrown down into the
+      straw and faggots in the hold, by the fishermen when they get close to the
+      corsairs. All this can be prepared before our morning meal, and when you
+      assemble here I hope to receive your reports that everything is in
+      readiness. One of the other coasters has some bullocks on board. Sir Ralph
+      will send one to each of the prizes, and one to us. They had better be
+      killed and cut up at once, in order that the crews may have two good meals
+      today of fresh meat. See that the galley slaves have their share.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      No time was lost in carrying out the orders. Ralph, as soon as the cloth,
+      arms, and meat were distributed, went round in a boat to see that the
+      combustibles were properly laid for firing, and everything done to insure
+      that the flames should spread rapidly. The Sards shared in the work, and
+      rations and wine were distributed to them; and when the knights sat down
+      to their meal on board the galley, they were able to report that
+      everything was in perfect readiness, and that the work of sewing the
+      mantles was making good progress.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The day passed slowly to the young knights, all of whom were burning with
+      excitement at the thought of the coming fray. The released Christians were
+      no less exultant at the prospect of taking vengeance for the sufferings
+      they had so long endured, and the scene on board all four ships was most
+      animated.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      After talking it over with Ralph, Gervaise told off three more of the
+      knights to each of the prizes, so that there should be ten on board each.
+      This reduced the strength on board the galley to seventeen; but as they
+      would have the assistance of a strong band of Sards they considered this
+      to be ample, under the circumstances. It was arranged that the galley,
+      with one of the prizes, should close with the first corsair that came out,
+      and that the other two prizes should attack the second. After capturing
+      these, they were to assist each other as circumstances might dictate.
+      Gervaise strongly impressed upon the knights in command of each prize that
+      they were not, single handed, to attack a corsair unless one of their
+      consorts was near, and free to give assistance.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;We must run no risk of a reverse,&rdquo; he said. &ldquo;We are certain of destroying
+      many of their vessels and of breaking up their fleet, and it is far better
+      that a few should escape than that we should run the risk of losing ten of
+      our number, to say nothing of those we have rescued from captivity. In the
+      excitement of the fight this order must be strictly borne in mind. Our
+      victory must be marred by no misfortune brought on by headstrong rashness.
+      The corsairs are bound to be very strongly manned, and ten knights, even
+      aided by such assistance as they may get from the Christians, might find
+      themselves altogether over matched against a crowd of desperate men.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      As soon as it was dusk the anchors were drawn up, and the fleet got under
+      way. They proceeded but slowly, for the wind was light, and the fishing
+      boats moved heavily through the water. There was, however, no occasion for
+      speed, for Gervaise did not wish to commence the attack until past
+      midnight. The guns had all been loaded before starting, and a pile of
+      ammunition was placed near each. Presently the wind nearly died out, and
+      the galley and prizes then took the coasters and fishing craft in tow. It
+      was nearly one o'clock when they got within half a mile of the inlet. The
+      tow ropes were then thrown off, the fishermen got out sweeps, and the
+      galley led the way, the fire ships followed in a body, and the three
+      prizes brought up the rear. The oars had all been muffled, and slowly they
+      made their way, until Fosco, who was standing next to Gervaise on board
+      the galley, said that the point just ahead marked the entrance to the
+      inlet. They then stopped rowing until the fire ships were all close up.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      These were, as had previously been arranged, in two lines. Five fishing
+      boats, each manned by four men and having its small boat in tow behind it,
+      formed the first line; the three coasters, each with six men at the oars,
+      and the three other fishing boats, formed the second. The torches were now
+      lighted. Ralph took his place in the centre boat of the first line;
+      Gervaise went on board one of the coasters, and the order was given to the
+      men to row. What wind there was was favourable, blowing from the
+      northwest, and therefore right into the inlet. Scarcely had the first
+      boats reached the entrance when a shout was heard.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Row, men, your hardest now!&rdquo; Ralph shouted; the Sards bent to their oars,
+      and the five boats advanced rapidly towards the corsairs. As they did so,
+      a babel of shouts and cries rose from the dark mass of ships, which
+      swelled into a tumult of alarm as on Ralph's order, &ldquo;Throw your torches
+      into the straw!&rdquo; a flash of flame leapt up from each boat. Five more
+      strokes, and they were alongside the two outside ships. As they crashed
+      heavily into them, the men leapt from their seats and sprang over into the
+      small boats, threw off the painters, and rowed astern, opening on either
+      hand to allow the second line of fire ships to pass. These, by Gervaise's
+      directions, divided, and three bore along on either side of the corsairs,
+      and then ran in among them, throwing grapnels to fasten the fire ships
+      alongside. Then, as the flames sprang up from the holds, the crews betook
+      themselves to their boats, and rowed out of the inlet.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      By the time they reached the galley and prizes, the eleven fire ships were
+      a mass of flame, which was spreading to the corsairs. Lying packed
+      together as these were, the confusion was terrible. Numbers of men
+      endeavoured to push off the fire ships, but it was too late; others tried
+      to extricate their galleys from the mass, throwing off the hawsers, and
+      striving with hand and oar to push their vessels out of the line. As soon
+      as the boats were alongside the galley, the guns of the four vessels
+      opened fire with grape into the crowded ships, now lit up by the flames as
+      clearly as at noontide, while the battle cry of the Order sounded high
+      above the din.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Nothing can save the ships near this end of the line,&rdquo; Ralph said, &ldquo;but
+      some of those behind may make their way out between the others and the
+      rocks. I can see that some of them there are lowering their yards and
+      sails to prevent their catching fire as they pass.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The knights distributed among the guns worked them incessantly, directing
+      their fire chiefly against the outside ships, so as to hinder the crews in
+      their endeavours to arrest the progress of the flames; but they were soon
+      able to fire impartially into the mass. As the heat of the flames drove
+      the pirates back, scores of men leapt overboard, and made for the shore.
+      Presently, two or three ships were seen making their way along the narrow
+      line of water on either side of the flaming group in front. As the first
+      advanced, the galley and one of the prizes rowed a short distance forward
+      to meet it. Its deck was crowded with men, among whom a discharge of the
+      cannon from both ships created terrible slaughter.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      A moment afterwards they closed with it, one on either side, and the
+      knights, the released captives, and the Sards, sprang down on to its deck.
+      The fight lasted but a minute. Appalled by the disaster that had befallen
+      them, by the terrible effect of the broadsides, poured in at a few yards'
+      distance, and by the sight of so many of the dreaded warriors of the
+      Cross, some of the corsairs threw down their arms and flung themselves on
+      the deck or into the hold, crying for quarter; those who resisted fell
+      either under the swords of the knights, the vengeful axes of the late
+      captives, or the pikes of the Sards; but the great bulk, leaping from the
+      bow or stern, swam ashore.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Back to your ships!&rdquo; Gervaise shouted, the moment resistance ceased.
+      &ldquo;Leave her floating here; she will help to block the way.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Six vessels alone managed to make their escape from the blazing mass of
+      ships, and all of these were captured almost as easily as the first had
+      been. As soon as it seemed that all the remainder were involved in the
+      flames, boats were lowered and sent on board the prizes to take
+      possession. Save for the wounded on the decks, they were entirely deserted
+      by their crews, as those who had run below, as soon as they found that
+      their captors had left the vessels, dropped into the water, and made their
+      way, either by swimming or with the assistance of oars, to the shore.
+      There remained only the slaves, chained to their benches. A few of these
+      had been killed by the broadsides; but the guns had been aimed at the
+      poops and forecastles, where the corsairs were clustered together, and
+      consequently the number of galley slaves who had fallen was comparatively
+      small.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      In none of the galleys was the proportion of Christians anything like so
+      large as that in the three prizes first taken, the greater portion being
+      men of inland tribes who had been captured in warfare, or malefactors who,
+      instead of being executed, had been sold to the corsairs. Nevertheless, in
+      the six galleys some seventy Christians were found, and at once freed. It
+      was terrible to think that in the galleys that had been destroyed a large
+      number of Christians must have perished in the flames, and Gervaise
+      expressed bitter regret that he had not considered that his attack by fire
+      ships must necessarily involve the loss of so many Christian lives.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It can't be helped,&rdquo; Ralph said, as Gervaise poured out his feelings to
+      him. &ldquo;To very many of them death must have been welcome, and if we had not
+      attacked them as we did, and they had sailed for Italy, hundreds, if not
+      thousands, of Christians would have been killed, and as many more carried
+      away into captivity; so, you see, the balance is all in favour of the
+      course we adopted.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise admitted this, but nevertheless his regret at the fate of so many
+      unfortunate captives quite overpowered for the time his satisfaction at
+      the complete success that had been achieved. The victory had been almost a
+      bloodless one on the part of the assailants. A few of the knights had
+      received wounds. Two among the Christian crews had been killed, and four
+      Sards; while two score had received wounds more or less serious, as,
+      unlike the knights, they had no defensive armour. While waiting for
+      daylight to appear, all their wounds were dressed and bandaged by the
+      knights.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      In the morning the captured galleys were towed out, and anchored a short
+      distance away, and then Gervaise rowed up to the head of the inlet,
+      followed by the other three ships. They found that eleven of the corsairs
+      had been burnt, and to their satisfaction, they discovered four uninjured
+      galleys lying there, deserted, save by the slaves.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Seeing the fate of their comrades who had first issued out, the commanders
+      had, instead of trying to escape, rowed quietly to the head of the inlet,
+      the movement being covered by the flame and smoke, and had there landed,
+      having laden themselves with stores for their support on shore. This was a
+      great satisfaction to the knights, for not only did it swell the list of
+      prizes, but it reduced by over thirty the number of Christian slaves who
+      had perished in the flames. Taking the galleys in tow, they rowed out of
+      the inlet, whose banks were strewn with half charred timbers, oars, and
+      relics of the fight.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      As soon as they had anchored by the side of their first prizes, a council
+      was held on board the Santa Barbara. It was clearly impossible to take
+      thirteen prizes to Rhodes, for there would be but three or four knights to
+      each, and were they to fall in with but one Moorish pirate, they might
+      suffer great disaster, while, should they meet with a storm, they would
+      fare badly indeed, as they could not depend upon the rescued Christians
+      for the management of the sails and oars in heavy weather. At the same
+      time, all were most anxious that the prizes should be carried to Rhodes.
+      Never, save as the result of some great battle, had such a fleet of
+      captured galleys been brought in, and the knights were prepared to endure
+      all dangers rather than part with one of them. Finally, after much
+      discussion, it was determined that they should make for Genoa. From thence
+      the rescued captives would be able to find their way to their homes. The
+      great majority were Italians and Spaniards; the former could proceed by
+      land or sea to their respective homes, while the Spaniards would have no
+      long time to wait before a vessel of their own nationality entered the
+      port, even if one were not lying there when they arrived. Moreover, in any
+      case it would be necessary to despatch a vessel to Genoa, in order that it
+      might be known that the danger was averted, and that there was no longer
+      any necessity for getting the galleys ready for sea.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The chief ostensible reason, however, for going to Genoa was that there
+      would be no difficulty in engaging as many sailors as might be necessary
+      to take the prizes to Rhodes. Underlying all the arguments was another
+      reason which Ralph laughingly stated.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It is all very well to bring forward one argument after another, but not
+      one of you has the courage to say what I am sure all of you have at the
+      bottom of your hearts. You know very well that you want to go to Genoa to
+      enjoy a triumph. The Rhodians are all very well, but there are very many
+      more fair faces at Genoa. Fie, Sir Knights! Such a spirit is little in
+      accordance with the vows of the Order. Are we not bound to humility? And
+      here you are all longing for the plaudits of the nobles and ladies of
+      Genoa!&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Some of the young knights laughed, others coloured hotly.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;They need not be ashamed of the feeling,&rdquo; Caretto said. &ldquo;Is it not the
+      ardent desire of all true knights to do gallant deeds, and do they not
+      value above all things the guerdon of applause from the fair eyes of
+      ladies. Your comrades have performed the gallant deeds, and well deserve
+      the reward. Now, Sir Gervaise, if not for this reason, at any rate for the
+      others that have been brought forward, I suppose we are all agreed that we
+      sail for Genoa. For our part we are heartily glad that such is your
+      decision. We, and the young knights of our langue, have many friends
+      there, and in their name I am sure I can promise you a reception as hearty
+      and sincere as that which we shall ourselves receive.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      It was settled that the rescued captives should be divided equally among
+      the thirteen prizes, and that three knights should go in each. The Moorish
+      captives were also divided equally among them, to aid with the sails, and
+      to row a few oars, in case of a dead calm setting in. The commands were
+      distributed according to seniority, the three rescued Italian knights
+      remaining on board the Santa Barbara with Gervaise.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The Sards were anxious to return to their villages, in order to carry the
+      news that several hundreds of Moorish pirates had landed.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;We shall have great trouble with them,&rdquo; one of the young fishermen, who
+      spoke a little Italian, said to Gervaise. &ldquo;There are always a great number
+      of swine, and herds of goats, up among the forests on the hills. We must
+      send up and drive in as many of these as possible, and of course we shall
+      send messengers to Tempe; but it will need a very large force to combat
+      these pirates, who will be able to come down and plunder and destroy, and
+      then retire to the hills, whence it will be hard to dislodge them.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I am sorry indeed that such trouble should have been caused to you,&rdquo;
+       Gervaise replied; &ldquo;but I am afraid that I can give you no assistance.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;We shall hunt them down in time,&rdquo; the Sard said confidently.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;There are many villages scattered about Tempe, and what with us
+      fishermen, and the woodmen and charcoal burners, we shall soon get a
+      strong body together. Besides, we know the mountains, and they do not.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I should say that you had best avoid a pitched battle with them, but keep
+      on harassing them by night and day, cutting off all who separate
+      themselves from the main body, until at last they are completely worn
+      out.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;We shall deal with them, Sir Knight. We are all hunters, for there are
+      wild boars and stags in the forest, and wolves too, and wild sheep on the
+      higher mountains. Every man among us can use his bow skillfully, and wield
+      pike and hatchet. The hunt will not be unprofitable, either, for we can
+      get a good price for all we take alive, to work in the mines.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      An hour later one of the galleys started with the Sards for their villages
+      in the bay of Tempe. After landing them, she was to rejoin the rest of the
+      fleet at their former anchorage at Madalena. By nightfall all were
+      gathered there, and the next morning they set out for Genoa. The wind was
+      light; but in their anxiety to return home as soon as possible the
+      released captives all volunteered to take their former places on the
+      benches, and the vessels were kept going at a fair rate of speed. Two
+      days' rowing took them to Bastia, where their approach created unbounded
+      excitement until the banner of the Order was seen floating from the stern
+      of the Santa Barbara, while smaller flags, that had been hastily
+      manufactured, flew from the mastheads of the thirteen prizes. Even then
+      the inhabitants feared to put out, believing that the flags were but a
+      ruse, and numbers of them fled at once, with their families and valuables,
+      to the mountains. It was not until a boat was lowered, and Ralph,
+      accompanied by three or four other knights, rowed ashore, that the panic
+      was allayed.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      As soon as it was understood that the galley of the knights had not only
+      captured the thirteen corsairs, but had destroyed eleven others, and had
+      thus annihilated a fleet that was intended to prey upon the commerce of
+      Italy, and ravage the western coast, the alarm was succeeded by the
+      wildest enthusiasm. By the time Ralph had obtained the fresh meat and
+      stores he came ashore to purchase, the greater part of the population were
+      gathered on the shore, and a flotilla of boats put out with him, filled
+      with picturesquely dressed men and women. Some carried flags, others green
+      boughs, while the ladies had bouquets and baskets of fruit. The galley was
+      the first attraction, and, mounting her sides, the ladies presented their
+      offerings of fruit, while the men cheered, and waved their hats; many
+      musicians came out in the boats, and these played on bagpipes and
+      three-reeded flutes a succession of airs peculiar to the island.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise received his visitors on the poop. These were at first altogether
+      incredulous when told that it was the lad before them who had commanded
+      the galley, had performed such a remarkable feat, and had freed them from
+      a terrible danger. The youth of the knights of the Order no less surprised
+      them, and had not Gervaise assured them that it was altogether contrary to
+      the rules of the Order for a knight to allow himself to be embraced, many
+      of the ladies would have taken this form of showing their enthusiasm and
+      gratitude. The next morning the fleet started for Genoa. The wind was much
+      stronger than it had been on the previous day, and it was therefore
+      unnecessary for the oars to be put out, except, indeed, on board the
+      galley. There, at nightfall, the Christians relieved the slaves for some
+      hours at their benches, and the next morning the circle of hills round
+      Genoa, with the city nestling at their feet on the water's edge, and
+      climbing for some distance up their slopes, was in view. Caretto at once
+      suggested that it would be well to signal to the fleet to lie to.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;If we do not do so,&rdquo; he said, &ldquo;they will assuredly think that it is the
+      corsair fleet advancing to attack and burn the vessels in port, and you
+      may be saluted as you approach by a shower of cannonballs. If you will
+      permit me, Sir Gervaise, I will go forward in one of the prizes and
+      explain matters, and will return here in a short time.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Thank you, Sir Fabricius. As such mischance as you mention might indeed
+      very well occur, we will lower sail and lie here until you return.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      While Caretto was away, the knights and crews breakfasted, and the former
+      put on their armour and gayest attire, in readiness for the landing.
+      Gervaise, although with much inward vexation, considered it necessary to
+      do the same.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I do wish,&rdquo; he said to Ralph, who was smiling at his rueful face, &ldquo;that
+      you could for today take my place, and let me pass as lieutenant.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I should not mind at all, Gervaise. But you must put up with the
+      disagreeables as well as the advantages of being commander, and must
+      submit to be honoured and feted here, as well as getting no end of credit
+      at Rhodes. You will have the satisfaction of well deserving it, for I am
+      sure the plan of attacking them with fire ships would never have occurred
+      to any one else, and if it had not been for that, we should have had the
+      mortification of seeing them sail off without being able to move a finger
+      to interfere with them.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;If one were fighting for fame and honour, all that would be true enough;
+      but members of an Order, whose sole object is to defend Christendom from
+      the Moslems, should strive only to do their duty, and care nothing for
+      such things as honour and glory.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Human nature is human nature, and I don't see any reason why one should
+      despise honour and glory when they come to one in the course of duty. I
+      fancy you will think so too, Gervaise, in course of time. I am quite sure
+      that among the fifty knights, there is not one who does not feel well
+      content that he has not only done his duty to the Order, but has gained a
+      share in the credit and honour that will certainly be given to all who
+      have taken a part in so crushing a defeat of the corsairs. As for myself,
+      I do not for a moment pretend that I am not sensible of the fact that, as
+      second in command of the galley, my chances of obtaining promotion in the
+      Order are very greatly improved.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      It was nearly two hours before Caretto returned.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It was well indeed that I went in,&rdquo; he said to Gervaise, &ldquo;for I found the
+      city in an uproar. The alarm bells of the churches were calling all
+      citizens to arms, and troops were being hurried down to the forts and
+      batteries. Rumour had of course exaggerated the strength of the fleet, and
+      half the population believed that the safety of the city itself was
+      menaced by the approach of a mighty squadron. As soon as my news was
+      bruited abroad, and they learned that the fleet consisted solely of prizes
+      captured from the Moors by a galley of the Order, alarm quickly changed
+      into delight, the sharp, angry clang of the bells was succeeded by peals
+      of gladness, and the joy of the citizens at being relieved from the cloud
+      of anxiety that had hung over the city since my last visit, was unbounded.
+      I went at once to the council chamber, where I found many of the leading
+      citizens already assembled, having been summoned in hot haste as soon as
+      our approach was made out. At first they were almost incredulous when I
+      told them that every ship of the pirate fleet had been either destroyed or
+      captured, and that the fleet in the offing consisted entirely of your
+      galley and the thirteen corsairs she had captured. As soon as they really
+      grasped the fact, they sent off messengers to the churches to order the
+      joy bells to be rung, and to the dockyard to arrest all work upon the
+      galleys. Then I had to give them a short account of the surprise and
+      destruction of the corsair fleet, and finally they begged me to ask you to
+      delay your entry to the port for a couple of hours, in order that they
+      might have time to prepare a suitable reception for you.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I suppose there is no help for it,&rdquo; Gervaise said. &ldquo;Is there anything
+      that we ought to do?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I should decorate the galley with all the flags on board: should set
+      every one to work to make great flags with the cross of the Order to hoist
+      to the masthead of the prizes, instead of the little things that are now
+      flying; and under them we will hoist the flags of the corsairs, among
+      which are those of Tripoli, Tunis, and Algiers. I do not know that there
+      is aught else we can do.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      <a name="link2HCH0016" id="link2HCH0016">
+      <!--  H2 anchor --> </a>
+    </p>
+    <div style="height: 4em;">
+      <br /><br /><br /><br />
+    </div>
+    <h2>
+      CHAPTER XVI FESTIVITIES
+    </h2>
+    <p>
+      At last the fleet, headed by the galley, to which all the knights had
+      returned, rowed towards the port. A gun flashed out from the fort at its
+      entrance, and at once those from all the other batteries responded; bells
+      pealed out again, and a confused roar of cheering broke from the crowds
+      occupying every spot from which a view of the harbour could be obtained.
+      The ships in the port were all decked with flags, and the front windows
+      and balconies of every house were hung with tapestries and bright
+      curtains. As soon as the galley entered the port, a state barge, flying
+      the flag of the Republic, advanced to meet her from the wharf. As she
+      approached, Ralph gave orders for the oars to be laid in, and the barge
+      was soon alongside. The knights were already ranged along the poop, and,
+      accompanied by Ralph and Caretto, Gervaise moved to the gangway to receive
+      the visitors. At their head was Battista Fragoso, the doge, in his robe of
+      state, and following him were a body of the highest nobles of Genoa, all
+      brilliant in gala costume.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;This, my lord duke,&rdquo; Caretto said, &ldquo;is Sir Gervaise Tresham, a knight
+      commander of our Order, and the commander of this, their galley. He has
+      before, as you may well believe from his appointment to so honourable a
+      post, highly distinguished himself, but what he has before accomplished is
+      far surpassed by the brilliant action that he has now achieved. He has won
+      a victory that not only reflects the highest honour upon the Order, but is
+      an inestimable service to Italy, and has freed her from a corsair fleet
+      that would have been a scourge to her, both at sea and to the towns and
+      villages along the coast. Not only has he, with the brave knights under
+      his orders, annihilated the corsair fleet, burning eleven of their
+      galleys, and capturing thirteen others, but he has restored to freedom no
+      less than two hundred Christian captives, among them the cavaliers Giacomo
+      da Vinci, Pietro Forzi, and myself.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;In the name of the Republic, Sir Gervaise Tresham, and I may say in that
+      of all Italy, I thank you most heartily for the splendid service that you
+      have rendered us. It would have seemed to me well nigh incredible that a
+      single galley, even if commanded and manned by the most famous knights of
+      your great Order, should have accomplished so extraordinary a feat. Still
+      more strange is it that it should have been performed by so young a
+      knight, with a crew composed, as Sir Fabricius Caretto has told us, of
+      knights chosen from among the youngest of the Order.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;You give far more credit to us, your Highness, than we deserve,&rdquo; Gervaise
+      replied. &ldquo;Three of the ships were indeed captured in fair fight, but we
+      caught the rest asleep and massed together as to be incapable of
+      successful resistance, and they fell easy victims to the fire ships we
+      launched against them. Any credit that is due to me is shared equally by
+      my subcommander here, Sir Ralph Harcourt, and indeed by every knight of my
+      company.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;This, doubtless, may be so, Sir Gervaise,&rdquo; the doge said, with a slight
+      smile, &ldquo;but it is to the head that plans, rather than to the hand that
+      strikes, that such success as you have achieved is due; and the credit of
+      this night attack is, as the cavalier Caretto tells me, wholly yours, for
+      until you issued your final orders it seemed to him, and to the two good
+      knights his companions, that there was naught to do but to remain in port
+      and watch this corsair fleet sail away to carry out its work of
+      destruction.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      By this time they had reached the poop of the galley. Gervaise now called
+      forward the knights one by one, and presented them to the doge, who
+      expressed to them all the gratitude felt by himself and the whole of the
+      citizens of Genoa for the service they had rendered to the Republic. This
+      ceremony being over, the knights broke up their ranks and conversed for a
+      few minutes with those who had come on board with the doge. The latter
+      then took his place in the barge with his companions, inviting Gervaise
+      and Ralph to accompany him. As the barge left the side of the galley,
+      which followed closely behind her, the guns again thundered out their
+      welcome, and a roar of greeting rose from the inhabitants. On landing, the
+      party waited until the knights had joined them, and then proceeded up the
+      street to the ducal palace, amidst enthusiastic cheering from the crowd
+      that lined the road, occupied the windows and balconies, and even
+      scrambled on the housetops, the ladies waving their handkerchiefs and
+      scarves.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      At the palace were assembled all the municipal authorities, and the
+      congratulations given on board were here repeated. After this there was a
+      great banquet, at which Gervaise was placed on the right hand of the doge,
+      who, at the conclusion of the feast, called upon the assembled guests to
+      drink to the health of the knights of St. John, who had saved the commerce
+      and seacoast of Italy from the greatest danger that had menaced them since
+      the days when the Northern rovers had desolated the shores of the
+      Mediterranean. The toast was drunk with enthusiasm, and Gervaise then
+      replied with a few words of thanks for the honour done to himself and his
+      comrades.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The party then left the banqueting hall for the great reception rooms,
+      where the wives and daughters of all the nobles and principal citizens of
+      Genoa were assembled. Most of the young knights, belonging as they did to
+      noble families, and accustomed from childhood to courtly ceremonies and
+      festivities, were quite at home here. Caretto, his two companions, and
+      their six Italian comrades, speedily introduced them, and each was soon
+      surrounded by a group of ladies, anxious to hear from his lips the details
+      of the exploits of the galley.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;But how is it that you are all so young, Sir Ralph?&rdquo; one of the ladies,
+      to whom Harcourt had been introduced as the second in command, asked him,
+      when he had finished his account of the capture of the galleys. &ldquo;We heard
+      from those who met you on landing, that all your comrades were young, but
+      we were filled with surprise when you entered the room, for many of them
+      are but lads.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;You may say that all of us are but lads, Countess. I am the oldest of the
+      party, and am but little over twenty-two, but few of the others are over
+      nineteen; they are all professed knights of the Order, who, as you
+      doubtless know, come out to Rhodes when only sixteen. Some, of course, do
+      not join until later, but I think that all here entered at the earliest
+      age permitted, and almost all had served in two or three voyages in the
+      galleys before they were appointed to the Santa Barbara. The reason why so
+      young a crew was chosen was that our commander was also young. He had done
+      such exceptional service to the Order that he was appointed to the command
+      of a galley, and he has, as all will allow, well justified the choice. It
+      was because it was deemed inexpedient to place knights many years his
+      senior under his command, and partly, perhaps, to encourage the younger
+      knights, by giving them an exceptional opportunity of distinguishing
+      themselves, that the crew was chosen entirely from their ranks. I was
+      selected as second in command because Gervaise and I had been special
+      friends when we came out from England in the same ship, and had before
+      fought side by side against the Moslems.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I see that you wear gilded spurs, Sir Ralph,&rdquo; another lady said; &ldquo;you
+      must therefore be a dubbed knight?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Yes; I had the good fortune to be knighted by D'Aubusson himself, at the
+      same time that Sir Gervaise was also so honoured. It was for an affair
+      with the Turkish pirates. It was Gervaise who really won the honour, for I
+      had no share in the affair, save that of doing my best in the fight.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;And who could do more?&rdquo; the countess queried.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Gervaise could do more, Countess, as was shown in that attack on the
+      corsairs by means of fire ships. He has a head to plan, and, in the case I
+      speak of, a happy thought of his not only saved the lives of ourselves and
+      Sir John Boswell, but, indirectly, was the means of preventing two of our
+      galleys being captured by the corsairs.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Which is Sir Gervaise?&rdquo; one of the ladies asked.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Ralph smiled.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Look round the hall, signoras, and see if any of you can pick him out
+      from the rest of us.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The ladies looked round the hall.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;There are only about twenty here; the rest are in the other rooms. Do not
+      set us to work guessing, if he is not in sight, Sir Ralph.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Oh yes, he is in sight. Now do each of you fix on the one you think most
+      accords with your ideas of what a knight, brave in action and wise and
+      prudent in council, would be like.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The six ladies each fixed on one of the young knights.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;You are all wrong,&rdquo; said Ralph.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;How can we choose?&rdquo; the countess said laughingly, &ldquo;when none of them
+      resemble our ideal hero? Most of them are pleasant and courtly looking
+      youths, but as yet there is scarce a vestige of hair on their faces, and
+      one could not fancy any of them as the destroyer of the fleet of
+      corsairs.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Do you see the one speaking to the elderly lady in the recess?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Yes; she is the wife of Fragoso. You do not mean to say that that lad is
+      the commander of the galley? Why, he looks the youngest of you all.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;He is between seventeen and eighteen, and there are several others who
+      are no older. Yes, that is Sir Gervaise, Knight Commander of the Order of
+      St. John.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;But how can he possibly have served his time as a professed knight?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;He was one of the grand master's pages, and his time in that service
+      counted just as it would have done had he entered as a professed knight;
+      and at fifteen, therefore, he stood in the same position as those three or
+      four years older than himself. He speaks Turkish as well as our own
+      tongue, and, as I told you, we received the accolade at the hands of the
+      grand master, a year and a half ago. He is now a knight commander, and
+      will assuredly one day occupy one of the highest posts in the Order.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;You do not speak as if you were jealous, Sir Ralph; and yet methinks it
+      cannot be pleasant for you all to have one younger than yourselves placed
+      at your head.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I do not think there is one of us who so feels,&rdquo; Ralph said earnestly.
+      &ldquo;In the first place, he has performed excellent service; in the next
+      place, even those who did not know him before, have felt, since we
+      started, that he is a born leader. Then, too, we regard with pride one who
+      has brought credit upon the younger members of the Order. Moreover, we all
+      owe our posts in the galley to the fact that he was chosen for its
+      command. It is a difficult position for him to fill, but he has managed so
+      that, while all obey his orders as cheerfully and willingly as if he were
+      a veteran, when off duty we regard him as one of ourselves.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;You are a staunch friend, Sir Ralph.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I am a staunch friend of Sir Gervaise, Countess, for the more I know of
+      him the more I care for him. He well deserves the promotion and honour
+      that have fallen to his share.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Will you bring him across here to us, Sir Ralph? I want to talk to this
+      hero of yours, and I am sure that my daughter is longing to be introduced
+      to him.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Ralph waited until Gervaise was disengaged, and then brought him across,
+      and, after introducing him, moved away at once, leaving Gervaise to be
+      interrogated by the ladies.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;You must be accustomed to festivities, Sir Gervaise, for we have just
+      heard that you were one of the grand master's pages?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I am accustomed to them, signora; but that is not at all the same thing
+      as liking them.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The reply was given so earnestly that all the ladies smiled.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Your taste is quite exceptional. Do you mean to say that you would rather
+      be on board your galley than here?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It would not be polite,&rdquo; Gervaise said, with a laugh, &ldquo;if I were to say
+      that I would infinitely rather be on board; but indeed I have not, like
+      most of my comrades, been brought up in court or castle. Until the day I
+      joined the Order, we led the lives of exiles. My father belonged to the
+      defeated party in England, and, save for a few months when the cause to
+      which he was attached was triumphant, we lived quietly on the estates he
+      had recovered, our life being one of care and anxiety. So, you see, I had
+      no training in gaiety and pleasure. At Rhodes there are state receptions
+      and religious pageants, but a meeting such as this, is, of course,
+      impossible in a convent; and since I was eleven years old I think I have
+      only once spoken to a woman. So you can well understand, signora, that I
+      feel awkward in speech, and I pray you to make allowance for my ignorance
+      of the language of courtesy, such as would naturally be expected in a
+      knight, even though belonging to a religious Order.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;There is naught to make allowance for,&rdquo; the countess said gently. &ldquo;Women
+      can appreciate simple truth, and are not, as men seem to think, always
+      yearning for compliments. Those who are most proficient in turning phrases
+      are not often among those foremost in battle, or wisest in council, and I
+      can tell you that we women value deeds far higher than words. Sir
+      Fabricius Caretto is a cousin of mine, and has this afternoon been
+      speaking so highly of you to me and my young daughter here, that I am glad
+      indeed to make your acquaintance. How long do you intend to stay in
+      Genoa?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;No longer than it will take me to engage men to carry the prizes to
+      Rhodes. I am afraid that sounds rude,&rdquo; he broke off, as he noticed a smile
+      on the faces of the ladies.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Not rude,&rdquo; said the countess; &ldquo;though most knights would have put it
+      differently, and said that their duty compelled them to leave as soon as
+      the prizes could be manned. But it comes to the same thing. Of course, you
+      will remain the guest of the doge as long as you are here; otherwise, it
+      would have given us the greatest pleasure to have entertained you. My
+      cousin is, of course, staying with us, and you see we all feel a very deep
+      obligation to you. He has been so long a slave among the Moors, that we
+      had almost come to hope death had freed him from his fetters; so you may
+      imagine our pleasure when he arrived here so suddenly ten days ago. We
+      were expecting that he would remain with us for some time, but he says
+      that he must first go back to Rhodes, after which he will ask for leave,
+      and return here. We have a banquet tomorrow evening to celebrate his
+      return, and earnestly hoped that you would be present, but, since you say
+      that you do not care for such gaieties, we shall, if you prefer it, be
+      glad if you will come to join us at our family meal at twelve.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Thank you, countess, I should very greatly prefer it, and it will give me
+      real pleasure to come.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Your friend, Sir Ralph Harcourt, has been telling us how you have
+      destroyed the corsair fleet that has been so alarming us. He, too, is an
+      Englishman, though he speaks Italian well.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Yes, he speaks it a great deal better than I do,&rdquo; Gervaise said. &ldquo;He is a
+      dear friend of mine, and it is, indeed, chiefly owing to his support and
+      influence that I have been able to manage so pleasantly and well in the
+      command of a body of young knights, most of whom are my seniors.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;He tells us that you speak Turkish?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Yes; I thought that it would be very useful, and spent nearly a year in
+      acquiring it, the bailiff of my langue being kind enough to relieve me of
+      all other duties. I was fortunate enough to find in one of the servants of
+      the auberge a well educated and widely informed Turk, who was a very
+      pleasant companion, as well as an excellent instructor, and I learnt much
+      from him besides his language. The knowledge of Turkish has already proved
+      to me most useful, and was indeed the means by which I obtained both my
+      commandery and my appointment as captain of the galley.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Perhaps you will tell us the story tomorrow; that is, if it is too long
+      to tell us now?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It is indeed much too long; but if it will interest you I shall be glad
+      to recount it tomorrow.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The next day Gervaise went to the palace of the Countess Da Forli. She was
+      a widow with no children, except Claudia, the young daughter who had
+      accompanied her to the fete the evening before. Caretto, and four or five
+      relations of the family, were the only guests beside himself. It was a
+      quiet and sociable meal, and served with less ceremony than usual, as the
+      countess wished to place Gervaise as much as possible at his ease. During
+      the meal but little was said about the affair with the pirates, Caretto
+      telling them some of his experiences as a captive.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It is well, Claudia,&rdquo; he said, laughing, &ldquo;that you did not see me at the
+      time I was rescued, for I was such a scarecrow that you would never have
+      been able to regard me with due and proper respect afterwards. I was so
+      thin that my bones almost came through my skin.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;You are thin enough now, cousin,&rdquo; the girl said.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I have gained so much weight during the last ten days that I begin to
+      fear that I shall, ere long, get too fat to buckle on my armour. But, bad
+      as the thinness was, it was nothing to the dirt. Moreover, I was coming
+      near to losing my voice. There was nothing for us to talk about in our
+      misery, and often days passed without a word being exchanged between Da
+      Vinci, Forzi, and myself. Do you know I felt almost more thankful for the
+      bath and perfumes than I did for my liberty. I was able at once to enjoy
+      the comfort of the one, while it was some time before I could really
+      assure myself that my slavery was over, and that I was a free man again.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;And now, Sir Gervaise,&rdquo; the countess said, when the meal was over, &ldquo;it is
+      your turn. Claudia is longing to hear your story, and to know how you came
+      to be in command of a galley.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;And I am almost as anxious,&rdquo; Caretto said. &ldquo;I did not like to ask the
+      question on board the galley, and have been looking forward to learning it
+      when I got to Rhodes. I did, indeed, ask the two knights who accompanied
+      me on my mission here, but they would only tell me that every one knew you
+      had performed some very great service to the Order, and that it concerned
+      some intended rising among the slaves, the details being known to only a
+      few, who had been, they understood, told that it was not to be repeated.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It was a very simple matter,&rdquo; Gervaise said, &ldquo;and although the grand
+      master and council were pleased to take a very favourable view of it, it
+      was, in fact, a question of luck, just as was the surprise of the
+      corsairs. There is really no secret about it&mdash;at least, except in
+      Rhodes: there it was thought best not to speak of it, because the fact
+      that the attempt among the slaves was almost successful, might, if
+      generally known, encourage others to try to escape, and perhaps with
+      greater success. I told you last night, Countess, that I had only once
+      before in the last six or seven years spoken to a woman, and it was on
+      that occasion that the adventure, so far as I was concerned, had its
+      commencement.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      He then, beginning at his visit with Ralph Harcourt to the Greek merchant
+      and his family on the roof of the house, recounted the suspicions he had
+      entertained, the manner in which they were confirmed, and the method by
+      which he had discovered the plot for the rising. He was interrupted
+      several times when he attempted to abbreviate the story, or to omit some
+      of the details, and there were exclamations of surprise at his proposal to
+      personate a Turkish prisoner, and to share the lot of the slaves in their
+      prison, and on the benches of the galley.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I had no idea, Sir Gervaise,&rdquo; Caretto said, when he had concluded, &ldquo;that
+      you too had been a galley slave, and I understand now the care you showed
+      to render the lot of the rowers as easy as possible. It was a splendid
+      scheme, and well carried out. Indeed, I no longer wonder that you were
+      appointed to the command of a galley, and received a rich commandery in
+      England at the hands of the grand master himself. What think you,
+      Countess; did I speak too highly in his favour?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Not one jot, cousin. Why, Sir Gervaise, it seems to me that you have been
+      born two centuries too late, and that you should have been a knight
+      errant, instead of being sworn to obey orders, and bound to celibacy. Do
+      you wear no lady's favour in your helm? I know that not a few of your
+      Order do so.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;As I have said, Countess, I know no ladies who would bestow favours upon
+      me; in the second place, I am but eighteen, and it would be ridiculous for
+      me to think of such matters; lastly, it seems to me that, being vowed to
+      the Order, I can desire no other mistress.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Claudia, who had listened with rapt attention to the story, whispered in
+      her mother's ear. The latter smiled.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It seems to me, Sir Gervaise,&rdquo; she went on, &ldquo;that after what you have
+      done for Italy there are many fair maidens who would feel it an honour
+      that their colours should be borne by one who has shown himself so valiant
+      a knight. You see, a gage of this kind does not necessarily mean that
+      there is any deep feeling between the knight who bears it and the lady who
+      bestows it; it shows only that she, on her part, feels it an honour that
+      her gage should be worn by a distinguished knight, and, on his part, that
+      he considers it as somewhat more than a compliment, and wears it as a
+      proof of regard on the part of one whose good opinion at least he values.
+      It is true that among secular knights it may mean even more than this, but
+      it ought not to mean more among knights of an Order like yours, pledged to
+      devote their lives to a lofty and holy aim. My daughter Claudia whispers
+      to me that she would deem it an honour indeed if you would wear her token,
+      accepting it in the spirit in which I have spoken. She is fourteen now,
+      and, as you know, a maid of fourteen here is as old as one of sixteen or
+      seventeen in your country.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise turned to the girl, who was standing by her mother's chair,
+      looking earnestly at him. He had noticed her the evening before; she had
+      asked no questions, but had listened so intently that he had felt almost
+      embarrassed. Claudia's was a very bright face, and yet marked by firmness
+      and strength. He turned his eyes again to the countess.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I never thought of wearing a woman's favour,&rdquo; he said; &ldquo;but if your
+      daughter will bestow one upon me, I shall be proud to wear it, and trust
+      that I may carry it unstained. I shall feel honoured indeed that one so
+      fair, and, as I am sure by her face, so deserving of all the devotion that
+      a knight of our Order can give, has thought me worthy of being one of
+      those on whom she could bestow so high a favour, with the confidence that
+      it would be ever borne with credit and honour.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;What shall I give him, mother?&rdquo; Claudia asked the countess, without a
+      shadow of the embarrassment with which Gervaise had spoken.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Not a kerchief, Claudia. In the rough work of the knights, it could not
+      be kept without spot or stain. Moreover, if I judge Sir Gervaise rightly,
+      methinks he would prefer some token that he could wear without exciting
+      attention and remark from his comrades. Go, fetch him any of your jewels
+      you may think fit.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Then I will give him this,&rdquo; the girl said; and unfastening a thin gold
+      chain she wore round her neck, she pulled up a heart shaped ornament, in
+      pink coral set in gold and pearls.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Her mother uttered a low exclamation of dissent.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I know, mother; it was your last gift, and I prize it far beyond anything
+      I have; therefore, it is all the more fit to be my token.&rdquo; Then she turned
+      to Gervaise, and went on, without the slightest tremor in her voice, or
+      accession of colour in her cheeks. &ldquo;Sir Gervaise Tresham, I bestow upon
+      you this my favour, and shall deem it an honour indeed to know that it is
+      borne by one so brave and worthy. You said that you would be glad to be
+      one of those who bore my favours. You will be more than that, for I vow to
+      you that while you live no other knight shall wear a favour of mine.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Claudia!&rdquo; her mother said disapprovingly.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I know what I am saying, mother. I have often wondered why maidens should
+      so carelessly bestow their favours upon every knight who begged for them,
+      and have said to myself that when my time came I would grant it but once,
+      and only then to one whom I deemed worthy of it in all ways&mdash;one in
+      whose loyalty and honour I could trust implicitly, and who would regard it
+      as something sacred, deeming it an honour to wear it, as being the pledge
+      of my trust and esteem. Kneel, Sir Gervaise, while I fasten this round
+      your neck.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise took out the small brooch, that fastened the collar of his silken
+      doublet, and then knelt on one knee. The girl fastened the clasp round his
+      neck, and as he rose he hid the heart beneath the doublet, and fastened
+      the collar.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Lady Claudia,&rdquo; he said earnestly, &ldquo;I accept your favour in the spirit in
+      which you bestow it. So long as I live I shall prize and value it beyond
+      any honour I may gain, and as I feel it next to my heart, it will ever
+      recall to me that you gave it me as a pledge of your esteem and trust, and
+      I will strive to the utmost so to bear myself that I may be worthy of the
+      gift.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      None of the others spoke while the little ceremony was being performed.
+      Caretto glanced at the countess with an amused smile, but the latter
+      looked grave, and somewhat vexed. However, she made an effort to dispel
+      the cloud on her face, and, when Gervaise ceased speaking, said, &ldquo;This has
+      been a somewhat more serious business than I intended, Sir Gervaise. But
+      do not think that I regret in any way the course it has taken; 'tis well
+      for a maiden on the threshold of womanhood that she should place before
+      herself a lofty ideal, and that she should entertain a warm feeling of
+      friendship for one worthy of it. So also it is good for a young knight to
+      know that he has the trust and confidence of a pure and innocent maiden;
+      such a knowledge will aid him to be in all ways true to the vows he has
+      taken, and to remember always that he is bound to be not only a valiant
+      knight of his Order, but a sincere soldier of the Cross.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Then she went on more lightly. &ldquo;Have you heard, Sir Gervaise, that there
+      is a question of making you a noble of Genoa?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;No, indeed,&rdquo; Gervaise replied, in great surprise; &ldquo;such an idea never
+      entered into my thoughts.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Nevertheless, I know that it was spoken of last night, and although it
+      has not yet been finally settled, and will not be until the council meet
+      this afternoon, I should not tell you if I did not think that it was as
+      good as agreed upon; and I am pleased to be the first to whisper to you
+      that it is intended to bestow upon you an honour that is jealously guarded
+      and seldom granted, even to crowned heads, unless as a token of gratitude
+      for some signal service done to the Republic.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I should feel most honoured and most grateful, Countess, for so
+      extraordinary a favour, did I feel that I had done any extraordinary
+      action to merit it. There can be no doubt that the destruction of the
+      corsairs has saved Genoa and all the maritime towns from immense loss by
+      damage to their trade, and by the raids that would have been made at
+      various points on the coast. But I cannot see that the mere fact that we
+      have destroyed their fleet merits any marked honour. They were caught in a
+      trap, and half of them burned, and this might have been done equally as
+      well by the Sardinian fishermen, unarmed, and without our aid. As to the
+      fighting, it was of small account. The first three craft we captured
+      offered a much stouter resistance, and we lost two of our number; but in
+      the other affair no knight was killed, or even seriously wounded, and
+      believe me, Countess, I feel absolutely ashamed at the fuss that is made
+      over it. It seems to me that I am a sort of impostor, obtaining credit
+      under false pretences.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;No man is a fair judge of his own actions, Sir Gervaise,&rdquo; Caretto said.
+      &ldquo;A man may believe himself a Solon, or a Roland; others may consider him
+      as a fool, or an empty braggart; and it must be taken that the general
+      opinion of the public is the judgment from which there is no appeal. It is
+      not the mob of Genoa only who regard the services that you have rendered
+      as extraordinary, but it is the opinion of the councillors and authorities
+      of the Republic, and of those who, like myself, have borne our share in
+      warfare, that not only is the service great, but that it is due to the
+      singular ability with which you, in command of only a single galley, have
+      wholly destroyed or captured the fleet that threatened our commerce. As
+      our councillors, therefore, all competent judges, are unanimous in their
+      opinion that you have deserved the highest honours that Genoa can bestow
+      upon you, it is useless for you to set up your own opinion to the
+      contrary. Take the good things that fall to you, Sir Gervaise, and be
+      thankful. It is seldom that men obtain more honours than they deserve,
+      while it very often happens that they deserve far more than they obtain.
+      Fortune has doubtless some share in every man's career; but when it is not
+      once, but several times, that a knight gains special credit for deeds he
+      has performed, we may be sure that fortune has less to do with the matter
+      than his personal merits. Three times have you earned special credit; upon
+      the first occasion, the grand master&mdash;no mean judge of conduct and
+      character&mdash;deemed you worthy of secular knighthood, an honour which
+      has not, in my memory, been bestowed at Rhodes upon any young knight; on
+      the second, you were promoted to the command of a galley, though never
+      before has such a command been given to any, save knights of long
+      experience; and now, for the third time, the councillors of one of the
+      greatest of Italian cities are about to do you honour. It is good to be
+      modest, Sir Gervaise, and it is better to underestimate than to overrate
+      one's own merits, but it is not well to carry the feeling to an extreme. I
+      am quite sure that in your case your disclaimer is wholly sincere and
+      unaffected; but take my advice, accept the honours the world may pay you
+      as not undeserved, determining only in your mind that if you deem them
+      excessive, you will at least do all in your power to show that they are
+      not ill bestowed. You will not, I trust, take my counsel amiss.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;On the contrary, Sir Fabricius,&rdquo; Gervaise said warmly. &ldquo;I am really but a
+      boy yet, though by good fortune pushed strangely forward, and I am glad
+      indeed to receive council from a knight of vastly greater experience than
+      myself and, in future, however much I may be conscious in my own mind that
+      anything I have done is greatly overrated, I will at least abstain from
+      protest. And now, Countess, I must pray you to excuse me. I know that Sir
+      Ralph Harcourt is, before this, down at the dockyard waiting my coming to
+      engage sailors.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;You will come tomorrow at the same time, I hope, Sir Gervaise. As
+      Claudia's sworn knight we have now a claim upon you, and for the short
+      time that you remain here you must regard this as your home, although you
+      must necessarily remain the guest of the doge.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;He is a fine young fellow, indeed,&rdquo; Caretto said, after Gervaise had
+      left. &ldquo;There is no affectation about his modesty, and he really considers
+      that this success he has gained is solely a stroke of good fortune. Of
+      course, I have been asking many questions about him of the young knights
+      of his own langue, Harcourt among them. They tell me that he is always in
+      earnest in everything he undertakes. He is without a rival among the
+      younger knights of the convent in his skill in arms, and for strength and
+      activity in all exercises; he seems to care nothing for the ordinary
+      amusements in which they join at Rhodes, and for nine months was scarcely
+      ever seen by those in the auberge, save when they gathered for meals, so
+      continuously did he work to acquire a perfect command of Turkish. How
+      thoroughly he succeeded is evident from the fact that he was able to live
+      among the galley slaves without exciting any suspicions in their minds
+      that he was other than he pretended to be, a Syrian captive. That he is
+      brave goes without saying, though perhaps no braver than the majority of
+      his companions. The extraordinary thing about him is that although, as he
+      himself says, little more than a boy, he has the coolness to plan, and the
+      head to carry out, schemes that would do credit to the most experienced
+      captain. He is already a credit to the Order, and, should he live, will
+      assuredly rise to the highest offices in it, and may even die its grand
+      master. In the stormy times that are coming on, there will be ample
+      opportunities for him still further to distinguish himself, and to fulfil
+      the singular promise of his youth. That he possesses great tact, as well
+      as other qualities, is shown by the enthusiasm with which his companions
+      regard him. In no case, among those to whom I have spoken, have I
+      discerned the smallest jealousy of him. The tact that is needed to stand
+      thus among fifty young knights, almost all his seniors in age, will
+      assuredly enable him later on to command the confidence and affection of
+      older men.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      When the other guests had left, and Caretto only remained, the countess
+      turned to Claudia. &ldquo;You went too far, Claudia. I was willing enough, when
+      you asked me, that you should bestow a favour upon him. Most young knights
+      wear such a favour, which may be a sign of devotion, but which far more
+      frequently is a piece of gallantry. In the case of a knight hospitaller it
+      can only be the latter; it is in his case merely a sign that he has so
+      distinguished himself that some maiden feels a pride that her gift should
+      be carried into battle by him, and, on his part, that he too is proud of
+      the gift so bestowed by one whose goodwill he prizes. In that way I was
+      willing that you should grant him your favour. But the manner in which you
+      gave it was far more serious than the occasion warranted, and your promise
+      to grant no similar favour to another as long as he lived, surprised, and,
+      I may almost say, shocked me. You are, according to our custom here,
+      considered almost a woman, and had not Sir Gervaise belonged to a
+      religious Order, and were he of a presuming disposition, he might well
+      have gathered a meaning from your words far beyond what you intended, and
+      have even entertained a presumptuous hope that you were not indifferent to
+      his merits. In the present case, of course, no harm is done; still,
+      methinks that it would be far better had the words been unspoken. Your
+      cousin here will, I am sure, agree with me.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Caretto did not speak, but stood playing with his moustache, waiting for
+      Claudia's reply. The girl had stood with downcast eyes while her mother
+      was speaking.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I only expressed what I felt, mother,&rdquo; she said, after a pause, &ldquo;and I do
+      not think that Sir Gervaise Tresham is likely to misunderstand me. It
+      seems to me that never among those whom I have met have I seen one so
+      worthy. No praises can be higher than those with which my cousin has
+      spoken of him. He has rescued him, whom we dearly love, from slavery; he
+      has saved Genoa from great disaster, and many towns and villages from
+      plunder and ruin. I do indeed feel proud that such a knight should wear my
+      gage, and, were there no other reason, I should be unwilling that, so long
+      as he carried it, another should possess a similar one from me. I am sure
+      that Sir Gervaise will have felt that this was the meaning of my words; I
+      wished him to see that it was not a favour lightly given by a girl who
+      might, a few weeks hence, bestow a similar one upon another, but was a
+      gage seriously given of the honour in which I held him.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Very well said, Claudia,&rdquo; Caretto broke in, before the countess could
+      reply. &ldquo;I warrant me the young knight will not misunderstand your gift,
+      and that he will prize it highly and carry it nobly. He is not one of
+      those who will boast of a favour and display it all times, and, except
+      perhaps to his friend Sir Ralph Harcourt, I will wager he never tells a
+      soul who was its donor.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      When Claudia shortly afterwards left the room, he said to the countess,
+      &ldquo;Excuse me for breaking in, Agatha, but I felt that it was much better to
+      agree with her, and not to make overmuch of the matter; she is just of an
+      age to make some one a hero, and she could hardly have chosen a better
+      subject for her worship. In the first place, he is a knight of St. John;
+      in the second, he is going away in a few days, perhaps tomorrow, and may
+      never cross her path again. The thought of him will prevent her fancy from
+      straying for a time, and keep her heart whole until you decide on a suitor
+      for her hand.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Nevertheless, I would rather that it had not been so. Claudia is not
+      given to change, and this may last long enough to cause trouble when I
+      bring forward the suitor you speak of.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Well, in any case it might be worse,&rdquo; Caretto said philosophically. And
+      then, with a smile in answer to her look of inquiry, &ldquo;Knights of the Order
+      have, ere now, obtained release from their vows.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Fabricius!&rdquo; the countess exclaimed, in a shocked voice.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Yes, I know, Agatha, that the child is one of the richest heiresses in
+      Italy, but for that very reason it needs not that her husband should have
+      wide possessions. In all other respects you could wish for no better. He
+      will assuredly be a famous knight; he is the sort of man to make her
+      perfectly happy; and, lastly, you know I cannot forget that I owe my
+      liberation from slavery to him. At any rate, Agatha, as I said before, he
+      may never cross her path again, and you may, a year or two hence, find her
+      perfectly amenable to your wishes.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      <a name="link2HCH0017" id="link2HCH0017">
+      <!--  H2 anchor --> </a>
+    </p>
+    <div style="height: 4em;">
+      <br /><br /><br /><br />
+    </div>
+    <h2>
+      CHAPTER XVII CAPTURED
+    </h2>
+    <p>
+      Upon the following day the doge requested Gervaise to accompany him to a
+      meeting of the council. Upon entering the grand hall he found not only the
+      members of the council assembled in their robes of office, but a large
+      gathering of the nobles and principal citizens of Genoa, together with the
+      knights of the galley whom, under Ralph Harcourt's orders, Gervaise found,
+      to his surprise, drawn up in order across the Hall. Here, in the name of
+      the Republic, Battista Fragoso announced to him that, by the unanimous
+      decision of the council, he had been elected a noble of Genoa; an honour,
+      he added, on only one or two previous occasions in the history of the
+      Republic bestowed upon any but of princely rank, but which he had nobly
+      earned by the great service he had rendered to the State. His name was
+      then inscribed in the book containing the names and titles of the nobles
+      of Genoa. Next, Battista Fragoso presented him with a superb suit of
+      Milanese armour, as his own personal gift, and then with a casket of very
+      valuable jewels, as the gift of the city of Genoa. Each presentation was
+      accompanied by the plaudits of the assembly, and by the no less warm
+      acclamations of the knights. Ralph was then called forward, and presented
+      with a suit of armour but little inferior to that given to Gervaise, and
+      each knight received a heavy gold chain of the finest workmanship of
+      Genoa.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Two days later the preparations for departure were complete, and a
+      sufficient number of men were engaged to man the prizes. This charge,
+      also, Genoa took upon itself, and put on board much stronger crews than
+      Gervaise deemed necessary for the navigation of the ships. The weather was
+      fine and the wind favourable, and a quick passage was made to Rhodes. When
+      the harbour was in sight, the ships were ordered to proceed in single
+      file, the galley leading the way with a huge banner of the Order floating
+      from her stern, and smaller flags on staffs at each side. It was not until
+      they passed by the two forts guarding the entrance that the flags
+      fluttering at the mastheads of the prizes afforded to those on shore an
+      intimation of the event that had taken place, and even then none supposed
+      that this fleet of prizes had been taken by the one galley that headed
+      them.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      As the Santa Barbara slowly rowed up the harbour, the State barge of the
+      grand master put off to meet it, and D'Aubusson, with a party of knights,
+      soon stepped on board.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Welcome back, Sir Gervaise! although I little expected to see you return
+      so soon. What is the meaning of this procession that follows you? By their
+      rig and appearance they are Moors, but how they come to be thus sailing in
+      your wake is a mystery to us all.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;They are Moors, your Excellency; they form part of an expedition fitted
+      out by the corsairs of Algiers, Tripoli, Tunis, and other piratical
+      strongholds, for the purpose of destroying the commerce and ravaging the
+      coasts of Western Italy. Fortunately, we fell in with a ship that had been
+      plundered by three of them on their way north, and learned from the dying
+      captain, who was the only one of her crew left with life on board, the
+      direction they were taking, and something of the nature of the expedition.
+      We pursued the three galleys, came up with them, had the good fortune to
+      capture them, and then had the delight of finding among their rowers the
+      noble knights, Fabricius Caretto, Giacomo Da Vinci, and Pietro Forzi.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The grand master, and the knights with him, uttered an exclamation of joy,
+      and, as the three knights named stepped forward, embraced them with the
+      liveliest pleasure.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;My dear Caretto,&rdquo; the grand master exclaimed, &ldquo;it is almost a
+      resurrection, for we have all long mourned you as dead; and your return to
+      us at the present time is indeed fortunate; for upon whose judgment and
+      aid could I better rely than those of my old comrade in arms?&rdquo; Then,
+      turning to Gervaise, he went on: &ldquo;It was a daring and brilliant exploit
+      indeed, Sir Gervaise, and in due time honour shall be paid to you and your
+      brave companions, to whom and to you I now tender the thanks of the Order.
+      But tell me the rest briefly, for I would fain hear from these noble
+      knights and old friends the story of what has befallen them.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;My tale is a very brief one, your Highness. The Cavalier Caretto sailed
+      at once in a swift craft from the south of Sardinia, to carry warnings to
+      the cities on the coast of Italy of the danger that threatened them, and
+      in order that some war galleys might be despatched by Genoa to meet the
+      corsair fleet. During his absence we discovered the little inlet in which
+      the pirates lay hidden, waiting doubtless the arrival of the three ships
+      we had captured, to commence operations. On the return of the knight with
+      the news that it would be at least a fortnight before Genoa could fit out
+      any galleys, and fearing that the pirates might at any moment put to sea,
+      we procured some small Sardinian craft, and fitted them as fire ships;
+      with the captives we had rescued, and some Sard fishermen, we manned the
+      three prizes, distributing the knights between them, and at night launched
+      the fire ships against the corsairs, whose ships were crowded together.
+      Eleven of them were burnt; six we captured as they endeavoured to make
+      their way out, and took possession of four others whose crews had run them
+      ashore and deserted them. None escaped.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Exclamations of astonishment and almost of incredulity broke from the
+      knights.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;And is it possible, Sir Gervaise, that these thirteen vessels that follow
+      you are all prizes captured by your galley alone?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It is, as I have the honour to tell your Highness. But their capture,
+      except in the case of the first three, was due almost solely to good
+      fortune and to the position in which we found them, almost incapable of
+      defence.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;What think you, knights and comrades?&rdquo; the grand master said to his
+      companions. &ldquo;There were some of you who deemed it rash to entrust a galley
+      to so young a commander and so youthful a crew. What say you now? Never in
+      the annals of the Order has such a sight been witnessed as that of
+      thirteen prizes being brought in by a single galley, to say naught of
+      eleven others destroyed. Caretto, you and your comrades must have had some
+      share in this marvellous victory.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;By no means,&rdquo; the Italian replied; &ldquo;beyond having the honour of aiding to
+      carry out the orders of Sir Gervaise Tresham, the commander of the galley.
+      The plan was wholly of his own devising, its execution solely due to his
+      arrangement of the details, and that without the slightest suggestion on
+      the part of myself or my comrades. I will presently narrate to you the
+      whole story; it will come better from my lips than from those of Sir
+      Gervaise, whose disposition is to wholly underestimate the merit of the
+      action he has performed. But I must also bear testimony, not only to the
+      bravery displayed by Sir Gervaise, Sir Ralph Harcourt, his lieutenant, and
+      every one of the knights his crew, but to the admirable discipline, order,
+      and good fellowship on board the galley, which would have done credit to
+      the most experienced commander and to the most veteran knights of the
+      Order.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The grand master paused a moment, and then said in a loud voice, &ldquo;Sir
+      Gervaise Tresham, Sir Ralph Harcourt, and knights of the seven langues of
+      the Order&mdash;As yet I can hardly appreciate the full extent of the
+      service that you have rendered. I thanked you but now for the capture of
+      three corsairs; but what can I say when I learn that you have destroyed or
+      taken a whole fleet? I invite you all to a banquet that I shall hold
+      tonight, where the Cavalier Caretto will relate to us all the details of
+      this marvellous exploit.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Within a few minutes after the return of the grand master and his party
+      ashore, the flags of the Order were run up to the flagstaffs of every fort
+      and bastion: the bells of the churches chimed out a triumphant peal, and a
+      salute was fired from the guns of the three water forts, while along the
+      wall facing the port, the townspeople waved numberless gay flags as a
+      welcome to the galley. Most of the knights went ashore at once, but
+      Gervaise, under the excuse that he wished to see that everything was in
+      order before landing, remained on board until it was time to go to the
+      banquet, being sure that by that time the knights would have fully told
+      the story at their respective auberges, and that there would be no more
+      questions to answer. The banquet differed but little from that at Genoa,
+      and Gervaise was heartily glad when it was over.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The next day the grand master sent for him.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;If I judge rightly, Sir Gervaise, the thing that will best please you at
+      present, is an order to put to sea again at once, to conclude the usual
+      period of service of the galley.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It is indeed,&rdquo; Gervaise replied earnestly. &ldquo;But I should be glad, sir, if
+      you will allow that the time should begin to count afresh from our present
+      start. We have really had but a short period of service, for we wasted a
+      week at Genoa, and ten days on our journey back here, so that we have had
+      really no more than a month's active service.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Yes, if you count only by time,&rdquo; D'Aubusson said, with a smile.
+      &ldquo;Reckoning by results, you have done a good five years' cruise. However,
+      so small a request can certainly be granted. The places of the two knights
+      who were killed, and of four others whose wounds are reported to me as
+      being too severe for them to be fit for service for some time, shall be
+      filled up at once from the langues to which each belonged. You will cruise
+      among the Western islands, whence complaints have reached us of a corsair
+      who has been plundering and burning. Sometimes he is heard of as far north
+      as Negropont, at others he is off the south of the Morea; then, again, we
+      hear of him among the Cyclades. We have been unwilling to despatch another
+      galley, for there is ample employment for every one here. After the blow
+      you have struck on the Moorish corsairs, they are likely to be quiet for a
+      little. You had best, therefore, try for a time if you cannot come across
+      this pirate. You must let me know how much you paid for the vessels you
+      used as fire ships, and to the Sards; this is an expense chargeable to the
+      general service. I may tell you that to me it is due that no recognition
+      of your exploits, such as that which Genoa bestowed upon you, will be
+      made. At the council this morning it was urged that some signal mark of
+      honour should be granted; but I interposed, saying that you had already
+      received exceptional promotion, and that it would not be for your good, or
+      that of the Order, for so young a knight to be raised to an official
+      position of a character usually held by seniors, and that I was perfectly
+      sure you would prefer remaining in command of your galley to any promotion
+      whatever that would retain you on the Island.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Indeed I should, your Highness. I wish to gain experience and to do
+      service to the Order, and so far from pleasing me, promotion would trouble
+      and distress me, and, could it have been done, I would most gladly have
+      sent home the prizes, instead of going to Genoa, and would myself have
+      continued the cruise.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;So the Cavalier Caretto told me,&rdquo; the grand master replied. &ldquo;Very well,
+      then. In three days you shall set out again. The admiral tells me that
+      never before has a galley returned with the slaves in such good health and
+      condition, and that unquestionably your plan of erecting an awning to
+      shelter them from the midday heat and the night dews has had a most
+      beneficial effect on their health; he has recommended its general
+      adoption.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Three days later the Santa Barbara again left port, and was soon upon her
+      station. For some weeks she cruised backwards and forwards along the coast
+      and among the islands. They often heard of the pirate ship, but all their
+      efforts to find her were unavailing.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      One evening there were signs of a change of weather, and by morning it was
+      blowing a furious gale from the north; in spite of the efforts of the
+      rowers, the galley narrowly escaped being driven ashore; but she at last
+      gained the shelter of an island, and anchored under its lee, the slaves
+      being utterly worn out by continuous exertion. As soon as the gale abated
+      they again put to sea, and, after proceeding for some miles, saw a ship
+      cast up on shore. Some people could be made out on board of her, and a
+      white flag was raised.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;She must have been driven ashore during the gale,&rdquo; Gervaise said. &ldquo;We
+      will row in to within a quarter of a mile of her and see what we can do
+      for them.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      As soon as the anchor was dropped a boat was lowered.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I will go myself, Ralph, for I shall be glad to set my foot on shore
+      again. There must be people on the island; I wonder none of them have come
+      to the aid of those poor fellows. I suppose the villages are on the other
+      side of the island, and they have not yet heard of the wreck.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise asked three of the knights to accompany him, and the boat, rowed
+      by galley slaves, was soon on its way. All were glad at the change
+      afforded to the monotony of their life on board, and at the prospect of a
+      scamper on shore.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      There were but five or six men to be seen on the deck of the wreck, and
+      these had, as the boat approached, come down to the rocks as if to meet
+      those who came to their aid; but as the knights leapt out, they threw
+      themselves suddenly upon them with knives and scimitars that had hitherto
+      been concealed beneath their garments, while at the same moment a crowd of
+      men appeared on the deck of the ship, and, leaping down, ran forward with
+      drawn swords. Two of the knights fell dead before they had time to draw
+      their weapons. The third shook off his two assailants, and for a minute
+      kept them both at bay; but others, rushing up, cut him down.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise had received a slight wound before he realised what was
+      happening. He snatched his dagger from its sheath, and struck down one
+      assailant; but ere he could raise it to strike again, another leapt on to
+      his back, and clung there until the rest rushed up, when he shouted, &ldquo;Take
+      him alive! take him alive!&rdquo; and, throwing down their weapons, half a dozen
+      of the pirates flung themselves upon Gervaise, and strove to pull him to
+      the ground, until at last, in spite of his desperate resistance, they
+      succeeded in doing so. His armour was hastily stripped off, his hands and
+      feet bound, and then at the orders of the pirate who had leapt on his
+      back, and who was evidently the captain, half a dozen men lifted him on to
+      their shoulders. As they did so four guns from the galley flashed out, and
+      the balls flew overhead. The pirates, who had already begun to quarrel
+      over the armour and arms of the fallen knights, at once took to their
+      heels, followed by the galley slaves from the boat.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Make haste,&rdquo; the captain said to the men carrying Gervaise.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;They are lowering their boats; we must be under way before they come up.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      In a minute or two Gervaise was set down on his feet, the cords round his
+      legs were cut, and he was made to hurry along with his captors. In a short
+      time an inlet was reached, and here Gervaise saw, to his mortification,
+      the pirate craft for which the Santa Barbara had in vain been searching.
+      As soon as the party were all on board, the ropes by which she was moored
+      to two trees were thrown off; the great sails hoisted, and she sailed
+      boldly out. Although the gale had entirely abated, there was still a brisk
+      wind blowing, and it was evident to the captain of the corsair that under
+      such circumstances he could outsail the galley that had long been
+      searching for him; when, therefore, the Santa Barbara came in sight, just
+      as he and his crew had finished stripping the wreck of its contents, the
+      idea had occurred to him to attempt to entice some of the knights to land.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      As soon as the vessel was under way he abused his followers hotly for not
+      having obeyed his orders to capture the knights without bloodshed; but
+      they pleaded that it was as much as they had been able to do to capture
+      Gervaise in that way, and that they could never have overcome the four
+      together, before the boats would have had time to come from the ship.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise had been told to sit down with his back to a mast and in this
+      position he could, when the vessel heeled over to the breeze, obtain a
+      view of the sea. It was with a feeling of bitter mortification and rage
+      that he saw the galley lying but half a mile away, as the corsair issued
+      from the inlet. A moment later he heard a gun fired, and saw the signal
+      hoisted to recall the boats.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;If the wind had been favourable,&rdquo; the captain said to his mate, &ldquo;we would
+      have borne down upon her, and could have reached and captured her before
+      the boats got back, for you may be sure that they have landed almost all
+      their men. However, we can't get there against the wind, and we will now
+      say goodbye to them.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise knew well that at the pace they were running through the water
+      the galley would have no chance whatever of overtaking her, and that, ere
+      the knights came on board again, she would be already two or three miles
+      away. A point of land soon concealed the galley from view, and when he
+      caught sight of her, as she rounded the point, she was but a speck in the
+      distance.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      They passed several islands in the course of the day, changing their
+      direction to a right angle to that which they had at first pursued, as
+      soon as they were hidden from the sight of the galley by an intervening
+      island. As night came on they anchored in a little bay on the coast of the
+      Morea. The sails being furled, the sailors made a division of the booty
+      they had captured on the island, and of the portable property found on
+      board the wreck. A gourd full of water was placed to Gervaise's lips by
+      one of the men of a kinder disposition than the rest. He drank it
+      thankfully, for he was parched with thirst excited by the pain caused by
+      the tightness with which he had been bound.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      He slept where he sat. All night four men remained on guard, although from
+      what he heard they had no fear whatever of being overtaken. In the morning
+      his arms were unbound, and they stripped off his tunic and shirt. They had
+      evidently respect for his strength, for before loosing his arms they
+      tightly fastened his ankles together. The removal of his shirt exposed
+      Claudia's gift to view.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Take that from him and give it to me,&rdquo; the captain said. As the two men
+      approached, Gervaise seized one in each hand, dashed them against each
+      other, and hurled them on the deck. But the exertion upset his
+      equilibrium, and after making a vain effort to recover it, he fell heavily
+      across them. The captain stooped over him, and, before he could recover
+      himself, snatched the chain from his neck.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;You are a stout fellow,&rdquo; he said, laughing, &ldquo;and will make a fine slave.
+      What have you got here that you are ready to risk your life for?&rdquo; He
+      looked at the little chain and its pendant with an air of disappointment.
+      &ldquo;'Tis worth but little,&rdquo; he said, showing it to his mate. &ldquo;I would not
+      give five ducats for it in the market. It must be a charm, or a knight
+      would never carry it about with him and prize it so highly. It may be to
+      things like this the Christians owe their luck.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It has not brought him luck this time,&rdquo; the mate observed with a laugh.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Even a charm cannot always bring good luck, but at any rate I will try
+      it;&rdquo; and he put it round his neck just as Gervaise had worn it. The latter
+      was now unbound, and permitted to move about the deck. The strength he had
+      shown in the struggle on shore, and the manner in which he had hurled,
+      bound as he was, two of their comrades to the deck, had won for him the
+      respect of his captors, and he was therefore allowed privileges not
+      granted to the seamen of the vessel that had had the ill fortune to be
+      cast on shore so close to the spot where the corsair was hiding. These had
+      been seized, driven to the ship, and having been stripped of the greater
+      portion of their clothes, shut down in the hold.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Although angry that but one out of the four who landed had been captured,
+      the captain was in a good humour at having tricked his redoubtable foes,
+      and was disposed to treat Gervaise with more consideration than was
+      generally given to captives. The latter had not spoken a word of Turkish
+      from the time he was captured, and had shaken his head when first
+      addressed in that language. No suspicion was therefore entertained that he
+      had any knowledge of it, and the Turks conversed freely before him.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Where think you we had better sell him?&rdquo; the mate asked the captain, when
+      Gervaise was leaning against the bulwark watching the land, a short
+      quarter of a mile away. &ldquo;He ought to fetch a good ransom.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Ay, but who would get it? You know how it was with one that Ibrahim took
+      two years ago. First there were months of delay, then, when the ransom was
+      settled, the pasha took four-fifths of it for himself, and Ibrahim got far
+      less than he would have done had he sold him as a slave. The pashas here,
+      and the sultans of the Moors, are all alike; if they once meddle in an
+      affair they take all the profit, and think they do well by giving you a
+      tithe of it. There are plenty of wealthy Moors who are ready to pay well
+      for a Christian slave, especially when he is a good looking young fellow
+      such as this. He will fetch as much as all those eight sailors below. They
+      are only worth their labour, while this youngster will command a fancy
+      price. I know a dozen rich Moors in Tripoli or Tunis who would be glad to
+      have him; and we agreed that we would run down to the African coast for
+      awhile, for that galley has been altogether too busy of late for our
+      comfort, and will be all the more active after this little affair;
+      besides, people in these islands have got so scared that one can't get
+      within ten miles of any of them now without seeing their signal smokes
+      rising on the hills, and finding, when they land, the villages deserted
+      and stripped of everything worth carrying away.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      This news was a disappointment to Gervaise. He had calculated that he
+      would be sold at one of the Levant ports, and had thought that with his
+      knowledge of Turkish he should have no great difficulty in escaping from
+      any master into whose hands he might fall, and taking his chance of either
+      seizing a fishing boat, or of making his way in a trading ship to some
+      district where the population was a mixed one, and where trade was winked
+      at between the merchants there, and those at some of the Greek towns. To
+      escape from Tunis or Tripoli would be far more difficult; there, too, he
+      would be beyond the reach of the good offices of Suleiman Ali, who would,
+      he was sure, have done all in his power to bring about his release. Of one
+      thing he was determined: he would not return to Rhodes without making
+      every possible effort to recover Claudia's gage, as he considered it
+      absolutely incumbent on him as a knight to guard, as something sacred, a
+      gift so bestowed. The fancy of the corsair to retain the jewel as a charm
+      he regarded as a piece of the greatest good fortune. Had it been thrown
+      among the common spoil, he would never have known to which of the crew it
+      had fallen at the division, still less have traced what became of it
+      afterwards; whereas now, for some time, at any rate, it was likely to
+      remain in the captain's possession.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Had it not been for that, he would have attempted to escape at the first
+      opportunity, and such an opportunity could not fail to present itself ere
+      long, for he had but to manage to possess himself of Moslem garments to be
+      able to move about unquestioned in any Turkish town. When it became dark
+      he was shut up in the hold, which was, he found, crowded with captives,
+      as, in addition to the crew of the wreck, between forty and fifty Greeks,
+      for the most part boys and young girls, had been carried off from the
+      villages plundered. It was pitch dark below, although the scuttle had been
+      left open in order to allow a certain amount of air to reach the captives;
+      Gervaise, therefore, felt his way about cautiously, and lay down as soon
+      as he found a clear space. Save an occasional moan or curse, and the
+      panting of those suffering from the heat and closeness of the crowded
+      hold, all was still. The majority of the captives had been some time in
+      their floating prison, and their first poignant grief had settled down
+      into a dull and despairing acceptance of their fate; the sailors, newly
+      captured, had for hours raved and cursed, but, worn out by their struggle
+      with the elements, and their rage and grief, they had now fallen asleep.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      It was long before Gervaise dozed off. He was furious with himself for
+      having fallen into the trap; if he had, as he said to himself, lain off
+      the beach in the boat, and questioned the supposed shipwrecked sailors,
+      their inability to reply to him would have at once put him on his guard;
+      as it was, he had walked into the snare as carelessly and confidently as a
+      child might have done. Even more than his own captivity, he regretted the
+      death of his three comrades, which he attributed to his own want of care.
+      The next morning he was again allowed on deck. The vessel was under way,
+      and her head was pointing south. To his surprise some of the crew gave him
+      a friendly greeting; he was unable to understand a manner so at variance
+      with their hatred to the Christians, until one of them said to him in a
+      mixture of Greek and Italian, &ldquo;We have heard from our countrymen who were
+      in the boat with you, that they received much kindness at your hands, and
+      that of all the Christians they had served under, you were the kindest
+      master. Therefore, it is but right now Allah has decreed that you in turn
+      should be a slave to the true believers, that you should receive the same
+      mercy you gave to Moslems when they were in your power.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The captain came up as the man was speaking. He talked for a time to the
+      sailor, who then turned again to Gervaise. &ldquo;The captain says that he is
+      told you were the commander of that galley; he has questioned the eight
+      men separately, and they all tell the same story: and yet he cannot
+      understand how so young a man should command a galley manned by warriors
+      famous for their deeds of arms, even among us who are their foes.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;This galley was an exception,&rdquo; Gervaise replied; &ldquo;the knights on board
+      were all young, as they could be better spared than those more
+      experienced, at a time when your sultan is known to be preparing for an
+      attack on Rhodes.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The captain was silent for a minute when this was interpreted to him; he
+      had at the time noticed and wondered at the youth of the four knights, and
+      the explanation seemed to him a reasonable one.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I wish I had known it,&rdquo; he said after a pause; &ldquo;for had I done so, I
+      would have fought and captured her yesterday; I have half a mind to go
+      back and seek her now.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      He called up one of the ex slaves who was a native of Tripoli, and who had
+      now taken his place as a member of the crew, and asked him a number of
+      questions. Gervaise felt uncomfortable while the man was answering.
+      Fortunately, his rowers had agreed to say nothing whatever of the
+      destruction of the corsair fleet, of which no word had as yet reached the
+      pirates, deeming that, in their anger at the news, the pirates might turn
+      upon them for the part that they had, however involuntarily, borne in it.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      As soon as he perceived that the captain entertained the idea of returning
+      to engage the galley, the man felt that if he were to avoid a return into
+      captivity he must deter him from taking such a step. He therefore, in
+      answer to his questions as to the strength of the crew of the galley and
+      the fighting powers of the knights, reported the capture of the three
+      vessels. The captain listened almost incredulously to his statement, and,
+      calling up another two of the men, questioned them also as to the
+      occurrence. Having heard them, he turned away and paced the deck, in
+      evident anger; however, he gave no instructions for a change of course,
+      and, to the great satisfaction of the eight rescued slaves, the vessel
+      continued her course southward.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      As they neared the African coast, Gervaise kept an eager lookout, in hopes
+      that Visconti's galley might appear in sight. The captain's temper had not
+      recovered from the effect of the news of the capture of three Moorish
+      vessels by the galley commanded by Gervaise, and the latter, seeing the
+      mood he was in, kept forward so as to avoid coming in contact with him. He
+      had early taken the opportunity of saying to one of the released galley
+      slaves, &ldquo;I pray you, if you have any feeling of kindness towards me for
+      the efforts I made to alleviate your condition, say no word of my
+      knowledge of Turkish, and ask the others also to remain silent on this
+      point.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The man had nodded, and the request was observed by them all.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The captain's irritation showed itself in his treatment of the other
+      captives. These were brought up every day from the hold, and kept on deck
+      until dark, as the price they would fetch in the slave market in Tripoli
+      would depend greatly upon their health and appearance; but when the
+      captain came near them he several times struck them brutally, if they
+      happened to be in his way. Gervaise had the greatest difficulty in
+      restraining his indignation, and, indeed, only did so because he felt that
+      his interference would but make things worse for them. When at last the
+      ship cast anchor off Tripoli, the captain ordered the boats to be lowered.
+      As he walked towards the gangway, he happened to push against one of the
+      captives, a Greek girl of some ten years of age. With an angry exclamation
+      he struck her to the deck. Gervaise sprang forward.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;You brute!&rdquo; he exclaimed in English. &ldquo;I have a good mind to throw you
+      overboard, and will do so the next time you strike one of these children
+      without cause.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Infuriated by Gervaise's interference and threatening attitude, the
+      corsair drew his long knife; but before he could strike, Gervaise caught
+      his wrist; the knife fell from his hand, and Gervaise kicked it through
+      the open gangway into the sea. The captain shouted to his men to seize the
+      Christian, but the young knight's blood was up now. The first man who came
+      at him he seized by the sash round his waist, and threw overboard; the two
+      next he stretched on the deck with blows from his clenched fist. Some of
+      the others now drew their weapons, but the captain shouted to them to
+      sheath them.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Fools!&rdquo; he yelled. &ldquo;Is it not enough that your cowardice has already cost
+      us the lives of three knights, whose capture would have brought us a big
+      sum? Throw him down and bind him. What! are fifty of you afraid of one
+      unarmed man? No wonder these Christians capture our ships, if this is the
+      mettle of our crews!&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Goaded by his words, the men made a general rush upon Gervaise, and, in
+      spite of his desperate efforts, threw him on to the deck and bound him;
+      then the captain, seizing a heavy stick in his left hand, his right being
+      still powerless, showered blows upon him until Gervaise almost lost
+      consciousness. &ldquo;Throw some water over the dog,&rdquo; the corsair said, as he
+      threw down the stick, panting with his exertions; and then, without
+      waiting to see if his order was obeyed, he took his place in the boat, and
+      was rowed ashore.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      As soon as he had left, three or four of the ex galley slaves carried
+      Gervaise into the shade of the sail. The sailors, several of whom bore
+      signs of the late struggle, looked on sullenly, but offered no opposition
+      when the men took off the ropes and raised him into a sitting posture
+      against the mast. He had not entirely lost consciousness, and was now fast
+      recovering himself.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Is there anything we can do for you?&rdquo; one of the men asked in Italian.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;No I shall soon be all right again, although I am bruised all over, and
+      shall be stiff for a day or two. You had best leave me now, or you will
+      incur the enmity of these fellows.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise was indeed bruised from his neck to his heels. Even in his
+      passion the pirate had avoided striking him on the head, as a disfiguring
+      mark on the face would diminish his value. Sitting there, he congratulated
+      himself that he had been beaten with a stick and not with a whip; a stick
+      is a weapon, and he did not feel the same sense of dishonour that he would
+      have experienced had he been beaten with a whip. That such might be his
+      lot in slavery he recognised. The backs of Caretto and his two companions
+      were seamed with the marks inflicted by the gang master's whip, and he
+      could scarce hope to escape the same treatment; but at present he hardly
+      felt a slave. There was another reflection that to some extent mitigated
+      the pain of his bruises; the pirate captain held his treasured gage, and
+      it was his fixed determination to recover it. The man had at first in a
+      rough way treated him fairly, and had allowed him more liberty than the
+      other captives, and he would have felt reluctant to take extreme measure
+      against him to recover the gage. Now he was not only free from any sense
+      of obligation, but had a heavy score to settle with him.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      After a time he got up and walked stiffly and painfully up and down the
+      deck, knowing that this was the best plan to prevent the limbs from
+      stiffening. The corsair did not return until night set in; he was
+      accompanied by an Arab, whose dress and appearance showed that he was a
+      person of importance. The other slaves had all been sent below, but
+      Gervaise still remained on deck, as the mate had not cared to risk another
+      conflict by giving him orders in the absence of the captain. As the pirate
+      stepped on deck he ordered some torches to be brought.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;This is the Christian I spoke of,&rdquo; he said to the Arab, pointing to
+      Gervaise, who was leaning carelessly against the bulwark.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;He is, as you see, capable of hard work of any kind; his strength is
+      prodigious, for it took ten of my best men to bind him this morning.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Why did you wish to bind him?&rdquo; the Arab asked coldly; &ldquo;you told me that
+      although so strong he was of a quiet disposition, and would make a good
+      household slave.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I struck a slave girl who stood in my way,&rdquo; the captain said, &ldquo;and he
+      came at me so suddenly that I had to call upon the men to bind him. He
+      threw one of them overboard, and with his naked hands knocked down two
+      others; and, as I have told you, it took all the efforts of eight or ten
+      more before they could overcome him.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The Arab took a torch from one of the sailors, walked across to Gervaise,
+      who was naked from the waist upwards, his upper garments having been torn
+      into shreds in the struggle, and examined him closely.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;And then you beat him,&rdquo; he said, turning to the captain.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Certainly I beat him. Do you think that a slave is to mutiny on board my
+      ship, and escape unpunished?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The Arab, without replying, again inspected Gervaise.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;You ask a large sum for him,&rdquo; he said.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I should ask twice as much,&rdquo; the captain replied, &ldquo;if it were not for the
+      regulation that one slave from each cargo brought in belongs to the
+      sultan, and his officers would as a matter of course choose this fellow,
+      for the others are merely such as are sold in the market every day. This
+      man is one of the accursed Order of Rhodes, and would fetch a ransom many
+      times greater than the sum I ask for him, only I have not the time to wait
+      for months until the affair could be arranged.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;And, moreover, Hassan,&rdquo; the Arab said grimly, &ldquo;it has doubtless not
+      escaped you that as the Sultan of Turkey is fitting out an expedition to
+      destroy the community of Rhodes, the chance of their ransoming their
+      comrade is a very slight one.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Threatened men live long,&rdquo; the captain said. &ldquo;The sultan has been talking
+      of attacking them for years, and something has always happened to prevent
+      his carrying out his intention. It may be the same again.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I will take him,&rdquo; the Arab said shortly. &ldquo;Here is a purse with the sum
+      you named; count it, and see that it is right.&rdquo; As he stood apart while
+      the pirate counted out the money, the eight released slaves came up in a
+      body, and one of them, bowing low before the merchant, said,
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;My lord, we have long been slaves of the Christian knights at Rhodes, and
+      have worked in their galleys. We were rescued the other day when this
+      knight was taken prisoner. Our life has been a hard one. We have borne
+      toil, and hardship, and blows, the heat of the sun by day, and the damp by
+      night, but we would humbly represent to you that since we were placed in
+      the galley commanded by this knight our lot has been made bearable by his
+      humanity and kindness. He erected an awning to shade us from the sun's
+      rays, and to shelter us from the night dews. He provided good food for us.
+      He saw that we were not worked beyond our strength, and he forbade us
+      being struck, unless for good cause. Therefore, my lord, now that
+      misfortune has fallen upon him, we venture to represent to you the
+      kindness with which he has treated us, in the hope that it may please you
+      to show him such mercy as he showed to us.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;You have done well,&rdquo; the Arab said, &ldquo;and your words shall not be
+      forgotten. When you land tomorrow, inquire for the house of Isaac Ben
+      Ibyn. You are doubtless penniless, and I may be able to obtain employment
+      for those of you who may stop at Tripoli, and to assist those who desire
+      to take passage to their homes elsewhere. We are commanded to be grateful
+      to those who befriend us, and as you have shown yourselves to be so, it is
+      right that I, an humble servant of the Great One, should in His name
+      reward you.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Motioning to Gervaise to follow him, the Arab stepped into his boat.
+      Gervaise turned to the men, and said in Italian, &ldquo;Thanks, my friends, you
+      have well discharged any debt that you may think you owe me. Will you tell
+      that villain&rdquo;&mdash;and he pointed to the captain threateningly&mdash;&ldquo;I
+      warn him that some day I will kill him like a dog!&rdquo; Then, turning, he
+      stepped into the bow of the boat, and the two men who rowed it at once
+      pushed off.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      <a name="link2HCH0018" id="link2HCH0018">
+      <!--  H2 anchor --> </a>
+    </p>
+    <div style="height: 4em;">
+      <br /><br /><br /><br />
+    </div>
+    <h2>
+      CHAPTER XVIII A KIND MASTER
+    </h2>
+    <p>
+      When the boat reached the shore the Arab handed a long bernouse to
+      Gervaise, signed to him to pull the hood well over his head, and then led
+      the way through the streets until he stopped at a large house, standing in
+      a quiet quarter of the town. He struck on the door with his hand, and it
+      was at once opened by a black slave.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Call Muley,&rdquo; the Arab said.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The slave hurried away, and returned in a minute with a man somewhat past
+      middle age, and dressed in a style that indicated that he was a trusted
+      servant.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Muley,&rdquo; his master said, &ldquo;I have bought this Christian who has been
+      brought in by Hassan the corsair. He is one of the knights who are the
+      terrors of our coasts, but is, from what I hear, of a kind and humane
+      disposition. I am told that he was a commander of one of their galleys,
+      and though I should not have believed it had I only Hassan's word, I have
+      heard from others that it was so. My wife has long desired to have a
+      Christian slave, and as Allah has blessed my efforts it was but right that
+      I should gratify her, though in truth I do not know what work I shall set
+      him to do at present. Let him first have a bath, and see that he is clad
+      decently, then let him have a good meal. I doubt if he has had one since
+      he was captured. He has been sorely beaten by the corsair, and from no
+      fault of his own, but only because he opposed the man's brutality to a
+      child slave. If any of his wounds need ointment, see that he has it. When
+      all is ready, bring him to the door of my apartments, in order that I may
+      show to my wife that I have gratified her whim.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Then he motioned to Gervaise to follow Muley, who was the head of his
+      household. Gervaise resisted the impulse to thank his new master, and
+      followed in silence.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      He was first taken to a bathroom, furnished with an abundance of hot and
+      cold water. Muley uttered an exclamation as, on Gervaise throwing off his
+      bernouse, he saw that his flesh was a mass of bruises. After filling the
+      bath with hot water, he motioned to Gervaise to get in, and lie there
+      until he returned. It was some time before he came back, bringing a pot of
+      ointment and some bandages. It was only on the body that the wounds needed
+      dressing, for here the blows had fallen on the naked skin. When he had
+      dressed them, Muley went out and returned with some Turkish garments,
+      consisting of a pair of baggy trousers of yellow cotton, a white shirt of
+      the same material, and a sleeveless jacket of blue cloth embroidered with
+      yellow trimming; a pair of yellow slippers completed the costume. Muley
+      now took him into another room, where he set before him a dish of rice
+      with a meat gravy, a large piece of bread, and a wooden spoon.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise ate the food with a deep feeling of thankfulness for the fate
+      that had thrown him into such good hands. Then, after taking a long
+      draught of water, he rose to his feet and followed Muley into the entrance
+      hall. The latter stopped at a door on the opposite side, knocked at it,
+      and then motioned to Gervaise to take off his slippers. The door was
+      opened by the Arab himself.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Enter,&rdquo; he said courteously, and led Gervaise into an apartment where a
+      lady and two girls were sitting on a divan. They were slightly veiled;
+      but, as Gervaise afterwards learnt, Ben Ibyn was not a Moor, but a Berber,
+      a people who do not keep their women in close confinement as do the Moors,
+      but allow them to go abroad freely without being entirely muffled up.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Khadja,&rdquo; the merchant said, &ldquo;this is the Christian slave I purchased
+      today. You have for a long time desired one, but not until now have I
+      found one who would, I thought, satisfy your expectations. What think you
+      of him?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;He is a noble looking youth truly, Isaac, with his fair, wavy hair, his
+      grey eyes, and white skin; truly, all my neighbours will envy me such a
+      possession. I have often seen Christian slaves before, but they have
+      always been broken down and dejected looking creatures; this one bears
+      himself like a warrior rather than a slave.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;He is a warrior; he is one of those terrible knights of Rhodes whose very
+      name is a terror to the Turks, and whose galleys are feared even by our
+      boldest corsairs. He must be of approved valour, for he was commander of
+      one of these galleys.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The girls looked with amazement at Gervaise. They had often heard tales of
+      the capture of ships that had sailed from Tripoli, by the galleys of the
+      Christian knights, and had pictured those fierce warriors as of almost
+      supernatural strength and valour. That this youth, whose upper lip was but
+      shaded with a slight moustache, should be one of them, struck them as
+      being almost incredible.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;He does not look ferocious, father,&rdquo; one of them said. &ldquo;He looks pleasant
+      and good tempered, as if he could injure no one.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;And yet this morning, daughter, he braved, unarmed, the anger of Hassan
+      the corsair, on the deck of his own ship; and when the pirate called upon
+      his men to seize him he threw one overboard, struck two more on to the
+      deck, and it needed eight men to overpower him.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I hope he won't get angry with us!&rdquo; the younger girl exclaimed. Gervaise
+      could not suppress a laugh, and then, turning to the merchant, said in
+      Turkish, &ldquo;I must ask your pardon for having concealed from you my
+      knowledge of your tongue. I kept the secret from all on board the corsair,
+      and meant to have done the same here, deeming that if none knew that I
+      spoke the language it would greatly aid me should I ever see an
+      opportunity of making my escape; but, Ben Ibyn, you have behaved so kindly
+      to me that I feel it would not be honourable to keep it a secret from you,
+      and to allow you and the ladies to talk freely before me, thinking that I
+      was altogether ignorant of what you were saying.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;You have acted well and honourably,&rdquo; Ben Ibyn said, putting a hand on his
+      shoulder kindly. &ldquo;We have heard much of the character of the Order, and
+      that though valiant in battle, your knights are courteous and chivalrous,
+      deeming a deceitful action to be unworthy of them, and binding themselves
+      by their vows to succour the distressed and to be pitiful to the weak. We
+      have heard that our wounded are tended by them in your hospitals with as
+      much care as men of their own race and religion, and that in many things
+      the knights were to be admired even by those who were their foes. I see
+      now that these reports were true, and that although, as you say, it might
+      be of advantage to you that none should know you speak Arabic, yet it is
+      from a spirit of honourable courtesy you have now told us that you do so.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I did not tell you, wife,&rdquo; he went on, turning to her, &ldquo;that the reason
+      why he bearded Hassan today was because the corsair brutally struck a
+      little female captive; thus, you see, he, at the risk of his life, and
+      when himself a captive, carried out his vows to protect the defenceless.
+      And now, wife, there is one thing you must know. For some time, at any
+      rate, you must abandon the idea of exciting the envy of your friends by
+      exhibiting your Christian captive to them. As you are aware, the sultan
+      has the choice of any one slave he may select from each batch brought in,
+      and assuredly he would choose this one, did it come to his ears, or to the
+      ears of one of his officers, that a Christian knight had been landed. For
+      this reason Hassan sold him to me for a less sum than he would otherwise
+      have demanded, and we must for some time keep his presence here a secret.
+      My idea is that he shall remain indoors until we move next week into our
+      country house, where he will be comparatively free from observation.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Certainly, Isaac. I would not on any account that he should be handed
+      over to the sultan, for he would either be put into the galleys or have to
+      labour in the streets.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I will tell Muley to order the other slaves to say nothing outside of the
+      fresh arrival, so for the present there is no fear of its being talked
+      about in the town. Hassan will, for his own sake, keep silent on the
+      matter. I have not yet asked your name,&rdquo; he went on, turning to Gervaise.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;My name is Gervaise Tresham; but it will be easier for you to call me by
+      my first name only.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Then, Gervaise, it were well that you retired to rest at once, for I am
+      sure that you sorely need it.&rdquo; He touched a bell on the table, and told
+      Muley, when he appeared, to conduct Gervaise to the place where he was to
+      sleep, which was, he had already ordered, apart from the quarters of the
+      other slaves.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;The young fellow is a mass of bruises,&rdquo; Ben Ibyn said to his wife, when
+      the door closed behind Gervaise. &ldquo;Hassan beat him so savagely, after they
+      had overpowered and bound him, that he well nigh killed him.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      An exclamation of indignation burst from the wife and daughters.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Muley has seen to his wounds,&rdquo; he went on, &ldquo;and he will doubtless be
+      cured in a few days. And now, wife, that your wish is gratified, and I
+      have purchased a Christian slave for you, may I ask what you are going to
+      do with him?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I am sure I do not know,&rdquo; she said in a tone of perplexity. &ldquo;I had
+      thought of having him to hand round coffee when my friends call, and
+      perhaps to work in the garden, but I did not think that he would be
+      anything like this.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;That is no reason why he should not do so,&rdquo; Ben Ibyn said. &ldquo;These
+      Christians, I hear, treat their women as if they were superior beings, and
+      feel it no dishonour to wait upon them; I think you cannot do better than
+      carry out your plan. It is certain there is no sort of work that he would
+      prefer to it; therefore, let it be understood that he is to be your own
+      personal attendant, and that when you have no occasion for his services,
+      he will work in the garden. Only do not for the present let any of your
+      friends see him; they would spread the news like wildfire, and in a week
+      every soul in the town would know that you had a good looking Christian
+      slave, and the sultan's officer would be sending for me to ask how I
+      obtained him. We must put a turban on him. Any one who caught a glimpse of
+      that hair of his, however far distant, would know that he was a Frank.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;We might stain his face and hands with walnut juice,&rdquo; Khadja said, &ldquo;he
+      would pass as a Nubian. Some of them are tall and strong.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;A very good thought, wife; it would be an excellent disguise. So shall it
+      be.&rdquo; He touched the bell again. &ldquo;Tell Muley I would speak with him.
+      Muley,&rdquo; he went on, when the steward appeared, &ldquo;have you said aught to any
+      of the servants touching the Christian?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;No, my lord; you gave me no instructions about it, and I thought it
+      better to wait until the morning, when I could ask you.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;You did well. We have determined to stain his skin, and at present he
+      will pass as a Nubian. This will avoid all questions and talk.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;But, my lord, they will wonder that he cannot speak their tongue.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;He must pass among them as a mute; but indeed he speaks Arabic as well as
+      we do, Muley.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The man uttered an exclamation of surprise.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;He had intended to conceal his knowledge,&rdquo; Ben Ibyn went on, &ldquo;which would
+      have been politic; but when he found that my intentions were kind, he told
+      us that he knew our tongue, and now revealed his knowledge, as he thought
+      it would be dishonourable to listen to our talk, leaving us under the
+      impression that he could not understand us.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Truly these Christians are strange men,&rdquo; Muley said. &ldquo;This youth, who has
+      not yet grown the hair on his face, is nevertheless commander of a war
+      galley. He is ready to risk his life on behalf of a slave, and can strike
+      down men with his unarmed hand; he is as gentle in his manner as a woman;
+      and now it seems he can talk Arabic, and although it was in his power to
+      keep this secret he tells it rather than overhear words that are not meant
+      for his ear. Truly they are strange people, the Franks. I will prepare
+      some stain in the morning, my lord, and complete his disguise before any
+      of the others see him.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The next morning Muley told Gervaise that his master thought that it would
+      be safer and more convenient for him to pass as a dumb Nubian slave.
+      Gervaise thought the plan an excellent one; and he was soon transformed,
+      Muley shaving that part of the hair that would have shown below the
+      turban, and then staining him a deep brownish black, from the waist
+      upwards, together with his feet and his legs up to his knee, and darkening
+      his eyebrows, eyelashes, and moustache.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Save that your lips lack the thickness, and your nose is straighter than
+      those of Nubians, no one would doubt but that you were one of that race;
+      and this is of little consequence, as many of them are of mixed blood,
+      and, though retaining their dark colour, have features that in their
+      outline resemble those of the Arabs. Now I will take you to Ben Ibyn, so
+      that he may judge whether any further change is required before the
+      servants and slaves see you.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;That is excellent,&rdquo; the merchant said, when he had carefully inspected
+      Gervaise, &ldquo;I should pass you myself without recognizing you. Now you can
+      take him into the servants' quarters, Muley, and tell them that he is a
+      new slave whom I have purchased, and that henceforth it will be his duty
+      to wait upon my wife, to whom I have presented him as her special
+      attendant, and that he will accompany her and my daughters when they go
+      abroad to make their purchases or visit their friends. Give some reason,
+      if you can think of one, why you have bestowed him in a chamber separate
+      from the rest.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise at once took up his new duties, and an hour later, carrying a
+      basket, followed them into the town. It was strange to him thus to be
+      walking among the fanatical Moors, who, had they known the damage that he
+      had inflicted upon their galleys, would have torn him in pieces. None gave
+      him, however, more than a passing look. Nubian slaves were no uncommon
+      sight in the town, and in wealthy Moorish families were commonly employed
+      in places of trust, and especially as attendants in the harems. The ladies
+      were now as closely veiled as the Moorish women, it being only in the
+      house that they followed the Berber customs. Gervaise had learnt from
+      Muley that Ben Ibyn was one of the richest merchants in Tripoli, trading
+      direct with Egypt, Syria, and Constantinople, besides carrying on a large
+      trade with the Berber tribes in the interior. He returned to the house
+      with his basket full of provisions, and having handed these over to the
+      cook, he went to the private apartments, as Khadja had requested him to
+      do. Here she and her daughters asked him innumerable questions as to his
+      country and its customs, and then about Rhodes and the Order to which he
+      belonged. Their surprise was great when they heard that the knights were
+      bound to celibacy.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;But why should they not marry if they like? Why should they not have
+      wives, children, and homes like other people?&rdquo; Khadja asked.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It is that they may devote their whole lives to their work. Their home is
+      the convent at Rhodes, or at one of the commanderies scattered over
+      Europe, where they take charge of the estates of the Order.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;But why should they not marry then, Gervaise? At Rhodes there might be
+      danger for women and children, but when they return to Europe to take
+      charge of the estates, surely they would do their duty no worse for having
+      wives?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise smiled.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I did not make the rules of the Order, lady, but I have thought myself
+      that although, so long as they are doing military work at the convent, it
+      is well that they should not marry, yet there is no good reason why, when
+      established in commanderies at home, they should not, like other knights
+      and nobles, marry if it so pleases them.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      In the evening the merchant returned from his stores, which were situated
+      down by the port. Soon after he came in he sent for Gervaise. &ldquo;There is a
+      question I had intended to ask you last night,&rdquo; he said, &ldquo;but it escaped
+      me. More than two months since there sailed from this port and others many
+      vessels&mdash;not the ships of the State, but corsairs. In all, more than
+      twenty ships started, with the intention of making a great raid upon the
+      coast of Italy. No word has since been received of them, and their friends
+      here are becoming very uneasy, the more so as we hear that neither at
+      Tunis nor Algiers has any news been received. Have you heard at Rhodes of
+      a Moorish fleet having been ravaging the coast of Italy?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Have you any friends on board the ships that sailed from here, or any
+      interest in the venture, Ben Ibyn?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The merchant shook his head. &ldquo;We Berbers,&rdquo; he said, &ldquo;are not like the
+      Moors, and have but little to do with the sea, save by the way of trade.
+      For myself, I regret that these corsair ships are constantly putting out.
+      Were it not for them and their doings we might trade with the ports of
+      France, of Spain, and Italy, and be on good terms with all. There is no
+      reason why, because our faiths are different, we should be constantly
+      fighting. It is true that the Turks threaten Europe, and are even now
+      preparing to capture Rhodes; but this is no question of religion. The
+      Turks are warlike and ambitious; they have conquered Syria, and war with
+      Egypt and Persia; but the Moorish states are small, they have no thought
+      of conquest, and might live peaceably with Europe were it not for the
+      hatred excited against them by the corsairs.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;In that case I can tell you the truth. Thirteen of those ships were taken
+      into Rhodes as prizes; the other eleven were burnt. Not one of the fleet
+      escaped.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Exclamations of surprise broke from Ben Ibyn, his wife, and daughters.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I am astonished, indeed,&rdquo; the merchant said. &ldquo;It was reported here that
+      the Genoese galleys were all laid up, and it was thought that they would
+      be able to sweep the seas without opposition, and to bring home vast spoil
+      and many captives, both from the ships they took and from many of the
+      villages and small towns of the coast. How came such a misfortune to
+      happen to them? It will create consternation here when it is known, for
+      although it was not a state enterprise, the sultan himself and almost all
+      the rich Moors embarked money in the fitting out of the ships, and were to
+      have shares in the spoil taken. How happened it that so strong a fleet was
+      all taken or destroyed, without even one vessel being able to get away to
+      carry home the news of the disaster?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Fortune was against them,&rdquo; Gervaise said. &ldquo;Three ships on their way up
+      were captured by a galley of our Order, and her commander having obtained
+      news of the whereabouts of the spot where the corsairs were to rendezvous,
+      found them all lying together in a small inlet, and launched against them
+      a number of fishing boats fitted out as fire ships. The corsairs, packed
+      closely together, were unable to avoid them, and, as I told you, eleven of
+      their ships were burnt, four were run ashore to avoid the flames, while
+      six, trying to make their way out, were captured by the galley, aided by
+      the three prizes that were taken and which the knights had caused to be
+      manned by Sards.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;The ways of Allah the All Seeing are wonderful,&rdquo; the merchant said. &ldquo;It
+      was indeed a marvellous feat for one galley thus to destroy a great
+      fleet.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It was the result of good fortune rather than skill and valour,&rdquo; Gervaise
+      said.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Nay, nay; let praise be given where it is due. It was a marvellous feat;
+      and although there is good or bad fortune in every event, such a deed
+      could not have been performed, and would not even have been thought of,
+      save by a great commander. Who was the knight who thus with one galley
+      alone destroyed a strongly manned fleet, from which great things had been
+      looked for?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise hesitated. &ldquo;It was a young knight,&rdquo; he said, &ldquo;of but little
+      standing in the Order, and whose name is entirely unknown outside its
+      ranks.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;By this time it must be well known,&rdquo; Ben Ibyn said; &ldquo;and it will soon be
+      known throughout Christendom, and will be dreaded by every Moor. What was
+      it?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise again hesitated.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I would not have told you the story at all, Ben Ibyn, had I supposed you
+      would have cared to inquire into the matter. Of course, I will tell you
+      the name if you insist upon it, but I would much rather you did not ask.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;But why?&rdquo; the merchant asked, in surprise. &ldquo;If I hear it not from you, I
+      shall assuredly hear it ere long from others, for it will be brought by
+      traders who are in communication with Italy. I cannot understand why you
+      should thus hesitate about telling me the name of this commander. When
+      known it will doubtless be cursed by thousands of Moorish wives and
+      mothers; but we Berbers are another race. None of our friends or kindred
+      were on board the fleet; and we traders have rather reason to rejoice,
+      for, in the first place, so severe a lesson will keep the corsairs in
+      their ports for a long time; and in the second, had the fleet succeeded
+      according to general expectation, so great a store of European goods would
+      have been brought home that the market would have been glutted, and the
+      goods in our storehouses would have lost all their value. What reason,
+      then, can you possibly have in refusing to tell me the name of the
+      commander who has won for himself such credit and glory?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise saw that Ben Ibyn was seriously annoyed at what he deemed his
+      unaccountable obstinacy.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I will tell you, Ben Ibyn, rather than excite your displeasure, though I
+      would much have preferred not to do so, for you speak so much more highly
+      of the affair than it merits. I had myself the honour of being in command
+      of that galley.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The ladies broke into exclamations of surprise, while the merchant
+      regarded him with grave displeasure.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I had thought you truthful,&rdquo; he said; &ldquo;but this passes all belief. Dost
+      tell me that a beardless youth could with one galley overcome a great
+      fleet, commanded by the most noted captains on our coast?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I thought that you would not believe me,&rdquo; Gervaise said quietly; &ldquo;and,
+      therefore, would have much preferred to keep silence, knowing that I had
+      no means of supporting my claim. That was not the only reason; the other
+      was, that already a great deal too much has been said about an affair in
+      which, as I have told you, I owed everything to good fortune, and am
+      heartily sick of receiving what I consider altogether undue praise. Ah!&rdquo;
+       he exclaimed suddenly, &ldquo;the thought has just occurred to me of a way by
+      which you can obtain confirmation of my story; and, as I value your good
+      opinion and would not be regarded as a boaster and a liar, I entreat you
+      to take it. I heard you tell the eight men who were rowers in my boat when
+      I was captured, to call upon you today, that you might do something for
+      them.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;They came this morning to my store,&rdquo; the merchant said. &ldquo;They told me
+      their wishes. I promised them that I would make inquiry about ships
+      sailing East; and they are to come to me again tomorrow.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Then, sir, I beseech you to suffer me to go down with you to your stores
+      and meet them there. The galley of which I was in command at the time I
+      was captured is the same as that in which a few weeks before I fought the
+      corsairs, and these eight men were with me at that time. I begged them for
+      my sake to maintain an absolute silence as to that affair, and I have no
+      doubt that they have done so, for in the fury the news would excite, they
+      might fall victims to the first outburst, though, of course, wholly
+      innocent of any share in the misfortune. Did you question them without my
+      being present, they might still keep silent, fearing to injure me. But if,
+      before you begin to do so, I tell them that they can speak the truth with
+      reference to me, they will, I am sure, confirm my story, incredible as it
+      may now appear to you.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;That is a fair offer,&rdquo; the merchant said gravely, &ldquo;and I accept it, for
+      it may be that I have been too hasty, and I trust it may prove so. I would
+      rather find myself to be in fault than that the esteem with which you have
+      inspired me should prove to be misplaced. We will speak no further on the
+      subject now. I have not yet asked you how it is that you come to speak our
+      language so well.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise related how he had studied with Suleiman Ali, and had escorted
+      him to Syria and received his ransom.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I had hoped,&rdquo; he said, &ldquo;that the corsair would have taken me to Syria,
+      for there I could have communicated with Suleiman, who would, I am sure,
+      have given me such shelter and aid as he was able, in the event of my
+      making my escape from slavery and finding myself unable to leave by sea.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The next day Gervaise went with Ben Ibyn to his stores. The eight men
+      arrived shortly afterwards, and the merchant, in the presence of Gervaise,
+      questioned them as to whether they knew anything of a misfortune that was
+      said to have befallen some ships that had sailed for the coast of Italy.
+      The men, surprised at the question, glanced at Gervaise, who said, &ldquo;Tell
+      Ben Ibyn the truth; it will do neither you nor me any harm, and will be
+      mentioned by him to no one else.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Accordingly the story was told. Ben Ibyn listened gravely.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It was the will of Allah,&rdquo; he said, when it was concluded. &ldquo;I have
+      wronged you, Gervaise, but your tale seemed too marvellous to be true.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Do not speak of this to others;&rdquo; he went on to the eight men. &ldquo;Now as to
+      yourselves. For the four of you who desire to return to Syria I have taken
+      passage in a trader that sails tomorrow and will touch at Joppa and Acre.
+      Here is money to provide yourselves with garments and to carry you to your
+      homes. For you,&rdquo; he said to two who were natives of the town, &ldquo;I can
+      myself find employment here, and if your conduct is good, you will have no
+      reason to regret taking service with me. The two of you who desire to go
+      to Smyrna I will give passage there in a ship which will sail next week;
+      in the meantime, here is money for your present wants.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Two days later the merchant's family moved to his house two miles outside
+      the town, and here Gervaise remained for six months. His life was not an
+      unpleasant one; he was treated with great kindness by the merchant and his
+      wife, his duties were but slight, and he had no more labour to perform in
+      the garden than he cared to do. Nevertheless, he felt that he would rather
+      have fallen into the hands of a less kind master, for it seemed to him
+      that it would be an act almost of treachery to escape from those who
+      treated him as a friend; moreover, at the country house he was not in a
+      position to frame any plans for escape, had he decided upon attempting it,
+      nor could he have found out when Hassan made one of his occasional visits
+      to the port.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      One evening the merchant returned from the town accompanied by one of the
+      sultan's officers and four soldiers. Ben Ibyn was evidently much depressed
+      and disturbed; he told Muley as he entered, to fetch Gervaise. When the
+      latter, in obedience to the order, came in from the garden, the officer
+      said in Italian, &ldquo;It having come to the ears of the sultan my master that
+      the merchant Ben Ibyn has ventured, contrary to the law, to purchase a
+      Christian slave brought secretly into the town, he has declared the slave
+      to be forfeited and I am commanded to take him at once to the slaves'
+      quarter.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I am at the sultan's orders,&rdquo; Gervaise said, bowing his head. &ldquo;My master
+      has been a kind one, and I am grateful to him for his treatment of me.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise, although taken aback by this sudden change in his fortunes, was
+      not so cast down as he might otherwise have been; he would now be free to
+      carry out any plan for escape that he might devise, and by his being
+      addressed in Italian it was evident to him that his knowledge of Turkish
+      was unsuspected. When among the other slaves he had always maintained his
+      character of a mute; and it was only when alone in his master's family
+      that he had spoken at all. He had no doubt that his betrayal was due to
+      one of the gardeners, who had several times shown him signs of ill will,
+      being doubtless jealous of the immunity he enjoyed from hard labour, and
+      who must, he thought, have crept up and overheard some conversation; but
+      in that case it was singular that the fact of his knowledge of Turkish had
+      not been mentioned. Gervaise afterwards learned that Ben Ibyn had been
+      fined a heavy sum for his breach of the regulations.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      He was now placed between the soldiers, and marched down to the town,
+      without being allowed to exchange a word with the merchant. On his arrival
+      there he was taken to the slaves' quarter; here his clothes were stripped
+      from him, and he was given in their place a ragged shirt and trousers, and
+      then turned into a room where some fifty slaves were lying. Of these about
+      half were Europeans, the rest malefactors who had been condemned to
+      labour.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The appearance of all was miserable in the extreme; they were clothed in
+      rags, and the faces of the Europeans had a dull, hopeless look that told
+      alike of their misery and of their despair of any escape from it. They
+      looked up listlessly as he entered, and then an Italian said, &ldquo;Cospetto,
+      comrade; but I know not whether your place is with us, or with the Moslems
+      across there. As far as colour goes I should put you down as a Nubian; but
+      your hair is of a hue that consorts but badly with that of your flesh.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I am an Englishman,&rdquo; Gervaise replied; &ldquo;but I have been passing under a
+      disguise which has unfortunately been detected, so you see here I am.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The mystery explained, his questioner had no further interest in the
+      matter, and Gervaise, picking out a vacant place on the stone floor, sat
+      down and looked round him. The room, although large, was roughly built,
+      and had doubtless been erected with a view to its present purpose. There
+      were only a few windows; and these were small, strongly barred, and twelve
+      feet above the floor.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Not easy to get out of them,&rdquo; Gervaise said to himself &ldquo;at least, not
+      easy without aid; and with these Moslems here it is clear that nothing can
+      be done.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      They were roused at daybreak next morning, and were taken out to their
+      work under the guard of six armed Moors, two overseers, provided with long
+      whips, accompanied them. The work consisted of cleaning the streets and
+      working on the roads, and at times of carrying stones for the use of the
+      masons employed in building an addition to the palace of the sultan. This
+      was the work to which the gang was set that morning, and it was not long
+      before the vigour with which Gervaise worked, and the strength he
+      displayed in moving the heavy stones, attracted the attention of the
+      overseers and of the head of the masons.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;That is a rare good fellow you have got there, that black with the
+      curious hair,&rdquo; the latter said. &ldquo;What is the man? I never saw one like
+      him.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;He is a Christian,&rdquo; one of the overseers said. &ldquo;He was smuggled into the
+      town and sold to Ben Ibyn the Berber, who, to conceal the matter, dyed him
+      black; but it got to the ears of the sultan, and he had him taken from the
+      Berber, and brought here; I have no doubt the merchant has been squeezed
+      rarely.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Well, that is a good fellow to work,&rdquo; the other said. &ldquo;He has just moved
+      a stone, single handed, that it would have taken half a dozen of the
+      others to lift. I wish you would put him regularly on this job; any one
+      will do to sweep the streets; but a fellow like that will be of real use
+      here, especially when the wall rises a bit higher.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It makes no difference to me,&rdquo; the overseer said. &ldquo;I will give orders
+      when I go down that he shall be always sent up with whichever gang comes
+      here.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The head mason, who was the chief official of the work, soon saw that
+      Gervaise not only possessed strength, but knowledge of the manner in which
+      the work should be done.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Accustomed as he had been to direct the slaves at work on the
+      fortifications at Rhodes, he had learned the best methods of moving
+      massive stones, and setting them in the places that they were to occupy.
+      At the end of the day the head mason told one of the slaves who spoke
+      Italian to inquire of Gervaise whether he had ever been employed on such
+      work before. Gervaise replied that he had been engaged in the construction
+      of large buildings.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I thought so,&rdquo; the officer said to the overseer; &ldquo;the way he uses his
+      lever shows that he knows what he is doing. Most of the slaves are worth
+      nothing; but I can see that this fellow will prove a treasure to us.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise returned to the prison well satisfied with his day's work. The
+      labour, hard though it was, was an absolute pleasure to him. There was,
+      moreover, nothing degrading in it, and while the overseers had plied their
+      whips freely on the backs of many of his companions, he had not only
+      escaped, but had, he felt, succeeded in pleasing his masters. The next
+      morning when the gangs were drawn up in the yard before starting for work,
+      he was surprised at being ordered to leave the one to which he belonged
+      and to fall in with another, and was greatly pleased when he found that
+      this took its way to the spot at which they were at work on the previous
+      day.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      At the end of the week, when the work of the day was finished, the head
+      mason came down to the prison and spoke to the governor; a few minutes
+      afterwards Gervaise was called out. The governor was standing in the
+      courtyard with an interpreter.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;This officer tells me that you are skilled in masonry,&rdquo; the governor
+      said, &ldquo;and has desired that you shall be appointed overseer of the gang
+      whose duty it is to move the stones, saying he is sure that with half the
+      slaves now employed you would get as much work done as at present. Have
+      you anything to say?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I thank you, my lord, and this officer,&rdquo; Gervaise replied. &ldquo;I will do my
+      best; but I would submit to you that it would be better if I could have
+      the same slaves always with me, instead of their being changed every day;
+      I could then instruct them in their work. I would also submit that it were
+      well to pick men with some strength for this labour, for many are so weak
+      that they are well nigh useless in the moving of heavy weights; and
+      lastly, I would humbly submit to you that if men are to do good work they
+      must be fed. This work is as heavy as that in the galleys, and the men
+      there employed receive extra rations to strengthen them; and I could
+      assuredly obtain far better results if the gang employed upon this labour
+      were to receive a somewhat larger supply of food.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;The fellow speaks boldly,&rdquo; the governor said to the head mason, when the
+      reply was translated.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;There is reason in what he says, my lord. Many of the slaves, though fit
+      for the light labour of cleaning the streets, are of very little use to
+      us, and even the whip of the drivers cannot get more than a momentary
+      effort from them. If you can save twenty-five men's labour for other work,
+      it will pay to give more food to the other twenty-five. I should let this
+      man pick out his gang. He has worked in turn with all of them, and must
+      know what each can do; besides, it is necessary that he should have men
+      who can understand his orders.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise accordingly was allowed to pick out his gang; and he chose those
+      whom he had observed to be the strongest and most handy at the work.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;You will be responsible,&rdquo; the governor said to him, &ldquo;for the masons being
+      supplied with stone, and if you fail you will be punished and put to other
+      labour.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      So far from there being any falling off in the work, the head mason found
+      that, even though the walls began to rise and the labour of transporting
+      the stones into their positions became greater, the masons were never kept
+      standing. The men, finding their position improved, both in the matter of
+      food and in the immunity they enjoyed from blows, worked cheerfully and
+      well. Gervaise did not content himself with giving orders, but worked at
+      the heaviest jobs, and, little by little, introduced many of the
+      appliances used by the skilled masons of Rhodes in transporting and
+      lifting heavy stones. Gradually his own position improved: he was treated
+      as an overseer, and was permitted to sleep under an arcade that ran along
+      one side of the yard, instead of being confined in the close and stifling
+      cell. His dye had long since worn off.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      One day as he was going up with his gang under charge of the usual guards
+      to the building, he saw Hassan, who grinned maliciously.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Ah, ah, Christian dog!&rdquo; he said; &ldquo;you threatened me, and I have not
+      forgotten it. The last time I was here I made it known to an officer of
+      the sultan that Ben Ibyn had a Christian slave who had been smuggled in;
+      and here you are. I hope you like the change. Look, I have still got your
+      amulet, and it has brought me better luck than it did you. I have been
+      fortunate ever since, and no money could buy it from me.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      He had been walking close to Gervaise as he spoke, and one of the guards
+      pushed him roughly aside.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Time passed on. One day on his return from work a well dressed Moor met
+      him as the gang broke up in the courtyard.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I have permission to speak to you,&rdquo; he said to Gervaise, and drew him
+      aside. &ldquo;Know, O Christian, that I have received a letter from Suleiman
+      Ali, of Syria. He tells me that he has heard from Ben Ibyn, the Berber,
+      that you are a slave, and has asked me to inquire of the sultan the price
+      that he will take for your ransom, expressing his willingness to pay
+      whatever may be demanded, and charging me to defray the sum and to make
+      arrangements by which you may return to Europe. This I am willing to do,
+      knowing Suleiman Ali by report as a wealthy man and an honourable one. I
+      saw the sultan yesterday. He told me that I should have an answer this
+      morning as to the ransom that he would take. When I went to him again
+      today, he said that he had learnt from the governor of the prison and from
+      the head mason that you were almost beyond price, that you had been raised
+      to the position of superintendent of the slaves employed in the building
+      of his palace, and that you were a man of such skill that he would not
+      part with you at any price until the work was finished. After that he
+      would sell you; but he named a price threefold that at which the very best
+      white slave in Tripoli would be valued. However, from the way in which
+      Suleiman Ali wrote, I doubt not that he would pay it, great as it is, for
+      he speaks of you in terms of affection, and I would pay the money could
+      you be released at once. As it is, however, I shall write to him, and
+      there will be ample time for an answer to be received from him before the
+      building is finished.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Truly I am deeply thankful to my good friend, Suleiman Ali; but for
+      reasons of my own I am not desirous of being ransomed at present,
+      especially at such a cost, which I should feel bound in honour to repay to
+      him; therefore, I pray you to write to him, saying that while I thank him
+      from my heart for his kindness, I am not able to avail myself of it. In
+      the first place, I am well treated here, and my position is not an
+      unpleasant one; secondly, the sum required for ransom is altogether
+      preposterous; thirdly, I am not without hopes that I may some day find
+      other means of freeing myself without so great a sacrifice; and lastly,
+      that I have a reason which I cannot mention, why, at present, I would not
+      quit Tripoli, even were I free tomorrow. You can tell him that this is the
+      reason which, most of all, weighs with me. Do not, however, I pray you,
+      let the sultan know that I have refused to be ransomed, for he might think
+      I was meditating an escape, and would order extra precautions to be taken
+      to prevent my doing so. Will you also see Ben Ibyn, and thank him from me
+      for having written to Suleiman Ali on my behalf?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      <a name="link2HCH0019" id="link2HCH0019">
+      <!--  H2 anchor --> </a>
+    </p>
+    <div style="height: 4em;">
+      <br /><br /><br /><br />
+    </div>
+    <h2>
+      CHAPTER XIX ESCAPE
+    </h2>
+    <p>
+      Gradually a greater amount of liberty was given to Gervaise. Escape from
+      Tripoli was deemed impossible, especially as he was supposed to be
+      entirely ignorant of Arabic. He was, indeed, scarcely regarded now as a
+      slave by the head mason, and instead of being clad in rags was dressed
+      like other overseers. He was no longer obliged to walk with the gang to
+      and from the palace, and was at last granted permission to go into the
+      town for an hour or two after his work was over, instead of returning
+      direct to the prison. The first time this permission was given to him he
+      placed himself on the road by which Ben Ibyn would leave the town,
+      choosing a quiet spot where the meeting would not be observed. Gervaise
+      had for some time taken to staining his face, hands, and legs with walnut
+      juice, beginning with a weak solution, and very gradually increasing the
+      strength until he had reached a shade approximating to that of the lighter
+      coloured portion of the population. The head mason had on one occasion
+      noticed it, and said, &ldquo;The sun is darkening your skin, Gervaise, until you
+      might verily pass as a Moor.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise detected an expression of doubt in the tone the officer had
+      spoken to the interpreter, and replied at once, &ldquo;It is not altogether the
+      sun. Since I have obtained permission to come to my work alone, I have
+      taken to slightly darkening my skin, in order to go to and fro unmolested,
+      and free from the insults that the boys and beggars hurl at Christians.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The master mason nodded approvingly when the answer was translated to him.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It is a wise step,&rdquo; he said; &ldquo;for truly the hatred of Christians is very
+      strong among the lower classes, especially since it became known that the
+      galleys that sailed from here nearly two years ago were, with all the
+      fleet from which so much was expected, utterly destroyed. It is well,
+      then, that you should pass unnoticed, for were there a tumult in the
+      street you might lose your life, and I should lose the best labour
+      overseer I have ever had.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Thus, then, as Gervaise walked through the streets on the first occasion
+      of obtaining his liberty, he attracted no attention whatever. When he saw
+      Ben Ibyn approaching he stepped out to meet him. The merchant looked in
+      his face, but for a moment failed to recognise him, then he exclaimed
+      suddenly, &ldquo;It is Gervaise! Ah, my son, I am indeed rejoiced to see you. We
+      have spoken of you so often at home, and sorely did my wife and daughters
+      grieve when you were torn from us. I did not dare to send any message to
+      you, for the sultan pretended great anger against me, and used the
+      opportunity to squeeze me hardly; but I have frequently made inquiries
+      about you, and was glad indeed to find that even in prison you received
+      promotion; had it been otherwise&mdash;had I found that you were in misery&mdash;I
+      would have endeavoured, whatever the risk, to aid you to escape.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I have indeed nothing to complain of, and was sorry to learn that you had
+      suffered on my account. Have you ever learned how it came about that I was
+      denounced?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;No, indeed; I would have given much to know, and assuredly the dog,
+      whoever he was, should have been made to suffer.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It was Hassan. The villain met me when I was with the gang, and boasted
+      that it was he who had sent me there. He had told the news to some
+      official, who had, of course, repeated it to the sultan; doubtless he
+      concealed his own share in the matter, otherwise he too would, next time
+      he returned here, have had to pay for his part in it.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I will make him pay more heavily than the sultan would,&rdquo; Ben Ibyn said
+      sternly; &ldquo;I will speak to my friends among the merchants, and henceforth
+      no Berber will buy aught from him; and we have hitherto been his best
+      customers. But let us not waste our time in speaking of this wretch. How
+      comes it that you are walking freely in the streets of Tripoli? I can see
+      that your face is stained, although you are no longer a Nubian.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise told him how it was that he was free to walk in the city after
+      his work was done.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I shall now,&rdquo; he went on, &ldquo;be able to carry out any plan of escape that
+      may occur to me; but before I leave, as I shall certainly do ere long, I
+      mean to settle my score with Hassan, and I pray you to send one of the men
+      who were with me in the galley, and whom you took into your employment,
+      directly you hear that his ship is in harbour. Do not give him either a
+      note or a message: bid him simply place himself in the road between the
+      prison gate and the palace, and look fixedly at me as I pass. I shall know
+      it is a signal that Hassan is in the port.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Can I aid you in your flight? I will willingly do so.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;All that I shall need is the garb of a peasant,&rdquo; Gervaise said. &ldquo;I might
+      buy one unnoticed; but, in the first place, I have no money, and in the
+      second, when it is known that I have escaped, the trader might recall the
+      fact that one of the slave overseers had purchased a suit of him.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;The dress of an Arab would be the best,&rdquo; the merchant said. &ldquo;That I will
+      procure and hold in readiness for you. On the day when I send you word
+      that Hassan is here, I will see that the gate of my garden is unbarred at
+      night, and will place the garments down just behind it. You mean, I
+      suppose, to travel by land?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I shall do so for some distance. Were I to steal a boat from the port, it
+      would be missed in the morning, and I be overtaken. I shall therefore go
+      along the coast for some distance and get a boat at one of the villages,
+      choosing my time when there is a brisk wind, and when I may be able to get
+      well beyond any risk of being overtaken. Now, Ben Ibyn, I will leave you;
+      it were better that we should not meet again, lest some suspicion might
+      fall upon you of having aided in my escape. I cannot thank you too much
+      for all your past kindness, and shall ever bear a grateful remembrance of
+      yourself and your family.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Perhaps it were better so,&rdquo; Ben Ibyn said; &ldquo;for if the Moors can find any
+      excuse for plundering us, they do so. Have you heard the news that the
+      Sultan of Turkey's expedition for the capture of Rhodes is all but
+      complete, and will assuredly sail before many weeks have passed?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I have not heard it,&rdquo; Gervaise replied; &ldquo;and trust that I may be in time
+      to bear my share in the defence. However, the blow has been so often
+      threatened that it may be some time before it falls.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;May Allah bless you, my son, and take you safely back to your friends! Be
+      assured that you shall have notice as soon as I know that Hassan has
+      returned, and you shall have the bundle with all that is needful, behind
+      my gate.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Another two months passed. Gervaise looked in vain for Ben Ibyn's
+      messenger as he went to and from the palace, and chafed terribly at the
+      delay, when, for aught he knew, the Turkish fleet might already have
+      brought Mahomet's army to Rhodes. At last, as he came back from work, he
+      saw with intense satisfaction one of the men, whose face he recognised,
+      leaning carelessly against the wall. The man gave no sign of recognition,
+      but looked at him earnestly for a minute, and then sauntered off up the
+      street. Gervaise went up into the town as usual, walked about until it
+      became quite dark, and then went to the gate that led into the merchant's
+      garden. He found that it was unfastened, and, opening it, he went in and
+      closed it behind him. As he did so he started, for a voice close by said,
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Master, it is I, the messenger whom you saw two hours since. Ben Ibyn
+      bade me say that he thought you might require some service, and, knowing
+      that I could be trusted, bade me wait for you here. He thought that you
+      might possibly need a messenger to Hassan.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;The very thing,&rdquo; Gervaise exclaimed. &ldquo;I have been puzzling myself in vain
+      as to how I could get speech with him in some quiet place; but with your
+      assistance that will be easy; but first let me put on this disguise.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      This was easily effected, even in the dark. A loose flowing robe of white
+      cotton, girt in at the waist, a long bernouse with hood to cover the head,
+      a sash with a dagger, and a scimitar, completed the disguise.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Here is a pouch,&rdquo; the man said, &ldquo;with money for your journey, and a long
+      sword, which he says you can hang at your back beneath your bernouse.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise gave an exclamation of pleasure. By its length and weight he was
+      sure that the weapon must have been the property of a Christian knight.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Shall I carry the message this evening?&rdquo; the man asked. &ldquo;It is early
+      still, and it were best that you should not linger in the city, where
+      there is sure to be a strict search for you in the morning.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;But perhaps he may recognise your face?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It is blackened, my lord, and I am dressed as you were when with Ben
+      Ibyn.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Let us settle our plans, then, before we sally out from here; we could
+      not find a safer place for talking. What message, think you, would be the
+      most likely to tempt Hassan to come ashore? You do not know what spoil he
+      has brought?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;No; besides, if a merchant wanted to buy he would go on board to inspect
+      Hassan's wares. We must have something to sell. It must be something
+      tempting, and something that must be disposed of secretly. I might tell
+      him that my employer&mdash;and I would mention some merchant whose name
+      would carry weight with him&mdash;has received from the interior a large
+      consignment of slaves, among whom are three or four girls, who would fetch
+      high prices in Egypt, and as he believes they have been captured from a
+      tribe within the limits of the sultan's territory, he is anxious to get
+      rid of them, and will either dispose of them all cheaply in a lot, or will
+      hand them over to him to take to Egypt to sell, giving him a large
+      commission for carrying them there and disposing of them.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I do not like tempting even an enemy by stories that are untrue,&rdquo;
+       Gervaise said doubtfully.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I have no scruples that way,&rdquo; the man said, with a laugh; &ldquo;and it is I
+      who shall tell the story, and not you.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise shook his head.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Could you not say that you came from one who owes him a heavy debt and
+      desires to pay him?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I do not think that would bring him ashore. Hassan doubtless trades for
+      ready money, and must be well aware that no one here can be greatly in his
+      debt. No, my lord; leave the matter in my hands. I will think of some
+      story before I go on board that will fetch him ashore. But first we must
+      settle where I am to bring him; there are some deserted spots near the
+      wall on the east side of the town.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I know where you mean,&rdquo; Gervaise agreed; &ldquo;let us go in that direction at
+      once, for the sooner you are off the better.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      In half an hour a spot was fixed on, near some huts that had fallen into
+      ruin. Here Gervaise seated himself on a sand heap, while the man hurried
+      away. The moon had just risen, it being but three days since it was at its
+      full. The night was quiet; sounds of music, laughter, and occasional
+      shouts came faintly from the town. Seated where he was, Gervaise could see
+      the port and the ships lying there. Half an hour later he saw a boat row
+      off to one of them, which he had already singled out, from its size and
+      general appearance, as being that of Hassan; ten minutes later he saw it
+      returning. At that distance separate figures could not be made out, but it
+      seemed to him that it loomed larger than before, and he thought that
+      certainly one, if not more, persons, were returning with his messenger.
+      Presently he heard men approaching; then Hassan's voice came distinctly to
+      his ears.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;How much farther are you going to take me? Remember, I warned you that
+      unless I found that my journey repaid me, it would be bad for you.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It is but a few yards farther, my lord. There is my master the sheik of
+      the Beni Kalis awaiting you.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise rose to his feet as Hassan and two of his crew came up.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Now,&rdquo; the former said roughly, &ldquo;where have you bestowed these captives
+      you want to sell me?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Will you please to follow me into this courtyard?&rdquo; Gervaise said. He had,
+      while waiting, reconnoitred the neighbourhood, and found an enclosure with
+      the walls still perfect, and had determined to bring Hassan there, in
+      order to prevent him from taking to flight. Hassan entered it
+      unsuspectingly, followed by his two men. Gervaise fell back a little, so
+      as to place himself between them and the entrance. Then he threw back the
+      hood of his bernouse.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Do you recognise me, Hassan?&rdquo; he said sternly. &ldquo;I am the captive whom you
+      beat almost to death. I told you that some day I would kill you; but even
+      now I am willing to forgive you and to allow you to depart in peace, if
+      you will restore the amulet you took from me.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The corsair gave a howl of rage.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Christian dog!&rdquo; he exclaimed. &ldquo;You thought to lead me into a trap, but
+      you have fallen into one yourself. You reckoned that I should come alone;
+      but I suspected there was something hidden behind the story of that black,
+      and so brought two of my crew with me. Upon him, men! Cut him down!&rdquo; So
+      saying, he drew his scimitar, and sprang furiously upon Gervaise. The
+      latter stepped back into the centre of the gateway, so as to prevent the
+      men, who had also drawn their swords, passing to attack him from behind.
+      He had undone the clasp of his bernouse, and allowed it to fall to the
+      ground as he addressed Hassan, and his long sword flashed in the moonlight
+      as the corsair sprang forward.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Hassan was a good swordsman, and his ferocious bravery had rendered him
+      one of the most dreaded of the Moorish rovers. Inferior in strength to
+      Gervaise, he was as active as a cat, and he leapt back with the spring of
+      a panther, avoiding the sweeping blow with which Gervaise had hoped to
+      finish the conflict at once; the latter found himself therefore engaged in
+      a desperate fight with his three assailants. So furiously did they attack
+      him that, foot by foot, he was forced to give ground. As he stepped
+      through the gateway one of the pirates sprang past him, but as he did so,
+      a figure leapt out from beyond the wall, and plunged a dagger into his
+      back, while at the same moment, by cutting down another pirate, Gervaise
+      rid himself of one of his assailants in front; but as he did so, he
+      himself received a severe wound on the left shoulder from Hassan, who,
+      before he could again raise his weapon, sprang upon him, and tried to hurl
+      him to the ground.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise's superior weight saved him from falling, though he staggered
+      back some paces; then his heel caught against a stone, and he fell,
+      dragging Hassan to the ground with him. Tightly clasped in each other's
+      arms, they rolled over and over. Gervaise succeeded at last in getting the
+      upper hand, but as he did so Hassan twisted his right arm free, snatched
+      the dagger from Gervaise's girdle, and struck furiously at him. Gervaise,
+      who had half risen to his knees, was unable to avoid the blow, but threw
+      himself forward, his weight partly pinning the corsair's shoulders to the
+      ground, and the blow passed behind him, inflicting but a slight wound in
+      the back; then, with his right hand, which was now free, he grasped Hassan
+      by the throat with a grip of iron. The pirate struggled convulsively for a
+      moment, then his left hand released his grasp of his opponent's wrist. A
+      minute later Gervaise rose to his feet: the pirate was dead.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise stooped and raised the fallen man's head from the ground, felt
+      for the chain, pulled up Claudia's gage, and placed it round his own neck;
+      then he turned to his guide.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I have to thank you for my life,&rdquo; he said, holding out his hand to him.
+      &ldquo;It would have gone hard with me if that fellow had attacked me from
+      behind. I had not bargained for three of them.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I could not help it, my lord. It was not until Hassan had stepped down
+      into the boat that I knew he was going to take any one with him; then he
+      suddenly told two of his men to take their places by him, saying to me, as
+      he did so, 'I know not whether this message is a snare; but mind, if I see
+      any signs of treachery, your life at any rate will pay the forfeit.' I
+      knew not what to do, and indeed could do nothing; but, knowing my lord's
+      valour, I thought that, even against these odds, you might conquer with
+      such poor aid as I could give you.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It was not poor aid at all,&rdquo; Gervaise said heartily. &ldquo;Greatly am I
+      indebted to you, and sorry indeed am I, that I am unable to reward you now
+      for the great service that you have rendered me.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Do not trouble about that, my lord. I am greatly mistaken if I do not
+      find in the sashes of these three villains sufficient to repay me amply
+      for my share in this evening's work. And now, my lord, I pray you to
+      linger not a moment. The gates of the town shut at ten o'clock, and it
+      cannot be long from that hour now. But first, I pray you, let me bind up
+      your shoulder; your garment is soaked with blood.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Fortunately my bernouse will hide that; but it were certainly best to
+      staunch the blood before I start, for it would be hard for me to get at
+      the wound myself.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The man took one of the sashes of the corsairs, tore it into strips, and
+      bandaged the wound; then with another he made a sling for the arm. As he
+      took off the sashes a leather bag dropped from each, and there was a chink
+      of metal. He placed them in his girdle, saying, &ldquo;I shall have time to
+      count them when I get back.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise sheathed his sword, and put on the bernouse, pulling the hood
+      well over his head; then, with a few more words of thanks, started for the
+      gate, leaving the man to search Hassan's girdle.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The gate was a quarter of a mile distant. Gervaise passed through with the
+      usual Arabic salutation to the sentry, and with difficulty repressed a
+      shout of exultation as he left Tripoli behind him.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Following the coast road he walked till daylight; then he left it and lay
+      down among the sand hills for five or six hours. He calculated that no
+      pursuit would be begun until midday. His absence was not likely to be
+      noticed until the gangs began work in the morning, when an alarm would be
+      given. The sentries at the gates on the previous evening would be
+      questioned, and when it was found that no one answering to his description
+      had passed out before these were closed, there would be a rigid search
+      throughout the city and port. The vessels would all be examined, and the
+      boatmen questioned as to whether any craft was missing. Not until the
+      search proved absolutely fruitless would it be seriously suspected that he
+      had, either by passing through the gates in disguise, or by scaling the
+      walls, made for the interior. None knew that he could speak Arabic, and it
+      would be so hopeless an undertaking for any one unacquainted with the
+      language to traverse the country without being detected, that the Moors
+      would be slow to believe that he had embarked upon such adventure.
+      However, when all search for him in the town and in the vessels in the
+      port proved fruitless, doubtless mounted men would be despatched in all
+      directions; some would take the coast roads, while others would ride into
+      the interior to warn the head men of the villages to be on the lookout for
+      an escaped slave.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      After a sleep of five hours, Gervaise pursued his journey. He had walked
+      for eight hours, and calculated that he must be fully thirty miles from
+      Tripoli, and that not until evening would searchers overtake him. After
+      walking four miles he came to a large village. There he purchased a bag of
+      dates, sat down on a stone bench by the roadside to eat them, and entered
+      into conversation with two or three Moors who sauntered up. To these he
+      represented that he belonged to a party of his tribe who had encamped for
+      the day at a short distance from the village in order to rest their horses
+      before riding into Tripoli, whither they were proceeding to exchange skins
+      of animals taken in the chase, and some young horses, for cotton clothes,
+      knives, and other articles of barter with the tribes beyond them.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      After quenching his thirst at a well in front of the mosque, he retraced
+      his steps until beyond the village, then struck out into the country, made
+      a detour, came down into the road again, and continued his journey
+      eastward. He walked until nightfall, and then again lay down.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      He was now fully fifty miles from Tripoli, and hoped that he was beyond
+      the point to which horsemen from that town would think of pursuing their
+      search. It was likely that they would not have gone beyond the village at
+      which he had halted on the previous day; for when they learned from the
+      inhabitants that no stranger, save an Arab, had entered it, they would
+      content themselves with warning the head man to be on the watch for any
+      stranger unable to speak their tongue, and would not consider it necessary
+      to push their steps farther.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      For four days Gervaise continued his journey. At each village through
+      which he passed he added to his stock of dates, until he had as many as he
+      could carry under his bernouse without attracting observation. He also
+      purchased a large water bottle, which he slung round his neck.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      All this time the sea lay to his left like a sheet of glass, and he knew
+      that until a change of weather occurred, it was useless for him to attempt
+      to escape by boat. On the fifth day there were signs of a change. He saw a
+      dark line far out at sea; it came across the water rapidly, and presently
+      a gentle breeze began to blow from the northwest; it gradually increased
+      in strength, and when, in the afternoon, he stopped at a village, the
+      waves were breaking upon the shore.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      After repeating his usual story, he sauntered down to the water's edge.
+      There were several boats hauled up, and a hundred yards out two or three
+      larger craft were lying at anchor. He entered into conversation with some
+      of the fishermen, and his questions as to the boats led them to believe
+      him altogether ignorant of the sea. The craft were, they told him, used
+      sometimes for fishing, but they often made voyages to towns along the
+      coast with dates and other produce. Each boat carried a single short mast,
+      to the top of which was attached a long tapering spar, on which the sail
+      was furled.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise knew that these small feluccas were generally fast sailors and
+      fair sea boats, and resolved to seize one of them, trusting that when once
+      the sail was shaken out he would be able to manage it single handed.
+      Accustomed to boats, he picked out that which he thought would be the
+      fastest, and then walked away for half a mile, and lay down to sleep until
+      the village was silent for the night. He had with him some oaten cakes he
+      had bought there, a string of fish he had purchased from the boatmen, and
+      with these and the dates he thought he could manage for four or five days
+      at least. As to water, he could only hope that he should find a supply on
+      board the boat. When he judged it to be about ten o'clock he went down to
+      the shore again, took off his clothes and made them into a bundle; then,
+      wading out into the water to within fifty yards of the felucca, swam off
+      to it, towing the bundle behind him.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      He had no difficulty in climbing on board, and after dressing himself in
+      the clothes he had worn at Tripoli, and had kept on underneath the Arab
+      attire, he pulled the head rope until the craft was nearly over the
+      anchor. He then loosened the line that brailed up the sail, got the stone
+      that served as an anchor on board, hauled the sheet aft, and took his
+      place at the tiller. The wind had dropped a good deal with the sun, but
+      there was still sufficient air to send the light craft fast through the
+      water. He steered out for a time, and then, when he thought himself a good
+      mile from the shore, headed east. By the appearance of the water as it
+      glanced past, he thought that he must be making from five to six miles an
+      hour, and when the sun rose at five o'clock, believed that he was nearly
+      forty miles on his way. He now fastened the tiller with a rope and
+      proceeded to overhaul the craft.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      It was decked over forward only, and he crept into the cabin, which was
+      little more than three feet high. The first thing his eye lit on was a
+      bulky object hanging against the side, and covered with a thick black
+      blanket of Arab manufacture. Lifting this, he saw, as he expected, that
+      the object beneath it was a large waterskin well filled; the blanket had
+      evidently been placed over it to keep it cool when the sun streamed down
+      on the deck above it. There was also a large bag of dates, and another of
+      flat cakes, and he guessed that these had all been put on board the
+      evening before, in readiness for a start in the morning. This relieved him
+      of his chief anxiety, for he had been unable to think of any plan for
+      replenishing his supply, or to concoct a likely tale that, were he obliged
+      to go on shore, would account for his being alone in a craft of that size.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The wind increased again after sunrise, and being unable to reef the sail
+      single handed he managed partially to brail it up. All day the craft flew
+      along with the wind on the quarter, making six or seven miles an hour; and
+      he felt that by morning he would be well beyond pursuit. On the run he
+      passed several craft engaged in fishing, but these gave him no uneasiness.
+      He had in the morning, with some old sails he found, constructed three
+      rough imitations of human figures, one with the Arab dress and another
+      with the bernouse, and had placed them against the bulwarks, so that at a
+      short distance it would appear that there were three men on board. Feeling
+      confident that the deception would not be noticed, he kept his course
+      without swerving, and passed some of the fishing boats within hailing
+      distance, waving his hand and shouting the usual Arab salutation to their
+      crews.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      During the day he contented himself with eating some dates and an oatmeal
+      cake or two; but at sunset he added to this two or three fish that he had
+      split open and hung up to dry in the sun and wind. There was charcoal on
+      board, and a flat stone served as a hearth in the bottom of the boat, but
+      he had no means of lighting a fire, for this the fishermen would have
+      brought off when they came on board in the morning. After he had finished
+      his meal and taken his place again at the tiller he altered his course.
+      Hitherto he had been steering to the south of east, following the line of
+      coast, but he now saw before him the projecting promontory of Cape
+      Mezurata, which marks the western entrance of the great Gulf of Sydra; and
+      he now directed his course two points north of east, so as to strike the
+      opposite promontory, known as Grenna, more than a hundred miles away. The
+      wind fell much lighter, and he shook out the sail to its full extent. All
+      night he kept at his post, but finding the wind perfectly steady he lashed
+      the tiller so as to keep the boat's head in the direction in which he was
+      steering, and dozed for some hours, waking up occasionally to assure
+      himself that she was keeping her course.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      At sunrise he indulged in a wash in sea water, and felt freshened and
+      revived. He now kept a sharp lookout for distant sails, for he was out of
+      the ordinary course a coaster would take, and would have attracted the
+      attention of any corsair coming out from the land; the sea, however,
+      remained clear of ships. All day the felucca made rapid progress, for
+      although the wind freshened, Gervaise did not lessen sail as before, being
+      now accustomed to the boat and confident of her powers. As soon as the
+      wind died away again after sunset, he lay down for a good sleep, feeling
+      this was an absolute necessity, and knowing that before morning he should
+      be obliged to keep a sharp lookout for land. He slept longer than he had
+      intended, for the day was breaking when he opened his eyes. He sprang to
+      his feet, and saw the land stretching ahead of him at a distance, as he
+      thought, of some fifteen miles, and at once put the helm down and bore
+      more to the north.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      He judged, from what he had heard on the coast, that he must be nearly off
+      Cape Tejones, behind which lies the town of Bengasi, and was confirmed in
+      the belief on finding half an hour later that the coast, which had run
+      nearly north and south, trended sharply away to the northeast. All day
+      long he kept about the same distance from the land, and at night, instead
+      of keeping on his course, brailed up the sail entirely, and allowed the
+      vessel to drift, as he knew that before morning he should lose the coast
+      if he continued as he was going. He slept without moving until daylight,
+      and then saw, to his satisfaction, by means of landmarks he had noticed
+      the evening before, that the boat had drifted but a few miles during the
+      night. As the day went on, he saw that the coastline was now east and
+      west, and felt that he must be off the most northerly point of the
+      promontory; he accordingly laid his course to the northeast, which would
+      take him close to Cape Saloman, the most easterly point of Crete, and from
+      two hundred and fifty to three hundred miles distant.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      For twenty-four hours he sailed quietly on, the wind dropping lighter and
+      lighter; then it suddenly died out altogether; for some hours there was
+      not a breath to stir the surface of the water, and the heat was stifling.
+      Gervaise slept for some time; when he awoke the same stillness reigned,
+      but there was a change in the appearance of the sky; its brightness was
+      dulled by a faint mist, while, although the sea was of a glassy
+      smoothness, there was an imperceptible swell that caused the felucca to
+      sway uneasily. Gervaise had sufficient experience of the Levant to know
+      that these signs were ominous of a change, and he at once set to work to
+      prepare for it. Although he saw that it would be difficult for him unaided
+      to hoist the long spar back into its place, he decided to lower it. This
+      was not difficult, as its weight brought it down on to the deck as soon as
+      he slackened the halliards; he unhooked it from the block, and then lashed
+      the sail securely to it. When he had done this he looked round. A bank of
+      dark clouds lay across the horizon to the northwest, and in a short time
+      he could see that this was rising rapidly.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Before taking down the spar and sail, he had deliberated as to whether it
+      would be better to run before the coming gale or to lie to, and had
+      decided on the latter alternative, as, were it to continue to blow long,
+      he might be driven on to the Egyptian coast. Moreover, the felucca's bow
+      was much higher out of water than the stern, and he thought that she would
+      ride over the waves with greater safety than she would did they sweep down
+      upon her stern.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      He had heard that the Greeks, when caught in a sudden gale in small boats,
+      often lashed the oars together, threw them overboard with a rope attached,
+      and rode to them safely through a sea that would otherwise have
+      overwhelmed them. After much consideration as to what had best be done, he
+      took the anchor rope, which was some sixty yards in length, fastened one
+      end to each end of the spar, and then lashed the middle of the rope to the
+      bow of the felucca; then, using an oar as a lever, he with great labour
+      managed to launch the spar over the bow, with the sail still attached to
+      it.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      When he had completed this, he looked round at the state of the weather.
+      The clouds had risen so fast that their edge was nearly overhead, spanning
+      the sky like a great arch. Ahead of him it seemed almost as black as
+      night. He had not been out in many of the gales that at times sweep the
+      eastern waters of the Mediterranean with terrible violence, but had seen
+      enough of them to know that it was no ordinary one that he was about to
+      encounter. He looked over the bow; the spar at present was lying in
+      contact with the stem. With an oar he pushed it across so as to be at
+      right angles with the craft, and then, there being nothing else to do, sat
+      down and waited for the storm to burst. In a short time he heard a dull
+      moaning sound, a puff of wind struck the boat, but in a few seconds died
+      out; it was sufficient to give the light craft stern way, and she drifted
+      backwards, the rope tightening, until the spar lay across her bows, and
+      some twenty yards away.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The dull moaning had grown louder; and now ahead of him he saw a white
+      line. It approached with extraordinary rapidity. Knowing the fury with
+      which it would burst upon him, he leapt down, and stood at the entrance to
+      the cabin, with his head just above the deck. With a deafening roar the
+      wind struck the boat, which staggered as if she had on her full course
+      struck on a rock, while a shower of spray flew over her. Half blinded and
+      deafened, Gervaise crawled into the cabin, closed the door, and lay down
+      there; whatever happened, there was nothing he could do. He was soon
+      conscious that the spar and sail were doing their work, for the boat still
+      lay head to wind. The noise overhead and around was deafening; above the
+      howl of the wind could be heard the creaking of the timbers, and the boat
+      seemed to shiver as each fresh gust struck her.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      In half an hour he looked out again. There was, as yet, but little sea;
+      the force of the wind seemed to flatten the water, and the instant a wave
+      lifted its head it was cut off as if by a knife, and carried away in
+      spray. The boat herself was moving rapidly through the water, dragging the
+      spar behind her, and Gervaise almost trembled at the thought of the speed
+      at which she would have flown along had it not been for the restraint of
+      the floating anchor. Gradually the sea got up, but the light craft rode
+      easily over it, and Gervaise, after commending his safety to God, lay
+      down, and was soon fast asleep. In spite of the motion of the vessel, he
+      slept soundly for many hours. When he awoke he opened the cabin door and
+      looked out. A tremendous sea was running, but he thought the wind,
+      although so strong that he could scarce lift his head above the shelter of
+      the bulwark, was less violent than it had been when it first broke upon
+      him. He saw to his satisfaction that the felucca breasted the waves
+      lightly, and that although enveloped in spray she took no green water over
+      the bows.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The spar and sail acted not only as a floating anchor, but as a
+      breakwater, and the white crested waves, which came on as if they would
+      break upon the boat, seemed robbed of half their violence by the
+      obstruction to their course, and passed under the felucca without
+      breaking. For forty-eight hours the gale continued; at the end of that
+      time it ceased almost as suddenly as it had begun. The sun shone brightly
+      out, the clouds cleared entirely away. It was some hours before the sea
+      went down sufficiently for Gervaise to attempt to get the spar on deck
+      again. It was a heavy task, taxing his strength to the utmost, but after a
+      deal of labour it was got on board, and then raised to its position at the
+      masthead; the sail was shaken out, and the felucca again put on her
+      course.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      <a name="link2HCH0020" id="link2HCH0020">
+      <!--  H2 anchor --> </a>
+    </p>
+    <div style="height: 4em;">
+      <br /><br /><br /><br />
+    </div>
+    <h2>
+      CHAPTER XX BELEAGUERED
+    </h2>
+    <p>
+      One morning towards the end of May, 1480, Sir John Boswell was standing
+      with some other knights on St. Stephen's Hill, near the city, having
+      hurried up as soon as a column of smoke from a bonfire lighted by the
+      lookout there, gave the news that the Turkish fleet was at last in sight.
+      A similar warning had been given a month previously, but the fleet had
+      sailed past the island, being bound for Phineka, which was the rendezvous
+      where Mahomet's great armament was to assemble. There could be but little
+      doubt that the long expected storm was this time about to burst. The fleet
+      now seen approaching numbered a hundred and sixty large ships, besides a
+      great number of small craft, conveying a force variously estimated at from
+      seventy to a hundred thousand men.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;'Tis a mighty fleet,&rdquo; Sir John said; &ldquo;and the worst of it is that we know
+      there are more to follow; still, I doubt not we shall send them back
+      defeated. Our defences are all complete; our recent peace with Egypt has
+      enabled us to fill up our magazines with provisions of all kinds; the
+      inhabitants of the Island have had ample warning to move into the town,
+      carrying with them everything of value; so the Turks will obtain but
+      little plunder, and will be able to gather no means of subsistence on the
+      island, as every animal has been driven within the walls, and even the
+      unripe corn has been reaped and brought in. However long the siege lasts,
+      we need be in no fear of being reduced to sore straits for food. Look over
+      there. There is a small craft under sail, and it comes not from the
+      direction of Phineka. See! one of the Turkish galleys has separated from
+      the rest and is making off in that direction. It may be that the little
+      craft contains one or two of our comrades who are late in coming to join
+      us.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It may well be so, Sir John, for they have been straggling in by twos and
+      threes for the last month.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I will get the grand master's leave to put out in one of the galleys,&rdquo;
+       Sir John said, &ldquo;for, by the way they are bearing, the Turks will cut the
+      little craft off before she can gain the port.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      He hurried to D'Aubusson, who was standing a short distance apart from the
+      others, gazing at the Turkish fleet. A minute later he was running down
+      the hill to the town, accompanied by three or four other knights; they
+      made direct for the outer port, where two galleys were lying in readiness,
+      leapt on board one of them, which already contained its quota of knights,
+      and at once rowed out of the port. Just as they did so the Turkish galley
+      fired a gun.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I fear we shall be too late,&rdquo; Sir John said; &ldquo;the Turk is gaining fast on
+      the other craft, whatever she may be. There goes another gun. Row your
+      hardest!&rdquo; he shouted down to the slaves.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The Turkish ship did not fire again; the wind was light, and they were
+      going two feet through the water to every one sailed by the other craft.
+      The galley from Rhodes was still half a mile away when the Turk was close
+      to the boat that was trying to escape. Sir John and the knights chafed as
+      they saw they would be too late.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I can't make out why the boat did not use her oars,&rdquo; the former said. &ldquo;Of
+      course, she could not have kept away from the galley, but if she had rowed
+      it would have made some difference, and we might have been nearly up.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I can only see one man on board of her, Sir John,&rdquo; one of the younger
+      knights said; and two or three others murmured that they were of the same
+      opinion.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;The others must be lying down; she cannot have less than from fifteen to
+      twenty men. The Turk is close alongside. They still hold on. There! She
+      has gone about and escaped the attempt to run her down. Now she is heading
+      for us again! Brave fellows! brave fellows!&rdquo; Sir John exclaimed, while a
+      cheer broke from those around him; &ldquo;but they have done for themselves.
+      They must have seen us coming out, and if they had surrendered might have
+      hoped to have been retaken. Their chance of getting quarter was truly not
+      great, for expecting&mdash;as the Turks do&mdash;to carry off both us and
+      all the inhabitants of the Island, a dozen fishermen would have seemed to
+      them scarcely worth keeping. However, by holding on they have thrown away
+      any chance they may have had. The Turks are alongside; they are leaping
+      down into the little craft. Ah! Two more galleys have just left their
+      fleet, and are heading here.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;See, Sir John,&rdquo; one of the knights exclaimed, &ldquo;there is a single man
+      standing in the bow of that craft: he is facing the Moors alone. See how
+      they crowd there; you can see the weapons flashing in the sun. They have
+      to press past the mast to get at him, and as yet he seems to hold them all
+      at bay.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;He has chosen his post well, D'Urville. The number of his assailants
+      prevents the archers on the Turkish craft using their bows. Fire those bow
+      guns!&rdquo; he shouted to the knights forward: &ldquo;Take steady aim at the galley.
+      It will distract their attention.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Nobly done indeed!&rdquo; one of the other knights shouted. &ldquo;I have seen him
+      strike down four of the Turks.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Row, men, row! 'Tis useless!&rdquo; Sir John muttered, as he clenched the hilt
+      of his sword. &ldquo;Useless! A Roland could not long maintain so unequal a
+      fight.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      A groan broke from those around him as suddenly the dark mass of the
+      assailants made a forward move, and the single figure was lost to sight.
+      It was but for an instant; a moment later the crowd separated, and a man
+      was seen to spring overboard.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;They will riddle him with their spears when he comes up; we shall have
+      nothing to do but to avenge him. To your stations, comrades! It is our
+      turn now, and we have no time to lose, for the other two Turks will be up
+      in twenty minutes, and I had orders not to fight if it could be avoided:
+      but we must take this fellow.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Five minutes later the galley ran alongside the Turk, to which those who
+      had captured the boat had already hastily returned. The ships discharged
+      their guns into each other, and then, as the galley ran alongside, the
+      knights tried to leap on board of her. They were opposed by a dense mass
+      of Turks, for in addition to her usual crew the Moslem was crowded with
+      troops. For three or four minutes the knights tried, but in vain, to get a
+      footing on board; then Sir John shouted to them to forbear, and gave
+      orders to the rowers at once to push off. A cloud of arrows swept across
+      the poop as they did so; but for the most part these fell harmless from
+      the armour of the knights. For a time the cannon on both sides continued
+      to fire, but as the Christians increased their distance it gradually
+      ceased.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      They had gone but a hundred yards from the Turk when a head appeared over
+      the stern railing of the poop, and a figure swung itself on to the deck.
+      The man was attired in Turkish garments, but his head was bare, and the
+      exclamation, &ldquo;A Christian!&rdquo; broke from the knights.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The man strode up to Sir John Boswell.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;You used to say you would make matters even with me some day, Sir John,
+      and you have more than kept your word.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Sir John fell back a pace in astonishment, and then with a shout, &ldquo;By St.
+      George, it is Tresham!&rdquo; threw his arms round Gervaise's neck, while the
+      knights thronged round with exclamations of satisfaction.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;And it was you whom we saw keep the Turks at bay for three good minutes
+      single handed,&rdquo; Sir John said, holding Gervaise at arm's length to gaze
+      into his face. &ldquo;Truly it seemed well nigh impossible that any one who was
+      like to be on that craft could have performed so doughty a deed. And how
+      did you escape?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It was simple enough,&rdquo; Gervaise replied. &ldquo;As soon as I dived I turned and
+      swam along under the boat and came up by the stern, and then held on by
+      the rudder, sheltered from their sight. I saw that the galley would be up
+      in five minutes, and had no fear of their wasting time to look for me.
+      Directly you came alongside her I dived again, and rose under your stern.
+      I did not think that you would be able to take her, for all their craft
+      are crowded with troops; so I contented myself with holding on until you
+      were out of reach of their arrows, and then I climbed up.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I am delighted to see you again, Gervaise. I was feeling very sore at the
+      moment, and I know the others felt the same, at being obliged to sheer off
+      without making a capture; but the grand master's orders were strict. We
+      noted your craft pursued by the Turks, and I asked leave to take out a
+      galley to cut her off. He said, 'Take one, Sir John, but do not adventure
+      an attack against the Turk unless she is likely to fall an easy prize to
+      you. Her capture would be of little benefit to us, and would be dearly
+      purchased at the cost of a knight's life. Therefore, as soon as we engaged
+      her, and I found that she was full of troops and could not be captured
+      without heavy loss, and that two of her consorts might arrive before we
+      accomplished it, it was plainly my duty to abandon the attempt, although,
+      you may guess, it went sorely against the grain to give the order,
+      especially as I knew that a host would be looking on from St. Stephen's
+      Hill. However, your rescue more than makes up for our failure; and
+      thankful indeed am I that I made the suggestion that we should put out to
+      save that little craft, though I thought it contained but a few fishermen
+      or some coasting sailors, who had, in ignorance that the Turks were at
+      hand, tried to enter Rhodes. One of those looking on with me did, indeed,
+      suggest that she might have on board a knight or two coming to join us,
+      but I did not give the matter a second thought.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;And how go things, Sir John? And how are old friends?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Ralph Harcourt and, I think, all your comrades in the Santa Barbara,
+      except the three who fell by your side when you were captured, are well,
+      and at present on the Island, as, for the last two years, none have been
+      allowed to depart. As to other matters, they go not so well as one could
+      wish. The commanderies have not responded to our call for aid as they
+      should have done. For this, however, they are not altogether to blame, for
+      we have been so often threatened with attack, and have so frequently
+      applied for aid in money or men, that they must have begun to doubt
+      whether the danger was really imminent. In other respects we are well
+      prepared. We have obtained large stores of provisions from Egypt, and
+      shall have no ground for uneasiness on that score. The defences have been
+      greatly strengthened, and no one fears that we shall not be able to beat
+      off an attack. We have destroyed the principal buildings outside the
+      walls, though it would have been better could we have gone much further in
+      this direction. And now let us have your adventures and escape.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;'Tis a long story, Sir John, and I must pray you to let me defer it for a
+      time. In the first place, I have two or three wounds that I shall be glad
+      to have bandaged.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Why did you not say so at once?&rdquo; Sir John exclaimed. &ldquo;In those dark
+      clothes, soaked with water as they are, I did not see the bloodstains; but
+      I ought to have looked for them, for surely no one could have gone through
+      that fight&mdash;altogether unprotected with armour too&mdash;without
+      being wounded. Come below, and we will attend to them.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Also order me some wine and food, Sir John; I have touched nothing save
+      water for twenty-four hours, and before that fasted somewhat strictly.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      By the time Gervaise's wounds, which were not severe, had been bandaged,
+      and he had eaten a hasty meal, the galley was alongside the mole, between
+      the two harbours.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      He was provided with some clothes, and went with Sir John straight to the
+      English auberge, where the knight insisted that he should at once lie
+      down.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I will report your return to D'Aubusson, and will tell him it is by my
+      orders that you are resting. Your wounds are not very deep, but you must
+      have lost a good deal of blood, and were you to exert yourself now, and be
+      pestered with questions, it would probably bring on an attack of fever.
+      There is nothing to do at present, for it must be some days before they
+      can land and bring up their guns.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise obeyed the orders not unwillingly, for he felt that he was really
+      weak, and was greatly worn out by want of sleep. Sir John Kendall, at
+      Boswell's request, issued orders that he was on no account whatever to be
+      disturbed, and that no one was to enter his room unless he sounded the
+      bell placed by the bedside. Gervaise indeed, falling off to sleep a few
+      minutes after he had lain down, did not awake until the following morning.
+      Having no idea that he had slept more than two or three hours, he sounded
+      the bell in order to inquire whether Ralph had returned to the auberge. He
+      was surprised to find his friend had just risen, and that he himself had
+      been asleep some eighteen hours!
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      A few minutes later Ralph hurried into the room.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Thank God that you are back again, Gervaise!&rdquo; he said, as he grasped the
+      hand of his friend. &ldquo;I did not return until late in the evening, having
+      been at work with a large body of slaves at the fortifications; and you
+      may guess what joy I felt at the news. You are changed a good deal.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I don't suppose you will think so at the end of a day or two, Ralph. I
+      lost a good deal of blood yesterday, and have been on short rations; but I
+      shall very soon pick up again.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;They will bring you some broth and wine directly, Gervaise. Early as it
+      is, the grand master has already sent down to inquire as to your health.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I will reply in person as soon as I have had a meal and dressed.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;And I suppose we must all wait to hear what you have been doing until you
+      return, Gervaise?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I suppose so, Ralph. Of course it is a long story; but I must tell you at
+      once that there is nothing very exciting in it, and that it differed
+      little from that of others who have been prisoners among the Moors, save
+      that I was strangely fortunate, and suffered no hardships whatever. And
+      now I want to ask you about clothes. Have my things been sold, or are they
+      still in the store?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;No; the question was raised but a short time since. It was mooted, by the
+      way, by that old enemy of yours, Robert Rivers, who returned here some
+      three months ago with a batch of knights from the English commanderies.
+      Sir John Boswell answered him roundly, I can tell you, and said that they
+      should be kept, were it for another fifty years, for that he would wager
+      his life that you would sooner or later make your escape.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I am sorry that fellow has returned, Ralph. Has he got a commandery yet?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;No; I believe that Sir John Kendall sent home so bad a report of him,
+      that even the great influence of his family has not sufficed to obtain his
+      appointment, and that he has been merely the assistant at one of the
+      smaller manors. Sir John Boswell told me in confidence that he understood
+      that Rivers did not at first volunteer to come out in response to the
+      appeal of the grand master, but that the grand prior informed him that
+      unless he took this opportunity of retrieving his character, he might give
+      up all hope of ever obtaining advancement. Ah, here is your breakfast.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      An hour later Gervaise presented himself at the palace, clothed in the
+      suit of armour that had been given to him by Genoa. Although he was
+      engaged with several members of the council at the time, the grand master
+      ordered him to be at once admitted as soon as he heard that he was in
+      attendance.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Welcome back, Sir Gervaise Tresham,&rdquo; he said warmly, as he entered. &ldquo;We
+      all rejoice greatly at your return, and I consider it a happy omen for the
+      success of our defence that so brave and distinguished a knight should at
+      the last moment have arrived to take a share in it.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The others present all shook Gervaise cordially by the hand, and
+      congratulated him on his return.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;You must dine with me this evening,&rdquo; D'Aubusson went on, &ldquo;and tell us the
+      story of your captivity and escape. At present, as you may suppose, we
+      have too many matters on hand to spare time for aught that is not pressing
+      and important. You will need a few days' rest before you are fit for
+      active service, and by that time we will settle as to what post will best
+      suit you.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Twice that day had Gervaise to recount his adventures, the first time to
+      Sir John Kendall and the knights of his auberge, the second to the grand
+      master. Most of the leading members of the Order were assembled at the
+      palace, and, among others, he was introduced to the Viscount de Monteuil,
+      the elder brother of D'Aubusson, one of the most famous leaders of the
+      day. He had brought with him a considerable body of retainers, and,
+      although not a member of the Order, had offered his services in defence of
+      the town. The council had gratefully accepted the offer, and had
+      unanimously named him Commander of the Forces. Many other knights and
+      soldiers had come from different parts of Europe, animated alike by the
+      desire to aid in the defence of Christendom against the advance of the
+      Moslems, and to gain credit and honour by taking part in a siege that was
+      sure to be a desperate one.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;My brother has already spoken of you to me, Sir Gervaise,&rdquo; the viscount
+      said, when the young knight was presented to him; &ldquo;although indeed there
+      was no occasion for him to do so, since the name of the knight who two
+      years ago saved the commerce of Italy from ruin, and with a single galley
+      destroyed or captured a great fleet of over twenty Barbary pirates, and
+      thus for a time put a stop to the depredations of the infidels, is known
+      throughout Europe. By the way, I am the bearer of a message to you. I took
+      ship at Genoa on my way hither, and stayed two or three days there while
+      she was being got ready for sea. Knowing that I was bound hither, a
+      certain very beautiful young lady of noble family, to whom I had the
+      honour of being introduced, prayed me that if you should by any chance
+      have escaped from captivity&mdash;and she said that she was convinced that
+      you would, when you heard that Rhodes was threatened, assuredly endeavour
+      to escape and to come hither to take a share in the defence&mdash;I was to
+      tell you that she trusted you still bore her gage, and that she, on her
+      part, had held fast to the promise she made you.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I still have her gage, Viscount; for though I was for a long time
+      deprived of it, I succeeded in regaining it when I made my escape,&rdquo;
+       Gervaise said quietly; and De Monteuil at once turned the conversation to
+      another topic.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise found that no attempt was to be made to take the offensive
+      against the Turks, and that they were to be permitted to advance against
+      the city without interference. Many of the more fiery spirits among the
+      knights chafed at this prohibition. The records of the past showed that
+      armies as large as that of Mahomet had suffered defeat at the hands of
+      bodies of knights no stronger than that gathered for the defence of
+      Rhodes. D'Aubusson, however, knew that between the undisciplined hordes
+      that gathered in countless numbers to oppose the crusaders, and the troops
+      of Mahomet, well trained in warfare, who had borne his standard
+      victoriously in numerous battles, there was but little comparison. They
+      were commanded, too, by Paleologus, a general of great capacity. Under
+      such circumstances, although victory might be possible, the chances of
+      defeat would be far greater, and while victory could be only won at a
+      great sacrifice of life, defeat would mean annihilation to the garrison,
+      and the loss of the city upon whose fortifications such an enormous amount
+      of money and labour had been expended.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      On the other hand, he felt perfectly confident that the city could be
+      successfully defended, and that at a cost of life far less than would be
+      attained by a victory in the open field, while the blow that would be
+      inflicted upon the prestige and power of the enemy, by being ignominiously
+      compelled to retire to their ships, after the failure of all their
+      attacks, would be as great as if their army had been defeated in the
+      field. Therefore the grand master, with the full assent of his leaders,
+      turned a deaf ear to the entreaties of the younger knights, that they
+      might be allowed to make a sortie. He calmly waited behind the formidable
+      defences he had for the past ten years been occupied in perfecting, in
+      anticipation of the assault of the Moslem host.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Accordingly, after disembarking at their leisure, the Turkish army moved
+      forward, and took their post upon St. Stephen's Hill. From this eminence
+      they commanded a full view of the town, the hills sloping gently down to
+      the foot of the walls. In later times the first care of a general
+      commanding the defence would have been to construct formidable works upon
+      this commanding position. But the cannon of that period were so cumbrous
+      and slowly worked, and so inaccurate in their aim, that the advantage of
+      occupying a position that would prevent an enemy from firing down into a
+      town was considered to be more than counterbalanced by the weakening of
+      the garrison by the abstraction of the force required to man the detached
+      work, and by the risk of their being surrounded and cut off without the
+      garrison of the town being able to aid them.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      That the defence of St. Stephen's Hill was considered unnecessary for the
+      safety of Rhodes is shown by the fact that no attempt had been made to
+      fortify it when, forty years later, the Moslems again besieged the city.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      There was no shadow of apprehension felt by the garrison of Rhodes as the
+      great array of their foes was seen moving on to the hill, and preparing to
+      pitch its camp. On the summit was the great tent of the pasha; round this
+      were the marquees of the other commanders, while the encampments of the
+      troops stretched far away along the upper slopes of the hill.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Previous to the despatch of the expedition, the sultan had made
+      preparations for aiding his arms by treachery. The agent he had sent to
+      propose a temporary truce had, during his stay on the Island, made himself
+      thoroughly acquainted with the outline of the works. A very accurate plan
+      of them had also been obtained from an inhabitant of Rhodes, who had
+      abandoned Christianity and taken service with the Turks.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      In addition to this he had arranged with a renegade German, known as
+      Maitre Georges, a man of very great ability as an artilleryman and
+      engineer, to desert to the city, and there do all in his power to assist
+      the besiegers, both by affording them information and by giving bad advice
+      to the besieged. On the day after Paleologus, who was himself a renegade
+      Greek, had established his camp, he sent in a herald to summon the city to
+      surrender, at the same time making lavish promises that the lives and
+      property of the native population should be respected, and that they
+      should be allowed to continue to reside there, to enjoy the full exercise
+      of their religion and of all other rights they possessed. The pasha had no
+      real hope that the knights would obey the summons, but he thought that he
+      might excite a spirit of disaffection among the townspeople that would,
+      when the crisis came, greatly hamper the efforts of the defenders.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The Rhodians, however, were well satisfied with the rule of the Order. The
+      knights, although belonging to the Catholic Church, had allowed the
+      natives of the Island, who were of the Greek faith, perfect freedom in the
+      exercise of their religion, and their rule, generally, had been fair and
+      just. The wealth and prosperity of the Island had increased enormously
+      since their establishment there, and the population had no inclination
+      whatever to change their rule for that of the Turks. The summons to
+      surrender being refused, the enemy made a reconnaissance towards the
+      walls.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      D'Aubusson had no longer any reason for checking the ardour of the
+      knights, and a strong body of horsemen, under the command of De Monteuil,
+      sallied out and drove the Turks back to their camp.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Maitre Georges, who was acting as the military adviser of the pasha, saw
+      at once that the weakest point of the defence was Fort St. Nicholas, at
+      the extremity of the mole along the neck of land dividing the outer from
+      the inner port. At a short distance away, on the opposite side of the
+      port, stood the church of St. Anthony, and in the gardens of the church a
+      battery was at once erected. The garden was but three hundred yards from
+      St. Nicholas, and the danger that would arise from the construction of the
+      battery was at once perceived, and an incessant fire opened upon it from
+      the guns on the wall round the grand master's palace. Numbers of the
+      workmen were killed, but the erection of the battery was pushed on night
+      and day, and ere long three of the immense cannon that had been brought
+      from Constantinople,&mdash;where sixteen of them had been cast under the
+      direction of Maitre Georges&mdash;were placed in position. These cannon
+      were eighteen feet in length, and carried stone balls of some twenty-six
+      inches in diameter.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Before these were ready to open fire, Gervaise had entirely regained his
+      health and strength. The grand master, being unwilling to appoint him to a
+      separate command over the heads of knights many years his senior, had
+      attached him to his person in the capacity of what would now be called an
+      aide-de-camp.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I know, Gervaise, that I can rely upon your coolness and discretion. I
+      cannot be everywhere myself, and I want you to act as my eyes in places
+      where I cannot be. I know that the knights, so far as bravery and devotion
+      are concerned, will each and every one do his best, and will die at their
+      posts before yielding a foot; but while fighting like paladins they will
+      think of naught else, and, however hardly pressed, will omit to send to me
+      for reinforcements. Nay, even did they think of it, they probably would
+      not send, deeming that to do so would be derogatory, and might be taken as
+      an act of cowardice. Now, it is this service that I shall specially look
+      for from you. When a post is attacked, I shall, when my presence is
+      required elsewhere, send you to represent me. I do not, of course, wish
+      you to interfere in any way in the conduct of the defence, in which you
+      will take such share as you can; but you are specially to observe how
+      matters go, and if you see that the knights are pressed and in sore need
+      of assistance to enable them to hold the post, you will at once bring the
+      news to me, and I will hurry there with reinforcements.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      No post could have been more in accordance with the desire of Gervaise,
+      for the portion of the wall defended by the English langue was far removed
+      from the point selected by the Turks for their first attack, the sea front
+      being defended half by the langue of Italy, and half by that of Castile.
+      Fort St. Nicholas was under the command of the Cavalier Caretto, and as
+      soon as the Turkish battery was completed, Gervaise went down there with
+      an order from the grand master that he was for the present to consider
+      himself as forming part of the garrison. This was pleasant for both
+      Caretto and himself, for the Italian knight had conceived a strong
+      friendship for the young Englishman, and had rejoiced greatly at his
+      return from captivity, but had been so much occupied with his duty of
+      placing the castle in all respects in a state of defence, that he had had
+      no opportunity for a private conversation with him since his return to
+      Rhodes.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise, on his part, was no less pleased. Caretto had shown so much tact
+      after his release from the Moors, and had so willingly aided him in any
+      capacity allotted to him, without in the slightest degree interposing his
+      council unasked, that Gervaise had come to like him greatly, even before
+      their arrival at Genoa. Circumstances there had brought them closely
+      together, and their friendship had been cemented during their voyage to
+      Rhodes. Caretto had gone back to Italy, where he had a commandery, a few
+      days after Gervaise had sailed on his last voyage, and had only returned
+      to Rhodes three months before Gervaise escaped from captivity.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;This is turning the tables,&rdquo; Caretto said, with a laugh, when Gervaise
+      presented the grand master's order. &ldquo;I was under your command last time,
+      and now it seems that you are to be under mine. I suppose you applied to
+      come here, in order to have a fresh opportunity of distinguishing
+      yourself. I heard that you had been placed on D'Aubusson's own staff.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Yes, and am on it still; and it is by his orders and not by my own
+      solicitation that I am here. I will tell you what my duties are. The grand
+      master knows the commanders of posts have their hands so full that they
+      will have no time for sending complete reports to him, and he considers,
+      moreover, that they might, in some cases, however pressed, hesitate to ask
+      for aid until too late for reinforcements to be brought up. My duty will
+      be to let the grand master know how matters are going, and to send to him
+      at once if it seems to me that help is needed. I should, of course, always
+      send for reinforcements, at the request of a commander; but it is only in
+      the event of his being too busy in the heat of the fray to think of aught
+      but resisting an attack, that I should exercise my own judgment in the
+      matter.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Caretto nodded.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It is a good thought of D'Aubusson's. When one is in the thick of a fight
+      in a breach, with the Moslems swarming round, it does not occur to one to
+      draw out of the fray to send off messages. For myself, I shall be glad
+      indeed to have that matter off my mind, though it is not every one I
+      should care to trust with such a responsibility. Some might send off for
+      aid when it was not needed, others might delay so long that help might
+      come too late; but with one so cool headed as yourself I should not fear
+      any contingency. And now, as I am not busy at present, let us have a
+      comfortable talk as to what has happened since we met last. I was at the
+      banquet at the grand master's on the night when you related your
+      adventures. You had certainly much to tell, but it seems to me for some
+      reason or other you cut short certain details, and I could not see why, as
+      there seemed no prospect of escape open to you, you did not accept the
+      offer of Suleiman Ali to ransom you.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I saw no chance of escape at the moment, but I did not doubt that I could
+      get away from the town whenever I chose, although it was not clear how I
+      should proceed afterwards. It was for this opportunity I was waiting, and
+      I felt sure that, with my knowledge of the language, it would come sooner
+      or later. In the next place, my captors had fixed an exorbitant sum for my
+      ransom, and I did not wish to impose upon the generosity of Suleiman.
+      There was another reason&mdash;a private one.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;You don't mean to say that you had fallen in love with a Moorish damsel,
+      Sir Gervaise?&rdquo; Caretto laughed.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;For shame, Cavalier! As if a Christian knight would care for a Moslem
+      maiden, even were she as fair as the houris of their creed!&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Christian knights have done so before now,&rdquo; Caretto laughed, greatly
+      amused at the young knight's indignation, &ldquo;and doubtless will do so again.
+      Well, I suppose I must not ask what the private matter was, though it must
+      have been something grave indeed to lead you, a slave, to reject the offer
+      of freedom. I know that when I was rowing in their galleys, no matter of
+      private business that I can conceive would have stood in my way for a
+      single moment, had a chance of freedom presented itself.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It was a matter of honour,&rdquo; Gervaise said gravely, &ldquo;and one of which I
+      should speak to no one else; but as you were present at the time, there
+      can, I think, be no harm in doing so. At the time that I was captured, I
+      was stripped of everything that I had upon me, and, of course, with the
+      rest, of the gage which the Lady Claudia had given me, and which hung
+      round my neck where she had placed it. It was taken possession of by the
+      captain of the pirates, who, seeing that it bore no Christian emblem,
+      looked upon it as a sort of amulet. I understood what he was saying, but,
+      as I was desirous that my knowledge of Turkish should not be suspected, I
+      said nothing. I was very glad that he so regarded it, for had he taken it
+      to be an ordinary trinket, he might have parted with it, and I should
+      never have been able to obtain a clue as to the person to whom he sold it.
+      As it was, he put it round his neck, with the remark that it might bring
+      him better luck than had befallen me. He told me jeeringly months
+      afterwards that it had done so, and that he would never part with it.
+      Given me as it was, I felt that my honour was concerned in its recovery,
+      and that, should I ever meet Lady Claudia again, I should feel disgraced
+      indeed, if, when she asked whether I still bore her gage, I had to confess
+      that it was lost.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;But lost from no fault of your own,&rdquo; Caretto put in.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;The losing was not indeed from any fault of my own, and had the pirate
+      thrown it into the sea I should have held myself free from disgrace; but
+      as it was still in existence, and I knew its possessor, I was bound in
+      honour to recover it. At the time Suleiman Ali's messenger arrived the
+      corsair was away, and there was no saying when his ship would return;
+      therefore, I decided at once not to accept the offer of freedom. Had it
+      not been for that, I own that I should have done so, for I knew that I
+      could repay Suleiman from the revenues of my commandery, which would have
+      accumulated in my absence; but if I had had to wait ten years longer to
+      regain the gage, I felt that I was in honour bound to do so. It was, in
+      fact, some six months before the corsair put into that port again. The
+      moment he did so I carried out the plans I had long before determined
+      upon. I obtained a disguise from Ben Ibyn, and by a ruse succeeded in
+      inducing the pirate to meet me outside the town, believing that I was an
+      Arab chief who wished to dispose of some valuable slave girls he had
+      brought in. I had with me one of my old galley slaves, who had been taken
+      into Ben Ibyn's employment; and when the pirate came up with two of his
+      crew, and furiously attacked me as soon as I threw off my disguise, it
+      would have gone hard with me had he not stood by me, and killed one of
+      them who was about to attack me in the rear. I slew the other and Hassan,
+      and the gage is in its place again.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      <a name="link2HCH0021" id="link2HCH0021">
+      <!--  H2 anchor --> </a>
+    </p>
+    <div style="height: 4em;">
+      <br /><br /><br /><br />
+    </div>
+    <h2>
+      CHAPTER XXI THE FORT OF ST. NICHOLAS
+    </h2>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Well, you have proved indeed,&rdquo; Caretto said, when Gervaise finished his
+      story, &ldquo;that you are worthy of the bestowal of a gage by a fair damsel. I
+      do not think that many knights, however true they might be to the donor,
+      would have suffered months of slavery in order to regain a token, lost by
+      no fault or carelessness of their own; and no lady could have blamed or
+      held them in any way dishonoured by the loss.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I had a message by the Viscount De Monteuil from Lady Claudia the other
+      day, saying that she trusted I had kept her gage. I can assure you that
+      the six months of slavery were cheaply purchased by the pleasure I felt
+      that I still possessed it; and I was glad, too, to learn that I had not
+      been forgotten by her.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Of that you may well assure yourself, Tresham; my commandery is not far
+      from Genoa, and I was frequently with her, but never without her drawing
+      me aside and asking me if I had heard any news of you, and talking over
+      with me the chances there might be of your escape. I can tell you that
+      there are not a few young nobles of Genoa who would give much to be
+      allowed as you are to carry her gage, or wear her colours. You should see
+      her now; you would scarce know her again, so altered and improved is she;
+      there is no fairer face in all Italy.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I hope some day to meet her again,&rdquo; Gervaise replied; &ldquo;although I own to
+      knowing it were better that I should not do so. Until she gave me her gage
+      I had scarcely noticed her. I have, as you know, no experience of women,
+      and had so much on my mind at the time, what with the fuss they were
+      making about us, and the question of getting the prizes here, that in
+      truth I paid but slight attention to the fair faces of the dames of Genoa.
+      But the gracious and earnest way in which, though scarce more than a
+      child, she gave me her gage, and vowed that no other knight should possess
+      one so long as I lived, struck me so greatly that I own I gave the matter
+      much more thought than was right or becoming in one of our Order. The
+      incident was much more gratifying to me than all the honour paid me by the
+      Republic, and during the long months of my captivity it has recurred to me
+      so frequently that I have in vain endeavoured to chase it from my
+      thoughts, as sinful thus to allow myself constantly to think of any woman.
+      Do not mistake me, Sir Fabricius. I am speaking to you as to a confessor,
+      and just as I have kept her amulet hidden from all, so is the thought of
+      her a secret I would not part with for my life. I do not for a moment
+      deceive myself with the thought that, beyond the fact that her gift has
+      made her feel an interest in me and my fate, she has any sentiment in the
+      matter: probably, indeed, she looks back upon the gift as a foolish act of
+      girlish enthusiasm that led her into making a promise that she now cannot
+      but find unpleasantly binding; for it is but natural that among the young
+      nobles of her own rank and country there must be some whom she would see
+      with pleasure wearing her colours.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Caretto looked at him with some amusement.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Were you not bound by your vows as a knight of the Order, how would you
+      feel in the matter?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I should feel worse,&rdquo; Gervaise said, without hesitation. &ldquo;I have
+      oftentimes thought that over, and I see that it is good for me I am so
+      bound. It does not decrease my chances, for, as I know, there are no
+      chances; but it renders it more easy for me to know that it is so.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;But why should you say that you have no chances, Tresham?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Because it is easy to see that it is so. I am, save for my commandery and
+      prospects in the Order, a penniless young knight, without home or estate,
+      without even a place in my country, and that country not hers. I know that
+      it is not only sinful, but mad, for me to think so frequently of her, but
+      at least I am not mad enough to think that I can either win the heart or
+      aspire to the hand of one who is, you say, so beautiful, and who is,
+      moreover, as I know, the heiress to wide estates.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;'There was a squire of low degree, Loved the king's daughter of
+      Hungarie,'&rdquo; Caretto sang, with a laugh. &ldquo;You are not of low degree, but of
+      noble family, Gervaise. You are not a squire, but a knight, and already a
+      very distinguished one; nor is the young lady, though she be a rich
+      heiress, a king's daughter.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;At any rate, the squire was not vowed to celibacy. No, no, Sir Fabricius,
+      it is a dream, and a pleasant one; but I know perfectly well that it is
+      but a dream, and one that will do me no harm so long as I ever bear in
+      mind that it is so. Many a knight of the Order before me has borne a
+      lady's gage, and carried it valiantly in many a fight, and has been no
+      less true to his vows for doing so.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Upon the contrary, he has been all the better a knight, Gervaise; it is
+      always good for a knight, whether he belongs to the Order or not, to prize
+      one woman above all others, and to try to make himself worthy of his
+      ideal. As to the vow of celibacy, you know that ere now knights have been
+      absolved from their vows, and methinks that, after the service you have
+      rendered to Italy by ridding the sea of those corsairs, his Holiness would
+      make no difficulty in granting any request that you might make him in that
+      or any other direction. I don't know whether you are aware that, after you
+      sailed from here, letters came from Rome as well as from Pisa, Florence,
+      and Naples, expressive of the gratitude felt for the services that you had
+      rendered, and of their admiration for the splendid exploit that you had
+      performed.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;No; the grand master has had his hands so full of other matters that
+      doubtless an affair so old escaped his memory. Indeed, he may have
+      forgotten that I sailed before the letters arrived.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Do not forget to jog his memory on the subject, for I can tell you that
+      the letters did not come alone, but were each accompanied by presents
+      worthy of the service you rendered. But as to the vows?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;As to the vows, I feel as I said just now, that I would not free myself
+      of them if I could, for, being bound by them, I can the more easily and
+      pleasantly enjoy my dream. Besides, what should I do if I left the Order
+      without home, country, or means, and with naught to do but to sell my
+      sword to some warlike monarch? Besides, Caretto, I love the Order, and
+      deem it the highest privilege to fight against the Moslems, and to uphold
+      the banner of the Cross.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;As to that, you could, like De Monteuil and many other knights here,
+      always come out to aid the Order in time of need. As to the vows, I am not
+      foolish enough to suppose that you would ask to be relieved from them,
+      until you had assured yourself that Claudia was also desirous that you
+      should be free.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It is absurd,&rdquo; Gervaise said, almost impatiently. &ldquo;Do not let us talk any
+      more about it, Caretto, or it will end by turning my head and making me
+      presumptuous enough to imagine that the Lady Claudia, who only saw me for
+      three or four days, and that while she was still but a girl, has been
+      thinking of me seriously since.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I do not know Claudia's thoughts,&rdquo; Caretto remarked drily, &ldquo;but I do know
+      that last year she refused to listen to at least a score of excellent
+      offers for her hand, including one from a son of the doge himself, and
+      that without any reasonable cause assigned by her, to the great wonderment
+      of all, seeing that she does not appear to have any leaning whatever
+      towards a life in a nunnery. At any rate, if at some future time you
+      should pluck up heart of grace to tell her you love her, and she refuses
+      you, you will at least have the consolation of knowing that you are not
+      the only one, by a long way, whose suit has been rejected. And now as to
+      our affairs here. Methinks that tomorrow that battery will open fire upon
+      us. It seems completed.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Yes, I think they are nearly ready,&rdquo; Gervaise said, turning his mind
+      resolutely from the subject they had been discussing. &ldquo;From the palace
+      wall I saw, before I came down here, large numbers of men rolling huge
+      stones down towards the church. Our guns were firing steadily; but could
+      they load them ten times as fast as they do, they would hardly be able to
+      stop the work, so numerous are those engaged upon it.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Yes we shall soon learn something of the quality of their artillery. The
+      tower is strong enough to resist ordinary guns, but it will soon crumble
+      under the blows of such enormous missiles. Never have I seen or heard in
+      Europe of cannon of such size; but indeed, in this matter the Turks are
+      far ahead of us, and have, ever since cannon were first cast, made them of
+      much larger size than we in Europe have done. However, there is one
+      comfort; they may destroy this fort, but they have still to cross the
+      water, and this under the fire of the guns on the palace walls; when they
+      once land, their great battery must cease firing, and we shall be able to
+      meet them on equal terms in the breach. Fight as hard as they may, I think
+      we can hold our own, especially as reinforcements can come down to us more
+      quickly than they can be brought across the water.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The next morning, at daybreak, the deep boom of a gun announced to the
+      city that the great battering cannon had begun their work. In the fort the
+      sleeping knights sprang to their feet at the concussion that seemed to
+      shake it to its centre. They would have rushed to the walls, but Caretto
+      at once issued orders that no one should show himself on the battlements
+      unless under special orders.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;There is nothing whatever to be done until the Turks have breached the
+      wall, and are ready to advance to attack us. Every sword will be needed
+      when that hour comes, and each man owes it to the Order to run no useless
+      risk, until the hour when he is required to do his share of the fighting.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The time required to reload the great cannon was considerable, but at
+      regular intervals they hurled their heavy missiles against the wall, the
+      distance being so short that every ball struck it. After some twenty shots
+      had been fired, Caretto, accompanied by Gervaise, went out by a small gate
+      on the eastern side of the tower, and made their way round by the foot of
+      the wall to see what effect the shots had produced on the solid masonry.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Caretto shook his head.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It is as I feared,&rdquo; he said. &ldquo;No stones ever quarried by man could long
+      resist such tremendous blows. In some places, you see, the stones are
+      starred and cracked, in others the shock seems to have pulverised the spot
+      where it struck; but, worse, still, the whole face of the wall is shaken.
+      There are cracks between the stones, and some of these are partly bulged
+      out and partly driven in. It may take some time before a breach is
+      effected, but sooner or later the wall will surely be demolished.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I will go up and make my report to the grand master.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Do so, Gervaise. I almost wonder that he has not himself come down to see
+      how the wall is resisting.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise, on reaching the palace, heard that D'Aubusson was at present
+      engaged in examining no less a person than Maitre Georges, the right hand
+      of Paleologus, who had soon after daybreak presented himself before the
+      wall on the other side of the town, declaring that he had left the Turkish
+      service, and craving to be admitted. News had been sent at once to
+      D'Aubusson, who despatched two of the senior knights, with orders to admit
+      him and receive him with all honour. This had been done, and the grand
+      master, with some of his council, were now closeted with the newcomer.
+      Several of the knights were gathered in the courtyard, discussing the
+      event. There was no question that if the renegade came in good faith, his
+      defection would be a serious blow to the assailants, and that his well
+      known skill and experience would greatly benefit the defenders.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;For my part,&rdquo; Sir John Boswell, who formed one of the detachment which
+      the English langue, as well as all the others, contributed to form the
+      garrison of the palace said, &ldquo;I would have hung the fellow up by the neck
+      over the gateway, and he should never have set foot within the walls.
+      Think you that a man who has denied his faith and taken service with his
+      enemies is to be trusted, whatever oaths he may take?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;You must remember, Boswell,&rdquo; another said, &ldquo;that hitherto Georges has not
+      fought against Christians, but has served Mahomet in his wars with other
+      infidels. I am not saying a word in defence of his having become a
+      renegade; yet even a renegade may have some sort of heart, and now that he
+      has been called upon to fight against Christians he may well have repented
+      of his faults, and determined to sacrifice his position and prospects
+      rather than aid in the attack on the city.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;We shall see. As for me, I regard a renegade as the most contemptible of
+      wretches, and have no belief that they have either a heart or conscience.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      When Maitre Georges came out from the palace, laughing and talking with
+      the two knights who had entered with him, it was evident that he was well
+      pleased with his reception by the grand master, who had assigned to him a
+      suite of apartments in the guest house. In reality, however, D'Aubusson
+      had no doubt that his object was a treacherous one, and that, like
+      Demetrius, who had come under the pretence of bringing about a truce, his
+      object was to find out the weak points and to supply the Turks with
+      information. Georges had, in his conversation with him, laid great stress
+      on the strength of the Turkish army, the excellent quality of the troops,
+      and the enormous battering train that had been prepared. But every word he
+      spoke but added to the grand master's suspicions; for if the man
+      considered that the capture of the city was morally certain, it would be
+      simply throwing away his life to enter it as a deserter.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The grand master was, however, too politic to betray any doubt of Georges'
+      sincerity. Were he treated as a traitor, Paleologus might find another
+      agent to do the work. It was, therefore, better to feign a belief in his
+      story, to obtain all the information possible from him, and at the same
+      time to prevent his gaining any knowledge of affairs that would be of the
+      slightest use to the Turks. Instructions were therefore given to the two
+      knights that, while Georges was to be treated with all courtesy, he was to
+      be strictly watched, though in such a manner that he should be in
+      ignorance of it, and that, whenever he turned his steps in the direction
+      of those parts of the defences where fresh works had been recently added
+      and preparations made of which it was desirable the Turks should be kept
+      in ignorance, he was to be met, as if by accident, by one of the knights
+      told off for the purpose, and his steps diverted in another direction.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Georges soon made himself popular among many of the knights, who had no
+      suspicions of his real character. He was a man of exceptional figure,
+      tall, strong, splendidly proportioned, with a handsome face and gallant
+      bearing. He was extremely well informed on all subjects, had travelled
+      widely, had seen many adventures, was full of anecdote, and among the
+      younger knights, therefore, he was soon regarded as a charming companion.
+      His very popularity among them aided D'Aubusson's plans, as Georges was
+      generally the centre of a group of listeners, and so had but few
+      opportunities of getting away quietly to obtain the information he sought.
+      Gervaise delivered his report to the grand master.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I am free now,&rdquo; D'Aubusson said, &ldquo;and will accompany you to St. Nicholas.
+      I have been detained by the coming of this man Georges. He is a clever
+      knave, and, I doubt not, has come as a spy. However, I have taken measures
+      that he shall learn nothing that can harm us. No lives have been lost at
+      the tower, I hope?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;No, sir; Caretto has forbidden any to show themselves on the walls.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;He has done well. This is no time for rash exposure, and where there is
+      naught to be gained, it is a grave fault to run risks.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      On arriving at the end of the mole, D'Aubusson, accompanied by Caretto,
+      made an investigation of the effect of the Turks' fire.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;'Tis worse than I expected,&rdquo; he said. &ldquo;When we laid out our
+      fortifications the thought that such guns as these would be used against
+      them never entered our minds. Against ordinary artillery the walls would
+      stand a long battering; but it is clear that we shall have to depend more
+      upon our swords than upon our walls for our defence. Fortunately, although
+      the Turks have indeed chosen the spot where our walls are most open to the
+      assaults of their battery, they have to cross the water to attack the
+      breach when it is made, and will have to fight under heavy disadvantage.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Tresham was last night saying to me, that it seemed to him it would not
+      be a difficult matter for one who spoke Turkish well, to issue at night on
+      the other side of the town, and to make his way round to the battery,
+      disguised of course as a Turkish soldier, and then, mixing with the
+      artillery men, to drive a spike into one of the touch holes. He said that
+      he would gladly volunteer for the task.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      D'Aubusson shook his head decidedly. &ldquo;It would be too dangerous; and even
+      were a spike driven in, the Turks would have no great difficulty in
+      extracting it, for the tubes are so big that a man might crawl in and
+      drive the spike up from the inside. Moreover, could one or more of the
+      guns be disabled permanently, others would be brought down and set in
+      their place, so that nothing would be gained but a very short delay, which
+      would be of no advantage to us, and certainly would in no way justify the
+      risking of the life of so distinguished a young knight.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The bombardment of St. Nicholas continued for some days. A breach was fast
+      forming in the wall, and a slope composed of the fallen rubbish extended
+      from the front of the breach to the water's edge. The grand master was
+      frequently on the spot, and as this was at present the sole object of
+      attack, the garrison was strengthened by as many knights as could be
+      sheltered within its walls. At night the shattered masonry that had fallen
+      inside was carried out, and with it a new work thrown up across the mole,
+      to strengthen the defence on that side, should the enemy land between the
+      town and the fort. Small batteries were planted wherever they could sweep
+      the approaches to the breach, and planks studded with nails were sunk in
+      the shallow water of the harbour, to impede the progress of those who
+      might attempt to swim or wade across. For the time, therefore, the
+      functions of Gervaise were in abeyance, and he laboured with the rest of
+      the garrison at the defences.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      At daybreak on the 9th of June, a great number of vessels and boats,
+      crowded with soldiers, bore down on St. Nicholas. As they approached,
+      every gun on the fortifications that could be brought to bear upon them
+      opened fire; but in a dense mass they advanced. Some made their way to the
+      rocks and landed the soldiers there; others got alongside the mole; but
+      the majority grounded in the shallow water of the harbour, and the troops,
+      leaping out, waded to the foot of the breach. On its crest D'Aubusson
+      himself had taken up his station. Beside him stood Caretto, and around
+      them the most distinguished knights of the Order. With wild shouts the
+      Turks rushed up the breach, and swarmed thickly up the ruined masonry
+      until, at its summit, they encountered the steel clad line of the
+      defenders. For hours the terrible struggle continued. As fast as the head
+      of the Turkish column broke and melted away against the obstacle they
+      tried in vain to penetrate, fresh reinforcements took the place of those
+      who had fallen, and in point of valour and devotion the Moslem showed
+      himself a worthy antagonist of the Christian. It was not only at the
+      breach that the conflict raged. At other points the Turks, well provided
+      with ladders, fixed them against the walls, and desperately strove to
+      obtain a footing there. From the breach clouds of dust rose from under the
+      feet of the combatants, mingling with the smoke of the cannon on the
+      ramparts, the fort, and Turkish ships, and at times entirely hid from the
+      sight of the anxious spectators on the walls of the town and fortress, and
+      of the still more numerous throng of Turks on St. Stephen's Hill, the
+      terrible struggle that continued without a moment's intermission.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The combatants now fought in comparative silence. The knights, exhausted
+      and worn out by their long efforts beneath the blazing sun, still showed
+      an unbroken front; but it was only occasionally that the battle cry of the
+      Order rose in the air, as a fresh body of assailants climbed up the corpse
+      strewn breach. The yell of the Moslems rose less frequently; they
+      sacrificed their lives as freely and devotedly as those who led the first
+      onset had done; but as the hours wore on, the assurance of victory died
+      out, and a doubt as to whether it was possible to break through the line
+      of their terrible foes gained ground. D'Aubusson himself, although, in
+      spite of the remonstrances of the knights, always in the thickest of the
+      fray, was yet ever watchful, and quickly perceived where the defenders
+      were hotly pressed, and where support was most needed. Gervaise fought by
+      his side, so that, when necessary, he could carry his orders to a little
+      body of knights, drawn up in reserve, and despatch them to any point where
+      aid was needed. The cannon still continued their fire on both sides. A
+      fragment of one of the stone balls from a basilisk struck off D'Aubusson's
+      helmet. He selected another from among the fallen knights, and resumed his
+      place in the line. Still the contest showed no signs of terminating. The
+      Turkish galleys ever brought up reinforcements, while the defenders grew
+      fewer, and more exhausted. During a momentary pause, while a fresh body of
+      Turks were landing, Gervaise said to the grand master,
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;If you will give me leave, sir, I will go out at the watergate, swim up
+      the inner harbour, and in a very short time turn a few of the craft lying
+      there into fire ships, and tow them out with a couple of galleys. At any
+      rate, we can fire all these craft that have grounded, and create a panic
+      among the others.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Well thought of, Gervaise! I will write an order on one of my tablets. Do
+      you take my place for a minute.&rdquo; Withdrawing behind the line, the grand
+      master sat down on a fragment of stone, and, drawing a tablet from a pouch
+      in his girdle, he wrote on it, &ldquo;In all things carry out the instructions
+      of Sir Gervaise Tresham: he is acting by my orders and authority, and has
+      full power in all respects.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      He handed the slip of parchment to Gervaise, who hurried to the water gate
+      in the inner harbour, threw off his helmet and armour, issued out at the
+      gate, and plunged into the sea. He swam out some distance, in order to
+      avoid the missiles of the Turks, who were trying to scale the wall from
+      the mole, and then directed his course to St. Michael's, which guarded the
+      inner entrance to the fort. He had fastened the parchment in his hair, and
+      as some of the garrison of the tower, noticing his approach, came down to
+      assist him, he handed it to them and was at once taken to the commander of
+      St. Michael, answering as he went the anxious questions as to how matters
+      stood at the breach.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Aid is sorely needed. The Turks have gained no foot of ground as yet, but
+      many of the knights are killed and most of the others utterly exhausted
+      with heat and labour. Unless aid reaches them speedily, the tower, with
+      all its defenders, will be lost.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The instant the commander knew what was required, he bade six of the
+      knights embark with Gervaise in a boat moored behind the tower, and row up
+      the harbour to the spot where the shipping was all massed together,
+      protected by the high ground of the fortress from the Turkish fire.
+      Gervaise waved his hand, as he neared the end of the harbour, to the
+      officer on the walls, and while the six knights who were with him ran off
+      to tell the master of the galleys to prepare two of them to leave the port
+      instantly, Gervaise explained to the officer in charge of the wall at that
+      point the plan that he was charged to carry out, and asked for twenty
+      knights to assist him.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It will leave us very weak along here,&rdquo; the officer said. &ldquo;Then let me
+      have ten, and send for another ten from other parts of the wall. Here is
+      the grand master's order, giving me full power and authority, and it is
+      all important that no single moment shall be wasted.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;You shall have twenty of mine,&rdquo; the officer said, &ldquo;and I will draw ten
+      from the langue next to us to fill their places.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      In a few minutes the quay was a scene of bustle and activity. Gervaise
+      picked out ten of the smallest vessels; the knights went among the other
+      ships, seized all goods and stores that would be useful as combustibles,
+      and compelled the crews to carry them on board the craft chosen as fire
+      ships. Then barrels were broken open, old sails and faggots saturated with
+      oil and pitch, and in little more than a quarter of an hour after his
+      arrival, Gervaise had the satisfaction of seeing that the ten boats were
+      all filled with combustibles, and ready to be set on fire. He now called
+      for volunteers from the sailors, and a number of them at once came
+      forward, including many of the captains. He placed one of these in command
+      of each fire ship, and gave him four of the sailors.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;The galleys will tow you out,&rdquo; he said, &ldquo;and take you close to the
+      enemy's ships. We shall range you five abreast, and when I give the word,
+      the one at the end of the line will steer for the nearest Turk, and, with
+      oars and poles, get alongside. The captain will then light the train of
+      powder in the hold, throw the torch among the straw, and see that, if
+      possible, the men fasten her to the Turk; but if this cannot be done, it
+      is not essential, for in the confusion the enemy will not be able to get
+      out of the way of the fire ship as it drives down against her. At the last
+      moment you will take to your boats and row back here. We will protect you
+      from the assaults of any of the Turkish ships.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Having made sure that all the captains understood the orders, Gervaise
+      took command of one of the galleys, the senior knight going on board the
+      other. The ten fire ships were now poled out until five were ranged
+      abreast behind each craft; Gervaise requested the commander of the other
+      galley to lie off the point of St. Nicholas until he had got rid of his
+      five fire ships, then to advance and launch his craft against the Turks.
+      The smoke of the guns lay so heavy on the water, and the combatants were
+      so intent upon the struggle at the breach, that Gervaise steered his
+      galley into the midst of the Turkish vessels laden with troops ready to
+      disembark, without attracting any notice; then, standing upon the
+      taffrail, he signalled to the two outside boats to throw off their ropes
+      and make for the Turkish ship nearest to them. This they did, and it was
+      not until a sheet of flame rose alongside, that the enemy awoke to the
+      sense of danger.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The other three fire ships were almost immediately cast off. Two of them
+      were equally successful, but the Turks managed to thrust off the third.
+      She drifted, however, through the shipping, and presently brought up
+      alongside one of the vessels fast aground. With but ten knights, Gervaise
+      could not attack one of the larger vessels, crowded with troops; but there
+      were many fishing boats that had been pressed into the service, and
+      against one of these Gervaise ordered the men to steer the galley. A shout
+      to the rowers made them redouble their efforts. A yell of dismay arose
+      from the Turkish troops as they saw the galley bearing down upon them, and
+      frantic efforts were made to row out of her way. These were in vain, for
+      her sharp prow struck them amidships, cutting the boat almost in two, and
+      she sank like a stone, the galley, without a pause, making for another
+      boat.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Looking back, Gervaise saw that his consort was already in the midst of
+      the Turks, among whom the wildest confusion prevailed, each ship trying to
+      extricate herself from the mass, upon which the batteries of the fortress
+      now concentrated their efforts. Two fresh columns of flame had already
+      shot up, and satisfied that all was going well, Gervaise continued his
+      attack upon the smaller craft, six of whom were overtaken and sunk. Three
+      or four of the larger vessels endeavoured to lay themselves alongside the
+      galley, but her speed was so superior to theirs that she easily evaded the
+      attempts, and, sweeping round, rejoined the other galley which had just
+      issued from among the Turks, who were already in full retreat. The
+      defenders of St. Nicholas, reanimated by the sight of the discomfiture of
+      the Turkish fleet, with a loud shout rushed down from the spot which they
+      had held for so many hours, drove their assailants before them, and flung
+      themselves upon the crowd assembled at the foot of the breach.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      These had already suffered terribly from the fire of the batteries. Again
+      and again they had striven to storm the mound of rubbish, and had each
+      time been repulsed, with the loss of their bravest leaders. Seeing
+      themselves abandoned by the ships, a panic seized them, and as the knights
+      rushed down upon them they relinquished all thoughts of resistance, and
+      dashed into the shallow water. Many were drowned in the attempt to swim
+      across the deep channel in the middle, some succeeded, while others made
+      their escape in the boats in which they had been brought ashore from the
+      ships.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The struggle was over. The two galleys made for the breach, and the
+      knights leapt out as soon as the boats grounded, and, wading ashore,
+      joined the group that had so long and gallantly sustained the unequal
+      fight. Fatigue, exhaustion, and wounds, were forgotten in the triumph of
+      the moment, and they crowded round the grand master and Caretto, to whose
+      joint exertions the success of the defence was so largely due.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Do not thank me, comrades,&rdquo; D'Aubusson said. &ldquo;No man has today fought
+      better than the rest. Every knight has shown himself worthy of the fame of
+      our Order. The meed of praise for our success is first due to Sir Gervaise
+      Tresham. At the moment when I began to doubt whether we could much longer
+      withstand the swarms of fresh foes who continued to pour against us, while
+      we were overcome by heat and labour, Sir Gervaise, who had throughout been
+      fighting at my side, offered to swim into the port, to fit out a dozen of
+      the merchant craft there as fire ships, and to tow them round into the
+      midst of the Turkish vessels behind the two galleys that were lying ready
+      for service. I remembered how he had before destroyed the corsair fleet at
+      Sardinia with fire ships, and the proposal seemed to me as an inspiration
+      sent from Heaven, at this moment of our great peril. I wrote him an order,
+      giving him full authority to act in my name, and in a time that seemed to
+      me incredibly short I saw him round the point with the fire ships in tow.
+      You saw, as well as I did, how completely the plan was carried out. Ten or
+      twelve of the Turkish ships are a mass of flames, and besides these I
+      noted that the galley ran down and destroyed several smaller craft filled
+      with soldiers. The panic in the ships spread to the troops on shore, and
+      rendered the last part of our task an easy one. I say it from my heart
+      that I consider it is to Sir Gervaise Tresham that we owe our success, and
+      that, had it not been for his happy thought, the sun would have gone down
+      on our dead bodies lying on the summit of the breach, and on the Turkish
+      flag waving over the fort of St. Nicholas.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Until now none of the defenders of the breach had known how what seemed to
+      them an almost miraculous change in the fortune of the fight had come
+      about, and they thronged round Gervaise, shaking his hand, and many of
+      them warmly embracing him, according to the custom of the time.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It was but natural that the idea should occur to me,&rdquo; he said, &ldquo;having
+      before successfully encountered them with fire ships; and as all on shore,
+      and especially these knights, aided me with all their power, it took but a
+      brief time to get the boats in readiness for burning. Much credit, too, is
+      due to the merchant captains and sailors who volunteered to take charge of
+      the fire ships and to manoeuver them alongside the Turks.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The grand master and the knights who had borne the brunt of the battle now
+      retired along the mole to the town, bearing with them their most seriously
+      wounded comrades, and assisting those whose wounds were less severe. The
+      twenty knights who had manned the two galleys remained in the fort.
+      Caretto continued in command, as, although he had suffered several wounds,
+      he refused to relinquish his post. Gervaise, who had,&mdash;thanks partly
+      to his skill with his weapons, but still more to the temper of the
+      splendid suit of armour presented to him by Genoa,&mdash;escaped without a
+      scratch, volunteered to remain with him until next morning, his principal
+      motive for making the request being his desire to escape from further
+      congratulations and praise for the success of his plan. After Caretto's
+      wounds had been dressed by the knights, and he and Gervaise had partaken
+      of some food and wine, which they greatly needed, Caretto was persuaded to
+      lie down for a time, the knights promising to bring him word at once if
+      they perceived any movement whatever on the part of the enemy. Gervaise
+      remained with him, feeling, now the excitement was over, that he sorely
+      needed rest after his exertions in the full heat of the summer sun.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It has been a great day, Gervaise,&rdquo; Caretto said, &ldquo;and I only hope that
+      when again I go into battle with the infidel, I shall have you at hand to
+      come forward at the critical moment with some master stroke to secure
+      victory. Claudia will be pleased indeed when she hears how the knight who
+      bears her gage has again distinguished himself. She will look on the gay
+      and idle young fops of Genoa with greater disdain than ever. Now you need
+      not say anything in protest, the more so as I feel grievously weak, and
+      disposed for sleep.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      <a name="link2HCH0022" id="link2HCH0022">
+      <!--  H2 anchor --> </a>
+    </p>
+    <div style="height: 4em;">
+      <br /><br /><br /><br />
+    </div>
+    <h2>
+      CHAPTER XXII THE STRUGGLE AT THE BREACH
+    </h2>
+    <p>
+      Two hours later Caretto and Gervaise were roused by the arrival of a
+      hundred knights in place of the previous garrison; these bore the news
+      that the pasha had sent in a flag of truce to ask for an armistice until
+      sundown, to enable him to carry off for burial the bodies of those who had
+      fallen in the attack. The request had been willingly granted; but
+      D'Aubusson had at the same time thought it well to send down a strong
+      reinforcement to the garrison to prevent any attempt at treachery on the
+      part of the Turks.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I have seldom heard pleasanter news,&rdquo; Caretto said; &ldquo;for just as I fell
+      asleep I was wondering how we were to rid ourselves of the corpses of the
+      infidels. By tomorrow the place would have become unbearable; and though,
+      living, the Turks could not turn us out of the tower, they would when dead
+      speedily have rid the place of us.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      In half an hour a number of Moslem vessels were seen approaching. Caretto
+      did not wish the Turks to imagine that he doubted their good faith, and
+      while directing the main body of knights to remain in concealment near the
+      breach, he placed two on sentry duty on the crest of the ruins, and, with
+      four other knights and Gervaise, went down in complete armour to salute
+      the officer in command of the burying party, as he landed from the boats.
+      The ships anchored a short distance out, and a number of boats rowed from
+      them to the shore. As the Turkish officer landed, Caretto saluted him, and
+      said in Arabic,
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I give you courteous greeting, Sir. When the cannon cease to sound and
+      swords are sheathed, there is no longer animosity between brave men; and
+      no braver than those whose bodies lie stretched there, breathed the air of
+      heaven. If, sir, I and the knights with me do not uncover our heads, it is
+      from no want of respect for the dead, but solely because we dare not stand
+      bareheaded under the fierce rays of the sun.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The Turk answered with equal courtesy, complimenting the knights on their
+      defence.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Had I not seen it with my own eyes,&rdquo; he said, &ldquo;I should have deemed it
+      altogether impossible that so small a number of men could thus for hours
+      have withstood the attacks of some of the best of the sultan's troops.
+      Tales have come down to us from our fathers of the marvellous prowess of
+      the knights of your Order, and how at Smyrna, at Acre, and elsewhere, they
+      performed such feats of valour that their name is still used by Turkish
+      mothers as a bugbear to frighten their children. But the stories have
+      always seemed to me incredible; now I perceive they were true, and that
+      the present members of the Order in no way fall short of the valour of
+      their predecessors.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The knights remained with the Turkish commander and some of his officers
+      while the work of collecting and carrying away the dead was performed, the
+      conversation on their side being supported by Caretto and Gervaise. No
+      less than seven hundred bodies were carried down to the boats, besides a
+      great many wounded by the artillery fire. None were, however, found
+      breathing among the great pile of dead at the upper part of the breach,
+      for the axes and double handed swords of the knights had, in most of the
+      cases, cleft through turban and skull.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;This represents but part of our loss,&rdquo; the Turkish commander said sadly,
+      as the last party came down with their burdens to the boats. &ldquo;At least as
+      many more must have perished in the sea, either in their endeavours to
+      escape when all was lost, in the destruction of their vessels by fire, by
+      the shot from your batteries, or by being run down by your galleys. Ah,
+      Sir Knight, if it had not been for the appearance of your fire ships,
+      methinks the matter might have ended differently.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;In that I altogether agree with you,&rdquo; Caretto said. &ldquo;We were indeed, well
+      nigh spent, and must have soon succumbed had it not been that the fire
+      ships arrived to our rescue. You have a fair right to claim that the
+      victory would have remained in your hands, had not those craft gone out
+      and snatched it from you.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Then, with salutes on both sides, the Turks took their places in the
+      boats, and the knights returned to the fort. As soon as darkness came on,
+      a large body of slaves were marched down from the town, and, under the
+      direction of the knights, laboured all night at the mound, removing great
+      quantities of the fallen stones and rubbish in a line halfway up it, and
+      piling them above so as to form a scarp across the mound that would need
+      ladders to ascend. Another party worked at the top of the mound, and there
+      built up a wall eight feet high. The work was completed by daylight, and
+      the knights felt that they were now in a position to resist another
+      attack, should Paleologus again send his troops to the assault.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The night had passed quietly. There was a sound of stir and movement in
+      the Turkish battery, but nothing that would excite the suspicion of a
+      large body of troops being in motion. When it became light it was seen
+      that the Turkish ships had sailed away to their previous anchorage on the
+      other side of the Island, and although at considerable intervals the great
+      cannon hurled their missiles against the fort, it was evident that, for
+      the time at least, the attack was not to be pressed at that point. A fresh
+      body of slaves, however, came down from the town to relieve those who had
+      been all night at work, and the repair of the defences was continued, and
+      with greater neatness and method than had been possible in the darkness.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      At eight o'clock the bells of St. John's Church gave notice that a solemn
+      service of thanksgiving for the repulse of the enemy was about to be held.
+      Notice had been sent down early to the tower; and all the knights who
+      could be spared, without too greatly weakening the garrison, went up to
+      attend it; the service was conducted with all the pomp and ceremony
+      possible, and after it was over a great procession was formed to proceed
+      to the shrine, where a picture of the Virgin held in special reverence by
+      the Order was placed.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      As it wound through the streets in splendid array, the grand master and
+      officials in all their robes of state, the knights in full armour and the
+      mantles of the Order, while the inhabitants in gala costume lined the
+      streets, windows, and housetops, the ladies waving scarves and scattering
+      flowers down on the knights, the roar of great cannon on the south side of
+      the city showed that the Turks had commenced the attack in another
+      quarter. Without pausing, the procession continued its way, and it was not
+      until the service in the chapel had been concluded that any steps were
+      taken to ascertain the direction of the attack. As soon as it was over,
+      the knights hastened to the walls. During the night the Turks had
+      transported their great basilisks, with other large pieces of artillery,
+      from the camp to the rising ground on the south side of the city, and had
+      opened fire against the wall covering the Jews' quarter, and at the same
+      time against the tower of St. Mary on the one hand and the Italian tower
+      on the other.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      From other commanding spots huge mortars were hurling great fragments of
+      rock and other missiles broadcast into the town. The portion of the wall
+      selected for the attack showed that the Turks had been well informed by
+      their spies of the weak points of the defence. The wall behind which the
+      Jews' quarter lay, was, to all appearance, of thick and solid masonry; but
+      this was really of great age, having formed part of the original defences
+      of the town, before the Order had established itself there. The masonry,
+      therefore, was ill fitted to resist the huge balls hurled against it by
+      the basilisks. The langue of Provence was in charge of this part of the
+      wall, and, leaving them for the present to bear the brunt of the storm,
+      the grand master sent the knights who could be spared, to assist the
+      inhabitants to erect shelters against the storm of missiles falling in the
+      town.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Sheds with sharply sloping roofs, constructed of solid timber, were built
+      against the inner side of the walls, and beneath these numbers of the
+      inhabitants found refuge. The work was performed with great celerity by
+      the inhabitants, aided by the gangs of slaves, and in two or three days
+      the townspeople were all in shelter, either in these sheds, in the vaults
+      of the churches, or in other strongly constructed buildings.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Among the missiles hurled into the town were balls filled with Greek fire,
+      but the houses being entirely built of stone, no conflagrations of
+      importance were caused by them, as a band of knights was organised
+      specially to watch for these bombs, and whenever one of them was seen to
+      fall, they hurried from their lookout to the spot, with a gang of slaves
+      carrying baskets of earth and buckets of water, and quenched the flames
+      before they had made any great headway.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The roar of the bombardment was almost continuous, and was heard at
+      islands distant from Rhodes, telling the inhabitants how the battle
+      between the Christians and the Moslems was raging.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      It was not long before the wall in the front of the Jews' quarter began to
+      crumble, and it was soon evident that it must, ere many days, succumb to
+      the storm of missiles hurled against it. D'Aubusson lost no time in making
+      preparations to avert the danger. He ordered all the houses in rear of the
+      wall to be levelled; a deep semicircular ditch was then dug, and behind
+      this a new wall, constructed of the stones and bricks from the houses
+      destroyed, was built, and backed with an earthen rampart of great
+      thickness and solidity.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The work was carried on with extraordinary rapidity. The grand master
+      himself set the example, and, throwing aside his robes and armour,
+      laboured with pick and shovel like the commonest labourer. This excited
+      the people to the highest pitch of enthusiasm, and all classes threw
+      themselves into the task. Knights and slaves, men, women, and children,
+      and even the inmates of the convents and nunneries, aided in the work, and
+      when at last the outer wall fell, and the Turks thought that success was
+      at hand, the pasha saw with astonishment and dismay that entry to the city
+      was still barred by a work as formidable as that which he had destroyed at
+      an enormous expenditure of ammunition. There was now a short breathing
+      time for the besieged; but the depression which the failure of their
+      efforts excited among the Turks, was shortly dispelled by the arrival of a
+      ship, with a despatch from Constantinople, in which the pasha was informed
+      that the sultan himself was about to proceed to Rhodes with a
+      reinforcement of a hundred thousand men, and a fresh park of artillery.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Paleologus had some doubts as to whether the report was true or was merely
+      intended to stimulate him to new efforts for the speedy capture of the
+      place. Knowing well that the grand master was the heart and soul of the
+      defence, and that the failure of the assault was mainly due to his energy
+      and ability, he determined to resort to the weapon so frequently in use in
+      Eastern warfare&mdash;that of assassination. To this end he employed two
+      men, one a Dalmatian, the other an Albanian; these presented themselves
+      before the walls as deserters, and as there was no reason for suspecting
+      their tale, they were admitted within the gates, and welcomed as having
+      escaped from enforced service. They soon spread the tale of the speedy
+      coming of the sultan with vast reinforcements, and as the pasha had on the
+      previous day caused salutes to be fired, and other demonstrations to be
+      made, the news was readily credited, and caused the greatest dismay among
+      the defenders.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Some of the knights of the Italian and Spanish langues believed the
+      prospect of a successful defence against so enormous a force was
+      absolutely hopeless, and determined to put pressure upon D'Aubusson to
+      treat for surrender before it became too late. They opened negotiations
+      with an Italian named Filelfo, one of D'Aubusson's secretaries, who
+      undertook to lay their opinion before the grand master. D'Aubusson at once
+      summoned the knights concerned in the matter before him. They found him
+      with several members of the council.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Sir Knights,&rdquo; he said, &ldquo;I have heard from my secretary your opinions in
+      the matter of a surrender, and since you are in such terror of the Moslem
+      sultan, you have my full permission to leave the town; and, more than
+      that, I will myself secure your safe departure, which might be imperilled
+      if your comrades or even the inhabitants of the town came to learn that
+      you had advocated surrender; but,&rdquo; he went on, changing his tone from that
+      of sarcasm to sternness, &ldquo;if you remain with us, see that the word
+      surrender never again passes your lips, and be assured that, should you
+      continue your intrigues, in that direction, you shall meet with the fate
+      you so justly deserve.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Overwhelmed by the grand master's accusation and sternness, the Italian
+      and Spanish knights threw themselves on their knees and implored him to
+      grant them an early opportunity of retrieving their fault by battle with
+      the infidel. Feeling that the lesson had been sufficiently severe, and
+      that henceforth there would be no renewal of intrigues for a surrender,
+      D'Aubusson forgave them, and promised them a place in the van when next
+      the Moslems attacked. The incident was not without its advantage, for the
+      two pretended deserters, believing that Filelfo, who had also fallen under
+      the displeasure of the grand master, would be ready to join in the
+      conspiracy against his life, approached him. Filelfo, who was greatly
+      attached to D'Aubusson, saw by their manner that they wished to engage him
+      in some intrigue, and, feigning great resentment and anger at his
+      disgrace, led them on until they divulged the entire plot for D'Aubusson's
+      assassination, and made brilliant offers to him if he would afford them
+      facilities for carrying it out, producing, in proof of their power to do
+      so, a letter of the pasha, authorising them to make such promises in his
+      name.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Filelfo at once divulged the whole plot to D'Aubusson. The two men were
+      immediately arrested, tried by the council, and sentenced to death. They
+      were not, however, formally executed, for the populace, obtaining news of
+      their treachery, broke in upon their guards, and tore them to pieces.
+      Foiled in his attempt on the life of the grand master, the pasha prepared
+      for a renewal of the attack, and it was not long before the knights on the
+      lookout at the church of St. John perceived that the fort of St. Nicholas
+      was again to be the scene of the attack. It was ere long discovered that a
+      large number of men were busy some distance along the shore in building a
+      long structure, that could only be intended for a floating bridge. Among
+      the sailors who had aided in the attack with the fire ships were several
+      men belonging to an English trader in the port. All who had done so had
+      been handsomely rewarded for their conduct, and five of the Englishmen had
+      afterwards gone to the English auberge and had asked to be enrolled for
+      service against the Turks, as they were weary of remaining on board in
+      idleness when there was work to be done. Their offer had been accepted,
+      and they had, in common with all the sailors in the port, laboured at the
+      construction of the inner wall. When that was completed, Sir John Boswell,
+      under whose special charge they had been placed, said to Gervaise, &ldquo;I
+      think that I cannot do better than send these men down to St. Nicholas. It
+      is probable that now the Turks see that they can do nothing at the new
+      breach, they may try again there. Sailors are accustomed to night watches,
+      and there are many of our knights who are not used to such work, and can
+      be better trusted to defend a breach than to keep a vigilant watch at
+      night. Will you take these men down to Caretto, and tell him that he can
+      sleep soundly if he has a couple of them on watch? One of them, Roger
+      Jervis, who is the mate of their ship, can speak some Italian, and as he
+      is in command of them, Caretto will find no trouble in making them
+      understand him.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      St. Nicholas had now been put into a fair state of defence, as a party had
+      been kept steadily at work there. Gervaise had not been to the tower since
+      the morning after the assault, and saw with satisfaction how much had been
+      done to render it secure. He found that Caretto was fast recovering from
+      his wounds.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;As it seems probable, Sir Fabricius,&rdquo; he said, after the first greetings
+      to the knight, &ldquo;that the Turks will favour you with another visit, I have
+      brought you five watchdogs. They are countrymen of mine, and were among
+      those who navigated the fire ships the other day. Sir John Boswell has
+      sent them down; they are, of course, accustomed to keep watch at night.
+      One of them is mate of their vessel, and will be in command of them; he
+      speaks a little Italian, and so will understand any orders you may give
+      him. I have been speaking to him as we came down; he will divide his men
+      into two watches, and will himself be on guard all night. Will you assign
+      them some quiet place where they can sleep in the daytime? They can erect
+      a shelter with a piece of sail cloth and a few bits of board, and they
+      will, of course, be furnished with food.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I shall be very glad to have them, for I am always restless at night,
+      lest those on watch should close their eyes. You see, they have quite made
+      up their minds that this fort will not be attacked again, and so are less
+      inclined to be vigilant than they would be, did they think that an attack
+      was impending.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Now that there was reason to believe that St. Nicholas might again be
+      attacked, Gervaise was frequently there with orders or inquiries from the
+      grand master. A number of vessels in the harbour were fitted up as fire
+      ships, so as to be in readiness when the attack came. He was about to
+      start early one morning when he saw Roger Jervis coming up with a heavy
+      anchor on his shoulder.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Why, what are you bringing that up here for?&rdquo; he asked. &ldquo;Have you been
+      diving; for I see your clothes are dripping with water?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Ay, ay, sir, I have been in the water, and that Italian commander told me
+      to come straight up here to tell the grand master all about the story; and
+      right glad am I to have met you, for I should have made but a poor fist of
+      it alone; I don't know more of their lingo than just to talk a few words
+      of it.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Then you had better tell me the story before I take you in.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Well, it was like this, Sir Knight: I had Hudson and Jeffreys posted upon
+      the wall, and I thought I would take a turn down on the rocks, for it was
+      a dark night, and you can see much farther when you are by the edge of the
+      water than you can when you are at the masthead. I sat there for an hour,
+      and was thinking that it was about time to go up and turn out the other
+      watch, when I saw something dark upon the water. It wasn't a ship, that
+      was certain, and if it was a boat there wasn't any one in it; but it was
+      too dark to make quite sure what it was. I watched it for a time, though I
+      did not think much of the thing, taking it for a boat that had got adrift,
+      or maybe a barrel from one of the Turkish ships. Presently I made out that
+      it was a good bit nearer than when I first saw it.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;That puzzled me. There is no tide to speak of in these seas, and there
+      was no wind moving about. I could make out now that it was a boat, though
+      a very small one, but certainly there was no one rowing it. It looked a
+      very strange craft, and as I saw by the way it was bearing that it would
+      come ashore about five or six fathoms from where I was sitting, I slid
+      quietly off the rock, put my sword down by me handy for action, and
+      waited. Presently the boat came up alongside the rock, and a fellow stood
+      up from behind the stern. I was glad to see him, for I had begun to think
+      that there was witchcraft in the thing moving along by itself, but I can
+      tell you I was savage with myself for not having guessed there was a man
+      swimming behind and pushing it on.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;He stooped over the boat, and took something heavy out; then he felt
+      about among the rocks under the water, and then laid the thing down there,
+      and seemed to me to be settling it firm. I had half a mind to jump up and
+      let fly at him, but then I thought it would be better to let him finish
+      what he was doing, and go off with the idea that no one had seen him. So I
+      kept hid until he started again. He waded a short way before he had to
+      swim, and I could see that as he went he was paying out a rope over the
+      stern. It was clear enough now what he had been up to: he had been fixing
+      an anchor. What he did it for, or what use it could be to him, I could not
+      say, but it was certain that he would not take all that trouble, with the
+      chance of being knocked on the head, for nothing; so I waited for a bit
+      till he had got out of sight, and over to the other side of the port.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Then I got up and felt about, and, chancing to get my foot under the
+      rope, went right over into the water. After that you may guess I was not
+      long in finding the anchor. I unknotted the rope from it and carried it
+      ashore; then it struck me that the Turks might take it into their heads to
+      give a pull on it in the morning, and if they did; they would find out
+      that their game, whatever it was, had been found out; so I got hold of a
+      stone of about twenty pound weight, and fastened the rope's end round it.
+      That was enough to prevent the rope getting slack and make them think that
+      it was still fast to the anchor; but, of course, if they pulled hard on it
+      it would come home directly. I went and reported the matter the first
+      thing this morning to the governor. He seemed to think that it was
+      important, and told me to bring the anchor up to the grand master, who
+      would get one of the English knights to find out all about it; for he
+      could not make out much of what I said.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;It is very important,&rdquo; Gervaise said, &ldquo;and you behaved very wisely in the
+      matter, and have rendered a great service by your discovery. I will take
+      you in at once to the grand master.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Still bearing the anchor, the sailor followed Gervaise into an apartment
+      where D'Aubusson was taking council with some of the senior knights.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Pardon my interrupting your Highness,&rdquo; Gervaise said; &ldquo;but the matter is
+      so important that I knew you would listen to it, however occupied you
+      were.&rdquo; And he then repeated the narrative of the sailor's discovery.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;This is indeed of the highest importance,&rdquo; D'Aubusson said, &ldquo;and the
+      knowledge that it gives us may enable us to defeat an attempt, that might
+      otherwise have proved our ruin. You see, knights, it solves the question
+      that we were just discussing. We agreed that this long floating bridge
+      that they have been constructing, was intended to enable them to cross the
+      outer port and again attack St. Nicholas; and yet it seemed to us that
+      even by night our batteries would be able to keep up such a fire on the
+      boats, towing the head of the bridge across, as to render it well nigh
+      impossible for them to get it over. Now you see what their plan is. With
+      the aid of this rope, the end of which they think is firmly fixed on our
+      side, they mean to haul the bridge across, and that so silently that they
+      hope to be upon us almost before we have time to don our armour. We shall
+      now be fully prepared, and need have no fear of the result.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      There could now be little doubt that the attack would be made without loss
+      of time, especially as the Turks believed that they could get their bridge
+      across unseen. The fire ships&mdash;which were altogether more formidable
+      than those Gervaise had improvised&mdash;were ordered to be made ready for
+      action. This being arranged, the admiral left the council at once, that no
+      time should be lost in getting them in readiness. D'Aubusson then turned
+      to the English sailor.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;You have rendered us a great service indeed by your vigilance, and showed
+      great prudence by allowing the Turk to believe that he had accomplished
+      his mission unsuspected. Had he thought he had been observed, some other
+      plan would have been adopted. For so great a service it is meet that a
+      great reward should be given.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      He then took a bag from the hands of one of his secretaries, whom he had
+      sent to fetch it, while they were discussing the matter of the fire ships.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Here are two hundred golden crowns,&rdquo; he added, handing the bag to the
+      seaman. &ldquo;With these you can either settle on shore, or can build a stout
+      ship and pursue your calling. Should you do so, call her the St. Nicholas,
+      in remembrance of the gratitude of the Order of St. John for your having
+      saved that fort from the Turks.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Astonished and delighted at the reward, which represented a very large sum
+      in those days, the sailor stammered his thanks, and added, &ldquo;I hope tonight
+      that if I again have charge of a fire ship, I may be able to do more to
+      prove to your Highness how grateful I am for the gift.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Throughout the day preparations for the defence of St. Nicholas went on
+      unceasingly. Gangs of men, as usual, worked in the breach; but, as it was
+      deemed advisable that there should be no outward show of activity that
+      would lead the Turks to suspect that their design had been discovered,
+      neither reinforcements of men nor munitions were sent along the mole;
+      everything being taken out by boats, which, rowing closely along under the
+      wall, were hidden from the view of the Turks. Barrels of Greek fire and
+      pitch, cauldrons for heating the latter, a store of firewood, great balls
+      of cotton steeped in oil and turpentine, sheaves of darts, spikes on short
+      staves, that were, after darkness fell, to be thrust in among the fallen
+      masonry to form a chevaux-de-frise&mdash;these, and all other matters that
+      the ingenuity of the defenders could suggest, were landed at the water
+      gate of the fort, while the garrison was strengthened by the addition of a
+      large number of knights. Stores of ammunition were collected in readiness
+      at all the batteries that commanded the mouth of the outer port, and by
+      sunset D'Aubusson felt that everything that was possible had been done to
+      meet the impending storm.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      At midnight the Turkish preparations were complete. The attack by the
+      bridge was to be assisted by a large number of boats and other craft, and
+      many armed galleys were also brought up to destroy or tow away the
+      defenders' fire ships. Paleologus himself was down by the shore directing
+      the preparations. Some of his best troops were placed upon the floating
+      bridge, and, when all was ready, the order was given to pull upon the
+      rope. No sooner, however, did the strain come upon it than there was a
+      jerk, the rope slackened, and it was at once evident that the anchor had
+      been discovered and the well laid plan disconcerted. Paleologus was
+      furious, but, believing that the attack he had arranged would still be
+      irresistible, he ordered a number of boats to take the bridge in tow,
+      while a still larger force was to make a direct attack upon the breach.
+      The movement was to be conducted as silently as possible until it was
+      discovered, and then a dash forward was to be made.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      It was two o'clock before the fresh arrangements were completed and the
+      boats put out. They had gone but a short distance when the anxious
+      watchers in St. Nicholas learnt by the dull, confused sound that came
+      across the water, that the attack was, in spite of the failure of the plan
+      to take the bridge silently across, to be persevered in. A cannon was at
+      once fired to give notice to the other batteries to be in readiness, and
+      as soon as the dark mass of boats was made out the guns of the fort opened
+      a destructive fire upon them, and a moment later were seconded by those
+      from the fortress; these, however, were at present being fired almost at
+      random, as the Turkish boats could not be made out at that distance. Now
+      that all need for concealment was at an end, the Turkish war cry rose
+      shrilly in the air, and the boatmen bent to their oars. The great cannon
+      at St. Anthony's Church hurled their tremendous missiles at the tower,
+      seconded by the fire of a number of other pieces that had in the darkness
+      been brought down almost to the water's edge.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      As before, the boats swept up to the foot of the breach, the Turks leaped
+      out, and, undismayed by the storm of shot, climbed up to the assault. The
+      short ladders that they had brought with them enabled them to surmount the
+      escarpments so laboriously made, and with loud shouts of &ldquo;Allah!&rdquo; they
+      flung themselves upon the defenders on the crest of the breach. Here they
+      were met by a line even more difficult to break through than before. The
+      knights were ranged three deep; those in the front were armed with swords
+      and battleaxes, while those in the other two lines thrust their spears out
+      between the swordsmen, covering them with a hedge of steel points. Others
+      in the rear brought up buckets of blazing pitch and Greek fire, and,
+      advancing through gaps left for the purpose, hurled the buckets down into
+      the struggling mass on the slope. There the fire not only carried death
+      among the assailants, but the lurid flames enabled the batteries to direct
+      their shot with terrible effect upon the breach, the crowded boats at its
+      foot, and the bridge which was, with immense labour, presently got into
+      position.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      It was not long before fresh light was thrown upon the scene, as the fire
+      ships, issuing out from the inner harbour, burst into columns of flame,
+      and, towed by boats, came into action. They were convoyed by the two
+      galleys, each with a full complement of knights, and these soon became
+      engaged in a fierce fight with the Turkish vessels that bore down to
+      arrest the course of the fire ships. The scene was indeed a terrible one,
+      the roar of cannon, the shouts of the combatants, the screams of the poor
+      wretches upon whom the terrible Greek fire fell, the clash of arms and the
+      shouts and cries of the Turks as they pressed across the bridge, united in
+      a din that thrilled with horror the spectators, both in the city and on
+      St. Stephen's Hill.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Several of the Turkish galleys, in their efforts to arrest the approach of
+      the fire ships towards the bridge, became themselves involved in the
+      flames; but they were so far successful that when daylight broke the
+      bridge was still intact and the combat at the breach continued to rage
+      with determination and fury on both sides. The Turks there were led by a
+      brave young prince named Ibrahim, a near relative of the sultan, with whom
+      he was a great favourite, and he was ever in the front line of the
+      assailants, his splendid bravery animating the soldiers to continue their
+      efforts. As the daylight broadened out, however, the light enabled the
+      Christian gunners to aim with far greater accuracy than had before been
+      possible, and, concentrating their fire upon the bridge, across which
+      reinforcements continued to press to the support of the assailants, they
+      succeeded in sinking so many of the boats that it was no longer passable.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Next they turned their fire upon the Turkish galleys, four of which they
+      sank. Shortly afterwards, a ball struck the gallant young leader of the
+      Turks, who, although previously several times wounded, had continued to
+      fight in the front line. He fell dead, and his followers, disheartened by
+      his fall and by the destruction of the bridge, at once abandoned their
+      efforts, and rushed down to the foot of the breach. The terrible scene
+      enacted at the repulse of the previous attack was now repeated. The
+      concentrated fire of the guns of the defenders carried destruction into
+      the crowded mass. Some gained the boats that still remained uninjured, and
+      rowed for the opposite shore; the greater number rushed into the water and
+      strove to recross it either by swimming or by the aid of the debris of the
+      shattered boats. Their total loss was greater even than that suffered by
+      them in the first attack, between two and three thousand being either
+      killed or drowned, among them a number of their best officers. The amount
+      of spoil, in the form of rich jewels and costly gold ornaments, found on
+      the bodies of the dead piled on the breach, was very great.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      For three days after this terrible repulse the Turks were inactive, the
+      pasha remaining shut up in his tent, refusing to see any one, or to issue
+      orders. At the end of that time he roused himself from his stupor of grief
+      and disappointment, and, abandoning the idea of any further attack upon
+      the point that had cost him so dearly, he ordered the troops to move round
+      and renew the attack upon the wall in front of the Jews' quarter, and
+      commence the construction of a battery on the edge of the great ditch
+      facing the retrenchment behind the breach before effected. The knights of
+      Italy and Spain determined to seize the opportunity of retrieving the
+      disgrace that had fallen upon them. At night they descended into the deep
+      cutting, carrying across their ladders, and, silently mounting the
+      opposite side, rushed with loud shouts into the unfinished battery. The
+      Turks there, taken utterly by surprise, made but a slight resistance; a
+      few were immediately cut down, and the rest fled panic stricken.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The knights at once set the woodwork of the battery on fire, hurled the
+      guns down into the ditch, and then returned triumphantly into the town,
+      the dashing feat completely reinstating them in the good opinion of the
+      grand master and their comrades.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The incident showed the pasha that he must neglect no precautions, and,
+      accordingly, he commenced his works at a distance from the walls, and
+      pushed his approaches regularly forward until he again established a
+      battery on the site of that from which his troops had been so
+      unceremoniously ejected. While forming the approaches, the workmen had
+      been constantly harassed by the fire from the guns on the walls, suffering
+      considerable loss of life; but their numerical superiority was so vast
+      that the loss in no way affected the plans of the pasha.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      As soon as the battery was completed, gangs of men, accustomed to mining
+      operations, set to work in its rear to drive sloping passages downwards,
+      opening into the face of the great cutting, and through these vast
+      quantities of earth and stones were poured, so as to afford a passage
+      across it, the depth being largely diminished by the great pile of rubbish
+      that had already fallen from the breached wall. This novel mode of attack
+      was altogether unexpected. The knights had regarded the fosse that had
+      been cut at such an enormous expenditure of labour as forming an
+      altogether impassable obstruction, and were dismayed at seeing the
+      progress made in filling it up. D'Aubusson himself, full of resources as
+      he was, saw that the defence was seriously threatened, unless some plan of
+      meeting this unexpected danger could be devised.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      He consulted Maitre Georges; but the latter could make no suggestion; his
+      only advice being the erection of a battery at a spot where it was almost
+      self evident that it could be of no utility whatever. Other circumstances
+      combined to render the suspicions D'Aubusson had entertained of the good
+      faith of the renegade almost a certainty. Georges was seized, tried, and
+      put to torture, and under this owned that he had been sent into the town
+      for the purpose of betraying it; and he was, the same day, hung in the
+      great square. His guilt must always be considered as uncertain. There was
+      no proof against him, save his own confession; and a confession extorted
+      by torture is of no value whatever. There are certainly many good grounds
+      for suspicion, but it is possible that Georges really repented his
+      apostacy, and acted in good faith in deserting the standard of Paleologus.
+      He was undoubtedly a man of altogether exceptional ability and
+      acquirements, and even the knights who have written accounts of the siege
+      do justice to the fascination of his manner and the charm of his
+      conversation.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      D'Aubusson now set to work in another direction to counteract the efforts
+      of the Turks. He erected an immense wooden catapult, which threw huge
+      pieces of rock into the midst of the Turkish works, crushing down the
+      wooden screens erected to hide their approaches, breaking in the covered
+      ways, and causing great loss of life among the besiegers. At the same time
+      galleries were driven below the breach, opening into the ditch, where
+      their exits were concealed by masses of rubbish. Through these strong
+      working parties issued out at night, and carried away up the passages the
+      rocks and other materials that the Turks had, during the day, brought,
+      with immense labour, from a distance to the shoot. The materials so
+      carried away were piled up behind the retrenchment, greatly adding to its
+      thickness and strength.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      For some days the Turks observed, to their astonishment, that the road
+      they were constructing across the ditch was diminishing instead of
+      increasing in bulk, and at length it became so evident that the garrison
+      were in some way removing the materials, that the pasha determined to
+      deliver the assault before the heap was so far diminished as to become
+      impassable. His former defeats had, however, taught him that success could
+      not be always calculated upon, however good its prospect might appear; and
+      although he had no real hope that the defenders would yield, he sent a
+      formal summons for them to do so. This was refused with disdain, and
+      preparations were at once made for the assault.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The pasha promised to his soldiers the sack of the town and all the booty
+      captured, and so assured were they of success that sacks were made to
+      carry off the plunder. Stakes, on which the knights, when taken prisoners,
+      were to be impaled, were prepared and sharpened, and each soldier carried
+      a coil of rope with which to secure his captive.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Before ordering the assault, the way was prepared for it by a terrible
+      fire from every siege gun of the Turks. This was kept up for twenty-four
+      hours, and so tremendous was the effect that the knights were unable to
+      remain on the ramparts. The Turkish troops moved into position for attack,
+      their movements being covered by the roar of the guns, and soon after
+      sunrise on the 22nd of July the signal was given, and at a number of
+      different points the Turks rushed to the assault. All these attacks, save
+      that on the breach, were merely feints, to distract the attention of the
+      garrison, and to add to the confusion caused by this sudden and unexpected
+      onslaught. The pasha's plans were well designed and carried out; the
+      knights, unable to keep their places on the ramparts under the storm of
+      missiles, had retired to shelter behind the walls. There was no thought of
+      an instant assault, as they considered that this would not be delivered
+      until the new wall behind the breach had been demolished.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Consequently, the rush of the Turks found the defenders altogether
+      unprepared. Swarming across the mass of debris in the ditch, they ascended
+      the breach without opposition, and their scaling ladders were placed
+      against the new wall before the knights could hurry up to its defence.
+      Even before the alarm was given in the town, the Turkish standard was
+      waving on the parapet, and the Moslems were crowding on to the wall in
+      vast numbers. The suddenness of the attack, the complete surprise, the
+      sound of battle at various points around the walls, caused for a time
+      confusion and dismay among the knights charged with the defence of the
+      wall facing the breach. Roused by the uproar, the inhabitants of the town
+      rushed up to their roofs to ascertain what was happening, and their cries
+      of wild terror and alarm at seeing the Turkish banner on the walls added
+      to the confusion. D'Aubusson sprang up from the couch, on which he had
+      thrown himself in full armour, at the first sound of the alarm, and,
+      sending off messages to all the auberges to summon every man to the
+      defence, ran down into the town, followed by a small party of knights.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Rushing through the streets, now filled with half dressed people wild with
+      terror, he reached the foot of the wall, whose summit was crowded with the
+      enemy, and saw in an instant that all was lost unless they could be driven
+      thence without delay. The effect of his presence was instantaneous. The
+      knights, hitherto confused and dismayed, rallied at once, and prepared for
+      the desperate undertaking. The bank on the inside was almost
+      perpendicular, and those charged with its defence had used two or three
+      ladders for ascending to the rampart. These were at once seized and
+      planted against the wall.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The position of the contending parties was now reversed; the Christians
+      were the assailants, the Turks the defenders. D'Aubusson himself was the
+      first to ascend. Covering his head with his shield, he mounted the
+      rampart; but ere he could gain a footing on the top he was severely
+      wounded and hurled backwards. Again he made the attempt, but was again
+      wounded and thrown down. Once more he mounted, and this time made good his
+      footing. A moment later, Gervaise, who had accompanied him from the
+      palace, stood beside him. Animated with the same spirit as his leader, he
+      threw himself recklessly against the Turks, using a short, heavy mace,
+      which in a melee was far more useful than the long sword. Scimitars
+      clashed upon his helmet and armour; but at every blow he struck a Turk
+      fell, and for each foot he gained a knight sprang on to the wall and
+      joined him. Each moment their number increased, and the war cry of the
+      Order rose louder and fiercer above the din. The very number of the Turks
+      told against them. Crowded together as they were they could not use their
+      weapons effectually, and, pressing fiercely upon them, the knights drove
+      them back along the wall on either hand, hurling them down into the street
+      or over the rampart. On so narrow a field of battle the advantage was all
+      on the side of the knights, whose superior height and strength, and the
+      protection afforded by their armour, rendered them almost invincible,
+      nerved as they were with fury at the surprise that had overtaken them, and
+      the knowledge that the fate of the city depended upon their efforts. After
+      a quarter of an hour's desperate conflict the Turks were driven down the
+      partial breach effected in the wall by the last bombardment, and the
+      Christians were again the masters of their ramparts. Paleologus, however,
+      hurried up reinforcements, headed by a band of janissaries, whose valour
+      had decided many an obstinate conflict. Before ordering them to advance,
+      he gave instructions to a company of men of approved valour to devote all
+      their efforts to attacking D'Aubusson himself, whose mantle and rich
+      armour rendered him a conspicuous object among the defenders of the
+      breach. Advancing to the attack, the janissaries burst through the mass of
+      Turks still continuing the conflict, and rushed up the breach. Then the
+      chosen band, separating from the rest, flung themselves upon the grand
+      master, the suddenness and fury of their attack isolating him and Gervaise
+      from the knights around.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Surrounded as he was by foes, already suffering from two severe wounds and
+      shaken by his falls from the ladder, the grand master yet made a valiant
+      defence in front, while Gervaise, hurling his mace into the face of one of
+      his assailants, and drawing his two handed sword, covered him from the
+      attack from behind. D'Aubusson received two more severe wounds, but still
+      fought on. Gervaise, while in the act of cutting down an assailant, heard
+      a shout of triumph from behind, and, looking round, he saw the grand
+      master sinking to the ground from another wound. With a cry of grief and
+      fury Gervaise sprang to him, receiving as he did so several blows on his
+      armour and shield intended for the fallen knight, and, standing across
+      him, showered his blows with such strength and swiftness that the
+      janissaries shrank back before the sweep of the flashing steel. More than
+      one who tried to spring into close quarters fell cleft to the chin, and,
+      ere his assailants could combine for a general rush, a body of knights,
+      who had just beaten off their assailants, fell upon the ranks of the
+      janissaries with a force and fury there was no withstanding, and the
+      chosen troops of the sultan for the first time broke and fled.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Excited almost to madness by the sight of their beloved master stretched
+      bleeding on the ground, the knights dashed down the breach in eager
+      pursuit. This action was decisive of the fate of the struggle. The panic
+      among the janissaries at once spread, and the main body of troops, who had
+      hitherto valiantly striven to regain the advantage snatched from them, now
+      lost heart and fled in confusion. But their escape was barred by the great
+      body of reinforcements pressing forward across the heap of rubbish that
+      formed the breach over the deep ditch. Maddened by fear, the fugitives
+      strove to cut a way through their friends. The whole of the defenders of
+      the breach now fell upon the rear of the struggling mass, hewing them down
+      almost without resistance, while the cannon from the walls and towers kept
+      up an unceasing fire until the last survivors of what had become a
+      massacre, succeeded in gaining their works beyond the ditch, and fled to
+      their camp. From every gateway and postern the knights now poured out,
+      and, gathering together, advanced to the attack of St. Stephen's Hill.
+      They met with but a faint resistance. The greater portion of the
+      disorganised troops had made no pause at their camp, but had continued
+      their headlong flight to the harbour, where their ships were moored,
+      Paleologus himself, heartbroken and despairing at his failure, sharing
+      their flight. The camp, with all its rich booty and the great banner of
+      the pasha, fell into the hands of the victors, who, satisfied with their
+      success, and exhausted by their efforts, made no attempt to follow the
+      flying foe, or to hinder their embarkation; for even now the Turks,
+      enormously outnumbering them as they did, might be driven by despair to a
+      resistance so desperate as once again to turn the tide of victory.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      <a name="link2HCH0023" id="link2HCH0023">
+      <!--  H2 anchor --> </a>
+    </p>
+    <div style="height: 4em;">
+      <br /><br /><br /><br />
+    </div>
+    <h2>
+      CHAPTER XXIII THE REWARD OF VALOUR
+    </h2>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise knew nothing at the time of the final result of the battle, for
+      as soon as the knights had burst through the circle of his opponents, he
+      sank insensible on the body of the grand master. When he came to himself,
+      he was lying on a bed in the hospital of the Order. As soon as he moved,
+      Ralph Harcourt, who was, with other knights, occupied in tending the
+      wounded, came to his bedside. &ldquo;Thank God that you are conscious again,
+      Gervaise! They told me that it was but faintness and loss of blood, and
+      that none of your wounds were likely to prove mortal, and for the last
+      twelve hours they have declared that you were asleep: but you looked so
+      white that I could not but fear you would never wake again.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;How is the grand master?&rdquo; Gervaise asked eagerly. Ralph shook his head.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;He is wounded sorely, Gervaise, and the leech declares that one at least
+      of his wounds is mortal; still, I cannot bring myself to believe that so
+      great a hero will be taken away in the moment of victory, after having
+      done such marvels for the cause not only of the Order, but of all
+      Christendom.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Then you beat them back again from the breach?&rdquo; Gervaise said.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;That was not all. They were in such confusion that we sallied out,
+      captured their camp, with the pasha's banner and an enormous quantity of
+      spoil, and pursued them to their harbour. Then we halted, fearing that
+      they might in their desperation turn upon us, and, terribly weakened as we
+      were by our losses, have again snatched the victory from our grasp. So we
+      let them go on board their ships without interference, and this morning
+      there is not a Turkish sail in sight. The inhabitants are well nigh mad
+      with joy. But elated as we are at our success, our gladness is sorely
+      damped by the state of the grand master, and the loss of so many of our
+      comrades, though, indeed, our langue has suffered less than any of the
+      others, for the brunt of the attacks on St. Nicholas and the breach did
+      not fall upon us, still we lost heavily when at last we hurried up to win
+      back the wall from them.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Who have fallen?&rdquo; Gervaise asked.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Among the principal knights are Thomas Ben, Henry Haler, Thomas Ploniton,
+      John Vaquelin, Adam Tedbond, Henry Batasbi, and Henry Anlui. Marmaduke
+      Lumley is dangerously wounded. Of the younger knights, some fifteen have
+      been killed, and among them your old enemy Rivers. He died a coward's
+      death, the only one, thank God, of all our langue. When the fray was
+      thickest Sir John Boswell marked him crouching behind the parapet. He
+      seized him by the gorget, and hauled him out, but his knees shook so that
+      he could scarcely walk, and would have slunk back when released. Sir John
+      raised his mace to slay him as a disgrace to the Order and our langue,
+      when a ball from one of the Turkish cannon cut him well nigh in half, so
+      that he fell by the hands of the Turks, and not by the sword of one of the
+      Order he had disgraced. Fortunately none, save half a dozen knights of our
+      langue, saw the affair, and you may be sure we shall say nothing about it;
+      and instead of Rivers' name going down to infamy, it will appear in the
+      list of those who died in the defence of Rhodes.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;May God assoil his soul!&rdquo; Gervaise said earnestly. &ldquo;'Tis strange that one
+      of gentle blood should have proved a coward. Had he remained at home, and
+      turned courtier, instead of entering the Order, he might have died
+      honoured, without any one ever coming to doubt his courage.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;He would have turned out bad whatever he was,&rdquo; Ralph said contemptuously;
+      &ldquo;for my part, I never saw a single good quality in him.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Long before Gervaise was out of hospital, the glad tidings that D'Aubusson
+      would recover, in spite of the prognostications of the leech, spread joy
+      through the city, and at about the same time that Gervaise left the
+      hospital the grand master was able to sit up. Two or three days afterwards
+      he sent for Gervaise.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I owe my life to you, Sir Gervaise,&rdquo; he said, stretching out his thin,
+      white hand to him as he entered. &ldquo;You stood by me nobly till I fell, for,
+      though unable to stand, I was not unconscious, and saw how you stood above
+      me and kept the swarming Moslems at bay. No knight throughout the siege
+      has rendered such great service as you have done. Since I have been lying
+      unable to move, I have thought of many things; among them, that I had
+      forgotten to give you the letters and presents that came for you after you
+      sailed away. They are in that cabinet; please bring them to me. There,&rdquo; he
+      said, as Gervaise brought a bulky parcel which the grand master opened,
+      &ldquo;this letter is from the Holy Father himself. That, as you may see from
+      the arms on the seal, is from Florence. The others are from Pisa, Leghorn,
+      and Naples. Rarely, Sir Gervaise, has any potentate or knight earned the
+      thanks of so many great cities. These caskets accompanied them. Sit down
+      and read your letters. They must be copied in our records.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise first opened the one from the Pope. It was written by his own
+      hand, and expressed his thanks as a temporal sovereign for the great
+      benefit to the commerce of his subjects by the destruction of the corsair
+      fleet, and as the head of the Christian Church for the blow struck at the
+      Moslems. The other three letters were alike in character, expressing the
+      gratitude of the cities for their deliverance from the danger, and of
+      their admiration for the action by which a fleet was destroyed with a
+      single galley. Along with the letter from Pisa was a casket containing a
+      heavy gold chain set with gems. Florence sent a casket containing a
+      document bestowing upon him the freedom of the city, and an order upon the
+      treasury for five thousand ducats that had been voted to him by the grand
+      council of the Republic; while Ferdinand, King of Naples, bestowed on him
+      the grand cross of the Order of St. Michael.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;The armour I had hung up in the armoury, where it has been carefully kept
+      clean. I guessed what it was by the weight of the case when it came, and
+      thought it best to open it, as it might have got spoilt by rust. It is a
+      timely gift, Sir Gervaise, for the siege has played havoc with the suit
+      Genoa gave you; it is sorely battered, dinted, and broken, and, although
+      you can doubtless get it repaired, if I were you I would keep it in its
+      present state as a memorial&mdash;and there could be no prouder one&mdash;of
+      the part you bore in the siege. I have seen Caretto this morning. He sails
+      for Genoa tomorrow, where he will, I hope, soon recover his strength, for
+      the wounds he received at St. Nicholas have healed but slowly. He said&rdquo;&mdash;and
+      a momentary smile crossed the grand master's face&mdash;&ldquo;that he thought a
+      change might benefit you also, for he was sure that the air here had
+      scarce recovered from the taint of blood. Therefore, here is a paper
+      granting you three months' leave. His commandery is a pleasant one, and
+      well situated on the slopes of the hills; and the fresh air will,
+      doubtless, speedily set you up. I should like nothing better than a stay
+      there myself, but there is much to do to repair the damages caused by the
+      siege, and to place the city in a state of defence should the Turks again
+      lay siege to it; and methinks Mahomet will not sit down quietly under the
+      heavy reverse his troops have met with.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;But I should be glad to stay here to assist in the work, your Highness.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;There are plenty of knights to see to that,&rdquo; D'Aubusson replied, &ldquo;and it
+      will be long before you are fit for such work. No, I give my orders for
+      you to proceed with Caretto to Genoa&mdash;unless, indeed, you would
+      prefer to go to some other locality to recruit your strength.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I would much rather go with Sir Fabricius, your Highness, than to any
+      place where I have no acquaintances. I have a great esteem and respect for
+      him.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;He is worthy of it; there is no nobler knight in the Order, and, had I
+      fallen, none who could more confidently have been selected to fill my
+      place. He has an equally high opinion of you, and spoke long and earnestly
+      concerning you.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      A fortnight later the ship carrying the two knights arrived at Genoa.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I will go ashore at once, Gervaise,&rdquo; Caretto said. &ldquo;I know not whether my
+      cousin is in the city or on her estate; if the former, I will stay with
+      her for a day or two before going off to my commandery, and of course you
+      will also be her guest. I hope she will be here, for methinks we shall
+      both need to refit our wardrobes before we are fit to appear in society.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Certainly I shall,&rdquo; Gervaise agreed; &ldquo;for, indeed, I find that my gala
+      costume suffered a good deal during my long absence; and, moreover,
+      although I have not increased in height, I have broadened out a good deal
+      since I was here two years ago.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Yes; you were a youth then, Gervaise, and now you are a man, and one of
+      no ordinary strength and size. The sun of Tripoli, and your labours during
+      the siege, have added some years to your appearance. You are, I think,
+      little over twenty, but you look two or three years older. The change is
+      even greater in your manner than in your appearance; you were then new to
+      command, doubtful as to your own powers, and diffident with those older
+      than yourself. Now for two years you have thought and acted for yourself,
+      and have shown yourself capable of making a mark even among men like the
+      knights of St. John, both in valour and in fitness to command. You saved
+      St. Nicholas, you saved the life of the grand master; and in the order of
+      the day he issued on the morning we left, granting you three months' leave
+      for the recovery of your wounds, he took the opportunity of recording, in
+      the name of the council and himself, their admiration for the services
+      rendered by you during the siege, and his own gratitude for saving his
+      life when he lay helpless and surrounded by the Moslems&mdash;a testimony
+      of which any knight of Christendom might well feel proud.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      It was three hours before Caretto returned to the ship.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;My cousin is at home, and will be delighted to see you. I am sorry that I
+      have kept you waiting so long, but at present Genoa, and, indeed, all
+      Europe, is agog at the news of the defeat of the Turks, and Italy
+      especially sees clearly enough that, had Rhodes fallen, she would have
+      been the next object of attack by Mahomet; therefore the ladies would not
+      hear of my leaving them until I had told them something at least of the
+      events of the siege, and also how it came about that you were there to
+      share in the defence. I see that you are ready to land; therefore, let us
+      be going at once. Most of the people will be taking their siesta at
+      present, and we shall get through the streets without being mobbed; for I
+      can assure you that the mantle of the Order is just at present in such
+      high favour that I had a hard task to wend my way through the streets to
+      my cousin's house.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      On arriving at the palace of the Countess of Forli, Gervaise was surprised
+      at the change that had taken place in the Lady Claudia. From what Caretto
+      had said, he was prepared to find that she had grown out of her girlhood,
+      and had altered much. She had, however, changed even more than he had
+      expected, and had become, he thought, the fairest woman that he had ever
+      seen. The countess greeted him with great cordiality; but Claudia came
+      forward with a timidity that contrasted strangely with the outspoken
+      frankness he remembered in the girl. For a time they all chatted together
+      of the events of the siege, and of his captivity.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;The news that you had been captured threw quite a gloom over us, Sir
+      Gervaise,&rdquo; the countess said. &ldquo;We at first consoled ourselves with the
+      thought that you would speedily be ransomed; but when months passed by,
+      and we heard that all the efforts of the grand master had failed to
+      discover where you had been taken, I should have lost all hope had it not
+      been that my cousin had returned after an even longer captivity among the
+      Moors. I am glad to hear that you did not suffer so many hardships as he
+      did.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I am in no way to be pitied, Countess,&rdquo; Gervaise said lightly. &ldquo;I had a
+      kind master for some months, and was treated as a friend rather than as a
+      slave; afterwards, I had the good fortune to be made the head of the
+      labourers at the buildings in the sultan's palace, and although I
+      certainly worked with them, the labour was not greater than one could
+      perform without distress, and I had naught to complain of as to my
+      condition.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      After talking for upwards of an hour, the countess told Caretto that she
+      had several matters on which she needed his counsel, and retired with him
+      to the next room of the suite opening from the apartment in which they had
+      been sitting. For a minute or two the others sat silent, and then Claudia
+      said,
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;You have changed much since I saw you last, Sir Gervaise. Then it seemed
+      to me scarcely possible that you could have performed the feat of
+      destroying the corsair fleet; now it is not so difficult to understand.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I have widened out a bit, Lady Claudia. My moustache is really a
+      moustache, and not a pretence at one; otherwise I don't feel that I have
+      changed. The alteration in yourself is infinitely greater.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I, too, have filled out,&rdquo; she said, with a smile. &ldquo;I was a thin girl then&mdash;all
+      corners and angles. No, I don' t want any compliments, of which, to tell
+      you the truth, I am heartily sick. And so,&rdquo; she went on in a softer tone,
+      &ldquo;you have actually brought my gage home! Oh, Sir Gervaise,&rdquo;&mdash;and her
+      eyes filled with tears&mdash;&ldquo;my cousin has told me! How could you have
+      been so foolish as to remain voluntarily in captivity, that you might
+      recover the gage a child had given you?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Not a child, Lady Claudia. A girl not yet a woman, I admit; yet it was
+      not given in the spirit of a young girl, but in that of an earnest woman.
+      I had taken a vow never to part with it, as you had pledged yourself to
+      bestow no similar favour upon any other knight. I was confident that you
+      would keep your vow; and although in any case, as a true knight, I was
+      bound to preserve your gift, still more so was I bound by the thought of
+      the manner in which you had presented it to me.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;But I could not have blamed you&mdash;I should never have dreamt of
+      blaming you,&rdquo; she said earnestly, &ldquo;for losing it as you did.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I felt sure, Lady Claudia, that had it been absolutely beyond my power to
+      regain it you would not have blamed me; but it was not beyond my power,
+      and that being so had I been obliged to wait for ten years, instead of
+      two, I would not have come back to you without it. Moreover, you must
+      remember that I prized it beyond all things. I had often scoffed at
+      knights of an order like ours wearing ladies' favours. I had always
+      thought it absurd that we, pledged as we are, should thus declare
+      ourselves admirers of one woman more than another. But this seemed to me a
+      gage of another kind; it was too sacred to be shown or spoken of, and I
+      only mentioned it to Caretto as he cross questioned me as to why I refused
+      the offer of ransom; and should not have done so then, had he not been
+      present when it was bestowed. I regarded it not as a lightly given favour,
+      the result of a passing fancy by one who gave favours freely, but as a
+      pledge of friendship and as a guerdon for what I had done, and therefore,
+      more to be honoured than the gifts of a Republic freed from a passing
+      danger. Had you then been what you are now, I might have been foolish
+      enough to think of it in another light, regardless of the fact that you
+      are a rich heiress of one of the noblest families in Italy, and I a knight
+      with no possessions save my sword.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Say not so, Sir Gervaise,&rdquo; she said impetuously. &ldquo;Are you not a knight on
+      whom Genoa and Florence have bestowed their citizenship, whom the Holy
+      Father himself has thanked, who has been honoured by Pisa, and whom
+      Ferdinand of Naples has created a Knight of the Grand Cross of St.
+      Michael, whom the grand master has singled out for praise among all the
+      valiant knights of the Order of St. John, who, as my cousin tells me,
+      saved him and the fort he commanded from capture, and who stood alone over
+      the fallen grand master, surrounded by a crowd of foes. How can you speak
+      of yourself as a simple knight?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Then she stopped, and sat silent for a minute, while a flush of colour
+      mounted to her cheeks.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Give me my gage again, Sir Gervaise,&rdquo; she said gently. In silence
+      Gervaise removed it from his neck, wondering greatly what could be her
+      intention. She turned it over and over in her hand.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Sir Knight,&rdquo; she said, &ldquo;this was of no great value in my eyes when I
+      bestowed it upon you; it was a gage, and not a gift. Now it is to me of
+      value beyond the richest gem on earth; it is a proof of the faith and
+      loyalty of the knight I most esteem and honour, and so in giving it to you
+      again, I part with it with a pang, for I have far greater reason to prize
+      it than you can have. I gave it you before as a girl, proud that a knight
+      who had gained such honour and applause should wear her favour, and
+      without the thought that the trinket was a heart. I give it to you now as
+      a woman, far prouder than before that you should wear her gage, and not
+      blind to the meaning of the emblem.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise took her hand as she fastened it round his neck, and kissed it;
+      then, still holding it, he said, &ldquo;Do you know what you are doing, Claudia?
+      You are raising hopes that I have never been presumptuous enough to
+      cherish.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I cannot help that,&rdquo; she said softly. &ldquo;There is assuredly no presumption
+      in the hope.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      He paused a moment.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;You would not esteem me,&rdquo; he said, holding both her hands now, &ldquo;were I
+      false to my vows. I will return to Rhodes tomorrow, and ask the grand
+      master to forward to the Pope and endorse my petition, that I may be
+      released from my vows to the Order. I cannot think that he or the Holy
+      Father will refuse my request. Then, when I am free, I can tell you how I
+      love and honour you, and how, as I have in the past devoted my life to the
+      Order, so I will in the future devote it to your happiness.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      The girl bowed her head.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;'Tis right it should be so,&rdquo; she said. &ldquo;I have waited, feeling in my
+      heart that the vow I had given would bind me for life, and I should be
+      content to wait years longer if needs be. But I am bound by no vows, and
+      can acknowledge that you have long been the lord of my life, and that so
+      long as you wore the heart I had given you, so long would I listen to the
+      wooing of no other.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I fear that the Countess, your mother&mdash;&rdquo; Gervaise began, but she
+      interrupted him.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;You need not fear,&rdquo; she said. &ldquo;My mother has long known, and knowing also
+      that I am not given to change, has ceased to importune me to listen to
+      other offers. Her sole objection was that you might never return from
+      captivity. Now that you have come back with added honours, she will not
+      only offer no objection, but will, I am sure, receive you gladly,
+      especially as she knows that my cousin Sir Fabricius, for whom she has the
+      greatest affection, holds you in such high esteem.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Six months later Gervaise again landed at Genoa, after having stayed at
+      Rome for a few days on his way back. D'Aubusson had expressed no surprise
+      at his return to Rhodes, or at the request he made.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Caretto prepared me for this,&rdquo; he said, smiling, &ldquo;when he asked me if you
+      might accompany him to Genoa. The Order will be a loser, for you would
+      assuredly have risen to the grand priorage of your langue some day. But we
+      have no right to complain; you have done your duty and more, and I doubt
+      not that should Mahomet again lay siege to Rhodes, we may count on your
+      hastening here to aid us?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;That assuredly you may, sir. Should danger threaten, my sword will be as
+      much at the service of the Order as if I were still a member of it.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;I by no means disapprove,&rdquo; D'Aubusson went on, &ldquo;of knights leaving us
+      when they have performed their active service, for in civil life they
+      sometimes have it in their power to render better service to the Order
+      than if passing their lives in the quiet duties of a provincial
+      commandery. It will be so in your case: the lady is a great heiress, and,
+      as the possessor of wide lands, your influence in Northern Italy may be
+      very valuable to us, and in case of need you will, like my brother De
+      Monteuil, be able to bring a gathering of men-at-arms to our aid. Have no
+      fear that the Pope will refuse to you a release from your vows. My
+      recommendation alone would be sufficient; but as, moreover, he is himself
+      under an obligation to you, he will do so without hesitation. Since you
+      have been away, your friend Harcourt has been appointed a commander of a
+      galley, and Sir John Boswell, being incapacitated by the grievous wounds
+      he received during the siege, has accepted a rich commandery in England,
+      and sailed but two days since to take up his charge. By the way, did you
+      reply to those letters expressing your thanks and explaining your long
+      silence?&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;Yes, your Highness, I wrote the same evening you gave them to me.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      &ldquo;That is right. The money voted you by Florence will be useful to you now,
+      and there is still a sum sent by your commandery owing to you by the
+      treasury. I will give you an order for it. However rich an heiress a
+      knight may win, 'tis pleasant for him to have money of his own; not that
+      you will need it greatly, for, among the presents you have received, the
+      jewels are valuable enough for a wedding gift to a princess.&rdquo;
+     </p>
+    <p>
+      Gervaise was well received at Rome, and the Pope, after reading the grand
+      master's letter, and learning from him his reason for wishing to leave the
+      Order, without hesitation granted him absolution from his vows. A few
+      months later there was a grand wedding at the cathedral of Genoa, the doge
+      and all the nobles of the Republic being present.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      Ralph Harcourt and nine other young knights had accompanied Gervaise from
+      Rhodes by the permission, and indeed at the suggestion, of the grand
+      master, who was anxious to show that Gervaise had his full approval and
+      countenance in leaving the Order. Caretto, who had been appointed grand
+      prior of Italy, had brought the knights from all the commanderies in the
+      northern republics to do honour to the occasion, and the whole, in their
+      rich armour and the mantles of the Order, made a distinguishing feature in
+      the scene.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The defeat of the Turks created such enthusiasm throughout Europe that
+      when the grand prior of England laid before the king letters he had
+      received from the grand master and Sir John Kendall, speaking in the
+      highest terms of the various great services Gervaise had rendered to the
+      Order, Edward granted his request that the act of attainder against Sir
+      Thomas Tresham and his descendants should be reversed and the estates
+      restored to Gervaise. The latter made, with his wife, occasional journeys
+      to England, staying a few months on his estates in Kent; and as soon as
+      his second son became old enough, he sent him to England to be educated,
+      and settled the estate upon him. He himself had but few pleasant memories
+      of England; he had spent indeed but a very short time there before he
+      entered the house of the Order in Clerkenwell, and that time had been
+      marked by constant anxiety, and concluded with the loss of his father. The
+      great estates that were now his in Italy demanded his full attention, and,
+      as one of the most powerful nobles of Genoa, he had come to take a
+      prominent part in the affairs of the Republic.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      He was not called upon to fulfil his promise to aid in the defence of
+      Rhodes, for the death of Mahomet just at the time when he was preparing a
+      vast expedition against it, freed the Island for a long time from fear of
+      an invasion. From time to time they received visits from Ralph Harcourt,
+      who, after five years longer service at Rhodes, received a commandery in
+      England. He held it a few years only, and then returned to the Island,
+      where he obtained a high official appointment.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      In 1489 Sir John Boswell became bailiff of the English langue, and Sir
+      Fabricius Caretto was in 1513 elected grand master of the Order, and held
+      the office eight years, dying in 1521.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      When, in 1522, forty-two years after the first siege, Rhodes was again
+      beleaguered, Gervaise, who had, on the death of the countess, become Count
+      of Forli, raised a large body of men-at-arms, and sent them, under the
+      command of his eldest son, to take part in the defence. His third son had,
+      at the age of sixteen, entered the Order, and rose to high rank in it.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      The defence, though even more obstinate and desperate than the first, was
+      attended with less success, for after inflicting enormous losses upon the
+      great army, commanded by the Sultan Solyman himself, the town was forced
+      to yield; for although the Grand Master L'Isle Adam, and most of his
+      knights, would have preferred to bury themselves beneath the ruins rather
+      than yield, they were deterred from doing so, by the knowledge that it
+      would have entailed the massacre of the whole of the inhabitants, who had
+      throughout the siege fought valiantly in the defence of the town. Solyman
+      had suffered such enormous losses that he was glad to grant favourable
+      conditions, and the knights sailed away from the city they had held so
+      long and with such honour, and afterwards established themselves in Malta,
+      where they erected another stronghold, which in the end proved an even
+      more valuable bulwark to Christendom than Rhodes had been. There were none
+      who assisted more generously and largely, by gifts of money, in the
+      establishment of the Order at Malta than Gervaise. His wife, while she
+      lived, was as eager to aid in the cause as he was himself, holding that it
+      was to the Order she owed her husband. And of all their wide possessions
+      there were none so valued by them both, as the little coral heart set in
+      pearls that she, as a girl, had given him, and he had so faithfully
+      brought back to her.
+    </p>
+    <p>
+      THE END <br /> <br />
+    </p>
+    <hr />
+    <p>
+      <br /> <br />
+    </p>
+<pre xml:space="preserve">
+
+
+
+
+
+End of Project Gutenberg's A Knight of the White Cross, by G.A. Henty
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK A KNIGHT OF THE WHITE CROSS ***
+
+***** This file should be named 4932-h.htm or 4932-h.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        http://www.gutenberg.org/4/9/3/4932/
+
+Produced by Martin Robb, and David Widger
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase &ldquo;Project
+Gutenberg&rdquo;), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+http://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  &ldquo;Project Gutenberg&rdquo; is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (&ldquo;the Foundation&rdquo;
+ or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase &ldquo;Project Gutenberg&rdquo; appears, or with which the phrase &ldquo;Project
+Gutenberg&rdquo; is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase &ldquo;Project Gutenberg&rdquo; associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+&ldquo;Plain Vanilla ASCII&rdquo; or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original &ldquo;Plain Vanilla ASCII&rdquo; or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, &ldquo;Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.&rdquo;
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+&ldquo;Defects,&rdquo; such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the &ldquo;Right
+of Replacement or Refund&rdquo; described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+http://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at http://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit http://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
+To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     http://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+
+
+</pre>
+  </body>
+</html>
diff --git a/4932.txt b/4932.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..246b39f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/4932.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,13928 @@
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of A Knight of the White Cross, by G.A. Henty
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: A Knight of the White Cross
+
+Author: G.A. Henty
+
+Release Date: January, 2004  [EBook #4932]
+Posting Date: April 13, 2009
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ASCII
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK A KNIGHT OF THE WHITE CROSS ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Martin Robb
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+A KNIGHT OF THE WHITE CROSS
+
+
+By G.A. Henty
+
+
+
+
+PREFACE.
+
+
+MY DEAR LADS,
+
+The order of the Knights of St. John, which for some centuries played
+a very important part in the great struggle between Christianity and
+Mahomedanism, was, at its origin, a semi-religious body, its members
+being, like other monks, bound by vows of obedience, chastity, and
+poverty, and pledged to minister to the wants of the pilgrims who
+flocked to the Holy Places, to receive them at their great Hospital--or
+guest house--at Jerusalem, dedicated to St. John the Baptist, and to
+defend them on their passage to and from the sea, against attack by
+Moslems. In a comparatively short time the constitution of the order was
+changed, and the Knights Hospitallers became, like the Templars, a
+great military Order pledged to defend the Holy Sepulchre, and to war
+everywhere against the Moslems. The Hospitallers bore a leading share
+in the struggle which terminated in the triumph of the Moslems, and the
+capture by them of Jerusalem. The Knights of St. John then established
+themselves at Acre, but after a valiant defence of that fortress,
+removed to Crete, and shortly afterwards to Rhodes. There they fortified
+the town, and withstood two terrible sieges by the Turks. At the end
+of the second they obtained honourable terms from Sultan Solyman, and
+retiring to Malta established themselves there in an even stronger
+fortress than that of Rhodes, and repulsed all the efforts of the Turks
+to dispossess them. The Order was the great bulwark of Christendom
+against the invasion of the Turks, and the tale of their long struggle
+is one of absorbing interest, and of the many eventful episodes none
+is more full of incident and excitement than the first siege of Rhodes,
+which I have chosen for the subject of my story.
+
+Yours truly, G. A. Henty
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER I The King Maker
+
+
+A stately lady was looking out of the window of an apartment in the
+Royal Chateau of Amboise, in the month of June, 1470. She was still
+handsome, though many years of anxiety, misfortune, and trouble, had
+left their traces on her face. In the room behind her, a knight was
+talking to a lady sitting at a tambour frame; a lad of seventeen was
+standing at another window stroking a hawk that sat on his wrist,
+while a boy of nine was seated at a table examining the pages of an
+illuminated missal.
+
+"What will come of it, Eleanor?" the lady at the window said, turning
+suddenly and impatiently from it. "It seems past belief that I am to
+meet as a friend this haughty earl, who has for fifteen years been the
+bitterest enemy of my House. It appears almost impossible."
+
+"'Tis strange indeed, my Queen; but so many strange things have befallen
+your Majesty that you should be the last to wonder at this. At any rate,
+as you said but yesterday, naught but good can come of it. He has done
+his worst against you, and one can scarce doubt that if he chooses he
+has power to do as much good for you, as in past times he has done you
+evil. 'Tis certain that his coming here shows he is in earnest, for
+his presence,--which is sure sooner or later to come to the ears of the
+Usurper,--will cause him to fall into the deepest disgrace."
+
+"And yet it seemed," the queen said, "that by marrying his daughter
+to Clarence he had bound himself more firmly than ever to the side of
+York."
+
+"Ay, madam," the knight said. "But Clarence himself is said to be alike
+unprincipled and ambitious, and it may well be that Warwick intended to
+set him up against Edward; had he not done so, such an alliance would
+not necessarily strengthen his position at Court."
+
+"Methinks your supposition is the true one, Sir Thomas," the queen said.
+"Edward cares not sufficiently for his brother to bestow much favour
+upon the father of the prince's wife. Thus, he would gain but little
+by the marriage unless he were to place Clarence on the throne. Then
+he would again become the real ruler of England, as he was until Edward
+married Elizabeth Woodville, and the House of Rivers rose to the first
+place in the royal favour, and eclipsed the Star of Warwick. It is no
+wonder the proud Earl chafes under the ingratitude of the man who owes
+his throne to him, and that he is ready to dare everything so that he
+can but prove to him that he is not to be slighted with impunity. But
+why come to me, when he has Clarence as his puppet?"
+
+"He may have convinced himself, madam, that Clarence is even less to
+be trusted than Edward, or he may perceive that but few of the Yorkists
+would follow him were he to declare against the Usurper, while assuredly
+your adherents would stand aloof altogether from such a struggle.
+Powerful as he is, Warwick could not alone withstand the united forces
+of all the nobles pledged to the support of the House of York. Thence,
+as I take it, does it happen that he has resolved to throw in his lot
+with Lancaster, if your Majesty will but forgive the evil he has done
+your House and accept him as your ally. No doubt he will have terms to
+make and conditions to lay down."
+
+"He may make what conditions he chooses," Queen Margaret said
+passionately, "so that he does but aid me to take vengeance on that
+false traitor; to place my husband again on the throne; and to obtain
+for my son his rightful heritage."
+
+As she spoke a trumpet sounded in the courtyard below.
+
+"He has come," she exclaimed. "Once again, after years of misery and
+humiliation, I can hope."
+
+"We had best retire, madam," Sir Thomas Tresham said. "He will speak
+more freely to your Majesty if there are no witnesses. Come, Gervaise,
+it is time that you practised your exercises." And Sir Thomas, with his
+wife and child, quitted the room, leaving Queen Margaret with her son to
+meet the man who had been the bitterest foe of her House, the author of
+her direst misfortunes.
+
+For two hours the Earl of Warwick was closeted with the queen; then he
+took horse and rode away. As soon as he did so, a servant informed Sir
+Thomas and his wife that the queen desired their presence. Margaret was
+standing radiant when they entered.
+
+"Congratulate me, my friends," she said. "The Star of Lancaster has
+risen again. Warwick has placed all his power and influence at our
+disposal. We have both forgiven all the past: I the countless injuries
+he has inflicted on my House, he the execution of his father and so many
+of his friends. We have both laid aside all our grievances, and we stand
+united by our hate for Edward. There is but one condition, and this I
+accepted gladly--namely, that my son should marry his daughter Anne.
+This will be another bond between us; and by all reports Anne is a
+charming young lady. Edward has gladly agreed to the match; he could
+make no alliance, even with the proudest princess in Europe, which would
+so aid him, and so strengthen his throne."
+
+"God grant that your hopes may be fulfilled, madam," the knight said
+earnestly, "and that peace may be given to our distracted country! The
+Usurper has rendered himself unpopular by his extravagance and by the
+exactions of his tax collectors, and I believe that England will gladly
+welcome the return of its lawful king to power. When does Warwick
+propose to begin?"
+
+"He will at once get a fleet together. Louis, who has privately brought
+about this meeting, will of course throw no impediment in his way; but,
+on the other hand, the Duke of Burgundy will do all in his power to
+thwart the enterprise, and will, as soon as he learns of it, warn
+Edward. I feel new life in me, Eleanor. After fretting powerless for
+years, I seem to be a different woman now that there is a prospect of
+action. I am rejoiced at the thought that at last I shall be able to
+reward those who have ventured and suffered so much in the cause of
+Lancaster."
+
+"My hope is, madam, that this enterprise will be the final one,--that,
+once successful, our dear land will be no longer deluged with blood,
+and that never again shall I be forced to draw my sword against my
+countrymen."
+
+"'Tis a good and pious wish, Sir Thomas, and heartily do I join in it.
+My married life has been one long round of trouble, and none more than I
+have cause to wish for peace."
+
+"There is the more hope for it, madam, that these wars have greatly
+diminished the number of powerful barons. It is they who are the authors
+of this struggle; their rivalries and their ambitions are the ruin of
+England. Save for their retainers there would be no armies to place in
+the field; the mass of people stand aloof altogether, desiring only to
+live in peace and quiet. 'Tis the same here in France; 'tis the powerful
+vassals of the king that are ever causing trouble."
+
+"'Tis so indeed, Sir Thomas. But without his feudal lords how could a
+king place an army in the field, when his dominions were threatened by a
+powerful neighbour?"
+
+"Then it would be the people's business to fight, madam, and I doubt not
+that they would do so in defence of their hearths and homes. Besides,
+the neighbour would no longer have the power of invasion were he also
+without great vassals. These great barons stand between the king and
+his subjects; and a monarch would be a king indeed were he able to rule
+without their constant dictation, and undisturbed by their rivalry and
+ambitions."
+
+"That would be a good time indeed, Sir Thomas," the queen said, with a
+smile; "but methinks there is but little chance of its coming about, for
+at present it seems to me that the vassals are better able to make or
+unmake kings, than kings are able to deprive the great vassals of
+power; and never since Norman William set foot in England were they more
+powerful than they are at present. What does my chance of recovering our
+throne rest upon? Not upon our right, but on the quarrel between Warwick
+and the House of Rivers. We are but puppets that the great lords play
+against each other. Did it depend upon my will, it should be as you
+say; I would crush them all at a blow. Then only should I feel really a
+queen. But that is but a dream that can never be carried out."
+
+"Not in our time, madam. But perhaps it may come sooner than we expect;
+and this long war, which has destroyed many great families and weakened
+others, may greatly hasten its arrival. I presume until Warwick is ready
+to move naught will be done, your Majesty?"
+
+"That is not settled yet. Warwick spoke somewhat of causing a rising
+in the north before he set sail, so that a portion at least of Edward's
+power may be up there when we make our landing."
+
+"It would be a prudent step, madam. If we can but gain possession of
+London, the matter would be half finished. The citizens are ever ready
+to take sides with those whom they regard as likely to win, and just as
+they shout at present 'Long live King Edward!' so would they shout 'Long
+live King Henry!' did you enter the town."
+
+"This may perhaps change the thought that you have entertained, Sir
+Thomas, of making your son a Knight of St. John."
+
+"I have not thought the matter over, madam. If there were quiet in the
+land I should, were it not for my vow, be well content that he should
+settle down in peace at my old hall; but if I see that there is still
+trouble and bloodshed ahead, I would in any case far rather that he
+should enter the Order, and spend his life in fighting the infidel than
+in strife with Englishmen. My good friend, the Grand Prior of the Order
+in England, has promised that he will take him as his page, and at
+any rate in the House of St. John's he will pass his youth in security
+whatsoever fate may befall me. The child himself already bids fair to
+do honour to our name, and to become a worthy member of the Order. He is
+fond of study, and under my daily tuition is making good progress in the
+use of his weapons."
+
+"That is he," the prince said, speaking for the first time, "It was but
+yesterday in the great hall downstairs he stood up with blunted swords
+against young Victor de Paulliac, who is nigh three years his senior. It
+was amusing to see how the little knaves fought against each other;
+and by my faith Gervaise held his own staunchly, in spite of Victor's
+superior height and weight. If he join the Order, Sir Thomas, I warrant
+me he will cleave many an infidel's skull, and will do honour to the
+langue of England."
+
+"I hope so, prince," the knight said gravely. "The Moslems ever gain in
+power, and it may well be that the Knights of St. John will be hardly
+pressed to hold their own. If the boy joins them it will be my wish that
+he shall as early as possible repair to Rhodes. I do not wish him to
+become one of the drones who live in sloth at their commanderies in
+England, and take no part in the noble struggle of the Order with the
+Moslem host, who have captured Constantinople and now threaten all
+Europe. We were childless some years after our marriage, and Eleanor and
+I vowed that were a son born to us he should join the Order of the White
+Cross, and dedicate his life to the defence of Christian Europe against
+the infidel. Our prayers for a son were granted, and Gervaise will enter
+the Order as soon as his age will permit him. That is why I rejoice at
+the grand prior's offer to take him as his page, for he will dwell in
+the hospital safely until old enough to take the first steps towards
+becoming a knight of the Order."
+
+"I would that I had been born the son of a baron like yourself," the
+prince said earnestly, "and that I were free to choose my own career.
+Assuredly in that case I too would have joined the noble Order and
+have spent my life in fighting in so grand a cause, free from all the
+quarrels and disputes and enmities that rend England. Even should I some
+day gain a throne, surely my lot is not to be envied. Yet, as I have
+been born to the rank, I must try for it, and I trust to do so worthily
+and bravely. But who can say what the end will be? Warwick has ever
+been our foe, and though my royal mother may use him in order to free my
+father, and place him on the throne, she must know well enough that he
+but uses us for his own ends alone, and that he will ever stand beside
+the throne and be the real ruler of England."
+
+"For a time, Edward," the queen broke in. "We have shown that we can
+wait, and now it seems that our great hope is likely to be fulfilled.
+After that, the rest will be easy. There are other nobles, well nigh as
+powerful as he, who look with jealousy upon the way in which he lords
+it, and be assured that they will look with a still less friendly eye
+upon him when he stands, as you say, beside the throne, once your father
+is again seated there. We can afford to bide our time, and assuredly it
+will not be long before a party is formed against Warwick. Until then
+we must bear everything. Our interests are the same. If he is content
+to remain a prop to the throne, and not to eclipse it, the memory of
+the past will not stand between us, and I shall regard him as the weapon
+that has beaten down the House of York and restored us to our own, and
+shall give him my confidence and friendship. If, on the other hand,
+he assumes too much, and tries to lord it over us, I shall seek other
+support and gather a party which even he will be unable successfully to
+withstand. I should have thought, Edward, that you would be even more
+glad than I that this long time of weary waiting for action is over, and
+that once again the banner of Lancaster will be spread to the winds."
+
+"I shall be that, mother. Rather would I meet death in the field than
+live cooped up here, a pensioner of France. But I own that I should feel
+more joy at the prospect if the people of England had declared in our
+favour, instead of its being Warwick--whom you have always taught me to
+fear and hate--who thus comes to offer to place my father again on the
+throne, and whose goodwill towards us is simply the result of pique and
+displeasure because he is no longer first in the favour of Edward. It
+does not seem to me that a throne won by the aid of a traitor can be a
+stable one."
+
+"You are a foolish boy," the queen said angrily. "Do you not see that by
+marrying Warwick's daughter you will attach him firmly to us?"
+
+"Marriages do not count for much, mother. Another of Warwick's daughters
+married Clarence, Edward's brother, and yet he purposes to dethrone
+Edward."
+
+The queen gave an angry gesture and said, "You have my permission to
+retire, Edward. I am in no mood to listen to auguries of evil at the
+present moment."
+
+The prince hesitated for a moment as if about to speak, but with an
+effort controlled himself, and bowing deeply to his mother, left the
+room.
+
+"Edward is in a perverse humour," the queen said in a tone of much
+vexation to Sir Thomas Tresham, when Gervaise had left the room.
+"However, I know he will bear himself well when the hour of trial
+comes."
+
+"That I can warrant he will, madam; he has a noble character, frank and
+fearless, and yet thoughtful beyond his years. He will make, I believe,
+a noble king, and may well gather round him all parties in the state.
+But your Majesty must make excuses for his humour. Young people are
+strong in their likes and dislikes. He has never heard you speak aught
+but ill of Warwick, and he knows how much harm the Earl has done to your
+House. The question of expediency does not weigh with the young as with
+their elders. While you see how great are the benefits that will accrue
+from an alliance with Warwick, and are ready to lay aside the hatred of
+years and to forget the wrongs you have suffered, the young prince is
+unable so quickly to forget that enmity against the Earl that he has
+learnt from you."
+
+"You are right, Sir Thomas, and I cannot blame Edward that he is unable,
+as I am, to forget the past. What steps would you advise that I myself
+should take? Shall I remain passive here, or shall I do what I can to
+rouse our partisans in England?"
+
+"I should say the latter, madam. Of course it will not do to trust to
+letters, for were one of these to fall into the wrong hands it might
+cause the ruin of Warwick's expedition; but I should say that a cautious
+message sent by word of mouth to some of our old adherents would be of
+great use. I myself will, if your Majesty chooses to entrust me with the
+mission, undertake to carry it out. I should take ship and land in the
+west, and would travel in the guise of a simple country gentleman,
+and call upon your adherents in all the western counties. It would be
+needful first to make out a list of the nobles who have shown themselves
+devoted to your cause, and I should bid these hold themselves and their
+retainers in readiness to take the field suddenly. I should say no word
+of Warwick, but merely hint that you will not land alone, but with a
+powerful array, and that all the chances are in your favour."
+
+"But it would be a dangerous mission, Sir Thomas."
+
+"Not greatly so, madam. My own estates lie in Sussex, and there would be
+but little chance of my recognition, save by your own adherents, who may
+have seen me among the leaders of your troops in battle; and even that
+is improbable. At present Edward deems himself so securely seated on
+the throne that men can travel hither and thither through the country
+without being questioned, and the Lancastrians live quietly with the
+Yorkists. Unless I were so unfortunate as to meet a Yorkist noble who
+knew that I was a banished man and one who had the honour of being in
+your Majesty's confidence, I do not think that any danger could possibly
+arise. What say you, wife?"
+
+"I cannot think that there is no danger," Lady Tresham said; "but even
+so I would not say a word to hinder you from doing service to the cause.
+I know of no one else who could perform the mission. You have left my
+side to go into battle before now, and I cannot think that the danger
+of such an expedition can be as great as that which you would undergo
+in the field. Therefore, my dear lord, I would say no word now to stay
+you."
+
+She spoke bravely and unfalteringly, but her face had paled when Sir
+Thomas first made the proposal, and the colour had not yet come back to
+her cheeks.
+
+"Bravely spoken, dame," the queen said warmly. "Well, Sir Thomas, I
+accept your offer, and trust that you will not be long separated from
+your wife and son, who will of course journey with me when I go to
+England, where doubtless you will be able to rejoin us a few days after
+we land. Now let us talk over the noblemen and gentlemen in the west,
+upon whom we can rely, if not to join our banner as soon as it is
+spread, at least to say no word that will betray you."
+
+Two days later Sir Thomas Tresham started on his journey, while the
+queen remained at Amboise eagerly awaiting the news that Warwick had
+collected a fleet, and was ready to set sail. Up to this point the Duke
+of Clarence had sided with Warwick against his brother, and had passed
+over with him to France, believing, no doubt, that if the Earl should
+succeed in dethroning Edward, he intended to place him, his son-in-law,
+upon the throne. He was rudely awakened from this delusion by Charles of
+Burgundy, who, being in all but open rebellion against his suzerain,
+the King of France, kept himself intimately acquainted with all that was
+going on. He despatched a female emissary to Clarence to inform him
+of the league Warwick had made with the Lancastrians, and the intended
+marriage between his daughter Anne and the young prince; imploring him
+to be reconciled with his brother and to break off his alliance with the
+Earl, who was on the point of waging war against the House of York.
+
+Clarence took the advice, and went over to England, where he made his
+peace with Edward, the more easily because the king, who was entirely
+given up to pleasure, treated with contempt the warnings the Duke
+of Burgundy sent him of the intended invasion by Warwick. And yet a
+moment's serious reflection should have shown him that his position was
+precarious. The crushing exactions of the tax gatherers, in order to
+provide the means for Edward's lavish expenditure, had already caused
+very serious insurrections in various parts of the country, and his
+unpopularity was deep and general. In one of these risings the royal
+troops had suffered a crushing defeat. The Earl Rivers, the father, and
+Sir John Woodville, one of the brothers, of the queen had, with the Earl
+of Devon, been captured by the rebels, and the three had been beheaded,
+and the throne had only been saved by the intervention of Warwick.
+
+Thus, then, Edward had every reason for fearing the result should the
+Earl appear in arms against him. He took, however, no measures whatever
+to prepare for the coming storm, and although the Duke of Burgundy
+despatched a fleet to blockade Harfleur, where Warwick was fitting out
+his expedition, and actually sent the name of the port at which the Earl
+intended to land if his fleet managed to escape from Harfleur, Edward
+continued carelessly to spend his time in pleasure and dissipation,
+bestowing his full confidence upon the Archbishop of York and the
+Marquis of Montague, both brothers of the Earl of Warwick.
+
+The elements favoured his enemies, for early in September the Duke of
+Burgundy's Fleet, off Harfleur, was dispersed by a storm, and Warwick,
+as soon as the gale abated, set sail, and on the 13th landed on the
+Devonshire coast. His force was a considerable one, for the French king
+had furnished him both with money and men; on effecting his landing
+he found no army assembled to oppose him. A few hours after his
+disembarkation, he was joined by Sir Thomas Tresham, who gave him the
+good news that the whole of the west was ready to rise, and that in a
+few days all the great landowners would join him with their retainers.
+This turned out to be the case, and Warwick, with a great array, marched
+eastward. Kent had already risen, and London declared for King
+Henry. Warwick, therefore, instead of marching thither, moved towards
+Lincolnshire, where Edward was with his army, having gone north to
+repress an insurrection that had broken out there at the instigation of
+Warwick.
+
+Lord Montague now threw off the mask, and declared for King Henry. Most
+of the soldiers followed him, and Edward, finding it hopeless to oppose
+Warwick's force, which was now within a short march of him, took ship
+with a few friends who remained faithful, and sailed for Holland.
+Warwick returned to London, where he took King Henry from the dungeon in
+the Tower, into which he himself had, five years before, thrown him, and
+proclaimed him king.
+
+On the day that this took place Dame Tresham arrived in London with her
+son. The queen had found that she could not for the present cross, as
+she was waiting for a large French force which was to accompany her.
+As it was uncertain how long the delay might last, she counselled her
+friend to join her husband. The revolution had been accomplished without
+the loss of a single life, with the exception of that of the Earl
+of Worcester, who was hated for his cruelty by the people. Edward's
+principal friends took refuge in various religious houses. The
+queen, her three daughters, and her mother, fled to the sanctuary at
+Westminster. All these were left unmolested, nor was any step taken
+against the other adherents of the House of York. Warwick was now
+virtually King of England. The king, whose intellect had always been
+weak, was now almost an imbecile, and Margaret of Anjou was still
+detained in France. Sir Thomas Tresham went down to his estates in Kent,
+and there lived quietly for some months. The Duke of Clarence had joined
+Warwick as soon as he saw that his brother's cause was lost; and as
+the Duke had no knowledge of his changed feelings towards him, he
+was heartily welcomed. An act of settlement was passed by Parliament
+entailing the Crown on Henry's son Edward, Prince of Wales, and in case
+of that prince's death without issue, on the Duke of Clarence. On the
+12th of March following (1471) Edward suddenly appeared with a fleet
+with which he had been secretly supplied by the Duke of Burgundy, and,
+sailing north, landed in the Humber. He found the northern population by
+no means disposed to aid him, but upon his taking a solemn oath that
+he had no designs whatever upon the throne, but simply claimed to be
+restored to his rights and dignities as Duke of York, he was joined by
+a sufficient force to enable him to cross the Trent. As he marched south
+his army speedily swelled, and he was joined by many great lords.
+
+Warwick had summoned Henry's adherents to the field, and marched
+north to meet him. When the armies approached each other, the Duke of
+Clarence, who commanded a portion of Henry's army, went over with his
+whole force to Edward, and Warwick, being no longer in a position to
+give battle, was obliged to draw off and allow Edward to march unopposed
+towards London. The citizens, with their usual fickleness, received him
+with the same outburst of enthusiasm with which, five months before,
+they had greeted the entry of Warwick. The unfortunate King Henry was
+again thrown into his dungeon in the Tower, and Edward found himself
+once more King of England.
+
+Sir Thomas Tresham, as soon as he heard of the landing of Edward, had
+hastened up to London. In his uncertainty how matters would go, he
+brought his wife and son up with him, and left them in lodgings, while
+he marched north with Warwick. As soon as the defection of Clarence
+opened the road to London, he left the Earl, promising to return in
+a few days, and rode to town, arriving there two days before Edward's
+entry, and, purchasing another horse, took his wife and son down to
+St. Albans, where leaving them, he rejoined Warwick. In a few days the
+latter had gathered sufficient forces to enable him to risk the fortunes
+of a battle, and, marching south, he encamped with his army on the
+common north of Barnet. Edward had come out to meet him, and the two
+armies slept on Easter Eve within two miles of each other.
+
+Late in the evening Clarence sent a messenger to the Earl, offering to
+mediate, but the offer was indignantly refused by Warwick.
+
+In the darkness, neither party was aware of the other's precise
+position. Warwick was much stronger than the king in artillery, and had
+placed it on his right wing. The king, in his ignorance of the enemy's
+position, had placed his troops considerably more to the right than
+those of Warwick's army. The latter, believing that Edward's line was
+facing his, kept up a heavy cannonade all night upon where he supposed
+Edward's left to be--a cannonade which was thus entirely futile.
+
+In the morning (April 14th) a heavy mist covered the country and
+prevented either force from seeing the other's dispositions. Warwick
+took the command of his left wing, having with him the Duke of Exeter.
+Somerset was in command of his centre, and Montague and Oxford of his
+right.
+
+Edward placed himself in the centre of his array, the Duke of Gloucester
+commanded on his right, and Lord Hastings on his left.
+
+Desirous, from his inferiority in artillery, to fight out the battle
+hand to hand, Edward, at six o'clock in the morning, ordered his
+trumpets to blow, and, after firing a few shots, advanced through the
+mist to attack the enemy. His misconception as to Warwick's position,
+which had saved his troops from the effects of the cannonade during the
+night, was now disadvantageous to him, for the Earl's right so greatly
+outflanked his left that when they came into contact Hastings found
+himself nearly surrounded by a vastly superior force. His wing fought
+valiantly, but was at length broken by Oxford's superior numbers, and
+driven out of the field. The mist prevented the rest of the armies from
+knowing what had happened on the king's left. Edward himself led
+the charge on Warwick's centre, and having his best troops under his
+command, pressed forward with such force and vehemence that he pierced
+Somerset's lines and threw them into confusion.
+
+Just as Warwick's right had outflanked the king's left, so his own
+left was outflanked by Gloucester. Warwick's troops fought with great
+bravery, and, in spite of the disaster to his centre, were holding their
+ground until Oxford, returning from his pursuit of the king's left, came
+back through the mist. The king's emblem was a sun, that of Oxford
+a star with streaming rays. In the dim light this was mistaken by
+Warwick's men for the king's device, and believing that Oxford was far
+away on the right, they received him with a discharge of arrows. This
+was at once returned, and a conflict took place. At last the mistake was
+discovered, but the confusion caused was irreparable. Warwick and
+Oxford each suspected the other of treachery, and the king's right still
+pressing on, the confusion increased, and the battle, which had been so
+nearly won by the Earl, soon became a complete defeat, and by ten in the
+morning Warwick's army was in full flight.
+
+Accounts differ as to the strength of the forces engaged, but it is
+probable that there was no great inequality, and that each party brought
+some fifteen thousand men into the field. The number of slain is also
+very uncertain, some historians placing the total at ten thousand,
+others as low as one thousand; but from the number of nobles who fell,
+the former computation is probably nearest to the truth. Warwick, his
+brother Montague, and many other nobles and gentlemen, were killed, the
+only great nobles on his side who escaped being the Earls of Somerset
+and Oxford; many were also killed on Edward's side, and the slaughter
+among the ordinary fighting men was greater than usual.
+
+Hitherto in the battles that had been fought during the civil war; while
+the leaders taken on the field were frequently executed, the common
+soldiers were permitted to return to their homes, as they had only
+been acting under the orders of their feudal superiors, and were not
+considered responsible for their acts. At Barnet, however, Edward,
+smarting from the humiliation he had suffered by his enforced flight
+from England, owing to the whole country declaring for his rival, gave
+orders that no quarter was to be granted. It was an anxious day at St.
+Albans, where many ladies whose husbands were with Warwick's army had,
+like Dame Tresham, taken up their quarters. It was but a few miles from
+the field of battle. In the event of victory they could at once join
+their husbands, while in case of defeat they could take refuge in the
+sanctuary of the abbey. Messengers the night before had brought the news
+that the battle would begin at the dawn of day, and with intense anxiety
+they waited for the news.
+
+Dame Tresham and her son attended early mass at the abbey, and had
+returned to their lodgings, when Sir Thomas rode up at full speed.
+His armour was dinted and his plume shorn away from his helmet. As he
+entered the house he was met by his wife, who had run downstairs as she
+heard his horse stop at the door. A glance at his face was sufficient to
+tell the news.
+
+"We have lost the day," he said. "Warwick and Montague are both killed.
+All is lost here for the present. Which will you do, my love, ride with
+me to the West, where Queen Margaret will speedily land, if indeed she
+has not landed already, or take sanctuary here with the boy?"
+
+"I will go with you," she said. "I would vastly rather do so."
+
+"I will tell you more on the road," he said. "There is no time to be
+lost now."
+
+The woman of the house was called, and at once set her son to saddle
+the other horse and to give a feed to that of the knight. Dame Tresham
+busied herself with packing the saddlebags while her husband partook of
+a hasty meal; and ten minutes after his arrival they set off, Gervaise
+riding behind his father, while the latter led the horse on which his
+wife was mounted. A thick mist hung over the country.
+
+"This mist told against us in the battle, wife, for as we advanced our
+forces fell into confusion, and more than once friend attacked friend,
+believing that he was an enemy. However, it has proved an advantage to
+us now, for it has enabled great numbers to escape who might otherwise
+have been followed and cut down. I was very fortunate. I had left my
+horse at a little farmhouse two miles in the rear of our camp, and in
+the fog had but small hope of finding it; but soon after leaving the
+battlefield, I came upon a rustic hurrying in the same direction as
+myself, and upon questioning him it turned out that he was a hand on
+the very farm at which I had left the horse. He had, with two or three
+others, stolen out after midnight to see the battle, and was now making
+his way home again, having seen indeed but little, but having learned
+from fugitives that we had been defeated. He guided me to the farmhouse,
+which otherwise I should assuredly never have reached. His master was
+favourable to our party, and let the man take one of the cart horses, on
+which he rode as my guide until he had placed me upon the high road to
+St. Albans, and I was then able to gallop on at full speed."
+
+"And Warwick and his brother Montague are both killed?"
+
+"Both. The great Earl will make and unmake no more kings. He has been a
+curse to England, with his boundless ambition, his vast possessions, and
+his readiness to change sides and to embroil the country in civil war
+for purely personal ends. The great nobles are a curse to the
+country, wife. They are, it is true, a check upon kingly ill doing and
+oppression; but were they, with their great arrays of retainers and
+feudal followers, out of the way, methinks that the citizens and yeomen
+would be able to hold their own against any king."
+
+"Was the battle a hard fought one?"
+
+"I know but little of what passed, except near the standard of Warwick
+himself. There the fighting was fierce indeed, for it was against the
+Earl that the king finally directed his chief onslaught. Doubtless he
+was actuated both by a deep personal resentment against the Earl for the
+part he had played and the humiliation he had inflicted upon him, and
+also by the knowledge that a defeat of Warwick personally would be the
+heaviest blow that he could inflict upon the cause of Lancaster."
+
+"Then do you think the cause is lost?"
+
+"I say not that. Pembroke has a strong force in Wales, and if the West
+rises, and Queen Margaret on landing can join him, we may yet prevail;
+but I fear that the news of the field of Barnet will deter many from
+joining us. Men may risk lands and lives for a cause which seems to
+offer a fair prospect of success, but they can hardly be blamed for
+holding back when they see that the chances are all against them.
+Moreover, as a Frenchwoman, it cannot be denied that Margaret has never
+been popular in England, and her arrival here, aided by French gold and
+surrounded by Frenchmen, will tell against her with the country people.
+I went as far as I could on the day before I left Amboise, urging her on
+no account to come hither until matters were settled. It would have been
+infinitely better had the young prince come alone, and landed in the
+West without a single follower. The people would have admired his trust
+in them, and would, I am sure, have gathered strongly round his banner.
+However, we must still hope for the best. Fortune was against us today:
+it may be with us next time we give battle. And with parties so equally
+divided throughout the country a signal victory would bring such vast
+numbers to our banners that Edward would again find it necessary to
+cross the seas."
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II THE BATTLE OF TEWKESBURY
+
+
+Riding fast, Sir Thomas Tresham crossed the Thames at Reading before any
+news of the battle of Barnet had arrived there. On the third day after
+leaving St. Albans he reached Westbury, and there heard that the news
+had been received of the queen's landing at Plymouth on the very day on
+which her friends had been defeated at Barnet, and that she had already
+been joined by the Duke of Somerset, the Earl of Devon, and others, and
+that Exeter had been named as the point of rendezvous for her friends.
+As the Lancastrians were in the majority in Wiltshire and Somerset,
+there was no longer any fear of arrest by partisans of York, and after
+resting for a day Sir Thomas Tresham rode quietly on to Exeter, where
+the queen had already arrived.
+
+The battle of Barnet had not, in reality, greatly weakened the
+Lancastrian cause. The Earl of Warwick was so detested by the adherents
+of the Red Rose that comparatively few of them had joined him, and the
+fight was rather between the two sections of Yorkists than between York
+and Lancaster. The Earl's death had broken up his party, and York and
+Lancaster were now face to face with each other, without his disturbing
+influence on either side. Among those who had joined the queen was
+Tresham's great friend, the Grand Prior of St. John's. Sir Thomas took
+up his lodgings in the house where he had established himself. The queen
+was greatly pleased at the arrival of Dame Tresham, and at her earnest
+request the latter shared her apartments, while Gervaise remained with
+his father.
+
+"So this is the young Knight of St. John," the prior said, on the
+evening of the arrival of Sir Thomas. "I would, Tresham, that I were at
+present at Rhodes, doing battle with the infidels, rather than engaged
+in this warfare against Englishmen and fellow Christians."
+
+"I can well understand that," Sir Thomas said.
+
+"I could not hold aloof here, Tresham. The vows of our Order by no means
+hinder us from taking part in the affairs of our own country. The rule
+of the Order is indeed against it, but the rule is constantly broken.
+Were it otherwise there could be no commanderies in this or any
+other country; we should have, on entering the Order, to abandon our
+nationality, and to form part of one community in the East. The Order
+is true to its oaths. We cannot defend the Holy Sepulchre, for that,
+for the present, is hopelessly lost; but we can and do wage war with
+the infidel. For this funds are necessary as well as swords, and our
+commanderies throughout Europe supply the funds by which the struggle is
+maintained, and, when it is needed, send out contingents to help those
+fighting in the East. It was from the neglect of this cardinal point
+that the Templars fell. Their commanderies amassed wealth and wide
+possessions, but unlike us the knights abstained altogether from
+fulfilling their vows, and ceased to resist the infidel. Therefore they
+were suppressed, and, with the general approval of Europe, a portion of
+their possessions was handed over to the knights of St. John. However,
+as I understand, it is your wish that as soon as the boy comes of age
+to wield arms he shall go to Rhodes and become an active member of the
+Order. This is indeed the rule with all neophytes, but having served
+a certain time they are then permitted to return and join one of the
+commanderies in their native countries."
+
+"I do not wish that for Gervaise," his father said; "at least, I wish
+him to remain at Rhodes until all the civil troubles are absolutely
+at an end here. My life has been ruined by them. Loving retirement and
+quiet, and longing for nothing so much as a life among my tenantry, I
+have almost from a boy been actively engaged in warfare or have been
+away as an exile. Here every one of gentle blood has been more or less
+mixed up in these civil broils. To few of us does it personally matter
+whether a member of the House of York or Lancaster sits on the throne,
+and yet we have been almost compelled to take sides with one or the
+other; and now, in my middle age I am on the eve of another battle
+in which I risk my life and fortune. If we win I gain naught but the
+satisfaction of seeing young Edward made King of England. If we lose I
+am going into exile again, or I may leave my wife a widow, and my child
+penniless."
+
+"It is too true, Tresham; and as I am as likely to fall as you are, the
+child might be left without a protector as well as fatherless. However,
+against that I will provide. I will write a letter to Peter D'Aubusson,
+who is the real governor of Rhodes, for the Grand Master Orsini is so
+old that his rule is little more than nominal. At his death D'Aubusson
+is certain to be elected Grand Master. He is a dear friend of mine. We
+entered the Order the same year, and were comrades in many a fight with
+the Moslems, and I am quite sure that when I tell him that it is my last
+request of him, he will, in memory of our long friendship, appoint your
+son as one of the Grand Master's pages. As you know, no one, however
+high his rank, is accepted as a novice before the age of sixteen.
+After a year's probation he is received into the body of the Order as a
+professed knight, and must go out and serve for a time in Rhodes. After
+three years of active service he must reside two more at the convent,
+and can then be made a commander. There is but one exception to the
+rule--namely, that the pages of the grand master are entitled to
+the privilege of admission at the age of twelve, so that they become
+professed knights at thirteen. Your son is now but nine, you say, and
+we must remember that D'Aubusson is not yet Grand Master, and Orsini may
+live for some years yet. D'Aubusson, however, can doubtless get him to
+appoint the boy as one of his pages. But, in any case, there are three
+years yet to be passed before he can go out. Doubtless these he will
+spend under his mother's care; but as it is as well to provide against
+everything, I will furnish your dame with a letter to the knight who
+will probably succeed me as Grand Prior of the English langue, asking
+him to see to the care and education of the boy up to the time when he
+can proceed to Rhodes. We may hope, my dear Tresham, that there will be
+no occasion to use such documents, and that you and I may both be able
+personally to watch over his career. Still, it is as well to take every
+precaution. I shall, of course, give D'Aubusson full particulars about
+you, your vow, and your wishes."
+
+"I thank you greatly, old friend," Sir Thomas said. "It has taken a
+load off my mind. I shall leave him here with his mother when we march
+forward, and bid her, if ill befalls me, cross again to France, and then
+to keep Gervaise with her until she can bring herself to part with him.
+She has her jewels and a considerable sum of money which I accepted from
+the man who has been enjoying my estates for the last five years, in
+lieu of the monies that he had received during that time. Therefore, she
+will not lack means for some years to come. Besides, Queen Margaret has
+a real affection for her, and will, doubtless, be glad to have her with
+her again in exile."
+
+"When I am old enough," Gervaise said, suddenly looking up from a missal
+of the Grand Prior's which he had been examining, "I will chop off the
+head of the Duke of York, and bring mother back to England."
+
+"You will be a valiant champion no doubt, my boy," the prior said,
+laughing. "But that is just what your father does not want. Chop off the
+heads of as many infidels as you will, but leave Englishmen alone, be
+they dukes or commoners. It is a far more glorious career to be aiding
+to defend Europe against the Moslem than to be engaged in wars with your
+own countrymen. If the great lords will fight, let them fight it out
+themselves without our aid; but I hope that long before you become a
+man even they will be tired of these perpetual broils, and that some
+agreement may be arrived at, and peace reign in this unhappy land."
+
+"Besides, Gervaise," his father added, "you must bear in mind always
+that my earnest wish and hope is that you will become a champion of
+the Cross. I took a solemn vow before you were born that if a son were
+granted to me I would dedicate him to the service of the Cross, and if I
+am taken from you, you must still try to carry that oath into effect.
+I trust that, at any rate for some years after you attain manhood,
+you will expend your whole strength and powers in the defence of
+Christianity, and as a worthy knight of the Order of St. John. Too many
+of the knights, after serving for three years against the infidels,
+return to their native countries and pass the rest of their lives in
+slothful ease at their commanderies, save perhaps when at any great
+crisis they go out for a while and join in the struggle. Such is not the
+life I should wish you to lead. At the death of your mother and myself,
+you will have no family ties in England--nothing to recall you here. If
+the House of York succeeds in establishing itself firmly on the throne,
+my estates will be forfeited. Therefore, regard Rhodes as your permanent
+home, and devote your life to the Order. Beginning so young, you may
+hope to distinguish yourself--to gain high rank in it; but remember that
+though these are my wishes, they are not my orders, and that your career
+must be in your own hands."
+
+"I will be a brave knight, father," the boy said firmly.
+
+"That is right, my boy. Now go upstairs to your bed; it is already late.
+I do not regret my vow," he went on, after Gervaise had left the room,
+"though I regret that he is my only son. It is singular that men should
+care about what comes after them, but I suppose it is human nature.
+I should have liked to think that my descendants would sit in the old
+house, and that men of my race and name would long own the estates. But
+doubtless it is all for the best; for at least I can view the permanent
+loss of my estates, in case the Yorkists triumph, without any poignant
+regret."
+
+"Doubtless it is for the best, Tresham, and you must remember that
+things may not, even now, turn out as you think. A knight who has done a
+brave service does not find much difficulty in obtaining from the Pope
+a dispensation from his vows. Numbers of knights have so left the Order
+and have married and perpetuated their name. It is almost a necessity
+that it should be so, for otherwise many princes and barons would
+object to their sons entering the Order. Its object is to keep back the
+irruption of the Moslems, and when men have done their share of hard
+work no regret need be felt if they desire to leave the Order. Our
+founder had no thought of covering Europe with monasteries, and beyond
+the fact that it is necessary there should be men to administer our
+manors and estates, I see no reason why any should not freely leave when
+they reach the age of thirty or thirty-five, and indeed believe that it
+would strengthen rather than weaken us were the vows, taken at the age
+of seventeen, to be for fifteen years only."
+
+"There is something in that," the knight said thoughtfully. "However,
+that is far in the distance, and concerns me but little; still, I agree
+with you, for I see no advantage in men, after their time of usefulness
+to the Order is past, being bound to settle down to a monastic life if
+by nature and habit unsuited for it. There are some spirits who,
+after long years of warfare, are well content so to do, but there are
+assuredly others to whom a life of forced inactivity, after a youth and
+manhood spent in action, must be well nigh unendurable. And now tell me
+frankly what you think of our chances here."
+
+"Everything depends upon time. Promises of aid have come in from all
+quarters, and if Edward delays we shall soon be at the head of an
+overwhelming force. But Edward, with all his faults and vices, is an
+able and energetic leader, and must be well aware that if he is to
+strike successfully he must strike soon. We must hope that he will not
+be able to do this. He cannot tell whether we intend to march direct to
+London, or to join Pembroke in Wales, or to march north, and until he
+divines our purpose, he will hardly dare to move lest we should, by some
+rapid movement, interpose between himself and London. If he gives us a
+month, our success is certain. If he can give battle in a fortnight, no
+one can say how the matter will end."
+
+Edward, indeed, was losing no time. He stayed but a few days in London
+after his victory at Barnet, and on the 19th of April left for Windsor,
+ordering all his forces to join him there. The Lancastrians had
+endeavoured to puzzle him as to their intended movements by sending
+parties out in various directions; but as soon as he had gathered a
+force, numerically small, but composed of veteran soldiers, he hurried
+west, determined to bring on a battle at the earliest opportunity. The
+queen's advisers determined to move first to Wells, as from that point
+they could either go north or march upon London. Edward entered Abingdon
+on the 27th, and then, finding the Lancastrians still at Wells, marched
+to the northwest, by which means he hoped to intercept them if they
+moved north, while he would be able to fall back and bar their road
+to London if they advanced in that direction. He therefore moved to
+Cirencester, and waited there for news until he learned that they had
+visited Bristol and there obtained reinforcements of men and supplies of
+money and cannon, and had then started on the high road to Gloucester.
+
+He at once sent off messengers to the son of Lord Beauchamp, who held
+the Castle of Gloucester for him, assuring him that he was following at
+full speed, and would come to his aid forthwith. The messengers
+arrived in time, and when the queen, after a long march, arrived before
+Gloucester, she found the gates shut in her face. The governor had taken
+steps to prevent her numerous adherents in the town from rising on
+her behalf, and, manning the walls, refused to surrender. Knowing that
+Edward was coming up rapidly, it was evident that there was no time to
+spare in an attempt to take the town, and the queen's army therefore
+pressed on, without waiting, to Tewkesbury. Once across the river they
+would speedily be joined by the Earl of Pembroke, and Edward would be
+forced to fall back at once.
+
+By the time they reached the river, however, they were thoroughly
+exhausted. They had marched thirty-six miles without rest, along bad
+roads and through woods, and were unable to go farther. The queen urged
+that the river should be crossed, but the leaders of the force were of
+opinion that it was better to halt. Edward would be able to follow them
+across the river, and were he to attack them when in disorder, and
+still further wearied by the operation of making the passage, he would
+certainly crush them. Moreover, a further retreat would discourage the
+soldiers, and as a battle must now be fought, it was better to fight
+where they were, especially as they could choose a strong position. The
+queen gave way, and the army encamped on a large field in front of the
+town. The position was well calculated for defence, for the country
+around was so broken and intercepted with lanes and deep hedges and
+ditches, that it was extremely difficult of approach.
+
+In the evening Edward came up, his men having also marched some
+six-and-thirty miles, and encamped for the night within three miles of
+the Lancastrian position. The queen's troops felt confident of victory.
+In point of numbers they were superior to their antagonists, and had the
+advantage of a strong position. Sir Thomas Tresham had, as he proposed,
+left his wife and son at Exeter when the force marched away.
+
+"Do not be despondent, love," he said to his weeping wife, as he bade
+her goodbye. "Everything is in our favour, and there is a good hope of a
+happy termination to this long struggle. But, win or lose, be assured it
+is the last time I will draw my sword. I have proved my fidelity to the
+House of Lancaster; I have risked life and fortune in their cause; but
+I feel that I have done my share and more, and whichever way Providence
+may now decide the issue of the struggle, I will accept it. If we lose,
+and I come scatheless through the fight, I will ride hither, and we will
+embark at Plymouth for France, and there live quietly until the time
+comes when Edward may feel himself seated with sufficient firmness on
+the throne to forgive past offences and to grant an amnesty to all who
+have fought against him. In any other case, dear, you know my wishes,
+and I bid you carry them out within twenty-four hours of your receiving
+news of a defeat, without waiting longer for my appearance."
+
+As soon as it was light, Edward advanced to the attack. The Duke of
+Gloucester was in command of the vanguard. He himself led the centre,
+while the rear was commanded by the Marquis of Dorset and Lord Hastings.
+The most advanced division of Lancastrians was commanded by the Duke of
+Somerset and his brother. The Grand Prior of the Order of St. John and
+Lord Wenlock were stationed in the centre, the Earl of Devon with
+the reserve. Refreshed by their rest, the queen's troops were in good
+spirits. While awaiting the attack, she and the prince rode among the
+ranks, encouraging the men with fiery speeches, and promising large
+rewards to all in case of victory.
+
+Gloucester made his advance with great difficulty. The obstacles to his
+progress were so many and serious that his division was brought to
+a halt before it came into contact with the defenders. He therefore
+brought up his artillery and opened a heavy cannonade upon Somerset's
+position, supporting his guns with flights of arrows, and inflicting
+such heavy loss upon him that the duke felt compelled to take the
+offensive.
+
+Having foreseen that he might be obliged to do so, he had, early in the
+morning, carefully examined the ground in front of him, and had found
+some lanes by which he could make a flank attack on the enemy. Moving
+his force down these lanes, where the trees and hedges completely hid
+his advance from the Yorkists, he fell suddenly upon Edward's centre,
+which, taken by surprise at the unexpected attack, was driven in
+confusion up the hill behind it. Somerset was quick to take advantage
+of his success, and wheeling his men round fell upon the Duke of
+Gloucester's division, and was equally successful in his attack upon
+it. Had the centre, under Lord Wenlock, moved forward at once to his
+support, the victory would have been assured; but Wenlock lay inactive,
+and Somerset was now engaged in conflict with the whole of Edward's
+force. But even under these circumstances he still gained ground, when
+suddenly the whole aspect of the battle was changed.
+
+Before it began Edward had sent two hundred spearmen to watch a wood
+near the defenders' lines, as he thought that the Lancastrians might
+place a force there to take him in flank as he attacked their front. He
+ordered them, if they found the wood unoccupied, to join in the fight
+as opportunity might offer. The wood was unoccupied, and the spearmen,
+seeing the two divisions of their army driven backwards, and being
+thereby cut off from their friends, issued from the wood and, charging
+down in a body, fell suddenly upon Somerset's rear.
+
+Astounded and confused by an attack from such a quarter, and believing
+that it was an act of treachery by one of their own commanders,
+Somerset's men, who had hitherto been fighting with the greatest
+bravery, fell into confusion. Edward's quick eye soon grasped the
+opportunity, and rallying his troops he charged impetuously down upon
+the Lancastrians, seconded hotly by Gloucester and his division.
+
+The disorder in Somerset's lines speedily grew into a panic, and the
+division broke up and fled through the lanes to the right and left.
+Somerset, after in vain trying to stop the panic, rode furiously back
+into the camp, followed by his principal officers, and riding up to
+Lord Wenlock he cleft his head in two with a battleaxe. His resentment,
+although justified by the inactivity of this nobleman at such a crisis,
+was yet disastrous, as it left the centre without a leader, and threw
+it into a state of disorganization, as many must have supposed that
+Somerset had turned traitor and gone over to the enemy. Before any
+disposition could be made, Edward and Gloucester poured their forces
+into the camp, and the Lancastrians at once broke and fled. Many of
+their leaders took refuge in the church, an asylum which they deemed
+inviolable, and which the Lancastrians had honourably respected in their
+hour of triumph.
+
+Among them were the Duke of Somerset, the Grand Prior of the Order
+of St. John, Sir Humphrey Audely, Sir Gervis of Clifton, Sir William
+Gainsby, Sir William Cary, Sir Henry Rose, Sir Thomas Tresham, and seven
+esquires. Margaret of Anjou fell into the hands of the victors. As to
+the fate of the young prince, accounts differ. Some authorities say that
+he was overtaken and slain on the field, but the majority related that
+he was captured and taken before Edward, who asked him, "What brought
+you to England?" On his replying boldly, "My father's crown and mine own
+inheritance," Edward struck him in the mouth with his gauntlet, and his
+attendants, or some say his brothers, at once despatched the youth with
+their swords.
+
+The king, with Gloucester and Clarence, then went to the church at
+Tewkesbury, where the knights had taken refuge, burst open the doors,
+and entered it. A priest, bearing the holy vessels, threw himself before
+the king, and would not move until he promised to pardon all who had
+taken sanctuary there. The king then retired, and trusting in the royal
+word, the gentlemen made no attempt to escape, although it is said that
+they could easily have done so. Two days later a party of soldiers by
+the king's orders broke into the church, dragged them from the foot of
+the altar, and beheaded them outside.
+
+The news of the issue of the fatal battle of Tewkesbury, the capture of
+the queen, and the death of the prince, was borne to Exeter by fugitives
+on the following day. Beyond the fact that the Earl of Devon and other
+nobles were known to have been killed, and Somerset with a party of
+knights had taken sanctuary, they could give no details as to the fate
+of individuals. In the deepest distress at the utter ruin of the cause,
+and in ignorance of the fate of her husband, who she could only hope was
+one of those who had gained sanctuary, Dame Tresham prepared for flight.
+This accomplished, she had only to wait, and sit in tearless anguish at
+the window, listening intently whenever a horseman rode past. All night
+her watch continued. Gervaise, who had cried himself to sleep, lay on
+a couch beside her. Morning dawned, and she then knew that her husband
+would not come, for had he escaped from the field he would long ere this
+have been with her. The messenger with the news had arrived at eight the
+previous morning, and, faithful to her husband's wishes, at that hour
+she ordered the horses to be brought round, and, joining a party
+of gentlemen who were also making for the coast, rode with them to
+Plymouth. Arrangements were at once made with the captain of a small
+ship in the port, and two days later they landed at Honfleur, where
+Sir Thomas had enjoined his wife to wait until she heard from him or
+obtained sure news of his fate.
+
+A week after her arrival the news was brought by other fugitives of the
+violation of the sanctuary by the king, and the murder of Somerset and
+the gentlemen with him, of whom Sir Thomas Tresham was known to have
+been one.
+
+The blow proved fatal to Dame Tresham. She had gone through many trials
+and misfortunes, and had ever borne them bravely, but the loss of her
+husband completely broke her down. Save to see his wishes concerning
+their son carried out, she had no longer any interest in life or any
+wish to live. But until the future of Gervaise was assured, her mission
+was unfulfilled. His education was her sole care; his mornings were
+spent at a monastery, where the monks instructed the sons of such of the
+nobles and gentry of the neighbourhood as cared that they should be able
+to read and write. In the afternoon he had the best masters in the town
+in military exercises. His evenings he spent with his mother, who strove
+to instill in him the virtues of patience, mercy to the vanquished, and
+valour, by stories of the great characters of history. She herself spent
+her days in pious exercises, in attending the services of the Church,
+and in acts of charity and kindness to her poorer neighbours. But her
+strength failed rapidly, and she was but a shadow of her former self
+when, two years and a half after her arrival at Honfleur, she felt that
+if she was herself to hand Gervaise over to the Order of St. John, she
+must no longer delay. Accordingly she took ship to London, and landing
+there made her way with him to the dwelling of the Order at Clerkenwell.
+It was in process of rebuilding, for in 1381 it had been first plundered
+and then burned by the insurgents under Wat Tyler. During the ninety
+years that had elapsed since that event the work of rebuilding had
+proceeded steadily, each grand prior making additions to the pile which,
+although not yet fully completed, was already one of the grandest and
+stateliest abodes in England.
+
+On inquiring for the grand prior, and stating that she had a letter
+of importance for him, Dame Tresham and her son were shown up to his
+apartment, and on entering were kindly and courteously received by him
+when informed that she was the widow of the late Sir Thomas Tresham.
+
+"I am the bearer of a letter for you, given into my hand by my husband's
+dear friend your predecessor," she said, "a few days before his murder
+at Tewkesbury. It relates to my son here."
+
+The grand prior opened the letter and read it.
+
+"Assuredly, madam, I will carry out the wishes here expressed," he said.
+"They are, that I should forward at once the letter he has given you to
+Sir Peter D'Aubusson, and that until an answer is received from him, I
+should take care of the boy here, and see that he is instructed in all
+that is needful for a future knight of our Order. I grieve to see that
+you yourself are looking so ill."
+
+"My course is well nigh run," she said. "I have, methinks, but a few
+days to live. I am thankful that it has been permitted to me to carry
+out my husband's wishes, and to place my boy in your hands. That done,
+my work on earth is finished, and glad indeed am I that the time is at
+hand when I can rejoin my dear husband."
+
+"We have a building here where we can lodge ladies in distress or need,
+Dame Tresham, and trust that you will take up your abode there."
+
+"I shall indeed be thankful to do so," she replied. "I know no one in
+London, and few would care to lodge a dying woman."
+
+"We are Hospitallers," the grand prior said. "That was our sole mission
+when we were first founded, and before we became a military order, and
+it is still a part of our sworn duty to aid the distressed."
+
+A few minutes later Dame Tresham was conducted to a comfortable
+apartment, and was given into the charge of a female attendant. The next
+day she had another interview with the grand prior, to whom she handed
+over her jewels and remaining money. This she prayed him to devote to
+the furnishing of the necessary outfit for Gervaise. She spent the rest
+of the day in the church of the hospital, had a long talk with her son
+in the evening, giving him her last charges as to his future life and
+conduct, and that night, as if she had now fulfilled her last duty on
+earth, she passed away, and was found by her attendant lying with a look
+of joy and peacefulness on her dead face.
+
+Gervaise's grief was for a time excessive. He was nearly twelve years
+old, and had never until now been separated from her even for a day. She
+had often spoken to him of her end being near, but until the blow came
+he had never quite understood that it could be so. She had, on the night
+before her death, told him that he must not grieve overmuch for her, for
+that in any case they must have soon been sundered, and that it was
+far better that he should think of her as at rest, and happy, than as
+leading a lonely and sorrowful life.
+
+The grand prior, however, wisely gave him but little time to dwell upon
+his loss, but as soon as her funeral had taken place, handed him over
+to the knights who had the charge of the novices on probation, and
+instructed them in their military exercises, and of the chaplain who
+taught them such learning as was considered requisite for a knight of
+the Order.
+
+The knights were surprised at the proficiency the lad had already
+attained in the use of his weapons.
+
+"By St. Agatha," one of them exclaimed, after the conclusion of his
+first lesson, "you have had good teachers, lad, and have availed
+yourself rarely of them. If you go on like this you will become a
+distinguished knight of our Order. With a few more years to strengthen
+your arms I warrant me you will bear your part well in your first tussle
+with the Moslem corsairs."
+
+It fortunately happened that a party of knights were starting for Rhodes
+a few days after the admission of Gervaise to the Hospital, and the
+letter to Sir Peter D'Aubusson was committed to their charge. They were
+to proceed to Bordeaux by ship, then to journey by land to Marseilles,
+and thence, being joined by some French knights, to sail direct to
+Rhodes. Two months later an answer was received. D'Aubusson wrote to the
+grand prior saying that he would gladly carry out the last wishes of his
+dead friend, and that he had already obtained from the grand master the
+appointment of Gervaise Tresham as one of his pages, and begged that he
+might be sent out with the next party of knights leaving England. It
+was three months before such an opportunity occurred. During that time
+Gervaise remained at the house of St. John's studying diligently, and
+continuing his military exercises. These were severe; for the scions of
+noble houses, who hoped some day to distinguish themselves as knights,
+were put through many gymnastic exercises--were taught to spring on to
+a horse when clad in full armour, to wield heavy battleaxes, to run and
+climb, and to prepare themselves for all the possibilities of the mode
+of fighting of the day.
+
+Gervaise gained the encomiums, not only of his special preceptor, but of
+the various knights in the house, and of the grand prior himself, both
+for his strength and activity, and for the earnestness with which he
+worked. When the time approached for his leaving England, the grand
+prior ordered for him the outfit which would be necessary in his
+position as a page of the grand master. The dresses were numerous and
+rich, for although the knights of St. John wore over their armour the
+simple mantle of their order, which was a sleeveless garment of black
+relieved only by a white cross on the chest, they indulged in the finest
+and most costly armour, and in rich garments beneath their black mantles
+when not in armour.
+
+"I am well pleased with you, Gervaise," the grand prior said, on the
+evening before he was to leave, "and I see in you the making of a
+valiant knight of the Order. Maintain the same spirit you have shown
+here; be obedient and reverent to your superiors; give your whole mind
+to your duties; strive earnestly during the three or four years that
+your pagedom will last, to perfect yourself in military exercises, that
+when the time comes for you to buckle on armour you will be able to bear
+yourself worthily. Remember that you will have to win your knighthood,
+for the Order does not bestow this honour, and you must remain a
+professed knight until you receive it at the hands of some distinguished
+warrior. Ever bear in mind that you are a soldier of the Cross. Avoid
+luxury, live simply and modestly; be not led away by others, upon whom
+their vows may sit but lightly; keep ever in your mind that you have
+joined the Order neither to gain fame nor personal advantage, but simply
+that you may devote the strength and the intelligence that God has given
+you to protect Christendom from the advance of the infidel. I shall
+hear of you from time to time from D'Aubusson, and feel sure that the
+expectations I have formed of you will be fulfilled."
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III THE GRAND MASTER'S PAGE
+
+
+The grand prior had, in accordance with Dame Tresham's request, sent the
+steward of the house to one of the principal jewellers of the city who,
+as the Order were excellent customers, paid a good price for her jewels.
+After the payment for the numerous dresses required for the service as
+a page to the grand master, the grand prior handed the balance of the
+money Dame Tresham had brought with her, and that obtained by the sale
+of her jewels, to one of the knights under whose charge Gervaise was to
+travel, to be given by him to D'Aubusson for the necessities of
+Gervaise as a page. During their term of service the pages received
+no remuneration, all their expenses being paid by their families.
+Nevertheless, the post was considered so honourable, and of such great
+advantage to those entering the Order, that the appointments were
+eagerly sought after.
+
+The head of the party was Sir Guy Redcar, who had been a commander in
+England, but who was now relinquishing that post in order to take a high
+office in the convent at the Island. With him were four lads between
+seventeen and twenty who were going out as professed knights, having
+served their year of probation as novices at the grand priory. With
+these Gervaise was already acquainted, as they had lived, studied, and
+performed their military exercises together. The three eldest of these
+Gervaise liked much, but the youngest of the party, Robert Rivers, a
+relation of the queen, had always shown a very different spirit from
+the others. He was jealous that a member of one of the defeated and
+disinherited Lancastrian families should obtain a post of such honour
+and advantage as that of page to the grand master, and that thus,
+although five years younger, Gervaise should enter the Order on an
+equality with him.
+
+In point of strength and stature he was, of course, greatly superior
+to Gervaise; but he had been spoilt from his childhood, was averse
+to exercise, and dull at learning, and while Gervaise was frequently
+commended by his instructors, he himself was constantly reproved, and
+it had been more than once a question whether he should be received as
+a professed knight at the termination of his year of novitiate. Thus,
+while the other lads treated Gervaise kindly, and indeed made rather
+a pet of him, Robert Rivers ignored him as much as possible, and if
+obliged to speak to him did so with a pointed rudeness that more than
+once brought upon him a sharp reproof from his companions. Gervaise
+himself was but little affected by Robert's manner. He was of an
+exceptionally good tempered nature, and, indeed, was so occupied with
+his work and so anxious to satisfy his teachers, that Robert's ill
+humour passed almost unnoticed.
+
+The journey was performed without incident. During their passage across
+the south of France, Gervaise's perfect knowledge of the language gained
+for him a great advantage over his companions, and enabled him to be of
+much use to Sir Guy. They had fine weather during their passage up the
+Mediterranean, and in the day their leader gave them their first lessons
+in the management and discipline of a ship.
+
+"You will be nearly as much at sea as you are on land for the five years
+you must stay at the convent," he said; "and it is essential to the
+education of a knight of our Order to know all things connected with the
+management of a ship, even to its building. We construct our own galleys
+at Rhodes, using, of course, the labour of slaves, but under our own
+superintendence; and it is even more essential to us to know how to
+fight on sea than on land. There is, too, you see, a rivalry among
+ourselves, for each langue has its duties, and each strives to perform
+more gallant deeds and to bring in more rich prizes than the others. We
+of England are among the smallest of the langues, and yet methinks we do
+a fair portion of the work, and gain fully our share of honour. There is
+no fear of your having much time on your hands, for it is quite certain
+that there will soon be open war between Mahomet and the Order. In spite
+of the nominal truce, constant skirmishes are taking place, so that, in
+addition to our fights with pirates, we have sometimes encounters with
+the sultan's galleys.
+
+"Seven years ago, a number of our Order took part in the defence
+of Lesbos, and lost their lives at its capture, and we have sure
+information that Mahomet is preparing for an attack on the Island. No
+doubt he thinks it will be an easy conquest, for in '57 he succeeded
+in landing eighteen thousand men on the Island, and in ravaging a large
+district, carrying off much booty. Since then, however, the defences of
+Rhodes have been greatly strengthened. Zacosta, our last grand master,
+laboured diligently to increase the fortifications, and, specially,
+built on one side of the entrance to the harbour a strong tower, called
+Fort St. Nicholas. Orsini has carried on the works, which have been
+directed by D'Aubusson, who is captain general of the forces of the
+Island, and who has deepened the ditches and built a wall on the sea
+front of the town six hundred feet in length and twenty feet in height,
+money being found by the grand master from his private purse.
+
+"At present we are not sure whether the great armament that Mahomet is
+preparing is intended for the capture of Negropont, which belongs to
+Venice, or of Rhodes. Unfortunately Venice and Rhodes are not good
+friends. In the course of our war with Egypt in '58 we captured from
+some Venetian vessels, in which they were travelling, several Egyptian
+merchants with a great store of goods. The Venetians protested that as
+the ships were theirs we had no right to interfere with our enemies who
+were travelling in them, and, without giving time for the question to
+be discussed, at once attacked our galleys, and sent a fleet against
+Rhodes. They landed on the Island, and not only pillaged the district
+of Halki, but, a number of natives having sought shelter in a cave, the
+Venetians blocked up the entrance with brushwood, set it on fire, and
+suffocated them all.
+
+"Shortly afterwards, another and larger fleet appeared off Rhodes, and
+demanded the restitution of the Egyptians and their merchandise. There
+was a great division of opinion in the council; but, seeing the great
+danger that threatened us both from the Turks at Constantinople and the
+Venetians, and that it was madness at such a time to engage in war with
+a Christian power, the grand master persuaded the council to accede to
+their request. There has never been any friendly feeling between Venice
+and ourselves since that time. Still, I trust that our common danger
+will reunite us, and that whether Negropont or Rhodes is attacked by the
+Moslems, we shall render loyal aid to each other."
+
+There was great excitement among Gervaise and his companions when it was
+announced that Rhodes was in sight, and as they approached the town
+they gazed with admiration at the castle with its stately buildings, the
+palace of the grand master and the Hospital of St. John, rising above
+the lower town, the massive walls strengthened by projecting bastions,
+and the fortifications of the ports. Of these there were two, with
+separate entrances, divided from each other by a narrow tongue of land.
+At its extremity stood Fort St. Nicholas, which was connected by a
+strong wall running along the promontory to the town. The inner port,
+as it was called, was of greater importance, as it adjoined the town
+itself. It was defended in the first place by Fort St. Nicholas, and at
+the inner entrance stood the towers of St. John and St. Michael, one
+on either side. Into this the vessel was steered. There were many craft
+lying there, among them eight or ten of the galleys of the Order.
+
+"We will go first to the house of our langue," Sir Guy said, "and tell
+them to send down slaves to fetch up our baggage; then I will take you,
+Gervaise, to Sir Peter D'Aubusson, and hand you over to his care."
+
+On landing, Gervaise was surprised at the number of slaves who were
+labouring at the public works, and who formed no small proportion of the
+population in the streets. Their condition was pitiable. They were, of
+course, enemies of Christianity, and numbers of them had been pirates;
+but he could not help pitying their condition as they worked in the full
+heat of the sun under the vigilant eyes of numbers of overseers, who
+carried heavy whips, in addition to their arms. Their progress to the
+upper city was slow, for on their way they met many knights, of whom
+several were acquainted with Sir Guy; and each, after greeting
+him, demanded the latest news from England, and in return gave him
+particulars of the state of things at Rhodes.
+
+At last they arrived at the house of the English langue. The Order
+was divided into langues or nationalities. Of these there were
+eight--Provence, Auvergne, France, Italy, Germany, England, Aragon, and
+Castile and Portugal. The French element was by far the strongest. The
+Order had been founded in that country, and as it possessed no less than
+three langues, and held the greater part of the high official positions
+in the Order, it was only kept in check by the other langues acting
+together to demand their fair share of dignities. The grand master's
+authority was considerable, but it was checked by the council, which
+was composed of the bailiffs and knights of the highest order, known
+as Grand Crosses. Each langue had its bailiff elected by itself: these
+resided constantly at Rhodes. Each of these bailiffs held a high office;
+thus the Bailiff of Provence was always the grand commander of the
+Order. He controlled the expenditure, superintended the stores, and
+was governor of the arsenal. The Bailiff of Auvergne was the
+commander-in-chief of all the forces, army and navy. The Bailiff of
+France was the grand hospitaller, with the supreme direction of the
+hospitals and infirmaries of the Order, a hospital in those days
+signifying a guest house. The Bailiff of Italy was the grand admiral,
+and the Bailiff of England was chief of the light cavalry. Thus the
+difficulties and jealousies that would have arisen at every vacancy were
+avoided.
+
+In the early days of the Order, when Jerusalem was in the hands of the
+Christians, the care of the hospitals was its chief and most important
+function. Innumerable pilgrims visited Jerusalem, and these were
+entertained at the immense guest house of the Order. But with the loss
+of Jerusalem and the expulsion of the Christians from Palestine, that
+function had become of very secondary importance although there was
+still a guest house and infirmary at Rhodes, where strangers and the
+sick were carefully attended by the knights. No longer did these ride
+out to battle on their war horses. It was on the sea that the foe was
+to be met, and the knights were now sailors rather than soldiers. They
+dwelt at the houses of their respective langues; here they ate at a
+common table, which was supplied by the bailiff, who drew rations for
+each knight, and received, in addition, a yearly sum for the supply of
+such luxuries as were not included in the rations. The average number of
+knights residing in each of these langues averaged from a hundred to a
+hundred and fifty.
+
+It was not until some hours after his arrival that Sir Guy could find
+time to take Gervaise across to the house of the langue of Auvergne, to
+which D'Aubusson belonged. It was a larger and more stately pile than
+that of the English langue, but the arrangements were similar in all
+these buildings. In the English house Gervaise had not felt strange, as
+he had the companionship of his fellow voyagers; but as he followed
+Sir Guy through the spacious halls of the langue of Auvergne, where no
+familiar face met his, he felt more lonely than he had done since he
+entered the house at Clerkenwell.
+
+On sending in his name Sir Guy was at once conducted to the chamber
+occupied by D'Aubusson. The knight was seated at his table, examining
+some plans. The room was furnished with monastic simplicity, save that
+the walls were hung with rich silks and curtains captured from Turkish
+galleys.
+
+"Welcome back to us, Sir Guy," D'Aubusson said, rising, and warmly
+shaking his visitor's hand. "I have been looking for your coming, for we
+need men with clear heads. Of strong arms and valiant spirits we have no
+lack; but men of judgment and discretion, who can be trusted to look at
+matters calmly and not to be carried away by passion, are welcome indeed
+to us. I was expecting you about this time, and when I heard that a ship
+had arrived from Marseilles I made inquiries, and was glad to find that
+you were on board."
+
+"I am heartily glad to be back, D'Aubusson; I am sick of the dull life
+of a commandery, and rejoice at the prospect of stirring times again.
+This lad is young Tresham, who has come out in my charge, and for
+whom you have been good enough to obtain the post of page to the grand
+master."
+
+"And no slight business was it to do so," D'Aubusson said with a smile.
+"It happened there was a vacancy when the letter concerning him arrived,
+and had it been one of the highest offices in the Order there could not
+have been a keener contention for it. Every bailiff had his candidate
+ready; but I seldom ask for anything for members of my langue, and when
+I told the other bailiffs that it was to me a matter of honour to carry
+out the last request of my dead friend, they all gave way. You see, I am
+placed in a position of some little difficulty. The grand master is
+so enfeebled and crippled that he leaves matters almost entirely in
+my hands, and it would be an abuse of my position, and would excite no
+little jealousy, were I to use the power I possess to nominate friends
+of my own to appointments. It is only by the most rigid impartiality,
+and by dividing as fairly as possible all offices between the eight
+langues, that all continue to give me their support. As you know, we
+have had great difficulties and heartburnings here; but happily they
+have to a great extent been set at rest by forming a new langue of
+Castile and Portugal out of that of Aragon. This has given one more vote
+to the smaller langues, and has so balanced the power that of late the
+jealousies between us have greatly subsided, and all are working well
+together in face of the common danger. Well, young sir, and how like you
+the prospect of your pageship?"
+
+"I like it greatly, sir, but shall like still more the time when I can
+buckle on armour and take a share of the fighting with the infidels. I
+would fain, sir, offer to you my deep and humble thanks for the great
+kindness you have shown me in procuring me the appointment of page to
+the grand master."
+
+The knight smiled kindly. "There are the less thanks due, lad, inasmuch
+as I did it not for you, but for the dear friend who wrote to me on your
+behalf. However, I trust that you will do credit to my nomination by
+your conduct here."
+
+"There is a letter from our grand prior which I have brought to you,"
+Sir Guy said. "He commended the lad to me warmly, and seems to be
+greatly pleased with his conduct."
+
+D'Aubusson cut the silken string that bound the missive together, and
+read the letter.
+
+"He does indeed speak warmly," he said, as he laid it down on the table.
+
+"He tells me that the lad, young as he was, had been well trained when
+he came, and that he worked with great diligence during the five months
+he was in the House, and displayed such skill and strength for his age,
+as to surprise his preceptors, who prophesied that he would turn out a
+stout swordsman, and would be a credit to the Order."
+
+"He is well furnished with garments both for ordinary and state
+occasions," Sir Guy said; "and in this packet are some sixty gold
+crowns, which are the last remains of his patrimony, and which I was to
+hand to you in order to pay the necessary expenses during his pageship."
+
+"He could have done without that," D'Aubusson said. "Recommended to me
+as he is, I would have seen that he lacked nothing, but was provided
+with all necessaries for his position. I will in the future take care
+that in all things he is on a par with his companions." He touched a
+bell on the table, and a servitor entered.
+
+"Tell Richard de Deauville to come here," he said.
+
+A minute later the hangings at the door were pushed aside, and a lad
+about a year older than Gervaise appeared, and, bowing deeply to the
+knight, stood in a respectful attitude, awaiting his orders.
+
+"Deauville, take this youth, Gervaise Tresham to your room. He is
+appointed one of the pages of the grand master. He is English, but he
+speaks French as well as you do, having lived in France for some years.
+Take him to your apartment and treat him kindly and well, seeing that he
+is a stranger and new to all here. Tomorrow he will go to the palace."
+
+Gervaise bowed deeply to the two knights, and then followed the page.
+
+"I suppose you arrived in that ship which came in today," the latter
+said, as soon as they had left the room. "You are in luck indeed to have
+obtained a pageship at the grand master's. You begin to count your time
+at once, while we do not begin to count ours until we are seventeen.
+Still, good luck may befall us yet, for if the grand master dies, Sir
+Peter is sure to be chosen to succeed him. Then, you see, we too shall
+be pages of the grand master."
+
+"How many are there of you?"
+
+"Only De Lille and myself. Of course D'Aubusson will take on the grand
+master's present pages; but as there are five vacancies on an average
+every year, he will be able to find room for us among the number."
+
+"Why, how many pages has the grand master?" Gervaise asked, in surprise.
+
+"Sixteen of them, so you may guess the duties are easy enough, as only
+two are generally employed, except, of course on solemn occasions."
+
+"Are there any other English besides myself?"
+
+The boy shook his head. "There are eight belonging to the French
+langues; the others are Spaniards, Italians, or Germans. There, this is
+our room and this is De Lille. De Lille, this is the grand master's new
+page, Master Gervaise Tresham, and our lord says we are to treat him
+kindly and entertain him well until tomorrow, when he will go to the
+palace. He speaks our language, and has been some years in France."
+
+"How came you to be there?" De Lille asked Gervaise.
+
+"My father was a Lancastrian, and my mother a great friend of our
+Queen Margaret of Anjou, and they were with her all the time she was in
+exile."
+
+"How quarrelsome you English are!" De Lille said. "You seem to be always
+fighting among yourselves."
+
+"I don't think," Gervaise said, with a smile, "there is any love lost
+between Louis of France and the Duke of Burgundy, to say nothing of
+other great lords."
+
+"No; you are right there. But though we talk a great deal about
+fighting, it is only occasionally that we engage in it."
+
+The pages' room was a small one. It contained two pallets, which
+served as seats by day, and two wooden chests, in which they kept their
+clothes.
+
+Their conversation was interrupted by the ringing of a bell.
+
+"That is supper," De Lille said, jumping up. "We will leave you here
+while we go down to stand behind our lord's chair. When the meal is over
+we will bring a pasty or something else good, and a measure of wine,
+and have our supper together up here; and we will tell the servitors to
+bring up another pallet for you. Of course, you can go down with us if
+you like."
+
+"Thank you, I would much rather stay here. Every one would be strange to
+me, and having nothing to do I should feel in the way."
+
+The boys nodded, and taking their caps ran off, while Gervaise, tired by
+the excitement of the day, lay down on the bed which a servant brought
+up a few minutes after they had left him, and slept soundly until their
+return.
+
+"I think I have been asleep," he said, starting up when they entered the
+room again.
+
+"You look as if you had, anyhow," De Lille laughed. "It was the best
+thing you could do. We have brought up supper. We generally sit down
+and eat after the knights have done, but this is much better, as you are
+here." They sat down on the beds, carved the pasty with their daggers,
+and after they had finished Gervaise gladly accepted the proposal of the
+others to take a walk round the walls.
+
+They started from the corner of the castle looking down upon the spit of
+land dividing the two ports.
+
+"You see," De Lille said, "there is a row of small islands across the
+mouth of the outer port, and the guns of St. Nicholas, and those on this
+wall, would prevent any hostile fleet from entering."
+
+"I hardly see what use that port is, for it lies altogether outside the
+town, and vessels could not unload there."
+
+"No. Still, it forms a useful place of refuge. In case a great fleet
+came to attack us, our galleys would lay up in the inner port, which
+would be cleared of all the merchant craft, as these would hamper the
+defence; they would, therefore, be sent round into the outer port, where
+they would be safe from any attack by sea, although they would doubtless
+be burnt did an army besiege the town."
+
+Passing along the walls of the grand master's palace, which was a
+strongly fortified building, and formed a citadel that could be defended
+after the lower town and the rest of the castle had been taken, they
+came to the western angle of the fortifications.
+
+"You must know that each langue has charge of a separate part of the
+wall. From the foot of the mole of St. Nicholas to the grand master's
+palace it is in charge of France. On the line where we now are, between
+the palace and the gate of St. George, it is held by Germany. From that
+gate to the Spanish tower Auvergne is posted. England takes the wall
+between the Spanish tower and that of St. Mary. You defend only the
+lower storey of that tower, the upper part being held by Aragon, whose
+charge extends up to the gate of St. John. Thence to the tower of
+Italy--behind which lies the Jews' quarter--Provence is in charge, while
+the sea front thence to the mole of St. Nicholas, is held by Italy
+and Castile, each taking half. Not only have the langues the charge of
+defending each its portion of the wall, but of keeping it in order at
+all times; and I may say that nowhere is the wall better kept or more
+fairly decorated with carvings than where England holds."
+
+"You have not told me who defends the palace itself."
+
+"That is in charge of a force composed of equal numbers of picked
+knights from each langue."
+
+Gervaise leant on the battlement and looked with admiration at the scene
+beyond. The land side was surrounded by hills, the ground rising
+very gradually from the foot of the walls. Every yard of ground was
+cultivated, and was covered with brilliant vegetation. Groves and
+orchards occurred thickly, while the slopes were dotted with chapels,
+summer houses--in which the natives of the city spent most of their time
+in the hot season--and other rustic buildings.
+
+"What a rich and beautiful country!" he said.
+
+"It is very pleasant to look at," De Lille agreed. "But all this would
+be a sore disadvantage to us if the Turks were besieging us, for the
+groves and orchards would conceal their approaches, the walls and
+buildings would give them shelter, and our cannon would be of little use
+until they reached the farther side of the ditch. If the Turks come,
+I hear it is decided to level all the buildings and walls, and to chop
+down every tree."
+
+"If they were to plant their cannon on the hills they would do us much
+harm," Gervaise remarked.
+
+"The Turks are clumsy gunners they say," Deauville replied, "and they
+would but waste their powder and ball at that distance, without making a
+breach in our walls."
+
+"Even if they did, they could surely scarce pass that deep fosse,"
+Gervaise said, looking down into the tremendous cutting in the solid
+rock that ran round the whole circuit of the walls; it was from forty
+to sixty feet deep, and from ninety to a hundred and forty feet wide. It
+was from this great cutting that the stones for the construction of the
+walls, towers, and buildings of the town had been taken, the work having
+been going on ever since the knights established themselves at Rhodes,
+and being performed by a host of captives taken in war, together with
+labour hired from neighboring islands. Upon this immense work the Order
+had expended no small proportion of their revenue since their capture
+of the island in 1310, and the result was a fortress that, under the
+conditions of warfare of that age, seemed almost impregnable; and this
+without any natural advantage of position.
+
+In addition to the five great towers or bastions, the wall was
+strengthened by square towers at short intervals. On looking down from
+the wall upon which the three pages were standing, on to the lower town,
+the view was a singular one. The houses were all built of stone, with
+flat roofs, after the manner of most Eastern cities. The streets were
+very narrow, and were crossed at frequent intervals by broad stone
+arches. These had the effect, not only of giving shelter from an enemy's
+fire, but of affording means by which troops could march rapidly across
+the town upon the roofs of the houses to reinforce the defenders of the
+wall, wherever pressed by the enemy. Thus the town from above presented
+the appearance of a great pavement, broken only by dark and frequently
+interrupted lines.
+
+"How different to the towns at home!" Gervaise exclaimed, as, after
+gazing long upon the beautiful country outside the walls, he turned and
+looked inward. "One would hardly know that it was a town at all."
+
+"Yes, it is rather different to the view from the top of the tower of
+Notre Dame, which I ascended while I was staying in Paris. But this sort
+of building is best here; the thickness of the stone roofs keeps out
+the heat of the sun, and it is only when it is almost overhead that it
+shines down into the narrow streets. As you can see by the number of
+the people on the roofs, they use them as a resort in the evening. Then
+carpets are spread, and they receive visitors, and can talk to their
+neighbours over the low walls that separate the roofs. You can trace the
+divisions. Some of the house roofs are larger than others, but all are
+upon the same level; this being the regulation, in order that there
+might be free passage everywhere for the troops."
+
+By the time they had made the circuit of the walls darkness had fallen,
+and concealed the martial features of the scene. Lights twinkled
+everywhere upon the stone terraces; the sound of lutes and other musical
+instruments came up softly on the still air, with the hum of talk and
+laughter. The sea lay as smooth as a mirror, and reflected the light of
+the stars, and the black hulls of the galleys and ships in the harbour
+lay still and motionless.
+
+Greatly pleased with his first experience of the city that was to be his
+future home, Gervaise returned, with his companions, to the auberge of
+Auvergne.
+
+The next morning the bailiff D'Aubusson bade Gervaise accompany him to
+the palace of the grand master. Here he introduced him to Orsini, an
+old and feeble man, who, after a few kind words, handed him over to the
+chamberlain, who, in turn, led him to the official who was in charge of
+the pages. That officer took him down to the courtyard, where four young
+knights were engaged in superintending the military exercises of the
+pages. The scene was exactly the same as that to which Gervaise had been
+accustomed at the House in London. Some of the lads were fighting with
+blunted swords, others were swinging heavy bars of iron, climbing ropes,
+or vaulting on to the back of a wooden horse. All paused as the official
+entered with his charge.
+
+"This is your new comrade, boys," he said--"Master Gervaise Tresham, a
+member of the English langue. Be good comrades to him. By the reports I
+hear I am sure that you will find him a worthy companion."
+
+The pages had been prepared to like the newcomer, for it was well known
+that he owed his appointment to the bailiff of Auvergne, who was the
+most popular of the officials of the Order, and who was already regarded
+as the grand master. His appearance confirmed their anticipation. His
+fair complexion and nut brown hair tinged with gold, cut somewhat short,
+but with a natural wave, contrasted with their darker locks and faces
+bronzed by the sun. There was an honest and frank look in his grey eyes,
+and an expression of good temper on his face, though the square chin and
+firm lips spoke of earnestness and resolution of purpose. The official
+took him round the circle and presented him first to the knights and
+then to each of his comrades.
+
+"You may as well join them in their exercises. In that way you will
+sooner become at home with them."
+
+Gervaise at once laid down his mantle, removed his doublet, and then
+joined the others. There was but one half hour remaining before they
+broke off to go to dinner, which was at half past ten, but the time
+sufficed to show the young pages that this English lad was the equal
+of all--except two or three of the oldest--both in strength and in
+knowledge of arms. He could climb the rope with any of them, could vault
+on to the wooden horse with a heavy cuirass and backpiece on him, and
+held his own in a bout with swords against Conrad von Berghoff, who was
+considered the best swordplayer among them. As soon as the exercises
+were over all proceeded to the bath, and then to dinner. The meal was a
+simple one, but Gervaise enjoyed it thoroughly, for the table was loaded
+with an abundance of fruits of kinds altogether novel to him, and which
+he found delicious.
+
+The official in charge of them sat at the head of the table, and the
+meal was eaten in silence. After it was over and they had retired to
+their own rooms discipline was at an end, and they were free to amuse
+themselves as they liked. There were many questions to be asked and
+answered, but his display of strength and skill in the courtyard saved
+Gervaise from a good deal of the teasing to which a newcomer among a
+party of boys is always exposed.
+
+He, on his part, learnt that the duties of the pages were very light.
+Two only were on duty each day, being in constant attendance on the
+grand master, and accompanying him wherever he went. When he dined in
+public four of them waited on him at table, and one of them performed
+the duties of taster. If he returned to the palace after dark, six
+others lined the staircase with torches. On occasions of state ceremony,
+and at the numerous religious festivals, all were in attendance. By this
+time Gervaise's trunks had been brought over from the English auberge,
+where they had been conveyed from the ship, and his garments were taken
+out and inspected by his comrades, who all admitted that they were, in
+point of beauty of colour and material, and in fashion, equal to their
+own.
+
+"You will have to get one more suit, Gervaise," one of the lads said.
+"At one or two of the grand ceremonies every year we are all dressed
+alike; that is the rule. On other occasions we wear what we choose, so
+that our garments are handsome, and I think it looks a good deal better
+than when we are dressed alike; though no doubt in religious processions
+that is more appropriate. De Ribaumont, our governor, will give orders
+for the supply of your state costume. He is a good fellow. Of course,
+he has to be rather strict with us; but so long as there is nothing done
+that he considers discreditable to our position, he lets us do pretty
+nearly as we like.
+
+"We have four hours a day at our military exercises, and two hours with
+the sub-chaplain, who teaches us our books and religious duties. The
+rest of our time we can use as we like, except that every day eight of
+us ride for two hours and practise with the lance; for although it is at
+sea we fight the Moslems, we are expected to become finished knights in
+all matters. These eight horses are kept for our service, and such as
+choose may at other times ride them. On Saturdays we are free from
+all our exercises; then some of us generally go on horseback for long
+excursions on the island, while others take boats and go out on the sea;
+one afternoon in the week we all make a trip in a galley, to learn our
+duties on board."
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV A PROFESSED KNIGHT
+
+
+Gervaise was soon quite at home in the palace of the grand master, and
+his companions were, like other boys, of varying characters; but as all
+were of noble families, were strongly impressed with the importance of
+the Order and the honour of their own position, and were constantly
+in contact with stately knights and grave officials, their manners
+conformed to those of their elders; and even among themselves there was
+no rough fun, or loud disputes, but a certain courtesy of manner that
+was in accordance with their surroundings. This came naturally to
+Gervaise, brought up as he had been by his father and mother, and having
+at frequent intervals stayed with them for months at the various
+royal castles in which Margaret of Anjou and her son had been assigned
+apartments during their exile. Even at St. John's house the novices
+with whom he lived were all a good deal older than himself, and the
+discipline of the house was much more strict than that at Rhodes.
+
+He enjoyed both his exercises with the knights and the time spent
+with the sub-chaplain, no small proportion of the hours of study being
+occupied in listening to stories of chivalry; it being considered one of
+the most important parts of a knight's education that he should have a
+thorough acquaintance, not only with the laws of chivalry, but with the
+brave deeds both of former and of living knights, with the relations of
+the noble houses of Europe to each other, especially of the many great
+families whose members were connected with the Order of St. John.
+
+These matters formed, indeed, the main subject of their studies. All
+were taught to read and write, but this was considered sufficient in the
+way of actual instruction. The rules of the Order had to be committed
+to memory. Beyond this their reading consisted largely of the lives
+of saints, especially of those who distinguished themselves by their
+charity or their devotion to their vows of poverty, to both of which the
+members of the Order were pledged. Gervaise, however, could see around
+him no signs whatever of poverty on their part. It was true that they
+all lived and fed together in the auberges of their respective langues,
+and that they possessed no houses or establishments of their own; but
+the magnificence of their armour and attire, and the lavish expenditure
+of some upon their pleasures, contrasted strangely with the poverty
+to which they had vowed themselves. It was true that in many cases the
+means to support the expenditure was derived from the shares the knights
+received of the plunder acquired in their captures of Moslem ships; but
+undoubtedly many must have possessed large private means; the bailiffs,
+for example, although only required by the rules to place before the
+knights at their auberges the rations they received for them, with
+such luxuries as could be purchased by their yearly allowance for that
+purpose, expended annually very large sums in addition, and supplied
+their tables with every dainty, in order to gain popularity and goodwill
+among the members of the langue.
+
+Not only did the post of bailiff confer upon its owner a very high
+position at Rhodes, but it was a stepping stone to the most lucrative
+offices in their langues. The bailiffs at Rhodes had the right of
+claiming any of the grand priories or bailiwicks at home that might
+fall vacant, and the grand master was frequently chosen from among their
+number, as, by being present at Rhodes, they had many advantages in the
+way of making themselves popular among the electors. The emoluments of
+some of these provincial bailiwicks were large; and as the bailiffs at
+Rhodes were generally elected by seniority--although younger knights who
+had greatly distinguished themselves were sometimes chosen--they were
+usually glad to resign the heavy work and responsibility of their
+position at Rhodes, and to retire to the far easier position of a
+provincial bailiff. In the majority of cases, doubtless, the fortunes
+of the high officials were obtained from the money amassed when in
+possession of rich commanderies at home; but even this was assuredly
+incompatible with their vows of poverty.
+
+His hours of leisure Gervaise spent either on the water or in the
+saddle, and his love of exercise of all sorts excited the wonder and
+even the amusement of his companions, who for the most part preferred
+spending the time at their disposal in sleep, in idly looking out from
+a shaded room at what was going on outside, or in visits to friends and
+relations at the auberges of the langues to which they belonged. The
+natural consequence was, that by the time he reached the end of his
+three years' pageship, Gervaise was indisputably superior in strength,
+activity, and skill in military exercises, to any of his companions.
+The majority of these, after completing their time, returned to the
+headquarters of their langue at home, to pass their time there, until of
+an age to be eligible for the charge of a commandery obtained for them
+by family influence, which had no small share in the granting of these
+appointments. As it was known, however, that Gervaise intended to remain
+permanently in the Island, his progress was watched with particular
+attention by his instructors; and, seeing his own earnestness in the
+matter, they took special pains with his training. The bailiff of
+Auvergne continued to take much interest in him, inquiring often from
+the officers in charge of the pages, and from his instructors, of his
+conduct and progress, and occasionally sending for him to his auberge
+and talking with him as to his life and progress. Just before his
+pageship terminated, he said to him, "I was rather puzzled at first,
+Gervaise, as to what we should do with you when your term of office
+concluded, but I am so no longer, for, although you are some two years
+younger than the professed knights who come out here, you are better
+fitted than the majority to take your place in the naval expeditions,
+and to fight the Moslem pirates. I will see that you have your share of
+these adventures. All young knights are, as you know, obliged to make
+three voyages, but beyond that many of them do not care to share in
+the rough life at sea, and prefer the bustle, and, I grieve to say,
+the gaiety and pleasures of this city. For one, then, really eager
+to distinguish himself, the opportunities are frequent. When danger
+threatens, or heavy engagements are expected, every knight is desirous
+of bearing his part in the fray; but this is not the case when the work
+to be done consists of scouring the sea for weeks, without perchance
+coming across a single pirate. Of course, as soon as your pageship is
+over you will go to the English auberge, but I shall still keep my eye
+upon you, and shall do my best to help you to achieve distinction; and
+I shall take upon myself the providing of your arms and armour as a
+knight."
+
+Accordingly, on the day on which his duties as a page terminated, two
+servitors of the auberge of Auvergne brought across to the palace a suit
+of fine armour and a sword, a battleaxe, a lance, and a dagger; also
+three complete suits of clothes, two of them for ordinary wear, and one
+for state occasions. The next day Gervaise took the oaths of the Order
+in the Church of St. John. The aged master himself received the vows,
+and formally inducted him as a professed knight of the Order, Peter
+D'Aubusson and the bailiff of the English langue acting as his sponsors,
+vouching that he was of noble blood and in all ways fitted to become
+a knight of Justice, this being the official title of the professed
+knights of the Order. Ten newly arrived novices were inducted at the
+same time, and the ceremony was a stately one, attended by a number of
+the knights from each langue, all in full armour.
+
+The ceremony over, Gervaise bore the title of Sir Gervaise Tresham;
+but this was an honorary rather than a real title, as the Order did not
+profess to bestow the honour of knighthood, and it was usual for its
+members to receive the accolade at the hands of secular knights. At the
+conclusion of the ceremony, he returned with the bailiff of the English
+langue to the auberge, and took up his quarters there. By his frequent
+visits he was well known to all the members, and in a day or two felt as
+much at home as he had done in the pages' room in the palace. A week was
+given to him before he was assigned to any special duty, and he was glad
+when he was told off as one of the knights who were to take their turn
+in superintending the work of the slaves employed in strengthening
+the fortifications, although he would rather that any other employment
+should have been assigned to him, because he felt deep pity for the
+unfortunate men who were engaged in the work.
+
+He knew well enough that if he himself were ever made prisoner by the
+Turks, his lot would be as hard and as hopeless as that of the Moslem
+captives; but this, although he often repeated it to himself in order to
+abate his feeling of commiseration, was but a poor satisfaction. He saw
+one side of the picture, and the other was hidden from him; and although
+he told himself that after slaving in a Turkish galley he would feel a
+satisfaction at seeing those who had been his tyrants suffering the same
+fate, he was well aware that this would not be the case, and that his
+own sufferings would only make him sympathise more deeply with those of
+others. He had found, soon after his arrival on the Island, that it was
+best to keep his feelings on this subject to himself. While the knights
+were bound, in accordance with their vows, to relieve sufferings of any
+kind among Christians, they seemed to regard their captives rather in
+the light of brute beasts than human beings. The slaves were struck on
+the smallest provocation, and even the killing of a slave was considered
+a very venial offence, and punished only because the slave was of value
+to the Order.
+
+It was true that edicts were from time to time published by the council,
+enjoining fair treatment of slaves, and it was specially ordered that
+those employed as servants in the auberges were not to be struck. The
+lot of these servants was, indeed, very much easier than that of
+those engaged on the public works, and such occupation was therefore
+considered a privilege, the servants being for the most part selected
+from among the captives of superior rank.
+
+For the next six months Gervaise worked at various duties in the town.
+He was employed for a fortnight in the infirmary, then for a while he
+was transferred to the galleys; but for the most part he was with the
+slaves working on the fortifications. At the end of that time he was,
+to his great delight, informed by the bailiff that he was one of the six
+knights of the langue told off to join a galley that was on the point
+of sailing. Among those going in her was Sir Ralph Harcourt, one of his
+companions on the journey from England.
+
+"So you are to go with us, Gervaise," the young knight said, "to try
+your luck for the first time against the infidels. This is my third
+voyage, and I hope that it will be more fortunate than its predecessors,
+for, beyond picking up two or three small craft, which did not venture
+upon resistance, we gained neither honour nor booty. I regard you as
+having specially good fortune, and besides being glad that we shall
+be together, I expect that you will bring good luck to us, and that we
+shall meet with foes worth contending with. The corsairs have been very
+active of late, and have captured many prizes, while, on the other hand,
+our galleys have been unfortunate, and have but seldom come upon the
+miscreants."
+
+"How many knights will there be on board?"
+
+"Forty. Aragon, like us, furnishes five, Germany ten, Portugal five,
+Auvergne ten, and Provence five. We shall be commanded by Sir Louis
+Ricord, a knight of Auvergne, and we could wish no better, for he has
+proved himself a good seaman and a brave captain. Two other galleys are
+to start with us. We are to cruise separately unless one gets news of a
+force so superior that he will need aid to attack it, when he will meet
+the others at a rendezvous agreed upon, and we shall work together."
+
+"Who are the other three Englishmen?"
+
+"John Boswell, Marmaduke Lumley, and Adam Tedbond--all, as you know,
+brave knights and good companions."
+
+That evening Gervaise received a message from D'Aubusson, requesting him
+to call at his auberge.
+
+"So you are going to sea, Sir Gervaise? I hear from your bailiff that
+you have been working to his satisfaction in the town."
+
+"Yes, sir. I shall indeed be glad to change it for a life at sea. In
+truth, it is grievous to me to witness the sufferings of the slaves, and
+I would rather do any other work."
+
+"They are far better off than the Christians who fall into the hands
+of the Turks," the bailiff said; "and, moreover, it is because their
+countrymen are preparing to attack us that we are forced to use their
+labour in strengthening our fortifications. They have naught to complain
+of in the way of food. Still, I would myself gladly see their lot
+alleviated; but we could not afford to keep so great a number of
+captives in idleness; they must work for their living. Had it not been
+for their labour we could never have built and fortified the city. After
+all, they are little worse off than our serfs at home; they build our
+castles and till our land."
+
+"It may be so, sir; but with us in England men are free, and it was,
+when I first came, strange to me to see them working under the fear of
+the whip. It is necessary, I know, that such work should be done, but I
+own that I shall be glad to be away from the sight of the poor wretches,
+pirates and enemies of the faith though they be."
+
+"I can understand your feelings, and I too felt somewhat the same when
+I first came here. Nevertheless, there is work that must be done if the
+Order is not to be crushed by the infidels. Here are captives, for the
+most part malefactors, who have to be fed; and there is no injustice in
+their having, like all men, to give work for food. I have learnt to see
+this and recognise the necessity, though I would that the work could
+be obtained without the use of harshness and severity. We ourselves are
+prepared at any moment to sacrifice our lives for the good of the Order
+and for the great cause, and it would be wrong, nay, sinful, not to use
+the means that have been placed ready to our hand. Now, Sir Gervaise, I
+wish you a pleasant voyage. You will find the life somewhat hard, after
+your three years' residence at the palace, but this I know you will
+not mind. I have specially commended you to Ricord as one in whom I am
+personally interested, and from whom I hope great things in the future.
+Be brave; be resolute. From what you have said I need not say--be
+merciful. Fulfill all orders promptly and without question; bear
+yourself courteously to all; above all things, remember that you are a
+soldier, not only of the Order, but of the Cross."
+
+The next day Gervaise embarked with his companions on board the galley.
+It was a long, low boat, similar to those in use by the Venetians and
+Genoese. It was rowed by fifty slaves, who slept at night on or beneath
+the benches they sat on by day. The knights occupied the great cabins
+in the poop. There were two tiers of these; the upper one contained the
+little cabin of the commander, while the rest of the space on this deck,
+and that below it, was used by the knights in common. In the upper cabin
+they took their meals, and a third of their number slept there, the
+remainder in the cabin below. A fourth of their number were, however,
+always on guard, lest any attempt at a rising or escape should be made
+by the galley slaves.
+
+On leaving the harbour the galley, with its two consorts, rowed north,
+and Gervaise learnt that they were to cruise between the mainland and
+the islands. Some of these were in the hands of the Turks, while others
+were still occupied by Greeks.
+
+Except when there was a formal and actual state of war, the Moslem and
+Christian islands remained in a state of neutrality, trading with
+each other and avoiding all unfriendly proceedings that would lead
+to struggles which would be fatal to the prosperity of both. The
+Archipelago, and indeed the whole of the eastern portion of the
+Mediterranean, was infested by pirates, fitted out, for the most part,
+on the mainland. These, when in force, openly kept the sea, attacking
+the Christian merchant ships, but when cruising alone they hid in
+unfrequented bays, or behind uninhabited islets, until they could pounce
+upon a passing ship whose size promised an easy capture. The Order of
+St. John furnished a maritime police, earning thereby the deep gratitude
+of Spain, France, and Italy. They were aided occasionally by the
+Venetians, but these, being frequently engaged in quarrels with their
+neighbours, did but a small share of this work, only sending their
+fleets to sea when danger threatened some of their possessions in the
+Levant.
+
+"This is delightful, Ralph," Gervaise said, as they stood together on
+the poop, looking back at the receding city.
+
+"What a pleasant change it is from standing in the broiling sun watching
+those poor wretches toiling at the fortifications! There is only one
+drawback to my pleasure. I wish that we carried sails, and were moved
+along by the breeze, instead of by the exertions of the slaves."
+
+"Much chance we should have of catching a pirate under such
+circumstances!" Ralph said, laughing. "You might as well set a tortoise
+to catch a hare."
+
+"I don't say that we should not be obliged to carry rowers, Ralph; but
+all the prizes that have been brought in since I have been at Rhodes
+carry masts and sails, as well as oars, and, as I understand, for the
+most part cruise about under sail, and only use the oars when chasing or
+fleeing."
+
+"That is so; because, you see, in most cases the crew themselves have
+to row, and I have no doubt if we had no slaves to do the work we should
+soon take to masts and sails also; but for speed the rowing galleys are
+the best, for unless a brisk wind were blowing, the mast and sails would
+but check her progress when the oars were out, and at any rate constrain
+her to travel only before the wind. I know your weakness about the
+slaves, Gervaise; but as we could neither build our fortifications
+nor row our galleys without them, I cannot go as far as you do in the
+matter, though I own that I am sometimes sorry for them. But you must
+remember that it is the fault of their people, and not of ours, that
+they are here."
+
+"All that is true enough, Ralph, and I cannot gainsay you. Still I would
+rather that we were gliding along with sails instead of being rowed by
+slaves."
+
+"At any rate, Gervaise, you will not see them ill treated, for I myself
+heard Ricord, just before we were starting, tell the slave overseers
+that so long as the rowers did fair work they were not to use their
+whips, and that only if we were in chase of a pirate were they to be
+urged to their utmost exertions."
+
+"I am right glad to hear it, Ralph, and shall be able to enjoy the
+voyage all the more, now you have told me that such orders have been
+issued."
+
+For a fortnight they cruised about among the islands. Several times
+boats rowed out from the shore to the galley with complaints of outrages
+by pirates under a notorious corsair named Hassan Ali, who had landed,
+burnt villages, killed many of the inhabitants, and carried off the rest
+as slaves; but no one could give any clue to aid them in their search
+for the corsairs. The time passed very pleasantly. There was no occasion
+for speed; often they lay all day in some bay, where they could approach
+near enough to the shore to lie in the shade of trees, while two or
+three of the knights ascended a hill and kept watch there for the
+appearance of any vessels of a suspicious character. One morning, after
+passing the night at anchor, Harcourt and Gervaise were despatched just
+before sunrise to take a look round before the galley got under way.
+From the top of the hill they had an uninterrupted view of the sea,
+studded with islands on all sides of them. Beyond a few fishing boats,
+looking like black specks on the glassy surface, no craft were in sight.
+They were about to return to the galley when, taking a last look round,
+Gervaise suddenly exclaimed, "Look, Ralph! There is smoke ascending from
+that island to the southwest. There was none just now."
+
+"You mean from that bay, Gervaise? Yes, I see it; it is not more than a
+light mist."
+
+"It is growing thicker," Gervaise said, "and spreading. Maybe it is but
+a hut that has accidentally caught fire, but it seems to me that the
+smoke is rising from several points."
+
+"I think you are right, Gervaise. Let us hurry down with the news. It
+may be that it is a village which has been attacked by pirates who have
+landed on the other side of the island during the night, for I can see
+no ships in the bay."
+
+A few minutes' run and they stood on the shore.
+
+"Quick, men!" Ralph said to the rowers of the boat that had brought them
+ashore. "Row your hardest."
+
+The slaves bent to their oars, and they were soon alongside the galley,
+which lay two or three hundred yards from the shore. Those on board had
+noticed the young knights running down the hill, and, marking the speed
+at which the boat was rowing, concluded at once that they must have
+observed one of the pirate's ships.
+
+"Do you see anything of them, Sir Ralph?" the commander shouted, as they
+came close.
+
+"We have seen no ships, Sir Louis, but there is smoke coming up from a
+bay in an island four or five miles away to the southwest. It seems to
+us that it is far too extensive a fire to be the result of an accident,
+for there was no smoke until within two or three minutes of the time we
+left, and before we started it was rising from several points, and we
+both think that it must come from a village that has been attacked by
+pirates."
+
+The commander rapidly issued his orders, and in two or three minutes the
+anchor was weighed, the boat hoisted on deck, and the oars in motion.
+
+"Stretch to your oars!" Ricord shouted to the slaves. "Hitherto we have
+exacted no toil from you, but you have to work now, and woe be to him
+who does not put out his full strength."
+
+Grateful for the unusual leniency with which they had been treated,
+the slaves bent to their oars, and the galley sped rapidly through the
+water. On rounding the end of the island there was an exclamation of
+satisfaction from the knights as they saw wreaths of white smoke rising
+from the distant island.
+
+"There can be no doubt that it is a village in flames," Sir Louis said;
+"and from the suddenness with which it broke out, it is clear that it
+must have been fired at several points. You say you saw no craft near?"
+he asked, turning to Harcourt.
+
+"There were none there, or from the top of the hill we should assuredly
+have made them out, Sir Louis."
+
+"Then the pirates--if this be, as I hope, their work--must have landed
+at some other point on the island, and if they catch sight of us they
+may make for their ship and slip away, unobserved by us. Instead of
+rowing direct, therefore, we will make for that islet to the right, and
+row round behind it. There are two others almost adjoining it. Once past
+these, 'tis not more than half a mile to that island stretching away
+south. Once round that, we shall be beyond the one from which we see the
+smoke rising, and can come down on its southern side. The course will
+be double the distance that it would be if we took a straight line, but
+except when we cross from island to island we shall not be exposed to
+their view, and may fall upon their ships before the crews have returned
+from their work of plunder."
+
+The knights fully agreed, and orders were given to the helmsman
+accordingly.
+
+"We must not over fatigue the rowers," the commander said. "We may have
+a long chase if they have started before we get round."
+
+He therefore gave orders to the slaves that, while they were to exert
+themselves to the utmost when crossing the open sea, they were to relax
+their efforts and to row within their strength while coasting along
+behind the islands. On board, everything was made in readiness for a
+fight: the knights buckled on their armour, the cooks set cauldrons of
+pitch over the fire, the cannoneers loaded her eight guns. It was an
+hour and a half after their start before they rounded the end of the
+last island. It extended a little farther to the south than did that to
+which they were making, and as they rounded the point, eager looks were
+cast in search of the pirate ships. No craft were, however, to be seen.
+
+"They must be in some bay or inlet," the commander said; "they can
+hardly have left, for it would have taken them half an hour at least to
+cross the island with their booty and captives, and even if they made
+straight away after having fired the village, their ship could have gone
+no great distance, for we must have seen her if she put to sea--unless
+indeed they were anchored on the east of the island, and have sailed in
+that direction."
+
+"Keep them rowing along steadily," he said to the overseers of the
+slaves; "but do not press them too hard. We may have a chase yet, and
+need all their strength, for most of these pirates are fast craft, and
+if they should get a start of three or four miles, it will be a long row
+before we catch them."
+
+They made straight for the island, and on nearing it coasted along its
+southern side. It was some three miles long, the shore being for the
+most part steep, but here and there falling gradually to the water's
+edge. Two or three little clusters of houses could be seen as they rowed
+along; one of these was on fire.
+
+"That is good," Sir Louis exclaimed, as, on turning a point, they saw
+the flames. "That cannot have been lighted long, and we are pretty
+certain to come upon the vessels before the marauders have set sail."
+
+Several inlets and small bays were passed, but all were empty. A few
+fishing boats lay on the shore, but there were no signs of life, as no
+doubt the people would, long since, have taken alarm and sought shelter
+in the woods. There was a sharp point just before they reached the
+southeastern extremity of the island, and as the galley shot past this,
+a shout of exultation rose from the knights, for, near the mouth of an
+inlet that now opened to their view, there lay four long, low vessels,
+above each of which floated the Moslem flag. A number of men were
+gathered on the shore near the ships, and heavily laden boats were
+passing to and fro.
+
+A yell of rage and alarm rose from the ships as the galley came into
+view. There was a stir and movement on the shore, and numbers of men
+leapt into the boats there, and started for the ships. These were some
+quarter of a mile away when first seen, and half that distance had been
+traversed when a puff of smoke shot out from the side of one of them,
+followed almost immediately by a general discharge of their cannon. One
+ball tore along the waist of the galley, killing six of the rowers, and
+several oars on both sides were broken. Two balls passed through the
+cabins in the poop. But there was no pause in the advance of the galley.
+The whips of the slave masters cracked, and the rowers whose oars were
+intact strained at them. There was no reply from the guns, but the
+knights raised loud the war cry of the Order, a war cry that was never
+heard without striking a thrill of apprehension among their Moslem foes.
+
+As they neared the pirate ships, the helm was put down, and the galley
+brought up alongside the largest of them and a broadside poured into
+her; then the knights, headed by their commander, leapt on to her deck.
+
+Although a number of the crew had not yet come off from shore, the
+Moslems still outnumbered their assailants, and, knowing that their
+consorts would soon come to their aid, they threw themselves in a body
+on the Christians. But in a hand-to-hand conflict like this, the knights
+of the Hospital were irresistible. Protected by their armour and long
+shields from the blows of their enemies' scimitars and daggers, their
+long, cross handled swords fell with irresistible force on turbaned head
+and coat-of-mail, and, maintaining regular order and advancing like a
+wall of steel along the deck, they drove the Moslems before them, and
+the combat would soon have terminated had not a shout been raised by
+one of the overseers of the slaves. One of the other ships had rowed
+alongside the galley, and the crew were already leaping on board it. At
+the same moment another ship came up alongside that they had boarded,
+while the fourth was maneuvering to bring up under her stern.
+
+"Sir John Boswell," Sir Louis shouted, "do you and your countrymen, with
+the knights of Spain, finish with these miscreants; knights of Germany
+and Provence keep back the boarders; knights of Auvergne follow me," and
+he leapt down into the galley.
+
+The English and Spanish knights redoubled their exertions. The Moslems
+endeavoured to rally, seeing that help was at hand, and that but a small
+body were now opposed to them, but their numbers availed little. The ten
+knights kept their line, and, hewing their way forward, pressed them so
+hotly that the Turks broke and sprang over the bulwarks into the sea.
+Then the knights looked round. A fierce fight was going on between those
+of Germany and Provence and the enemy, who strove desperately to board
+from the ship alongside. The other vessel was now almost touching the
+stern, and her crew were swarming to her side in readiness to leap on
+board as soon as the vessels touched.
+
+"We will keep them at bay there," Sir John Boswell shouted. "Do you, Don
+Pedro, and your comrades, aid Ricord. When his foes are finished with,
+you can come back to help us."
+
+Then, with the four English knights, he ran along the deck, and reached
+the stern just in time to hurl backwards the Moslems, who had already
+obtained a footing. For a time the five knights kept back the surging
+mass of their foes. The deck was wide enough for each to have fair play
+for his sword, and in vain the pirates strove to obtain a footing.
+
+At last Sir Marmaduke Lumley fell, severely wounded by an arrow from a
+Moslem marksman, and before the others could close the gap a score of
+pirates leapt on to the deck.
+
+"Fall back, comrades, fall back; but keep together!" Sir John Boswell
+shouted, as he cleft the skull of one of the pirate officers who sprang
+at him. "Sir Louis will soon finish his work, and be here to our aid.
+Ah!" he exclaimed, looking over his shoulder, as he retired a step,
+"Provence and Germany are overmatched too."
+
+This was indeed the case. Stoutly as they fought the knights were unable
+to guard the whole of the line of bulwark, and the Moslems had already
+obtained a footing on the deck. The discipline of the knights stood them
+in good stead. Drawing closely together as they retreated, they made a
+stand on the opposite side of the deck, and were here joined by Sir John
+Boswell and his companions. They now formed a semicircle, each flank
+resting on the bulwark, and the pirates in vain endeavoured to break
+their line. Again and again they flung themselves upon the knights, only
+to be beaten off with heavy loss. At length a loud cheer arose from the
+galley, and Sir Louis Ricord, with the knights of Auvergne and Spain
+having cleared the galley of their foes, and carried the pirate that had
+grappled with her, sprang on to the deck of the ship, and fell upon
+the throng that were attacking the knights there, oblivious of what was
+going on elsewhere. At once the English knights and their comrades took
+the offensive, and fell upon their assailants who, at the sight of the
+reinforcement, for a moment stood irresolute. For a short time there was
+a fierce struggle; then the pirates sprang back to their two ships, and
+endeavoured to cast off the grapnels. But the knights followed hotly
+upon them, and, panic stricken now, the pirates sprang overboard. Many
+were drowned, but the greater part managed to swim to shore.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V SCOURGES OF THE SEA
+
+
+Breathless and faint from their tremendous exertions, the knights
+removed their helmets.
+
+"By St. Mary," Sir Louis said, "this has been as hard a fight as I have
+ever been engaged in, and well may we be content with our victory! Well
+fought, my brave comrades! Each of these vessels must have carried twice
+our number at least, and we have captured four of them; but I fear the
+cost has been heavy."
+
+Seven knights had fallen, struck down by sword, arrow, or thrust of
+spear. Of the rest but few had escaped unwounded, for, strong as was
+their armour, the keen Damascus blades of the Moslems had in many cases
+cut clean through it, and their daggers had found entry at points where
+the armour joined; and, now that the fight was over, several of the
+knights sank exhausted on the deck from loss of blood.
+
+But the dressing of wounds formed part of a knight of St. John's
+training. Those who were unwounded unbuckled the armour and bandaged the
+wounds. Others fetched wine and water from the galley. The chains of the
+galley slaves were removed, and these were set to clear the decks of the
+Moslem corpses. The anchors were dropped, for what little wind there
+was drifted them towards the shore. They had learned from a dying pirate
+that the vessels were part of the fleet of Hassan Ali, a fact that added
+to the satisfaction felt by the knights at their capture, as this man
+was one of the most dreaded pirates of the Levant. They learnt that he
+himself had not been present, the expedition being under the command of
+one of his lieutenants, who had fallen in the fight.
+
+"Now, comrades, let us in the first place take food; we have not broken
+our fast this morning. Then let us consider what had best be done, for
+indeed we have got as much in our hands as we can manage; but let us
+leave that till we eat and drink, for we are faint from want of food
+and from our exertions. But we shall have to eat what comes to hand, and
+that without cooking, for our servants all joined the pirates when they
+boarded us, and are either dead or are ashore there."
+
+A meal was made of bread and fruit, and this with wine sufficed to
+recruit their energies.
+
+"It seems to me, comrades," Sir Louis said, when all had finished, "that
+the first thing is to search the holds of these vessels and see what
+valuables are stored there. These may be all carried on board one ship,
+and the others must be burnt, for it is clear that, as there are four of
+them, we cannot take them to Rhodes; and even with one and our galley
+we should fare but ill, if we fell in with two or three more of Hassan's
+ships."
+
+"But how about the pirates on shore, Sir Louis?" a knight asked. "There
+were very many who could not get off to their ships during the fight,
+and scores must have swum ashore. I should say that there must be full
+two hundred, and it will be a grievous thing for the islanders if we
+leave them there."
+
+"It is certain," the commander said, "that we are not strong enough
+to attack them, for were we to land, a party would have to be left on
+board, or the pirates might elude our search, seize some fishing boats,
+and regain possession. Certainly, we are in no position to divide our
+forces."
+
+"Methinks," Sir John Boswell said, "that the best plan would be to send
+a boat, manned with ten galley slaves, taking two or three of us to the
+rendezvous, to fetch hither the other two galleys. With their aid we
+might take all the four ships safe into port, after first clearing the
+island of these pirates. It is but forty miles away, and eight hours'
+rowing would take us there."
+
+There was a general murmur of assent, for all wished that the trophies
+of their bravery should, if possible, be carried to Rhodes.
+
+"That will certainly be the best plan, Sir John, though it may detain us
+here for two or three days, or even more, for it is quite uncertain when
+the other two galleys may put in at the rendezvous. Will you yourself
+undertake the mission?"
+
+"With pleasure."
+
+"How many will you take with you?"
+
+"Two will be sufficient, for we shall have no fighting to do, as we
+shall have to trust to our speed if we fall in with an enemy. I will
+take, with your permission, Sir Ralph Harcourt and Sir Gervaise Tresham,
+both of whom have today fought with distinguished bravery. Indeed, I
+owe my life to them, for more than once, when I was hotly pressed, they
+freed me from my assailants. Truly none bore themselves better in the
+fray than they did."
+
+Three or four others joined in hearty commendations of the two young
+knights.
+
+"Indeed," one said, "I was greatly surprised to see how Tresham bore
+himself. He is but a lad, with scarce, one would think, strength to hold
+his own in such a fray. It chanced that he was next to me in the circle,
+and for a time I kept my eye on him, thinking he might require my aid;
+but I soon saw that I need not trouble myself on his account, for he
+wielded his weapon as doughtily as the best knight of the Order could
+have done, and one of the proofs is that, while most of us bear marks of
+the conflict, he has escaped without scratch. I trust, Sir Louis, that
+when you give an account of the fighting you will specially mention that
+this, the youngest knight of the Order, bore himself as stoutly as any
+of them. I say this, Sir John, because, not being of your langue, I can
+speak more warmly than you can do of his skill and bravery."
+
+"I thank you, De Boysey," Sir John Boswell said, "and I am proud that
+my young countryman should have so gained your approbation. And now,"
+he went on, "while the galley slaves are getting a meal--which they have
+right well earned today--I should like to see what there is under the
+hatches of these ships, so that I can give our comrades in the other
+galleys some idea of the value of this booty we have taken."
+
+They rose from the table, and, going on board the prizes, lifted the
+hatches.
+
+"Beware!" De Boysey exclaimed, looking down into the hold, when the
+first hatch was taken off. "There are people below."
+
+A chorus of cries followed his exclamation.
+
+"They are the voices of women and children," Sir Louis exclaimed. "They
+must be captives."
+
+This turned out to be so. In the holds of the four ships were found over
+a hundred and fifty women and children; these had been brought on board
+in the first boat loads by the pirates, and when the Christian galley
+had been seen coming round the point, had been thrust below, and the
+hatches thrown over them. They had heard the din of battle above, but
+knew not how the conflict had terminated, and, being afraid to cry out,
+had remained silent until, on the hatch being lifted, they had seen the
+figures of Christian knights standing in the bright sunshine. All had
+come from the village on the other side of the island. They related how
+the pirates had suddenly burst upon them, had slaughtered all the men,
+set fire to the village, and had driven them before them across the
+island to the ships. The poor creatures were delighted at their escape
+from slavery, but at the same time were full of grief at the loss of
+husbands, fathers, and sons.
+
+Some laughed, others cried; while some thanked God for their rescue
+others heaped imprecations upon the authors of their misfortunes.
+
+The knights explained to them that for a short time they must remain on
+board, as half the pirates were still on shore, but that aid would soon
+arrive that would enable them to clear the island.
+
+Half an hour later Sir John Boswell, with the two young knights, started
+in a rowing boat, manned by ten of the galley slaves. The wind had
+sprung up since the fight ceased, and as it was nearly astern, they
+anticipated that they would make a good passage, and be at the little
+islet, named as the place of rendezvous, before nightfall.
+
+Among the many bales of rich merchandise in the hold of the pirate
+vessels an abundance of wine had been discovered, and of this a tankard
+had been given to each of the slaves, by Sir Louis's orders, as a token
+of satisfaction at their work in the morning.
+
+They had gone some two miles when, from one of the inlets in the island
+they had left a large fishing boat was seen to issue out.
+
+"By St. George!" Sir John exclaimed, "that boat must be full of pirates.
+And if they see us, which they cannot help doing, and take it in their
+heads to chase us, we shall have a hard time of it."
+
+The fishing boat for a few minutes kept along the coast, and then
+suddenly her course was altered, and her head directed towards their
+boat.
+
+"Now stretch to your oars," Sir John, who spoke some Turkish, said to
+the slaves. "Keep ahead of that boat, and I promise you, on my honour as
+a Christian knight, that I will myself purchase your freedom as soon as
+we get to Rhodes."
+
+With a shout of delight, the galley slaves bent to their oars, and the
+boat flew along at a greatly increased speed.
+
+"There is but small chance of our getting away," Sir John said quietly.
+"At present we must be rowing as fast as they sail; but wind never
+tires, while there are limits to the powers of muscle and bone. If those
+fellows follow us--and I doubt not that they will, for they must be
+thirsting for vengeance--they will overtake us long before we get to the
+rendezvous; and even did we reach it, the chances are that we should not
+find either of the galleys there. We must hold on as long as we can,
+and as a last resource must run ashore. Unfortunately there are no large
+islands on our way. Nor have we any hope of assistance from our friends
+behind. The inlet looks east, and they will know nothing of our danger;
+nor, if they did, could they help us. The galley is short handed now,
+and there are the captured ships to look after, and the captives we
+rescued. We have only ourselves to depend on."
+
+At the end of an hour's rowing the boat astern had gained little; but
+the exertions of the rowers were telling severely upon them. They were
+still doing their best, but their breath came in short gasps, the rowing
+was getting short and unsteady, and there was a sensible decrease in the
+speed of the boat. Three miles ahead of them was an islet about half
+a mile in diameter. In some parts it was covered with foliage, but
+elsewhere it was bare rock.
+
+"That must be our goal," Sir John said. "They will be close to us by the
+time we get there." Then he said to the rowers, "Stop for a minute to
+get breath. We will land at that islet ahead, and I shall hold to my
+promise if we get there in time. Those of you who like can remain in the
+boat until your countrymen come up; those who choose can leave the boat
+and hide yourselves as best you may. I leave the choice to yourselves.
+If we are overtaken and fall, I cannot keep my promise, and it will be
+best then for you to remain in the boat."
+
+For three or four minutes the slaves bent forward over their oars; but
+as soon as Sir John gave the word they straightened themselves up and
+began rowing again. The rest had done them good, and they again fell
+into a long, steady stroke.
+
+"Shall we buckle on our armour again?" Sir Ralph Harcourt asked; for
+they had not put it on when they left the ship, as the heat was very
+great.
+
+"I think we had better don our mail shirts only. In climbing about that
+rock ahead of us, the less weight we carry the better, and with this
+heat I would rather fight unprotected than in casque and armour.
+Besides, there can be little doubt that, if they come upon us, it will
+be our last battle. That craft behind is crowded with men, and, armour
+or no armour, it will come to the same in the end. If it were not that
+we have a mission to fulfil, and that it is of all things important to
+send the galleys to aid our friends, I would say let us choose a spot
+at the foot of the rocks there, where they cannot attack us in the rear,
+and there fight it out as becomes knights of the Cross; but as it is our
+duty above all things to carry this message, we must strive to preserve
+our lives, and must, if we can, conceal ourselves from these paynims."
+
+"What are you going to do?" Sir John asked the slaves, when they were
+within a quarter of a mile of the islet. "I should think, after we have
+left the boat, it will be best for you to sit quietly on your benches
+till our pursuers arrive."
+
+"They would cut our throats at once, Sir Knight; they will be furious at
+our having given them so long a chase. Hassan Ali's men care little whom
+they slay, and, irritated by their misfortune, it will be naught to them
+whether we are Moslem or Christian. I, for one, shall take to the woods,
+and hide."
+
+There was a chorus of assent among the other rowers.
+
+"I trust that you may escape," the knight said. "It is for us they
+will be hunting, and if they catch and slay us they will not trouble to
+search the island further."
+
+"It seems to me, Sir John," Gervaise said, "that with the aid of these
+good fellows we may yet have a chance of escape."
+
+"What is your plan, Sir Gervaise?"
+
+"I think, Sir John, that if, when we land, we climb straight up that
+hill, in full sight of the shore, the pirates, when they see us, will
+follow at once. The slaves should, therefore, be safe for a time if they
+hide in that wood to the left of the spot we are making for. Will you
+tell them to keep down by the water's edge among the bushes, and that
+after crossing that crest, we will try to make a dash round, so as to
+join them there. 'Tis probable that most of the pirates will start in
+pursuit of us, and if we and the slaves make a rush for the shore we may
+seize our boat, push off, and capture their craft, if there are but
+a few left on board, knock out a plank and scuttle her, and then row
+away."
+
+"By St. George, your plan is a good one, Tresham! A right good scheme,
+and we will try it."
+
+He at once translated what Gervaise had said to the rowers, by whom
+it was received with short exclamations of approval, for they were too
+breathless and exhausted for talk. Already they could hear the yells of
+the pirates, who, as the boat ran up on the beach were but a quarter of
+a mile behind.
+
+"Now, away for that wood!" Sir John cried, as he leapt ashore. "Now,
+comrades, for a climb up the hill!"
+
+It was a steep ascent, and more than once one had to be helped up by the
+others, and then in turn to assist them to get up beside him. Louder and
+louder rose the shouts of the pirates, but the knights did not glance
+back until they reached the top of the hill; then they turned and looked
+round. A swarm of men were climbing after them, and were already halfway
+up the cliff.
+
+"Heave them down!" Sir John exclaimed, pointing to some loose rocks, and
+set the example by lifting a great stone and hurling it over the edge.
+Harcourt and Gervaise at once did the same, and twenty or thirty rocks
+were speedily sent rolling down the steep ascent, and yells, shouts, and
+cries were heard below.
+
+"That will check them a bit. Now let us be off," Sir John Boswell said,
+and they at once started. After crossing a hundred yards of bare rock
+they stood at the edge of another slope into a deep valley, beyond which
+rose the central hill of the island. The valley ran right across,
+and was filled with trees extending to the sea at either end. Running
+rapidly down, the knights were within the shelter of the wood before the
+Moslems had reached the brow behind them. A minute later they heard the
+shouts of their enemies. Once in the wood they turned to the left, and
+in a few minutes stood on the sea shore. It was a little bay some two
+hundred yards across, and at either point the cliffs rose abruptly from
+the water.
+
+"We shall have to swim round the point," Sir John said.
+
+"Take off your mail shirts. We will make our way along the rocks as far
+as we can, and then drop them into the sea, otherwise they will know
+that we have taken to the water."
+
+They hurried along the rocks, and were able to make their way to within
+fifty yards of the point; then, throwing their mail shirts into the sea,
+they plunged in. All knew the importance of getting round before any of
+the pirates, who would be searching the valley, came down on the shore,
+and they swam their hardest until they rounded the corner. The wood
+rang with the shouts of their pursuers, but no yell had risen from the
+water's edge. A hundred yards farther, and they were able to land, and
+were in a short time in the shelter of the trees that fringed the water
+to the point where they had left the boat. There was no longer any
+occasion for speed, and they made their way through the thick bushes and
+undergrowth quietly, until they recovered breath after their exertions.
+They had gone a few hundreds yards when from the bushes the slaves
+suddenly rose up.
+
+"All has gone well," Sir John said to them in their own language. "The
+pirates are searching for us on the other side of the hill. There are
+not likely to be many of them left here. We shall soon be in possession
+of our boat again."
+
+Followed by the slaves, they made their way forward until they stood at
+the edge of the wood. Five or six pirates were standing on the shore.
+
+"I expect they have been left there," Harcourt said, "to prevent the
+slaves from carrying off the boat. They must have seen them run into the
+wood. They won't reckon on our being with them."
+
+Drawing their swords, the three knights rushed out, followed by the
+slaves. They had but a hundred yards to run. The pirates, on seeing
+them, raised a yell and drew their scimitars; but the sight of the
+knights rushing upon them, when they had expected but a few unarmed
+rowers, was too much for their courage, and when their assailants were
+still fifty yards away they turned and fled. The fishing craft had been
+run ashore but a few yards from their boat.
+
+"Get her afloat, Harcourt, and bring her to the stern of the fisherman.
+Now, Tresham, follow me."
+
+Sir John Boswell climbed up on to the fishing boat, which was a craft of
+some fifteen tons burden. She was entirely deserted, but the sail still
+hung from the yard, and a fire was burning on a stone hearth, raised on
+some logs of wood in the centre of the deck.
+
+"Look for something to stave in a plank, Tresham."
+
+Gervaise leapt down into the hold. There were some nets and spare sails
+lying there, but nothing that would answer the purpose. He examined the
+planks. The boat was very strongly and roughly built.
+
+"There is nothing here, Sir John, that will do, and nothing short of a
+heavy sledge hammer would suffice to smash one of these planks."
+
+"There are a lot of them coming down the hill, Tresham. We have not many
+minutes to spare, but we must disable the craft. They will soon be after
+us again; they have run her hard and fast here, but when they all come
+back they will soon get her off. Let us try one of these sweeps."
+
+He lifted one of the heavy oars, and holding it upright he and Gervaise
+together tried to drive the handle through the bottom. Again and again
+they raised it and drove it down; but the plank was too strong, and too
+securely fastened to the timbers.
+
+"We must give it up," the knight said, with a sigh. "Fortune has
+befriended us so far, Tresham, but she has deserted us at last. Another
+three minutes, and we shall have thirty or forty of them upon us."
+
+At this moment the lad's eye fell upon the fire.
+
+"We shall manage yet," he exclaimed, and, seizing a blazing brand, he
+jumped below and set fire to the sails stowed there; they were as dry as
+tinder, and the flame shot up at once.
+
+"That is good, Tresham," the knight said; "but they will put it out
+before it has caught the boat."
+
+"Not before it has burnt the sails," Gervaise replied. "Now for this
+one," and he applied the brand to the lower edge of the great sail.
+Without a word Sir John seized another brand, and fired the sail on the
+other side of the deck. The flames flashed up, and a wild yell of rage
+and alarm broke from the pirates, who were now rushing down towards the
+beach.
+
+"Now to the boat, Tresham; we have no time to lose if we would avoid
+being pounded with stones."
+
+They dropped over the stern into the boat. The galley slaves dipped
+their oars into the water, and she shot away just as the foremost of the
+pirates reached the edge of the water. A few stones were thrown; but
+the pirates were so anxious about the craft, by which alone they could
+escape from the island, that the majority at once climbed on board.
+
+At a word from the knight, the slaves stopped rowing a hundred yards
+from the shore. The sail was already consumed, and the yard and the
+upper part of the mast were in flames. A dense smoke was rising from the
+hold, and the pirates were throwing buckets of water down into it. In a
+few minutes the smoke decreased.
+
+"I thought that they would be able to put it out; but, as far as we are
+concerned, it matters little. They have lost their sails, and as I saw
+but four sweeps, we can travel five miles to their one. If we find the
+galleys we will look in here on our way back, and if they have not left
+we will fire that craft more effectually, and then the pirates will be
+trapped, and we can leave them till we have fetched off Sir Louis
+and his prizes, and then have a grand hunt here. We took no prisoners
+before, and a hundred slaves will be a useful addition to our wall
+builders. Now, Tresham, I have to thank you warmly, for Harcourt and I
+doubly owe our lives to you. It was thanks to your quickness of wit that
+we regained our boat, for I would not have given a ducat for our chances
+had you not thought of that scheme. In the second place, we should
+assuredly have been overtaken again had it not been for your happy
+thought of crippling them by burning their sails. By St. George,
+Harcourt, this young countryman of ours is as quick and as ready of wit
+as he has shown himself a brave and gallant fighter! We have no lack of
+sturdy fighters; but the wit to devise and to seize upon the right thing
+in the moment of danger is vastly more rare. As for myself, I have no
+shame that this lad, who is young enough to be my son, should have thus,
+twice in a single hour, pointed out the way to safety. With sword and
+battleaxe I can, I trust, hold my own with any man; but my brain is dull
+when it comes to hatching schemes. If we live, we shall see Sir Gervaise
+one of the most distinguished knights of the Order."
+
+"While I feel gratified indeed, as I may well be by your commendation,
+Sir John, I must, under your favour, say that you have given me a far
+greater degree of credit than is my due. There was the fire, and there
+was the sail, and the thought that the one would destroy the other was
+simply a natural one, which might have occurred to a child. As to the
+plan about the boat, seeing that there was the hill and the wood, it
+flashed upon me at once that we might make a circuit and come back to
+her."
+
+"Just so, lad; but those thoughts did not flash upon my mind, nor upon
+that of Harcourt. It is just because those sort of ideas do flash upon
+the minds of some men, and not of others, that the first rise to the
+rank of distinguished commanders, while the others remain simple knights
+who would play their part in a charge or in the defence of a breach, but
+would be of no account as leaders.
+
+"Now row along steadily, men," he went on, speaking to the slaves.
+"We are still in good time, for it was not an hour from the moment we
+touched the island to our departure from it, and much of that time we
+have gained by the speed with which you rowed before. At any rate, we
+shall make out the island before sunset, and whether we arrive there a
+little sooner or later matters little. Harcourt, hand me that wineskin
+and a goblet. A draught will do us good after our climb and swim, and
+these good fellows will be none the worse for a cup also."
+
+Inspired with the hope of freedom, the slaves rowed steadily, and the
+sun had just set when they entered a little inlet in the rocky isle that
+was their place of rendezvous.
+
+"Thanks be to the saints!" Sir John exclaimed, as they reached the
+entrance. "There is Santoval's galley."
+
+There was a stir on board the galley as the boat was seen approaching.
+The knights had put on their armour, which they had found still lying
+in the boat, the pirates, in their haste to pursue, having left her
+unexamined, while those who had remained on guard had abstained from
+touching anything until the return of their captain and comrades.
+
+"Whence come you, Sir John, and what is the news? No misfortune has
+befallen Ricord's galley, I hope?" the Spanish knight in command
+shouted, as the boat came near enough for him to recognize the features
+of its occupants.
+
+"All is well," Sir John shouted back; "but we have taken more prizes
+than we can manage, though not without hard fighting. Seven knights have
+fallen, and at least ten others will not be able to buckle their armour
+on again for some time to come, so I have been sent here to beg your
+assistance; and it is well that it should be given speedily, for if more
+pirate vessels come up before you join, Ricord and his companions will
+be in a sorry plight."
+
+By this time the boat had reached the side of the galley, and as Sir
+John and his two companions stepped on board, the knights crowded
+round to hear the details of the news. Exclamations of approval and
+satisfaction arose when Sir John related the incidents of the fight, and
+told them that the four vessels that had fallen into their hands formed
+part of Hassan Ali's fleet.
+
+"That is good news indeed, Boswell," Don Santoval said; "and I would I
+had been there to take part in so gallant a fight. It is well you found
+us here, for with four prizes on hand, and with half his strength dead
+or disabled, Ricord must be in sore need of aid. We will start tomorrow
+morning at daybreak. As all the ships were taken, there is little fear
+of any of the other pirates hearing news of what has happened."
+
+"I don't know," Sir John replied. "There were, as I told you, some two
+hundred pirates left on the island. About half those, we know, seized a
+fishing boat and escaped, for they chased us, and we have had as narrow
+an escape from death as has ever fallen to my lot, though I have been
+in over a score of hard fought battles. The rest may well have taken
+another fishing boat and made off also, for we saw several craft along
+the shores of the island. If so, they may have made for Hassan Ali's
+rendezvous, wherever that may be, just as I made here, and by this time
+some of his ships may be on the way there."
+
+"By St. Anthony, this alters the situation gravely!" Don Santoval said.
+"Fellow knights, we must lose no time in going to Ricord's assistance.
+The slaves have had a long row today, but they must start on another.
+Let them have a good meal to strengthen them, and a cup of wine each.
+Whatever their scruples at other times, they never refuse wine when
+there is heavy work to be done, knowing full well that a draught of it
+helps them mightily in their labours. Your men must have rowed well, Sir
+John, to have brought you here so quickly?"
+
+"I have promised them their freedom," Sir John said; "and they shall
+have it, even if I have to pay their value into the treasury. As I told
+you, we were hotly pursued, for the craft with her sail went faster than
+we with our oars; and, knowing the importance of bringing the news here,
+I encouraged them by promising them their freedom, should we get away.
+Not only did they row right manfully, but they proved faithful in our
+extremity, and, when all seemed lost, stuck to us instead of deserting
+and joining the pirates."
+
+"But how did you get away, Sir John, if their craft outsailed you?"
+
+"I owe my life entirely to the quick wit of my young countryman, Sir
+Gervaise Tresham here." And Sir John then related the incidents of their
+adventure on the island, his narrative eliciting warm expressions of
+approval from the knights.
+
+"Of course, you will go with us, Boswell?" Don Santoval said, when the
+master of the slaves announced that these had eaten their meal, and were
+ready.
+
+"I must do so," Sir John replied. "I want you, on your way, to look in
+at that island where we had so narrow an escape, and if we find their
+craft still there we can destroy it. The place is directly in our
+course; we shall, therefore, lose but little time in looking in. Of
+course, they may have gone as soon as they got their vessel afloat,
+but it is hardly likely. They would have no idea of my returning with
+a galley so soon, and will probably set to to make a dozen more oars
+before they start, for she had but four on board, which will scarce
+suffice to send her a mile an hour through the water. Therefore, I fancy
+they will not put off until tomorrow morning. If that is so, and we
+destroy their craft, they will be trapped in the islet, and on our
+return we can capture them all. I think of leaving Harcourt and Tresham
+in the boat, in order that when Piccolomini's galley comes in, they may
+direct him also to join us."
+
+"He may be in at any moment; we met him three days since. He had
+captured a pirate, and sent her off under charge of ten of his knights.
+We agreed to meet him this evening; and as he is not here, he will
+probably be in the first thing in the morning."
+
+Gervaise and Harcourt took their places in the boat again. The galley
+got up its anchor and started. Just as she reached the mouth of the
+inlet another galley rounded the point and nearly ran into her.
+
+"I am going to Ricord's assistance, Piccolomini," Don Santoval shouted.
+
+"Is it urgent?" the commander of the galley shouted back. "We have had
+a very long row, and can go no farther, unless his strait is a very sore
+one."
+
+"No. Come on in the morning. You will hear all the news from a boat
+lying two hundred yards astern. Two young English knights are waiting in
+her to give you the news. Ricord has made a fine capture. Row on, men."
+And the galley proceeded on her way, while the newcomer proceeded up the
+harbour.
+
+Harcourt and Gervaise at once went on board, and the former gave the
+Italian commander an account of the battle that had taken place, and
+the capture of the four pirate vessels. After the exclamations
+of satisfaction by the knights had ceased, he recounted their own
+adventures, which were heard with lively interest.
+
+"I hope indeed that Santoval will burn that fishing boat, and that we
+shall capture the pirates," the commander said. "We have need of
+more slaves to carry out the works at Rhodes. Now, let us to supper,
+gentlemen, and then to sleep. In six hours we will be off again, for if
+some more of these villains have escaped and carried the news to Hassan
+Ali, our swords may be sorely needed by Ricord and Santoval tomorrow."
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI KNIGHTED
+
+
+At three in the morning all on board the galley were astir. A ration
+of bread and meat was served out to the slaves, and the boat was soon
+afterwards under way. The rowers of the English knight's boat had been
+warmly commended by the commander and placed in charge of the overseer,
+with instructions that they were to be treated as free men. As soon as
+the galley slaves set to work, however, they seated themselves on
+the benches and double banked some of the oars, anxious to please the
+knights. With the exception of those whose turn it was to be on watch,
+most of the knights slept until daybreak.
+
+"At the rate we are rowing, Gervaise," Harcourt said, as they went up
+on to the poop together, "it will not take us very long to join our
+friends. We are going through the water at fully six miles an hour; and
+as we have already been two hours under way, in another three we shall
+be there."
+
+An hour and a half later they passed the island where they had landed.
+The two young knights pointed out to the others the valley into which
+they had descended, and the point round which they had swum. In a few
+minutes they caught sight of the landing place.
+
+"Look, Gervaise, there is something black showing just above the water."
+
+"I see it. I think it is a line of timbers. There were certainly no
+rocks there when we ran ashore."
+
+"Then Santoval must have found the craft still there and burnt her," one
+of the knights standing by remarked, "and the pirates are caged up. It
+will take them some time to make a raft that will carry them to the next
+island, and before they can do that we shall be back again. I shall be
+sorry if they escape, for they are as ruthless a set of villains as sail
+the seas."
+
+The galley had traversed half the remaining distance when the sound of
+a gun was faintly heard. For a moment there was an absolute hush on the
+poop; then three or four shots in rapid succession were heard.
+
+"Some more pirate ships must have come up," the commander exclaimed.
+Then he shouted down to the slaves, "Row, men--row for your lives!
+Overseer, do not spare your lash if any hang back from their work."
+
+The galley had been travelling fast before, but her speed greatly
+increased as the slaves rowed their hardest. Fast as she was travelling,
+the impatience of the knights was extreme. They walked up and down the
+deck, making vows of candles that should be burnt at the shrine of St.
+John if they arrived in time to take a share in the fight, stopping at
+times to listen to the sound of artillery, which was now so frequent as
+to show that a severe engagement was being fought. Many of the younger
+knights ran down to the waist and double banked the oars, and in a
+shorter time than it seemed possible the galley arrived at the mouth of
+the bay.
+
+A desperate fight was going on. Ricord's ship lay, idle and deserted,
+at anchor. Five pirate crafts surrounded Santoval's galley. Two of them
+were alongside of her; the others were raking her fore and aft with
+their shot. The young knights left the oars, sprang up to the poop and
+joined in the shout of encouragement raised by the others, and then,
+resuming their helmets and armour, stood ready to leap on board an enemy
+as soon as they reached her. Piccolomini directed the helmsman to lay
+him alongside one of the ships grappling with Santoval. As they came up,
+their galley's cannon poured their fire into her, and a moment later the
+knights sprang on board.
+
+In the din of battle their shout had been unheard. The pirates thronging
+the other side of their ship were intent only on overcoming the
+resistance of the knights, and even the discharge of cannon had not
+called their attention to their foe, until the latter, shouting the war
+cry of the Order, fell suddenly upon them. A panic at once seized them.
+Some were cut down almost unresistingly, but the great majority, running
+to the bow or stern, threw themselves overboard and swam to the other
+ships. The pirate ship on the other side of Santoval's galley instantly
+threw off the grapnels and thrust off from her side, and, immediately
+hauling in the sheets of the big sail, began at once to draw away, while
+her three consorts made for the mouth of the bay.
+
+"Back to your galley, comrades," Piccolomini shouted, "or with this
+brisk wind they will escape us."
+
+The knights at once crossed on to their own craft, the oars were got
+out, and the chase began. A minute or two later Don Santoval followed
+them, but soon gave up, as so large a number of the oars had been broken
+when the two pirate ships ran alongside him, that it would have been
+hopeless to pursue. The wind was blowing freshly, and was rapidly
+increasing in strength, so that, in spite of the efforts of the galley
+slaves, the pirates gradually drew away, running straight before
+the wind, and aiding the effects of the sails with oars. Seeing the
+hopelessness of the chase, Piccolomini abandoned it, after rowing for
+two miles, and returned to the island. The other two galleys were lying
+beside each other, and Piccolomini had his craft steered alongside them.
+
+"Thanks, Piccolomini, for arriving so opportunely," Santoval, who was
+seated on the deck leaning against the bulwarks, said, as his fellow
+commander leapt on board, and came towards him.
+
+"Would that I had arrived sooner, Santoval, for I see that you have been
+grievously wounded!"
+
+"Ay. One of the paynims' cannonballs has carried off both my legs below
+the knee. The leech has been searing the wounds with a hot iron, and
+says that he thinks I shall get over it; but if so I fear that my
+fighting days are past, unless, indeed, I fight seated on a chair.
+However, I ought not to grumble. I have lost many brave comrades, and
+others are wounded more sorely than I am."
+
+Sir Louis Ricord now joined them. He embraced Piccolomini warmly.
+
+"I never heard a more welcome shout, Piccolomini, than that which you
+gave when you fell upon the Moslems, for in truth the issue of the
+conflict was doubtful. I was delighted when this morning at daybreak
+Santoval's galley rowed in. We had all kept watch during the night,
+thinking the pirates might obtain boats and make an attack upon us; and,
+with but twenty of us fit to wield a sword, our position would have been
+a bad one, and at any rate they might have recaptured the prizes. We
+agreed that Santoval and his knights should land at once. This they did.
+Sir John Boswell had of course told me how his boat had been chased by
+a fishing craft, manned by a large number of the pirates, and that he
+feared the rest might similarly have escaped, and might have gone to
+bring some more of Hassan Ali's ships upon us.
+
+"As soon as Santoval landed, some of the natives came down and told him
+that there was not a pirate remaining there, the rest having started
+in another boat a few minutes after the one that had chased Boswell.
+Santoval left two of his men with orders to ascend to the highest spot
+on the island, and to keep watch, and then brought the rest off to
+his galley. Our first step was, of course, to send all the women and
+children ashore. Then we consulted as to what had best be done if the
+pirates should come back in force. We hoped, at any rate, that this
+would not happen until you arrived. We expected that you would be here
+before noon; but we decided that, should they get here before you, we
+from our galley would embark on Santoval's, as it was better to fight in
+one strongly manned boat than to divide our forces.
+
+"It was scarce half an hour after Santoval came down before the men left
+on the lookout appeared on the beach. On fetching them off, they told us
+that as soon as they reached the top of the hill they saw five vessels
+approaching with sails and oars, and that they would be here in half an
+hour at the outside. We at once abandoned my galley, brought the rowers
+and the wounded here, and prepared for the fight. As you saw, they ran
+their two biggest ships alongside us, and for two hours the fight went
+on. They were crowded with men, who in vain strove to get a footing on
+our decks. Had we only had these two to deal with, we should have had
+nothing to fear, heavily manned though they were; but the other three
+kept sailing backwards and forwards, discharging their guns into us as
+they passed, firing not only shot, but bags of bullets.
+
+"Their gunners were skilful, and, as you see, they have completely
+riddled our poop. Twenty knights have been killed, and eleven others are
+sorely wounded. Scarce one has escaped unscathed. You may guess, then,
+how welcome was your aid, which we had not expected for another three
+hours. We were on the point of abandoning the waist and gathering on the
+poop, which we could still have defended for a considerable time, when,
+as if dropped from the skies, you fell upon the pirates, and turned the
+tables. How is it that you were here so early?"
+
+"We started at three o'clock, instead of waiting for daybreak. It
+seemed, from the story of the two young knights, that it was possible
+you might be attacked early, and, crippled as your command was, and with
+four prizes on your hands, I deemed it best to come on as soon as the
+rowers had had a few hours' rest."
+
+"It is well that you did so; it would have been a grievous affair had
+two of our galleys been captured by the pirates. It would have been a
+blow to the prestige of the Order, and would have brought such strength
+to Hassan Ali and other pirate leaders that nothing short of sending out
+a fleet would have recovered our ascendancy; and as every ducat we
+can spare has to be spent on the fortifications, it would have been a
+misfortune indeed had we been obliged to fit out such an expedition at
+present."
+
+"Who have fallen, Sir Louis?"
+
+"Five more of the knights of my galley--Pierre des Vignes, Raoul de
+Montpelier, Ernest Schmidt, Raymond Garcia, and Albert Schenck. Here is
+the list of the knights of Santoval's galley."
+
+"'Tis a long list, and a sad one," Piccolomini said, after reading
+the names. "With the seven who fell in your first fight, twenty-seven
+knights have fallen, all brave comrades. Truly, we can ill spare such
+a loss. It is true there are five prizes to show for it, and we have
+struck Hassan Ali a blow that will resound through the Levant; but the
+cost is heavy."
+
+"It is indeed," Ricord agreed. "The four vessels are well filled with
+rich spoil that the scoundrels had gathered, and I doubt not the one you
+captured is equally rich. Still, had they been ten times as valuable,
+the booty would be dearly purchased at such a price."
+
+There was now a consultation among the leaders, and it was agreed that
+six knights should be placed in each of the captured ships, with ten of
+the galley slaves to work the sails, the others being equally divided
+between the three galleys. They were, in the first place, to row to the
+island where the pirates were imprisoned, and to slay or capture the
+whole of them; afterwards they were to make direct for Rhodes; with
+so numerous a fleet there was no fear of their being attacked. The
+arrangements took but a short time to complete. An hour later they left
+the port, the three galleys rowing ahead, while the five prizes, under
+easy sail, followed them.
+
+Sir John Boswell had been wounded, but not so seriously as to altogether
+disable him, and he was in command of one of the prizes, having Sir
+Adam Tedbond, Harcourt, Gervaise, and a German knight, with him. Sir
+Marmaduke Lumley, who, after the first fight was over, was found, to the
+surprise and pleasure of his comrades, to be still living, was, with the
+rest of the wounded, on board one of the galleys. Two of the pirates
+had fallen dead across him, and in the ardour of their attack on the
+knights, he had lain there unnoticed until the return of Sir Louis and
+his comrades had driven the pirates overboard. The leech was of opinion
+that he might yet recover from his wound.
+
+On arriving at the island, sixty of the knights disembarked. The woods
+near the shore were first searched, but were found untenanted. They were
+about to advance up the hill when a man appeared on the crest above them
+waving a white flag. He was told to come down, and on his arrival said
+that he was sent by his companions to offer to surrender, on the promise
+that their lives should be spared. The knights were well pleased to be
+saved the trouble of a long search through the woods, and the messenger
+left at once to acquaint the pirates that their terms were accepted. In
+a short time some eighty men made their way down the hill. On reaching
+the beach they were disarmed, divided equally between the galleys, and
+distributed among the rowers, filling up the places of those who had
+been killed by the fire of the Moslems, and of the men drafted into the
+prizes. They begged for food and water before they began work, and, on
+being questioned, admitted that their surrender was due principally
+to the fact that they had been unable to find food of any sort on the
+island, and that after searching all over it no spring of water could be
+discovered.
+
+"In that case," Sir John Boswell said, "I have no doubt they have all
+surrendered. I before thought it probable that a good many of them would
+have remained hidden, trusting to be able to make a raft after we
+had left, and so get away, believing rightly enough that we should be
+disinclined to search every foot of the island for them. As it is, I
+doubt not, all are here."
+
+The little fleet anchored that night at the rendezvous, and after two
+more days' rowing reached Rhodes, where the appearance of the three
+galleys, followed by their five prizes, was greeted with great
+acclamation. The news, however, that twenty-seven knights had fallen,
+and that thirteen or fourteen others were very gravely wounded, damped
+the satisfaction that every one had at first felt. D'Aubusson came
+down as soon as they reached the mole, and was greatly affected when he
+received Ricord's report.
+
+"It is an unfortunate loss indeed, Sir Louis," he said, "though it may
+be that the victory is not too dearly purchased. I do not speak of the
+captured ships, nor of the spoil they contain, nor even of the slaves
+you have brought us, welcome though all may be, but of the effect that
+the defeat and capture of these craft of Hassan Ali's will have. It is
+plain that the preparations the sultan is making, and the belief that
+Rhodes is doomed, have so encouraged the infidels that they are becoming
+really formidable at sea. This blow will show them that the Order has
+yet power to sweep the sea of pirates. Since, however, this adventure
+has taught us that a single leader like Hassan sails with at least nine
+ships under his orders, it is clear that in future our galleys must not
+adventure singly among the islands. It was fortunate indeed that first
+Santoval, and then Piccolomini, arrived to your assistance. How was it
+that they happened to come up so opportunely?"
+
+"Sir John Boswell, with Ralph Harcourt and Gervaise Tresham; went in
+a boat to the rendezvous we had arranged, and reached it after an
+adventure, which I will leave Sir John to tell himself. I may say that
+the two young knights named had in our encounter both obtained very high
+credit amongst us all for the valour with which they fought. No one bore
+himself more stoutly, and I am glad to take this early opportunity of
+bringing their conduct before your notice. As you will learn from Sir
+John, Gervaise Tresham afterwards showed a quickness of wit that was the
+means of saving the lives of those with him, and I may say also of all
+with me, for had they failed to reach the rendezvous we should have
+fallen easy victims to the five ships Hassan Ali brought against us."
+
+Sending for Sir John Boswell, the grand prior heard from him the details
+of his adventure in the boat.
+
+"I am right glad to hear you speak so warmly of Tresham, Sir John, for I
+regard him as my special protege, and am pleased indeed to find that at
+this outset of his career he has proved himself not only a brave knight,
+but full of resource, and quick at invention. I think, Sir John, that
+these two young knights have shown themselves well worthy of receiving
+the honour of secular knighthood."
+
+"Assuredly they have," Sir John agreed.
+
+"Then, Sir John, will you bestow it upon them? The Order, as an Order,
+does not bestow the honour, but its members do not forfeit their right
+as knights to bestow it individually, and none among us are more worthy
+of admitting them to your rank than yourself."
+
+"I would gladly do it, Sir Peter; but the honour would come far better
+from yourself, and would not only be more highly prized by them, but
+would be of greater value in the eyes of others. I am but a simple
+knight commander of the Order, and my name would scarce be known beyond
+its ranks. But to be knighted by one whose name is known and honoured
+throughout Europe would give them a standing wherever they went, and
+place them on a level with the best."
+
+"If that is your opinion, Boswell, I will myself undertake it, and
+will do it at once; it were better done here than at a conclave of the
+Order--now, when they are fresh from the battle. Let the knights be
+summoned from the other galleys at once."
+
+In a few minutes the whole of the knights were assembled on the poop of
+the galley.
+
+"Friends, and brother knights," D'Aubusson said. "First, in the name
+of the Order, I have to thank you all most heartily for the brave deeds
+that you have performed, and for the fresh honour you have won for it.
+Every man has, as I learn from the three commanders, borne himself as
+a true and valiant knight, ready to give his life in the cause of the
+Order and of humanity. Two names have been specially brought before me
+by commander Ricord, and by the good knight Sir John Boswell; they are
+those of two young companions who, though knights of our Order, have not
+yet received secular knighthood, and this, in the opinion of these
+two knights, they have right worthily won. Sir Ralph Harcourt and Sir
+Gervaise Tresham, step forward."
+
+The two young knights, colouring with pleasure at this unexpected
+honour, removed their helmets, and stood with bowed heads before the
+grand prior. D'Aubusson went on, turning to the knights around him, "I
+am about, comrades, to undertake the office of knighting them. Sir
+Louis Ricord and Sir John Boswell stand as their sponsors. But before I
+proceed I would ask you all whether you, too, approve, and hold that Sir
+Ralph Harcourt and Sir Gervaise Tresham have proved themselves worthy of
+the honour of secular knighthood at my hands?"
+
+There was a general reply in the affirmative, the answer of the
+survivors of Ricord's crew being specially emphatic. The grand prior
+drew his sword, and the two young knights knelt before him, their
+sponsors standing beside them.
+
+"Sir Ralph Harcourt, you have now been four years a knight of this
+Order, but hitherto you have had no opportunity of drawing sword against
+the infidels. Now that the chance has come, you have proved yourself a
+true and valiant brother of the Order, and well worthy of the secular
+accolade. It is in that capacity that I now knight you. It is not the
+grand prior of Auvergne, but Sir Peter D'Aubusson, of the grand cross of
+St. Louis, who now bestows upon you the honour of secular knighthood."
+He touched him lightly with the sword. He then turned to Gervaise.
+
+"You, Sir Gervaise Tresham, are young indeed to receive the honour of
+secular knighthood; but valour is of no age, and in the opinion of
+your commanders, and in that of your comrades, you have proved yourself
+worthy of the honour. You have shown too, that, as Sir John Boswell has
+related to me, you are not only brave in action, but able, in the moment
+of danger, to plan and to execute. You were, he tells me, the means of
+saving his life and that of your comrade, and, by thus enabling him to
+bear to the place of rendezvous the news of Sir Louis's danger, were
+also the means of saving the lives of Sir Louis and his companions,
+and of bringing home in safety the prizes he had taken. With such a
+beginning it is easy to foresee that you will win for yourself some day
+a distinguished position in the ranks of the Order, and are most worthy
+of the honour I now bestow upon you." And he touched him with his sword.
+
+The two young knights rose to their feet, bowed deeply to D'Aubusson,
+and then retired, with their sponsors. They were at once surrounded by
+the knights, who shook them by the hand, and warmly congratulated
+them upon the honour that had befallen them, receiving equally warm
+congratulations on their arrival at the auberge of the langue.
+
+The five prizes turned out, when their cargoes were landed, to be much
+more valuable than the cursory examination made by the knights had
+warranted them in expecting. They contained, indeed, an accumulation of
+the most valuable contents of the prizes taken by the pirates for a long
+time previously; and as these desperadoes preyed upon Turkish
+commerce as well as Christian, the goods consisted largely of Eastern
+manufactures of all kinds. Costly robes, delicate embroidery, superb
+carpets, shawls, goldsmiths' work, and no small amount of jewels, were
+among the spoil collected, and the bulk of the merchandise captured was,
+two days later, despatched in galleys to Genoa and Marseilles, to be
+sold for the benefit of the Order.
+
+D'Aubusson without hesitation carried out Sir John Boswell's promise to
+the slaves who had rowed his boat. They were not only set at liberty,
+but were each presented with a sum of money, and were placed on board a
+galley, and landed on the mainland.
+
+The English knights were all proud of the honour that had been won by
+their young countrymen, the only exception being Robert Rivers, who was
+devoured with jealousy at their advancement. He did not openly display
+his feelings, for the reports not only of Sir John Boswell, but of the
+other two English knights, were so strong that he dared not express
+his discontent. He himself had twice been engaged with pirates, but
+had gained no particular credit, and indeed had, in the opinion of his
+comrades, been somewhat slack in the fray. He was no favourite in the
+auberge, though he spared no pains to ingratiate himself with the senior
+knights, and had a short time before been very severely reprimanded by
+the bailiff for striking one of the servants.
+
+"I have more than once had to reprove you for your manners to the
+servants," the bailiff said. "You will now be punished by the septaine;
+you will fast for seven days, on Wednesday and Friday you will receive
+bread and water only, and will be confined to the auberge for that
+period. The next time that I have reason to complain of you, I shall
+bring the matter before the grand master, and represent to him that it
+were best to send you home, since you cannot comport yourself to the
+servants of the auberge as befits a knight of the Order. We have always
+borne the reputation of being specially kind to our servants, and it
+is intolerable that one, who has been but a short time only a professed
+knight, should behave with a hauteur and insolence that not even the
+oldest among us would permit himself. There is not one of the servants
+here who was not in his own country of a rank and station equal, if not
+superior, to your own; and though misfortune has fallen upon them, they
+are to be pitied rather than condemned for it. In future, you are to
+give no order whatever to the servants, nor to address them, save when
+at meals you require anything. If you have any complaints to make of
+their conduct to you, you will make them to me, and I will inquire into
+the matter; and if I find they have failed in their duty they will be
+punished. I shall keep my eye upon you in the future. There are other
+faults that I have observed in you. More than once I have heard you
+address Sir Gervaise Tresham in a manner which, were not duelling
+forbidden by our rules, might bring about bloodshed; and from what I
+have seen when I have been watching the exercises, he is as much your
+superior in arms as he is in manner and disposition."
+
+This reproof had greatly subdued Robert Rivers; and as he felt that
+any display of his jealousy of Gervaise would be resented by the
+other knights, and might result in serious consequences to himself, he
+abstained from any exhibition of it when they returned to the auberge,
+although he could not bring himself to join in the congratulations
+offered to them. The next day, however, when he was talking to Ralph
+Harcourt, he remarked, "From what I hear, Harcourt, D'Aubusson praised
+young Tresham very highly. It seems to me that there was nothing at all
+out of the way in what he did, and it was very unfair that he should be
+selected for higher praise than yourself."
+
+"It was not unfair at all," Ralph said warmly, for he was of a generous
+nature, and incapable of the base feeling of envy. "Tresham did a great
+deal more than I did. When we saw the pirate boat gaining so fast upon
+us, it seemed to Sir John Boswell, as well as to myself, that there was
+scarce a chance of escape, and that all we could do was to choose a spot
+on which to make a stand, and then to sell our lives as dearly as we
+could. I could see that Sir John was scanning the hill for a spot where
+we could best defend ourselves. As to hiding on so small an island, with
+a hundred men eager for our blood searching for us, it was well nigh
+impossible. It was Tresham's suggestion alone that saved our lives and
+enabled us to fetch succour to Sir Louis. Sir John, who is an old and
+tried soldier, said that for quickness and merit of conception, the
+oldest knight in the Order could not have done better; and he is not
+one to praise unduly. I am four years older than Gervaise Tresham, but
+I tell you that were he named tomorrow commander of a galley, I would
+willingly serve under him."
+
+"Well, well, you need not be angry, Harcourt, I have nothing to say
+against Tresham. No doubt he had a happy thought, which turned out well;
+but I cannot see that there was anything wonderful in it, and it seemed
+to me unfair that one who is a mere boy should receive higher praise
+than yourself, who, as I heard Sir John and Sir Adam Tedbond say last
+night at the refectory, bore yourself right gallantly."
+
+"I did my best," Ralph said shortly; "but there was small credit in that
+when we were fighting for our lives. The most cowardly beast will fight
+under such circumstances. When you see a Moslem rushing at you, scimitar
+in hand, and know that if you do not cut him down he will cut you down,
+you naturally strike as hard and as quickly as you can. You have never
+liked Gervaise, Rivers. I am sure I don't know why, but you always speak
+in a contemptuous sort of tone about him. True, it does him no harm,
+but it certainly does you no good. For what reason should you feel a
+contempt for him? Although so much younger, he is a better swordsman and
+a better rider than you are. He is liked by every one in the auberge,
+which is more than can be said of yourself; he is always good tempered,
+and is quiet and unassuming. What on earth do you always set yourself
+against him for?"
+
+"I do not know that I do set myself against him," Rivers said sullenly.
+"I own to having no great liking for him, which is natural enough,
+seeing that his father was a Lancastrian, while we are Yorkists; but it
+is not pleasant to see so much made of a boy, merely because D'Aubusson
+has favoured him."
+
+"I am certain," Harcourt said hotly, "that such an idea has never
+occurred to any one but yourself. Sir Peter is a great man and will soon
+be our grand master, but at present he is but grand prior of the langue
+of Auvergne, and whether he favours Tresham or not is a matter that
+concerns none of us. Gervaise is liked by us for his own good qualities.
+He bears himself, as a young knight should do, respectfully towards his
+seniors, and is ever ready to do a service to any one. No one has
+ever seen him out of temper; he is always kind and considerate to the
+servants, and when in command of parties of slaves at the public works
+never says a harsh word to them, but treats them as if they were human
+beings, and not brute beasts. Besides, though he is more skilful than
+any of us with his sword, or indeed at any of the military exercises, he
+is unassuming, and has no particle of pride or arrogance. It is for
+all these things that he is liked, and the friendship of D'Aubusson
+has naught whatever to do with it. It is not only D'Aubusson who has
+prophesied that he will rise to a distinguished rank in the Order.
+Boswell and Ricord both said the same, and I for one thoroughly believe
+it. Is there one among us under the age of twenty--and I might go
+farther--who has already won such credit for himself? One who when but
+sixteen can make his mark in an Order like ours is certain to rise to
+high office, and you and I may, before many years are over, be proud to
+serve under him."
+
+"That I will never do," Rivers said fiercely. "I would rather go and
+bury myself for life in the smallest commandery in England."
+
+"That may be," Harcourt retorted, his temper also roused, "But possibly
+you might prefer that to fighting under any other leader."
+
+"That is a reflection on my courage, Sir Ralph Harcourt, I shall lay
+this matter before the bailiff."
+
+"You can do as you like," Harcourt said disdainfully, "But I don't think
+you will benefit by your pains."
+
+When his temper cooled down Rivers acknowledged to himself the truth of
+what Harcourt said. He was not in the favour of the bailiff, while both
+Harcourt and Tresham stood at the present moment high in his estimation.
+Any complaint would lead to an inquiry into the matter that had led
+to the former's words, and even if Harcourt were reprimanded for using
+them, he himself would assuredly not gain in the estimation of the
+knights. Harcourt himself thought no more of the matter, though he
+laughingly told Gervaise that Rivers was by no means gratified at their
+both attaining the honour of secular knighthood, which virtually placed
+them over his head.
+
+"He is not a nice fellow," Gervaise said. "But naturally it must be
+galling to him, and to a good many others who have not yet had the
+chance of distinguishing themselves. I think it is very good of them
+that they are all so kind and cordial. Of course it is otherwise with
+you, who are as old as most of the other professed knights serving here;
+but with me it is quite different, and as Rivers, somehow, has never
+been very friendly with me, of course it is doubly galling to him. I
+hope he will soon get an opportunity of winning his spurs too."
+
+"That is just like you, Tresham. If I were in your place, I should
+have no good wishes for a fellow who has never lost an opportunity of
+annoying me, and that without the smallest cause of offence on my part."
+
+"I am sure you would not wish him ill, Harcourt. You would make
+allowance for him just as I do, and feel that if he had had the same
+opportunities he would have obtained the same credit and honours."
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII A FIRST COMMAND
+
+
+The first news that the knights heard on their return from their
+expedition was that the Grand Master Orsini was seriously ill, and that,
+at his advanced age, the doctors feared there was little hope of his
+rallying. Gervaise felt a keen regret on hearing that the kind and
+gentle old man, who had been for three years his master, was at the
+point of death. Nevertheless, it was generally felt among the knights
+that, in view of the dangers that threatened Rhodes, it was for the good
+of the Order that a strong and capable man, whom all respected, and who
+possessed their entire confidence, should at such a time be invested
+with absolute power.
+
+D'Aubusson had, indeed, for some years been the real head of the
+community, but every question had, if only as a matter of form, to
+be referred to the grand master, in order to obtain his approval and
+signature. In the state of feebleness to which he had for some months
+past fallen, much time was frequently lost before he could be made to
+understand the questions referred to him. Moreover, orders of D'Aubusson
+could be appealed against, his views thwarted, and his authority
+questioned; and it was therefore felt that, much as they all respected
+the old grand master, it would be an advantage to the Order when the
+supreme authority passed into the hands of D'Aubusson.
+
+Four days after the return of the expedition Orsini died. A few hours
+later the grand council was convened, and D'Aubusson unanimously
+elected grand master of the Order. The ceremony of the funeral of his
+predecessor was an imposing one. Every knight of the Order in Rhodes was
+present, together with a number of the leading natives of the Island;
+and although Gervaise had, since his arrival on the Island, seen many
+stately ceremonies, this far surpassed anything he had previously
+beheld.
+
+Gervaise had, at one of his first interviews with D'Aubusson after his
+arrival at the Island, been advised by him to acquire some knowledge of
+Turkish.
+
+"There are but few knights of the Order who speak the language," he
+said. "As a rule, while young men are ready to devote any amount of time
+to acquiring dexterity in all martial exercises, they will bestow no
+labour in obtaining knowledge that may be fully as useful to them as
+skill in arms. In our dealings with the Turks, one or other party has
+to employ an interpreter, and it is often by no means certain that these
+men convey the full meaning of the speeches they translate. Again, we
+have large numbers of Turkish slaves, and it is highly to be desired
+that the knights should be able to give their orders to these men in
+their own language. Lastly, a knight who has been taken prisoner by the
+Turks--and even the bravest might meet with such a misfortune--would
+find it an alleviation of his lot, and might be able to plan and carry
+out his escape, did he speak Turkish well. I should strongly counsel you
+to acquire a knowledge of the tongue."
+
+Gervaise had intended to follow the advice of the grand prior, but the
+duties of his office as page, and the time required for his military
+exercises and his studies with the chaplain, had rendered it well nigh
+impossible, during the first three years, to turn his attention to
+learning Turkish. As soon as his pageship was at an end, and he found
+that his duties included supervision of Turkish slaves, he felt the want
+of a knowledge of the language, and from that time devoted an hour a day
+to its study, employing one of the servants of the auberge, who was a
+man of rank and education at home, to instruct him.
+
+While he conscientiously spent this amount of time at the work, it was
+the most disagreeable portion of this day's labour. The events, however,
+that had taken place during the expedition had impressed him greatly
+with the utility of a knowledge of Turkish, for had it not been for Sir
+John Boswell's possessing some acquaintance with the language, it would
+have been impossible to communicate with the rowers of their boat, or
+to have arranged the plan by which they had escaped the pirates. He had
+then and there determined that as soon as he returned to Rhodes he would
+take the matter up in a very different spirit to that in which he before
+approached it. He had on the way home spoken to Sir John, who had highly
+approved of the determination.
+
+"I myself, when I was a young knight of eighteen, was taken captive,
+twenty-six years ago, at the time when the Egyptian fleet appeared
+before Rhodes. Our galleys advanced to attack them, but under cover of
+night they retired, and proceeding to the mainland took shelter under
+the guns of a Turkish fort. We attacked them there; it was a desperate
+engagement, but without any decisive advantage on either side. We lost
+no less than sixty knights, the Egyptians seven hundred men; and their
+fleet returned to Egypt. I and three others who were left wounded on the
+deck of one of their ships we had boarded, but failed to capture, were
+carried to Egypt, and remained there captive for six months, when we
+were ransomed by the Order.
+
+"During that time I learnt enough of their language, which is akin to
+Turkish, to be able to make myself understood and to understand what was
+said to me. I have kept up that much for intercourse with the slaves
+and servants at Rhodes, and have found it very useful. I consider, then,
+that you will do well to acquire their tongue; it will be useful not
+only to yourself, but to others, and when we get back I will, if you
+like, ask the bailiff to free you from all duty in order that you may
+devote yourself to it."
+
+The head of the langue at once granted Sir John's request.
+
+"I would," he said, "that more of our young knights would give a portion
+of their time to study; but most of them look to returning home when
+their term of service here has expired. Many think only of amusement,
+and all imagine that advancement is best achieved by valour. Tresham has
+already distinguished himself very greatly; so much so, that I think
+it would be well if he did not go on another expedition for a time, but
+stayed here while others have the opportunity of doing the same. Were we
+to send him out with the next galleys that start, I should be accused of
+favouritism, and the lad, who is now deservedly popular with all, would
+be regarded with envy, and possibly even with dislike.
+
+"At the same time, after what he has done I should have difficulty in
+refusing, were he to volunteer to sail in the next galley that sets out.
+The desire, then, on his part to learn Turkish is in all ways opportune.
+It will, too, in the long run be of great advantage to him in the Order,
+will give him weight, and bring him into prominence. I do not think
+there are six in the Order who can fairly translate a Turkish document;
+there are but two who could write a reply in the same language. Inform
+him, then, that from the present time he will be excused from all work,
+except, of course, to join in ceremonials when all are required to be
+present; and if you, Sir John, will pick out from among the servitors
+here one who is well instructed and educated, and capable of writing as
+well as reading his language, I will similarly relieve him of all other
+work, and place him at the disposal of young Tresham. Tell the lad that
+I hope he will persevere until he obtains a complete knowledge of the
+tongue. You can mention to him what I have said as to my opinion of the
+advantage the knowledge of it will be to him in the Order."
+
+Gervaise accordingly devoted himself to study. His instructor was a Turk
+of fine presence. He had been a large landowner in Syria, and held
+a high official position in the province, but had been captured in a
+galley on his way to Constantinople, whither he was proceeding on an
+official mission. He was delighted with his new post. Gervaise, both as
+the youngest member of the community, and from the kind manner in
+which he always spoke to the servants,--all of whom had acquired some
+knowledge of English,--was a general favourite among them, and the Turk
+was glad that he was to be thrown with him. Still more he rejoiced at
+being appointed his instructor, as it relieved him from all menial work
+which, although preferable to that to which the bulk of the slaves were
+condemned, yet galled his spirit infinitely.
+
+Now that he had entered upon the work with the approbation of his
+superior, and a conviction of its great utility, Gervaise set to work
+with the same zeal and ardour which he had exhibited in his military
+exercises. During the heat of the day he sat in the shade reading and
+writing with his instructor. In the cool of the morning and afternoon
+he walked with him on the walls, or in the country beyond them. After
+sunset he sat with him in an unfrequented corner of the roof, all the
+time conversing with him, either of his own country, or that of his
+instructor.
+
+At first this was difficult, and he had to eke out the Turkish words
+he had acquired with English; but it was not long before there was no
+necessity for this. His intercourse for ten or twelve hours a day with
+this Turk, and the pains taken by his instructor, caused him to acquire
+the language with extreme rapidity. Of course, he had to put up with
+a great deal of banter from the younger knights upon his passion for
+study. Sometimes they pretended that his mania, as they considered it,
+arose from the fact that he was determined to become a renegade, and was
+fitting himself for a high position in the Turkish army. At other times
+they insisted that his intention was to become a Turkish dervish, or to
+win a great Turkish heiress and settle in Syria. But as he always bore
+their banter good temperedly, and was ready occasionally to join them in
+the sport when assaults-at-arms were carried on, they soon became tired
+of making fun of him.
+
+After nine months' constant work, the young knight's studies were
+abruptly stopped by the receipt of a letter from the Pasha of Syria,
+offering a considerable sum for the ransom of his instructor. The
+request was at once acceded to, as it was the policy of the knights to
+accept ransoms for their prisoners, both because the sums so gained
+were useful, and because they were themselves compelled sometimes to pay
+ransom for members of the Order. Suleiman Ali was, it was arranged, to
+be put on board an Egyptian craft bound for Acre, a safe conduct having
+been sent for the vessel and her crew, and for a knight, who was to
+receive the ransom from the pasha.
+
+"At any rate, Sir Gervaise," the Turk said, when the young knight
+expressed great regret at his leaving them, "our position as instructor
+and pupil would have come to an end shortly. For the last three months
+there has been but little teaching between us; we have talked, and that
+has been all, save that for a short time each day you read and wrote.
+But there has been little to teach. You speak the native language now
+as fluently as I do, and would pass anywhere as a Syrian, especially
+as there are slight differences of speech in the various provinces. I
+believe that in Syria you would not be suspected of being anything but
+a native, and assuredly you would be taken for a Syrian elsewhere.
+You have learnt enough, and it would be but a waste of time for you, a
+knight and a soldier, to spend another day in study."
+
+On the following day Gervaise was, to his surprise, sent for by the
+grand master. Except on the occasion of a few public ceremonies, he
+had not seen D'Aubusson since he had been elected to his present
+high dignity, and the summons to attend at the palace therefore came
+unexpectedly.
+
+"We have become quite strangers, Tresham," the grand master said
+cordially when he entered. "I have not forgotten you, and have several
+times questioned your bailiff concerning you. He tells me that you
+have become quite an anchorite, and that, save at your meals and for an
+occasional bout-at-arms, you are seldom to be seen. I was glad to
+hear of your devotion to study, and thought it better to leave you
+undisturbed at it. Yesterday evening I sent for your instructor. He is
+a man of influence in Syria, and I wished to learn how he was affected
+towards us, now that he is about to return there. We talked for some
+time, and I then asked him what progress you had made, and was surprised
+and pleased to find that in his opinion you could pass anywhere as a
+native, and that you were perfectly capable of drawing up and writing
+any document I might desire to send to the sultan or any of his
+generals. This is far more than I had expected, and shows how earnestly
+you must have worked. Your knowledge may prove of much assistance to the
+Order, and believe me, the time you have spent in acquiring it may prove
+of much greater advantage to you in your career than if you had occupied
+it in performing even the most valiant deeds, and that at some future
+time it will ensure your appointment to a responsible office here. It
+was partly to assure you of my approbation that I sent for you, partly
+to inform you that I have appointed you to proceed with Suleiman Ali as
+the knight in charge of the vessel, and to receive the ransom agreed on,
+upon your handing him over. The office is an honourable one and one of
+trust, and it is the first fruits of the advantages you will gain by
+your knowledge of Turkish. No, do not thank me. I am selecting you
+because you are better fitted than any knight I can spare for the
+mission, and also, I may say, because the choice will be pleasing
+to Suleiman Ali, whose goodwill I am desirous of gaining. Before now
+Turkish provinces have thrown off their allegiance to the sultan. They
+have, I must admit, been usually reconquered, but such might not be
+always the case; and if such an event happened in Syria, this man's
+influence and goodwill might be of great advantage to us, as it might
+well suit us to ally ourselves with Syria against Constantinople. I am
+glad to say that I found him at least as well disposed as any man could
+be who had been some years in slavery. He admitted that, for a slave,
+he had been kindly and gently treated, and added that any unpleasant
+memories he might have retained had been obliterated by the nine months
+of pleasant companionship spent with you."
+
+When Gervaise returned to dinner at the auberge, and informed Ralph
+Harcourt and the other young knights that he had been appointed to take
+charge of the vessel in which Suleiman Ali was to be conveyed to
+Acre, the statement was at first received with incredulity. It seemed
+incredible that the youngest knight in the langue should be chosen for
+such a mission, involving as it did a separate command. Even the older
+knights, when the news was passed down the table, were surprised.
+
+"I must say that I am astonished at the grand master's choice. Sir
+Gervaise Tresham doubtless distinguished himself greatly some months
+since, but from that time he has not been out with the galleys, or,
+indeed, done anything that would seem to recommend him for so marked a
+favour as a separate command."
+
+"I don't know, Wingate," Sir John Boswell said. "It seems to me that
+when a young knight of seventeen eschews all pleasure, refrains from
+volunteering for service at sea, and spends his whole time in study, he
+does distinguish himself, and that very greatly. Of the three or four
+hundred young knights here I doubt if one other would have so acted.
+Certainly, none to my knowledge have done so. Yet I do not suppose
+that D'Aubusson selected him for this duty as a reward for so much self
+denial and study, but because by that self denial and study he is more
+fitted for it than any of us here, save some three or four knights in
+the other langues, all of whom are in too high a position to be employed
+in so unimportant a duty. He can speak Turkish--not a few score of
+words and sentences such as I can, but, as Suleiman Ali tells me, like a
+native. Were one of us chosen for this mission, it would be necessary to
+send an interpreter with him; and every one knows how hard it is to do
+business in that manner. It seems to me that the grand master has acted
+wisely in putting aside all question of seniority, and employing the
+knight who is better suited than any other for it."
+
+"You are right, Boswell," the bailiff said. "I really have been
+astonished at the manner in which Tresham has given himself up to study.
+It would have been a natural thing had he, after gaining so much credit,
+been anxious and eager to gain more. When you spoke to me about his
+determination to learn Turkish, I thought he would speedily tire of it,
+and that when the next galley sailed, his name would be among the list
+of volunteers for the service. I am sure, comrades, that there are few,
+if any, among us who would not infinitely prefer fighting the Moslems
+to spending our whole time in learning their language; and I for one
+consider the fact that he has for nine months laboured so incessantly
+and assiduously that he has come, as Boswell says, to speak it like
+a native, is even more to his credit than the deed for which he was
+knighted."
+
+This conversation took place at the upper end of the table, and was not
+heard at the lower end where the younger knights were seated.
+
+"I am not chosen from favour," Gervaise said hotly, to one of his
+companions who had asserted that this was so. "I am simply chosen
+because I can speak Turkish."
+
+"How much Turkish can you speak?" one of them laughed. Gervaise turned
+to the Turkish servant behind them, and said, in his language, "Hassan,
+Sir Giles Trevor wishes to know how well I speak Turkish. You have heard
+me talking with Suleiman Ali. Will you give him your opinion about it?"
+
+The man turned gravely to Sir Giles Trevor.
+
+"My lord," he said, in English, "Sir Gervaise Tresham, he speaks Turkish
+same as I do. If he dress up in Turk clothes I suppose him Turk, not
+know he Christian by his speech."
+
+Exclamations of surprise broke from the young knights.
+
+"Well, you have earned the appointment, Tresham," Ralph Harcourt said
+heartily. "You always told me when I asked you that you were getting on,
+but I had not the least idea that you were getting on like this. And can
+you read and write the Turkish language?"
+
+"Well enough for practical purposes, Ralph. At any rate, I wrote a
+complimentary letter this morning from the grand master to the governor
+of Syria, and the bailiff of Spain, who was, as you know, for ten years
+a prisoner among the Turks, read it through at D'Aubusson's request,
+to see that there was no error in it, and was good enough to pass it
+without alteration."
+
+"I would give a good deal," Sir Giles Trevor said, "if I could follow
+your example, and shut myself up for nine months with an infidel to
+study his language; but I could not do it if my life depended on it. I
+should throw myself off the wall at the end of the first fortnight."
+
+"I don't pretend that I can do what Tresham has done," Ralph Harcourt
+said. "I always hated our lessons with the chaplain, who gave me the
+character of having the thickest head of any of his pupils; but I
+vow"--and he kissed the handle of his dagger--"I will spend half an hour
+a day in trying to learn something of Turkish. Of course, I know that
+such time will not be enough to learn a great deal; but if one could get
+up just enough to be able to give orders to the slaves, to question
+the captain of a vessel one has captured, and to make them understand
+a little, if by bad luck one fell into their hands, it would be quite
+enough for me. I am sure sometimes one is quite at a loss how to pass
+the hours when the sun is at its hottest, and if one tried one ought to
+be able to pick up a little without much trouble. Look at the servants;
+there is not one of them but speaks a little English. And if an infidel
+can learn enough English to get on with, without any regular study, I
+can't see why we shouldn't be able to learn enough Turkish in the same
+way."
+
+Two or three of the other young knights declared that they too would
+devote a short time during the heat of the day to learning Turkish, and
+they agreed to begin together forthwith with one of the servants, who
+spoke English most fluently. Robert Rivers was not present, for he had
+returned to England six months before, to take up his residence at the
+House in Clerkenwell, in order that he might bring to bear the interest
+of his many powerful friends to secure for him an appointment as
+commander of one of the estates of the Order in England. His departure
+had caused general satisfaction among the other knights, whom his
+arrogance and ill temper had frequently irritated. Gervaise especially
+was glad at his leaving the Island, for after he received the honour
+of knighthood, Rivers made a point of always addressing him with an
+affectation of deference and respect that often tried his temper to the
+utmost.
+
+"It is well that Rivers has gone," Ralph said, laughing, "for I don't
+know how he would have supported the chagrin your appointment would have
+given him. He was devoured with jealousy as it was, but this would have
+been a trial beyond bearing."
+
+"I am heartily glad he has gone," Gervaise said gravely. "I have put up
+with a great deal from him, but I don't think I could have stood much
+more. If our vows had not forbidden our fighting I should have called
+him to account long ago; but the only thing else to do was for me
+to lodge a formal complaint before the bailiff, of his continually
+offensive bearing and manner, which I could not bring myself to do, and
+indeed there was no special matter that would have seemed to justify me,
+no single speech that in itself would warrant such grave action on my
+part. I used to wish over and over again that we could but meet in some
+quiet spot in England, both unarmed, and could there settle the matter
+in good English fashion, with our fists, or even with a couple of
+quarterstaffs."
+
+The others laughed.
+
+"That would be a very unknightly form of contest."
+
+"I care not for that," Gervaise replied. "It would be a very
+satisfactory one anyhow, and quite serious enough for the occasion. His
+sneers and petty insults were not sufficient to justify the drawing of
+blood, and there has been enough of that shed for the last twenty years
+in England without two brother knights betaking themselves to their
+swords against each other. But a sound thrashing would have done neither
+of us harm, and if it had fallen to his lot to get the largest share of
+it, it might have done him some good."
+
+"He thinks he is sure of an appointment," one of the others said, "but
+he has been so frequently in trouble here that it is likely that the
+official report, which is always sent home to the grand prior when the
+knights return to England, will be so unfavourable that even the most
+powerful influence will fail to obtain him a post. If so, we may have
+him back here again, especially if the Turks carry out their threat of
+assailing us, for an appeal will be made to all the grand priors for
+knights to aid in the defence."
+
+That evening Gervaise went again to the palace to receive final
+instructions.
+
+"The craft in which you are to travel is an Egyptian trader. As at
+present war has not been formally declared between us and the sultan,
+peaceful traders, as you know, carry on their avocations unmolested
+either by the warships of the Turks or by ours; they do not enter our
+ports without a special permit, and the crews are never allowed to land,
+in order that no detailed account of our fortifications may be taken
+to the sultan. Moreover, brawls might arise between them and the native
+population, or they might aid slaves to escape. However, you will be
+altogether safe from interference from Turkish war vessels, and if
+overhauled by one of them the safe conduct will be sufficient to prevent
+interference with you. But it is not so with pirates. They will plunder
+their own countrymen as readily as they will Christians, and the safe
+guard of the governor of Syria will be of no use whatever to you. In
+this consists the danger of your mission. I cannot send one of our war
+galleys on such an errand, and if there are not enough knights on board
+to beat off any pirate, the fewer there are the better. I hear that
+the craft is a fast sailor, and as the crew will be as anxious to avoid
+pirates as you, they will do their best to escape. I leave it to you to
+take any route. You can either sail hence direct for Acre, or you can
+coast along the shores of Anatolia and Syria, lying up at night in bays.
+
+"Should you be overtaken I do not think it would be of any use for you
+to disguise yourself, for some of the crew would be sure to denounce
+you. Should the worst happen, and you are captured by pirates, you will
+of course in the first place show them your safe conduct, and if I find
+that you do not return I shall send at once to the governor of Syria,
+complaining of your capture when furnished with his safeguard, and
+requesting him to order a search for you to be made at every port on the
+coast, with instructions that you are to be at once released, and either
+sent to him for return hither, or placed on board a craft bound for any
+Christian port; while you, on your part, will endeavour to acquaint
+the Turkish authorities with the fact that you have been seized while
+travelling with a safe conduct from the governor of Syria.
+
+"But, more than from any efforts on your part or mine, I rely upon
+Suleiman Ali, who will, I am sure, as soon as he is set on shore, lose
+no time in acquainting the pasha of your capture, and in calling upon
+him to interfere in your favour. In that case, the worst that could
+befall you would be a temporary detention, unless, indeed, the pirates
+should take you to Egypt. As that country is friendly with us at
+present, since Egypt dreads the ever increasing power of the Turks, it
+will be but a question of ransom, for I have secret agents there who
+will inform me without delay of the arrival of a Christian captive."
+
+"I understand, sir, and will do my best in the matter. If I am captured
+I trust that an opportunity of escape will soon present itself, for I
+should, if taken, conceal from my captors the fact that I understand
+their language, and should thus, if I could evade my guard, have every
+chance of escaping, as in a native dress I could meet and converse with
+those hunting for me, without their having a suspicion of my being the
+white slave for whom they were in search."
+
+"Once at Acre you will be safe. But do not land unless it is absolutely
+necessary, for you might fall a victim to the fanaticism of its
+inhabitants, and no knight has ever set foot on shore there since the
+ill fated day when the Moslems wrested it from us, bathed the ruined
+walls with the best blood of our Order and the Templars', and destroyed
+the last hope of our ever recovering the Holy Sepulchre."
+
+The next morning at daybreak Gervaise and Suleiman Ali went on board the
+Egyptian trader, and sailed for Acre. The current of opinion had changed
+at the auberge when the knights came to think over the mission on which
+Gervaise was about to start, and the slight feeling of jealousy with
+which the younger knights had received the news was entirely dissipated.
+While it did not seem to them that there was any chance of his
+distinguishing himself, they perceived, as they thought it over, the
+considerable danger there was of capture by pirates, and Ralph and some
+of his companions came down to the mole to see him off, with feelings in
+which envy bore no part whatever.
+
+"I see now, Gervaise, that it is truly no holiday excursion on which you
+are starting. I should envy you greatly were you going in command of an
+armed galley, prepared to beat off any craft that might try to overhaul
+you; but, going alone as you are, it is a very different thing. Should
+pirates meet you, you could offer no resistance, and your position would
+be a perilous one indeed. However, I think you are born to good luck,
+and am confident that your patron saint will look after you, and
+therefore expect to see you back here in a fortnight's time at the
+outside."
+
+"I hope so with all my heart, Ralph. It will be no fault of mine if I
+tarry."
+
+"Will you keep the open sea, or skirt the land, Tresham?" one of the
+others asked.
+
+"I shall keep the open sea. The grand master left me to choose my
+course; but I think there is more danger by the coast--where pirates may
+be hiding in unfrequented bays, in readiness to pounce upon a passing
+craft--than in the open sea, where we should have at least the advantage
+that we could not be taken by surprise, and might make a race of it. But
+the sun will be up in a few minutes, and my orders were to set out at
+sunrise, so I must say goodbye at once."
+
+As soon as the vessel was under way, Gervaise took a seat on the poop by
+the side of Suleiman Ali, and related to him the conversation he had had
+with the grand master.
+
+"The risk that you will run has not escaped me," the Turk said, "and
+indeed, I now regret that you were chosen as my escort. I almost wish
+that my son had not purchased my freedom at the present time, since it
+involves the risk of you losing yours. There is no doubt that the sea
+swarms with pirates; the sultan is too busy with his own struggles for
+Empire to bestow any attention upon so small a matter. The pashas and
+the officers of the ports have not the power, even had they the will,
+to put down piracy in their districts, and indeed are, as often as not,
+participators in the spoils. Your Order, which, years back, scoured the
+seas so hotly that piracy well nigh ceased, have now for forty years
+been obliged to turn their attention chiefly to their own defence. They
+possess a comparatively small fleet of galleys, and their wealth is
+expended on their fortress.
+
+"What with Egypt and the sultan their hands are too full for them to act
+as the police of the sea, and the consequence is that from every port,
+bay, and inlet, pirate craft set out--some mere rowboats, some, like
+those under the command of Hassan Ali, veritable fleets. Thus the
+humblest coasters and the largest merchant craft go alike in fear of
+them, and I would that the sultan and Egypt and your Order would for two
+or three years put aside their differences, and confine their efforts to
+sweeping the seas of these pests, to storming their strongholds, and to
+inflicting such punishment upon them as that, for a very long time to
+come, peaceful merchants might carry on their trade without fear.
+
+"I heard you tell the captain that he was to steer straight for Acre,
+and I think you are right in avoiding the coast, where the most harmless
+looking fishing boat may carry a crowd of pirates hidden in her hold. At
+the same time, if you will take my advice you will head much more to
+the south, so as to be out of the regular track of ships making from
+Constantinople or the islands to Acre. You may meet pirates anywhere,
+but they are assuredly thicker along the more frequented routes. The
+safest plan of all would probably be to bear south, and strike the
+Egyptian coast well to the east of the mouth of the Nile. Thence, till
+you get to Palestine, the country is utterly barren and uninhabited,
+while, running up the coast to Palestine, there are, save at Jaffa, no
+ports to speak of until you arrive at Acre; and besides, the inhabitants
+there, even if pirates, would not venture to disregard the pasha's
+safe conduct. I do not by any means say that such a course would be
+absolutely safe. You may meet with vessels on your way south, and
+doubtless some of them cruise off the barren coast I speak of, to
+intercept traders to and from Egypt and Acre, and other Syrian ports;
+for the trade carried on is considerable, and, although of the same
+religion, the Turks are disposed to view the Egyptians as enemies rather
+than as friends, and would have even less hesitation in plundering them
+than in robbing their own countrymen."
+
+"I think that your suggestion is a good one, and will follow it, at any
+rate. The course is a good deal longer, but that is comparatively of
+little moment. The great thing is to carry you safely to Acre."
+
+"And to get back with equal safety," Suleiman said, with a smile.
+
+"That is quite as important in my eyes; in fact, of the two, I would far
+rather that we were captured on our voyage thither, for in that case I
+might be able to arrange for the ransom of both of us."
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII AN EVENING AT RHODES
+
+
+Suleiman Ali's advice was carried out. It added considerably to the
+length of the voyage; but they saw only one doubtful craft. She was
+lying close inshore under the shadow of the sand hills, and they did
+not see her until she hoisted her sails and shot out from the land. They
+were, however, three miles distant from the land at the time, and the
+wind was blowing from the north; consequently the pirate was dead to
+leeward. Every sail was set at once on board the trader, and, being a
+fast sailor, she maintained her position until nightfall. The wind then
+dropped, and just as the light faded they could see that the vessel
+behind them had put out her sweeps. The trader kept up her sails until
+certain that she could be no longer seen; then the canvas was lowered,
+and the crew took to the boats and towed her due north.
+
+The night was fortunately a dark one, and those watching anxiously from
+the deck of the trader were unable to discern her pursuer as she passed
+behind them. As soon as they were well assured that she must have
+gone on, the boats were got in, the sails hoisted again, and, taking
+advantage of every light flaw of wind, they proceeded on their course.
+In the morning the sails of the galley could be seen on the horizon, but
+the distance was too great for her to take up the pursuit again with any
+chance of success, and the trader continued her course to Acre without
+seeing more of her.
+
+As soon as the trader entered the port, the Egyptian captain went on
+shore, taking with him a copy of the safe conduct and the letter from
+the grand master to the pasha. Going to the residence of the governor,
+he handed these to him, saying that he had on board Aga Suleiman Ali,
+and a knight who was charged to deliver him up on payment of the ransom.
+
+"I have been expecting you," the governor said. "I have received a
+letter from the pasha, stating that he had written to the grand master
+respecting the ransom of the aga, and sending me the amount which
+Suleiman's son had offered. The young man was not of age when his father
+was captured, but he is so now, and was therefore able to raise the
+sum required. I will go down to the port with you myself, hand over
+the ransom, and welcome Suleiman, whom I know well, back from his
+captivity."
+
+The transfer was speedily made; a heavy purse was handed to Gervaise,
+and Suleiman was a free man.
+
+"Send me word, if you can, when you return to Rhodes," the latter said,
+as he bade farewell to the young knight. "I shall be anxious until I
+hear. Fortune was with us as we sailed hither, but it may desert you
+on your return. Should aught befall you, tell your captors that if they
+bring you to me I will pay any ransom that they could, in fairness,
+require. Should they refuse to do this, send, if possible, a messenger
+to me, and on receipt of your message I will send a trusty man to
+purchase your freedom. You have treated me as a friend and an equal, and
+a friend I shall always remain."
+
+The vessel was to remain four days in port, to discharge her cargo and
+take in another, and Suleiman had talked of remaining at Acre until she
+sailed, but Gervaise protested strongly against this.
+
+"You have your family, from whom you have been so long separated,
+awaiting your return with anxiety, and I pray you to make no stay on my
+account. I am well content to remain on board here, and to look at the
+city which has so often been the theatre of great deeds--which Richard
+the Lion Heart captured, and which so many of the Hospitallers died to
+defend. I was charged by the grand master not to land, and indeed I feel
+myself that it would be an act of folly to do so. There are doubtless
+many on shore who have relatives and friends now working as slaves among
+us, and some of these might well seek to avenge them by slaying one of
+the Order. I feel your kindness, but it would be a pain to me to know
+that you were lingering here on my account, when you must be longing to
+embrace your children."
+
+The four days passed rapidly. Gervaise had, at the suggestion of the
+governor, laid aside the mantle and insignia of the Order.
+
+"If you do not do so," he said, "I must place a strong guard of soldiers
+on board, in order to ensure that the pasha's safeguard is not violated.
+Sailors are a turbulent race, and were you recognised here they might
+make a tumult, and slay you before a word of what was going on reached
+me. In any case I shall place two soldiers on board until you leave the
+port."
+
+On the morning of the fifth day the sails were got up, and the vessel
+sailed out from the port. Fortune again favoured them, and they reached
+Rhodes without any adventure. Gervaise went at once to the palace, and
+handed over the purse of gold to the treasurer. He then sent up his name
+to the grand master, and was immediately conducted to his room.
+
+"I am glad to see you back, Tresham. I have been uneasy about you. Have
+you fulfilled your mission without adventure?"
+
+"Without any adventure, sir, save that we were once chased by a pirate
+on our way east, but escaped in the darkness. Save for that, the voyage
+has been wholly uneventful. I have received the ransom, and handed the
+purse to your treasurer."
+
+"I am glad that your first command has turned out so well. I will see
+that you do not lack employment; and the fact that you are able to act
+as interpreter will ensure you a welcome on any galley. At present,
+however, it is not my intention to send out many cruisers. Every life
+now is precious, and no amount of spoil that can be brought in will
+counter balance the loss of those who fall. However, I may find some
+mission on which you can be employed. I know that you love an active
+life; and as, for nine months, you have put a rein on your inclinations,
+and have devoted yourself wholly to study, so that you might be of
+greater use to the Order, you have a good right to any employment in
+which your knowledge can be utilised."
+
+On his arrival at the auberge, Gervaise was very heartily greeted by the
+younger knights.
+
+"I told you you were born lucky, Gervaise," Ralph Harcourt said. "There
+has been more than one wager made that you would be captured; but I,
+for my part, was confident that your good fortune would not desert you.
+Still, though not surprised, we are delighted to see you again. Now tell
+us about your voyage."
+
+Gervaise gave a brief account of the adventure with the pirate, and then
+described the visit of the governor to the ship.
+
+"Did he say anything to you?"
+
+"He was courteous and solemn; just the sort of man you would fancy a
+Turkish governor should be. He looked a little surprised when I accosted
+him in Turkish, but asked no questions at the time, though I daresay he
+inquired afterwards of Suleiman how I came to speak the language. The
+only time he actually said anything was when he requested that I would
+not wear the mantle of the Order while in port, as sailors were a
+turbulent race, and it might lead to an attack upon me; and as he was
+responsible to the pasha that his safe conduct should be respected, it
+would be necessary, if I declined to follow his advice, to keep a strong
+body of soldiers on board. As this would have been a horrible nuisance,
+especially as I wanted to enjoy in quiet the view of the city, with its
+castle and walls, I acceded at once to his request, which seemed to me
+a reasonable one. He did send two soldiers on board, but they remained
+down in the waist, and did not interfere with my pleasure in any way."
+
+"Next to Jerusalem, how I should like to see Acre!" Ralph Harcourt
+exclaimed. "It is, of all other cities, the most closely connected with
+our Order. We helped to win it, and we were the last to defend it.
+We have heard so much about the fortress, and it has been so often
+described to me, that I know the situation of every bastion--at least,
+as it was when we left it, though I know not what changes the Turks may
+since have made."
+
+"That I know not, Ralph. Of course, I only saw the seafront, and it was
+upon the land side that the attack was made. We know that the breaches
+were all repaired long ago, and it is said that the place is stronger
+than ever. From the port all was solid and massive. It is indeed a grand
+and stately fortress. Here we have done all that was possible to make
+Rhodes impregnable, but nature did nothing for us; there nature has done
+everything, and the castle looks as if it could defy the assaults of an
+army, however large. And indeed, it was not wrested from us by force.
+The knights, when the city walls were stormed and the town filled with
+their foes fought their way down to the water's edge and embarked there,
+for they were reduced to a mere handful; and however strong a castle may
+be, it needs hands to defend it. Still, it well nigh moved me to tears
+to see the Turkish banner waving over it, and to think how many tens
+of thousands of Christian soldiers had died in the effort to retain the
+holy places, and had died in vain."
+
+"I wonder whether the Turks will ever be forced to relinquish their hold
+of the holy places?"
+
+"Who can tell, Sir Giles?" the bailiff, who had come up to the group
+unobserved, said quietly. "Certainly not in our time--not until the
+Moslem power, which threatens not only us, but all Europe, has crumbled
+to dust. So long as Acre remains in their power there is no hope. I say
+not but that by a mighty effort of all Christendom, Palestine might be
+wrested from the infidels, as it was wrested before; but the past shows
+us that while men or nations can be stirred to enthusiasm for a time,
+the fire does not last long, and once again the faithful few would be
+overwhelmed by the odds that would be brought against them, while Europe
+looked on impassive, if not indifferent. No, knights; the utmost that
+can be hoped for, is that the tide of Moslem invasion westward may be
+stayed. At present we are the bulwark, and as long as the standard of
+our Order waves over Rhodes so long is Europe safe by sea. But I foresee
+that this cannot last: the strongest defences, the stoutest hearts,
+and the bravest of hearts, cannot in the long run prevail against
+overpowering numbers. As at Acre, we may repel assault after assault,
+we may cause army after army to betake themselves again to their ships;
+but, as a rock is overwhelmed by the rising tide, so must Rhodes succumb
+at last, if left by Europe to bear alone the brunt of Moslem invasion.
+All that men can do we shall do. As long as it is possible to resist,
+we shall resist. When further resistance becomes impossible, we shall, I
+trust, act as we did before.
+
+"We were driven from Palestine, only to fortify ourselves at Rhodes.
+If we are driven from Rhodes, we shall, I feel assured, find a home
+elsewhere, and again commence our labours. The nearer we are to Europe
+the more hope there is that Christendom will aid us, for they will more
+generally understand that our defeat would mean the laying open of the
+shores of the Mediterranean, from Turkey to Gibraltar, to the invasion
+of the Moslems. However, comrades, this is all in the future. Our share
+is but in the present, and I trust the flag of the Order will float over
+Rhodes as long, at least, as the lifetime of the youngest of us, and
+that we may bequeath the duty of upholding the Cross untarnished to
+those who come after us; and we can then leave the issue in God's
+hands."
+
+All listened respectfully to the words of their leader, although his
+opinion fell like cold water upon the fiery zeal and high hopes of his
+hearers. The possibility of their losing Rhodes had never once entered
+into the minds of the majority of them. It was likely that ere long they
+might be called upon to stand a siege, but, acquainted as they were with
+the strength of the place--its deep and seemingly impassable moat, its
+massive walls, and protecting towers and bastions--it had seemed to them
+that Rhodes was capable of withstanding all assaults, however numerous
+the foe, however oft repeated the invasion. The bailiff was, as all
+knew, a man of dauntless courage, of wide experience and great judgment,
+and that he should believe that Rhodes would, although not in their
+time, inevitably fall, brought home to them for the first time the fact
+that their fortress was but an outpost of Europe, and one placed so
+distant from it that Christendom, in the hour of peril, might be unable
+to furnish them with aid. As the bailiff walked away, there was silence
+for a short time, and then Sir Giles Trevor said cheerfully, "Well, if
+it lasts our time we need not trouble our heads as to what will take
+place afterwards. As the bailiff says, our duty is with the present, and
+as we all mean to drive the Turks back when they come, I do not see that
+there is any occasion for us to take it to heart, even if it be fated
+that the Moslems shall one day walk over our tombs. If Christendom
+chooses to be supine, let Christendom suffer, say I. At any rate, I am
+not going to weep for what may take place after I am turned into dust."
+
+"That sounds all very well, Sir Giles," Ralph Harcourt said, "and I have
+no argument to advance against it, though I am sure there is much to be
+said; but if the bailiff, or the chaplain, or indeed any of the elders,
+had heard you say so, I have no doubt you would have had a fitting
+reply."
+
+Sir Giles tossed his head mockingly. "I shall fight neither better nor
+worse, friend Harcourt, because it may be that someday the Moslems are,
+as the bailiff seems to think, destined to lord it here. I have only
+promised and vowed to do my best against the Moslems, and that vow only
+holds good as long as I am in the flesh; beyond that I have no concern.
+But what are we staying here for, wasting our time? It is the hour for
+those of us who are going, to be starting for the ball given by Signor
+Succhi; as he is one of the richest merchants in the town, it will be a
+gay one, and there is no lack of fair faces in Rhodes. It is a grievous
+pity that our elders all set their will against even the younger members
+of the community joining in a dance. It was not one of the things I
+swore to give up. However, here in Rhodes there is no flying in the face
+of rules."
+
+Three or four of the other young knights were also going.
+
+"What are you thinking of doing, Gervaise?" Harcourt asked.
+
+"I have nothing particular to do, Ralph, except that, first of all, I
+must write a letter to Suleiman Ali and hand it to the bailiff, praying
+him to send it off by the first vessel that may put in here on her way
+to Acre. If I do not do it now it may be neglected, and I promised to
+write directly I got here. I will not be half an hour, and after that I
+shall be ready to do anything you like."
+
+In less than that time, indeed, he rejoined Ralph. "Now what shall we
+do with ourselves? What do you say to a stroll through the streets? I am
+never tired of that."
+
+"I like better to go by way of the roofs, Gervaise. The streets are
+badly lit, and although they are busy enough in some quarters, they are
+so narrow that one gets jostled and pushed. On the terraces everything
+is quiet. You have plenty of light and music, and it is pleasant to
+see families sitting together and enjoying themselves; and if one is
+disposed for a cup of wine or of cool sherbet, they are delighted to
+give it, for they all are pleased when one of us joins a group. I have
+quite a number of acquaintances I have made in this way while you have
+been working away at your Turkish."
+
+"Very well," Gervaise said. "If such is your fancy, Ralph, let us take
+one of the paths across the roofs. I might walk there twenty years by
+myself without making an acquaintance, and I do not pledge myself to
+join in these intimacies of yours. However, I shall be quite content to
+amuse myself by looking on at the scene in general, while you are paying
+your visits and drinking your sherbet."
+
+"There are plenty of fair girls among the Rhodians," Ralph said, with a
+smile; "and though we are pledged to celibacy we are in no way bound to
+abstain from admiration."
+
+Gervaise laughed.
+
+"Admire as much as you like, Ralph, but do not expect me to do so. I
+have scarcely as much as spoken to a woman since I entered the House in
+London, and I should have no idea what to say to a young girl."
+
+"But it is part of the education of a true knight to be courteous to
+women. It is one of the great duties of chivalry. And you must remember
+that we are secular knights, as well knights of the Order."
+
+"The work of the Order is quite sufficient for me at present, Ralph. In
+time I may come to like the society of women, to admire their beauty,
+and possibly even to wear the colour of some one, for that seems to be
+the fashion; though why we, who are bound to celibacy, should admire one
+woman more than another I cannot understand."
+
+They had by this time descended from the castle, and were taking their
+way along one of the broad paths that led over the flat roofs of the
+houses by means of the bridges thrown across the streets.
+
+"These are some acquaintances of mine," Ralph said, stopping at one of
+the walls, some three feet high, that bordered the path.
+
+Beyond was an enclosure of some fifty feet square. Clumps of shrubs and
+flowers, surrounded by stonework some eight or ten inches high enclosing
+the earth in which they grew, were scattered here and there. Lamps were
+hung to cords stretched above it, while others were arranged among the
+flowers. In the centre a large carpet was spread, and on this some eight
+or ten persons were seated on cushions. A girl was playing a lute, and
+another singing to her accompaniment. She stopped abruptly when her eye
+fell upon the figures of the two young knights.
+
+"There is Sir Ralph Harcourt, father!" she exclaimed in Italian, which
+was the language most used on the Island, and spoken with more or less
+fluency by all the knights, among whom it served as a general medium of
+communication. "Are you waiting to be invited in, Sir Knight?" she
+went on saucily. "I thought that by this time you would know you were
+welcome."
+
+"Your tongue runs too fast, child," her father said, as he rose and
+walked across to Ralph. "You are welcome, Sir Ralph, very welcome. I
+pray you enter and join us."
+
+"I will do so with pleasure, Signor Vrados, if you will also extend your
+hospitality to my friend Sir Gervaise Tresham."
+
+"Most gladly," the merchant said. "I pray him to enter."
+
+The two knights passed through the gate in the wall. All rose to their
+feet as they went up to the carpet, and greeted Ralph with a warmth
+which showed that he was a favourite. He introduced Gervaise to them.
+
+"I wonder that I do not know your face, Sir Knight," the merchant's
+wife said. "I thought I knew all the knights of the Order by sight, from
+seeing them either at the public ceremonies, or observing them pass in
+the streets."
+
+"For the last nine months Sir Gervaise has been an anchorite. He has
+been learning Turkish, and has so devoted himself to the study that even
+I have scarce caught sight of him, save at meals. As for walking in the
+streets, it is the last thing he would think of doing. I consider myself
+a good and conscientious young knight, but I am as nothing in that
+respect to my friend. I used to look upon him as my little brother, for
+we were at the House of the Order in London together. He is four years
+younger than I am, and you know four years between boys makes an immense
+difference. Now the tables are turned, and I quite look up to him."
+
+"You will believe as much as you like, Signora, of what Sir Ralph says,"
+Gervaise laughed. "As you have, he says, known him for some time,
+you must by this time have learnt that his word is not to be taken
+literally."
+
+"We learned that quite early in our acquaintance," the girl who had
+first noticed them said, with an affectation of gravity. "I always tell
+him that I cannot believe anything he says, and I am grateful to you,
+Sir Knight, for having thus borne evidence to the quickness of my
+perception."
+
+By this time the servants had brought some more cushions, and on these
+Ralph and Gervaise seated themselves. Wine, sherbet, and cakes, were
+then handed round. The master of the house placed Gervaise on his right
+hand, as a stranger.
+
+"You have been among our islands, Sir Gervaise? But indeed, I need not
+ask that, since I know that you and Sir Ralph were knighted together for
+your valour in that affair with the ships of Hassan Ali. We come from
+Lesbos. It is now eighty years since my family settled in Rhodes, and we
+have seen it grow from a small place to a great fortress."
+
+"'Tis a wonderful place," Gervaise said. "I know nothing of the
+fortresses of Europe, but it seems to me that no other can well be
+stronger than this--that is, among places with no natural advantages."
+
+"The knights have always had an abundance of slaves," the merchant said;
+"so many that they have not only had sufficient for their work here, but
+have been able to sell numbers to European potentates. Yes, Rhodes is
+wonderfully strong. That great fosse would seem as if it could defy the
+efforts of an army to cross; and yet the past has shown that even the
+strongest defences, held with the greatest bravery, can be carried by
+generals with immense armies, and careless how they sacrifice them so
+that they do but succeed. Look at Acre, for example."
+
+"I was looking at it five days ago," Gervaise said, "and thinking that
+it was beyond the might of man to take."
+
+"Do you mean that you were at Acre?" the merchant asked, with surprise.
+
+"Yes. I went there to hand over a captive who had been ransomed. Of
+course I had a safe conduct, and I was glad indeed of the opportunity of
+seeing so famous a fortress."
+
+"You were fortunate indeed, Sir Knight, and it was, if you will pardon
+my saying so, singular that so young a knight should have been chosen.
+Assuredly, even the senior knights of the Order would rejoice at the
+opportunity of beholding a fortress so intimately connected with the
+past history of the Order."
+
+"It was due entirely to my being able to speak Turkish," Gervaise said.
+"As my friend Sir Ralph was mentioning, I have been studying hard, and
+can now speak the language fluently; and as this was a necessity on
+such a mission, and the few knights who can so speak it are all in high
+office, and could hardly be asked to undertake so unimportant a service,
+I was selected."
+
+"And you really speak Turkish well? It is an accomplishment that few,
+save Greeks subject to Turkey, possess. Do you intend, may I ask, to
+make Rhodes your home? I ask because I suppose you would not have taken
+this labour had you intended shortly to return to England."
+
+"Yes; I hope to remain here permanently. I know that the first step
+towards promotion here is generally a commandery at home, but I did not
+enter the Order with any idea of gaining office or dignity. I desire
+simply to be a knight of the Cross, and to spend my life in doing
+faithful service to the Order."
+
+"A worthy ambition indeed, and one that, so far as my experience goes,
+very few knights entertain. I see yearly scores of young knights depart,
+no small proportion of whom never place foot on Rhodes again, although
+doubtless many of them will hasten back again as soon as the danger of
+an assault from the Turks becomes imminent. You see, we who dwell here
+under the protection of the Order naturally talk over these things among
+ourselves; and although, in the matter of fortifications, all will admit
+that enormous efforts have been made to render the town secure, it is
+clear that in the matter of knights to defend them there is very much
+left to be desired. It is all very well to say that the knights from all
+parts of Europe would flock hither to defend it; but the journey would
+be a long one, and would occupy much time, and they would probably
+not receive news that the Turks had sailed until the place was already
+invested. Then it would be difficult, if not altogether impossible, for
+ships with reinforcements to make their way through the Turkish fleet,
+and to enter the port. To man the walls properly would need a force five
+times as numerous as that which is now here. I recognise the valour
+of your knights; they have accomplished wonders. But even they cannot
+accomplish impossibilities. For a time they could hold the walls; but
+as their number became reduced by the fire of the Turkish cannon and the
+battles at the breaches, they would at last be too weak any longer
+to repel the onslaughts of foes with an almost unlimited supply of
+soldiers."
+
+"That is true enough," Gervaise admitted; "and to my mind it is shocking
+that four-fifths at least of the Order, pledged to oppose the infidels,
+should be occupied with the inglorious work of looking after the manors
+and estates of the society throughout Europe, while one-fifth, at most,
+are here performing the duties to which all are sworn. Of the revenues
+of the estates themselves, a mere fraction finds its way hither. Still,
+I trust that the greater part of the knights will hasten here as soon as
+danger becomes imminent, without waiting for the news that the Turkish
+armament has actually set forth."
+
+For an hour the two young knights remained on the roof, Gervaise talking
+quietly with the merchant, while his companion laughed and chatted with
+the ladies and friends of their host. After they had left, with the
+promise that it would not be long before they repeated their visit,
+Ralph bantered Gervaise on preferring the society of the merchant to
+that of his daughters.
+
+"I found him a pleasant and very well informed man, Ralph, and enjoyed
+my talk with him just as you enjoyed talking nonsense to his daughters
+and listening to their songs. Who was the man sitting next to the eldest
+daughter?"
+
+"He doesn't belong to Rhodes, but is a Greek from one of the islands,
+though I did not catch from which. I don't know whether he is a relative
+of the family, or a business connection of the merchant's, or a stranger
+who has brought a letter of introduction to him. Nothing was said on
+that head; why do you ask?"
+
+"I don't like the man's face; he is a handsome fellow, but has a crafty
+expression. He did not say much, but it seemed to me that at times, when
+he appeared to be sitting carelessly sipping his sherbet, he was really
+trying to listen to what Vrados was saying to me. He could not do
+so, for we were on the other side of the circle, and were speaking in
+somewhat low tones, while the rest of you were chatting and laughing."
+
+"What should he want to listen for, most sapient knight?"
+
+"That I can't tell, Ralph; but I am certain that he was trying to
+listen."
+
+"Well, as you were no doubt both talking more sensibly than most of us,"
+Ralph laughed, "he certainly showed his discernment."
+
+"I daresay I am wrong," Gervaise said quietly; "but you know we have our
+spies at Constantinople, and probably the sultan has his spies here; and
+the idea occurred to me that perhaps this man might be one of them."
+
+"Well, I am bound to say, Gervaise," Ralph said, a little irritably,
+"I have never heard so grave an accusation brought on such insufficient
+evidence--or rather, as far as I can see, without a shadow of evidence
+of any kind. We drop in upon a man who is one of our most respected
+merchants, whose family has been established here many years, whose
+interests must be the same as those of the Order; and because a guest of
+his does not care to take any active part in my joking with the girls,
+and because you imagine that there is a cunning expression on his face,
+you must straightway take it into your head that he must be a spy."
+
+"Excuse me, Ralph, I simply said that the idea occurred to me that he
+might be a spy, which is a very different thing to my accusing him of
+being one. I am ready to admit that the chances are infinitely greater
+that he is an honest trader or a relation of the merchant, and that his
+presence here is perfectly legitimate and natural, than that he should
+be a spy. Still, there is a chance, if it be but one out of a thousand,
+that he may be the latter. I don't think that I am at all of a
+suspicious nature, but I really should like to learn a little about
+this man. I do not mean that I am going to try to do so. It would be an
+unworthy action to pry into another's business, when it is no concern of
+one's own. Still, I should like to know why he is here."
+
+Ralph shrugged his shoulders.
+
+"This comes of living the life of a hermit, Gervaise. Other people meet
+and talk, and enjoy what society there is in the city, without troubling
+their heads for a moment as to where people come from or what their
+business is here, still less whether they are spies. Such ideas do not
+so much as occur to them, and I must say that I think the sooner you
+fall into the ways of other people the better."
+
+"There is no harm done," Gervaise said composedly. "I am not thinking
+of asking our bailiff to order him to be arrested on suspicion. I only
+remarked that I did not like the man's face, nor the way in which, while
+he pretended to be thinking of nothing, he was trying to overhear what
+we were saying. I am quite willing to admit that I have made a mistake,
+not in devoting myself to Turkish, but in going to the merchant's with
+you this evening. I have had no experience whatever of what you call
+society, and, so far from it giving me pleasure to talk to strangers,
+especially to women, it seems to me that such talk is annoying to me,
+at any rate at present. When I get to your age, possibly my ideas may
+change. I don't for a moment wish to judge you or others; you apparently
+enjoy it, and it is a distraction from our serious work. I say simply
+that it is an amusement which I do not understand. You must remember
+that I entered the Order in consequence of a solemn vow of my dead
+father, that I regard the profession we make as a very serious one, and
+that my present intention is to devote my life entirely to the Order and
+to an active fulfilment of its vows."
+
+"That is all right, Gervaise," Ralph said good temperedly. "Only I think
+it would be a pity if you were to turn out a fanatic. Jerusalem and
+Palestine are lost, and you admit that there is really very little
+chance of our ever regaining them. Our duties, therefore, are changed,
+and we are now an army of knights, pledged to war against the infidels,
+in the same way as knights and nobles at home are ever ready to engage
+in a war with France. The vow of poverty is long since obsolete. Many of
+our chief officials are men of great wealth, and indeed, a grand master,
+or the bailiff of a langue, is expected to spend, and does spend, a sum
+vastly exceeding his allowance from the Order. The great body of knights
+are equally lax as to some of their other vows, and carry this to a
+length that, as you know, has caused grave scandal. But I see not that
+it is in any way incumbent on us to give up all the pleasures of life.
+We are a military Order, and are all ready to fight in defence of
+Rhodes, as in bygone days we were ready to fight in defence of the Holy
+Sepulchre. Kings and great nobles have endowed us with a large number of
+estates, in order to maintain us as an army against Islam; and as such
+we do our duty. But to affect asceticism is out of date and ridiculous."
+
+"I have certainly no wish to be an ascetic, Ralph. I should have no
+objection to hold estates, if I had them to hold. But I think that at
+present, with the great danger hanging over us, it would be better
+if, in the first place, we were all to spend less time in idleness or
+amusement, and to devote all our energies to the cause. I mean not only
+by fighting when the time comes for fighting, but by endeavouring in
+every way to ward off danger."
+
+"When I see danger, I will do my best to ward it off, Gervaise; but I
+cannot go about with my nose in the air, snuffing danger like a hunting
+dog in pursuit of game. At any rate, I will not bother you to accompany
+me on my visits in future."
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX WITH THE GALLEY SLAVES
+
+
+Gervaise, on consideration, was obliged to own to himself that Ralph was
+right in saying that he had no ground whatever for suspicion against
+the Greek he had met at Signor Vrados's; and he could see no means of
+following the matter up. It would not, he felt, be honourable to go
+again to the merchant's house, and to avail himself of his hospitality,
+while watching his guest. He determined to dismiss the matter from
+his mind, and had, indeed, altogether done so when, a week later, it
+suddenly recurred to his memory.
+
+A party of slaves, under the escort of overseers and in charge of a
+knight who had been with them at their work on the fortifications, were
+passing along the street on their way back to barracks. It was already
+dusk, and as Gervaise was going the same way as they were, he stood
+aside in a doorway to let them pass. He was on the point of stepping out
+to follow them, when he saw a man, who had been standing in the shadow
+of the wall, fall in with their ranks, and, as he walked engaged in an
+earnest conversation with one of the slaves. He kept beside him for a
+hundred yards or so, then passed something into the slave's hand, and
+turned abruptly down a side opening. There were but few people about,
+and in the growing darkness the action of the man passed unobserved by
+the overseers. Gervaise, thinking the occurrence a strange one, turned
+down the same lane as the man.
+
+He slackened his pace until the latter was fifty yards ahead, so that he
+would not, had he looked round, have been able to perceive that it was
+a knight who was behind him. After passing through several streets, the
+man turned into a refreshment house. The door stood open, and as the
+place was brightly lit up, Gervaise, pausing outside, was able to see
+what was going on inside. The man he had followed was on the point
+of seating himself at one of the tables, and as he did so Gervaise
+recognised him as the Greek he had met at the merchant's house. He at
+once walked on a short distance, and then paused to think.
+
+The vague suspicions he had before entertained as to the man now
+recurred with double force; he was certainly in communication with one
+or more of the slaves, and such communication, so secretly effected,
+could be for no good purpose. So far, however, there was nothing he
+could tax the man with. He would probably deny altogether that he had
+spoken to any of the slaves, and Gervaise could not point out the one
+he had conversed with. At any rate, nothing could be done now, and he
+required time to think what steps he could take to follow up the matter.
+He resolved, however, to wait and follow the Greek when he came out.
+After a few minutes he again repassed the door, and saw that the man was
+engaged in earnest conversation with another. After considering for
+a time, Gervaise thought that it would be best for him to follow this
+other man when he left, and ascertain who he was, rather than to keep
+a watch on the movements of the Greek, who, as likely as not, would now
+return to the merchant's.
+
+He walked several times up and down the street, until at last he saw the
+two men issue out together. They stopped for a moment outside, and
+then, after exchanging a few words, separated, the Greek going in the
+direction of the quarter in which lay the house of Vrados, while the
+other walked towards Gervaise. The latter passed him carelessly, but
+when the man had gone nearly to the end of the street, he turned and
+followed him. He could see at once that he was a lay brother of the
+Order. This class consisted of men of an inferior social position to the
+knights; they filled many of the minor offices, but were not eligible
+for promotion. Following for ten minutes, Gervaise saw him approach one
+of the barracks, or prisons, occupied by the slaves. He knocked at the
+door, and, upon its being opened, at once entered.
+
+The matter had now assumed a much more serious aspect. This young Greek,
+a stranger to Rhodes, was in communication not only with some of the
+slaves, but with a prison official, and the matter appeared so grave to
+Gervaise that, after some deliberation, he thought it was too important
+for him to endeavour to follow out alone, and that it was necessary to
+lay it before the bailiff. Accordingly, after the evening meal he went
+up to Sir John Kendall, and asked if he could confer with him alone on
+a matter over which he was somewhat troubled. The bailiff assented at
+once, and Gervaise followed him to his private apartment.
+
+"Now, what is this matter, Sir Gervaise?" he asked pleasantly. "Nothing
+serious, I trust?"
+
+"I don't know, Sir John. That is a matter for your consideration; but
+it seems to me of such importance that it ought to be brought to your
+knowledge."
+
+The face of the bailiff grew more grave, and, seating himself in a
+chair, he motioned to Gervaise to do the same.
+
+"Now, let me hear what it is," he said.
+
+Gervaise told his story simply. A slight smile passed across the
+bailiff's face as he mentioned that he had met the Greek on the roof
+of the house of Signor Vrados, and had not liked the expression of his
+face.
+
+"Vrados has some fair daughters, has he not?" he asked.
+
+"Yes, sir; but I know little of them. That is the only visit that I ever
+paid there, or, indeed, to the house of any one in the town."
+
+Sir John's face grew grave again as Gervaise recounted how he had seen
+the man enter into communication with a slave; and he frowned heavily
+when he heard of his meeting afterwards with one of the prison officers.
+
+"In truth, Sir Gervaise," he said, after a pause, "this seems to be a
+right serious matter, and you have done wisely in informing me of what
+you have seen. Assuredly there is mischief of some sort in the wind. The
+question is how to get to the bottom of it. Of course, the grand master
+might order the arrest of this Greek and of the prison officer, but
+you may be sure that neither would commit himself unless torture were
+applied; and I, for one, have no belief in what any man says under such
+circumstances. The most honest man may own himself a traitor when racked
+with torture, and may denounce innocent men. It is at best a clumsy
+device. What think you of the matter?"
+
+"I have hardly thought it over yet, Sir John; and certainly no plan has
+yet occurred to me."
+
+"Well, think it over, Sir Gervaise. It is not likely that a few days
+will make any difference. But I will take measures to see that this
+Greek does not sail away from the Island at present, and will speak to
+the port master about it. I will myself give the matter consideration,
+but as you have shown yourself so quick witted in following up the
+matter so far, I rely upon you more than myself to carry it farther.
+There may possibly be some simple explanation of the matter. He may come
+from an island where the Turks are masters, and has, perhaps, brought a
+message from some relatives of a slave; as to the talk with the prison
+officer, it may be wholly innocent. If we should find that it is so we
+will keep this matter to ourselves, if possible, or we shall get finely
+laughed at by our comrades for having run upon a false scent. If, on the
+other hand, the matter should turn out to be serious, you will assuredly
+get great credit for having discovered it. Therefore, turn it over in
+your mind tonight, and see if you can arrive at some scheme for seeing
+further into it before we take any steps."
+
+In the morning Gervaise again called upon Sir John Kendall.
+
+"Well, Sir Gervaise, I hope that you have hit upon some scheme for
+getting to the bottom of this matter. I confess that I myself, though I
+have had a sleepless night over it, have not been able to see any
+method of getting to the root of the affair, save by the application of
+torture."
+
+"I do not know whether the plan I have thought of will commend itself to
+your opinion, sir, but I have worked out a scheme which will, I think,
+enable us to get to the bottom of the matter. I believe that a galley is
+expected back from a cruise today or tomorrow. Now, sir, my idea is that
+I should go on board a small craft, under the command of a knight upon
+whose discretion and silence you can rely, such as, for example, Sir
+John Boswell, and that we should intercept the galley. Before we board
+her I should disguise myself as a Turkish slave, and as such Sir John
+should hand me over to the officer in command of the galley, giving him
+a letter of private instructions from you as to my disposal. If they
+have other slaves on board I would ask that I should be kept apart from
+them, as well as from the rowers of the galley. On being landed I should
+be sent to the prison where I saw the officer enter last night, and the
+slaves and rowers should be distributed among the other prisons. Thus,
+then, the slaves I should be placed with would only know that I had
+arrived in the galley with other slaves captured by it. I have no doubt
+I should be able to maintain my assumed character, and should in a short
+time be taken into the confidence of the others, and should learn what
+is going on. It would be well, of course, that none of the officials
+of the prison should be informed as to my true character, for others,
+besides the one I saw, may have been bribed to participate in whatever
+plot is going on."
+
+"And do you mean to say, Sir Gervaise, that you, a knight of the Order,
+are willing to submit to the indignity of being treated as a slave? To
+keep up the disguise long enough to be taken into the confidence of the
+plotters, you might have to stay there for some time; and if the prison
+officials believe you to be but an ordinary slave, you will be put to
+work either on the walls or in one of the galleys."
+
+"I am ready to do anything for the benefit of the Order, and the safety
+of Rhodes, that will meet with your approval," Gervaise replied. "It
+will no doubt be unpleasant, but we did not enter the Order to do
+pleasant things, but to perform certain duties, and those duties
+necessarily involve a certain amount of sacrifice."
+
+"Do you think you would be able to maintain the character? Because
+you must remember that if detected you might be torn in pieces by the
+slaves, before the officers could interfere to protect you."
+
+"I feel sure that I can do so, Sir John."
+
+"What story would you tell them?"
+
+"I would say that I had come from Syria, and sailed from Acre in a
+trader, which is perfectly true, and also that I was taken off the ship
+I was on by a galley--which would not be altogether false, as I crossed
+one as I landed. I think there would be very little questioning, for I
+should pretend to be in a state of sullen despair, and give such short
+answers to questions that I should soon be left alone."
+
+"The scheme is a good one, Sir Gervaise, though full of danger and
+difficulty. If you are ready to render this great service to the Order,
+I willingly accept the sacrifice you offer to make. I will send one of
+my slaves down into the town to buy garments suitable for you, and also
+stains for your skin. It will, of course, be necessary for you to shave
+a portion of your head in Turkish fashion. I will also see Sir John
+Boswell, and ask him to arrange for a craft to be ready to start at
+noon. The galley is not expected in until evening, but of course she may
+arrive at any moment now. Come here again in an hour's time, and I will
+have the clothes ready for you."
+
+"May I suggest, sir, that they should be those appropriate to a small
+merchant? This might seem to account for my not being placed with the
+other slaves who may be on board the galley, as it would be supposed
+that I was set apart in order that I should be sent to one of the
+auberges as a servant; and my afterwards being herded with the others
+would be explained by its being found that there was no opening for
+me in such a capacity. I should think there would be no difficulty in
+obtaining such a suit, as garments of all kinds are brought here in
+prizes, and are bought up by some of the Greek merchants, who afterwards
+find opportunities of despatching them by craft trading among the
+islands."
+
+Just before noon Gervaise walked down to the port with Sir John Boswell,
+a servant following with a bundle.
+
+"It seems to me a hare brained scheme, lad," Sir John, who had just
+joined him, said, as they issued from the auberge; "though I own, from
+what the bailiff tells me, that there must be some treacherous plot on
+hand, and when that is the case it is necessary that it should be probed
+to the bottom. But for a knight to go in the disguise of an infidel
+slave seems to me to be beyond all bounds."
+
+"If one is ready to give one's life for the Order, Sir John, surely one
+need not mind a few weeks' inconvenience. I shall, at any rate, be no
+worse off than you were when serving as a Turkish slave."
+
+"Well, no, I don't know that you will," Sir John replied doubtfully.
+"But that was from necessity, and not from choice; and it is, moreover,
+an accident we are all exposed to."
+
+"It is surely better to do a thing of one's own free will than because
+one is forced to do it, Sir John?"
+
+The knight was silent. He was a stout fighting man, but unused to
+argument.
+
+"Well," he said, after a long pause, "I can only hope that it will turn
+out all right, and promise that if you are strangled in prison, I will
+see that every slave who had a hand in it shall be strung up. I have
+told Kendall frankly that if I were in his place I would not permit you
+to try such a venture. However, as I could think of no other plan by
+which there would be a chance of getting to the bottom of this matter,
+my words had no effect with him. I should not have so much cared if the
+officers of the gaol knew who you were; but I can see that if there is
+treachery at work this would defeat your object altogether. What do you
+suppose this rascal Greek can be intending?"
+
+"That I cannot say, Sir John. He may be trying to get an exact plan of
+the fortifications, or he may be arranging some plan of communication by
+which, in case of siege, news of our condition and of the state of our
+defences may be conveyed to the Turkish commander."
+
+By this time they had reached the port, and embarked at once on a
+trading vessel belonging to one of the merchants, from whom Sir John
+had readily obtained her use for a day or two. Her sails were hoisted
+at once, and she rowed out from the port. Having proceeded some three
+or four miles, they lowered her sails, and lay to in the course a galley
+making for the port would take. A sailor was sent up to the masthead to
+keep a lookout. Late in the afternoon he called down that he could make
+out a black speck some twelve miles away. She carried no sails, and he
+judged her to be a galley.
+
+"It will be dark before she comes along," Sir John Boswell said. "You
+can hoist your sails, captain, and return to within half a mile of the
+port, or she may pass us beyond hailing distance."
+
+Gervaise at once retired to the cabin that had been set aside for their
+use, and proceeded to disguise himself. An hour later Sir John came
+down. He looked at Gervaise critically.
+
+"You are all right as far as appearances go. I should take you anywhere
+for a young Turk. Your clothes are not too new, and are in accordance
+with the tale you are going to tell, which is that you are the son of
+a Syrian trader. If, as Suleiman says, you speak Turkish well enough to
+pose as a native, I think you ought to be able to pass muster. How long
+will that dye last? Because if it begins to fade they will soon suspect
+you."
+
+"It will last a fortnight; at least, so Sir John Kendall says. But he
+has arranged that if at the end of ten days I have not succeeded in
+finding out anything, he will send down to the prison, and under the
+pretence that he wants to ask me some questions about what ransom my
+father would be likely to pay for me, he will have me up to the auberge,
+and there I can dye myself afresh."
+
+"How are you to communicate with him in case of need?"
+
+"His servant Ahmet, who got the things for me, is to come down every
+morning, and to be near the door of the prison at the hour when the
+slaves are taken out to work. If I have aught to communicate I am to
+nod twice, and Sir John Kendall will send down that evening to fetch me,
+instead of waiting until it is time for me to renew my dye."
+
+"What is going to be said to Harcourt and the others to account for your
+absence?"
+
+"The bailiff will merely say that he has suddenly sent me away by ship,
+on a private mission. They may wonder, perhaps, but none of them will
+venture to ask him its nature."
+
+"Well, I must say that you seem to have made all your arrangements
+carefully, Tresham, and I hope it will turn out well. I was against
+the scheme at first, but I own that I do not see now why it should not
+succeed; and if there is any plot really on hand, you may be able to get
+to the bottom of it."
+
+It was an hour after darkness had completely fallen when the regular
+beat of oars was heard. The ship's boat was already in the water, and
+Gervaise, wrapped up in his mantle, followed Sir John out of his cabin
+and descended with him into the boat, which was at once rowed towards
+the approaching galley. Sir John hailed it as it came along.
+
+"Who is it calls?" a voice said.
+
+"It is I--Sir John Boswell. Pray take me on board, Sir Almeric. It is a
+somewhat special matter."
+
+The order was given, the galley slaves ceased rowing, and the boat ran
+alongside. Gervaise unclasped his mantle and gave it to Sir John, and
+then followed him on board.
+
+"I congratulate you on your return, and on your good fortune in having,
+as your letter stated, made a prosperous voyage," Sir John said, as he
+shook hands with the commander of the galley.
+
+"I would speak a word with you aside," he added in a low voice.
+
+Sir Almeric moved with him a few paces from the other knights.
+
+"I am sent here by our bailiff, Sir Almeric. I have a Turkish prisoner
+here with me who is to be landed with those you have taken. There are
+special reasons for this, which I need not now enter into. Will you let
+him sit down here by the helm? My instructions are that he is not to
+mingle with the other slaves; and as there are reasons why it is wished
+that his coming on board in this manner shall not be known to them, I
+myself am to take him up to one of the prisons, or at least to hand him
+over to the officer sent down from that prison to take up the captives
+allotted to it. The matter is of more importance than it seems to be,
+or, as you may imagine, I should not be charged to intercept you on such
+an errand."
+
+"Of course, I don't understand anything about it, Sir John, but will do
+as you ask me."
+
+He went to where Gervaise had crouched down by the bulwark, beckoned him
+to follow, and, walking aft, motioned to him to sit down there. Then
+he returned to Sir John, and joined the other knights, who were all too
+anxious to learn the latest news--who had left the island, and who had
+come to it since they sailed--to interest themselves in any way with
+the figure who had gone aft, supposing him, indeed, to be Sir John's
+servant, the lantern suspended over the poop giving too feeble a light
+for his costume to be noted.
+
+A quarter of an hour later they anchored in the harbour. Some of the
+knights at once went ashore to their respective auberges, but Sir
+Almeric and a few others remained on board until relieved of their
+charge in the morning, an account being sent on shore of the number of
+captives that had been brought in. No thought was given to Gervaise, who
+slept curled up on the poop. Sir John Boswell passed the night on board.
+In the morning an officer came off with a list of the prisons to which
+the slaves were to be sent. Sir John Kendall had seen the officer
+charged with the distribution, who had, at his request, not included the
+prison of St. Pelagius in the list.
+
+A message, however, had been sent to that prison, as well as to the
+others, for an officer to attend at the landing stage. In the morning
+Sir John went ashore in one of the boats conveying the slaves, of whom
+some forty had been captured. Gervaise followed him into the boat, and
+took his seat by the others, who were too dispirited at the fate which
+had befallen them to pay any attention to him.
+
+When he landed, Sir John asked which was the officer from St. Pelagius.
+One stepped forward.
+
+"This is the only slave for you," he said, pointing to Gervaise. "He is
+of a better class than the rest, and in the future may be he will do for
+a servitor at one of the auberges, but none have at present occasion for
+one, and so he is to go to you. He says that his father is a merchant,
+and will be ready to pay a ransom for him; but they all say that, and we
+must not heed it overmuch. As he seems a smart young fellow, it may be
+that he will be sent to one of the auberges later on; but at present,
+at any rate, you can put him with the rest, and send him out with the
+gangs."
+
+"He is a well built young fellow, Sir John," the officer remarked, "and
+should make a good rower in a galley. I will put him in the crew of the
+St. Elmo. Follow me," he said, in Turkish, to Gervaise, and then led the
+way up to the prison. On entering he crossed a courtyard to a door which
+was standing open. Within was a vaulted room, some forty feet long by
+twenty wide; along each side there were rushes strewn thickly.
+
+"The others have just started to their work," he said, "so that for
+today you can sleep."
+
+After he had left, Gervaise looked with some disgust at the rushes, that
+had evidently been for weeks unchanged.
+
+"I would rather have the bare stones, if they were clean," he muttered
+to himself. "However, it can't be helped."
+
+He presently strolled out into the courtyard, where some other slaves,
+disabled by illness or injuries, were seated in the sun. Gervaise walked
+across to them, and they looked listlessly up at him as he approached.
+
+"You are a newcomer," one said, as he came up. "I saw you brought in,
+but it didn't need that. By the time you have been here a week or two,
+your clothes will be like ours," and he pointed to his ragged garments.
+"When did you arrive? Are there no others coming up here?"
+
+"The galley came in last night," Gervaise said, "but they did not land
+us until this morning. I wish they had killed me rather than that I
+should have been brought here to work as a slave."
+
+"One always thinks so at first," the man said. "But somehow one clings
+to life. We shall die when Allah wills it, and not before."
+
+"What is the matter with your foot?" Gervaise asked.
+
+"I was with the gang quarrying stones, and a mass of rock fell upon it.
+I have been in the infirmary for weeks, and I own that the Christian
+dogs treated me well. A slave has his value, you see. I am nearly cured
+now, but I shall never walk well again. I expect they will put me in one
+of their accursed galleys."
+
+"How long have you been here?"
+
+"Seven years; it seems a lifetime. However, there is hope yet. They
+don't tell us much, but we hear things sometimes, and they say that the
+sultan is going to sweep them out of Rhodes as they were swept out of
+Acre. When will it be?"
+
+"I know not. I am from Syria, but even there they are making
+preparations. The sultan has had troubles in the East, and that has
+delayed him, but he will be here before long, and then we shall see. It
+will be our turn then."
+
+"It will, indeed!" one of the others exclaimed. "Oh, to see these dogs
+brought down, and suffering as we have suffered, toiling at oars in one
+of our galleys, or at the fortifications of one of our castles! It will
+make amends for all our suffering. Had you a hard fight with them?"
+
+"No. We were but a small craft, and it was vain to attempt resistance. I
+would gladly have fought, but the sailors said it would only throw away
+their lives. There was but little on board, and they allowed the vessel
+to go free with those of the sailors who were too old to be made useful
+for hard work."
+
+No further questions were asked. The men seemed to have no interest save
+in their own misery, and Gervaise soon left them, and, sitting down in a
+shady corner, presently dropped off to sleep.
+
+In the evening all came in from their various work. The officer man who
+had brought Gervaise in went up to the overseer of the galley slaves
+and informed him that he had told off the new slave--pointing to
+Gervaise--to his gang.
+
+"He was brought in by the galley that arrived last night," he said; "he
+was the only slave sent up here. I hear that he had been set aside to be
+appointed a servitor, but there are no vacancies, so they sent him here
+till one should occur; and I was ordered to make him useful in other
+ways in the meantime."
+
+"I am two or three hands short," the overseer said. "I wish now I had
+sent in an application yesterday, for if I had done so, no doubt they
+would have sent me some more men. However, this fellow will make up an
+even number, and he is strong and active, though at present he looks
+sulky enough under his bad fortune."
+
+A few of the slaves spoke to Gervaise as they were waiting for food to
+be brought them, but the majority dropped upon the rushes, too exhausted
+with toil and heat to feel an interest in anything. The food consisted
+of rye bread, with thin broth, brought in a great iron vessel. Each
+slave had a horn, which was used for soup or water, and which, when done
+with, he had, by the rule enforced among themselves, to take out to the
+fountain in the courtyard and wash, before it was added to the pile in
+the corner of the room.
+
+The cool of the evening aided the meal in restoring the energies of the
+slaves. Several gathered round Gervaise, and asked questions as to what
+he knew of the prospects of an early invasion of Rhodes; but as soon as
+the officer left the room, closing and locking the door after him,
+the slaves became for the most part silent. A few men sat in groups
+together, talking in undertones, but the greater number threw themselves
+down on the rushes, either to sleep or to think alone. Gervaise was
+struck by the manner in which most of them lay, without making the
+slightest movement, so long as there was light to enable him to make out
+their figures. He himself addressed two or three of them, as they lay
+with their eyes wide open, asking questions with reference to the work;
+but in no case did he receive any reply. The men seemed altogether
+unconscious of being addressed, being absorbed in the thought of their
+far distant homes and families which they might never see again.
+
+Gervaise walked a few times up and down the room, and as he approached
+a silence fell each time upon the groups of men talking together. More
+than once a figure rose soon afterwards from the ground, and, as he came
+along again, asked him a few questions about himself. As soon as it was
+dark, he lay down in a vacant space on the rushes. Shortly afterwards
+talking ceased altogether, and there was quiet in the vaulted room. With
+the first gleam of daylight they were astir, and, when the doors were
+opened, poured out into the courtyard, where all had a wash at the
+fountain. Half an hour later, a meal, precisely similar to that of the
+previous evening, was served out; then the overseers called over the
+muster roll, the gangs were made up, and each, under its officer,
+started for its work.
+
+Gervaise, with the men of his room, proceeded down to the port, and
+at once took their seats on the benches of the galley, one foot being
+chained to a ring in the deck, the other to that of a companion at the
+oar. The slaves were more cheerful now. As there was no work to do at
+present, they were allowed to talk, and an occasional laugh was heard,
+for the sun and brightness of the day cheered them. Many, after years
+of captivity, had grown altogether reckless, and it was among these
+that there was most talking; the younger men seemed, for the most part,
+silent and moody.
+
+"You will get accustomed to it," the man next to Gervaise said
+cheeringly. "When I first came here, it seemed to me that I could not
+support the life for a month--that the fate was too dreadful to be
+borne, and that death would be most welcome; but, like the rest, I
+became accustomed to it in time. After all, the work is no harder than
+one would do at home. There is no stint of food, and it is no worse than
+one would have, were one labouring in the fields. Were it not for the
+loss of those we love, it would be nothing; and in time one gets over
+even that. I have long ago told myself that if they are not dead, at
+least they are dead to me. They have their livings to get, and cannot
+be always mourning, and I have tried to forget them, as they must have
+forgotten me."
+
+"Do you work hard?" Gervaise asked.
+
+"No. We who are in the galleys are regarded by the others with envy.
+Sometimes--often, indeed--we have naught to do all day. We bask in the
+sun, we talk, we sleep, we forget that we are slaves. But, generally, we
+go out for an hour or two's exercise; that is well enough, and keeps us
+strong and in health. Only when we are away on voyages is the work hard.
+Sometimes we row from morning to night; but it is only when they are in
+chase of another craft that we have really to exert ourselves greatly.
+Then it is terrible. We may be doing our best, our very best, and yet to
+the impatient knights it seems that we might do more. Then they shout to
+the overseer, and he lays his whip on our backs without mercy. Then we
+row until sometimes we drop, senseless, off the benches. But this, you
+understand, is not very often; and though the work on a cruise is long,
+it is not beyond our strength. Besides, when we are away in the galley
+there is always hope. The galley may meet with four or five of our
+ships, and be captured, or a storm may arise and dash her upon the
+shore; and though many would lose their lives, some might escape,
+and each man, in thinking of it, believes that he will be one of the
+fortunate ones.
+
+"Take my advice: always look cheerful if you can; always put your hand
+on the oar when the order is given, and row as if you were glad to be at
+work again; and always make a show, as if you were working your
+hardest. Never complain when you are struck unjustly, and always speak
+respectfully to the overseer. In that way you will find your life much
+easier than you would think. You will be chosen for small boat service;
+and that is a great thing, as we are not chained in the small boats.
+Some men are foolish and obstinate, but, so far from doing any good,
+this only brings trouble on themselves; they come in for punishment
+daily, they are closely watched, and their lives made hells for them.
+Even as a help to escape it pays best to be cheerful and alert. We all
+think of escape, you know, though it is seldom indeed that a chance ever
+comes to any of us. It is the one thing except death to look forward to,
+and there is not a man among us who does not think of it scores of times
+a day; but, small as the chance is, it is greatest for those who behave
+best. For instance, it is they only who man small boats; and when a
+small boat rows ashore, it is always possible that the guard may be
+careless--that he will keep the boat at the landing place, instead of
+pushing off at once into deep water, as he ought to do--and that in this
+way a chance will, sooner or later, come for springing ashore and making
+a dash for liberty."
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X. A PLOT DISCOVERED.
+
+
+The conversation between Gervaise and his fellow slave was interrupted
+by the arrival at the side of the quay of a party of knights. Silence
+instantly fell upon the slaves; all straightened themselves up to the
+oars, and prepared for a start. Among the knights who took their places
+on the poop Gervaise saw with amusement his friend Ralph. He had no fear
+of a recognition, for the darkly stained skin and the black hair had so
+completely altered him that when he had looked at himself in a mirror,
+after the application of the dye, he was surprised to find that he would
+not have known it to be his own face. Ralph was in command of the party,
+which consisted of young knights who had but recently arrived at Rhodes;
+and as it was the first time he had been appointed as instructor,
+Gervaise saw that he was greatly pleased at what he rightly regarded as
+promotion.
+
+The galley at once pushed off from the wharf, and rowed out of the
+port. The work was hard; but as the slaves were not pressed to any
+extraordinary exertions, Gervaise did not find it excessive. He
+congratulated himself, however, that the stain was, as he had been
+assured, indelible, save by time, for after a few minutes' exercise he
+was bathed in perspiration. As the galley had been taken out only that
+instruction might be given to the young knights, the work was frequently
+broken.
+
+Sometimes they went ahead at full speed for a few hundred yards, as if
+to chase an adversary; then they would swerve aside, the slaves on one
+side rowing, while those on the other backed, so as to make a rapid
+turn. Then she lay for a minute or two immovable, and then backed water,
+or turned to avoid the attack of an imaginary foe. Then for an hour she
+lay quiet, while the knights, divesting themselves of their mantles and
+armour, worked one of the guns on the poop, aiming at a floating
+barrel moored for the purpose a mile out at sea. At eleven o'clock they
+returned to the port. Bread and water were served out to the slaves, and
+they were then permitted to lie down and sleep, the galley being moored
+under the shadow of the wall.
+
+At four o'clock another party of knights came down, and the work was
+similar to that which had been performed in the morning. At seven
+o'clock the slaves were taken back to their barracks.
+
+"Well, what do you think of your work?" one of the slaves asked
+Gervaise, as they ate their evening meal.
+
+"It would not be so bad if it was all like that."
+
+"No. But I can tell you that when you have to row from sunrise to
+sunset, with perhaps but one or two pauses for a few minutes, it is
+a different thing altogether, especially if the galley is carrying
+despatches, and speed is necessary. Then you get so worn out and
+exhausted, that you can scarce move an oar through the water, until you
+are wakened up by a smart as if a red hot iron had been laid across your
+shoulders. It is terrible work then. The whip cracks every minute across
+some one's back; you are blinded by exhaustion and rage, and you feel
+that you would give the world if you could but burst your chain, rush on
+your taskmasters, and strike, if only one blow, before you are killed."
+
+"It must be terrible," Gervaise said. "And do you never get loose, and
+fall upon them?"
+
+The man shook his head.
+
+"The chains are too strong, and the watch too vigilant," he said. "Since
+I came here I have heard tales of crews having freed themselves in the
+night, and fallen upon the Christians, but for my part I do not believe
+in them. I have thought, as I suppose every one of us has thought, how
+such a thing could be done; but as far as I know no one has hit on a
+plan yet. Now and then men have managed to become possessed of a file,
+and have, by long and patient work, sawn through a chain, and have,
+when a galley has been lying near our own shore, sprung overboard
+and escaped; but for every attempt that succeeds there must be twenty
+failures, for the chains are frequently examined, and woe be to the man
+who is found to have been tampering with his. But as to a whole gang
+getting free at once, it is altogether impossible, unless the key of
+the pad locks could be stolen from an overseer, or the man bribed into
+aiding us."
+
+"And that, I suppose, is impossible?" Gervaise said.
+
+"Certainly, impossible for us who have no money to bribe them with, but
+easy enough if any one outside, with ample means, were to set about it.
+These overseers are, many of them, sons of Turkish mothers, and have
+no sympathy, save that caused by interest, with one parent more than
+another. Of course, they are brought up Christians, and taught to hold
+Moslems in abhorrence, but I think many of them, if they had their free
+choice, would cross to the mainland. Here they have no chance of ever
+being aught but what they are--overseers of slaves, or small prison
+officials. They are despised by these haughty knights, and hated by us,
+while were they to reach the mainland and adopt their mothers' religion,
+everything would be open to them. All followers of the Prophet have
+an equal chance, and one may be a soldier today, a bey tomorrow, and
+a pasha a year hence, if he be brave, or astute, or capable in any way
+beyond his fellows. Men like these warders would be sure to make their
+way.
+
+"They cannot have gathered much during their service, therefore the
+offer of a large sum of money would find plenty among them eager to earn
+it. But, you see, they are but the inferiors. On our voyages on board
+the galley, the knights inspect our fetters twice a day, and the keys
+are kept in the commander's cabin. For an hour or two, when we are not
+on a long passage, the padlocks are unfastened, in order that we may
+jump over and bathe, and exercise our limbs; but at this time the
+knights are always on guard, and as we are without arms we are
+altogether powerless. It is the same thing here. The senior warders, who
+all belong to the Order, although of an inferior grade, come round, as
+you have seen, to examine our fetters, and themselves lock and bar the
+doors. If one or two of these could be corrupted, escape would be easy
+enough."
+
+"But is it impossible to do this?" Gervaise asked eagerly. "My father
+has money, and would I know be ready, if I could communicate with him,
+to pay a handsome sum, if sure that it would result in my obtaining my
+freedom."
+
+The man nodded significantly.
+
+"There may be other means of doing it," he said. "Perhaps it will not be
+long before you hear of it. You seem a stout fellow, and full of spirit,
+but, as yet, anything that may be going on is known but to a few, and
+will go no further until the time comes that all may be told. I think
+not so badly of men of our faith as to believe that any one would betray
+the secret for the sake of obtaining his own freedom and a big reward;
+but secrets, when known by many, are apt to leak out. A muttered word or
+two in sleep, or the ravings of one down with fever, might afford ground
+for suspicion, and torture would soon do the rest. I myself know nothing
+of the secret, but I do know that there is something going on which, if
+successful, will give us our freedom. I am content to know no more until
+the time comes; but there are few, save those engaged in the matter,
+that know as much as this, and you can see that it is better it should
+be so. Look at that man opposite; he has been here fifteen years; he
+seldom speaks; he does his work, but it is as a brute beast--despair has
+well nigh turned him into one. Think you that if such a man as that were
+to know that there is hope, he would not be so changed that even the
+dullest would observe it? I see you are a brisk young fellow, and I say
+to you, keep up your courage. The time is nearer than you think when you
+will be free from these accursed shackles."
+
+Each morning, as he went out to work with his gang, Gervaise saw the
+servant from the auberge standing near; but he made no sign. He was
+satisfied that his suspicions had been justified, and that he was not
+leading this life in vain, but he thought it better to wait until the
+week passed, and he was taken away to have his colour renewed, than to
+make a sign that might possibly rouse the suspicions of his comrades. On
+the eighth morning, when the door of the room was unlocked, the overseer
+said--"Number 36, you will remain here. You are wanted for other work."
+
+After the gang had left the prison, the overseer returned.
+
+"I am to take you up to the English auberge. The knight who handed
+you over to me when you landed, told me that you might be wanted as a
+servitor; and as it is he who has sent down, it may be that a vacancy
+has occurred. If so, you are in luck, for the servitors have a vastly
+better time of it than the galley slaves, and the English auberge has
+the best reputation in that respect. Come along with me."
+
+The English auberge was one of the most handsome of the buildings
+standing in the great street of the Knights. Its architecture was Gothic
+in its character, and, although the langue was one of the smallest of
+those represented at Rhodes, it vied with any of them in the splendour
+of its appointments. Sir John Boswell was standing in the interior
+courtyard.
+
+"Wait here for a few minutes," he said to the overseer. "The bailiff
+will himself question the slave as to his accomplishments; but I fancy
+he will not be considered of sufficient age for the post that is vacant.
+However, if this should not be so, I shall no doubt find a post to fit
+him ere long, for he seems a smart young fellow, and, what is better, a
+willing one, and bears himself well under his misfortunes."
+
+Then he motioned to Gervaise to follow him to the bailiff's apartments.
+
+"Well, Sir Gervaise," Sir John Kendall exclaimed, as the door closed
+behind him, "have you found aught to justify this cruel penance you have
+undertaken?"
+
+"As to the penance, Sir John, it has been nothing unsupportable. The
+exercise is hard enough, but none too hard for one in good health and
+strength, and, save for the filth of the chamber in which we are shut
+up at night, and the foul state of the rushes on which we lie, I
+should have naught to complain of. No, I have as yet heard nothing of a
+surety--and yet enough to show me that my suspicions were justified, and
+that there is a plot of some sort on foot," and he related to the two
+knights the conversation he had had with the galley slave.
+
+"By St. George!" the bailiff said, "you have indeed been justified in
+your surmises, and I am glad that I attached sufficient importance to
+your suspicions to let you undertake this strange enterprise. What think
+you, Sir John Boswell?"
+
+"I think with you, that Sir Gervaise has fully justified his insistence
+in this matter, which I own I considered to be hare brained folly. What
+is to be done next, Sir Gervaise?"
+
+"That is what I have been turning over in my mind. You see, I may have
+little warning of what is going to take place. I may not hear of it
+until we are locked up for the night and the affair is on the point of
+taking place, and it will, of course, be most needful that I shall be
+able to communicate with you speedily."
+
+"That, of course, is of vital importance," the bailiff said. "But how is
+it to be managed?"
+
+"That is what I cannot exactly see, Sir John. An armed guard remains in
+our room all night. But, in the first place, he might be himself in the
+plot, and if not, the slaves would almost certainly overpower him and
+kill him, as a preliminary to the work of knocking off their chains."
+
+"Is there a window to the room? At least, of course there is a window,
+but is it within your reach?"
+
+"There are six small loopholes--one on each side of the door, and two in
+each of the side walls; they are but four inches across and three feet
+in length, and there are two crossbars to each; they are four feet from
+the floor."
+
+"At any rate, they are large enough for your arm to pass through, Sir
+Gervaise, and you might drop a strip of cloth out."
+
+"Certainly I could, Sir John. I could easily hide a piece of white
+cotton a yard or so long in my clothes, scanty as these are, and could
+certainly manage, unobserved, to drop it outside the window."
+
+"Then the rest is for us to contrive, Boswell. We must have some one
+posted in the yard of the prison, with instructions to go every ten
+minutes throughout the night to see if a strip of white cotton has been
+dropped out. When he finds it he must go at once to William Neave, the
+governor. He is a sturdy Englishman, and there is no fear of his having
+been bribed to turn traitor; but it were well to take no one into
+our confidence. I think we cannot do better than employ Ahmet on this
+business, as he already knows that Sir Gervaise is masquerading there.
+We will have William Neave up here presently. Tell him that for certain
+reasons we wish Ahmet to pass the night for the present in the prison,
+and arrange with him on what excuse we can best bestow him there without
+exciting suspicion. At any rate, Sir Gervaise, that is our affair."
+
+He went to a closet and took out a white mantle, tore a strip off the
+bottom, and gave it to Gervaise.
+
+"It would be best not to keep you here any longer," he said, "so renew
+your stain while I speak. As soon as you learn the details of the plot,
+you will drop this out from the loophole on the right hand side of the
+door; that is to say, the one on your right, standing inside. If the
+affair is not to come off at once, it were best for you to proceed as
+before. Ahmet will be outside when you go out with your gang, and on
+your nodding to him we will make some excuse to take you away on your
+return. I say this because if you see that the affair, whatever it is,
+is not imminent, you might think it better to remain with them longer,
+so as to learn their plans more fully, instead of having the thing put a
+stop to at once."
+
+"I understand, Sir John; but, as I have said, I do not think we should
+all be told until the blow is ready to be struck, as they would be
+afraid that some one might inform against them, if time and opportunity
+were granted them."
+
+"I think so too, Sir Gervaise. This afternoon we will call upon the
+grand master, for we have no means of knowing how serious or how
+extended this plot may be; it may include only the crew of a single
+galley, and, on the other hand, the whole of the slaves may be
+implicated in it. It is evident, therefore, that the matter is too
+serious to be kept any longer from his knowledge."
+
+Three more days passed. On the third evening, after the allowance of
+broth and bread had been consumed, and the door was closed and locked
+upon them for the night, three or four of the galley slaves, after
+talking eagerly together, beckoned to the others to gather round them
+at the end of the room farthest from the door. Two of them took up arms
+full of the bedding, and stuffed it into the side windows. Gervaise
+saw, in the dim light, a look of intense excitement on the faces of the
+slaves. It had been vaguely known among them that a plot was in hand,
+although but few had been admitted into the confidence of the leaders.
+Hitherto all had feared that it concerned only a small number, but
+the preparations now made to insure that they should not be overheard,
+showed that, whatever the plan might be, all were to share in it.
+
+"Thanks be to Allah, the All Powerful," one of the men began, "my lips
+are unsealed, and I can tell you the great news that our hour for escape
+from bondage is at hand! We need not fear the warder there," he went on,
+as several eyes were turned apprehensively towards the guard, who, with
+his spear beside him, was leaning carelessly against the wall at the
+farther end, looking through the window into the courtyard; "he is
+with us. You must know that for the last two months an agent from
+Constantinople has been on the Island, and has been engaged in arranging
+this affair. Two of our taskmasters belonging to the Order have been
+bribed by large sums of money, and several of the overseers, who are
+half of our blood, have eagerly embraced the prospect of returning
+to their mothers' country, and of avowing openly their belief in our
+religion. These, again, have bought over many of the guards, ours
+included, and tonight all will be ready for action. Those not of our
+party will be killed without ceremony. Duplicate keys have been made of
+all the padlocks of the fetters; the guards who are with us have each
+one of them, the others will have been slipped into the hands of one man
+in each gang as they returned tonight from work. The overseers who are
+in the plot will, at midnight, go quietly round and unlock the doors,
+and remove the bars from the outside. We have, therefore, only to
+overcome the eight or ten men who patrol the prison; and as we shall
+have the arms of the guards, some thirty in number, we shall make quick
+work of them.
+
+"The two guards at the outside gates must, of course, be killed.
+Duplicates of the keys have been made, and will be hidden in a spot
+known to some of our party, close to the gate. Thus we have but to issue
+out and rush down, in a body, to the port. I and another are to take the
+arms of our guard, and two others are told off in each room to do the
+same. That will give us sixty armed men. We shall make very short work
+of the guards at the gate leading into the port. Then twenty of us are
+to run along the mole to Fort St. Nicholas, twenty to the Tower of St.
+Michael, and twenty to that of St. John. There will be, at the most, but
+three or four men keeping watch at each fort, and thus we shall have in
+our possession the three forts commanding the entrance to the harbour.
+There are, as you know, six galleys manned by crews from our prison
+there. The crew of each galley will embark upon it, and man the oars;
+the rest will divide themselves among the galleys. Before starting, we
+shall seize and set fire to all other galleys and ships in the port. The
+gangs in four of the rooms have been told off specially for this duty.
+Before firing them, they are to take out such provisions as they may
+find, and transport them to the galleys. We who take the forts are
+provided with hammers and long nails, to drive down the vent holes of
+the cannon; when we have done this, we are to wait until one of the
+galleys fetches us off. Ten minutes should be ample time for all there
+is to be done, and even if the alarm is given at once, we shall be
+away long before the knights can be aroused from sleep, buckle on their
+armour, and get down to the port."
+
+Exclamations of delight and approbation burst from his hearers.
+
+"Then it is only we of this prison who are in the plot?" one said.
+
+"Yes. In the first place, it would have been too dangerous to attempt to
+free all. In the second, the galleys would not carry them; we shall be
+closely packed as it is, for there are over a thousand here. I hear that
+there was a talk of freeing all, and that we, instead of embarking at
+first, should make for the other prisons, burst open the doors, and
+rescue the others; but by the time we could do so the knights would
+be all in arms, and our enterprise would fail altogether, for as but a
+small proportion of us can obtain weapons, we could not hope to overcome
+them. Were it not for the strong wall that separates their quarter from
+the town, we might make straight for their houses and slay them before
+the alarm could be given. As it is, that would be impossible, and
+therefore the plan will be carried out as I have told you. The loss of
+all their galleys and of over one thousand slaves will be a heavy blow
+for them. Great pains have been taken to prevent confusion when we reach
+the port. The men in each room have been instructed as to the galleys on
+which they are to embark. As for you, you know precisely what is to be
+done; you will simply take your places, and then wait until all are on
+board. No galley is to push out from the wharf until the last man of
+those employed in burning the ships has returned, with the provisions
+found in them. Then the order will be given by the man who has arranged
+all this, and the six galleys will put out together.
+
+"One is to row to each of the forts to carry off the party that will
+have been engaged in silencing its cannon. Our galley is to row to St.
+Nicholas, and take off the twenty men I shall lead there. There is no
+possibility of failure. Everything has, you see, been arranged. One of
+the overseers who is in the plot walked by my side as we returned from
+the port, and gave me the instructions, and all the others will have
+been told in the same way, or else by the guards in charge of them."
+The gang now broke up into little groups, talking excitedly over the
+unlooked for news, and exulting over the speedy advent of liberty.
+Gervaise strolled carelessly to the window, and dropped out the white
+strip of stuff. It was now quite dark, and there was no fear of any one
+observing the movement. Then he joined the others. After an hour and
+a half had passed he heard footsteps approaching the door. There was a
+pause; then the outside bars were taken down, and a key turned in the
+lock. A deep silence fell on the slaves. Then a voice called, "Number
+36!"
+
+"What is it?" replied Gervaise, without raising himself from his seat on
+the bedding. "I have done my share of work today, and earned my night's
+sleep."
+
+"It is a knight from the English auberge; he has come to fetch you. It
+seems that you are to go there as a servitor."
+
+"What a cursed fortune," Gervaise muttered, in Turkish, "just when a
+road to freedom is open! I have a good mind to say I am ill, and cannot
+go till the morning."
+
+"No, no!" one of the others exclaimed. "They would only drag you out,
+and when they saw that there was naught the matter with you, would
+suspect that there must be some reason why you did not want to go,
+when, as every one knows, the position of the servitors is in every way
+preferable to ours."
+
+"Now then, why are you delaying?" a voice said sharply, and a warder
+entered with a lighted torch. "Get up, you lazy hound! It will be worse
+for you if I have to speak again."
+
+"I am coming," Gervaise grumbled. "I was just asleep."
+
+He rose, as if reluctantly, and went forward. The warder gave him an
+angry push, followed him out, and locked and barred the door after him.
+
+"I suppose this is the right man?" Sir John Boswell said.
+
+"This is Number 36, Sir Knight, the same who was taken over to your
+auberge the other day," and he held the light close to Gervaise's face.
+
+"Yes, that is the man. Follow me," he added, in Turkish. The gate of
+the courtyard was unbarred, and they passed out unquestioned. Sir John
+strolled on ahead. Gervaise followed him a pace or two behind. Not until
+they had passed through the gate of the castle did Sir John turn.
+
+"I have not spoken to you," he said, "as we may have been watched. Keep
+your news until we reach the auberge."
+
+Upon entering it they went up at once to Sir John Kendall's apartments.
+
+"Well, Sir Gervaise, the strip of cotton was brought to us safely. What
+is your news?"
+
+"It is very serious, Sir John, and I have been in terrible anxiety since
+I dropped it out, lest it should not come to hand in time. As it is,
+you have till midnight to make your preparations." He then repeated the
+statement made by the galley slave.
+
+"By my faith," Sir John Kendall exclaimed, "this is a pretty plot
+indeed! And had it succeeded, as it certainly would have done but for
+your vigilance, it would have been a heavy blow to us. The burning of
+all our galleys would have crippled us sorely, and the loss of over
+a thousand slaves would have been a serious one indeed, when we so
+urgently require them for completing our defences. Get rid of those
+clothes at once, Sir Gervaise, and don your own. We must go straight
+to the grand master. You will find your clothes and armour in the next
+room. I had them taken there as soon as your token was brought me."
+
+In a few minutes Gervaise returned in his usual attire, and with his
+armour buckled on. The two knights were already in their coats of
+mail, and leaving the auberge they went to the grand master's palace.
+A servitor had already been sent to D'Aubusson to inform him that they
+were coming, and he advanced to meet them as they entered.
+
+"Welcome, Sir Gervaise!" he said. "Whether your news be good or bad,
+whether you have found that it is a general rising of the slaves that
+is intended, or a plot by which a handful of slaves may seize a boat
+and escape, the gratitude of the Order is no less due to you for the
+hardships and humiliations you have undergone on its behalf."
+
+"It concerns but one prison: that of St. Pelagius."
+
+"The largest of them," the grand master put in.
+
+"The whole of the slaves there are to be liberated at twelve o'clock
+tonight, are to seize the three water towers and to spike the guns, to
+burn all the shipping in the harbour, to make off with six galleys, and
+destroy the rest."
+
+"By St. John!" D'Aubusson exclaimed, "this is indeed a serious matter.
+But tell me all about it. There must be treachery indeed at work for
+such a scheme to be carried out."
+
+Gervaise now told him all the details he had learned.
+
+"So two of the Order, though but of the inferior grade, are in the
+plot?" the grand master said; "and several of the overseers? One of the
+villains is, of course, the man you saw this Greek talking with. We
+must get hold of the other if we can. As to the slaves, now that we have
+warning, there is an end of the matter, though without such warning they
+would surely have succeeded, for the plans are well laid, and they would
+have been at sea before we could have gathered in any force at the port.
+If it were not that it would cost the lives of many of the warders and
+of the prison guards, I should say we ought to take post outside the
+gate, for we should then catch the traitors who are to accompany them.
+As it is, we must be beforehand with them. A hundred men will be more
+than ample for our purpose. Do you take fifty of your knights, Sir John
+Kendall, and I will draw fifty of those of Auvergne. At eleven o'clock
+we will meet at the gate leading down into the town, and will march to
+the private entrance of the governor's house. I will go in first with a
+few of you, tell him what we have discovered, and post guards to prevent
+any one from leaving his house. Then, having admitted the others, we
+will go quietly out and place a party at each door of the overseers'
+house, with orders to seize any who may come out. The rest, in small
+parties, will then go round the prison, and, entering each room, show
+the slaves that their plot has been discovered. This we must do to save
+the lives of the guards who may be faithful to their trust. As to the
+higher officials engaged in the affair, we must obtain their names from
+the overseers or slaves. It is not likely that the two traitors will
+quit their houses, as they will leave the matter in the hands of the
+overseers, who, as you say, intend to first open the doors, and then to
+accompany the slaves in their escape. Do not warn the knights until it
+is nearly time to start, Sir John. The less stir made the better, for no
+one can say whether they may not have suborned some of the servitors to
+send instant news of any unusual movements in any of the auberges."
+
+At half past ten Sir John Kendall went round among the knights and bade
+fifty of them arm themselves quietly, and proceed, one by one, down to
+the gate, and there await orders. Up to this time Gervaise had remained
+in the bailiff's room, so as to avoid the questioning that would take
+place, and he went down to the gate with the bailiff and Sir John
+Boswell.
+
+The knights assembled rapidly. None were aware of the reason for which
+they had been called out at such an hour, and there was a buzz of talk
+and conjecture until Sir John Kendall arrived. He was followed by four
+of the servants, who at once lighted the torches they carried, when
+he proceeded to go through the roll, and found that the muster was
+complete. Many of the knights had gazed in some surprise at Gervaise,
+whose dark complexion altogether concealed his identity, and it was
+supposed that he must be some newly arrived knight, though none had
+heard that any ship had entered the harbour that day.
+
+Two or three minutes later fifty knights of the langue of Auvergne
+came down, headed by the grand master himself, whose appearance greatly
+heightened the surprise of the English knights. The torches were now
+extinguished, the gate thrown open, and the party descended into the
+town. Gervaise had purposely fallen in by the side of Harcourt.
+
+"You are but newly arrived, Sir Knight?" the latter said, as they moved
+off.
+
+"Not so very newly, Ralph," Gervaise replied.
+
+"What! is it you, Gervaise?" Harcourt exclaimed, with a start of
+surprise. "Why, I did not know you, though I looked hard at you in the
+torch light. What have you done with yourself? Where have you been? Do
+you know what all this is about?"
+
+"I cannot tell you now, Ralph. You must be content to know that I have
+been in prison, and working in the galleys."
+
+"The saints defend us! Why, what on earth had you done to entail such
+punishment as that? It is an outrage. The grand master and the council
+have the right to expel a knight from the Order after due trial and
+investigation, but not to condemn him to such penalties as the galleys.
+It is an outrage upon the whole Order, and I would say so to the grand
+master himself."
+
+"There was no outrage in it, Ralph. Wait until you hear the whole story.
+That I have not disgraced you, you may judge from the fact that I am in
+the armour and mantle of the Order, and that, as you saw, I came down
+with Sir John Kendall himself."
+
+There were no people about in the streets, though the lights still
+burned on a few of the roofs. For a short distance the knights marched
+down towards the port, and then turned down a street to the right. After
+a few minutes' marching they halted under a high wall which all knew to
+be that of the prison of St. Pelagius. Six knights were posted at the
+main entrance, with orders that none should be allowed to leave the
+prison, and that any persons who came up to the gate were to be at once
+seized and made prisoners.
+
+The rest marched on to a small door leading into the governor's house.
+Here they were halted, and told to wait till called in; six knights of
+England, and as many of Auvergne, being told off to accompany the grand
+master and Sir John Kendall. A note had been sent to the governor,
+informing him that the grand master intended to visit the prison at
+eleven o'clock, but that the matter was to be kept an absolute secret;
+and that the governor himself was to be down at the gate to admit him.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XI IN COMMAND OF A GALLEY
+
+
+William Neave, the governor of the prison, looked astonished indeed
+when, upon his opening the door, the grand master and the bailiff of
+the English langue, with the twelve knights behind them, entered. He had
+been puzzled when, four days before, he had received an order from
+the grand master that Ahmet, a servitor in the auberge of the English
+langue, should be permitted to pass the night in his house, with
+authority to move freely and without question, at any hour, in the
+courtyard of the gaol, and to depart at any hour, secretly and without
+observation, by the private gate. Still more had he been surprised when
+he received the message that the grand master would pay him a secret
+visit at eleven o'clock at night.
+
+"Let no word be spoken until we are in your apartments," D'Aubusson said
+in a low voice, as he entered. "But first lead four of these knights and
+post them so that none can enter the gaol from the house. If there are
+more than four doors or windows on that side, you must post a larger
+number. It is imperative that there shall be no communication whatever
+between your servants and the gaol."
+
+As soon as this was done, the rest of the party were taken to the
+governor's rooms.
+
+"I can now explain to you all," the grand master said, "the reason of
+our presence here. I have learned that at twelve tonight there will be
+a general rising of the slaves in this prison, and that, aided by
+treachery, they will free themselves from their fetters, overpower and
+slay such of the guards in their rooms as have not been bribed, throw
+open the gates, make their way down to the port, burn all the shipping
+there, and make off in the six galleys manned by them, having first
+overpowered the sentries in the three forts commanding the entrance, and
+spiked the guns."
+
+Exclamations of astonishment burst from the knights, who now, for the
+first time, learnt the reason of their being called out. The governor
+listened with an expression of stupefaction.
+
+"With all deference to your Highness," he said hesitatingly, "it seems
+to me that some one must have been deceiving you with this tale. It is
+altogether incredible that such a plot should have been hatched without
+a whisper of the matter coming to my ears. It could only be possible
+were there, not one but many, traitors among the officials; if this is
+so, then indeed am I a dull ass, and unfit for my duty here, of which
+I shall pray you to relieve me, and to order such punishment as the
+council may deem just to be allotted to me for having so signally been
+hoodwinked."
+
+"My news is sure," the grand master said; "but I deem not that you are
+in any way to blame in the matter. The plot has been matured, not as
+a consequence of any laxity of discipline in the prison, but from
+deliberate treachery, against which no mortal being can guard. The
+traitors are two of the officials who, being members of the Order, none
+would suspect of connivance in such a deed. With them are several--I
+know not how many--under officials, warders, and guards; all these have
+been bribed by an emissary from Constantinople, now in the town, and
+who is doubtless furnished with large means. It is well, indeed, for the
+Order, that this terrible act of treachery has been discovered in time
+to prevent the plot from coming to a head, for the loss of all our
+galleys, to say nothing of the disgrace of having been thus bearded by
+slaves, would be a very heavy blow to it.
+
+"Now that the house is safely guarded, William Neave, you can admit
+the rest of the knights, who are waiting outside. Then you will, in the
+first place, conduct a party, and post them so that they may arrest,
+as they come out to perform their share of the work, all officials,
+warders, and guards, of whatever rank. When you have posted knights to
+carry out this--and I need not say that the operation must be performed
+as silently as possible, for it is above all things necessary that
+the men concerned shall have no suspicion that their plot has been
+discovered--you will conduct other parties to the various rooms occupied
+by the slaves. The guards on duty inside will be made prisoners. The
+doors will then be locked and barred as before. The appearance of the
+knights and the arrest of the guards will be sufficient to show the
+slaves that their plot has been discovered, and there will be no fear of
+their making any attempt to carry it into execution. I will myself post
+the main body of the knights in the courtyard. The arrest of the guards
+is to be carried out at once, as all those not concerned in the plot
+would be killed when the hour comes for the rising. Therefore this part
+of the business must be carried out immediately. I should not, however,
+lead the guards away to a cell, for the less tramping of feet the
+better. Therefore I shall place two knights in each room, and beg them
+to remain inside in charge until the traitors outside are secured."
+
+The knights outside were now marched up. The grand master ordered half
+those of Auvergne to go round to the main gate, which would be opened
+for them by the governor; they were to enter quietly, and remain in a
+body close to it until they received further orders. Sir John Kendall
+told off the rest of the knights to the various duties of watching the
+houses occupied by the officials and warders, and of entering the prison
+rooms and remaining in them on guard. The governor, with his private
+servants, bearing a supply of torches, was to lead them to the various
+cells, and unlock the doors. The knights were enjoined to move as
+noiselessly as possible, and to avoid all clashing of arms against
+armour.
+
+The governor produced a number of cloths intended to be served out to
+the slaves. Strips of these were cut off and wrapped round the feet of
+the English knights, so as to deaden the sound of their boots on the
+stone pavement. Then, accompanied by the grand master and Sir John
+Kendall, he went the round of the cells.
+
+In some of these the slaves were found standing up in an attitude of
+eager expectation, which, as the door opened, and the light of the
+torches showed a party of knights, changed into one of terror and
+consternation. Scarce a word was spoken. The guard was ordered to
+lay down his arms, and to take one of the torches. Two knights placed
+themselves, one on each side of him, with drawn swords. The door was
+again locked and barred, and the party proceeded to the next cell. In
+less than a quarter of an hour this part of the work was finished,
+and D'Aubusson, Sir John Kendall, and the governor, then took up their
+station with a party of knights who, concealed behind a buttress, were
+watching the doors of the officials' houses.
+
+Ten minutes later one of these doors was heard to open, and five dark
+figures came noiselessly out. They were allowed to go a short distance,
+in order to see if any others followed; but as no others came out, the
+governor stepped forward.
+
+"Whither are you going, at this time of night?" he asked. There was a
+momentary pause, a few hasty words were exchanged, then the five men
+rushed towards him with bared swords or knives; but before they reached
+him the knights poured out from their hiding place.
+
+"We are betrayed," one of the men shouted in Turkish. "Fight to the
+last. Better be killed than tortured and executed." With a yell of fury
+and despair, they rushed upon the knights. So desperate was their attack
+that the latter were forced to use their swords, which indeed, burning
+with rage at the treachery of these men, they were not backward in
+doing, and in less than a minute the five traitors lay, with cloven
+heads, dead on the pavement.
+
+"It is as well so," D'Aubusson said, looking sternly down upon them;
+"perhaps better so, since it has saved us the scandal of their trial.
+We might have learned more from them, but we have learnt enough, since,
+doubtless, they have no accomplices among the warders, or they would
+have been with them. Now we will deal with the arch traitors. There is
+no need for further concealment; the noise of this fray will assuredly
+have been heard by them, for they will be listening for the sounds that
+would tell them the slaves had been liberated."
+
+Followed by the knights, he went to the door of the house occupied
+by the overseers, all of whom were members of the lower branch of the
+Order. It was indeed evident that an alarm had been given there, for
+lights appeared at the windows. As they opened the door and entered the
+hall, several half-dressed men rushed down the stairs with drawn swords,
+two of them carrying torches in their left hands. As the light fell
+upon the figures of the grand master and the knights, they paused in
+astonishment.
+
+"There is treachery at work in the prison," D'Aubusson said quietly. "I
+pray you to collect your comrades and to assemble here at once."
+
+In a minute or two some twenty officials were gathered in the hall.
+
+"Are all here?" D'Aubusson asked the governor.
+
+The latter counted the men.
+
+"There are two short," he said--"Pietro Romano and Karl Schumann. They
+occupy the same room. Go and fetch them down, four of you."
+
+The four men nearest to the stairs at once went up with two torches.
+They returned in a minute.
+
+"The door is fastened on the inside, and we can obtain no response."
+
+"Fetch an axe and break it in," the grand master ordered. "Sir John
+Boswell, do you, with some other knights, take post without; they may
+attempt to escape by the window, though, as we hold the gates, it would
+avail them little. Sir Gervaise Tresham, do you follow us."
+
+Gervaise, who had been placed with the party watching the house,
+followed the grand master and governor upstairs. A few blows with an axe
+splintered the door; its fastenings gave way, and they entered the room.
+The window was open, and two figures lay prostrate on the ground near
+it.
+
+"I half expected this," the grand master said. "They were listening
+there. The conflict in the yard told them that the plot had been
+discovered, and as they saw us approaching the house, they dared not
+meet the punishment of their crimes, and have fallen by their own
+daggers. Put a torch close to their faces. Sir Gervaise, do you
+recognise in either of these men the official you saw in conversation
+with the Greek?"
+
+Gervaise stepped forward and examined the men's faces.
+
+"This is the man," he said, pointing to one of them. "I marked him so
+closely that I cannot be mistaken."
+
+"That is Pietro Romano," the governor said; "he was an able officer,
+but discontented with his position and given to quarrelling with his
+comrades."
+
+"Have a hole dug and bury them in the prison," D'Aubusson said; "they
+have been false to their vows, and false to their religion. They have
+chosen their own mode of death; let them be buried like dogs, as they
+are. But let a careful search be made of their garments and of this
+room. It may be that they have some documents concealed which may be of
+use to us."
+
+The grand master then descended to the hall.
+
+"Members of the Order," he said to the overseers, "your guilty
+companions have met death by their own hands, as the others concerned
+in this plot have met theirs by the swords of the knights. It were well
+that this matter were not spoken of outside the prison. The attempt has
+been detected, and has failed; but were it talked of, it might incite
+others to repeat the attempt, and possibly with better success. Now,"
+he went on, turning to the governor, "our work is done here. Call up
+the other warders. Let them take the men now prisoners in the rooms, and
+place them in a dungeon. Let fresh men be placed on guard, and let all
+the knights gather in the courtyard."
+
+When this was done, and all the knights again assembled, D'Aubusson
+said, "Our work is nearly done, brothers. The traitors are all dead, and
+the revolt is at an end. It remains but to capture the author of this
+attempt; but I believe he is already in our hands. I have given an
+accurate description of him to Da Veschi, who has taken four knights
+with him, and they probably will catch him down at the port; if not, he
+will be arrested the first thing in the morning. As to the slaves, they
+will be so utterly cowed by the discovery, that there will be no fear of
+their repeating the attempt. I have ordered the officials of the prison
+to say naught in the town of what has taken place. There can, however,
+be no concealment among ourselves. I shall, of course, lay the whole
+matter before the council. The fact that a strong body of knights has,
+at so late an hour, started on some unknown mission is, of course,
+already known in the auberges of Auvergne and England. No concealment
+of the facts is therefore possible. It is the most serious attempt at a
+revolt of the slaves that has ever taken place, and will be a warning
+to us that more vigilance must be exercised. As it is, we have only been
+saved from the loss of our galleys and slaves by the acuteness of one of
+the youngest of our knights, who, in the first place, noted a suspicious
+occurrence which would have been passed by without attracting a moment's
+thought by ninety-nine out of a hundred men. He laid the matter before
+his bailiff, Sir John Kendall, who accepted his offer to disguise
+himself as a slave, to enter the prison under circumstances that would
+excite no suspicions among the others, and to live and work among them
+in order to ascertain whether there was any plot on hand. This task--a
+painful one, as you may imagine--he carried out, and for two weeks he
+rowed as a galley slave. His lot was as hard as that of the others, for,
+as he had reason to believe that some of the officials were concerned in
+the plot, it was necessary that all should be kept in ignorance that
+he was other than he seemed to be. Thanks to his perfect knowledge of
+Turkish, he was able to carry his mission through with complete success,
+and to obtain full particulars of the plot we have tonight crushed.
+The knight who has performed this inestimable service is Sir Gervaise
+Tresham, of the English langue. The action he has performed will be
+noted in the annals of the Order as an example of intelligence and of
+the extreme of self sacrifice, as well as of courage; for his life would
+have been assuredly forfeited had the slaves entertained the slightest
+suspicion of his real character."
+
+There was a murmur of acclamation among the knights. Not one of them but
+would have freely risked his life in the service of the Order, but there
+were few who would not have shrunk from the idea of living as a slave
+among the slaves, sharing their tasks, and subject to the orders of men
+of inferior rank and often brutal manners.
+
+The knights now returned to their auberges. It was past midnight, but
+at the English house the lamps and flambeaux were lighted in the great
+hall. The servitors were called up, wine placed on the table, and the
+knights discussed the incidents of the evening.
+
+When the meal had concluded, Sir John Kendall said, "Brother knights,
+when the grand master bestowed the honour of secular knighthood upon
+this young comrade of ours, he predicted that he would rise to high
+distinction in the Order. I think you will all agree with me that the
+prediction is already in a fair way of being fulfilled, and that the
+services he has rendered to the Order justify us, his comrades of the
+English langue, in feeling proud of him. I drink, brothers, to his
+health."
+
+A loud shout rose from the assembled knights, for upon the return of the
+party who had been away, the rest of those at the auberge had hastily
+robed themselves and descended to the hall to gather the news. When the
+shout had died away, and the wine cups were emptied, Gervaise, who was
+sitting on Sir John Kendall's right hand, would gladly have retained his
+seat, but the bailiff told him that he must say a few words, and after
+standing in embarrassed silence for a minute he said, "Sir John Kendall,
+and brother knights, I can only say that I am very sensible of the
+kindness with which you have been pleased to regard what seems to me
+after all to have been a very ordinary affair. I saw a man, whom I knew
+to be a stranger in the Island, speaking surreptitiously to a slave,
+and afterwards saw him conversing with a prison officer. That naturally
+struck me as curious, and I followed the officer, to see to which prison
+he belonged. Any one would have thought, as I did, that such a thing was
+strange, if not suspicious, and the only way to find out whether there
+was anything in it was to mix with the slaves; as I spoke Turkish
+well enough to do so I asked Sir John Kendall's permission to disguise
+myself. He gave me every assistance, and I shared their lot for a
+fortnight. There was no very great hardship in that--certainly nothing
+to merit the praise that Sir John Kendall has been kind enough to bestow
+on me. Nevertheless, I am very glad to have gained your good opinion and
+very grateful to him and to you for drinking to my health."
+
+Then he sat down abruptly.
+
+Sir John Kendall now rose, and the knights, following his example,
+betook themselves to their dormitories.
+
+The next morning notices were sent by the grand master to the bailiffs
+of the auberges, and the knights of the grand cross who happened to
+be in the Island, to assemble in council. Messages were also sent to
+Gervaise, requesting him to repair at the same hour to the palace, as
+the council would probably require his attendance.
+
+"Oh dear! I wish this was all over," he said to Ralph, as the latter
+assisted him to buckle on his armour.
+
+"I don't see anything to sigh about," Ralph said. "I think that you are
+the most fortunate fellow in the world. I do not say that you have not
+well deserved it, because it is the tremendous way you worked at Turkish
+and gave up everything else that has enabled you to do this. Still,
+there was luck in your noticing that villain talking to the galley
+slaves, and then to one of the officers of the prison. Of course, as the
+grand master said last night, it isn't one in a thousand who would have
+thought anything more about it, and I am sure I shouldn't; so that, and
+all the rest, is entirely your own doing. Still, it was a piece of
+luck that you noticed him talking with a slave. Don't think I envy you,
+Gervaise; I don't a bit, and I feel as much as any one that you have
+well deserved the honour you have obtained. Still, you know, it is a
+sort of consolation to me that luck had a little--just a little--to do
+with it."
+
+"In my opinion luck had everything to do with it," Gervaise said
+heartily, "and I feel downright ashamed at there being such a fuss made
+over it. It was bad enough before, merely because I had hit on a
+plan for our escape from those pirates, but this is worse, and I feel
+horribly nervous at the thought of having to appear before the grand
+master and the council."
+
+"Well, that brown dye will hide your blushes, Gervaise. I can only say
+I wish that I was in your place. By-the-bye, have you heard that they
+caught that rascal Greek last night?"
+
+"No, I have not heard anything about it."
+
+"Yes. The knights hid themselves behind a pile of goods on the wharf.
+There was no one about, so far as they could see, but soon after twelve
+they saw a figure come up on to the deck of a fishing boat moored by the
+quay. It was the Greek; he stood there for a minute or two listening,
+and then went down again; he did this five or six times, and at one
+o'clock they saw him throw up his arms, as if in despair; he stepped
+ashore, and was about to make his way up into the town when they rushed
+out and seized him. There is no doubt as to what his fate will be. I am
+sorry to say that I hear my friend Vrados has been arrested; but there
+can be no doubt about his loyalty, and he will assuredly be able
+to explain to the satisfaction of the council how this man became a
+resident at his house."
+
+"I am sorry I met him there, Ralph. It is a very unpleasant thing to
+have gone to a house, to have been received kindly, and then to be the
+means of bringing trouble upon it."
+
+"Yes. I feel that a little myself, because I took you there; and yet I
+cannot regret it, for if you had not seen him and taken an objection to
+him, you might not have noticed him particularly when he spoke to one of
+the galley slaves. It is certainly curious that you should have doubted
+the man, for I have met him there several times, and even after your
+visit with me I could see nothing in him to justify your dislike."
+
+Gervaise went up to the palace, and while waiting in the great hall
+until summoned before the council he was warmly accosted by several
+knights,--some of whom were quite strangers to him,--who all joined in
+congratulating him on the immense service he had done to the Order. It
+was upwards of an hour before he was called in.
+
+"The council have received, Sir Gervaise Tresham," the grand master
+said, "full details from Sir John Kendall of the manner in which you
+first discovered, and have since followed up the daring plot by which
+the slaves at St. Pelagius were to have risen, slain the guards who were
+faithful, spiked the cannon in the three water forts, burnt the merchant
+shipping, carried off six galleys and burnt the rest, and in their
+name I thank you for having saved the Order from a great calamity. The
+members of the council agree with me that you have shown an amount of
+discernment of the highest kind, and that you are worthy of exceptional
+favour and reward for your conduct. I therefore in my own name appoint
+you to the commandery of our manor of Maltby in Lincolnshire, which,
+having fallen vacant, is in my gift; and I release it from the usual
+payment of the first year's revenue. Knowing that you desire to
+establish yourself here, the council have, at my request, decided to
+make an exception to the general rule that a knight, on promotion to a
+commandery, must return and take charge of it in two years from the time
+the grant is made to him. The commandery will therefore be administered
+by the senior of the knights attached to it.
+
+"The council, on their part, have requested the bailiff of Auvergne, as
+grand master of the Fleet, to appoint you to the command of the galley
+now building, and approaching completion. This he has consented to
+do, feeling, as we all feel, that although such an appointment is
+unprecedented for a young knight, yet in the present case such an
+exception may well be made. I may add that the Admiral has--in
+order that no knight greatly your senior should be placed under your
+command--determined that he will appoint to it only young knights, who
+will, we are assured, gladly serve under one who has so distinguished
+himself, feeling certain that, under his command, they will have ample
+opportunities against the infidels to prove themselves worthy of the
+Order. I may add, also, that the bailiffs of all the langues promise
+that they will select from among the young knights such as may seem best
+fitted for such service, by their skill in warlike exercises, by their
+ready obedience to orders, and good conduct. And I foresee that the
+spirit of emulation, and the desire to show that, though still but
+professed knights, they are capable of performing as valiant deeds as
+their elders, will make the galley under your command one of the most
+successful in the Order.
+
+"As you are aware, it is a stringent rule, which even in so exceptional
+a case we should not be justified in breaking, that a knight must reside
+in the Island for five years previous to being promoted to a commandery.
+It is now two months more than that time since you were received as page
+to the late grand master, and in promoting you to a commandery I have
+not, therefore, broken the rule. You may retire, Sir Gervaise."
+
+Gervaise, overwhelmed by the unlooked for honours thus bestowed upon
+him, bowed deeply to the grand master and the members of the council,
+and then retired from the chamber. He passed out of the palace by a side
+door, so as to avoid being accosted by the knights in the great hall,
+and took his way out on to the ramparts, where he walked up and down for
+a considerable time before returning to the auberge. He felt no hilarity
+at his promotion. He had never entertained any ambition for rising to
+high office in the Order, but had hoped only to perform his duty as a
+true knight, to fight against the infidels, and some day, if need be, to
+die for the Order. The commandery was, he knew, a rich one, and as
+its chief he would draw a considerable revenue from the estate. This
+afforded him no pleasure whatever, except inasmuch as it would enable
+him, in his new command of the galley, to keep a handsome table, and to
+entertain well the knights who served under him.
+
+It seemed to him, however, that the reward and honours were so far
+beyond his deserts that he felt almost humiliated by their bestowal. The
+responsibility, too, was great. Would these young knights, the youngest
+of whom could be but a year his junior, serve willingly under his
+orders? And, above all, would they be able to emulate the deeds of
+experienced warriors, and would the galley worthily maintain the fame of
+the Order?
+
+At the end of two hours he was joined by Ralph Harcourt.
+
+"I have been looking for you everywhere, Gervaise. You seemed to have
+disappeared mysteriously. None had marked you leave the council chamber,
+or knew where you had gone; and after searching everywhere I remembered
+your fondness for walks upon the walls, so I climbed to the top of
+St. John's tower and thence espied you. Well, I congratulate you most
+heartily on the honours that have fallen to your share, especially that
+of the command of a new galley."
+
+"It is too much altogether, Ralph. I feel ashamed at being thus thrust
+into a post that ought to be given to a knight of age and experience.
+How can I expect a number of young knights, of whom well nigh all must
+be my seniors in age, to obey me as they would an older man?"
+
+"What has age to do with it?" Ralph said. "You have shown that you have
+a head to think, and, as you before proved, you have an arm to strike.
+Why, every young knight in the Order must feel proud that one of their
+own age has gained such honour. It raises them all in their own esteem,
+and you will see that you will get the pick among all the professed
+knights, and of a good many who have finished their profession, and are
+serving here in the hope of some day getting promotion to a commandery.
+Not such an one as you have got; that, in the ordinary course of things,
+does not fall to a knight until he is well on in years, and has served
+in many commanderies of smaller value. I can tell you, directly Sir John
+Kendall came back and told us that you had been appointed commander of
+the new galley, and that it was to be manned wholly by young knights,
+there was not one of those serving their profession in the auberge who
+did not beg Sir John to put down his name for it; and ten or twelve
+others, myself among them, who have obtained full knighthood also."
+
+"You don't mean to say that you have put down your name to serve under
+me, Ralph? It would be monstrous."
+
+"I see nothing monstrous in it, Gervaise. As I said just now, years have
+nothing to do with it, and, putting aside our friendship, I would rather
+serve under you than under many knights old enough to be your father. I
+don't know whether I shall have the luck to be one of the chosen, as Sir
+John said that there were to be only seven from each langue, which will
+make forty-nine--with yourself fifty. If I am chosen--and, knowing
+our friendship, I hope that the bailiff will let me go with you--it is
+likely enough I may be named your lieutenant, as I shall be the only one
+beside yourself who is a secular knight, and am, therefore, superior in
+rank to the rest."
+
+"That would be pleasant indeed, Ralph, though I would rather that you
+had been made commander and I lieutenant; but at any rate, with you
+to support me, I shall feel less oppressed by the thought of my
+responsibility."
+
+As Ralph had declared would be the case, the young knights in the other
+auberges were as anxious as those of England to be enrolled among the
+crew of the new galley, and the bailiffs had some trouble in choosing
+among the aspirants. Very few were selected outside the rank of
+professed knights, and as great pains were taken to comply with the
+grand master's wishes that only young knights of good conduct and
+disposition, and distinguished by their proficiency in warlike
+exercises, should be chosen, the crew was in every way a picked one.
+Most of them had made one or two of the three months' voyages in
+the galleys, though comparatively few had had the good fortune to be
+absolutely engaged with the Moslem pirates.
+
+To the great satisfaction of himself and Gervaise, Ralph Harcourt
+was nominated lieutenant of the galley. The fact that so many had
+volunteered impressed all those who were chosen with the sense that it
+was at once an honour and a piece of good fortune to be selected, and
+all were determined that the boy galley, as the elder knights laughingly
+termed it, should do honour to the Order.
+
+It was a fortnight before she was launched. Gervaise had heard, with
+great satisfaction, that it had been decided by the council that no
+punishment should be inflicted upon the slaves for their share in the
+intended rising at St. Pelagius. All were guilty, and there was no means
+of saying who had taken prominent parts in the plot. The council felt
+that it was but natural that they should grasp at the prospect of
+freedom, for they themselves would have done the same had they been
+captives of the infidels. Even the warders and guards were allowed to
+go unpunished, although their offence was a much more serious one. Those
+who could have named the men who had accepted bribes were dead, and the
+lesson had been so severe a one that there was no probability of any
+again turning traitors. The author of the rising had been publicly
+executed. Seeing the hopelessness of denial, he had boldly avowed his
+share in the matter, and had acknowledged that he was acting as agent
+for the sultan, and had been supplied with ample funds before leaving
+Constantinople.
+
+He declared that he was absolutely unable to give any names whatever of
+those concerned in the plot, save those of the two overseers, as these
+had undertaken the work of suborning the warders and guards, though he
+admitted that he had on several occasions spoken to slaves as the gangs
+were on their way back to the prison, and had told them to be prepared
+to take part in a plan that was on foot for their rescue from slavery.
+The torture had not been, as was then the usual custom, applied to
+extort information; partly because his story was probable, still more
+because the grand master and council did not wish that more publicity
+should be given to the affair, and were glad that it should be allowed
+to drop without any further trial of the delinquents. In the city
+generally it was only known that a plot had been discovered for the
+liberation and escape of some of the slaves; and, outside the members of
+the Order, none were aware of its extent and dangerous character. To the
+satisfaction of Gervaise and Ralph, Vrados was able to produce letters
+and documents that satisfied the council that he had been deceived as to
+the character of the Greek, and was wholly innocent in the matter.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XII THE BOY GALLEY
+
+
+Among those most pleased at the appointment of Gervaise to the command
+of the galley was Sir John Boswell. Ever since the adventure with the
+pirates, the knight had exhibited an almost fatherly interest in him;
+had encouraged him in his studies, ridden with him on such occasions as
+he had permitted himself a short holiday, and had, whenever they were
+together, related to him stories of war, sieges, battles, and escapes,
+from which he thought the young knight might gain lessons for his future
+guidance.
+
+"I doubt, Gervaise," he said one day, as they were riding quietly along
+the road, "whether our plan of life is altogether the best. We were
+founded, you know, simply as a body of monks, bound to devote ourselves
+solely to the care of the sick, and to give hospitality to pilgrims in
+Palestine. Now this was monkish work, and men who devoted themselves
+solely to such a life of charity as that in our Hospital at Jerusalem,
+might well renounce all human pleasures; but when the great change
+was made by Master Raymond du Puy, and from a nursing body we became a
+brotherhood in arms, it seems to me that the vows of celibacy were no
+longer needful or desirable. The crusaders were, many of them, married
+men, but they fought no worse for that. It would have been far better,
+methinks, had we been converted into an Order pledged to resist the
+infidel, but without the vows of poverty and of celibacy, which have
+never been seriously regarded.
+
+"The garrison here might be composed, as indeed it is now, principally
+of young knights, of those who have not cared to marry, and of the
+officers of the Order whose wives and families might dwell here with
+them. This would have many advantages. Among others, the presence of so
+many ladies of rank would have the excellent effect of discountenancing
+and repressing extravagances and dissolute habits, which are but too
+common, and are a shame to the Order. Knights possessing commanderies
+throughout Europe would be no worse stewards for being married men, and
+scandals, such as contributed largely to the downfall of the Templars,
+would be avoided.
+
+"The sole vow necessary, so far as I can see, would be that knights
+should remain unmarried and disposable at all times for service until
+ten years after making their profession, and that afterwards they should
+ever be ready to obey the summons to arms, on occasions when the safety
+of Rhodes, or the invasion of any Christian country by the Moslems,
+rendered their services needful, when they would come out just as the
+knights of Richard the Lion Heart went out as crusaders. I have spent
+half my life since I joined the Order in commanderies at home, and a
+dull life it was, and I was glad enough to resign my last command and
+come out here. Had I been able to marry, I might now have had a son of
+your age, whose career I could watch and feel a pride in. My life would
+have been far happier in England, and in all respects I should be a
+better man than I am now. Methinks it would strengthen rather than
+weaken the Order. As a fighting body we should be in no way inferior
+to what we are now, and we should be more liked and more respected
+throughout Europe, for naturally the sight of so many men leading a
+luxurious life in commanderies causes a feeling against them."
+
+"But I suppose, Sir John, that there is no great difficulty in obtaining
+a dispensation from our vows?"
+
+"In this, as in all other matters, everything depends upon interest or
+money. Of course, dispensations are not common; but doubtless any knight
+when he had served his term of active service could, especially if
+his request were backed by the grand master, obtain from the Pope
+a dispensation of his vows. If he had a commandery it would make a
+vacancy, and give the grand prior, or the grand master, or the council,
+in whosoever's gift it might be, an opportunity of rewarding services or
+of gratifying some powerful family."
+
+"I agree with you that it would have been much better, Sir John. I can
+understand that monks, ever living a quiet life apart from the world,
+should be content so to continue; but among a body of warlike knights
+there must be many who, in time, must come to regret the vows they took
+when boys. The cadet of a noble family might, by the death of elder
+brothers, come to be the head of a great family, the ruler over wide
+domains. Surely it would be desirable that such a man should be able to
+marry and have heirs."
+
+"Doubtless it could be managed in such cases, Gervaise, but it is a pity
+that it should have to be managed. I can see no reason in the world why
+a knight, after doing ten years of service here, should not be free
+to marry, providing he takes a vow to render full service to the Order
+whenever called upon to do so. Already the vow of poverty is everywhere
+broken. Already, in defiance of their oaths, too many knights lead idle
+and dissolute lives. Already, knights, when in their own countries,
+disregard the rule that they shall draw sword in no cause save that of
+the Holy Sepulchre, and, like other knights and nobles, take part in
+civil strife or foreign wars. All this is a scandal, and it were better
+by far to do away with all oaths, save that of obedience and willingness
+to war with the infidel, than to make vows that all men know are
+constantly and shamelessly broken.
+
+"I am fond of you, Gervaise. I am proud of you, as one who has brought
+honour to our langue, and who, in time, will bring more honour. I am
+glad that, so far as there can be between a young knight and one of
+middle age, there is a friendship between us. But see what greater
+pleasure it would give to my life were you my son, for whom I could
+lay by such funds as I could well spare, instead of spending all my
+appointments on myself, and having neither kith nor kin to give a sigh
+of regret when the news comes that I have fallen in some engagement with
+the infidels. I often think of all these things, and sometimes talk them
+over with comrades, and there are few who do not hold, with me, that it
+would be far better that we should become a purely military Order, like
+some of the military Orders in the courts of the European sovereigns,
+than remain as we are, half monk, half soldier--a mixture that, so far
+as I can see, accords but badly with either morality or public repute.
+
+"However, I see no chance of such a change coming, and we must be
+content to observe our vows as well as may be, so long as we are willing
+to remain monks and try to obtain dispensation from our vows should we
+desire to alter our mode of life. We ought either to have remained monks
+pure and simple, spending our lives in deeds of charity, a life which
+suits many men, and against which I should be the last to say anything,
+or else soldiers pure and simple, as were the crusaders, who wrested
+the Holy Sepulchre from the hands of the infidels. At present, Gervaise,
+your vocation lies wholly in the way of fighting, but it may be that the
+time will come when you may have other aims and ambitions, and when the
+vows of the Order will gall you."
+
+"I hope not, Sir John," Gervaise said earnestly.
+
+"You are young yet," the knight replied, with an indulgent smile. "Some
+day you may think differently. Now," he went on, changing the subject
+abruptly, "when will your galley be ready?"
+
+"This is my last ride, Sir John. The shipwrights will have finished
+tomorrow, and the next day we shall take possession of her, and begin to
+practise, so that each man shall know his duties, and the galley slaves
+learn to row well, before we have orders to sail. I wish you were going
+with us, Sir John."
+
+"I should like it, lad, in many respects. It does one good to see the
+enthusiasm of young men, and doubtless you will be a merry party.
+But, on the other hand, unless I mistake, you will be undertaking wild
+adventures, and my time for these is well nigh passed. When the Turk
+comes here, if he ever comes--and of that I have little doubt--I
+shall be ready to take my full share of the fighting; but I shall seek
+adventures no longer, and shall go no more to sea. Next only to the
+bailiff, I am the senior of our auberge, and--but this is between
+ourselves, lad--am like to succeed to the grand priory of England when
+it becomes vacant, and if not I shall, as the grand master has told me,
+have the offer of the next high office vacant in the palace."
+
+Two days later Gervaise and his company of young knights went down to
+the port to take part in the launch of the new galley. This was the
+occasion of a solemn ceremony, the grand master and a large number of
+knights being present. A religious service first took place on her
+poop, and she was named by the grand master the Santa Barbara. When the
+ceremony was over, Gervaise was solemnly invested with the command of
+the galley by the grand marshal of the navy; then the shores were struck
+away, and the galley glided into the water, amid the firing of guns, the
+blowing of trumpets, and the cheers of the spectators who had gathered
+at the port to witness the ceremony.
+
+The next morning a gang of galley slaves were marched down. A third of
+these had been drawn from the crews of other galleys, their places being
+supplied by new hands. The remainder were taken from the men employed
+on the fortifications. Three weeks were occupied in teaching the rowers
+their work, and getting them well together. They were a fine crew, for
+the governor of St. Pelagius, grateful to Gervaise for the discovery of
+the plot, had ordered the overseers to pick out from the various gangs
+men specially suited by age and strength for the work.
+
+The dye by this time had entirely worn off his face, and although his
+hair was still several shades darker than of old, it differed even more
+widely from the ebon hue that it had been when he was in prison. Thus,
+although he recognised three or four men upon the benches who had been
+fellow occupants of his cell, he had no fear whatever of their detecting
+in the commander of the galley their late companion in misfortune.
+
+Only a portion of the knights had been out each day while the crew were
+learning to row, as there was but little for them to learn. The galley
+carried no sails, and the knights were soldiers rather than sailors, and
+fought on the deck of their ship, as if defending a breach, or storming
+one held by the enemy. Moreover, as all of them had already made one or
+more voyages, they were accustomed to such duties as they would have to
+discharge on board.
+
+All were glad when an order was published for the galley to sail. On the
+eve of departure Gervaise was sent for by the grand master. The general
+of the galleys was with him when Gervaise entered the room. The bailiff
+of Auvergne always held the position of grand marshal, and the bailiff
+of Italy that of second in command, with the title of grand admiral.
+These officials, however, as heads of their respective langues, had many
+other duties to perform, and it was only on great occasions that they
+took any practical share in the work of which they were nominally heads.
+The real control in all naval questions rested with the general of the
+galleys, who was elected by the council, but on the nomination of the
+grand master.
+
+His power when at sea with the fleet was absolute. He could suspend any
+officer from duty, and had unquestioned power of life and death over
+the crews. He had been frequently on board the galley since she had been
+launched, and had been pleased with the attention paid by Gervaise to
+his duties, and with the ready manner in which the young knights carried
+out his orders.
+
+"Sir Gervaise Tresham," he said, "it is usual, as you know, to appoint
+each galley to a certain cruising ground, to which it is confined during
+its three months' absence. At present there is a galley on each of these
+stations, and as the last relief took place but a month since, it is
+better that they should remain at the stations allotted to them. I
+have therefore, after consultation with his Highness the grand master,
+decided to give you a free hand. You are as likely to meet with pirates
+in one quarter as in another, and you will pick up from vessels you
+may overhaul news of their doings, which will enable you to direct your
+course to the point where you will be most useful."
+
+"In the first place, however, you will proceed to the coast of Tunis.
+Visconti's galley is already there, but the coast swarms with corsairs,
+and we have had many complaints as to their depredations. The Court of
+Spain has twice represented to us lately that the pirates have grown
+so bold that vessels have been carried off, even when coasting from one
+Spanish port to another. Visconti is specially watching the coast near
+Tunis, and you will therefore perhaps do better to proceed farther west,
+for every village from Tunis to Tangier is little better than a nest
+of pirates. I should imagine that you will find ample employment there
+during your three months' cruise. When I say that you are free to
+choose your own cruising ground, I do not mean that you should go up the
+Levant, or to the east of the Mediterranean, but that you are not bound
+to keep close along the African coast, but may, should you obtain any
+information to warrant your doing so, seek the pirates along the shores
+of Spain, Sardinia, Corsica, or Sicily.
+
+"I need not warn you to act with prudence as well as courage, for you
+have proved that you possess both qualities. Do not allow yourself to
+be carried away by the impetuosity of your knights; it is more often
+the duty of a commander to restrain than to encourage his crew, and with
+such young blood as you have under your command the necessity will be
+greater than usual. Be kind to your slaves, but be ever watchful;
+yet this I need not tell you. Maintain a strict but not over severe
+discipline. You are all knights and comrades of the Order, and equals
+when on shore, but on board you are the captain and they are your
+soldiers. I have this afternoon had a meeting of your knights, and have
+urged upon them very strongly that, having volunteered to serve under
+you, they must obey your orders as promptly and willingly as if you were
+the senior knight of the Order, and that it behooves them specially
+upon the present occasion, when the crew is composed entirely of young
+knights, to show themselves worthy of the honour that has been done to
+them by entrusting a galley of the Order to their charge. I told them
+I should regard your report of their individual conduct with the same
+attention and respect with which I should that of any other commander,
+and that they might greatly make or mar their future prospects in the
+Order by their conduct during the cruise. I am convinced, from what I
+know of you, that you will exercise no undue harshness, but will act
+with tact and discretion, as well as firmness."
+
+"I will try to do so, your Excellency. I feel that it is a heavy
+responsibility and will spare no pains to justify the unmerited honour
+that has been bestowed upon me."
+
+"You have seen that the taking in of stores is complete, and that
+nothing is wanting for the voyage?"
+
+"Yes, sir. I stood by while the overseer of stores checked off every
+sack and barrel as it came on board. The water is to be brought off this
+evening, and as I was unable to be present, Sir Ralph Harcourt is there
+to count the barrels and see that all are full."
+
+"Goodbye, Sir Gervaise," the grand master said, as the interview
+terminated.
+
+"Hitherto you have given me, from the time you reached the Island,
+naught but reason for satisfaction at my nomination of you as page,
+and I have no fear that you will fail this time. Remember that valour,
+however great, cannot prevail against overpowering odds. You had a
+lesson of that when you served under Ricord, though finally the affair
+turned out well. I do not say, don't attempt desperate undertakings, but
+don't attempt impossible ones. Be careful of the lives of your knights.
+Remember that ere long every sword may be of the utmost consequence in
+the defence of Rhodes, and that even the capture of pirates may be too
+dearly purchased; but that, at the same time, the honour of the flag
+of the Order must be upheld at all hazards. Ah!" he broke off, seeing
+a slight smile on the young knight's face, "you think my orders
+contradictory? It may be so; but you know what I mean, and I fear not
+that you will blunder in carrying them out. Be prudent, and yet not
+over prudent. I mean, be not rash, unless there are such benefits to be
+obtained as would justify great risk in obtaining them."
+
+On returning to the auberge, Gervaise had a long chat with Ralph.
+
+"I think the admiral's talk with us this afternoon had an excellent
+effect, Gervaise. I do not say that every one was not before disposed
+to obey you in all things, willingly and cheerfully; but he put it so
+strongly to them that they had volunteered specially for service in this
+galley, knowing well who was to be its commander, and the circumstance
+that the crew was to consist solely of young knights, and had therefore
+specially pledged their honour so to act that the enterprise should be
+in all respects a successful one. To render it so, obedience was even
+a greater necessity than valour. This was the most important of all the
+vows taken by the knights of the Order, and it was only by the strictest
+and most unquestioning obedience on the part of all to the orders of
+their superiors, that the work of a vast community could be carried
+on. Passing over the fact that you were their superior in rank, both as
+being a secular knight and a knight commander of the Order, you had
+been specially appointed by the grand master and council, as well as
+by himself, and that they bestowed upon you while at sea, and in
+the absence of any officers of superior rank, their full powers and
+authority. You were, in fact, their representative and agent, and
+therefore to be regarded with the same deference and respect that would
+be due to the oldest knight similarly placed. 'Lastly,' he said, in a
+less serious tone, 'you must remember that this is an experiment, and,
+as some think, a somewhat rash one. Never before did a galley, manned
+entirely from among the youngest of our knights, put to sea; and you may
+be sure that, unless successful, the experiment is not likely to be ever
+repeated. You have been selected from among many other candidates, and
+you have not only to justify the choice, but to uphold the reputation
+and honour of the young knights of your Order, by all of whom your
+doings will be regarded with special interest, as reflecting credit not
+only upon yourselves individually, but as representatives and champions
+of them all.'
+
+"I could see that his words had a great effect. He had placed me beside
+him, and I marked their faces as he spoke. Each face lit up at his
+appeal, and I do not think there was one but silently registered a vow
+to do all in his power to prove himself worthy of the confidence placed
+in him and his companions by the grand master and admiral. I had before
+no shadow of fear that everything would not go well. I knew almost all
+of them personally, and if I myself had had the selection from among
+the whole body of knights in the convent, I could not have made a choice
+that would have suited me better. It seems to me that in each auberge
+the bailiff has endeavoured to pick out the seven young knights whom he
+considered would most worthily support the honour of the langue. Still,
+confident as I was before, I feel more so now, after the admiral's
+address to us."
+
+"I had no fear either, Ralph, though doubtless the admiral's words
+will carry great weight with them. It was thoughtlessness rather than
+anything else that I dreaded; but now that the admiral himself has
+spoken to them, there is no fear that anything will occur to give us
+trouble. I have particularly noticed that when we have been on board,
+and have been laughing and chatting together before we got under way,
+their manner changed directly the first order was given, and that all
+the commands were carried out with as much goodwill and alacrity as if
+they were under Ricord himself."
+
+On the following morning the knights all went on board the Santa
+Barbara. Their baggage was carried down by slaves, and by the personal
+servants from each auberge who were to go as their attendants during
+the voyage. The grand master had advanced Gervaise a sum equal to half a
+year's income of his commandery, and with this he had purchased a stock
+of the best wines, and various other luxuries, to supplement the rations
+supplied from the funds of the Order to knights when at sea. Gervaise
+had to go round early to the admiral to sign the receipt for stores and
+to receive his final orders in writing. All were, therefore, on board
+before him and, when he arrived, were drawn up in military order to
+receive him.
+
+Every knight was in full armour, and as, at a word from Ralph, they
+drew their swords and saluted the young commander, Gervaise felt with a
+thrill of pleasure and of confidence that with such a following he
+need not fear any encounter with a pirate force, unless in overwhelming
+numbers.
+
+The young knights were all, with the exception only of Ralph Harcourt,
+between the ages of seventeen and nineteen, and their young faces, free
+in most cases even from the suspicion of a moustache, looked almost
+those of boys. But there was no mistaking the ardour and enthusiasm in
+their faces, and the lack of breadth and weight, that years alone would
+give to them, was compensated by skill in their weapons, acquired by
+long and severe training, and by the activity and tireless energy of
+youth.
+
+"Knights and comrades," Gervaise said as, after walking through the
+double line to the end of the poop he turned and faced them, "I am
+proud indeed to command so gallant a body of knights. The success of our
+expedition depends upon you rather than upon me, and as I feel assured
+of your warm cooperation I have no fear as to what the result will be,
+if Dame Fortune will but favour us by throwing in our way some of those
+scourges of the sea in search of whom we are about to set out. Many of
+us have already encountered them, and, fighting side by side with older
+knights, have borne our share of the work, while those who have not done
+so will, I am sure, do equally well when the opportunity arrives. We
+shall not this voyage have the encouragement and confidence inspired by
+the presence of those who have long and valiantly borne the standard of
+the Order; but, on the other hand, we have to show that we are worthy
+of the confidence reposed in us, and that the young knights of the Order
+can be trusted to emulate the deeds of those who have rendered the name
+of the Hospitallers a terror to the infidel."
+
+A shout of approbation greeted the close of his address. Gervaise then
+walked forward to the end of the poop, and looked down upon the slaves,
+who, with their oars out, were awaiting the order to row.
+
+"Men," he said in Turkish, "it is my desire that, while it is necessary
+that you should do your work, your lot shall be no heavier than can be
+avoided. You will not be taxed beyond your powers, save when the enemy
+is in sight, or there is supreme need for haste, but then you must be
+called upon for your utmost exertions. I wish your work to be willing.
+I abhor the use of the lash, and so long as each man does his fair quota
+of work, I have given the strictest orders that it shall never be used.
+I have, at my own cost, made provision that your daily rations shall be
+improved while under my command. Meat will be served out to you daily,
+when it can be obtained, and for those of you who hold that the strict
+tenets of your religion may be relaxed while engaged in such severe
+labour, a ration of wine will also be served out; and such other
+indulgences as are compatible with the discipline and safety of the
+ship, will also be granted to you."
+
+There was a murmur of gratitude among the slaves. Gervaise then gave the
+order to row, and the galley started on her voyage. The knights had now
+fallen out from their ranks, and were soon laughing and talking gaily.
+Being all of noble families and knightly rank, there was, except when on
+actual duty, a tone of perfect equality and good fellowship prevailing
+among them. French was the common language, for as the Order was of
+French foundation, and three of the seven langues belonged to that
+country, most of the high dignitaries being chosen from their ranks,
+it was natural that the French language should be the general medium of
+communication between them.
+
+Until noon the slaves rowed steadily and well. Work was then stopped,
+for there was scarce a breath of wind stirring the water. Even under the
+awning that had, as the sun gained power, been erected over the poop,
+the heat was oppressive. The knights had all divested themselves of
+their armour, and most of them retired below for a siesta. As soon as
+the slaves stopped rowing, an awning, which Gervaise had purchased,
+and which was rolled up under the break of the poop, was, to their
+astonishment, drawn over them.
+
+"Don't you think you are spoiling your slaves, Sir Gervaise?" one of the
+Spanish knights asked doubtfully.
+
+"On the contrary, Sir Pedro, I hope that I am improving them. You have
+not worked as a galley slave, but I have, and I can assure you that I
+used to feel the hours when we were lying broiling in the sun, doing
+nothing, much more trying than those during which I was at work. I used
+to be quite giddy and sick with the heat, and on getting out the
+oars again had scarce strength to work them. But this is not the most
+important point. In port the slaves always sleep in the prison, but at
+sea they must rest on their benches; and to do so with clothes soaked
+with the heavy dew must be a severe trial, and most prejudicial to the
+health. The awning cost but a few ducats, and I reckon that, putting
+aside the comfort to the slaves, it will be very speedily repaid by
+their better health and capacity for labour. When away in the galley
+with Sir Louis Ricord, I used to feel the greatest pity for the
+unfortunate wretches when at daybreak, in their drenched clothes, and
+shivering with cold and wet, they rose to commence their work. I then
+took a vow that if ever I should come to command a galley I would
+provide an awning for the slaves."
+
+Two or three of the knights standing by expressed their warm approval
+of what Gervaise said. There was, in those days, but little of that
+sentiment of humanity that is now prevalent, and slaves were everywhere
+regarded as mere beasts of burden rather than as human beings. When,
+however, they had the question put to them, as Gervaise had done, they
+were ready to give a hearty agreement, although it was the utilitarian
+rather than the humanitarian side of the question that recommended it
+to them. After three hours' rest the journey was renewed, and just
+at nightfall the galley anchored off an islet lying to the north of
+Carpathos.
+
+While the servants were laying the tables along the poop for the
+evening meal, Gervaise went down to see that his orders were carried out
+regarding the food for the slaves. They were already eating their
+bread and meat with an air of satisfaction that showed how warmly they
+appreciated the unusual indulgence, while there were few indeed who did
+not hold up their drinking horns as a servant passed along between the
+benches with a skin of wine. Gervaise spoke to many of them.
+
+"Ah, my lord," one of them said, "if we were always treated like this,
+slavery would be endurable. For ten years have I rowed in Christian
+galleys, but never before has an awning been spread to keep off the sun
+or the dew. We shall not forget your kindness, my lord, and will row our
+hardest right cheerfully when you call upon us for an effort."
+
+There was a murmur of assent from the galley slaves around.
+
+"May Allah be merciful to you, as you are merciful to us!" another slave
+exclaimed. "The blessing of those whom you regard as infidels can at
+least do you no harm."
+
+"On the contrary, it can do me good," Gervaise said. "The God you
+Moslems and we Christians worship is, I believe, the same, though under
+another name."
+
+Gervaise had, indeed, during his long conversations with Suleiman Ali,
+often discussed with him the matter of his faith, and had come, in
+consequence, to regard it in a very different light to that in which it
+was viewed by his companions. There was faith in one God at the
+bottom of both Mohammedanism and Christianity. The Mohammedans held
+in reverence the lawgivers and prophets of the Old Testament, and even
+regarded Christ Himself as being a prophet. They had been grievously led
+away by Mahomet, whom Gervaise regarded as a false teacher; but as he
+had seen innumerable instances of the fidelity of the Moslems to their
+creed, and the punctuality and devotion with which the slaves said their
+daily prayers, exposed though they were to the scorn and even the anger
+of their taskmasters, he had quite lost, during his nine months
+of constant association with Suleiman Ali, the bigoted hatred of
+Mohammedanism so universal at the time. He regarded Moslems as foes to
+be opposed to the death; but he felt that it was unfair to hate them for
+being hostile to Christianity, of which they knew nothing.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIII THE FIRST PRIZES
+
+
+After leaving the slaves, Gervaise joined his companions on the poop.
+They were engaged in an animated discussion as to whether it was
+advisable to grant indulgences to slaves. The majority approved of the
+steps Gervaise had taken, but some asserted that these concessions would
+only lead them to look for more, and would create discontent among the
+crews of other galleys not so favoured.
+
+"Well, comrades," said Gervaise, "I think that so far I am better
+qualified than any of you to give an opinion; but it may be that it will
+fall to the lot of some of you to be a slave in Turkish hands. In that
+case, I can affirm with certainty, that you will keenly appreciate any
+alleviation, however small, of your lot. You must remember that the one
+feeling of the slave is dull despair. Death is the only relief he has
+to look forward to. Do you think that a man so feeling can do his best,
+either at an oar or at any other kind of work? I am sure it would not be
+so in my case. But if you brighten his life a little, and show him
+that he is not regarded as merely a brute beast, and that you take some
+interest in him, he will work in a different spirit. Even viewed from a
+merely monetary point of view it must pay well to render him as content
+as possible with his lot. You know how great is the mortality among the
+slaves--how they pine away and die from no material malady that can be
+detected, but simply from hopelessness and weariness of life, aided,
+undoubtedly, in the case of the galley slaves, by sleeping in the damp
+night air after an exposure all day to the full heat of the sun. This
+brings an answer to your second objection. Undoubtedly it might cause
+discontent among the slaves of other galleys when they hear that others
+are treated better than themselves. But I hope that if, on our return,
+we bring back all our slaves in good condition and health, the contrast
+between their appearance and that of the slaves in most other galleys
+will be so marked that the admiral may consider it would be well to
+order awnings to be fixed to all the vessels of the Order, and even to
+grant to all slaves, when away on voyages, the little indulgences I
+have given them here. The expense would be very trifling, and it would
+certainly add a great deal to the average life of a slave, and would
+render him capable of better work. There is another advantage. If
+the Turks learn that their countrymen in our hands are treated with a
+certain amount of kindness and consideration, it might lead them to act
+similarly to those of our Order who may be unfortunate enough to fall
+into their hands."
+
+"There is a great deal in what you say, Sir Gervaise," one of the
+knights, who had before taken the opposite point of view, said. "There
+is no reason why our galley should not be a model one, and though, like
+enough, the seniors will laugh at our making innovations, D'Aubusson
+is a reformer, and will certainly support anything that he sees to be
+beneficial, from whatever quarter it comes."
+
+Supper was now served, and the young knights were well pleased with the
+entertainment provided for them. It was the principal meal of the day.
+Their fast was broken by a glass of wine, a manchet of bread, and fruit
+soon after rising. At eleven o'clock they sat down to a more substantial
+meal; but in that climate the heat was at that hour considerable, and as
+there were duties to be performed, there was no sitting long at table.
+At supper the day's work was over, their appetite was sharpened by the
+cool evening breeze, and the meal was hearty and prolonged. After it was
+concluded, several of the knights brought up from below viols and other
+instruments of music; for the ability to accompany the voice with such
+an instrument was considered an essential part of the education of a
+knight.
+
+For some hours the songs and romances, so popular at the time, were sung
+in the various languages represented on board; then the knights, one by
+one, went down to their sleeping places, until only the seven knights of
+the langue of Auvergne, who were to watch the first night, remained on
+deck. Five of these wrapped themselves in their mantles and lay down on
+the benches. One of the others descended to the waist, walked along the
+plank between the lines of sleeping slaves, and took up his place in
+the bow, while the other paced up and down the poop, the fall of
+his footsteps being the only sound to break the silence that reigned
+throughout the ship.
+
+In the morning, as soon as the knights had all taken a plunge in the
+sea, the oars were got out, and the galley proceeded on her way. Passing
+through the islands and skirting the southern shore of Greece, she
+continued her course west. Malta was sighted, but they did not put in
+there. Pantellaria was passed, and in a fortnight after leaving Rhodes,
+Cape Bon, at the entrance to the bay of Tunis, was sighted. Until Greece
+was left behind them, the nights had generally been spent in small
+ports, where supplies of fresh meat, fish, and fruit, were obtainable.
+So far no incident had marked the voyage. The weather had continued
+fine, and they had heard nothing, from ships they had fallen in with,
+of any Moslem pirates having been seen. A few hours, however, after
+sighting the coast of Africa, a dark object was seen ahead.
+
+"It is a ship of some sort," Ralph said; "but her masts have gone. It
+may be that she is a merchantman that has been captured and sacked by
+the Moorish pirates."
+
+Orders were given to the rowers to quicken their pace, and in little
+over an hour they were alongside the hull. As soon as the vessels were
+close enough for those on the poop of the galley to look down on to
+the deck of the other craft, it was seen that Ralph's suppositions were
+correct. Two bodies lay stretched upon it. One was crushed under the
+fallen mast; the other lay huddled up in a heap, a cannon ball having
+almost torn him asunder. The knights leapt on to the deck as soon as the
+galley ran alongside. Gervaise made first for the man lying beneath the
+mast; as he came up to him, the sailor opened his eyes and murmured,
+"Water!" Gervaise called out to one of the servants to bring water from
+the galley, and, as soon as it came, poured some between the man's lips,
+and the knights by their united efforts lifted the mast from across his
+body. It was evident, however, that he had but a short time to live,
+and the dew of death was on his face. After a few minutes he rallied a
+little, and looked gratefully at his rescuers.
+
+"You have been attacked by pirates," Gervaise said. "Was there one
+galley, or two?"
+
+"Three galleys," the man replied in a faint whisper.
+
+"Do you know where they were from?"
+
+"Tripoli."
+
+"How long ago?"
+
+"It was about three hours after sunrise when we saw them coming up," the
+man said, his voice gaining in strength, as some wine they gave him took
+effect. "It was useless to fight, and I hauled down our flag, but in
+spite of that one of the pirates fired a broadside, and one of the
+shot hit the mast and brought it down, and I was crushed under it. They
+boarded us, took off all the crew as captives, and emptied the hold; I
+knew that I was done for, and begged them to kill me; but they paid
+no attention. I know a little of their language, and as I lay there I
+caught something of what they were saying; they are bound for the Island
+of Sardinia, where they have a rendezvous, and are to join a great
+gathering of their consorts. I don't know the name of the place, but it
+is on the east coast. More water!"
+
+Gervaise knelt to pour some water between his lips, when he gave a
+sudden cry, a shudder ran through his frame, and he was dead.
+
+"Let us return on board, gentlemen," Gervaise said, rising to his feet.
+"We can do nothing here."
+
+As soon as he regained the deck of the galley, he signed to Ralph to
+follow him below.
+
+"Now, Ralph," he said, "this is one of those cases in which we have to
+decide whether we ought or ought not to be prudent. From what that poor
+fellow said, the pirates have about five hours' start of us, and as they
+can have no idea that they are pursued, we can doubtless overtake them
+before they reach Sardinia. The question is, ought we to pursue them at
+once, or ought we to coast along until we find Visconti's galley? Three
+of these Tripoli pirates, crowded as they always are with men, would
+prove serious opponents, yet we might engage them with a fair hope of
+victory. But we may be seriously disabled in the fight, and should be,
+perhaps, unable to carry the news to Genoa that there are many pirate
+ships gathering on the coast of Sardinia to prey upon their commerce."
+
+"We might be days, or even weeks, before we light upon Visconti's
+galley, Gervaise, and even when we found it, he might not consider
+himself justified in leaving the coast where he is stationed. Besides,
+while we are spending our time looking for him, the pirates will be
+committing terrible depredations. It must be a big expedition, under
+some notorious pirate, or they would never venture so far north."
+
+"Then you think that I should be justified in pursuing them alone. It is
+a fearful responsibility to have to decide."
+
+"I think so, Gervaise. There is no saying what misfortunes might happen
+if we did not venture to do so."
+
+"Very well then, so be it. But before deciding finally on so grave a
+matter, I will lay it before the company."
+
+"There is no doubt as to what their decision will be," Ralph said, with
+a smile.
+
+"Perhaps not, Ralph; but as they will be called upon to risk their lives
+in a dangerous enterprise, it is as well that they should have a say in
+the matter."
+
+When they returned on to the poop, there was an expression of eagerness
+and excitement on the faces of the young knights which showed how
+anxiously they had been awaiting the result of the conference below.
+Gervaise stepped on to a bench, and motioned to them to close up round
+him.
+
+"Comrades," he said, "although the responsibility of whatever course may
+be taken must rest upon my shoulders, yet I think it but right that,
+as a general before a battle often calls a council of war to assist him
+with its advice, so I should lay before you the two courses open to us,
+and ask your opinion upon them. Sir Ralph Harcourt and I are of one mind
+in the matter, but as the decision is a grave one we should be loath to
+act upon it without your concurrence."
+
+He then repeated the alternatives as he had laid them before Ralph.
+"Now," he went on, "as you see, there is grave danger, and much risk
+in the one course; but if successful its advantages are obvious. On
+the other hand, the second plan is more sure, more prudent, and more in
+accordance with the instructions I have received. I ask you to let me
+know frankly your opinion on the subject. If your view agrees with ours,
+although it will not relieve me from the responsibility of deciding,
+it will at least, in the event of things turning out badly, be a
+satisfaction to know that the course had your approval, and that it was
+your desire, as well as ours, that we should undertake it. First, then,
+let all who are in favour of following the pirates go to the starboard
+side of the deck, while those who are in favour of joining Visconti, and
+laying this serious matter we have discovered before him, move to the
+larboard side."
+
+There was a rush of the knights to the right, and not one moved to the
+other side.
+
+"Your decision is the same as ours," Gervaise said. "To the north, then!
+If there is great peril in the adventure, there is also great honour to
+be gained."
+
+The knights gave a shout of satisfaction at finding that their choice
+was also that of the officers.
+
+"Lay her head to the north," Gervaise said to the pilot. Then he went
+to the end of the poop, and ordered the slaves to row on. "Row a long,
+steady stroke, such as you can maintain for many hours. We have a long
+journey before us, and there is need for haste. Now is the time for
+willing work."
+
+The oars dipped into the water, and the galley was soon moving along
+at a much faster pace than that at which they had performed the journey
+from Rhodes. The slaves had not, from their benches, been able to see
+what had passed on board the dismantled vessel, but from the order and
+the change of course, they had no doubt that the knights had obtained
+some clue to the direction taken by the corsairs who had captured and
+sacked the ship.
+
+"There is but little wind," Gervaise said to Ralph, "and their sails
+will be of slight use to them; therefore we shall go fully three feet to
+their two. It is quite possible that we may not catch sight of them,
+for we cannot tell exactly the course they will take. We shall steer for
+Cape Carbonara, which is some hundred and thirty miles distant. If we
+do not see them by the time we get there, we shall be sure that we have
+passed them on the way, unless, indeed, a strong wind should spring up
+from the south. However, I hope that we shall catch sight of them before
+that, for we shall be able from our lookout to discover their masts and
+sails some eight or ten miles away, while they will not be able to see
+us until we are within half that distance. They cannot be more than
+twenty miles away now, for the light breeze will aid them but little,
+and as they will see no occasion for haste, they will not be rowing at
+their full power, with so long a passage before them."
+
+Already, indeed, one of the knights had perched himself on the seat at
+the top of a low mast some fifteen feet above the poop, that served as a
+lookout.
+
+"You can see nothing yet, I suppose, Cairoli?"
+
+"No; the line of sea is clear all round."
+
+It was indeed some four hours before the knight on the lookout cried
+that he could make out three dark specks on the horizon. Gervaise at
+once ascended to the lookout, by the ladder that was fixed against the
+post.
+
+"They are making to the left of the course we are taking. Turn her head
+rather more to the west. That will do. They are directly ahead now." He
+then came down to the deck again. "I would that we had seven or eight
+more hours of daylight, Ralph, instead of but three at the outside.
+However, as we know the course they are taking, we are not likely to
+miss them, for as we shall not be near enough for them to make us out
+before the sun sets, there will be no chance of their changing it. Do
+you think they will row all night?"
+
+"I should not think so. If the land were nearer they might keep on until
+they make it, but as they have had no wind since daylight, they will lie
+on their oars until morning. You see, at sunset they will still be some
+eighty miles from Cape Carbonara, and the slaves could not possibly row
+that distance without rest; so that if we keep on we may take them by
+surprise."
+
+"That is what I have been thinking, Ralph, but it would be well not to
+attack them until nearly daybreak. We should capture one galley easily
+enough; but the others, being ignorant of our force, might make off in
+different directions, and we might lose both of them. If, on the other
+hand, we could fall upon them a short time before daylight, we should be
+able to keep them in sight, and, even if they separated, they would soon
+come together and continue their course, or, as I hope, when they see
+that we are alone, bear up and fight us. I think that our best plan will
+be to row on until it is dark, then give the slaves six hours' rest, and
+after that go on quietly. If we can make them out, which we may do if
+they have lights on board, we will stop, and wait until it is the hour
+to attack them. If we miss them, we will row on to Sardinia and lie up,
+as we proposed, until they come along."
+
+"I think that will be a very good plan, Gervaise."
+
+Before sunset the three pirate ships could be clearly made out from the
+deck, but the pilot judged them to be fully ten miles away. Half an hour
+later the slaves were told to cease rowing. Gervaise had ordered the
+cooks to prepare them a good meal, and this was at once served, together
+with a full ration of wine. As soon as they had consumed it, they were
+told to lie down and sleep, as at one o'clock the galley would be again
+under way.
+
+The knights' supper was served below, as lights on the poop might be
+made out, should a lookout be placed by the corsairs in their tops.
+
+"We had better follow the example of the galley slaves," Gervaise said,
+rising as soon as the meal was finished, "and, with the exception of
+Spain, who is on watch, turn in to sleep till we are off again. All of
+you will, of course, don your armour on rising."
+
+At the appointed hour the galley was again under way. There was not a
+breath of air, and before starting, pieces of cloth were wrapped round
+the oars at the rowlocks to deaden the sound, which might otherwise have
+been heard at a considerable distance on so still a night. After an hour
+and a half's rowing, the knight on the lookout said that he could see a
+light some distance ahead. The pilot, an experienced old sailor, joined
+him, and speedily descended to the poop again.
+
+"It is a ship's light," he said. "I should say that it was a lantern on
+board the ship of the captain of the expedition, and is shown to enable
+the other two to keep near him. I cannot say how far it is away, for
+I do not know at what height it hangs above the water; but I should
+imagine, from the feebleness of the light, that it must be some two
+miles distant."
+
+As soon as the light had been noticed, the slaves had been ordered to
+cease rowing, and they were now told that they would not be required
+again for fully two hours. When the first gleam of dawn appeared in
+the east they were called to their work again. The lantern was still
+burning, and, in a quarter of an hour, the knights on the poop were
+able, in the broadening light, to make out three shadowy forms some
+two miles ahead of them. They decreased this distance by more than half
+before they could discern any signs of life or motion on board. Then
+a sudden stir was apparent; they could hear shouts from one vessel to
+another, oars were thrust out, and an effort made to get the heads of
+the ships in the same direction, so as to catch the light breeze that
+had just sprung up.
+
+The moment he saw that the galley was discovered, Gervaise shouted down
+to the slaves to row their hardest, and told the pilot to steer for the
+ship farthest to the east. She was some four or five hundred yards from
+her nearest consort, and the same distance separated that vessel from
+the third craft.
+
+"We shall have time to carry her, Ralph, before the others come to her
+assistance, and they will only arrive one at a time. If we were to lie
+alongside the middle craft, which is probably that of the chief, as it
+is she that has the light burning, we might have the other two upon us
+before we had done with her, for she is evidently the largest, and most
+likely the strongest handed, of them."
+
+The leader of the pirates evidently saw that there was no chance of
+evading the fight. A flag was run up to the masthead of his ship, and
+the three vessels began to endeavour to turn, so as to meet the galley.
+The operation, however, took some time. In the confusion, orders were
+misunderstood, and instead of all the slaves on one side rowing whilst
+those on the other side backed, all order was lost, and long before the
+craft for which the galley was making had got round, the latter was upon
+her.
+
+"Shall I ram her, Sir Gervaise?" the pilot asked.
+
+"No; we might damage ourselves; besides, I do not want to sink her.
+Sheer away the oars on one side!"
+
+The galley carried eight guns--three on each side of the poop, and two
+forward; and these had been loaded with small pieces of iron. A few
+shots had been fired by the pirates, but, owing to the confusion that
+prevailed on board, the guns were discharged so hurriedly that the shot
+either flew overhead or passed wide of the galley. Excited as the young
+knights were, and eager for the fray, a general laugh broke out as the
+galley swept along by the pirate ship, breaking many of her oars, and
+hurling all the slaves who manned them backwards off their benches. A
+moment later the guns poured their iron contents among the pirates who
+clustered thickly on the forecastle and poop, and as the vessels grated
+together the knights sprang on board the corsair.
+
+The members of the English langue had each been provided with short
+pieces of rope, and before joining their companions in the fray they
+lashed the vessels together, side by side. The fight was a very short
+one. France and Auvergne, led by Ralph Harcourt, boarded at the bow, the
+other five langues at the poop; and so impetuous was their onset that
+the pirates, who had still scarce recovered from their surprise at being
+hastily aroused from sleep to repel the attack of the foe who had so
+suddenly sprung out from the darkness upon them, offered but a feeble
+resistance. Many threw themselves overboard, and swam to the ship
+nearest to them; others were cut down; and the rest flung away their
+arms, and cried for quarter.
+
+All who did so were, without the loss of a minute's time, thrown down
+into the hold of their ship, and the hatches secured over them. It had
+before been arranged that Ralph should take the command of the corsair,
+having with him France, Auvergne, and Germany. As soon, therefore, as
+the captives were fastened below, Gervaise called the knights of the
+other four langues back to the deck of the galley. The lashings were
+cast off, she was pushed from the side of the prize, and the oars were
+got out. There was no time to be lost, for the largest of the three
+pirate ships, which had, directly it was seen that her consort
+was captured, poured two heavy broadsides into the prize, was now
+approaching--rowing but slowly, however, for the third vessel to come
+up.
+
+She was but a hundred yards away when the galley swept round the bow of
+the prize and advanced to meet her. As she did so, Ralph discharged the
+eight guns of the prize, which he had at once reloaded, into the bow of
+the corsair, the shot raking the crowded deck from end to end. When but
+a few yards distant, the two bow guns of the galley poured in a shower
+of missiles, and a moment later she ran alongside the pirate, the poop
+guns, as before, preparing the way for the boarders. But no sooner had
+they leapt on deck than they were met by the pirates, headed by their
+captain.
+
+Gervaise had specially charged the knights not to allow themselves to
+be carried away by their ardour. "We are sure to be greatly outnumbered,
+and, when we first spring on board, we must cut our way across the deck,
+and then form ourselves in a double or treble line across it, and, so
+fighting, gradually force them before us."
+
+This, in spite of the efforts of the pirates, was accomplished, and,
+once formed, the corsairs strove in vain to break through the wall
+of steel. For a time, however, no forward movement could be made, so
+furious were the attacks upon them, led by the pirate chief. Several
+times breaches were made in the front rank, but the knights behind each
+time bore back the assault, and restored the line. The knights had won
+their way half along the poop when a yell of exultation rose from the
+corsairs as the third of their vessels rowed up on the other side of the
+galley, and her crew sprang on board it. Gervaise called the knights of
+the second line from their places, and ranged them along the bulwark, to
+prevent the Moors from boarding from the poop of the galley.
+
+Then for a moment he looked round. The prize was creeping up, and was a
+length or two away, coming up alongside. Its approach was also noticed
+by the pirates, who, with wild shouts, flung themselves upon their
+opponents. Gervaise sprang forward to take the place of a young Italian
+knight, who staggered back, with his helmet cleft by a heavy blow from
+the keen yataghan of the pirate captain. The corsair, shouting his war
+cry of "Allah!" sprang with the bound of a wild cat upon Gervaise; his
+weapon descended on his uplifted guard, and shore right through the
+stout blade. With a shout of triumph, the corsair raised his arm to
+repeat the blow; but Gervaise in turn sprang forward, and struck with
+all his force with the pommel of his sword on the forehead of his
+opponent. The latter fell as if shot, his weapon dropping from his hand
+beside him.
+
+Dismayed at the fall of their leader, his followers recoiled for a
+moment. Another tall pirate sprang forward to take his place, and,
+shouting to them to follow, was about to throw himself upon Gervaise,
+when a gun crashed out close alongside. A storm of iron swept away the
+front line of Moors, and the shout of "St. John!" "St. John!" rose above
+the din. It was one of the bow guns of the prize, and as she swept along
+gun after gun poured its contents among the pirates.
+
+"Do you clear the galley, Ralph. We can manage here now," Gervaise said,
+as Ralph leapt on board. The latter, followed by his party of knights,
+rushed across the poop, and sprang on to the galley among the pirates,
+who had been striving in vain to break through the line of defenders.
+Gervaise called to his party to follow him, and, taking the offensive,
+fell upon the remnant of the corsairs who still held the forward end of
+the poop.
+
+The discharge of the cannon at such close quarters had wrought terrible
+havoc among them, and the pirates, with but slight resistance, turned,
+and either ran down the ladder or leapt into the water. The knights
+followed them forward among the benches of the rowers, who cheered
+loudly in many tongues as they passed them. At the forecastle the Moors
+made another stand, but the knights forced their way up, and in two
+minutes all was over.
+
+"Now to the aid of our comrades!" Gervaise shouted, as the last of the
+corsairs was struck down.
+
+Ralph's party had indeed cleared the poop of the galley, but they in
+vain endeavoured to climb up on to that of the third pirate ship, whose
+superior height gave a great advantage to its defenders. Gervaise leapt
+down on to the bow of the galley, followed by the knights, and then ran
+aft until he could climb into the waist of the pirate. So intent were
+the corsairs upon defending the poop that they did not see what was
+going on elsewhere, and Gervaise had obtained a fair footing before he
+was noticed. Then a number of men ran down and attacked his party. But
+it was too late, for the whole of the knights had, by this time, leaped
+on board. Their assailants were forced back, and, pressing close upon
+them, the knights gained the poop before the main body of the pirates
+were aware of their coming.
+
+Warned by the shouts and shrieks of their comrades that they had been
+taken in the rear, the Moslems who were defending the side of the poop
+wavered for a moment. Ralph took advantage of their hesitation, and
+sprang on board, his companions pouring in after him. There was a
+stern and desperate fight. The Moslems fought with the fury of despair,
+disdaining to ask or accept quarter. A few leapt overboard, preferring
+death by drowning to that by the swords of the Christians; but the great
+majority died fighting to the last. A shout of triumph rose from the
+knights as the last of the Moslems fell.
+
+The first impulse of all of them was to take off their helmets in order
+to breathe the fresh air, and for a while they all stood panting from
+their exertions.
+
+"Nobly and gallantly done, comrades!" Gervaise exclaimed. "This is
+indeed a victory of which we have all a right to be proud. Now, the
+first thing is to free the slaves of their shackles; there are many
+white faces among them. Let our langue look after the wounded, while the
+released captives clear the decks of the bodies of the fallen pirates."
+
+It took an hour's hard work to knock off the chains of the slaves. The
+greater portion of them were Christians--Greeks, Italians, Spaniards,
+and French, who had been captured in various raids by the corsairs; and
+among them were the crew of the ship that had been overhauled by the
+galley on the previous day. Besides these, there were a few Moslems who
+had been sentenced to labour in the galleys for various crimes.
+
+Among the Christians, the joy at their liberation was intense. Some
+laughed, some cried, others were too overcome to speak coherently. Among
+the rest were found, to the intense pleasure of their rescuers, three
+knights of the Order who had for years been missing. They had been taken
+prisoners on an island at which the galley to which they belonged
+had touched. Many of the knights had landed, and three of them, all
+belonging to the langue of Italy, had wandered away from the rest, and
+had not returned. A search had been made for them, and it was discovered
+that a struggle had taken place. As there were no marks of blood, it
+was supposed that they were suddenly pounced upon by a party of hidden
+marauders, who had been watching them from some hiding place, and had
+thrown themselves upon the knights before they had had time to draw
+their swords. Following the trail by bushes broken down, and plants
+crushed under foot, it was found to lead to a creek on the other side
+of the island. Here there were signs that a craft had been anchored,
+as there were the ashes of fires, fragments of food, and other matters,
+scattered about on the shore. Hours had passed before the knights had
+been missed, and therefore the craft in which they had been carried off
+was long out of sight. Letters were written by the grand master to
+the Pasha of Syria, to the Emperor of Egypt, and to the Bey of Tunis,
+offering to ransom the knights, but all replied that they were unaware
+of any such captives having been landed.
+
+An attempt had then been made to ascertain whether they had been carried
+to Tripoli; but the bey had little authority over the various tribesmen
+along the coast, and only replied that no such captives had been sold in
+the city. Thus all hope of ransoming them had died away, and their names
+were inscribed in the list of those who had fallen into the hands of the
+infidels, but of whose subsequent fate no clue could be obtained.
+
+All were greatly emaciated, and their faces showed signs of the
+sufferings they had undergone. The young knights were all familiar
+with their names, but personally none had known them, for they had been
+carried off two or three months before Gervaise and Ralph Harcourt had
+arrived at Rhodes.
+
+All three had struggled desperately to break their chains while the
+fight was going on, and had, as soon as the contest was decided, risen
+to their feet and shouted the battle cry of the Order; then, overcome by
+their emotions, they sank down upon their benches, and remained as if
+in a stupor until the knights, who had hurried first to them, struck
+off their fetters. Then the three men grasped each other's hands, while
+tears streamed down their cheeks.
+
+"It is no dream, comrades," one of them said, in a hoarse voice. "We are
+free again. Let us first return thanks to God for our release, and then
+we can thank these our brothers."
+
+The three knights knelt at the benches where they had toiled and
+suffered, and hid their faces in their hands. No sounds came from their
+lips, but their stifled sobs and the heaving of their naked shoulders,
+seamed and scarred by the strokes of their taskmasters' whips, told
+the young knights, who stood unhelmeted and silent around, how deep was
+their emotion. Then they rose.
+
+"I am Fabricius Caretto," one said; "this is Giacomo Da Vinci; this
+Pietro Forzi: all knight commanders of the Order, and now for six years
+prisoners in the hands of these corsairs. Assuredly no one would know
+us, so changed are we." He looked round inquiringly for a familiar face.
+"Your commander must surely be a comrade of ours?"
+
+"We know all your names," Gervaise said, coming forward, "though none
+of us reached the convent until after your capture. I have the honour
+to command this galley. My name is Gervaise Tresham, and I have for my
+lieutenant Sir Ralph Harcourt. All of us, glad as we are at the capture
+we have effected of these three corsairs, are still more pleased that we
+should have been the means of rescuing three noble knights of our Order
+from captivity. Now, I pray you first of all to accompany me on
+board the galley, where we will do all we can to make you forget the
+sufferings you have gone through. After you have bathed, and reclad
+yourselves, I will present to you the knights my comrades, amongst whom
+are seven of your own langue. Three of these I will tell off to see to
+your comfort, for, as you will understand, I have my hands full indeed
+at present."
+
+"First, before all things, Sir Knight, let me express to you all our
+deep gratitude and our admiration of the gallant deed that you have
+accomplished in thus, single handed, capturing three vessels belonging
+to the fiercest and most dreaded of the corsairs of Tripoli. God bless
+you all, sirs"--and his voice broke again--"for the deed you have done,
+and for bringing us out of this living hell!"
+
+Gervaise called to three of the Italian knights, and, followed by them
+and the released captives, led the way to the galley. Here he left them
+in charge of their countrymen. "Give them each a draught of old Cyprus,
+and something to eat," he said aside to one of the knights; "they sorely
+need refreshment before aught else, for, as you see, they are well nigh
+dazed with this unlooked for change. I will put out clothes enough
+for one of them; the others you must supply for the present from your
+stores. Now I must be off."
+
+There was indeed much to be done. Four of the knights were told off to
+attend upon the most urgent cases among their own wounded. Only two of
+their number had been killed outright, but there were four serious cases
+among the wounded, while eight or ten others had received wounds that
+required bandaging and attending to. As fast as the slaves' fetters
+were struck off, food and wine were given to them, together with such
+garments as could be found at the moment. Then the bodies of the fallen
+pirates were thrown overboard, while the wounded were attended to, and
+the released Christians were divided equally between the three prizes.
+To each of these the knights of one of the langues were told off, the
+seniors being appointed to the command. There were in all some ninety
+Christian captives on board the three ships. Thus each vessel had a
+complement of seven knights and thirty Christians, and to these were
+added ten of the thirty Moslems found at the oars, and fifteen of the
+pirates to whom quarter had been given.
+
+It was past noon before all these arrangements had been made, and during
+the time so occupied, the ships lay idly side by side, drifting slowly
+before the wind, the sails having been lowered as soon as the struggle
+was over. Up to this time, the knights had been too busily engaged to
+think of food, but they were right glad when they were summoned to a
+meal on board the galley.
+
+Gervaise found the three knights in the cabin, dressed in the usual
+attire of the Order. They presented a very different appearance, indeed,
+to that which they wore when he had first seen them. They had bathed,
+and combed their matted hair, which was alone sufficient to transform
+them, but the feeling that they were once more free men, and knights of
+an honoured Order, had done even more to effect the change; and although
+they looked thin and worn, the martial bearing had come back naturally
+as they donned their knightly robes and buckled on swords.
+
+"I am glad to see that you are better," Gervaise said, as he went up to
+greet them. "Twenty years seem to have dropped off your shoulders since
+this morning."
+
+"We are not the same men, Sir Gervaise. We were slaves, and are now
+free. We were Christian dogs; now we are Christian knights. We were
+subject to scoffs and blows; now, thank God, we have swords to strike
+with, and though as yet our arms may not have regained their full
+strength, we could at least bear a share in a fray. Our comrades have
+been telling us somewhat of how this wonderful thing has come about,
+and have been explaining what at first filled us with surprise, that a
+galley should be manned solely by young knights, of whom their commander
+is one of the youngest. We can testify, at least, that had the grand
+master been himself in command, and his crew composed of veteran
+knights, he could have done no better."
+
+"We were fortunate in taking them so much by surprise that the first of
+their ships fell into our hands before her consorts could come to her
+assistance; and her guns did us good service in our struggle with the
+others."
+
+"The matter was well arranged, as well as gallantly fought," one of the
+other knights said. "Had you first fallen foul of the chief's galley,
+it would have gone hard with you, for his crew were so strong that you
+could scarce have overcome them before the other two vessels came up to
+his assistance."
+
+"Now let us to our meal," Gervaise said.
+
+The three knights were placed at the head of the table by him, and it
+was pleasant to see how they enjoyed their food.
+
+"I can scarce persuade myself that I am not dreaming," Caretto said.
+"Sometimes, when lying at night, wet through with the damp air, I have
+wondered to myself whether I could ever have lived thus, and whether
+I should ever exchange my hard bread and water for what seemed to me
+fabulous luxuries, though at the time one had taken them as a matter of
+course. You cannot tell how strange it feels to me to come back to the
+old life again."
+
+"You will soon be accustomed to it," Gervaise said, with a smile, "and
+then you will look upon your captivity as a dream, just as you then
+regarded your past life."
+
+"I suppose, Sir Gervaise," Pietro Forzi said, "that you will sail direct
+for Rhodes with your prizes?"
+
+"No indeed," Gervaise replied. "At the same time that we learned, from a
+dying man left on board the ship the pirates captured yesterday, of
+the course they had taken, and were so enabled to follow them, we also
+learned that they were on their way to join a corsair fleet that was
+collecting at some point on the eastern side of Sardinia, with the
+intention of sweeping the coast of Italy. It was this, rather than the
+capture of these three vessels, that induced us to disobey the general
+instructions we had been given to cruise along the northern coast of
+Africa, and determined us to push north to give warning along the coast
+from Naples to Genoa of the danger that threatened, and, if possible, to
+enable Genoa to fit out her galleys to encounter the corsairs. That duty
+has still to be fulfilled, though I fear that Genoa will be able to
+do little, for of late she has been engaged in a long civil struggle
+between her great families, and has taken but a small part in maritime
+affairs. However, we can at least warn her, as well as Naples, Pisa,
+and other towns, and may possibly find some opportunity for ourselves
+striking another blow against the pirates."
+
+"If so, certainly we shall be glad to accompany you, if you will allow
+us to serve under you; for nothing would please us so much as the
+opportunity of paying off a small share of the vengeance we owe them.
+But of course, if you would rather, we will sail for Rhodes in the
+prizes."
+
+"I am not thinking of sending them to Rhodes at present," Gervaise said.
+"It seems to me that we may be able, in some way, to utilise them to
+advantage. They have their sails, and rowers for the oars. There will
+be, in each, besides seven knights of the Order, thirty men who, like
+yourselves, must feel willing to strike a blow at their late oppressors.
+I need hardly say that I shall be glad indeed to have the company and
+aid of three such well known knights of the Order, and would, could I
+do so, gladly resign my command into your experienced hands. But this
+I cannot do, and, anticipating that you would be willing to join us in
+this expedition, I have been thinking how I could best utilise your aid.
+I have thought that, if you would accept the positions, I would appoint
+one of you to each of the prizes, to act, not as its commander, but as
+the leader of the band of released captives. Most of them are sailors,
+of course, and with them you could work the guns and give effective aid
+to the little party of knights in any actual fight."
+
+The three knights all exclaimed that they would gladly accept the posts
+he offered them.
+
+"The idea is a capital one, Sir Gervaise; and, as long as it does
+not come to close fighting, the three ships should be able to render
+efficient aid to your galley in any encounter. They will be, at any
+rate, a match for their own number of pirate ships," Caretto said.
+
+As soon as the meal concluded, the Moslem captives were questioned one
+by one as to the rendezvous at which the pirate fleet was to assemble;
+all, however, protested that the place was known only to the three
+commanders, all of whom had fallen in the fight.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIV THE CORSAIR FLEET
+
+
+An hour later all was ready for a start. The knights of the langues of
+France, Germany, and Spain went on board their respective ships, as did
+the three parties of released captives, with the knights who were to
+command them, while the rowers took their seats on the benches, shackled
+with the chains that had recently held the Christians. The wind was from
+the south, and with sails and oars the prizes were able to keep fairly
+abreast of the galley. With a few short intervals of rest, the slaves
+continued their work all night, until, shortly before daybreak, land was
+seen ahead, and the pilot at once pronounced it to be Cape Carbonara.
+
+"A good landfall, Gervaise," Ralph said. "The pilot has done right well.
+I suppose you mean to anchor when you get there?"
+
+"Certainly, Ralph. The slaves will have rowed nearly eighteen hours,
+with only two hours' rest. They must have some hours, at least, of sleep
+before we go on. As you and I have been up all night, we will turn in
+also. We will send a boat ashore to try and find out from the natives
+they may come across whether any vessels, bearing the appearance of
+Moorish corsairs, have been seen passing up the coast, and also to find
+out what bays and inlets there are where they would be likely to anchor.
+Some of the Italian knights had best go with the boat, for though I
+believe these people speak a different dialect to those of the mainland,
+they would have more chance of understanding them than any of the
+others."
+
+The sun had risen when the little fleet came to an anchor close to the
+cape. A boat was at once prepared to go ashore, and Gervaise begged
+Fabricius Caretto, the senior of the rescued Italian knights, to
+endeavour to find out whether a swift sailing craft of some kind could
+be hired. If so, he was to secure her on any terms, and come off in her
+at once to the galley.
+
+Gervaise had already talked the matter over with Ralph, and they agreed
+that a strongly manned craft of this kind would go faster than any of
+those they had taken, and that, moreover, it would be a pity to weaken
+their force by sending one of the prizes away. Having seen them off,
+Gervaise retired to the cabin and threw himself down for a short sleep,
+leaving the knights who had been off watch during the night, to see
+that all went well. In two hours he was roused. A native craft had come
+alongside with Sir Fabricius Caretto.
+
+"I think she is just the craft for us," the knight said, as Gervaise
+came on deck. "She belongs to a large fishing village just round the
+point to the left. There were several boats there, but the villagers all
+said that this was the speediest vessel anywhere along the coast. She
+belongs to two brothers, who, with four men, constitute her regular
+crew; but I have arranged for twelve others to go in her, in order that
+they may row her along at a good pace if the wind falls light."
+
+"Are your companions come off yet?"
+
+"No; but we can hoist a flag for their recall."
+
+"Do so. I shall be greatly obliged if you will undertake this mission to
+the seaports. It needs one of name and rank to speak with the nobles and
+officials authoritatively."
+
+"I will gladly do so, Sir Gervaise. Give me your instructions, and you
+can rely upon my carrying them out."
+
+"I thank you greatly, Sir Fabricius, and shall be glad if you will take
+with you any two of the knights you may select. I have to write letters
+for you to deliver to the authorities at Naples, Pisa, and Genoa. I
+shall write but briefly, and leave you to explain matters more fully. I
+shall merely say that I have intelligence of the arrival here of a fleet
+of Moorish corsairs, of whose strength I am ignorant, but that assuredly
+their intention is to make a raid on the commerce of the coast, and
+perhaps to land at unprotected places. At Ostia, after warning the
+authorities to send orders along the coast for the inhabitants to be on
+their guard, pray them to carry word at once to Rome, and request his
+Holiness the Pope to order some armed galleys to put to sea as soon
+as possible. Beg them at Naples and Pisa to do the same thing. But of
+course it is from Genoa that we must hope for the most assistance.
+
+"In each place you will, if possible, see the syndic himself, and such
+of his council as can be got quickly together. The moment you have done
+all you can at Genoa sail for the Island of Madalena, which lies off the
+northeastern point of the island. There you will either find us, or a
+boat with a message where to direct your course. I think perhaps it will
+be best to omit Naples--it will save you fully a day, if not two, to do
+so. Pray them at Ostia to send off news down the coast, or to request
+the papal authorities to despatch mounted messengers. 'Tis likely that,
+at first, at any rate, the corsairs will try the narrower waters to the
+north. From here to Ostia is nigh two hundred miles, and if the wind is
+brisk you may arrive there tomorrow afternoon, and start again at night,
+arriving at Pisa before noon on the following day; while, allowing for
+four or five hours to ascend the river there, you may be at Genoa next
+morning.
+
+"Three hours should suffice to gather from the authorities what force
+they can despatch, and as soon as you have learned this, embark again
+and sail south. You may reach Madalena in two days. Thus, at the
+earliest, it must be from six to seven days before you can bring us the
+news there; if you meet with calms or foul winds you may be well nigh
+double that time. If at Ostia you can get a faster craft than this, hire
+it, or take a relay of fresh rowers. I will furnish you with means when
+I give you the letters."
+
+In less than half an hour Gervaise was on deck again. The boat had
+returned with the other Italian knights. An ample store of provisions
+had been placed on board the Sperondra, both for the crew and for the
+three knights, and, without a minute's delay, these took their places on
+board, the great sails were hoisted, and the craft glided rapidly away.
+
+"The villagers spoke truly as to her speed," Ralph said, as they looked
+after her. "Even with this light wind, she is running fully six miles an
+hour, and as, by the look of the sky, there will be more of it soon, she
+will make the run to Ostia well within the time we calculated."
+
+Gervaise now questioned the other Italian knights as to what information
+they had gained.
+
+They said the peasants had told them that several strange craft, using
+both oars and sails, had been noticed passing northwards, and that so
+strong was the opinion that these were either Algerines or Tunisians
+that, for the last three or four days, none of the fishing craft had
+ventured to put to sea. They were able to tell but little as to the
+bays along the coastline, which they described as very rugged and
+precipitous. Five or six little streams ran, they knew, down from
+the mountains. They thought the most likely places for corsairs to
+rendezvous would be in a deep indentation north of Cape Bellavista, or
+behind Cape Comino. If not at these places, they might meet in the great
+bay at whose entrance stands Tavolara Island, and that beyond, there
+were several deep inlets on the northeastern coast of the Island.
+Gervaise had a consultation with Ralph.
+
+"The first thing is to find out where these corsairs have their meeting
+place, Ralph; and this must be done without their catching sight of the
+galley or of the prizes, which some of them would be sure to recognise."
+
+Ralph nodded.
+
+"It is a difficult question, Gervaise. Of course, if we had a boat
+speedy enough to row away from the corsairs it would be easy enough; but
+with wind and oars they go so fast that no boat could escape them."
+
+"That is quite certain, Ralph; and therefore, if it is done by a boat,
+it must be by one so small and insignificant that they would pay but
+little attention to it if they caught sight of it. My idea is that we
+should take our own little boat, which is a fast one, paint it black, to
+give it the appearance of a fisherman's boat, and hire a couple of good
+rowers from the village. This, with one knight dressed as a fisherman,
+should go ahead of us, and explore every inlet where ships could be
+sheltered. We would follow ten miles behind. When we get near the places
+where the natives think the fleet is likely to be, the boat must go on
+at night, while we anchor. In that way they ought to be able to discover
+the corsairs, while themselves unseen, and to gain some idea of their
+numbers and the position in which they are anchored, and bring us back
+news."
+
+"Shall I go myself, Gervaise?"
+
+"I could not spare you, Ralph. The risk of capture does not seem to me
+to be great, but there certainly is a risk, and I dare not part with
+you. It had better be an Italian, because there will doubtless be an
+opportunity of landing at villages and questioning the inhabitants,
+therefore we will send Fosco. If there are some eight or ten corsairs
+gathered in any of these bays the news is sure to travel along the
+shore, and we may get some tidings in that way. The first thing is to
+send off to the village again to fetch two young fishermen; they must
+be active fellows, strong, and possessed of some courage. I will ask da
+Vinci to go himself and select them. While he is away we will paint our
+boat black, and make ready for her to start at once; the sooner she is
+off the better."
+
+The Italian knight at once undertook the mission, and started for the
+shore. Fosco, who had been chosen principally because he was light of
+frame, as well as very shrewd and intelligent, was then called up, and
+his mission explained to him. He was delighted at having been selected.
+Gervaise took him down to the cabin, and they consulted the maps with
+which the galley was furnished.
+
+"You will row on to Muravera; it is some twenty miles from here. You
+see, the village lies at the mouth of a river. As soon as you arrive
+there, you will land and find out whether there is any report of
+Moorish pirates having been seen along the coast. We shall be there this
+evening, and you will come on board and report. Next day you will get to
+Lunasei, which is about five miles on this side of Cape Bellavista, and
+they will certainly know there if the pirates are lying behind the cape.
+If they are so, you will row back to meet us; if they are not, you will
+remain there until we come up in the evening. Remember that, should you
+on either day be seen and chased, and you find they are overtaking you,
+you will make for the shore, land, and conceal yourselves. We shall keep
+along near the coast, and as we pass you can come down to the water's
+edge and signal to us to take you off. Now you had better disguise
+yourself, so as to be in readiness to start as soon as da Vinci
+comes off with the men. You will only need to take a small stock of
+provisions, as each night you can replenish them here."
+
+An hour later da Vinci came off with two stalwart young fishermen. The
+little boat had already been painted, and it was lowered at once; Fosco
+stepped into it, and started.
+
+Two hours later the prizes got up sail, and, accompanied by the galley,
+coasted quietly along the shore, arriving, late in the afternoon, at
+Muravera. Fosco at once came on board.
+
+"There is no news here beyond that which we gained this morning, Sir
+Gervaise," he said. "Strange ships have certainly been seen sailing
+north, but they did not approach the coast."
+
+A similar report was given at Lunasei; there were certainly no corsairs
+lying behind Cape Bellavista, or news would assuredly have reached the
+village. At Orosei, next day, the report was the same; there were no
+strange ships at Cape Comino. They had been warned overnight that
+the coast beyond the cape was so precipitous, that there would be no
+villages at which to make inquiries, and arranged with Fosco that the
+ships should anchor north of the cape, and that he should go on at once
+to inspect the next bay. If he found ships there, he was to return at
+once; if not, he was, at daybreak, to land at one of the villages in the
+bay, and to make inquiries.
+
+No news was brought in by him during the night.
+
+"It is evident the pirates are not in the bay, Gervaise," Ralph said, as
+they came on deck at daybreak.
+
+"Yes; and I am glad of it. It is a large bay, and if the Genoese send
+half a dozen galleys, some of the pirates might still escape, while the
+next bays are deeper and narrower, and it would be more easy to entrap
+them all. I have all along thought it most probable that they would
+rendezvous there. The maps show no villages for many miles round, and
+they might lie there for weeks without so much as a shepherd getting
+sight of them from the cliffs. Moreover, it is the nearest point for
+cutting off ships coming down between Corsica and the mainland, and they
+can, besides, snap up those proceeding from the south to Marseilles, as
+these, for the most part, pass between Sardinia and Corsica."
+
+At eight o'clock the boat was seen coming round the point.
+
+"Any news, Fosco?" Gervaise asked, as it approached the galley.
+
+"None, Sir Gervaise. They have heard nothing of pirates, nor seen
+anything of them."
+
+Exclamations of disappointment broke from the knights.
+
+"That makes it all the more likely," Gervaise said, "that they are
+lying in one of the inlets to the north. You see, lower down they kept
+comparatively close to the shore, being careless who might notice them;
+but as they approached their rendezvous, they would be more careful, and
+might either pass along at night, or keep far out. If they had not been
+anxious to conceal their near presence, they would have been likely to
+put into this bay in search of plunder and captives; for Tempe, one of
+the largest of the Sardinian towns, lies but a short distance away, and
+there must be a considerable amount of traffic."
+
+"There are four or five small craft lying there," Fosco, who had by this
+time stepped on board, put in, "and a considerable number of fishing
+boats. When I came upon the ships in the dark, I thought at first that
+I had lighted on the pirates, but on letting the boat drift closely by
+them I soon saw they were not corsair galleys."
+
+"Shall we get up anchor and go into the bay?" Ralph asked.
+
+"It were safer not to do so, Ralph. Possibly one of the craft lying
+there might be presently captured by them, and they might learn from her
+crew of the presence of a galley of the Order there. Therefore I think
+it best to remain where we are till nightfall, and then to proceed and
+anchor on the north side of the Island of Madalena, if we can find a
+sheltered cove where we could not be seen either from the land or by
+passing ships."
+
+During the day there was a good deal of discussion among the knights
+as to whether the corsairs might not already have sailed away. It was
+evident that if all their ships had arrived, there would be no motive
+for delay. Three ships they knew would never join them, and others might
+have been detained, from some cause or another. There could be no doubt
+that the pirates had already ample force for capturing as many merchant
+vessels as they might come across. But it might be intended to carry out
+some more daring project--to sack and burn towns along the coast, carry
+off the leading people for ransom, and fill the vessels with slaves--the
+attack being made simultaneously on several unprotected towns. A vast
+amount of plunder could thus be reaped, together with captives of even
+greater money value. Were this their plan, they would doubtless delay
+until all those who had promised to join in the expedition had arrived.
+The balance of opinion, then, was that the corsairs were still in
+hiding.
+
+By daybreak next morning they were moored in a sheltered little bay to
+the north of Madalena, the galley lying inside the prizes, so as to be
+concealed as much as possible from view of any craft that might happen
+to pass the mouth of the bay. Fosco started as soon as darkness fell in
+the evening, and returned early in the morning.
+
+"They are there," he shouted, as he neared the galley, "hidden in a deep
+inlet that runs into one of the narrow bays."
+
+"How many are there of them?"
+
+"Seventeen or eighteen, I could not say which. They are all moored side
+by side."
+
+By this time Fosco's boat had reached the galley.
+
+"You have done well indeed," Gervaise said, as the young knight ascended
+to the poop. "Now give us a full account of what you have seen."
+
+"As you know, Sir Gervaise, the bay opposite this island splits up into
+two, running a long way inland, like the fangs of a great tooth. I had,
+of course, no difficulty in finding the entrance to the bay itself, as
+it is but a short distance across the strait. I steered first for the
+left hand shore, and kept close along under the shadow of the cliffs,
+which, in many cases, rise almost straight out from the water. We rowed
+very quietly, fearing to run against a rock; for although it was light
+enough to see across the water, and to make out any craft that might be
+anchored there, it was very dark along the foot of the cliffs. There was
+no need for haste, as I knew I had plenty of time to explore both arms
+of the bay, and to be back here before day began to break.
+
+"We rowed up to the end of the inlet, and then, having assured ourselves
+that it was empty, came down the other side, and turned up the western
+arm. We had got some distance along when I fancied I heard voices,
+and so let the boat drift along, only dipping the oars in the water
+occasionally. I could make out no signs whatever of the corsairs, when
+suddenly we came upon a break in the cliffs. It was only some fifty
+yards across, and here a creek came in at right angles to the shore.
+I could have given a shout of pleasure as I looked up it, for there a
+score of lights were burning above a dark mass, and we could hear the
+sound of talking and laughter. It was but a glimpse I caught, for the
+men at once backed water, and we were soon round the corner again.
+
+"Up till then the fishermen had been ready enough to go where I wanted,
+but the sight of that clump of galleys regularly scared them, and they
+wanted to row straight away; but of course I pointed out to them that
+they had taken pay to do this thing, and that they had to do it. They
+said that if caught they would be either killed or made slaves of, and
+I could not contradict them, but said that, in the first place, as I was
+ready to run the risk, there was no reason why they shouldn't do so, and
+in the second, there was no chance whatever of their being taken, as,
+if discovered, we should get so long a start that we could either escape
+them altogether or run the boat ashore at some point where the trees
+came down to the water's edge, carry the boat up and hide it, and then
+move up into the hills until the corsairs had gone.
+
+"We waited there three or four hours, looking round the point
+occasionally. At the end of that time all was quiet. Two or three of
+the lanterns still burned, but there was no sign of life or movement on
+their decks. After waiting another half hour to ensure the crews being
+asleep, we rowed quietly up the creek, keeping within an oar's length of
+the rocks. There was not much to see; the galleys lay two abreast, and
+as there was no space between them, I supposed the whole were lashed
+together. There were eight of them on the side we went along, but I
+think there were only seven on the other side. As I thought it did not
+much matter whether there were fifteen or sixteen, and as the men were
+in a state of horrible fright, we turned and went back again, and I own
+I felt very glad myself when we got round the point without an alarm
+being given. We came quietly out, and it was fortunate we did so, for we
+had not gone a quarter of a mile when we heard the sound of oars, and,
+lying silently under the cliff, we saw two large galleys row past us."
+
+"It is a strong force, Gervaise," Ralph said, as they paced up and down
+the poop together. "Probably in each of those galleys are eighty or a
+hundred men, in addition to the rowers. It is evident that unless Genoa
+sends us help we shall not be able to interfere with their plans."
+
+"I don't know, Ralph. I think we may injure them sorely, though we might
+not be able to defeat them altogether. I want you tonight to take one of
+the prizes, and row round to the bay we passed, and there to buy three
+coasting vessels and six or eight fishing boats. Get as much pitch,
+oil, and other combustibles, as you can purchase in the villages on
+the shore. If you can engage a score of fishermen to man them, all the
+better. My idea is that if Caretto returns with news that the Genoese
+have no galleys ready for sea, we must do what we can to injure these
+corsairs. If we smear these craft you are going to fetch with pitch and
+oil, and fill the holds with combustibles, and so turn them into fire
+ships, we may at least do the pirates a tremendous lot of harm. When we
+get to the mouth of this inlet, we could have the fire ships rowed in by
+three or four men in each, they having a boat behind in which to escape
+as soon as the boats are lighted. The sight of a dozen craft coming
+down on them in flames would cause a terrific panic, for, moored closely
+together, as they are, if one took fire there would be little chance
+of the others escaping. Of course, we should add to the confusion by
+opening a fire with all our guns, and could hope to capture some at
+least of them as they tried to make their way out."
+
+"It is a grand idea, Gervaise; a splendid idea! It would be a terrific
+blow to the Moors, and would make the sea safe from them for a long
+time."
+
+"When you buy the other things, Ralph, get a quantity of black cloth--it
+matters not how coarse, or of what material; and also some white. As
+soon as you come back with it, all hands shall set to work to make the
+stuff up into mantles of the Order, with the white cross. We will put
+these on to the Christians in the prizes, and the Moors will suppose
+that they are attacked by four of the galleys of the Order. If you can
+get some more arms and some iron headpieces, all the better."
+
+"I will do what I can, Gervaise; the arms will certainly be wanted,
+for those we found on the decks were sufficient only to arm half the
+Christians. As to the steel caps, that will not matter so much, as in
+the darkness and confusion the sight of the mantles will be quite enough
+to convince the corsairs that we are all knights of the Order. By the
+way, Gervaise, we have not yet looked into the holds of the prizes."
+
+"That is so, Ralph; we knew, of course, that as the ships had but
+just started we should find nothing in them save the cargo of that
+unfortunate craft they captured."
+
+On searching they found, as they had expected, that the cargo of the
+captured ship had been of no great value. It consisted of wine, olive
+oil, and grain. These were all useful, for the number of mouths to be
+fed was considerable, and heavy inroads had already been made on the
+stores of the galley. The rowers of the four vessels were at once set to
+work to crush the grain between flat stones brought from the shore, and
+an ample supply of coarse flour for their use for at least a fortnight
+was obtained before sunset.
+
+As soon as darkness fell, Ralph and two of the French knights started
+in one of the prizes. Late on the following afternoon a sail was seen
+coming from the north, and before the sun set they were able to make
+her out to be the craft in which Caretto had sailed. The anchor of
+the galley was at once got up, and she rowed out to meet the boat and
+conduct her into the little bay. It was almost dark when they came
+within hailing distance.
+
+"What news do you bring, Sir Fabricius?"
+
+"Bad news, I regret to say. I do not think that Genoa will be able to
+send out any galleys for at least a fortnight. There have been civil
+dissensions, and fighting between rival factions, and in consequence her
+ships are all dismantled and laid up. Crews will have to be collected
+for them, repairs executed, and officers chosen; a fortnight will be the
+earliest time in which they can be here. Pisa has no war galleys, and
+unless the Pope sends some out directly he gets the news, the corsairs
+will have it their own way. Have you discovered them?"
+
+"Yes; they lie but a few miles from here. There were fifteen or sixteen
+of them two days ago, and two others joined them that night. You have
+lost no time indeed. We had scarce begun to expect you, Sir Fabricius,"
+he added, as the knight and his two comrades stepped on board.
+
+"I have done my best," the knight said angrily. "But I am in a rage with
+my ill success. All I have accomplished is that no merchant vessels will
+put to sea at present. At Ostia they would only send off a message to
+Rome, to ask for orders. At Pisa the authorities at first treated my
+story as a fiction, and, I believe, took me for an impostor; but on the
+news spreading, some knights came forward and recognised me. Then we had
+a meeting of the council. All talked, wrangled, and protested. They said
+that it was absurd to suppose that they could, at a moment's notice, fit
+out ships to cope with a fleet of corsairs; and their sole idea was to
+man the forts, and to repel an attack. However, mounted messengers
+were sent off at once, up and down the coast, to give warning to the
+inhabitants of the towns to put themselves into a posture of defence,
+and to the villagers to fly with their wives and families into the
+interior as soon as they saw galleys of doubtful appearance approaching.
+I was there but four hours, and then started for Genoa."
+
+"There was almost a panic there too, as the members of the council were
+mostly merchants, and were filled with dismay for the safety of their
+ships and goods at sea. Of course, there was no thought that the
+corsairs, however strong, would venture an attack upon Genoa itself.
+I told them that you had captured three of the corsairs with a single
+galley, and that if they could send you ten others you would probably be
+able to make head against the pirates; but, as I have told you, Genoa
+is at peace with all the world; her war galleys are laid up, and most of
+them would need repair and recaulking before they would be fit to send
+to sea. Although they maintained that no more than a week should elapse
+before they would be ready to sail I am right sure that it will be
+double that time before they are fitted out.
+
+"Of course, in Genoa I was well known, though my family estates lie near
+Mantua, and my acquaintances flocked round me and urged me to stay until
+the galleys were ready for sea. This I would not hear of, and, six hours
+after my arrival, started again. We made the voyage to Corsica at a good
+speed, but since then we have had the oars constantly out to help the
+sails. The men have well earned their pay, I can assure you. It is
+enough to make one mad with rage to think that these pirates will be
+able to harry the coast of Italy at their pleasure; for there can
+be little chance that they will abide quiet much longer at this
+rendezvous."
+
+"It is annoying, indeed," Gervaise agreed; and a murmur of
+disappointment ran round the assembled knights. "However, we have the
+consolation that we have done all we could, and I am sure that we shall
+do so in the future."
+
+Gervaise had charged Ralph to say nothing about the object of his
+mission, and the general supposition was that he had sailed to endeavour
+to purchase some bullocks, as the supply of meat was nearly exhausted.
+Ralph himself had let drop a few words to this effect, and had indeed
+been charged by Gervaise to bring off a few oxen if they could be
+obtained without loss of time. Gervaise was on deck at midnight, and
+soon afterwards the beat of oars was heard. It was a still night,
+and one of the knights on watch remarked to him, "It seems to me, Sir
+Gervaise, that the sound is a confused one, and that there must be
+several vessels rowing. Shall I call up our companions? It may be that
+it is the pirate fleet coming out."
+
+"You need not do that," Gervaise replied. "I am expecting Sir Ralph to
+bring back with him some fishing boats, for which I think I can find a
+use. We should have heard before this if the corsairs had been putting
+out. Fosco is in his boat watching the mouth of the inlet, and would
+have started with the news had there been any stir on board their
+galleys."
+
+It was a quarter of an hour before a number of dark objects entered the
+little bay. As soon as they did so, they ceased rowing, and the splashes
+of the anchors as they fell into the water were heard. Then came the
+sound of a boat's oars, and Ralph was soon alongside.
+
+"I see that you have succeeded, Ralph."
+
+"There is no fear of failing when one is ready to pay the full value of
+what one wants to get. I have bought three coasters and eight fishing
+boats, and have a sufficient store of pitch and oil, with plenty of
+straw and faggots. There was no difficulty in getting men to come with
+me. As soon as they heard that a fleet of eighteen Moorish galleys was
+in the next bay, they were ready enough to aid in any plan for their
+destruction, for they knew well enough that some of them would be sure
+to make raids all along the coast, sacking and burning, and carrying off
+men, women, and children, as slaves. I said I only wanted two men for
+each craft, but so many were willing to come that I have some thirty
+more than the number I asked for, and we can divide these among us. They
+are strong, active looking fellows."
+
+"We will keep them here then, Ralph. You see, there are one-and-twenty
+of our knights in the three prizes, and as we lost two in the
+capture, and four others are not fit to put on armour, we have but
+six-and-twenty, and the addition will be very welcome. What are they
+armed with?"
+
+"They have bows and arrows, and long pikes and axes."
+
+"Good. Have you managed to collect any more arms?"
+
+"Yes. The people are all charcoal burners and woodmen in winter, and
+I was therefore able to get together some thirty or forty axes and
+hatchets, which will be ample, with the arms we took from the Moors, to
+equip the ninety Christians."
+
+"I think we can depend upon these for fighting, Ralph."
+
+"I don't think there is any doubt about that. A few of them are pretty
+well worn out with labour and suffering, but all have gained strength
+and spirits greatly in the past week, and you may be sure that they
+will fight to the death rather than run the risk of another turn in the
+galleys."
+
+"And have you got the stuff to make the mantles?"
+
+"Yes. There was plenty of the coarse black cloth which they wear in
+summer--in winter, of course, they are clad in sheepskins; and I have
+sufficient white cotton cloth to make the crosses."
+
+"We have only one thing to wish for now, Ralph, and that is, that the
+corsairs may not take it into their heads to sail tomorrow. Fosco will
+bring me news at daybreak, and we will at once send another boat off to
+watch the mouth of the bay when he leaves it. If they sail, we cannot
+venture to attack them as long as they keep together, the odds are far
+too heavy, and our only plan will be to follow them at a distance, when
+we can just keep their upper sails in sight, and then to attack any
+detachment that may separate from the main body."
+
+"I hope it will not come to that, Gervaise. It would be hard indeed,
+when you have devised such a splendid plan, and we have got everything
+ready to carry it out, if they were to give us the slip. Do the others
+know anything about it yet?"
+
+"No. I thought it better to keep silence till tomorrow. No doubt some of
+the galley slaves understand enough of one or other of our languages
+to gather what is on foot. Besides, their late captives might, in their
+satisfaction at the thought of revenge, say enough to them to let them
+know that an attack on their fleet was intended, and one of them might,
+in some way, free himself from his irons and swim ashore. We know there
+is a small fishing village across the island, and there would be no
+difficulty in stealing a boat and making off with the news. I do not say
+that the risk is great; still, it were better not to throw away even
+a chance. The knights have all turned in in a very gloomy mood, for
+Caretto has returned with news that there is no hope of assistance from
+Genoa for a fortnight, and it seemed, therefore, that all our pains had
+been thrown away. And now we may as well turn in until daylight."
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XV A SPLENDID EXPLOIT
+
+
+Gervaise was up again at dawn. He was amused at the wonder of the
+knights, as they came up one by one, at the sight of the little fleet
+anchored outside them. As soon as it was fairly daylight, he sent off to
+the three prizes to request all the knights to come on board the galley.
+When all were assembled there he said, "You are all aware, comrades,
+that Sir Fabricius Caretto has brought news that the galleys at Genoa
+are all laid up, and that it will be a fortnight before they can put to
+sea. Long before that, the corsairs will assuredly be ravaging all the
+villages and small towns along the coast of Italy, unless we can prevent
+their doing so. It would be simple madness to try to attack them at sea;
+of that I feel sure you are all conscious. It would be only throwing
+away our lives and our galley."
+
+There was a murmur of assent among the knights. They were ready for any
+encounter in which there was a chance, however faint, of success; but
+all saw that for a single galley to attack one of the largest corsair
+fleets that had ever set out, would be nothing short of insanity. Their
+leader's words, however, seemed to show that he had some plan in his
+mind by which he hoped to strike a blow at the enemy, and all listened
+eagerly for what was coming.
+
+"We have heard from our comrade Fosco that their ships lie moored in two
+lines, side by side in a narrow inlet. He has returned this morning with
+the news that they are still there. He thinks that three or four more
+have arrived during the last two days, and it is probable they are
+waiting for the three we captured to join them. Tonight it is my
+intention to attack them, but not by rowing in and boarding them, for
+that would be hopeless. Yesterday Sir Ralph Harcourt went, as you are
+aware, to fetch provisions. But this was a part only of the object of
+his trip. He has, as you see, brought back eleven craft with him; these,
+I may tell you, are laden with combustibles--pitch, oil, straw, and
+faggots. They will be rowed and towed to the inlet tonight, set on fire,
+and launched against the pirates."
+
+An enthusiastic cheer broke from the knights. They saw at once that,
+lying as the corsairs were, side by side, the destruction of many of
+them was certain.
+
+"He has also brought fishermen," Gervaise went on, "two or three of whom
+will go in each fire ship, having a boat towing behind, in which they
+will escape as soon as the craft are alongside the galleys. The galley
+and the three prizes will take their post at the mouth of the inlet.
+The fire of our guns will add to the confusion among the pirates, and we
+shall endeavour to fall upon any galleys that may extricate themselves
+from the mass, and try to make their escape. Sir Ralph has brought back
+materials for making ninety mantles of the Order, for the Christians on
+board the three prizes, and thirty fishermen to bring the crew of our
+galley up to its full strength. The light of the flames will suffice
+to show the pirates that, as they will believe, four vessels, manned
+by knights of the Order, are barring the entrance. Many will, we may
+calculate, jump overboard and swim ashore rather than face us, and we
+shall be able, at any rate, to capture three or four of their craft,
+for, as they come out, one by one, we can all close round them; and with
+nearly fifty knights, ninety released captives, burning for vengeance,
+and some fifty or sixty fishermen, for those from the fire ships will,
+of course, join us--we shall make short work of them, and may even hope
+to entirely destroy their fleet."
+
+Again a joyous shout rose from the knights. This would indeed be an
+exploit that all might be proud to share in, and, breaking the ranks in
+which they had stood while Gervaise addressed them, they crowded round
+him with exclamations of enthusiasm and devotion.
+
+"Now," he said, as soon as silence was a little restored, "the knights
+of the langues on board the prizes will send at once to the coaster on
+the left of the other two. Sir Ralph will go there now, and supply each
+with materials for making the mantles for the Christians; he has brought
+thread, and fish bone needles. You will see that the stuff is cut up
+into suitable lengths, and handed over to your crews, and that each man
+makes up his mantle. There can be but little sewing required for these
+sleeveless gowns, nor need it be carefully done. The great thing is that
+the white crosses shall be conspicuous. As soon as you have set them
+to work, you will examine the state of the arms, see how many more are
+needed to complete the list, and then send off to Sir Ralph, who will
+furnish as many as are required: the fishermen have brought their
+own weapons. See that the slaves are all well fed today, and, before
+evening, inspect well their fetters, so that you may be free from all
+anxiety as to an attempt by them to escape during the conflict.
+
+"The rest of you will go on board these native craft, and see that
+the combustibles are fairly distributed among them, the wood and straw
+soaked with pitch and oil, as also the sails and ropes, and that the
+decks are well coated; this is a most important duty. Get some torches
+made also, so that there shall be two on board each craft; these are to
+be lighted the last thing before we get to the point, and will be thrown
+down into the straw and faggots in the hold, by the fishermen when they
+get close to the corsairs. All this can be prepared before our morning
+meal, and when you assemble here I hope to receive your reports that
+everything is in readiness. One of the other coasters has some bullocks
+on board. Sir Ralph will send one to each of the prizes, and one to us.
+They had better be killed and cut up at once, in order that the crews
+may have two good meals today of fresh meat. See that the galley slaves
+have their share."
+
+No time was lost in carrying out the orders. Ralph, as soon as the
+cloth, arms, and meat were distributed, went round in a boat to see that
+the combustibles were properly laid for firing, and everything done to
+insure that the flames should spread rapidly. The Sards shared in
+the work, and rations and wine were distributed to them; and when the
+knights sat down to their meal on board the galley, they were able to
+report that everything was in perfect readiness, and that the work of
+sewing the mantles was making good progress.
+
+The day passed slowly to the young knights, all of whom were burning
+with excitement at the thought of the coming fray. The released
+Christians were no less exultant at the prospect of taking vengeance for
+the sufferings they had so long endured, and the scene on board all four
+ships was most animated.
+
+After talking it over with Ralph, Gervaise told off three more of the
+knights to each of the prizes, so that there should be ten on board
+each. This reduced the strength on board the galley to seventeen; but as
+they would have the assistance of a strong band of Sards they considered
+this to be ample, under the circumstances. It was arranged that the
+galley, with one of the prizes, should close with the first corsair that
+came out, and that the other two prizes should attack the second. After
+capturing these, they were to assist each other as circumstances might
+dictate. Gervaise strongly impressed upon the knights in command of each
+prize that they were not, single handed, to attack a corsair unless one
+of their consorts was near, and free to give assistance.
+
+"We must run no risk of a reverse," he said. "We are certain of
+destroying many of their vessels and of breaking up their fleet, and it
+is far better that a few should escape than that we should run the risk
+of losing ten of our number, to say nothing of those we have rescued
+from captivity. In the excitement of the fight this order must be
+strictly borne in mind. Our victory must be marred by no misfortune
+brought on by headstrong rashness. The corsairs are bound to be very
+strongly manned, and ten knights, even aided by such assistance as
+they may get from the Christians, might find themselves altogether over
+matched against a crowd of desperate men."
+
+As soon as it was dusk the anchors were drawn up, and the fleet got
+under way. They proceeded but slowly, for the wind was light, and the
+fishing boats moved heavily through the water. There was, however, no
+occasion for speed, for Gervaise did not wish to commence the attack
+until past midnight. The guns had all been loaded before starting, and a
+pile of ammunition was placed near each. Presently the wind nearly died
+out, and the galley and prizes then took the coasters and fishing craft
+in tow. It was nearly one o'clock when they got within half a mile of
+the inlet. The tow ropes were then thrown off, the fishermen got out
+sweeps, and the galley led the way, the fire ships followed in a body,
+and the three prizes brought up the rear. The oars had all been muffled,
+and slowly they made their way, until Fosco, who was standing next to
+Gervaise on board the galley, said that the point just ahead marked the
+entrance to the inlet. They then stopped rowing until the fire ships
+were all close up.
+
+These were, as had previously been arranged, in two lines. Five fishing
+boats, each manned by four men and having its small boat in tow behind
+it, formed the first line; the three coasters, each with six men at the
+oars, and the three other fishing boats, formed the second. The torches
+were now lighted. Ralph took his place in the centre boat of the first
+line; Gervaise went on board one of the coasters, and the order was
+given to the men to row. What wind there was was favourable, blowing
+from the northwest, and therefore right into the inlet. Scarcely had the
+first boats reached the entrance when a shout was heard.
+
+"Row, men, your hardest now!" Ralph shouted; the Sards bent to their
+oars, and the five boats advanced rapidly towards the corsairs. As they
+did so, a babel of shouts and cries rose from the dark mass of ships,
+which swelled into a tumult of alarm as on Ralph's order, "Throw your
+torches into the straw!" a flash of flame leapt up from each boat. Five
+more strokes, and they were alongside the two outside ships. As they
+crashed heavily into them, the men leapt from their seats and sprang
+over into the small boats, threw off the painters, and rowed astern,
+opening on either hand to allow the second line of fire ships to pass.
+These, by Gervaise's directions, divided, and three bore along on either
+side of the corsairs, and then ran in among them, throwing grapnels to
+fasten the fire ships alongside. Then, as the flames sprang up from the
+holds, the crews betook themselves to their boats, and rowed out of the
+inlet.
+
+By the time they reached the galley and prizes, the eleven fire ships
+were a mass of flame, which was spreading to the corsairs. Lying packed
+together as these were, the confusion was terrible. Numbers of men
+endeavoured to push off the fire ships, but it was too late; others
+tried to extricate their galleys from the mass, throwing off the
+hawsers, and striving with hand and oar to push their vessels out of the
+line. As soon as the boats were alongside the galley, the guns of the
+four vessels opened fire with grape into the crowded ships, now lit up
+by the flames as clearly as at noontide, while the battle cry of the
+Order sounded high above the din.
+
+"Nothing can save the ships near this end of the line," Ralph said, "but
+some of those behind may make their way out between the others and the
+rocks. I can see that some of them there are lowering their yards and
+sails to prevent their catching fire as they pass."
+
+The knights distributed among the guns worked them incessantly,
+directing their fire chiefly against the outside ships, so as to hinder
+the crews in their endeavours to arrest the progress of the flames; but
+they were soon able to fire impartially into the mass. As the heat of
+the flames drove the pirates back, scores of men leapt overboard, and
+made for the shore. Presently, two or three ships were seen making their
+way along the narrow line of water on either side of the flaming group
+in front. As the first advanced, the galley and one of the prizes rowed
+a short distance forward to meet it. Its deck was crowded with men,
+among whom a discharge of the cannon from both ships created terrible
+slaughter.
+
+A moment afterwards they closed with it, one on either side, and the
+knights, the released captives, and the Sards, sprang down on to its
+deck. The fight lasted but a minute. Appalled by the disaster that had
+befallen them, by the terrible effect of the broadsides, poured in at a
+few yards' distance, and by the sight of so many of the dreaded warriors
+of the Cross, some of the corsairs threw down their arms and flung
+themselves on the deck or into the hold, crying for quarter; those who
+resisted fell either under the swords of the knights, the vengeful axes
+of the late captives, or the pikes of the Sards; but the great bulk,
+leaping from the bow or stern, swam ashore.
+
+"Back to your ships!" Gervaise shouted, the moment resistance ceased.
+"Leave her floating here; she will help to block the way."
+
+Six vessels alone managed to make their escape from the blazing mass of
+ships, and all of these were captured almost as easily as the first had
+been. As soon as it seemed that all the remainder were involved in
+the flames, boats were lowered and sent on board the prizes to take
+possession. Save for the wounded on the decks, they were entirely
+deserted by their crews, as those who had run below, as soon as they
+found that their captors had left the vessels, dropped into the water,
+and made their way, either by swimming or with the assistance of oars,
+to the shore. There remained only the slaves, chained to their benches.
+A few of these had been killed by the broadsides; but the guns had been
+aimed at the poops and forecastles, where the corsairs were clustered
+together, and consequently the number of galley slaves who had fallen
+was comparatively small.
+
+In none of the galleys was the proportion of Christians anything like so
+large as that in the three prizes first taken, the greater portion being
+men of inland tribes who had been captured in warfare, or malefactors
+who, instead of being executed, had been sold to the corsairs.
+Nevertheless, in the six galleys some seventy Christians were found,
+and at once freed. It was terrible to think that in the galleys that had
+been destroyed a large number of Christians must have perished in the
+flames, and Gervaise expressed bitter regret that he had not considered
+that his attack by fire ships must necessarily involve the loss of so
+many Christian lives.
+
+"It can't be helped," Ralph said, as Gervaise poured out his feelings to
+him. "To very many of them death must have been welcome, and if we had
+not attacked them as we did, and they had sailed for Italy, hundreds,
+if not thousands, of Christians would have been killed, and as many more
+carried away into captivity; so, you see, the balance is all in favour
+of the course we adopted."
+
+Gervaise admitted this, but nevertheless his regret at the fate of
+so many unfortunate captives quite overpowered for the time his
+satisfaction at the complete success that had been achieved. The victory
+had been almost a bloodless one on the part of the assailants. A few of
+the knights had received wounds. Two among the Christian crews had been
+killed, and four Sards; while two score had received wounds more or less
+serious, as, unlike the knights, they had no defensive armour. While
+waiting for daylight to appear, all their wounds were dressed and
+bandaged by the knights.
+
+In the morning the captured galleys were towed out, and anchored a short
+distance away, and then Gervaise rowed up to the head of the inlet,
+followed by the other three ships. They found that eleven of the
+corsairs had been burnt, and to their satisfaction, they discovered four
+uninjured galleys lying there, deserted, save by the slaves.
+
+Seeing the fate of their comrades who had first issued out, the
+commanders had, instead of trying to escape, rowed quietly to the head
+of the inlet, the movement being covered by the flame and smoke, and had
+there landed, having laden themselves with stores for their support on
+shore. This was a great satisfaction to the knights, for not only did
+it swell the list of prizes, but it reduced by over thirty the number of
+Christian slaves who had perished in the flames. Taking the galleys
+in tow, they rowed out of the inlet, whose banks were strewn with half
+charred timbers, oars, and relics of the fight.
+
+As soon as they had anchored by the side of their first prizes, a
+council was held on board the Santa Barbara. It was clearly impossible
+to take thirteen prizes to Rhodes, for there would be but three or four
+knights to each, and were they to fall in with but one Moorish pirate,
+they might suffer great disaster, while, should they meet with a storm,
+they would fare badly indeed, as they could not depend upon the rescued
+Christians for the management of the sails and oars in heavy weather. At
+the same time, all were most anxious that the prizes should be carried
+to Rhodes. Never, save as the result of some great battle, had such a
+fleet of captured galleys been brought in, and the knights were prepared
+to endure all dangers rather than part with one of them. Finally, after
+much discussion, it was determined that they should make for Genoa. From
+thence the rescued captives would be able to find their way to their
+homes. The great majority were Italians and Spaniards; the former could
+proceed by land or sea to their respective homes, while the Spaniards
+would have no long time to wait before a vessel of their own nationality
+entered the port, even if one were not lying there when they arrived.
+Moreover, in any case it would be necessary to despatch a vessel to
+Genoa, in order that it might be known that the danger was averted, and
+that there was no longer any necessity for getting the galleys ready for
+sea.
+
+The chief ostensible reason, however, for going to Genoa was that there
+would be no difficulty in engaging as many sailors as might be necessary
+to take the prizes to Rhodes. Underlying all the arguments was another
+reason which Ralph laughingly stated.
+
+"It is all very well to bring forward one argument after another, but
+not one of you has the courage to say what I am sure all of you have
+at the bottom of your hearts. You know very well that you want to go to
+Genoa to enjoy a triumph. The Rhodians are all very well, but there are
+very many more fair faces at Genoa. Fie, Sir Knights! Such a spirit is
+little in accordance with the vows of the Order. Are we not bound to
+humility? And here you are all longing for the plaudits of the nobles
+and ladies of Genoa!"
+
+Some of the young knights laughed, others coloured hotly.
+
+"They need not be ashamed of the feeling," Caretto said. "Is it not the
+ardent desire of all true knights to do gallant deeds, and do they not
+value above all things the guerdon of applause from the fair eyes of
+ladies. Your comrades have performed the gallant deeds, and well deserve
+the reward. Now, Sir Gervaise, if not for this reason, at any rate for
+the others that have been brought forward, I suppose we are all agreed
+that we sail for Genoa. For our part we are heartily glad that such
+is your decision. We, and the young knights of our langue, have many
+friends there, and in their name I am sure I can promise you a reception
+as hearty and sincere as that which we shall ourselves receive."
+
+It was settled that the rescued captives should be divided equally
+among the thirteen prizes, and that three knights should go in each. The
+Moorish captives were also divided equally among them, to aid with the
+sails, and to row a few oars, in case of a dead calm setting in. The
+commands were distributed according to seniority, the three rescued
+Italian knights remaining on board the Santa Barbara with Gervaise.
+
+The Sards were anxious to return to their villages, in order to carry
+the news that several hundreds of Moorish pirates had landed.
+
+"We shall have great trouble with them," one of the young fishermen,
+who spoke a little Italian, said to Gervaise. "There are always a great
+number of swine, and herds of goats, up among the forests on the hills.
+We must send up and drive in as many of these as possible, and of course
+we shall send messengers to Tempe; but it will need a very large force
+to combat these pirates, who will be able to come down and plunder
+and destroy, and then retire to the hills, whence it will be hard to
+dislodge them."
+
+"I am sorry indeed that such trouble should have been caused to you,"
+Gervaise replied; "but I am afraid that I can give you no assistance."
+
+"We shall hunt them down in time," the Sard said confidently.
+
+"There are many villages scattered about Tempe, and what with us
+fishermen, and the woodmen and charcoal burners, we shall soon get a
+strong body together. Besides, we know the mountains, and they do not."
+
+"I should say that you had best avoid a pitched battle with them, but
+keep on harassing them by night and day, cutting off all who separate
+themselves from the main body, until at last they are completely worn
+out."
+
+"We shall deal with them, Sir Knight. We are all hunters, for there are
+wild boars and stags in the forest, and wolves too, and wild sheep on
+the higher mountains. Every man among us can use his bow skillfully, and
+wield pike and hatchet. The hunt will not be unprofitable, either, for
+we can get a good price for all we take alive, to work in the mines."
+
+An hour later one of the galleys started with the Sards for their
+villages in the bay of Tempe. After landing them, she was to rejoin the
+rest of the fleet at their former anchorage at Madalena. By nightfall
+all were gathered there, and the next morning they set out for Genoa.
+The wind was light; but in their anxiety to return home as soon as
+possible the released captives all volunteered to take their former
+places on the benches, and the vessels were kept going at a fair rate
+of speed. Two days' rowing took them to Bastia, where their approach
+created unbounded excitement until the banner of the Order was seen
+floating from the stern of the Santa Barbara, while smaller flags, that
+had been hastily manufactured, flew from the mastheads of the thirteen
+prizes. Even then the inhabitants feared to put out, believing that
+the flags were but a ruse, and numbers of them fled at once, with their
+families and valuables, to the mountains. It was not until a boat was
+lowered, and Ralph, accompanied by three or four other knights, rowed
+ashore, that the panic was allayed.
+
+As soon as it was understood that the galley of the knights had not only
+captured the thirteen corsairs, but had destroyed eleven others, and had
+thus annihilated a fleet that was intended to prey upon the commerce
+of Italy, and ravage the western coast, the alarm was succeeded by the
+wildest enthusiasm. By the time Ralph had obtained the fresh meat and
+stores he came ashore to purchase, the greater part of the population
+were gathered on the shore, and a flotilla of boats put out with him,
+filled with picturesquely dressed men and women. Some carried flags,
+others green boughs, while the ladies had bouquets and baskets of fruit.
+The galley was the first attraction, and, mounting her sides, the ladies
+presented their offerings of fruit, while the men cheered, and waved
+their hats; many musicians came out in the boats, and these played on
+bagpipes and three-reeded flutes a succession of airs peculiar to the
+island.
+
+Gervaise received his visitors on the poop. These were at first
+altogether incredulous when told that it was the lad before them who
+had commanded the galley, had performed such a remarkable feat, and had
+freed them from a terrible danger. The youth of the knights of the Order
+no less surprised them, and had not Gervaise assured them that it was
+altogether contrary to the rules of the Order for a knight to allow
+himself to be embraced, many of the ladies would have taken this form
+of showing their enthusiasm and gratitude. The next morning the fleet
+started for Genoa. The wind was much stronger than it had been on the
+previous day, and it was therefore unnecessary for the oars to be put
+out, except, indeed, on board the galley. There, at nightfall, the
+Christians relieved the slaves for some hours at their benches, and the
+next morning the circle of hills round Genoa, with the city nestling at
+their feet on the water's edge, and climbing for some distance up their
+slopes, was in view. Caretto at once suggested that it would be well to
+signal to the fleet to lie to.
+
+"If we do not do so," he said, "they will assuredly think that it is the
+corsair fleet advancing to attack and burn the vessels in port, and you
+may be saluted as you approach by a shower of cannonballs. If you will
+permit me, Sir Gervaise, I will go forward in one of the prizes and
+explain matters, and will return here in a short time."
+
+"Thank you, Sir Fabricius. As such mischance as you mention might indeed
+very well occur, we will lower sail and lie here until you return."
+
+While Caretto was away, the knights and crews breakfasted, and the
+former put on their armour and gayest attire, in readiness for the
+landing. Gervaise, although with much inward vexation, considered it
+necessary to do the same.
+
+"I do wish," he said to Ralph, who was smiling at his rueful face, "that
+you could for today take my place, and let me pass as lieutenant."
+
+"I should not mind at all, Gervaise. But you must put up with the
+disagreeables as well as the advantages of being commander, and must
+submit to be honoured and feted here, as well as getting no end of
+credit at Rhodes. You will have the satisfaction of well deserving it,
+for I am sure the plan of attacking them with fire ships would never
+have occurred to any one else, and if it had not been for that, we
+should have had the mortification of seeing them sail off without being
+able to move a finger to interfere with them."
+
+"If one were fighting for fame and honour, all that would be true
+enough; but members of an Order, whose sole object is to defend
+Christendom from the Moslems, should strive only to do their duty, and
+care nothing for such things as honour and glory."
+
+"Human nature is human nature, and I don't see any reason why one should
+despise honour and glory when they come to one in the course of duty.
+I fancy you will think so too, Gervaise, in course of time. I am quite
+sure that among the fifty knights, there is not one who does not feel
+well content that he has not only done his duty to the Order, but has
+gained a share in the credit and honour that will certainly be given to
+all who have taken a part in so crushing a defeat of the corsairs. As
+for myself, I do not for a moment pretend that I am not sensible of the
+fact that, as second in command of the galley, my chances of obtaining
+promotion in the Order are very greatly improved."
+
+It was nearly two hours before Caretto returned.
+
+"It was well indeed that I went in," he said to Gervaise, "for I found
+the city in an uproar. The alarm bells of the churches were calling all
+citizens to arms, and troops were being hurried down to the forts and
+batteries. Rumour had of course exaggerated the strength of the fleet,
+and half the population believed that the safety of the city itself was
+menaced by the approach of a mighty squadron. As soon as my news was
+bruited abroad, and they learned that the fleet consisted solely of
+prizes captured from the Moors by a galley of the Order, alarm quickly
+changed into delight, the sharp, angry clang of the bells was succeeded
+by peals of gladness, and the joy of the citizens at being relieved from
+the cloud of anxiety that had hung over the city since my last visit,
+was unbounded. I went at once to the council chamber, where I found many
+of the leading citizens already assembled, having been summoned in hot
+haste as soon as our approach was made out. At first they were almost
+incredulous when I told them that every ship of the pirate fleet had
+been either destroyed or captured, and that the fleet in the offing
+consisted entirely of your galley and the thirteen corsairs she had
+captured. As soon as they really grasped the fact, they sent off
+messengers to the churches to order the joy bells to be rung, and to the
+dockyard to arrest all work upon the galleys. Then I had to give them a
+short account of the surprise and destruction of the corsair fleet, and
+finally they begged me to ask you to delay your entry to the port for
+a couple of hours, in order that they might have time to prepare a
+suitable reception for you."
+
+"I suppose there is no help for it," Gervaise said. "Is there anything
+that we ought to do?"
+
+"I should decorate the galley with all the flags on board: should set
+every one to work to make great flags with the cross of the Order to
+hoist to the masthead of the prizes, instead of the little things that
+are now flying; and under them we will hoist the flags of the corsairs,
+among which are those of Tripoli, Tunis, and Algiers. I do not know that
+there is aught else we can do."
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVI FESTIVITIES
+
+
+At last the fleet, headed by the galley, to which all the knights had
+returned, rowed towards the port. A gun flashed out from the fort at
+its entrance, and at once those from all the other batteries responded;
+bells pealed out again, and a confused roar of cheering broke from the
+crowds occupying every spot from which a view of the harbour could be
+obtained. The ships in the port were all decked with flags, and the
+front windows and balconies of every house were hung with tapestries and
+bright curtains. As soon as the galley entered the port, a state barge,
+flying the flag of the Republic, advanced to meet her from the wharf.
+As she approached, Ralph gave orders for the oars to be laid in, and
+the barge was soon alongside. The knights were already ranged along
+the poop, and, accompanied by Ralph and Caretto, Gervaise moved to the
+gangway to receive the visitors. At their head was Battista Fragoso, the
+doge, in his robe of state, and following him were a body of the highest
+nobles of Genoa, all brilliant in gala costume.
+
+"This, my lord duke," Caretto said, "is Sir Gervaise Tresham, a knight
+commander of our Order, and the commander of this, their galley. He has
+before, as you may well believe from his appointment to so honourable a
+post, highly distinguished himself, but what he has before accomplished
+is far surpassed by the brilliant action that he has now achieved. He
+has won a victory that not only reflects the highest honour upon the
+Order, but is an inestimable service to Italy, and has freed her from a
+corsair fleet that would have been a scourge to her, both at sea and to
+the towns and villages along the coast. Not only has he, with the brave
+knights under his orders, annihilated the corsair fleet, burning eleven
+of their galleys, and capturing thirteen others, but he has restored
+to freedom no less than two hundred Christian captives, among them the
+cavaliers Giacomo da Vinci, Pietro Forzi, and myself."
+
+"In the name of the Republic, Sir Gervaise Tresham, and I may say in
+that of all Italy, I thank you most heartily for the splendid service
+that you have rendered us. It would have seemed to me well nigh
+incredible that a single galley, even if commanded and manned by the
+most famous knights of your great Order, should have accomplished so
+extraordinary a feat. Still more strange is it that it should have been
+performed by so young a knight, with a crew composed, as Sir Fabricius
+Caretto has told us, of knights chosen from among the youngest of the
+Order."
+
+"You give far more credit to us, your Highness, than we deserve,"
+Gervaise replied. "Three of the ships were indeed captured in fair
+fight, but we caught the rest asleep and massed together as to be
+incapable of successful resistance, and they fell easy victims to the
+fire ships we launched against them. Any credit that is due to me is
+shared equally by my subcommander here, Sir Ralph Harcourt, and indeed
+by every knight of my company."
+
+"This, doubtless, may be so, Sir Gervaise," the doge said, with a slight
+smile, "but it is to the head that plans, rather than to the hand that
+strikes, that such success as you have achieved is due; and the credit
+of this night attack is, as the cavalier Caretto tells me, wholly yours,
+for until you issued your final orders it seemed to him, and to the two
+good knights his companions, that there was naught to do but to remain
+in port and watch this corsair fleet sail away to carry out its work of
+destruction."
+
+By this time they had reached the poop of the galley. Gervaise now
+called forward the knights one by one, and presented them to the doge,
+who expressed to them all the gratitude felt by himself and the whole of
+the citizens of Genoa for the service they had rendered to the Republic.
+This ceremony being over, the knights broke up their ranks and conversed
+for a few minutes with those who had come on board with the doge. The
+latter then took his place in the barge with his companions, inviting
+Gervaise and Ralph to accompany him. As the barge left the side of the
+galley, which followed closely behind her, the guns again thundered
+out their welcome, and a roar of greeting rose from the inhabitants. On
+landing, the party waited until the knights had joined them, and
+then proceeded up the street to the ducal palace, amidst enthusiastic
+cheering from the crowd that lined the road, occupied the windows and
+balconies, and even scrambled on the housetops, the ladies waving their
+handkerchiefs and scarves.
+
+At the palace were assembled all the municipal authorities, and the
+congratulations given on board were here repeated. After this there was
+a great banquet, at which Gervaise was placed on the right hand of the
+doge, who, at the conclusion of the feast, called upon the assembled
+guests to drink to the health of the knights of St. John, who had saved
+the commerce and seacoast of Italy from the greatest danger that had
+menaced them since the days when the Northern rovers had desolated the
+shores of the Mediterranean. The toast was drunk with enthusiasm, and
+Gervaise then replied with a few words of thanks for the honour done to
+himself and his comrades.
+
+The party then left the banqueting hall for the great reception rooms,
+where the wives and daughters of all the nobles and principal citizens
+of Genoa were assembled. Most of the young knights, belonging as
+they did to noble families, and accustomed from childhood to courtly
+ceremonies and festivities, were quite at home here. Caretto, his two
+companions, and their six Italian comrades, speedily introduced them,
+and each was soon surrounded by a group of ladies, anxious to hear from
+his lips the details of the exploits of the galley.
+
+"But how is it that you are all so young, Sir Ralph?" one of the ladies,
+to whom Harcourt had been introduced as the second in command, asked
+him, when he had finished his account of the capture of the galleys.
+"We heard from those who met you on landing, that all your comrades were
+young, but we were filled with surprise when you entered the room, for
+many of them are but lads."
+
+"You may say that all of us are but lads, Countess. I am the oldest of
+the party, and am but little over twenty-two, but few of the others are
+over nineteen; they are all professed knights of the Order, who, as you
+doubtless know, come out to Rhodes when only sixteen. Some, of course,
+do not join until later, but I think that all here entered at the
+earliest age permitted, and almost all had served in two or three
+voyages in the galleys before they were appointed to the Santa Barbara.
+The reason why so young a crew was chosen was that our commander was
+also young. He had done such exceptional service to the Order that he
+was appointed to the command of a galley, and he has, as all will allow,
+well justified the choice. It was because it was deemed inexpedient
+to place knights many years his senior under his command, and partly,
+perhaps, to encourage the younger knights, by giving them an exceptional
+opportunity of distinguishing themselves, that the crew was chosen
+entirely from their ranks. I was selected as second in command because
+Gervaise and I had been special friends when we came out from England in
+the same ship, and had before fought side by side against the Moslems."
+
+"I see that you wear gilded spurs, Sir Ralph," another lady said; "you
+must therefore be a dubbed knight?"
+
+"Yes; I had the good fortune to be knighted by D'Aubusson himself, at
+the same time that Sir Gervaise was also so honoured. It was for an
+affair with the Turkish pirates. It was Gervaise who really won the
+honour, for I had no share in the affair, save that of doing my best in
+the fight."
+
+"And who could do more?" the countess queried.
+
+"Gervaise could do more, Countess, as was shown in that attack on the
+corsairs by means of fire ships. He has a head to plan, and, in the case
+I speak of, a happy thought of his not only saved the lives of ourselves
+and Sir John Boswell, but, indirectly, was the means of preventing two
+of our galleys being captured by the corsairs."
+
+"Which is Sir Gervaise?" one of the ladies asked.
+
+Ralph smiled.
+
+"Look round the hall, signoras, and see if any of you can pick him out
+from the rest of us."
+
+The ladies looked round the hall.
+
+"There are only about twenty here; the rest are in the other rooms. Do
+not set us to work guessing, if he is not in sight, Sir Ralph."
+
+"Oh yes, he is in sight. Now do each of you fix on the one you think
+most accords with your ideas of what a knight, brave in action and wise
+and prudent in council, would be like."
+
+The six ladies each fixed on one of the young knights.
+
+"You are all wrong," said Ralph.
+
+"How can we choose?" the countess said laughingly, "when none of them
+resemble our ideal hero? Most of them are pleasant and courtly looking
+youths, but as yet there is scarce a vestige of hair on their faces,
+and one could not fancy any of them as the destroyer of the fleet of
+corsairs."
+
+"Do you see the one speaking to the elderly lady in the recess?"
+
+"Yes; she is the wife of Fragoso. You do not mean to say that that lad
+is the commander of the galley? Why, he looks the youngest of you all."
+
+"He is between seventeen and eighteen, and there are several others who
+are no older. Yes, that is Sir Gervaise, Knight Commander of the Order
+of St. John."
+
+"But how can he possibly have served his time as a professed knight?"
+
+"He was one of the grand master's pages, and his time in that service
+counted just as it would have done had he entered as a professed knight;
+and at fifteen, therefore, he stood in the same position as those three
+or four years older than himself. He speaks Turkish as well as our own
+tongue, and, as I told you, we received the accolade at the hands of the
+grand master, a year and a half ago. He is now a knight commander, and
+will assuredly one day occupy one of the highest posts in the Order."
+
+"You do not speak as if you were jealous, Sir Ralph; and yet methinks
+it cannot be pleasant for you all to have one younger than yourselves
+placed at your head."
+
+"I do not think there is one of us who so feels," Ralph said earnestly.
+"In the first place, he has performed excellent service; in the next
+place, even those who did not know him before, have felt, since we
+started, that he is a born leader. Then, too, we regard with pride one
+who has brought credit upon the younger members of the Order. Moreover,
+we all owe our posts in the galley to the fact that he was chosen for
+its command. It is a difficult position for him to fill, but he has
+managed so that, while all obey his orders as cheerfully and willingly
+as if he were a veteran, when off duty we regard him as one of
+ourselves."
+
+"You are a staunch friend, Sir Ralph."
+
+"I am a staunch friend of Sir Gervaise, Countess, for the more I know of
+him the more I care for him. He well deserves the promotion and honour
+that have fallen to his share."
+
+"Will you bring him across here to us, Sir Ralph? I want to talk to
+this hero of yours, and I am sure that my daughter is longing to be
+introduced to him."
+
+Ralph waited until Gervaise was disengaged, and then brought him across,
+and, after introducing him, moved away at once, leaving Gervaise to be
+interrogated by the ladies.
+
+"You must be accustomed to festivities, Sir Gervaise, for we have just
+heard that you were one of the grand master's pages?"
+
+"I am accustomed to them, signora; but that is not at all the same thing
+as liking them."
+
+The reply was given so earnestly that all the ladies smiled.
+
+"Your taste is quite exceptional. Do you mean to say that you would
+rather be on board your galley than here?"
+
+"It would not be polite," Gervaise said, with a laugh, "if I were to say
+that I would infinitely rather be on board; but indeed I have not, like
+most of my comrades, been brought up in court or castle. Until the day I
+joined the Order, we led the lives of exiles. My father belonged to the
+defeated party in England, and, save for a few months when the cause to
+which he was attached was triumphant, we lived quietly on the estates
+he had recovered, our life being one of care and anxiety. So, you see,
+I had no training in gaiety and pleasure. At Rhodes there are state
+receptions and religious pageants, but a meeting such as this, is, of
+course, impossible in a convent; and since I was eleven years old I
+think I have only once spoken to a woman. So you can well understand,
+signora, that I feel awkward in speech, and I pray you to make allowance
+for my ignorance of the language of courtesy, such as would naturally be
+expected in a knight, even though belonging to a religious Order."
+
+"There is naught to make allowance for," the countess said gently.
+"Women can appreciate simple truth, and are not, as men seem to think,
+always yearning for compliments. Those who are most proficient in
+turning phrases are not often among those foremost in battle, or wisest
+in council, and I can tell you that we women value deeds far higher than
+words. Sir Fabricius Caretto is a cousin of mine, and has this afternoon
+been speaking so highly of you to me and my young daughter here, that I
+am glad indeed to make your acquaintance. How long do you intend to stay
+in Genoa?"
+
+"No longer than it will take me to engage men to carry the prizes to
+Rhodes. I am afraid that sounds rude," he broke off, as he noticed a
+smile on the faces of the ladies.
+
+"Not rude," said the countess; "though most knights would have put it
+differently, and said that their duty compelled them to leave as soon as
+the prizes could be manned. But it comes to the same thing. Of
+course, you will remain the guest of the doge as long as you are
+here; otherwise, it would have given us the greatest pleasure to have
+entertained you. My cousin is, of course, staying with us, and you see
+we all feel a very deep obligation to you. He has been so long a slave
+among the Moors, that we had almost come to hope death had freed him
+from his fetters; so you may imagine our pleasure when he arrived here
+so suddenly ten days ago. We were expecting that he would remain with us
+for some time, but he says that he must first go back to Rhodes, after
+which he will ask for leave, and return here. We have a banquet tomorrow
+evening to celebrate his return, and earnestly hoped that you would be
+present, but, since you say that you do not care for such gaieties,
+we shall, if you prefer it, be glad if you will come to join us at our
+family meal at twelve."
+
+"Thank you, countess, I should very greatly prefer it, and it will give
+me real pleasure to come."
+
+"Your friend, Sir Ralph Harcourt, has been telling us how you have
+destroyed the corsair fleet that has been so alarming us. He, too, is an
+Englishman, though he speaks Italian well."
+
+"Yes, he speaks it a great deal better than I do," Gervaise said. "He is
+a dear friend of mine, and it is, indeed, chiefly owing to his support
+and influence that I have been able to manage so pleasantly and well in
+the command of a body of young knights, most of whom are my seniors."
+
+"He tells us that you speak Turkish?"
+
+"Yes; I thought that it would be very useful, and spent nearly a year in
+acquiring it, the bailiff of my langue being kind enough to relieve
+me of all other duties. I was fortunate enough to find in one of the
+servants of the auberge a well educated and widely informed Turk, who
+was a very pleasant companion, as well as an excellent instructor, and I
+learnt much from him besides his language. The knowledge of Turkish has
+already proved to me most useful, and was indeed the means by which
+I obtained both my commandery and my appointment as captain of the
+galley."
+
+"Perhaps you will tell us the story tomorrow; that is, if it is too long
+to tell us now?"
+
+"It is indeed much too long; but if it will interest you I shall be glad
+to recount it tomorrow."
+
+The next day Gervaise went to the palace of the Countess Da Forli. She
+was a widow with no children, except Claudia, the young daughter who
+had accompanied her to the fete the evening before. Caretto, and four
+or five relations of the family, were the only guests beside himself. It
+was a quiet and sociable meal, and served with less ceremony than usual,
+as the countess wished to place Gervaise as much as possible at his
+ease. During the meal but little was said about the affair with the
+pirates, Caretto telling them some of his experiences as a captive.
+
+"It is well, Claudia," he said, laughing, "that you did not see me at
+the time I was rescued, for I was such a scarecrow that you would never
+have been able to regard me with due and proper respect afterwards. I
+was so thin that my bones almost came through my skin."
+
+"You are thin enough now, cousin," the girl said.
+
+"I have gained so much weight during the last ten days that I begin to
+fear that I shall, ere long, get too fat to buckle on my armour. But,
+bad as the thinness was, it was nothing to the dirt. Moreover, I was
+coming near to losing my voice. There was nothing for us to talk about
+in our misery, and often days passed without a word being exchanged
+between Da Vinci, Forzi, and myself. Do you know I felt almost more
+thankful for the bath and perfumes than I did for my liberty. I was able
+at once to enjoy the comfort of the one, while it was some time before
+I could really assure myself that my slavery was over, and that I was a
+free man again."
+
+"And now, Sir Gervaise," the countess said, when the meal was over, "it
+is your turn. Claudia is longing to hear your story, and to know how you
+came to be in command of a galley."
+
+"And I am almost as anxious," Caretto said. "I did not like to ask the
+question on board the galley, and have been looking forward to learning
+it when I got to Rhodes. I did, indeed, ask the two knights who
+accompanied me on my mission here, but they would only tell me that
+every one knew you had performed some very great service to the Order,
+and that it concerned some intended rising among the slaves, the details
+being known to only a few, who had been, they understood, told that it
+was not to be repeated."
+
+"It was a very simple matter," Gervaise said, "and although the grand
+master and council were pleased to take a very favourable view of it,
+it was, in fact, a question of luck, just as was the surprise of the
+corsairs. There is really no secret about it--at least, except in
+Rhodes: there it was thought best not to speak of it, because the fact
+that the attempt among the slaves was almost successful, might, if
+generally known, encourage others to try to escape, and perhaps with
+greater success. I told you last night, Countess, that I had only once
+before in the last six or seven years spoken to a woman, and it was on
+that occasion that the adventure, so far as I was concerned, had its
+commencement."
+
+He then, beginning at his visit with Ralph Harcourt to the Greek
+merchant and his family on the roof of the house, recounted the
+suspicions he had entertained, the manner in which they were confirmed,
+and the method by which he had discovered the plot for the rising. He
+was interrupted several times when he attempted to abbreviate the story,
+or to omit some of the details, and there were exclamations of surprise
+at his proposal to personate a Turkish prisoner, and to share the lot of
+the slaves in their prison, and on the benches of the galley.
+
+"I had no idea, Sir Gervaise," Caretto said, when he had concluded,
+"that you too had been a galley slave, and I understand now the care
+you showed to render the lot of the rowers as easy as possible. It was
+a splendid scheme, and well carried out. Indeed, I no longer wonder
+that you were appointed to the command of a galley, and received a rich
+commandery in England at the hands of the grand master himself. What
+think you, Countess; did I speak too highly in his favour?"
+
+"Not one jot, cousin. Why, Sir Gervaise, it seems to me that you have
+been born two centuries too late, and that you should have been a knight
+errant, instead of being sworn to obey orders, and bound to celibacy.
+Do you wear no lady's favour in your helm? I know that not a few of your
+Order do so."
+
+"As I have said, Countess, I know no ladies who would bestow favours
+upon me; in the second place, I am but eighteen, and it would be
+ridiculous for me to think of such matters; lastly, it seems to me that,
+being vowed to the Order, I can desire no other mistress."
+
+Claudia, who had listened with rapt attention to the story, whispered in
+her mother's ear. The latter smiled.
+
+"It seems to me, Sir Gervaise," she went on, "that after what you have
+done for Italy there are many fair maidens who would feel it an honour
+that their colours should be borne by one who has shown himself so
+valiant a knight. You see, a gage of this kind does not necessarily mean
+that there is any deep feeling between the knight who bears it and the
+lady who bestows it; it shows only that she, on her part, feels it an
+honour that her gage should be worn by a distinguished knight, and, on
+his part, that he considers it as somewhat more than a compliment, and
+wears it as a proof of regard on the part of one whose good opinion at
+least he values. It is true that among secular knights it may mean even
+more than this, but it ought not to mean more among knights of an Order
+like yours, pledged to devote their lives to a lofty and holy aim. My
+daughter Claudia whispers to me that she would deem it an honour indeed
+if you would wear her token, accepting it in the spirit in which I have
+spoken. She is fourteen now, and, as you know, a maid of fourteen here
+is as old as one of sixteen or seventeen in your country."
+
+Gervaise turned to the girl, who was standing by her mother's chair,
+looking earnestly at him. He had noticed her the evening before; she had
+asked no questions, but had listened so intently that he had felt
+almost embarrassed. Claudia's was a very bright face, and yet marked by
+firmness and strength. He turned his eyes again to the countess.
+
+"I never thought of wearing a woman's favour," he said; "but if your
+daughter will bestow one upon me, I shall be proud to wear it, and trust
+that I may carry it unstained. I shall feel honoured indeed that one so
+fair, and, as I am sure by her face, so deserving of all the devotion
+that a knight of our Order can give, has thought me worthy of being one
+of those on whom she could bestow so high a favour, with the confidence
+that it would be ever borne with credit and honour."
+
+"What shall I give him, mother?" Claudia asked the countess, without a
+shadow of the embarrassment with which Gervaise had spoken.
+
+"Not a kerchief, Claudia. In the rough work of the knights, it could
+not be kept without spot or stain. Moreover, if I judge Sir Gervaise
+rightly, methinks he would prefer some token that he could wear without
+exciting attention and remark from his comrades. Go, fetch him any of
+your jewels you may think fit."
+
+"Then I will give him this," the girl said; and unfastening a thin gold
+chain she wore round her neck, she pulled up a heart shaped ornament, in
+pink coral set in gold and pearls.
+
+Her mother uttered a low exclamation of dissent.
+
+"I know, mother; it was your last gift, and I prize it far beyond
+anything I have; therefore, it is all the more fit to be my token." Then
+she turned to Gervaise, and went on, without the slightest tremor in her
+voice, or accession of colour in her cheeks. "Sir Gervaise Tresham, I
+bestow upon you this my favour, and shall deem it an honour indeed to
+know that it is borne by one so brave and worthy. You said that you
+would be glad to be one of those who bore my favours. You will be more
+than that, for I vow to you that while you live no other knight shall
+wear a favour of mine."
+
+"Claudia!" her mother said disapprovingly.
+
+"I know what I am saying, mother. I have often wondered why maidens
+should so carelessly bestow their favours upon every knight who begged
+for them, and have said to myself that when my time came I would grant
+it but once, and only then to one whom I deemed worthy of it in all
+ways--one in whose loyalty and honour I could trust implicitly, and who
+would regard it as something sacred, deeming it an honour to wear it,
+as being the pledge of my trust and esteem. Kneel, Sir Gervaise, while I
+fasten this round your neck."
+
+Gervaise took out the small brooch, that fastened the collar of his
+silken doublet, and then knelt on one knee. The girl fastened the clasp
+round his neck, and as he rose he hid the heart beneath the doublet, and
+fastened the collar.
+
+"Lady Claudia," he said earnestly, "I accept your favour in the spirit
+in which you bestow it. So long as I live I shall prize and value it
+beyond any honour I may gain, and as I feel it next to my heart, it will
+ever recall to me that you gave it me as a pledge of your esteem and
+trust, and I will strive to the utmost so to bear myself that I may be
+worthy of the gift."
+
+None of the others spoke while the little ceremony was being performed.
+Caretto glanced at the countess with an amused smile, but the latter
+looked grave, and somewhat vexed. However, she made an effort to dispel
+the cloud on her face, and, when Gervaise ceased speaking, said, "This
+has been a somewhat more serious business than I intended, Sir Gervaise.
+But do not think that I regret in any way the course it has taken; 'tis
+well for a maiden on the threshold of womanhood that she should place
+before herself a lofty ideal, and that she should entertain a warm
+feeling of friendship for one worthy of it. So also it is good for a
+young knight to know that he has the trust and confidence of a pure and
+innocent maiden; such a knowledge will aid him to be in all ways true to
+the vows he has taken, and to remember always that he is bound to be not
+only a valiant knight of his Order, but a sincere soldier of the Cross."
+
+Then she went on more lightly. "Have you heard, Sir Gervaise, that there
+is a question of making you a noble of Genoa?"
+
+"No, indeed," Gervaise replied, in great surprise; "such an idea never
+entered into my thoughts."
+
+"Nevertheless, I know that it was spoken of last night, and although it
+has not yet been finally settled, and will not be until the council meet
+this afternoon, I should not tell you if I did not think that it was as
+good as agreed upon; and I am pleased to be the first to whisper to
+you that it is intended to bestow upon you an honour that is jealously
+guarded and seldom granted, even to crowned heads, unless as a token of
+gratitude for some signal service done to the Republic."
+
+"I should feel most honoured and most grateful, Countess, for so
+extraordinary a favour, did I feel that I had done any extraordinary
+action to merit it. There can be no doubt that the destruction of the
+corsairs has saved Genoa and all the maritime towns from immense loss
+by damage to their trade, and by the raids that would have been made at
+various points on the coast. But I cannot see that the mere fact that we
+have destroyed their fleet merits any marked honour. They were caught in
+a trap, and half of them burned, and this might have been done equally
+as well by the Sardinian fishermen, unarmed, and without our aid. As to
+the fighting, it was of small account. The first three craft we captured
+offered a much stouter resistance, and we lost two of our number; but
+in the other affair no knight was killed, or even seriously wounded, and
+believe me, Countess, I feel absolutely ashamed at the fuss that is made
+over it. It seems to me that I am a sort of impostor, obtaining credit
+under false pretences."
+
+"No man is a fair judge of his own actions, Sir Gervaise," Caretto said.
+"A man may believe himself a Solon, or a Roland; others may consider him
+as a fool, or an empty braggart; and it must be taken that the general
+opinion of the public is the judgment from which there is no appeal.
+It is not the mob of Genoa only who regard the services that you have
+rendered as extraordinary, but it is the opinion of the councillors and
+authorities of the Republic, and of those who, like myself, have borne
+our share in warfare, that not only is the service great, but that it is
+due to the singular ability with which you, in command of only a single
+galley, have wholly destroyed or captured the fleet that threatened
+our commerce. As our councillors, therefore, all competent judges, are
+unanimous in their opinion that you have deserved the highest honours
+that Genoa can bestow upon you, it is useless for you to set up your
+own opinion to the contrary. Take the good things that fall to you, Sir
+Gervaise, and be thankful. It is seldom that men obtain more honours
+than they deserve, while it very often happens that they deserve far
+more than they obtain. Fortune has doubtless some share in every man's
+career; but when it is not once, but several times, that a knight gains
+special credit for deeds he has performed, we may be sure that fortune
+has less to do with the matter than his personal merits. Three times
+have you earned special credit; upon the first occasion, the grand
+master--no mean judge of conduct and character--deemed you worthy of
+secular knighthood, an honour which has not, in my memory, been bestowed
+at Rhodes upon any young knight; on the second, you were promoted to the
+command of a galley, though never before has such a command been given
+to any, save knights of long experience; and now, for the third time,
+the councillors of one of the greatest of Italian cities are about to do
+you honour. It is good to be modest, Sir Gervaise, and it is better to
+underestimate than to overrate one's own merits, but it is not well to
+carry the feeling to an extreme. I am quite sure that in your case your
+disclaimer is wholly sincere and unaffected; but take my advice, accept
+the honours the world may pay you as not undeserved, determining only in
+your mind that if you deem them excessive, you will at least do all
+in your power to show that they are not ill bestowed. You will not, I
+trust, take my counsel amiss."
+
+"On the contrary, Sir Fabricius," Gervaise said warmly. "I am really
+but a boy yet, though by good fortune pushed strangely forward, and I
+am glad indeed to receive council from a knight of vastly greater
+experience than myself and, in future, however much I may be conscious
+in my own mind that anything I have done is greatly overrated, I will at
+least abstain from protest. And now, Countess, I must pray you to excuse
+me. I know that Sir Ralph Harcourt is, before this, down at the dockyard
+waiting my coming to engage sailors."
+
+"You will come tomorrow at the same time, I hope, Sir Gervaise. As
+Claudia's sworn knight we have now a claim upon you, and for the short
+time that you remain here you must regard this as your home, although
+you must necessarily remain the guest of the doge."
+
+"He is a fine young fellow, indeed," Caretto said, after Gervaise
+had left. "There is no affectation about his modesty, and he really
+considers that this success he has gained is solely a stroke of good
+fortune. Of course, I have been asking many questions about him of the
+young knights of his own langue, Harcourt among them. They tell me that
+he is always in earnest in everything he undertakes. He is without a
+rival among the younger knights of the convent in his skill in arms, and
+for strength and activity in all exercises; he seems to care nothing
+for the ordinary amusements in which they join at Rhodes, and for nine
+months was scarcely ever seen by those in the auberge, save when they
+gathered for meals, so continuously did he work to acquire a perfect
+command of Turkish. How thoroughly he succeeded is evident from the fact
+that he was able to live among the galley slaves without exciting any
+suspicions in their minds that he was other than he pretended to be, a
+Syrian captive. That he is brave goes without saying, though perhaps
+no braver than the majority of his companions. The extraordinary thing
+about him is that although, as he himself says, little more than a boy,
+he has the coolness to plan, and the head to carry out, schemes that
+would do credit to the most experienced captain. He is already a credit
+to the Order, and, should he live, will assuredly rise to the highest
+offices in it, and may even die its grand master. In the stormy times
+that are coming on, there will be ample opportunities for him still
+further to distinguish himself, and to fulfil the singular promise of
+his youth. That he possesses great tact, as well as other qualities,
+is shown by the enthusiasm with which his companions regard him. In no
+case, among those to whom I have spoken, have I discerned the smallest
+jealousy of him. The tact that is needed to stand thus among fifty young
+knights, almost all his seniors in age, will assuredly enable him later
+on to command the confidence and affection of older men."
+
+When the other guests had left, and Caretto only remained, the countess
+turned to Claudia. "You went too far, Claudia. I was willing enough,
+when you asked me, that you should bestow a favour upon him. Most young
+knights wear such a favour, which may be a sign of devotion, but which
+far more frequently is a piece of gallantry. In the case of a knight
+hospitaller it can only be the latter; it is in his case merely a sign
+that he has so distinguished himself that some maiden feels a pride that
+her gift should be carried into battle by him, and, on his part, that he
+too is proud of the gift so bestowed by one whose goodwill he prizes.
+In that way I was willing that you should grant him your favour. But
+the manner in which you gave it was far more serious than the occasion
+warranted, and your promise to grant no similar favour to another as
+long as he lived, surprised, and, I may almost say, shocked me. You are,
+according to our custom here, considered almost a woman, and had not
+Sir Gervaise belonged to a religious Order, and were he of a presuming
+disposition, he might well have gathered a meaning from your words far
+beyond what you intended, and have even entertained a presumptuous hope
+that you were not indifferent to his merits. In the present case, of
+course, no harm is done; still, methinks that it would be far better had
+the words been unspoken. Your cousin here will, I am sure, agree with
+me."
+
+Caretto did not speak, but stood playing with his moustache, waiting for
+Claudia's reply. The girl had stood with downcast eyes while her mother
+was speaking.
+
+"I only expressed what I felt, mother," she said, after a pause, "and I
+do not think that Sir Gervaise Tresham is likely to misunderstand me.
+It seems to me that never among those whom I have met have I seen one
+so worthy. No praises can be higher than those with which my cousin has
+spoken of him. He has rescued him, whom we dearly love, from slavery;
+he has saved Genoa from great disaster, and many towns and villages from
+plunder and ruin. I do indeed feel proud that such a knight should wear
+my gage, and, were there no other reason, I should be unwilling that, so
+long as he carried it, another should possess a similar one from me. I
+am sure that Sir Gervaise will have felt that this was the meaning of my
+words; I wished him to see that it was not a favour lightly given by a
+girl who might, a few weeks hence, bestow a similar one upon another,
+but was a gage seriously given of the honour in which I held him."
+
+"Very well said, Claudia," Caretto broke in, before the countess could
+reply. "I warrant me the young knight will not misunderstand your gift,
+and that he will prize it highly and carry it nobly. He is not one of
+those who will boast of a favour and display it all times, and, except
+perhaps to his friend Sir Ralph Harcourt, I will wager he never tells a
+soul who was its donor."
+
+When Claudia shortly afterwards left the room, he said to the countess,
+"Excuse me for breaking in, Agatha, but I felt that it was much better
+to agree with her, and not to make overmuch of the matter; she is just
+of an age to make some one a hero, and she could hardly have chosen a
+better subject for her worship. In the first place, he is a knight
+of St. John; in the second, he is going away in a few days, perhaps
+tomorrow, and may never cross her path again. The thought of him will
+prevent her fancy from straying for a time, and keep her heart whole
+until you decide on a suitor for her hand."
+
+"Nevertheless, I would rather that it had not been so. Claudia is not
+given to change, and this may last long enough to cause trouble when I
+bring forward the suitor you speak of."
+
+"Well, in any case it might be worse," Caretto said philosophically.
+And then, with a smile in answer to her look of inquiry, "Knights of the
+Order have, ere now, obtained release from their vows."
+
+"Fabricius!" the countess exclaimed, in a shocked voice.
+
+"Yes, I know, Agatha, that the child is one of the richest heiresses
+in Italy, but for that very reason it needs not that her husband should
+have wide possessions. In all other respects you could wish for no
+better. He will assuredly be a famous knight; he is the sort of man to
+make her perfectly happy; and, lastly, you know I cannot forget that I
+owe my liberation from slavery to him. At any rate, Agatha, as I said
+before, he may never cross her path again, and you may, a year or two
+hence, find her perfectly amenable to your wishes."
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVII CAPTURED
+
+
+Upon the following day the doge requested Gervaise to accompany him to
+a meeting of the council. Upon entering the grand hall he found not only
+the members of the council assembled in their robes of office, but a
+large gathering of the nobles and principal citizens of Genoa, together
+with the knights of the galley whom, under Ralph Harcourt's orders,
+Gervaise found, to his surprise, drawn up in order across the Hall.
+Here, in the name of the Republic, Battista Fragoso announced to him
+that, by the unanimous decision of the council, he had been elected
+a noble of Genoa; an honour, he added, on only one or two previous
+occasions in the history of the Republic bestowed upon any but of
+princely rank, but which he had nobly earned by the great service he
+had rendered to the State. His name was then inscribed in the book
+containing the names and titles of the nobles of Genoa. Next, Battista
+Fragoso presented him with a superb suit of Milanese armour, as his own
+personal gift, and then with a casket of very valuable jewels, as the
+gift of the city of Genoa. Each presentation was accompanied by the
+plaudits of the assembly, and by the no less warm acclamations of the
+knights. Ralph was then called forward, and presented with a suit of
+armour but little inferior to that given to Gervaise, and each knight
+received a heavy gold chain of the finest workmanship of Genoa.
+
+Two days later the preparations for departure were complete, and a
+sufficient number of men were engaged to man the prizes. This charge,
+also, Genoa took upon itself, and put on board much stronger crews than
+Gervaise deemed necessary for the navigation of the ships. The weather
+was fine and the wind favourable, and a quick passage was made to
+Rhodes. When the harbour was in sight, the ships were ordered to proceed
+in single file, the galley leading the way with a huge banner of the
+Order floating from her stern, and smaller flags on staffs at each side.
+It was not until they passed by the two forts guarding the entrance that
+the flags fluttering at the mastheads of the prizes afforded to those
+on shore an intimation of the event that had taken place, and even then
+none supposed that this fleet of prizes had been taken by the one galley
+that headed them.
+
+As the Santa Barbara slowly rowed up the harbour, the State barge of
+the grand master put off to meet it, and D'Aubusson, with a party of
+knights, soon stepped on board.
+
+"Welcome back, Sir Gervaise! although I little expected to see you
+return so soon. What is the meaning of this procession that follows you?
+By their rig and appearance they are Moors, but how they come to be thus
+sailing in your wake is a mystery to us all."
+
+"They are Moors, your Excellency; they form part of an expedition fitted
+out by the corsairs of Algiers, Tripoli, Tunis, and other piratical
+strongholds, for the purpose of destroying the commerce and ravaging the
+coasts of Western Italy. Fortunately, we fell in with a ship that had
+been plundered by three of them on their way north, and learned from the
+dying captain, who was the only one of her crew left with life on board,
+the direction they were taking, and something of the nature of the
+expedition. We pursued the three galleys, came up with them, had the
+good fortune to capture them, and then had the delight of finding among
+their rowers the noble knights, Fabricius Caretto, Giacomo Da Vinci, and
+Pietro Forzi."
+
+The grand master, and the knights with him, uttered an exclamation of
+joy, and, as the three knights named stepped forward, embraced them with
+the liveliest pleasure.
+
+"My dear Caretto," the grand master exclaimed, "it is almost a
+resurrection, for we have all long mourned you as dead; and your return
+to us at the present time is indeed fortunate; for upon whose judgment
+and aid could I better rely than those of my old comrade in arms?" Then,
+turning to Gervaise, he went on: "It was a daring and brilliant exploit
+indeed, Sir Gervaise, and in due time honour shall be paid to you and
+your brave companions, to whom and to you I now tender the thanks of the
+Order. But tell me the rest briefly, for I would fain hear from these
+noble knights and old friends the story of what has befallen them."
+
+"My tale is a very brief one, your Highness. The Cavalier Caretto sailed
+at once in a swift craft from the south of Sardinia, to carry warnings
+to the cities on the coast of Italy of the danger that threatened them,
+and in order that some war galleys might be despatched by Genoa to meet
+the corsair fleet. During his absence we discovered the little inlet in
+which the pirates lay hidden, waiting doubtless the arrival of the three
+ships we had captured, to commence operations. On the return of the
+knight with the news that it would be at least a fortnight before Genoa
+could fit out any galleys, and fearing that the pirates might at any
+moment put to sea, we procured some small Sardinian craft, and fitted
+them as fire ships; with the captives we had rescued, and some Sard
+fishermen, we manned the three prizes, distributing the knights between
+them, and at night launched the fire ships against the corsairs, whose
+ships were crowded together. Eleven of them were burnt; six we captured
+as they endeavoured to make their way out, and took possession of four
+others whose crews had run them ashore and deserted them. None escaped."
+
+Exclamations of astonishment and almost of incredulity broke from the
+knights.
+
+"And is it possible, Sir Gervaise, that these thirteen vessels that
+follow you are all prizes captured by your galley alone?"
+
+"It is, as I have the honour to tell your Highness. But their capture,
+except in the case of the first three, was due almost solely to good
+fortune and to the position in which we found them, almost incapable of
+defence."
+
+"What think you, knights and comrades?" the grand master said to his
+companions. "There were some of you who deemed it rash to entrust a
+galley to so young a commander and so youthful a crew. What say you now?
+Never in the annals of the Order has such a sight been witnessed as that
+of thirteen prizes being brought in by a single galley, to say naught
+of eleven others destroyed. Caretto, you and your comrades must have had
+some share in this marvellous victory."
+
+"By no means," the Italian replied; "beyond having the honour of aiding
+to carry out the orders of Sir Gervaise Tresham, the commander of the
+galley. The plan was wholly of his own devising, its execution solely
+due to his arrangement of the details, and that without the slightest
+suggestion on the part of myself or my comrades. I will presently
+narrate to you the whole story; it will come better from my lips than
+from those of Sir Gervaise, whose disposition is to wholly underestimate
+the merit of the action he has performed. But I must also bear
+testimony, not only to the bravery displayed by Sir Gervaise, Sir Ralph
+Harcourt, his lieutenant, and every one of the knights his crew, but
+to the admirable discipline, order, and good fellowship on board the
+galley, which would have done credit to the most experienced commander
+and to the most veteran knights of the Order."
+
+The grand master paused a moment, and then said in a loud voice, "Sir
+Gervaise Tresham, Sir Ralph Harcourt, and knights of the seven langues
+of the Order--As yet I can hardly appreciate the full extent of the
+service that you have rendered. I thanked you but now for the capture of
+three corsairs; but what can I say when I learn that you have destroyed
+or taken a whole fleet? I invite you all to a banquet that I shall hold
+tonight, where the Cavalier Caretto will relate to us all the details of
+this marvellous exploit."
+
+Within a few minutes after the return of the grand master and his party
+ashore, the flags of the Order were run up to the flagstaffs of every
+fort and bastion: the bells of the churches chimed out a triumphant
+peal, and a salute was fired from the guns of the three water forts,
+while along the wall facing the port, the townspeople waved numberless
+gay flags as a welcome to the galley. Most of the knights went ashore
+at once, but Gervaise, under the excuse that he wished to see that
+everything was in order before landing, remained on board until it was
+time to go to the banquet, being sure that by that time the knights
+would have fully told the story at their respective auberges, and that
+there would be no more questions to answer. The banquet differed but
+little from that at Genoa, and Gervaise was heartily glad when it was
+over.
+
+The next day the grand master sent for him.
+
+"If I judge rightly, Sir Gervaise, the thing that will best please you
+at present, is an order to put to sea again at once, to conclude the
+usual period of service of the galley."
+
+"It is indeed," Gervaise replied earnestly. "But I should be glad, sir,
+if you will allow that the time should begin to count afresh from our
+present start. We have really had but a short period of service, for we
+wasted a week at Genoa, and ten days on our journey back here, so that
+we have had really no more than a month's active service."
+
+"Yes, if you count only by time," D'Aubusson said, with a smile.
+"Reckoning by results, you have done a good five years' cruise. However,
+so small a request can certainly be granted. The places of the two
+knights who were killed, and of four others whose wounds are reported
+to me as being too severe for them to be fit for service for some time,
+shall be filled up at once from the langues to which each belonged. You
+will cruise among the Western islands, whence complaints have reached us
+of a corsair who has been plundering and burning. Sometimes he is heard
+of as far north as Negropont, at others he is off the south of the
+Morea; then, again, we hear of him among the Cyclades. We have been
+unwilling to despatch another galley, for there is ample employment for
+every one here. After the blow you have struck on the Moorish corsairs,
+they are likely to be quiet for a little. You had best, therefore, try
+for a time if you cannot come across this pirate. You must let me know
+how much you paid for the vessels you used as fire ships, and to the
+Sards; this is an expense chargeable to the general service. I may tell
+you that to me it is due that no recognition of your exploits, such as
+that which Genoa bestowed upon you, will be made. At the council this
+morning it was urged that some signal mark of honour should be granted;
+but I interposed, saying that you had already received exceptional
+promotion, and that it would not be for your good, or that of the
+Order, for so young a knight to be raised to an official position of
+a character usually held by seniors, and that I was perfectly sure
+you would prefer remaining in command of your galley to any promotion
+whatever that would retain you on the Island."
+
+"Indeed I should, your Highness. I wish to gain experience and to do
+service to the Order, and so far from pleasing me, promotion would
+trouble and distress me, and, could it have been done, I would most
+gladly have sent home the prizes, instead of going to Genoa, and would
+myself have continued the cruise."
+
+"So the Cavalier Caretto told me," the grand master replied. "Very well,
+then. In three days you shall set out again. The admiral tells me that
+never before has a galley returned with the slaves in such good health
+and condition, and that unquestionably your plan of erecting an awning
+to shelter them from the midday heat and the night dews has had a
+most beneficial effect on their health; he has recommended its general
+adoption."
+
+Three days later the Santa Barbara again left port, and was soon upon
+her station. For some weeks she cruised backwards and forwards along the
+coast and among the islands. They often heard of the pirate ship, but
+all their efforts to find her were unavailing.
+
+One evening there were signs of a change of weather, and by morning it
+was blowing a furious gale from the north; in spite of the efforts of
+the rowers, the galley narrowly escaped being driven ashore; but she at
+last gained the shelter of an island, and anchored under its lee, the
+slaves being utterly worn out by continuous exertion. As soon as the
+gale abated they again put to sea, and, after proceeding for some miles,
+saw a ship cast up on shore. Some people could be made out on board of
+her, and a white flag was raised.
+
+"She must have been driven ashore during the gale," Gervaise said. "We
+will row in to within a quarter of a mile of her and see what we can do
+for them."
+
+As soon as the anchor was dropped a boat was lowered.
+
+"I will go myself, Ralph, for I shall be glad to set my foot on shore
+again. There must be people on the island; I wonder none of them have
+come to the aid of those poor fellows. I suppose the villages are on the
+other side of the island, and they have not yet heard of the wreck."
+
+Gervaise asked three of the knights to accompany him, and the boat,
+rowed by galley slaves, was soon on its way. All were glad at the change
+afforded to the monotony of their life on board, and at the prospect of
+a scamper on shore.
+
+There were but five or six men to be seen on the deck of the wreck, and
+these had, as the boat approached, come down to the rocks as if to meet
+those who came to their aid; but as the knights leapt out, they threw
+themselves suddenly upon them with knives and scimitars that had
+hitherto been concealed beneath their garments, while at the same moment
+a crowd of men appeared on the deck of the ship, and, leaping down, ran
+forward with drawn swords. Two of the knights fell dead before they had
+time to draw their weapons. The third shook off his two assailants,
+and for a minute kept them both at bay; but others, rushing up, cut him
+down.
+
+Gervaise had received a slight wound before he realised what was
+happening. He snatched his dagger from its sheath, and struck down one
+assailant; but ere he could raise it to strike again, another leapt on
+to his back, and clung there until the rest rushed up, when he shouted,
+"Take him alive! take him alive!" and, throwing down their weapons, half
+a dozen of the pirates flung themselves upon Gervaise, and strove
+to pull him to the ground, until at last, in spite of his desperate
+resistance, they succeeded in doing so. His armour was hastily stripped
+off, his hands and feet bound, and then at the orders of the pirate who
+had leapt on his back, and who was evidently the captain, half a dozen
+men lifted him on to their shoulders. As they did so four guns from the
+galley flashed out, and the balls flew overhead. The pirates, who had
+already begun to quarrel over the armour and arms of the fallen knights,
+at once took to their heels, followed by the galley slaves from the
+boat.
+
+"Make haste," the captain said to the men carrying Gervaise.
+
+"They are lowering their boats; we must be under way before they come
+up."
+
+In a minute or two Gervaise was set down on his feet, the cords round
+his legs were cut, and he was made to hurry along with his captors. In
+a short time an inlet was reached, and here Gervaise saw, to his
+mortification, the pirate craft for which the Santa Barbara had in vain
+been searching. As soon as the party were all on board, the ropes by
+which she was moored to two trees were thrown off; the great sails
+hoisted, and she sailed boldly out. Although the gale had entirely
+abated, there was still a brisk wind blowing, and it was evident to the
+captain of the corsair that under such circumstances he could outsail
+the galley that had long been searching for him; when, therefore,
+the Santa Barbara came in sight, just as he and his crew had finished
+stripping the wreck of its contents, the idea had occurred to him to
+attempt to entice some of the knights to land.
+
+As soon as the vessel was under way he abused his followers hotly for
+not having obeyed his orders to capture the knights without bloodshed;
+but they pleaded that it was as much as they had been able to do to
+capture Gervaise in that way, and that they could never have overcome
+the four together, before the boats would have had time to come from the
+ship.
+
+Gervaise had been told to sit down with his back to a mast and in this
+position he could, when the vessel heeled over to the breeze, obtain a
+view of the sea. It was with a feeling of bitter mortification and rage
+that he saw the galley lying but half a mile away, as the corsair issued
+from the inlet. A moment later he heard a gun fired, and saw the signal
+hoisted to recall the boats.
+
+"If the wind had been favourable," the captain said to his mate, "we
+would have borne down upon her, and could have reached and captured her
+before the boats got back, for you may be sure that they have landed
+almost all their men. However, we can't get there against the wind, and
+we will now say goodbye to them."
+
+Gervaise knew well that at the pace they were running through the water
+the galley would have no chance whatever of overtaking her, and that,
+ere the knights came on board again, she would be already two or three
+miles away. A point of land soon concealed the galley from view, and
+when he caught sight of her, as she rounded the point, she was but a
+speck in the distance.
+
+They passed several islands in the course of the day, changing their
+direction to a right angle to that which they had at first pursued, as
+soon as they were hidden from the sight of the galley by an intervening
+island. As night came on they anchored in a little bay on the coast of
+the Morea. The sails being furled, the sailors made a division of the
+booty they had captured on the island, and of the portable property
+found on board the wreck. A gourd full of water was placed to Gervaise's
+lips by one of the men of a kinder disposition than the rest. He drank
+it thankfully, for he was parched with thirst excited by the pain caused
+by the tightness with which he had been bound.
+
+He slept where he sat. All night four men remained on guard, although
+from what he heard they had no fear whatever of being overtaken. In
+the morning his arms were unbound, and they stripped off his tunic and
+shirt. They had evidently respect for his strength, for before loosing
+his arms they tightly fastened his ankles together. The removal of his
+shirt exposed Claudia's gift to view.
+
+"Take that from him and give it to me," the captain said. As the two men
+approached, Gervaise seized one in each hand, dashed them against
+each other, and hurled them on the deck. But the exertion upset his
+equilibrium, and after making a vain effort to recover it, he fell
+heavily across them. The captain stooped over him, and, before he could
+recover himself, snatched the chain from his neck.
+
+"You are a stout fellow," he said, laughing, "and will make a fine
+slave. What have you got here that you are ready to risk your life
+for?" He looked at the little chain and its pendant with an air of
+disappointment. "'Tis worth but little," he said, showing it to his
+mate. "I would not give five ducats for it in the market. It must be a
+charm, or a knight would never carry it about with him and prize it so
+highly. It may be to things like this the Christians owe their luck."
+
+"It has not brought him luck this time," the mate observed with a laugh.
+
+"Even a charm cannot always bring good luck, but at any rate I will try
+it;" and he put it round his neck just as Gervaise had worn it. The
+latter was now unbound, and permitted to move about the deck. The
+strength he had shown in the struggle on shore, and the manner in which
+he had hurled, bound as he was, two of their comrades to the deck, had
+won for him the respect of his captors, and he was therefore allowed
+privileges not granted to the seamen of the vessel that had had the ill
+fortune to be cast on shore so close to the spot where the corsair
+was hiding. These had been seized, driven to the ship, and having been
+stripped of the greater portion of their clothes, shut down in the hold.
+
+Although angry that but one out of the four who landed had been
+captured, the captain was in a good humour at having tricked his
+redoubtable foes, and was disposed to treat Gervaise with more
+consideration than was generally given to captives. The latter had not
+spoken a word of Turkish from the time he was captured, and had shaken
+his head when first addressed in that language. No suspicion was
+therefore entertained that he had any knowledge of it, and the Turks
+conversed freely before him.
+
+"Where think you we had better sell him?" the mate asked the captain,
+when Gervaise was leaning against the bulwark watching the land, a short
+quarter of a mile away. "He ought to fetch a good ransom."
+
+"Ay, but who would get it? You know how it was with one that Ibrahim
+took two years ago. First there were months of delay, then, when the
+ransom was settled, the pasha took four-fifths of it for himself, and
+Ibrahim got far less than he would have done had he sold him as a slave.
+The pashas here, and the sultans of the Moors, are all alike; if they
+once meddle in an affair they take all the profit, and think they do
+well by giving you a tithe of it. There are plenty of wealthy Moors who
+are ready to pay well for a Christian slave, especially when he is a
+good looking young fellow such as this. He will fetch as much as all
+those eight sailors below. They are only worth their labour, while
+this youngster will command a fancy price. I know a dozen rich Moors in
+Tripoli or Tunis who would be glad to have him; and we agreed that we
+would run down to the African coast for awhile, for that galley has been
+altogether too busy of late for our comfort, and will be all the more
+active after this little affair; besides, people in these islands have
+got so scared that one can't get within ten miles of any of them now
+without seeing their signal smokes rising on the hills, and finding,
+when they land, the villages deserted and stripped of everything worth
+carrying away."
+
+This news was a disappointment to Gervaise. He had calculated that he
+would be sold at one of the Levant ports, and had thought that with his
+knowledge of Turkish he should have no great difficulty in escaping
+from any master into whose hands he might fall, and taking his chance of
+either seizing a fishing boat, or of making his way in a trading ship to
+some district where the population was a mixed one, and where trade was
+winked at between the merchants there, and those at some of the Greek
+towns. To escape from Tunis or Tripoli would be far more difficult;
+there, too, he would be beyond the reach of the good offices of Suleiman
+Ali, who would, he was sure, have done all in his power to bring about
+his release. Of one thing he was determined: he would not return to
+Rhodes without making every possible effort to recover Claudia's gage,
+as he considered it absolutely incumbent on him as a knight to guard, as
+something sacred, a gift so bestowed. The fancy of the corsair to
+retain the jewel as a charm he regarded as a piece of the greatest good
+fortune. Had it been thrown among the common spoil, he would never have
+known to which of the crew it had fallen at the division, still less
+have traced what became of it afterwards; whereas now, for some time, at
+any rate, it was likely to remain in the captain's possession.
+
+Had it not been for that, he would have attempted to escape at the first
+opportunity, and such an opportunity could not fail to present itself
+ere long, for he had but to manage to possess himself of Moslem garments
+to be able to move about unquestioned in any Turkish town. When it
+became dark he was shut up in the hold, which was, he found, crowded
+with captives, as, in addition to the crew of the wreck, between forty
+and fifty Greeks, for the most part boys and young girls, had been
+carried off from the villages plundered. It was pitch dark below,
+although the scuttle had been left open in order to allow a certain
+amount of air to reach the captives; Gervaise, therefore, felt his way
+about cautiously, and lay down as soon as he found a clear space. Save
+an occasional moan or curse, and the panting of those suffering from the
+heat and closeness of the crowded hold, all was still. The majority
+of the captives had been some time in their floating prison, and
+their first poignant grief had settled down into a dull and despairing
+acceptance of their fate; the sailors, newly captured, had for hours
+raved and cursed, but, worn out by their struggle with the elements, and
+their rage and grief, they had now fallen asleep.
+
+It was long before Gervaise dozed off. He was furious with himself for
+having fallen into the trap; if he had, as he said to himself, lain off
+the beach in the boat, and questioned the supposed shipwrecked sailors,
+their inability to reply to him would have at once put him on his guard;
+as it was, he had walked into the snare as carelessly and confidently as
+a child might have done. Even more than his own captivity, he regretted
+the death of his three comrades, which he attributed to his own want
+of care. The next morning he was again allowed on deck. The vessel was
+under way, and her head was pointing south. To his surprise some of the
+crew gave him a friendly greeting; he was unable to understand a manner
+so at variance with their hatred to the Christians, until one of them
+said to him in a mixture of Greek and Italian, "We have heard from
+our countrymen who were in the boat with you, that they received much
+kindness at your hands, and that of all the Christians they had served
+under, you were the kindest master. Therefore, it is but right now Allah
+has decreed that you in turn should be a slave to the true believers,
+that you should receive the same mercy you gave to Moslems when they
+were in your power."
+
+The captain came up as the man was speaking. He talked for a time to the
+sailor, who then turned again to Gervaise. "The captain says that he is
+told you were the commander of that galley; he has questioned the eight
+men separately, and they all tell the same story: and yet he cannot
+understand how so young a man should command a galley manned by warriors
+famous for their deeds of arms, even among us who are their foes."
+
+"This galley was an exception," Gervaise replied; "the knights on
+board were all young, as they could be better spared than those more
+experienced, at a time when your sultan is known to be preparing for an
+attack on Rhodes."
+
+The captain was silent for a minute when this was interpreted to him; he
+had at the time noticed and wondered at the youth of the four knights,
+and the explanation seemed to him a reasonable one.
+
+"I wish I had known it," he said after a pause; "for had I done so, I
+would have fought and captured her yesterday; I have half a mind to go
+back and seek her now."
+
+He called up one of the ex slaves who was a native of Tripoli, and who
+had now taken his place as a member of the crew, and asked him a number
+of questions. Gervaise felt uncomfortable while the man was answering.
+Fortunately, his rowers had agreed to say nothing whatever of the
+destruction of the corsair fleet, of which no word had as yet reached
+the pirates, deeming that, in their anger at the news, the pirates might
+turn upon them for the part that they had, however involuntarily, borne
+in it.
+
+As soon as he perceived that the captain entertained the idea of
+returning to engage the galley, the man felt that if he were to avoid
+a return into captivity he must deter him from taking such a step. He
+therefore, in answer to his questions as to the strength of the crew of
+the galley and the fighting powers of the knights, reported the capture
+of the three vessels. The captain listened almost incredulously to his
+statement, and, calling up another two of the men, questioned them also
+as to the occurrence. Having heard them, he turned away and paced the
+deck, in evident anger; however, he gave no instructions for a change of
+course, and, to the great satisfaction of the eight rescued slaves, the
+vessel continued her course southward.
+
+As they neared the African coast, Gervaise kept an eager lookout, in
+hopes that Visconti's galley might appear in sight. The captain's temper
+had not recovered from the effect of the news of the capture of three
+Moorish vessels by the galley commanded by Gervaise, and the latter,
+seeing the mood he was in, kept forward so as to avoid coming in contact
+with him. He had early taken the opportunity of saying to one of the
+released galley slaves, "I pray you, if you have any feeling of kindness
+towards me for the efforts I made to alleviate your condition, say
+no word of my knowledge of Turkish, and ask the others also to remain
+silent on this point."
+
+The man had nodded, and the request was observed by them all.
+
+The captain's irritation showed itself in his treatment of the other
+captives. These were brought up every day from the hold, and kept on
+deck until dark, as the price they would fetch in the slave market in
+Tripoli would depend greatly upon their health and appearance; but when
+the captain came near them he several times struck them brutally, if
+they happened to be in his way. Gervaise had the greatest difficulty in
+restraining his indignation, and, indeed, only did so because he felt
+that his interference would but make things worse for them. When at last
+the ship cast anchor off Tripoli, the captain ordered the boats to be
+lowered. As he walked towards the gangway, he happened to push against
+one of the captives, a Greek girl of some ten years of age. With an
+angry exclamation he struck her to the deck. Gervaise sprang forward.
+
+"You brute!" he exclaimed in English. "I have a good mind to throw you
+overboard, and will do so the next time you strike one of these children
+without cause."
+
+Infuriated by Gervaise's interference and threatening attitude, the
+corsair drew his long knife; but before he could strike, Gervaise caught
+his wrist; the knife fell from his hand, and Gervaise kicked it through
+the open gangway into the sea. The captain shouted to his men to seize
+the Christian, but the young knight's blood was up now. The first
+man who came at him he seized by the sash round his waist, and threw
+overboard; the two next he stretched on the deck with blows from his
+clenched fist. Some of the others now drew their weapons, but the
+captain shouted to them to sheath them.
+
+"Fools!" he yelled. "Is it not enough that your cowardice has already
+cost us the lives of three knights, whose capture would have brought us
+a big sum? Throw him down and bind him. What! are fifty of you afraid of
+one unarmed man? No wonder these Christians capture our ships, if this
+is the mettle of our crews!"
+
+Goaded by his words, the men made a general rush upon Gervaise, and, in
+spite of his desperate efforts, threw him on to the deck and bound him;
+then the captain, seizing a heavy stick in his left hand, his right
+being still powerless, showered blows upon him until Gervaise almost
+lost consciousness. "Throw some water over the dog," the corsair said,
+as he threw down the stick, panting with his exertions; and then,
+without waiting to see if his order was obeyed, he took his place in the
+boat, and was rowed ashore.
+
+As soon as he had left, three or four of the ex galley slaves carried
+Gervaise into the shade of the sail. The sailors, several of whom
+bore signs of the late struggle, looked on sullenly, but offered no
+opposition when the men took off the ropes and raised him into a sitting
+posture against the mast. He had not entirely lost consciousness, and
+was now fast recovering himself.
+
+"Is there anything we can do for you?" one of the men asked in Italian.
+
+"No I shall soon be all right again, although I am bruised all over, and
+shall be stiff for a day or two. You had best leave me now, or you will
+incur the enmity of these fellows."
+
+Gervaise was indeed bruised from his neck to his heels. Even in
+his passion the pirate had avoided striking him on the head, as a
+disfiguring mark on the face would diminish his value. Sitting there, he
+congratulated himself that he had been beaten with a stick and not
+with a whip; a stick is a weapon, and he did not feel the same sense of
+dishonour that he would have experienced had he been beaten with a
+whip. That such might be his lot in slavery he recognised. The backs of
+Caretto and his two companions were seamed with the marks inflicted
+by the gang master's whip, and he could scarce hope to escape the same
+treatment; but at present he hardly felt a slave. There was another
+reflection that to some extent mitigated the pain of his bruises;
+the pirate captain held his treasured gage, and it was his fixed
+determination to recover it. The man had at first in a rough way treated
+him fairly, and had allowed him more liberty than the other captives,
+and he would have felt reluctant to take extreme measure against him to
+recover the gage. Now he was not only free from any sense of obligation,
+but had a heavy score to settle with him.
+
+After a time he got up and walked stiffly and painfully up and down
+the deck, knowing that this was the best plan to prevent the limbs
+from stiffening. The corsair did not return until night set in; he was
+accompanied by an Arab, whose dress and appearance showed that he was
+a person of importance. The other slaves had all been sent below, but
+Gervaise still remained on deck, as the mate had not cared to risk
+another conflict by giving him orders in the absence of the captain. As
+the pirate stepped on deck he ordered some torches to be brought.
+
+"This is the Christian I spoke of," he said to the Arab, pointing to
+Gervaise, who was leaning carelessly against the bulwark.
+
+"He is, as you see, capable of hard work of any kind; his strength is
+prodigious, for it took ten of my best men to bind him this morning."
+
+"Why did you wish to bind him?" the Arab asked coldly; "you told me that
+although so strong he was of a quiet disposition, and would make a good
+household slave."
+
+"I struck a slave girl who stood in my way," the captain said, "and he
+came at me so suddenly that I had to call upon the men to bind him. He
+threw one of them overboard, and with his naked hands knocked down two
+others; and, as I have told you, it took all the efforts of eight or ten
+more before they could overcome him."
+
+The Arab took a torch from one of the sailors, walked across to
+Gervaise, who was naked from the waist upwards, his upper garments
+having been torn into shreds in the struggle, and examined him closely.
+
+"And then you beat him," he said, turning to the captain.
+
+"Certainly I beat him. Do you think that a slave is to mutiny on board
+my ship, and escape unpunished?"
+
+The Arab, without replying, again inspected Gervaise.
+
+"You ask a large sum for him," he said.
+
+"I should ask twice as much," the captain replied, "if it were not for
+the regulation that one slave from each cargo brought in belongs to the
+sultan, and his officers would as a matter of course choose this fellow,
+for the others are merely such as are sold in the market every day. This
+man is one of the accursed Order of Rhodes, and would fetch a ransom
+many times greater than the sum I ask for him, only I have not the time
+to wait for months until the affair could be arranged."
+
+"And, moreover, Hassan," the Arab said grimly, "it has doubtless not
+escaped you that as the Sultan of Turkey is fitting out an expedition
+to destroy the community of Rhodes, the chance of their ransoming their
+comrade is a very slight one."
+
+"Threatened men live long," the captain said. "The sultan has been
+talking of attacking them for years, and something has always happened
+to prevent his carrying out his intention. It may be the same again."
+
+"I will take him," the Arab said shortly. "Here is a purse with the sum
+you named; count it, and see that it is right." As he stood apart while
+the pirate counted out the money, the eight released slaves came up in a
+body, and one of them, bowing low before the merchant, said,
+
+"My lord, we have long been slaves of the Christian knights at Rhodes,
+and have worked in their galleys. We were rescued the other day when
+this knight was taken prisoner. Our life has been a hard one. We have
+borne toil, and hardship, and blows, the heat of the sun by day, and the
+damp by night, but we would humbly represent to you that since we were
+placed in the galley commanded by this knight our lot has been made
+bearable by his humanity and kindness. He erected an awning to shade us
+from the sun's rays, and to shelter us from the night dews. He provided
+good food for us. He saw that we were not worked beyond our strength,
+and he forbade us being struck, unless for good cause. Therefore, my
+lord, now that misfortune has fallen upon him, we venture to represent
+to you the kindness with which he has treated us, in the hope that it
+may please you to show him such mercy as he showed to us."
+
+"You have done well," the Arab said, "and your words shall not be
+forgotten. When you land tomorrow, inquire for the house of Isaac
+Ben Ibyn. You are doubtless penniless, and I may be able to obtain
+employment for those of you who may stop at Tripoli, and to assist those
+who desire to take passage to their homes elsewhere. We are commanded to
+be grateful to those who befriend us, and as you have shown yourselves
+to be so, it is right that I, an humble servant of the Great One, should
+in His name reward you."
+
+Motioning to Gervaise to follow him, the Arab stepped into his boat.
+Gervaise turned to the men, and said in Italian, "Thanks, my friends,
+you have well discharged any debt that you may think you owe me. Will
+you tell that villain"--and he pointed to the captain threateningly--"I
+warn him that some day I will kill him like a dog!" Then, turning, he
+stepped into the bow of the boat, and the two men who rowed it at once
+pushed off.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVIII A KIND MASTER
+
+
+When the boat reached the shore the Arab handed a long bernouse to
+Gervaise, signed to him to pull the hood well over his head, and then
+led the way through the streets until he stopped at a large house,
+standing in a quiet quarter of the town. He struck on the door with his
+hand, and it was at once opened by a black slave.
+
+"Call Muley," the Arab said.
+
+The slave hurried away, and returned in a minute with a man somewhat
+past middle age, and dressed in a style that indicated that he was a
+trusted servant.
+
+"Muley," his master said, "I have bought this Christian who has been
+brought in by Hassan the corsair. He is one of the knights who are the
+terrors of our coasts, but is, from what I hear, of a kind and humane
+disposition. I am told that he was a commander of one of their galleys,
+and though I should not have believed it had I only Hassan's word, I
+have heard from others that it was so. My wife has long desired to have
+a Christian slave, and as Allah has blessed my efforts it was but right
+that I should gratify her, though in truth I do not know what work I
+shall set him to do at present. Let him first have a bath, and see that
+he is clad decently, then let him have a good meal. I doubt if he has
+had one since he was captured. He has been sorely beaten by the corsair,
+and from no fault of his own, but only because he opposed the man's
+brutality to a child slave. If any of his wounds need ointment, see that
+he has it. When all is ready, bring him to the door of my apartments, in
+order that I may show to my wife that I have gratified her whim."
+
+Then he motioned to Gervaise to follow Muley, who was the head of his
+household. Gervaise resisted the impulse to thank his new master, and
+followed in silence.
+
+He was first taken to a bathroom, furnished with an abundance of hot and
+cold water. Muley uttered an exclamation as, on Gervaise throwing off
+his bernouse, he saw that his flesh was a mass of bruises. After filling
+the bath with hot water, he motioned to Gervaise to get in, and lie
+there until he returned. It was some time before he came back, bringing
+a pot of ointment and some bandages. It was only on the body that the
+wounds needed dressing, for here the blows had fallen on the naked skin.
+When he had dressed them, Muley went out and returned with some Turkish
+garments, consisting of a pair of baggy trousers of yellow cotton, a
+white shirt of the same material, and a sleeveless jacket of blue cloth
+embroidered with yellow trimming; a pair of yellow slippers completed
+the costume. Muley now took him into another room, where he set before
+him a dish of rice with a meat gravy, a large piece of bread, and a
+wooden spoon.
+
+Gervaise ate the food with a deep feeling of thankfulness for the fate
+that had thrown him into such good hands. Then, after taking a long
+draught of water, he rose to his feet and followed Muley into the
+entrance hall. The latter stopped at a door on the opposite side,
+knocked at it, and then motioned to Gervaise to take off his slippers.
+The door was opened by the Arab himself.
+
+"Enter," he said courteously, and led Gervaise into an apartment where
+a lady and two girls were sitting on a divan. They were slightly veiled;
+but, as Gervaise afterwards learnt, Ben Ibyn was not a Moor, but a
+Berber, a people who do not keep their women in close confinement as
+do the Moors, but allow them to go abroad freely without being entirely
+muffled up.
+
+"Khadja," the merchant said, "this is the Christian slave I purchased
+today. You have for a long time desired one, but not until now have I
+found one who would, I thought, satisfy your expectations. What think
+you of him?"
+
+"He is a noble looking youth truly, Isaac, with his fair, wavy hair, his
+grey eyes, and white skin; truly, all my neighbours will envy me such
+a possession. I have often seen Christian slaves before, but they have
+always been broken down and dejected looking creatures; this one bears
+himself like a warrior rather than a slave."
+
+"He is a warrior; he is one of those terrible knights of Rhodes whose
+very name is a terror to the Turks, and whose galleys are feared even
+by our boldest corsairs. He must be of approved valour, for he was
+commander of one of these galleys."
+
+The girls looked with amazement at Gervaise. They had often heard tales
+of the capture of ships that had sailed from Tripoli, by the galleys
+of the Christian knights, and had pictured those fierce warriors as of
+almost supernatural strength and valour. That this youth, whose upper
+lip was but shaded with a slight moustache, should be one of them,
+struck them as being almost incredible.
+
+"He does not look ferocious, father," one of them said. "He looks
+pleasant and good tempered, as if he could injure no one."
+
+"And yet this morning, daughter, he braved, unarmed, the anger of Hassan
+the corsair, on the deck of his own ship; and when the pirate called
+upon his men to seize him he threw one overboard, struck two more on to
+the deck, and it needed eight men to overpower him."
+
+"I hope he won't get angry with us!" the younger girl exclaimed.
+Gervaise could not suppress a laugh, and then, turning to the merchant,
+said in Turkish, "I must ask your pardon for having concealed from you
+my knowledge of your tongue. I kept the secret from all on board the
+corsair, and meant to have done the same here, deeming that if none knew
+that I spoke the language it would greatly aid me should I ever see
+an opportunity of making my escape; but, Ben Ibyn, you have behaved so
+kindly to me that I feel it would not be honourable to keep it a secret
+from you, and to allow you and the ladies to talk freely before me,
+thinking that I was altogether ignorant of what you were saying."
+
+"You have acted well and honourably," Ben Ibyn said, putting a hand on
+his shoulder kindly. "We have heard much of the character of the Order,
+and that though valiant in battle, your knights are courteous and
+chivalrous, deeming a deceitful action to be unworthy of them, and
+binding themselves by their vows to succour the distressed and to be
+pitiful to the weak. We have heard that our wounded are tended by
+them in your hospitals with as much care as men of their own race and
+religion, and that in many things the knights were to be admired even by
+those who were their foes. I see now that these reports were true, and
+that although, as you say, it might be of advantage to you that none
+should know you speak Arabic, yet it is from a spirit of honourable
+courtesy you have now told us that you do so.
+
+"I did not tell you, wife," he went on, turning to her, "that the reason
+why he bearded Hassan today was because the corsair brutally struck a
+little female captive; thus, you see, he, at the risk of his life, and
+when himself a captive, carried out his vows to protect the defenceless.
+And now, wife, there is one thing you must know. For some time, at any
+rate, you must abandon the idea of exciting the envy of your friends by
+exhibiting your Christian captive to them. As you are aware, the sultan
+has the choice of any one slave he may select from each batch brought
+in, and assuredly he would choose this one, did it come to his ears,
+or to the ears of one of his officers, that a Christian knight had been
+landed. For this reason Hassan sold him to me for a less sum than
+he would otherwise have demanded, and we must for some time keep his
+presence here a secret. My idea is that he shall remain indoors until
+we move next week into our country house, where he will be comparatively
+free from observation."
+
+"Certainly, Isaac. I would not on any account that he should be handed
+over to the sultan, for he would either be put into the galleys or have
+to labour in the streets."
+
+"I will tell Muley to order the other slaves to say nothing outside
+of the fresh arrival, so for the present there is no fear of its being
+talked about in the town. Hassan will, for his own sake, keep silent
+on the matter. I have not yet asked your name," he went on, turning to
+Gervaise.
+
+"My name is Gervaise Tresham; but it will be easier for you to call me
+by my first name only."
+
+"Then, Gervaise, it were well that you retired to rest at once, for I am
+sure that you sorely need it." He touched a bell on the table, and told
+Muley, when he appeared, to conduct Gervaise to the place where he was
+to sleep, which was, he had already ordered, apart from the quarters of
+the other slaves.
+
+"The young fellow is a mass of bruises," Ben Ibyn said to his wife, when
+the door closed behind Gervaise. "Hassan beat him so savagely, after
+they had overpowered and bound him, that he well nigh killed him."
+
+An exclamation of indignation burst from the wife and daughters.
+
+"Muley has seen to his wounds," he went on, "and he will doubtless be
+cured in a few days. And now, wife, that your wish is gratified, and I
+have purchased a Christian slave for you, may I ask what you are going
+to do with him?"
+
+"I am sure I do not know," she said in a tone of perplexity. "I had
+thought of having him to hand round coffee when my friends call, and
+perhaps to work in the garden, but I did not think that he would be
+anything like this."
+
+"That is no reason why he should not do so," Ben Ibyn said. "These
+Christians, I hear, treat their women as if they were superior beings,
+and feel it no dishonour to wait upon them; I think you cannot do better
+than carry out your plan. It is certain there is no sort of work that
+he would prefer to it; therefore, let it be understood that he is to be
+your own personal attendant, and that when you have no occasion for his
+services, he will work in the garden. Only do not for the present let
+any of your friends see him; they would spread the news like wildfire,
+and in a week every soul in the town would know that you had a good
+looking Christian slave, and the sultan's officer would be sending for
+me to ask how I obtained him. We must put a turban on him. Any one who
+caught a glimpse of that hair of his, however far distant, would know
+that he was a Frank."
+
+"We might stain his face and hands with walnut juice," Khadja said, "he
+would pass as a Nubian. Some of them are tall and strong."
+
+"A very good thought, wife; it would be an excellent disguise. So shall
+it be." He touched the bell again. "Tell Muley I would speak with him.
+Muley," he went on, when the steward appeared, "have you said aught to
+any of the servants touching the Christian?"
+
+"No, my lord; you gave me no instructions about it, and I thought it
+better to wait until the morning, when I could ask you."
+
+"You did well. We have determined to stain his skin, and at present he
+will pass as a Nubian. This will avoid all questions and talk."
+
+"But, my lord, they will wonder that he cannot speak their tongue."
+
+"He must pass among them as a mute; but indeed he speaks Arabic as well
+as we do, Muley."
+
+The man uttered an exclamation of surprise.
+
+"He had intended to conceal his knowledge," Ben Ibyn went on, "which
+would have been politic; but when he found that my intentions were kind,
+he told us that he knew our tongue, and now revealed his knowledge, as
+he thought it would be dishonourable to listen to our talk, leaving us
+under the impression that he could not understand us."
+
+"Truly these Christians are strange men," Muley said. "This youth, who
+has not yet grown the hair on his face, is nevertheless commander of a
+war galley. He is ready to risk his life on behalf of a slave, and can
+strike down men with his unarmed hand; he is as gentle in his manner as
+a woman; and now it seems he can talk Arabic, and although it was in his
+power to keep this secret he tells it rather than overhear words that
+are not meant for his ear. Truly they are strange people, the Franks.
+I will prepare some stain in the morning, my lord, and complete his
+disguise before any of the others see him."
+
+The next morning Muley told Gervaise that his master thought that it
+would be safer and more convenient for him to pass as a dumb Nubian
+slave. Gervaise thought the plan an excellent one; and he was soon
+transformed, Muley shaving that part of the hair that would have shown
+below the turban, and then staining him a deep brownish black, from the
+waist upwards, together with his feet and his legs up to his knee, and
+darkening his eyebrows, eyelashes, and moustache.
+
+"Save that your lips lack the thickness, and your nose is straighter
+than those of Nubians, no one would doubt but that you were one of that
+race; and this is of little consequence, as many of them are of mixed
+blood, and, though retaining their dark colour, have features that in
+their outline resemble those of the Arabs. Now I will take you to Ben
+Ibyn, so that he may judge whether any further change is required before
+the servants and slaves see you."
+
+"That is excellent," the merchant said, when he had carefully inspected
+Gervaise, "I should pass you myself without recognizing you. Now you can
+take him into the servants' quarters, Muley, and tell them that he is a
+new slave whom I have purchased, and that henceforth it will be his
+duty to wait upon my wife, to whom I have presented him as her special
+attendant, and that he will accompany her and my daughters when they go
+abroad to make their purchases or visit their friends. Give some reason,
+if you can think of one, why you have bestowed him in a chamber separate
+from the rest."
+
+Gervaise at once took up his new duties, and an hour later, carrying a
+basket, followed them into the town. It was strange to him thus to be
+walking among the fanatical Moors, who, had they known the damage that
+he had inflicted upon their galleys, would have torn him in pieces.
+None gave him, however, more than a passing look. Nubian slaves were
+no uncommon sight in the town, and in wealthy Moorish families were
+commonly employed in places of trust, and especially as attendants in
+the harems. The ladies were now as closely veiled as the Moorish women,
+it being only in the house that they followed the Berber customs.
+Gervaise had learnt from Muley that Ben Ibyn was one of the
+richest merchants in Tripoli, trading direct with Egypt, Syria, and
+Constantinople, besides carrying on a large trade with the Berber
+tribes in the interior. He returned to the house with his basket full
+of provisions, and having handed these over to the cook, he went to the
+private apartments, as Khadja had requested him to do. Here she and
+her daughters asked him innumerable questions as to his country and its
+customs, and then about Rhodes and the Order to which he belonged.
+Their surprise was great when they heard that the knights were bound to
+celibacy.
+
+"But why should they not marry if they like? Why should they not have
+wives, children, and homes like other people?" Khadja asked.
+
+"It is that they may devote their whole lives to their work. Their home
+is the convent at Rhodes, or at one of the commanderies scattered over
+Europe, where they take charge of the estates of the Order."
+
+"But why should they not marry then, Gervaise? At Rhodes there might be
+danger for women and children, but when they return to Europe to take
+charge of the estates, surely they would do their duty no worse for
+having wives?"
+
+Gervaise smiled.
+
+"I did not make the rules of the Order, lady, but I have thought myself
+that although, so long as they are doing military work at the convent,
+it is well that they should not marry, yet there is no good reason why,
+when established in commanderies at home, they should not, like other
+knights and nobles, marry if it so pleases them."
+
+In the evening the merchant returned from his stores, which were
+situated down by the port. Soon after he came in he sent for Gervaise.
+"There is a question I had intended to ask you last night," he said,
+"but it escaped me. More than two months since there sailed from this
+port and others many vessels--not the ships of the State, but corsairs.
+In all, more than twenty ships started, with the intention of making a
+great raid upon the coast of Italy. No word has since been received of
+them, and their friends here are becoming very uneasy, the more so as we
+hear that neither at Tunis nor Algiers has any news been received. Have
+you heard at Rhodes of a Moorish fleet having been ravaging the coast of
+Italy?"
+
+"Have you any friends on board the ships that sailed from here, or any
+interest in the venture, Ben Ibyn?"
+
+The merchant shook his head. "We Berbers," he said, "are not like the
+Moors, and have but little to do with the sea, save by the way of trade.
+For myself, I regret that these corsair ships are constantly putting
+out. Were it not for them and their doings we might trade with the ports
+of France, of Spain, and Italy, and be on good terms with all. There is
+no reason why, because our faiths are different, we should be constantly
+fighting. It is true that the Turks threaten Europe, and are even now
+preparing to capture Rhodes; but this is no question of religion. The
+Turks are warlike and ambitious; they have conquered Syria, and war with
+Egypt and Persia; but the Moorish states are small, they have no thought
+of conquest, and might live peaceably with Europe were it not for the
+hatred excited against them by the corsairs."
+
+"In that case I can tell you the truth. Thirteen of those ships were
+taken into Rhodes as prizes; the other eleven were burnt. Not one of the
+fleet escaped."
+
+Exclamations of surprise broke from Ben Ibyn, his wife, and daughters.
+
+"I am astonished, indeed," the merchant said. "It was reported here that
+the Genoese galleys were all laid up, and it was thought that they would
+be able to sweep the seas without opposition, and to bring home vast
+spoil and many captives, both from the ships they took and from many of
+the villages and small towns of the coast. How came such a misfortune to
+happen to them? It will create consternation here when it is known, for
+although it was not a state enterprise, the sultan himself and almost
+all the rich Moors embarked money in the fitting out of the ships, and
+were to have shares in the spoil taken. How happened it that so strong a
+fleet was all taken or destroyed, without even one vessel being able to
+get away to carry home the news of the disaster?"
+
+"Fortune was against them," Gervaise said. "Three ships on their way
+up were captured by a galley of our Order, and her commander having
+obtained news of the whereabouts of the spot where the corsairs were to
+rendezvous, found them all lying together in a small inlet, and launched
+against them a number of fishing boats fitted out as fire ships. The
+corsairs, packed closely together, were unable to avoid them, and, as
+I told you, eleven of their ships were burnt, four were run ashore to
+avoid the flames, while six, trying to make their way out, were captured
+by the galley, aided by the three prizes that were taken and which the
+knights had caused to be manned by Sards."
+
+"The ways of Allah the All Seeing are wonderful," the merchant said.
+"It was indeed a marvellous feat for one galley thus to destroy a great
+fleet."
+
+"It was the result of good fortune rather than skill and valour,"
+Gervaise said.
+
+"Nay, nay; let praise be given where it is due. It was a marvellous
+feat; and although there is good or bad fortune in every event, such a
+deed could not have been performed, and would not even have been thought
+of, save by a great commander. Who was the knight who thus with one
+galley alone destroyed a strongly manned fleet, from which great things
+had been looked for?"
+
+Gervaise hesitated. "It was a young knight," he said, "of but little
+standing in the Order, and whose name is entirely unknown outside its
+ranks."
+
+"By this time it must be well known," Ben Ibyn said; "and it will soon
+be known throughout Christendom, and will be dreaded by every Moor. What
+was it?"
+
+Gervaise again hesitated.
+
+"I would not have told you the story at all, Ben Ibyn, had I supposed
+you would have cared to inquire into the matter. Of course, I will tell
+you the name if you insist upon it, but I would much rather you did not
+ask."
+
+"But why?" the merchant asked, in surprise. "If I hear it not from you,
+I shall assuredly hear it ere long from others, for it will be brought
+by traders who are in communication with Italy. I cannot understand why
+you should thus hesitate about telling me the name of this commander.
+When known it will doubtless be cursed by thousands of Moorish wives and
+mothers; but we Berbers are another race. None of our friends or kindred
+were on board the fleet; and we traders have rather reason to rejoice,
+for, in the first place, so severe a lesson will keep the corsairs in
+their ports for a long time; and in the second, had the fleet succeeded
+according to general expectation, so great a store of European goods
+would have been brought home that the market would have been glutted,
+and the goods in our storehouses would have lost all their value. What
+reason, then, can you possibly have in refusing to tell me the name of
+the commander who has won for himself such credit and glory?"
+
+Gervaise saw that Ben Ibyn was seriously annoyed at what he deemed his
+unaccountable obstinacy.
+
+"I will tell you, Ben Ibyn, rather than excite your displeasure, though
+I would much have preferred not to do so, for you speak so much more
+highly of the affair than it merits. I had myself the honour of being in
+command of that galley."
+
+The ladies broke into exclamations of surprise, while the merchant
+regarded him with grave displeasure.
+
+"I had thought you truthful," he said; "but this passes all belief. Dost
+tell me that a beardless youth could with one galley overcome a great
+fleet, commanded by the most noted captains on our coast?"
+
+"I thought that you would not believe me," Gervaise said quietly; "and,
+therefore, would have much preferred to keep silence, knowing that I had
+no means of supporting my claim. That was not the only reason; the other
+was, that already a great deal too much has been said about an affair
+in which, as I have told you, I owed everything to good fortune, and am
+heartily sick of receiving what I consider altogether undue praise. Ah!"
+he exclaimed suddenly, "the thought has just occurred to me of a way by
+which you can obtain confirmation of my story; and, as I value your good
+opinion and would not be regarded as a boaster and a liar, I entreat you
+to take it. I heard you tell the eight men who were rowers in my boat
+when I was captured, to call upon you today, that you might do something
+for them."
+
+"They came this morning to my store," the merchant said. "They told
+me their wishes. I promised them that I would make inquiry about ships
+sailing East; and they are to come to me again tomorrow."
+
+"Then, sir, I beseech you to suffer me to go down with you to your
+stores and meet them there. The galley of which I was in command at the
+time I was captured is the same as that in which a few weeks before I
+fought the corsairs, and these eight men were with me at that time.
+I begged them for my sake to maintain an absolute silence as to that
+affair, and I have no doubt that they have done so, for in the fury
+the news would excite, they might fall victims to the first outburst,
+though, of course, wholly innocent of any share in the misfortune.
+Did you question them without my being present, they might still keep
+silent, fearing to injure me. But if, before you begin to do so, I tell
+them that they can speak the truth with reference to me, they will, I am
+sure, confirm my story, incredible as it may now appear to you."
+
+"That is a fair offer," the merchant said gravely, "and I accept it,
+for it may be that I have been too hasty, and I trust it may prove so. I
+would rather find myself to be in fault than that the esteem with which
+you have inspired me should prove to be misplaced. We will speak no
+further on the subject now. I have not yet asked you how it is that you
+come to speak our language so well."
+
+Gervaise related how he had studied with Suleiman Ali, and had escorted
+him to Syria and received his ransom.
+
+"I had hoped," he said, "that the corsair would have taken me to Syria,
+for there I could have communicated with Suleiman, who would, I am sure,
+have given me such shelter and aid as he was able, in the event of my
+making my escape from slavery and finding myself unable to leave by
+sea."
+
+The next day Gervaise went with Ben Ibyn to his stores. The eight
+men arrived shortly afterwards, and the merchant, in the presence
+of Gervaise, questioned them as to whether they knew anything of a
+misfortune that was said to have befallen some ships that had sailed
+for the coast of Italy. The men, surprised at the question, glanced at
+Gervaise, who said, "Tell Ben Ibyn the truth; it will do neither you nor
+me any harm, and will be mentioned by him to no one else."
+
+Accordingly the story was told. Ben Ibyn listened gravely.
+
+"It was the will of Allah," he said, when it was concluded. "I have
+wronged you, Gervaise, but your tale seemed too marvellous to be true.
+
+"Do not speak of this to others;" he went on to the eight men. "Now as
+to yourselves. For the four of you who desire to return to Syria I have
+taken passage in a trader that sails tomorrow and will touch at Joppa
+and Acre. Here is money to provide yourselves with garments and to carry
+you to your homes. For you," he said to two who were natives of the
+town, "I can myself find employment here, and if your conduct is good,
+you will have no reason to regret taking service with me. The two of
+you who desire to go to Smyrna I will give passage there in a ship which
+will sail next week; in the meantime, here is money for your present
+wants."
+
+Two days later the merchant's family moved to his house two miles
+outside the town, and here Gervaise remained for six months. His life
+was not an unpleasant one; he was treated with great kindness by the
+merchant and his wife, his duties were but slight, and he had no more
+labour to perform in the garden than he cared to do. Nevertheless, he
+felt that he would rather have fallen into the hands of a less kind
+master, for it seemed to him that it would be an act almost of treachery
+to escape from those who treated him as a friend; moreover, at the
+country house he was not in a position to frame any plans for escape,
+had he decided upon attempting it, nor could he have found out when
+Hassan made one of his occasional visits to the port.
+
+One evening the merchant returned from the town accompanied by one of
+the sultan's officers and four soldiers. Ben Ibyn was evidently much
+depressed and disturbed; he told Muley as he entered, to fetch Gervaise.
+When the latter, in obedience to the order, came in from the garden, the
+officer said in Italian, "It having come to the ears of the sultan my
+master that the merchant Ben Ibyn has ventured, contrary to the law,
+to purchase a Christian slave brought secretly into the town, he has
+declared the slave to be forfeited and I am commanded to take him at
+once to the slaves' quarter."
+
+"I am at the sultan's orders," Gervaise said, bowing his head. "My
+master has been a kind one, and I am grateful to him for his treatment
+of me."
+
+Gervaise, although taken aback by this sudden change in his fortunes,
+was not so cast down as he might otherwise have been; he would now be
+free to carry out any plan for escape that he might devise, and by his
+being addressed in Italian it was evident to him that his knowledge
+of Turkish was unsuspected. When among the other slaves he had always
+maintained his character of a mute; and it was only when alone in his
+master's family that he had spoken at all. He had no doubt that his
+betrayal was due to one of the gardeners, who had several times shown
+him signs of ill will, being doubtless jealous of the immunity he
+enjoyed from hard labour, and who must, he thought, have crept up and
+overheard some conversation; but in that case it was singular that
+the fact of his knowledge of Turkish had not been mentioned. Gervaise
+afterwards learned that Ben Ibyn had been fined a heavy sum for his
+breach of the regulations.
+
+He was now placed between the soldiers, and marched down to the town,
+without being allowed to exchange a word with the merchant. On his
+arrival there he was taken to the slaves' quarter; here his clothes were
+stripped from him, and he was given in their place a ragged shirt and
+trousers, and then turned into a room where some fifty slaves were
+lying. Of these about half were Europeans, the rest malefactors who had
+been condemned to labour.
+
+The appearance of all was miserable in the extreme; they were clothed in
+rags, and the faces of the Europeans had a dull, hopeless look that told
+alike of their misery and of their despair of any escape from it. They
+looked up listlessly as he entered, and then an Italian said, "Cospetto,
+comrade; but I know not whether your place is with us, or with the
+Moslems across there. As far as colour goes I should put you down as a
+Nubian; but your hair is of a hue that consorts but badly with that of
+your flesh."
+
+"I am an Englishman," Gervaise replied; "but I have been passing under a
+disguise which has unfortunately been detected, so you see here I am."
+
+The mystery explained, his questioner had no further interest in the
+matter, and Gervaise, picking out a vacant place on the stone floor, sat
+down and looked round him. The room, although large, was roughly built,
+and had doubtless been erected with a view to its present purpose. There
+were only a few windows; and these were small, strongly barred, and
+twelve feet above the floor.
+
+"Not easy to get out of them," Gervaise said to himself "at least, not
+easy without aid; and with these Moslems here it is clear that nothing
+can be done."
+
+They were roused at daybreak next morning, and were taken out to their
+work under the guard of six armed Moors, two overseers, provided with
+long whips, accompanied them. The work consisted of cleaning the streets
+and working on the roads, and at times of carrying stones for the use of
+the masons employed in building an addition to the palace of the sultan.
+This was the work to which the gang was set that morning, and it was not
+long before the vigour with which Gervaise worked, and the strength he
+displayed in moving the heavy stones, attracted the attention of the
+overseers and of the head of the masons.
+
+"That is a rare good fellow you have got there, that black with the
+curious hair," the latter said. "What is the man? I never saw one like
+him."
+
+"He is a Christian," one of the overseers said. "He was smuggled into
+the town and sold to Ben Ibyn the Berber, who, to conceal the matter,
+dyed him black; but it got to the ears of the sultan, and he had him
+taken from the Berber, and brought here; I have no doubt the merchant
+has been squeezed rarely."
+
+"Well, that is a good fellow to work," the other said. "He has just
+moved a stone, single handed, that it would have taken half a dozen of
+the others to lift. I wish you would put him regularly on this job; any
+one will do to sweep the streets; but a fellow like that will be of real
+use here, especially when the wall rises a bit higher."
+
+"It makes no difference to me," the overseer said. "I will give orders
+when I go down that he shall be always sent up with whichever gang comes
+here."
+
+The head mason, who was the chief official of the work, soon saw that
+Gervaise not only possessed strength, but knowledge of the manner in
+which the work should be done.
+
+Accustomed as he had been to direct the slaves at work on the
+fortifications at Rhodes, he had learned the best methods of moving
+massive stones, and setting them in the places that they were to occupy.
+At the end of the day the head mason told one of the slaves who spoke
+Italian to inquire of Gervaise whether he had ever been employed on
+such work before. Gervaise replied that he had been engaged in the
+construction of large buildings.
+
+"I thought so," the officer said to the overseer; "the way he uses his
+lever shows that he knows what he is doing. Most of the slaves are worth
+nothing; but I can see that this fellow will prove a treasure to us."
+
+Gervaise returned to the prison well satisfied with his day's work. The
+labour, hard though it was, was an absolute pleasure to him. There was,
+moreover, nothing degrading in it, and while the overseers had plied
+their whips freely on the backs of many of his companions, he had not
+only escaped, but had, he felt, succeeded in pleasing his masters. The
+next morning when the gangs were drawn up in the yard before starting
+for work, he was surprised at being ordered to leave the one to which
+he belonged and to fall in with another, and was greatly pleased when he
+found that this took its way to the spot at which they were at work on
+the previous day.
+
+At the end of the week, when the work of the day was finished, the head
+mason came down to the prison and spoke to the governor; a few minutes
+afterwards Gervaise was called out. The governor was standing in the
+courtyard with an interpreter.
+
+"This officer tells me that you are skilled in masonry," the governor
+said, "and has desired that you shall be appointed overseer of the gang
+whose duty it is to move the stones, saying he is sure that with half
+the slaves now employed you would get as much work done as at present.
+Have you anything to say?"
+
+"I thank you, my lord, and this officer," Gervaise replied. "I will do
+my best; but I would submit to you that it would be better if I could
+have the same slaves always with me, instead of their being changed
+every day; I could then instruct them in their work. I would also submit
+that it were well to pick men with some strength for this labour, for
+many are so weak that they are well nigh useless in the moving of heavy
+weights; and lastly, I would humbly submit to you that if men are to
+do good work they must be fed. This work is as heavy as that in the
+galleys, and the men there employed receive extra rations to strengthen
+them; and I could assuredly obtain far better results if the gang
+employed upon this labour were to receive a somewhat larger supply of
+food."
+
+"The fellow speaks boldly," the governor said to the head mason, when
+the reply was translated.
+
+"There is reason in what he says, my lord. Many of the slaves, though
+fit for the light labour of cleaning the streets, are of very little use
+to us, and even the whip of the drivers cannot get more than a momentary
+effort from them. If you can save twenty-five men's labour for other
+work, it will pay to give more food to the other twenty-five. I should
+let this man pick out his gang. He has worked in turn with all of them,
+and must know what each can do; besides, it is necessary that he should
+have men who can understand his orders."
+
+Gervaise accordingly was allowed to pick out his gang; and he chose
+those whom he had observed to be the strongest and most handy at the
+work.
+
+"You will be responsible," the governor said to him, "for the masons
+being supplied with stone, and if you fail you will be punished and put
+to other labour."
+
+So far from there being any falling off in the work, the head mason
+found that, even though the walls began to rise and the labour of
+transporting the stones into their positions became greater, the masons
+were never kept standing. The men, finding their position improved,
+both in the matter of food and in the immunity they enjoyed from blows,
+worked cheerfully and well. Gervaise did not content himself with
+giving orders, but worked at the heaviest jobs, and, little by little,
+introduced many of the appliances used by the skilled masons of Rhodes
+in transporting and lifting heavy stones. Gradually his own position
+improved: he was treated as an overseer, and was permitted to sleep
+under an arcade that ran along one side of the yard, instead of being
+confined in the close and stifling cell. His dye had long since worn
+off.
+
+One day as he was going up with his gang under charge of the usual
+guards to the building, he saw Hassan, who grinned maliciously.
+
+"Ah, ah, Christian dog!" he said; "you threatened me, and I have not
+forgotten it. The last time I was here I made it known to an officer of
+the sultan that Ben Ibyn had a Christian slave who had been smuggled
+in; and here you are. I hope you like the change. Look, I have still got
+your amulet, and it has brought me better luck than it did you. I have
+been fortunate ever since, and no money could buy it from me."
+
+He had been walking close to Gervaise as he spoke, and one of the guards
+pushed him roughly aside.
+
+Time passed on. One day on his return from work a well dressed Moor met
+him as the gang broke up in the courtyard.
+
+"I have permission to speak to you," he said to Gervaise, and drew him
+aside. "Know, O Christian, that I have received a letter from Suleiman
+Ali, of Syria. He tells me that he has heard from Ben Ibyn, the Berber,
+that you are a slave, and has asked me to inquire of the sultan the
+price that he will take for your ransom, expressing his willingness to
+pay whatever may be demanded, and charging me to defray the sum and to
+make arrangements by which you may return to Europe. This I am willing
+to do, knowing Suleiman Ali by report as a wealthy man and an honourable
+one. I saw the sultan yesterday. He told me that I should have an answer
+this morning as to the ransom that he would take. When I went to him
+again today, he said that he had learnt from the governor of the prison
+and from the head mason that you were almost beyond price, that you had
+been raised to the position of superintendent of the slaves employed in
+the building of his palace, and that you were a man of such skill that
+he would not part with you at any price until the work was finished.
+After that he would sell you; but he named a price threefold that at
+which the very best white slave in Tripoli would be valued. However,
+from the way in which Suleiman Ali wrote, I doubt not that he would pay
+it, great as it is, for he speaks of you in terms of affection, and I
+would pay the money could you be released at once. As it is, however,
+I shall write to him, and there will be ample time for an answer to be
+received from him before the building is finished."
+
+"Truly I am deeply thankful to my good friend, Suleiman Ali; but for
+reasons of my own I am not desirous of being ransomed at present,
+especially at such a cost, which I should feel bound in honour to repay
+to him; therefore, I pray you to write to him, saying that while I thank
+him from my heart for his kindness, I am not able to avail myself of it.
+In the first place, I am well treated here, and my position is not an
+unpleasant one; secondly, the sum required for ransom is altogether
+preposterous; thirdly, I am not without hopes that I may some day find
+other means of freeing myself without so great a sacrifice; and lastly,
+that I have a reason which I cannot mention, why, at present, I would
+not quit Tripoli, even were I free tomorrow. You can tell him that this
+is the reason which, most of all, weighs with me. Do not, however, I
+pray you, let the sultan know that I have refused to be ransomed, for
+he might think I was meditating an escape, and would order extra
+precautions to be taken to prevent my doing so. Will you also see Ben
+Ibyn, and thank him from me for having written to Suleiman Ali on my
+behalf?"
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIX ESCAPE
+
+
+Gradually a greater amount of liberty was given to Gervaise. Escape
+from Tripoli was deemed impossible, especially as he was supposed to be
+entirely ignorant of Arabic. He was, indeed, scarcely regarded now as a
+slave by the head mason, and instead of being clad in rags was dressed
+like other overseers. He was no longer obliged to walk with the gang to
+and from the palace, and was at last granted permission to go into the
+town for an hour or two after his work was over, instead of returning
+direct to the prison. The first time this permission was given to him
+he placed himself on the road by which Ben Ibyn would leave the town,
+choosing a quiet spot where the meeting would not be observed. Gervaise
+had for some time taken to staining his face, hands, and legs with
+walnut juice, beginning with a weak solution, and very gradually
+increasing the strength until he had reached a shade approximating to
+that of the lighter coloured portion of the population. The head mason
+had on one occasion noticed it, and said, "The sun is darkening your
+skin, Gervaise, until you might verily pass as a Moor."
+
+Gervaise detected an expression of doubt in the tone the officer had
+spoken to the interpreter, and replied at once, "It is not altogether
+the sun. Since I have obtained permission to come to my work alone,
+I have taken to slightly darkening my skin, in order to go to and fro
+unmolested, and free from the insults that the boys and beggars hurl at
+Christians."
+
+The master mason nodded approvingly when the answer was translated to
+him.
+
+"It is a wise step," he said; "for truly the hatred of Christians is
+very strong among the lower classes, especially since it became known
+that the galleys that sailed from here nearly two years ago were, with
+all the fleet from which so much was expected, utterly destroyed. It is
+well, then, that you should pass unnoticed, for were there a tumult in
+the street you might lose your life, and I should lose the best labour
+overseer I have ever had."
+
+Thus, then, as Gervaise walked through the streets on the first occasion
+of obtaining his liberty, he attracted no attention whatever. When he
+saw Ben Ibyn approaching he stepped out to meet him. The merchant looked
+in his face, but for a moment failed to recognise him, then he exclaimed
+suddenly, "It is Gervaise! Ah, my son, I am indeed rejoiced to see
+you. We have spoken of you so often at home, and sorely did my wife and
+daughters grieve when you were torn from us. I did not dare to send any
+message to you, for the sultan pretended great anger against me, and
+used the opportunity to squeeze me hardly; but I have frequently made
+inquiries about you, and was glad indeed to find that even in prison you
+received promotion; had it been otherwise--had I found that you were
+in misery--I would have endeavoured, whatever the risk, to aid you to
+escape."
+
+"I have indeed nothing to complain of, and was sorry to learn that you
+had suffered on my account. Have you ever learned how it came about that
+I was denounced?"
+
+"No, indeed; I would have given much to know, and assuredly the dog,
+whoever he was, should have been made to suffer."
+
+"It was Hassan. The villain met me when I was with the gang, and boasted
+that it was he who had sent me there. He had told the news to some
+official, who had, of course, repeated it to the sultan; doubtless he
+concealed his own share in the matter, otherwise he too would, next time
+he returned here, have had to pay for his part in it."
+
+"I will make him pay more heavily than the sultan would," Ben Ibyn said
+sternly; "I will speak to my friends among the merchants, and henceforth
+no Berber will buy aught from him; and we have hitherto been his best
+customers. But let us not waste our time in speaking of this wretch. How
+comes it that you are walking freely in the streets of Tripoli? I can
+see that your face is stained, although you are no longer a Nubian."
+
+Gervaise told him how it was that he was free to walk in the city after
+his work was done.
+
+"I shall now," he went on, "be able to carry out any plan of escape that
+may occur to me; but before I leave, as I shall certainly do ere long,
+I mean to settle my score with Hassan, and I pray you to send one of
+the men who were with me in the galley, and whom you took into your
+employment, directly you hear that his ship is in harbour. Do not give
+him either a note or a message: bid him simply place himself in the
+road between the prison gate and the palace, and look fixedly at me as I
+pass. I shall know it is a signal that Hassan is in the port."
+
+"Can I aid you in your flight? I will willingly do so."
+
+"All that I shall need is the garb of a peasant," Gervaise said. "I
+might buy one unnoticed; but, in the first place, I have no money, and
+in the second, when it is known that I have escaped, the trader might
+recall the fact that one of the slave overseers had purchased a suit of
+him."
+
+"The dress of an Arab would be the best," the merchant said. "That I
+will procure and hold in readiness for you. On the day when I send
+you word that Hassan is here, I will see that the gate of my garden is
+unbarred at night, and will place the garments down just behind it. You
+mean, I suppose, to travel by land?"
+
+"I shall do so for some distance. Were I to steal a boat from the port,
+it would be missed in the morning, and I be overtaken. I shall therefore
+go along the coast for some distance and get a boat at one of the
+villages, choosing my time when there is a brisk wind, and when I may
+be able to get well beyond any risk of being overtaken. Now, Ben Ibyn, I
+will leave you; it were better that we should not meet again, lest some
+suspicion might fall upon you of having aided in my escape. I cannot
+thank you too much for all your past kindness, and shall ever bear a
+grateful remembrance of yourself and your family."
+
+"Perhaps it were better so," Ben Ibyn said; "for if the Moors can find
+any excuse for plundering us, they do so. Have you heard the news that
+the Sultan of Turkey's expedition for the capture of Rhodes is all but
+complete, and will assuredly sail before many weeks have passed?"
+
+"I have not heard it," Gervaise replied; "and trust that I may be in
+time to bear my share in the defence. However, the blow has been so
+often threatened that it may be some time before it falls."
+
+"May Allah bless you, my son, and take you safely back to your friends!
+Be assured that you shall have notice as soon as I know that Hassan has
+returned, and you shall have the bundle with all that is needful, behind
+my gate."
+
+Another two months passed. Gervaise looked in vain for Ben Ibyn's
+messenger as he went to and from the palace, and chafed terribly at the
+delay, when, for aught he knew, the Turkish fleet might already have
+brought Mahomet's army to Rhodes. At last, as he came back from work, he
+saw with intense satisfaction one of the men, whose face he recognised,
+leaning carelessly against the wall. The man gave no sign of
+recognition, but looked at him earnestly for a minute, and then
+sauntered off up the street. Gervaise went up into the town as usual,
+walked about until it became quite dark, and then went to the gate that
+led into the merchant's garden. He found that it was unfastened,
+and, opening it, he went in and closed it behind him. As he did so he
+started, for a voice close by said,
+
+"Master, it is I, the messenger whom you saw two hours since. Ben Ibyn
+bade me say that he thought you might require some service, and, knowing
+that I could be trusted, bade me wait for you here. He thought that you
+might possibly need a messenger to Hassan."
+
+"The very thing," Gervaise exclaimed. "I have been puzzling myself in
+vain as to how I could get speech with him in some quiet place; but
+with your assistance that will be easy; but first let me put on this
+disguise."
+
+This was easily effected, even in the dark. A loose flowing robe of
+white cotton, girt in at the waist, a long bernouse with hood to cover
+the head, a sash with a dagger, and a scimitar, completed the disguise.
+
+"Here is a pouch," the man said, "with money for your journey, and
+a long sword, which he says you can hang at your back beneath your
+bernouse."
+
+Gervaise gave an exclamation of pleasure. By its length and weight he
+was sure that the weapon must have been the property of a Christian
+knight.
+
+"Shall I carry the message this evening?" the man asked. "It is early
+still, and it were best that you should not linger in the city, where
+there is sure to be a strict search for you in the morning."
+
+"But perhaps he may recognise your face?"
+
+"It is blackened, my lord, and I am dressed as you were when with Ben
+Ibyn."
+
+"Let us settle our plans, then, before we sally out from here; we could
+not find a safer place for talking. What message, think you, would be
+the most likely to tempt Hassan to come ashore? You do not know what
+spoil he has brought?"
+
+"No; besides, if a merchant wanted to buy he would go on board to
+inspect Hassan's wares. We must have something to sell. It must be
+something tempting, and something that must be disposed of secretly. I
+might tell him that my employer--and I would mention some merchant whose
+name would carry weight with him--has received from the interior a large
+consignment of slaves, among whom are three or four girls, who would
+fetch high prices in Egypt, and as he believes they have been captured
+from a tribe within the limits of the sultan's territory, he is anxious
+to get rid of them, and will either dispose of them all cheaply in a
+lot, or will hand them over to him to take to Egypt to sell, giving him
+a large commission for carrying them there and disposing of them."
+
+"I do not like tempting even an enemy by stories that are untrue,"
+Gervaise said doubtfully.
+
+"I have no scruples that way," the man said, with a laugh; "and it is I
+who shall tell the story, and not you."
+
+Gervaise shook his head.
+
+"Could you not say that you came from one who owes him a heavy debt and
+desires to pay him?"
+
+"I do not think that would bring him ashore. Hassan doubtless trades for
+ready money, and must be well aware that no one here can be greatly in
+his debt. No, my lord; leave the matter in my hands. I will think of
+some story before I go on board that will fetch him ashore. But first we
+must settle where I am to bring him; there are some deserted spots near
+the wall on the east side of the town."
+
+"I know where you mean," Gervaise agreed; "let us go in that direction
+at once, for the sooner you are off the better."
+
+In half an hour a spot was fixed on, near some huts that had fallen into
+ruin. Here Gervaise seated himself on a sand heap, while the man hurried
+away. The moon had just risen, it being but three days since it was at
+its full. The night was quiet; sounds of music, laughter, and occasional
+shouts came faintly from the town. Seated where he was, Gervaise could
+see the port and the ships lying there. Half an hour later he saw a boat
+row off to one of them, which he had already singled out, from its size
+and general appearance, as being that of Hassan; ten minutes later he
+saw it returning. At that distance separate figures could not be made
+out, but it seemed to him that it loomed larger than before, and he
+thought that certainly one, if not more, persons, were returning with
+his messenger. Presently he heard men approaching; then Hassan's voice
+came distinctly to his ears.
+
+"How much farther are you going to take me? Remember, I warned you that
+unless I found that my journey repaid me, it would be bad for you."
+
+"It is but a few yards farther, my lord. There is my master the sheik of
+the Beni Kalis awaiting you."
+
+Gervaise rose to his feet as Hassan and two of his crew came up.
+
+"Now," the former said roughly, "where have you bestowed these captives
+you want to sell me?"
+
+"Will you please to follow me into this courtyard?" Gervaise said.
+He had, while waiting, reconnoitred the neighbourhood, and found an
+enclosure with the walls still perfect, and had determined to bring
+Hassan there, in order to prevent him from taking to flight. Hassan
+entered it unsuspectingly, followed by his two men. Gervaise fell back
+a little, so as to place himself between them and the entrance. Then he
+threw back the hood of his bernouse.
+
+"Do you recognise me, Hassan?" he said sternly. "I am the captive whom
+you beat almost to death. I told you that some day I would kill you;
+but even now I am willing to forgive you and to allow you to depart in
+peace, if you will restore the amulet you took from me."
+
+The corsair gave a howl of rage.
+
+"Christian dog!" he exclaimed. "You thought to lead me into a trap,
+but you have fallen into one yourself. You reckoned that I should come
+alone; but I suspected there was something hidden behind the story of
+that black, and so brought two of my crew with me. Upon him, men! Cut
+him down!" So saying, he drew his scimitar, and sprang furiously upon
+Gervaise. The latter stepped back into the centre of the gateway, so as
+to prevent the men, who had also drawn their swords, passing to attack
+him from behind. He had undone the clasp of his bernouse, and allowed it
+to fall to the ground as he addressed Hassan, and his long sword flashed
+in the moonlight as the corsair sprang forward.
+
+Hassan was a good swordsman, and his ferocious bravery had rendered him
+one of the most dreaded of the Moorish rovers. Inferior in strength to
+Gervaise, he was as active as a cat, and he leapt back with the spring
+of a panther, avoiding the sweeping blow with which Gervaise had hoped
+to finish the conflict at once; the latter found himself therefore
+engaged in a desperate fight with his three assailants. So furiously did
+they attack him that, foot by foot, he was forced to give ground. As he
+stepped through the gateway one of the pirates sprang past him, but as
+he did so, a figure leapt out from beyond the wall, and plunged a dagger
+into his back, while at the same moment, by cutting down another pirate,
+Gervaise rid himself of one of his assailants in front; but as he did
+so, he himself received a severe wound on the left shoulder from Hassan,
+who, before he could again raise his weapon, sprang upon him, and tried
+to hurl him to the ground.
+
+Gervaise's superior weight saved him from falling, though he staggered
+back some paces; then his heel caught against a stone, and he fell,
+dragging Hassan to the ground with him. Tightly clasped in each other's
+arms, they rolled over and over. Gervaise succeeded at last in getting
+the upper hand, but as he did so Hassan twisted his right arm free,
+snatched the dagger from Gervaise's girdle, and struck furiously at him.
+Gervaise, who had half risen to his knees, was unable to avoid the
+blow, but threw himself forward, his weight partly pinning the corsair's
+shoulders to the ground, and the blow passed behind him, inflicting but
+a slight wound in the back; then, with his right hand, which was now
+free, he grasped Hassan by the throat with a grip of iron. The pirate
+struggled convulsively for a moment, then his left hand released his
+grasp of his opponent's wrist. A minute later Gervaise rose to his feet:
+the pirate was dead.
+
+Gervaise stooped and raised the fallen man's head from the ground, felt
+for the chain, pulled up Claudia's gage, and placed it round his own
+neck; then he turned to his guide.
+
+"I have to thank you for my life," he said, holding out his hand to him.
+"It would have gone hard with me if that fellow had attacked me from
+behind. I had not bargained for three of them."
+
+"I could not help it, my lord. It was not until Hassan had stepped down
+into the boat that I knew he was going to take any one with him; then he
+suddenly told two of his men to take their places by him, saying to me,
+as he did so, 'I know not whether this message is a snare; but mind,
+if I see any signs of treachery, your life at any rate will pay the
+forfeit.' I knew not what to do, and indeed could do nothing; but,
+knowing my lord's valour, I thought that, even against these odds, you
+might conquer with such poor aid as I could give you."
+
+"It was not poor aid at all," Gervaise said heartily. "Greatly am I
+indebted to you, and sorry indeed am I, that I am unable to reward you
+now for the great service that you have rendered me."
+
+"Do not trouble about that, my lord. I am greatly mistaken if I do not
+find in the sashes of these three villains sufficient to repay me amply
+for my share in this evening's work. And now, my lord, I pray you to
+linger not a moment. The gates of the town shut at ten o'clock, and it
+cannot be long from that hour now. But first, I pray you, let me bind up
+your shoulder; your garment is soaked with blood."
+
+"Fortunately my bernouse will hide that; but it were certainly best to
+staunch the blood before I start, for it would be hard for me to get at
+the wound myself."
+
+The man took one of the sashes of the corsairs, tore it into strips, and
+bandaged the wound; then with another he made a sling for the arm. As
+he took off the sashes a leather bag dropped from each, and there was a
+chink of metal. He placed them in his girdle, saying, "I shall have time
+to count them when I get back."
+
+Gervaise sheathed his sword, and put on the bernouse, pulling the hood
+well over his head; then, with a few more words of thanks, started for
+the gate, leaving the man to search Hassan's girdle.
+
+The gate was a quarter of a mile distant. Gervaise passed through with
+the usual Arabic salutation to the sentry, and with difficulty repressed
+a shout of exultation as he left Tripoli behind him.
+
+Following the coast road he walked till daylight; then he left it and
+lay down among the sand hills for five or six hours. He calculated that
+no pursuit would be begun until midday. His absence was not likely to be
+noticed until the gangs began work in the morning, when an alarm would
+be given. The sentries at the gates on the previous evening would
+be questioned, and when it was found that no one answering to his
+description had passed out before these were closed, there would be
+a rigid search throughout the city and port. The vessels would all
+be examined, and the boatmen questioned as to whether any craft was
+missing. Not until the search proved absolutely fruitless would it be
+seriously suspected that he had, either by passing through the gates in
+disguise, or by scaling the walls, made for the interior. None knew that
+he could speak Arabic, and it would be so hopeless an undertaking for
+any one unacquainted with the language to traverse the country without
+being detected, that the Moors would be slow to believe that he had
+embarked upon such adventure. However, when all search for him in the
+town and in the vessels in the port proved fruitless, doubtless mounted
+men would be despatched in all directions; some would take the coast
+roads, while others would ride into the interior to warn the head men of
+the villages to be on the lookout for an escaped slave.
+
+After a sleep of five hours, Gervaise pursued his journey. He had walked
+for eight hours, and calculated that he must be fully thirty miles from
+Tripoli, and that not until evening would searchers overtake him. After
+walking four miles he came to a large village. There he purchased a bag
+of dates, sat down on a stone bench by the roadside to eat them, and
+entered into conversation with two or three Moors who sauntered up. To
+these he represented that he belonged to a party of his tribe who had
+encamped for the day at a short distance from the village in order
+to rest their horses before riding into Tripoli, whither they were
+proceeding to exchange skins of animals taken in the chase, and some
+young horses, for cotton clothes, knives, and other articles of barter
+with the tribes beyond them.
+
+After quenching his thirst at a well in front of the mosque, he retraced
+his steps until beyond the village, then struck out into the country,
+made a detour, came down into the road again, and continued his journey
+eastward. He walked until nightfall, and then again lay down.
+
+He was now fully fifty miles from Tripoli, and hoped that he was beyond
+the point to which horsemen from that town would think of pursuing their
+search. It was likely that they would not have gone beyond the village
+at which he had halted on the previous day; for when they learned from
+the inhabitants that no stranger, save an Arab, had entered it, they
+would content themselves with warning the head man to be on the watch
+for any stranger unable to speak their tongue, and would not consider it
+necessary to push their steps farther.
+
+For four days Gervaise continued his journey. At each village through
+which he passed he added to his stock of dates, until he had as many
+as he could carry under his bernouse without attracting observation. He
+also purchased a large water bottle, which he slung round his neck.
+
+All this time the sea lay to his left like a sheet of glass, and he
+knew that until a change of weather occurred, it was useless for him
+to attempt to escape by boat. On the fifth day there were signs of a
+change. He saw a dark line far out at sea; it came across the water
+rapidly, and presently a gentle breeze began to blow from the northwest;
+it gradually increased in strength, and when, in the afternoon, he
+stopped at a village, the waves were breaking upon the shore.
+
+After repeating his usual story, he sauntered down to the water's edge.
+There were several boats hauled up, and a hundred yards out two or three
+larger craft were lying at anchor. He entered into conversation with
+some of the fishermen, and his questions as to the boats led them to
+believe him altogether ignorant of the sea. The craft were, they told
+him, used sometimes for fishing, but they often made voyages to towns
+along the coast with dates and other produce. Each boat carried a single
+short mast, to the top of which was attached a long tapering spar, on
+which the sail was furled.
+
+Gervaise knew that these small feluccas were generally fast sailors and
+fair sea boats, and resolved to seize one of them, trusting that when
+once the sail was shaken out he would be able to manage it single
+handed. Accustomed to boats, he picked out that which he thought would
+be the fastest, and then walked away for half a mile, and lay down to
+sleep until the village was silent for the night. He had with him some
+oaten cakes he had bought there, a string of fish he had purchased from
+the boatmen, and with these and the dates he thought he could manage
+for four or five days at least. As to water, he could only hope that he
+should find a supply on board the boat. When he judged it to be about
+ten o'clock he went down to the shore again, took off his clothes and
+made them into a bundle; then, wading out into the water to within fifty
+yards of the felucca, swam off to it, towing the bundle behind him.
+
+He had no difficulty in climbing on board, and after dressing himself in
+the clothes he had worn at Tripoli, and had kept on underneath the Arab
+attire, he pulled the head rope until the craft was nearly over the
+anchor. He then loosened the line that brailed up the sail, got the
+stone that served as an anchor on board, hauled the sheet aft, and took
+his place at the tiller. The wind had dropped a good deal with the sun,
+but there was still sufficient air to send the light craft fast through
+the water. He steered out for a time, and then, when he thought himself
+a good mile from the shore, headed east. By the appearance of the water
+as it glanced past, he thought that he must be making from five to six
+miles an hour, and when the sun rose at five o'clock, believed that he
+was nearly forty miles on his way. He now fastened the tiller with a
+rope and proceeded to overhaul the craft.
+
+It was decked over forward only, and he crept into the cabin, which was
+little more than three feet high. The first thing his eye lit on was a
+bulky object hanging against the side, and covered with a thick black
+blanket of Arab manufacture. Lifting this, he saw, as he expected, that
+the object beneath it was a large waterskin well filled; the blanket had
+evidently been placed over it to keep it cool when the sun streamed down
+on the deck above it. There was also a large bag of dates, and another
+of flat cakes, and he guessed that these had all been put on board the
+evening before, in readiness for a start in the morning. This relieved
+him of his chief anxiety, for he had been unable to think of any plan
+for replenishing his supply, or to concoct a likely tale that, were he
+obliged to go on shore, would account for his being alone in a craft of
+that size.
+
+The wind increased again after sunrise, and being unable to reef the
+sail single handed he managed partially to brail it up. All day the
+craft flew along with the wind on the quarter, making six or seven miles
+an hour; and he felt that by morning he would be well beyond pursuit. On
+the run he passed several craft engaged in fishing, but these gave him
+no uneasiness. He had in the morning, with some old sails he found,
+constructed three rough imitations of human figures, one with the Arab
+dress and another with the bernouse, and had placed them against the
+bulwarks, so that at a short distance it would appear that there were
+three men on board. Feeling confident that the deception would not be
+noticed, he kept his course without swerving, and passed some of the
+fishing boats within hailing distance, waving his hand and shouting the
+usual Arab salutation to their crews.
+
+During the day he contented himself with eating some dates and an
+oatmeal cake or two; but at sunset he added to this two or three fish
+that he had split open and hung up to dry in the sun and wind. There was
+charcoal on board, and a flat stone served as a hearth in the bottom of
+the boat, but he had no means of lighting a fire, for this the fishermen
+would have brought off when they came on board in the morning. After he
+had finished his meal and taken his place again at the tiller he
+altered his course. Hitherto he had been steering to the south of east,
+following the line of coast, but he now saw before him the projecting
+promontory of Cape Mezurata, which marks the western entrance of the
+great Gulf of Sydra; and he now directed his course two points north
+of east, so as to strike the opposite promontory, known as Grenna, more
+than a hundred miles away. The wind fell much lighter, and he shook out
+the sail to its full extent. All night he kept at his post, but finding
+the wind perfectly steady he lashed the tiller so as to keep the boat's
+head in the direction in which he was steering, and dozed for some
+hours, waking up occasionally to assure himself that she was keeping her
+course.
+
+At sunrise he indulged in a wash in sea water, and felt freshened and
+revived. He now kept a sharp lookout for distant sails, for he was out
+of the ordinary course a coaster would take, and would have attracted
+the attention of any corsair coming out from the land; the sea, however,
+remained clear of ships. All day the felucca made rapid progress, for
+although the wind freshened, Gervaise did not lessen sail as before,
+being now accustomed to the boat and confident of her powers. As soon
+as the wind died away again after sunset, he lay down for a good sleep,
+feeling this was an absolute necessity, and knowing that before morning
+he should be obliged to keep a sharp lookout for land. He slept longer
+than he had intended, for the day was breaking when he opened his eyes.
+He sprang to his feet, and saw the land stretching ahead of him at a
+distance, as he thought, of some fifteen miles, and at once put the helm
+down and bore more to the north.
+
+He judged, from what he had heard on the coast, that he must be nearly
+off Cape Tejones, behind which lies the town of Bengasi, and was
+confirmed in the belief on finding half an hour later that the coast,
+which had run nearly north and south, trended sharply away to the
+northeast. All day long he kept about the same distance from the land,
+and at night, instead of keeping on his course, brailed up the sail
+entirely, and allowed the vessel to drift, as he knew that before
+morning he should lose the coast if he continued as he was going. He
+slept without moving until daylight, and then saw, to his satisfaction,
+by means of landmarks he had noticed the evening before, that the boat
+had drifted but a few miles during the night. As the day went on, he saw
+that the coastline was now east and west, and felt that he must be off
+the most northerly point of the promontory; he accordingly laid his
+course to the northeast, which would take him close to Cape Saloman, the
+most easterly point of Crete, and from two hundred and fifty to three
+hundred miles distant.
+
+For twenty-four hours he sailed quietly on, the wind dropping lighter
+and lighter; then it suddenly died out altogether; for some hours there
+was not a breath to stir the surface of the water, and the heat was
+stifling. Gervaise slept for some time; when he awoke the same stillness
+reigned, but there was a change in the appearance of the sky; its
+brightness was dulled by a faint mist, while, although the sea was of
+a glassy smoothness, there was an imperceptible swell that caused the
+felucca to sway uneasily. Gervaise had sufficient experience of the
+Levant to know that these signs were ominous of a change, and he at
+once set to work to prepare for it. Although he saw that it would be
+difficult for him unaided to hoist the long spar back into its place,
+he decided to lower it. This was not difficult, as its weight brought it
+down on to the deck as soon as he slackened the halliards; he unhooked
+it from the block, and then lashed the sail securely to it. When he had
+done this he looked round. A bank of dark clouds lay across the horizon
+to the northwest, and in a short time he could see that this was rising
+rapidly.
+
+Before taking down the spar and sail, he had deliberated as to whether
+it would be better to run before the coming gale or to lie to, and had
+decided on the latter alternative, as, were it to continue to blow long,
+he might be driven on to the Egyptian coast. Moreover, the felucca's
+bow was much higher out of water than the stern, and he thought that she
+would ride over the waves with greater safety than she would did they
+sweep down upon her stern.
+
+He had heard that the Greeks, when caught in a sudden gale in small
+boats, often lashed the oars together, threw them overboard with a rope
+attached, and rode to them safely through a sea that would otherwise
+have overwhelmed them. After much consideration as to what had best be
+done, he took the anchor rope, which was some sixty yards in length,
+fastened one end to each end of the spar, and then lashed the middle of
+the rope to the bow of the felucca; then, using an oar as a lever, he
+with great labour managed to launch the spar over the bow, with the sail
+still attached to it.
+
+When he had completed this, he looked round at the state of the weather.
+The clouds had risen so fast that their edge was nearly overhead,
+spanning the sky like a great arch. Ahead of him it seemed almost as
+black as night. He had not been out in many of the gales that at times
+sweep the eastern waters of the Mediterranean with terrible violence,
+but had seen enough of them to know that it was no ordinary one that he
+was about to encounter. He looked over the bow; the spar at present was
+lying in contact with the stem. With an oar he pushed it across so as to
+be at right angles with the craft, and then, there being nothing else to
+do, sat down and waited for the storm to burst. In a short time he
+heard a dull moaning sound, a puff of wind struck the boat, but in a few
+seconds died out; it was sufficient to give the light craft stern way,
+and she drifted backwards, the rope tightening, until the spar lay
+across her bows, and some twenty yards away.
+
+The dull moaning had grown louder; and now ahead of him he saw a white
+line. It approached with extraordinary rapidity. Knowing the fury with
+which it would burst upon him, he leapt down, and stood at the entrance
+to the cabin, with his head just above the deck. With a deafening roar
+the wind struck the boat, which staggered as if she had on her full
+course struck on a rock, while a shower of spray flew over her. Half
+blinded and deafened, Gervaise crawled into the cabin, closed the door,
+and lay down there; whatever happened, there was nothing he could do. He
+was soon conscious that the spar and sail were doing their work, for
+the boat still lay head to wind. The noise overhead and around was
+deafening; above the howl of the wind could be heard the creaking of the
+timbers, and the boat seemed to shiver as each fresh gust struck her.
+
+In half an hour he looked out again. There was, as yet, but little sea;
+the force of the wind seemed to flatten the water, and the instant a
+wave lifted its head it was cut off as if by a knife, and carried
+away in spray. The boat herself was moving rapidly through the water,
+dragging the spar behind her, and Gervaise almost trembled at the
+thought of the speed at which she would have flown along had it not been
+for the restraint of the floating anchor. Gradually the sea got up, but
+the light craft rode easily over it, and Gervaise, after commending
+his safety to God, lay down, and was soon fast asleep. In spite of the
+motion of the vessel, he slept soundly for many hours. When he awoke he
+opened the cabin door and looked out. A tremendous sea was running, but
+he thought the wind, although so strong that he could scarce lift his
+head above the shelter of the bulwark, was less violent than it had
+been when it first broke upon him. He saw to his satisfaction that the
+felucca breasted the waves lightly, and that although enveloped in spray
+she took no green water over the bows.
+
+The spar and sail acted not only as a floating anchor, but as a
+breakwater, and the white crested waves, which came on as if they
+would break upon the boat, seemed robbed of half their violence by
+the obstruction to their course, and passed under the felucca without
+breaking. For forty-eight hours the gale continued; at the end of
+that time it ceased almost as suddenly as it had begun. The sun shone
+brightly out, the clouds cleared entirely away. It was some hours before
+the sea went down sufficiently for Gervaise to attempt to get the spar
+on deck again. It was a heavy task, taxing his strength to the utmost,
+but after a deal of labour it was got on board, and then raised to its
+position at the masthead; the sail was shaken out, and the felucca again
+put on her course.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XX BELEAGUERED
+
+
+One morning towards the end of May, 1480, Sir John Boswell was standing
+with some other knights on St. Stephen's Hill, near the city, having
+hurried up as soon as a column of smoke from a bonfire lighted by the
+lookout there, gave the news that the Turkish fleet was at last in
+sight. A similar warning had been given a month previously, but the
+fleet had sailed past the island, being bound for Phineka, which was the
+rendezvous where Mahomet's great armament was to assemble. There could
+be but little doubt that the long expected storm was this time about to
+burst. The fleet now seen approaching numbered a hundred and sixty
+large ships, besides a great number of small craft, conveying a force
+variously estimated at from seventy to a hundred thousand men.
+
+"'Tis a mighty fleet," Sir John said; "and the worst of it is that we
+know there are more to follow; still, I doubt not we shall send them
+back defeated. Our defences are all complete; our recent peace with
+Egypt has enabled us to fill up our magazines with provisions of all
+kinds; the inhabitants of the Island have had ample warning to move
+into the town, carrying with them everything of value; so the Turks
+will obtain but little plunder, and will be able to gather no means of
+subsistence on the island, as every animal has been driven within the
+walls, and even the unripe corn has been reaped and brought in. However
+long the siege lasts, we need be in no fear of being reduced to sore
+straits for food. Look over there. There is a small craft under sail,
+and it comes not from the direction of Phineka. See! one of the Turkish
+galleys has separated from the rest and is making off in that direction.
+It may be that the little craft contains one or two of our comrades who
+are late in coming to join us."
+
+"It may well be so, Sir John, for they have been straggling in by twos
+and threes for the last month."
+
+"I will get the grand master's leave to put out in one of the galleys,"
+Sir John said, "for, by the way they are bearing, the Turks will cut the
+little craft off before she can gain the port."
+
+He hurried to D'Aubusson, who was standing a short distance apart from
+the others, gazing at the Turkish fleet. A minute later he was running
+down the hill to the town, accompanied by three or four other knights;
+they made direct for the outer port, where two galleys were lying in
+readiness, leapt on board one of them, which already contained its quota
+of knights, and at once rowed out of the port. Just as they did so the
+Turkish galley fired a gun.
+
+"I fear we shall be too late," Sir John said; "the Turk is gaining fast
+on the other craft, whatever she may be. There goes another gun. Row
+your hardest!" he shouted down to the slaves.
+
+The Turkish ship did not fire again; the wind was light, and they were
+going two feet through the water to every one sailed by the other craft.
+The galley from Rhodes was still half a mile away when the Turk was
+close to the boat that was trying to escape. Sir John and the knights
+chafed as they saw they would be too late.
+
+"I can't make out why the boat did not use her oars," the former said.
+"Of course, she could not have kept away from the galley, but if she had
+rowed it would have made some difference, and we might have been nearly
+up."
+
+"I can only see one man on board of her, Sir John," one of the younger
+knights said; and two or three others murmured that they were of the
+same opinion.
+
+"The others must be lying down; she cannot have less than from fifteen
+to twenty men. The Turk is close alongside. They still hold on. There!
+She has gone about and escaped the attempt to run her down. Now she is
+heading for us again! Brave fellows! brave fellows!" Sir John exclaimed,
+while a cheer broke from those around him; "but they have done
+for themselves. They must have seen us coming out, and if they had
+surrendered might have hoped to have been retaken. Their chance of
+getting quarter was truly not great, for expecting--as the Turks
+do--to carry off both us and all the inhabitants of the Island, a dozen
+fishermen would have seemed to them scarcely worth keeping. However, by
+holding on they have thrown away any chance they may have had. The Turks
+are alongside; they are leaping down into the little craft. Ah! Two more
+galleys have just left their fleet, and are heading here."
+
+"See, Sir John," one of the knights exclaimed, "there is a single man
+standing in the bow of that craft: he is facing the Moors alone. See how
+they crowd there; you can see the weapons flashing in the sun. They have
+to press past the mast to get at him, and as yet he seems to hold them
+all at bay."
+
+"He has chosen his post well, D'Urville. The number of his assailants
+prevents the archers on the Turkish craft using their bows. Fire those
+bow guns!" he shouted to the knights forward: "Take steady aim at the
+galley. It will distract their attention."
+
+"Nobly done indeed!" one of the other knights shouted. "I have seen him
+strike down four of the Turks."
+
+"Row, men, row! 'Tis useless!" Sir John muttered, as he clenched the
+hilt of his sword. "Useless! A Roland could not long maintain so unequal
+a fight."
+
+A groan broke from those around him as suddenly the dark mass of the
+assailants made a forward move, and the single figure was lost to sight.
+It was but for an instant; a moment later the crowd separated, and a man
+was seen to spring overboard.
+
+"They will riddle him with their spears when he comes up; we shall have
+nothing to do but to avenge him. To your stations, comrades! It is our
+turn now, and we have no time to lose, for the other two Turks will
+be up in twenty minutes, and I had orders not to fight if it could be
+avoided: but we must take this fellow."
+
+Five minutes later the galley ran alongside the Turk, to which those who
+had captured the boat had already hastily returned. The ships discharged
+their guns into each other, and then, as the galley ran alongside, the
+knights tried to leap on board of her. They were opposed by a dense mass
+of Turks, for in addition to her usual crew the Moslem was crowded with
+troops. For three or four minutes the knights tried, but in vain, to get
+a footing on board; then Sir John shouted to them to forbear, and gave
+orders to the rowers at once to push off. A cloud of arrows swept across
+the poop as they did so; but for the most part these fell harmless from
+the armour of the knights. For a time the cannon on both sides continued
+to fire, but as the Christians increased their distance it gradually
+ceased.
+
+They had gone but a hundred yards from the Turk when a head appeared
+over the stern railing of the poop, and a figure swung itself on to the
+deck. The man was attired in Turkish garments, but his head was bare,
+and the exclamation, "A Christian!" broke from the knights.
+
+The man strode up to Sir John Boswell.
+
+"You used to say you would make matters even with me some day, Sir John,
+and you have more than kept your word."
+
+Sir John fell back a pace in astonishment, and then with a shout, "By
+St. George, it is Tresham!" threw his arms round Gervaise's neck, while
+the knights thronged round with exclamations of satisfaction.
+
+"And it was you whom we saw keep the Turks at bay for three good minutes
+single handed," Sir John said, holding Gervaise at arm's length to gaze
+into his face. "Truly it seemed well nigh impossible that any one who
+was like to be on that craft could have performed so doughty a deed. And
+how did you escape?"
+
+"It was simple enough," Gervaise replied. "As soon as I dived I turned
+and swam along under the boat and came up by the stern, and then held on
+by the rudder, sheltered from their sight. I saw that the galley would
+be up in five minutes, and had no fear of their wasting time to look for
+me. Directly you came alongside her I dived again, and rose under your
+stern. I did not think that you would be able to take her, for all their
+craft are crowded with troops; so I contented myself with holding on
+until you were out of reach of their arrows, and then I climbed up."
+
+"I am delighted to see you again, Gervaise. I was feeling very sore at
+the moment, and I know the others felt the same, at being obliged to
+sheer off without making a capture; but the grand master's orders were
+strict. We noted your craft pursued by the Turks, and I asked leave to
+take out a galley to cut her off. He said, 'Take one, Sir John, but do
+not adventure an attack against the Turk unless she is likely to fall
+an easy prize to you. Her capture would be of little benefit to us, and
+would be dearly purchased at the cost of a knight's life. Therefore,
+as soon as we engaged her, and I found that she was full of troops and
+could not be captured without heavy loss, and that two of her consorts
+might arrive before we accomplished it, it was plainly my duty to
+abandon the attempt, although, you may guess, it went sorely against
+the grain to give the order, especially as I knew that a host would be
+looking on from St. Stephen's Hill. However, your rescue more than makes
+up for our failure; and thankful indeed am I that I made the suggestion
+that we should put out to save that little craft, though I thought it
+contained but a few fishermen or some coasting sailors, who had, in
+ignorance that the Turks were at hand, tried to enter Rhodes. One of
+those looking on with me did, indeed, suggest that she might have on
+board a knight or two coming to join us, but I did not give the matter a
+second thought."
+
+"And how go things, Sir John? And how are old friends?"
+
+"Ralph Harcourt and, I think, all your comrades in the Santa Barbara,
+except the three who fell by your side when you were captured, are well,
+and at present on the Island, as, for the last two years, none have been
+allowed to depart. As to other matters, they go not so well as one could
+wish. The commanderies have not responded to our call for aid as they
+should have done. For this, however, they are not altogether to blame,
+for we have been so often threatened with attack, and have so frequently
+applied for aid in money or men, that they must have begun to doubt
+whether the danger was really imminent. In other respects we are well
+prepared. We have obtained large stores of provisions from Egypt, and
+shall have no ground for uneasiness on that score. The defences have
+been greatly strengthened, and no one fears that we shall not be able
+to beat off an attack. We have destroyed the principal buildings outside
+the walls, though it would have been better could we have gone much
+further in this direction. And now let us have your adventures and
+escape."
+
+"'Tis a long story, Sir John, and I must pray you to let me defer it for
+a time. In the first place, I have two or three wounds that I shall be
+glad to have bandaged."
+
+"Why did you not say so at once?" Sir John exclaimed. "In those dark
+clothes, soaked with water as they are, I did not see the bloodstains;
+but I ought to have looked for them, for surely no one could have gone
+through that fight--altogether unprotected with armour too--without
+being wounded. Come below, and we will attend to them."
+
+"Also order me some wine and food, Sir John; I have touched nothing save
+water for twenty-four hours, and before that fasted somewhat strictly."
+
+By the time Gervaise's wounds, which were not severe, had been bandaged,
+and he had eaten a hasty meal, the galley was alongside the mole,
+between the two harbours.
+
+He was provided with some clothes, and went with Sir John straight to
+the English auberge, where the knight insisted that he should at once
+lie down.
+
+"I will report your return to D'Aubusson, and will tell him it is by my
+orders that you are resting. Your wounds are not very deep, but you must
+have lost a good deal of blood, and were you to exert yourself now,
+and be pestered with questions, it would probably bring on an attack
+of fever. There is nothing to do at present, for it must be some days
+before they can land and bring up their guns."
+
+Gervaise obeyed the orders not unwillingly, for he felt that he was
+really weak, and was greatly worn out by want of sleep. Sir John
+Kendall, at Boswell's request, issued orders that he was on no account
+whatever to be disturbed, and that no one was to enter his room unless
+he sounded the bell placed by the bedside. Gervaise indeed, falling off
+to sleep a few minutes after he had lain down, did not awake until the
+following morning. Having no idea that he had slept more than two or
+three hours, he sounded the bell in order to inquire whether Ralph had
+returned to the auberge. He was surprised to find his friend had just
+risen, and that he himself had been asleep some eighteen hours!
+
+A few minutes later Ralph hurried into the room.
+
+"Thank God that you are back again, Gervaise!" he said, as he grasped
+the hand of his friend. "I did not return until late in the evening,
+having been at work with a large body of slaves at the fortifications;
+and you may guess what joy I felt at the news. You are changed a good
+deal."
+
+"I don't suppose you will think so at the end of a day or two, Ralph. I
+lost a good deal of blood yesterday, and have been on short rations; but
+I shall very soon pick up again."
+
+"They will bring you some broth and wine directly, Gervaise. Early as
+it is, the grand master has already sent down to inquire as to your
+health."
+
+"I will reply in person as soon as I have had a meal and dressed."
+
+"And I suppose we must all wait to hear what you have been doing until
+you return, Gervaise?"
+
+"I suppose so, Ralph. Of course it is a long story; but I must tell you
+at once that there is nothing very exciting in it, and that it differed
+little from that of others who have been prisoners among the Moors, save
+that I was strangely fortunate, and suffered no hardships whatever. And
+now I want to ask you about clothes. Have my things been sold, or are
+they still in the store?"
+
+"No; the question was raised but a short time since. It was mooted, by
+the way, by that old enemy of yours, Robert Rivers, who returned
+here some three months ago with a batch of knights from the English
+commanderies. Sir John Boswell answered him roundly, I can tell you, and
+said that they should be kept, were it for another fifty years, for
+that he would wager his life that you would sooner or later make your
+escape."
+
+"I am sorry that fellow has returned, Ralph. Has he got a commandery
+yet?"
+
+"No; I believe that Sir John Kendall sent home so bad a report of him,
+that even the great influence of his family has not sufficed to obtain
+his appointment, and that he has been merely the assistant at one of
+the smaller manors. Sir John Boswell told me in confidence that he
+understood that Rivers did not at first volunteer to come out in
+response to the appeal of the grand master, but that the grand prior
+informed him that unless he took this opportunity of retrieving his
+character, he might give up all hope of ever obtaining advancement. Ah,
+here is your breakfast."
+
+An hour later Gervaise presented himself at the palace, clothed in the
+suit of armour that had been given to him by Genoa. Although he was
+engaged with several members of the council at the time, the grand
+master ordered him to be at once admitted as soon as he heard that he
+was in attendance.
+
+"Welcome back, Sir Gervaise Tresham," he said warmly, as he entered. "We
+all rejoice greatly at your return, and I consider it a happy omen for
+the success of our defence that so brave and distinguished a knight
+should at the last moment have arrived to take a share in it."
+
+The others present all shook Gervaise cordially by the hand, and
+congratulated him on his return.
+
+"You must dine with me this evening," D'Aubusson went on, "and tell us
+the story of your captivity and escape. At present, as you may suppose,
+we have too many matters on hand to spare time for aught that is not
+pressing and important. You will need a few days' rest before you are
+fit for active service, and by that time we will settle as to what post
+will best suit you."
+
+Twice that day had Gervaise to recount his adventures, the first time to
+Sir John Kendall and the knights of his auberge, the second to the grand
+master. Most of the leading members of the Order were assembled at
+the palace, and, among others, he was introduced to the Viscount de
+Monteuil, the elder brother of D'Aubusson, one of the most famous
+leaders of the day. He had brought with him a considerable body of
+retainers, and, although not a member of the Order, had offered his
+services in defence of the town. The council had gratefully accepted the
+offer, and had unanimously named him Commander of the Forces. Many other
+knights and soldiers had come from different parts of Europe, animated
+alike by the desire to aid in the defence of Christendom against the
+advance of the Moslems, and to gain credit and honour by taking part in
+a siege that was sure to be a desperate one.
+
+"My brother has already spoken of you to me, Sir Gervaise," the viscount
+said, when the young knight was presented to him; "although indeed there
+was no occasion for him to do so, since the name of the knight who
+two years ago saved the commerce of Italy from ruin, and with a single
+galley destroyed or captured a great fleet of over twenty Barbary
+pirates, and thus for a time put a stop to the depredations of the
+infidels, is known throughout Europe. By the way, I am the bearer of a
+message to you. I took ship at Genoa on my way hither, and stayed two or
+three days there while she was being got ready for sea. Knowing that I
+was bound hither, a certain very beautiful young lady of noble family,
+to whom I had the honour of being introduced, prayed me that if you
+should by any chance have escaped from captivity--and she said that she
+was convinced that you would, when you heard that Rhodes was threatened,
+assuredly endeavour to escape and to come hither to take a share in the
+defence--I was to tell you that she trusted you still bore her gage, and
+that she, on her part, had held fast to the promise she made you."
+
+"I still have her gage, Viscount; for though I was for a long time
+deprived of it, I succeeded in regaining it when I made my escape,"
+Gervaise said quietly; and De Monteuil at once turned the conversation
+to another topic.
+
+Gervaise found that no attempt was to be made to take the offensive
+against the Turks, and that they were to be permitted to advance against
+the city without interference. Many of the more fiery spirits among the
+knights chafed at this prohibition. The records of the past showed that
+armies as large as that of Mahomet had suffered defeat at the hands
+of bodies of knights no stronger than that gathered for the defence of
+Rhodes. D'Aubusson, however, knew that between the undisciplined hordes
+that gathered in countless numbers to oppose the crusaders, and the
+troops of Mahomet, well trained in warfare, who had borne his standard
+victoriously in numerous battles, there was but little comparison. They
+were commanded, too, by Paleologus, a general of great capacity. Under
+such circumstances, although victory might be possible, the chances of
+defeat would be far greater, and while victory could be only won at a
+great sacrifice of life, defeat would mean annihilation to the garrison,
+and the loss of the city upon whose fortifications such an enormous
+amount of money and labour had been expended.
+
+On the other hand, he felt perfectly confident that the city could be
+successfully defended, and that at a cost of life far less than would
+be attained by a victory in the open field, while the blow that would
+be inflicted upon the prestige and power of the enemy, by being
+ignominiously compelled to retire to their ships, after the failure of
+all their attacks, would be as great as if their army had been defeated
+in the field. Therefore the grand master, with the full assent of his
+leaders, turned a deaf ear to the entreaties of the younger knights,
+that they might be allowed to make a sortie. He calmly waited behind
+the formidable defences he had for the past ten years been occupied in
+perfecting, in anticipation of the assault of the Moslem host.
+
+Accordingly, after disembarking at their leisure, the Turkish army moved
+forward, and took their post upon St. Stephen's Hill. From this eminence
+they commanded a full view of the town, the hills sloping gently down
+to the foot of the walls. In later times the first care of a general
+commanding the defence would have been to construct formidable works
+upon this commanding position. But the cannon of that period were so
+cumbrous and slowly worked, and so inaccurate in their aim, that the
+advantage of occupying a position that would prevent an enemy from
+firing down into a town was considered to be more than counterbalanced
+by the weakening of the garrison by the abstraction of the force
+required to man the detached work, and by the risk of their being
+surrounded and cut off without the garrison of the town being able to
+aid them.
+
+That the defence of St. Stephen's Hill was considered unnecessary for
+the safety of Rhodes is shown by the fact that no attempt had been made
+to fortify it when, forty years later, the Moslems again besieged the
+city.
+
+There was no shadow of apprehension felt by the garrison of Rhodes
+as the great array of their foes was seen moving on to the hill, and
+preparing to pitch its camp. On the summit was the great tent of the
+pasha; round this were the marquees of the other commanders, while the
+encampments of the troops stretched far away along the upper slopes of
+the hill.
+
+Previous to the despatch of the expedition, the sultan had made
+preparations for aiding his arms by treachery. The agent he had sent
+to propose a temporary truce had, during his stay on the Island, made
+himself thoroughly acquainted with the outline of the works. A very
+accurate plan of them had also been obtained from an inhabitant of
+Rhodes, who had abandoned Christianity and taken service with the Turks.
+
+In addition to this he had arranged with a renegade German, known as
+Maitre Georges, a man of very great ability as an artilleryman and
+engineer, to desert to the city, and there do all in his power to assist
+the besiegers, both by affording them information and by giving bad
+advice to the besieged. On the day after Paleologus, who was himself a
+renegade Greek, had established his camp, he sent in a herald to summon
+the city to surrender, at the same time making lavish promises that the
+lives and property of the native population should be respected, and
+that they should be allowed to continue to reside there, to enjoy the
+full exercise of their religion and of all other rights they possessed.
+The pasha had no real hope that the knights would obey the summons,
+but he thought that he might excite a spirit of disaffection among the
+townspeople that would, when the crisis came, greatly hamper the efforts
+of the defenders.
+
+The Rhodians, however, were well satisfied with the rule of the Order.
+The knights, although belonging to the Catholic Church, had allowed the
+natives of the Island, who were of the Greek faith, perfect freedom in
+the exercise of their religion, and their rule, generally, had been
+fair and just. The wealth and prosperity of the Island had increased
+enormously since their establishment there, and the population had no
+inclination whatever to change their rule for that of the Turks. The
+summons to surrender being refused, the enemy made a reconnaissance
+towards the walls.
+
+D'Aubusson had no longer any reason for checking the ardour of the
+knights, and a strong body of horsemen, under the command of De
+Monteuil, sallied out and drove the Turks back to their camp.
+
+Maitre Georges, who was acting as the military adviser of the pasha, saw
+at once that the weakest point of the defence was Fort St. Nicholas, at
+the extremity of the mole along the neck of land dividing the outer from
+the inner port. At a short distance away, on the opposite side of the
+port, stood the church of St. Anthony, and in the gardens of the church
+a battery was at once erected. The garden was but three hundred yards
+from St. Nicholas, and the danger that would arise from the construction
+of the battery was at once perceived, and an incessant fire opened upon
+it from the guns on the wall round the grand master's palace. Numbers of
+the workmen were killed, but the erection of the battery was pushed on
+night and day, and ere long three of the immense cannon that had been
+brought from Constantinople,--where sixteen of them had been cast under
+the direction of Maitre Georges--were placed in position. These cannon
+were eighteen feet in length, and carried stone balls of some twenty-six
+inches in diameter.
+
+Before these were ready to open fire, Gervaise had entirely regained his
+health and strength. The grand master, being unwilling to appoint him to
+a separate command over the heads of knights many years his senior, had
+attached him to his person in the capacity of what would now be called
+an aide-de-camp.
+
+"I know, Gervaise, that I can rely upon your coolness and discretion. I
+cannot be everywhere myself, and I want you to act as my eyes in places
+where I cannot be. I know that the knights, so far as bravery and
+devotion are concerned, will each and every one do his best, and will
+die at their posts before yielding a foot; but while fighting like
+paladins they will think of naught else, and, however hardly pressed,
+will omit to send to me for reinforcements. Nay, even did they think
+of it, they probably would not send, deeming that to do so would be
+derogatory, and might be taken as an act of cowardice. Now, it is
+this service that I shall specially look for from you. When a post is
+attacked, I shall, when my presence is required elsewhere, send you to
+represent me. I do not, of course, wish you to interfere in any way in
+the conduct of the defence, in which you will take such share as you
+can; but you are specially to observe how matters go, and if you see
+that the knights are pressed and in sore need of assistance to enable
+them to hold the post, you will at once bring the news to me, and I will
+hurry there with reinforcements."
+
+No post could have been more in accordance with the desire of Gervaise,
+for the portion of the wall defended by the English langue was far
+removed from the point selected by the Turks for their first attack, the
+sea front being defended half by the langue of Italy, and half by that
+of Castile. Fort St. Nicholas was under the command of the Cavalier
+Caretto, and as soon as the Turkish battery was completed, Gervaise
+went down there with an order from the grand master that he was for the
+present to consider himself as forming part of the garrison. This
+was pleasant for both Caretto and himself, for the Italian knight had
+conceived a strong friendship for the young Englishman, and had rejoiced
+greatly at his return from captivity, but had been so much occupied with
+his duty of placing the castle in all respects in a state of defence,
+that he had had no opportunity for a private conversation with him since
+his return to Rhodes.
+
+Gervaise, on his part, was no less pleased. Caretto had shown so much
+tact after his release from the Moors, and had so willingly aided him
+in any capacity allotted to him, without in the slightest degree
+interposing his council unasked, that Gervaise had come to like him
+greatly, even before their arrival at Genoa. Circumstances there had
+brought them closely together, and their friendship had been cemented
+during their voyage to Rhodes. Caretto had gone back to Italy, where
+he had a commandery, a few days after Gervaise had sailed on his last
+voyage, and had only returned to Rhodes three months before Gervaise
+escaped from captivity.
+
+"This is turning the tables," Caretto said, with a laugh, when Gervaise
+presented the grand master's order. "I was under your command last time,
+and now it seems that you are to be under mine. I suppose you applied
+to come here, in order to have a fresh opportunity of distinguishing
+yourself. I heard that you had been placed on D'Aubusson's own staff."
+
+"Yes, and am on it still; and it is by his orders and not by my own
+solicitation that I am here. I will tell you what my duties are. The
+grand master knows the commanders of posts have their hands so full
+that they will have no time for sending complete reports to him, and he
+considers, moreover, that they might, in some cases, however pressed,
+hesitate to ask for aid until too late for reinforcements to be brought
+up. My duty will be to let the grand master know how matters are going,
+and to send to him at once if it seems to me that help is needed. I
+should, of course, always send for reinforcements, at the request of a
+commander; but it is only in the event of his being too busy in the heat
+of the fray to think of aught but resisting an attack, that I should
+exercise my own judgment in the matter."
+
+Caretto nodded.
+
+"It is a good thought of D'Aubusson's. When one is in the thick of a
+fight in a breach, with the Moslems swarming round, it does not occur to
+one to draw out of the fray to send off messages. For myself, I shall be
+glad indeed to have that matter off my mind, though it is not every one
+I should care to trust with such a responsibility. Some might send off
+for aid when it was not needed, others might delay so long that help
+might come too late; but with one so cool headed as yourself I should
+not fear any contingency. And now, as I am not busy at present, let us
+have a comfortable talk as to what has happened since we met last. I was
+at the banquet at the grand master's on the night when you related your
+adventures. You had certainly much to tell, but it seems to me for some
+reason or other you cut short certain details, and I could not see why,
+as there seemed no prospect of escape open to you, you did not accept
+the offer of Suleiman Ali to ransom you."
+
+"I saw no chance of escape at the moment, but I did not doubt that I
+could get away from the town whenever I chose, although it was not
+clear how I should proceed afterwards. It was for this opportunity I
+was waiting, and I felt sure that, with my knowledge of the language, it
+would come sooner or later. In the next place, my captors had fixed
+an exorbitant sum for my ransom, and I did not wish to impose upon the
+generosity of Suleiman. There was another reason--a private one."
+
+"You don't mean to say that you had fallen in love with a Moorish
+damsel, Sir Gervaise?" Caretto laughed.
+
+"For shame, Cavalier! As if a Christian knight would care for a Moslem
+maiden, even were she as fair as the houris of their creed!"
+
+"Christian knights have done so before now," Caretto laughed, greatly
+amused at the young knight's indignation, "and doubtless will do so
+again. Well, I suppose I must not ask what the private matter was,
+though it must have been something grave indeed to lead you, a slave,
+to reject the offer of freedom. I know that when I was rowing in their
+galleys, no matter of private business that I can conceive would have
+stood in my way for a single moment, had a chance of freedom presented
+itself."
+
+"It was a matter of honour," Gervaise said gravely, "and one of which I
+should speak to no one else; but as you were present at the time, there
+can, I think, be no harm in doing so. At the time that I was captured, I
+was stripped of everything that I had upon me, and, of course, with the
+rest, of the gage which the Lady Claudia had given me, and which hung
+round my neck where she had placed it. It was taken possession of by the
+captain of the pirates, who, seeing that it bore no Christian emblem,
+looked upon it as a sort of amulet. I understood what he was saying,
+but, as I was desirous that my knowledge of Turkish should not be
+suspected, I said nothing. I was very glad that he so regarded it, for
+had he taken it to be an ordinary trinket, he might have parted with it,
+and I should never have been able to obtain a clue as to the person to
+whom he sold it. As it was, he put it round his neck, with the remark
+that it might bring him better luck than had befallen me. He told me
+jeeringly months afterwards that it had done so, and that he would never
+part with it. Given me as it was, I felt that my honour was concerned in
+its recovery, and that, should I ever meet Lady Claudia again, I should
+feel disgraced indeed, if, when she asked whether I still bore her gage,
+I had to confess that it was lost."
+
+"But lost from no fault of your own," Caretto put in.
+
+"The losing was not indeed from any fault of my own, and had the pirate
+thrown it into the sea I should have held myself free from disgrace; but
+as it was still in existence, and I knew its possessor, I was bound in
+honour to recover it. At the time Suleiman Ali's messenger arrived the
+corsair was away, and there was no saying when his ship would return;
+therefore, I decided at once not to accept the offer of freedom. Had it
+not been for that, I own that I should have done so, for I knew that
+I could repay Suleiman from the revenues of my commandery, which would
+have accumulated in my absence; but if I had had to wait ten years
+longer to regain the gage, I felt that I was in honour bound to do so.
+It was, in fact, some six months before the corsair put into that port
+again. The moment he did so I carried out the plans I had long before
+determined upon. I obtained a disguise from Ben Ibyn, and by a ruse
+succeeded in inducing the pirate to meet me outside the town, believing
+that I was an Arab chief who wished to dispose of some valuable slave
+girls he had brought in. I had with me one of my old galley slaves, who
+had been taken into Ben Ibyn's employment; and when the pirate came up
+with two of his crew, and furiously attacked me as soon as I threw off
+my disguise, it would have gone hard with me had he not stood by me, and
+killed one of them who was about to attack me in the rear. I slew the
+other and Hassan, and the gage is in its place again."
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXI THE FORT OF ST. NICHOLAS
+
+
+"Well, you have proved indeed," Caretto said, when Gervaise finished his
+story, "that you are worthy of the bestowal of a gage by a fair damsel.
+I do not think that many knights, however true they might be to the
+donor, would have suffered months of slavery in order to regain a token,
+lost by no fault or carelessness of their own; and no lady could have
+blamed or held them in any way dishonoured by the loss."
+
+"I had a message by the Viscount De Monteuil from Lady Claudia the other
+day, saying that she trusted I had kept her gage. I can assure you that
+the six months of slavery were cheaply purchased by the pleasure I felt
+that I still possessed it; and I was glad, too, to learn that I had not
+been forgotten by her."
+
+"Of that you may well assure yourself, Tresham; my commandery is not far
+from Genoa, and I was frequently with her, but never without her drawing
+me aside and asking me if I had heard any news of you, and talking over
+with me the chances there might be of your escape. I can tell you that
+there are not a few young nobles of Genoa who would give much to be
+allowed as you are to carry her gage, or wear her colours. You should
+see her now; you would scarce know her again, so altered and improved is
+she; there is no fairer face in all Italy."
+
+"I hope some day to meet her again," Gervaise replied; "although I own
+to knowing it were better that I should not do so. Until she gave me her
+gage I had scarcely noticed her. I have, as you know, no experience of
+women, and had so much on my mind at the time, what with the fuss they
+were making about us, and the question of getting the prizes here, that
+in truth I paid but slight attention to the fair faces of the dames of
+Genoa. But the gracious and earnest way in which, though scarce more
+than a child, she gave me her gage, and vowed that no other knight
+should possess one so long as I lived, struck me so greatly that I own
+I gave the matter much more thought than was right or becoming in one
+of our Order. The incident was much more gratifying to me than all
+the honour paid me by the Republic, and during the long months of
+my captivity it has recurred to me so frequently that I have in vain
+endeavoured to chase it from my thoughts, as sinful thus to allow myself
+constantly to think of any woman. Do not mistake me, Sir Fabricius. I
+am speaking to you as to a confessor, and just as I have kept her amulet
+hidden from all, so is the thought of her a secret I would not part with
+for my life. I do not for a moment deceive myself with the thought that,
+beyond the fact that her gift has made her feel an interest in me and my
+fate, she has any sentiment in the matter: probably, indeed, she looks
+back upon the gift as a foolish act of girlish enthusiasm that led her
+into making a promise that she now cannot but find unpleasantly binding;
+for it is but natural that among the young nobles of her own rank and
+country there must be some whom she would see with pleasure wearing her
+colours."
+
+Caretto looked at him with some amusement.
+
+"Were you not bound by your vows as a knight of the Order, how would you
+feel in the matter?"
+
+"I should feel worse," Gervaise said, without hesitation. "I have
+oftentimes thought that over, and I see that it is good for me I am so
+bound. It does not decrease my chances, for, as I know, there are no
+chances; but it renders it more easy for me to know that it is so."
+
+"But why should you say that you have no chances, Tresham?"
+
+"Because it is easy to see that it is so. I am, save for my commandery
+and prospects in the Order, a penniless young knight, without home or
+estate, without even a place in my country, and that country not hers. I
+know that it is not only sinful, but mad, for me to think so frequently
+of her, but at least I am not mad enough to think that I can either win
+the heart or aspire to the hand of one who is, you say, so beautiful,
+and who is, moreover, as I know, the heiress to wide estates."
+
+"'There was a squire of low degree, Loved the king's daughter of
+Hungarie,'" Caretto sang, with a laugh. "You are not of low degree,
+but of noble family, Gervaise. You are not a squire, but a knight, and
+already a very distinguished one; nor is the young lady, though she be a
+rich heiress, a king's daughter."
+
+"At any rate, the squire was not vowed to celibacy. No, no, Sir
+Fabricius, it is a dream, and a pleasant one; but I know perfectly well
+that it is but a dream, and one that will do me no harm so long as I
+ever bear in mind that it is so. Many a knight of the Order before me
+has borne a lady's gage, and carried it valiantly in many a fight, and
+has been no less true to his vows for doing so."
+
+"Upon the contrary, he has been all the better a knight, Gervaise; it
+is always good for a knight, whether he belongs to the Order or not, to
+prize one woman above all others, and to try to make himself worthy of
+his ideal. As to the vow of celibacy, you know that ere now knights have
+been absolved from their vows, and methinks that, after the service
+you have rendered to Italy by ridding the sea of those corsairs, his
+Holiness would make no difficulty in granting any request that you might
+make him in that or any other direction. I don't know whether you are
+aware that, after you sailed from here, letters came from Rome as well
+as from Pisa, Florence, and Naples, expressive of the gratitude felt
+for the services that you had rendered, and of their admiration for the
+splendid exploit that you had performed."
+
+"No; the grand master has had his hands so full of other matters that
+doubtless an affair so old escaped his memory. Indeed, he may have
+forgotten that I sailed before the letters arrived."
+
+"Do not forget to jog his memory on the subject, for I can tell you that
+the letters did not come alone, but were each accompanied by presents
+worthy of the service you rendered. But as to the vows?"
+
+"As to the vows, I feel as I said just now, that I would not free myself
+of them if I could, for, being bound by them, I can the more easily and
+pleasantly enjoy my dream. Besides, what should I do if I left the Order
+without home, country, or means, and with naught to do but to sell my
+sword to some warlike monarch? Besides, Caretto, I love the Order,
+and deem it the highest privilege to fight against the Moslems, and to
+uphold the banner of the Cross."
+
+"As to that, you could, like De Monteuil and many other knights here,
+always come out to aid the Order in time of need. As to the vows, I am
+not foolish enough to suppose that you would ask to be relieved from
+them, until you had assured yourself that Claudia was also desirous that
+you should be free."
+
+"It is absurd," Gervaise said, almost impatiently. "Do not let us talk
+any more about it, Caretto, or it will end by turning my head and making
+me presumptuous enough to imagine that the Lady Claudia, who only saw
+me for three or four days, and that while she was still but a girl, has
+been thinking of me seriously since."
+
+"I do not know Claudia's thoughts," Caretto remarked drily, "but I
+do know that last year she refused to listen to at least a score of
+excellent offers for her hand, including one from a son of the doge
+himself, and that without any reasonable cause assigned by her, to the
+great wonderment of all, seeing that she does not appear to have any
+leaning whatever towards a life in a nunnery. At any rate, if at some
+future time you should pluck up heart of grace to tell her you love her,
+and she refuses you, you will at least have the consolation of knowing
+that you are not the only one, by a long way, whose suit has been
+rejected. And now as to our affairs here. Methinks that tomorrow that
+battery will open fire upon us. It seems completed."
+
+"Yes, I think they are nearly ready," Gervaise said, turning his mind
+resolutely from the subject they had been discussing. "From the palace
+wall I saw, before I came down here, large numbers of men rolling huge
+stones down towards the church. Our guns were firing steadily; but could
+they load them ten times as fast as they do, they would hardly be able
+to stop the work, so numerous are those engaged upon it."
+
+"Yes we shall soon learn something of the quality of their artillery.
+The tower is strong enough to resist ordinary guns, but it will soon
+crumble under the blows of such enormous missiles. Never have I seen or
+heard in Europe of cannon of such size; but indeed, in this matter the
+Turks are far ahead of us, and have, ever since cannon were first cast,
+made them of much larger size than we in Europe have done. However,
+there is one comfort; they may destroy this fort, but they have still
+to cross the water, and this under the fire of the guns on the palace
+walls; when they once land, their great battery must cease firing, and
+we shall be able to meet them on equal terms in the breach. Fight
+as hard as they may, I think we can hold our own, especially as
+reinforcements can come down to us more quickly than they can be brought
+across the water."
+
+The next morning, at daybreak, the deep boom of a gun announced to the
+city that the great battering cannon had begun their work. In the fort
+the sleeping knights sprang to their feet at the concussion that seemed
+to shake it to its centre. They would have rushed to the walls, but
+Caretto at once issued orders that no one should show himself on the
+battlements unless under special orders.
+
+"There is nothing whatever to be done until the Turks have breached the
+wall, and are ready to advance to attack us. Every sword will be needed
+when that hour comes, and each man owes it to the Order to run no
+useless risk, until the hour when he is required to do his share of the
+fighting."
+
+The time required to reload the great cannon was considerable, but at
+regular intervals they hurled their heavy missiles against the wall,
+the distance being so short that every ball struck it. After some twenty
+shots had been fired, Caretto, accompanied by Gervaise, went out by a
+small gate on the eastern side of the tower, and made their way round
+by the foot of the wall to see what effect the shots had produced on the
+solid masonry.
+
+Caretto shook his head.
+
+"It is as I feared," he said. "No stones ever quarried by man could long
+resist such tremendous blows. In some places, you see, the stones are
+starred and cracked, in others the shock seems to have pulverised the
+spot where it struck; but, worse, still, the whole face of the wall
+is shaken. There are cracks between the stones, and some of these are
+partly bulged out and partly driven in. It may take some time before
+a breach is effected, but sooner or later the wall will surely be
+demolished."
+
+"I will go up and make my report to the grand master."
+
+"Do so, Gervaise. I almost wonder that he has not himself come down to
+see how the wall is resisting."
+
+Gervaise, on reaching the palace, heard that D'Aubusson was at present
+engaged in examining no less a person than Maitre Georges, the right
+hand of Paleologus, who had soon after daybreak presented himself before
+the wall on the other side of the town, declaring that he had left the
+Turkish service, and craving to be admitted. News had been sent at once
+to D'Aubusson, who despatched two of the senior knights, with orders to
+admit him and receive him with all honour. This had been done, and
+the grand master, with some of his council, were now closeted with
+the newcomer. Several of the knights were gathered in the courtyard,
+discussing the event. There was no question that if the renegade came in
+good faith, his defection would be a serious blow to the assailants,
+and that his well known skill and experience would greatly benefit the
+defenders.
+
+"For my part," Sir John Boswell, who formed one of the detachment which
+the English langue, as well as all the others, contributed to form the
+garrison of the palace said, "I would have hung the fellow up by the
+neck over the gateway, and he should never have set foot within the
+walls. Think you that a man who has denied his faith and taken service
+with his enemies is to be trusted, whatever oaths he may take?"
+
+"You must remember, Boswell," another said, "that hitherto Georges has
+not fought against Christians, but has served Mahomet in his wars with
+other infidels. I am not saying a word in defence of his having become a
+renegade; yet even a renegade may have some sort of heart, and now that
+he has been called upon to fight against Christians he may well have
+repented of his faults, and determined to sacrifice his position and
+prospects rather than aid in the attack on the city."
+
+"We shall see. As for me, I regard a renegade as the most contemptible
+of wretches, and have no belief that they have either a heart or
+conscience."
+
+When Maitre Georges came out from the palace, laughing and talking with
+the two knights who had entered with him, it was evident that he was
+well pleased with his reception by the grand master, who had assigned
+to him a suite of apartments in the guest house. In reality, however,
+D'Aubusson had no doubt that his object was a treacherous one, and that,
+like Demetrius, who had come under the pretence of bringing about a
+truce, his object was to find out the weak points and to supply the
+Turks with information. Georges had, in his conversation with him, laid
+great stress on the strength of the Turkish army, the excellent quality
+of the troops, and the enormous battering train that had been prepared.
+But every word he spoke but added to the grand master's suspicions; for
+if the man considered that the capture of the city was morally certain,
+it would be simply throwing away his life to enter it as a deserter.
+
+The grand master was, however, too politic to betray any doubt of
+Georges' sincerity. Were he treated as a traitor, Paleologus might
+find another agent to do the work. It was, therefore, better to feign
+a belief in his story, to obtain all the information possible from him,
+and at the same time to prevent his gaining any knowledge of affairs
+that would be of the slightest use to the Turks. Instructions were
+therefore given to the two knights that, while Georges was to be treated
+with all courtesy, he was to be strictly watched, though in such a
+manner that he should be in ignorance of it, and that, whenever he
+turned his steps in the direction of those parts of the defences where
+fresh works had been recently added and preparations made of which it
+was desirable the Turks should be kept in ignorance, he was to be met,
+as if by accident, by one of the knights told off for the purpose, and
+his steps diverted in another direction.
+
+Georges soon made himself popular among many of the knights, who had no
+suspicions of his real character. He was a man of exceptional figure,
+tall, strong, splendidly proportioned, with a handsome face and gallant
+bearing. He was extremely well informed on all subjects, had travelled
+widely, had seen many adventures, was full of anecdote, and among
+the younger knights, therefore, he was soon regarded as a charming
+companion. His very popularity among them aided D'Aubusson's plans, as
+Georges was generally the centre of a group of listeners, and so had but
+few opportunities of getting away quietly to obtain the information he
+sought. Gervaise delivered his report to the grand master.
+
+"I am free now," D'Aubusson said, "and will accompany you to St.
+Nicholas. I have been detained by the coming of this man Georges. He
+is a clever knave, and, I doubt not, has come as a spy. However, I have
+taken measures that he shall learn nothing that can harm us. No lives
+have been lost at the tower, I hope?"
+
+"No, sir; Caretto has forbidden any to show themselves on the walls."
+
+"He has done well. This is no time for rash exposure, and where there is
+naught to be gained, it is a grave fault to run risks."
+
+On arriving at the end of the mole, D'Aubusson, accompanied by Caretto,
+made an investigation of the effect of the Turks' fire.
+
+"'Tis worse than I expected," he said. "When we laid out our
+fortifications the thought that such guns as these would be used against
+them never entered our minds. Against ordinary artillery the walls would
+stand a long battering; but it is clear that we shall have to depend
+more upon our swords than upon our walls for our defence. Fortunately,
+although the Turks have indeed chosen the spot where our walls are most
+open to the assaults of their battery, they have to cross the water to
+attack the breach when it is made, and will have to fight under heavy
+disadvantage."
+
+"Tresham was last night saying to me, that it seemed to him it would not
+be a difficult matter for one who spoke Turkish well, to issue at night
+on the other side of the town, and to make his way round to the battery,
+disguised of course as a Turkish soldier, and then, mixing with the
+artillery men, to drive a spike into one of the touch holes. He said
+that he would gladly volunteer for the task."
+
+D'Aubusson shook his head decidedly. "It would be too dangerous; and
+even were a spike driven in, the Turks would have no great difficulty
+in extracting it, for the tubes are so big that a man might crawl in and
+drive the spike up from the inside. Moreover, could one or more of the
+guns be disabled permanently, others would be brought down and set in
+their place, so that nothing would be gained but a very short delay,
+which would be of no advantage to us, and certainly would in no way
+justify the risking of the life of so distinguished a young knight."
+
+The bombardment of St. Nicholas continued for some days. A breach was
+fast forming in the wall, and a slope composed of the fallen rubbish
+extended from the front of the breach to the water's edge. The grand
+master was frequently on the spot, and as this was at present the sole
+object of attack, the garrison was strengthened by as many knights as
+could be sheltered within its walls. At night the shattered masonry
+that had fallen inside was carried out, and with it a new work thrown
+up across the mole, to strengthen the defence on that side, should the
+enemy land between the town and the fort. Small batteries were planted
+wherever they could sweep the approaches to the breach, and planks
+studded with nails were sunk in the shallow water of the harbour, to
+impede the progress of those who might attempt to swim or wade across.
+For the time, therefore, the functions of Gervaise were in abeyance, and
+he laboured with the rest of the garrison at the defences.
+
+At daybreak on the 9th of June, a great number of vessels and boats,
+crowded with soldiers, bore down on St. Nicholas. As they approached,
+every gun on the fortifications that could be brought to bear upon them
+opened fire; but in a dense mass they advanced. Some made their way to
+the rocks and landed the soldiers there; others got alongside the mole;
+but the majority grounded in the shallow water of the harbour, and
+the troops, leaping out, waded to the foot of the breach. On its crest
+D'Aubusson himself had taken up his station. Beside him stood Caretto,
+and around them the most distinguished knights of the Order. With wild
+shouts the Turks rushed up the breach, and swarmed thickly up the ruined
+masonry until, at its summit, they encountered the steel clad line of
+the defenders. For hours the terrible struggle continued. As fast as the
+head of the Turkish column broke and melted away against the obstacle
+they tried in vain to penetrate, fresh reinforcements took the place
+of those who had fallen, and in point of valour and devotion the Moslem
+showed himself a worthy antagonist of the Christian. It was not only
+at the breach that the conflict raged. At other points the Turks, well
+provided with ladders, fixed them against the walls, and desperately
+strove to obtain a footing there. From the breach clouds of dust rose
+from under the feet of the combatants, mingling with the smoke of
+the cannon on the ramparts, the fort, and Turkish ships, and at times
+entirely hid from the sight of the anxious spectators on the walls of
+the town and fortress, and of the still more numerous throng of Turks
+on St. Stephen's Hill, the terrible struggle that continued without a
+moment's intermission.
+
+The combatants now fought in comparative silence. The knights, exhausted
+and worn out by their long efforts beneath the blazing sun, still showed
+an unbroken front; but it was only occasionally that the battle cry of
+the Order rose in the air, as a fresh body of assailants climbed up the
+corpse strewn breach. The yell of the Moslems rose less frequently;
+they sacrificed their lives as freely and devotedly as those who led the
+first onset had done; but as the hours wore on, the assurance of victory
+died out, and a doubt as to whether it was possible to break through the
+line of their terrible foes gained ground. D'Aubusson himself, although,
+in spite of the remonstrances of the knights, always in the thickest
+of the fray, was yet ever watchful, and quickly perceived where the
+defenders were hotly pressed, and where support was most needed.
+Gervaise fought by his side, so that, when necessary, he could carry his
+orders to a little body of knights, drawn up in reserve, and despatch
+them to any point where aid was needed. The cannon still continued their
+fire on both sides. A fragment of one of the stone balls from a basilisk
+struck off D'Aubusson's helmet. He selected another from among the
+fallen knights, and resumed his place in the line. Still the contest
+showed no signs of terminating. The Turkish galleys ever brought up
+reinforcements, while the defenders grew fewer, and more exhausted.
+During a momentary pause, while a fresh body of Turks were landing,
+Gervaise said to the grand master,
+
+"If you will give me leave, sir, I will go out at the watergate, swim
+up the inner harbour, and in a very short time turn a few of the craft
+lying there into fire ships, and tow them out with a couple of galleys.
+At any rate, we can fire all these craft that have grounded, and create
+a panic among the others."
+
+"Well thought of, Gervaise! I will write an order on one of my tablets.
+Do you take my place for a minute." Withdrawing behind the line, the
+grand master sat down on a fragment of stone, and, drawing a tablet
+from a pouch in his girdle, he wrote on it, "In all things carry out
+the instructions of Sir Gervaise Tresham: he is acting by my orders and
+authority, and has full power in all respects."
+
+He handed the slip of parchment to Gervaise, who hurried to the water
+gate in the inner harbour, threw off his helmet and armour, issued out
+at the gate, and plunged into the sea. He swam out some distance, in
+order to avoid the missiles of the Turks, who were trying to scale the
+wall from the mole, and then directed his course to St. Michael's, which
+guarded the inner entrance to the fort. He had fastened the parchment
+in his hair, and as some of the garrison of the tower, noticing his
+approach, came down to assist him, he handed it to them and was at once
+taken to the commander of St. Michael, answering as he went the anxious
+questions as to how matters stood at the breach.
+
+"Aid is sorely needed. The Turks have gained no foot of ground as
+yet, but many of the knights are killed and most of the others utterly
+exhausted with heat and labour. Unless aid reaches them speedily, the
+tower, with all its defenders, will be lost."
+
+The instant the commander knew what was required, he bade six of the
+knights embark with Gervaise in a boat moored behind the tower, and row
+up the harbour to the spot where the shipping was all massed together,
+protected by the high ground of the fortress from the Turkish fire.
+Gervaise waved his hand, as he neared the end of the harbour, to the
+officer on the walls, and while the six knights who were with him ran
+off to tell the master of the galleys to prepare two of them to leave
+the port instantly, Gervaise explained to the officer in charge of the
+wall at that point the plan that he was charged to carry out, and asked
+for twenty knights to assist him.
+
+"It will leave us very weak along here," the officer said. "Then let me
+have ten, and send for another ten from other parts of the wall. Here is
+the grand master's order, giving me full power and authority, and it is
+all important that no single moment shall be wasted."
+
+"You shall have twenty of mine," the officer said, "and I will draw ten
+from the langue next to us to fill their places."
+
+In a few minutes the quay was a scene of bustle and activity. Gervaise
+picked out ten of the smallest vessels; the knights went among the other
+ships, seized all goods and stores that would be useful as combustibles,
+and compelled the crews to carry them on board the craft chosen as fire
+ships. Then barrels were broken open, old sails and faggots saturated
+with oil and pitch, and in little more than a quarter of an hour after
+his arrival, Gervaise had the satisfaction of seeing that the ten boats
+were all filled with combustibles, and ready to be set on fire. He now
+called for volunteers from the sailors, and a number of them at once
+came forward, including many of the captains. He placed one of these in
+command of each fire ship, and gave him four of the sailors.
+
+"The galleys will tow you out," he said, "and take you close to the
+enemy's ships. We shall range you five abreast, and when I give the
+word, the one at the end of the line will steer for the nearest Turk,
+and, with oars and poles, get alongside. The captain will then light the
+train of powder in the hold, throw the torch among the straw, and see
+that, if possible, the men fasten her to the Turk; but if this cannot
+be done, it is not essential, for in the confusion the enemy will not
+be able to get out of the way of the fire ship as it drives down against
+her. At the last moment you will take to your boats and row back here.
+We will protect you from the assaults of any of the Turkish ships."
+
+Having made sure that all the captains understood the orders, Gervaise
+took command of one of the galleys, the senior knight going on board
+the other. The ten fire ships were now poled out until five were ranged
+abreast behind each craft; Gervaise requested the commander of the other
+galley to lie off the point of St. Nicholas until he had got rid of his
+five fire ships, then to advance and launch his craft against the Turks.
+The smoke of the guns lay so heavy on the water, and the combatants were
+so intent upon the struggle at the breach, that Gervaise steered his
+galley into the midst of the Turkish vessels laden with troops ready
+to disembark, without attracting any notice; then, standing upon the
+taffrail, he signalled to the two outside boats to throw off their ropes
+and make for the Turkish ship nearest to them. This they did, and it was
+not until a sheet of flame rose alongside, that the enemy awoke to the
+sense of danger.
+
+The other three fire ships were almost immediately cast off. Two of them
+were equally successful, but the Turks managed to thrust off the third.
+She drifted, however, through the shipping, and presently brought
+up alongside one of the vessels fast aground. With but ten knights,
+Gervaise could not attack one of the larger vessels, crowded with
+troops; but there were many fishing boats that had been pressed into the
+service, and against one of these Gervaise ordered the men to steer the
+galley. A shout to the rowers made them redouble their efforts. A yell
+of dismay arose from the Turkish troops as they saw the galley bearing
+down upon them, and frantic efforts were made to row out of her way.
+These were in vain, for her sharp prow struck them amidships, cutting
+the boat almost in two, and she sank like a stone, the galley, without a
+pause, making for another boat.
+
+Looking back, Gervaise saw that his consort was already in the midst of
+the Turks, among whom the wildest confusion prevailed, each ship trying
+to extricate herself from the mass, upon which the batteries of the
+fortress now concentrated their efforts. Two fresh columns of flame
+had already shot up, and satisfied that all was going well, Gervaise
+continued his attack upon the smaller craft, six of whom were overtaken
+and sunk. Three or four of the larger vessels endeavoured to lay
+themselves alongside the galley, but her speed was so superior to theirs
+that she easily evaded the attempts, and, sweeping round, rejoined
+the other galley which had just issued from among the Turks, who were
+already in full retreat. The defenders of St. Nicholas, reanimated by
+the sight of the discomfiture of the Turkish fleet, with a loud shout
+rushed down from the spot which they had held for so many hours, drove
+their assailants before them, and flung themselves upon the crowd
+assembled at the foot of the breach.
+
+These had already suffered terribly from the fire of the batteries.
+Again and again they had striven to storm the mound of rubbish, and had
+each time been repulsed, with the loss of their bravest leaders. Seeing
+themselves abandoned by the ships, a panic seized them, and as the
+knights rushed down upon them they relinquished all thoughts of
+resistance, and dashed into the shallow water. Many were drowned in the
+attempt to swim across the deep channel in the middle, some succeeded,
+while others made their escape in the boats in which they had been
+brought ashore from the ships.
+
+The struggle was over. The two galleys made for the breach, and the
+knights leapt out as soon as the boats grounded, and, wading ashore,
+joined the group that had so long and gallantly sustained the unequal
+fight. Fatigue, exhaustion, and wounds, were forgotten in the triumph
+of the moment, and they crowded round the grand master and Caretto, to
+whose joint exertions the success of the defence was so largely due.
+
+"Do not thank me, comrades," D'Aubusson said. "No man has today fought
+better than the rest. Every knight has shown himself worthy of the fame
+of our Order. The meed of praise for our success is first due to Sir
+Gervaise Tresham. At the moment when I began to doubt whether we could
+much longer withstand the swarms of fresh foes who continued to pour
+against us, while we were overcome by heat and labour, Sir Gervaise, who
+had throughout been fighting at my side, offered to swim into the port,
+to fit out a dozen of the merchant craft there as fire ships, and to tow
+them round into the midst of the Turkish vessels behind the two galleys
+that were lying ready for service. I remembered how he had before
+destroyed the corsair fleet at Sardinia with fire ships, and the
+proposal seemed to me as an inspiration sent from Heaven, at this moment
+of our great peril. I wrote him an order, giving him full authority to
+act in my name, and in a time that seemed to me incredibly short I saw
+him round the point with the fire ships in tow. You saw, as well as
+I did, how completely the plan was carried out. Ten or twelve of the
+Turkish ships are a mass of flames, and besides these I noted that
+the galley ran down and destroyed several smaller craft filled with
+soldiers. The panic in the ships spread to the troops on shore, and
+rendered the last part of our task an easy one. I say it from my heart
+that I consider it is to Sir Gervaise Tresham that we owe our success,
+and that, had it not been for his happy thought, the sun would have gone
+down on our dead bodies lying on the summit of the breach, and on the
+Turkish flag waving over the fort of St. Nicholas."
+
+Until now none of the defenders of the breach had known how what seemed
+to them an almost miraculous change in the fortune of the fight had come
+about, and they thronged round Gervaise, shaking his hand, and many of
+them warmly embracing him, according to the custom of the time.
+
+"It was but natural that the idea should occur to me," he said, "having
+before successfully encountered them with fire ships; and as all on
+shore, and especially these knights, aided me with all their power, it
+took but a brief time to get the boats in readiness for burning. Much
+credit, too, is due to the merchant captains and sailors who volunteered
+to take charge of the fire ships and to manoeuver them alongside the
+Turks."
+
+The grand master and the knights who had borne the brunt of the battle
+now retired along the mole to the town, bearing with them their most
+seriously wounded comrades, and assisting those whose wounds were less
+severe. The twenty knights who had manned the two galleys remained in
+the fort. Caretto continued in command, as, although he had suffered
+several wounds, he refused to relinquish his post. Gervaise, who
+had,--thanks partly to his skill with his weapons, but still more to
+the temper of the splendid suit of armour presented to him by
+Genoa,--escaped without a scratch, volunteered to remain with him until
+next morning, his principal motive for making the request being his
+desire to escape from further congratulations and praise for the success
+of his plan. After Caretto's wounds had been dressed by the knights, and
+he and Gervaise had partaken of some food and wine, which they greatly
+needed, Caretto was persuaded to lie down for a time, the knights
+promising to bring him word at once if they perceived any movement
+whatever on the part of the enemy. Gervaise remained with him, feeling,
+now the excitement was over, that he sorely needed rest after his
+exertions in the full heat of the summer sun.
+
+"It has been a great day, Gervaise," Caretto said, "and I only hope that
+when again I go into battle with the infidel, I shall have you at hand
+to come forward at the critical moment with some master stroke to secure
+victory. Claudia will be pleased indeed when she hears how the knight
+who bears her gage has again distinguished himself. She will look on the
+gay and idle young fops of Genoa with greater disdain than ever. Now you
+need not say anything in protest, the more so as I feel grievously weak,
+and disposed for sleep."
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXII THE STRUGGLE AT THE BREACH
+
+
+Two hours later Caretto and Gervaise were roused by the arrival of a
+hundred knights in place of the previous garrison; these bore the news
+that the pasha had sent in a flag of truce to ask for an armistice until
+sundown, to enable him to carry off for burial the bodies of those who
+had fallen in the attack. The request had been willingly granted; but
+D'Aubusson had at the same time thought it well to send down a strong
+reinforcement to the garrison to prevent any attempt at treachery on the
+part of the Turks.
+
+"I have seldom heard pleasanter news," Caretto said; "for just as I fell
+asleep I was wondering how we were to rid ourselves of the corpses of
+the infidels. By tomorrow the place would have become unbearable; and
+though, living, the Turks could not turn us out of the tower, they would
+when dead speedily have rid the place of us."
+
+In half an hour a number of Moslem vessels were seen approaching.
+Caretto did not wish the Turks to imagine that he doubted their good
+faith, and while directing the main body of knights to remain in
+concealment near the breach, he placed two on sentry duty on the crest
+of the ruins, and, with four other knights and Gervaise, went down in
+complete armour to salute the officer in command of the burying party,
+as he landed from the boats. The ships anchored a short distance out,
+and a number of boats rowed from them to the shore. As the Turkish
+officer landed, Caretto saluted him, and said in Arabic,
+
+"I give you courteous greeting, Sir. When the cannon cease to sound and
+swords are sheathed, there is no longer animosity between brave men; and
+no braver than those whose bodies lie stretched there, breathed the air
+of heaven. If, sir, I and the knights with me do not uncover our heads,
+it is from no want of respect for the dead, but solely because we dare
+not stand bareheaded under the fierce rays of the sun."
+
+The Turk answered with equal courtesy, complimenting the knights on
+their defence.
+
+"Had I not seen it with my own eyes," he said, "I should have deemed it
+altogether impossible that so small a number of men could thus for hours
+have withstood the attacks of some of the best of the sultan's troops.
+Tales have come down to us from our fathers of the marvellous prowess
+of the knights of your Order, and how at Smyrna, at Acre, and elsewhere,
+they performed such feats of valour that their name is still used by
+Turkish mothers as a bugbear to frighten their children. But the stories
+have always seemed to me incredible; now I perceive they were true, and
+that the present members of the Order in no way fall short of the valour
+of their predecessors."
+
+The knights remained with the Turkish commander and some of his officers
+while the work of collecting and carrying away the dead was performed,
+the conversation on their side being supported by Caretto and Gervaise.
+No less than seven hundred bodies were carried down to the boats,
+besides a great many wounded by the artillery fire. None were, however,
+found breathing among the great pile of dead at the upper part of the
+breach, for the axes and double handed swords of the knights had, in
+most of the cases, cleft through turban and skull.
+
+"This represents but part of our loss," the Turkish commander said
+sadly, as the last party came down with their burdens to the boats.
+"At least as many more must have perished in the sea, either in their
+endeavours to escape when all was lost, in the destruction of their
+vessels by fire, by the shot from your batteries, or by being run down
+by your galleys. Ah, Sir Knight, if it had not been for the appearance
+of your fire ships, methinks the matter might have ended differently."
+
+"In that I altogether agree with you," Caretto said. "We were indeed,
+well nigh spent, and must have soon succumbed had it not been that the
+fire ships arrived to our rescue. You have a fair right to claim that
+the victory would have remained in your hands, had not those craft gone
+out and snatched it from you."
+
+Then, with salutes on both sides, the Turks took their places in the
+boats, and the knights returned to the fort. As soon as darkness came
+on, a large body of slaves were marched down from the town, and, under
+the direction of the knights, laboured all night at the mound, removing
+great quantities of the fallen stones and rubbish in a line halfway up
+it, and piling them above so as to form a scarp across the mound that
+would need ladders to ascend. Another party worked at the top of the
+mound, and there built up a wall eight feet high. The work was completed
+by daylight, and the knights felt that they were now in a position to
+resist another attack, should Paleologus again send his troops to the
+assault.
+
+The night had passed quietly. There was a sound of stir and movement in
+the Turkish battery, but nothing that would excite the suspicion of a
+large body of troops being in motion. When it became light it was seen
+that the Turkish ships had sailed away to their previous anchorage on
+the other side of the Island, and although at considerable intervals
+the great cannon hurled their missiles against the fort, it was evident
+that, for the time at least, the attack was not to be pressed at that
+point. A fresh body of slaves, however, came down from the town to
+relieve those who had been all night at work, and the repair of the
+defences was continued, and with greater neatness and method than had
+been possible in the darkness.
+
+At eight o'clock the bells of St. John's Church gave notice that a
+solemn service of thanksgiving for the repulse of the enemy was about
+to be held. Notice had been sent down early to the tower; and all the
+knights who could be spared, without too greatly weakening the garrison,
+went up to attend it; the service was conducted with all the pomp and
+ceremony possible, and after it was over a great procession was formed
+to proceed to the shrine, where a picture of the Virgin held in special
+reverence by the Order was placed.
+
+As it wound through the streets in splendid array, the grand master and
+officials in all their robes of state, the knights in full armour and
+the mantles of the Order, while the inhabitants in gala costume lined
+the streets, windows, and housetops, the ladies waving scarves and
+scattering flowers down on the knights, the roar of great cannon on the
+south side of the city showed that the Turks had commenced the attack in
+another quarter. Without pausing, the procession continued its way, and
+it was not until the service in the chapel had been concluded that any
+steps were taken to ascertain the direction of the attack. As soon as it
+was over, the knights hastened to the walls. During the night the
+Turks had transported their great basilisks, with other large pieces of
+artillery, from the camp to the rising ground on the south side of the
+city, and had opened fire against the wall covering the Jews' quarter,
+and at the same time against the tower of St. Mary on the one hand and
+the Italian tower on the other.
+
+From other commanding spots huge mortars were hurling great fragments of
+rock and other missiles broadcast into the town. The portion of the wall
+selected for the attack showed that the Turks had been well informed by
+their spies of the weak points of the defence. The wall behind which the
+Jews' quarter lay, was, to all appearance, of thick and solid masonry;
+but this was really of great age, having formed part of the original
+defences of the town, before the Order had established itself there.
+The masonry, therefore, was ill fitted to resist the huge balls hurled
+against it by the basilisks. The langue of Provence was in charge of
+this part of the wall, and, leaving them for the present to bear the
+brunt of the storm, the grand master sent the knights who could be
+spared, to assist the inhabitants to erect shelters against the storm of
+missiles falling in the town.
+
+Sheds with sharply sloping roofs, constructed of solid timber, were
+built against the inner side of the walls, and beneath these numbers of
+the inhabitants found refuge. The work was performed with great celerity
+by the inhabitants, aided by the gangs of slaves, and in two or three
+days the townspeople were all in shelter, either in these sheds, in the
+vaults of the churches, or in other strongly constructed buildings.
+
+Among the missiles hurled into the town were balls filled with Greek
+fire, but the houses being entirely built of stone, no conflagrations
+of importance were caused by them, as a band of knights was organised
+specially to watch for these bombs, and whenever one of them was seen to
+fall, they hurried from their lookout to the spot, with a gang of slaves
+carrying baskets of earth and buckets of water, and quenched the flames
+before they had made any great headway.
+
+The roar of the bombardment was almost continuous, and was heard at
+islands distant from Rhodes, telling the inhabitants how the battle
+between the Christians and the Moslems was raging.
+
+It was not long before the wall in the front of the Jews' quarter began
+to crumble, and it was soon evident that it must, ere many days, succumb
+to the storm of missiles hurled against it. D'Aubusson lost no time in
+making preparations to avert the danger. He ordered all the houses in
+rear of the wall to be levelled; a deep semicircular ditch was then dug,
+and behind this a new wall, constructed of the stones and bricks from
+the houses destroyed, was built, and backed with an earthen rampart of
+great thickness and solidity.
+
+The work was carried on with extraordinary rapidity. The grand master
+himself set the example, and, throwing aside his robes and armour,
+laboured with pick and shovel like the commonest labourer. This excited
+the people to the highest pitch of enthusiasm, and all classes threw
+themselves into the task. Knights and slaves, men, women, and children,
+and even the inmates of the convents and nunneries, aided in the work,
+and when at last the outer wall fell, and the Turks thought that success
+was at hand, the pasha saw with astonishment and dismay that entry to
+the city was still barred by a work as formidable as that which he had
+destroyed at an enormous expenditure of ammunition. There was now a
+short breathing time for the besieged; but the depression which the
+failure of their efforts excited among the Turks, was shortly dispelled
+by the arrival of a ship, with a despatch from Constantinople, in which
+the pasha was informed that the sultan himself was about to proceed to
+Rhodes with a reinforcement of a hundred thousand men, and a fresh park
+of artillery.
+
+Paleologus had some doubts as to whether the report was true or was
+merely intended to stimulate him to new efforts for the speedy capture
+of the place. Knowing well that the grand master was the heart and soul
+of the defence, and that the failure of the assault was mainly due
+to his energy and ability, he determined to resort to the weapon so
+frequently in use in Eastern warfare--that of assassination. To this
+end he employed two men, one a Dalmatian, the other an Albanian; these
+presented themselves before the walls as deserters, and as there was no
+reason for suspecting their tale, they were admitted within the gates,
+and welcomed as having escaped from enforced service. They soon spread
+the tale of the speedy coming of the sultan with vast reinforcements,
+and as the pasha had on the previous day caused salutes to be fired,
+and other demonstrations to be made, the news was readily credited, and
+caused the greatest dismay among the defenders.
+
+Some of the knights of the Italian and Spanish langues believed the
+prospect of a successful defence against so enormous a force was
+absolutely hopeless, and determined to put pressure upon D'Aubusson to
+treat for surrender before it became too late. They opened negotiations
+with an Italian named Filelfo, one of D'Aubusson's secretaries, who
+undertook to lay their opinion before the grand master. D'Aubusson at
+once summoned the knights concerned in the matter before him. They found
+him with several members of the council.
+
+"Sir Knights," he said, "I have heard from my secretary your opinions
+in the matter of a surrender, and since you are in such terror of the
+Moslem sultan, you have my full permission to leave the town; and, more
+than that, I will myself secure your safe departure, which might be
+imperilled if your comrades or even the inhabitants of the town came to
+learn that you had advocated surrender; but," he went on, changing his
+tone from that of sarcasm to sternness, "if you remain with us, see that
+the word surrender never again passes your lips, and be assured that,
+should you continue your intrigues, in that direction, you shall meet
+with the fate you so justly deserve."
+
+Overwhelmed by the grand master's accusation and sternness, the Italian
+and Spanish knights threw themselves on their knees and implored him to
+grant them an early opportunity of retrieving their fault by battle with
+the infidel. Feeling that the lesson had been sufficiently severe, and
+that henceforth there would be no renewal of intrigues for a surrender,
+D'Aubusson forgave them, and promised them a place in the van when next
+the Moslems attacked. The incident was not without its advantage, for
+the two pretended deserters, believing that Filelfo, who had also fallen
+under the displeasure of the grand master, would be ready to join in the
+conspiracy against his life, approached him. Filelfo, who was greatly
+attached to D'Aubusson, saw by their manner that they wished to engage
+him in some intrigue, and, feigning great resentment and anger at
+his disgrace, led them on until they divulged the entire plot for
+D'Aubusson's assassination, and made brilliant offers to him if he would
+afford them facilities for carrying it out, producing, in proof of their
+power to do so, a letter of the pasha, authorising them to make such
+promises in his name.
+
+Filelfo at once divulged the whole plot to D'Aubusson. The two men were
+immediately arrested, tried by the council, and sentenced to death. They
+were not, however, formally executed, for the populace, obtaining news
+of their treachery, broke in upon their guards, and tore them to
+pieces. Foiled in his attempt on the life of the grand master, the pasha
+prepared for a renewal of the attack, and it was not long before the
+knights on the lookout at the church of St. John perceived that the fort
+of St. Nicholas was again to be the scene of the attack. It was ere long
+discovered that a large number of men were busy some distance along the
+shore in building a long structure, that could only be intended for a
+floating bridge. Among the sailors who had aided in the attack with the
+fire ships were several men belonging to an English trader in the port.
+All who had done so had been handsomely rewarded for their conduct, and
+five of the Englishmen had afterwards gone to the English auberge and
+had asked to be enrolled for service against the Turks, as they were
+weary of remaining on board in idleness when there was work to be done.
+Their offer had been accepted, and they had, in common with all the
+sailors in the port, laboured at the construction of the inner wall.
+When that was completed, Sir John Boswell, under whose special charge
+they had been placed, said to Gervaise, "I think that I cannot do better
+than send these men down to St. Nicholas. It is probable that now the
+Turks see that they can do nothing at the new breach, they may try again
+there. Sailors are accustomed to night watches, and there are many of
+our knights who are not used to such work, and can be better trusted to
+defend a breach than to keep a vigilant watch at night. Will you take
+these men down to Caretto, and tell him that he can sleep soundly if
+he has a couple of them on watch? One of them, Roger Jervis, who is the
+mate of their ship, can speak some Italian, and as he is in command of
+them, Caretto will find no trouble in making them understand him."
+
+St. Nicholas had now been put into a fair state of defence, as a party
+had been kept steadily at work there. Gervaise had not been to the tower
+since the morning after the assault, and saw with satisfaction how
+much had been done to render it secure. He found that Caretto was fast
+recovering from his wounds.
+
+"As it seems probable, Sir Fabricius," he said, after the first
+greetings to the knight, "that the Turks will favour you with another
+visit, I have brought you five watchdogs. They are countrymen of mine,
+and were among those who navigated the fire ships the other day. Sir
+John Boswell has sent them down; they are, of course, accustomed to
+keep watch at night. One of them is mate of their vessel, and will be in
+command of them; he speaks a little Italian, and so will understand any
+orders you may give him. I have been speaking to him as we came down; he
+will divide his men into two watches, and will himself be on guard all
+night. Will you assign them some quiet place where they can sleep in the
+daytime? They can erect a shelter with a piece of sail cloth and a few
+bits of board, and they will, of course, be furnished with food."
+
+"I shall be very glad to have them, for I am always restless at night,
+lest those on watch should close their eyes. You see, they have quite
+made up their minds that this fort will not be attacked again, and so
+are less inclined to be vigilant than they would be, did they think that
+an attack was impending."
+
+Now that there was reason to believe that St. Nicholas might again be
+attacked, Gervaise was frequently there with orders or inquiries from
+the grand master. A number of vessels in the harbour were fitted up as
+fire ships, so as to be in readiness when the attack came. He was about
+to start early one morning when he saw Roger Jervis coming up with a
+heavy anchor on his shoulder.
+
+"Why, what are you bringing that up here for?" he asked. "Have you been
+diving; for I see your clothes are dripping with water?"
+
+"Ay, ay, sir, I have been in the water, and that Italian commander
+told me to come straight up here to tell the grand master all about the
+story; and right glad am I to have met you, for I should have made but
+a poor fist of it alone; I don't know more of their lingo than just to
+talk a few words of it."
+
+"Then you had better tell me the story before I take you in."
+
+"Well, it was like this, Sir Knight: I had Hudson and Jeffreys posted
+upon the wall, and I thought I would take a turn down on the rocks, for
+it was a dark night, and you can see much farther when you are by the
+edge of the water than you can when you are at the masthead. I sat there
+for an hour, and was thinking that it was about time to go up and turn
+out the other watch, when I saw something dark upon the water. It wasn't
+a ship, that was certain, and if it was a boat there wasn't any one in
+it; but it was too dark to make quite sure what it was. I watched it for
+a time, though I did not think much of the thing, taking it for a boat
+that had got adrift, or maybe a barrel from one of the Turkish ships.
+Presently I made out that it was a good bit nearer than when I first saw
+it.
+
+"That puzzled me. There is no tide to speak of in these seas, and there
+was no wind moving about. I could make out now that it was a boat,
+though a very small one, but certainly there was no one rowing it. It
+looked a very strange craft, and as I saw by the way it was bearing that
+it would come ashore about five or six fathoms from where I was sitting,
+I slid quietly off the rock, put my sword down by me handy for action,
+and waited. Presently the boat came up alongside the rock, and a fellow
+stood up from behind the stern. I was glad to see him, for I had begun
+to think that there was witchcraft in the thing moving along by itself,
+but I can tell you I was savage with myself for not having guessed there
+was a man swimming behind and pushing it on.
+
+"He stooped over the boat, and took something heavy out; then he felt
+about among the rocks under the water, and then laid the thing down
+there, and seemed to me to be settling it firm. I had half a mind to
+jump up and let fly at him, but then I thought it would be better to let
+him finish what he was doing, and go off with the idea that no one had
+seen him. So I kept hid until he started again. He waded a short way
+before he had to swim, and I could see that as he went he was paying out
+a rope over the stern. It was clear enough now what he had been up to:
+he had been fixing an anchor. What he did it for, or what use it could
+be to him, I could not say, but it was certain that he would not take
+all that trouble, with the chance of being knocked on the head, for
+nothing; so I waited for a bit till he had got out of sight, and over to
+the other side of the port.
+
+"Then I got up and felt about, and, chancing to get my foot under the
+rope, went right over into the water. After that you may guess I was not
+long in finding the anchor. I unknotted the rope from it and carried it
+ashore; then it struck me that the Turks might take it into their heads
+to give a pull on it in the morning, and if they did; they would find
+out that their game, whatever it was, had been found out; so I got hold
+of a stone of about twenty pound weight, and fastened the rope's end
+round it. That was enough to prevent the rope getting slack and make
+them think that it was still fast to the anchor; but, of course, if they
+pulled hard on it it would come home directly. I went and reported the
+matter the first thing this morning to the governor. He seemed to think
+that it was important, and told me to bring the anchor up to the grand
+master, who would get one of the English knights to find out all about
+it; for he could not make out much of what I said."
+
+"It is very important," Gervaise said, "and you behaved very wisely in
+the matter, and have rendered a great service by your discovery. I will
+take you in at once to the grand master."
+
+Still bearing the anchor, the sailor followed Gervaise into an apartment
+where D'Aubusson was taking council with some of the senior knights.
+
+"Pardon my interrupting your Highness," Gervaise said; "but the matter
+is so important that I knew you would listen to it, however occupied you
+were." And he then repeated the narrative of the sailor's discovery.
+
+"This is indeed of the highest importance," D'Aubusson said, "and the
+knowledge that it gives us may enable us to defeat an attempt, that
+might otherwise have proved our ruin. You see, knights, it solves the
+question that we were just discussing. We agreed that this long floating
+bridge that they have been constructing, was intended to enable them to
+cross the outer port and again attack St. Nicholas; and yet it seemed to
+us that even by night our batteries would be able to keep up such a fire
+on the boats, towing the head of the bridge across, as to render it well
+nigh impossible for them to get it over. Now you see what their plan is.
+With the aid of this rope, the end of which they think is firmly fixed
+on our side, they mean to haul the bridge across, and that so silently
+that they hope to be upon us almost before we have time to don our
+armour. We shall now be fully prepared, and need have no fear of the
+result."
+
+There could now be little doubt that the attack would be made without
+loss of time, especially as the Turks believed that they could get
+their bridge across unseen. The fire ships--which were altogether more
+formidable than those Gervaise had improvised--were ordered to be made
+ready for action. This being arranged, the admiral left the council
+at once, that no time should be lost in getting them in readiness.
+D'Aubusson then turned to the English sailor.
+
+"You have rendered us a great service indeed by your vigilance, and
+showed great prudence by allowing the Turk to believe that he had
+accomplished his mission unsuspected. Had he thought he had been
+observed, some other plan would have been adopted. For so great a
+service it is meet that a great reward should be given."
+
+He then took a bag from the hands of one of his secretaries, whom he
+had sent to fetch it, while they were discussing the matter of the fire
+ships.
+
+"Here are two hundred golden crowns," he added, handing the bag to the
+seaman. "With these you can either settle on shore, or can build a
+stout ship and pursue your calling. Should you do so, call her the St.
+Nicholas, in remembrance of the gratitude of the Order of St. John for
+your having saved that fort from the Turks."
+
+Astonished and delighted at the reward, which represented a very large
+sum in those days, the sailor stammered his thanks, and added, "I hope
+tonight that if I again have charge of a fire ship, I may be able to do
+more to prove to your Highness how grateful I am for the gift."
+
+Throughout the day preparations for the defence of St. Nicholas went on
+unceasingly. Gangs of men, as usual, worked in the breach; but, as it
+was deemed advisable that there should be no outward show of activity
+that would lead the Turks to suspect that their design had been
+discovered, neither reinforcements of men nor munitions were sent along
+the mole; everything being taken out by boats, which, rowing closely
+along under the wall, were hidden from the view of the Turks. Barrels
+of Greek fire and pitch, cauldrons for heating the latter, a store of
+firewood, great balls of cotton steeped in oil and turpentine, sheaves
+of darts, spikes on short staves, that were, after darkness fell, to be
+thrust in among the fallen masonry to form a chevaux-de-frise--these,
+and all other matters that the ingenuity of the defenders could suggest,
+were landed at the water gate of the fort, while the garrison was
+strengthened by the addition of a large number of knights. Stores
+of ammunition were collected in readiness at all the batteries that
+commanded the mouth of the outer port, and by sunset D'Aubusson felt
+that everything that was possible had been done to meet the impending
+storm.
+
+At midnight the Turkish preparations were complete. The attack by the
+bridge was to be assisted by a large number of boats and other craft,
+and many armed galleys were also brought up to destroy or tow away
+the defenders' fire ships. Paleologus himself was down by the shore
+directing the preparations. Some of his best troops were placed upon the
+floating bridge, and, when all was ready, the order was given to pull
+upon the rope. No sooner, however, did the strain come upon it than
+there was a jerk, the rope slackened, and it was at once evident that
+the anchor had been discovered and the well laid plan disconcerted.
+Paleologus was furious, but, believing that the attack he had arranged
+would still be irresistible, he ordered a number of boats to take the
+bridge in tow, while a still larger force was to make a direct attack
+upon the breach. The movement was to be conducted as silently as
+possible until it was discovered, and then a dash forward was to be
+made.
+
+It was two o'clock before the fresh arrangements were completed and
+the boats put out. They had gone but a short distance when the anxious
+watchers in St. Nicholas learnt by the dull, confused sound that came
+across the water, that the attack was, in spite of the failure of the
+plan to take the bridge silently across, to be persevered in. A cannon
+was at once fired to give notice to the other batteries to be in
+readiness, and as soon as the dark mass of boats was made out the guns
+of the fort opened a destructive fire upon them, and a moment later were
+seconded by those from the fortress; these, however, were at present
+being fired almost at random, as the Turkish boats could not be made out
+at that distance. Now that all need for concealment was at an end, the
+Turkish war cry rose shrilly in the air, and the boatmen bent to their
+oars. The great cannon at St. Anthony's Church hurled their tremendous
+missiles at the tower, seconded by the fire of a number of other pieces
+that had in the darkness been brought down almost to the water's edge.
+
+As before, the boats swept up to the foot of the breach, the Turks
+leaped out, and, undismayed by the storm of shot, climbed up to the
+assault. The short ladders that they had brought with them enabled them
+to surmount the escarpments so laboriously made, and with loud shouts
+of "Allah!" they flung themselves upon the defenders on the crest of
+the breach. Here they were met by a line even more difficult to break
+through than before. The knights were ranged three deep; those in the
+front were armed with swords and battleaxes, while those in the other
+two lines thrust their spears out between the swordsmen, covering them
+with a hedge of steel points. Others in the rear brought up buckets of
+blazing pitch and Greek fire, and, advancing through gaps left for the
+purpose, hurled the buckets down into the struggling mass on the slope.
+There the fire not only carried death among the assailants, but the
+lurid flames enabled the batteries to direct their shot with terrible
+effect upon the breach, the crowded boats at its foot, and the bridge
+which was, with immense labour, presently got into position.
+
+It was not long before fresh light was thrown upon the scene, as the
+fire ships, issuing out from the inner harbour, burst into columns of
+flame, and, towed by boats, came into action. They were convoyed by
+the two galleys, each with a full complement of knights, and these soon
+became engaged in a fierce fight with the Turkish vessels that bore down
+to arrest the course of the fire ships. The scene was indeed a terrible
+one, the roar of cannon, the shouts of the combatants, the screams of
+the poor wretches upon whom the terrible Greek fire fell, the clash of
+arms and the shouts and cries of the Turks as they pressed across the
+bridge, united in a din that thrilled with horror the spectators, both
+in the city and on St. Stephen's Hill.
+
+Several of the Turkish galleys, in their efforts to arrest the approach
+of the fire ships towards the bridge, became themselves involved in the
+flames; but they were so far successful that when daylight broke the
+bridge was still intact and the combat at the breach continued to rage
+with determination and fury on both sides. The Turks there were led by
+a brave young prince named Ibrahim, a near relative of the sultan, with
+whom he was a great favourite, and he was ever in the front line of
+the assailants, his splendid bravery animating the soldiers to continue
+their efforts. As the daylight broadened out, however, the light enabled
+the Christian gunners to aim with far greater accuracy than had before
+been possible, and, concentrating their fire upon the bridge,
+across which reinforcements continued to press to the support of the
+assailants, they succeeded in sinking so many of the boats that it was
+no longer passable.
+
+Next they turned their fire upon the Turkish galleys, four of which they
+sank. Shortly afterwards, a ball struck the gallant young leader of the
+Turks, who, although previously several times wounded, had continued to
+fight in the front line. He fell dead, and his followers, disheartened
+by his fall and by the destruction of the bridge, at once abandoned
+their efforts, and rushed down to the foot of the breach. The terrible
+scene enacted at the repulse of the previous attack was now repeated.
+The concentrated fire of the guns of the defenders carried destruction
+into the crowded mass. Some gained the boats that still remained
+uninjured, and rowed for the opposite shore; the greater number rushed
+into the water and strove to recross it either by swimming or by the aid
+of the debris of the shattered boats. Their total loss was greater even
+than that suffered by them in the first attack, between two and three
+thousand being either killed or drowned, among them a number of their
+best officers. The amount of spoil, in the form of rich jewels and
+costly gold ornaments, found on the bodies of the dead piled on the
+breach, was very great.
+
+For three days after this terrible repulse the Turks were inactive,
+the pasha remaining shut up in his tent, refusing to see any one, or to
+issue orders. At the end of that time he roused himself from his stupor
+of grief and disappointment, and, abandoning the idea of any further
+attack upon the point that had cost him so dearly, he ordered the troops
+to move round and renew the attack upon the wall in front of the Jews'
+quarter, and commence the construction of a battery on the edge of the
+great ditch facing the retrenchment behind the breach before effected.
+The knights of Italy and Spain determined to seize the opportunity
+of retrieving the disgrace that had fallen upon them. At night they
+descended into the deep cutting, carrying across their ladders, and,
+silently mounting the opposite side, rushed with loud shouts into the
+unfinished battery. The Turks there, taken utterly by surprise, made but
+a slight resistance; a few were immediately cut down, and the rest fled
+panic stricken.
+
+The knights at once set the woodwork of the battery on fire, hurled the
+guns down into the ditch, and then returned triumphantly into the town,
+the dashing feat completely reinstating them in the good opinion of the
+grand master and their comrades.
+
+The incident showed the pasha that he must neglect no precautions, and,
+accordingly, he commenced his works at a distance from the walls, and
+pushed his approaches regularly forward until he again established
+a battery on the site of that from which his troops had been so
+unceremoniously ejected. While forming the approaches, the workmen
+had been constantly harassed by the fire from the guns on the walls,
+suffering considerable loss of life; but their numerical superiority was
+so vast that the loss in no way affected the plans of the pasha.
+
+As soon as the battery was completed, gangs of men, accustomed to mining
+operations, set to work in its rear to drive sloping passages downwards,
+opening into the face of the great cutting, and through these vast
+quantities of earth and stones were poured, so as to afford a passage
+across it, the depth being largely diminished by the great pile of
+rubbish that had already fallen from the breached wall. This novel mode
+of attack was altogether unexpected. The knights had regarded the fosse
+that had been cut at such an enormous expenditure of labour as forming
+an altogether impassable obstruction, and were dismayed at seeing the
+progress made in filling it up. D'Aubusson himself, full of resources as
+he was, saw that the defence was seriously threatened, unless some plan
+of meeting this unexpected danger could be devised.
+
+He consulted Maitre Georges; but the latter could make no suggestion;
+his only advice being the erection of a battery at a spot where it
+was almost self evident that it could be of no utility whatever.
+Other circumstances combined to render the suspicions D'Aubusson had
+entertained of the good faith of the renegade almost a certainty.
+Georges was seized, tried, and put to torture, and under this owned that
+he had been sent into the town for the purpose of betraying it; and he
+was, the same day, hung in the great square. His guilt must always be
+considered as uncertain. There was no proof against him, save his
+own confession; and a confession extorted by torture is of no value
+whatever. There are certainly many good grounds for suspicion, but it
+is possible that Georges really repented his apostacy, and acted in good
+faith in deserting the standard of Paleologus. He was undoubtedly a man
+of altogether exceptional ability and acquirements, and even the knights
+who have written accounts of the siege do justice to the fascination of
+his manner and the charm of his conversation.
+
+D'Aubusson now set to work in another direction to counteract the
+efforts of the Turks. He erected an immense wooden catapult, which threw
+huge pieces of rock into the midst of the Turkish works, crushing down
+the wooden screens erected to hide their approaches, breaking in the
+covered ways, and causing great loss of life among the besiegers. At
+the same time galleries were driven below the breach, opening into the
+ditch, where their exits were concealed by masses of rubbish. Through
+these strong working parties issued out at night, and carried away up
+the passages the rocks and other materials that the Turks had, during
+the day, brought, with immense labour, from a distance to the shoot. The
+materials so carried away were piled up behind the retrenchment, greatly
+adding to its thickness and strength.
+
+For some days the Turks observed, to their astonishment, that the road
+they were constructing across the ditch was diminishing instead of
+increasing in bulk, and at length it became so evident that the garrison
+were in some way removing the materials, that the pasha determined to
+deliver the assault before the heap was so far diminished as to become
+impassable. His former defeats had, however, taught him that success
+could not be always calculated upon, however good its prospect might
+appear; and although he had no real hope that the defenders would
+yield, he sent a formal summons for them to do so. This was refused with
+disdain, and preparations were at once made for the assault.
+
+The pasha promised to his soldiers the sack of the town and all the
+booty captured, and so assured were they of success that sacks were
+made to carry off the plunder. Stakes, on which the knights, when taken
+prisoners, were to be impaled, were prepared and sharpened, and each
+soldier carried a coil of rope with which to secure his captive.
+
+Before ordering the assault, the way was prepared for it by a terrible
+fire from every siege gun of the Turks. This was kept up for twenty-four
+hours, and so tremendous was the effect that the knights were unable
+to remain on the ramparts. The Turkish troops moved into position for
+attack, their movements being covered by the roar of the guns, and soon
+after sunrise on the 22nd of July the signal was given, and at a number
+of different points the Turks rushed to the assault. All these attacks,
+save that on the breach, were merely feints, to distract the attention
+of the garrison, and to add to the confusion caused by this sudden and
+unexpected onslaught. The pasha's plans were well designed and carried
+out; the knights, unable to keep their places on the ramparts under the
+storm of missiles, had retired to shelter behind the walls. There was no
+thought of an instant assault, as they considered that this would not be
+delivered until the new wall behind the breach had been demolished.
+
+Consequently, the rush of the Turks found the defenders altogether
+unprepared. Swarming across the mass of debris in the ditch, they
+ascended the breach without opposition, and their scaling ladders were
+placed against the new wall before the knights could hurry up to its
+defence. Even before the alarm was given in the town, the Turkish
+standard was waving on the parapet, and the Moslems were crowding on
+to the wall in vast numbers. The suddenness of the attack, the complete
+surprise, the sound of battle at various points around the walls, caused
+for a time confusion and dismay among the knights charged with the
+defence of the wall facing the breach. Roused by the uproar, the
+inhabitants of the town rushed up to their roofs to ascertain what
+was happening, and their cries of wild terror and alarm at seeing the
+Turkish banner on the walls added to the confusion. D'Aubusson sprang
+up from the couch, on which he had thrown himself in full armour, at the
+first sound of the alarm, and, sending off messages to all the auberges
+to summon every man to the defence, ran down into the town, followed by
+a small party of knights.
+
+Rushing through the streets, now filled with half dressed people wild
+with terror, he reached the foot of the wall, whose summit was crowded
+with the enemy, and saw in an instant that all was lost unless they
+could be driven thence without delay. The effect of his presence was
+instantaneous. The knights, hitherto confused and dismayed, rallied at
+once, and prepared for the desperate undertaking. The bank on the inside
+was almost perpendicular, and those charged with its defence had used
+two or three ladders for ascending to the rampart. These were at once
+seized and planted against the wall.
+
+The position of the contending parties was now reversed; the Christians
+were the assailants, the Turks the defenders. D'Aubusson himself was
+the first to ascend. Covering his head with his shield, he mounted the
+rampart; but ere he could gain a footing on the top he was severely
+wounded and hurled backwards. Again he made the attempt, but was again
+wounded and thrown down. Once more he mounted, and this time made good
+his footing. A moment later, Gervaise, who had accompanied him from the
+palace, stood beside him. Animated with the same spirit as his leader,
+he threw himself recklessly against the Turks, using a short, heavy
+mace, which in a melee was far more useful than the long sword.
+Scimitars clashed upon his helmet and armour; but at every blow he
+struck a Turk fell, and for each foot he gained a knight sprang on to
+the wall and joined him. Each moment their number increased, and the war
+cry of the Order rose louder and fiercer above the din. The very number
+of the Turks told against them. Crowded together as they were they could
+not use their weapons effectually, and, pressing fiercely upon them, the
+knights drove them back along the wall on either hand, hurling them down
+into the street or over the rampart. On so narrow a field of battle the
+advantage was all on the side of the knights, whose superior height and
+strength, and the protection afforded by their armour, rendered them
+almost invincible, nerved as they were with fury at the surprise that
+had overtaken them, and the knowledge that the fate of the city depended
+upon their efforts. After a quarter of an hour's desperate conflict the
+Turks were driven down the partial breach effected in the wall by the
+last bombardment, and the Christians were again the masters of their
+ramparts. Paleologus, however, hurried up reinforcements, headed by
+a band of janissaries, whose valour had decided many an obstinate
+conflict. Before ordering them to advance, he gave instructions to
+a company of men of approved valour to devote all their efforts to
+attacking D'Aubusson himself, whose mantle and rich armour rendered him
+a conspicuous object among the defenders of the breach. Advancing to the
+attack, the janissaries burst through the mass of Turks still continuing
+the conflict, and rushed up the breach. Then the chosen band, separating
+from the rest, flung themselves upon the grand master, the suddenness
+and fury of their attack isolating him and Gervaise from the knights
+around.
+
+Surrounded as he was by foes, already suffering from two severe wounds
+and shaken by his falls from the ladder, the grand master yet made a
+valiant defence in front, while Gervaise, hurling his mace into the face
+of one of his assailants, and drawing his two handed sword, covered him
+from the attack from behind. D'Aubusson received two more severe wounds,
+but still fought on. Gervaise, while in the act of cutting down an
+assailant, heard a shout of triumph from behind, and, looking round, he
+saw the grand master sinking to the ground from another wound. With a
+cry of grief and fury Gervaise sprang to him, receiving as he did so
+several blows on his armour and shield intended for the fallen knight,
+and, standing across him, showered his blows with such strength and
+swiftness that the janissaries shrank back before the sweep of the
+flashing steel. More than one who tried to spring into close quarters
+fell cleft to the chin, and, ere his assailants could combine for
+a general rush, a body of knights, who had just beaten off their
+assailants, fell upon the ranks of the janissaries with a force and fury
+there was no withstanding, and the chosen troops of the sultan for the
+first time broke and fled.
+
+Excited almost to madness by the sight of their beloved master stretched
+bleeding on the ground, the knights dashed down the breach in eager
+pursuit. This action was decisive of the fate of the struggle. The panic
+among the janissaries at once spread, and the main body of troops, who
+had hitherto valiantly striven to regain the advantage snatched from
+them, now lost heart and fled in confusion. But their escape was barred
+by the great body of reinforcements pressing forward across the heap of
+rubbish that formed the breach over the deep ditch. Maddened by fear,
+the fugitives strove to cut a way through their friends. The whole of
+the defenders of the breach now fell upon the rear of the struggling
+mass, hewing them down almost without resistance, while the cannon from
+the walls and towers kept up an unceasing fire until the last survivors
+of what had become a massacre, succeeded in gaining their works beyond
+the ditch, and fled to their camp. From every gateway and postern the
+knights now poured out, and, gathering together, advanced to the attack
+of St. Stephen's Hill. They met with but a faint resistance. The greater
+portion of the disorganised troops had made no pause at their camp, but
+had continued their headlong flight to the harbour, where their ships
+were moored, Paleologus himself, heartbroken and despairing at his
+failure, sharing their flight. The camp, with all its rich booty and
+the great banner of the pasha, fell into the hands of the victors, who,
+satisfied with their success, and exhausted by their efforts, made no
+attempt to follow the flying foe, or to hinder their embarkation; for
+even now the Turks, enormously outnumbering them as they did, might be
+driven by despair to a resistance so desperate as once again to turn the
+tide of victory.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIII THE REWARD OF VALOUR
+
+
+Gervaise knew nothing at the time of the final result of the battle, for
+as soon as the knights had burst through the circle of his opponents,
+he sank insensible on the body of the grand master. When he came to
+himself, he was lying on a bed in the hospital of the Order. As soon
+as he moved, Ralph Harcourt, who was, with other knights, occupied
+in tending the wounded, came to his bedside. "Thank God that you are
+conscious again, Gervaise! They told me that it was but faintness and
+loss of blood, and that none of your wounds were likely to prove mortal,
+and for the last twelve hours they have declared that you were asleep:
+but you looked so white that I could not but fear you would never wake
+again."
+
+"How is the grand master?" Gervaise asked eagerly. Ralph shook his head.
+
+"He is wounded sorely, Gervaise, and the leech declares that one at
+least of his wounds is mortal; still, I cannot bring myself to believe
+that so great a hero will be taken away in the moment of victory, after
+having done such marvels for the cause not only of the Order, but of all
+Christendom."
+
+"Then you beat them back again from the breach?" Gervaise said.
+
+"That was not all. They were in such confusion that we sallied out,
+captured their camp, with the pasha's banner and an enormous quantity of
+spoil, and pursued them to their harbour. Then we halted, fearing that
+they might in their desperation turn upon us, and, terribly weakened as
+we were by our losses, have again snatched the victory from our grasp.
+So we let them go on board their ships without interference, and this
+morning there is not a Turkish sail in sight. The inhabitants are well
+nigh mad with joy. But elated as we are at our success, our gladness is
+sorely damped by the state of the grand master, and the loss of so many
+of our comrades, though, indeed, our langue has suffered less than any
+of the others, for the brunt of the attacks on St. Nicholas and the
+breach did not fall upon us, still we lost heavily when at last we
+hurried up to win back the wall from them."
+
+"Who have fallen?" Gervaise asked.
+
+"Among the principal knights are Thomas Ben, Henry Haler, Thomas
+Ploniton, John Vaquelin, Adam Tedbond, Henry Batasbi, and Henry Anlui.
+Marmaduke Lumley is dangerously wounded. Of the younger knights, some
+fifteen have been killed, and among them your old enemy Rivers. He died
+a coward's death, the only one, thank God, of all our langue. When
+the fray was thickest Sir John Boswell marked him crouching behind the
+parapet. He seized him by the gorget, and hauled him out, but his knees
+shook so that he could scarcely walk, and would have slunk back when
+released. Sir John raised his mace to slay him as a disgrace to the
+Order and our langue, when a ball from one of the Turkish cannon cut him
+well nigh in half, so that he fell by the hands of the Turks, and not by
+the sword of one of the Order he had disgraced. Fortunately none, save
+half a dozen knights of our langue, saw the affair, and you may be sure
+we shall say nothing about it; and instead of Rivers' name going down to
+infamy, it will appear in the list of those who died in the defence of
+Rhodes."
+
+"May God assoil his soul!" Gervaise said earnestly. "'Tis strange that
+one of gentle blood should have proved a coward. Had he remained at
+home, and turned courtier, instead of entering the Order, he might have
+died honoured, without any one ever coming to doubt his courage."
+
+"He would have turned out bad whatever he was," Ralph said
+contemptuously; "for my part, I never saw a single good quality in him."
+
+Long before Gervaise was out of hospital, the glad tidings that
+D'Aubusson would recover, in spite of the prognostications of the leech,
+spread joy through the city, and at about the same time that Gervaise
+left the hospital the grand master was able to sit up. Two or three days
+afterwards he sent for Gervaise.
+
+"I owe my life to you, Sir Gervaise," he said, stretching out his thin,
+white hand to him as he entered. "You stood by me nobly till I fell,
+for, though unable to stand, I was not unconscious, and saw how
+you stood above me and kept the swarming Moslems at bay. No knight
+throughout the siege has rendered such great service as you have done.
+Since I have been lying unable to move, I have thought of many things;
+among them, that I had forgotten to give you the letters and presents
+that came for you after you sailed away. They are in that cabinet;
+please bring them to me. There," he said, as Gervaise brought a bulky
+parcel which the grand master opened, "this letter is from the Holy
+Father himself. That, as you may see from the arms on the seal, is from
+Florence. The others are from Pisa, Leghorn, and Naples. Rarely, Sir
+Gervaise, has any potentate or knight earned the thanks of so many great
+cities. These caskets accompanied them. Sit down and read your letters.
+They must be copied in our records."
+
+Gervaise first opened the one from the Pope. It was written by his own
+hand, and expressed his thanks as a temporal sovereign for the great
+benefit to the commerce of his subjects by the destruction of the
+corsair fleet, and as the head of the Christian Church for the blow
+struck at the Moslems. The other three letters were alike in character,
+expressing the gratitude of the cities for their deliverance from the
+danger, and of their admiration for the action by which a fleet was
+destroyed with a single galley. Along with the letter from Pisa was
+a casket containing a heavy gold chain set with gems. Florence sent a
+casket containing a document bestowing upon him the freedom of the city,
+and an order upon the treasury for five thousand ducats that had been
+voted to him by the grand council of the Republic; while Ferdinand, King
+of Naples, bestowed on him the grand cross of the Order of St. Michael.
+
+"The armour I had hung up in the armoury, where it has been carefully
+kept clean. I guessed what it was by the weight of the case when it
+came, and thought it best to open it, as it might have got spoilt by
+rust. It is a timely gift, Sir Gervaise, for the siege has played havoc
+with the suit Genoa gave you; it is sorely battered, dinted, and broken,
+and, although you can doubtless get it repaired, if I were you I would
+keep it in its present state as a memorial--and there could be no
+prouder one--of the part you bore in the siege. I have seen Caretto
+this morning. He sails for Genoa tomorrow, where he will, I hope, soon
+recover his strength, for the wounds he received at St. Nicholas have
+healed but slowly. He said"--and a momentary smile crossed the grand
+master's face--"that he thought a change might benefit you also, for he
+was sure that the air here had scarce recovered from the taint of
+blood. Therefore, here is a paper granting you three months' leave. His
+commandery is a pleasant one, and well situated on the slopes of the
+hills; and the fresh air will, doubtless, speedily set you up. I should
+like nothing better than a stay there myself, but there is much to do to
+repair the damages caused by the siege, and to place the city in a state
+of defence should the Turks again lay siege to it; and methinks Mahomet
+will not sit down quietly under the heavy reverse his troops have met
+with."
+
+"But I should be glad to stay here to assist in the work, your
+Highness."
+
+"There are plenty of knights to see to that," D'Aubusson replied, "and
+it will be long before you are fit for such work. No, I give my orders
+for you to proceed with Caretto to Genoa--unless, indeed, you would
+prefer to go to some other locality to recruit your strength."
+
+"I would much rather go with Sir Fabricius, your Highness, than to any
+place where I have no acquaintances. I have a great esteem and respect
+for him."
+
+"He is worthy of it; there is no nobler knight in the Order, and, had
+I fallen, none who could more confidently have been selected to fill
+my place. He has an equally high opinion of you, and spoke long and
+earnestly concerning you."
+
+A fortnight later the ship carrying the two knights arrived at Genoa.
+
+"I will go ashore at once, Gervaise," Caretto said. "I know not whether
+my cousin is in the city or on her estate; if the former, I will stay
+with her for a day or two before going off to my commandery, and of
+course you will also be her guest. I hope she will be here, for methinks
+we shall both need to refit our wardrobes before we are fit to appear in
+society."
+
+"Certainly I shall," Gervaise agreed; "for, indeed, I find that my gala
+costume suffered a good deal during my long absence; and, moreover,
+although I have not increased in height, I have broadened out a good
+deal since I was here two years ago."
+
+"Yes; you were a youth then, Gervaise, and now you are a man, and one
+of no ordinary strength and size. The sun of Tripoli, and your labours
+during the siege, have added some years to your appearance. You are, I
+think, little over twenty, but you look two or three years older. The
+change is even greater in your manner than in your appearance; you were
+then new to command, doubtful as to your own powers, and diffident with
+those older than yourself. Now for two years you have thought and acted
+for yourself, and have shown yourself capable of making a mark even
+among men like the knights of St. John, both in valour and in fitness to
+command. You saved St. Nicholas, you saved the life of the grand master;
+and in the order of the day he issued on the morning we left, granting
+you three months' leave for the recovery of your wounds, he took the
+opportunity of recording, in the name of the council and himself, their
+admiration for the services rendered by you during the siege, and his
+own gratitude for saving his life when he lay helpless and surrounded by
+the Moslems--a testimony of which any knight of Christendom might well
+feel proud."
+
+It was three hours before Caretto returned to the ship.
+
+"My cousin is at home, and will be delighted to see you. I am sorry that
+I have kept you waiting so long, but at present Genoa, and, indeed,
+all Europe, is agog at the news of the defeat of the Turks, and Italy
+especially sees clearly enough that, had Rhodes fallen, she would have
+been the next object of attack by Mahomet; therefore the ladies would
+not hear of my leaving them until I had told them something at least of
+the events of the siege, and also how it came about that you were there
+to share in the defence. I see that you are ready to land; therefore,
+let us be going at once. Most of the people will be taking their siesta
+at present, and we shall get through the streets without being mobbed;
+for I can assure you that the mantle of the Order is just at present
+in such high favour that I had a hard task to wend my way through the
+streets to my cousin's house."
+
+On arriving at the palace of the Countess of Forli, Gervaise was
+surprised at the change that had taken place in the Lady Claudia. From
+what Caretto had said, he was prepared to find that she had grown out of
+her girlhood, and had altered much. She had, however, changed even more
+than he had expected, and had become, he thought, the fairest woman that
+he had ever seen. The countess greeted him with great cordiality; but
+Claudia came forward with a timidity that contrasted strangely with
+the outspoken frankness he remembered in the girl. For a time they all
+chatted together of the events of the siege, and of his captivity.
+
+"The news that you had been captured threw quite a gloom over us, Sir
+Gervaise," the countess said. "We at first consoled ourselves with the
+thought that you would speedily be ransomed; but when months passed
+by, and we heard that all the efforts of the grand master had failed to
+discover where you had been taken, I should have lost all hope had it
+not been that my cousin had returned after an even longer captivity
+among the Moors. I am glad to hear that you did not suffer so many
+hardships as he did."
+
+"I am in no way to be pitied, Countess," Gervaise said lightly. "I had a
+kind master for some months, and was treated as a friend rather than as
+a slave; afterwards, I had the good fortune to be made the head of
+the labourers at the buildings in the sultan's palace, and although I
+certainly worked with them, the labour was not greater than one could
+perform without distress, and I had naught to complain of as to my
+condition."
+
+After talking for upwards of an hour, the countess told Caretto that she
+had several matters on which she needed his counsel, and retired with
+him to the next room of the suite opening from the apartment in which
+they had been sitting. For a minute or two the others sat silent, and
+then Claudia said,
+
+"You have changed much since I saw you last, Sir Gervaise. Then it
+seemed to me scarcely possible that you could have performed the feat of
+destroying the corsair fleet; now it is not so difficult to understand."
+
+"I have widened out a bit, Lady Claudia. My moustache is really a
+moustache, and not a pretence at one; otherwise I don't feel that I have
+changed. The alteration in yourself is infinitely greater."
+
+"I, too, have filled out," she said, with a smile. "I was a thin girl
+then--all corners and angles. No, I don' t want any compliments, of
+which, to tell you the truth, I am heartily sick. And so," she went
+on in a softer tone, "you have actually brought my gage home! Oh, Sir
+Gervaise,"--and her eyes filled with tears--"my cousin has told me! How
+could you have been so foolish as to remain voluntarily in captivity,
+that you might recover the gage a child had given you?"
+
+"Not a child, Lady Claudia. A girl not yet a woman, I admit; yet it
+was not given in the spirit of a young girl, but in that of an earnest
+woman. I had taken a vow never to part with it, as you had pledged
+yourself to bestow no similar favour upon any other knight. I was
+confident that you would keep your vow; and although in any case, as
+a true knight, I was bound to preserve your gift, still more so was I
+bound by the thought of the manner in which you had presented it to me."
+
+"But I could not have blamed you--I should never have dreamt of blaming
+you," she said earnestly, "for losing it as you did."
+
+"I felt sure, Lady Claudia, that had it been absolutely beyond my power
+to regain it you would not have blamed me; but it was not beyond my
+power, and that being so had I been obliged to wait for ten years,
+instead of two, I would not have come back to you without it. Moreover,
+you must remember that I prized it beyond all things. I had often
+scoffed at knights of an order like ours wearing ladies' favours. I had
+always thought it absurd that we, pledged as we are, should thus declare
+ourselves admirers of one woman more than another. But this seemed to me
+a gage of another kind; it was too sacred to be shown or spoken of, and
+I only mentioned it to Caretto as he cross questioned me as to why I
+refused the offer of ransom; and should not have done so then, had he
+not been present when it was bestowed. I regarded it not as a lightly
+given favour, the result of a passing fancy by one who gave favours
+freely, but as a pledge of friendship and as a guerdon for what I had
+done, and therefore, more to be honoured than the gifts of a Republic
+freed from a passing danger. Had you then been what you are now, I might
+have been foolish enough to think of it in another light, regardless of
+the fact that you are a rich heiress of one of the noblest families in
+Italy, and I a knight with no possessions save my sword."
+
+"Say not so, Sir Gervaise," she said impetuously. "Are you not a knight
+on whom Genoa and Florence have bestowed their citizenship, whom the
+Holy Father himself has thanked, who has been honoured by Pisa, and
+whom Ferdinand of Naples has created a Knight of the Grand Cross of St.
+Michael, whom the grand master has singled out for praise among all the
+valiant knights of the Order of St. John, who, as my cousin tells me,
+saved him and the fort he commanded from capture, and who stood alone
+over the fallen grand master, surrounded by a crowd of foes. How can you
+speak of yourself as a simple knight?"
+
+Then she stopped, and sat silent for a minute, while a flush of colour
+mounted to her cheeks.
+
+"Give me my gage again, Sir Gervaise," she said gently. In silence
+Gervaise removed it from his neck, wondering greatly what could be her
+intention. She turned it over and over in her hand.
+
+"Sir Knight," she said, "this was of no great value in my eyes when I
+bestowed it upon you; it was a gage, and not a gift. Now it is to me of
+value beyond the richest gem on earth; it is a proof of the faith and
+loyalty of the knight I most esteem and honour, and so in giving it to
+you again, I part with it with a pang, for I have far greater reason to
+prize it than you can have. I gave it you before as a girl, proud that
+a knight who had gained such honour and applause should wear her favour,
+and without the thought that the trinket was a heart. I give it to you
+now as a woman, far prouder than before that you should wear her gage,
+and not blind to the meaning of the emblem."
+
+Gervaise took her hand as she fastened it round his neck, and kissed
+it; then, still holding it, he said, "Do you know what you are doing,
+Claudia? You are raising hopes that I have never been presumptuous
+enough to cherish."
+
+"I cannot help that," she said softly. "There is assuredly no
+presumption in the hope."
+
+He paused a moment.
+
+"You would not esteem me," he said, holding both her hands now, "were
+I false to my vows. I will return to Rhodes tomorrow, and ask the grand
+master to forward to the Pope and endorse my petition, that I may be
+released from my vows to the Order. I cannot think that he or the Holy
+Father will refuse my request. Then, when I am free, I can tell you how
+I love and honour you, and how, as I have in the past devoted my life to
+the Order, so I will in the future devote it to your happiness."
+
+The girl bowed her head.
+
+"'Tis right it should be so," she said. "I have waited, feeling in my
+heart that the vow I had given would bind me for life, and I should be
+content to wait years longer if needs be. But I am bound by no vows, and
+can acknowledge that you have long been the lord of my life, and that
+so long as you wore the heart I had given you, so long would I listen to
+the wooing of no other."
+
+"I fear that the Countess, your mother--" Gervaise began, but she
+interrupted him.
+
+"You need not fear," she said. "My mother has long known, and knowing
+also that I am not given to change, has ceased to importune me to listen
+to other offers. Her sole objection was that you might never return from
+captivity. Now that you have come back with added honours, she will
+not only offer no objection, but will, I am sure, receive you gladly,
+especially as she knows that my cousin Sir Fabricius, for whom she has
+the greatest affection, holds you in such high esteem."
+
+Six months later Gervaise again landed at Genoa, after having stayed
+at Rome for a few days on his way back. D'Aubusson had expressed no
+surprise at his return to Rhodes, or at the request he made.
+
+"Caretto prepared me for this," he said, smiling, "when he asked me if
+you might accompany him to Genoa. The Order will be a loser, for you
+would assuredly have risen to the grand priorage of your langue some
+day. But we have no right to complain; you have done your duty and more,
+and I doubt not that should Mahomet again lay siege to Rhodes, we may
+count on your hastening here to aid us?"
+
+"That assuredly you may, sir. Should danger threaten, my sword will be
+as much at the service of the Order as if I were still a member of it."
+
+"I by no means disapprove," D'Aubusson went on, "of knights leaving us
+when they have performed their active service, for in civil life they
+sometimes have it in their power to render better service to the
+Order than if passing their lives in the quiet duties of a provincial
+commandery. It will be so in your case: the lady is a great heiress,
+and, as the possessor of wide lands, your influence in Northern Italy
+may be very valuable to us, and in case of need you will, like my
+brother De Monteuil, be able to bring a gathering of men-at-arms to our
+aid. Have no fear that the Pope will refuse to you a release from your
+vows. My recommendation alone would be sufficient; but as, moreover, he
+is himself under an obligation to you, he will do so without hesitation.
+Since you have been away, your friend Harcourt has been appointed a
+commander of a galley, and Sir John Boswell, being incapacitated by
+the grievous wounds he received during the siege, has accepted a rich
+commandery in England, and sailed but two days since to take up his
+charge. By the way, did you reply to those letters expressing your
+thanks and explaining your long silence?"
+
+"Yes, your Highness, I wrote the same evening you gave them to me."
+
+"That is right. The money voted you by Florence will be useful to you
+now, and there is still a sum sent by your commandery owing to you by
+the treasury. I will give you an order for it. However rich an heiress a
+knight may win, 'tis pleasant for him to have money of his own; not that
+you will need it greatly, for, among the presents you have received, the
+jewels are valuable enough for a wedding gift to a princess."
+
+Gervaise was well received at Rome, and the Pope, after reading the
+grand master's letter, and learning from him his reason for wishing
+to leave the Order, without hesitation granted him absolution from his
+vows. A few months later there was a grand wedding at the cathedral of
+Genoa, the doge and all the nobles of the Republic being present.
+
+Ralph Harcourt and nine other young knights had accompanied Gervaise
+from Rhodes by the permission, and indeed at the suggestion, of the
+grand master, who was anxious to show that Gervaise had his full
+approval and countenance in leaving the Order. Caretto, who had been
+appointed grand prior of Italy, had brought the knights from all the
+commanderies in the northern republics to do honour to the occasion,
+and the whole, in their rich armour and the mantles of the Order, made a
+distinguishing feature in the scene.
+
+The defeat of the Turks created such enthusiasm throughout Europe that
+when the grand prior of England laid before the king letters he had
+received from the grand master and Sir John Kendall, speaking in the
+highest terms of the various great services Gervaise had rendered to the
+Order, Edward granted his request that the act of attainder against Sir
+Thomas Tresham and his descendants should be reversed and the estates
+restored to Gervaise. The latter made, with his wife, occasional
+journeys to England, staying a few months on his estates in Kent; and as
+soon as his second son became old enough, he sent him to England to
+be educated, and settled the estate upon him. He himself had but few
+pleasant memories of England; he had spent indeed but a very short time
+there before he entered the house of the Order in Clerkenwell, and that
+time had been marked by constant anxiety, and concluded with the loss
+of his father. The great estates that were now his in Italy demanded his
+full attention, and, as one of the most powerful nobles of Genoa, he had
+come to take a prominent part in the affairs of the Republic.
+
+He was not called upon to fulfil his promise to aid in the defence of
+Rhodes, for the death of Mahomet just at the time when he was preparing
+a vast expedition against it, freed the Island for a long time from
+fear of an invasion. From time to time they received visits from Ralph
+Harcourt, who, after five years longer service at Rhodes, received a
+commandery in England. He held it a few years only, and then returned to
+the Island, where he obtained a high official appointment.
+
+In 1489 Sir John Boswell became bailiff of the English langue, and Sir
+Fabricius Caretto was in 1513 elected grand master of the Order, and
+held the office eight years, dying in 1521.
+
+When, in 1522, forty-two years after the first siege, Rhodes was again
+beleaguered, Gervaise, who had, on the death of the countess, become
+Count of Forli, raised a large body of men-at-arms, and sent them, under
+the command of his eldest son, to take part in the defence. His third
+son had, at the age of sixteen, entered the Order, and rose to high rank
+in it.
+
+The defence, though even more obstinate and desperate than the first,
+was attended with less success, for after inflicting enormous losses
+upon the great army, commanded by the Sultan Solyman himself, the town
+was forced to yield; for although the Grand Master L'Isle Adam, and
+most of his knights, would have preferred to bury themselves beneath
+the ruins rather than yield, they were deterred from doing so, by the
+knowledge that it would have entailed the massacre of the whole of
+the inhabitants, who had throughout the siege fought valiantly in the
+defence of the town. Solyman had suffered such enormous losses that he
+was glad to grant favourable conditions, and the knights sailed away
+from the city they had held so long and with such honour, and afterwards
+established themselves in Malta, where they erected another stronghold,
+which in the end proved an even more valuable bulwark to Christendom
+than Rhodes had been. There were none who assisted more generously and
+largely, by gifts of money, in the establishment of the Order at Malta
+than Gervaise. His wife, while she lived, was as eager to aid in the
+cause as he was himself, holding that it was to the Order she owed her
+husband. And of all their wide possessions there were none so valued by
+them both, as the little coral heart set in pearls that she, as a girl,
+had given him, and he had so faithfully brought back to her.
+
+
+THE END
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+End of Project Gutenberg's A Knight of the White Cross, by G.A. Henty
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK A KNIGHT OF THE WHITE CROSS ***
+
+***** This file should be named 4932.txt or 4932.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        http://www.gutenberg.org/4/9/3/4932/
+
+Produced by Martin Robb
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+http://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+http://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at http://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit http://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
+To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     http://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
diff --git a/4932.zip b/4932.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..380c752
--- /dev/null
+++ b/4932.zip
diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6312041
--- /dev/null
+++ b/LICENSE.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements,
+metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be
+in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES.
+
+Procedures for determining public domain status are described in
+the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org.
+
+No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in
+jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize
+this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright
+status under the laws that apply to them.
diff --git a/README.md b/README.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..52e03bd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/README.md
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for
+eBook #4932 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/4932)
diff --git a/old/kniwc10.txt b/old/kniwc10.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..790d01d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/kniwc10.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,14676 @@
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of A Knight of the White Cross, by G.A. Henty
+(#7 in our series by G.A. Henty)
+
+Copyright laws are changing all over the world. Be sure to check the
+copyright laws for your country before downloading or redistributing
+this or any other Project Gutenberg eBook.
+
+This header should be the first thing seen when viewing this Project
+Gutenberg file.  Please do not remove it.  Do not change or edit the
+header without written permission.
+
+Please read the "legal small print," and other information about the
+eBook and Project Gutenberg at the bottom of this file.  Included is
+important information about your specific rights and restrictions in
+how the file may be used.  You can also find out about how to make a
+donation to Project Gutenberg, and how to get involved.
+
+
+**Welcome To The World of Free Plain Vanilla Electronic Texts**
+
+**eBooks Readable By Both Humans and By Computers, Since 1971**
+
+*****These eBooks Were Prepared By Thousands of Volunteers!*****
+
+
+Title: A Knight of the White Cross
+
+Author: G.A. Henty
+
+Release Date: January, 2004  [EBook #4932]
+[Yes, we are more than one year ahead of schedule]
+[This file was first posted on March 31, 2002]
+
+Edition: 10
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ASCII
+
+*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK, A KNIGHT OF THE WHITE CROSS ***
+
+
+
+
+This etext was produced by Martin Robb (MartinRobb@ieee.org)
+
+PREFACE.
+
+
+MY DEAR LADS,
+
+The order of the Knights of St. John, which for some centuries played
+a very important part in the great  struggle between Christianity
+and Mahomedanism, was, at its origin, a semi-religious body,
+its members  being, like other monks, bound by vows of obedience,
+chastity, and poverty, and pledged to minister to the  wants of the
+pilgrims who flocked to the Holy Places, to receive them at their
+great Hospital -- or guest  house -- at Jerusalem, dedicated to St.
+John the Baptist, and to defend them on their passage to and from
+the  sea, against attack by Moslems. In a comparatively short
+time the constitution of the order was changed,  and the Knights
+Hospitallers became, like the Templars, a great military Order
+pledged to defend the Holy  Sepulchre, and to war everywhere against
+the Moslems. The Hospitallers bore a leading share in the  struggle
+which terminated in the triumph of the Moslems, and the capture
+by them of Jerusalem. The  Knights of St. John then established
+themselves at Acre, but after a valiant defence of that fortress,
+removed to Crete, and shortly afterwards to Rhodes. There they
+fortified the town, and withstood two  terrible sieges by the Turks.
+At the end of the second they obtained honourable terms from Sultan
+Solyman,  and retiring to Malta established themselves there in an
+even stronger fortress than that of Rhodes, and  repulsed all the
+efforts of the Turks to dispossess them. The Order was the great
+bulwark of Christendom  against the invasion of the Turks, and
+the tale of their long struggle is one of absorbing interest, and
+of the  many eventful episodes none is more full of incident and
+excitement than the first siege of Rhodes, which I  have chosen
+for the subject of my story.
+
+Yours truly,  G. A. Henty
+
+
+
+CHAPTER I The King Maker
+
+
+A stately lady was looking out of the window of an apartment
+in the Royal Chateau of Amboise, in the  month of June, 1470. She
+was still handsome, though many years of anxiety, misfortune, and
+trouble, had  left their traces on her face. In the room behind
+her, a knight was talking to a lady sitting at a tambour  frame;
+a lad of seventeen was standing at another window stroking a hawk
+that sat on his wrist, while a boy  of nine was seated at a table
+examining the pages of an illuminated missal.
+
+"What will come of it, Eleanor?" the lady at the window said,
+turning suddenly and impatiently from it. "It  seems past belief
+that I am to meet as a friend this haughty earl, who has for fifteen
+years been the bitterest  enemy of my House. It appears almost
+impossible."
+
+"'Tis strange indeed, my Queen; but so many strange things have
+befallen your Majesty that you should be  the last to wonder at
+this. At any rate, as you said but yesterday, naught but good can
+come of it. He has  done his worst against you, and one can scarce
+doubt that if he chooses he has power to do as much good  for you,
+as in past times he has done you evil. 'Tis certain that his coming
+here shows he is in earnest, for  his presence, -- which is sure
+sooner or later to come to the ears of the Usurper, -- will cause
+him to fall into  the deepest disgrace."
+
+"And yet it seemed," the queen said, "that by marrying his daughter
+to Clarence he had bound himself more  firmly than ever to the side
+of York."
+
+"Ay, madam," the knight said. "But Clarence himself is said to be
+alike unprincipled and ambitious, and it  may well be that Warwick
+intended to set him up against Edward; had he not done so, such an
+alliance  would not necessarily strengthen his position at Court."
+
+"Methinks your supposition is the true one, Sir Thomas," the queen
+said. "Edward cares not sufficiently for  his brother to bestow
+much favour upon the father of the prince's wife. Thus, he would
+gain but little by the  marriage unless he were to place Clarence
+on the throne.  Then he would again become the real ruler of  England,
+as he was until Edward married Elizabeth Woodville, and the House
+of Rivers rose to the first  place in the royal favour, and eclipsed
+the Star of Warwick. It is no wonder the proud Earl chafes under
+the  ingratitude of the man who owes his throne to him, and that he
+is ready to dare everything so that he can  but prove to him that
+he is not to be slighted with impunity. But why come to me, when
+he has Clarence as  his puppet?"
+
+"He may have convinced himself, madam, that Clarence is even less
+to be trusted than Edward, or he may  perceive that but few of the
+Yorkists would follow him were he to declare against the Usurper,
+while  assuredly your adherents would stand aloof altogether
+from such a struggle.  Powerful as he is, Warwick  could not alone
+withstand the united forces of all the nobles pledged to the support
+of the House of York.  Thence, as I take it, does it happen that
+he has resolved to throw in his lot with Lancaster, if your Majesty
+will but forgive the evil he has done your House and accept him as
+your ally. No doubt he will have terms  to make and conditions to
+lay down."
+
+"He may make what conditions he chooses," Queen Margaret said
+passionately, "so that he does but aid me  to take vengeance on
+that false traitor; to place my husband again on the throne; and
+to obtain for my son  his rightful heritage."
+
+As she spoke a trumpet sounded in the courtyard below.
+
+"He has come," she exclaimed. "Once again, after years of misery
+and humiliation, I can hope."
+
+"We had best retire, madam," Sir Thomas Tresham said.  "He will
+speak more freely to your Majesty if  there are no witnesses. Come,
+Gervaise, it is time that you practised your exercises." And Sir
+Thomas, with  his wife and child, quitted the room, leaving Queen
+Margaret with her son to meet the man who had been  the bitterest
+foe of her House, the author of her direst misfortunes.
+
+For two hours the Earl of Warwick was closeted with the queen;
+then he took horse and rode away. As soon  as he did so, a servant
+informed Sir Thomas and his wife that the queen desired their
+presence. Margaret  was standing radiant when they entered.
+
+"Congratulate me, my friends," she said. "The Star of Lancaster
+has risen again. Warwick has placed all his  power and influence at
+our disposal. We have both forgiven all the past: I the countless
+injuries he has  inflicted on my House, he the execution of his
+father and so many of his friends. We have both laid aside  all
+our grievances, and we stand united by our hate for Edward. There
+is but one condition, and this I  accepted gladly -- namely, that
+my son should marry his daughter Anne. This will be another bond
+between  us; and by all reports Anne is a charming young lady.
+Edward has gladly agreed to the match; he could  make no alliance,
+even with the proudest princess in Europe, which would so aid him,
+and so strengthen his  throne."
+
+"God grant that your hopes may be fulfilled, madam," the knight
+said earnestly, "and that peace may be  given to our distracted
+country! The Usurper has rendered himself unpopular by his extravagance
+and by  the exactions of his tax collectors, and I believe that
+England will gladly welcome the return of its lawful  king to power.
+When does Warwick propose to begin?"
+
+"He will at once get a fleet together. Louis, who has privately
+brought about this meeting, will of course  throw no impediment in
+his way; but, on the other hand, the Duke of Burgundy will do all
+in his power to  thwart the enterprise, and will, as soon as he
+learns of it, warn Edward. I feel new life in me, Eleanor. After
+fretting powerless for years, I seem to be a different woman now
+that there is a prospect of action. I am  rejoiced at the thought
+that at last I shall be able to reward those who have ventured and
+suffered so much  in the cause of Lancaster."
+
+"My hope is, madam, that this enterprise will be the final one,
+-- that, once successful, our dear land will be  no longer deluged
+with blood, and that never again shall I be forced to draw my sword
+against my  countrymen."
+
+"'Tis a good and pious wish, Sir Thomas, and heartily do I join in
+it. My married life has been one long  round of trouble, and none
+more than I have cause to wish for peace."
+
+"There is the more hope for it, madam, that these wars have
+greatly diminished the number of powerful  barons. It is they who
+are the authors of this struggle; their rivalries and their ambitions
+are the ruin of  England. Save for their retainers there would be
+no armies to place in the field; the mass of people stand  aloof
+altogether, desiring only to live in peace and quiet. 'Tis the
+same here in France; 'tis the powerful  vassals of the king that
+are ever causing trouble."
+
+"'Tis so indeed, Sir Thomas. But without his feudal lords how
+could a king place an army in the field, when  his dominions were
+threatened by a powerful neighbour?"
+
+"Then it would be the people's business to fight, madam, and I doubt
+not that they would do so in defence  of their hearths and homes.
+Besides, the neighbour would no longer have the power of invasion
+were he  also without great vassals. These great barons stand
+between the king and his subjects; and a monarch  would be a king
+indeed were he able to rule without their constant dictation, and
+undisturbed by their  rivalry and ambitions."
+
+"That would be a good time indeed, Sir Thomas," the queen said, with
+a smile; "but methinks there is but  little chance of its coming
+about, for at present it seems to me that the vassals are better
+able to make or  unmake kings, than kings are able to deprive the
+great vassals of power; and never since Norman William  set foot
+in England were they more powerful than they are at present. What
+does my chance of recovering  our throne rest upon? Not upon our
+right, but on the quarrel between Warwick and the House of Rivers.
+We  are but puppets that the great lords play against each other.
+Did it depend upon my will, it should be as you  say; I would
+crush them all at a blow. Then only should I feel really a queen.
+But that is but a dream that  can never be carried out."
+
+"Not in our time, madam. But perhaps it may come sooner than we
+expect; and this long war, which has  destroyed many great families
+and weakened others, may greatly hasten its arrival. I presume
+until  Warwick is ready to move naught will be done, your Majesty?"
+
+"That is not settled yet. Warwick spoke somewhat of causing a rising
+in the north before he set sail, so that  a portion at least of
+Edward's power may be up there when we make our landing."
+
+"It would be a prudent step, madam. If we can but gain possession
+of London, the matter would be half  finished. The citizens are
+ever ready to take sides with those whom they regard as likely to
+win, and just as  they shout at present 'Long live King Edward!' so
+would they shout 'Long live King Henry!' did you enter  the town."
+
+"This may perhaps change the thought that you have entertained,
+Sir Thomas, of making your son a Knight  of St. John."
+
+"I have not thought the matter over, madam. If there were quiet in
+the land I should, were it not for my  vow, be well content that
+he should settle down in peace at my old hall; but if I see that
+there is still trouble  and bloodshed ahead, I would in any case
+far rather that he should enter the Order, and spend his life in
+fighting the infidel than in strife with Englishmen. My good friend,
+the Grand Prior of the Order in  England, has promised that he will
+take him as his page, and at any rate in the House of St. John's
+he will  pass his youth in security whatsoever fate may befall me.
+The child himself already bids fair to do honour  to our name, and
+to become a worthy member of the Order.  He is fond of study, and
+under my daily tuition  is making good progress in the use of his
+weapons."
+
+"That is he," the prince said, speaking for the first time, "It
+was but yesterday in the great hall downstairs he  stood up with
+blunted swords against young Victor de Paulliac, who is nigh three
+years his senior. It was  amusing to see how the little knaves
+fought against each other; and by my faith Gervaise held his own
+staunchly, in spite of Victor's superior height and weight. If he
+join the Order, Sir Thomas, I warrant me he  will cleave many an
+infidel's skull, and will do honour to the langue of England."
+
+"I hope so, prince," the knight said gravely. "The Moslems ever
+gain in power, and it may well be that the  Knights of St. John
+will be hardly pressed to hold their own.  If the boy joins them
+it will be my wish that  he shall as early as possible repair to
+Rhodes. I do not wish him to become one of the drones who live in
+sloth at their commanderies in England, and take no part in the
+noble struggle of the Order with the  Moslem host, who have captured
+Constantinople and now threaten all Europe. We were childless some
+years after our marriage, and Eleanor and I vowed that were a son
+born to us he should join the Order of the  White Cross, and dedicate
+his life to the defence of Christian Europe against the infidel.
+Our prayers for a  son were granted, and Gervaise will enter the
+Order as soon as his age will permit him. That is why I  rejoice
+at the grand prior's offer to take him as his page, for he will
+dwell in the hospital safely until old  enough to take the first
+steps towards becoming a knight of the Order."
+
+"I would that I had been born the son of a baron like yourself,"
+the prince said earnestly, "and that I were  free to choose my own
+career. Assuredly in that case I too would have joined the noble
+Order and have  spent my life in fighting in so grand a cause, free
+from all the quarrels and disputes and enmities that rend  England.
+Even should I some day gain a throne, surely my lot is not to be
+envied.  Yet, as I have been born  to the rank, I must try for it,
+and I trust to do so worthily and bravely. But who can say what the
+end will  be? Warwick has ever been our foe, and though my royal
+mother may use him in order to free my father,  and place him on
+the throne, she must know well enough that he but uses us for his
+own ends alone, and  that he will ever stand beside the throne and
+be the real ruler of England."
+
+"For a time, Edward," the queen broke in. "We have shown that
+we can wait, and now it seems that our  great hope is likely to
+be fulfilled. After that, the rest will be easy.  There are other
+nobles, well nigh as  powerful as he, who look with jealousy upon
+the way in which he lords it, and be assured that they will  look
+with a still less friendly eye upon him when he stands, as you say,
+beside the throne, once your father  is again seated there. We can
+afford to bide our time, and assuredly it will not be long before
+a party is  formed against Warwick. Until then we must bear everything.
+Our interests are the same. If he is content to  remain a prop to
+the throne, and not to eclipse it, the memory of the past will not
+stand between us, and I  shall regard him as the weapon that has
+beaten down the House of York and restored us to our own, and  shall
+give him my confidence and friendship. If, on the other hand, he
+assumes too much, and tries to lord it  over us, I shall seek other
+support and gather a party which even he will be unable successfully
+to  withstand. I should have thought, Edward, that you would be even
+more glad than I that this long time of  weary waiting for action
+is over, and that once again the banner of Lancaster will be spread
+to the winds."
+
+"I shall be that, mother. Rather would I meet death in the field
+than live cooped up here, a pensioner of  France.  But I own that
+I should feel more joy at the prospect if the people of England
+had declared in our  favour, instead of its being Warwick -- whom
+you have always taught me to fear and hate -- who thus  comes to
+offer to place my father again on the throne, and whose goodwill
+towards us is simply the result  of pique and displeasure because
+he is no longer first in the favour of Edward. It does not seem to
+me that a  throne won by the aid of a traitor can be a stable one."
+
+"You are a foolish boy," the queen said angrily. "Do you not see
+that by marrying Warwick's daughter you  will attach him firmly to
+us?"
+
+"Marriages do not count for much, mother. Another of Warwick's
+daughters married Clarence, Edward's  brother, and yet he purposes
+to dethrone Edward."
+
+The queen gave an angry gesture and said, "You have my permission
+to retire, Edward. I am in no mood to  listen to auguries of evil
+at the present moment."
+
+The prince hesitated for a moment as if about to speak, but with an
+effort controlled himself, and bowing  deeply to his mother, left
+the room.
+
+"Edward is in a perverse humour," the queen said in a tone of much
+vexation to Sir Thomas Tresham, when  Gervaise had left the room.
+"However, I know he will bear himself well when the hour of trial
+comes."
+
+"That I can warrant he will, madam; he has a noble character, frank
+and fearless, and yet thoughtful beyond  his years. He will make,
+I believe, a noble king, and may well gather round him all parties
+in the state. But  your Majesty must make excuses for his humour.
+Young people are strong in their likes and dislikes. He  has never
+heard you speak aught but ill of Warwick, and he knows how much
+harm the Earl has done to  your House. The question of expediency
+does not weigh with the young as with their elders. While you see
+how great are the benefits that will accrue from an alliance with
+Warwick, and are ready to lay aside the  hatred of years and to
+forget the wrongs you have suffered, the young prince is unable so
+quickly to forget  that enmity against the Earl that he has learnt
+from you."
+
+"You are right, Sir Thomas, and I cannot blame Edward that he is
+unable, as I am, to forget the past. What  steps would you advise
+that I myself should take? Shall I remain passive here, or shall
+I do what I can to  rouse our partisans in England?"
+
+"I should say the latter, madam. Of course it will not do to trust
+to letters, for were one of these to fall into  the wrong hands
+it might cause the ruin of Warwick's expedition; but I should say
+that a cautious message  sent by word of mouth to some of our old
+adherents would be of great use. I myself will, if your Majesty
+chooses to entrust me with the mission, undertake to carry it out.
+I should take ship and land in the west,  and would travel in the
+guise of a simple country gentleman, and call upon your adherents
+in all the western  counties. It would be needful first to make
+out a list of the nobles who have shown themselves devoted to  your
+cause, and I should bid these hold themselves and their retainers
+in readiness to take the field  suddenly. I should say no word of
+Warwick, but merely hint that you will not land alone, but with a
+powerful array, and that all the chances are in your favour."
+
+"But it would be a dangerous mission, Sir Thomas."
+
+"Not greatly so, madam. My own estates lie in Sussex, and there
+would be but little chance of my  recognition, save by your own
+adherents, who may have seen me among the leaders of your troops
+in  battle; and even that is improbable. At present Edward deems
+himself so securely seated on the throne that  men can travel
+hither and thither through the country without being questioned,
+and the Lancastrians live  quietly with the Yorkists. Unless I were
+so unfortunate as to meet a Yorkist noble who knew that I was a
+banished man and one who had the honour of being in your Majesty's
+confidence, I do not think that any  danger could possibly arise.
+What say you, wife?"
+
+"I cannot think that there is no danger," Lady Tresham said; "but
+even so I would not say a word to hinder  you from doing service
+to the cause. I know of no one else who could perform the mission.
+You have left  my side to go into battle before now, and I cannot
+think that the danger of such an expedition can be as  great as
+that which you would undergo in the field. Therefore, my dear lord,
+I would say no word now to  stay you."
+
+She spoke bravely and unfalteringly, but her face had paled when
+Sir Thomas first made the proposal, and  the colour had not yet
+come back to her cheeks.
+
+"Bravely spoken, dame," the queen said warmly. "Well, Sir Thomas,
+I accept your offer, and trust that you  will not be long separated
+from your wife and son, who will of course journey with me when
+I go to  England, where doubtless you will be able to rejoin us
+a few days after we land. Now let us talk over the  noblemen and
+gentlemen in the west, upon whom we can rely, if not to join our
+banner as soon as it is  spread, at least to say no word that will
+betray you."
+
+Two days later Sir Thomas Tresham started on his journey, while the
+queen remained at Amboise eagerly  awaiting the news that Warwick
+had collected a fleet, and was ready to set sail. Up to this point
+the Duke of  Clarence had sided with Warwick against his brother,
+and had passed over with him to France, believing,  no doubt, that
+if the Earl should succeed in dethroning Edward, he intended to
+place him, his son-in-law,  upon the throne. He was rudely awakened
+from this delusion by Charles of Burgundy, who, being in all but
+open rebellion against his suzerain, the King of France, kept himself
+intimately acquainted with all that was  going on. He despatched a
+female emissary to Clarence to inform him of the league Warwick had
+made  with the Lancastrians, and the intended marriage between his
+daughter Anne and the young prince;  imploring him to be reconciled
+with his brother and to break off his alliance with the Earl, who
+was on the  point of waging war against the House of York.
+
+Clarence took the advice, and went over to England, where he made
+his peace with Edward, the more easily  because the king, who was
+entirely given up to pleasure, treated with contempt the warnings
+the Duke of  Burgundy sent him of the intended invasion by Warwick. And
+yet a moment's serious reflection should  have shown him that his
+position was precarious. The crushing exactions of the tax gatherers,
+in order to  provide the means for Edward's lavish expenditure,
+had already caused very serious insurrections in various  parts of
+the country, and his unpopularity was deep and general. In one of
+these risings the royal troops had  suffered a crushing defeat.
+The Earl Rivers, the father, and Sir John Woodville, one of the
+brothers, of the  queen had, with the Earl of Devon, been captured
+by the rebels, and the three had been beheaded, and the  throne
+had only been saved by the intervention of Warwick.
+
+Thus, then, Edward had every reason for fearing the result should
+the Earl appear in arms against him. He  took, however, no measures
+whatever to prepare for the coming storm, and although the Duke of
+Burgundy  despatched a fleet to blockade Harfleur, where Warwick
+was fitting out his expedition, and actually sent the  name of the
+port at which the Earl intended to land if his fleet managed to
+escape from Harfleur, Edward  continued carelessly to spend his
+time in pleasure and dissipation, bestowing his full confidence upon
+the  Archbishop of York and the Marquis of Montague, both brothers
+of the Earl of Warwick.
+
+The elements favoured his enemies, for early in September the Duke
+of Burgundy's Fleet, off Harfleur, was  dispersed by a storm, and
+Warwick, as soon as the gale abated, set sail, and on the 13th
+landed on the  Devonshire coast. His force was a considerable one,
+for the French king had furnished him both with  money and men; on
+effecting his landing he found no army assembled to oppose him. A
+few hours after his  disembarkation, he was joined by Sir Thomas
+Tresham, who gave him the good news that the whole of the  west
+was ready to rise, and that in a few days all the great landowners
+would join him with their retainers.  This turned out to be
+the case, and Warwick, with a great array, marched eastward. Kent
+had already risen,  and London declared for King Henry. Warwick,
+therefore, instead of marching thither, moved towards  Lincolnshire,
+where Edward was with his army, having gone north to repress
+an insurrection that had  broken out there at the instigation of
+Warwick.
+
+Lord Montague now threw off the mask, and declared for King Henry.
+Most of the soldiers followed him,  and Edward, finding it hopeless
+to oppose Warwick's force, which was now within a short march of
+him,  took ship with a few friends who remained faithful, and sailed
+for Holland.  Warwick returned to London,  where he took King Henry
+from the dungeon in the Tower, into which he himself had, five
+years before,  thrown him, and proclaimed him king.
+
+On the day that this took place Dame Tresham arrived in London with
+her son. The queen had found that  she could not for the present
+cross, as she was waiting for a large French force which was to
+accompany  her. As it was uncertain how long the delay might last,
+she counselled her friend to join her husband. The  revolution
+had been accomplished without the loss of a single life, with the
+exception of that of the Earl of  Worcester, who was hated for his
+cruelty by the people. Edward's principal friends took refuge in
+various  religious houses. The queen, her three daughters, and her
+mother, fled to the sanctuary at Westminster. All  these were left
+unmolested, nor was any step taken against the other adherents of
+the House of York.   Warwick was now virtually King of England.
+The king, whose intellect had always been weak, was now  almost an
+imbecile, and Margaret of Anjou was still detained in France.  Sir
+Thomas Tresham went down  to his estates in Kent, and there lived
+quietly for some months. The Duke of Clarence had joined Warwick
+as soon as he saw that his brother's cause was lost; and as the
+Duke had no knowledge of his changed  feelings towards him, he was
+heartily welcomed.  An act of settlement was passed by Parliament
+entailing  the Crown on Henry's son Edward, Prince of Wales,
+and in case of that prince's death without issue, on the  Duke of
+Clarence. On the 12th of March following (1471) Edward suddenly
+appeared with a fleet with  which he had been secretly supplied
+by the Duke of Burgundy, and, sailing north, landed in the Humber.
+He found the northern population by no means disposed to aid him,
+but upon his taking a solemn oath that  he had no designs whatever
+upon the throne, but simply claimed to be restored to his rights
+and dignities as  Duke of York, he was joined by a sufficient force
+to enable him to cross the Trent. As he marched south his  army
+speedily swelled, and he was joined by many great lords.
+
+Warwick had summoned Henry's adherents to the field, and marched
+north to meet him. When the armies  approached each other, the Duke
+of Clarence, who commanded a portion of Henry's army, went over
+with  his whole force to Edward, and Warwick, being no longer in a
+position to give battle, was obliged to draw  off and allow Edward
+to march unopposed towards London. The citizens, with their usual
+fickleness,  received him with the same outburst of enthusiasm with
+which, five months before, they had greeted the  entry of Warwick.
+The unfortunate King Henry was again thrown into his dungeon in
+the Tower, and  Edward found himself once more King of England.
+
+Sir Thomas Tresham, as soon as he heard of the landing of Edward,
+had hastened up to London. In his  uncertainty how matters would go,
+he brought his wife and son up with him, and left them in lodgings,
+while he marched north with Warwick. As soon as the defection of
+Clarence opened the road to London, he  left the Earl, promising
+to return in a few days, and rode to town, arriving there two days
+before Edward's  entry, and, purchasing another horse, took his
+wife and son down to St. Albans, where leaving them, he  rejoined
+Warwick. In a few days the latter had gathered sufficient forces to
+enable him to risk the fortunes  of a battle, and, marching south,
+he encamped with his army on the common north of Barnet. Edward
+had  come out to meet him, and the two armies slept on Easter Eve
+within two miles of each other.
+
+Late in the evening Clarence sent a messenger to the Earl, offering
+to mediate, but the offer was indignantly  refused by Warwick.
+
+In the darkness, neither party was aware of the other's precise
+position. Warwick was much stronger than  the king in artillery,
+and had placed it on his right wing. The king, in his ignorance of
+the enemy's position,  had placed his troops considerably more to
+the right than those of Warwick's army. The latter, believing  that
+Edward's line was facing his, kept up a heavy cannonade all night
+upon where he supposed Edward's  left to be -- a cannonade which
+was thus entirely futile.
+
+In the morning (April 14th) a heavy mist covered the country
+and prevented either force from seeing the  other's dispositions.
+Warwick took the command of his left wing, having with him the Duke
+of Exeter.  Somerset was in command of his centre, and Montague
+and Oxford of his right.
+
+Edward placed himself in the centre of his array, the Duke of
+Gloucester commanded on his right, and Lord  Hastings on his left.
+
+Desirous, from his inferiority in artillery, to fight out the battle
+hand to hand, Edward, at six o'clock in the  morning, ordered his
+trumpets to blow, and, after firing a few shots, advanced through
+the mist to attack the  enemy.  His misconception as to Warwick's
+position, which had saved his troops from the effects of the
+cannonade during the night, was now disadvantageous to him, for the
+Earl's right so greatly outflanked his  left that when they came
+into contact Hastings found himself nearly surrounded by a vastly
+superior force.  His wing fought valiantly, but was at length
+broken by Oxford's superior numbers, and driven out of the  field.
+The mist prevented the rest of the armies from knowing what had
+happened on the king's left.   Edward himself led the charge on
+Warwick's centre, and having his best troops under his command,
+pressed forward with such force and vehemence that he pierced
+Somerset's lines and threw them into  confusion.
+
+Just as Warwick's right had outflanked the king's left, so his own
+left was outflanked by Gloucester.  Warwick's troops fought with
+great bravery, and, in spite of the disaster to his centre, were
+holding their  ground until Oxford, returning from his pursuit of
+the king's left, came back through the mist. The king's  emblem
+was a sun, that of Oxford a star with streaming rays. In the dim
+light this was mistaken by  Warwick's men for the king's device,
+and believing that Oxford was far away on the right, they received
+him with a discharge of arrows. This was at once returned, and a
+conflict took place. At last the mistake  was discovered, but the
+confusion caused was irreparable. Warwick and Oxford each suspected
+the other of  treachery, and the king's right still pressing on,
+the confusion increased, and the battle, which had been so  nearly
+won by the Earl, soon became a complete defeat, and by ten in the
+morning Warwick's army was in  full flight.
+
+Accounts differ as to the strength of the forces engaged, but it is
+probable that there was no great inequality,  and that each party
+brought some fifteen thousand men into the field. The number of
+slain is also very  uncertain, some historians placing the total at
+ten thousand, others as low as one thousand; but from the  number
+of nobles who fell, the former computation is probably nearest to
+the truth.  Warwick, his brother  Montague, and many other nobles
+and gentlemen, were killed, the only great nobles on his side who
+escaped being the Earls of Somerset and Oxford; many were also killed
+on Edward's side, and the slaughter  among the ordinary fighting
+men was greater than usual.
+
+Hitherto in the battles that had been fought during the civil war;
+while the leaders taken on the field were  frequently executed, the
+common soldiers were permitted to return to their homes, as they
+had only been  acting under the orders of their feudal superiors,
+and were not considered responsible for their acts. At  Barnet,
+however, Edward, smarting from the humiliation he had suffered
+by his enforced flight from  England, owing to the whole country
+declaring for his rival, gave orders that no quarter was to be
+granted.  It was an anxious day at St. Albans, where many ladies
+whose husbands were with Warwick's army had,  like Dame Tresham,
+taken up their quarters. It was but a few miles from the field
+of battle. In the event of  victory they could at once join their
+husbands, while in case of defeat they could take refuge in the
+sanctuary of the abbey.  Messengers the night before had brought
+the news that the battle would begin at  the dawn of day, and with
+intense anxiety they waited for the news.
+
+Dame Tresham and her son attended early mass at the abbey, and had
+returned to their lodgings, when Sir  Thomas rode up at full speed.
+His armour was dinted and his plume shorn away from his helmet. As
+he  entered the house he was met by his wife, who had run downstairs
+as she heard his horse stop at the door. A  glance at his face was
+sufficient to tell the news.
+
+"We have lost the day," he said. "Warwick and Montague are both
+killed. All is lost here for the present.  Which will you do, my
+love, ride with me to the West, where Queen Margaret will speedily
+land, if indeed  she has not landed already, or take sanctuary here
+with the boy?"
+
+"I will go with you," she said. "I would vastly rather do so."
+
+"I will tell you more on the road," he said. "There is no time to
+be lost now."
+
+The woman of the house was called, and at once set her son to
+saddle the other horse and to give a feed to  that of the knight.
+Dame Tresham busied herself with packing the saddlebags while her
+husband partook of  a hasty meal; and ten minutes after his arrival
+they set off, Gervaise riding behind his father, while the latter
+led the horse on which his wife was mounted. A thick mist hung over
+the country.
+
+"This mist told against us in the battle, wife, for as we advanced
+our forces fell into confusion, and more  than once friend attacked
+friend, believing that he was an enemy.  However, it has proved an
+advantage to  us now, for it has enabled great numbers to escape
+who might otherwise have been followed and cut down.  I was very
+fortunate. I had left my horse at a little farmhouse two miles in
+the rear of our camp, and in the  fog had but small hope of finding
+it; but soon after leaving the battlefield, I came upon a rustic
+hurrying in  the same direction as myself, and upon questioning him
+it turned out that he was a hand on the very farm at  which I had
+left the horse. He had, with two or three others, stolen out after
+midnight to see the battle, and  was now making his way home again,
+having seen indeed but little, but having learned from fugitives
+that  we had been defeated.  He guided me to the farmhouse, which
+otherwise I should assuredly never have  reached. His master
+was favourable to our party, and let the man take one of the cart
+horses, on which he  rode as my guide until he had placed me upon
+the high road to St. Albans, and I was then able to gallop on  at
+full speed."
+
+"And Warwick and his brother Montague are both killed?"
+
+"Both. The great Earl will make and unmake no more kings. He has
+been a curse to England, with his  boundless ambition, his vast
+possessions, and his readiness to change sides and to embroil the
+country in  civil war for purely personal ends. The great nobles
+are a curse to the country, wife. They are, it is true, a  check
+upon kingly ill doing and oppression; but were they, with their
+great arrays of retainers and feudal  followers, out of the way,
+methinks that the citizens and yeomen would be able to hold their
+own against  any king."
+
+"Was the battle a hard fought one?"
+
+"I know but little of what passed, except near the standard of
+Warwick himself. There the fighting was  fierce indeed, for it was
+against the Earl that the king finally directed his chief onslaught.
+Doubtless he was  actuated both by a deep personal resentment
+against the Earl for the part he had played and the humiliation
+he had inflicted upon him, and also by the knowledge that a defeat
+of Warwick personally would be the  heaviest blow that he could
+inflict upon the cause of Lancaster."
+
+"Then do you think the cause is lost?"
+
+"I say not that. Pembroke has a strong force in Wales, and if the
+West rises, and Queen Margaret on landing  can join him, we may
+yet prevail; but I fear that the news of the field of Barnet will
+deter many from  joining us. Men may risk lands and lives for a
+cause which seems to offer a fair prospect of success, but  they
+can hardly be blamed for holding back when they see that the chances
+are all against them. Moreover,  as a Frenchwoman, it cannot be
+denied that Margaret has never been popular in England, and her
+arrival  here, aided by French gold and surrounded by Frenchmen,
+will tell against her with the country people. I  went as far as
+I could on the day before I left Amboise, urging her on no account
+to come hither until  matters were settled. It would have been
+infinitely better had the young prince come alone, and landed in
+the West without a single follower. The people would have admired
+his trust in them, and would, I am sure,  have gathered strongly
+round his banner. However, we must still hope for the best. Fortune
+was against us  today: it may be with us next time we give battle.
+And with parties so equally divided throughout the  country a signal
+victory would bring such vast numbers to our banners that Edward
+would again find it  necessary to cross the seas."
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II THE BATTLE OF TEWKESBURY
+
+
+Riding fast, Sir Thomas Tresham crossed the Thames at Reading before
+any news of the battle of Barnet  had arrived there. On the third
+day after leaving St.  Albans he reached Westbury, and there heard
+that the  news had been received of the queen's landing at Plymouth
+on the very day on which her friends had been  defeated at Barnet,
+and that she had already been joined by the Duke of Somerset, the
+Earl of Devon, and  others, and that Exeter had been named as the
+point of rendezvous for her friends.  As the Lancastrians  were
+in the majority in Wiltshire and Somerset, there was no longer any
+fear of arrest by partisans of York,  and after resting for a day
+Sir Thomas Tresham rode quietly on to Exeter, where the queen had
+already  arrived.
+
+The battle of Barnet had not, in reality, greatly weakened the
+Lancastrian cause. The Earl of Warwick was  so detested by the
+adherents of the Red Rose that comparatively few of them had joined
+him, and the fight  was rather between the two sections of Yorkists
+than between York and Lancaster. The Earl's death had  broken up
+his party, and York and Lancaster were now face to face with each
+other, without his disturbing  influence on either side.  Among
+those who had joined the queen was Tresham's great friend, the Grand
+Prior of St. John's. Sir Thomas took up his lodgings in the house
+where he had established himself. The  queen was greatly pleased at
+the arrival of Dame Tresham, and at her earnest request the latter
+shared her  apartments, while Gervaise remained with his father.
+
+"So this is the young Knight of St. John," the prior said, on the
+evening of the arrival of Sir Thomas. "I  would, Tresham, that I were
+at present at Rhodes, doing battle with the infidels, rather than
+engaged in this  warfare against Englishmen and fellow Christians."
+
+"I can well understand that," Sir Thomas said.
+
+"I could not hold aloof here, Tresham. The vows of our Order
+by no means hinder us from taking part in  the affairs of our own
+country. The rule of the Order is indeed against it, but the rule
+is constantly broken.  Were it otherwise there could be no commanderies
+in this or any other country; we should have, on  entering the Order,
+to abandon our nationality, and to form part of one community in
+the East. The Order is  true to its oaths. We cannot defend the Holy
+Sepulchre, for that, for the present, is hopelessly lost; but we
+can and do wage war with the infidel. For this funds are necessary
+as well as swords, and our  commanderies throughout Europe supply
+the funds by which the struggle is maintained, and, when it is
+needed, send out contingents to help those fighting in the East.
+It was from the neglect of this cardinal point  that the Templars
+fell. Their commanderies amassed wealth and wide possessions, but
+unlike us the knights  abstained altogether from fulfilling their
+vows, and ceased to resist the infidel.  Therefore they were
+suppressed, and, with the general approval of Europe, a portion
+of their possessions was handed over to the  knights of St. John.
+However, as I understand, it is your wish that as soon as the
+boy comes of age to wield  arms he shall go to Rhodes and become
+an active member of the Order. This is indeed the rule with all
+neophytes, but having served a certain time they are then permitted to
+return and join one of the  commanderies in their native countries."
+
+"I do not wish that for Gervaise," his father said; "at least,
+I wish him to remain at Rhodes until all the civil  troubles are
+absolutely at an end here. My life has been ruined by them. Loving
+retirement and quiet, and  longing for nothing so much as a life
+among my tenantry, I have almost from a boy been actively engaged
+in warfare or have been away as an exile. Here every one of gentle
+blood has been more or less mixed up in  these civil broils. To
+few of us does it personally matter whether a member of the House
+of York or  Lancaster sits on the throne, and yet we have been
+almost compelled to take sides with one or the other; and  now,
+in my middle age I am on the eve of another battle in which I risk
+my life and fortune. If we win I  gain naught but the satisfaction
+of seeing young Edward made King of England. If we lose I am going
+into  exile again, or I may leave my wife a widow, and my child
+penniless."
+
+"It is too true, Tresham; and as I am as likely to fall as you are,
+the child might be left without a protector as  well as fatherless.
+However, against that I will provide. I will write a letter
+to Peter D'Aubusson, who is the  real governor of Rhodes, for the
+Grand Master Orsini is so old that his rule is little more than
+nominal. At  his death D'Aubusson is certain to be elected Grand
+Master. He is a dear friend of mine. We entered the  Order the
+same year, and were comrades in many a fight with the Moslems, and
+I am quite sure that when I  tell him that it is my last request
+of him, he will, in memory of our long friendship, appoint your son
+as one  of the Grand Master's pages. As you know, no one, however
+high his rank, is accepted as a novice before  the age of sixteen.
+After a year's probation he is received into the body of the
+Order as a professed knight,  and must go out and serve for a time
+in Rhodes. After three years of active service he must reside two
+more  at the convent, and can then be made a commander. There is
+but one exception to the rule -- namely, that  the pages of the
+grand master are entitled to the privilege of admission at the age
+of twelve, so that they  become professed knights at thirteen. Your
+son is now but nine, you say, and we must remember that  D'Aubusson
+is not yet Grand Master, and Orsini may live for some years yet.
+D'Aubusson, however, can  doubtless get him to appoint the boy
+as one of his pages. But, in any case, there are three years yet
+to be  passed before he can go out. Doubtless these he will spend
+under his mother's care; but as it is as well to  provide against
+everything, I will furnish your dame with a letter to the knight
+who will probably succeed  me as Grand Prior of the English langue,
+asking him to see to the care and education of the boy up to the
+time when he can proceed to Rhodes. We may hope, my dear Tresham,
+that there will be no occasion to use  such documents, and that you
+and I may both be able personally to watch over his career. Still,
+it is as well  to take every precaution. I shall, of course, give
+D'Aubusson full particulars about you, your vow, and your  wishes."
+
+"I thank you greatly, old friend," Sir Thomas said. "It has taken
+a load off my mind. I shall leave him here  with his mother when
+we march forward, and bid her, if ill befalls me, cross again to
+France, and then to  keep Gervaise with her until she can bring
+herself to part with him. She has her jewels and a considerable
+sum of money which I accepted from the man who has been enjoying
+my estates for the last five years, in  lieu of the monies that he
+had received during that time. Therefore, she will not lack means
+for some years  to come. Besides, Queen Margaret has a real affection
+for her, and will, doubtless, be glad to have her with  her again
+in exile."
+
+"When I am old enough," Gervaise said, suddenly looking up from a
+missal of the Grand Prior's which he  had been examining, "I will
+chop off the head of the Duke of York, and bring mother back to
+England."
+
+"You will be a valiant champion no doubt, my boy," the prior said,
+laughing. "But that is just what your  father does not want. Chop
+off the heads of as many infidels as you will, but leave Englishmen
+alone, be  they dukes or commoners. It is a far more glorious
+career to be aiding to defend Europe against the Moslem  than to be
+engaged in wars with your own countrymen. If the great lords will
+fight, let them fight it out  themselves without our aid; but I
+hope that long before you become a man even they will be tired of
+these  perpetual broils, and that some agreement may be arrived
+at, and peace reign in this unhappy land."
+
+"Besides, Gervaise," his father added, "you must bear in mind always
+that my earnest wish and hope is that  you will become a champion
+of the Cross. I took a solemn vow before you were born that if a
+son were  granted to me I would dedicate him to the service of the
+Cross, and if I am taken from you, you must still  try to carry
+that oath into effect. I trust that, at any rate for some years
+after you attain manhood, you will  expend your whole strength and
+powers in the defence of Christianity, and as a worthy knight of
+the Order  of St. John. Too many of the knights, after serving for
+three years against the infidels, return to their native  countries
+and pass the rest of their lives in slothful ease at their
+commanderies, save perhaps when at any  great crisis they go out
+for a while and join in the struggle. Such is not the life I should
+wish you to lead. At  the death of your mother and myself, you will
+have no family ties in England -- nothing to recall you here.  If
+the House of York succeeds in establishing itself firmly on the
+throne, my estates will be forfeited.  Therefore, regard Rhodes as
+your permanent home, and devote your life to the Order.  Beginning
+so young,  you may hope to distinguish yourself -- to gain high
+rank in it; but remember that though these are my  wishes, they
+are not my orders, and that your career must be in your own hands."
+
+"I will be a brave knight, father," the boy said firmly.
+
+"That is right, my boy. Now go upstairs to your bed; it is already
+late. I do not regret my vow," he went on,  after Gervaise had left
+the room, "though I regret that he is my only son. It is singular
+that men should care  about what comes after them, but I suppose it
+is human nature. I should have liked to think that my  descendants
+would sit in the old house, and that men of my race and name would
+long own the estates. But  doubtless it is all for the best; for
+at least I can view the permanent loss of my estates, in case the
+Yorkists  triumph, without any poignant regret."
+
+"Doubtless it is for the best, Tresham, and you must remember that
+things may not, even now, turn out as  you think. A knight who has
+done a brave service does not find much difficulty in obtaining
+from the Pope  a dispensation from his vows. Numbers of knights
+have so left the Order and have married and perpetuated  their name.
+It is almost a necessity that it should be so, for otherwise many
+princes and barons would  object to their sons entering the Order.
+Its object is to keep back the irruption of the Moslems, and when
+men have done their share of hard work no regret need be felt
+if they desire to leave the Order. Our founder  had no thought of
+covering Europe with monasteries, and beyond the fact that it is
+necessary there should  be men to administer our manors and estates,
+I see no reason why any should not freely leave when they  reach
+the age of thirty or thirty-five, and indeed believe that it would
+strengthen rather than weaken us were  the vows, taken at the age
+of seventeen, to be for fifteen years only."
+
+"There is something in that," the knight said thoughtfully. "However,
+that is far in the distance, and  concerns me but little; still,
+I agree with you, for I see no advantage in men, after their time
+of usefulness to  the Order is past, being bound to settle down to
+a monastic life if by nature and habit unsuited for it. There  are
+some spirits who, after long years of warfare, are well content
+so to do, but there are assuredly others to  whom a life of forced
+inactivity, after a youth and manhood spent in action, must be
+well nigh unendurable.  And now tell me frankly what you think of
+our chances here."
+
+"Everything depends upon time. Promises of aid have come in from
+all quarters, and if Edward delays we  shall soon be at the head of
+an overwhelming force. But Edward, with all his faults and vices,
+is an able and  energetic leader, and must be well aware that if he
+is to strike successfully he must strike soon. We must  hope that
+he will not be able to do this. He cannot tell whether we intend
+to march direct to London, or to  join Pembroke in Wales, or to
+march north, and until he divines our purpose, he will hardly dare
+to move  lest we should, by some rapid movement, interpose between
+himself and London. If he gives us a month,  our success is certain.
+If he can give battle in a fortnight, no one can say how the matter
+will end."
+
+Edward, indeed, was losing no time. He stayed but a few days
+in London after his victory at Barnet, and on  the 19th of April
+left for Windsor, ordering all his forces to join him there. The
+Lancastrians had  endeavoured to puzzle him as to their intended
+movements by sending parties out in various directions; but  as
+soon as he had gathered a force, numerically small, but composed
+of veteran soldiers, he hurried west,  determined to bring on a
+battle at the earliest opportunity. The queen's advisers determined
+to move first to  Wells, as from that point they could either go
+north or march upon London. Edward entered Abingdon on  the 27th,
+and then, finding the Lancastrians still at Wells, marched to the
+northwest, by which means he  hoped to intercept them if they moved
+north, while he would be able to fall back and bar their road to
+London if they advanced in that direction. He therefore moved to
+Cirencester, and waited there for news  until he learned that they
+had visited Bristol and there obtained reinforcements of men and
+supplies of  money and cannon, and had then started on the high
+road to Gloucester.
+
+He at once sent off messengers to the son of Lord Beauchamp, who
+held the Castle of Gloucester for him,  assuring him that he was
+following at full speed, and would come to his aid forthwith. The
+messengers  arrived in time, and when the queen, after a long march,
+arrived before Gloucester, she found the gates shut  in her face.
+The governor had taken steps to prevent her numerous adherents in
+the town from rising on her  behalf, and, manning the walls, refused
+to surrender. Knowing that Edward was coming up rapidly, it was
+evident that there was no time to spare in an attempt to take the
+town, and the queen's army therefore  pressed on, without waiting,
+to Tewkesbury. Once across the river they would speedily be joined
+by the  Earl of Pembroke, and Edward would be forced to fall back
+at once.
+
+By the time they reached the river, however, they were thoroughly
+exhausted. They had marched thirty-six  miles without rest, along
+bad roads and through woods, and were unable to go farther. The
+queen urged that  the river should be crossed, but the leaders of
+the force were of opinion that it was better to halt. Edward  would
+be able to follow them across the river, and were he to attack
+them when in disorder, and still further  wearied by the operation
+of making the passage, he would certainly crush them.  Moreover,
+a further retreat  would discourage the soldiers, and as a battle
+must now be fought, it was better to fight where they were,
+especially as they could choose a strong position. The queen gave
+way, and the army encamped on a large  field in front of the town.
+The position was well calculated for defence, for the country
+around was so  broken and intercepted with lanes and deep hedges
+and ditches, that it was extremely difficult of approach.
+
+In the evening Edward came up, his men having also marched some
+six-and-thirty miles, and encamped for  the night within three miles
+of the Lancastrian position. The queen's troops felt confident of
+victory. In  point of numbers they were superior to their antagonists,
+and had the advantage of a strong position. Sir  Thomas Tresham
+had, as he proposed, left his wife and son at Exeter when the force
+marched away.
+
+"Do not be despondent, love," he said to his weeping wife, as he
+bade her goodbye. "Everything is in our  favour, and there is a
+good hope of a happy termination to this long struggle. But, win
+or lose, be assured it  is the last time I will draw my sword. I
+have proved my fidelity to the House of Lancaster; I have risked
+life  and fortune in their cause; but I feel that I have done my
+share and more, and whichever way Providence  may now decide the
+issue of the struggle, I will accept it. If we lose, and I come
+scatheless through the  fight, I will ride hither, and we will
+embark at Plymouth for France, and there live quietly until the
+time  comes when Edward may feel himself seated with sufficient
+firmness on the throne to forgive past offences  and to grant
+an amnesty to all who have fought against him. In any other case,
+dear, you know my wishes,  and I bid you carry them out within
+twenty-four hours of your receiving news of a defeat, without
+waiting  longer for my appearance."
+
+As soon as it was light, Edward advanced to the attack.  The Duke
+of Gloucester was in command of the  vanguard.  He himself led
+the centre, while the rear was commanded by the Marquis of Dorset
+and Lord  Hastings. The most advanced division of Lancastrians
+was commanded by the Duke of Somerset and his  brother. The Grand
+Prior of the Order of St. John and Lord Wenlock were stationed in
+the centre, the Earl  of Devon with the reserve. Refreshed by their
+rest, the queen's troops were in good spirits. While awaiting  the
+attack, she and the prince rode among the ranks, encouraging the
+men with fiery speeches, and  promising large rewards to all in
+case of victory.
+
+Gloucester made his advance with great difficulty. The obstacles
+to his progress were so many and serious  that his division was
+brought to a halt before it came into contact with the defenders.
+He therefore brought  up his artillery and opened a heavy cannonade
+upon Somerset's position, supporting his guns with flights of
+arrows, and inflicting such heavy loss upon him that the duke felt
+compelled to take the offensive.
+
+Having foreseen that he might be obliged to do so, he had, early
+in the morning, carefully examined the  ground in front of him, and
+had found some lanes by which he could make a flank attack on the
+enemy.  Moving his force down these lanes, where the trees and hedges
+completely hid his advance from the  Yorkists, he fell suddenly
+upon Edward's centre, which, taken by surprise at the unexpected
+attack, was  driven in confusion up the hill behind it.  Somerset
+was quick to take advantage of his success, and  wheeling his men
+round fell upon the Duke of Gloucester's division, and was equally
+successful in his  attack upon it.  Had the centre, under Lord
+Wenlock, moved forward at once to his support, the victory  would
+have been assured; but Wenlock lay inactive, and Somerset was now
+engaged in conflict with the  whole of Edward's force. But even
+under these circumstances he still gained ground, when suddenly
+the  whole aspect of the battle was changed.
+
+Before it began Edward had sent two hundred spearmen to watch a
+wood near the defenders' lines, as he  thought that the Lancastrians
+might place a force there to take him in flank as he attacked
+their front. He  ordered them, if they found the wood unoccupied,
+to join in the fight as opportunity might offer. The wood  was
+unoccupied, and the spearmen, seeing the two divisions of their army
+driven backwards, and being  thereby cut off from their friends,
+issued from the wood and, charging down in a body, fell suddenly
+upon  Somerset's rear.
+
+Astounded and confused by an attack from such a quarter, and believing
+that it was an act of treachery by  one of their own commanders,
+Somerset's men, who had hitherto been fighting with the greatest
+bravery,  fell into confusion. Edward's quick eye soon grasped the
+opportunity, and rallying his troops he charged  impetuously down
+upon the Lancastrians, seconded hotly by Gloucester and his division.
+
+The disorder in Somerset's lines speedily grew into a panic, and
+the division broke up and fled through the  lanes to the right
+and left. Somerset, after in vain trying to stop the panic, rode
+furiously back into the  camp, followed by his principal officers,
+and riding up to Lord Wenlock he cleft his head in two with a
+battleaxe. His resentment, although justified by the inactivity of
+this nobleman at such a crisis, was yet  disastrous, as it left the
+centre without a leader, and threw it into a state of disorganization,
+as many must  have supposed that Somerset had turned traitor and
+gone over to the enemy. Before any disposition could  be made,
+Edward and Gloucester poured their forces into the camp, and the
+Lancastrians at once broke and  fled. Many of their leaders took
+refuge in the church, an asylum which they deemed inviolable, and
+which  the Lancastrians had honourably respected in their hour of
+triumph.
+
+Among them were the Duke of Somerset, the Grand Prior of the Order
+of St. John, Sir Humphrey Audely,  Sir Gervis of Clifton, Sir William
+Gainsby, Sir William Cary, Sir Henry Rose, Sir Thomas Tresham,
+and  seven esquires.  Margaret of Anjou fell into the hands of the
+victors. As to the fate of the young prince,  accounts differ. Some
+authorities say that he was overtaken and slain on the field, but
+the majority related  that he was captured and taken before Edward,
+who asked him, "What brought you to England?" On his  replying
+boldly, "My father's crown and mine own inheritance," Edward struck
+him in the mouth with his  gauntlet, and his attendants, or some
+say his brothers, at once despatched the youth with their swords.
+
+The king, with Gloucester and Clarence, then went to the church
+at Tewkesbury, where the knights had  taken refuge, burst open the
+doors, and entered it. A priest, bearing the holy vessels, threw
+himself before  the king, and would not move until he promised to
+pardon all who had taken sanctuary there. The king then  retired,
+and trusting in the royal word, the gentlemen made no attempt to
+escape, although it is said that  they could easily have done so.
+Two days later a party of soldiers by the king's orders broke into
+the  church, dragged them from the foot of the altar, and beheaded
+them outside.
+
+The news of the issue of the fatal battle of Tewkesbury, the capture
+of the queen, and the death of the  prince, was borne to Exeter by
+fugitives on the following day. Beyond the fact that the Earl of
+Devon and  other nobles were known to have been killed, and Somerset
+with a party of knights had taken sanctuary,  they could give no
+details as to the fate of individuals. In the deepest distress at
+the utter ruin of the cause,  and in ignorance of the fate of her
+husband, who she could only hope was one of those who had gained
+sanctuary, Dame Tresham prepared for flight. This accomplished,
+she had only to wait, and sit in tearless  anguish at the window,
+listening intently whenever a horseman rode past. All night her
+watch continued.   Gervaise, who had cried himself to sleep, lay
+on a couch beside her. Morning dawned, and she then knew  that her
+husband would not come, for had he escaped from the field he would
+long ere this have been with  her. The messenger with the news
+had arrived at eight the previous morning, and, faithful to her
+husband's  wishes, at that hour she ordered the horses to be brought
+round, and, joining a party of gentlemen who were  also making for
+the coast, rode with them to Plymouth. Arrangements were at once
+made with the captain  of a small ship in the port, and two days
+later they landed at Honfleur, where Sir Thomas had enjoined his
+wife to wait until she heard from him or obtained sure news of his
+fate.
+
+A week after her arrival the news was brought by other fugitives
+of the violation of the sanctuary by the  king, and the murder of
+Somerset and the gentlemen with him, of whom Sir Thomas Tresham
+was known  to have been one.
+
+The blow proved fatal to Dame Tresham. She had gone through many
+trials and misfortunes, and had ever  borne them bravely, but the
+loss of her husband completely broke her down. Save to see his
+wishes  concerning their son carried out, she had no longer any
+interest in life or any wish to live. But until the  future of
+Gervaise was assured, her mission was unfulfilled. His education
+was her sole care; his mornings  were spent at a monastery, where
+the monks instructed the sons of such of the nobles and gentry of
+the  neighbourhood as cared that they should be able to read and
+write. In the afternoon he had the best masters  in the town in
+military exercises. His evenings he spent with his mother, who strove
+to instill in him the  virtues of patience, mercy to the vanquished,
+and valour, by stories of the great characters of history. She
+herself spent her days in pious exercises, in attending the services
+of the Church, and in acts of charity and  kindness to her poorer
+neighbours. But her strength failed rapidly, and she was but a shadow
+of her former  self when, two years and a half after her arrival at
+Honfleur, she felt that if she was herself to hand Gervaise  over
+to the Order of St. John, she must no longer delay. Accordingly
+she took ship to London, and landing  there made her way with him
+to the dwelling of the Order at Clerkenwell. It was in process of
+rebuilding,  for in 1381 it had been first plundered and then burned
+by the insurgents under Wat Tyler. During the  ninety years that
+had elapsed since that event the work of rebuilding had proceeded
+steadily, each grand  prior making additions to the pile which,
+although not yet fully completed, was already one of the grandest
+and stateliest abodes in England.
+
+On inquiring for the grand prior, and stating that she had a letter
+of importance for him, Dame Tresham and  her son were shown up to
+his apartment, and on entering were kindly and courteously received
+by him  when informed that she was the widow of the late Sir Thomas
+Tresham.
+
+"I am the bearer of a letter for you, given into my hand by my
+husband's dear friend your predecessor," she  said, "a few days
+before his murder at Tewkesbury. It relates to my son here."
+
+The grand prior opened the letter and read it.
+
+"Assuredly, madam, I will carry out the wishes here expressed," he
+said. "They are, that I should forward at  once the letter he has
+given you to Sir Peter D'Aubusson, and that until an answer is
+received from him, I  should take care of the boy here, and see
+that he is instructed in all that is needful for a future knight of
+our  Order. I grieve to see that you yourself are looking so ill."
+
+"My course is well nigh run," she said. "I have, methinks, but
+a few days to live. I am thankful that it has  been permitted to
+me to carry out my husband's wishes, and to place my boy in your
+hands. That done, my  work on earth is finished, and glad indeed
+am I that the time is at hand when I can rejoin my dear husband."
+
+"We have a building here where we can lodge ladies in distress or
+need, Dame Tresham, and trust that you  will take up your abode
+there."
+
+"I shall indeed be thankful to do so," she replied. "I know no one
+in London, and few would care to lodge a  dying woman."
+
+"We are Hospitallers," the grand prior said. "That was our sole
+mission when we were first founded, and  before we became a military
+order, and it is still a part of our sworn duty to aid the distressed."
+
+A few minutes later Dame Tresham was conducted to a comfortable
+apartment, and was given into the  charge of a female attendant. The
+next day she had another interview with the grand prior, to whom
+she  handed over her jewels and remaining money. This she prayed him
+to devote to the furnishing of the  necessary outfit for Gervaise.
+She spent the rest of the day in the church of the hospital, had a
+long talk with  her son in the evening, giving him her last charges
+as to his future life and conduct, and that night, as if she  had
+now fulfilled her last duty on earth, she passed away, and was
+found by her attendant lying with a look  of joy and peacefulness
+on her dead face.
+
+Gervaise's grief was for a time excessive. He was nearly twelve
+years old, and had never until now been  separated from her even
+for a day. She had often spoken to him of her end being near, but
+until the blow  came he had never quite understood that it could
+be so. She had, on the night before her death, told him that  he
+must not grieve overmuch for her, for that in any case they must
+have soon been sundered, and that it  was far better that he should
+think of her as at rest, and happy, than as leading a lonely and
+sorrowful life.
+
+The grand prior, however, wisely gave him but little time to dwell
+upon his loss, but as soon as her funeral  had taken place, handed
+him over to the knights who had the charge of the novices on
+probation, and  instructed them in their military exercises, and
+of the chaplain who taught them such learning as was  considered
+requisite for a knight of the Order.
+
+The knights were surprised at the proficiency the lad had already
+attained in the use of his weapons.
+
+"By St. Agatha," one of them exclaimed, after the conclusion of his
+first lesson, "you have had good  teachers, lad, and have availed
+yourself rarely of them. If you go on like this you will become
+a  distinguished knight of our Order.  With a few more years to
+strengthen your arms I warrant me you will  bear your part well in
+your first tussle with the Moslem corsairs."
+
+It fortunately happened that a party of knights were starting for
+Rhodes a few days after the admission of  Gervaise to the Hospital,
+and the letter to Sir Peter D'Aubusson was committed to their
+charge. They were  to proceed to Bordeaux by ship, then to journey
+by land to Marseilles, and thence, being joined by some  French
+knights, to sail direct to Rhodes. Two months later an answer
+was received. D'Aubusson wrote to  the grand prior saying that he
+would gladly carry out the last wishes of his dead friend, and that
+he had  already obtained from the grand master the appointment of
+Gervaise Tresham as one of his pages, and  begged that he might
+be sent out with the next party of knights leaving England. It was
+three months before  such an opportunity occurred. During that time
+Gervaise remained at the house of St. John's studying  diligently,
+and continuing his military exercises. These were severe; for
+the scions of noble houses, who  hoped some day to distinguish
+themselves as knights, were put through many gymnastic exercises
+-- were  taught to spring on to a horse when clad in full armour,
+to wield heavy battleaxes, to run and climb, and to  prepare themselves
+for all the possibilities of the mode of fighting of the day.
+
+Gervaise gained the encomiums, not only of his special preceptor,
+but of the various knights in the house,  and of the grand prior
+himself, both for his strength and activity, and for the earnestness
+with which he  worked. When the time approached for his leaving
+England, the grand prior ordered for him the outfit  which would
+be necessary in his position as a page of the grand master. The
+dresses were numerous and  rich, for although the knights of St.
+John wore over their armour the simple mantle of their order, which
+was a sleeveless garment of black relieved only by a white cross
+on the chest, they indulged in the finest  and most costly armour,
+and in rich garments beneath their black mantles when not in armour.
+
+"I am well pleased with you, Gervaise," the grand prior said, on
+the evening before he was to leave, "and I  see in you the making
+of a valiant knight of the Order. Maintain the same spirit you
+have shown here; be  obedient and reverent to your superiors; give
+your whole mind to your duties; strive earnestly during the  three
+or four years that your pagedom will last, to perfect yourself in
+military exercises, that when the time  comes for you to buckle on
+armour you will be able to bear yourself worthily. Remember that you
+will  have to win your knighthood, for the Order does not bestow
+this honour, and you must remain a professed  knight until you
+receive it at the hands of some distinguished warrior. Ever bear
+in mind that you are a  soldier of the Cross. Avoid luxury, live
+simply and modestly; be not led away by others, upon whom their
+vows may sit but lightly; keep ever in your mind that you have
+joined the Order neither to gain fame nor  personal advantage, but
+simply that you may devote the strength and the intelligence that
+God has given  you to protect Christendom from the advance of the
+infidel. I shall hear of you from time to time from  D'Aubusson,
+and feel sure that the expectations I have formed of you will be
+fulfilled."
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III THE GRAND MASTER'S PAGE
+
+
+The grand prior had, in accordance with Dame Tresham's request,
+sent the steward of the house to one of  the principal jewellers
+of the city who, as the Order were excellent customers, paid a good
+price for her  jewels. After the payment for the numerous dresses
+required for the service as a page to the grand master,  the grand
+prior handed the balance of the money Dame Tresham had brought
+with her, and that obtained by  the sale of her jewels, to one of
+the knights under whose charge Gervaise was to travel, to be given
+by him  to D'Aubusson for the necessities of Gervaise as a page.
+During their term of service the pages received no  remuneration,
+all their expenses being paid by their families. Nevertheless, the
+post was considered so  honourable, and of such great advantage
+to those entering the Order, that the appointments were eagerly
+sought after.
+
+The head of the party was Sir Guy Redcar, who had been a commander
+in England, but who was now  relinquishing that post in order to
+take a high office in the convent at the Island. With him were four
+lads  between seventeen and twenty who were going out as professed
+knights, having served their year of  probation as novices at the
+grand priory. With these Gervaise was already acquainted, as they
+had lived,  studied, and performed their military exercises together.
+The three eldest of these Gervaise liked much, but  the youngest
+of the party, Robert Rivers, a relation of the queen, had always
+shown a very different spirit  from the others. He was jealous
+that a member of one of the defeated and disinherited Lancastrian
+families  should obtain a post of such honour and advantage as that
+of page to the grand master, and that thus,  although five years
+younger, Gervaise should enter the Order on an equality with him.
+
+In point of strength and stature he was, of course, greatly superior
+to Gervaise; but he had been spoilt from  his childhood, was averse
+to exercise, and dull at learning, and while Gervaise was frequently
+commended  by his instructors, he himself was constantly reproved,
+and it had been more than once a question whether  he should be
+received as a professed knight at the termination of his year of
+novitiate. Thus, while the other  lads treated Gervaise kindly, and
+indeed made rather a pet of him, Robert Rivers ignored him as much
+as  possible, and if obliged to speak to him did so with a pointed
+rudeness that more than once brought upon  him a sharp reproof
+from his companions.  Gervaise himself was but little affected
+by Robert's manner.  He  was of an exceptionally good tempered
+nature, and, indeed, was so occupied with his work and so anxious
+to satisfy his teachers, that Robert's ill humour passed almost
+unnoticed.
+
+The journey was performed without incident. During their passage
+across the south of France, Gervaise's  perfect knowledge of the
+language gained for him a great advantage over his companions, and
+enabled him  to be of much use to Sir Guy. They had fine weather
+during their passage up the Mediterranean, and in the  day their
+leader gave them their first lessons in the management and discipline
+of a ship.
+
+"You will be nearly as much at sea as you are on land for the five
+years you must stay at the convent," he  said; "and it is essential
+to the education of a knight of our Order to know all things
+connected with the  management of a ship, even to its building. We
+construct our own galleys at Rhodes, using, of course, the  labour
+of slaves, but under our own superintendence; and it is even more
+essential to us to know how to  fight on sea than on land. There
+is, too, you see, a rivalry among ourselves, for each langue has
+its duties,  and each strives to perform more gallant deeds and
+to bring in more rich prizes than the others. We of  England are
+among the smallest of the langues, and yet methinks we do a fair
+portion of the work, and gain  fully our share of honour. There
+is no fear of your having much time on your hands, for it is quite
+certain  that there will soon be open war between Mahomet and the
+Order. In spite of the nominal truce, constant  skirmishes are
+taking place, so that, in addition to our fights with pirates, we
+have sometimes encounters  with the sultan's galleys.
+
+"Seven years ago, a number of our Order took part in the defence
+of Lesbos, and lost their lives at its  capture, and we have sure
+information that Mahomet is preparing for an attack on the Island.
+No doubt he  thinks it will be an easy conquest, for in '57 he
+succeeded in landing eighteen thousand men on the Island,  and in
+ravaging a large district, carrying off much booty. Since then,
+however, the defences of Rhodes have  been greatly strengthened.
+Zacosta, our last grand master, laboured diligently to increase the
+fortifications,  and, specially, built on one side of the entrance
+to the harbour a strong tower, called Fort St.  Nicholas.  Orsini
+has carried on the works, which have been directed by D'Aubusson,
+who is captain general of the  forces of the Island, and who has
+deepened the ditches and built a wall on the sea front of the town
+six  hundred feet in length and twenty feet in height, money being
+found by the grand master from his private  purse.
+
+"At present we are not sure whether the great armament that Mahomet
+is preparing is intended for the  capture of Negropont, which
+belongs to Venice, or of Rhodes.  Unfortunately Venice and Rhodes
+are not  good friends. In the course of our war with Egypt in
+'58 we captured from some Venetian vessels, in which  they were
+travelling, several Egyptian merchants with a great store of goods.
+The Venetians protested that  as the ships were theirs we had no
+right to interfere with our enemies who were travelling in them,
+and,  without giving time for the question to be discussed, at
+once attacked our galleys, and sent a fleet against  Rhodes. They
+landed on the Island, and not only pillaged the district of Halki,
+but, a number of natives  having sought shelter in a cave, the
+Venetians blocked up the entrance with brushwood, set it on fire,
+and  suffocated them all.
+
+"Shortly afterwards, another and larger fleet appeared off Rhodes,
+and demanded the restitution of the  Egyptians and their merchandise.
+There was a great division of opinion in the council; but, seeing
+the great  danger that threatened us both from the Turks at
+Constantinople and the Venetians, and that it was madness  at such
+a time to engage in war with a Christian power, the grand master
+persuaded the council to accede to  their request. There has never
+been any friendly feeling between Venice and ourselves since that
+time. Still,  I trust that our common danger will reunite us, and
+that whether Negropont or Rhodes is attacked by the  Moslems, we
+shall render loyal aid to each other."
+
+There was great excitement among Gervaise and his companions when
+it was announced that Rhodes was  in sight, and as they approached
+the town they gazed with admiration at the castle with its stately
+buildings,  the palace of the grand master and the Hospital of St.
+John, rising above the lower town, the massive walls  strengthened
+by projecting bastions, and the fortifications of the ports. Of
+these there were two, with  separate entrances, divided from each
+other by a narrow tongue of land. At its extremity stood Fort St.
+Nicholas, which was connected by a strong wall running along the
+promontory to the town. The inner port,  as it was called, was of
+greater importance, as it adjoined the town itself. It was defended
+in the first place  by Fort St.  Nicholas, and at the inner entrance
+stood the towers of St.  John and St. Michael, one on either  side.
+Into this the vessel was steered. There were many craft lying there,
+among them eight or ten of the  galleys of the Order.
+
+"We will go first to the house of our langue," Sir Guy said, "and
+tell them to send down slaves to fetch up  our baggage; then I will
+take you, Gervaise, to Sir Peter D'Aubusson, and hand you over to
+his care."
+
+On landing, Gervaise was surprised at the number of slaves who were
+labouring at the public works, and  who formed no small proportion
+of the population in the streets.  Their condition was pitiable.
+They were,  of course, enemies of Christianity, and numbers of them
+had been pirates; but he could not help pitying  their condition
+as they worked in the full heat of the sun under the vigilant eyes
+of numbers of overseers,  who carried heavy whips, in addition
+to their arms. Their progress to the upper city was slow, for on
+their  way they met many knights, of whom several were acquainted
+with Sir Guy; and each, after greeting him,  demanded the latest
+news from England, and in return gave him particulars of the state
+of things at Rhodes.
+
+At last they arrived at the house of the English langue.  The Order
+was divided into langues or nationalities.  Of these there were
+eight -- Provence, Auvergne, France, Italy, Germany, England,
+Aragon, and Castile and  Portugal. The French element was by far
+the strongest. The Order had been founded in that country, and as
+it possessed no less than three langues, and held the greater part
+of the high official positions in the Order,  it was only kept in
+check by the other langues acting together to demand their fair
+share of dignities. The  grand master's authority was considerable,
+but it was checked by the council, which was composed of the
+bailiffs and knights of the highest order, known as Grand Crosses.
+Each langue had its bailiff elected by  itself:  these resided
+constantly at Rhodes. Each of these bailiffs held a high office;
+thus the Bailiff of  Provence was always the grand commander of the
+Order. He controlled the expenditure, superintended the  stores,
+and was governor of the arsenal. The Bailiff of Auvergne was the
+commander-in-chief of all the  forces, army and navy. The Bailiff
+of France was the grand hospitaller, with the supreme direction of
+the  hospitals and infirmaries of the Order, a hospital in those
+days signifying a guest house. The Bailiff of Italy  was the grand
+admiral, and the Bailiff of England was chief of the light cavalry.
+Thus the difficulties and  jealousies that would have arisen at
+every vacancy were avoided.
+
+In the early days of the Order, when Jerusalem was in the hands of
+the Christians, the care of the hospitals  was its chief and most
+important function. Innumerable pilgrims visited Jerusalem, and
+these were  entertained at the immense guest house of the Order.
+But with the loss of Jerusalem and the expulsion of  the Christians
+from Palestine, that function had become of very secondary importance
+although there was  still a guest house and infirmary at Rhodes,
+where strangers and the sick were carefully attended by the  knights.
+No longer did these ride out to battle on their war horses. It was
+on the sea that the foe was to be  met, and the knights were now
+sailors rather than soldiers.  They dwelt at the houses of their
+respective  langues; here they ate at a common table, which was
+supplied by the bailiff, who drew rations for each  knight, and
+received, in addition, a yearly sum for the supply of such luxuries
+as were not included in the  rations. The average number of knights
+residing in each of these langues averaged from a hundred to a
+hundred and fifty.
+
+It was not until some hours after his arrival that Sir Guy could
+find time to take Gervaise across to the  house of the langue of
+Auvergne, to which D'Aubusson belonged.  It was a larger and more
+stately pile than  that of the English langue, but the arrangements
+were similar in all these buildings. In the English house  Gervaise
+had not felt strange, as he had the companionship of his fellow
+voyagers; but as he followed Sir  Guy through the spacious halls
+of the langue of Auvergne, where no familiar face met his, he
+felt more  lonely than he had done since he entered the house at
+Clerkenwell.
+
+On sending in his name Sir Guy was at once conducted to the chamber
+occupied by D'Aubusson. The  knight was seated at his table, examining
+some plans. The room was furnished with monastic simplicity,  save
+that the walls were hung with rich silks and curtains captured from
+Turkish galleys.
+
+"Welcome back to us, Sir Guy," D'Aubusson said, rising, and warmly
+shaking his visitor's hand. "I have  been looking for your coming,
+for we need men with clear heads. Of strong arms and valiant spirits
+we  have no lack; but men of judgment and discretion, who can be
+trusted to look at matters calmly and not to  be carried away by
+passion, are welcome indeed to us. I was expecting you about this
+time, and when I  heard that a ship had arrived from Marseilles I
+made inquiries, and was glad to find that you were on  board."
+
+"I am heartily glad to be back, D'Aubusson; I am sick of the dull
+life of a commandery, and rejoice at the  prospect of stirring times
+again. This lad is young Tresham, who has come out in my charge,
+and for whom  you have been good enough to obtain the post of page
+to the grand master."
+
+"And no slight business was it to do so," D'Aubusson said with a
+smile. "It happened there was a vacancy  when the letter concerning
+him arrived, and had it been one of the highest offices in the
+Order there could  not have been a keener contention for it. Every
+bailiff had his candidate ready; but I seldom ask for  anything
+for members of my langue, and when I told the other bailiffs that
+it was to me a matter of honour  to carry out the last request of
+my dead friend, they all gave way. You see, I am placed in a position
+of  some little difficulty. The grand master is so enfeebled and
+crippled that he leaves matters almost entirely  in my hands, and
+it would be an abuse of my position, and would excite no little
+jealousy, were I to use the  power I possess to nominate friends of
+my own to appointments. It is only by the most rigid impartiality,
+and by dividing as fairly as possible all offices between the eight
+langues, that all continue to give me their  support. As you know,
+we have had great difficulties and heartburnings here; but happily
+they have to a  great extent been set at rest by forming a new langue
+of Castile and Portugal out of that of Aragon. This has  given one
+more vote to the smaller langues, and has so balanced the power
+that of late the jealousies  between us have greatly subsided, and
+all are working well together in face of the common danger. Well,
+young sir, and how like you the prospect of your pageship?"
+
+"I like it greatly, sir, but shall like still more the time when
+I can buckle on armour and take a share of the  fighting with
+the infidels. I would fain, sir, offer to you my deep and humble
+thanks for the great kindness  you have shown me in procuring me
+the appointment of page to the grand master."
+
+The knight smiled kindly. "There are the less thanks due, lad,
+inasmuch as I did it not for you, but for the  dear friend who wrote
+to me on your behalf. However, I trust that you will do credit to
+my nomination by  your conduct here."
+
+"There is a letter from our grand prior which I have brought to
+you," Sir Guy said. "He commended the lad  to me warmly, and seems
+to be greatly pleased with his conduct."
+
+D'Aubusson cut the silken string that bound the missive together,
+and read the letter.
+
+"He does indeed speak warmly," he said, as he laid it down on the
+table.
+
+"He tells me that the lad, young as he was, had been well trained
+when he came, and that he worked with  great diligence during
+the five months he was in the House, and displayed such skill and
+strength for his  age, as to surprise his preceptors, who prophesied
+that he would turn out a stout swordsman, and would be  a credit
+to the Order."
+
+"He is well furnished with garments both for ordinary and state
+occasions," Sir Guy said; "and in this  packet are some sixty gold
+crowns, which are the last remains of his patrimony, and which I
+was to hand to  you in order to pay the necessary expenses during
+his pageship."
+
+"He could have done without that," D'Aubusson said.  "Recommended
+to me as he is, I would have seen  that he lacked nothing, but was
+provided with all necessaries for his position. I will in the future
+take care  that in all things he is on a par with his companions."
+He touched a bell on the table, and a servitor entered.
+
+"Tell Richard de Deauville to come here," he said.
+
+A minute later the hangings at the door were pushed aside, and a
+lad about a year older than Gervaise  appeared, and, bowing deeply
+to the knight, stood in a respectful attitude, awaiting his orders.
+
+"Deauville, take this youth, Gervaise Tresham to your room. He is
+appointed one of the pages of the grand  master. He is English,
+but he speaks French as well as you do, having lived in France for
+some years. Take  him to your apartment and treat him kindly and
+well, seeing that he is a stranger and new to all here.  Tomorrow
+he will go to the palace."
+
+Gervaise bowed deeply to the two knights, and then followed the
+page.
+
+"I suppose you arrived in that ship which came in today," the latter
+said, as soon as they had left the room.   "You are in luck indeed
+to have obtained a pageship at the grand master's. You begin to
+count your time at  once, while we do not begin to count ours until
+we are seventeen. Still, good luck may befall us yet, for if  the
+grand master dies, Sir Peter is sure to be chosen to succeed him.
+Then, you see, we too shall be pages of  the grand master."
+
+"How many are there of you?"
+
+"Only De Lille and myself. Of course D'Aubusson will take on the
+grand master's present pages; but as  there are five vacancies on
+an average every year, he will be able to find room for us among
+the number."
+
+"Why, how many pages has the grand master?" Gervaise asked, in
+surprise.
+
+"Sixteen of them, so you may guess the duties are easy enough,
+as only two are generally employed,  except, of course on solemn
+occasions."
+
+"Are there any other English besides myself?"
+
+The boy shook his head. "There are eight belonging to the French
+langues; the others are Spaniards,  Italians, or Germans. There,
+this is our room and this is De Lille. De Lille, this is the grand
+master's new  page, Master Gervaise Tresham, and our lord says we
+are to treat him kindly and entertain him well until  tomorrow,
+when he will go to the palace. He speaks our language, and has been
+some years in France."
+
+"How came you to be there?" De Lille asked Gervaise.
+
+"My father was a Lancastrian, and my mother a great friend of our
+Queen Margaret of Anjou, and they  were with her all the time she
+was in exile."
+
+"How quarrelsome you English are!" De Lille said. "You seem to be
+always fighting among yourselves."
+
+"I don't think," Gervaise said, with a smile, "there is any love
+lost between Louis of France and the Duke of  Burgundy, to say
+nothing of other great lords."
+
+"No; you are right there. But though we talk a great deal about
+fighting, it is only occasionally that we  engage in it."
+
+The pages' room was a small one. It contained two pallets, which
+served as seats by day, and two wooden  chests, in which they kept
+their clothes.
+
+Their conversation was interrupted by the ringing of a bell.
+
+"That is supper," De Lille said, jumping up. "We will leave you
+here while we go down to stand behind our  lord's chair. When the
+meal is over we will bring a pasty or something else good, and a
+measure of wine,  and have our supper together up here; and we will
+tell the servitors to bring up another pallet for you. Of  course,
+you can go down with us if you like."
+
+"Thank you, I would much rather stay here. Every one would be
+strange to me, and having nothing to do I  should feel in the way."
+
+The boys nodded, and taking their caps ran off, while Gervaise,
+tired by the excitement of the day, lay  down on the bed which a
+servant brought up a few minutes after they had left him, and slept
+soundly until  their return.
+
+"I think I have been asleep," he said, starting up when they entered
+the room again.
+
+"You look as if you had, anyhow," De Lille laughed. "It was the
+best thing you could do. We have brought  up supper. We generally
+sit down and eat after the knights have done, but this is much
+better, as you are  here." They sat down on the beds, carved the
+pasty with their daggers, and after they had finished Gervaise
+gladly accepted the proposal of the others to take a walk round
+the walls.
+
+They started from the corner of the castle looking down upon the
+spit of land dividing the two ports.
+
+"You see," De Lille said, "there is a row of small islands across
+the mouth of the outer port, and the guns of  St.  Nicholas, and
+those on this wall, would prevent any hostile fleet from entering."
+
+"I hardly see what use that port is, for it lies altogether outside
+the town, and vessels could not unload  there."
+
+"No. Still, it forms a useful place of refuge. In case a great
+fleet came to attack us, our galleys would lay up  in the inner
+port, which would be cleared of all the merchant craft, as these
+would hamper the defence; they  would, therefore, be sent round
+into the outer port, where they would be safe from any attack by
+sea,  although they would doubtless be burnt did an army besiege
+the town."
+
+Passing along the walls of the grand master's palace, which was a
+strongly fortified building, and formed a  citadel that could be
+defended after the lower town and the rest of the castle had been
+taken, they came to  the western angle of the fortifications.
+
+"You must know that each langue has charge of a separate part of
+the wall. From the foot of the mole of St.   Nicholas to the grand
+master's palace it is in charge of France. On the line where we now
+are, between the  palace and the gate of St. George, it is held by
+Germany. From that gate to the Spanish tower Auvergne is  posted.
+England takes the wall between the Spanish tower and that of St.
+Mary. You defend only the lower  storey of that tower, the upper
+part being held by Aragon, whose charge extends up to the gate of
+St. John.  Thence to the tower of Italy -- behind which lies the
+Jews' quarter -- Provence is in charge, while the sea  front thence
+to the mole of St. Nicholas, is held by Italy and Castile, each
+taking half. Not only have the  langues the charge of defending each
+its portion of the wall, but of keeping it in order at all times;
+and I  may say that nowhere is the wall better kept or more fairly
+decorated with carvings than where England  holds."
+
+"You have not told me who defends the palace itself."
+
+"That is in charge of a force composed of equal numbers of picked
+knights from each langue."
+
+Gervaise leant on the battlement and looked with admiration at the
+scene beyond. The land side was  surrounded by hills, the ground
+rising very gradually from the foot of the walls. Every yard of
+ground was  cultivated, and was covered with brilliant vegetation.
+Groves and orchards occurred thickly, while the  slopes were dotted
+with chapels, summer houses -- in which the natives of the city
+spent most of their time  in the hot season -- and other rustic
+buildings.
+
+"What a rich and beautiful country!" he said.
+
+"It is very pleasant to look at," De Lille agreed. "But all this
+would be a sore disadvantage to us if the Turks  were besieging
+us, for the groves and orchards would conceal their approaches,
+the walls and buildings  would give them shelter, and our cannon
+would be of little use until they reached the farther side of the
+ditch. If the Turks come, I hear it is decided to level all the
+buildings and walls, and to chop down every  tree."
+
+"If they were to plant their cannon on the hills they would do us
+much harm," Gervaise remarked.
+
+"The Turks are clumsy gunners they say," Deauville replied, "and
+they would but waste their powder and  ball at that distance,
+without making a breach in our walls."
+
+"Even if they did, they could surely scarce pass that deep fosse,"
+Gervaise said, looking down into the  tremendous cutting in the
+solid rock that ran round the whole circuit of the walls; it was
+from forty to sixty  feet deep, and from ninety to a hundred and
+forty feet wide. It was from this great cutting that the stones
+for  the construction of the walls, towers, and buildings of the
+town had been taken, the work having been going  on ever since the
+knights established themselves at Rhodes, and being performed by
+a host of captives  taken in war, together with labour hired from
+neighboring islands. Upon this immense work the Order had  expended
+no small proportion of their revenue since their capture of the
+island in 1310, and the result was a  fortress that, under the
+conditions of warfare of that age, seemed almost impregnable; and
+this without any  natural advantage of position.
+
+In addition to the five great towers or bastions, the wall was
+strengthened by square towers at short  intervals.  On looking
+down from the wall upon which the three pages were standing, on to
+the lower town,  the view was a singular one. The houses were all
+built of stone, with flat roofs, after the manner of most  Eastern
+cities. The streets were very narrow, and were crossed at frequent
+intervals by broad stone arches.  These had the effect, not only
+of giving shelter from an enemy's fire, but of affording means by
+which  troops could march rapidly across the town upon the roofs
+of the houses to reinforce the defenders of the  wall, wherever
+pressed by the enemy. Thus the town from above presented the
+appearance of a great  pavement, broken only by dark and frequently
+interrupted lines.
+
+"How different to the towns at home!" Gervaise exclaimed, as,
+after gazing long upon the beautiful country  outside the walls,
+he turned and looked inward. "One would hardly know that it was a
+town at all."
+
+"Yes, it is rather different to the view from the top of the tower
+of Notre Dame, which I ascended while I  was staying in Paris.
+But this sort of building is best here; the thickness of the stone
+roofs keeps out the heat  of the sun, and it is only when it is
+almost overhead that it shines down into the narrow streets. As you
+can  see by the number of the people on the roofs, they use them
+as a resort in the evening. Then carpets are  spread, and they
+receive visitors, and can talk to their neighbours over the low
+walls that separate the roofs.  You can trace the divisions. Some
+of the house roofs are larger than others, but all are upon the
+same level;  this being the regulation, in order that there might
+be free passage everywhere for the troops."
+
+By the time they had made the circuit of the walls darkness had
+fallen, and concealed the martial features of  the scene. Lights
+twinkled everywhere upon the stone terraces; the sound of lutes and
+other musical  instruments came up softly on the still air, with
+the hum of talk and laughter. The sea lay as smooth as a  mirror,
+and reflected the light of the stars, and the black hulls of the
+galleys and ships in the harbour lay still  and motionless.
+
+Greatly pleased with his first experience of the city that was to
+be his future home, Gervaise returned, with  his companions, to
+the auberge of Auvergne.
+
+The next morning the bailiff D'Aubusson bade Gervaise accompany
+him to the palace of the grand master.  Here he introduced him to
+Orsini, an old and feeble man, who, after a few kind words, handed
+him over to  the chamberlain, who, in turn, led him to the official
+who was in charge of the pages. That officer took him  down to the
+courtyard, where four young knights were engaged in superintending
+the military exercises of  the pages. The scene was exactly the
+same as that to which Gervaise had been accustomed at the House in
+London. Some of the lads were fighting with blunted swords, others
+were swinging heavy bars of iron,  climbing ropes, or vaulting on
+to the back of a wooden horse. All paused as the official entered
+with his  charge.
+
+"This is your new comrade, boys," he said -- "Master Gervaise
+Tresham, a member of the English langue.  Be good comrades to him.
+By the reports I hear I am sure that you will find him a worthy
+companion."
+
+The pages had been prepared to like the newcomer, for it was well
+known that he owed his appointment to  the bailiff of Auvergne,
+who was the most popular of the officials of the Order, and who
+was already  regarded as the grand master. His appearance confirmed
+their anticipation.  His fair complexion and nut  brown hair tinged
+with gold, cut somewhat short, but with a natural wave, contrasted
+with their darker  locks and faces bronzed by the sun. There was
+an honest and frank look in his grey eyes, and an expression  of
+good temper on his face, though the square chin and firm lips spoke
+of earnestness and resolution of  purpose. The official took him
+round the circle and presented him first to the knights and then
+to each of his  comrades.
+
+"You may as well join them in their exercises. In that way you will
+sooner become at home with them."
+
+Gervaise at once laid down his mantle, removed his doublet, and then
+joined the others. There was but one  half hour remaining before
+they broke off to go to dinner, which was at half past ten, but
+the time sufficed  to show the young pages that this English lad
+was the equal of all -- except two or three of the oldest -- both
+in strength and in knowledge of arms. He could climb the rope
+with any of them, could vault on to the  wooden horse with a heavy
+cuirass and backpiece on him, and held his own in a bout with
+swords against  Conrad von Berghoff, who was considered the best
+swordplayer among them. As soon as the exercises  were over all
+proceeded to the bath, and then to dinner. The meal was a simple
+one, but Gervaise enjoyed it  thoroughly, for the table was loaded
+with an abundance of fruits of kinds altogether novel to him, and
+which he found delicious.
+
+The official in charge of them sat at the head of the table, and
+the meal was eaten in silence. After it was  over and they had
+retired to their own rooms discipline was at an end, and they were
+free to amuse  themselves as they liked.  There were many questions
+to be asked and answered, but his display of strength  and skill
+in the courtyard saved Gervaise from a good deal of the teasing to
+which a newcomer among a  party of boys is always exposed.
+
+He, on his part, learnt that the duties of the pages were very light.
+Two only were on duty each day, being  in constant attendance on
+the grand master, and accompanying him wherever he went. When he
+dined in  public four of them waited on him at table, and one of
+them performed the duties of taster. If he returned to  the palace
+after dark, six others lined the staircase with torches. On occasions
+of state ceremony, and at the  numerous religious festivals, all
+were in attendance. By this time Gervaise's trunks had been brought
+over  from the English auberge, where they had been conveyed from
+the ship, and his garments were taken out  and inspected by his
+comrades, who all admitted that they were, in point of beauty of
+colour and material,  and in fashion, equal to their own.
+
+"You will have to get one more suit, Gervaise," one of the lads
+said. "At one or two of the grand  ceremonies every year we are
+all dressed alike; that is the rule. On other occasions we wear
+what we  choose, so that our garments are handsome, and I think it
+looks a good deal better than when we are dressed  alike; though
+no doubt in religious processions that is more appropriate.
+De Ribaumont, our governor, will  give orders for the supply of
+your state costume. He is a good fellow. Of course, he has to be
+rather strict  with us; but so long as there is nothing done that
+he considers discreditable to our position, he lets us do  pretty
+nearly as we like.
+
+"We have four hours a day at our military exercises, and two hours
+with the sub-chaplain, who teaches us  our books and religious
+duties. The rest of our time we can use as we like, except that every
+day eight of us  ride for two hours and practise with the lance;
+for although it is at sea we fight the Moslems, we are  expected
+to become finished knights in all matters. These eight horses are
+kept for our service, and such as  choose may at other times ride
+them.  On Saturdays we are free from all our exercises; then some
+of us  generally go on horseback for long excursions on the island,
+while others take boats and go out on the sea;  one afternoon in
+the week we all make a trip in a galley, to learn our duties on
+board."
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV A PROFESSED KNIGHT
+
+
+Gervaise was soon quite at home in the palace of the grand master,
+and his companions were, like other  boys, of varying characters;
+but as all were of noble families, were strongly impressed with
+the importance  of the Order and the honour of their own position,
+and were constantly in contact with stately knights and  grave
+officials, their manners conformed to those of their elders; and
+even among themselves there was no  rough fun, or loud disputes,
+but a certain courtesy of manner that was in accordance with their
+surroundings. This came naturally to Gervaise, brought up as he had
+been by his father and mother, and  having at frequent intervals
+stayed with them for months at the various royal castles in which
+Margaret of  Anjou and her son had been assigned apartments during
+their exile. Even at St. John's house the novices  with whom he
+lived were all a good deal older than himself, and the discipline
+of the house was much more  strict than that at Rhodes.
+
+He enjoyed both his exercises with the knights and the time spent
+with the sub-chaplain, no small  proportion of the hours of study
+being occupied in listening to stories of chivalry; it being
+considered one  of the most important parts of a knight's education
+that he should have a thorough acquaintance, not only  with the
+laws of chivalry, but with the brave deeds both of former and of
+living knights, with the relations  of the noble houses of Europe
+to each other, especially of the many great families whose members
+were  connected with the Order of St. John.
+
+These matters formed, indeed, the main subject of their studies. All
+were taught to read and write, but this  was considered sufficient
+in the way of actual instruction. The rules of the Order had to be
+committed to  memory. Beyond this their reading consisted largely
+of the lives of saints, especially of those who  distinguished
+themselves by their charity or their devotion to their vows of
+poverty, to both of which the  members of the Order were pledged.
+Gervaise, however, could see around him no signs whatever of  poverty
+on their part. It was true that they all lived and fed together in
+the auberges of their respective  langues, and that they possessed
+no houses or establishments of their own; but the magnificence of
+their  armour and attire, and the lavish expenditure of some upon
+their pleasures, contrasted strangely with the  poverty to which
+they had vowed themselves. It was true that in many cases the means
+to support the  expenditure was derived from the shares the knights
+received of the plunder acquired in their captures of  Moslem ships;
+but undoubtedly many must have possessed large private means; the
+bailiffs, for example,  although only required by the rules to
+place before the knights at their auberges the rations they received
+for them, with such luxuries as could be purchased by their yearly
+allowance for that purpose, expended  annually very large sums in
+addition, and supplied their tables with every dainty, in order to
+gain popularity  and goodwill among the members of the langue.
+
+Not only did the post of bailiff confer upon its owner a very
+high position at Rhodes, but it was a stepping  stone to the most
+lucrative offices in their langues. The bailiffs at Rhodes had the
+right of claiming any of  the grand priories or bailiwicks at home
+that might fall vacant, and the grand master was frequently chosen
+from among their number, as, by being present at Rhodes, they had
+many advantages in the way of making  themselves popular among the
+electors. The emoluments of some of these provincial bailiwicks
+were large;  and as the bailiffs at Rhodes were generally elected
+by seniority -- although younger knights who had  greatly distinguished
+themselves were sometimes chosen -- they were usually glad to resign
+the heavy work  and responsibility of their position at Rhodes,
+and to retire to the far easier position of a provincial bailiff.
+In the majority of cases, doubtless, the fortunes of the high
+officials were obtained from the money amassed  when in possession
+of rich commanderies at home; but even this was assuredly incompatible
+with their  vows of poverty.
+
+His hours of leisure Gervaise spent either on the water or in the
+saddle, and his love of exercise of all sorts  excited the wonder
+and even the amusement of his companions, who for the most part
+preferred spending  the time at their disposal in sleep, in idly
+looking out from a shaded room at what was going on outside, or
+in visits to friends and relations at the auberges of the langues
+to which they belonged. The natural  consequence was, that by the
+time he reached the end of his three years' pageship, Gervaise was
+indisputably superior in strength, activity, and skill in military
+exercises, to any of his companions. The  majority of these, after
+completing their time, returned to the headquarters of their langue
+at home, to pass  their time there, until of an age to be eligible
+for the charge of a commandery obtained for them by family  influence,
+which had no small share in the granting of these appointments.  As
+it was known, however, that  Gervaise intended to remain permanently
+in the Island, his progress was watched with particular attention
+by his instructors; and, seeing his own earnestness in the matter,
+they took special pains with his training.  The bailiff of Auvergne
+continued to take much interest in him, inquiring often from the
+officers in charge  of the pages, and from his instructors, of
+his conduct and progress, and occasionally sending for him to his
+auberge and talking with him as to his life and progress. Just before
+his pageship terminated, he said to him,  "I was rather puzzled at
+first, Gervaise, as to what we should do with you when your term
+of office  concluded, but I am so no longer, for, although you are
+some two years younger than the professed knights  who come out
+here, you are better fitted than the majority to take your place
+in the naval expeditions, and  to fight the Moslem pirates. I will
+see that you have your share of these adventures. All young knights
+are,  as you know, obliged to make three voyages, but beyond that
+many of them do not care to share in the  rough life at sea, and
+prefer the bustle, and, I grieve to say, the gaiety and pleasures
+of this city. For one,  then, really eager to distinguish himself,
+the opportunities are frequent. When danger threatens, or heavy
+engagements are expected, every knight is desirous of bearing his
+part in the fray; but this is not the case  when the work to be done
+consists of scouring the sea for weeks, without perchance coming
+across a single  pirate. Of course, as soon as your pageship is
+over you will go to the English auberge, but I shall still keep
+my eye upon you, and shall do my best to help you to achieve
+distinction; and I shall take upon myself the  providing of your
+arms and armour as a knight."
+
+Accordingly, on the day on which his duties as a page terminated,
+two servitors of the auberge of Auvergne  brought across to the
+palace a suit of fine armour and a sword, a battleaxe, a lance, and
+a dagger; also three  complete suits of clothes, two of them for
+ordinary wear, and one for state occasions. The next day  Gervaise
+took the oaths of the Order in the Church of St. John. The aged
+master himself received the vows,  and formally inducted him as a
+professed knight of the Order, Peter D'Aubusson and the bailiff of
+the  English langue acting as his sponsors, vouching that he was of
+noble blood and in all ways fitted to become  a knight of Justice,
+this being the official title of the professed knights of the
+Order. Ten newly arrived  novices were inducted at the same time,
+and the ceremony was a stately one, attended by a number of the
+knights from each langue, all in full armour.
+
+The ceremony over, Gervaise bore the title of Sir Gervaise Tresham;
+but this was an honorary rather than a  real title, as the Order
+did not profess to bestow the honour of knighthood, and it was usual
+for its members  to receive the accolade at the hands of secular
+knights. At the conclusion of the ceremony, he returned with  the
+bailiff of the English langue to the auberge, and took up his
+quarters there. By his frequent visits he was  well known to all
+the members, and in a day or two felt as much at home as he had done
+in the pages' room  in the palace. A week was given to him before
+he was assigned to any special duty, and he was glad when  he
+was told off as one of the knights who were to take their turn in
+superintending the work of the slaves  employed in strengthening the
+fortifications, although he would rather that any other employment
+should  have been assigned to him, because he felt deep pity for
+the unfortunate men who were engaged in the  work.
+
+He knew well enough that if he himself were ever made prisoner by
+the Turks, his lot would be as hard and  as hopeless as that of
+the Moslem captives; but this, although he often repeated it to
+himself in order to  abate his feeling of commiseration, was but a
+poor satisfaction. He saw one side of the picture, and the  other
+was hidden from him; and although he told himself that after slaving
+in a Turkish galley he would  feel a satisfaction at seeing those
+who had been his tyrants suffering the same fate, he was well aware
+that  this would not be the case, and that his own sufferings would
+only make him sympathise more deeply with  those of others. He had
+found, soon after his arrival on the Island, that it was best to
+keep his feelings on  this subject to himself.  While the knights
+were bound, in accordance with their vows, to relieve sufferings
+of any kind among Christians, they seemed to regard their captives
+rather in the light of brute beasts than  human beings. The slaves
+were struck on the smallest provocation, and even the killing of
+a slave was  considered a very venial offence, and punished only
+because the slave was of value to the Order.
+
+It was true that edicts were from time to time published by the
+council, enjoining fair treatment of slaves,  and it was specially
+ordered that those employed as servants in the auberges were not
+to be struck. The lot  of these servants was, indeed, very much
+easier than that of those engaged on the public works, and such
+occupation was therefore considered a privilege, the servants being
+for the most part selected from among  the captives of superior
+rank.
+
+For the next six months Gervaise worked at various duties in the
+town. He was employed for a fortnight in  the infirmary, then for
+a while he was transferred to the galleys; but for the most part
+he was with the slaves  working on the fortifications. At the end
+of that time he was, to his great delight, informed by the bailiff
+that he was one of the six knights of the langue told off to join
+a galley that was on the point of sailing.  Among those going in
+her was Sir Ralph Harcourt, one of his companions on the journey
+from England.
+
+"So you are to go with us, Gervaise," the young knight said, "to
+try your luck for the first time against the  infidels.  This is
+my third voyage, and I hope that it will be more fortunate than
+its predecessors, for,  beyond picking up two or three small craft,
+which did not venture upon resistance, we gained neither  honour nor
+booty. I regard you as having specially good fortune, and besides
+being glad that we shall be  together, I expect that you will bring
+good luck to us, and that we shall meet with foes worth contending
+with.  The corsairs have been very active of late, and have
+captured many prizes, while, on the other hand,  our galleys have
+been unfortunate, and have but seldom come upon the miscreants."
+
+"How many knights will there be on board?"
+
+"Forty. Aragon, like us, furnishes five, Germany ten, Portugal
+five, Auvergne ten, and Provence five. We  shall be commanded by
+Sir Louis Ricord, a knight of Auvergne, and we could wish no better,
+for he has  proved himself a good seaman and a brave captain. Two
+other galleys are to start with us. We are to cruise  separately
+unless one gets news of a force so superior that he will need aid
+to attack it, when he will meet  the others at a rendezvous agreed
+upon, and we shall work together."
+
+"Who are the other three Englishmen?"
+
+"John Boswell, Marmaduke Lumley, and Adam Tedbond -- all, as you
+know, brave knights and good  companions."
+
+That evening Gervaise received a message from D'Aubusson, requesting
+him to call at his auberge.
+
+"So you are going to sea, Sir Gervaise? I hear from your bailiff
+that you have been working to his  satisfaction in the town."
+
+"Yes, sir. I shall indeed be glad to change it for a life at sea.
+In truth, it is grievous to me to witness the  sufferings of the
+slaves, and I would rather do any other work."
+
+"They are far better off than the Christians who fall into the hands
+of the Turks," the bailiff said; "and,  moreover, it is because
+their countrymen are preparing to attack us that we are forced to
+use their labour in  strengthening our fortifications. They have
+naught to complain of in the way of food. Still, I would myself
+gladly see their lot alleviated; but we could not afford to keep so
+great a number of captives in idleness;  they must work for their
+living. Had it not been for their labour we could never have built
+and fortified the  city. After all, they are little worse off than
+our serfs at home; they build our castles and till our land."
+
+"It may be so, sir; but with us in England men are free, and it
+was, when I first came, strange to me to see  them working under
+the fear of the whip. It is necessary, I know, that such work should
+be done, but I own  that I shall be glad to be away from the sight
+of the poor wretches, pirates and enemies of the faith though  they
+be."
+
+"I can understand your feelings, and I too felt somewhat the same
+when I first came here. Nevertheless,  there is work that must be
+done if the Order is not to be crushed by the infidels. Here are
+captives, for the  most part malefactors, who have to be fed; and
+there is no injustice in their having, like all men, to give  work
+for food.  I have learnt to see this and recognise the necessity,
+though I would that the work could be  obtained without the use of
+harshness and severity. We ourselves are prepared at any moment to
+sacrifice  our lives for the good of the Order and for the great
+cause, and it would be wrong, nay, sinful, not to use the  means
+that have been placed ready to our hand. Now, Sir Gervaise, I wish
+you a pleasant voyage. You will  find the life somewhat hard, after
+your three years' residence at the palace, but this I know you will
+not  mind. I have specially commended you to Ricord as one in whom
+I am personally interested, and from  whom I hope great things in
+the future. Be brave; be resolute. From what you have said I need
+not say -- be  merciful. Fulfill all orders promptly and without
+question; bear yourself courteously to all; above all things,
+remember that you are a soldier, not only of the Order, but of the
+Cross."
+
+The next day Gervaise embarked with his companions on board the
+galley. It was a long, low boat, similar  to those in use by the
+Venetians and Genoese. It was rowed by fifty slaves, who slept at
+night on or beneath  the benches they sat on by day. The knights
+occupied the great cabins in the poop. There were two tiers of
+these; the upper one contained the little cabin of the commander,
+while the rest of the space on this deck,  and that below it, was
+used by the knights in common. In the upper cabin they took their
+meals, and a third  of their number slept there, the remainder in
+the cabin below. A fourth of their number were, however,  always
+on guard, lest any attempt at a rising or escape should be made by
+the galley slaves.
+
+On leaving the harbour the galley, with its two consorts, rowed
+north, and Gervaise learnt that they were to  cruise between the
+mainland and the islands. Some of these were in the hands of the
+Turks, while others  were still occupied by Greeks.
+
+Except when there was a formal and actual state of war, the Moslem
+and Christian islands remained in a  state of neutrality, trading
+with each other and avoiding all unfriendly proceedings that would
+lead to  struggles which would be fatal to the prosperity of both.
+The Archipelago, and indeed the whole of the  eastern portion of
+the Mediterranean, was infested by pirates, fitted out, for the most
+part, on the mainland.  These, when in force, openly kept the sea,
+attacking the Christian merchant ships, but when cruising alone
+they hid in unfrequented bays, or behind uninhabited islets, until
+they could pounce upon a passing ship  whose size promised an easy
+capture. The Order of St. John furnished a maritime police, earning
+thereby  the deep gratitude of Spain, France, and Italy. They were
+aided occasionally by the Venetians, but these,  being frequently
+engaged in quarrels with their neighbours, did but a small share of
+this work, only sending  their fleets to sea when danger threatened
+some of their possessions in the Levant.
+
+"This is delightful, Ralph," Gervaise said, as they stood together
+on the poop, looking back at the receding  city.
+
+"What a pleasant change it is from standing in the broiling sun
+watching those poor wretches toiling at the  fortifications! There
+is only one drawback to my pleasure.  I wish that we carried sails,
+and were moved  along by the breeze, instead of by the exertions
+of the slaves."
+
+"Much chance we should have of catching a pirate under such
+circumstances!" Ralph said, laughing. "You  might as well set a
+tortoise to catch a hare."
+
+"I don't say that we should not be obliged to carry rowers, Ralph;
+but all the prizes that have been brought  in since I have been at
+Rhodes carry masts and sails, as well as oars, and, as I understand,
+for the most part  cruise about under sail, and only use the oars
+when chasing or fleeing."
+
+"That is so; because, you see, in most cases the crew themselves
+have to row, and I have no doubt if we had  no slaves to do the
+work we should soon take to masts and sails also; but for speed the
+rowing galleys are  the best, for unless a brisk wind were blowing,
+the mast and sails would but check her progress when the  oars
+were out, and at any rate constrain her to travel only before the
+wind. I know your weakness about the  slaves, Gervaise; but as we
+could neither build our fortifications nor row our galleys without
+them, I cannot  go as far as you do in the matter, though I own
+that I am sometimes sorry for them. But you must remember  that it
+is the fault of their people, and not of ours, that they are here."
+
+"All that is true enough, Ralph, and I cannot gainsay you. Still
+I would rather that we were gliding along  with sails instead of
+being rowed by slaves."
+
+"At any rate, Gervaise, you will not see them ill treated, for I
+myself heard Ricord, just before we were  starting, tell the slave
+overseers that so long as the rowers did fair work they were not
+to use their whips,  and that only if we were in chase of a pirate
+were they to be urged to their utmost exertions."
+
+"I am right glad to hear it, Ralph, and shall be able to enjoy the
+voyage all the more, now you have told me  that such orders have
+been issued."
+
+For a fortnight they cruised about among the islands.  Several times
+boats rowed out from the shore to the  galley with complaints of
+outrages by pirates under a notorious corsair named Hassan Ali,
+who had landed,  burnt villages, killed many of the inhabitants,
+and carried off the rest as slaves; but no one could give any  clue
+to aid them in their search for the corsairs. The time passed very
+pleasantly.  There was no occasion  for speed; often they lay all
+day in some bay, where they could approach near enough to the shore
+to lie in  the shade of trees, while two or three of the knights
+ascended a hill and kept watch there for the appearance  of any
+vessels of a suspicious character.  One morning, after passing the
+night at anchor, Harcourt and  Gervaise were despatched just before
+sunrise to take a look round before the galley got under way. From
+the top of the hill they had an uninterrupted view of the sea,
+studded with islands on all sides of them.  Beyond a few fishing
+boats, looking like black specks on the glassy surface, no craft
+were in sight. They  were about to return to the galley when, taking
+a last look round, Gervaise suddenly exclaimed, "Look,  Ralph!
+There is smoke ascending from that island to the southwest. There
+was none just now."
+
+"You mean from that bay, Gervaise? Yes, I see it; it is not more
+than a light mist."
+
+"It is growing thicker," Gervaise said, "and spreading.  Maybe it
+is but a hut that has accidentally caught  fire, but it seems to
+me that the smoke is rising from several points."
+
+"I think you are right, Gervaise. Let us hurry down with the news.
+It may be that it is a village which has  been attacked by pirates
+who have landed on the other side of the island during the night,
+for I can see no  ships in the bay."
+
+A few minutes' run and they stood on the shore.
+
+"Quick, men!" Ralph said to the rowers of the boat that had brought
+them ashore. "Row your hardest."
+
+The slaves bent to their oars, and they were soon alongside the
+galley, which lay two or three hundred yards  from the shore. Those
+on board had noticed the young knights running down the hill, and,
+marking the  speed at which the boat was rowing, concluded at once
+that they must have observed one of the pirate's  ships.
+
+"Do you see anything of them, Sir Ralph?" the commander shouted,
+as they came close.
+
+"We have seen no ships, Sir Louis, but there is smoke coming up
+from a bay in an island four or five miles  away to the southwest.
+It seems to us that it is far too extensive a fire to be the result
+of an accident, for  there was no smoke until within two or three
+minutes of the time we left, and before we started it was rising
+from several points, and we both think that it must come from a
+village that has been attacked by pirates."
+
+The commander rapidly issued his orders, and in two or three minutes
+the anchor was weighed, the boat  hoisted on deck, and the oars in
+motion.
+
+"Stretch to your oars!" Ricord shouted to the slaves.  "Hitherto
+we have exacted no toil from you, but you  have to work now, and
+woe be to him who does not put out his full strength."
+
+Grateful for the unusual leniency with which they had been treated,
+the slaves bent to their oars, and the  galley sped rapidly
+through the water. On rounding the end of the island there was an
+exclamation of  satisfaction from the knights as they saw wreaths
+of white smoke rising from the distant island.
+
+"There can be no doubt that it is a village in flames," Sir Louis
+said; "and from the suddenness with which  it broke out, it is
+clear that it must have been fired at several points.  You say you
+saw no craft near?" he  asked, turning to Harcourt.
+
+"There were none there, or from the top of the hill we should
+assuredly have made them out, Sir Louis."
+
+"Then the pirates -- if this be, as I hope, their work -- must
+have landed at some other point on the island,  and if they catch
+sight of us they may make for their ship and slip away, unobserved
+by us. Instead of  rowing direct, therefore, we will make for that
+islet to the right, and row round behind it. There are two  others
+almost adjoining it. Once past these, 'tis not more than half
+a mile to that island stretching away  south. Once round that, we
+shall be beyond the one from which we see the smoke rising, and
+can come  down on its southern side. The course will be double the
+distance that it would be if we took a straight line,  but except
+when we cross from island to island we shall not be exposed to
+their view, and may fall upon  their ships before the crews have
+returned from their work of plunder."
+
+The knights fully agreed, and orders were given to the helmsman
+accordingly.
+
+"We must not over fatigue the rowers," the commander said. "We may
+have a long chase if they have  started before we get round."
+
+He therefore gave orders to the slaves that, while they were to
+exert themselves to the utmost when crossing  the open sea, they
+were to relax their efforts and to row within their strength while
+coasting along behind  the islands. On board, everything was made
+in readiness for a fight: the knights buckled on their armour,  the
+cooks set cauldrons of pitch over the fire, the cannoneers loaded
+her eight guns.  It was an hour and a  half after their start
+before they rounded the end of the last island. It extended a little
+farther to the south  than did that to which they were making, and
+as they rounded the point, eager looks were cast in search of  the
+pirate ships. No craft were, however, to be seen.
+
+"They must be in some bay or inlet," the commander said; "they can
+hardly have left, for it would have  taken them half an hour at
+least to cross the island with their booty and captives, and even
+if they made  straight away after having fired the village, their
+ship could have gone no great distance, for we must have  seen her
+if she put to sea -- unless indeed they were anchored on the east
+of the island, and have sailed in  that direction."
+
+"Keep them rowing along steadily," he said to the overseers of the
+slaves; "but do not press them too hard.   We may have a chase yet,
+and need all their strength, for most of these pirates are fast
+craft, and if they  should get a start of three or four miles, it
+will be a long row before we catch them."
+
+They made straight for the island, and on nearing it coasted along
+its southern side. It was some three miles  long, the shore being
+for the most part steep, but here and there falling gradually to
+the water's edge. Two  or three little clusters of houses could be
+seen as they rowed along; one of these was on fire.
+
+"That is good," Sir Louis exclaimed, as, on turning a point, they
+saw the flames. "That cannot have been  lighted long, and we are
+pretty certain to come upon the vessels before the marauders have
+set sail."
+
+Several inlets and small bays were passed, but all were empty.
+A few fishing boats lay on the shore, but  there were no signs of
+life, as no doubt the people would, long since, have taken alarm and
+sought shelter in  the woods. There was a sharp point just before
+they reached the southeastern extremity of the island, and as  the
+galley shot past this, a shout of exultation rose from the knights,
+for, near the mouth of an inlet that now  opened to their view,
+there lay four long, low vessels, above each of which floated the
+Moslem flag. A  number of men were gathered on the shore near the
+ships, and heavily laden boats were passing to and fro.
+
+A yell of rage and alarm rose from the ships as the galley came into
+view. There was a stir and movement  on the shore, and numbers of
+men leapt into the boats there, and started for the ships. These
+were some  quarter of a mile away when first seen, and half that
+distance had been traversed when a puff of smoke shot  out from
+the side of one of them, followed almost immediately by a general
+discharge of their cannon. One  ball tore along the waist of the
+galley, killing six of the rowers, and several oars on both sides
+were broken.  Two balls passed through the cabins in the poop.
+But there was no pause in the advance of the galley. The  whips of
+the slave masters cracked, and the rowers whose oars were intact
+strained at them. There was no  reply from the guns, but the
+knights raised loud the war cry of the Order, a war cry that was
+never heard  without striking a thrill of apprehension among their
+Moslem foes.
+
+As they neared the pirate ships, the helm was put down, and the
+galley brought up alongside the largest of  them and a broadside
+poured into her; then the knights, headed by their commander, leapt
+on to her deck.
+
+Although a number of the crew had not yet come off from shore,
+the Moslems still outnumbered their  assailants, and, knowing that
+their consorts would soon come to their aid, they threw themselves
+in a body  on the Christians. But in a hand-to-hand conflict like
+this, the knights of the Hospital were irresistible.  Protected
+by their armour and long shields from the blows of their enemies'
+scimitars and daggers, their  long, cross handled swords fell
+with irresistible force on turbaned head and coat-of-mail, and,
+maintaining  regular order and advancing like a wall of steel along
+the deck, they drove the Moslems before them, and  the combat would
+soon have terminated had not a shout been raised by one of the
+overseers of the slaves.  One of the other ships had rowed alongside
+the galley, and the crew were already leaping on board it. At  the
+same moment another ship came up alongside that they had boarded,
+while the fourth was maneuvering  to bring up under her stern.
+
+"Sir John Boswell," Sir Louis shouted, "do you and your countrymen,
+with the knights of Spain, finish with  these miscreants; knights
+of Germany and Provence keep back the boarders; knights of Auvergne
+follow  me," and he leapt down into the galley.
+
+The English and Spanish knights redoubled their exertions. The
+Moslems endeavoured to rally, seeing that  help was at hand, and
+that but a small body were now opposed to them, but their numbers
+availed little. The  ten knights kept their line, and, hewing
+their way forward, pressed them so hotly that the Turks broke and
+sprang over the bulwarks into the sea. Then the knights looked
+round.  A fierce fight was going on between  those of Germany and
+Provence and the enemy, who strove desperately to board from the
+ship alongside.  The other vessel was now almost touching the stern,
+and her crew were swarming to her side in readiness to  leap on
+board as soon as the vessels touched.
+
+"We will keep them at bay there," Sir John Boswell shouted. "Do
+you, Don Pedro, and your comrades, aid  Ricord. When his foes are
+finished with, you can come back to help us."
+
+Then, with the four English knights, he ran along the deck, and
+reached the stern just in time to hurl  backwards the Moslems, who
+had already obtained a footing. For a time the five knights kept
+back the  surging mass of their foes. The deck was wide enough
+for each to have fair play for his sword, and in vain  the pirates
+strove to obtain a footing.
+
+At last Sir Marmaduke Lumley fell, severely wounded by an arrow
+from a Moslem marksman, and before  the others could close the gap
+a score of pirates leapt on to the deck.
+
+"Fall back, comrades, fall back; but keep together!" Sir John Boswell
+shouted, as he cleft the skull of one of  the pirate officers who
+sprang at him. "Sir Louis will soon finish his work, and be here
+to our aid. Ah!" he  exclaimed, looking over his shoulder, as he
+retired a step, "Provence and Germany are overmatched too."
+
+This was indeed the case. Stoutly as they fought the knights were
+unable to guard the whole of the line of  bulwark, and the Moslems
+had already obtained a footing on the deck. The discipline of the
+knights stood  them in good stead. Drawing closely together as they
+retreated, they made a stand on the opposite side of  the deck,
+and were here joined by Sir John Boswell and his companions. They
+now formed a semicircle,  each flank resting on the bulwark, and
+the pirates in vain endeavoured to break their line.  Again and
+again  they flung themselves upon the knights, only to be beaten
+off with heavy loss. At length a loud cheer arose  from the galley,
+and Sir Louis Ricord, with the knights of Auvergne and Spain having
+cleared the galley of  their foes, and carried the pirate that
+had grappled with her, sprang on to the deck of the ship, and fell
+upon  the throng that were attacking the knights there, oblivious
+of what was going on elsewhere. At once the  English knights and
+their comrades took the offensive, and fell upon their assailants
+who, at the sight of the  reinforcement, for a moment stood
+irresolute. For a short time there was a fierce struggle; then the
+pirates  sprang back to their two ships, and endeavoured to cast
+off the grapnels. But the knights followed hotly  upon them, and,
+panic stricken now, the pirates sprang overboard. Many were drowned,
+but the greater part  managed to swim to shore.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V SCOURGES OF THE SEA
+
+
+Breathless and faint from their tremendous exertions, the knights
+removed their helmets.
+
+"By St. Mary," Sir Louis said, "this has been as hard a fight as
+I have ever been engaged in, and well may  we be content with our
+victory! Well fought, my brave comrades!  Each of these vessels
+must have carried  twice our number at least, and we have captured
+four of them; but I fear the cost has been heavy."
+
+Seven knights had fallen, struck down by sword, arrow, or thrust
+of spear. Of the rest but few had escaped  unwounded, for, strong
+as was their armour, the keen Damascus blades of the Moslems had
+in many cases  cut clean through it, and their daggers had found
+entry at points where the armour joined; and, now that the  fight
+was over, several of the knights sank exhausted on the deck from
+loss of blood.
+
+But the dressing of wounds formed part of a knight of St. John's
+training. Those who were unwounded  unbuckled the armour and
+bandaged the wounds. Others fetched wine and water from the galley.
+The  chains of the galley slaves were removed, and these were set
+to clear the decks of the Moslem corpses. The  anchors were dropped,
+for what little wind there was drifted them towards the shore. They
+had learned from  a dying pirate that the vessels were part of the
+fleet of Hassan Ali, a fact that added to the satisfaction felt
+by the knights at their capture, as this man was one of the most
+dreaded pirates of the Levant. They learnt  that he himself had
+not been present, the expedition being under the command of one of
+his lieutenants,  who had fallen in the fight.
+
+"Now, comrades, let us in the first place take food; we have not
+broken our fast this morning. Then let us  consider what had best be
+done, for indeed we have got as much in our hands as we can manage;
+but let us  leave that till we eat and drink, for we are faint
+from want of food and from our exertions. But we shall  have to
+eat what comes to hand, and that without cooking, for our servants
+all joined the pirates when they  boarded us, and are either dead
+or are ashore there."
+
+A meal was made of bread and fruit, and this with wine sufficed to
+recruit their energies.
+
+"It seems to me, comrades," Sir Louis said, when all had finished,
+"that the first thing is to search the holds  of these vessels
+and see what valuables are stored there. These may be all carried
+on board one ship, and  the others must be burnt, for it is clear
+that, as there are four of them, we cannot take them to Rhodes; and
+even with one and our galley we should fare but ill, if we fell in
+with two or three more of Hassan's ships."
+
+"But how about the pirates on shore, Sir Louis?" a knight asked.
+"There were very many who could not get  off to their ships during
+the fight, and scores must have swum ashore. I should say that
+there must be full  two hundred, and it will be a grievous thing
+for the islanders if we leave them there."
+
+"It is certain," the commander said, "that we are not strong enough
+to attack them, for were we to land, a  party would have to be
+left on board, or the pirates might elude our search, seize some
+fishing boats, and  regain possession.  Certainly, we are in no
+position to divide our forces."
+
+"Methinks," Sir John Boswell said, "that the best plan would be to
+send a boat, manned with ten galley  slaves, taking two or three of
+us to the rendezvous, to fetch hither the other two galleys. With
+their aid we  might take all the four ships safe into port, after
+first clearing the island of these pirates. It is but forty miles
+away, and eight hours' rowing would take us there."
+
+There was a general murmur of assent, for all wished that the trophies
+of their bravery should, if possible,  be carried to Rhodes.
+
+"That will certainly be the best plan, Sir John, though it may
+detain us here for two or three days, or even  more, for it is quite
+uncertain when the other two galleys may put in at the rendezvous.
+Will you yourself  undertake the mission?"
+
+"With pleasure."
+
+"How many will you take with you?"
+
+"Two will be sufficient, for we shall have no fighting to do, as
+we shall have to trust to our speed if we fall  in with an enemy.
+I will take, with your permission, Sir Ralph Harcourt and Sir
+Gervaise Tresham, both of  whom have today fought with distinguished
+bravery. Indeed, I owe my life to them, for more than once,  when
+I was hotly pressed, they freed me from my assailants. Truly none
+bore themselves better in the fray  than they did."
+
+Three or four others joined in hearty commendations of the two
+young knights.
+
+"Indeed," one said, "I was greatly surprised to see how Tresham bore
+himself. He is but a lad, with scarce,  one would think, strength
+to hold his own in such a fray. It chanced that he was next to me
+in the circle, and  for a time I kept my eye on him, thinking he
+might require my aid; but I soon saw that I need not trouble  myself
+on his account, for he wielded his weapon as doughtily as the best
+knight of the Order could have  done, and one of the proofs is
+that, while most of us bear marks of the conflict, he has escaped
+without  scratch. I trust, Sir Louis, that when you give an account
+of the fighting you will specially mention that this,  the youngest
+knight of the Order, bore himself as stoutly as any of them. I say
+this, Sir John, because, not  being of your langue, I can speak
+more warmly than you can do of his skill and bravery."
+
+"I thank you, De Boysey," Sir John Boswell said, "and I am proud
+that my young countryman should have  so gained your approbation.
+And now," he went on, "while the galley slaves are getting a meal
+-- which  they have right well earned today -- I should like to
+see what there is under the hatches of these ships, so  that I can
+give our comrades in the other galleys some idea of the value of
+this booty we have taken."
+
+They rose from the table, and, going on board the prizes, lifted
+the hatches.
+
+"Beware!" De Boysey exclaimed, looking down into the hold, when
+the first hatch was taken off. "There  are people below."
+
+A chorus of cries followed his exclamation.
+
+"They are the voices of women and children," Sir Louis exclaimed.
+"They must be captives."
+
+This turned out to be so. In the holds of the four ships were
+found over a hundred and fifty women and  children; these had been
+brought on board in the first boat loads by the pirates, and when
+the Christian  galley had been seen coming round the point, had
+been thrust below, and the hatches thrown over them.  They had
+heard the din of battle above, but knew not how the conflict had
+terminated, and, being afraid to  cry out, had remained silent until,
+on the hatch being lifted, they had seen the figures of Christian
+knights  standing in the bright sunshine. All had come from the
+village on the other side of the island. They related  how the
+pirates had suddenly burst upon them, had slaughtered all the men,
+set fire to the village, and had  driven them before them across
+the island to the ships. The poor creatures were delighted at their
+escape  from slavery, but at the same time were full of grief at
+the loss of husbands, fathers, and sons.
+
+Some laughed, others cried; while some thanked God for their rescue
+others heaped imprecations upon the  authors of their misfortunes.
+
+The knights explained to them that for a short time they must remain
+on board, as half the pirates were still  on shore, but that aid
+would soon arrive that would enable them to clear the island.
+
+Half an hour later Sir John Boswell, with the two young knights,
+started in a rowing boat, manned by ten of  the galley slaves. The
+wind had sprung up since the fight ceased, and as it was nearly
+astern, they  anticipated that they would make a good passage, and
+be at the little islet, named as the place of  rendezvous, before
+nightfall.
+
+Among the many bales of rich merchandise in the hold of the pirate
+vessels an abundance of wine had been  discovered, and of this a
+tankard had been given to each of the slaves, by Sir Louis's orders,
+as a token of  satisfaction at their work in the morning.
+
+They had gone some two miles when, from one of the inlets in the
+island they had left a large fishing boat  was seen to issue out.
+
+"By St. George!" Sir John exclaimed, "that boat must be full of
+pirates. And if they see us, which they  cannot help doing, and
+take it in their heads to chase us, we shall have a hard time of
+it."
+
+The fishing boat for a few minutes kept along the coast, and then
+suddenly her course was altered, and her  head directed towards
+their boat.
+
+"Now stretch to your oars," Sir John, who spoke some Turkish, said
+to the slaves. "Keep ahead of that boat,  and I promise you, on
+my honour as a Christian knight, that I will myself purchase your
+freedom as soon as  we get to Rhodes."
+
+With a shout of delight, the galley slaves bent to their oars, and
+the boat flew along at a greatly increased  speed.
+
+"There is but small chance of our getting away," Sir John said
+quietly. "At present we must be rowing as  fast as they sail; but
+wind never tires, while there are limits to the powers of muscle
+and bone. If those  fellows follow us -- and I doubt not that
+they will, for they must be thirsting for vengeance -- they will
+overtake us long before we get to the rendezvous; and even did we
+reach it, the chances are that we should  not find either of the
+galleys there. We must hold on as long as we can, and as a last
+resource must run  ashore. Unfortunately there are no large islands
+on our way. Nor have we any hope of assistance from our  friends
+behind. The inlet looks east, and they will know nothing of our
+danger; nor, if they did, could they  help us. The galley is short
+handed now, and there are the captured ships to look after, and
+the captives we  rescued. We have only ourselves to depend on."
+
+At the end of an hour's rowing the boat astern had gained little;
+but the exertions of the rowers were telling  severely upon them.
+They were still doing their best, but their breath came in short
+gasps, the rowing was  getting short and unsteady, and there was
+a sensible decrease in the speed of the boat. Three miles ahead of
+them was an islet about half a mile in diameter. In some parts it
+was covered with foliage, but elsewhere it  was bare rock.
+
+"That must be our goal," Sir John said. "They will be close to
+us by the time we get there." Then he said to  the rowers, "Stop
+for a minute to get breath. We will land at that islet ahead, and
+I shall hold to my promise  if we get there in time. Those of you
+who like can remain in the boat until your countrymen come up;
+those  who choose can leave the boat and hide yourselves as best
+you may. I leave the choice to yourselves. If we  are overtaken
+and fall, I cannot keep my promise, and it will be best then for
+you to remain in the boat."
+
+For three or four minutes the slaves bent forward over their oars;
+but as soon as Sir John gave the word they  straightened themselves
+up and began rowing again. The rest had done them good, and they
+again fell into  a long, steady stroke.
+
+"Shall we buckle on our armour again?" Sir Ralph Harcourt asked;
+for they had not put it on when they left  the ship, as the heat
+was very great.
+
+"I think we had better don our mail shirts only. In climbing about
+that rock ahead of us, the less weight we  carry the better, and
+with this heat I would rather fight unprotected than in casque
+and armour. Besides,  there can be little doubt that, if they come
+upon us, it will be our last battle. That craft behind is crowded
+with men, and, armour or no armour, it will come to the same in
+the end.  If it were not that we have a  mission to fulfil, and
+that it is of all things important to send the galleys to aid our
+friends, I would say let  us choose a spot at the foot of the rocks
+there, where they cannot attack us in the rear, and there fight it
+out  as becomes knights of the Cross; but as it is our duty above
+all things to carry this message, we must strive  to preserve our
+lives, and must, if we can, conceal ourselves from these paynims."
+
+"What are you going to do?" Sir John asked the slaves, when they
+were within a quarter of a mile of the  islet. "I should think,
+after we have left the boat, it will be best for you to sit quietly
+on your benches till our  pursuers arrive."
+
+"They would cut our throats at once, Sir Knight; they will be furious
+at our having given them so long a  chase.  Hassan Ali's men care
+little whom they slay, and, irritated by their misfortune, it will
+be naught to  them whether we are Moslem or Christian. I, for one,
+shall take to the woods, and hide."
+
+There was a chorus of assent among the other rowers.
+
+"I trust that you may escape," the knight said. "It is for us
+they will be hunting, and if they catch and slay us  they will not
+trouble to search the island further."
+
+"It seems to me, Sir John," Gervaise said, "that with the aid of
+these good fellows we may yet have a  chance of escape."
+
+"What is your plan, Sir Gervaise?"
+
+"I think, Sir John, that if, when we land, we climb straight up
+that hill, in full sight of the shore, the pirates,  when they see
+us, will follow at once. The slaves should, therefore, be safe for
+a time if they hide in that  wood to the left of the spot we are
+making for. Will you tell them to keep down by the water's edge
+among  the bushes, and that after crossing that crest, we will try
+to make a dash round, so as to join them there. 'Tis  probable that
+most of the pirates will start in pursuit of us, and if we and the
+slaves make a rush for the  shore we may seize our boat, push off,
+and capture their craft, if there are but a few left on board,
+knock out  a plank and scuttle her, and then row away."
+
+"By St. George, your plan is a good one, Tresham!  A right good
+scheme, and we will try it."
+
+He at once translated what Gervaise had said to the rowers, by whom
+it was received with short  exclamations of approval, for they were
+too breathless and exhausted for talk. Already they could hear the
+yells of the pirates, who, as the boat ran up on the beach were
+but a quarter of a mile behind.
+
+"Now, away for that wood!" Sir John cried, as he leapt ashore.
+"Now, comrades, for a climb up the hill!"
+
+It was a steep ascent, and more than once one had to be helped up
+by the others, and then in turn to assist  them to get up beside him.
+Louder and louder rose the shouts of the pirates, but the knights
+did not glance  back until they reached the top of the hill; then
+they turned and looked round. A swarm of men were  climbing after
+them, and were already halfway up the cliff.
+
+"Heave them down!" Sir John exclaimed, pointing to some loose rocks,
+and set the example by lifting a  great stone and hurling it over
+the edge. Harcourt and Gervaise at once did the same, and twenty
+or thirty  rocks were speedily sent rolling down the steep ascent,
+and yells, shouts, and cries were heard below.
+
+"That will check them a bit. Now let us be off," Sir John Boswell
+said, and they at once started. After  crossing a hundred yards
+of bare rock they stood at the edge of another slope into a deep
+valley, beyond  which rose the central hill of the island. The valley
+ran right across, and was filled with trees extending to  the sea
+at either end.  Running rapidly down, the knights were within the
+shelter of the wood before the  Moslems had reached the brow behind
+them. A minute later they heard the shouts of their enemies. Once
+in  the wood they turned to the left, and in a few minutes stood on
+the sea shore. It was a little bay some two  hundred yards across,
+and at either point the cliffs rose abruptly from the water.
+
+"We shall have to swim round the point," Sir John said.
+
+"Take off your mail shirts. We will make our way along the rocks
+as far as we can, and then drop them into  the sea, otherwise they
+will know that we have taken to the water."
+
+They hurried along the rocks, and were able to make their way to
+within fifty yards of the point; then,  throwing their mail shirts
+into the sea, they plunged in. All knew the importance of getting
+round before  any of the pirates, who would be searching the
+valley, came down on the shore, and they swam their  hardest until
+they rounded the corner.  The wood rang with the shouts of their
+pursuers, but no yell had  risen from the water's edge. A hundred
+yards farther, and they were able to land, and were in a short time
+in  the shelter of the trees that fringed the water to the point
+where they had left the boat. There was no longer  any occasion
+for speed, and they made their way through the thick bushes
+and undergrowth quietly, until  they recovered breath after their
+exertions. They had gone a few hundreds yards when from the bushes
+the  slaves suddenly rose up.
+
+"All has gone well," Sir John said to them in their own language.
+"The pirates are searching for us on the  other side of the hill.
+There are not likely to be many of them left here. We shall soon
+be in possession of  our boat again."
+
+Followed by the slaves, they made their way forward until they
+stood at the edge of the wood. Five or six  pirates were standing
+on the shore.
+
+"I expect they have been left there," Harcourt said, "to prevent
+the slaves from carrying off the boat. They  must have seen them
+run into the wood. They won't reckon on our being with them."
+
+Drawing their swords, the three knights rushed out, followed by
+the slaves. They had but a hundred yards to  run. The pirates, on
+seeing them, raised a yell and drew their scimitars; but the sight
+of the knights rushing  upon them, when they had expected but a
+few unarmed rowers, was too much for their courage, and when  their
+assailants were still fifty yards away they turned and fled. The
+fishing craft had been run ashore but a  few yards from their boat.
+
+"Get her afloat, Harcourt, and bring her to the stern of the
+fisherman. Now, Tresham, follow me."
+
+Sir John Boswell climbed up on to the fishing boat, which was
+a craft of some fifteen tons burden. She was  entirely deserted,
+but the sail still hung from the yard, and a fire was burning on
+a stone hearth, raised on  some logs of wood in the centre of the
+deck.
+
+"Look for something to stave in a plank, Tresham."
+
+Gervaise leapt down into the hold. There were some nets and spare
+sails lying there, but nothing that would  answer the purpose. He
+examined the planks. The boat was very strongly and roughly built.
+
+"There is nothing here, Sir John, that will do, and nothing short of
+a heavy sledge hammer would suffice to  smash one of these planks."
+
+"There are a lot of them coming down the hill, Tresham. We have not
+many minutes to spare, but we must  disable the craft. They will
+soon be after us again; they have run her hard and fast here, but
+when they all  come back they will soon get her off. Let us try
+one of these sweeps."
+
+He lifted one of the heavy oars, and holding it upright he and
+Gervaise together tried to drive the handle  through the bottom.
+Again and again they raised it and drove it down; but the plank
+was too strong, and too  securely fastened to the timbers.
+
+"We must give it up," the knight said, with a sigh.  "Fortune has
+befriended us so far, Tresham, but she has  deserted us at last.
+Another three minutes, and we shall have thirty or forty of them
+upon us."
+
+At this moment the lad's eye fell upon the fire.
+
+"We shall manage yet," he exclaimed, and, seizing a blazing brand,
+he jumped below and set fire to the  sails stowed there; they were
+as dry as tinder, and the flame shot up at once.
+
+"That is good, Tresham," the knight said; "but they will put it
+out before it has caught the boat."
+
+"Not before it has burnt the sails," Gervaise replied.  "Now for
+this one," and he applied the brand to the  lower edge of the great
+sail. Without a word Sir John seized another brand, and fired the
+sail on the other  side of the deck. The flames flashed up, and a
+wild yell of rage and alarm broke from the pirates, who were  now
+rushing down towards the beach.
+
+"Now to the boat, Tresham; we have no time to lose if we would
+avoid being pounded with stones."
+
+They dropped over the stern into the boat. The galley slaves dipped
+their oars into the water, and she shot  away just as the foremost
+of the pirates reached the edge of the water. A few stones were
+thrown; but the  pirates were so anxious about the craft, by which
+alone they could escape from the island, that the majority  at once
+climbed on board.
+
+At a word from the knight, the slaves stopped rowing a hundred
+yards from the shore. The sail was already  consumed, and the yard
+and the upper part of the mast were in flames. A dense smoke was
+rising from the  hold, and the pirates were throwing buckets of
+water down into it.  In a few minutes the smoke decreased.
+
+"I thought that they would be able to put it out; but, as far as
+we are concerned, it matters little. They have  lost their sails,
+and as I saw but four sweeps, we can travel five miles to their
+one. If we find the galleys we  will look in here on our way back,
+and if they have not left we will fire that craft more effectually,
+and then  the pirates will be trapped, and we can leave them till
+we have fetched off Sir Louis and his prizes, and then  have a grand
+hunt here. We took no prisoners before, and a hundred slaves will
+be a useful addition to our  wall builders. Now, Tresham, I have to
+thank you warmly, for Harcourt and I doubly owe our lives to you.
+It was thanks to your quickness of wit that we regained our boat,
+for I would not have given a ducat for our  chances had you not
+thought of that scheme. In the second place, we should assuredly
+have been overtaken  again had it not been for your happy thought
+of crippling them by burning their sails. By St. George,  Harcourt,
+this young countryman of ours is as quick and as ready of wit as
+he has shown himself a brave  and gallant fighter! We have no lack
+of sturdy fighters; but the wit to devise and to seize upon the
+right  thing in the moment of danger is vastly more rare. As for
+myself, I have no shame that this lad, who is  young enough to be
+my son, should have thus, twice in a single hour, pointed out the
+way to safety. With  sword and battleaxe I can, I trust, hold my
+own with any man; but my brain is dull when it comes to  hatching
+schemes. If we live, we shall see Sir Gervaise one of the most
+distinguished knights of the Order."
+
+"While I feel gratified indeed, as I may well be by your commendation,
+Sir John, I must, under your favour,  say that you have given me
+a far greater degree of credit than is my due. There was the fire,
+and there was  the sail, and the thought that the one would destroy
+the other was simply a natural one, which might have  occurred to
+a child. As to the plan about the boat, seeing that there was the
+hill and the wood, it flashed  upon me at once that we might make
+a circuit and come back to her."
+
+"Just so, lad; but those thoughts did not flash upon my mind, nor
+upon that of Harcourt. It is just because  those sort of ideas do
+flash upon the minds of some men, and not of others, that the first
+rise to the rank of  distinguished commanders, while the others
+remain simple knights who would play their part in a charge or  in
+the defence of a breach, but would be of no account as leaders.
+
+"Now row along steadily, men," he went on, speaking to the slaves.
+"We are still in good time, for it was  not an hour from the moment
+we touched the island to our departure from it, and much of that
+time we have  gained by the speed with which you rowed before. At
+any rate, we shall make out the island before sunset,  and whether
+we arrive there a little sooner or later matters little. Harcourt,
+hand me that wineskin and a  goblet. A draught will do us good
+after our climb and swim, and these good fellows will be none the
+worse  for a cup also."
+
+Inspired with the hope of freedom, the slaves rowed steadily, and
+the sun had just set when they entered a  little inlet in the rocky
+isle that was their place of rendezvous.
+
+"Thanks be to the saints!" Sir John exclaimed, as they reached the
+entrance. "There is Santoval's galley."
+
+There was a stir on board the galley as the boat was seen approaching.
+The knights had put on their armour,  which they had found still
+lying in the boat, the pirates, in their haste to pursue, having
+left her unexamined,  while those who had remained on guard had
+abstained from touching anything until the return of their  captain
+and comrades.
+
+"Whence come you, Sir John, and what is the news?  No misfortune has
+befallen Ricord's galley, I hope?"  the Spanish knight in command
+shouted, as the boat came near enough for him to recognize the
+features of  its occupants.
+
+"All is well," Sir John shouted back; "but we have taken more
+prizes than we can manage, though not  without hard fighting. Seven
+knights have fallen, and at least ten others will not be able to
+buckle their  armour on again for some time to come, so I have been
+sent here to beg your assistance; and it is well that it  should
+be given speedily, for if more pirate vessels come up before you
+join, Ricord and his companions  will be in a sorry plight."
+
+By this time the boat had reached the side of the galley, and
+as Sir John and his two companions stepped on  board, the knights
+crowded round to hear the details of the news.  Exclamations of
+approval and satisfaction  arose when Sir John related the incidents
+of the fight, and told them that the four vessels that had fallen
+into  their hands formed part of Hassan Ali's fleet.
+
+"That is good news indeed, Boswell," Don Santoval said; "and I would
+I had been there to take part in so  gallant a fight. It is well
+you found us here, for with four prizes on hand, and with half his
+strength dead or  disabled, Ricord must be in sore need of aid.
+We will start tomorrow morning at daybreak. As all the ships  were
+taken, there is little fear of any of the other pirates hearing
+news of what has happened."
+
+"I don't know," Sir John replied. "There were, as I told you, some
+two hundred pirates left on the island.   About half those, we
+know, seized a fishing boat and escaped, for they chased us, and
+we have had as  narrow an escape from death as has ever fallen to
+my lot, though I have been in over a score of hard fought  battles.
+The rest may well have taken another fishing boat and made off
+also, for we saw several craft along  the shores of the island. If
+so, they may have made for Hassan Ali's rendezvous, wherever that
+may be, just  as I made here, and by this time some of his ships
+may be on the way there."
+
+"By St. Anthony, this alters the situation gravely!" Don Santoval
+said. "Fellow knights, we must lose no  time in going to Ricord's
+assistance. The slaves have had a long row today, but they must
+start on another.  Let them have a good meal to strengthen them,
+and a cup of wine each. Whatever their scruples at other  times,
+they never refuse wine when there is heavy work to be done, knowing
+full well that a draught of it  helps them mightily in their labours.
+Your men must have rowed well, Sir John, to have brought you here
+so quickly?"
+
+"I have promised them their freedom," Sir John said; "and they shall
+have it, even if I have to pay their  value into the treasury. As I
+told you, we were hotly pursued, for the craft with her sail went
+faster than we  with our oars; and, knowing the importance of
+bringing the news here, I encouraged them by promising  them their
+freedom, should we get away. Not only did they row right manfully,
+but they proved faithful in  our extremity, and, when all seemed
+lost, stuck to us instead of deserting and joining the pirates."
+
+"But how did you get away, Sir John, if their craft outsailed you?"
+
+"I owe my life entirely to the quick wit of my young countryman,
+Sir Gervaise Tresham here." And Sir  John then related the incidents
+of their adventure on the island, his narrative eliciting warm
+expressions of  approval from the knights.
+
+"Of course, you will go with us, Boswell?" Don Santoval said, when
+the master of the slaves announced  that these had eaten their
+meal, and were ready.
+
+"I must do so," Sir John replied. "I want you, on your way, to
+look in at that island where we had so narrow  an escape, and if
+we find their craft still there we can destroy it.  The place is
+directly in our course; we  shall, therefore, lose but little time
+in looking in. Of course, they may have gone as soon as they got
+their  vessel afloat, but it is hardly likely. They would have no
+idea of my returning with a galley so soon, and  will probably set
+to to make a dozen more oars before they start, for she had but
+four on board, which will  scarce suffice to send her a mile an
+hour through the water. Therefore, I fancy they will not put off
+until  tomorrow morning. If that is so, and we destroy their craft,
+they will be trapped in the islet, and on our  return we can capture
+them all. I think of leaving Harcourt and Tresham in the boat, in
+order that when  Piccolomini's galley comes in, they may direct
+him also to join us."
+
+"He may be in at any moment; we met him three days since. He had
+captured a pirate, and sent her off  under charge of ten of his
+knights. We agreed to meet him this evening; and as he is not here,
+he will  probably be in the first thing in the morning."
+
+Gervaise and Harcourt took their places in the boat again. The galley
+got up its anchor and started. Just as  she reached the mouth of
+the inlet another galley rounded the point and nearly ran into her.
+
+"I am going to Ricord's assistance, Piccolomini," Don Santoval
+shouted.
+
+"Is it urgent?" the commander of the galley shouted back.  "We have
+had a very long row, and can go no  farther, unless his strait is
+a very sore one."
+
+"No. Come on in the morning. You will hear all the news from
+a boat lying two hundred yards astern. Two  young English knights
+are waiting in her to give you the news. Ricord has made a fine
+capture. Row on,  men." And the galley proceeded on her way, while
+the newcomer proceeded up the harbour.
+
+Harcourt and Gervaise at once went on board, and the former gave the
+Italian commander an account of the  battle that had taken place,
+and the capture of the four pirate vessels. After the exclamations
+of satisfaction  by the knights had ceased, he recounted their own
+adventures, which were heard with lively interest.
+
+"I hope indeed that Santoval will burn that fishing boat, and that
+we shall capture the pirates," the  commander said.  "We have need
+of more slaves to carry out the works at Rhodes. Now, let us to
+supper,  gentlemen, and then to sleep. In six hours we will be off
+again, for if some more of these villains have  escaped and carried
+the news to Hassan Ali, our swords may be sorely needed by Ricord
+and Santoval  tomorrow."
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI KNIGHTED
+
+
+At three in the morning all on board the galley were astir. A ration
+of bread and meat was served out to the  slaves, and the boat was
+soon afterwards under way. The rowers of the English knight's boat
+had been  warmly commended by the commander and placed in charge
+of the overseer, with instructions that they  were to be treated as
+free men. As soon as the galley slaves set to work, however, they
+seated themselves  on the benches and double banked some of the
+oars, anxious to please the knights. With the exception of  those
+whose turn it was to be on watch, most of the knights slept until
+daybreak.
+
+"At the rate we are rowing, Gervaise," Harcourt said, as they went
+up on to the poop together, "it will not  take us very long to join
+our friends. We are going through the water at fully six miles an
+hour; and as we  have already been two hours under way, in another
+three we shall be there."
+
+An hour and a half later they passed the island where they had
+landed. The two young knights pointed out  to the others the valley
+into which they had descended, and the point round which they had
+swum. In a few  minutes they caught sight of the landing place.
+
+"Look, Gervaise, there is something black showing just above the
+water."
+
+"I see it. I think it is a line of timbers. There were certainly
+no rocks there when we ran ashore."
+
+"Then Santoval must have found the craft still there and burnt
+her," one of the knights standing by  remarked, "and the pirates
+are caged up. It will take them some time to make a raft that will
+carry them to  the next island, and before they can do that we shall
+be back again. I shall be sorry if they escape, for they  are as
+ruthless a set of villains as sail the seas."
+
+The galley had traversed half the remaining distance when the sound
+of a gun was faintly heard. For a  moment there was an absolute
+hush on the poop; then three or four shots in rapid succession were
+heard.
+
+"Some more pirate ships must have come up," the commander exclaimed.
+Then he shouted down to the  slaves, "Row, men -- row for your lives!
+Overseer, do not spare your lash if any hang back from their  work."
+
+The galley had been travelling fast before, but her speed greatly
+increased as the slaves rowed their hardest.  Fast as she was
+travelling, the impatience of the knights was extreme.  They walked
+up and down the deck,  making vows of candles that should be burnt
+at the shrine of St. John if they arrived in time to take a share
+in the fight, stopping at times to listen to the sound of artillery,
+which was now so frequent as to show that a  severe engagement was
+being fought. Many of the younger knights ran down to the waist
+and double  banked the oars, and in a shorter time than it seemed
+possible the galley arrived at the mouth of the bay.
+
+A desperate fight was going on. Ricord's ship lay, idle and deserted,
+at anchor. Five pirate crafts surrounded  Santoval's galley. Two
+of them were alongside of her; the others were raking her fore and
+aft with their  shot. The young knights left the oars, sprang up
+to the poop and joined in the shout of encouragement  raised by the
+others, and then, resuming their helmets and armour, stood ready to
+leap on board an enemy  as soon as they reached her.  Piccolomini
+directed the helmsman to lay him alongside one of the ships  grappling
+with Santoval. As they came up, their galley's cannon poured their
+fire into her, and a moment  later the knights sprang on board.
+
+In the din of battle their shout had been unheard. The pirates thronging
+the other side of their ship were  intent only on overcoming the
+resistance of the knights, and even the discharge of cannon had not
+called  their attention to their foe, until the latter, shouting
+the war cry of the Order, fell suddenly upon them. A  panic at
+once seized them.  Some were cut down almost unresistingly, but
+the great majority, running to the  bow or stern, threw themselves
+overboard and swam to the other ships. The pirate ship on the
+other side of  Santoval's galley instantly threw off the grapnels
+and thrust off from her side, and, immediately hauling in  the
+sheets of the big sail, began at once to draw away, while her three
+consorts made for the mouth of the  bay.
+
+"Back to your galley, comrades," Piccolomini shouted, "or with this
+brisk wind they will escape us."
+
+The knights at once crossed on to their own craft, the oars were
+got out, and the chase began. A minute or  two later Don Santoval
+followed them, but soon gave up, as so large a number of the oars
+had been broken  when the two pirate ships ran alongside him,
+that it would have been hopeless to pursue. The wind was  blowing
+freshly, and was rapidly increasing in strength, so that, in spite
+of the efforts of the galley slaves,  the pirates gradually drew
+away, running straight before the wind, and aiding the effects
+of the sails with  oars. Seeing the hopelessness of the chase,
+Piccolomini abandoned it, after rowing for two miles, and  returned
+to the island. The other two galleys were lying beside each other,
+and Piccolomini had his craft  steered alongside them.
+
+"Thanks, Piccolomini, for arriving so opportunely," Santoval, who
+was seated on the deck leaning against  the bulwarks, said, as his
+fellow commander leapt on board, and came towards him.
+
+"Would that I had arrived sooner, Santoval, for I see that you have
+been grievously wounded!"
+
+"Ay. One of the paynims' cannonballs has carried off both my legs
+below the knee. The leech has been  searing the wounds with a hot
+iron, and says that he thinks I shall get over it; but if so I fear
+that my  fighting days are past, unless, indeed, I fight seated on
+a chair. However, I ought not to grumble. I have lost  many brave
+comrades, and others are wounded more sorely than I am."
+
+Sir Louis Ricord now joined them. He embraced Piccolomini warmly.
+
+"I never heard a more welcome shout, Piccolomini, than that which
+you gave when you fell upon the  Moslems, for in truth the issue
+of the conflict was doubtful. I was delighted when this morning at
+daybreak  Santoval's galley rowed in. We had all kept watch during
+the night, thinking the pirates might obtain boats  and make an
+attack upon us; and, with but twenty of us fit to wield a sword,
+our position would have been a  bad one, and at any rate they
+might have recaptured the prizes. We agreed that Santoval and his
+knights  should land at once. This they did. Sir John Boswell had
+of course told me how his boat had been chased by  a fishing craft,
+manned by a large number of the pirates, and that he feared the
+rest might similarly have  escaped, and might have gone to bring
+some more of Hassan Ali's ships upon us.
+
+"As soon as Santoval landed, some of the natives came down and told
+him that there was not a pirate  remaining there, the rest having
+started in another boat a few minutes after the one that had chased
+Boswell.  Santoval left two of his men with orders to ascend to the
+highest spot on the island, and to keep watch, and  then brought
+the rest off to his galley. Our first step was, of course, to send
+all the women and children  ashore. Then we consulted as to what had
+best be done if the pirates should come back in force.  We hoped,
+at any rate, that this would not happen until you arrived. We
+expected that you would be here before noon;  but we decided that,
+should they get here before you, we from our galley would embark
+on Santoval's, as it  was better to fight in one strongly manned
+boat than to divide our forces.
+
+"It was scarce half an hour after Santoval came down before the
+men left on the lookout appeared on the  beach.  On fetching them
+off, they told us that as soon as they reached the top of the hill
+they saw five  vessels approaching with sails and oars, and that
+they would be here in half an hour at the outside. We at  once
+abandoned my galley, brought the rowers and the wounded here, and
+prepared for the fight. As you  saw, they ran their two biggest
+ships alongside us, and for two hours the fight went on. They
+were crowded  with men, who in vain strove to get a footing on our
+decks. Had we only had these two to deal with, we  should have had
+nothing to fear, heavily manned though they were; but the other
+three kept sailing  backwards and forwards, discharging their guns
+into us as they passed, firing not only shot, but bags of  bullets.
+
+"Their gunners were skilful, and, as you see, they have completely
+riddled our poop. Twenty knights have  been killed, and eleven
+others are sorely wounded. Scarce one has escaped unscathed. You may
+guess,  then, how welcome was your aid, which we had not expected
+for another three hours. We were on the point  of abandoning the
+waist and gathering on the poop, which we could still have defended
+for a considerable  time, when, as if dropped from the skies, you
+fell upon the pirates, and turned the tables. How is it that you
+were here so early?"
+
+"We started at three o'clock, instead of waiting for daybreak.
+It seemed, from the story of the two young  knights, that it was
+possible you might be attacked early, and, crippled as your command
+was, and with  four prizes on your hands, I deemed it best to come
+on as soon as the rowers had had a few hours' rest."
+
+"It is well that you did so; it would have been a grievous affair
+had two of our galleys been captured by the  pirates.  It would have
+been a blow to the prestige of the Order, and would have brought
+such strength to  Hassan Ali and other pirate leaders that nothing
+short of sending out a fleet would have recovered our  ascendancy;
+and as every ducat we can spare has to be spent on the fortifications,
+it would have been a  misfortune indeed had we been obliged to fit
+out such an expedition at present."
+
+"Who have fallen, Sir Louis?"
+
+"Five more of the knights of my galley -- Pierre des Vignes, Raoul
+de Montpelier, Ernest Schmidt,  Raymond Garcia, and Albert Schenck.
+Here is the list of the knights of Santoval's galley."
+
+"'Tis a long list, and a sad one," Piccolomini said, after reading
+the names. "With the seven who fell in your  first fight, twenty-seven
+knights have fallen, all brave comrades.  Truly, we can ill spare
+such a loss. It is  true there are five prizes to show for it,
+and we have struck Hassan Ali a blow that will resound through the
+Levant; but the cost is heavy."
+
+"It is indeed," Ricord agreed. "The four vessels are well filled
+with rich spoil that the scoundrels had  gathered, and I doubt
+not the one you captured is equally rich. Still, had they been ten
+times as valuable, the  booty would be dearly purchased at such a
+price."
+
+There was now a consultation among the leaders, and it was agreed
+that six knights should be placed in  each of the captured ships,
+with ten of the galley slaves to work the sails, the others being
+equally divided  between the three galleys. They were, in the first
+place, to row to the island where the pirates were  imprisoned,
+and to slay or capture the whole of them; afterwards they were to
+make direct for Rhodes; with  so numerous a fleet there was no fear
+of their being attacked. The arrangements took but a short time
+to  complete. An hour later they left the port, the three galleys
+rowing ahead, while the five prizes, under easy  sail, followed
+them.
+
+Sir John Boswell had been wounded, but not so seriously as to
+altogether disable him, and he was in  command of one of the prizes,
+having Sir Adam Tedbond, Harcourt, Gervaise, and a German knight,
+with  him. Sir Marmaduke Lumley, who, after the first fight was
+over, was found, to the surprise and pleasure of  his comrades, to
+be still living, was, with the rest of the wounded, on board one
+of the galleys. Two of the  pirates had fallen dead across him,
+and in the ardour of their attack on the knights, he had lain there
+unnoticed until the return of Sir Louis and his comrades had driven
+the pirates overboard. The leech was of  opinion that he might yet
+recover from his wound.
+
+On arriving at the island, sixty of the knights disembarked. The
+woods near the shore were first searched,  but were found untenanted.
+They were about to advance up the hill when a man appeared on the
+crest  above them waving a white flag. He was told to come down,
+and on his arrival said that he was sent by his  companions to offer
+to surrender, on the promise that their lives should be spared.
+The knights were well  pleased to be saved the trouble of a long
+search through the woods, and the messenger left at once to  acquaint
+the pirates that their terms were accepted.  In a short time some
+eighty men made their way down  the hill. On reaching the beach they
+were disarmed, divided equally between the galleys, and distributed
+among the rowers, filling up the places of those who had been
+killed by the fire of the Moslems, and of the  men drafted into
+the prizes. They begged for food and water before they began work,
+and, on being  questioned, admitted that their surrender was due
+principally to the fact that they had been unable to find  food
+of any sort on the island, and that after searching all over it no
+spring of water could be discovered.
+
+"In that case," Sir John Boswell said, "I have no doubt they have
+all surrendered. I before thought it  probable that a good many
+of them would have remained hidden, trusting to be able to make a
+raft after we  had left, and so get away, believing rightly enough
+that we should be disinclined to search every foot of the  island
+for them. As it is, I doubt not, all are here."
+
+The little fleet anchored that night at the rendezvous, and after
+two more days' rowing reached Rhodes,  where the appearance of
+the three galleys, followed by their five prizes, was greeted with
+great  acclamation. The news, however, that twenty-seven knights
+had fallen, and that thirteen or fourteen others  were very gravely
+wounded, damped the satisfaction that every one had at first felt.
+D'Aubusson came  down as soon as they reached the mole, and was
+greatly affected when he received Ricord's report.
+
+"It is an unfortunate loss indeed, Sir Louis," he said, "though
+it may be that the victory is not too dearly  purchased. I do not
+speak of the captured ships, nor of the spoil they contain, nor
+even of the slaves you  have brought us, welcome though all may
+be, but of the effect that the defeat and capture of these craft
+of  Hassan Ali's will have. It is plain that the preparations the
+sultan is making, and the belief that Rhodes is  doomed, have so
+encouraged the infidels that they are becoming really formidable
+at sea. This blow will  show them that the Order has yet power to
+sweep the sea of pirates. Since, however, this adventure has  taught
+us that a single leader like Hassan sails with at least nine ships
+under his orders, it is clear that in  future our galleys must not
+adventure singly among the islands. It was fortunate indeed that
+first Santoval,  and then Piccolomini, arrived to your assistance.
+How was it that they happened to come up so  opportunely?"
+
+"Sir John Boswell, with Ralph Harcourt and Gervaise Tresham; went
+in a boat to the rendezvous we had  arranged, and reached it after
+an adventure, which I will leave Sir John to tell himself. I may
+say that the  two young knights named had in our encounter both
+obtained very high credit amongst us all for the valour  with which
+they fought. No one bore himself more stoutly, and I am glad to
+take this early opportunity of  bringing their conduct before your
+notice. As you will learn from Sir John, Gervaise Tresham afterwards
+showed a quickness of wit that was the means of saving the lives
+of those with him, and I may say also of  all with me, for had they
+failed to reach the rendezvous we should have fallen easy victims
+to the five ships  Hassan Ali brought against us."
+
+Sending for Sir John Boswell, the grand prior heard from him the
+details of his adventure in the boat.
+
+"I am right glad to hear you speak so warmly of Tresham, Sir John,
+for I regard him as my special protege,  and am pleased indeed to
+find that at this outset of his career he has proved himself not
+only a brave knight,  but full of resource, and quick at invention.
+I think, Sir John, that these two young knights have shown  themselves
+well worthy of receiving the honour of secular knighthood."
+
+"Assuredly they have," Sir John agreed.
+
+"Then, Sir John, will you bestow it upon them? The Order, as an
+Order, does not bestow the honour, but its  members do not forfeit
+their right as knights to bestow it individually, and none among
+us are more worthy  of admitting them to your rank than yourself."
+
+"I would gladly do it, Sir Peter; but the honour would come far
+better from yourself, and would not only be  more highly prized by
+them, but would be of greater value in the eyes of others. I am but
+a simple knight  commander of the Order, and my name would scarce
+be known beyond its ranks. But to be knighted by one  whose name
+is known and honoured throughout Europe would give them a standing
+wherever they went,  and place them on a level with the best."
+
+"If that is your opinion, Boswell, I will myself undertake it, and
+will do it at once; it were better done here  than at a conclave
+of the Order -- now, when they are fresh from the battle. Let the
+knights be summoned  from the other galleys at once."
+
+In a few minutes the whole of the knights were assembled on the
+poop of the galley.
+
+"Friends, and brother knights," D'Aubusson said.  "First, in
+the name of the Order, I have to thank you all  most heartily for
+the brave deeds that you have performed, and for the fresh honour
+you have won for it.  Every man has, as I learn from the three
+commanders, borne himself as a true and valiant knight, ready to
+give his life in the cause of the Order and of humanity. Two names
+have been specially brought before me  by commander Ricord, and
+by the good knight Sir John Boswell; they are those of two young
+companions  who, though knights of our Order, have not yet received
+secular knighthood, and this, in the opinion of  these two knights,
+they have right worthily won. Sir Ralph Harcourt and Sir Gervaise
+Tresham, step  forward."
+
+The two young knights, colouring with pleasure at this unexpected
+honour, removed their helmets, and  stood with bowed heads before
+the grand prior. D'Aubusson went on, turning to the knights around
+him, "I  am about, comrades, to undertake the office of knighting
+them. Sir Louis Ricord and Sir John Boswell  stand as their sponsors.
+But before I proceed I would ask you all whether you, too, approve,
+and hold that  Sir Ralph Harcourt and Sir Gervaise Tresham have
+proved themselves worthy of the honour of secular  knighthood at
+my hands?"
+
+There was a general reply in the affirmative, the answer of the
+survivors of Ricord's crew being specially  emphatic.  The grand
+prior drew his sword, and the two young knights knelt before him,
+their sponsors  standing beside them.
+
+"Sir Ralph Harcourt, you have now been four years a knight of this
+Order, but hitherto you have had no  opportunity of drawing sword
+against the infidels. Now that the chance has come, you have proved
+yourself  a true and valiant brother of the Order, and well worthy
+of the secular accolade. It is in that capacity that I  now knight
+you. It is not the grand prior of Auvergne, but Sir Peter D'Aubusson,
+of the grand cross of St.  Louis, who now bestows upon you the honour
+of secular knighthood." He touched him lightly with the  sword. He
+then turned to Gervaise.
+
+"You, Sir Gervaise Tresham, are young indeed to receive the honour
+of secular knighthood; but valour is of  no age, and in the opinion
+of your commanders, and in that of your comrades, you have proved
+yourself  worthy of the honour. You have shown too, that, as Sir
+John Boswell has related to me, you are not only  brave in action,
+but able, in the moment of danger, to plan and to execute. You
+were, he tells me, the means  of saving his life and that of your
+comrade, and, by thus enabling him to bear to the place of rendezvous
+the  news of Sir Louis's danger, were also the means of saving the
+lives of Sir Louis and his companions, and of  bringing home in
+safety the prizes he had taken. With such a beginning it is easy
+to foresee that you will  win for yourself some day a distinguished
+position in the ranks of the Order, and are most worthy of the
+honour I now bestow upon you." And he touched him with his sword.
+
+The two young knights rose to their feet, bowed deeply to D'Aubusson,
+and then retired, with their  sponsors. They were at once surrounded
+by the knights, who shook them by the hand, and warmly  congratulated
+them upon the honour that had befallen them, receiving equally warm
+congratulations on  their arrival at the auberge of the langue.
+
+The five prizes turned out, when their cargoes were landed, to
+be much more valuable than the cursory  examination made by the
+knights had warranted them in expecting. They contained, indeed,
+an  accumulation of the most valuable contents of the prizes taken
+by the pirates for a long time previously;  and as these desperadoes
+preyed upon Turkish commerce as well as Christian, the goods
+consisted largely  of Eastern manufactures of all kinds.  Costly
+robes, delicate embroidery, superb carpets, shawls,  goldsmiths'
+work, and no small amount of jewels, were among the spoil collected,
+and the bulk of the  merchandise captured was, two days later,
+despatched in galleys to Genoa and Marseilles, to be sold for the
+benefit of the Order.
+
+D'Aubusson without hesitation carried out Sir John Boswell's
+promise to the slaves who had rowed his  boat.  They were not only
+set at liberty, but were each presented with a sum of money, and
+were placed on  board a galley, and landed on the mainland.
+
+The English knights were all proud of the honour that had been won
+by their young countrymen, the only  exception being Robert Rivers,
+who was devoured with jealousy at their advancement. He did not
+openly  display his feelings, for the reports not only of Sir John
+Boswell, but of the other two English knights, were  so strong that
+he dared not express his discontent. He himself had twice been
+engaged with pirates, but had  gained no particular credit, and
+indeed had, in the opinion of his comrades, been somewhat slack
+in the  fray. He was no favourite in the auberge, though he spared
+no pains to ingratiate himself with the senior  knights, and had
+a short time before been very severely reprimanded by the bailiff
+for striking one of the  servants.
+
+"I have more than once had to reprove you for your manners to the
+servants," the bailiff said. "You will  now be punished by the
+septaine; you will fast for seven days, on Wednesday and Friday
+you will receive  bread and water only, and will be confined to
+the auberge for that period. The next time that I have reason  to
+complain of you, I shall bring the matter before the grand master,
+and represent to him that it were best  to send you home, since you
+cannot comport yourself to the servants of the auberge as befits a
+knight of the  Order. We have always borne the reputation of being
+specially kind to our servants, and it is intolerable that  one,
+who has been but a short time only a professed knight, should behave
+with a hauteur and insolence that  not even the oldest among us
+would permit himself. There is not one of the servants here who
+was not in  his own country of a rank and station equal, if not
+superior, to your own; and though misfortune has fallen  upon them,
+they are to be pitied rather than condemned for it. In future,
+you are to give no order whatever  to the servants, nor to address
+them, save when at meals you require anything. If you have any
+complaints  to make of their conduct to you, you will make them to
+me, and I will inquire into the matter; and if I find  they have
+failed in their duty they will be punished. I shall keep my eye upon
+you in the future. There are  other faults that I have observed in
+you. More than once I have heard you address Sir Gervaise Tresham
+in  a manner which, were not duelling forbidden by our rules, might
+bring about bloodshed; and from what I  have seen when I have been
+watching the exercises, he is as much your superior in arms as he
+is in manner  and disposition."
+
+This reproof had greatly subdued Robert Rivers; and as he felt that
+any display of his jealousy of Gervaise  would be resented by the
+other knights, and might result in serious consequences to himself,
+he abstained  from any exhibition of it when they returned to
+the auberge, although he could not bring himself to join in  the
+congratulations offered to them. The next day, however, when he
+was talking to Ralph Harcourt, he  remarked, "From what I hear,
+Harcourt, D'Aubusson praised young Tresham very highly. It seems to
+me  that there was nothing at all out of the way in what he did,
+and it was very unfair that he should be selected  for higher praise
+than yourself."
+
+"It was not unfair at all," Ralph said warmly, for he was of a generous
+nature, and incapable of the base  feeling of envy. "Tresham did
+a great deal more than I did. When we saw the pirate boat gaining
+so fast  upon us, it seemed to Sir John Boswell, as well as to
+myself, that there was scarce a chance of escape, and  that all we
+could do was to choose a spot on which to make a stand, and then
+to sell our lives as dearly as  we could. I could see that Sir
+John was scanning the hill for a spot where we could best defend
+ourselves.   As to hiding on so small an island, with a hundred men
+eager for our blood searching for us, it was well  nigh impossible.
+It was Tresham's suggestion alone that saved our lives and enabled
+us to fetch succour to  Sir Louis. Sir John, who is an old and
+tried soldier, said that for quickness and merit of conception,
+the  oldest knight in the Order could not have done better; and he
+is not one to praise unduly. I am four years  older than Gervaise
+Tresham, but I tell you that were he named tomorrow commander of
+a galley, I would  willingly serve under him."
+
+"Well, well, you need not be angry, Harcourt, I have nothing to
+say against Tresham. No doubt he had a  happy thought, which turned
+out well; but I cannot see that there was anything wonderful in
+it, and it  seemed to me unfair that one who is a mere boy should
+receive higher praise than yourself, who, as I heard  Sir John and
+Sir Adam Tedbond say last night at the refectory, bore yourself
+right gallantly."
+
+"I did my best," Ralph said shortly; "but there was small credit
+in that when we were fighting for our lives.  The most cowardly
+beast will fight under such circumstances. When you see a Moslem
+rushing at you,  scimitar in hand, and know that if you do not cut
+him down he will cut you down, you naturally strike as  hard and
+as quickly as you can. You have never liked Gervaise, Rivers. I
+am sure I don't know why, but  you always speak in a contemptuous
+sort of tone about him. True, it does him no harm, but it certainly
+does  you no good. For what reason should you feel a contempt for
+him? Although so much younger, he is a  better swordsman and a
+better rider than you are. He is liked by every one in the auberge,
+which is more  than can be said of yourself; he is always good
+tempered, and is quiet and unassuming. What on earth do  you always
+set yourself against him for?"
+
+"I do not know that I do set myself against him," Rivers said
+sullenly. "I own to having no great liking for  him, which is
+natural enough, seeing that his father was a Lancastrian, while
+we are Yorkists; but it is not  pleasant to see so much made of a
+boy, merely because D'Aubusson has favoured him."
+
+"I am certain," Harcourt said hotly, "that such an idea has never
+occurred to any one but yourself. Sir Peter  is a great man and will
+soon be our grand master, but at present he is but grand prior of
+the langue of  Auvergne, and whether he favours Tresham or not is
+a matter that concerns none of us. Gervaise is liked by  us for
+his own good qualities.  He bears himself, as a young knight should
+do, respectfully towards his  seniors, and is ever ready to do a
+service to any one. No one has ever seen him out of temper; he is
+always  kind and considerate to the servants, and when in command
+of parties of slaves at the public works never  says a harsh word
+to them, but treats them as if they were human beings, and not
+brute beasts. Besides,  though he is more skilful than any of us
+with his sword, or indeed at any of the military exercises, he is
+unassuming, and has no particle of pride or arrogance. It is for
+all these things that he is liked, and the  friendship of D'Aubusson
+has naught whatever to do with it. It is not only D'Aubusson who has
+prophesied  that he will rise to a distinguished rank in the Order.
+Boswell and Ricord both said the same, and I for one  thoroughly
+believe it. Is there one among us under the age of twenty -- and I
+might go farther -- who has  already won such credit for himself?
+One who when but sixteen can make his mark in an Order like ours
+is  certain to rise to high office, and you and I may, before many
+years are over, be proud to serve under him."
+
+"That I will never do," Rivers said fiercely. "I would rather go
+and bury myself for life in the smallest  commandery in England."
+
+"That may be," Harcourt retorted, his temper also roused, "But
+possibly you might prefer that to fighting  under any other leader."
+
+"That is a reflection on my courage, Sir Ralph Harcourt, I shall
+lay this matter before the bailiff."
+
+"You can do as you like," Harcourt said disdainfully, "But I don't
+think you will benefit by your pains."
+
+When his temper cooled down Rivers acknowledged to himself the truth
+of what Harcourt said. He was not  in the favour of the bailiff,
+while both Harcourt and Tresham stood at the present moment high
+in his  estimation. Any complaint would lead to an inquiry into the
+matter that had led to the former's words, and  even if Harcourt
+were reprimanded for using them, he himself would assuredly not
+gain in the estimation of  the knights. Harcourt himself thought no
+more of the matter, though he laughingly told Gervaise that Rivers
+was by no means gratified at their both attaining the honour of
+secular knighthood, which virtually placed  them over his head.
+
+"He is not a nice fellow," Gervaise said. "But naturally it must
+be galling to him, and to a good many others  who have not yet had
+the chance of distinguishing themselves.  I think it is very good
+of them that they are  all so kind and cordial. Of course it is
+otherwise with you, who are as old as most of the other professed
+knights serving here; but with me it is quite different, and as
+Rivers, somehow, has never been very friendly  with me, of course
+it is doubly galling to him. I hope he will soon get an opportunity
+of winning his spurs  too."
+
+"That is just like you, Tresham. If I were in your place, I should
+have no good wishes for a fellow who has  never lost an opportunity
+of annoying me, and that without the smallest cause of offence on
+my part."
+
+"I am sure you would not wish him ill, Harcourt. You would make
+allowance for him just as I do, and feel  that if he had had the same
+opportunities he would have obtained the same credit and honours."
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII A FIRST COMMAND
+
+
+The first news that the knights heard on their return from their
+expedition was that the Grand Master Orsini  was seriously ill,
+and that, at his advanced age, the doctors feared there was little
+hope of his rallying.   Gervaise felt a keen regret on hearing
+that the kind and gentle old man, who had been for three years his
+master, was at the point of death. Nevertheless, it was generally
+felt among the knights that, in view of the  dangers that threatened
+Rhodes, it was for the good of the Order that a strong and capable
+man, whom all  respected, and who possessed their entire confidence,
+should at such a time be invested with absolute  power.
+
+D'Aubusson had, indeed, for some years been the real head of the
+community, but every question had, if  only as a matter of form,
+to be referred to the grand master, in order to obtain his approval
+and signature. In  the state of feebleness to which he had for
+some months past fallen, much time was frequently lost before  he
+could be made to understand the questions referred to him.
+Moreover, orders of D'Aubusson could be  appealed against, his views
+thwarted, and his authority questioned; and it was therefore felt
+that, much as  they all respected the old grand master, it would be
+an advantage to the Order when the supreme authority  passed into
+the hands of D'Aubusson.
+
+Four days after the return of the expedition Orsini died.  A few hours
+later the grand council was convened,  and D'Aubusson unanimously
+elected grand master of the Order. The ceremony of the funeral of
+his  predecessor was an imposing one. Every knight of the Order in
+Rhodes was present, together with a  number of the leading natives
+of the Island; and although Gervaise had, since his arrival on the
+Island, seen  many stately ceremonies, this far surpassed anything
+he had previously beheld.
+
+Gervaise had, at one of his first interviews with D'Aubusson after
+his arrival at the Island, been advised by  him to acquire some
+knowledge of Turkish.
+
+"There are but few knights of the Order who speak the language," he
+said. "As a rule, while young men are  ready to devote any amount
+of time to acquiring dexterity in all martial exercises, they will
+bestow no  labour in obtaining knowledge that may be fully as useful
+to them as skill in arms. In our dealings with the  Turks, one or
+other party has to employ an interpreter, and it is often by no means
+certain that these men  convey the full meaning of the speeches
+they translate. Again, we have large numbers of Turkish slaves,  and
+it is highly to be desired that the knights should be able to give
+their orders to these men in their own  language. Lastly, a knight
+who has been taken prisoner by the Turks -- and even the bravest
+might meet  with such a misfortune -- would find it an alleviation
+of his lot, and might be able to plan and carry out his  escape,
+did he speak Turkish well. I should strongly counsel you to acquire
+a knowledge of the tongue."
+
+Gervaise had intended to follow the advice of the grand prior, but
+the duties of his office as page, and the  time required for his
+military exercises and his studies with the chaplain, had rendered
+it well nigh  impossible, during the first three years, to turn
+his attention to learning Turkish.  As soon as his pageship  was
+at an end, and he found that his duties included supervision of
+Turkish slaves, he felt the want of a  knowledge of the language,
+and from that time devoted an hour a day to its study, employing
+one of the  servants of the auberge, who was a man of rank and
+education at home, to instruct him.
+
+While he conscientiously spent this amount of time at the work,
+it was the most disagreeable portion of this  day's labour. The
+events, however, that had taken place during the expedition had
+impressed him greatly  with the utility of a knowledge of Turkish,
+for had it not been for Sir John Boswell's possessing some
+acquaintance with the language, it would have been impossible to
+communicate with the rowers of their  boat, or to have arranged the
+plan by which they had escaped the pirates. He had then and there
+determined  that as soon as he returned to Rhodes he would take the
+matter up in a very different spirit to that in which  he before
+approached it. He had on the way home spoken to Sir John, who had
+highly approved of the  determination.
+
+"I myself, when I was a young knight of eighteen, was taken captive,
+twenty-six years ago, at the time  when the Egyptian fleet appeared
+before Rhodes. Our galleys advanced to attack them, but under
+cover of  night they retired, and proceeding to the mainland took
+shelter under the guns of a Turkish fort. We  attacked them there;
+it was a desperate engagement, but without any decisive advantage
+on either side. We  lost no less than sixty knights, the Egyptians
+seven hundred men; and their fleet returned to Egypt. I and  three
+others who were left wounded on the deck of one of their ships we
+had boarded, but failed to capture,  were carried to Egypt, and
+remained there captive for six months, when we were ransomed by
+the Order.
+
+"During that time I learnt enough of their language, which is akin
+to Turkish, to be able to make myself  understood and to understand
+what was said to me. I have kept up that much for intercourse with
+the slaves  and servants at Rhodes, and have found it very useful.
+I consider, then, that you will do well to acquire their  tongue;
+it will be useful not only to yourself, but to others, and when
+we get back I will, if you like, ask the  bailiff to free you from
+all duty in order that you may devote yourself to it."
+
+The head of the langue at once granted Sir John's request.
+
+"I would," he said, "that more of our young knights would give a
+portion of their time to study; but most of  them look to returning
+home when their term of service here has expired. Many think only
+of amusement,  and all imagine that advancement is best achieved by
+valour.  Tresham has already distinguished himself  very greatly;
+so much so, that I think it would be well if he did not go on
+another expedition for a time, but  stayed here while others have
+the opportunity of doing the same. Were we to send him out with
+the next  galleys that start, I should be accused of favouritism,
+and the lad, who is now deservedly popular with all,  would be
+regarded with envy, and possibly even with dislike.
+
+"At the same time, after what he has done I should have difficulty
+in refusing, were he to volunteer to sail  in the next galley that
+sets out. The desire, then, on his part to learn Turkish is in all
+ways opportune. It will,  too, in the long run be of great advantage
+to him in the Order, will give him weight, and bring him into
+prominence. I do not think there are six in the Order who can
+fairly translate a Turkish document; there are  but two who could
+write a reply in the same language. Inform him, then, that from the
+present time he will  be excused from all work, except, of course,
+to join in ceremonials when all are required to be present; and
+if you, Sir John, will pick out from among the servitors here one
+who is well instructed and educated, and  capable of writing as
+well as reading his language, I will similarly relieve him of all
+other work, and place  him at the disposal of young Tresham. Tell
+the lad that I hope he will persevere until he obtains a complete
+knowledge of the tongue. You can mention to him what I have said
+as to my opinion of the advantage the  knowledge of it will be to
+him in the Order."
+
+Gervaise accordingly devoted himself to study. His instructor was
+a Turk of fine presence. He had been a  large landowner in Syria,
+and held a high official position in the province, but had been
+captured in a galley  on his way to Constantinople, whither he was
+proceeding on an official mission. He was delighted with his  new
+post. Gervaise, both as the youngest member of the community, and
+from the kind manner in which he  always spoke to the servants,
+-- all of whom had acquired some knowledge of English, -- was a
+general  favourite among them, and the Turk was glad that he was
+to be thrown with him. Still more he rejoiced at  being appointed
+his instructor, as it relieved him from all menial work which,
+although preferable to that to  which the bulk of the slaves were
+condemned, yet galled his spirit infinitely.
+
+Now that he had entered upon the work with the approbation of his
+superior, and a conviction of its great  utility, Gervaise set
+to work with the same zeal and ardour which he had exhibited in
+his military exercises.  During the heat of the day he sat in the
+shade reading and writing with his instructor. In the cool of the
+morning and afternoon he walked with him on the walls, or in the
+country beyond them. After sunset he sat  with him in an unfrequented
+corner of the roof, all the time conversing with him, either of
+his own country,  or that of his instructor.
+
+At first this was difficult, and he had to eke out the Turkish
+words he had acquired with English; but it was  not long before
+there was no necessity for this. His intercourse for ten or twelve
+hours a day with this Turk,  and the pains taken by his instructor,
+caused him to acquire the language with extreme rapidity. Of course,
+he had to put up with a great deal of banter from the younger
+knights upon his passion for study.  Sometimes they pretended that
+his mania, as they considered it, arose from the fact that he was
+determined  to become a renegade, and was fitting himself for a
+high position in the Turkish army. At other times they  insisted
+that his intention was to become a Turkish dervish, or to win a
+great Turkish heiress and settle in  Syria.  But as he always bore
+their banter good temperedly, and was ready occasionally to join
+them in the  sport when assaults-at-arms were carried on, they soon
+became tired of making fun of him.
+
+After nine months' constant work, the young knight's studies were
+abruptly stopped by the receipt of a letter  from the Pasha of Syria,
+offering a considerable sum for the ransom of his instructor. The
+request was at  once acceded to, as it was the policy of the knights
+to accept ransoms for their prisoners, both because the  sums
+so gained were useful, and because they were themselves compelled
+sometimes to pay ransom for  members of the Order. Suleiman Ali
+was, it was arranged, to be put on board an Egyptian craft bound
+for  Acre, a safe conduct having been sent for the vessel and her
+crew, and for a knight, who was to receive the  ransom from the
+pasha.
+
+"At any rate, Sir Gervaise," the Turk said, when the young knight
+expressed great regret at his leaving  them, "our position as
+instructor and pupil would have come to an end shortly. For the
+last three months  there has been but little teaching between us;
+we have talked, and that has been all, save that for a short  time
+each day you read and wrote. But there has been little to teach.
+You speak the native language now as  fluently as I do, and would
+pass anywhere as a Syrian, especially as there are slight differences
+of speech in  the various provinces. I believe that in Syria you
+would not be suspected of being anything but a native, and  assuredly
+you would be taken for a Syrian elsewhere.  You have learnt enough,
+and it would be but a waste  of time for you, a knight and a soldier,
+to spend another day in study."
+
+On the following day Gervaise was, to his surprise, sent for by the
+grand master. Except on the occasion of  a few public ceremonies,
+he had not seen D'Aubusson since he had been elected to his present
+high dignity,  and the summons to attend at the palace therefore
+came unexpectedly.
+
+"We have become quite strangers, Tresham," the grand master said
+cordially when he entered. "I have not  forgotten you, and have
+several times questioned your bailiff concerning you. He tells me
+that you have  become quite an anchorite, and that, save at your
+meals and for an occasional bout-at-arms, you are seldom  to be
+seen. I was glad to hear of your devotion to study, and thought it
+better to leave you undisturbed at it.  Yesterday evening I sent
+for your instructor. He is a man of influence in Syria, and I wished
+to learn how  he was affected towards us, now that he is about to
+return there. We talked for some time, and I then asked  him what
+progress you had made, and was surprised and pleased to find that
+in his opinion you could pass  anywhere as a native, and that you
+were perfectly capable of drawing up and writing any document I
+might  desire to send to the sultan or any of his generals. This
+is far more than I had expected, and shows how  earnestly you must
+have worked. Your knowledge may prove of much assistance to the
+Order, and believe  me, the time you have spent in acquiring it may
+prove of much greater advantage to you in your career than  if you
+had occupied it in performing even the most valiant deeds, and
+that at some future time it will ensure  your appointment to a
+responsible office here. It was partly to assure you of my approbation
+that I sent for  you, partly to inform you that I have appointed
+you to proceed with Suleiman Ali as the knight in charge of  the
+vessel, and to receive the ransom agreed on, upon your handing him
+over. The office is an honourable  one and one of trust, and it is
+the first fruits of the advantages you will gain by your knowledge
+of Turkish.  No, do not thank me. I am selecting you because you
+are better fitted than any knight I can spare for the  mission, and
+also, I may say, because the choice will be pleasing to Suleiman
+Ali, whose goodwill I am  desirous of gaining. Before now Turkish
+provinces have thrown off their allegiance to the sultan. They
+have, I must admit, been usually reconquered, but such might not
+be always the case; and if such an event  happened in Syria, this
+man's influence and goodwill might be of great advantage to us,
+as it might well suit  us to ally ourselves with Syria against
+Constantinople. I am glad to say that I found him at least as well
+disposed as any man could be who had been some years in slavery. He
+admitted that, for a slave, he had  been kindly and gently treated,
+and added that any unpleasant memories he might have retained had
+been  obliterated by the nine months of pleasant companionship
+spent with you."
+
+When Gervaise returned to dinner at the auberge, and informed Ralph
+Harcourt and the other young knights  that he had been appointed to
+take charge of the vessel in which Suleiman Ali was to be conveyed
+to Acre,  the statement was at first received with incredulity. It
+seemed incredible that the youngest knight in the  langue should be
+chosen for such a mission, involving as it did a separate command.
+Even the older  knights, when the news was passed down the table,
+were surprised.
+
+"I must say that I am astonished at the grand master's choice. Sir
+Gervaise Tresham doubtless distinguished  himself greatly some months
+since, but from that time he has not been out with the galleys,
+or, indeed, done  anything that would seem to recommend him for so
+marked a favour as a separate command."
+
+"I don't know, Wingate," Sir John Boswell said. "It seems to me that
+when a young knight of seventeen  eschews all pleasure, refrains
+from volunteering for service at sea, and spends his whole time
+in study, he  does distinguish himself, and that very greatly. Of
+the three or four hundred young knights here I doubt if  one other
+would have so acted.  Certainly, none to my knowledge have done so.
+Yet I do not suppose that  D'Aubusson selected him for this duty
+as a reward for so much self denial and study, but because by that
+self denial and study he is more fitted for it than any of us here,
+save some three or four knights in the other  langues, all of whom
+are in too high a position to be employed in so unimportant a duty.
+He can speak  Turkish -- not a few score of words and sentences
+such as I can, but, as Suleiman Ali tells me, like a native.  Were
+one of us chosen for this mission, it would be necessary to send
+an interpreter with him; and every  one knows how hard it is to
+do business in that manner. It seems to me that the grand master
+has acted  wisely in putting aside all question of seniority, and
+employing the knight who is better suited than any  other for it."
+
+"You are right, Boswell," the bailiff said. "I really have been
+astonished at the manner in which Tresham  has given himself up to
+study. It would have been a natural thing had he, after gaining so
+much credit, been  anxious and eager to gain more. When you spoke
+to me about his determination to learn Turkish, I thought  he
+would speedily tire of it, and that when the next galley sailed,
+his name would be among the list of  volunteers for the service. I
+am sure, comrades, that there are few, if any, among us who would
+not  infinitely prefer fighting the Moslems to spending our whole
+time in learning their language; and I for one  consider the fact
+that he has for nine months laboured so incessantly and assiduously
+that he has come, as  Boswell says, to speak it like a native, is
+even more to his credit than the deed for which he was knighted."
+
+This conversation took place at the upper end of the table, and was
+not heard at the lower end where the  younger knights were seated.
+
+"I am not chosen from favour," Gervaise said hotly, to one of his
+companions who had asserted that this  was so.  "I am simply chosen
+because I can speak Turkish."
+
+"How much Turkish can you speak?" one of them laughed.  Gervaise
+turned to the Turkish servant behind  them, and said, in his language,
+"Hassan, Sir Giles Trevor wishes to know how well I speak Turkish.
+You  have heard me talking with Suleiman Ali. Will you give him
+your opinion about it?"
+
+The man turned gravely to Sir Giles Trevor.
+
+"My lord," he said, in English, "Sir Gervaise Tresham, he speaks
+Turkish same as I do. If he dress up in  Turk clothes I suppose
+him Turk, not know he Christian by his speech."
+
+Exclamations of surprise broke from the young knights.
+
+"Well, you have earned the appointment, Tresham," Ralph Harcourt
+said heartily. "You always told me  when I asked you that you were
+getting on, but I had not the least idea that you were getting on
+like this.  And can you read and write the Turkish language?"
+
+"Well enough for practical purposes, Ralph. At any rate, I wrote
+a complimentary letter this morning from  the grand master to the
+governor of Syria, and the bailiff of Spain, who was, as you know,
+for ten years a  prisoner among the Turks, read it through at
+D'Aubusson's request, to see that there was no error in it, and
+was good enough to pass it without alteration."
+
+"I would give a good deal," Sir Giles Trevor said, "if I could
+follow your example, and shut myself up for  nine months with an
+infidel to study his language; but I could not do it if my life
+depended on it. I should  throw myself off the wall at the end of
+the first fortnight."
+
+"I don't pretend that I can do what Tresham has done," Ralph Harcourt
+said. "I always hated our lessons  with the chaplain, who gave me
+the character of having the thickest head of any of his pupils;
+but I vow" --  and he kissed the handle of his dagger -- "I will
+spend half an hour a day in trying to learn something of  Turkish.
+Of course, I know that such time will not be enough to learn a
+great deal; but if one could get up  just enough to be able to give
+orders to the slaves, to question the captain of a vessel one has
+captured, and  to make them understand a little, if by bad luck
+one fell into their hands, it would be quite enough for me. I  am
+sure sometimes one is quite at a loss how to pass the hours when
+the sun is at its hottest, and if one tried  one ought to be able
+to pick up a little without much trouble.  Look at the servants;
+there is not one of them  but speaks a little English. And if an
+infidel can learn enough English to get on with, without any regular
+study, I can't see why we shouldn't be able to learn enough Turkish
+in the same way."
+
+Two or three of the other young knights declared that they too
+would devote a short time during the heat of  the day to learning
+Turkish, and they agreed to begin together forthwith with one of
+the servants, who  spoke English most fluently. Robert Rivers was
+not present, for he had returned to England six months  before, to
+take up his residence at the House in Clerkenwell, in order that he
+might bring to bear the interest  of his many powerful friends to
+secure for him an appointment as commander of one of the estates of
+the  Order in England. His departure had caused general satisfaction
+among the other knights, whom his  arrogance and ill temper had
+frequently irritated. Gervaise especially was glad at his leaving
+the Island, for  after he received the honour of knighthood,
+Rivers made a point of always addressing him with an  affectation
+of deference and respect that often tried his temper to the utmost.
+
+"It is well that Rivers has gone," Ralph said, laughing, "for I
+don't know how he would have supported the  chagrin your appointment
+would have given him. He was devoured with jealousy as it was, but
+this would  have been a trial beyond bearing."
+
+"I am heartily glad he has gone," Gervaise said gravely.  "I have
+put up with a great deal from him, but I  don't think I could have
+stood much more. If our vows had not forbidden our fighting I should
+have called  him to account long ago; but the only thing else to
+do was for me to lodge a formal complaint before the  bailiff, of
+his continually offensive bearing and manner, which I could not
+bring myself to do, and indeed  there was no special matter that
+would have seemed to justify me, no single speech that in itself
+would  warrant such grave action on my part. I used to wish over and
+over again that we could but meet in some  quiet spot in England,
+both unarmed, and could there settle the matter in good English
+fashion, with our  fists, or even with a couple of quarterstaffs."
+
+The others laughed.
+
+"That would be a very unknightly form of contest."
+
+"I care not for that," Gervaise replied. "It would be a very
+satisfactory one anyhow, and quite serious  enough for the occasion.
+His sneers and petty insults were not sufficient to justify the
+drawing of blood, and  there has been enough of that shed for the
+last twenty years in England without two brother knights  betaking
+themselves to their swords against each other. But a sound thrashing
+would have done neither of  us harm, and if it had fallen to his
+lot to get the largest share of it, it might have done him some
+good."
+
+"He thinks he is sure of an appointment," one of the others said,
+"but he has been so frequently in trouble  here that it is likely
+that the official report, which is always sent home to the grand
+prior when the knights  return to England, will be so unfavourable
+that even the most powerful influence will fail to obtain him a
+post. If so, we may have him back here again, especially if the
+Turks carry out their threat of assailing us,  for an appeal will
+be made to all the grand priors for knights to aid in the defence."
+
+That evening Gervaise went again to the palace to receive final
+instructions.
+
+"The craft in which you are to travel is an Egyptian trader. As
+at present war has not been formally declared  between us and the
+sultan, peaceful traders, as you know, carry on their avocations
+unmolested either by  the warships of the Turks or by ours; they
+do not enter our ports without a special permit, and the crews
+are  never allowed to land, in order that no detailed account of
+our fortifications may be taken to the sultan.  Moreover, brawls
+might arise between them and the native population, or they might
+aid slaves to escape.  However, you will be altogether safe from
+interference from Turkish war vessels, and if overhauled by one  of
+them the safe conduct will be sufficient to prevent interference
+with you. But it is not so with pirates.  They will plunder their
+own countrymen as readily as they will Christians, and the safe
+guard of the  governor of Syria will be of no use whatever to you.
+In this consists the danger of your mission. I cannot  send one
+of our war galleys on such an errand, and if there are not enough
+knights on board to beat off any  pirate, the fewer there are the
+better. I hear that the craft is a fast sailor, and as the crew
+will be as anxious  to avoid pirates as you, they will do their
+best to escape. I leave it to you to take any route. You can either
+sail hence direct for Acre, or you can coast along the shores of
+Anatolia and Syria, lying up at night in bays.
+
+"Should you be overtaken I do not think it would be of any use
+for you to disguise yourself, for some of the  crew would be sure
+to denounce you. Should the worst happen, and you are captured
+by pirates, you will of  course in the first place show them your
+safe conduct, and if I find that you do not return I shall send at
+once to the governor of Syria, complaining of your capture when
+furnished with his safeguard, and  requesting him to order a search
+for you to be made at every port on the coast, with instructions
+that you are  to be at once released, and either sent to him for
+return hither, or placed on board a craft bound for any  Christian
+port; while you, on your part, will endeavour to acquaint the
+Turkish authorities with the fact that  you have been seized while
+travelling with a safe conduct from the governor of Syria.
+
+"But, more than from any efforts on your part or mine, I rely upon
+Suleiman Ali, who will, I am sure, as  soon as he is set on shore,
+lose no time in acquainting the pasha of your capture, and in
+calling upon him to  interfere in your favour. In that case, the
+worst that could befall you would be a temporary detention,  unless,
+indeed, the pirates should take you to Egypt. As that country is
+friendly with us at present, since  Egypt dreads the ever increasing
+power of the Turks, it will be but a question of ransom, for I
+have secret  agents there who will inform me without delay of the
+arrival of a Christian captive."
+
+"I understand, sir, and will do my best in the matter. If I am
+captured I trust that an opportunity of escape  will soon present
+itself, for I should, if taken, conceal from my captors the fact
+that I understand their  language, and should thus, if I could
+evade my guard, have every chance of escaping, as in a native dress
+I  could meet and converse with those hunting for me, without their
+having a suspicion of my being the white  slave for whom they were
+in search."
+
+"Once at Acre you will be safe. But do not land unless it is absolutely
+necessary, for you might fall a victim  to the fanaticism of its
+inhabitants, and no knight has ever set foot on shore there since
+the ill fated day  when the Moslems wrested it from us, bathed the
+ruined walls with the best blood of our Order and the  Templars', and
+destroyed the last hope of our ever recovering the Holy Sepulchre."
+
+The next morning at daybreak Gervaise and Suleiman Ali went on
+board the Egyptian trader, and sailed for  Acre.  The current of
+opinion had changed at the auberge when the knights came to think over
+the mission  on which Gervaise was about to start, and the slight
+feeling of jealousy with which the younger knights had  received
+the news was entirely dissipated. While it did not seem to them
+that there was any chance of his  distinguishing himself, they
+perceived, as they thought it over, the considerable danger there
+was of capture  by pirates, and Ralph and some of his companions
+came down to the mole to see him off, with feelings in  which envy
+bore no part whatever.
+
+"I see now, Gervaise, that it is truly no holiday excursion on
+which you are starting. I should envy you  greatly were you going
+in command of an armed galley, prepared to beat off any craft that
+might try to  overhaul you; but, going alone as you are, it is a
+very different thing.  Should pirates meet you, you could  offer
+no resistance, and your position would be a perilous one indeed.
+However, I think you are born to  good luck, and am confident that
+your patron saint will look after you, and therefore expect to see
+you back  here in a fortnight's time at the outside."
+
+"I hope so with all my heart, Ralph. It will be no fault of mine
+if I tarry."
+
+"Will you keep the open sea, or skirt the land, Tresham?" one of
+the others asked.
+
+"I shall keep the open sea. The grand master left me to choose my
+course; but I think there is more danger  by the coast -- where
+pirates may be hiding in unfrequented bays, in readiness to pounce
+upon a passing  craft -- than in the open sea, where we should have
+at least the advantage that we could not be taken by  surprise, and
+might make a race of it. But the sun will be up in a few minutes,
+and my orders were to set out  at sunrise, so I must say goodbye
+at once."
+
+As soon as the vessel was under way, Gervaise took a seat on the poop
+by the side of Suleiman Ali, and  related to him the conversation
+he had had with the grand master.
+
+"The risk that you will run has not escaped me," the Turk said, "and
+indeed, I now regret that you were  chosen as my escort. I almost
+wish that my son had not purchased my freedom at the present time,
+since it  involves the risk of you losing yours. There is no doubt
+that the sea swarms with pirates; the sultan is too  busy with
+his own struggles for Empire to bestow any attention upon so small
+a matter.  The pashas and the  officers of the ports have not the
+power, even had they the will, to put down piracy in their districts,
+and  indeed are, as often as not, participators in the spoils.  Your
+Order, which, years back, scoured the seas so  hotly that piracy
+well nigh ceased, have now for forty years been obliged to turn
+their attention chiefly to  their own defence.  They possess a
+comparatively small fleet of galleys, and their wealth is expended
+on  their fortress.
+
+"What with Egypt and the sultan their hands are too full for them
+to act as the police of the sea, and the  consequence is that
+from every port, bay, and inlet, pirate craft set out -- some mere
+rowboats, some, like  those under the command of Hassan Ali, veritable
+fleets. Thus the humblest coasters and the largest  merchant craft
+go alike in fear of them, and I would that the sultan and Egypt and
+your Order would for two  or three years put aside their differences,
+and confine their efforts to sweeping the seas of these pests, to
+storming their strongholds, and to inflicting such punishment upon
+them as that, for a very long time to  come, peaceful merchants
+might carry on their trade without fear.
+
+"I heard you tell the captain that he was to steer straight for
+Acre, and I think you are right in avoiding the  coast, where the
+most harmless looking fishing boat may carry a crowd of pirates
+hidden in her hold. At the  same time, if you will take my advice
+you will head much more to the south, so as to be out of the regular
+track of ships making from Constantinople or the islands to Acre.
+You may meet pirates anywhere, but they  are assuredly thicker along
+the more frequented routes. The safest plan of all would probably
+be to bear  south, and strike the Egyptian coast well to the east
+of the mouth of the Nile. Thence, till you get to  Palestine, the
+country is utterly barren and uninhabited, while, running up the
+coast to Palestine, there are,  save at Jaffa, no ports to speak
+of until you arrive at Acre; and besides, the inhabitants there,
+even if pirates,  would not venture to disregard the pasha's safe
+conduct. I do not by any means say that such a course would  be
+absolutely safe. You may meet with vessels on your way south, and
+doubtless some of them cruise off  the barren coast I speak of,
+to intercept traders to and from Egypt and Acre, and other Syrian
+ports; for the  trade carried on is considerable, and, although of
+the same religion, the Turks are disposed to view the  Egyptians as
+enemies rather than as friends, and would have even less hesitation
+in plundering them than in  robbing their own countrymen."
+
+"I think that your suggestion is a good one, and will follow
+it, at any rate. The course is a good deal longer,  but that is
+comparatively of little moment. The great thing is to carry you
+safely to Acre."
+
+"And to get back with equal safety," Suleiman said, with a smile.
+
+"That is quite as important in my eyes; in fact, of the two, I
+would far rather that we were captured on our  voyage thither, for
+in that case I might be able to arrange for the ransom of both of
+us."
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII AN EVENING AT RHODES
+
+
+Suleiman Ali's advice was carried out. It added considerably to
+the length of the voyage; but they saw only  one doubtful craft.
+She was lying close inshore under the shadow of the sand hills, and
+they did not see her  until she hoisted her sails and shot out from
+the land.  They were, however, three miles distant from the  land
+at the time, and the wind was blowing from the north; consequently
+the pirate was dead to leeward.  Every sail was set at once on board
+the trader, and, being a fast sailor, she maintained her position
+until  nightfall. The wind then dropped, and just as the light
+faded they could see that the vessel behind them had  put out her
+sweeps. The trader kept up her sails until certain that she could
+be no longer seen; then the  canvas was lowered, and the crew took
+to the boats and towed her due north.
+
+The night was fortunately a dark one, and those watching anxiously
+from the deck of the trader were unable  to discern her pursuer
+as she passed behind them. As soon as they were well assured that
+she must have  gone on, the boats were got in, the sails hoisted
+again, and, taking advantage of every light flaw of wind,  they
+proceeded on their course. In the morning the sails of the galley
+could be seen on the horizon, but the  distance was too great for
+her to take up the pursuit again with any chance of success, and
+the trader  continued her course to Acre without seeing more of
+her.
+
+As soon as the trader entered the port, the Egyptian captain went
+on shore, taking with him a copy of the  safe conduct and the letter
+from the grand master to the pasha.  Going to the residence of the
+governor, he  handed these to him, saying that he had on board Aga
+Suleiman Ali, and a knight who was charged to  deliver him up on
+payment of the ransom.
+
+"I have been expecting you," the governor said. "I have received
+a letter from the pasha, stating that he had  written to the grand
+master respecting the ransom of the aga, and sending me the amount
+which Suleiman's  son had offered.  The young man was not of age
+when his father was captured, but he is so now, and was  therefore
+able to raise the sum required. I will go down to the port with you
+myself, hand over the ransom,  and welcome Suleiman, whom I know
+well, back from his captivity."
+
+The transfer was speedily made; a heavy purse was handed to Gervaise,
+and Suleiman was a free man.
+
+"Send me word, if you can, when you return to Rhodes," the latter
+said, as he bade farewell to the young  knight. "I shall be anxious
+until I hear. Fortune was with us as we sailed hither, but it may
+desert you on  your return.  Should aught befall you, tell your
+captors that if they bring you to me I will pay any ransom  that
+they could, in fairness, require. Should they refuse to do this,
+send, if possible, a messenger to me, and  on receipt of your
+message I will send a trusty man to purchase your freedom. You have
+treated me as a  friend and an equal, and a friend I shall always
+remain."
+
+The vessel was to remain four days in port, to discharge her cargo
+and take in another, and Suleiman had  talked of remaining at Acre
+until she sailed, but Gervaise protested strongly against this.
+
+"You have your family, from whom you have been so long separated,
+awaiting your return with anxiety,  and I pray you to make no
+stay on my account. I am well content to remain on board here, and
+to look at  the city which has so often been the theatre of great
+deeds -- which Richard the Lion Heart captured, and  which so many
+of the Hospitallers died to defend. I was charged by the grand
+master not to land, and  indeed I feel myself that it would be an
+act of folly to do so. There are doubtless many on shore who have
+relatives and friends now working as slaves among us, and some of
+these might well seek to avenge them  by slaying one of the Order.
+I feel your kindness, but it would be a pain to me to know that
+you were  lingering here on my account, when you must be longing
+to embrace your children."
+
+The four days passed rapidly. Gervaise had, at the suggestion of
+the governor, laid aside the mantle and  insignia of the Order.
+
+"If you do not do so," he said, "I must place a strong guard of
+soldiers on board, in order to ensure that the  pasha's safeguard
+is not violated. Sailors are a turbulent race, and were you recognised
+here they might  make a tumult, and slay you before a word of what
+was going on reached me. In any case I shall place two  soldiers
+on board until you leave the port."
+
+On the morning of the fifth day the sails were got up, and the
+vessel sailed out from the port. Fortune again  favoured them, and
+they reached Rhodes without any adventure. Gervaise went at once
+to the palace, and  handed over the purse of gold to the treasurer.
+He then sent up his name to the grand master, and was  immediately
+conducted to his room.
+
+"I am glad to see you back, Tresham. I have been uneasy about you.
+Have you fulfilled your mission  without adventure?"
+
+"Without any adventure, sir, save that we were once chased by
+a pirate on our way east, but escaped in the  darkness. Save for
+that, the voyage has been wholly uneventful. I have received the
+ransom, and handed the  purse to your treasurer."
+
+"I am glad that your first command has turned out so well. I will
+see that you do not lack employment; and  the fact that you are able
+to act as interpreter will ensure you a welcome on any galley. At
+present,  however, it is not my intention to send out many cruisers.
+Every life now is precious, and no amount of  spoil that can be
+brought in will counter balance the loss of those who fall. However,
+I may find some  mission on which you can be employed. I know that
+you love an active life; and as, for nine months, you  have put a
+rein on your inclinations, and have devoted yourself wholly to study,
+so that you might be of  greater use to the Order, you have a good
+right to any employment in which your knowledge can be  utilised."
+
+On his arrival at the auberge, Gervaise was very heartily greeted
+by the younger knights.
+
+"I told you you were born lucky, Gervaise," Ralph Harcourt said.
+"There has been more than one wager  made that you would be captured;
+but I, for my part, was confident that your good fortune would not
+desert  you. Still, though not surprised, we are delighted to see
+you again. Now tell us about your voyage."
+
+Gervaise gave a brief account of the adventure with the pirate,
+and then described the visit of the governor  to the ship.
+
+"Did he say anything to you?"
+
+"He was courteous and solemn; just the sort of man you would fancy
+a Turkish governor should be. He  looked a little surprised when I
+accosted him in Turkish, but asked no questions at the time, though
+I  daresay he inquired afterwards of Suleiman how I came to speak
+the language.  The only time he actually  said anything was when
+he requested that I would not wear the mantle of the Order while in
+port, as sailors  were a turbulent race, and it might lead to an
+attack upon me; and as he was responsible to the pasha that  his safe
+conduct should be respected, it would be necessary, if I declined
+to follow his advice, to keep a  strong body of soldiers on board.
+As this would have been a horrible nuisance, especially as I wanted
+to  enjoy in quiet the view of the city, with its castle and walls,
+I acceded at once to his request, which seemed  to me a reasonable
+one.  He did send two soldiers on board, but they remained down in
+the waist, and did  not interfere with my pleasure in any way."
+
+"Next to Jerusalem, how I should like to see Acre!" Ralph Harcourt
+exclaimed. "It is, of all other cities, the  most closely connected
+with our Order. We helped to win it, and we were the last to defend
+it. We have  heard so much about the fortress, and it has been so
+often described to me, that I know the situation of  every bastion
+-- at least, as it was when we left it, though I know not what
+changes the Turks may since  have made."
+
+"That I know not, Ralph. Of course, I only saw the seafront, and it
+was upon the land side that the attack  was made. We know that the
+breaches were all repaired long ago, and it is said that the place
+is stronger  than ever. From the port all was solid and massive. It
+is indeed a grand and stately fortress. Here we have  done all that
+was possible to make Rhodes impregnable, but nature did nothing for
+us; there nature has done  everything, and the castle looks as if
+it could defy the assaults of an army, however large. And indeed,
+it  was not wrested from us by force. The knights, when the city
+walls were stormed and the town filled with  their foes fought
+their way down to the water's edge and embarked there, for they
+were reduced to a mere  handful; and however strong a castle may
+be, it needs hands to defend it. Still, it well nigh moved me to
+tears to see the Turkish banner waving over it, and to think how
+many tens of thousands of Christian  soldiers had died in the effort
+to retain the holy places, and had died in vain."
+
+"I wonder whether the Turks will ever be forced to relinquish their
+hold of the holy places?"
+
+"Who can tell, Sir Giles?" the bailiff, who had come up to the group
+unobserved, said quietly. "Certainly  not in our time -- not until
+the Moslem power, which threatens not only us, but all Europe, has
+crumbled to  dust. So long as Acre remains in their power there is
+no hope. I say not but that by a mighty effort of all  Christendom,
+Palestine might be wrested from the infidels, as it was wrested
+before; but the past shows us  that while men or nations can be
+stirred to enthusiasm for a time, the fire does not last long, and
+once again  the faithful few would be overwhelmed by the odds that
+would be brought against them, while Europe  looked on impassive,
+if not indifferent. No, knights; the utmost that can be hoped for,
+is that the tide of  Moslem invasion westward may be stayed. At
+present we are the bulwark, and as long as the standard of  our
+Order waves over Rhodes so long is Europe safe by sea. But I foresee
+that this cannot last: the strongest  defences, the stoutest hearts,
+and the bravest of hearts, cannot in the long run prevail against
+overpowering  numbers. As at Acre, we may repel assault after
+assault, we may cause army after army to betake  themselves again
+to their ships; but, as a rock is overwhelmed by the rising tide,
+so must Rhodes succumb  at last, if left by Europe to bear alone
+the brunt of Moslem invasion. All that men can do we shall do. As
+long as it is possible to resist, we shall resist. When further
+resistance becomes impossible, we shall, I trust,  act as we did
+before.
+
+"We were driven from Palestine, only to fortify ourselves at Rhodes.
+If we are driven from Rhodes, we  shall, I feel assured, find a
+home elsewhere, and again commence our labours. The nearer we are
+to Europe  the more hope there is that Christendom will aid us,
+for they will more generally understand that our defeat  would mean
+the laying open of the shores of the Mediterranean, from Turkey
+to Gibraltar, to the invasion  of the Moslems. However, comrades,
+this is all in the future. Our share is but in the present, and
+I trust the  flag of the Order will float over Rhodes as long,
+at least, as the lifetime of the youngest of us, and that we  may
+bequeath the duty of upholding the Cross untarnished to those who
+come after us; and we can then  leave the issue in God's hands."
+
+All listened respectfully to the words of their leader, although
+his opinion fell like cold water upon the fiery  zeal and high
+hopes of his hearers. The possibility of their losing Rhodes had
+never once entered into the  minds of the majority of them. It was
+likely that ere long they might be called upon to stand a siege,
+but,  acquainted as they were with the strength of the place --
+its deep and seemingly impassable moat, its  massive walls, and
+protecting towers and bastions -- it had seemed to them that Rhodes
+was capable of  withstanding all assaults, however numerous the
+foe, however oft repeated the invasion. The bailiff was, as  all
+knew, a man of dauntless courage, of wide experience and great
+judgment, and that he should believe  that Rhodes would, although
+not in their time, inevitably fall, brought home to them for the
+first time the  fact that their fortress was but an outpost of
+Europe, and one placed so distant from it that Christendom, in  the
+hour of peril, might be unable to furnish them with aid.  As the
+bailiff walked away, there was silence  for a short time, and then
+Sir Giles Trevor said cheerfully, "Well, if it lasts our time we
+need not trouble our  heads as to what will take place afterwards.
+As the bailiff says, our duty is with the present, and as we all
+mean to drive the Turks back when they come, I do not see that there
+is any occasion for us to take it to  heart, even if it be fated
+that the Moslems shall one day walk over our tombs. If Christendom
+chooses to be  supine, let Christendom suffer, say I. At any rate,
+I am not going to weep for what may take place after I  am turned
+into dust."
+
+"That sounds all very well, Sir Giles," Ralph Harcourt said, "and
+I have no argument to advance against it,  though I am sure there
+is much to be said; but if the bailiff, or the chaplain, or indeed
+any of the elders, had  heard you say so, I have no doubt you would
+have had a fitting reply."
+
+Sir Giles tossed his head mockingly. "I shall fight neither better
+nor worse, friend Harcourt, because it may  be that someday the
+Moslems are, as the bailiff seems to think, destined to lord it
+here. I have only  promised and vowed to do my best against the
+Moslems, and that vow only holds good as long as I am in  the flesh;
+beyond that I have no concern. But what are we staying here for,
+wasting our time? It is the hour  for those of us who are going,
+to be starting for the ball given by Signor Succhi; as he is one
+of the richest  merchants in the town, it will be a gay one, and
+there is no lack of fair faces in Rhodes. It is a grievous pity
+that our elders all set their will against even the younger members
+of the community joining in a dance. It  was not one of the things
+I swore to give up. However, here in Rhodes there is no flying in
+the face of  rules."
+
+Three or four of the other young knights were also going.
+
+"What are you thinking of doing, Gervaise?" Harcourt asked.
+
+"I have nothing particular to do, Ralph, except that, first of all,
+I must write a letter to Suleiman Ali and  hand it to the bailiff,
+praying him to send it off by the first vessel that may put in here
+on her way to Acre.  If I do not do it now it may be neglected,
+and I promised to write directly I got here. I will not be half an
+hour, and after that I shall be ready to do anything you like."
+
+In less than that time, indeed, he rejoined Ralph. "Now what shall
+we do with ourselves? What do you say  to a stroll through the
+streets? I am never tired of that."
+
+"I like better to go by way of the roofs, Gervaise. The streets
+are badly lit, and although they are busy  enough in some quarters,
+they are so narrow that one gets jostled and pushed. On the terraces
+everything is  quiet. You have plenty of light and music, and it is
+pleasant to see families sitting together and enjoying  themselves;
+and if one is disposed for a cup of wine or of cool sherbet, they
+are delighted to give it, for they  all are pleased when one of us
+joins a group.  I have quite a number of acquaintances I have made
+in this  way while you have been working away at your Turkish."
+
+"Very well," Gervaise said. "If such is your fancy, Ralph, let us
+take one of the paths across the roofs. I  might walk there twenty
+years by myself without making an acquaintance, and I do not pledge
+myself to  join in these intimacies of yours. However, I shall be
+quite content to amuse myself by looking on at the  scene in general,
+while you are paying your visits and drinking your sherbet."
+
+"There are plenty of fair girls among the Rhodians," Ralph said,
+with a smile; "and though we are pledged  to celibacy we are in no
+way bound to abstain from admiration."
+
+Gervaise laughed.
+
+"Admire as much as you like, Ralph, but do not expect me to do so.
+I have scarcely as much as spoken to a  woman since I entered the
+House in London, and I should have no idea what to say to a young
+girl."
+
+"But it is part of the education of a true knight to be courteous
+to women. It is one of the great duties of  chivalry.  And you must
+remember that we are secular knights, as well knights of the Order."
+
+"The work of the Order is quite sufficient for me at present, Ralph.
+In time I may come to like the society  of women, to admire their
+beauty, and possibly even to wear the colour of some one, for that
+seems to be  the fashion; though why we, who are bound to celibacy,
+should admire one woman more than another I  cannot understand."
+
+They had by this time descended from the castle, and were taking
+their way along one of the broad paths  that led over the flat roofs
+of the houses by means of the bridges thrown across the streets.
+
+"These are some acquaintances of mine," Ralph said, stopping at
+one of the walls, some three feet high, that  bordered the path.
+
+Beyond was an enclosure of some fifty feet square.  Clumps of shrubs
+and flowers, surrounded by  stonework some eight or ten inches
+high enclosing the earth in which they grew, were scattered here
+and  there. Lamps were hung to cords stretched above it, while
+others were arranged among the flowers. In the  centre a large carpet
+was spread, and on this some eight or ten persons were seated on
+cushions. A girl was  playing a lute, and another singing to her
+accompaniment. She stopped abruptly when her eye fell upon the
+figures of the two young knights.
+
+"There is Sir Ralph Harcourt, father!" she exclaimed in Italian,
+which was the language most used on the  Island, and spoken with
+more or less fluency by all the knights, among whom it served as
+a general medium  of communication. "Are you waiting to be invited
+in, Sir Knight?" she went on saucily. "I thought that by  this time
+you would know you were welcome."
+
+"Your tongue runs too fast, child," her father said, as he rose and
+walked across to Ralph. "You are  welcome, Sir Ralph, very welcome.
+I pray you enter and join us."
+
+"I will do so with pleasure, Signor Vrados, if you will also extend
+your hospitality to my friend Sir  Gervaise Tresham."
+
+"Most gladly," the merchant said. "I pray him to enter."
+
+The two knights passed through the gate in the wall.  All rose to
+their feet as they went up to the carpet, and  greeted Ralph with
+a warmth which showed that he was a favourite. He introduced Gervaise
+to them.
+
+"I wonder that I do not know your face, Sir Knight," the merchant's
+wife said. "I thought I knew all the  knights of the Order by sight,
+from seeing them either at the public ceremonies, or observing them
+pass in  the streets."
+
+"For the last nine months Sir Gervaise has been an anchorite. He
+has been learning Turkish, and has so  devoted himself to the study
+that even I have scarce caught sight of him, save at meals. As for
+walking in  the streets, it is the last thing he would think of
+doing. I consider myself a good and conscientious young  knight,
+but I am as nothing in that respect to my friend. I used to look
+upon him as my little brother, for we  were at the House of the
+Order in London together. He is four years younger than I am, and
+you know four  years between boys makes an immense difference. Now
+the tables are turned, and I quite look up to him."
+
+"You will believe as much as you like, Signora, of what Sir Ralph
+says," Gervaise laughed. "As you have,  he says, known him for
+some time, you must by this time have learnt that his word is not
+to be taken  literally."
+
+"We learned that quite early in our acquaintance," the girl who
+had first noticed them said, with an  affectation of gravity. "I
+always tell him that I cannot believe anything he says, and I am
+grateful to you, Sir  Knight, for having thus borne evidence to
+the quickness of my perception."
+
+By this time the servants had brought some more cushions, and on these
+Ralph and Gervaise seated  themselves. Wine, sherbet, and cakes,
+were then handed round. The master of the house placed Gervaise on
+his right hand, as a stranger.
+
+"You have been among our islands, Sir Gervaise? But indeed, I need
+not ask that, since I know that you and  Sir Ralph were knighted
+together for your valour in that affair with the ships of Hassan
+Ali. We come from  Lesbos. It is now eighty years since my family
+settled in Rhodes, and we have seen it grow from a small  place to
+a great fortress."
+
+"'Tis a wonderful place," Gervaise said. "I know nothing of the
+fortresses of Europe, but it seems to me that  no other can well
+be stronger than this -- that is, among places with no natural
+advantages."
+
+"The knights have always had an abundance of slaves," the merchant
+said; "so many that they have not only  had sufficient for their
+work here, but have been able to sell numbers to European potentates.
+Yes, Rhodes  is wonderfully strong. That great fosse would seem
+as if it could defy the efforts of an army to cross; and  yet the
+past has shown that even the strongest defences, held with the
+greatest bravery, can be carried by  generals with immense armies,
+and careless how they sacrifice them so that they do but succeed.
+Look at  Acre, for example."
+
+"I was looking at it five days ago," Gervaise said, "and thinking
+that it was beyond the might of man to  take."
+
+"Do you mean that you were at Acre?" the merchant asked, with
+surprise.
+
+"Yes. I went there to hand over a captive who had been ransomed.
+Of course I had a safe conduct, and I  was glad indeed of the
+opportunity of seeing so famous a fortress."
+
+"You were fortunate indeed, Sir Knight, and it was, if you will
+pardon my saying so, singular that so young  a knight should have
+been chosen. Assuredly, even the senior knights of the Order would
+rejoice at the  opportunity of beholding a fortress so intimately
+connected with the past history of the Order."
+
+"It was due entirely to my being able to speak Turkish," Gervaise
+said. "As my friend Sir Ralph was  mentioning, I have been studying
+hard, and can now speak the language fluently; and as this was a
+necessity on such a mission, and the few knights who can so speak
+it are all in high office, and could hardly  be asked to undertake
+so unimportant a service, I was selected."
+
+"And you really speak Turkish well? It is an accomplishment that
+few, save Greeks subject to Turkey,  possess. Do you intend, may
+I ask, to make Rhodes your home? I ask because I suppose you would
+not  have taken this labour had you intended shortly to return to
+England."
+
+"Yes; I hope to remain here permanently. I know that the first step
+towards promotion here is generally a  commandery at home, but I
+did not enter the Order with any idea of gaining office or dignity.
+I desire  simply to be a knight of the Cross, and to spend my life
+in doing faithful service to the Order."
+
+"A worthy ambition indeed, and one that, so far as my experience
+goes, very few knights entertain. I see  yearly scores of young
+knights depart, no small proportion of whom never place foot on
+Rhodes again,  although doubtless many of them will hasten back
+again as soon as the danger of an assault from the Turks  becomes
+imminent.  You see, we who dwell here under the protection of
+the Order naturally talk over these  things among ourselves; and
+although, in the matter of fortifications, all will admit that
+enormous efforts  have been made to render the town secure, it is
+clear that in the matter of knights to defend them there is  very
+much left to be desired. It is all very well to say that the knights
+from all parts of Europe would flock  hither to defend it; but the
+journey would be a long one, and would occupy much time, and they
+would  probably not receive news that the Turks had sailed until
+the place was already invested. Then it would be  difficult, if
+not altogether impossible, for ships with reinforcements to make
+their way through the Turkish  fleet, and to enter the port. To
+man the walls properly would need a force five times as numerous
+as that  which is now here. I recognise the valour of your knights;
+they have accomplished wonders. But even they  cannot accomplish
+impossibilities. For a time they could hold the walls; but as their
+number became  reduced by the fire of the Turkish cannon and the
+battles at the breaches, they would at last be too weak any  longer
+to repel the onslaughts of foes with an almost unlimited supply of
+soldiers."
+
+"That is true enough," Gervaise admitted; "and to my mind it is
+shocking that four-fifths at least of the  Order, pledged to oppose
+the infidels, should be occupied with the inglorious work of looking
+after the  manors and estates of the society throughout Europe,
+while one-fifth, at most, are here performing the  duties to which
+all are sworn. Of the revenues of the estates themselves, a mere
+fraction finds its way  hither. Still, I trust that the greater
+part of the knights will hasten here as soon as danger becomes
+imminent,  without waiting for the news that the Turkish armament
+has actually set forth."
+
+For an hour the two young knights remained on the roof, Gervaise
+talking quietly with the merchant, while  his companion laughed
+and chatted with the ladies and friends of their host. After they
+had left, with the  promise that it would not be long before they
+repeated their visit, Ralph bantered Gervaise on preferring the
+society of the merchant to that of his daughters.
+
+"I found him a pleasant and very well informed man, Ralph, and
+enjoyed my talk with him just as you  enjoyed talking nonsense to
+his daughters and listening to their songs. Who was the man sitting
+next to the  eldest daughter?"
+
+"He doesn't belong to Rhodes, but is a Greek from one of the
+islands, though I did not catch from which. I  don't know whether
+he is a relative of the family, or a business connection of the
+merchant's, or a stranger  who has brought a letter of introduction
+to him. Nothing was said on that head; why do you ask?"
+
+"I don't like the man's face; he is a handsome fellow, but has a
+crafty expression. He did not say much, but  it seemed to me that
+at times, when he appeared to be sitting carelessly sipping his
+sherbet, he was really  trying to listen to what Vrados was saying
+to me. He could not do so, for we were on the other side of the
+circle, and were speaking in somewhat low tones, while the rest of
+you were chatting and laughing."
+
+"What should he want to listen for, most sapient knight?"
+
+"That I can't tell, Ralph; but I am certain that he was trying to
+listen."
+
+"Well, as you were no doubt both talking more sensibly than most
+of us," Ralph laughed, "he certainly  showed his discernment."
+
+"I daresay I am wrong," Gervaise said quietly; "but you know
+we have our spies at Constantinople, and  probably the sultan has
+his spies here; and the idea occurred to me that perhaps this man
+might be one of  them."
+
+"Well, I am bound to say, Gervaise," Ralph said, a little irritably,
+"I have never heard so grave an  accusation brought on such
+insufficient evidence -- or rather, as far as I can see, without a
+shadow of  evidence of any kind. We drop in upon a man who is one
+of our most respected merchants, whose family  has been established
+here many years, whose interests must be the same as those of
+the Order; and because  a guest of his does not care to take any
+active part in my joking with the girls, and because you imagine
+that  there is a cunning expression on his face, you must straightway
+take it into your head that he must be a  spy."
+
+"Excuse me, Ralph, I simply said that the idea occurred to me that
+he might be a spy, which is a very  different thing to my accusing
+him of being one. I am ready to admit that the chances are infinitely
+greater  that he is an honest trader or a relation of the merchant,
+and that his presence here is perfectly legitimate  and natural,
+than that he should be a spy. Still, there is a chance, if it
+be but one out of a thousand, that he  may be the latter. I don't
+think that I am at all of a suspicious nature, but I really should
+like to learn a little  about this man. I do not mean that I am
+going to try to do so. It would be an unworthy action to pry into
+another's business, when it is no concern of one's own. Still, I
+should like to know why he is here."
+
+Ralph shrugged his shoulders.
+
+"This comes of living the life of a hermit, Gervaise.  Other people
+meet and talk, and enjoy what society  there is in the city, without
+troubling their heads for a moment as to where people come from or
+what their  business is here, still less whether they are spies.
+Such ideas do not so much as occur to them, and I must  say that I
+think the sooner you fall into the ways of other people the better."
+
+"There is no harm done," Gervaise said composedly.  "I am not thinking
+of asking our bailiff to order him  to be arrested on suspicion.
+I only remarked that I did not like the man's face, nor the way
+in which, while  he pretended to be thinking of nothing, he was
+trying to overhear what we were saying. I am quite willing  to admit
+that I have made a mistake, not in devoting myself to Turkish, but
+in going to the merchant's with  you this evening. I have had no
+experience whatever of what you call society, and, so far from it
+giving me  pleasure to talk to strangers, especially to women, it
+seems to me that such talk is annoying to me, at any  rate at present.
+When I get to your age, possibly my ideas may change. I don't for
+a moment wish to judge  you or others; you apparently enjoy it,
+and it is a distraction from our serious work. I say simply that
+it is an  amusement which I do not understand. You must remember
+that I entered the Order in consequence of a  solemn vow of my
+dead father, that I regard the profession we make as a very serious
+one, and that my  present intention is to devote my life entirely
+to the Order and to an active fulfilment of its vows."
+
+"That is all right, Gervaise," Ralph said good temperedly. "Only
+I think it would be a pity if you were to  turn out a fanatic.
+Jerusalem and Palestine are lost, and you admit that there is
+really very little chance of  our ever regaining them. Our duties,
+therefore, are changed, and we are now an army of knights, pledged
+to  war against the infidels, in the same way as knights and nobles
+at home are ever ready to engage in a war  with France. The vow
+of poverty is long since obsolete. Many of our chief officials are
+men of great  wealth, and indeed, a grand master, or the bailiff
+of a langue, is expected to spend, and does spend, a sum  vastly
+exceeding his allowance from the Order. The great body of knights
+are equally lax as to some of  their other vows, and carry this to
+a length that, as you know, has caused grave scandal. But I see not
+that it  is in any way incumbent on us to give up all the pleasures
+of life. We are a military Order, and are all ready  to fight
+in defence of Rhodes, as in bygone days we were ready to fight in
+defence of the Holy Sepulchre.  Kings and great nobles have endowed
+us with a large number of estates, in order to maintain us as
+an army  against Islam; and as such we do our duty. But to affect
+asceticism is out of date and ridiculous."
+
+"I have certainly no wish to be an ascetic, Ralph. I should have
+no objection to hold estates, if I had them to  hold. But I think
+that at present, with the great danger hanging over us, it would
+be better if, in the first  place, we were all to spend less time
+in idleness or amusement, and to devote all our energies to the
+cause. I  mean not only by fighting when the time comes for fighting,
+but by endeavouring in every way to ward off  danger."
+
+"When I see danger, I will do my best to ward it off, Gervaise; but
+I cannot go about with my nose in the  air, snuffing danger like
+a hunting dog in pursuit of game. At any rate, I will not bother
+you to accompany  me on my visits in future."
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX WITH THE GALLEY SLAVES
+
+
+Gervaise, on consideration, was obliged to own to himself that Ralph
+was right in saying that he had no  ground whatever for suspicion
+against the Greek he had met at Signor Vrados's; and he could
+see no means  of following the matter up. It would not, he felt,
+be honourable to go again to the merchant's house, and to  avail
+himself of his hospitality, while watching his guest.  He determined
+to dismiss the matter from his  mind, and had, indeed, altogether
+done so when, a week later, it suddenly recurred to his memory.
+
+A party of slaves, under the escort of overseers and in charge of
+a knight who had been with them at their  work on the fortifications,
+were passing along the street on their way back to barracks. It
+was already dusk,  and as Gervaise was going the same way as they
+were, he stood aside in a doorway to let them pass. He  was on the
+point of stepping out to follow them, when he saw a man, who had
+been standing in the shadow  of the wall, fall in with their ranks,
+and, as he walked engaged in an earnest conversation with one of
+the  slaves. He kept beside him for a hundred yards or so, then
+passed something into the slave's hand, and  turned abruptly down
+a side opening. There were but few people about, and in the growing
+darkness the  action of the man passed unobserved by the overseers.
+Gervaise, thinking the occurrence a strange one,  turned down the
+same lane as the man.
+
+He slackened his pace until the latter was fifty yards ahead, so
+that he would not, had he looked round, have  been able to perceive
+that it was a knight who was behind him. After passing through several
+streets, the  man turned into a refreshment house. The door stood
+open, and as the place was brightly lit up, Gervaise,  pausing
+outside, was able to see what was going on inside. The man he had
+followed was on the point of  seating himself at one of the tables,
+and as he did so Gervaise recognised him as the Greek he had met
+at  the merchant's house. He at once walked on a short distance,
+and then paused to think.
+
+The vague suspicions he had before entertained as to the man now
+recurred with double force; he was  certainly in communication
+with one or more of the slaves, and such communication, so secretly
+effected,  could be for no good purpose. So far, however, there
+was nothing he could tax the man with. He would  probably deny
+altogether that he had spoken to any of the slaves, and Gervaise
+could not point out the one  he had conversed with. At any rate,
+nothing could be done now, and he required time to think what steps
+he  could take to follow up the matter. He resolved, however, to
+wait and follow the Greek when he came out.  After a few minutes
+he again repassed the door, and saw that the man was engaged in
+earnest conversation  with another. After considering for a time,
+Gervaise thought that it would be best for him to follow this  other
+man when he left, and ascertain who he was, rather than to keep a
+watch on the movements of the  Greek, who, as likely as not, would
+now return to the merchant's.
+
+He walked several times up and down the street, until at last
+he saw the two men issue out together. They  stopped for a moment
+outside, and then, after exchanging a few words, separated, the
+Greek going in the  direction of the quarter in which lay the house
+of Vrados, while the other walked towards Gervaise. The  latter
+passed him carelessly, but when the man had gone nearly to the end
+of the street, he turned and  followed him. He could see at once
+that he was a lay brother of the Order. This class consisted of
+men of an  inferior social position to the knights; they filled
+many of the minor offices, but were not eligible for  promotion.
+Following for ten minutes, Gervaise saw him approach one of the
+barracks, or prisons,  occupied by the slaves. He knocked at the
+door, and, upon its being opened, at once entered.
+
+The matter had now assumed a much more serious aspect. This young
+Greek, a stranger to Rhodes, was in  communication not only with
+some of the slaves, but with a prison official, and the matter
+appeared so  grave to Gervaise that, after some deliberation, he
+thought it was too important for him to endeavour to  follow out
+alone, and that it was necessary to lay it before the bailiff.
+Accordingly, after the evening meal  he went up to Sir John Kendall,
+and asked if he could confer with him alone on a matter over which
+he was  somewhat troubled. The bailiff assented at once, and Gervaise
+followed him to his private apartment.
+
+"Now, what is this matter, Sir Gervaise?" he asked pleasantly.
+"Nothing serious, I trust?"
+
+"I don't know, Sir John. That is a matter for your consideration;
+but it seems to me of such importance that  it ought to be brought
+to your knowledge."
+
+The face of the bailiff grew more grave, and, seating himself in
+a chair, he motioned to Gervaise to do the  same.
+
+"Now, let me hear what it is," he said.
+
+Gervaise told his story simply. A slight smile passed across the
+bailiff's face as he mentioned that he had  met the Greek on the
+roof of the house of Signor Vrados, and had not liked the expression
+of his face.
+
+"Vrados has some fair daughters, has he not?" he asked.
+
+"Yes, sir; but I know little of them. That is the only visit that I
+ever paid there, or, indeed, to the house of  any one in the town."
+
+Sir John's face grew grave again as Gervaise recounted how he had
+seen the man enter into communication  with a slave; and he frowned
+heavily when he heard of his meeting afterwards with one of the
+prison  officers.
+
+"In truth, Sir Gervaise," he said, after a pause, "this seems to
+be a right serious matter, and you have done  wisely in informing
+me of what you have seen. Assuredly there is mischief of some
+sort in the wind. The  question is how to get to the bottom of it.
+Of course, the grand master might order the arrest of this Greek
+and of the prison officer, but you may be sure that neither would
+commit himself unless torture were  applied; and I, for one, have
+no belief in what any man says under such circumstances. The most
+honest  man may own himself a traitor when racked with torture,
+and may denounce innocent men. It is at best a  clumsy device. What
+think you of the matter?"
+
+"I have hardly thought it over yet, Sir John; and certainly no plan
+has yet occurred to me."
+
+"Well, think it over, Sir Gervaise. It is not likely that a few
+days will make any difference. But I will take  measures to see
+that this Greek does not sail away from the Island at present, and
+will speak to the port  master about it. I will myself give the
+matter consideration, but as you have shown yourself so quick witted
+in following up the matter so far, I rely upon you more than myself
+to carry it farther. There may possibly  be some simple explanation
+of the matter. He may come from an island where the Turks are
+masters, and  has, perhaps, brought a message from some relatives
+of a slave; as to the talk with the prison officer, it may  be
+wholly innocent. If we should find that it is so we will keep this
+matter to ourselves, if possible, or we  shall get finely laughed
+at by our comrades for having run upon a false scent. If, on the
+other hand, the  matter should turn out to be serious, you will
+assuredly get great credit for having discovered it.  Therefore,
+turn it over in your mind tonight, and see if you can arrive at
+some scheme for seeing further into it before  we take any steps.
+
+In the morning Gervaise again called upon Sir John Kendall.
+
+"Well, Sir Gervaise, I hope that you have hit upon some scheme for
+getting to the bottom of this matter. I  confess that I myself,
+though I have had a sleepless night over it, have not been able to
+see any method of  getting to the root of the affair, save by the
+application of torture."
+
+"I do not know whether the plan I have thought of will commend itself
+to your opinion, sir, but I have  worked out a scheme which will,
+I think, enable us to get to the bottom of the matter. I believe
+that a galley  is expected back from a cruise today or tomorrow.
+Now, sir, my idea is that I should go on board a small  craft, under
+the command of a knight upon whose discretion and silence you can
+rely, such as, for example,  Sir John Boswell, and that we should
+intercept the galley. Before we board her I should disguise myself
+as  a Turkish slave, and as such Sir John should hand me over to the
+officer in command of the galley, giving  him a letter of private
+instructions from you as to my disposal. If they have other slaves
+on board I would  ask that I should be kept apart from them, as
+well as from the rowers of the galley. On being landed I  should
+be sent to the prison where I saw the officer enter last night,
+and the slaves and rowers should be  distributed among the other
+prisons. Thus, then, the slaves I should be placed with would only
+know that I  had arrived in the galley with other slaves captured
+by it. I have no doubt I should be able to maintain my  assumed
+character, and should in a short time be taken into the confidence
+of the others, and should learn  what is going on.  It would be
+well, of course, that none of the officials of the prison should
+be informed as  to my true character, for others, besides the one
+I saw, may have been bribed to participate in whatever plot  is
+going on."
+
+"And do you mean to say, Sir Gervaise, that you, a knight of the
+Order, are willing to submit to the  indignity of being treated as
+a slave? To keep up the disguise long enough to be taken into the
+confidence  of the plotters, you might have to stay there for some
+time; and if the prison officials believe you to be but  an ordinary
+slave, you will be put to work either on the walls or in one of
+the galleys."
+
+"I am ready to do anything for the benefit of the Order, and the
+safety of Rhodes, that will meet with your  approval," Gervaise
+replied. "It will no doubt be unpleasant, but we did not enter the
+Order to do pleasant  things, but to perform certain duties, and
+those duties necessarily involve a certain amount of sacrifice."
+
+"Do you think you would be able to maintain the character? Because
+you must remember that if detected  you might be torn in pieces by
+the slaves, before the officers could interfere to protect you."
+
+"I feel sure that I can do so, Sir John."
+
+"What story would you tell them?"
+
+"I would say that I had come from Syria, and sailed from Acre in
+a trader, which is perfectly true, and also  that I was taken off
+the ship I was on by a galley -- which would not be altogether
+false, as I crossed one as  I landed. I think there would be very
+little questioning, for I should pretend to be in a state of sullen
+despair,  and give such short answers to questions that I should
+soon be left alone."
+
+"The scheme is a good one, Sir Gervaise, though full of danger and
+difficulty. If you are ready to render  this great service to the
+Order, I willingly accept the sacrifice you offer to make. I will
+send one of my  slaves down into the town to buy garments suitable
+for you, and also stains for your skin. It will, of course,  be
+necessary for you to shave a portion of your head in Turkish
+fashion. I will also see Sir John Boswell,  and ask him to arrange
+for a craft to be ready to start at noon. The galley is not expected
+in until evening,  but of course she may arrive at any moment now.
+Come here again in an hour's time, and I will have the  clothes
+ready for you."
+
+"May I suggest, sir, that they should be those appropriate to a
+small merchant? This might seem to account  for my not being placed
+with the other slaves who may be on board the galley, as it would
+be supposed that  I was set apart in order that I should be sent to
+one of the auberges as a servant; and my afterwards being  herded
+with the others would be explained by its being found that there
+was no opening for me in such a  capacity. I should think there
+would be no difficulty in obtaining such a suit, as garments of
+all kinds are  brought here in prizes, and are bought up by some
+of the Greek merchants, who afterwards find  opportunities of
+despatching them by craft trading among the islands."
+
+Just before noon Gervaise walked down to the port with Sir John
+Boswell, a servant following with a  bundle.
+
+"It seems to me a hare brained scheme, lad," Sir John, who had just
+joined him, said, as they issued from  the auberge; "though I own,
+from what the bailiff tells me, that there must be some treacherous
+plot on  hand, and when that is the case it is necessary that
+it should be probed to the bottom. But for a knight to go  in the
+disguise of an infidel slave seems to me to be beyond all bounds."
+
+"If one is ready to give one's life for the Order, Sir John,
+surely one need not mind a few weeks'  inconvenience.  I shall, at
+any rate, be no worse off than you were when serving as a Turkish
+slave."
+
+"Well, no, I don't know that you will," Sir John replied doubtfully.
+"But that was from necessity, and not  from choice; and it is,
+moreover, an accident we are all exposed to."
+
+"It is surely better to do a thing of one's own free will than
+because one is forced to do it, Sir John?"
+
+The knight was silent. He was a stout fighting man, but unused to
+argument.
+
+"Well," he said, after a long pause, "I can only hope that it
+will turn out all right, and promise that if you are  strangled in
+prison, I will see that every slave who had a hand in it shall be
+strung up. I have told Kendall  frankly that if I were in his place
+I would not permit you to try such a venture. However, as I could
+think of  no other plan by which there would be a chance of getting
+to the bottom of this matter, my words had no  effect with him. I
+should not have so much cared if the officers of the gaol knew who
+you were; but I can  see that if there is treachery at work this
+would defeat your object altogether. What do you suppose this
+rascal Greek can be intending?"
+
+"That I cannot say, Sir John. He may be trying to get an exact
+plan of the fortifications, or he may be  arranging some plan of
+communication by which, in case of siege, news of our condition
+and of the state of  our defences may be conveyed to the Turkish
+commander."
+
+By this time they had reached the port, and embarked at once on a
+trading vessel belonging to one of the  merchants, from whom Sir
+John had readily obtained her use for a day or two. Her sails were
+hoisted at  once, and she rowed out from the port. Having proceeded
+some three or four miles, they lowered her sails,  and lay to in
+the course a galley making for the port would take. A sailor was
+sent up to the masthead to  keep a lookout. Late in the afternoon
+he called down that he could make out a black speck some twelve
+miles away. She carried no sails, and he judged her to be a galley.
+
+"It will be dark before she comes along," Sir John Boswell said.
+"You can hoist your sails, captain, and  return to within half a
+mile of the port, or she may pass us beyond hailing distance."
+
+Gervaise at once retired to the cabin that had been set aside for
+their use, and proceeded to disguise himself.  An hour later Sir
+John came down. He looked at Gervaise critically.
+
+"You are all right as far as appearances go. I should take you
+anywhere for a young Turk. Your clothes are  not too new, and are
+in accordance with the tale you are going to tell, which is that
+you are the son of a  Syrian trader. If, as Suleiman says, you speak
+Turkish well enough to pose as a native, I think you ought to  be
+able to pass muster. How long will that dye last? Because if it
+begins to fade they will soon suspect  you."
+
+"It will last a fortnight; at least, so Sir John Kendall says. But
+he has arranged that if at the end of ten days I  have not succeeded
+in finding out anything, he will send down to the prison, and under
+the pretence that he  wants to ask me some questions about what
+ransom my father would be likely to pay for me, he will have  me
+up to the auberge, and there I can dye myself afresh."
+
+"How are you to communicate with him in case of need?"
+
+"His servant Ahmet, who got the things for me, is to come down
+every morning, and to be near the door of  the prison at the hour
+when the slaves are taken out to work. If I have aught to communicate
+I am to nod  twice, and Sir John Kendall will send down that evening
+to fetch me, instead of waiting until it is time for  me to renew
+my dye."
+
+"What is going to be said to Harcourt and the others to account
+for your absence?"
+
+"The bailiff will merely say that he has suddenly sent me away by
+ship, on a private mission. They may  wonder, perhaps, but none of
+them will venture to ask him its nature."
+
+"Well, I must say that you seem to have made all your arrangements
+carefully, Tresham, and I hope it will  turn out well. I was against
+the scheme at first, but I own that I do not see now why it should
+not succeed;  and if there is any plot really on hand, you may be
+able to get to the bottom of it."
+
+It was an hour after darkness had completely fallen when the regular
+beat of oars was heard. The ship's boat  was already in the water,
+and Gervaise, wrapped up in his mantle, followed Sir John out of
+his cabin and  descended with him into the boat, which was at once
+rowed towards the approaching galley. Sir John hailed  it as it
+came along.
+
+"Who is it calls?" a voice said.
+
+"It is I -- Sir John Boswell. Pray take me on board, Sir Almeric.
+It is a somewhat special matter."
+
+The order was given, the galley slaves ceased rowing, and the boat
+ran alongside. Gervaise unclasped his  mantle and gave it to Sir
+John, and then followed him on board.
+
+"I congratulate you on your return, and on your good fortune in
+having, as your letter stated, made a  prosperous voyage," Sir John
+said, as he shook hands with the commander of the galley.
+
+"I would speak a word with you aside," he added in a low voice.
+
+Sir Almeric moved with him a few paces from the other knights.
+
+"I am sent here by our bailiff, Sir Almeric. I have a Turkish prisoner
+here with me who is to be landed with  those you have taken. There
+are special reasons for this, which I need not now enter into.
+Will you let him  sit down here by the helm? My instructions are
+that he is not to mingle with the other slaves; and as there  are
+reasons why it is wished that his coming on board in this manner
+shall not be known to them, I myself  am to take him up to one of
+the prisons, or at least to hand him over to the officer sent down
+from that  prison to take up the captives allotted to it.  The
+matter is of more importance than it seems to be, or, as you  may
+imagine, I should not be charged to intercept you on such an errand."
+
+"Of course, I don't understand anything about it, Sir John, but
+will do as you ask me."
+
+He went to where Gervaise had crouched down by the bulwark,
+beckoned him to follow, and, walking aft,  motioned to him to sit
+down there. Then he returned to Sir John, and joined the other
+knights, who were all  too anxious to learn the latest news -- who
+had left the island, and who had come to it since they sailed --
+to  interest themselves in any way with the figure who had gone
+aft, supposing him, indeed, to be Sir John's  servant, the lantern
+suspended over the poop giving too feeble a light for his costume
+to be noted.
+
+A quarter of an hour later they anchored in the harbour. Some of
+the knights at once went ashore to their  respective auberges, but
+Sir Almeric and a few others remained on board until relieved of
+their charge in  the morning, an account being sent on shore of
+the number of captives that had been brought in. No thought  was
+given to Gervaise, who slept curled up on the poop. Sir John
+Boswell passed the night on board. In the  morning an officer came
+off with a list of the prisons to which the slaves were to be sent.
+Sir John Kendall  had seen the officer charged with the distribution,
+who had, at his request, not included the prison of St.  Pelagius
+in the list.
+
+A message, however, had been sent to that prison, as well as
+to the others, for an officer to attend at the  landing stage. In
+the morning Sir John went ashore in one of the boats conveying the
+slaves, of whom some  forty had been captured. Gervaise followed
+him into the boat, and took his seat by the others, who were too
+dispirited at the fate which had befallen them to pay any attention
+to him.
+
+When he landed, Sir John asked which was the officer from St.
+Pelagius. One stepped forward.
+
+"This is the only slave for you," he said, pointing to Gervaise.
+"He is of a better class than the rest, and in  the future may be
+he will do for a servitor at one of the auberges, but none have at
+present occasion for one,  and so he is to go to you. He says that
+his father is a merchant, and will be ready to pay a ransom for
+him;  but they all say that, and we must not heed it overmuch. As
+he seems a smart young fellow, it may be that  he will be sent to
+one of the auberges later on; but at present, at any rate, you can
+put him with the rest, and  send him out with the gangs."
+
+"He is a well built young fellow, Sir John," the officer remarked,
+"and should make a good rower in a  galley. I will put him in the
+crew of the St. Elmo. Follow me," he said, in Turkish, to Gervaise,
+and then led  the way up to the prison.  On entering he crossed a
+courtyard to a door which was standing open. Within  was a vaulted
+room, some forty feet long by twenty wide; along each side there
+were rushes strewn thickly.
+
+"The others have just started to their work," he said, "so that
+for today you can sleep."
+
+After he had left, Gervaise looked with some disgust at the rushes,
+that had evidently been for weeks  unchanged.
+
+"I would rather have the bare stones, if they were clean," he
+muttered to himself. "However, it can't be  helped."
+
+He presently strolled out into the courtyard, where some other
+slaves, disabled by illness or injuries, were  seated in the sun.
+Gervaise walked across to them, and they looked listlessly up at
+him as he approached.
+
+"You are a newcomer," one said, as he came up. "I saw you brought
+in, but it didn't need that. By the time  you have been here
+a week or two, your clothes will be like ours," and he pointed to
+his ragged garments.  "When did you arrive? Are there no others
+coming up here?"
+
+"The galley came in last night," Gervaise said, "but they did not
+land us until this morning. I wish they had  killed me rather than
+that I should have been brought here to work as a slave."
+
+"One always thinks so at first," the man said. "But somehow one
+clings to life. We shall die when Allah  wills it, and not before."
+
+"What is the matter with your foot?" Gervaise asked.
+
+"I was with the gang quarrying stones, and a mass of rock fell upon
+it. I have been in the infirmary for  weeks, and I own that the
+Christian dogs treated me well. A slave has his value, you see. I
+am nearly cured  now, but I shall never walk well again. I expect
+they will put me in one of their accursed galleys."
+
+"How long have you been here?"
+
+"Seven years; it seems a lifetime. However, there is hope yet.
+They don't tell us much, but we hear things  sometimes, and they
+say that the sultan is going to sweep them out of Rhodes as they
+were swept out of  Acre. When will it be?"
+
+"I know not. I am from Syria, but even there they are making
+preparations. The sultan has had troubles in  the East, and that
+has delayed him, but he will be here before long, and then we shall
+see. It will be our turn  then."
+
+"It will, indeed!" one of the others exclaimed. "Oh, to see these
+dogs brought down, and suffering as we  have suffered, toiling at
+oars in one of our galleys, or at the fortifications of one of our
+castles! It will make  amends for all our suffering. Had you a hard
+fight with them?"
+
+"No. We were but a small craft, and it was vain to attempt resistance.
+I would gladly have fought, but the  sailors said it would only
+throw away their lives. There was but little on board, and they
+allowed the vessel  to go free with those of the sailors who were
+too old to be made useful for hard work."
+
+No further questions were asked. The men seemed to have no interest
+save in their own misery, and  Gervaise soon left them, and, sitting
+down in a shady corner, presently dropped off to sleep.
+
+In the evening all came in from their various work.  The officer
+man who had brought Gervaise in went up  to the overseer of the
+galley slaves and informed him that he had told off the new slave
+-- pointing to  Gervaise -- to his gang.
+
+"He was brought in by the galley that arrived last night," he said;
+"he was the only slave sent up here. I hear  that he had been set
+aside to be appointed a servitor, but there are no vacancies, so
+they sent him here till  one should occur; and I was ordered to
+make him useful in other ways in the meantime."
+
+"I am two or three hands short," the overseer said. "I wish now
+I had sent in an application yesterday, for if  I had done so, no
+doubt they would have sent me some more men. However, this fellow
+will make up an  even number, and he is strong and active, though
+at present he looks sulky enough under his bad fortune."
+
+A few of the slaves spoke to Gervaise as they were waiting for food
+to be brought them, but the majority  dropped upon the rushes, too
+exhausted with toil and heat to feel an interest in anything. The
+food consisted  of rye bread, with thin broth, brought in a great
+iron vessel. Each slave had a horn, which was used for soup  or
+water, and which, when done with, he had, by the rule enforced
+among themselves, to take out to the  fountain in the courtyard and
+wash, before it was added to the pile in the corner of the room.
+
+The cool of the evening aided the meal in restoring the energies of
+the slaves. Several gathered round  Gervaise, and asked questions
+as to what he knew of the prospects of an early invasion of Rhodes;
+but as  soon as the officer left the room, closing and locking the
+door after him, the slaves became for the most part  silent. A few
+men sat in groups together, talking in undertones, but the greater
+number threw themselves  down on the rushes, either to sleep or
+to think alone. Gervaise was struck by the manner in which most of
+them lay, without making the slightest movement, so long as there
+was light to enable him to make out their  figures. He himself
+addressed two or three of them, as they lay with their eyes wide
+open, asking questions  with reference to the work; but in no case
+did he receive any reply. The men seemed altogether unconscious  of
+being addressed, being absorbed in the thought of their far distant
+homes and families which they might  never see again.
+
+Gervaise walked a few times up and down the room, and as he approached
+a silence fell each time upon the  groups of men talking together.
+More than once a figure rose soon afterwards from the ground, and,
+as he  came along again, asked him a few questions about himself.
+As soon as it was dark, he lay down in a  vacant space on the
+rushes. Shortly afterwards talking ceased altogether, and there was
+quiet in the vaulted  room. With the first gleam of daylight they
+were astir, and, when the doors were opened, poured out into  the
+courtyard, where all had a wash at the fountain. Half an hour
+later, a meal, precisely similar to that of  the previous evening,
+was served out; then the overseers called over the muster roll,
+the gangs were made  up, and each, under its officer, started for
+its work.
+
+Gervaise, with the men of his room, proceeded down to the port, and
+at once took their seats on the benches  of the galley, one foot
+being chained to a ring in the deck, the other to that of a companion
+at the oar. The  slaves were more cheerful now. As there was no
+work to do at present, they were allowed to talk, and an  occasional
+laugh was heard, for the sun and brightness of the day cheered them.
+Many, after years of  captivity, had grown altogether reckless, and
+it was among these that there was most talking; the younger  men
+seemed, for the most part, silent and moody.
+
+"You will get accustomed to it," the man next to Gervaise said
+cheeringly. "When I first came here, it  seemed to me that I could
+not support the life for a month -- that the fate was too dreadful
+to be borne, and  that death would be most welcome; but, like the
+rest, I became accustomed to it in time. After all, the work  is
+no harder than one would do at home. There is no stint of food,
+and it is no worse than one would have,  were one labouring in
+the fields.  Were it not for the loss of those we love, it would
+be nothing; and in time  one gets over even that. I have long ago
+told myself that if they are not dead, at least they are dead to
+me.  They have their livings to get, and cannot be always mourning,
+and I have tried to forget them, as they must  have forgotten me."
+
+"Do you work hard?" Gervaise asked.
+
+"No. We who are in the galleys are regarded by the others with envy.
+Sometimes -- often, indeed -- we have  naught to do all day. We
+bask in the sun, we talk, we sleep, we forget that we are slaves.
+But, generally, we  go out for an hour or two's exercise; that is
+well enough, and keeps us strong and in health. Only when we  are
+away on voyages is the work hard. Sometimes we row from morning
+to night; but it is only when they  are in chase of another craft
+that we have really to exert ourselves greatly. Then it is terrible.
+We may be  doing our best, our very best, and yet to the impatient
+knights it seems that we might do more. Then they  shout to the
+overseer, and he lays his whip on our backs without mercy. Then
+we row until sometimes we  drop, senseless, off the benches. But
+this, you understand, is not very often; and though the work on a
+cruise is long, it is not beyond our strength. Besides, when we
+are away in the galley there is always hope.  The galley may meet
+with four or five of our ships, and be captured, or a storm may
+arise and dash her  upon the shore; and though many would lose
+their lives, some might escape, and each man, in thinking of  it,
+believes that he will be one of the fortunate ones.
+
+"Take my advice: always look cheerful if you can; always put your
+hand on the oar when the order is given,  and row as if you were
+glad to be at work again; and always make a show, as if you were
+working your  hardest. Never complain when you are struck unjustly,
+and always speak respectfully to the overseer. In  that way you
+will find your life much easier than you would think. You will
+be chosen for small boat  service; and that is a great thing, as
+we are not chained in the small boats. Some men are foolish and
+obstinate, but, so far from doing any good, this only brings trouble
+on themselves; they come in for  punishment daily, they are closely
+watched, and their lives made hells for them. Even as a help to
+escape it  pays best to be cheerful and alert. We all think of escape,
+you know, though it is seldom indeed that a  chance ever comes to
+any of us. It is the one thing except death to look forward to,
+and there is not a man  among us who does not think of it scores
+of times a day; but, small as the chance is, it is greatest for
+those  who behave best. For instance, it is they only who man small
+boats; and when a small boat rows ashore, it  is always possible
+that the guard may be careless -- that he will keep the boat at
+the landing place, instead  of pushing off at once into deep water,
+as he ought to do -- and that in this way a chance will, sooner or
+later, come for springing ashore and making a dash for liberty."
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X.  A PLOT DISCOVERED.
+
+
+The conversation between Gervaise and his fellow slave was
+interrupted by the arrival at the side of the  quay of a party of
+knights. Silence instantly fell upon the slaves; all straightened
+themselves up to the oars,  and prepared for a start. Among the
+knights who took their places on the poop Gervaise saw with  amusement
+his friend Ralph. He had no fear of a recognition, for the darkly
+stained skin and the black hair  had so completely altered him that
+when he had looked at himself in a mirror, after the application
+of the  dye, he was surprised to find that he would not have known
+it to be his own face. Ralph was in command of  the party, which
+consisted of young knights who had but recently arrived at Rhodes;
+and as it was the first  time he had been appointed as instructor,
+Gervaise saw that he was greatly pleased at what he rightly  regarded
+as promotion.
+
+The galley at once pushed off from the wharf, and rowed out of the
+port. The work was hard; but as the  slaves were not pressed to
+any extraordinary exertions, Gervaise did not find it excessive.
+He congratulated  himself, however, that the stain was, as he had
+been assured, indelible, save by time, for after a few  minutes'
+exercise he was bathed in perspiration. As the galley had been taken
+out only that instruction  might be given to the young knights,
+the work was frequently broken.
+
+Sometimes they went ahead at full speed for a few hundred yards,
+as if to chase an adversary; then they  would swerve aside, the
+slaves on one side rowing, while those on the other backed, so as
+to make a rapid  turn. Then she lay for a minute or two immovable,
+and then backed water, or turned to avoid the attack of  an imaginary
+foe. Then for an hour she lay quiet, while the knights, divesting
+themselves of their mantles  and armour, worked one of the guns on
+the poop, aiming at a floating barrel moored for the purpose a mile
+out at sea. At eleven o'clock they returned to the port. Bread and
+water were served out to the slaves, and  they were then permitted
+to lie down and sleep, the galley being moored under the shadow of
+the wall.
+
+At four o'clock another party of knights came down, and the work
+was similar to that which had been  performed in the morning. At
+seven o'clock the slaves were taken back to their barracks.
+
+"Well, what do you think of your work?" one of the slaves asked
+Gervaise, as they ate their evening meal.
+
+"It would not be so bad if it was all like that."
+
+"No. But I can tell you that when you have to row from sunrise
+to sunset, with perhaps but one or two  pauses for a few minutes,
+it is a different thing altogether, especially if the galley is
+carrying despatches,  and speed is necessary.  Then you get so worn
+out and exhausted, that you can scarce move an oar through  the
+water, until you are wakened up by a smart as if a red hot iron
+had been laid across your shoulders. It is  terrible work then. The
+whip cracks every minute across some one's back; you are blinded
+by exhaustion  and rage, and you feel that you would give the world
+if you could but burst your chain, rush on your  taskmasters, and
+strike, if only one blow, before you are killed."
+
+"It must be terrible," Gervaise said. "And do you never get loose,
+and fall upon them?"
+
+The man shook his head.
+
+"The chains are too strong, and the watch too vigilant," he said.
+"Since I came here I have heard tales of  crews having freed
+themselves in the night, and fallen upon the Christians, but for
+my part I do not believe  in them. I have thought, as I suppose
+every one of us has thought, how such a thing could be done; but
+as  far as I know no one has hit on a plan yet. Now and then men
+have managed to become possessed of a file,  and have, by long and
+patient work, sawn through a chain, and have, when a galley has
+been lying near our  own shore, sprung overboard and escaped; but
+for every attempt that succeeds there must be twenty  failures,
+for the chains are frequently examined, and woe be to the man who
+is found to have been  tampering with his. But as to a whole gang
+getting free at once, it is altogether impossible, unless the key
+of  the pad locks could be stolen from an overseer, or the man
+bribed into aiding us."
+
+"And that, I suppose, is impossible?" Gervaise said.
+
+"Certainly, impossible for us who have no money to bribe them
+with, but easy enough if any one outside,  with ample means, were
+to set about it. These overseers are, many of them, sons of Turkish
+mothers, and  have no sympathy, save that caused by interest,
+with one parent more than another. Of course, they are  brought up
+Christians, and taught to hold Moslems in abhorrence, but I think
+many of them, if they had  their free choice, would cross to the
+mainland. Here they have no chance of ever being aught but what
+they  are -- overseers of slaves, or small prison officials. They
+are despised by these haughty knights, and hated  by us, while
+were they to reach the mainland and adopt their mothers' religion,
+everything would be open to  them.  All followers of the Prophet
+have an equal chance, and one may be a soldier today, a bey tomorrow,
+and a pasha a year hence, if he be brave, or astute, or capable in
+any way beyond his fellows. Men like  these warders would be sure
+to make their way.
+
+"They cannot have gathered much during their service, therefore the
+offer of a large sum of money would  find plenty among them eager
+to earn it. But, you see, they are but the inferiors. On our voyages
+on board  the galley, the knights inspect our fetters twice a day,
+and the keys are kept in the commander's cabin. For  an hour or
+two, when we are not on a long passage, the padlocks are unfastened,
+in order that we may jump  over and bathe, and exercise our limbs;
+but at this time the knights are always on guard, and as we are
+without arms we are altogether powerless. It is the same thing
+here. The senior warders, who all belong to  the Order, although
+of an inferior grade, come round, as you have seen, to examine our
+fetters, and  themselves lock and bar the doors. If one or two of
+these could be corrupted, escape would be easy  enough."
+
+"But is it impossible to do this?" Gervaise asked eagerly.  "My
+father has money, and would I know be  ready, if I could communicate
+with him, to pay a handsome sum, if sure that it would result in
+my obtaining  my freedom."
+
+The man nodded significantly.
+
+"There may be other means of doing it," he said.  "Perhaps it will
+not be long before you hear of it. You  seem a stout fellow, and
+full of spirit, but, as yet, anything that may be going on is known
+but to a few, and  will go no further until the time comes that all
+may be told. I think not so badly of men of our faith as to  believe
+that any one would betray the secret for the sake of obtaining his
+own freedom and a big reward;  but secrets, when known by many, are
+apt to leak out. A muttered word or two in sleep, or the ravings
+of  one down with fever, might afford ground for suspicion, and
+torture would soon do the rest. I myself know  nothing of the secret,
+but I do know that there is something going on which, if successful,
+will give us our  freedom. I am content to know no more until the
+time comes; but there are few, save those engaged in the  matter,
+that know as much as this, and you can see that it is better it
+should be so.  Look at that man  opposite; he has been here fifteen
+years; he seldom speaks; he does his work, but it is as a brute
+beast --  despair has well nigh turned him into one. Think you that
+if such a man as that were to know that there is  hope, he would
+not be so changed that even the dullest would observe it? I see you
+are a brisk young  fellow, and I say to you, keep up your courage.
+The time is nearer than you think when you will be free  from these
+accursed shackles."
+
+Each morning, as he went out to work with his gang, Gervaise saw
+the servant from the auberge standing  near; but he made no sign.
+He was satisfied that his suspicions had been justified, and that
+he was not  leading this life in vain, but he thought it better
+to wait until the week passed, and he was taken away to  have his
+colour renewed, than to make a sign that might possibly rouse the
+suspicions of his comrades. On  the eighth morning, when the door
+of the room was unlocked, the overseer said -- "Number 36, you will
+remain here. You are wanted for other work."
+
+After the gang had left the prison, the overseer returned.
+
+"I am to take you up to the English auberge. The knight who handed
+you over to me when you landed, told  me that you might be wanted
+as a servitor; and as it is he who has sent down, it may be that
+a vacancy has  occurred. If so, you are in luck, for the servitors
+have a vastly better time of it than the galley slaves, and  the
+English auberge has the best reputation in that respect. Come along
+with me."
+
+The English auberge was one of the most handsome of the buildings
+standing in the great street of the  Knights.  Its architecture
+was Gothic in its character, and, although the langue was one of
+the smallest of  those represented at Rhodes, it vied with any of
+them in the splendour of its appointments. Sir John  Boswell was
+standing in the interior courtyard.
+
+"Wait here for a few minutes," he said to the overseer.  "The bailiff
+will himself question the slave as to his  accomplishments; but I
+fancy he will not be considered of sufficient age for the post that
+is vacant.  However, if this should not be so, I shall no doubt
+find a post to fit him ere long, for he seems a smart  young fellow,
+and, what is better, a willing one, and bears himself well under
+his misfortunes."
+
+Then he motioned to Gervaise to follow him to the bailiff's
+apartments.
+
+"Well, Sir Gervaise," Sir John Kendall exclaimed, as the door closed
+behind him, "have you found aught to  justify this cruel penance
+you have undertaken?"
+
+"As to the penance, Sir John, it has been nothing unsupportable.
+The exercise is hard enough, but none too  hard for one in good
+health and strength, and, save for the filth of the chamber in
+which we are shut up at  night, and the foul state of the rushes
+on which we lie, I should have naught to complain of. No, I have
+as  yet heard nothing of a surety -- and yet enough to show me that
+my suspicions were justified, and that there  is a plot of some
+sort on foot," and he related to the two knights the conversation
+he had had with the galley  slave.
+
+"By St. George!" the bailiff said, "you have indeed been justified
+in your surmises, and I am glad that I  attached sufficient importance
+to your suspicions to let you undertake this strange enterprise.
+What think  you, Sir John Boswell?"
+
+"I think with you, that Sir Gervaise has fully justified his
+insistence in this matter, which I own I considered  to be hare
+brained folly. What is to be done next, Sir Gervaise?"
+
+"That is what I have been turning over in my mind.  You see, I may
+have little warning of what is going to  take place. I may not hear
+of it until we are locked up for the night and the affair is on
+the point of taking  place, and it will, of course, be most needful
+that I shall be able to communicate with you speedily."
+
+"That, of course, is of vital importance," the bailiff said.  "But
+how is it to be managed?"
+
+"That is what I cannot exactly see, Sir John. An armed guard remains in
+our room all night. But, in the first  place, he might be himself
+in the plot, and if not, the slaves would almost certainly overpower
+him and kill  him, as a preliminary to the work of knocking off
+their chains."
+
+"Is there a window to the room? At least, of course there is a
+window, but is it within your reach?"
+
+"There are six small loopholes -- one on each side of the door,
+and two in each of the side walls; they are  but four inches across
+and three feet in length, and there are two crossbars to each; they
+are four feet from  the floor."
+
+"At any rate, they are large enough for your arm to pass through,
+Sir Gervaise, and you might drop a strip  of cloth out."
+
+"Certainly I could, Sir John. I could easily hide a piece of white
+cotton a yard or so long in my clothes,  scanty as these are, and
+could certainly manage, unobserved, to drop it outside the window."
+
+"Then the rest is for us to contrive, Boswell. We must have some
+one posted in the yard of the prison, with  instructions to go
+every ten minutes throughout the night to see if a strip of white
+cotton has been dropped  out. When he finds it he must go at once
+to William Neave, the governor. He is a sturdy Englishman, and
+there is no fear of his having been bribed to turn traitor; but it
+were well to take no one into our confidence.  I think we cannot
+do better than employ Ahmet on this business, as he already knows
+that Sir Gervaise is  masquerading there. We will have William
+Neave up here presently. Tell him that for certain reasons we  wish
+Ahmet to pass the night for the present in the prison, and arrange
+with him on what excuse we can  best bestow him there without
+exciting suspicion. At any rate, Sir Gervaise, that is our affair."
+
+He went to a closet and took out a white mantle, tore a strip off
+the bottom, and gave it to Gervaise.
+
+"It would be best not to keep you here any longer," he said, "so
+renew your stain while I speak. As soon as  you learn the details
+of the plot, you will drop this out from the loophole on the right
+hand side of the door;  that is to say, the one on your right,
+standing inside. If the affair is not to come off at once, it were
+best for  you to proceed as before. Ahmet will be outside when you
+go out with your gang, and on your nodding to  him we will make some
+excuse to take you away on your return. I say this because if you
+see that the affair,  whatever it is, is not imminent, you might
+think it better to remain with them longer, so as to learn their
+plans more fully, instead of having the thing put a stop to at
+once."
+
+"I understand, Sir John; but, as I have said, I do not think we
+should all be told until the blow is ready to be  struck, as they
+would be afraid that some one might inform against them, if time
+and opportunity were  granted them."
+
+"I think so too, Sir Gervaise. This afternoon we will call upon the
+grand master, for we have no means of  knowing how serious or how
+extended this plot may be; it may include only the crew of a single
+galley,  and, on the other hand, the whole of the slaves may be
+implicated in it.  It is evident, therefore, that the  matter is
+too serious to be kept any longer from his knowledge."
+
+Three more days passed. On the third evening, after the allowance
+of broth and bread had been consumed,  and the door was closed and
+locked upon them for the night, three or four of the galley slaves,
+after talking  eagerly together, beckoned to the others to gather
+round them at the end of the room farthest from the door.  Two
+of them took up arms full of the bedding, and stuffed it into the
+side windows. Gervaise saw, in the  dim light, a look of intense
+excitement on the faces of the slaves. It had been vaguely known
+among them  that a plot was in hand, although but few had been
+admitted into the confidence of the leaders.  Hitherto all  had
+feared that it concerned only a small number, but the preparations
+now made to insure that they should  not be overheard, showed that,
+whatever the plan might be, all were to share in it.
+
+"Thanks be to Allah, the All Powerful," one of the men began, "my
+lips are unsealed, and I can tell you the  great news that our hour
+for escape from bondage is at hand!  We need not fear the warder
+there," he went  on, as several eyes were turned apprehensively
+towards the guard, who, with his spear beside him, was  leaning
+carelessly against the wall at the farther end, looking through
+the window into the courtyard; "he is  with us. You must know that
+for the last two months an agent from Constantinople has been on
+the Island,  and has been engaged in arranging this affair.  Two of
+our taskmasters belonging to the Order have been  bribed by large
+sums of money, and several of the overseers, who are half of our
+blood, have eagerly  embraced the prospect of returning to their
+mothers' country, and of avowing openly their belief in our  religion.
+These, again, have bought over many of the guards, ours included,
+and tonight all will be ready for  action. Those not of our party
+will be killed without ceremony. Duplicate keys have been made of
+all the  padlocks of the fetters; the guards who are with us have
+each one of them, the others will have been slipped  into the
+hands of one man in each gang as they returned tonight from work.
+The overseers who are in the  plot will, at midnight, go quietly
+round and unlock the doors, and remove the bars from the outside.
+We  have, therefore, only to overcome the eight or ten men who
+patrol the prison; and as we shall have the arms  of the guards,
+some thirty in number, we shall make quick work of them.
+
+"The two guards at the outside gates must, of course, be killed.
+Duplicates of the keys have been made, and  will be hidden in a
+spot known to some of our party, close to the gate. Thus we have
+but to issue out and  rush down, in a body, to the port. I and
+another are to take the arms of our guard, and two others are told
+off  in each room to do the same. That will give us sixty armed men.
+We shall make very short work of the  guards at the gate leading
+into the port. Then twenty of us are to run along the mole to Fort
+St. Nicholas,  twenty to the Tower of St. Michael, and twenty to
+that of St. John. There will be, at the most, but three or  four
+men keeping watch at each fort, and thus we shall have in our
+possession the three forts commanding  the entrance to the harbour.
+There are, as you know, six galleys manned by crews from our prison
+there.  The crew of each galley will embark upon it, and man the
+oars; the rest will divide themselves among the  galleys. Before
+starting, we shall seize and set fire to all other galleys and
+ships in the port. The gangs in  four of the rooms have been told
+off specially for this duty. Before firing them, they are to take
+out such  provisions as they may find, and transport them to the
+galleys. We who take the forts are provided with  hammers and long
+nails, to drive down the vent holes of the cannon; when we have
+done this, we are to  wait until one of the galleys fetches us off.
+Ten minutes should be ample time for all there is to be done,  and
+even if the alarm is given at once, we shall be away long before
+the knights can be aroused from sleep,  buckle on their armour,
+and get down to the port."
+
+Exclamations of delight and approbation burst from his hearers.
+
+"Then it is only we of this prison who are in the plot?" one said.
+
+"Yes. In the first place, it would have been too dangerous to attempt
+to free all. In the second, the galleys  would not carry them; we
+shall be closely packed as it is, for there are over a thousand
+here. I hear that  there was a talk of freeing all, and that we,
+instead of embarking at first, should make for the other prisons,
+burst open the doors, and rescue the others; but by the time we
+could do so the knights would be all in  arms, and our enterprise
+would fail altogether, for as but a small proportion of us can
+obtain weapons, we  could not hope to overcome them. Were it not
+for the strong wall that separates their quarter from the town,
+we might make straight for their houses and slay them before the
+alarm could be given. As it is, that would  be impossible, and
+therefore the plan will be carried out as I have told you. The
+loss of all their galleys and  of over one thousand slaves will
+be a heavy blow for them. Great pains have been taken to prevent
+confusion when we reach the port. The men in each room have been
+instructed as to the galleys on which  they are to embark. As for
+you, you know precisely what is to be done; you will simply take
+your places,  and then wait until all are on board. No galley is
+to push out from the wharf until the last man of those  employed
+in burning the ships has returned, with the provisions found in
+them. Then the order will be given  by the man who has arranged
+all this, and the six galleys will put out together.
+
+One is to row to each of the forts to carry off the party that
+will have been engaged in silencing its cannon.  Our galley is to
+row to St. Nicholas, and take off the twenty men I shall lead there.
+There is no possibility  of failure. Everything has, you see, been
+arranged. One of the overseers who is in the plot walked by my
+side as we returned from the port, and gave me the instructions,
+and all the others will have been told in the  same way, or else
+by the guards in charge of them." The gang now broke up into little
+groups, talking  excitedly over the unlooked for news, and exulting
+over the speedy advent of liberty. Gervaise strolled  carelessly
+to the window, and dropped out the white strip of stuff. It was now
+quite dark, and there was no  fear of any one observing the movement.
+Then he joined the others. After an hour and a half had passed he
+heard footsteps approaching the door. There was a pause; then the
+outside bars were taken down, and a key  turned in the lock. A deep
+silence fell on the slaves. Then a voice called, "Number 36!"
+
+"What is it?" replied Gervaise, without raising himself from his
+seat on the bedding. "I have done my share  of work today, and
+earned my night's sleep."
+
+"It is a knight from the English auberge; he has come to fetch you.
+It seems that you are to go there as a  servitor."
+
+"What a cursed fortune," Gervaise muttered, in Turkish, "just when
+a road to freedom is open! I have a  good mind to say I am ill,
+and cannot go till the morning."
+
+"No, no!" one of the others exclaimed. "They would only drag you
+out, and when they saw that there was  naught the matter with you,
+would suspect that there must be some reason why you did not want
+to go,  when, as every one knows, the position of the servitors is
+in every way preferable to ours."
+
+"Now then, why are you delaying?" a voice said sharply, and a
+warder entered with a lighted torch. "Get  up, you lazy hound! It
+will be worse for you if I have to speak again."
+
+"I am coming," Gervaise grumbled. "I was just asleep."
+
+He rose, as if reluctantly, and went forward. The warder gave him
+an angry push, followed him out, and  locked and barred the door
+after him.
+
+"I suppose this is the right man?" Sir John Boswell said.
+
+"This is Number 36, Sir Knight, the same who was taken over to your
+auberge the other day," and he held  the light close to Gervaise's
+face.
+
+"Yes, that is the man. Follow me," he added, in Turkish.  The gate
+of the courtyard was unbarred, and they  passed out unquestioned.
+Sir John strolled on ahead. Gervaise followed him a pace or two
+behind. Not until  they had passed through the gate of the castle
+did Sir John turn.
+
+"I have not spoken to you," he said, "as we may have been watched.
+Keep your news until we reach the  auberge."
+
+Upon entering it they went up at once to Sir John Kendall's
+apartments.
+
+"Well, Sir Gervaise, the strip of cotton was brought to us safely.
+What is your news?"
+
+"It is very serious, Sir John, and I have been in terrible anxiety
+since I dropped it out, lest it should not  come to hand in time.
+As it is, you have till midnight to make your preparations." He
+then repeated the  statement made by the galley slave.
+
+"By my faith," Sir John Kendall exclaimed, "this is a pretty plot
+indeed! And had it succeeded, as it  certainly would have done but
+for your vigilance, it would have been a heavy blow to us. The
+burning of all  our galleys would have crippled us sorely, and
+the loss of over a thousand slaves would have been a serious  one
+indeed, when we so urgently require them for completing our defences.
+Get rid of those clothes at once,  Sir Gervaise, and don your own.
+We must go straight to the grand master. You will find your clothes
+and  armour in the next room. I had them taken there as soon as
+your token was brought me."
+
+In a few minutes Gervaise returned in his usual attire, and with
+his armour buckled on. The two knights  were already in their coats
+of mail, and leaving the auberge they went to the grand master's
+palace. A  servitor had already been sent to D'Aubusson to inform
+him that they were coming, and he advanced to  meet them as they
+entered.
+
+"Welcome, Sir Gervaise!" he said. "Whether your news be good or bad,
+whether you have found that it is a  general rising of the slaves
+that is intended, or a plot by which a handful of slaves may seize
+a boat and  escape, the gratitude of the Order is no less due to
+you for the hardships and humiliations you have  undergone on its
+behalf."
+
+"It concerns but one prison: that of St. Pelagius."
+
+"The largest of them," the grand master put in.
+
+"The whole of the slaves there are to be liberated at twelve
+o'clock tonight, are to seize the three water  towers and to spike
+the guns, to burn all the shipping in the harbour, to make off with
+six galleys, and  destroy the rest."
+
+"By St. John!" D'Aubusson exclaimed, "this is indeed a serious
+matter. But tell me all about it. There must  be treachery indeed
+at work for such a scheme to be carried out.
+
+Gervaise now told him all the details he had learned.
+
+"So two of the Order, though but of the inferior grade, are in the
+plot?" the grand master said; "and several  of the overseers? One
+of the villains is, of course, the man you saw this Greek talking
+with. We must get  hold of the other if we can. As to the slaves,
+now that we have warning, there is an end of the matter,  though
+without such warning they would surely have succeeded, for the
+plans are well laid, and they would  have been at sea before we
+could have gathered in any force at the port. If it were not that
+it would cost the  lives of many of the warders and of the prison
+guards, I should say we ought to take post outside the gate,  for
+we should then catch the traitors who are to accompany them. As it
+is, we must be beforehand with  them. A hundred men will be more
+than ample for our purpose.  Do you take fifty of your knights,
+Sir John  Kendall, and I will draw fifty of those of Auvergne.
+At eleven o'clock we will meet at the gate leading  down into the
+town, and will march to the private entrance of the governor's
+house. I will go in first with a  few of you, tell him what we
+have discovered, and post guards to prevent any one from leaving
+his house.  Then, having admitted the others, we will go quietly
+out and place a party at each door of the overseers'  house, with
+orders to seize any who may come out. The rest, in small parties,
+will then go round the prison,  and, entering each room, show the
+slaves that their plot has been discovered. This we must do to
+save the  lives of the guards who may be faithful to their trust.
+As to the higher officials engaged in the affair, we  must obtain
+their names from the overseers or slaves. It is not likely that
+the two traitors will quit their  houses, as they will leave the
+matter in the hands of the overseers, who, as you say, intend to
+first open the  doors, and then to accompany the slaves in their
+escape. Do not warn the knights until it is nearly time to  start,
+Sir John. The less stir made the better, for no one can say whether
+they may not have suborned some  of the servitors to send instant
+news of any unusual movements in any of the auberges."
+
+At half past ten Sir John Kendall went round among the knights
+and bade fifty of them arm themselves  quietly, and proceed, one
+by one, down to the gate, and there await orders. Up to this time
+Gervaise had  remained in the bailiff's room, so as to avoid the
+questioning that would take place, and he went down to  the gate
+with the bailiff and Sir John Boswell.
+
+The knights assembled rapidly. None were aware of the reason for
+which they had been called out at such  an hour, and there was a
+buzz of talk and conjecture until Sir John Kendall arrived. He was
+followed by  four of the servants, who at once lighted the torches
+they carried, when he proceeded to go through the roll,  and found
+that the muster was complete. Many of the knights had gazed in some
+surprise at Gervaise,  whose dark complexion altogether concealed
+his identity, and it was supposed that he must be some newly  arrived
+knight, though none had heard that any ship had entered the harbour
+that day.
+
+Two or three minutes later fifty knights of the langue of Auvergne
+came down, headed by the grand master  himself, whose appearance
+greatly heightened the surprise of the English knights. The
+torches were now  extinguished, the gate thrown open, and the party
+descended into the town. Gervaise had purposely fallen in  by the
+side of Harcourt.
+
+"You are but newly arrived, Sir Knight?" the latter said, as they
+moved off.
+
+"Not so very newly, Ralph," Gervaise replied.
+
+"What! is it you, Gervaise?" Harcourt exclaimed, with a start of
+surprise. "Why, I did not know you, though  I looked hard at you
+in the torch light. What have you done with yourself? Where have
+you been? Do you  know what all this is about?"
+
+"I cannot tell you now, Ralph. You must be content to know that I
+have been in prison, and working in the  galleys."
+
+"The saints defend us! Why, what on earth had you done to entail
+such punishment as that? It is an outrage.   The grand master and
+the council have the right to expel a knight from the Order after
+due trial and  investigation, but not to condemn him to such
+penalties as the galleys. It is an outrage upon the whole  Order,
+and I would say so to the grand master himself."
+
+"There was no outrage in it, Ralph. Wait until you hear the whole
+story. That I have not disgraced you, you  may judge from the fact
+that I am in the armour and mantle of the Order, and that, as you
+saw, I came down  with Sir John Kendall himself."
+
+There were no people about in the streets, though the lights still
+burned on a few of the roofs. For a short  distance the knights
+marched down towards the port, and then turned down a street to
+the right. After a few  minutes' marching they halted under a high
+wall which all knew to be that of the prison of St. Pelagius. Six
+knights were posted at the main entrance, with orders that none
+should be allowed to leave the prison, and  that any persons who
+came up to the gate were to be at once seized and made prisoners.
+
+The rest marched on to a small door leading into the governor's
+house. Here they were halted, and told to  wait till called in;
+six knights of England, and as many of Auvergne, being told off to
+accompany the grand  master and Sir John Kendall. A note had been
+sent to the governor, informing him that the grand master  intended
+to visit the prison at eleven o'clock, but that the matter was to
+be kept an absolute secret; and that  the governor himself was to
+be down at the gate to admit him.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XI IN COMMAND OF A GALLEY
+
+
+William Neave, the governor of the prison, looked astonished indeed
+when, upon his opening the door, the  grand master and the bailiff
+of the English langue, with the twelve knights behind them, entered.
+He had  been puzzled when, four days before, he had received an
+order from the grand master that Ahmet, a servitor  in the auberge
+of the English langue, should be permitted to pass the night in
+his house, with authority to  move freely and without question, at
+any hour, in the courtyard of the gaol, and to depart at any hour,
+secretly and without observation, by the private gate. Still more
+had he been surprised when he received the  message that the grand
+master would pay him a secret visit at eleven o'clock at night.
+
+"Let no word be spoken until we are in your apartments," D'Aubusson
+said in a low voice, as he entered.   "But first lead four of
+these knights and post them so that none can enter the gaol from
+the house. If there  are more than four doors or windows on that
+side, you must post a larger number. It is imperative that there
+shall be no communication whatever between your servants and the
+gaol."
+
+As soon as this was done, the rest of the party were taken to the
+governor's rooms.
+
+"I can now explain to you all," the grand master said, "the reason
+of our presence here. I have learned that  at twelve tonight there
+will be a general rising of the slaves in this prison, and that,
+aided by treachery, they  will free themselves from their fetters,
+overpower and slay such of the guards in their rooms as have not
+been bribed, throw open the gates, make their way down to the port,
+burn all the shipping there, and make  off in the six galleys manned
+by them, having first overpowered the sentries in the three forts
+commanding  the entrance, and spiked the guns."
+
+Exclamations of astonishment burst from the knights, who now, for
+the first time, learnt the reason of their  being called out. The
+governor listened with an expression of stupefaction.
+
+"With all deference to your Highness," he said hesitatingly, "it
+seems to me that some one must have been  deceiving you with this
+tale. It is altogether incredible that such a plot should have
+been hatched without a  whisper of the matter coming to my ears.
+It could only be possible were there, not one but many, traitors
+among the officials; if this is so, then indeed am I a dull ass,
+and unfit for my duty here, of which I shall  pray you to relieve
+me, and to order such punishment as the council may deem just to
+be allotted to me for  having so signally been hoodwinked."
+
+"My news is sure," the grand master said; "but I deem not that you
+are in any way to blame in the matter.  The plot has been matured,
+not as a consequence of any laxity of discipline in the prison,
+but from  deliberate treachery, against which no mortal being can
+guard. The traitors are two of the officials who,  being members
+of the Order, none would suspect of connivance in such a deed.
+With them are several -- I  know not how many -- under officials,
+warders, and guards; all these have been bribed by an emissary from
+Constantinople, now in the town, and who is doubtless furnished
+with large means. It is well, indeed, for  the Order, that this
+terrible act of treachery has been discovered in time to prevent
+the plot from coming to a  head, for the loss of all our galleys,
+to say nothing of the disgrace of having been thus bearded by
+slaves,  would be a very heavy blow to it.
+
+"Now that the house is safely guarded, William Neave, you can admit
+the rest of the knights, who are  waiting outside. Then you will,
+in the first place, conduct a party, and post them so that they
+may arrest, as  they come out to perform their share of the work,
+all officials, warders, and guards, of whatever rank. When  you
+have posted knights to carry out this -- and I need not say that
+the operation must be performed as  silently as possible, for it
+is above all things necessary that the men concerned shall have no
+suspicion that  their plot has been discovered -- you will conduct
+other parties to the various rooms occupied by the slaves.  The
+guards on duty inside will be made prisoners.  The doors will then
+be locked and barred as before. The  appearance of the knights
+and the arrest of the guards will be sufficient to show the slaves
+that their plot has  been discovered, and there will be no fear of
+their making any attempt to carry it into execution. I will  myself
+post the main body of the knights in the courtyard. The arrest of
+the guards is to be carried out at  once, as all those not concerned
+in the plot would be killed when the hour comes for the rising.
+Therefore  this part of the business must be carried out immediately.
+I should not, however, lead the guards away to a  cell, for the less
+tramping of feet the better.  Therefore I shall place two knights
+in each room, and beg them  to remain inside in charge until the
+traitors outside are secured."
+
+The knights outside were now marched up. The grand master ordered
+half those of Auvergne to go round to  the main gate, which would
+be opened for them by the governor; they were to enter quietly, and
+remain in a  body close to it until they received further orders.
+Sir John Kendall told off the rest of the knights to the  various
+duties of watching the houses occupied by the officials and warders,
+and of entering the prison  rooms and remaining in them on guard.
+The governor, with his private servants, bearing a supply of  torches,
+was to lead them to the various cells, and unlock the doors. The
+knights were enjoined to move as  noiselessly as possible, and to
+avoid all clashing of arms against armour.
+
+The governor produced a number of cloths intended to be served out
+to the slaves. Strips of these were cut  off and wrapped round the
+feet of the English knights, so as to deaden the sound of their
+boots on the stone  pavement.  Then, accompanied by the grand master
+and Sir John Kendall, he went the round of the cells.
+
+In some of these the slaves were found standing up in an attitude
+of eager expectation, which, as the door  opened, and the light of
+the torches showed a party of knights, changed into one of terror
+and consternation.  Scarce a word was spoken. The guard was ordered
+to lay down his arms, and to take one of the torches.  Two knights
+placed themselves, one on each side of him, with drawn swords.  The
+door was again locked  and barred, and the party proceeded to the
+next cell. In less than a quarter of an hour this part of the work
+was finished, and D'Aubusson, Sir John Kendall, and the governor,
+then took up their station with a party  of knights who, concealed
+behind a buttress, were watching the doors of the officials' houses.
+
+Ten minutes later one of these doors was heard to open, and five
+dark figures came noiselessly out. They  were allowed to go a short
+distance, in order to see if any others followed; but as no others
+came out, the  governor stepped forward.
+
+"Whither are you going, at this time of night?" he asked.  There
+was a momentary pause, a few hasty words  were exchanged, then the
+five men rushed towards him with bared swords or knives; but before
+they  reached him the knights poured out from their hiding place.
+
+"We are betrayed," one of the men shouted in Turkish.  "Fight to
+the last. Better be killed than tortured and  executed." With a
+yell of fury and despair, they rushed upon the knights. So desperate
+was their attack that  the latter were forced to use their swords,
+which indeed, burning with rage at the treachery of these men,
+they were not backward in doing, and in less than a minute the five
+traitors lay, with cloven heads, dead on  the pavement.
+
+"It is as well so," D'Aubusson said, looking sternly down upon them;
+"perhaps better so, since it has saved  us the scandal of their
+trial. We might have learned more from them, but we have learnt
+enough, since,  doubtless, they have no accomplices among the
+warders, or they would have been with them. Now we will  deal with
+the arch traitors.  There is no need for further concealment; the
+noise of this fray will assuredly  have been heard by them, for they
+will be listening for the sounds that would tell them the slaves
+had been  liberated."
+
+Followed by the knights, he went to the door of the house occupied
+by the overseers, all of whom were  members of the lower branch
+of the Order. It was indeed evident that an alarm had been given
+there, for  lights appeared at the windows. As they opened the
+door and entered the hall, several half-dressed men  rushed down
+the stairs with drawn swords, two of them carrying torches in their
+left hands. As the light fell  upon the figures of the grand master
+and the knights, they paused in astonishment.
+
+"There is treachery at work in the prison," D'Aubusson said quietly.
+"I pray you to collect your comrades  and to assemble here at once."
+
+In a minute or two some twenty officials were gathered in the hall.
+
+"Are all here?" D'Aubusson asked the governor.
+
+The latter counted the men.
+
+"There are two short," he said -- "Pietro Romano and Karl Schumann.
+They occupy the same room. Go and  fetch them down, four of you."
+
+The four men nearest to the stairs at once went up with two torches.
+They returned in a minute.
+
+"The door is fastened on the inside, and we can obtain no response."
+
+"Fetch an axe and break it in," the grand master ordered. "Sir John
+Boswell, do you, with some other  knights, take post without; they
+may attempt to escape by the window, though, as we hold the gates,
+it  would avail them little. Sir Gervaise Tresham, do you follow
+us."
+
+Gervaise, who had been placed with the party watching the house,
+followed the grand master and governor  upstairs.  A few blows with
+an axe splintered the door; its fastenings gave way, and they entered
+the room.  The window was open, and two figures lay prostrate on
+the ground near it.
+
+"I half expected this," the grand master said. "They were listening
+there. The conflict in the yard told them  that the plot had been
+discovered, and as they saw us approaching the house, they dared
+not meet the  punishment of their crimes, and have fallen by their
+own daggers. Put a torch close to their faces. Sir  Gervaise,
+do you recognise in either of these men the official you saw in
+conversation with the Greek?"
+
+Gervaise stepped forward and examined the men's faces.
+
+"This is the man," he said, pointing to one of them. "I marked him
+so closely that I cannot be mistaken."
+
+"That is Pietro Romano," the governor said; "he was an able officer,
+but discontented with his position and  given to quarrelling with
+his comrades."
+
+"Have a hole dug and bury them in the prison," D'Aubusson said;
+"they have been false to their vows, and  false to their religion.
+They have chosen their own mode of death; let them be buried like
+dogs, as they are.  But let a careful search be made of their
+garments and of this room.  It may be that they have some  documents
+concealed which may be of use to us."
+
+The grand master then descended to the hall.
+
+"Members of the Order," he said to the overseers, "your guilty
+companions have met death by their own  hands, as the others concerned
+in this plot have met theirs by the swords of the knights. It were
+well that  this matter were not spoken of outside the prison. The
+attempt has been detected, and has failed; but were it  talked of,
+it might incite others to repeat the attempt, and possibly with
+better success. Now," he went on,  turning to the governor, "our
+work is done here. Call up the other warders. Let them take the
+men now  prisoners in the rooms, and place them in a dungeon. Let
+fresh men be placed on guard, and let all the  knights gather in
+the courtyard."
+
+When this was done, and all the knights again assembled, D'Aubusson
+said, "Our work is nearly done,  brothers. The traitors are all
+dead, and the revolt is at an end. It remains but to capture the
+author of this  attempt; but I believe he is already in our hands.
+I have given an accurate description of him to Da Veschi,  who
+has taken four knights with him, and they probably will catch him
+down at the port; if not, he will be  arrested the first thing in
+the morning. As to the slaves, they will be so utterly cowed by
+the discovery, that  there will be no fear of their repeating the
+attempt. I have ordered the officials of the prison to say naught
+in  the town of what has taken place. There can, however, be no
+concealment among ourselves. I shall, of  course, lay the whole
+matter before the council. The fact that a strong body of knights
+has, at so late an  hour, started on some unknown mission is, of
+course, already known in the auberges of Auvergne and  England.
+No concealment of the facts is therefore possible. It is the most
+serious attempt at a revolt of the  slaves that has ever taken place,
+and will be a warning to us that more vigilance must be exercised.
+As it is,  we have only been saved from the loss of our galleys
+and slaves by the acuteness of one of the youngest of  our knights,
+who, in the first place, noted a suspicious occurrence which would
+have been passed by  without attracting a moment's thought by
+ninety-nine out of a hundred men. He laid the matter before his
+bailiff, Sir John Kendall, who accepted his offer to disguise
+himself as a slave, to enter the prison under  circumstances that
+would excite no suspicions among the others, and to live and work
+among them in order  to ascertain whether there was any plot on
+hand. This task -- a painful one, as you may imagine -- he  carried
+out, and for two weeks he rowed as a galley slave. His lot was as
+hard as that of the others, for, as  he had reason to believe that
+some of the officials were concerned in the plot, it was necessary
+that all  should be kept in ignorance that he was other than he
+seemed to be. Thanks to his perfect knowledge of  Turkish, he was
+able to carry his mission through with complete success, and to
+obtain full particulars of  the plot we have tonight crushed. The
+knight who has performed this inestimable service is Sir Gervaise
+Tresham, of the English langue. The action he has performed will
+be noted in the annals of the Order as an  example of intelligence
+and of the extreme of self sacrifice, as well as of courage;
+for his life would have  been assuredly forfeited had the slaves
+entertained the slightest suspicion of his real character."
+
+There was a murmur of acclamation among the knights.  Not one of
+them but would have freely risked his  life in the service of the
+Order, but there were few who would not have shrunk from the idea
+of living as a  slave among the slaves, sharing their tasks, and
+subject to the orders of men of inferior rank and often  brutal
+manners.
+
+The knights now returned to their auberges. It was past midnight,
+but at the English house the lamps and  flambeaux were lighted in
+the great hall. The servitors were called up, wine placed on the
+table, and the  knights discussed the incidents of the evening.
+
+When the meal had concluded, Sir John Kendall said, "Brother knights,
+When the grand master bestowed  the honour of secular knighthood
+upon this young comrade of ours, he predicted that he would rise
+to high  distinction in the Order. I think you will all agree with
+me that the prediction is already in a fair way of  being fulfilled,
+and that the services he has rendered to the Order justify us, his
+comrades of the English  langue, in feeling proud of him.  I drink,
+brothers, to his health."
+
+A loud shout rose from the assembled knights, for upon the return
+of the party who had been away, the rest  of those at the auberge
+had hastily robed themselves and descended to the hall to gather
+the news. When the  shout had died away, and the wine cups were
+emptied, Gervaise, who was sitting on Sir John Kendall's  right
+hand, would gladly have retained his seat, but the bailiff told him
+that he must say a few words, and  after standing in embarrassed
+silence for a minute he said, "Sir John Kendall, and brother knights,
+I can  only say that I am very sensible of the kindness with which
+you have been pleased to regard what seems to  me after all to
+have been a very ordinary affair. I saw a man, whom I knew to be a
+stranger in the Island,  speaking surreptitiously to a slave, and
+afterwards saw him conversing with a prison officer.  That naturally
+struck me as curious, and I followed the officer, to see to which
+prison he belonged. Any one would have  thought, as I did, that such
+a thing was strange, if not suspicious, and the only way to find
+out whether there  was anything in it was to mix with the slaves;
+as I spoke Turkish well enough to do so I asked Sir John  Kendall's
+permission to disguise myself. He gave me every assistance, and I
+shared their lot for a fortnight.  There was no very great hardship
+in that -- certainly nothing to merit the praise that Sir John
+Kendall has  been kind enough to bestow on me.  Nevertheless, I am
+very glad to have gained your good opinion and  very grateful to
+him and to you for drinking to my health."
+
+Then he sat down abruptly.
+
+Sir John Kendall now rose, and the knights, following his example,
+betook themselves to their dormitories.
+
+The next morning notices were sent by the grand master to the
+bailiffs of the auberges, and the knights of  the grand cross who
+happened to be in the Island, to assemble in council. Messages were
+also sent to  Gervaise, requesting him to repair at the same hour
+to the palace, as the council would probably require his  attendance.
+
+"Oh dear! I wish this was all over," he said to Ralph, as the latter
+assisted him to buckle on his armour.
+
+"I don't see anything to sigh about," Ralph said. "I think that
+you are the most fortunate fellow in the world.  I do not say that
+you have not well deserved it, because it is the tremendous way
+you worked at Turkish and  gave up everything else that has enabled
+you to do this. Still, there was luck in your noticing that villain
+talking to the galley slaves, and then to one of the officers of
+the prison. Of course, as the grand master said  last night, it
+isn't one in a thousand who would have thought anything more about
+it, and I am sure I  shouldn't; so that, and all the rest, is
+entirely your own doing. Still, it was a piece of luck that you
+noticed  him talking with a slave. Don't think I envy you, Gervaise;
+I don't a bit, and I feel as much as any one that  you have well
+deserved the honour you have obtained.  Still, you know, it is a
+sort of consolation to me that  luck had a little -- just a little
+-- to do with it."
+
+"In my opinion luck had everything to do with it," Gervaise said
+heartily, "and I feel downright ashamed at  there being such a
+fuss made over it. It was bad enough before, merely because I had
+hit on a plan for our  escape from those pirates, but this is worse,
+and I feel horribly nervous at the thought of having to appear
+before the grand master and the council."
+
+"Well, that brown dye will hide your blushes, Gervaise.  I can only
+say I wish that I was in your place. By-the-bye, have you heard
+that they caught that rascal Greek last night?"
+
+"No, I have not heard anything about it."
+
+"Yes. The knights hid themselves behind a pile of goods on the
+wharf. There was no one about, so far as  they could see, but soon
+after twelve they saw a figure come up on to the deck of a fishing
+boat moored by  the quay. It was the Greek; he stood there for
+a minute or two listening, and then went down again; he did  this
+five or six times, and at one o'clock they saw him throw up his
+arms, as if in despair; he stepped ashore,  and was about to make
+his way up into the town when they rushed out and seized him.
+There is no doubt  as to what his fate will be. I am sorry to say
+that I hear my friend Vrados has been arrested; but there can be  no
+doubt about his loyalty, and he will assuredly be able to explain
+to the satisfaction of the council how  this man became a resident
+at his house."
+
+"I am sorry I met him there, Ralph. It is a very unpleasant thing
+to have gone to a house, to have been  received kindly, and then
+to be the means of bringing trouble upon it."
+
+"Yes. I feel that a little myself, because I took you there; and
+yet I cannot regret it, for if you had not seen  him and taken an
+objection to him, you might not have noticed him particularly when
+he spoke to one of  the galley slaves. It is certainly curious that
+you should have doubted the man, for I have met him there  several
+times, and even after your visit with me I could see nothing in
+him to justify your dislike."
+
+Gervaise went up to the palace, and while waiting in the great
+hall until summoned before the council he  was warmly accosted by
+several knights, -- some of whom were quite strangers to him, --
+who all joined in  congratulating him on the immense service he had
+done to the Order. It was upwards of an hour before he  was called
+in.
+
+"The council have received, Sir Gervaise Tresham," the grand master
+said, "full details from Sir John  Kendall of the manner in which
+you first discovered, and have since followed up the daring plot
+by which  the slaves at St.  Pelagius were to have risen, slain the
+guards who were faithful, spiked the cannon in the  three water
+forts, burnt the merchant shipping, carried off six galleys and
+burnt the rest, and in their name I  thank you for having saved
+the Order from a great calamity. The members of the council agree
+with me that  you have shown an amount of discernment of the highest
+kind, and that you are worthy of exceptional  favour and reward
+for your conduct. I therefore in my own name appoint you to the
+commandery of our  manor of Maltby in Lincolnshire, which, having
+fallen vacant, is in my gift; and I release it from the usual  payment
+of the first year's revenue. Knowing that you desire to establish
+yourself here, the council have, at  my request, decided to make
+an exception to the general rule that a knight, on promotion to a
+commandery,  must return and take charge of it in two years from
+the time the grant is made to him. The commandery will  therefore
+be administered by the senior of the knights attached to it.
+
+"The council, on their part, have requested the bailiff of Auvergne,
+as grand master of the Fleet, to appoint  you to the command of
+the galley now building, and approaching completion. This he has
+consented to do,  feeling, as we all feel, that although such an
+appointment is unprecedented for a young knight, yet in the  present
+case such an exception may well be made. I may add that the Admiral
+has -- in order that no knight  greatly your senior should be placed
+under your command -- determined that he will appoint to it only
+young knights, who will, we are assured, gladly serve under one
+who has so distinguished himself, feeling  certain that, under his
+command, they will have ample opportunities against the infidels
+to prove  themselves worthy of the Order. I may add, also, that
+the bailiffs of all the langues promise that they will  select
+from among the young knights such as may seem best fitted for
+such service, by their skill in warlike  exercises, by their ready
+obedience to orders, and good conduct. And I foresee that the
+spirit of emulation,  and the desire to show that, though still
+but professed knights, they are capable of performing as valiant
+deeds as their elders, will make the galley under your command one
+of the most successful in the Order.
+
+"As you are aware, it is a stringent rule, which even in so
+exceptional a case we should not be justified in  breaking, that a
+knight must reside in the Island for five years previous to being
+promoted to a  commandery. It is now two months more than that time
+since you were received as page to the late grand  master, and in
+promoting you to a commandery I have not, therefore, broken the
+rule. You may retire, Sir  Gervaise."
+
+Gervaise, overwhelmed by the unlooked for honours thus bestowed
+upon him, bowed deeply to the grand  master and the members of the
+council, and then retired from the chamber. He passed out of the
+palace by a  side door, so as to avoid being accosted by the knights
+in the great hall, and took his way out on to the  ramparts, where
+he walked up and down for a considerable time before returning to
+the auberge. He felt no  hilarity at his promotion. He had never
+entertained any ambition for rising to high office in the Order,
+but  had hoped only to perform his duty as a true knight, to fight
+against the infidels, and some day, if need be,  to die for the
+Order. The commandery was, he knew, a rich one, and as its chief he
+would draw a  considerable revenue from the estate. This afforded
+him no pleasure whatever, except inasmuch as it would  enable him,
+in his new command of the galley, to keep a handsome table, and to
+entertain well the knights  who served under him.
+
+It seemed to him, however, that the reward and honours were so
+far beyond his deserts that he felt almost  humiliated by their
+bestowal. The responsibility, too, was great. Would these young
+knights, the youngest  of whom could be but a year his junior,
+serve willingly under his orders? And, above all, would they be
+able to emulate the deeds of experienced warriors, and would the
+galley worthily maintain the fame of the  Order?
+
+At the end of two hours he was joined by Ralph Harcourt.
+
+"I have been looking for you everywhere, Gervaise.  You seemed
+to have disappeared mysteriously. None  had marked you leave the
+council chamber, or knew where you had gone; and after searching
+everywhere I  remembered your fondness for walks upon the walls,
+so I climbed to the top of St. John's tower and thence  espied you.
+Well, I congratulate you most heartily on the honours that have
+fallen to your share, especially  that of the command of a new
+galley."
+
+"It is too much altogether, Ralph. I feel ashamed at being thus
+thrust into a post that ought to be given to a  knight of age and
+experience. How can I expect a number of young knights, of whom
+well nigh all must be  my seniors in age, to obey me as they would
+an older man?"
+
+"What has age to do with it?" Ralph said. "You have shown that you
+have a head to think, and, as you  before proved, you have an arm
+to strike. Why, every young knight in the Order must feel proud
+that one of  their own age has gained such honour. It raises them
+all in their own esteem, and you will see that you will  get the
+pick among all the professed knights, and of a good many who have
+finished their profession, and  are serving here in the hope of
+some day getting promotion to a commandery. Not such an one as you
+have  got; that, in the ordinary course of things, does not fall
+to a knight until he is well on in years, and has  served in many
+commanderies of smaller value. I can tell you, directly Sir John
+Kendall came back and told  us that you had been appointed commander
+of the new galley, and that it was to be manned wholly by  young
+knights, there was not one of those serving their profession in
+the auberge who did not beg Sir John  to put down his name for it;
+and ten or twelve others, myself among them, who have obtained full
+knighthood also."
+
+"You don't mean to say that you have put down your name to serve
+under me, Ralph? It would be  monstrous."
+
+"I see nothing monstrous in it, Gervaise. As I said just now, years
+have nothing to do with it, and, putting  aside our friendship, I
+would rather serve under you than under many knights old enough to
+be your father.  I don't know whether I shall have the luck to be
+one of the chosen, as Sir John said that there were to be  only
+seven from each langue, which will make forty-nine -- with yourself
+fifty. If I am chosen -- and,  knowing our friendship, I hope that
+the bailiff will let me go with you -- it is likely enough I may be
+named  your lieutenant, as I shall be the only one beside yourself
+who is a secular knight, and am, therefore,  superior in rank to
+the rest."
+
+"That would be pleasant indeed, Ralph, though I would rather that
+you had been made commander and I  lieutenant; but at any rate,
+with you to support me, I shall feel less oppressed by the thought
+of my  responsibility."
+
+As Ralph had declared would be the case, the young knights in the
+other auberges were as anxious as those  of England to be enrolled
+among the crew of the new galley, and the bailiffs had some trouble
+in choosing  among the aspirants. Very few were selected outside
+the rank of professed knights, and as great pains were  taken to
+comply with the grand master's wishes that only young knights of
+good conduct and disposition,  and distinguished by their proficiency
+in warlike exercises, should be chosen, the crew was in every way a
+picked one. Most of them had made one or two of the three months'
+voyages in the galleys, though  comparatively few had had the good
+fortune to be absolutely engaged with the Moslem pirates.
+
+To the great satisfaction of himself and Gervaise, Ralph Harcourt
+was nominated lieutenant of the galley.  The fact that so many had
+volunteered impressed all those who were chosen with the sense that
+it was at  once an honour and a piece of good fortune to be selected,
+and all were determined that the boy galley, as  the elder knights
+laughingly termed it, should do honour to the Order.
+
+It was a fortnight before she was launched. Gervaise had heard,
+with great satisfaction, that it had been  decided by the council
+that no punishment should be inflicted upon the slaves for their
+share in the intended  rising at St. Pelagius.  All were guilty,
+and there was no means of saying who had taken prominent parts in
+the plot. The council felt that it was but natural that they should
+grasp at the prospect of freedom, for they  themselves would have
+done the same had they been captives of the infidels. Even the
+warders and guards  were allowed to go unpunished, although their
+offence was a much more serious one. Those who could  have named
+the men who had accepted bribes were dead, and the lesson had been
+so severe a one that there  was no probability of any again turning
+traitors. The author of the rising had been publicly executed.
+Seeing  the hopelessness of denial, he had boldly avowed his share
+in the matter, and had acknowledged that he  was acting as agent for
+the sultan, and had been supplied with ample funds before leaving
+Constantinople.
+
+He declared that he was absolutely unable to give any names whatever
+of those concerned in the plot, save  those of the two overseers,
+as these had undertaken the work of suborning the warders and
+guards, though  he admitted that he had on several occasions spoken
+to slaves as the gangs were on their way back to the  prison, and
+had told them to be prepared to take part in a plan that was on
+foot for their rescue from slavery.  The torture had not been, as
+was then the usual custom, applied to extort information; partly
+because his  story was probable, still more because the grand master
+and council did not wish that more publicity should  be given to
+the affair, and were glad that it should be allowed to drop without
+any further trial of the  delinquents. In the city generally it
+was only known that a plot had been discovered for the liberation
+and  escape of some of the slaves; and, outside the members of the
+Order, none were aware of its extent and  dangerous character. To
+the satisfaction of Gervaise and Ralph, Vrados was able to produce
+letters and  documents that satisfied the council that he had been
+deceived as to the character of the Greek, and was  wholly innocent
+in the matter.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XII THE BOY GALLEY
+
+
+Among those most pleased at the appointment of Gervaise to the command
+of the galley was Sir John  Boswell. Ever since the adventure with
+the pirates, the knight had exhibited an almost fatherly interest
+in  him; had encouraged him in his studies, ridden with him on such
+occasions as he had permitted himself a  short holiday, and had,
+whenever they were together, related to him stories of war, sieges,
+battles, and  escapes, from which he thought the young knight might
+gain lessons for his future guidance.
+
+"I doubt, Gervaise," he said one day, as they were riding quietly
+along the road, "whether our plan of life is  altogether the
+best. We were founded, you know, simply as a body of monks, bound
+to devote ourselves  solely to the care of the sick, and to give
+hospitality to pilgrims in Palestine. Now this was monkish work,
+and men who devoted themselves solely to such a life of charity as
+that in our Hospital at Jerusalem, might  well renounce all human
+pleasures; but when the great change was made by Master Raymond du
+Puy, and  from a nursing body we became a brotherhood in arms, it
+seems to me that the vows of celibacy were no  longer needful or
+desirable. The crusaders were, many of them, married men, but they
+fought no worse for  that. It would have been far better, methinks,
+had we been converted into an Order pledged to resist the  infidel,
+but without the vows of poverty and of celibacy, which have never
+been seriously regarded.
+
+"The garrison here might be composed, as indeed it is now, principally of
+young knights, of those who have  not cared to marry, and of the
+officers of the Order whose wives and families might dwell here with
+them.  This would have many advantages. Among others, the presence
+of so many ladies of rank would have the  excellent effect of
+discountenancing and repressing extravagances and dissolute habits,
+which are but too  common, and are a shame to the Order. Knights
+possessing commanderies throughout Europe would be no  worse
+stewards for being married men, and scandals, such as contributed
+largely to the downfall of the  Templars, would be avoided.
+
+"The sole vow necessary, so far as I can see, would be that knights
+should remain unmarried and disposable  at all times for service
+until ten years after making their profession, and that afterwards
+they should ever be  ready to obey the summons to arms, on occasions
+when the safety of Rhodes, or the invasion of any  Christian country
+by the Moslems, rendered their services needful, when they would
+come out just as the  knights of Richard the Lion Heart went out
+as crusaders. I have spent half my life since I joined the Order
+in commanderies at home, and a dull life it was, and I was glad
+enough to resign my last command and  come out here. Had I been
+able to marry, I might now have had a son of your age, whose career
+I could  watch and feel a pride in. My life would have been far
+happier in England, and in all respects I should be a  better man
+than I am now.  Methinks it would strengthen rather than weaken
+the Order.  As a fighting body  we should be in no way inferior
+to what we are now, and we should be more liked and more respected
+throughout Europe, for naturally the sight of so many men leading
+a luxurious life in commanderies causes  a feeling against them."
+
+"But I suppose, Sir John, that there is no great difficulty in
+obtaining a dispensation from our vows?"
+
+"In this, as in all other matters, everything depends upon interest
+or money. Of course, dispensations are not  common; but doubtless
+any knight when he had served his term of active service could,
+especially if his  request were backed by the grand master, obtain
+from the Pope a dispensation of his vows. If he had a  commandery
+it would make a vacancy, and give the grand prior, or the grand
+master, or the council, in  whosoever's gift it might be, an
+opportunity of rewarding services or of gratifying some powerful
+family."
+
+"I agree with you that it would have been much better, Sir John.
+I can understand that monks, ever living a  quiet life apart from
+the world, should be content so to continue; but among a body
+of warlike knights there  must be many who, in time, must come to
+regret the vows they took when boys. The cadet of a noble  family
+might, by the death of elder brothers, come to be the head of
+a great family, the ruler over wide  domains. Surely it would be
+desirable that such a man should be able to marry and have heirs."
+
+"Doubtless it could be managed in such cases, Gervaise, but it
+is a pity that it should have to be managed. I  can see no reason
+in the world why a knight, after doing ten years of service here,
+should not be free to  marry, providing he takes a vow to render
+full service to the Order whenever called upon to do so. Already
+the vow of poverty is everywhere broken. Already, in defiance
+of their oaths, too many knights lead idle  and dissolute lives.
+Already, knights, when in their own countries, disregard the rule
+that they shall draw  sword in no cause save that of the Holy
+Sepulchre, and, like other knights and nobles, take part in civil
+strife or foreign wars. All this is a scandal, and it were better
+by far to do away with all oaths, save that of  obedience and
+willingness to war with the infidel, than to make vows that all
+men know are constantly and  shamelessly broken.
+
+"I am fond of you, Gervaise. I am proud of you, as one who has
+brought honour to our langue, and who, in  time, will bring more
+honour. I am glad that, so far as there can be between a young
+knight and one of  middle age, there is a friendship between us.
+But see what greater pleasure it would give to my life were  you
+my son, for whom I could lay by such funds as I could well spare,
+instead of spending all my  appointments on myself, and having
+neither kith nor kin to give a sigh of regret when the news comes
+that I  have fallen in some engagement with the infidels. I often
+think of all these things, and sometimes talk them  over with
+comrades, and there are few who do not hold, with me, that it would
+be far better that we should  become a purely military Order, like
+some of the military Orders in the courts of the European sovereigns,
+than remain as we are, half monk, half soldier -- a mixture that,
+so far as I can see, accords but badly with  either morality or
+public repute.
+
+"However, I see no chance of such a change coming, and we must be
+content to observe our vows as well  as may be, so long as we are
+willing to remain monks and try to obtain dispensation from our
+vows should  we desire to alter our mode of life. We ought either
+to have remained monks pure and simple, spending our  lives in
+deeds of charity, a life which suits many men, and against which
+I should be the last to say  anything, or else soldiers pure and
+simple, as were the crusaders, who wrested the Holy Sepulchre from
+the  hands of the infidels. At present, Gervaise, your vocation
+lies wholly in the way of fighting, but it may be  that the time
+will come when you may have other aims and ambitions, and when the
+vows of the Order will  gall you."
+
+"I hope not, Sir John," Gervaise said earnestly.
+
+"You are young yet," the knight replied, with an indulgent smile.
+"Some day you may think differently.  Now," he went on, changing
+the subject abruptly, "when will your galley be ready?"
+
+"This is my last ride, Sir John. The shipwrights will have finished
+tomorrow, and the next day we shall take  possession of her, and
+begin to practise, so that each man shall know his duties, and the
+galley slaves learn  to row well, before we have orders to sail.
+I wish you were going with us, Sir John."
+
+"I should like it, lad, in many respects. It does one good to see
+the enthusiasm of young men, and doubtless  you will be a merry party.
+But, on the other hand, unless I mistake, you will be undertaking
+wild  adventures, and my time for these is well nigh passed. When
+the Turk comes here, if he ever comes -- and  of that I have little
+doubt -- I shall be ready to take my full share of the fighting;
+but I shall seek adventures  no longer, and shall go no more to
+sea.  Next only to the bailiff, I am the senior of our auberge,
+and -- but  this is between ourselves, lad -- am like to succeed
+to the grand priory of England when it becomes vacant,  and if not
+I shall, as the grand master has told me, have the offer of the
+next high office vacant in the  palace."
+
+Two days later Gervaise and his company of young knights went down
+to the port to take part in the launch  of the new galley. This
+was the occasion of a solemn ceremony, the grand master and a large
+number of  knights being present. A religious service first took
+place on her poop, and she was named by the grand  master the
+Santa Barbara.  When the ceremony was over, Gervaise was solemnly
+invested with the  command of the galley by the grand marshal of
+the navy; then the shores were struck away, and the galley  glided
+into the water, amid the firing of guns, the blowing of trumpets,
+and the cheers of the spectators who  had gathered at the port to
+witness the ceremony.
+
+The next morning a gang of galley slaves were marched down. A third
+of these had been drawn from the  crews of other galleys, their
+places being supplied by new hands. The remainder were taken from
+the men  employed on the fortifications. Three weeks were occupied
+in teaching the rowers their work, and getting  them well together.
+They were a fine crew, for the governor of St. Pelagius, grateful to
+Gervaise for the  discovery of the plot, had ordered the overseers
+to pick out from the various gangs men specially suited by  age
+and strength for the work.
+
+The dye by this time had entirely worn off his face, and although
+his hair was still several shades darker  than of old, it differed
+even more widely from the ebon hue that it had been when he was in
+prison. Thus,  although he recognised three or four men upon the
+benches who had been fellow occupants of his cell, he  had no fear
+whatever of their detecting in the commander of the galley their
+late companion in misfortune.
+
+Only a portion of the knights had been out each day while the crew
+were learning to row, as there was but  little for them to learn.
+The galley carried no sails, and the knights were soldiers rather
+than sailors, and  fought on the deck of their ship, as if defending
+a breach, or storming one held by the enemy. Moreover, as  all of
+them had already made one or more voyages, they were accustomed to
+such duties as they would  have to discharge on board.
+
+All were glad when an order was published for the galley to sail.
+On the eve of departure Gervaise was sent  for by the grand master.
+The general of the galleys was with him when Gervaise entered the
+room. The  bailiff of Auvergne always held the position of grand
+marshal, and the bailiff of Italy that of second in  command, with
+the title of grand admiral. These officials, however, as heads of
+their respective langues,  had many other duties to perform, and
+it was only on great occasions that they took any practical share
+in  the work of which they were nominally heads. The real control
+in all naval questions rested with the  general of the galleys,
+who was elected by the council, but on the nomination of the grand
+master.
+
+His power when at sea with the fleet was absolute. He could suspend
+any officer from duty, and had  unquestioned power of life and
+death over the crews. He had been frequently on board the galley
+since she  had been launched, and had been pleased with the attention
+paid by Gervaise to his duties, and with the  ready manner in which
+the young knights carried out his orders.
+
+"Sir Gervaise Tresham," he said, "it is usual, as you know, to
+appoint each galley to a certain cruising  ground, to which it is
+confined during its three months' absence.  At present there is
+a galley on each of  these stations, and as the last relief took
+place but a month since, it is better that they should remain at
+the  stations allotted to them. I have therefore, after consultation
+with his Highness the grand master, decided to  give you a free
+hand. You are as likely to meet with pirates in one quarter as in
+another, and you will pick  up from vessels you may overhaul news
+of their doings, which will enable you to direct your course to
+the  point where you will be most useful."
+
+"In the first place, however, you will proceed to the coast of
+Tunis. Visconti's galley is already there, but  the coast swarms with
+corsairs, and we have had many complaints as to their depredations.
+The Court of  Spain has twice represented to us lately that the
+pirates have grown so bold that vessels have been carried  off,
+even when coasting from one Spanish port to another. Visconti is
+specially watching the coast near  Tunis, and you will therefore
+perhaps do better to proceed farther west, for every village from
+Tunis to  Tangier is little better than a nest of pirates. I should
+imagine that you will find ample employment there  during your
+three months' cruise. When I say that you are free to choose your
+own cruising ground, I do not  mean that you should go up the
+Levant, or to the east of the Mediterranean, but that you are not
+bound to  keep close along the African coast, but may, should you
+obtain any information to warrant your doing so,  seek the pirates
+along the shores of Spain, Sardinia, Corsica, or Sicily.
+
+"I need not warn you to act with prudence as well as courage, for
+you have proved that you possess both  qualities. Do not allow
+yourself to be carried away by the impetuosity of your knights; it
+is more often the  duty of a commander to restrain than to encourage
+his crew, and with such young blood as you have under  your command
+the necessity will be greater than usual. Be kind to your slaves,
+but be ever watchful; yet  this I need not tell you.  Maintain
+a strict but not over severe discipline. You are all knights and
+comrades  of the Order, and equals when on shore, but on board you
+are the captain and they are your soldiers. I have  this afternoon
+had a meeting of your knights, and have urged upon them very strongly
+that, having  volunteered to serve under you, they must obey your
+orders as promptly and willingly as if you were the  senior knight
+of the Order, and that it behooves them specially upon the present
+occasion, when the crew is  composed entirely of young knights,
+to show themselves worthy of the honour that has been done to them
+by entrusting a galley of the Order to their charge. I told them
+I should regard your report of their individual  conduct with the
+same attention and respect with which I should that of any other
+commander, and that they  might greatly make or mar their future
+prospects in the Order by their conduct during the cruise. I
+am  convinced, from what I know of you, that you will exercise no
+undue harshness, but will act with tact and  discretion, as well
+as firmness."
+
+"I will try to do so, your Excellency. I feel that it is a heavy
+responsibility and will spare no pains to justify  the unmerited
+honour that has been bestowed upon me."
+
+"You have seen that the taking in of stores is complete, and that
+nothing is wanting for the voyage?"
+
+"Yes, sir. I stood by while the overseer of stores checked off every
+sack and barrel as it came on board. The  water is to be brought
+off this evening, and as I was unable to be present, Sir Ralph
+Harcourt is there to  count the barrels and see that all are full."
+
+"Goodbye, Sir Gervaise," the grand master said, as the interview
+terminated.
+
+"Hitherto you have given me, from the time you reached the Island,
+naught but reason for satisfaction at my  nomination of you as
+page, and I have no fear that you will fail this time. Remember
+that valour, however  great, cannot prevail against overpowering
+odds. You had a lesson of that when you served under Ricord,  though
+finally the affair turned out well. I do not say, don't attempt
+desperate undertakings, but don't  attempt impossible ones.  Be
+careful of the lives of your knights. Remember that ere long every
+sword may  be of the utmost consequence in the defence of Rhodes,
+and that even the capture of pirates may be too  dearly purchased;
+but that, at the same time, the honour of the flag of the Order
+must be upheld at all  hazards. Ah!" he broke off, seeing a slight
+smile on the young knight's face, "you think my orders  contradictory?
+It may be so; but you know what I mean, and I fear not that you
+will blunder in carrying  them out. Be prudent, and yet not over
+prudent. I mean, be not rash, unless there are such benefits to be
+obtained as would justify great risk in obtaining them."
+
+On returning to the auberge, Gervaise had a long chat with Ralph.
+
+"I think the admiral's talk with us this afternoon had an excellent
+effect, Gervaise. I do not say that every  one was not before
+disposed to obey you in all things, willingly and cheerfully; but
+he put it so strongly to  them that they had volunteered specially
+for service in this galley, knowing well who was to be its  commander,
+and the circumstance that the crew was to consist solely of young
+knights, and had therefore  specially pledged their honour so
+to act that the enterprise should be in all respects a successful
+one. To  render it so, obedience was even a greater necessity than
+valour. This was the most important of all the  vows taken by the
+knights of the Order, and it was only by the strictest and most
+unquestioning obedience  on the part of all to the orders of their
+superiors, that the work of a vast community could be carried on.
+Passing over the fact that you were their superior in rank, both
+as being a secular knight and a knight  commander of the Order,
+you had been specially appointed by the grand master and council,
+as well as by  himself, and that they bestowed upon you while at
+sea, and in the absence of any officers of superior rank,  their
+full powers and authority. You were, in fact, their representative
+and agent, and therefore to be  regarded with the same deference
+and respect that would be due to the oldest knight similarly placed.
+'Lastly,' he said, in a less serious tone, 'you must remember that
+this is an experiment, and, as some think, a  somewhat rash one.
+Never before did a galley, manned entirely from among the youngest
+of our knights,  put to sea; and you may be sure that, unless
+successful, the experiment is not likely to be ever repeated.  You
+have been selected from among many other candidates, and you have
+not only to justify the choice,  but to uphold the reputation and
+honour of the young knights of your Order, by all of whom your doings
+will be regarded with special interest, as reflecting credit not
+only upon yourselves individually, but as  representatives and
+champions of them all.'
+
+"I could see that his words had a great effect. He had placed me
+beside him, and I marked their faces as he  spoke.  Each face lit
+up at his appeal, and I do not think there was one but silently
+registered a vow to do all  in his power to prove himself worthy
+of the confidence placed in him and his companions by the grand
+master and admiral. I had before no shadow of fear that everything
+would not go well.  I knew almost all of  them personally, and if
+I myself had had the selection from among the whole body of knights
+in the  convent, I could not have made a choice that would have
+suited me better. It seems to me that in each  auberge the bailiff has
+endeavoured to pick out the seven young knights whom he considered
+would most  worthily support the honour of the langue. Still,
+confident as I was before, I feel more so now, after the  admiral's
+address to us."
+
+"I had no fear either, Ralph, though doubtless the admiral's words
+will carry great weight with them. It was  thoughtlessness rather
+than anything else that I dreaded; but now that the admiral himself
+has spoken to  them, there is no fear that anything will occur to
+give us trouble. I have particularly noticed that when we  have
+been on board, and have been laughing and chatting together before
+we got under way, their manner  changed directly the first order
+was given, and that all the commands were carried out with as much
+goodwill and alacrity as if they were under Ricord himself."
+
+On the following morning the knights all went on board the Santa
+Barbara. Their baggage was carried  down by slaves, and by the
+personal servants from each auberge who were to go as their attendants
+during  the voyage. The grand master had advanced Gervaise a sum
+equal to half a year's income of his  commandery, and with this he
+had purchased a stock of the best wines, and various other luxuries,
+to  supplement the rations supplied from the funds of the Order to
+knights when at sea. Gervaise had to go  round early to the admiral
+to sign the receipt for stores and to receive his final orders in
+writing. All were,  therefore, on board before him and, when he
+arrived, were drawn up in military order to receive him.
+
+Every knight was in full armour, and as, at a word from Ralph,
+they drew their swords and saluted the  young commander, Gervaise
+felt with a thrill of pleasure and of confidence that with such
+a following he  need not fear any encounter with a pirate force,
+unless in overwhelming numbers.
+
+The young knights were all, with the exception only of Ralph Harcourt,
+between the ages of seventeen and  nineteen, and their young faces,
+free in most cases even from the suspicion of a moustache, looked
+almost  those of boys. But there was no mistaking the ardour and
+enthusiasm in their faces, and the lack of breadth  and weight,
+that years alone would give to them, was compensated by skill in
+their weapons, acquired by  long and severe training, and by the
+activity and tireless energy of youth.
+
+"Knights and comrades," Gervaise said as, after walking through
+the double line to the end of the poop he  turned and faced them,
+"I am proud indeed to command so gallant a body of knights. The
+success of our  expedition depends upon you rather than upon me,
+and as I feel assured of your warm cooperation I have  no fear as
+to what the result will be, if Dame Fortune will but favour us by
+throwing in our way some of  those scourges of the sea in search of
+whom we are about to set out. Many of us have already encountered
+them, and, fighting side by side with older knights, have borne our
+share of the work, while those who have  not done so will, I am
+sure, do equally well when the opportunity arrives. We shall not
+this voyage have the  encouragement and confidence inspired by the
+presence of those who have long and valiantly borne the  standard
+of the Order; but, on the other hand, we have to show that we are
+worthy of the confidence  reposed in us, and that the young knights
+of the Order can be trusted to emulate the deeds of those who  have
+rendered the name of the Hospitallers a terror to the infidel."
+
+A shout of approbation greeted the close of his address. Gervaise
+then walked forward to the end of the  poop, and looked down upon
+the slaves, who, with their oars out, were awaiting the order to
+row.
+
+"Men," he said in Turkish, "it is my desire that, while it is necessary
+that you should do your work, your lot  shall be no heavier than
+can be avoided. You will not be taxed beyond your powers, save
+when the enemy  is in sight, or there is supreme need for haste,
+but then you must be called upon for your utmost exertions. I  wish
+your work to be willing. I abhor the use of the lash, and so long
+as each man does his fair quota of  work, I have given the strictest
+orders that it shall never be used. I have, at my own cost, made
+provision  that your daily rations shall be improved while under
+my command. Meat will be served out to you daily,  when it can be
+obtained, and for those of you who hold that the strict tenets of
+your religion may be relaxed  while engaged in such severe labour,
+a ration of wine will also be served out; and such other indulgences
+as  are compatible with the discipline and safety of the ship, will
+also be granted to you."
+
+There was a murmur of gratitude among the slaves.  Gervaise then
+gave the order to row, and the galley  started on her voyage. The
+knights had now fallen out from their ranks, and were soon laughing
+and talking  gaily. Being all of noble families and knightly rank,
+there was, except when on actual duty, a tone of  perfect equality
+and good fellowship prevailing among them. French was the common
+language, for as the  Order was of French foundation, and three
+of the seven langues belonged to that country, most of the high
+dignitaries being chosen from their ranks, it was natural that
+the French language should be the general  medium of communication
+between them.
+
+Until noon the slaves rowed steadily and well. Work was then stopped,
+for there was scarce a breath of  wind stirring the water. Even
+under the awning that had, as the sun gained power, been erected
+over the  poop, the heat was oppressive. The knights had all divested
+themselves of their armour, and most of them  retired below for
+a siesta.  As soon as the slaves stopped rowing, an awning, which
+Gervaise had  purchased, and which was rolled up under the break
+of the poop, was, to their astonishment, drawn over  them.
+
+"Don't you think you are spoiling your slaves, Sir Gervaise?" one
+of the Spanish knights asked doubtfully.
+
+"On the contrary, Sir Pedro, I hope that I am improving them. You
+have not worked as a galley slave, but I  have, and I can assure
+you that I used to feel the hours when we were lying broiling in
+the sun, doing  nothing, much more trying than those during which
+I was at work. I used to be quite giddy and sick with  the heat,
+and on getting out the oars again had scarce strength to work them.
+But this is not the most  important point. In port the slaves always
+sleep in the prison, but at sea they must rest on their benches;
+and  to do so with clothes soaked with the heavy dew must be a
+severe trial, and most prejudicial to the health.   The awning cost
+but a few ducats, and I reckon that, putting aside the comfort to
+the slaves, it will be very  speedily repaid by their better health
+and capacity for labour. When away in the galley with Sir Louis
+Ricord, I used to feel the greatest pity for the unfortunate wretches
+when at daybreak, in their drenched  clothes, and shivering with
+cold and wet, they rose to commence their work. I then took a vow
+that if ever I  should come to command a galley I would provide an
+awning for the slaves."
+
+Two or three of the knights standing by expressed their warm approval of
+what Gervaise said. There was,  in those days, but little of that
+sentiment of humanity that is now prevalent, and slaves were everywhere
+regarded as mere beasts of burden rather than as human beings.
+When, however, they had the question put  to them, as Gervaise had
+done, they were ready to give a hearty agreement, although it was
+the utilitarian  rather than the humanitarian side of the question
+that recommended it to them. After three hours' rest the  journey
+was renewed, and just at nightfall the galley anchored off an islet
+lying to the north of Carpathos.
+
+While the servants were laying the tables along the poop for
+the evening meal, Gervaise went down to see  that his orders were
+carried out regarding the food for the slaves.  They were already
+eating their bread and  meat with an air of satisfaction that showed
+how warmly they appreciated the unusual indulgence, while  there
+were few indeed who did not hold up their drinking horns as a servant
+passed along between the  benches with a skin of wine. Gervaise
+spoke to many of them.
+
+"Ah, my lord," one of them said, "if we were always treated like
+this, slavery would be endurable. For ten  years have I rowed in
+Christian galleys, but never before has an awning been spread to
+keep off the sun or  the dew. We shall not forget your kindness,
+my lord, and will row our hardest right cheerfully when you  call
+upon us for an effort."
+
+There was a murmur of assent from the galley slaves around.
+
+"May Allah be merciful to you, as you are merciful to us!" another
+slave exclaimed. "The blessing of those  whom you regard as infidels
+can at least do you no harm."
+
+"On the contrary, it can do me good," Gervaise said.  "The God you
+Moslems and we Christians worship is,  I believe, the same, though
+under another name."
+
+Gervaise had, indeed, during his long conversations with Suleiman
+Ali, often discussed with him the matter  of his faith, and had
+come, in consequence, to regard it in a very different light to that
+in which it was  viewed by his companions. There was faith in one
+God at the bottom of both Mohammedanism and  Christianity. The
+Mohammedans held in reverence the lawgivers and prophets of the Old
+Testament, and  even regarded Christ Himself as being a prophet.
+They had been grievously led away by Mahomet, whom  Gervaise regarded
+as a false teacher; but as he had seen innumerable instances of the
+fidelity of the  Moslems to their creed, and the punctuality and
+devotion with which the slaves said their daily prayers,  exposed
+though they were to the scorn and even the anger of their taskmasters,
+he had quite lost, during his  nine months of constant association
+with Suleiman Ali, the bigoted hatred of Mohammedanism so universal
+at the time. He regarded Moslems as foes to be opposed to the death;
+but he felt that it was unfair to hate  them for being hostile to
+Christianity, of which they knew nothing.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIII THE FIRST PRIZES
+
+
+After leaving the slaves, Gervaise joined his companions on the
+poop. They were engaged in an animated  discussion as to whether it
+was advisable to grant indulgences to slaves. The majority approved
+of the steps  Gervaise had taken, but some asserted that these
+concessions would only lead them to look for more, and  would create
+discontent among the crews of other galleys not so favoured.
+
+"Well, comrades," said Gervaise, "I think that so far I am better
+qualified than any of you to give an  opinion; but it may be that
+it will fall to the lot of some of you to be a slave in Turkish
+hands. In that case, I  can affirm with certainty, that you will
+keenly appreciate any alleviation, however small, of your lot. You
+must remember that the one feeling of the slave is dull despair.
+Death is the only relief he has to look  forward to. Do you think
+that a man so feeling can do his best, either at an oar or at any
+other kind of work?  I am sure it would not be so in my case. But
+if you brighten his life a little, and show him that he is not
+regarded as merely a brute beast, and that you take some interest
+in him, he will work in a different spirit.  Even viewed from
+a merely monetary point of view it must pay well to render him
+as content as possible  with his lot. You know how great is the
+mortality among the slaves -- how they pine away and die from no
+material malady that can be detected, but simply from hopelessness
+and weariness of life, aided,  undoubtedly, in the case of the
+galley slaves, by sleeping in the damp night air after an exposure
+all day to  the full heat of the sun. This brings an answer to your
+second objection.  Undoubtedly it might cause  discontent among
+the slaves of other galleys when they hear that others are treated
+better than themselves.  But I hope that if, on our return, we bring
+back all our slaves in good condition and health, the contrast
+between their appearance and that of the slaves in most other
+galleys will be so marked that the admiral  may consider it would
+be well to order awnings to be fixed to all the vessels of the Order,
+and even to grant  to all slaves, when away on voyages, the little
+indulgences I have given them here. The expense would be  very
+trifling, and it would certainly add a great deal to the average
+life of a slave, and would render him  capable of better work.
+There is another advantage. If the Turks learn that their countrymen
+in our hands  are treated with a certain amount of kindness and
+consideration, it might lead them to act similarly to those  of
+our Order who may be unfortunate enough to fall into their hands."
+
+"There is a great deal in what you say, Sir Gervaise," one of the
+knights, who had before taken the opposite  point of view, said.
+"There is no reason why our galley should not be a model one,
+and though, like enough,  the seniors will laugh at our making
+innovations, D'Aubusson is a reformer, and will certainly support
+anything that he sees to be beneficial, from whatever quarter it
+comes."
+
+Supper was now served, and the young knights were well pleased with
+the entertainment provided for  them. It was the principal meal of
+the day. Their fast was broken by a glass of wine, a manchet of
+bread,  and fruit soon after rising. At eleven o'clock they sat
+down to a more substantial meal; but in that climate  the heat was
+at that hour considerable, and as there were duties to be performed,
+there was no sitting long at  table. At supper the day's work was
+over, their appetite was sharpened by the cool evening breeze, and
+the  meal was hearty and prolonged. After it was concluded, several
+of the knights brought up from below viols  and other instruments
+of music; for the ability to accompany the voice with such an
+instrument was  considered an essential part of the education of
+a knight.
+
+For some hours the songs and romances, so popular at the time,
+were sung in the various languages  represented on board; then the
+knights, one by one, went down to their sleeping places, until only
+the seven  knights of the langue of Auvergne, who were to watch the
+first night, remained on deck. Five of these  wrapped themselves
+in their mantles and lay down on the benches. One of the others
+descended to the  waist, walked along the plank between the lines
+of sleeping slaves, and took up his place in the bow, while  the
+other paced up and down the poop, the fall of his footsteps being
+the only sound to break the silence  that reigned throughout the
+ship.
+
+In the morning, as soon as the knights had all taken a plunge in
+the sea, the oars were got out, and the  galley proceeded on her
+way. Passing through the islands and skirting the southern shore of
+Greece, she  continued her course west. Malta was sighted, but they
+did not put in there. Pantellaria was passed, and in a  fortnight
+after leaving Rhodes, Cape Bon, at the entrance to the bay of
+Tunis, was sighted. Until Greece  was left behind them, the nights
+had generally been spent in small ports, where supplies of fresh
+meat, fish,  and fruit, were obtainable. So far no incident had
+marked the voyage. The weather had continued fine, and  they had
+heard nothing, from ships they had fallen in with, of any Moslem
+pirates having been seen. A few  hours, however, after sighting
+the coast of Africa, a dark object was seen ahead.
+
+"It is a ship of some sort," Ralph said; "but her masts have gone.
+It may be that she is a merchantman that  has been captured and
+sacked by the Moorish pirates."
+
+Orders were given to the rowers to quicken their pace, and in little
+over an hour they were alongside the  hull. As soon as the vessels
+were close enough for those on the poop of the galley to look
+down on to the  deck of the other craft, it was seen that Ralph's
+suppositions were correct. Two bodies lay stretched upon it.  One
+was crushed under the fallen mast; the other lay huddled up in a
+heap, a cannon ball having almost torn  him asunder. The knights
+leapt on to the deck as soon as the galley ran alongside. Gervaise
+made first for  the man lying beneath the mast; as he came up to
+him, the sailor opened his eyes and murmured, "Water!"  Gervaise
+called out to one of the servants to bring water from the galley,
+and, as soon as it came, poured  some between the man's lips, and
+the knights by their united efforts lifted the mast from across
+his body. It  was evident, however, that he had but a short time
+to live, and the dew of death was on his face. After a few  minutes
+he rallied a little, and looked gratefully at his rescuers.
+
+"You have been attacked by pirates," Gervaise said.  "Was there
+one galley, or two?"
+
+"Three galleys," the man replied in a faint whisper.
+
+"Do you know where they were from?"
+
+"Tripoli."
+
+"How long ago?"
+
+"It was about three hours after sunrise when we saw them coming
+up," the man said, his voice gaining in  strength, as some wine
+they gave him took effect. "It was useless to fight, and I hauled
+down our flag, but  in spite of that one of the pirates fired a
+broadside, and one of the shot hit the mast and brought it down,
+and  I was crushed under it. They boarded us, took off all the crew
+as captives, and emptied the hold; I knew that  I was done for,
+and begged them to kill me; but they paid no attention. I know a
+little of their language, and  as I lay there I caught something of
+what they were saying; they are bound for the Island of Sardinia,
+where  they have a rendezvous, and are to join a great gathering
+of their consorts. I don't know the name of the  place, but it is
+on the east coast. More water!"
+
+Gervaise knelt to pour some water between his lips, when he gave
+a sudden cry, a shudder ran through his  frame, and he was dead.
+
+"Let us return on board, gentlemen," Gervaise said, rising to his
+feet. "We can do nothing here."
+
+As soon as he regained the deck of the galley, he signed to Ralph
+to follow him below.
+
+"Now, Ralph," he said, "this is one of those cases in which we have
+to decide whether we ought or ought  not to be prudent. From what
+that poor fellow said, the pirates have about five hours' start
+of us, and as they  can have no idea that they are pursued, we can
+doubtless overtake them before they reach Sardinia. The  question
+is, ought we to pursue them at once, or ought we to coast along
+until we find Visconti's galley?  Three of these Tripoli pirates,
+crowded as they always are with men, would prove serious opponents,
+yet  we might engage them with a fair hope of victory. But we
+may be seriously disabled in the fight, and  should be, perhaps,
+unable to carry the news to Genoa that there are many pirate ships
+gathering on the  coast of Sardinia to prey upon their commerce."
+
+"We might be days, or even weeks, before we light upon Visconti's
+galley, Gervaise, and even when we  found it, he might not consider
+himself justified in leaving the coast where he is stationed. Besides,
+while  we are spending our time looking for him, the pirates will
+be committing terrible depredations. It must be a  big expedition,
+under some notorious pirate, or they would never venture so far
+north."
+
+"Then you think that I should be justified in pursuing them alone.
+It is a fearful responsibility to have to  decide."
+
+"I think so, Gervaise. There is no saying what misfortunes might
+happen if we did not venture to do so."
+
+"Very well then, so be it. But before deciding finally on so grave
+a matter, I will lay it before the company."
+
+"There is no doubt as to what their decision will be," Ralph said,
+with a smile.
+
+"Perhaps not, Ralph; but as they will be called upon to risk their
+lives in a dangerous enterprise, it is as well  that they should
+have a say in the matter."
+
+When they returned on to the poop, there was an expression of
+eagerness and excitement on the faces of the  young knights which
+showed how anxiously they had been awaiting the result of the
+conference below.  Gervaise stepped on to a bench, and motioned to
+them to close up round him.
+
+"Comrades," he said, "although the responsibility of whatever
+course may be taken must rest upon my  shoulders, yet I think it
+but right that, as a general before a battle often calls a council
+of war to assist him  with its advice, so I should lay before you
+the two courses open to us, and ask your opinion upon them. Sir
+Ralph Harcourt and I are of one mind in the matter, but as the
+decision is a grave one we should be loath to  act upon it without
+your concurrence."
+
+He then repeated the alternatives as he had laid them before Ralph.
+"Now," he went on, "as you see, there is  grave danger, and much
+risk in the one course; but if successful its advantages are obvious.
+On the other  hand, the second plan is more sure, more prudent, and
+more in accordance with the instructions I have  received. I ask
+you to let me know frankly your opinion on the subject. If your
+view agrees with ours,  although it will not relieve me from the
+responsibility of deciding, it will at least, in the event of things
+turning out badly, be a satisfaction to know that the course had
+your approval, and that it was your desire,  as well as ours, that
+we should undertake it. First, then, let all who are in favour of
+following the pirates go  to the starboard side of the deck, while
+those who are in favour of joining Visconti, and laying this serious
+matter we have discovered before him, move to the larboard side."
+
+There was a rush of the knights to the right, and not one moved to
+the other side.
+
+"Your decision is the same as ours," Gervaise said. "To the north,
+then! If there is great peril in the  adventure, there is also
+great honour to be gained."
+
+The knights gave a shout of satisfaction at finding that their
+choice was also that of the officers.
+
+"Lay her head to the north," Gervaise said to the pilot.  Then he
+went to the end of the poop, and ordered  the slaves to row on. "Row
+a long, steady stroke, such as you can maintain for many hours. We
+have a long  journey before us, and there is need for haste. Now
+is the time for willing work."
+
+The oars dipped into the water, and the galley was soon moving
+along at a much faster pace than that at  which they had performed
+the journey from Rhodes. The slaves had not, from their benches,
+been able to  see what had passed on board the dismantled vessel,
+but from the order and the change of course, they had  no doubt
+that the knights had obtained some clue to the direction taken by
+the corsairs who had captured  and sacked the ship.
+
+"There is but little wind," Gervaise said to Ralph, "and their
+sails will be of slight use to them; therefore we  shall go fully
+three feet to their two. It is quite possible that we may not catch
+sight of them, for we cannot  tell exactly the course they will
+take. We shall steer for Cape Carbonara, which is some hundred
+and thirty  miles distant. If we do not see them by the time we
+get there, we shall be sure that we have passed them on  the way,
+unless, indeed, a strong wind should spring up from the south.
+However, I hope that we shall catch  sight of them before that,
+for we shall be able from our lookout to discover their masts and
+sails some eight  or ten miles away, while they will not be able
+to see us until we are within half that distance. They cannot  be
+more than twenty miles away now, for the light breeze will aid them
+but little, and as they will see no  occasion for haste, they will
+not be rowing at their full power, with so long a passage before
+them."
+
+Already, indeed, one of the knights had perched himself on the seat
+at the top of a low mast some fifteen  feet above the poop, that
+served as a lookout.
+
+"You can see nothing yet, I suppose, Cairoli?"
+
+"No; the line of sea is clear all round."
+
+It was indeed some four hours before the knight on the lookout cried
+that he could make out three dark  specks on the horizon. Gervaise
+at once ascended to the lookout, by the ladder that was fixed
+against the  post.
+
+"They are making to the left of the course we are taking.  Turn
+her head rather more to the west. That will  do. They are directly
+ahead now." He then came down to the deck again. "I would that we
+had seven or  eight more hours of daylight, Ralph, instead of but
+three at the outside.  However, as we know the course  they are
+taking, we are not likely to miss them, for as we shall not be near
+enough for them to make us out  before the sun sets, there will
+be no chance of their changing it. Do you think they will row all
+night?"
+
+"I should not think so. If the land were nearer they might keep on
+until they make it, but as they have had  no wind since daylight,
+they will lie on their oars until morning.  You see, at sunset
+they will still be some  eighty miles from Cape Carbonara, and the
+slaves could not possibly row that distance without rest; so that
+if we keep on we may take them by surprise."
+
+"That is what I have been thinking, Ralph, but it would be well
+not to attack them until nearly daybreak.  We should capture one
+galley easily enough; but the others, being ignorant of our force,
+might make off in  different directions, and we might lose both of
+them. If, on the other hand, we could fall upon them a short  time
+before daylight, we should be able to keep them in sight, and,
+even if they separated, they would soon  come together and continue
+their course, or, as I hope, when they see that we are alone, bear
+up and fight  us. I think that our best plan will be to row on
+until it is dark, then give the slaves six hours' rest, and after
+that go on quietly. If we can make them out, which we may do if
+they have lights on board, we will stop,  and wait until it is the
+hour to attack them. If we miss them, we will row on to Sardinia
+and lie up, as we  proposed, until they come along."
+
+"I think that will be a very good plan, Gervaise."
+
+Before sunset the three pirate ships could be clearly made out from
+the deck, but the pilot judged them to be  fully ten miles away.
+Half an hour later the slaves were told to cease rowing. Gervaise
+had ordered the  cooks to prepare them a good meal, and this was
+at once served, together with a full ration of wine. As soon  as
+they had consumed it, they were told to lie down and sleep, as at
+one o'clock the galley would be again  under way.
+
+The knights' supper was served below, as lights on the poop might
+be made out, should a lookout be placed  by the corsairs in their
+tops.
+
+"We had better follow the example of the galley slaves," Gervaise
+said, rising as soon as the meal was  finished, "and, with the
+exception of Spain, who is on watch, turn in to sleep till we are
+off again. All of  you will, of course, don your armour on rising."
+
+At the appointed hour the galley was again under way.  There was
+not a breath of air, and before starting,  pieces of cloth were
+wrapped round the oars at the rowlocks to deaden the sound, which
+might otherwise  have been heard at a considerable distance on so
+still a night. After an hour and a half's rowing, the knight  on
+the lookout said that he could see a light some distance ahead.
+The pilot, an experienced old sailor,  joined him, and speedily
+descended to the poop again.
+
+"It is a ship's light," he said. "I should say that it was a lantern
+on board the ship of the captain of the  expedition, and is shown
+to enable the other two to keep near him. I cannot say how far it
+is away, for I do  not know at what height it hangs above the water;
+but I should imagine, from the feebleness of the light,  that it
+must be some two miles distant."
+
+As soon as the light had been noticed, the slaves had been ordered
+to cease rowing, and they were now told  that they would not be
+required again for fully two hours. When the first gleam of dawn
+appeared in the  east they were called to their work again. The
+lantern was still burning, and, in a quarter of an hour, the  knights
+on the poop were able, in the broadening light, to make out three
+shadowy forms some two miles  ahead of them. They decreased this
+distance by more than half before they could discern any signs of
+life or  motion on board. Then a sudden stir was apparent; they
+could hear shouts from one vessel to another, oars  were thrust
+out, and an effort made to get the heads of the ships in the same
+direction, so as to catch the  light breeze that had just sprung
+up.
+
+The moment he saw that the galley was discovered, Gervaise shouted
+down to the slaves to row their  hardest, and told the pilot
+to steer for the ship farthest to the east.  She was some four or
+five hundred yards  from her nearest consort, and the same distance
+separated that vessel from the third craft.
+
+"We shall have time to carry her, Ralph, before the others come
+to her assistance, and they will only arrive  one at a time. If we
+were to lie alongside the middle craft, which is probably that of
+the chief, as it is she  that has the light burning, we might have
+the other two upon us before we had done with her, for she is
+evidently the largest, and most likely the strongest handed, of
+them."
+
+The leader of the pirates evidently saw that there was no chance
+of evading the fight. A flag was run up to  the masthead of his
+ship, and the three vessels began to endeavour to turn, so as to
+meet the galley. The  operation, however, took some time. In the
+confusion, orders were misunderstood, and instead of all the  slaves
+on one side rowing whilst those on the other side backed, all order
+was lost, and long before the craft  for which the galley was making
+had got round, the latter was upon her.
+
+"Shall I ram her, Sir Gervaise?" the pilot asked.
+
+"No; we might damage ourselves; besides, I do not want to sink her.
+Sheer away the oars on one side!"
+
+The galley carried eight guns -- three on each side of the poop,
+and two forward; and these had been loaded  with small pieces of
+iron. A few shots had been fired by the pirates, but, owing to the
+confusion that  prevailed on board, the guns were discharged so
+hurriedly that the shot either flew overhead or passed wide  of
+the galley. Excited as the young knights were, and eager for the
+fray, a general laugh broke out as the  galley swept along by the
+pirate ship, breaking many of her oars, and hurling all the slaves
+who manned  them backwards off their benches. A moment later the
+guns poured their iron contents among the pirates  who clustered
+thickly on the forecastle and poop, and as the vessels grated
+together the knights sprang on  board the corsair.
+
+The members of the English langue had each been provided with short
+pieces of rope, and before joining  their companions in the fray
+they lashed the vessels together, side by side. The fight was a
+very short one.  France and Auvergne, led by Ralph Harcourt, boarded
+at the bow, the other five langues at the poop; and so  impetuous
+was their onset that the pirates, who had still scarce recovered
+from their surprise at being  hastily aroused from sleep to repel
+the attack of the foe who had so suddenly sprung out from the
+darkness  upon them, offered but a feeble resistance.  Many threw
+themselves overboard, and swam to the ship  nearest to them; others
+were cut down; and the rest flung away their arms, and cried for
+quarter.
+
+All who did so were, without the loss of a minute's time, thrown
+down into the hold of their ship, and the  hatches secured over them.
+It had before been arranged that Ralph should take the command of
+the corsair,  having with him France, Auvergne, and Germany. As
+soon, therefore, as the captives were fastened below,  Gervaise
+called the knights of the other four langues back to the deck of
+the galley. The lashings were cast  off, she was pushed from the
+side of the prize, and the oars were got out. There was no time
+to be lost, for  the largest of the three pirate ships, which had,
+directly it was seen that her consort was captured, poured  two
+heavy broadsides into the prize, was now approaching -- rowing but
+slowly, however, for the third  vessel to come up.
+
+She was but a hundred yards away when the galley swept round the
+bow of the prize and advanced to meet  her. As she did so, Ralph
+discharged the eight guns of the prize, which he had at once
+reloaded, into the  bow of the corsair, the shot raking the crowded
+deck from end to end. When but a few yards distant, the  two bow
+guns of the galley poured in a shower of missiles, and a moment
+later she ran alongside the pirate,  the poop guns, as before,
+preparing the way for the boarders. But no sooner had they leapt
+on deck than  they were met by the pirates, headed by their captain.
+
+Gervaise had specially charged the knights not to allow themselves
+to be carried away by their ardour. "We  are sure to be greatly
+outnumbered, and, when we first spring on board, we must cut our
+way across the  deck, and then form ourselves in a double or treble
+line across it, and, so fighting, gradually force them  before us."
+
+This, in spite of the efforts of the pirates, was accomplished,
+and, once formed, the corsairs strove in vain to  break through
+the wall of steel. For a time, however, no forward movement could
+be made, so furious were  the attacks upon them, led by the pirate
+chief. Several times breaches were made in the front rank, but
+the  knights behind each time bore back the assault, and restored
+the line. The knights had won their way half  along the poop when
+a yell of exultation rose from the corsairs as the third of their
+vessels rowed up on the  other side of the galley, and her crew
+sprang on board it. Gervaise called the knights of the second line
+from their places, and ranged them along the bulwark, to prevent
+the Moors from boarding from the poop  of the galley.
+
+Then for a moment he looked round. The prize was creeping up, and
+was a length or two away, coming up  alongside. Its approach was
+also noticed by the pirates, who, with wild shouts, flung themselves
+upon their  opponents. Gervaise sprang forward to take the place
+of a young Italian knight, who staggered back, with  his helmet
+cleft by a heavy blow from the keen yataghan of the pirate captain.
+The corsair, shouting his war  cry of "Allah!" sprang with the bound
+of a wild cat upon Gervaise; his weapon descended on his uplifted
+guard, and shore right through the stout blade. With a shout of
+triumph, the corsair raised his arm to repeat  the blow; but Gervaise
+in turn sprang forward, and struck with all his force with the
+pommel of his sword  on the forehead of his opponent. The latter
+fell as if shot, his weapon dropping from his hand beside him.
+
+Dismayed at the fall of their leader, his followers recoiled for
+a moment. Another tall pirate sprang forward  to take his place,
+and, shouting to them to follow, was about to throw himself upon
+Gervaise, when a gun  crashed out close alongside. A storm of iron
+swept away the front line of Moors, and the shout of "St.  John!"
+"St. John!" rose above the din. It was one of the bow guns of the
+prize, and as she swept along gun  after gun poured its contents
+among the pirates.
+
+"Do you clear the galley, Ralph. We can manage here now," Gervaise
+said, as Ralph leapt on board. The  latter, followed by his party
+of knights, rushed across the poop, and sprang on to the galley
+among the  pirates, who had been striving in vain to break through
+the line of defenders.  Gervaise called to his party to  follow him,
+and, taking the offensive, fell upon the remnant of the corsairs
+who still held the forward end of  the poop.
+
+The discharge of the cannon at such close quarters had wrought
+terrible havoc among them, and the pirates,  with but slight
+resistance, turned, and either ran down the ladder or leapt into
+the water. The knights  followed them forward among the benches
+of the rowers, who cheered loudly in many tongues as they  passed
+them. At the forecastle the Moors made another stand, but the
+knights forced their way up, and in  two minutes all was over.
+
+"Now to the aid of our comrades!" Gervaise shouted, as the last of
+the corsairs was struck down.
+
+Ralph's party had indeed cleared the poop of the galley, but they
+in vain endeavoured to climb up on to that  of the third pirate
+ship, whose superior height gave a great advantage to its defenders.
+Gervaise leapt down  on to the bow of the galley, followed by the
+knights, and then ran aft until he could climb into the waist of
+the pirate. So intent were the corsairs upon defending the poop
+that they did not see what was going on  elsewhere, and Gervaise
+had obtained a fair footing before he was noticed. Then a number of
+men ran  down and attacked his party. But it was too late, for the
+whole of the knights had, by this time, leaped on  board. Their
+assailants were forced back, and, pressing close upon them, the
+knights gained the poop before  the main body of the pirates were
+aware of their coming.
+
+Warned by the shouts and shrieks of their comrades that they had
+been taken in the rear, the Moslems who  were defending the side
+of the poop wavered for a moment.  Ralph took advantage of their
+hesitation, and  sprang on board, his companions pouring in after
+him. There was a stern and desperate fight. The Moslems  fought
+with the fury of despair, disdaining to ask or accept quarter. A
+few leapt overboard, preferring death  by drowning to that by the
+swords of the Christians; but the great majority died fighting to
+the last. A shout  of triumph rose from the knights as the last of
+the Moslems fell.
+
+The first impulse of all of them was to take off their helmets in
+order to breathe the fresh air, and for a  while they all stood
+panting from their exertions.
+
+"Nobly and gallantly done, comrades!" Gervaise exclaimed. "This is
+indeed a victory of which we have all  a right to be proud. Now,
+the first thing is to free the slaves of their shackles; there
+are many white faces  among them.  Let our langue look after the
+wounded, while the released captives clear the decks of the  bodies
+of the fallen pirates."
+
+It took an hour's hard work to knock off the chains of the slaves.
+The greater portion of them were  Christians -- Greeks, Italians,
+Spaniards, and French, who had been captured in various raids by
+the  corsairs; and among them were the crew of the ship that had
+been overhauled by the galley on the previous  day. Besides these,
+there were a few Moslems who had been sentenced to labour in the
+galleys for various  crimes.
+
+Among the Christians, the joy at their liberation was intense. Some
+laughed, some cried, others were too  overcome to speak coherently.
+Among the rest were found, to the intense pleasure of their rescuers,
+three  knights of the Order who had for years been missing. They
+had been taken prisoners on an island at which  the galley to which
+they belonged had touched. Many of the knights had landed, and three
+of them, all  belonging to the langue of Italy, had wandered away
+from the rest, and had not returned. A search had been  made for
+them, and it was discovered that a struggle had taken place. As there
+were no marks of blood, it  was supposed that they were suddenly
+pounced upon by a party of hidden marauders, who had been  watching
+them from some hiding place, and had thrown themselves upon the
+knights before they had had  time to draw their swords. Following
+the trail by bushes broken down, and plants crushed under foot,
+it was  found to lead to a creek on the other side of the island.
+Here there were signs that a craft had been  anchored, as there
+were the ashes of fires, fragments of food, and other matters,
+scattered about on the  shore. Hours had passed before the knights
+had been missed, and therefore the craft in which they had been
+carried off was long out of sight. Letters were written by the
+grand master to the Pasha of Syria, to the  Emperor of Egypt, and
+to the Bey of Tunis, offering to ransom the knights, but all replied
+that they were  unaware of any such captives having been landed.
+
+An attempt had then been made to ascertain whether they had been
+carried to Tripoli; but the bey had little  authority over the
+various tribesmen along the coast, and only replied that no such
+captives had been sold in  the city.  Thus all hope of ransoming
+them had died away, and their names were inscribed in the list of
+those who had fallen into the hands of the infidels, but of whose
+subsequent fate no clue could be obtained.
+
+All were greatly emaciated, and their faces showed signs of the
+sufferings they had undergone. The young  knights were all familiar
+with their names, but personally none had known them, for they had
+been carried  off two or three months before Gervaise and Ralph
+Harcourt had arrived at Rhodes.
+
+All three had struggled desperately to break their chains while the
+fight was going on, and had, as soon as  the contest was decided,
+risen to their feet and shouted the battle cry of the Order; then,
+overcome by their  emotions, they sank down upon their benches,
+and remained as if in a stupor until the knights, who had  hurried
+first to them, struck off their fetters. Then the three men grasped
+each other's hands, while tears  streamed down their cheeks.
+
+"It is no dream, comrades," one of them said, in a hoarse voice.
+"We are free again. Let us first return  thanks to God for our
+release, and then we can thank these our brothers."
+
+The three knights knelt at the benches where they had toiled and
+suffered, and hid their faces in their hands.  No sounds came from
+their lips, but their stifled sobs and the heaving of their naked
+shoulders, seamed and  scarred by the strokes of their taskmasters'
+whips, told the young knights, who stood unhelmeted and silent
+around, how deep was their emotion. Then they rose.
+
+"I am Fabricius Caretto," one said; "this is Giacomo Da Vinci; this
+Pietro Forzi: all knight commanders of  the Order, and now for six
+years prisoners in the hands of these corsairs. Assuredly no one
+would know us,  so changed are we." He looked round inquiringly
+for a familiar face. "Your commander must surely be a  comrade of
+ours?"
+
+"We know all your names," Gervaise said, coming forward, "though
+none of us reached the convent until  after your capture. I have
+the honour to command this galley.  My name is Gervaise Tresham,
+and I have  for my lieutenant Sir Ralph Harcourt. All of us, glad
+as we are at the capture we have effected of these  three corsairs,
+are still more pleased that we should have been the means of rescuing
+three noble knights of  our Order from captivity. Now, I pray you
+first of all to accompany me on board the galley, where we will  do
+all we can to make you forget the sufferings you have gone through.
+After you have bathed, and reclad  yourselves, I will present to
+you the knights my comrades, amongst whom are seven of your own
+langue.   Three of these I will tell off to see to your comfort, for,
+as you will understand, I have my hands full indeed  at present."
+
+"First, before all things, Sir Knight, let me express to you all
+our deep gratitude and our admiration of the  gallant deed that you
+have accomplished in thus, single handed, capturing three vessels
+belonging to the  fiercest and most dreaded of the corsairs of
+Tripoli. God bless you all, sirs" -- and his voice broke again --
+"for the deed you have done, and for bringing us out of this living
+hell!"
+
+Gervaise called to three of the Italian knights, and, followed by
+them and the released captives, led the way  to the galley. Here
+he left them in charge of their countrymen.  "Give them each a
+draught of old Cyprus,  and something to eat," he said aside to one
+of the knights; "they sorely need refreshment before aught else,
+for, as you see, they are well nigh dazed with this unlooked for
+change. I will put out clothes enough for  one of them; the others
+you must supply for the present from your stores. Now I must be
+off."
+
+There was indeed much to be done. Four of the knights were told
+off to attend upon the most urgent cases  among their own wounded.
+Only two of their number had been killed outright, but there were
+four serious  cases among the wounded, while eight or ten others
+had received wounds that required bandaging and  attending to. As
+fast as the slaves' fetters were struck off, food and wine were
+given to them, together with  such garments as could be found
+at the moment. Then the bodies of the fallen pirates were thrown
+overboard, while the wounded were attended to, and the released
+Christians were divided equally between  the three prizes. To
+each of these the knights of one of the langues were told off, the
+seniors being  appointed to the command. There were in all some
+ninety Christian captives on board the three ships. Thus  each
+vessel had a complement of seven knights and thirty Christians, and
+to these were added ten of the  thirty Moslems found at the oars,
+and fifteen of the pirates to whom quarter had been given.
+
+It was past noon before all these arrangements had been made, and
+during the time so occupied, the ships  lay idly side by side,
+drifting slowly before the wind, the sails having been lowered as
+soon as the struggle  was over. Up to this time, the knights had
+been too busily engaged to think of food, but they were right glad
+when they were summoned to a meal on board the galley.
+
+Gervaise found the three knights in the cabin, dressed in the usual
+attire of the Order. They presented a very  different appearance,
+indeed, to that which they wore when he had first seen them. They
+had bathed, and  combed their matted hair, which was alone sufficient
+to transform them, but the feeling that they were once  more free
+men, and knights of an honoured Order, had done even more to effect
+the change; and although  they looked thin and worn, the martial
+bearing had come back naturally as they donned their knightly robes
+and buckled on swords.
+
+"I am glad to see that you are better," Gervaise said, as he went
+up to greet them. "Twenty years seem to  have dropped off your
+shoulders since this morning."
+
+"We are not the same men, Sir Gervaise. We were slaves, and are
+now free. We were Christian dogs; now  we are Christian knights.
+We were subject to scoffs and blows; now, thank God, we have swords
+to strike  with, and though as yet our arms may not have regained
+their full strength, we could at least bear a share in  a fray.
+Our comrades have been telling us somewhat of how this wonderful
+thing has come about, and have  been explaining what at first
+filled us with surprise, that a galley should be manned solely by
+young  knights, of whom their commander is one of the youngest. We
+can testify, at least, that had the grand  master been himself in
+command, and his crew composed of veteran knights, he could have
+done no  better."
+
+"We were fortunate in taking them so much by surprise that the first
+of their ships fell into our hands before  her consorts could come
+to her assistance; and her guns did us good service in our struggle
+with the others."
+
+"The matter was well arranged, as well as gallantly fought," one of
+the other knights said. "Had you first  fallen foul of the chief's
+galley, it would have gone hard with you, for his crew were so
+strong that you  could scarce have overcome them before the other
+two vessels came up to his assistance."
+
+"Now let us to our meal," Gervaise said.
+
+The three knights were placed at the head of the table by him, and
+it was pleasant to see how they enjoyed  their food.
+
+"I can scarce persuade myself that I am not dreaming," Caretto
+said. "Sometimes, when lying at night, wet  through with the damp
+air, I have wondered to myself whether I could ever have lived
+thus, and whether I  should ever exchange my hard bread and water
+for what seemed to me fabulous luxuries, though at the time  one
+had taken them as a matter of course. You cannot tell how strange
+it feels to me to come back to the old  life again."
+
+"You will soon be accustomed to it," Gervaise said, with a smile,
+"and then you will look upon your  captivity as a dream, just as
+you then regarded your past life."
+
+"I suppose, Sir Gervaise," Pietro Forzi said, "that you will sail
+direct for Rhodes with your prizes?"
+
+"No indeed," Gervaise replied. "At the same time that we learned,
+from a dying man left on board the ship  the pirates captured
+yesterday, of the course they had taken, and were so enabled to
+follow them, we also  learned that they were on their way to join
+a corsair fleet that was collecting at some point on the eastern
+side of Sardinia, with the intention of sweeping the coast of Italy.
+It was this, rather than the capture of  these three vessels, that
+induced us to disobey the general instructions we had been given
+to cruise along  the northern coast of Africa, and determined us
+to push north to give warning along the coast from Naples  to Genoa
+of the danger that threatened, and, if possible, to enable Genoa
+to fit out her galleys to encounter  the corsairs. That duty has
+still to be fulfilled, though I fear that Genoa will be able to do
+little, for of late  she has been engaged in a long civil struggle
+between her great families, and has taken but a small part in
+maritime affairs.  However, we can at least warn her, as well as
+Naples, Pisa, and other towns, and may  possibly find some opportunity
+for ourselves striking another blow against the pirates."
+
+"If so, certainly we shall be glad to accompany you, if you will
+allow us to serve under you; for nothing  would please us so much
+as the opportunity of paying off a small share of the vengeance
+we owe them. But  of course, if you would rather, we will sail for
+Rhodes in the prizes."
+
+"I am not thinking of sending them to Rhodes at present," Gervaise
+said. "It seems to me that we may be  able, in some way, to utilise
+them to advantage. They have their sails, and rowers for the oars.
+There will  be, in each, besides seven knights of the Order, thirty
+men who, like yourselves, must feel willing to strike  a blow at
+their late oppressors. I need hardly say that I shall be glad indeed
+to have the company and aid of  three such well known knights of
+the Order, and would, could I do so, gladly resign my command into
+your  experienced hands. But this I cannot do, and, anticipating
+that you would be willing to join us in this  expedition, I have
+been thinking how I could best utilise your aid. I have thought
+that, if you would accept  the positions, I would appoint one of
+you to each of the prizes, to act, not as its commander, but as the
+leader of the band of released captives. Most of them are sailors,
+of course, and with them you could work  the guns and give effective
+aid to the little party of knights in any actual fight."
+
+The three knights all exclaimed that they would gladly accept the
+posts he offered them.
+
+"The idea is a capital one, Sir Gervaise; and, as long as it does
+not come to close fighting, the three ships  should be able to
+render efficient aid to your galley in any encounter. They will
+be, at any rate, a match for  their own number of pirate ships,"
+Caretto said.
+
+As soon as the meal concluded, the Moslem captives were questioned
+one by one as to the rendezvous at  which the pirate fleet was to
+assemble; all, however, protested that the place was known only to
+the three  commanders, all of whom had fallen in the fight.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIV THE CORSAIR FLEET
+
+
+An hour later all was ready for a start. The knights of the langues
+of France, Germany, and Spain went on  board their respective ships,
+as did the three parties of released captives, with the knights
+who were to  command them, while the rowers took their seats on
+the benches, shackled with the chains that had recently  held the
+Christians. The wind was from the south, and with sails and oars
+the prizes were able to keep fairly  abreast of the galley. With
+a few short intervals of rest, the slaves continued their work all
+night, until,  shortly before daybreak, land was seen ahead, and
+the pilot at once pronounced it to be Cape Carbonara.
+
+"A good landfall, Gervaise," Ralph said. "The pilot has done right
+well. I suppose you mean to anchor  when you get there?"
+
+"Certainly, Ralph. The slaves will have rowed nearly eighteen hours,
+with only two hours' rest. They must  have some hours, at least,
+of sleep before we go on. As you and I have been up all night, we
+will turn in  also. We will send a boat ashore to try and find out
+from the natives they may come across whether any  vessels, bearing
+the appearance of Moorish corsairs, have been seen passing up the
+coast, and also to find  out what bays and inlets there are where
+they would be likely to anchor. Some of the Italian knights had
+best go with the boat, for though I believe these people speak a
+different dialect to those of the mainland,  they would have more
+chance of understanding them than any of the others."
+
+The sun had risen when the little fleet came to an anchor close to
+the cape. A boat was at once prepared to  go ashore, and Gervaise
+begged Fabricius Caretto, the senior of the rescued Italian knights,
+to endeavour to  find out whether a swift sailing craft of some
+kind could be hired. If so, he was to secure her on any terms,  and
+come off in her at once to the galley.
+
+Gervaise had already talked the matter over with Ralph, and they
+agreed that a strongly manned craft of this  kind would go faster
+than any of those they had taken, and that, moreover, it would be
+a pity to weaken  their force by sending one of the prizes away.
+Having seen them off, Gervaise retired to the cabin and threw
+himself down for a short sleep, leaving the knights who had been
+off watch during the night, to see that all  went well. In two
+hours he was roused.  A native craft had come alongside with Sir
+Fabricius Caretto.
+
+"I think she is just the craft for us," the knight said, as Gervaise
+came on deck. "She belongs to a large  fishing village just round
+the point to the left. There were several boats there, but the
+villagers all said that  this was the speediest vessel anywhere
+along the coast. She belongs to two brothers, who, with four men,
+constitute her regular crew; but I have arranged for twelve others
+to go in her, in order that they may row  her along at a good pace
+if the wind falls light."
+
+"Are your companions come off yet?"
+
+"No; but we can hoist a flag for their recall."
+
+"Do so. I shall be greatly obliged if you will undertake this mission
+to the seaports. It needs one of name  and rank to speak with the
+nobles and officials authoritatively."
+
+"I will gladly do so, Sir Gervaise. Give me your instructions, and
+you can rely upon my carrying them out."
+
+"I thank you greatly, Sir Fabricius, and shall be glad if you
+will take with you any two of the knights you  may select.  I have
+to write letters for you to deliver to the authorities at Naples,
+Pisa, and Genoa. I shall  write but briefly, and leave you to explain
+matters more fully. I shall merely say that I have intelligence of
+the arrival here of a fleet of Moorish corsairs, of whose strength
+I am ignorant, but that assuredly their  intention is to make a raid
+on the commerce of the coast, and perhaps to land at unprotected
+places. At  Ostia, after warning the authorities to send orders
+along the coast for the inhabitants to be on their guard,  pray
+them to carry word at once to Rome, and request his Holiness the
+Pope to order some armed galleys to  put to sea as soon as possible.
+Beg them at Naples and Pisa to do the same thing.  But of course
+it is from  Genoa that we must hope for the most assistance.
+
+"In each place you will, if possible, see the syndic himself, and
+such of his council as can be got quickly  together. The moment
+you have done all you can at Genoa sail for the Island of Madalena,
+which lies off  the northeastern point of the island. There you
+will either find us, or a boat with a message where to direct  your
+course. I think perhaps it will be best to omit Naples -- it will
+save you fully a day, if not two, to do so.  Pray them at Ostia to
+send off news down the coast, or to request the papal authorities
+to despatch mounted  messengers. 'Tis likely that, at first, at
+any rate, the corsairs will try the narrower waters to the north.
+From  here to Ostia is nigh two hundred miles, and if the wind is
+brisk you may arrive there tomorrow afternoon,  and start again at
+night, arriving at Pisa before noon on the following day; while,
+allowing for four or five  hours to ascend the river there, you
+may be at Genoa next morning.
+
+"Three hours should suffice to gather from the authorities what
+force they can despatch, and as soon as you  have learned this,
+embark again and sail south. You may reach Madalena in two days.
+Thus, at the earliest,  it must be from six to seven days before
+you can bring us the news there; if you meet with calms or foul
+winds you may be well nigh double that time. If at Ostia you can
+get a faster craft than this, hire it, or take a  relay of fresh
+rowers.  I will furnish you with means when I give you the letters."
+
+In less than half an hour Gervaise was on deck again.  The boat
+had returned with the other Italian knights.  An ample store of
+provisions had been placed on board the Sperondra, both for the
+crew and for the three  knights, and, without a minute's delay,
+these took their places on board, the great sails were hoisted,
+and the  craft glided rapidly away.
+
+"The villagers spoke truly as to her speed," Ralph said, as they
+looked after her. "Even with this light wind,  she is running fully
+six miles an hour, and as, by the look of the sky, there will be
+more of it soon, she will  make the run to Ostia well within the
+time we calculated."
+
+Gervaise now questioned the other Italian knights as to what
+information they had gained.
+
+They said the peasants had told them that several strange craft,
+using both oars and sails, had been noticed  passing northwards,
+and that so strong was the opinion that these were either Algerines
+or Tunisians that,  for the last three or four days, none of the
+fishing craft had ventured to put to sea. They were able to tell
+but  little as to the bays along the coastline, which they described
+as very rugged and precipitous. Five or six  little streams ran,
+they knew, down from the mountains. They thought the most likely
+places for corsairs to  rendezvous would be in a deep indentation
+north of Cape Bellavista, or behind Cape Comino. If not at these
+places, they might meet in the great bay at whose entrance stands
+Tavolara Island, and that beyond, there  were several deep inlets
+on the northeastern coast of the Island. Gervaise had a consultation
+with Ralph.
+
+"The first thing is to find out where these corsairs have their
+meeting place, Ralph; and this must be done  without their catching
+sight of the galley or of the prizes, which some of them would be
+sure to recognise."
+
+Ralph nodded.
+
+"It is a difficult question, Gervaise. Of course, if we had a
+boat speedy enough to row away from the  corsairs it would be easy
+enough; but with wind and oars they go so fast that no boat could
+escape them."
+
+"That is quite certain, Ralph; and therefore, if it is done by a
+boat, it must be by one so small and  insignificant that they would
+pay but little attention to it if they caught sight of it. My idea
+is that we should  take our own little boat, which is a fast one,
+paint it black, to give it the appearance of a fisherman's boat,
+and hire a couple of good rowers from the village. This, with one
+knight dressed as a fisherman, should go  ahead of us, and explore
+every inlet where ships could be sheltered. We would follow ten
+miles behind.  When we get near the places where the natives think
+the fleet is likely to be, the boat must go on at night,  while we
+anchor. In that way they ought to be able to discover the corsairs,
+while themselves unseen, and to  gain some idea of their numbers and
+the position in which they are anchored, and bring us back news."
+
+"Shall I go myself, Gervaise?"
+
+"I could not spare you, Ralph. The risk of capture does not seem
+to me to be great, but there certainly is a  risk, and I dare not
+part with you. It had better be an Italian, because there will
+doubtless be an opportunity  of landing at villages and questioning
+the inhabitants, therefore we will send Fosco. If there are some
+eight  or ten corsairs gathered in any of these bays the news is
+sure to travel along the shore, and we may get  some tidings in
+that way. The first thing is to send off to the village again to
+fetch two young fishermen;  they must be active fellows, strong,
+and possessed of some courage. I will ask da Vinci to go himself
+and  select them. While he is away we will paint our boat black,
+and make ready for her to start at once; the  sooner she is off
+the better."
+
+The Italian knight at once undertook the mission, and started for
+the shore. Fosco, who had been chosen  principally because he was
+light of frame, as well as very shrewd and intelligent, was then
+called up, and  his mission explained to him. He was delighted at
+having been selected.  Gervaise took him down to the  cabin, and
+they consulted the maps with which the galley was furnished.
+
+"You will row on to Muravera; it is some twenty miles from here.
+You see, the village lies at the mouth of a  river.  As soon as
+you arrive there, you will land and find out whether there is any
+report of Moorish pirates  having been seen along the coast. We
+shall be there this evening, and you will come on board and report.
+Next day you will get to Lunasei, which is about five miles on
+this side of Cape Bellavista, and they will  certainly know there
+if the pirates are lying behind the cape. If they are so, you will
+row back to meet us; if  they are not, you will remain there until
+we come up in the evening. Remember that, should you on either
+day be seen and chased, and you find they are overtaking you, you
+will make for the shore, land, and  conceal yourselves. We shall
+keep along near the coast, and as we pass you can come down to the
+water's  edge and signal to us to take you off. Now you had better
+disguise yourself, so as to be in readiness to start  as soon as
+da Vinci comes off with the men. You will only need to take a small
+stock of provisions, as each  night you can replenish them here."
+
+An hour later da Vinci came off with two stalwart young fishermen.
+The little boat had already been  painted, and it was lowered at
+once; Fosco stepped into it, and started.
+
+Two hours later the prizes got up sail, and, accompanied by the
+galley, coasted quietly along the shore,  arriving, late in the
+afternoon, at Muravera. Fosco at once came on board.
+
+"There is no news here beyond that which we gained this morning,
+Sir Gervaise," he said. "Strange ships  have certainly been seen
+sailing north, but they did not approach the coast."
+
+A similar report was given at Lunasei; there were certainly no
+corsairs lying behind Cape Bellavista, or  news would assuredly
+have reached the village. At Orosei, next day, the report was the
+same; there were no  strange ships at Cape Comino. They had been
+warned overnight that the coast beyond the cape was so  precipitous,
+that there would be no villages at which to make inquiries, and
+arranged with Fosco that the  ships should anchor north of the
+cape, and that he should go on at once to inspect the next bay. If
+he found  ships there, he was to return at once; if not, he was, at
+daybreak, to land at one of the villages in the bay,  and to make
+inquiries.
+
+No news was brought in by him during the night.
+
+"It is evident the pirates are not in the bay, Gervaise," Ralph
+said, as they came on deck at daybreak.
+
+"Yes; and I am glad of it. It is a large bay, and if the Genoese
+send half a dozen galleys, some of the pirates  might still escape,
+while the next bays are deeper and narrower, and it would be more
+easy to entrap them  all. I have all along thought it most probable
+that they would rendezvous there. The maps show no villages  for
+many miles round, and they might lie there for weeks without so
+much as a shepherd getting sight of  them from the cliffs. Moreover,
+it is the nearest point for cutting off ships coming down between
+Corsica  and the mainland, and they can, besides, snap up those
+proceeding from the south to Marseilles, as these,  for the most
+part, pass between Sardinia and Corsica."
+
+At eight o'clock the boat was seen coming round the point.
+
+"Any news, Fosco?" Gervaise asked, as it approached the galley.
+
+"None, Sir Gervaise. They have heard nothing of pirates, nor seen
+anything of them."
+
+Exclamations of disappointment broke from the knights.
+
+"That makes it all the more likely," Gervaise said, "that they are
+lying in one of the inlets to the north. You  see, lower down they
+kept comparatively close to the shore, being careless who might
+notice them; but as  they approached their rendezvous, they would
+be more careful, and might either pass along at night, or  keep far
+out. If they had not been anxious to conceal their near presence,
+they would have been likely to put  into this bay in search of plunder
+and captives; for Tempe, one of the largest of the Sardinian towns,
+lies  but a short distance away, and there must be a considerable
+amount of traffic."
+
+"There are four or five small craft lying there," Fosco, who had
+by this time stepped on board, put in, "and a  considerable number
+of fishing boats. When I came upon the ships in the dark, I thought
+at first that I had  lighted on the pirates, but on letting the
+boat drift closely by them I soon saw they were not corsair galleys."
+
+"Shall we get up anchor and go into the bay?" Ralph asked.
+
+"It were safer not to do so, Ralph. Possibly one of the craft lying
+there might be presently captured by them,  and they might learn
+from her crew of the presence of a galley of the Order there.
+Therefore I think it best  to remain where we are till nightfall,
+and then to proceed and anchor on the north side of the Island of
+Madalena, if we can find a sheltered cove where we could not be
+seen either from the land or by passing  ships."
+
+During the day there was a good deal of discussion among the
+knights as to whether the corsairs might not  already have sailed
+away. It was evident that if all their ships had arrived, there
+would be no motive for  delay. Three ships they knew would never
+join them, and others might have been detained, from some  cause
+or another. There could be no doubt that the pirates had already
+ample force for capturing as many  merchant vessels as they might
+come across. But it might be intended to carry out some more daring
+project  -- to sack and burn towns along the coast, carry off the
+leading people for ransom, and fill the vessels with  slaves --
+the attack being made simultaneously on several unprotected towns.
+A vast amount of plunder  could thus be reaped, together with
+captives of even greater money value. Were this their plan, they
+would  doubtless delay until all those who had promised to join
+in the expedition had arrived. The balance of  opinion, then, was
+that the corsairs were still in hiding.
+
+By daybreak next morning they were moored in a sheltered little bay
+to the north of Madalena, the galley  lying inside the prizes, so
+as to be concealed as much as possible from view of any craft that
+might happen  to pass the mouth of the bay. Fosco started as soon
+as darkness fell in the evening, and returned early in the  morning.
+
+"They are there," he shouted, as he neared the galley, "hidden in
+a deep inlet that runs into one of the  narrow bays."
+
+"How many are there of them?"
+
+"Seventeen or eighteen, I could not say which. They are all moored
+side by side."
+
+By this time Fosco's boat had reached the galley.
+
+"You have done well indeed," Gervaise said, as the young knight
+ascended to the poop. "Now give us a full  account of what you have
+seen."
+
+"As you know, Sir Gervaise, the bay opposite this island splits
+up into two, running a long way inland, like  the fangs of a great
+tooth. I had, of course, no difficulty in finding the entrance to
+the bay itself, as it is but a  short distance across the strait. I
+steered first for the left hand shore, and kept close along under
+the shadow  of the cliffs, which, in many cases, rise almost straight
+out from the water. We rowed very quietly, fearing  to run against
+a rock; for although it was light enough to see across the water,
+and to make out any craft that  might be anchored there, it was very
+dark along the foot of the cliffs. There was no need for haste, as
+I  knew I had plenty of time to explore both arms of the bay, and
+to be back here before day began to break.
+
+"We rowed up to the end of the inlet, and then, having assured
+ourselves that it was empty, came down the  other side, and turned
+up the western arm. We had got some distance along when I fancied
+I heard voices,  and so let the boat drift along, only dipping the
+oars in the water occasionally. I could make out no signs  whatever
+of the corsairs, when suddenly we came upon a break in the cliffs.
+It was only some fifty yards  across, and here a creek came in at
+right angles to the shore. I could have given a shout of pleasure
+as I  looked up it, for there a score of lights were burning above
+a dark mass, and we could hear the sound of  talking and laughter.
+It was but a glimpse I caught, for the men at once backed water,
+and we were soon  round the corner again.
+
+"Up till then the fishermen had been ready enough to go where I
+wanted, but the sight of that clump of  galleys regularly scared
+them, and they wanted to row straight away; but of course I pointed
+out to them  that they had taken pay to do this thing, and that
+they had to do it. They said that if caught they would be  either
+killed or made slaves of, and I could not contradict them, but said
+that, in the first place, as I was  ready to run the risk, there
+was no reason why they shouldn't do so, and in the second, there
+was no chance  whatever of their being taken, as, if discovered,
+we should get so long a start that we could either escape  them
+altogether or run the boat ashore at some point where the trees
+came down to the water's edge, carry  the boat up and hide it, and
+then move up into the hills until the corsairs had gone.
+
+"We waited there three or four hours, looking round the point
+occasionally. At the end of that time all was  quiet.  Two or three
+of the lanterns still burned, but there was no sign of life or
+movement on their decks.  After waiting another half hour to ensure
+the crews being asleep, we rowed quietly up the creek, keeping
+within an oar's length of the rocks. There was not much to see; the
+galleys lay two abreast, and as there was  no space between them,
+I supposed the whole were lashed together. There were eight of them
+on the side  we went along, but I think there were only seven on
+the other side. As I thought it did not much matter  whether there
+were fifteen or sixteen, and as the men were in a state of horrible
+fright, we turned and went  back again, and I own I felt very glad
+myself when we got round the point without an alarm being given.
+We came quietly out, and it was fortunate we did so, for we had
+not gone a quarter of a mile when we heard  the sound of oars, and,
+lying silently under the cliff, we saw two large galleys row past
+us."
+
+"It is a strong force, Gervaise," Ralph said, as they paced up and
+down the poop together. "Probably in each  of those galleys are
+eighty or a hundred men, in addition to the rowers. It is evident
+that unless Genoa sends  us help we shall not be able to interfere
+with their plans."
+
+"I don't know, Ralph. I think we may injure them sorely, though we
+might not be able to defeat them  altogether. I want you tonight
+to take one of the prizes, and row round to the bay we passed,
+and there to  buy three coasting vessels and six or eight fishing
+boats. Get as much pitch, oil, and other combustibles, as  you can
+purchase in the villages on the shore. If you can engage a score of
+fishermen to man them, all the  better. My idea is that if Caretto
+returns with news that the Genoese have no galleys ready for sea,
+we must  do what we can to injure these corsairs. If we smear
+these craft you are going to fetch with pitch and oil,  and fill
+the holds with combustibles, and so turn them into fire ships, we
+may at least do the pirates a  tremendous lot of harm. When we get
+to the mouth of this inlet, we could have the fire ships rowed in
+by  three or four men in each, they having a boat behind in which
+to escape as soon as the boats are lighted.  The sight of a dozen
+craft coming down on them in flames would cause a terrific panic,
+for, moored closely  together, as they are, if one took fire there
+would be little chance of the others escaping. Of course, we  should
+add to the confusion by opening a fire with all our guns, and could
+hope to capture some at least of  them as they tried to make their
+way out."
+
+"It is a grand idea, Gervaise; a splendid idea! It would be a
+terrific blow to the Moors, and would make the  sea safe from them
+for a long time."
+
+"When you buy the other things, Ralph, get a quantity of black
+cloth -- it matters not how coarse, or of what  material; and also
+some white. As soon as you come back with it, all hands shall set
+to work to make the  stuff up into mantles of the Order, with the
+white cross. We will put these on to the Christians in the prizes,
+and the Moors will suppose that they are attacked by four of the
+galleys of the Order. If you can get some  more arms and some iron
+headpieces, all the better."
+
+"I will do what I can, Gervaise; the arms will certainly be wanted,
+for those we found on the decks were  sufficient only to arm half
+the Christians. As to the steel caps, that will not matter so much,
+as in the  darkness and confusion the sight of the mantles will be
+quite enough to convince the corsairs that we are all  knights of
+the Order. By the way, Gervaise, we have not yet looked into the
+holds of the prizes."
+
+"That is so, Ralph; we knew, of course, that as the ships had but
+just started we should find nothing in them  save the cargo of that
+unfortunate craft they captured."
+
+On searching they found, as they had expected, that the cargo of
+the captured ship had been of no great  value.  It consisted of
+wine, olive oil, and grain. These were all useful, for the number of
+mouths to be fed  was considerable, and heavy inroads had already
+been made on the stores of the galley. The rowers of the  four
+vessels were at once set to work to crush the grain between flat
+stones brought from the shore, and an  ample supply of coarse flour
+for their use for at least a fortnight was obtained before sunset.
+
+As soon as darkness fell, Ralph and two of the French knights started
+in one of the prizes. Late on the  following afternoon a sail was
+seen coming from the north, and before the sun set they were able
+to make  her out to be the craft in which Caretto had sailed. The
+anchor of the galley was at once got up, and she  rowed out to meet
+the boat and conduct her into the little bay. It was almost dark
+when they came within  hailing distance.
+
+"What news do you bring, Sir Fabricius?"
+
+"Bad news, I regret to say. I do not think that Genoa will be able
+to send out any galleys for at least a  fortnight.  There have
+been civil dissensions, and fighting between rival factions, and in
+consequence her  ships are all dismantled and laid up. Crews will
+have to be collected for them, repairs executed, and officers
+chosen; a fortnight will be the earliest time in which they can
+be here. Pisa has no war galleys, and unless  the Pope sends some
+out directly he gets the news, the corsairs will have it their own
+way. Have you  discovered them?"
+
+"Yes; they lie but a few miles from here. There were fifteen
+or sixteen of them two days ago, and two  others joined them that
+night. You have lost no time indeed. We had scarce begun to expect
+you, Sir  Fabricius," he added, as the knight and his two comrades
+stepped on board.
+
+"I have done my best," the knight said angrily. "But I am in a rage
+with my ill success. All I have  accomplished is that no merchant
+vessels will put to sea at present. At Ostia they would only send
+off a  message to Rome, to ask for orders. At Pisa the authorities
+at first treated my story as a fiction, and, I  believe, took me for
+an impostor; but on the news spreading, some knights came forward
+and recognised  me. Then we had a meeting of the council. All
+talked, wrangled, and protested. They said that it was absurd  to
+suppose that they could, at a moment's notice, fit out ships
+to cope with a fleet of corsairs; and their sole  idea was to man
+the forts, and to repel an attack. However, mounted messengers
+were sent off at once, up  and down the coast, to give warning to
+the inhabitants of the towns to put themselves into a posture of
+defence, and to the villagers to fly with their wives and families
+into the interior as soon as they saw galleys  of doubtful appearance
+approaching. I was there but four hours, and then started for
+Genoa."
+
+"There was almost a panic there too, as the members of the council
+were mostly merchants, and were filled  with dismay for the safety
+of their ships and goods at sea. Of course, there was no thought that
+the corsairs,  however strong, would venture an attack upon Genoa
+itself. I told them that you had captured three of the  corsairs
+with a single galley, and that if they could send you ten others you
+would probably be able to make  head against the pirates; but, as
+I have told you, Genoa is at peace with all the world; her war galleys
+are  laid up, and most of them would need repair and recaulking
+before they would be fit to send to sea.  Although they maintained
+that no more than a week should elapse before they would be ready
+to sail I am  right sure that it will be double that time before
+they are fitted out.
+
+"Of course, in Genoa I was well known, though my family estates
+lie near Mantua, and my acquaintances  flocked round me and urged
+me to stay until the galleys were ready for sea. This I would not
+hear of, and,  six hours after my arrival, started again. We made
+the voyage to Corsica at a good speed, but since then we  have had
+the oars constantly out to help the sails. The men have well earned
+their pay, I can assure you. It is  enough to make one mad with
+rage to think that these pirates will be able to harry the coast
+of Italy at their  pleasure; for there can be little chance that
+they will abide quiet much longer at this rendezvous."
+
+"It is annoying, indeed," Gervaise agreed; and a murmur of
+disappointment ran round the assembled  knights. "However, we have
+the consolation that we have done all we could, and I am sure that
+we shall do  so in the future."
+
+Gervaise had charged Ralph to say nothing about the object of
+his mission, and the general supposition was  that he had sailed
+to endeavour to purchase some bullocks, as the supply of meat was
+nearly exhausted.  Ralph himself had let drop a few words to this
+effect, and had indeed been charged by Gervaise to bring off  a
+few oxen if they could be obtained without loss of time.  Gervaise
+was on deck at midnight, and soon  afterwards the beat of oars
+was heard. It was a still night, and one of the knights on watch
+remarked to him,  "It seems to me, Sir Gervaise, that the sound
+is a confused one, and that there must be several vessels  rowing.
+Shall I call up our companions? It may be that it is the pirate
+fleet coming out."
+
+"You need not do that," Gervaise replied. "I am expecting Sir Ralph
+to bring back with him some fishing  boats, for which I think I
+can find a use. We should have heard before this if the corsairs
+had been putting  out. Fosco is in his boat watching the mouth of
+the inlet, and would have started with the news had there  been
+any stir on board their galleys."
+
+It was a quarter of an hour before a number of dark objects entered
+the little bay. As soon as they did so,  they ceased rowing, and
+the splashes of the anchors as they fell into the water were heard.
+Then came the  sound of a boat's oars, and Ralph was soon alongside.
+
+"I see that you have succeeded, Ralph."
+
+"There is no fear of failing when one is ready to pay the full
+value of what one wants to get. I have bought  three coasters and
+eight fishing boats, and have a sufficient store of pitch and oil,
+with plenty of straw and  faggots. There was no difficulty in
+getting men to come with me. As soon as they heard that a fleet
+of  eighteen Moorish galleys was in the next bay, they were ready
+enough to aid in any plan for their  destruction, for they knew
+well enough that some of them would be sure to make raids all along
+the coast,  sacking and burning, and carrying off men, women, and
+children, as slaves. I said I only wanted two men  for each craft,
+but so many were willing to come that I have some thirty more than
+the number I asked for,  and we can divide these among us. They
+are strong, active looking fellows."
+
+"We will keep them here then, Ralph. You see, there are one-and-twenty
+of our knights in the three prizes,  and as we lost two in the
+capture, and four others are not fit to put on armour, we have but
+six-and-twenty,  and the addition will be very welcome. What are
+they armed with?"
+
+"They have bows and arrows, and long pikes and axes."
+
+"Good. Have you managed to collect any more arms?"
+
+"Yes. The people are all charcoal burners and woodmen in winter,
+and I was therefore able to get together  some thirty or forty axes
+and hatchets, which will be ample, with the arms we took from the
+Moors, to  equip the ninety Christians."
+
+"I think we can depend upon these for fighting, Ralph."
+
+"I don't think there is any doubt about that. A few of them
+are pretty well worn out with labour and  suffering, but all have
+gained strength and spirits greatly in the past week, and you may
+be sure that they  will fight to the death rather than run the risk
+of another turn in the galleys."
+
+"And have you got the stuff to make the mantles?"
+
+"Yes. There was plenty of the coarse black cloth which they wear
+in summer -- in winter, of course, they  are clad in sheepskins;
+and I have sufficient white cotton cloth to make the crosses."
+
+"We have only one thing to wish for now, Ralph, and that is, that
+the corsairs may not take it into their  heads to sail tomorrow.
+Fosco will bring me news at daybreak, and we will at once send
+another boat off to  watch the mouth of the bay when he leaves
+it. If they sail, we cannot venture to attack them as long as they
+keep together, the odds are far too heavy, and our only plan will
+be to follow them at a distance, when we  can just keep their upper
+sails in sight, and then to attack any detachment that may separate
+from the main  body."
+
+"I hope it will not come to that, Gervaise. It would be hard
+indeed, when you have devised such a splendid  plan, and we have
+got everything ready to carry it out, if they were to give us the
+slip. Do the others know  anything about it yet?"
+
+"No. I thought it better to keep silence till tomorrow.  No doubt
+some of the galley slaves understand  enough of one or other of our
+languages to gather what is on foot.  Besides, their late captives
+might, in  their satisfaction at the thought of revenge, say
+enough to them to let them know that an attack on their fleet  was
+intended, and one of them might, in some way, free himself from his
+irons and swim ashore. We know  there is a small fishing village
+across the island, and there would be no difficulty in stealing a
+boat and  making off with the news. I do not say that the risk is
+great; still, it were better not to throw away even a  chance.  The
+knights have all turned in in a very gloomy mood, for Caretto has
+returned with news that  there is no hope of assistance from Genoa
+for a fortnight, and it seemed, therefore, that all our pains had
+been thrown away. And now we may as well turn in until daylight."
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XV A SPLENDID EXPLOIT
+
+
+Gervaise was up again at dawn. He was amused at the wonder of the
+knights, as they came up one by one,  at the sight of the little
+fleet anchored outside them. As soon as it was fairly daylight, he
+sent off to the  three prizes to request all the knights to come
+on board the galley. When all were assembled there he said,  "You
+are all aware, comrades, that Sir Fabricius Caretto has brought
+news that the galleys at Genoa are all  laid up, and that it will
+be a fortnight before they can put to sea. Long before that, the
+corsairs will  assuredly be ravaging all the villages and small
+towns along the coast of Italy, unless we can prevent their  doing
+so. It would be simple madness to try to attack them at sea; of
+that I feel sure you are all conscious. It  would be only throwing
+away our lives and our galley."
+
+There was a murmur of assent among the knights. They were ready
+for any encounter in which there was a  chance, however faint, of
+success; but all saw that for a single galley to attack one of the
+largest corsair  fleets that had ever set out, would be nothing
+short of insanity. Their leader's words, however, seemed to  show
+that he had some plan in his mind by which he hoped to strike a
+blow at the enemy, and all listened  eagerly for what was coming.
+
+"We have heard from our comrade Fosco that their ships lie moored
+in two lines, side by side in a narrow  inlet.  He has returned
+this morning with the news that they are still there. He thinks
+that three or four more  have arrived during the last two days, and
+it is probable they are waiting for the three we captured to join
+them. Tonight it is my intention to attack them, but not by rowing
+in and boarding them, for that would be  hopeless. Yesterday Sir
+Ralph Harcourt went, as you are aware, to fetch provisions. But
+this was a part only  of the object of his trip. He has, as you
+see, brought back eleven craft with him; these, I may tell you,
+are  laden with combustibles -- pitch, oil, straw, and faggots.
+They will be rowed and towed to the inlet tonight,  set on fire,
+and launched against the pirates."
+
+An enthusiastic cheer broke from the knights. They saw at once
+that, lying as the corsairs were, side by  side, the destruction
+of many of them was certain.
+
+"He has also brought fishermen," Gervaise went on, "two or three
+of whom will go in each fire ship, having  a boat towing behind,
+in which they will escape as soon as the craft are alongside the
+galleys. The galley  and the three prizes will take their post
+at the mouth of the inlet. The fire of our guns will add to the
+confusion among the pirates, and we shall endeavour to fall upon
+any galleys that may extricate themselves  from the mass, and try
+to make their escape. Sir Ralph has brought back materials for
+making ninety  mantles of the Order, for the Christians on board
+the three prizes, and thirty fishermen to bring the crew of  our
+galley up to its full strength. The light of the flames will suffice
+to show the pirates that, as they will  believe, four vessels, manned
+by knights of the Order, are barring the entrance. Many will, we
+may  calculate, jump overboard and swim ashore rather than face
+us, and we shall be able, at any rate, to capture  three or four of
+their craft, for, as they come out, one by one, we can all close
+round them; and with nearly  fifty knights, ninety released captives,
+burning for vengeance, and some fifty or sixty fishermen, for those
+from the fire ships will, of course, join us -- we shall make short
+work of them, and may even hope to  entirely destroy their fleet."
+
+Again a joyous shout rose from the knights. This would indeed be
+an exploit that all might be proud to  share in, and, breaking the
+ranks in which they had stood while Gervaise addressed them, they
+crowded  round him with exclamations of enthusiasm and devotion.
+
+"Now," he said, as soon as silence was a little restored, "the
+knights of the langues on board the prizes will  send at once to
+the coaster on the left of the other two. Sir Ralph will go there
+now, and supply each with  materials for making the mantles for
+the Christians; he has brought thread, and fish bone needles. You
+will  see that the stuff is cut up into suitable lengths, and handed
+over to your crews, and that each man makes up  his mantle. There
+can be but little sewing required for these sleeveless gowns,
+nor need it be carefully done.  The great thing is that the white
+crosses shall be conspicuous. As soon as you have set them to
+work, you  will examine the state of the arms, see how many more
+are needed to complete the list, and then send off to  Sir Ralph,
+who will furnish as many as are required: the fishermen have brought
+their own weapons. See  that the slaves are all well fed today,
+and, before evening, inspect well their fetters, so that you may
+be free  from all anxiety as to an attempt by them to escape during
+the conflict.
+
+"The rest of you will go on board these native craft, and see that
+the combustibles are fairly distributed  among them, the wood and
+straw soaked with pitch and oil, as also the sails and ropes, and
+that the decks  are well coated; this is a most important duty. Get
+some torches made also, so that there shall be two on  board each
+craft; these are to be lighted the last thing before we get to the
+point, and will be thrown down  into the straw and faggots in the
+hold, by the fishermen when they get close to the corsairs. All this
+can be  prepared before our morning meal, and when you assemble here
+I hope to receive your reports that  everything is in readiness.
+One of the other coasters has some bullocks on board. Sir Ralph will
+send one to  each of the prizes, and one to us. They had better be
+killed and cut up at once, in order that the crews may  have two
+good meals today of fresh meat. See that the galley slaves have
+their share."
+
+No time was lost in carrying out the orders. Ralph, as soon as
+the cloth, arms, and meat were distributed,  went round in a boat
+to see that the combustibles were properly laid for firing, and
+everything done to  insure that the flames should spread rapidly.
+The Sards shared in the work, and rations and wine were  distributed
+to them; and when the knights sat down to their meal on board the
+galley, they were able to  report that everything was in perfect
+readiness, and that the work of sewing the mantles was making good
+progress.
+
+The day passed slowly to the young knights, all of whom were burning
+with excitement at the thought of  the coming fray. The released
+Christians were no less exultant at the prospect of taking vengeance
+for the  sufferings they had so long endured, and the scene on
+board all four ships was most animated.
+
+After talking it over with Ralph, Gervaise told off three more of
+the knights to each of the prizes, so that  there should be ten
+on board each. This reduced the strength on board the galley to
+seventeen; but as they  would have the assistance of a strong band
+of Sards they considered this to be ample, under the  circumstances.
+It was arranged that the galley, with one of the prizes, should
+close with the first corsair that  came out, and that the other two
+prizes should attack the second. After capturing these, they were
+to assist  each other as circumstances might dictate. Gervaise
+strongly impressed upon the knights in command of  each prize that
+they were not, single handed, to attack a corsair unless one of
+their consorts was near, and  free to give assistance.
+
+"We must run no risk of a reverse," he said. "We are certain of
+destroying many of their vessels and of  breaking up their fleet,
+and it is far better that a few should escape than that we should
+run the risk of losing  ten of our number, to say nothing of those
+we have rescued from captivity. In the excitement of the fight  this
+order must be strictly borne in mind. Our victory must be marred
+by no misfortune brought on by  headstrong rashness. The corsairs
+are bound to be very strongly manned, and ten knights, even aided
+by  such assistance as they may get from the Christians, might find
+themselves altogether over matched against  a crowd of desperate
+men."
+
+As soon as it was dusk the anchors were drawn up, and the fleet
+got under way. They proceeded but slowly,  for the wind was light,
+and the fishing boats moved heavily through the water. There was,
+however, no  occasion for speed, for Gervaise did not wish to
+commence the attack until past midnight. The guns had all  been
+loaded before starting, and a pile of ammunition was placed near
+each.  Presently the wind nearly died  out, and the galley and prizes
+then took the coasters and fishing craft in tow. It was nearly one
+o'clock when  they got within half a mile of the inlet.  The tow
+ropes were then thrown off, the fishermen got out sweeps,  and
+the galley led the way, the fire ships followed in a body, and the
+three prizes brought up the rear. The  oars had all been muffled,
+and slowly they made their way, until Fosco, who was standing next
+to Gervaise  on board the galley, said that the point just ahead
+marked the entrance to the inlet. They then stopped  rowing until
+the fire ships were all close up.
+
+These were, as had previously been arranged, in two lines. Five
+fishing boats, each manned by four men  and having its small boat
+in tow behind it, formed the first line; the three coasters, each
+with six men at the  oars, and the three other fishing boats, formed
+the second. The torches were now lighted. Ralph took his  place in
+the centre boat of the first line; Gervaise went on board one of
+the coasters, and the order was  given to the men to row. What wind
+there was was favourable, blowing from the northwest, and therefore
+right into the inlet. Scarcely had the first boats reached the
+entrance when a shout was heard.
+
+"Row, men, your hardest now!" Ralph shouted; the Sards bent to their
+oars, and the five boats advanced  rapidly towards the corsairs.
+As they did so, a babel of shouts and cries rose from the dark
+mass of ships,  which swelled into a tumult of alarm as on Ralph's
+order, "Throw your torches into the straw!" a flash of  flame leapt
+up from each boat.  Five more strokes, and they were alongside
+the two outside ships. As they  crashed heavily into them, the men
+leapt from their seats and sprang over into the small boats, threw
+off the  painters, and rowed astern, opening on either hand to
+allow the second line of fire ships to pass. These, by  Gervaise's
+directions, divided, and three bore along on either side of the
+corsairs, and then ran in among  them, throwing grapnels to fasten
+the fire ships alongside. Then, as the flames sprang up from the
+holds, the  crews betook themselves to their boats, and rowed out
+of the inlet.
+
+By the time they reached the galley and prizes, the eleven fire
+ships were a mass of flame, which was  spreading to the corsairs.
+Lying packed together as these were, the confusion was terrible.
+Numbers of men  endeavoured to push off the fire ships, but it was
+too late; others tried to extricate their galleys from the  mass,
+throwing off the hawsers, and striving with hand and oar to push
+their vessels out of the line. As soon  as the boats were alongside
+the galley, the guns of the four vessels opened fire with grape
+into the crowded  ships, now lit up by the flames as clearly as
+at noontide, while the battle cry of the Order sounded high  above
+the din.
+
+"Nothing can save the ships near this end of the line," Ralph said,
+"but some of those behind may make  their way out between the others
+and the rocks. I can see that some of them there are lowering their
+yards  and sails to prevent their catching fire as they pass."
+
+The knights distributed among the guns worked them incessantly,
+directing their fire chiefly against the  outside ships, so as
+to hinder the crews in their endeavours to arrest the progress of
+the flames; but they  were soon able to fire impartially into the
+mass. As the heat of the flames drove the pirates back, scores of
+men leapt overboard, and made for the shore. Presently, two or
+three ships were seen making their way  along the narrow line of
+water on either side of the flaming group in front. As the first
+advanced, the galley  and one of the prizes rowed a short distance
+forward to meet it. Its deck was crowded with men, among  whom a
+discharge of the cannon from both ships created terrible slaughter.
+
+A moment afterwards they closed with it, one on either side, and
+the knights, the released captives, and the  Sards, sprang down
+on to its deck. The fight lasted but a minute.  Appalled by the
+disaster that had befallen  them, by the terrible effect of the
+broadsides, poured in at a few yards' distance, and by the sight of
+so many  of the dreaded warriors of the Cross, some of the corsairs
+threw down their arms and flung themselves on  the deck or into
+the hold, crying for quarter; those who resisted fell either under
+the swords of the knights,  the vengeful axes of the late captives,
+or the pikes of the Sards; but the great bulk, leaping from the
+bow or  stern, swam ashore.
+
+"Back to your ships!" Gervaise shouted, the moment resistance
+ceased. "Leave her floating here; she will  help to block the way."
+
+Six vessels alone managed to make their escape from the blazing mass
+of ships, and all of these were  captured almost as easily as the
+first had been. As soon as it seemed that all the remainder were
+involved in  the flames, boats were lowered and sent on board the
+prizes to take possession. Save for the wounded on  the decks, they
+were entirely deserted by their crews, as those who had run below,
+as soon as they found  that their captors had left the vessels,
+dropped into the water, and made their way, either by swimming or
+with the assistance of oars, to the shore. There remained only the
+slaves, chained to their benches. A few of  these had been killed
+by the broadsides; but the guns had been aimed at the poops
+and forecastles, where  the corsairs were clustered together,
+and consequently the number of galley slaves who had fallen was
+comparatively small.
+
+In none of the galleys was the proportion of Christians anything
+like so large as that in the three prizes first  taken, the
+greater portion being men of inland tribes who had been captured in
+warfare, or malefactors who,  instead of being executed, had been
+sold to the corsairs. Nevertheless, in the six galleys some seventy
+Christians were found, and at once freed. It was terrible to think
+that in the galleys that had been destroyed  a large number of
+Christians must have perished in the flames, and Gervaise expressed
+bitter regret that he  had not considered that his attack by fire
+ships must necessarily involve the loss of so many Christian lives.
+
+"It can't be helped," Ralph said, as Gervaise poured out his feelings
+to him. "To very many of them death  must have been welcome, and if
+we had not attacked them as we did, and they had sailed for Italy,
+hundreds, if not thousands, of Christians would have been killed,
+and as many more carried away into  captivity; so, you see, the
+balance is all in favour of the course we adopted."
+
+Gervaise admitted this, but nevertheless his regret at the fate
+of so many unfortunate captives quite  overpowered for the time
+his satisfaction at the complete success that had been achieved.
+The victory had  been almost a bloodless one on the part of the
+assailants. A few of the knights had received wounds. Two  among
+the Christian crews had been killed, and four Sards; while two score
+had received wounds more or  less serious, as, unlike the knights,
+they had no defensive armour. While waiting for daylight to appear,
+all  their wounds were dressed and bandaged by the knights.
+
+In the morning the captured galleys were towed out, and anchored
+a short distance away, and then Gervaise  rowed up to the head of
+the inlet, followed by the other three ships. They found that eleven
+of the corsairs  had been burnt, and to their satisfaction, they
+discovered four uninjured galleys lying there, deserted, save  by
+the slaves.
+
+Seeing the fate of their comrades who had first issued out, the
+commanders had, instead of trying to escape,  rowed quietly to
+the head of the inlet, the movement being covered by the flame and
+smoke, and had there  landed, having laden themselves with stores
+for their support on shore. This was a great satisfaction to the
+knights, for not only did it swell the list of prizes, but it reduced
+by over thirty the number of Christian  slaves who had perished
+in the flames.  Taking the galleys in tow, they rowed out of the
+inlet, whose banks  were strewn with half charred timbers, oars,
+and relics of the fight.
+
+As soon as they had anchored by the side of their first prizes,
+a council was held on board the Santa  Barbara. It was clearly
+impossible to take thirteen prizes to Rhodes, for there would be
+but three or four  knights to each, and were they to fall in with
+but one Moorish pirate, they might suffer great disaster, while,
+should they meet with a storm, they would fare badly indeed, as they
+could not depend upon the rescued  Christians for the management
+of the sails and oars in heavy weather. At the same time, all were
+most  anxious that the prizes should be carried to Rhodes. Never,
+save as the result of some great battle, had such  a fleet of
+captured galleys been brought in, and the knights were prepared
+to endure all dangers rather than  part with one of them. Finally,
+after much discussion, it was determined that they should make for
+Genoa.  From thence the rescued captives would be able to find their
+way to their homes.  The great majority were  Italians and Spaniards;
+the former could proceed by land or sea to their respective homes,
+while the  Spaniards would have no long time to wait before a vessel
+of their own nationality entered the port, even if  one were not
+lying there when they arrived. Moreover, in any case it would be
+necessary to despatch a  vessel to Genoa, in order that it might
+be known that the danger was averted, and that there was no longer
+any necessity for getting the galleys ready for sea.
+
+The chief ostensible reason, however, for going to Genoa was that
+there would be no difficulty in engaging  as many sailors as might
+be necessary to take the prizes to Rhodes. Underlying all the
+arguments was  another reason which Ralph laughingly stated.
+
+"It is all very well to bring forward one argument after another,
+but not one of you has the courage to say  what I am sure all of
+you have at the bottom of your hearts. You know very well that you
+want to go to  Genoa to enjoy a triumph. The Rhodians are all very
+well, but there are very many more fair faces at  Genoa. Fie, Sir
+Knights! Such a spirit is little in accordance with the vows of the
+Order. Are we not bound  to humility? And here you are all longing
+for the plaudits of the nobles and ladies of Genoa!"
+
+Some of the young knights laughed, others coloured hotly.
+
+"They need not be ashamed of the feeling," Caretto said. "Is it not
+the ardent desire of all true knights to do  gallant deeds, and do
+they not value above all things the guerdon of applause from the
+fair eyes of ladies.  Your comrades have performed the gallant
+deeds, and well deserve the reward. Now, Sir Gervaise, if not  for
+this reason, at any rate for the others that have been brought
+forward, I suppose we are all agreed that  we sail for Genoa. For
+our part we are heartily glad that such is your decision. We, and
+the young knights  of our langue, have many friends there, and in
+their name I am sure I can promise you a reception as hearty  and
+sincere as that which we shall ourselves receive."
+
+It was settled that the rescued captives should be divided equally
+among the thirteen prizes, and that three  knights should go in
+each. The Moorish captives were also divided equally among them, to
+aid with the  sails, and to row a few oars, in case of a dead calm
+setting in. The commands were distributed according to  seniority,
+the three rescued Italian knights remaining on board the Santa
+Barbara with Gervaise.
+
+The Sards were anxious to return to their villages, in order to
+carry the news that several hundreds of  Moorish pirates had landed.
+
+"We shall have great trouble with them," one of the young fishermen,
+who spoke a little Italian, said to  Gervaise.  "There are always
+a great number of swine, and herds of goats, up among the forests
+on the hills.  We must send up and drive in as many of these as
+possible, and of course we shall send messengers to  Tempe; but it
+will need a very large force to combat these pirates, who will be
+able to come down and  plunder and destroy, and then retire to the
+hills, whence it will be hard to dislodge them."
+
+"I am sorry indeed that such trouble should have been caused to
+you," Gervaise replied; "but I am afraid  that I can give you no
+assistance."
+
+"We shall hunt them down in time," the Sard said confidently.
+
+"There are many villages scattered about Tempe, and what with us
+fishermen, and the woodmen and  charcoal burners, we shall soon get
+a strong body together. Besides, we know the mountains, and they
+do  not."
+
+"I should say that you had best avoid a pitched battle with them,
+but keep on harassing them by night and  day, cutting off all who
+separate themselves from the main body, until at last they are
+completely worn  out."
+
+"We shall deal with them, Sir Knight. We are all hunters, for there
+are wild boars and stags in the forest,  and wolves too, and wild
+sheep on the higher mountains. Every man among us can use his
+bow skillfully,  and wield pike and hatchet. The hunt will not be
+unprofitable, either, for we can get a good price for all we  take
+alive, to work in the mines."
+
+An hour later one of the galleys started with the Sards for their
+villages in the bay of Tempe. After landing  them, she was to rejoin
+the rest of the fleet at their former anchorage at Madalena. By
+nightfall all were  gathered there, and the next morning they set
+out for Genoa. The wind was light; but in their anxiety to  return
+home as soon as possible the released captives all volunteered
+to take their former places on the  benches, and the vessels were
+kept going at a fair rate of speed. Two days' rowing took them to
+Bastia,  where their approach created unbounded excitement until the
+banner of the Order was seen floating from  the stern of the Santa
+Barbara, while smaller flags, that had been hastily manufactured,
+flew from the  mastheads of the thirteen prizes. Even then the
+inhabitants feared to put out, believing that the flags were  but
+a ruse, and numbers of them fled at once, with their families and
+valuables, to the mountains. It was not  until a boat was lowered,
+and Ralph, accompanied by three or four other knights, rowed ashore,
+that the  panic was allayed.
+
+As soon as it was understood that the galley of the knights had
+not only captured the thirteen corsairs, but  had destroyed eleven
+others, and had thus annihilated a fleet that was intended to prey
+upon the commerce  of Italy, and ravage the western coast, the
+alarm was succeeded by the wildest enthusiasm. By the time  Ralph
+had obtained the fresh meat and stores he came ashore to purchase,
+the greater part of the population  were gathered on the shore,
+and a flotilla of boats put out with him, filled with picturesquely
+dressed men  and women. Some carried flags, others green boughs,
+while the ladies had bouquets and baskets of fruit.  The galley was
+the first attraction, and, mounting her sides, the ladies presented
+their offerings of fruit,  while the men cheered, and waved their
+hats; many musicians came out in the boats, and these played on
+bagpipes and three-reeded flutes a succession of airs peculiar to
+the island.
+
+Gervaise received his visitors on the poop. These were at first
+altogether incredulous when told that it was  the lad before them
+who had commanded the galley, had performed such a remarkable
+feat, and had freed  them from a terrible danger. The youth of the
+knights of the Order no less surprised them, and had not  Gervaise
+assured them that it was altogether contrary to the rules of the
+Order for a knight to allow himself  to be embraced, many of the
+ladies would have taken this form of showing their enthusiasm and
+gratitude.  The next morning the fleet started for Genoa.  The
+wind was much stronger than it had been on the  previous day, and
+it was therefore unnecessary for the oars to be put out, except,
+indeed, on board the  galley. There, at nightfall, the Christians
+relieved the slaves for some hours at their benches, and the next
+morning the circle of hills round Genoa, with the city nestling at
+their feet on the water's edge, and climbing  for some distance up
+their slopes, was in view. Caretto at once suggested that it would
+be well to signal to  the fleet to lie to.
+
+"If we do not do so," he said, "they will assuredly think that
+it is the corsair fleet advancing to attack and  burn the vessels
+in port, and you may be saluted as you approach by a shower of
+cannonballs. If you will  permit me, Sir Gervaise, I will go forward
+in one of the prizes and explain matters, and will return here in
+a  short time."
+
+"Thank you, Sir Fabricius. As such mischance as you mention might
+indeed very well occur, we will lower  sail and lie here until you
+return."
+
+While Caretto was away, the knights and crews breakfasted, and the
+former put on their armour and gayest  attire, in readiness for the
+landing. Gervaise, although with much inward vexation, considered
+it necessary  to do the same.
+
+"I do wish," he said to Ralph, who was smiling at his rueful
+face, "that you could for today take my place,  and let me pass as
+lieutenant."
+
+"I should not mind at all, Gervaise. But you must put up with the
+disagreeables as well as the advantages of  being commander, and
+must submit to be honoured and feted here, as well as getting no
+end of credit at  Rhodes. You will have the satisfaction of well
+deserving it, for I am sure the plan of attacking them with  fire
+ships would never have occurred to any one else, and if it had
+not been for that, we should have had the  mortification of seeing
+them sail off without being able to move a finger to interfere with
+them."
+
+"If one were fighting for fame and honour, all that would be true
+enough; but members of an Order, whose  sole object is to defend
+Christendom from the Moslems, should strive only to do their duty,
+and care  nothing for such things as honour and glory."
+
+"Human nature is human nature, and I don't see any reason why
+one should despise honour and glory when  they come to one in the
+course of duty. I fancy you will think so too, Gervaise, in course
+of time. I am quite  sure that among the fifty knights, there is
+not one who does not feel well content that he has not only done
+his duty to the Order, but has gained a share in the credit and
+honour that will certainly be given to all who  have taken a part
+in so crushing a defeat of the corsairs. As for myself, I do not
+for a moment pretend that I  am not sensible of the fact that, as
+second in command of the galley, my chances of obtaining promotion
+in  the Order are very greatly improved."
+
+It was nearly two hours before Caretto returned.
+
+"It was well indeed that I went in," he said to Gervaise, "for I
+found the city in an uproar. The alarm bells of  the churches were
+calling all citizens to arms, and troops were being hurried down
+to the forts and batteries.  Rumour had of course exaggerated the
+strength of the fleet, and half the population believed that the
+safety  of the city itself was menaced by the approach of a mighty
+squadron. As soon as my news was bruited  abroad, and they learned
+that the fleet consisted solely of prizes captured from the Moors
+by a galley of the  Order, alarm quickly changed into delight, the
+sharp, angry clang of the bells was succeeded by peals of  gladness,
+and the joy of the citizens at being relieved from the cloud
+of anxiety that had hung over the city  since my last visit, was
+unbounded. I went at once to the council chamber, where I found many
+of the  leading citizens already assembled, having been summoned in
+hot haste as soon as our approach was made  out. At first they were
+almost incredulous when I told them that every ship of the pirate
+fleet had been  either destroyed or captured, and that the fleet
+in the offing consisted entirely of your galley and the thirteen
+corsairs she had captured. As soon as they really grasped the fact,
+they sent off messengers to the churches  to order the joy bells to
+be rung, and to the dockyard to arrest all work upon the galleys.
+Then I had to give  them a short account of the surprise and
+destruction of the corsair fleet, and finally they begged me to
+ask  you to delay your entry to the port for a couple of hours, in
+order that they might have time to prepare a  suitable reception
+for you."
+
+"I suppose there is no help for it," Gervaise said. "Is there
+anything that we ought to do?"
+
+"I should decorate the galley with all the flags on board:  should
+set every one to work to make great flags  with the cross of
+the Order to hoist to the masthead of the prizes, instead of the
+little things that are now  flying; and under them we will hoist
+the flags of the corsairs, among which are those of Tripoli, Tunis,
+and  Algiers. I do not know that there is aught else we can do."
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVI FESTIVITIES
+
+
+At last the fleet, headed by the galley, to which all the knights
+had returned, rowed towards the port. A gun  flashed out from the
+fort at its entrance, and at once those from all the other batteries
+responded; bells  pealed out again, and a confused roar of cheering
+broke from the crowds occupying every spot from which  a view of the
+harbour could be obtained. The ships in the port were all decked
+with flags, and the front  windows and balconies of every house
+were hung with tapestries and bright curtains. As soon as the galley
+entered the port, a state barge, flying the flag of the Republic,
+advanced to meet her from the wharf. As she  approached, Ralph gave
+orders for the oars to be laid in, and the barge was soon alongside.
+The knights  were already ranged along the poop, and, accompanied
+by Ralph and Caretto, Gervaise moved to the  gangway to receive
+the visitors. At their head was Battista Fragoso, the doge, in his
+robe of state, and  following him were a body of the highest nobles
+of Genoa, all brilliant in gala costume.
+
+"This, my lord duke," Caretto said, "is Sir Gervaise Tresham, a
+knight commander of our Order, and the  commander of this, their
+galley. He has before, as you may well believe from his appointment
+to so  honourable a post, highly distinguished himself, but what he
+has before accomplished is far surpassed by  the brilliant action
+that he has now achieved. He has won a victory that not only reflects
+the highest honour  upon the Order, but is an inestimable service
+to Italy, and has freed her from a corsair fleet that would have
+been a scourge to her, both at sea and to the towns and villages
+along the coast. Not only has he, with the  brave knights under
+his orders, annihilated the corsair fleet, burning eleven of their
+galleys, and capturing  thirteen others, but he has restored to
+freedom no less than two hundred Christian captives, among them
+the  cavaliers Giacomo da Vinci, Pietro Forzi, and myself."
+
+"In the name of the Republic, Sir Gervaise Tresham, and I may say
+in that of all Italy, I thank you most  heartily for the splendid
+service that you have rendered us. It would have seemed to me well
+nigh incredible  that a single galley, even if commanded and manned
+by the most famous knights of your great Order,  should have
+accomplished so extraordinary a feat. Still more strange is it that
+it should have been  performed by so young a knight, with a crew
+composed, as Sir Fabricius Caretto has told us, of knights  chosen
+from among the youngest of the Order."
+
+"You give far more credit to us, your Highness, than we deserve,"
+Gervaise replied. "Three of the ships  were indeed captured in fair
+fight, but we caught the rest asleep and massed together as to be
+incapable of  successful resistance, and they fell easy victims to
+the fire ships we launched against them. Any credit that  is due to
+me is shared equally by my subcommander here, Sir Ralph Harcourt,
+and indeed by every knight  of my company."
+
+"This, doubtless, may be so, Sir Gervaise," the doge said, with a
+slight smile, "but it is to the head that  plans, rather than to the
+hand that strikes, that such success as you have achieved is due;
+and the credit of  this night attack is, as the cavalier Caretto
+tells me, wholly yours, for until you issued your final orders it
+seemed to him, and to the two good knights his companions, that
+there was naught to do but to remain in  port and watch this corsair
+fleet sail away to carry out its work of destruction."
+
+By this time they had reached the poop of the galley.  Gervaise
+now called forward the knights one by one,  and presented them to
+the doge, who expressed to them all the gratitude felt by himself
+and the whole of the  citizens of Genoa for the service they had
+rendered to the Republic.  This ceremony being over, the knights
+broke up their ranks and conversed for a few minutes with those who
+had come on board with the doge.  The latter then took his place
+in the barge with his companions, inviting Gervaise and Ralph to
+accompany  him. As the barge left the side of the galley, which
+followed closely behind her, the guns again thundered  out their
+welcome, and a roar of greeting rose from the inhabitants. On
+landing, the party waited until the  knights had joined them, and
+then proceeded up the street to the ducal palace, amidst enthusiastic
+cheering  from the crowd that lined the road, occupied the windows
+and balconies, and even scrambled on the  housetops, the ladies
+waving their handkerchiefs and scarves.
+
+At the palace were assembled all the municipal authorities, and
+the congratulations given on board were  here repeated. After this
+there was a great banquet, at which Gervaise was placed on the right
+hand of the  doge, who, at the conclusion of the feast, called upon
+the assembled guests to drink to the health of the  knights of St.
+John, who had saved the commerce and seacoast of Italy from the
+greatest danger that had  menaced them since the days when the
+Northern rovers had desolated the shores of the Mediterranean. The
+toast was drunk with enthusiasm, and Gervaise then replied with a
+few words of thanks for the honour done  to himself and his comrades.
+
+The party then left the banqueting hall for the great reception
+rooms, where the wives and daughters of all  the nobles and principal
+citizens of Genoa were assembled. Most of the young knights,
+belonging as they  did to noble families, and accustomed from
+childhood to courtly ceremonies and festivities, were quite at  home
+here. Caretto, his two companions, and their six Italian comrades,
+speedily introduced them, and each  was soon surrounded by a group
+of ladies, anxious to hear from his lips the details of the exploits
+of the  galley.
+
+"But how is it that you are all so young, Sir Ralph?" one of the
+ladies, to whom Harcourt had been  introduced as the second in
+command, asked him, when he had finished his account of the capture
+of the  galleys. "We heard from those who met you on landing, that
+all your comrades were young, but we were  filled with surprise
+when you entered the room, for many of them are but lads."
+
+"You may say that all of us are but lads, Countess. I am the oldest
+of the party, and am but little over  twenty-two, but few of the
+others are over nineteen; they are all professed knights of the
+Order, who, as you  doubtless know, come out to Rhodes when only
+sixteen. Some, of course, do not join until later, but I think  that
+all here entered at the earliest age permitted, and almost all had
+served in two or three voyages in the  galleys before they were
+appointed to the Santa Barbara. The reason why so young a crew was
+chosen was  that our commander was also young. He had done such
+exceptional service to the Order that he was  appointed to the
+command of a galley, and he has, as all will allow, well justified
+the choice. It was because  it was deemed inexpedient to place knights
+many years his senior under his command, and partly, perhaps,  to
+encourage the younger knights, by giving them an exceptional
+opportunity of distinguishing themselves,  that the crew was chosen
+entirely from their ranks. I was selected as second in command
+because Gervaise  and I had been special friends when we came out
+from England in the same ship, and had before fought  side by side
+against the Moslems."
+
+"I see that you wear gilded spurs, Sir Ralph," another lady said;
+"you must therefore be a dubbed knight?"
+
+"Yes; I had the good fortune to be knighted by D'Aubusson himself,
+at the same time that Sir Gervaise was  also so honoured. It was
+for an affair with the Turkish pirates. It was Gervaise who really
+won the honour,  for I had no share in the affair, save that of
+doing my best in the fight."
+
+"And who could do more?" the countess queried.
+
+"Gervaise could do more, Countess, as was shown in that attack on
+the corsairs by means of fire ships. He  has a head to plan, and,
+in the case I speak of, a happy thought of his not only saved the
+lives of ourselves  and Sir John Boswell, but, indirectly, was
+the means of preventing two of our galleys being captured by the
+corsairs."
+
+"Which is Sir Gervaise?" one of the ladies asked.
+
+Ralph smiled.
+
+"Look round the hall, signoras, and see if any of you can pick him
+out from the rest of us."
+
+The ladies looked round the hall.
+
+"There are only about twenty here; the rest are in the other rooms.
+Do not set us to work guessing, if he is  not in sight, Sir Ralph."
+
+"Oh yes, he is in sight. Now do each of you fix on the one you think
+most accords with your ideas of what a  knight, brave in action
+and wise and prudent in council, would be like."
+
+The six ladies each fixed on one of the young knights.
+
+"You are all wrong," said Ralph.
+
+"How can we choose?" the countess said laughingly, "when none of
+them resemble our ideal hero? Most of  them are pleasant and courtly
+looking youths, but as yet there is scarce a vestige of hair on
+their faces, and  one could not fancy any of them as the destroyer
+of the fleet of corsairs."
+
+"Do you see the one speaking to the elderly lady in the recess?"
+
+"Yes; she is the wife of Fragoso. You do not mean to say that that
+lad is the commander of the galley?  Why, he looks the youngest of
+you all."
+
+"He is between seventeen and eighteen, and there are several others
+who are no older. Yes, that is Sir  Gervaise, Knight Commander of
+the Order of St. John."
+
+"But how can he possibly have served his time as a professed knight?"
+
+"He was one of the grand master's pages, and his time in that service
+counted just as it would have done had  he entered as a professed
+knight; and at fifteen, therefore, he stood in the same position
+as those three or  four years older than himself. He speaks Turkish
+as well as our own tongue, and, as I told you, we received  the
+accolade at the hands of the grand master, a year and a half ago.
+He is now a knight commander, and  will assuredly one day occupy
+one of the highest posts in the Order."
+
+"You do not speak as if you were jealous, Sir Ralph; and yet
+methinks it cannot be pleasant for you all to  have one younger
+than yourselves placed at your head."
+
+"I do not think there is one of us who so feels," Ralph said earnestly.
+"In the first place, he has performed  excellent service; in the
+next place, even those who did not know him before, have felt,
+since we started,  that he is a born leader. Then, too, we regard
+with pride one who has brought credit upon the younger  members
+of the Order.  Moreover, we all owe our posts in the galley to the
+fact that he was chosen for its  command. It is a difficult position
+for him to fill, but he has managed so that, while all obey his
+orders as  cheerfully and willingly as if he were a veteran, when
+off duty we regard him as one of ourselves."
+
+"You are a staunch friend, Sir Ralph."
+
+"I am a staunch friend of Sir Gervaise, Countess, for the more I
+know of him the more I care for him. He  well deserves the promotion
+and honour that have fallen to his share."
+
+"Will you bring him across here to us, Sir Ralph? I want to talk
+to this hero of yours, and I am sure that my  daughter is longing
+to be introduced to him."
+
+Ralph waited until Gervaise was disengaged, and then brought him
+across, and, after introducing him,  moved away at once, leaving
+Gervaise to be interrogated by the ladies.
+
+"You must be accustomed to festivities, Sir Gervaise, for we have
+just heard that you were one of the grand  master's pages?"
+
+"I am accustomed to them, signora; but that is not at all the same
+thing as liking them."
+
+The reply was given so earnestly that all the ladies smiled.
+
+"Your taste is quite exceptional. Do you mean to say that you would
+rather be on board your galley than  here?"
+
+"It would not be polite," Gervaise said, with a laugh, "if I were
+to say that I would infinitely rather be on  board; but indeed I have
+not, like most of my comrades, been brought up in court or castle.
+Until the day I  joined the Order, we led the lives of exiles. My
+father belonged to the defeated party in England, and, save  for a
+few months when the cause to which he was attached was triumphant,
+we lived quietly on the estates  he had recovered, our life being
+one of care and anxiety. So, you see, I had no training in gaiety
+and  pleasure. At Rhodes there are state receptions and religious
+pageants, but a meeting such as this, is, of  course, impossible
+in a convent; and since I was eleven years old I think I have only
+once spoken to a  woman. So you can well understand, signora, that
+I feel awkward in speech, and I pray you to make  allowance for my
+ignorance of the language of courtesy, such as would naturally be
+expected in a knight,  even though belonging to a religious Order."
+
+"There is naught to make allowance for," the countess said gently.
+"Women can appreciate simple truth,  and are not, as men seem to
+think, always yearning for compliments.  Those who are most proficient
+in  turning phrases are not often among those foremost in battle,
+or wisest in council, and I can tell you that we  women value deeds
+far higher than words. Sir Fabricius Caretto is a cousin of mine,
+and has this afternoon  been speaking so highly of you to me and my
+young daughter here, that I am glad indeed to make your  acquaintance.
+How long do you intend to stay in Genoa?"
+
+"No longer than it will take me to engage men to carry the prizes
+to Rhodes. I am afraid that sounds rude,"  he broke off, as he
+noticed a smile on the faces of the ladies.
+
+"Not rude," said the countess; "though most knights would have put
+it differently, and said that their duty  compelled them to leave
+as soon as the prizes could be manned. But it comes to the same
+thing. Of course,  you will remain the guest of the doge as long
+as you are here; otherwise, it would have given us the greatest
+pleasure to have entertained you. My cousin is, of course, staying
+with us, and you see we all feel a very  deep obligation to you.  He
+has been so long a slave among the Moors, that we had almost come
+to hope  death had freed him from his fetters; so you may imagine
+our pleasure when he arrived here so suddenly  ten days ago. We
+were expecting that he would remain with us for some time, but he
+says that he must first  go back to Rhodes, after which he will
+ask for leave, and return here. We have a banquet tomorrow evening
+to celebrate his return, and earnestly hoped that you would be
+present, but, since you say that you do not  care for such gaieties,
+we shall, if you prefer it, be glad if you will come to join us at
+our family meal at  twelve."
+
+"Thank you, countess, I should very greatly prefer it, and it will
+give me real pleasure to come."
+
+"Your friend, Sir Ralph Harcourt, has been telling us how you have
+destroyed the corsair fleet that has been  so alarming us. He, too,
+is an Englishman, though he speaks Italian well."
+
+"Yes, he speaks it a great deal better than I do," Gervaise said.
+"He is a dear friend of mine, and it is,  indeed, chiefly owing
+to his support and influence that I have been able to manage so
+pleasantly and well in  the command of a body of young knights,
+most of whom are my seniors."
+
+"He tells us that you speak Turkish?"
+
+"Yes; I thought that it would be very useful, and spent nearly a
+year in acquiring it, the bailiff of my langue  being kind enough
+to relieve me of all other duties. I was fortunate enough to find
+in one of the servants of  the auberge a well educated and widely
+informed Turk, who was a very pleasant companion, as well as an
+excellent instructor, and I learnt much from him besides his language.
+The knowledge of Turkish has  already proved to me most useful, and
+was indeed the means by which I obtained both my commandery  and
+my appointment as captain of the galley."
+
+"Perhaps you will tell us the story tomorrow; that is, if it is
+too long to tell us now?"
+
+"It is indeed much too long; but if it will interest you I shall
+be glad to recount it tomorrow."
+
+The next day Gervaise went to the palace of the Countess Da Forli.
+She was a widow with no children,  except Claudia, the young daughter
+who had accompanied her to the fete the evening before. Caretto,
+and  four or five relations of the family, were the only guests
+beside himself.  It was a quiet and sociable meal,  and served with
+less ceremony than usual, as the countess wished to place Gervaise
+as much as possible at  his ease. During the meal but little was
+said about the affair with the pirates, Caretto telling them some
+of  his experiences as a captive.
+
+"It is well, Claudia," he said, laughing, "that you did not see
+me at the time I was rescued, for I was such a  scarecrow that you
+would never have been able to regard me with due and proper respect
+afterwards. I was  so thin that my bones almost came through my
+skin."
+
+"You are thin enough now, cousin," the girl said.
+
+"I have gained so much weight during the last ten days that I
+begin to fear that I shall, ere long, get too fat  to buckle on my
+armour. But, bad as the thinness was, it was nothing to the dirt.
+Moreover, I was coming  near to losing my voice.  There was nothing
+for us to talk about in our misery, and often days passed  without
+a word being exchanged between Da Vinci, Forzi, and myself. Do you
+know I felt almost more  thankful for the bath and perfumes than
+I did for my liberty.  I was able at once to enjoy the comfort of
+the  one, while it was some time before I could really assure myself
+that my slavery was over, and that I was a  free man again."
+
+"And now, Sir Gervaise," the countess said, when the meal was over,
+"it is your turn. Claudia is longing to  hear your story, and to
+know how you came to be in command of a galley."
+
+"And I am almost as anxious," Caretto said. "I did not like to ask
+the question on board the galley, and have  been looking forward
+to learning it when I got to Rhodes. I did, indeed, ask the two
+knights who  accompanied me on my mission here, but they would
+only tell me that every one knew you had performed  some very great
+service to the Order, and that it concerned some intended rising
+among the slaves, the  details being known to only a few, who had
+been, they understood, told that it was not to be repeated."
+
+"It was a very simple matter," Gervaise said, "and although the
+grand master and council were pleased to  take a very favourable
+view of it, it was, in fact, a question of luck, just as was the
+surprise of the corsairs.  There is really no secret about it --
+at least, except in Rhodes: there it was thought best not to speak
+of it,  because the fact that the attempt among the slaves was
+almost successful, might, if generally known,  encourage others to
+try to escape, and perhaps with greater success. I told you last
+night, Countess, that I  had only once before in the last six or
+seven years spoken to a woman, and it was on that occasion that
+the  adventure, so far as I was concerned, had its commencement."
+
+He then, beginning at his visit with Ralph Harcourt to the Greek
+merchant and his family on the roof of the  house, recounted
+the suspicions he had entertained, the manner in which they were
+confirmed, and the  method by which he had discovered the plot for
+the rising. He was interrupted several times when he  attempted to
+abbreviate the story, or to omit some of the details, and there were
+exclamations of surprise at  his proposal to personate a Turkish
+prisoner, and to share the lot of the slaves in their prison, and
+on the  benches of the galley.
+
+"I had no idea, Sir Gervaise," Caretto said, when he had concluded,
+"that you too had been a galley slave,  and I understand now the care
+you showed to render the lot of the rowers as easy as possible. It
+was a  splendid scheme, and well carried out. Indeed, I no longer
+wonder that you were appointed to the command  of a galley, and
+received a rich commandery in England at the hands of the grand
+master himself. What  think you, Countess; did I speak too highly
+in his favour?"
+
+"Not one jot, cousin. Why, Sir Gervaise, it seems to me that you
+have been born two centuries too late, and  that you should have
+been a knight errant, instead of being sworn to obey orders, and
+bound to celibacy. Do  you wear no lady's favour in your helm? I
+know that not a few of your Order do so."
+
+"As I have said, Countess, I know no ladies who would bestow favours
+upon me; in the second place, I am  but eighteen, and it would be
+ridiculous for me to think of such matters; lastly, it seems to me
+that, being  vowed to the Order, I can desire no other mistress."
+
+Claudia, who had listened with rapt attention to the story, whispered
+in her mother's ear. The latter smiled.
+
+"It seems to me, Sir Gervaise," she went on, "that after what you
+have done for Italy there are many fair  maidens who would feel it
+an honour that their colours should be borne by one who has shown
+himself so  valiant a knight.  You see, a gage of this kind does
+not necessarily mean that there is any deep feeling  between the
+knight who bears it and the lady who bestows it; it shows only that
+she, on her part, feels it an  honour that her gage should be worn
+by a distinguished knight, and, on his part, that he considers it
+as  somewhat more than a compliment, and wears it as a proof of
+regard on the part of one whose good opinion  at least he values.
+It is true that among secular knights it may mean even more than
+this, but it ought not to  mean more among knights of an Order like
+yours, pledged to devote their lives to a lofty and holy aim. My
+daughter Claudia whispers to me that she would deem it an honour
+indeed if you would wear her token,  accepting it in the spirit in
+which I have spoken. She is fourteen now, and, as you know, a maid
+of fourteen  here is as old as one of sixteen or seventeen in your
+country."
+
+Gervaise turned to the girl, who was standing by her mother's chair,
+looking earnestly at him. He had  noticed her the evening before;
+she had asked no questions, but had listened so intently that he
+had felt  almost embarrassed.  Claudia's was a very bright face,
+and yet marked by firmness and strength. He turned  his eyes again
+to the countess.
+
+"I never thought of wearing a woman's favour," he said; "but if
+your daughter will bestow one upon me, I  shall be proud to wear
+it, and trust that I may carry it unstained. I shall feel honoured
+indeed that one so  fair, and, as I am sure by her face, so
+deserving of all the devotion that a knight of our Order can give,
+has  thought me worthy of being one of those on whom she could
+bestow so high a favour, with the confidence  that it would be ever
+borne with credit and honour."
+
+"What shall I give him, mother?" Claudia asked the countess, without
+a shadow of the embarrassment with  which Gervaise had spoken.
+
+"Not a kerchief, Claudia. In the rough work of the knights, it
+could not be kept without spot or stain.   Moreover, if I judge
+Sir Gervaise rightly, methinks he would prefer some token that he
+could wear without  exciting attention and remark from his comrades.
+Go, fetch him any of your jewels you may think fit."
+
+"Then I will give him this," the girl said; and unfastening a thin
+gold chain she wore round her neck, she  pulled up a heart shaped
+ornament, in pink coral set in gold and pearls.
+
+Her mother uttered a low exclamation of dissent.
+
+"I know, mother; it was your last gift, and I prize it far beyond
+anything I have; therefore, it is all the more  fit to be my token."
+Then she turned to Gervaise, and went on, without the slightest
+tremor in her voice, or  accession of colour in her cheeks. "Sir
+Gervaise Tresham, I bestow upon you this my favour, and shall  deem
+it an honour indeed to know that it is borne by one so brave and
+worthy. You said that you would be  glad to be one of those who
+bore my favours. You will be more than that, for I vow to you that
+while you  live no other knight shall wear a favour of mine."
+
+"Claudia!" her mother said disapprovingly.
+
+"I know what I am saying, mother. I have often wondered why maidens
+should so carelessly bestow their  favours upon every knight who
+begged for them, and have said to myself that when my time came I
+would  grant it but once, and only then to one whom I deemed worthy
+of it in all ways -- one in whose loyalty and  honour I could trust
+implicitly, and who would regard it as something sacred, deeming it
+an honour to wear  it, as being the pledge of my trust and esteem.
+Kneel, Sir Gervaise, while I fasten this round your neck."
+
+Gervaise took out the small brooch, that fastened the collar of
+his silken doublet, and then knelt on one  knee.  The girl fastened
+the clasp round his neck, and as he rose he hid the heart beneath
+the doublet, and  fastened the collar.
+
+"Lady Claudia," he said earnestly, "I accept your favour in the
+spirit in which you bestow it. So long as I  live I shall prize
+and value it beyond any honour I may gain, and as I feel it next
+to my heart, it will ever  recall to me that you gave it me as a
+pledge of your esteem and trust, and I will strive to the utmost
+so to  bear myself that I may be worthy of the gift."
+
+None of the others spoke while the little ceremony was being
+performed. Caretto glanced at the countess  with an amused smile,
+but the latter looked grave, and somewhat vexed. However, she made
+an effort to  dispel the cloud on her face, and, when Gervaise ceased
+speaking, said, "This has been a somewhat more  serious business
+than I intended, Sir Gervaise. But do not think that I regret in
+any way the course it has  taken; 'tis well for a maiden on the
+threshold of womanhood that she should place before herself a lofty
+ideal, and that she should entertain a warm feeling of friendship
+for one worthy of it. So also it is good for a  young knight to
+know that he has the trust and confidence of a pure and innocent
+maiden; such a  knowledge will aid him to be in all ways true to
+the vows he has taken, and to remember always that he is  bound to
+be not only a valiant knight of his Order, but a sincere soldier
+of the Cross."
+
+Then she went on more lightly. "Have you heard, Sir Gervaise, that
+there is a question of making you a  noble of Genoa?"
+
+"No, indeed," Gervaise replied, in great surprise; "such an idea
+never entered into my thoughts."
+
+"Nevertheless, I know that it was spoken of last night, and although
+it has not yet been finally settled, and  will not be until the
+council meet this afternoon, I should not tell you if I did not
+think that it was as good as  agreed upon; and I am pleased to
+be the first to whisper to you that it is intended to bestow upon
+you an  honour that is jealously guarded and seldom granted, even
+to crowned heads, unless as a token of gratitude  for some signal
+service done to the Republic."
+
+"I should feel most honoured and most grateful, Countess, for so
+extraordinary a favour, did I feel that I had  done any extraordinary
+action to merit it. There can be no doubt that the destruction
+of the corsairs has  saved Genoa and all the maritime towns from
+immense loss by damage to their trade, and by the raids that  would
+have been made at various points on the coast. But I cannot see
+that the mere fact that we have  destroyed their fleet merits any
+marked honour. They were caught in a trap, and half of them burned,
+and  this might have been done equally as well by the Sardinian
+fishermen, unarmed, and without our aid. As to  the fighting, it
+was of small account. The first three craft we captured offered
+a much stouter resistance, and  we lost two of our number; but in
+the other affair no knight was killed, or even seriously wounded,
+and  believe me, Countess, I feel absolutely ashamed at the fuss
+that is made over it. It seems to me that I am a  sort of impostor,
+obtaining credit under false pretences."
+
+"No man is a fair judge of his own actions, Sir Gervaise," Caretto
+said. "A man may believe himself a  Solon, or a Roland; others may
+consider him as a fool, or an empty braggart; and it must be taken
+that the  general opinion of the public is the judgment from which
+there is no appeal.  It is not the mob of Genoa  only who regard
+the services that you have rendered as extraordinary, but it is
+the opinion of the councillors  and authorities of the Republic,
+and of those who, like myself, have borne our share in warfare, that
+not  only is the service great, but that it is due to the singular
+ability with which you, in command of only a  single galley, have
+wholly destroyed or captured the fleet that threatened our commerce.
+As our  councillors, therefore, all competent judges, are unanimous
+in their opinion that you have deserved the  highest honours that
+Genoa can bestow upon you, it is useless for you to set up your own
+opinion to the  contrary. Take the good things that fall to you,
+Sir Gervaise, and be thankful. It is seldom that men obtain  more
+honours than they deserve, while it very often happens that they
+deserve far more than they obtain.   Fortune has doubtless some
+share in every man's career; but when it is not once, but several
+times, that a  knight gains special credit for deeds he has performed,
+we may be sure that fortune has less to do with the  matter than
+his personal merits. Three times have you earned special credit;
+upon the first occasion, the  grand master -- no mean judge of
+conduct and character -- deemed you worthy of secular knighthood,
+an  honour which has not, in my memory, been bestowed at Rhodes upon
+any young knight; on the second, you  were promoted to the command
+of a galley, though never before has such a command been given to
+any,  save knights of long experience; and now, for the third time,
+the councillors of one of the greatest of Italian  cities are about
+to do you honour. It is good to be modest, Sir Gervaise, and it
+is better to underestimate  than to overrate one's own merits, but
+it is not well to carry the feeling to an extreme. I am quite sure
+that in  your case your disclaimer is wholly sincere and unaffected;
+but take my advice, accept the honours the  world may pay you as
+not undeserved, determining only in your mind that if you deem them
+excessive, you  will at least do all in your power to show that
+they are not ill bestowed. You will not, I trust, take my  counsel
+amiss."
+
+"On the contrary, Sir Fabricius," Gervaise said warmly.  "I am really
+but a boy yet, though by good fortune  pushed strangely forward,
+and I am glad indeed to receive council from a knight of vastly
+greater  experience than myself and, in future, however much I may
+be conscious in my own mind that anything I  have done is greatly
+overrated, I will at least abstain from protest. And now, Countess,
+I must pray you to  excuse me. I know that Sir Ralph Harcourt is,
+before this, down at the dockyard waiting my coming to  engage
+sailors."
+
+"You will come tomorrow at the same time, I hope, Sir Gervaise. As
+Claudia's sworn knight we have now a  claim upon you, and for the
+short time that you remain here you must regard this as your home,
+although  you must necessarily remain the guest of the doge."
+
+"He is a fine young fellow, indeed," Caretto said, after Gervaise
+had left. "There is no affectation about his  modesty, and he really
+considers that this success he has gained is solely a stroke of
+good fortune. Of  course, I have been asking many questions about
+him of the young knights of his own langue, Harcourt  among them.
+They tell me that he is always in earnest in everything he undertakes.
+He is without a rival  among the younger knights of the convent in
+his skill in arms, and for strength and activity in all exercises;
+he seems to care nothing for the ordinary amusements in which they
+join at Rhodes, and for nine months  was scarcely ever seen by those
+in the auberge, save when they gathered for meals, so continuously
+did he  work to acquire a perfect command of Turkish. How thoroughly
+he succeeded is evident from the fact that  he was able to live
+among the galley slaves without exciting any suspicions in their
+minds that he was other  than he pretended to be, a Syrian captive.
+That he is brave goes without saying, though perhaps no braver  than
+the majority of his companions.  The extraordinary thing about him
+is that although, as he himself  says, little more than a boy, he
+has the coolness to plan, and the head to carry out, schemes that
+would do  credit to the most experienced captain. He is already a
+credit to the Order, and, should he live, will  assuredly rise to
+the highest offices in it, and may even die its grand master. In the
+stormy times that are  coming on, there will be ample opportunities
+for him still further to distinguish himself, and to fulfil the
+singular promise of his youth. That he possesses great tact, as
+well as other qualities, is shown by the  enthusiasm with which
+his companions regard him. In no case, among those to whom I have
+spoken, have I  discerned the smallest jealousy of him. The tact
+that is needed to stand thus among fifty young knights,  almost all
+his seniors in age, will assuredly enable him later on to command
+the confidence and affection of  older men."
+
+When the other guests had left, and Caretto only remained, the
+countess turned to Claudia. "You went too  far, Claudia. I was
+willing enough, when you asked me, that you should bestow a favour
+upon him. Most  young knights wear such a favour, which may be
+a sign of devotion, but which far more frequently is a  piece of
+gallantry. In the case of a knight hospitaller it can only be the
+latter; it is in his case merely a sign  that he has so distinguished
+himself that some maiden feels a pride that her gift should be
+carried into battle  by him, and, on his part, that he too is proud
+of the gift so bestowed by one whose goodwill he prizes. In  that
+way I was willing that you should grant him your favour.  But the
+manner in which you gave it was far  more serious than the occasion
+warranted, and your promise to grant no similar favour to another
+as long as  he lived, surprised, and, I may almost say, shocked me.
+You are, according to our custom here, considered  almost a woman,
+and had not Sir Gervaise belonged to a religious Order, and were he
+of a presuming  disposition, he might well have gathered a meaning
+from your words far beyond what you intended, and  have even
+entertained a presumptuous hope that you were not indifferent to
+his merits. In the present case,  of course, no harm is done; still,
+methinks that it would be far better had the words been unspoken.
+Your  cousin here will, I am sure, agree with me."
+
+Caretto did not speak, but stood playing with his moustache, waiting
+for Claudia's reply. The girl had stood  with downcast eyes while
+her mother was speaking.
+
+"I only expressed what I felt, mother," she said, after a pause, "and
+I do not think that Sir Gervaise Tresham  is likely to misunderstand
+me. It seems to me that never among those whom I have met have I
+seen one so  worthy. No praises can be higher than those with which
+my cousin has spoken of him. He has rescued him,  whom we dearly
+love, from slavery; he has saved Genoa from great disaster, and
+many towns and villages  from plunder and ruin. I do indeed feel
+proud that such a knight should wear my gage, and, were there no
+other reason, I should be unwilling that, so long as he carried
+it, another should possess a similar one from  me. I am sure that
+Sir Gervaise will have felt that this was the meaning of my words;
+I wished him to see  that it was not a favour lightly given by a girl
+who might, a few weeks hence, bestow a similar one upon  another,
+but was a gage seriously given of the honour in which I held him."
+
+"Very well said, Claudia," Caretto broke in, before the countess
+could reply. "I warrant me the young  knight will not misunderstand
+your gift, and that he will prize it highly and carry it nobly.
+He is not one of  those who will boast of a favour and display it
+all times, and, except perhaps to his friend Sir Ralph  Harcourt,
+I will wager he never tells a soul who was its donor."
+
+When Claudia shortly afterwards left the room, he said to the
+countess, "Excuse me for breaking in,  Agatha, but I felt that it
+was much better to agree with her, and not to make overmuch of the
+matter; she is  just of an age to make some one a hero, and she
+could hardly have chosen a better subject for her worship.  In
+the first place, he is a knight of St. John; in the second, he is
+going away in a few days, perhaps  tomorrow, and may never cross
+her path again.  The thought of him will prevent her fancy from
+straying for  a time, and keep her heart whole until you decide on
+a suitor for her hand."
+
+"Nevertheless, I would rather that it had not been so.  Claudia
+is not given to change, and this may last long  enough to cause
+trouble when I bring forward the suitor you speak of."
+
+"Well, in any case it might be worse," Caretto said philosophically.
+And then, with a smile in answer to her  look of inquiry, "Knights
+of the Order have, ere now, obtained release from their vows."
+
+"Fabricius!" the countess exclaimed, in a shocked voice.
+
+"Yes, I know, Agatha, that the child is one of the richest heiresses
+in Italy, but for that very reason it needs  not that her husband
+should have wide possessions. In all other respects you could wish
+for no better. He  will assuredly be a famous knight; he is the
+sort of man to make her perfectly happy; and, lastly, you know  I
+cannot forget that I owe my liberation from slavery to him. At any
+rate, Agatha, as I said before, he may  never cross her path again,
+and you may, a year or two hence, find her perfectly amenable to
+your wishes."
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVII CAPTURED
+
+
+Upon the following day the doge requested Gervaise to accompany
+him to a meeting of the council.  Upon  entering the grand hall he
+found not only the members of the council assembled in their robes
+of office, but  a large gathering of the nobles and principal
+citizens of Genoa, together with the knights of the galley  whom,
+under Ralph Harcourt's orders, Gervaise found, to his surprise, drawn
+up in order across the Hall.  Here, in the name of the Republic,
+Battista Fragoso announced to him that, by the unanimous decision
+of  the council, he had been elected a noble of Genoa; an honour,
+he added, on only one or two previous  occasions in the history of
+the Republic bestowed upon any but of princely rank, but which he
+had nobly  earned by the great service he had rendered to the State.
+His name was then inscribed in the book  containing the names and
+titles of the nobles of Genoa.  Next, Battista Fragoso presented
+him with a superb  suit of Milanese armour, as his own personal
+gift, and then with a casket of very valuable jewels, as the gift
+of the city of Genoa.  Each presentation was accompanied by the
+plaudits of the assembly, and by the no  less warm acclamations
+of the knights. Ralph was then called forward, and presented with
+a suit of armour  but little inferior to that given to Gervaise, and
+each knight received a heavy gold chain of the finest  workmanship
+of Genoa.
+
+Two days later the preparations for departure were complete, and
+a sufficient number of men were engaged  to man the prizes. This
+charge, also, Genoa took upon itself, and put on board much stronger
+crews than  Gervaise deemed necessary for the navigation of the
+ships. The weather was fine and the wind favourable,  and a quick
+passage was made to Rhodes. When the harbour was in sight, the
+ships were ordered to proceed  in single file, the galley leading
+the way with a huge banner of the Order floating from her stern,
+and  smaller flags on staffs at each side. It was not until they
+passed by the two forts guarding the entrance that  the flags
+fluttering at the mastheads of the prizes afforded to those on
+shore an intimation of the event that  had taken place, and even
+then none supposed that this fleet of prizes had been taken by the
+one galley that  headed them.
+
+As the Santa Barbara slowly rowed up the harbour, the State barge
+of the grand master put off to meet it,  and D'Aubusson, with a
+party of knights, soon stepped on board.
+
+"Welcome back, Sir Gervaise! although I little expected to see
+you return so soon. What is the meaning of  this procession that
+follows you? By their rig and appearance they are Moors, but how
+they come to be thus  sailing in your wake is a mystery to us all."
+
+"They are Moors, your Excellency; they form part of an expedition
+fitted out by the corsairs of Algiers,  Tripoli, Tunis, and other
+piratical strongholds, for the purpose of destroying the commerce
+and ravaging the  coasts of Western Italy. Fortunately, we fell
+in with a ship that had been plundered by three of them on  their
+way north, and learned from the dying captain, who was the only
+one of her crew left with life on  board, the direction they were
+taking, and something of the nature of the expedition. We pursued
+the three  galleys, came up with them, had the good fortune to capture
+them, and then had the delight of finding  among their rowers the
+noble knights, Fabricius Caretto, Giacomo Da Vinci, and Pietro
+Forzi."
+
+The grand master, and the knights with him, uttered an exclamation
+of joy, and, as the three knights named  stepped forward, embraced
+them with the liveliest pleasure.
+
+"My dear Caretto," the grand master exclaimed, "it is almost a
+resurrection, for we have all long mourned  you as dead; and your
+return to us at the present time is indeed fortunate; for upon
+whose judgment and aid  could I better rely than those of my old
+comrade in arms?" Then, turning to Gervaise, he went on: "It was
+a  daring and brilliant exploit indeed, Sir Gervaise, and in due
+time honour shall be paid to you and your brave  companions, to
+whom and to you I now tender the thanks of the Order. But tell me
+the rest briefly, for I  would fain hear from these noble knights
+and old friends the story of what has befallen them."
+
+"My tale is a very brief one, your Highness. The Cavalier Caretto
+sailed at once in a swift craft from the  south of Sardinia, to
+carry warnings to the cities on the coast of Italy of the danger
+that threatened them,  and in order that some war galleys might be
+despatched by Genoa to meet the corsair fleet. During his  absence
+we discovered the little inlet in which the pirates lay hidden,
+waiting doubtless the arrival of the  three ships we had captured,
+to commence operations. On the return of the knight with the news
+that it  would be at least a fortnight before Genoa could fit out
+any galleys, and fearing that the pirates might at any  moment put
+to sea, we procured some small Sardinian craft, and fitted them
+as fire ships; with the captives  we had rescued, and some Sard
+fishermen, we manned the three prizes, distributing the knights
+between  them, and at night launched the fire ships against the
+corsairs, whose ships were crowded together. Eleven  of them were
+burnt; six we captured as they endeavoured to make their way out,
+and took possession of  four others whose crews had run them ashore
+and deserted them. None escaped."
+
+Exclamations of astonishment and almost of incredulity broke from
+the knights.
+
+"And is it possible, Sir Gervaise, that these thirteen vessels that
+follow you are all prizes captured by your  galley alone?"
+
+"It is, as I have the honour to tell your Highness. But their
+capture, except in the case of the first three, was  due almost
+solely to good fortune and to the position in which we found them,
+almost incapable of  defence."
+
+"What think you, knights and comrades?" the grand master said
+to his companions. "There were some of  you who deemed it rash to
+entrust a galley to so young a commander and so youthful a crew.
+What say you  now?  Never in the annals of the Order has such
+a sight been witnessed as that of thirteen prizes being  brought
+in by a single galley, to say naught of eleven others destroyed.
+Caretto, you and your comrades  must have had some share in this
+marvellous victory."
+
+"By no means," the Italian replied; "beyond having the honour
+of aiding to carry out the orders of Sir  Gervaise Tresham, the
+commander of the galley. The plan was wholly of his own devising,
+its execution  solely due to his arrangement of the details, and
+that without the slightest suggestion on the part of myself  or my
+comrades. I will presently narrate to you the whole story; it will
+come better from my lips than from  those of Sir Gervaise, whose
+disposition is to wholly underestimate the merit of the action he has
+performed. But I must also bear testimony, not only to the bravery
+displayed by Sir Gervaise, Sir Ralph  Harcourt, his lieutenant, and
+every one of the knights his crew, but to the admirable discipline,
+order, and  good fellowship on board the galley, which would have
+done credit to the most experienced commander  and to the most
+veteran knights of the Order."
+
+The grand master paused a moment, and then said in a loud voice,
+"Sir Gervaise Tresham, Sir Ralph  Harcourt, and knights of the
+seven langues of the Order -- As yet I can hardly appreciate the
+full extent of  the service that you have rendered. I thanked you
+but now for the capture of three corsairs; but what can I  say when
+I learn that you have destroyed or taken a whole fleet? I invite
+you all to a banquet that I shall  hold tonight, where the Cavalier
+Caretto will relate to us all the details of this marvellous
+exploit."
+
+Within a few minutes after the return of the grand master and his
+party ashore, the flags of the Order were  run up to the flagstaffs
+of every fort and bastion: the bells of the churches chimed out a
+triumphant peal,  and a salute was fired from the guns of the three
+water forts, while along the wall facing the port, the  townspeople
+waved numberless gay flags as a welcome to the galley. Most of the
+knights went ashore at  once, but Gervaise, under the excuse that
+he wished to see that everything was in order before landing,
+remained on board until it was time to go to the banquet, being sure
+that by that time the knights would  have fully told the story at
+their respective auberges, and that there would be no more questions
+to answer.  The banquet differed but little from that at Genoa,
+and Gervaise was heartily glad when it was over.
+
+The next day the grand master sent for him.
+
+"If I judge rightly, Sir Gervaise, the thing that will best please
+you at present, is an order to put to sea again  at once, to conclude
+the usual period of service of the galley."
+
+"It is indeed," Gervaise replied earnestly. "But I should be glad,
+sir, if you will allow that the time should  begin to count afresh
+from our present start. We have really had but a short period of
+service, for we wasted  a week at Genoa, and ten days on our journey
+back here, so that we have had really no more than a month's  active
+service."
+
+"Yes, if you count only by time," D'Aubusson said, with a smile.
+"Reckoning by results, you have done a  good five years' cruise.
+However, so small a request can certainly be granted. The places of
+the two knights  who were killed, and of four others whose wounds
+are reported to me as being too severe for them to be fit  for
+service for some time, shall be filled up at once from the langues
+to which each belonged. You will  cruise among the Western islands,
+whence complaints have reached us of a corsair who has been  plundering
+and burning. Sometimes he is heard of as far north as Negropont,
+at others he is off the south of  the Morea; then, again, we hear
+of him among the Cyclades.  We have been unwilling to despatch
+another  galley, for there is ample employment for every one here.
+After the blow you have struck on the Moorish  corsairs, they are
+likely to be quiet for a little. You had best, therefore, try for
+a time if you cannot come  across this pirate. You must let me know
+how much you paid for the vessels you used as fire ships, and to
+the Sards; this is an expense chargeable to the general service.
+I may tell you that to me it is due that no  recognition of your
+exploits, such as that which Genoa bestowed upon you, will be made.
+At the council  this morning it was urged that some signal mark
+of honour should be granted; but I interposed, saying that  you
+had already received exceptional promotion, and that it would not
+be for your good, or that of the  Order, for so young a knight to
+be raised to an official position of a character usually held by
+seniors, and  that I was perfectly sure you would prefer remaining
+in command of your galley to any promotion whatever  that would
+retain you on the Island."
+
+"Indeed I should, your Highness. I wish to gain experience and to
+do service to the Order, and so far from  pleasing me, promotion
+would trouble and distress me, and, could it have been done, I
+would most gladly  have sent home the prizes, instead of going to
+Genoa, and would myself have continued the cruise."
+
+"So the Cavalier Caretto told me," the grand master replied. "Very
+well, then. In three days you shall set out  again. The admiral
+tells me that never before has a galley returned with the slaves
+in such good health and  condition, and that unquestionably your
+plan of erecting an awning to shelter them from the midday heat  and
+the night dews has had a most beneficial effect on their health;
+he has recommended its general  adoption."
+
+Three days later the Santa Barbara again left port, and was soon
+upon her station. For some weeks she  cruised backwards and forwards
+along the coast and among the islands. They often heard of the
+pirate ship,  but all their efforts to find her were unavailing.
+
+One evening there were signs of a change of weather, and by morning
+it was blowing a furious gale from  the north; in spite of the
+efforts of the rowers, the galley narrowly escaped being driven
+ashore; but she at  last gained the shelter of an island, and anchored
+under its lee, the slaves being utterly worn out by  continuous
+exertion. As soon as the gale abated they again put to sea, and,
+after proceeding for some miles,  saw a ship cast up on shore.
+Some people could be made out on board of her, and a white flag
+was raised.
+
+"She must have been driven ashore during the gale," Gervaise said.
+"We will row in to within a quarter of a  mile of her and see what
+we can do for them."
+
+As soon as the anchor was dropped a boat was lowered.
+
+"I will go myself, Ralph, for I shall be glad to set my foot on
+shore again. There must be people on the  island; I wonder none
+of them have come to the aid of those poor fellows. I suppose the
+villages are on the  other side of the island, and they have not
+yet heard of the wreck."
+
+Gervaise asked three of the knights to accompany him, and the boat,
+rowed by galley slaves, was soon on  its way.  All were glad at
+the change afforded to the monotony of their life on board, and at
+the prospect of  a scamper on shore.
+
+There were but five or six men to be seen on the deck of the wreck,
+and these had, as the boat approached,  come down to the rocks as
+if to meet those who came to their aid; but as the knights leapt
+out, they threw  themselves suddenly upon them with knives and
+scimitars that had hitherto been concealed beneath their  garments,
+while at the same moment a crowd of men appeared on the deck of
+the ship, and, leaping down,  ran forward with drawn swords.  Two
+of the knights fell dead before they had time to draw their weapons.
+The third shook off his two assailants, and for a minute kept them
+both at bay; but others, rushing up, cut  him down.
+
+Gervaise had received a slight wound before he realised what was
+happening. He snatched his dagger from  its sheath, and struck down
+one assailant; but ere he could raise it to strike again, another
+leapt on to his  back, and clung there until the rest rushed up,
+when he shouted, "Take him alive! take him alive!" and,  throwing
+down their weapons, half a dozen of the pirates flung themselves
+upon Gervaise, and strove to  pull him to the ground, until at last,
+in spite of his desperate resistance, they succeeded in doing so.
+His  armour was hastily stripped off, his hands and feet bound,
+and then at the orders of the pirate who had leapt  on his back,
+and who was evidently the captain, half a dozen men lifted him
+on to their shoulders. As they  did so four guns from the galley
+flashed out, and the balls flew overhead. The pirates, who had
+already  begun to quarrel over the armour and arms of the fallen
+knights, at once took to their heels, followed by the  galley slaves
+from the boat.
+
+"Make haste," the captain said to the men carrying Gervaise.
+
+"They are lowering their boats; we must be under way before they
+come up."
+
+In a minute or two Gervaise was set down on his feet, the cords
+round his legs were cut, and he was made  to hurry along with his
+captors. In a short time an inlet was reached, and here Gervaise
+saw, to his  mortification, the pirate craft for which the Santa
+Barbara had in vain been searching. As soon as the party  were
+all on board, the ropes by which she was moored to two trees were
+thrown off; the great sails hoisted,  and she sailed boldly out.
+Although the gale had entirely abated, there was still a brisk wind
+blowing, and it  was evident to the captain of the corsair that
+under such circumstances he could outsail the galley that had  long
+been searching for him; when, therefore, the Santa Barbara came in
+sight, just as he and his crew had  finished stripping the wreck
+of its contents, the idea had occurred to him to attempt to entice
+some of the  knights to land.
+
+As soon as the vessel was under way he abused his followers hotly
+for not having obeyed his orders to  capture the knights without
+bloodshed; but they pleaded that it was as much as they had been
+able to do to  capture Gervaise in that way, and that they could
+never have overcome the four together, before the boats  would have
+had time to come from the ship.
+
+Gervaise had been told to sit down with his back to a mast and
+in this position he could, when the vessel  heeled over to the
+breeze, obtain a view of the sea. It was with a feeling of bitter
+mortification and rage that  he saw the galley lying but half a
+mile away, as the corsair issued from the inlet. A moment later he
+heard a  gun fired, and saw the signal hoisted to recall the boats.
+
+"If the wind had been favourable," the captain said to his mate,
+"we would have borne down upon her, and  could have reached and
+captured her before the boats got back, for you may be sure that
+they have landed  almost all their men. However, we can't get there
+against the wind, and we will now say goodbye to them."
+
+Gervaise knew well that at the pace they were running through the
+water the galley would have no chance  whatever of overtaking her,
+and that, ere the knights came on board again, she would be already
+two or  three miles away. A point of land soon concealed the galley
+from view, and when he caught sight of her, as  she rounded the
+point, she was but a speck in the distance.
+
+They passed several islands in the course of the day, changing
+their direction to a right angle to that which  they had at first
+pursued, as soon as they were hidden from the sight of the galley by
+an intervening island.  As night came on they anchored in a little
+bay on the coast of the Morea.  The sails being furled, the sailors
+made a division of the booty they had captured on the island, and
+of the portable property found on board  the wreck. A gourd full of
+water was placed to Gervaise's lips by one of the men of a kinder
+disposition  than the rest. He drank it thankfully, for he was
+parched with thirst excited by the pain caused by the  tightness
+with which he had been bound.
+
+He slept where he sat. All night four men remained on guard, although
+from what he heard they had no fear  whatever of being overtaken.
+In the morning his arms were unbound, and they stripped off his
+tunic and  shirt. They had evidently respect for his strength, for
+before loosing his arms they tightly fastened his  ankles together.
+The removal of his shirt exposed Claudia's gift to view.
+
+"Take that from him and give it to me," the captain said. As the
+two men approached, Gervaise seized one  in each hand, dashed them
+against each other, and hurled them on the deck. But the exertion
+upset his  equilibrium, and after making a vain effort to recover
+it, he fell heavily across them. The captain stooped  over him,
+and, before he could recover himself, snatched the chain from his
+neck.
+
+"You are a stout fellow," he said, laughing, "and will make a fine
+slave. What have you got here that you  are ready to risk your life
+for?" He looked at the little chain and its pendant with an air of
+disappointment.  "'Tis worth but little," he said, showing it to
+his mate. "I would not give five ducats for it in the market. It
+must be a charm, or a knight would never carry it about with him and
+prize it so highly. It may be to things  like this the Christians
+owe their luck."
+
+"It has not brought him luck this time," the mate observed with a
+laugh.
+
+"Even a charm cannot always bring good luck, but at any rate I will
+try it; " and he put it round his neck just  as Gervaise had worn
+it. The latter was now unbound, and permitted to move about the
+deck. The strength  he had shown in the struggle on shore, and
+the manner in which he had hurled, bound as he was, two of  their
+comrades to the deck, had won for him the respect of his captors,
+and he was therefore allowed  privileges not granted to the seamen
+of the vessel that had had the ill fortune to be cast on shore so
+close to  the spot where the corsair was hiding.  These had been
+seized, driven to the ship, and having been stripped  of the greater
+portion of their clothes, shut down in the hold.
+
+Although angry that but one out of the four who landed had been
+captured, the captain was in a good  humour at having tricked his
+redoubtable foes, and was disposed to treat Gervaise with more
+consideration  than was generally given to captives. The latter
+had not spoken a word of Turkish from the time he was  captured,
+and had shaken his head when first addressed in that language. No
+suspicion was therefore  entertained that he had any knowledge of
+it, and the Turks conversed freely before him.
+
+"Where think you we had better sell him?" the mate asked the captain,
+when Gervaise was leaning against  the bulwark watching the land,
+a short quarter of a mile away.  "He ought to fetch a good ransom."
+
+"Ay, but who would get it? You know how it was with one that Ibrahim
+took two years ago. First there  were months of delay, then, when
+the ransom was settled, the pasha took four-fifths of it for himself,
+and  Ibrahim got far less than he would have done had he sold him
+as a slave. The pashas here, and the sultans  of the Moors, are all
+alike; if they once meddle in an affair they take all the profit,
+and think they do well by  giving you a tithe of it. There are
+plenty of wealthy Moors who are ready to pay well for a Christian
+slave,  especially when he is a good looking young fellow such
+as this. He will fetch as much as all those eight  sailors below.
+They are only worth their labour, while this youngster will command
+a fancy price. I know a  dozen rich Moors in Tripoli or Tunis who
+would be glad to have him; and we agreed that we would run  down to
+the African coast for awhile, for that galley has been altogether
+too busy of late for our comfort,  and will be all the more active
+after this little affair; besides, people in these islands have
+got so scared that  one can't get within ten miles of any of them
+now without seeing their signal smokes rising on the hills, and
+finding, when they land, the villages deserted and stripped of
+everything worth carrying away."
+
+This news was a disappointment to Gervaise. He had calculated that
+he would be sold at one of the Levant  ports, and had thought that
+with his knowledge of Turkish he should have no great difficulty
+in escaping  from any master into whose hands he might fall, and
+taking his chance of either seizing a fishing boat, or of  making
+his way in a trading ship to some district where the population was
+a mixed one, and where trade  was winked at between the merchants
+there, and those at some of the Greek towns. To escape from Tunis
+or Tripoli would be far more difficult; there, too, he would be
+beyond the reach of the good offices of  Suleiman Ali, who would,
+he was sure, have done all in his power to bring about his release.
+Of one thing  he was determined: he would not return to Rhodes
+without making every possible effort to recover  Claudia's gage, as
+he considered it absolutely incumbent on him as a knight to guard,
+as something sacred,  a gift so bestowed. The fancy of the corsair
+to retain the jewel as a charm he regarded as a piece of the
+greatest good fortune. Had it been thrown among the common spoil,
+he would never have known to which  of the crew it had fallen at
+the division, still less have traced what became of it afterwards;
+whereas now,  for some time, at any rate, it was likely to remain
+in the captain's possession.
+
+Had it not been for that, he would have attempted to escape at
+the first opportunity, and such an opportunity  could not fail to
+present itself ere long, for he had but to manage to possess himself
+of Moslem garments to  be able to move about unquestioned in any
+Turkish town. When it became dark he was shut up in the hold,  which
+was, he found, crowded with captives, as, in addition to the crew
+of the wreck, between forty and  fifty Greeks, for the most part boys
+and young girls, had been carried off from the villages plundered.
+It  was pitch dark below, although the scuttle had been left open
+in order to allow a certain amount of air to  reach the captives;
+Gervaise, therefore, felt his way about cautiously, and lay down as
+soon as he found a  clear space.  Save an occasional moan or curse,
+and the panting of those suffering from the heat and  closeness of
+the crowded hold, all was still. The majority of the captives had
+been some time in their  floating prison, and their first poignant
+grief had settled down into a dull and despairing acceptance of
+their  fate; the sailors, newly captured, had for hours raved and
+cursed, but, worn out by their struggle with the  elements, and
+their rage and grief, they had now fallen asleep.
+
+It was long before Gervaise dozed off. He was furious with himself
+for having fallen into the trap; if he  had, as he said to himself,
+lain off the beach in the boat, and questioned the supposed
+shipwrecked sailors,  their inability to reply to him would have
+at once put him on his guard; as it was, he had walked into the
+snare as carelessly and confidently as a child might have done.
+Even more than his own captivity, he  regretted the death of his
+three comrades, which he attributed to his own want of care.  The
+next morning  he was again allowed on deck. The vessel was under
+way, and her head was pointing south. To his surprise  some of the
+crew gave him a friendly greeting; he was unable to understand a
+manner so at variance with  their hatred to the Christians, until
+one of them said to him in a mixture of Greek and Italian, "We have
+heard from our countrymen who were in the boat with you, that they
+received much kindness at your hands,  and that of all the Christians
+they had served under, you were the kindest master. Therefore,
+it is but right  now Allah has decreed that you in turn should be
+a slave to the true believers, that you should receive the  same
+mercy you gave to Moslems when they were in your power."
+
+The captain came up as the man was speaking. He talked for a time
+to the sailor, who then turned again to  Gervaise. "The captain
+says that he is told you were the commander of that galley; he has
+questioned the  eight men separately, and they all tell the same
+story: and yet he cannot understand how so young a man  should
+command a galley manned by warriors famous for their deeds of arms,
+even among us who are their  foes."
+
+"This galley was an exception," Gervaise replied; "the knights on
+board were all young, as they could be  better spared than those
+more experienced, at a time when your sultan is known to be preparing
+for an  attack on Rhodes."
+
+The captain was silent for a minute when this was interpreted to
+him; he had at the time noticed and  wondered at the youth of the
+four knights, and the explanation seemed to him a reasonable one.
+
+"I wish I had known it," he said after a pause; "for had I done
+so, I would have fought and captured her  yesterday; I have half
+a mind to go back and seek her now."
+
+He called up one of the ex slaves who was a native of Tripoli, and
+who had now taken his place as a  member of the crew, and asked
+him a number of questions. Gervaise felt uncomfortable while the
+man was  answering.  Fortunately, his rowers had agreed to say
+nothing whatever of the destruction of the corsair  fleet, of which
+no word had as yet reached the pirates, deeming that, in their
+anger at the news, the pirates  might turn upon them for the part
+that they had, however involuntarily, borne in it.
+
+As soon as he perceived that the captain entertained the idea of
+returning to engage the galley, the man felt  that if he were to
+avoid a return into captivity he must deter him from taking such a
+step. He therefore, in  answer to his questions as to the strength
+of the crew of the galley and the fighting powers of the knights,
+reported the capture of the three vessels. The captain listened
+almost incredulously to his statement, and,  calling up another
+two of the men, questioned them also as to the occurrence. Having
+heard them, he turned  away and paced the deck, in evident anger;
+however, he gave no instructions for a change of course, and, to
+the great satisfaction of the eight rescued slaves, the vessel
+continued her course southward.
+
+As they neared the African coast, Gervaise kept an eager lookout, in
+hopes that Visconti's galley might  appear in sight. The captain's
+temper had not recovered from the effect of the news of the capture
+of three  Moorish vessels by the galley commanded by Gervaise,
+and the latter, seeing the mood he was in, kept  forward so as to
+avoid coming in contact with him. He had early taken the opportunity
+of saying to one of  the released galley slaves, "I pray you, if you
+have any feeling of kindness towards me for the efforts I  made to
+alleviate your condition, say no word of my knowledge of Turkish,
+and ask the others also to  remain silent on this point."
+
+The man had nodded, and the request was observed by them all.
+
+The captain's irritation showed itself in his treatment of the other
+captives. These were brought up every  day from the hold, and kept
+on deck until dark, as the price they would fetch in the slave market
+in Tripoli  would depend greatly upon their health and appearance;
+but when the captain came near them he several  times struck them
+brutally, if they happened to be in his way. Gervaise had the
+greatest difficulty in  restraining his indignation, and, indeed,
+only did so because he felt that his interference would but make
+things worse for them. When at last the ship cast anchor off Tripoli,
+the captain ordered the boats to be  lowered. As he walked towards
+the gangway, he happened to push against one of the captives, a
+Greek girl  of some ten years of age. With an angry exclamation he
+struck her to the deck. Gervaise sprang forward.
+
+"You brute!" he exclaimed in English. "I have a good mind to throw
+you overboard, and will do so the next  time you strike one of
+these children without cause."
+
+Infuriated by Gervaise's interference and threatening attitude, the
+corsair drew his long knife; but before he  could strike, Gervaise
+caught his wrist; the knife fell from his hand, and Gervaise kicked
+it through the  open gangway into the sea. The captain shouted to
+his men to seize the Christian, but the young knight's  blood was
+up now. The first man who came at him he seized by the sash round
+his waist, and threw  overboard; the two next he stretched on the
+deck with blows from his clenched fist. Some of the others now
+drew their weapons, but the captain shouted to them to sheath them.
+
+"Fools!" he yelled. "Is it not enough that your cowardice has
+already cost us the lives of three knights,  whose capture would
+have brought us a big sum? Throw him down and bind him. What! are
+fifty of you  afraid of one unarmed man? No wonder these Christians
+capture our ships, if this is the mettle of our  crews!"
+
+Goaded by his words, the men made a general rush upon Gervaise,
+and, in spite of his desperate efforts,  threw him on to the deck
+and bound him; then the captain, seizing a heavy stick in his left
+hand, his right  being still powerless, showered blows upon him
+until Gervaise almost lost consciousness. "Throw some  water over
+the dog," the corsair said, as he threw down the stick, panting
+with his exertions; and then,  without waiting to see if his order
+was obeyed, he took his place in the boat, and was rowed ashore.
+
+As soon as he had left, three or four of the ex galley slaves
+carried Gervaise into the shade of the sail. The  sailors, several
+of whom bore signs of the late struggle, looked on sullenly, but
+offered no opposition when  the men took off the ropes and raised
+him into a sitting posture against the mast. He had not entirely
+lost  consciousness, and was now fast recovering himself.
+
+"Is there anything we can do for you?" one of the men asked in
+Italian.
+
+"No I shall soon be all right again, although I am bruised all
+over, and shall be stiff for a day or two. You  had best leave me
+now, or you will incur the enmity of these fellows."
+
+Gervaise was indeed bruised from his neck to his heels.  Even in
+his passion the pirate had avoided striking  him on the head, as
+a disfiguring mark on the face would diminish his value. Sitting
+there, he congratulated  himself that he had been beaten with a stick
+and not with a whip; a stick is a weapon, and he did not feel the
+same sense of dishonour that he would have experienced had he been
+beaten with a whip. That such might  be his lot in slavery he
+recognised.  The backs of Caretto and his two companions were seamed
+with the  marks inflicted by the gang master's whip, and he could
+scarce hope to escape the same treatment; but at  present he hardly
+felt a slave. There was another reflection that to some extent
+mitigated the pain of his  bruises; the pirate captain held his
+treasured gage, and it was his fixed determination to recover it.
+The man  had at first in a rough way treated him fairly, and had
+allowed him more liberty than the other captives, and  he would
+have felt reluctant to take extreme measure against him to recover
+the gage. Now he was not only  free from any sense of obligation,
+but had a heavy score to settle with him.
+
+After a time he got up and walked stiffly and painfully up and
+down the deck, knowing that this was the  best plan to prevent the
+limbs from stiffening. The corsair did not return until night set
+in; he was  accompanied by an Arab, whose dress and appearance
+showed that he was a person of importance. The  other slaves had
+all been sent below, but Gervaise still remained on deck, as the
+mate had not cared to risk  another conflict by giving him orders
+in the absence of the captain. As the pirate stepped on deck he
+ordered some torches to be brought.
+
+"This is the Christian I spoke of," he said to the Arab, pointing
+to Gervaise, who was leaning carelessly  against the bulwark.
+
+"He is, as you see, capable of hard work of any kind; his strength
+is prodigious, for it took ten of my best  men to bind him this
+morning."
+
+"Why did you wish to bind him?" the Arab asked coldly; "you told me
+that although so strong he was of a  quiet disposition, and would
+make a good household slave."
+
+"I struck a slave girl who stood in my way," the captain said,
+"and he came at me so suddenly that I had to  call upon the men to
+bind him. He threw one of them overboard, and with his naked hands
+knocked down  two others; and, as I have told you, it took all the
+efforts of eight or ten more before they could overcome  him."
+
+The Arab took a torch from one of the sailors, walked across to
+Gervaise, who was naked from the waist  upwards, his upper garments
+having been torn into shreds in the struggle, and examined him
+closely.
+
+"And then you beat him," he said, turning to the captain.
+
+"Certainly I beat him. Do you think that a slave is to mutiny on
+board my ship, and escape unpunished?"
+
+The Arab, without replying, again inspected Gervaise.
+
+"You ask a large sum for him," he said.
+
+"I should ask twice as much," the captain replied, "if it were
+not for the regulation that one slave from each  cargo brought in
+belongs to the sultan, and his officers would as a matter of course
+choose this fellow, for  the others are merely such as are sold
+in the market every day. This man is one of the accursed Order of
+Rhodes, and would fetch a ransom many times greater than the sum
+I ask for him, only I have not the time  to wait for months until
+the affair could be arranged."
+
+"And, moreover, Hassan," the Arab said grimly, "it has doubtless
+not escaped you that as the Sultan of  Turkey is fitting out an
+expedition to destroy the community of Rhodes, the chance of their
+ransoming their  comrade is a very slight one."
+
+"Threatened men live long," the captain said. "The sultan has been
+talking of attacking them for years, and  something has always
+happened to prevent his carrying out his intention. It may be the
+same again."
+
+"I will take him," the Arab said shortly. "Here is a purse with the
+sum you named; count it, and see that it is  right." As he stood
+apart while the pirate counted out the money, the eight released
+slaves came up in a  body, and one of them, bowing low before the
+merchant, said,
+
+"My lord, we have long been slaves of the Christian knights
+at Rhodes, and have worked in their galleys.  We were rescued the
+other day when this knight was taken prisoner. Our life has been
+a hard one. We have  borne toil, and hardship, and blows, the heat
+of the sun by day, and the damp by night, but we would  humbly
+represent to you that since we were placed in the galley commanded
+by this knight our lot has been  made bearable by his humanity and
+kindness. He erected an awning to shade us from the sun's rays,
+and to  shelter us from the night dews. He provided good food for
+us. He saw that we were not worked beyond our  strength, and he
+forbade us being struck, unless for good cause. Therefore, my lord,
+now that misfortune  has fallen upon him, we venture to represent
+to you the kindness with which he has treated us, in the hope  that
+it may please you to show him such mercy as he showed to us."
+
+"You have done well," the Arab said, "and your words shall not be
+forgotten. When you land tomorrow,  inquire for the house of Isaac
+Ben Ibyn. You are doubtless penniless, and I may be able to obtain
+employment for those of you who may stop at Tripoli, and to assist
+those who desire to take passage to  their homes elsewhere. We are
+commanded to be grateful to those who befriend us, and as you have
+shown  yourselves to be so, it is right that I, an humble servant
+of the Great One, should in His name reward you."
+
+Motioning to Gervaise to follow him, the Arab stepped into his
+boat. Gervaise turned to the men, and said  in Italian, "Thanks,
+my friends, you have well discharged any debt that you may think
+you owe me. Will  you tell that villain" -- and he pointed to the
+captain threateningly -- "I warn him that some day I will kill  him
+like a dog!" Then, turning, he stepped into the bow of the boat,
+and the two men who rowed it at once  pushed off.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVIII A KIND MASTER
+
+
+When the boat reached the shore the Arab handed a long bernouse to
+Gervaise, signed to him to pull the  hood well over his head, and
+then led the way through the streets until he stopped at a large
+house, standing  in a quiet quarter of the town. He struck on the
+door with his hand, and it was at once opened by a black  slave.
+
+"Call Muley," the Arab said.
+
+The slave hurried away, and returned in a minute with a man somewhat
+past middle age, and dressed in a  style that indicated that he
+was a trusted servant.
+
+"Muley," his master said, "I have bought this Christian who has
+been brought in by Hassan the corsair. He  is one of the knights
+who are the terrors of our coasts, but is, from what I hear, of a
+kind and humane  disposition. I am told that he was a commander of
+one of their galleys, and though I should not have  believed it
+had I only Hassan's word, I have heard from others that it was so.
+My wife has long desired to  have a Christian slave, and as Allah
+has blessed my efforts it was but right that I should gratify her,
+though  in truth I do not know what work I shall set him to do
+at present. Let him first have a bath, and see that he is  clad
+decently, then let him have a good meal. I doubt if he has had one
+since he was captured. He has been  sorely beaten by the corsair,
+and from no fault of his own, but only because he opposed the man's
+brutality  to a child slave.  If any of his wounds need ointment,
+see that he has it. When all is ready, bring him to the  door
+of my apartments, in order that I may show to my wife that I have
+gratified her whim."
+
+Then he motioned to Gervaise to follow Muley, who was the head
+of his household. Gervaise resisted the  impulse to thank his new
+master, and followed in silence.
+
+He was first taken to a bathroom, furnished with an abundance of
+hot and cold water. Muley uttered an  exclamation as, on Gervaise
+throwing off his bernouse, he saw that his flesh was a mass of
+bruises. After  filling the bath with hot water, he motioned to
+Gervaise to get in, and lie there until he returned. It was  some
+time before he came back, bringing a pot of ointment and some
+bandages. It was only on the body  that the wounds needed dressing,
+for here the blows had fallen on the naked skin. When he had dressed
+them, Muley went out and returned with some Turkish garments,
+consisting of a pair of baggy trousers of  yellow cotton, a white
+shirt of the same material, and a sleeveless jacket of blue cloth
+embroidered with  yellow trimming; a pair of yellow slippers completed
+the costume.  Muley now took him into another room,  where he set
+before him a dish of rice with a meat gravy, a large piece of bread,
+and a wooden spoon.
+
+Gervaise ate the food with a deep feeling of thankfulness for the
+fate that had thrown him into such good  hands. Then, after taking
+a long draught of water, he rose to his feet and followed Muley into
+the entrance  hall.  The latter stopped at a door on the opposite
+side, knocked at it, and then motioned to Gervaise to take  off
+his slippers.  The door was opened by the Arab himself.
+
+"Enter," he said courteously, and led Gervaise into an apartment
+where a lady and two girls were sitting on  a divan.  They were
+slightly veiled; but, as Gervaise afterwards learnt, Ben Ibyn was
+not a Moor, but a  Berber, a people who do not keep their women
+in close confinement as do the Moors, but allow them to go  abroad
+freely without being entirely muffled up.
+
+"Khadja," the merchant said, "this is the Christian slave I purchased
+today. You have for a long time  desired one, but not until now
+have I found one who would, I thought, satisfy your expectations.
+What  think you of him?"
+
+"He is a noble looking youth truly, Isaac, with his fair, wavy hair,
+his grey eyes, and white skin; truly, all  my neighbours will envy
+me such a possession. I have often seen Christian slaves before, but
+they have  always been broken down and dejected looking creatures;
+this one bears himself like a warrior rather than a  slave."
+
+"He is a warrior; he is one of those terrible knights of Rhodes
+whose very name is a terror to the Turks, and  whose galleys are
+feared even by our boldest corsairs. He must be of approved valour,
+for he was  commander of one of these galleys."
+
+The girls looked with amazement at Gervaise. They had often heard
+tales of the capture of ships that had  sailed from Tripoli, by
+the galleys of the Christian knights, and had pictured those fierce
+warriors as of  almost supernatural strength and valour. That this
+youth, whose upper lip was but shaded with a slight  moustache,
+should be one of them, struck them as being almost incredible.
+
+"He does not look ferocious, father," one of them said.  "He looks
+pleasant and good tempered, as if he  could injure no one."
+
+"And yet this morning, daughter, he braved, unarmed, the anger
+of Hassan the corsair, on the deck of his  own ship; and when the
+pirate called upon his men to seize him he threw one overboard,
+struck two more  on to the deck, and it needed eight men to overpower
+him."
+
+"I hope he won't get angry with us!" the younger girl exclaimed.
+Gervaise could not suppress a laugh, and  then, turning to
+the merchant, said in Turkish, "I must ask your pardon for having
+concealed from you my  knowledge of your tongue. I kept the secret
+from all on board the corsair, and meant to have done the same
+here, deeming that if none knew that I spoke the language it would
+greatly aid me should I ever see an  opportunity of making my
+escape; but, Ben Ibyn, you have behaved so kindly to me that I feel
+it would not  be honourable to keep it a secret from you, and to
+allow you and the ladies to talk freely before me,  thinking that
+I was altogether ignorant of what you were saying."
+
+"You have acted well and honourably," Ben Ibyn said, putting a
+hand on his shoulder kindly. "We have  heard much of the character
+of the Order, and that though valiant in battle, your knights
+are courteous and  chivalrous, deeming a deceitful action to be
+unworthy of them, and binding themselves by their vows to  succour
+the distressed and to be pitiful to the weak. We have heard that
+our wounded are tended by them in  your hospitals with as much care
+as men of their own race and religion, and that in many things the
+knights  were to be admired even by those who were their foes. I
+see now that these reports were true, and that  although, as you
+say, it might be of advantage to you that none should know you
+speak Arabic, yet it is  from a spirit of honourable courtesy you
+have now told us that you do so.
+
+"I did not tell you, wife," he went on, turning to her, "that
+the reason why he bearded Hassan today was  because the corsair
+brutally struck a little female captive; thus, you see, he, at the
+risk of his life, and when  himself a captive, carried out his vows
+to protect the defenceless. And now, wife, there is one thing you
+must know. For some time, at any rate, you must abandon the idea
+of exciting the envy of your friends by  exhibiting your Christian
+captive to them.  As you are aware, the sultan has the choice of any
+one slave he  may select from each batch brought in, and assuredly
+he would choose this one, did it come to his ears, or  to the ears
+of one of his officers, that a Christian knight had been landed.
+For this reason Hassan sold him to  me for a less sum than he
+would otherwise have demanded, and we must for some time keep his
+presence  here a secret. My idea is that he shall remain indoors
+until we move next week into our country house,  where he will be
+comparatively free from observation."
+
+"Certainly, Isaac. I would not on any account that he should be
+handed over to the sultan, for he would  either be put into the
+galleys or have to labour in the streets."
+
+"I will tell Muley to order the other slaves to say nothing outside
+of the fresh arrival, so for the present there  is no fear of its
+being talked about in the town. Hassan will, for his own sake, keep
+silent on the matter. I  have not yet asked your name," he went
+on, turning to Gervaise.
+
+"My name is Gervaise Tresham; but it will be easier for you to call
+me by my first name only."
+
+"Then, Gervaise, it were well that you retired to rest at once,
+for I am sure that you sorely need it." He  touched a bell on the
+table, and told Muley, when he appeared, to conduct Gervaise to the
+place where he  was to sleep, which was, he had already ordered,
+apart from the quarters of the other slaves.
+
+"The young fellow is a mass of bruises," Ben Ibyn said to his
+wife, when the door closed behind Gervaise.  "Hassan beat him so
+savagely, after they had overpowered and bound him, that he well
+nigh killed him."
+
+An exclamation of indignation burst from the wife and daughters.
+
+"Muley has seen to his wounds," he went on, "and he will doubtless
+be cured in a few days. And now, wife,  that your wish is gratified,
+and I have purchased a Christian slave for you, may I ask what you
+are going to  do with him?"
+
+"I am sure I do not know," she said in a tone of perplexity. "I had
+thought of having him to hand round  coffee when my friends call,
+and perhaps to work in the garden, but I did not think that he
+would be  anything like this."
+
+"That is no reason why he should not do so," Ben Ibyn said. "These
+Christians, I hear, treat their women as  if they were superior
+beings, and feel it no dishonour to wait upon them; I think you
+cannot do better than  carry out your plan. It is certain there is
+no sort of work that he would prefer to it; therefore, let it be
+understood that he is to be your own personal attendant, and that
+when you have no occasion for his  services, he will work in the
+garden.  Only do not for the present let any of your friends see
+him; they  would spread the news like wildfire, and in a week every
+soul in the town would know that you had a good  looking Christian
+slave, and the sultan's officer would be sending for me to ask how
+I obtained him. We  must put a turban on him. Any one who caught a
+glimpse of that hair of his, however far distant, would  know that
+he was a Frank."
+
+"We might stain his face and hands with walnut juice," Khadja said,
+"he would pass as a Nubian. Some of  them are tall and strong."
+
+"A very good thought, wife; it would be an excellent disguise. So
+shall it be." He touched the bell again.  "Tell Muley I would speak
+with him. Muley," he went on, when the steward appeared, "have you
+said  aught to any of the servants touching the Christian?"
+
+"No, my lord; you gave me no instructions about it, and I thought
+it better to wait until the morning, when I  could ask you."
+
+"You did well. We have determined to stain his skin, and at present
+he will pass as a Nubian. This will  avoid all questions and talk."
+
+"But, my lord, they will wonder that he cannot speak their tongue."
+
+"He must pass among them as a mute; but indeed he speaks Arabic as
+well as we do, Muley."
+
+The man uttered an exclamation of surprise.
+
+"He had intended to conceal his knowledge," Ben Ibyn went on, "which
+would have been politic; but when  he found that my intentions
+were kind, he told us that he knew our tongue, and now revealed
+his  knowledge, as he thought it would be dishonourable to listen
+to our talk, leaving us under the impression  that he could not
+understand us."
+
+"Truly these Christians are strange men," Muley said.  "This
+youth, who has not yet grown the hair on his  face, is nevertheless
+commander of a war galley. He is ready to risk his life on behalf
+of a slave, and can  strike down men with his unarmed hand; he is
+as gentle in his manner as a woman; and now it seems he can  talk
+Arabic, and although it was in his power to keep this secret he
+tells it rather than overhear words that  are not meant for his
+ear. Truly they are strange people, the Franks. I will prepare some
+stain in the  morning, my lord, and complete his disguise before
+any of the others see him."
+
+The next morning Muley told Gervaise that his master thought that
+it would be safer and more convenient  for him to pass as a dumb
+Nubian slave. Gervaise thought the plan an excellent one; and he
+was soon  transformed, Muley shaving that part of the hair that
+would have shown below the turban, and then staining  him a deep
+brownish black, from the waist upwards, together with his feet and
+his legs up to his knee, and  darkening his eyebrows, eyelashes,
+and moustache.
+
+"Save that your lips lack the thickness, and your nose is straighter
+than those of Nubians, no one would  doubt but that you were one
+of that race; and this is of little consequence, as many of them
+are of mixed  blood, and, though retaining their dark colour, have
+features that in their outline resemble those of the  Arabs. Now I
+will take you to Ben Ibyn, so that he may judge whether any further
+change is required before  the servants and slaves see you."
+
+"That is excellent," the merchant said, when he had carefully
+inspected Gervaise, "I should pass you myself  without recognizing
+you. Now you can take him into the servants' quarters, Muley, and
+tell them that he is a  new slave whom I have purchased, and that
+henceforth it will be his duty to wait upon my wife, to whom I  have
+presented him as her special attendant, and that he will accompany
+her and my daughters when they  go abroad to make their purchases
+or visit their friends. Give some reason, if you can think of one,
+why you  have bestowed him in a chamber separate from the rest."
+
+Gervaise at once took up his new duties, and an hour later, carrying
+a basket, followed them into the town.  It was strange to him thus
+to be walking among the fanatical Moors, who, had they known the
+damage that  he had inflicted upon their galleys, would have torn
+him in pieces.  None gave him, however, more than a  passing look.
+Nubian slaves were no uncommon sight in the town, and in wealthy
+Moorish families were  commonly employed in places of trust, and
+especially as attendants in the harems. The ladies were now as
+closely veiled as the Moorish women, it being only in the house
+that they followed the Berber customs.   Gervaise had learnt from
+Muley that Ben Ibyn was one of the richest merchants in Tripoli,
+trading direct  with Egypt, Syria, and Constantinople, besides
+carrying on a large trade with the Berber tribes in the  interior.
+He returned to the house with his basket full of provisions,
+and having handed these over to the  cook, he went to the private
+apartments, as Khadja had requested him to do. Here she and
+her daughters  asked him innumerable questions as to his country
+and its customs, and then about Rhodes and the Order to  which he
+belonged. Their surprise was great when they heard that the knights
+were bound to celibacy.
+
+"But why should they not marry if they like?  Why should they not
+have wives, children, and homes like  other people?" Khadja asked.
+
+"It is that they may devote their whole lives to their work. Their
+home is the convent at Rhodes, or at one of  the commanderies
+scattered over Europe, where they take charge of the estates of
+the Order."
+
+"But why should they not marry then, Gervaise? At Rhodes there might
+be danger for women and children,  but when they return to Europe
+to take charge of the estates, surely they would do their duty no
+worse for  having wives?"
+
+Gervaise smiled.
+
+"I did not make the rules of the Order, lady, but I have thought
+myself that although, so long as they are  doing military work at
+the convent, it is well that they should not marry, yet there is
+no good reason why,  when established in commanderies at home, they
+should not, like other knights and nobles, marry if it so  pleases
+them."
+
+In the evening the merchant returned from his stores, which
+were situated down by the port. Soon after he  came in he sent
+for Gervaise. "There is a question I had intended to ask you last
+night," he said, "but it  escaped me. More than two months since
+there sailed from this port and others many vessels -- not the
+ships of the State, but corsairs. In all, more than twenty ships
+started, with the intention of making a great  raid upon the coast
+of Italy. No word has since been received of them, and their friends
+here are becoming  very uneasy, the more so as we hear that neither
+at Tunis nor Algiers has any news been received. Have  you heard at
+Rhodes of a Moorish fleet having been ravaging the coast of Italy?"
+
+"Have you any friends on board the ships that sailed from here, or
+any interest in the venture, Ben Ibyn?"
+
+The merchant shook his head. "We Berbers," he said, "are not like
+the Moors, and have but little to do with  the sea, save by the
+way of trade. For myself, I regret that these corsair ships are
+constantly putting out.  Were it not for them and their doings we
+might trade with the ports of France, of Spain, and Italy, and be
+on  good terms with all.  There is no reason why, because our faiths
+are different, we should be constantly  fighting. It is true that
+the Turks threaten Europe, and are even now preparing to capture
+Rhodes; but this is  no question of religion. The Turks are warlike
+and ambitious; they have conquered Syria, and war with  Egypt and
+Persia; but the Moorish states are small, they have no thought of
+conquest, and might live  peaceably with Europe were it not for
+the hatred excited against them by the corsairs."
+
+"In that case I can tell you the truth. Thirteen of those ships
+were taken into Rhodes as prizes; the other  eleven were burnt.
+Not one of the fleet escaped."
+
+Exclamations of surprise broke from Ben Ibyn, his wife, and daughters.
+
+"I am astonished, indeed," the merchant said. "It was reported
+here that the Genoese galleys were all laid  up, and it was thought
+that they would be able to sweep the seas without opposition, and
+to bring home vast  spoil and many captives, both from the ships
+they took and from many of the villages and small towns of  the
+coast. How came such a misfortune to happen to them? It will create
+consternation here when it is  known, for although it was not a
+state enterprise, the sultan himself and almost all the rich Moors
+embarked  money in the fitting out of the ships, and were to have
+shares in the spoil taken. How happened it that so  strong a fleet
+was all taken or destroyed, without even one vessel being able to
+get away to carry home the  news of the disaster?"
+
+"Fortune was against them," Gervaise said. "Three ships on their
+way up were captured by a galley of our  Order, and her commander
+having obtained news of the whereabouts of the spot where the
+corsairs were to  rendezvous, found them all lying together in a
+small inlet, and launched against them a number of fishing  boats
+fitted out as fire ships. The corsairs, packed closely together,
+were unable to avoid them, and, as I told  you, eleven of their
+ships were burnt, four were run ashore to avoid the flames, while
+six, trying to make  their way out, were captured by the galley,
+aided by the three prizes that were taken and which the knights
+had caused to be manned by Sards."
+
+"The ways of Allah the All Seeing are wonderful," the merchant said.
+"It was indeed a marvellous feat for  one galley thus to destroy
+a great fleet."
+
+"It was the result of good fortune rather than skill and valour,"
+Gervaise said.
+
+"Nay, nay; let praise be given where it is due. It was a marvellous
+feat; and although there is good or bad  fortune in every event,
+such a deed could not have been performed, and would not even have
+been thought  of, save by a great commander. Who was the knight
+who thus with one galley alone destroyed a strongly  manned fleet,
+from which great things had been looked for?"
+
+Gervaise hesitated. "It was a young knight," he said, "of but
+little standing in the Order, and whose name is  entirely unknown
+outside its ranks."
+
+"By this time it must be well known," Ben Ibyn said; "and it will
+soon be known throughout Christendom,  and will be dreaded by every
+Moor. What was it?"
+
+Gervaise again hesitated.
+
+"I would not have told you the story at all, Ben Ibyn, had I supposed
+you would have cared to inquire into  the matter. Of course, I will
+tell you the name if you insist upon it, but I would much rather
+you did not  ask."
+
+"But why?" the merchant asked, in surprise. "If I hear it not from
+you, I shall assuredly hear it ere long  from others, for it will
+be brought by traders who are in communication with Italy. I cannot
+understand why  you should thus hesitate about telling me the name
+of this commander.  When known it will doubtless be  cursed by
+thousands of Moorish wives and mothers; but we Berbers are another
+race. None of our friends  or kindred were on board the fleet; and
+we traders have rather reason to rejoice, for, in the first place,
+so  severe a lesson will keep the corsairs in their ports for a
+long time; and in the second, had the fleet  succeeded according
+to general expectation, so great a store of European goods would
+have been brought  home that the market would have been glutted,
+and the goods in our storehouses would have lost all their  value.
+What reason, then, can you possibly have in refusing to tell me
+the name of the commander who has  won for himself such credit and
+glory?"
+
+Gervaise saw that Ben Ibyn was seriously annoyed at what he deemed
+his unaccountable obstinacy.
+
+"I will tell you, Ben Ibyn, rather than excite your displeasure,
+though I would much have preferred not to  do so, for you speak
+so much more highly of the affair than it merits. I had myself the
+honour of being in  command of that galley."
+
+The ladies broke into exclamations of surprise, while the merchant
+regarded him with grave displeasure.
+
+"I had thought you truthful," he said; "but this passes all belief.
+Dost tell me that a beardless youth could  with one galley overcome
+a great fleet, commanded by the most noted captains on our coast?"
+
+"I thought that you would not believe me," Gervaise said quietly;
+"and, therefore, would have much  preferred to keep silence, knowing
+that I had no means of supporting my claim. That was not the only
+reason; the other was, that already a great deal too much has been
+said about an affair in which, as I have  told you, I owed everything
+to good fortune, and am heartily sick of receiving what I consider
+altogether  undue praise. Ah!" he exclaimed suddenly, "the thought has
+just occurred to me of a way by which you can  obtain confirmation
+of my story; and, as I value your good opinion and would not
+be regarded as a boaster  and a liar, I entreat you to take it. I
+heard you tell the eight men who were rowers in my boat when I was
+captured, to call upon you today, that you might do something for
+them."
+
+"They came this morning to my store," the merchant said. "They told
+me their wishes. I promised them that  I would make inquiry about
+ships sailing East; and they are to come to me again tomorrow."
+
+"Then, sir, I beseech you to suffer me to go down with you to your
+stores and meet them there. The galley  of which I was in command
+at the time I was captured is the same as that in which a few weeks
+before I  fought the corsairs, and these eight men were with me
+at that time. I begged them for my sake to maintain  an absolute
+silence as to that affair, and I have no doubt that they have done
+so, for in the fury the news  would excite, they might fall victims
+to the first outburst, though, of course, wholly innocent of any
+share  in the misfortune. Did you question them without my being
+present, they might still keep silent, fearing to  injure me.  But
+if, before you begin to do so, I tell them that they can speak
+the truth with reference to me,  they will, I am sure.  confirm my
+story, incredible as it may now appear to you."
+
+"That is a fair offer," the merchant said gravely, "and I accept
+it, for it may be that I have been too hasty,  and I trust it may
+prove so. I would rather find myself to be in fault than that the
+esteem with which you  have inspired me should prove to be misplaced.
+We will speak no further on the subject now. I have not yet  asked
+you how it is that you come to speak our language so well."
+
+Gervaise related how he had studied with Suleiman Ali, and had
+escorted him to Syria and received his  ransom.
+
+"I had hoped," he said, "that the corsair would have taken me
+to Syria, for there I could have communicated  with Suleiman, who
+would, I am sure, have given me such shelter and aid as he was
+able, in the event of  my making my escape from slavery and finding
+myself unable to leave by sea."
+
+The next day Gervaise went with Ben Ibyn to his stores.  The eight
+men arrived shortly afterwards, and the  merchant, in the presence
+of Gervaise, questioned them as to whether they knew anything of
+a misfortune  that was said to have befallen some ships that had
+sailed for the coast of Italy.  The men, surprised at the  question,
+glanced at Gervaise, who said, "Tell Ben Ibyn the truth; it will
+do neither you nor me any harm,  and will be mentioned by him to
+no one else."
+
+Accordingly the story was told. Ben Ibyn listened gravely.
+
+"It was the will of Allah," he said, when it was concluded.  "I
+have wronged you, Gervaise, but your tale  seemed too marvellous
+to be true.
+
+"Do not speak of this to others;" he went on to the eight men.
+"Now as to yourselves. For the four of you  who desire to return
+to Syria I have taken passage in a trader that sails tomorrow and
+will touch at Joppa  and Acre. Here is money to provide yourselves
+with garments and to carry you to your homes. For you," he  said
+to two who were natives of the town, "I can myself find employment
+here, and if your conduct is good,  you will have no reason to
+regret taking service with me. The two of you who desire to go to
+Smyrna I will  give passage there in a ship which will sail next
+week; in the meantime, here is money for your present  wants."
+
+Two days later the merchant's family moved to his house two miles
+outside the town, and here Gervaise  remained for six months. His
+life was not an unpleasant one; he was treated with great kindness
+by the  merchant and his wife, his duties were but slight, and he
+had no more labour to perform in the garden than  he cared to do.
+Nevertheless, he felt that he would rather have fallen into the
+hands of a less kind master,  for it seemed to him that it would
+be an act almost of treachery to escape from those who treated him
+as a  friend; moreover, at the country house he was not in a position
+to frame any plans for escape, had he  decided upon attempting it,
+nor could he have found out when Hassan made one of his occasional
+visits to  the port.
+
+One evening the merchant returned from the town accompanied by one
+of the sultan's officers and four  soldiers. Ben Ibyn was evidently
+much depressed and disturbed; he told Muley as he entered, to fetch
+Gervaise.  When the latter, in obedience to the order, came in from
+the garden, the officer said in Italian, "It  having come to the
+ears of the sultan my master that the merchant Ben Ibyn has ventured,
+contrary to the  law, to purchase a Christian slave brought secretly
+into the town, he has declared the slave to be forfeited  and I am
+commanded to take him at once to the slaves' quarter."
+
+"I am at the sultan's orders," Gervaise said, bowing his head.
+"My master has been a kind one, and I am  grateful to him for his
+treatment of me."
+
+Gervaise, although taken aback by this sudden change in his fortunes,
+was not so cast down as he might  otherwise have been; he would
+now be free to carry out any plan for escape that he might devise,
+and by his  being addressed in Italian it was evident to him that
+his knowledge of Turkish was unsuspected. When  among the other
+slaves he had always maintained his character of a mute; and it was
+only when alone in his  master's family that he had spoken at all.
+He had no doubt that his betrayal was due to one of the  gardeners,
+who had several times shown him signs of ill will, being doubtless
+jealous of the immunity he  enjoyed from hard labour, and who must,
+he thought, have crept up and overheard some conversation; but  in
+that case it was singular that the fact of his knowledge of Turkish
+had not been mentioned. Gervaise  afterwards learned that Ben Ibyn
+had been fined a heavy sum for his breach of the regulations.
+
+He was now placed between the soldiers, and marched down to the
+town, without being allowed to  exchange a word with the merchant.
+On his arrival there he was taken to the slaves' quarter; here his
+clothes  were stripped from him, and he was given in their place a
+ragged shirt and trousers, and then turned into a  room where some
+fifty slaves were lying. Of these about half were Europeans, the
+rest malefactors who had  been condemned to labour.
+
+The appearance of all was miserable in the extreme; they were
+clothed in rags, and the faces of the  Europeans had a dull, hopeless
+look that told alike of their misery and of their despair of any
+escape from  it. They looked up listlessly as he entered, and then
+an Italian said, "Cospetto, comrade; but I know not  whether your
+place is with us, or with the Moslems across there. As far as colour
+goes I should put you  down as a Nubian; but your hair is of a hue
+that consorts but badly with that of your flesh."
+
+"I am an Englishman," Gervaise replied; "but I have been passing
+under a disguise which has unfortunately  been detected, so you
+see here I am."
+
+The mystery explained, his questioner had no further interest in
+the matter, and Gervaise, picking out a  vacant place on the stone
+floor, sat down and looked round him.  The room, although large,
+was roughly  built, and had doubtless been erected with a view to
+its present purpose.  There were only a few windows;  and these
+were small, strongly barred, and twelve feet above the floor.
+
+"Not easy to get out of them," Gervaise said to himself "at least,
+not easy without aid; and with these  Moslems here it is clear that
+nothing can be done."
+
+They were roused at daybreak next morning, and were taken out
+to their work under the guard of six armed  Moors, two overseers,
+provided with long whips, accompanied them. The work consisted of
+cleaning the  streets and working on the roads, and at times of
+carrying stones for the use of the masons employed in  building
+an addition to the palace of the sultan. This was the work to which
+the gang was set that morning,  and it was not long before the
+vigour with which Gervaise worked, and the strength he displayed in
+moving  the heavy stones, attracted the attention of the overseers
+and of the head of the masons.
+
+"That is a rare good fellow you have got there, that black with
+the curious hair," the latter said.  "What is  the man? I never
+saw one like him."
+
+"He is a Christian," one of the overseers said. "He was smuggled
+into the town and sold to Ben Ibyn the  Berber, who, to conceal
+the matter, dyed him black; but it got to the ears of the sultan,
+and he had him  taken from the Berber, and brought here; I have no
+doubt the merchant has been squeezed rarely."
+
+"Well, that is a good fellow to work," the other said.  "He has
+just moved a stone, single handed, that it  would have taken half
+a dozen of the others to lift. I wish you would put him regularly
+on this job; any one  will do to sweep the streets; but a fellow
+like that will be of real use here, especially when the wall rises
+a  bit higher."
+
+"It makes no difference to me," the overseer said. "I will give
+orders when I go down that he shall be  always sent up with whichever
+gang comes here."
+
+The head mason, who was the chief official of the work, soon saw
+that Gervaise not only possessed  strength, but knowledge of the
+manner in which the work should be done.
+
+Accustomed as he had been to direct the slaves at work on the
+fortifications at Rhodes, he had learned the  best methods of moving
+massive stones, and setting them in the places that they were to
+occupy. At the end  of the day the head mason told one of the slaves
+who spoke Italian to inquire of Gervaise whether he had  ever been
+employed on such work before. Gervaise replied that he had been
+engaged in the construction of  large buildings.
+
+"I thought so," the officer said to the overseer; "the way he uses
+his lever shows that he knows what he is  doing.  Most of the
+slaves are worth nothing; but I can see that this fellow will prove
+a treasure to us."
+
+Gervaise returned to the prison well satisfied with his day's
+work. The labour, hard though it was, was an  absolute pleasure to
+him. There was, moreover, nothing degrading in it, and while the
+overseers had plied  their whips freely on the backs of many of his
+companions, he had not only escaped, but had, he felt,  succeeded
+in pleasing his masters.  The next morning when the gangs were
+drawn up in the yard before  starting for work, he was surprised
+at being ordered to leave the one to which he belonged and to fall
+in  with another, and was greatly pleased when he found that this
+took its way to the spot at which they were at  work on the previous
+day.
+
+At the end of the week, when the work of the day was finished, the
+head mason came down to the prison  and spoke to the governor; a
+few minutes afterwards Gervaise was called out. The governor was
+standing in  the courtyard with an interpreter.
+
+"This officer tells me that you are skilled in masonry," the governor
+said, "and has desired that you shall be  appointed overseer of the
+gang whose duty it is to move the stones, saying he is sure that
+with half the  slaves now employed you would get as much work done
+as at present.  Have you anything to say?"
+
+"I thank you, my lord, and this officer," Gervaise replied. "I will
+do my best; but I would submit to you that  it would be better if
+I could have the same slaves always with me, instead of their being
+changed every day;  I could then instruct them in their work. I
+would also submit that it were well to pick men with some  strength
+for this labour, for many are so weak that they are well nigh useless
+in the moving of heavy  weights; and lastly, I would humbly submit
+to you that if men are to do good work they must be fed.  This
+work is as heavy as that in the galleys, and the men there employed
+receive extra rations to strengthen  them; and I could assuredly
+obtain far better results if the gang employed upon this labour
+were to receive a  somewhat larger supply of food."
+
+"The fellow speaks boldly," the governor said to the head mason,
+when the reply was translated.
+
+"There is reason in what he says, my lord. Many of the slaves,
+though fit for the light labour of cleaning the  streets, are of
+very little use to us, and even the whip of the drivers cannot get
+more than a momentary  effort from them. If you can save twenty-five
+men's labour for other work, it will pay to give more food to  the
+other twenty-five. I should let this man pick out his gang. He has
+worked in turn with all of them, and  must know what each can do;
+besides, it is necessary that he should have men who can understand
+his  orders."
+
+Gervaise accordingly was allowed to pick out his gang; and he chose
+those whom he had observed to be the  strongest and most handy at
+the work.
+
+"You will be responsible," the governor said to him, "for the masons
+being supplied with stone, and if you  fail you will be punished
+and put to other labour."
+
+So far from there being any falling off in the work, the head mason
+found that, even though the walls began  to rise and the labour of
+transporting the stones into their positions became greater, the
+masons were never  kept standing. The men, finding their position
+improved, both in the matter of food and in the immunity  they
+enjoyed from blows, worked cheerfully and well. Gervaise did not
+content himself with giving orders,  but worked at the heaviest
+jobs, and, little by little, introduced many of the appliances
+used by the skilled  masons of Rhodes in transporting and lifting
+heavy stones. Gradually his own position improved: he was  treated
+as an overseer, and was permitted to sleep under an arcade that
+ran along one side of the yard,  instead of being confined in the
+close and stifling cell. His dye had long since worn off.
+
+One day as he was going up with his gang under charge of the usual
+guards to the building, he saw Hassan,  who grinned maliciously.
+
+"Ah, ah, Christian dog!" he said; "you threatened me, and I have
+not forgotten it. The last time I was here I  made it known to an
+officer of the sultan that Ben Ibyn had a Christian slave who had
+been smuggled in;  and here you are. I hope you like the change.
+Look, I have still got your amulet, and it has brought me  better
+luck than it did you. I have been fortunate ever since, and no
+money could buy it from me."
+
+He had been walking close to Gervaise as he spoke, and one of the
+guards pushed him roughly aside.
+
+Time passed on. One day on his return from work a well dressed Moor
+met him as the gang broke up in the  courtyard.
+
+"I have permission to speak to you," he said to Gervaise, and drew
+him aside. "Know, 0 Christian, that I  have received a letter from
+Suleiman Ali, of Syria. He tells me that he has heard from Ben Ibyn,
+the Berber,  that you are a slave, and has asked me to inquire of
+the sultan the price that he will take for your ransom,  expressing
+his willingness to pay whatever may be demanded, and charging me
+to defray the sum and to  make arrangements by which you may return
+to Europe. This I am willing to do, knowing Suleiman Ali by  report
+as a wealthy man and an honourable one. I saw the sultan yesterday.
+He told me that I should have  an answer this morning as to the
+ransom that he would take. When I went to him again today, he said
+that  he had learnt from the governor of the prison and from the
+head mason that you were almost beyond price,  that you had been
+raised to the position of superintendent of the slaves employed in
+the building of his  palace, and that you were a man of such skill
+that he would not part with you at any price until the work  was
+finished. After that he would sell you; but he named a price threefold
+that at which the very best white  slave in Tripoli would be valued.
+However, from the way in which Suleiman Ali wrote, I doubt not that
+he  would pay it, great as it is, for he speaks of you in terms
+of affection, and I would pay the money could you  be released at
+once. As it is, however, I shall write to him, and there will be
+ample time for an answer to be  received from him before the building
+is finished."
+
+"Truly I am deeply thankful to my good friend, Suleiman Ali; but for
+reasons of my own I am not desirous  of being ransomed at present,
+especially at such a cost, which I should feel bound in honour to
+repay to  him; therefore, I pray you to write to him, saying that
+while I thank him from my heart for his kindness, I  am not able
+to avail myself of it.  In the first place, I am well treated
+here, and my position is not an  unpleasant one; secondly, the sum
+required for ransom is altogether preposterous; thirdly, I am not
+without  hopes that I may some day find other means of freeing
+myself without so great a sacrifice; and lastly, that I  have a
+reason which I cannot mention, why, at present, I would not quit
+Tripoli, even were I free tomorrow.  You can tell him that this is
+the reason which, most of all, weighs with me. Do not, however, I
+pray you, let  the sultan know that I have refused to be ransomed,
+for he might think I was meditating an escape, and  would order
+extra precautions to be taken to prevent my doing so. Will you also
+see Ben Ibyn, and thank  him from me for having written to Suleiman
+Ali on my behalf?"
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIX ESCAPE
+
+
+Gradually a greater amount of liberty was given to Gervaise. Escape
+from Tripoli was deemed impossible,  especially as he was supposed
+to be entirely ignorant of Arabic. He was, indeed, scarcely regarded
+now as a  slave by the head mason, and instead of being clad in
+rags was dressed like other overseers. He was no  longer obliged to
+walk with the gang to and from the palace, and was at last granted
+permission to go into  the town for an hour or two after his work
+was over, instead of returning direct to the prison. The first time
+this permission was given to him he placed himself on the road by
+which Ben Ibyn would leave the town,  choosing a quiet spot where
+the meeting would not be observed. Gervaise had for some time taken
+to  staining his face, hands, and legs with walnut juice, beginning
+with a weak solution, and very gradually  increasing the strength
+until he had reached a shade approximating to that of the lighter
+coloured portion of  the population. The head mason had on one
+occasion noticed it, and said, "The sun is darkening your skin,
+Gervaise, until you might verily pass as a Moor."
+
+Gervaise detected an expression of doubt in the tone the officer
+had spoken to the interpreter, and replied at  once, "It is not
+altogether the sun. Since I have obtained permission to come to my
+work alone, I have taken  to slightly darkening my skin, in order
+to go to and fro unmolested, and free from the insults that the
+boys  and beggars hurl at Christians."
+
+The master mason nodded approvingly when the answer was translated
+to him.
+
+"It is a wise step," he said; "for truly the hatred of Christians
+is very strong among the lower classes,  especially since it became
+known that the galleys that sailed from here nearly two years ago
+were, with all  the fleet from which so much was expected, utterly
+destroyed. It is well, then, that you should pass  unnoticed, for
+were there a tumult in the street you might lose your life, and I
+should lose the best labour  overseer I have ever had."
+
+Thus, then, as Gervaise walked through the streets on the first
+occasion of obtaining his liberty, he attracted  no attention
+whatever. When he saw Ben Ibyn approaching he stepped out to meet
+him. The merchant  looked in his face, but for a moment failed to
+recognise him, then he exclaimed suddenly, "It is Gervaise!  Ah,
+my son, I am indeed rejoiced to see you. We have spoken of you
+so often at home, and sorely did my  wife and daughters grieve
+when you were torn from us. I did not dare to send any message to
+you, for the  sultan pretended great anger against me, and used
+the opportunity to squeeze me hardly; but I have  frequently made
+inquiries about you, and was glad indeed to find that even in prison
+you received  promotion; had it been otherwise -- had I found that
+you were in misery -- I would have endeavoured,  whatever the risk,
+to aid you to escape."
+
+"I have indeed nothing to complain of, and was sorry to learn that
+you had suffered on my account. Have  you ever learned how it came
+about that I was denounced?"
+
+"No, indeed; I would have given much to know, and assuredly the
+dog, whoever he was, should have been  made to suffer."
+
+"It was Hassan. The villain met me when I was with the gang, and
+boasted that it was he who had sent me  there. He had told the news
+to some official, who had, of course, repeated it to the sultan;
+doubtless he  concealed his own share in the matter, otherwise he
+too would, next time he returned here, have had to pay  for his
+part in it."
+
+"I will make him pay more heavily than the sultan would," Ben Ibyn
+said sternly; "I will speak to my  friends among the merchants, and
+henceforth no Berber will buy aught from him; and we have hitherto
+been his best customers. But let us not waste our time in speaking
+of this wretch. How comes it that you are  walking freely in the
+streets of Tripoli? I can see that your face is stained, although
+you are no longer a  Nubian."
+
+Gervaise told him how it was that he was free to walk in the city
+after his work was done.
+
+"I shall now," he went on, "be able to carry out any plan of escape
+that may occur to me; but before I leave,  as I shall certainly do
+ere long, I mean to settle my score with Hassan, and I pray you to
+send one of the  men who were with me in the galley, and whom you
+took into your employment, directly you hear that his  ship is
+in harbour.  Do not give him either a note or a message: bid him
+simply place himself in the road  between the prison gate and the
+palace, and look fixedly at me as I pass. I shall know it is a
+signal that  Hassan is in the port."
+
+"Can I aid you in your flight? I will willingly do so."
+
+"All that I shall need is the garb of a peasant," Gervaise said.
+"I might buy one unnoticed; but, in the first  place, I have no
+money, and in the second, when it is known that I have escaped,
+the trader might recall the  fact that one of the slave overseers
+had purchased a suit of him."
+
+"The dress of an Arab would be the best," the merchant said. "That
+I will procure and hold in readiness for  you.  On the day when I
+send you word that Hassan is here, I will see that the gate of my
+garden is unbarred  at night, and will place the garments down just
+behind it. You mean, I suppose, to travel by land?"
+
+"I shall do so for some distance. Were I to steal a boat from the
+port, it would be missed in the morning,  and I be overtaken. I
+shall therefore go along the coast for some distance and get a boat
+at one of the  villages, choosing my time when there is a brisk
+wind, and when I may be able to get well beyond any risk  of being
+overtaken. Now, Ben Ibyn, I will leave you; it were better that
+we should not meet again, lest some  suspicion might fall upon you
+of having aided in my escape. I cannot thank you too much for all
+your past  kindness, and shall ever bear a grateful remembrance of
+yourself and your family."
+
+"Perhaps it were better so," Ben Ibyn said; "for if the Moors can
+find any excuse for plundering us, they do  so.  Have you heard
+the news that the Sultan of Turkey's expedition for the capture of
+Rhodes is all but  complete, and will assuredly sail before many
+weeks have passed?"
+
+"I have not heard it," Gervaise replied; "and trust that I may be
+in time to bear my share in the defence.  However, the blow has
+been so often threatened that it may be some time before it falls."
+
+"May Allah bless you, my son, and take you safely back to your
+friends!  Be assured that you shall have  notice as soon as I know
+that Hassan has returned, and you shall have the bundle with all
+that is needful,  behind my gate."
+
+Another two months passed. Gervaise looked in vain for Ben Ibyn's
+messenger as he went to and from the  palace, and chafed terribly
+at the delay, when, for aught he knew, the Turkish fleet might
+already have  brought Mahomet's army to Rhodes. At last, as he came
+back from work, he saw with intense satisfaction  one of the men,
+whose face he recognised, leaning carelessly against the wall. The
+man gave no sign of  recognition, but looked at him earnestly for
+a minute, and then sauntered off up the street. Gervaise went up
+into the town as usual, walked about until it became quite dark,
+and then went to the gate that led into the  merchant's garden.
+He found that it was unfastened, and, opening it, he went in and
+closed it behind him.  As he did so he started, for a voice close
+by said,
+
+"Master, it is I, the messenger whom you saw two hours since. Ben
+Ibyn bade me say that he thought you  might require some service,
+and, knowing that I could be trusted, bade me wait for you here.
+He thought  that you might possibly need a messenger to Hassan."
+
+"The very thing," Gervaise exclaimed. "I have been puzzling myself
+in vain as to how I could get speech  with him in some quiet place;
+but with your assistance that will be easy; but first let me put
+on this  disguise."
+
+This was easily effected, even in the dark. A loose flowing robe
+of white cotton, girt in at the waist, a long  bernouse with hood
+to cover the head, a sash with a dagger, and a scimitar, completed
+the disguise.
+
+"Here is a pouch," the man said, "with money for your journey, and
+a long sword, which he says you can  hang at your back beneath your
+bernouse."
+
+Gervaise gave an exclamation of pleasure. By its length and weight
+he was sure that the weapon must have  been the property of a
+Christian knight.
+
+"Shall I carry the message this evening?" the man asked.  "It is
+early still, and it were best that you should  not linger in the
+city, where there is sure to be a strict search for you in the
+morning."
+
+"But perhaps he may recognise your face?"
+
+"It is blackened, my lord, and I am dressed as you were when with
+Ben Ibyn."
+
+"Let us settle our plans, then, before we sally out from here;
+we could not find a safer place for talking.  What message, think
+you, would be the most likely to tempt Hassan to come ashore? You
+do not know  what spoil he has brought?"
+
+"No; besides, if a merchant wanted to buy he would go on board to
+inspect Hassan's wares. We must have  something to sell. It must
+be something tempting, and something that must be disposed of
+secretly. I might  tell him that my employer -- and I would mention
+some merchant whose name would carry weight with  him -- has received
+from the interior a large consignment of slaves, among whom are
+three or four girls,  who would fetch high prices in Egypt, and as
+he believes they have been captured from a tribe within the  limits
+of the sultan's territory, he is anxious to get rid of them, and
+will either dispose of them all cheaply in  a lot, or will hand them
+over to him to take to Egypt to sell, giving him a large commission
+for carrying  them there and disposing of them."
+
+"I do not like tempting even an enemy by stories that are untrue,"
+Gervaise said doubtfully.
+
+"I have no scruples that way," the man said, with a laugh; "and it
+is I who shall tell the story, and not you."
+
+Gervaise shook his head.
+
+"Could you not say that you came from one who owes him a heavy debt
+and desires to pay him?"
+
+"I do not think that would bring him ashore. Hassan doubtless trades
+for ready money, and must be well  aware that no one here can be
+greatly in his debt. No, my lord; leave the matter in my hands. I
+will think of  some story before I go on board that will fetch him
+ashore. But first we must settle where I am to bring  him; there
+are some deserted spots near the wall on the east side of the town."
+
+"I know where you mean," Gervaise agreed; "let us go in that
+direction at once, for the sooner you are off  the better."
+
+In half an hour a spot was fixed on, near some huts that had fallen
+into ruin. Here Gervaise seated himself  on a sand heap, while the
+man hurried away. The moon had just risen, it being but three days
+since it was at  its full. The night was quiet; sounds of music,
+laughter, and occasional shouts came faintly from the town.  Seated
+where he was, Gervaise could see the port and the ships lying there.
+Half an hour later he saw a boat  row off to one of them, which
+he had already singled out, from its size and general appearance,
+as being  that of Hassan; ten minutes later he saw it returning.
+At that distance separate figures could not be made  out, but it
+seemed to him that it loomed larger than before, and he thought
+that certainly one, if not more,  persons, were returning with his
+messenger. Presently he heard men approaching; then Hassan's voice
+came  distinctly to his ears.
+
+"How much farther are you going to take me?  Remember, I warned
+you that unless I found that my  journey repaid me, it would be
+bad for you."
+
+"It is but a few yards farther, my lord. There is my master the
+sheik of the Beni Kalis awaiting you."
+
+Gervaise rose to his feet as Hassan and two of his crew came up.
+
+"Now," the former said roughly, "where have you bestowed these
+captives you want to sell me?"
+
+"Will you please to follow me into this courtyard?" Gervaise said.
+He had, while waiting, reconnoitred the  neighbourhood, and found
+an enclosure with the walls still perfect, and had determined to
+bring Hassan  there, in order to prevent him from taking to flight.
+Hassan entered it unsuspectingly, followed by his two  men. Gervaise
+fell back a little, so as to place himself between them and the
+entrance.  Then he threw back  the hood of his bernouse.
+
+"Do you recognise me, Hassan?" he said sternly. "I am the captive
+whom you beat almost to death. I told  you that some day I would
+kill you; but even now I am willing to forgive you and to allow you
+to depart in  peace, if you will restore the amulet you took from
+me."
+
+The corsair gave a howl of rage.
+
+"Christian dog!" he exclaimed. "You thought to lead me into a trap,
+but you have fallen into one yourself.  You reckoned that I should
+come alone; but I suspected there was something hidden behind the
+story of  that black, and so brought two of my crew with me. Upon
+him, men! Cut him down!" So saying, he drew  his scimitar, and
+sprang furiously upon Gervaise. The latter stepped back into the
+centre of the gateway, so  as to prevent the men, who had also drawn
+their swords, passing to attack him from behind.  He had undone
+the clasp of his bernouse, and allowed it to fall to the ground as
+he addressed Hassan, and his long sword  flashed in the moonlight
+as the corsair sprang forward.
+
+Hassan was a good swordsman, and his ferocious bravery had rendered
+him one of the most dreaded of the  Moorish rovers. Inferior in
+strength to Gervaise, he was as active as a cat, and he leapt back
+with the spring  of a panther, avoiding the sweeping blow with
+which Gervaise had hoped to finish the conflict at once; the  latter
+found himself therefore engaged in a desperate fight with his three
+assailants. So furiously did they  attack him that, foot by foot,
+he was forced to give ground. As he stepped through the gateway one
+of the  pirates sprang past him, but as he did so, a figure leapt
+out from beyond the wall, and plunged a dagger into  his back,
+while at the same moment, by cutting down another pirate, Gervaise
+rid himself of one of his  assailants in front; but as he did so,
+he himself received a severe wound on the left shoulder from Hassan,
+who, before he could again raise his weapon, sprang upon him, and
+tried to hurl him to the ground.
+
+Gervaise's superior weight saved him from falling, though he
+staggered back some paces; then his heel  caught against a stone,
+and he fell, dragging Hassan to the ground with him. Tightly
+clasped in each other's  arms, they rolled over and over. Gervaise
+succeeded at last in getting the upper hand, but as he did so  Hassan
+twisted his right arm free, snatched the dagger from Gervaise's
+girdle, and struck furiously at him.  Gervaise, who had half risen
+to his knees, was unable to avoid the blow, but threw himself
+forward, his  weight partly pinning the corsair s shoulders to the
+ground, and the blow passed behind him, inflicting but a  slight
+wound in the back; then, with his right hand, which was now free,
+he grasped Hassan by the throat  with a grip of iron. The pirate
+struggled convulsively for a moment, then his left hand released
+his grasp of  his opponent's wrist.  A minute later Gervaise rose
+to his feet: the pirate was dead.
+
+Gervaise stooped and raised the fallen man's head from the ground,
+felt for the chain, pulled up Claudia's  gage, and placed it round
+his own neck; then he turned to his guide.
+
+"I have to thank you for my life," he said, holding out his hand to
+him.  "It would have gone hard with me if  that fellow had attacked
+me from behind. I had not bargained for three of them."
+
+"I could not help it, my lord. It was not until Hassan had stepped
+down into the boat that I knew he was  going to take any one with
+him; then he suddenly told two of his men to take their places by
+him, saying to  me, as he did so, 'I know not whether this message
+is a snare; but mind, if I see any signs of treachery, your  life
+at any rate will pay the forfeit.' I knew not what to do, and indeed
+could do nothing; but, knowing my  lord's valour, I thought that,
+even against these odds, you might conquer with such poor aid as
+I could give  you."
+
+"It was not poor aid at all," Gervaise said heartily.  "Greatly
+am I indebted to you, and sorry indeed am I,  that I am unable to
+reward you now for the great service that you have rendered me."
+
+"Do not trouble about that, my lord. I am greatly mistaken if I
+do not find in the sashes of these three  villains sufficient to
+repay me amply for my share in this evening's work. And now, my
+lord, I pray you to  linger not a moment.  The gates of the town
+shut at ten o'clock, and it cannot be long from that hour now.
+But first, I pray you, let me bind up your shoulder; your garment
+is soaked with blood."
+
+"Fortunately my bernouse will hide that; but it were certainly best
+to staunch the blood before I start, for it  would be hard for me
+to get at the wound myself."
+
+The man took one of the sashes of the corsairs, tore it into strips,
+and bandaged the wound; then with  another he made a sling for the
+arm. As he took off the sashes a leather bag dropped from each,
+and there  was a chink of metal.  He placed them in his girdle,
+saying, "I shall have time to count them when I get  back."
+
+Gervaise sheathed his sword, and put on the bernouse, pulling the
+hood well over his head; then, with a few  more words of thanks,
+started for the gate, leaving the man to search Hassan's girdle.
+
+The gate was a quarter of a mile distant. Gervaise passed through
+with the usual Arabic salutation to the  sentry, and with difficulty
+repressed a shout of exultation as he left Tripoli behind him.
+
+Following the coast road he walked till daylight; then he left
+it and lay down among the sand hills for five  or six hours. He
+calculated that no pursuit would be begun until midday. His absence
+was not likely to be  noticed until the gangs began work in the
+morning, when an alarm would be given. The sentries at the gates
+on the previous evening would be questioned, and when it was found
+that no one answering to his  description had passed out before
+these were closed, there would be a rigid search throughout the
+city and  port. The vessels would all be examined, and the boatmen
+questioned as to whether any craft was missing.   Not until the
+search proved absolutely fruitless would it be seriously suspected
+that he had, either by  passing through the gates in disguise,
+or by scaling the walls, made for the interior. None knew that he
+could speak Arabic, and it would be so hopeless an undertaking for
+any one unacquainted with the  language to traverse the country
+without being detected, that the Moors would be slow to believe that
+he  had embarked upon such adventure.  However, when all search for
+him in the town and in the vessels in the  port proved fruitless,
+doubtless mounted men would be despatched in all directions; some
+would take the  coast roads, while others would ride into the interior
+to warn the head men of the villages to be on the  lookout for an
+escaped slave.
+
+After a sleep of five hours, Gervaise pursued his journey. He had
+walked for eight hours, and calculated  that he must be fully thirty
+miles from Tripoli, and that not until evening would searchers
+overtake him.  After walking four miles he came to a large village.
+There he purchased a bag of dates, sat down on a stone  bench by
+the roadside to eat them, and entered into conversation with two
+or three Moors who sauntered  up. To these he represented that he
+belonged to a party of his tribe who had encamped for the day at
+a short  distance from the village in order to rest their horses
+before riding into Tripoli, whither they were  proceeding to exchange
+skins of animals taken in the chase, and some young horses, for
+cotton clothes,  knives, and other articles of barter with the
+tribes beyond them.
+
+After quenching his thirst at a well in front of the mosque, he
+retraced his steps until beyond the village,  then struck out into
+the country, made a detour, came down into the road again, and
+continued his journey  eastward.  He walked until nightfall, and
+then again lay down.
+
+He was now fully fifty miles from Tripoli, and hoped that he was
+beyond the point to which horsemen from  that town would think of
+pursuing their search. It was likely that they would not have gone
+beyond the  village at which he had halted on the previous day; for
+when they learned from the inhabitants that no  stranger, save an
+Arab, had entered it, they would content themselves with warning
+the head man to be on  the watch for any stranger unable to speak
+their tongue, and would not consider it necessary to push their
+steps farther.
+
+For four days Gervaise continued his journey. At each village
+through which he passed he added to his  stock of dates, until he
+had as many as he could carry under his bernouse without attracting
+observation. He  also purchased a large water bottle, which he
+slung round his neck.
+
+All this time the sea lay to his left like a sheet of glass, and
+he knew that until a change of weather  occurred, it was useless
+for him to attempt to escape by boat. On the fifth day there were
+signs of a change.  He saw a dark line far out at sea; it came
+across the water rapidly, and presently a gentle breeze began to
+blow from the northwest; it gradually increased in strength, and
+when, in the afternoon, he stopped at a  village, the waves were
+breaking upon the shore.
+
+After repeating his usual story, he sauntered down to the water's
+edge. There were several boats hauled up,  and a hundred yards out
+two or three larger craft were lying at anchor. He entered into
+conversation with  some of the fishermen, and his questions as to
+the boats led them to believe him altogether ignorant of the  sea.
+The craft were, they told him, used sometimes for fishing, but they
+often made voyages to towns along  the coast with dates and other
+produce. Each boat carried a single short mast, to the top of which
+was  attached a long tapering spar, on which the sail was furled.
+
+Gervaise knew that these small feluccas were generally fast sailors
+and fair sea boats, and resolved to seize  one of them, trusting
+that when once the sail was shaken out he would be able to manage
+it single handed.  Accustomed to boats, he picked out that which
+he thought would be the fastest, and then walked away for  half a
+mile, and lay down to sleep until the village was silent for the
+night. He had with him some oaten  cakes he had bought there, a
+string of fish he had purchased from the boatmen, and with these
+and the dates  he thought he could manage for four or five days
+at least. As to water, he could only hope that he should  find a
+supply on board the boat. When he judged it to be about ten o'clock
+he went down to the shore again,  took off his clothes and made
+them into a bundle; then, wading out into the water to within fifty
+yards of  the felucca, swam off to it, towing the bundle behind
+him.
+
+He had no difficulty in climbing on board, and after dressing himself
+in the clothes he had worn at Tripoli,  and had kept on underneath
+the Arab attire, he pulled the head rope until the craft was nearly
+over the  anchor. He then loosened the line that brailed up the
+sail, got the stone that served as an anchor on board,  hauled the
+sheet aft, and took his place at the tiller. The wind had dropped
+a good deal with the sun, but  there was still sufficient air to
+send the light craft fast through the water. He steered out for
+a time, and  then, when he thought himself a good mile from the
+shore, headed east. By the appearance of the water as it  glanced
+past, he thought that he must be making from five to six miles an
+hour, and when the sun rose at  five o'clock, believed that he was
+nearly forty miles on his way. He now fastened the tiller with a
+rope and  proceeded to overhaul the craft.
+
+It was decked over forward only, and he crept into the cabin, which
+was little more than three feet high.  The first thing his eye lit
+on was a bulky object hanging against the side, and covered with
+a thick black  blanket of Arab manufacture. Lifting this, he saw,
+as he expected, that the object beneath it was a large  waterskin
+well filled; the blanket had evidently been placed over it to keep
+it cool when the sun streamed  down on the deck above it. There
+was also a large bag of dates, and another of flat cakes, and he
+guessed  that these had all been put on board the evening before,
+in readiness for a start in the morning. This relieved  him of
+his chief anxiety, for he had been unable to think of any plan for
+replenishing his supply, or to  concoct a likely tale that, were
+he obliged to go on shore, would account for his being alone in a
+craft of  that size.
+
+The wind increased again after sunrise, and being unable to reef
+the sail single handed he managed partially  to brail it up. All
+day the craft flew along with the wind on the quarter, making six
+or seven miles an hour;  and he felt that by morning he would be
+well beyond pursuit. On the run he passed several craft engaged in
+fishing, but these gave him no uneasiness. He had in the morning,
+with some old sails he found, constructed  three rough imitations
+of human figures, one with the Arab dress and another with the
+bernouse, and had  placed them against the bulwarks, so that at a
+short distance it would appear that there were three men on  board.
+Feeling confident that the deception would not be noticed, he kept
+his course without swerving, and  passed some of the fishing boats
+within hailing distance, waving his hand and shouting the usual
+Arab  salutation to their crews.
+
+During the day he contented himself with eating some dates and an
+oatmeal cake or two; but at sunset he  added to this two or three
+fish that he had split open and hung up to dry in the sun and wind.
+There was  charcoal on board, and a flat stone served as a hearth
+in the bottom of the boat, but he had no means of  lighting a fire,
+for this the fishermen would have brought off when they came on
+board in the morning.  After he had finished his meal and taken his
+place again at the tiller he altered his course.  Hitherto he had
+been steering to the south of east, following the line of coast, but
+he now saw before him the projecting  promontory of Cape Mezurata,
+which marks the western entrance of the great Gulf of Sydra; and he
+now  directed his course two points north of east, so as to strike
+the opposite promontory, known as Grenna,  more than a hundred
+miles away. The wind fell much lighter, and he shook out the sail
+to its full extent. All  night he kept at his post, but finding
+the wind perfectly steady he lashed the tiller so as to keep the
+boat's  head in the direction in which he was steering, and dozed
+for some hours, waking up occasionally to assure  himself that she
+was keeping her course.
+
+At sunrise he indulged in a wash in sea water, and felt freshened
+and revived. He now kept a sharp lookout  for distant sails, for
+he was out of the ordinary course a coaster would take, and would
+have attracted the  attention of any corsair coming out from the
+land; the sea, however, remained clear of ships. All day the  felucca
+made rapid progress, for although the wind freshened, Gervaise did
+not lessen sail as before, being  now accustomed to the boat and
+confident of her powers. As soon as the wind died away again after
+sunset,  he lay down for a good sleep, feeling this was an absolute
+necessity, and knowing that before morning he  should be obliged
+to keep a sharp lookout for land. He slept longer than he had
+intended, for the day was  breaking when he opened his eyes. He
+sprang to his feet, and saw the land stretching ahead of him at a
+distance, as he thought, of some fifteen miles, and at once put
+the helm down and bore more to the north.
+
+He judged, from what he had heard on the coast, that he must be
+nearly off Cape Tejones, behind which lies  the town of Bengasi,
+and was confirmed in the belief on finding half an hour later that
+the coast, which had  run nearly north and south, trended sharply
+away to the northeast. All day long he kept about the same  distance
+from the land, and at night, instead of keeping on his course,
+brailed up the sail entirely, and  allowed the vessel to drift, as
+he knew that before morning he should lose the coast if he continued
+as he  was going. He slept without moving until daylight, and then
+saw, to his satisfaction, by means of landmarks  he had noticed the
+evening before, that the boat had drifted but a few miles during
+the night. As the day  went on, he saw that the coastline was now
+east and west, and felt that he must be off the most northerly
+point of the promontory; he accordingly laid his course to the
+northeast, which would take him close to  Cape Saloman, the most
+easterly point of Crete, and from two hundred and fifty to three
+hundred miles  distant.
+
+For twenty-four hours he sailed quietly on, the wind dropping lighter
+and lighter; then it suddenly died out  altogether; for some hours
+there was not a breath to stir the surface of the water, and the
+heat was stifling.  Gervaise slept for some time; when he awoke the
+same stillness reigned, but there was a change in the  appearance
+of the sky; its brightness was dulled by a faint mist, while, although
+the sea was of a glassy  smoothness, there was an imperceptible
+swell that caused the felucca to sway uneasily.  Gervaise had
+sufficient experience of the Levant to know that these signs were
+ominous of a change, and he at once set to  work to prepare for
+it. Although he saw that it would be difficult for him unaided to
+hoist the long spar  back into its place, he decided to lower it.
+This was not difficult, as its weight brought it down on to the
+deck as soon as he slackened the halliards; he unhooked it from the
+block, and then lashed the sail securely  to it. When he had done
+this he looked round. A bank of dark clouds lay across the horizon
+to the  northwest, and in a short time he could see that this was
+rising rapidly.
+
+Before taking down the spar and sail, he had deliberated as to whether
+it would be better to run before the  coming gale or to lie to, and
+had decided on the latter alternative, as, were it to continue to
+blow long, he  might be driven on to the Egyptian coast. Moreover,
+the felucca's bow was much higher out of water than  the stern, and
+he thought that she would ride over the waves with greater safety
+than she would did they  sweep down upon her stern.
+
+He had heard that the Greeks, when caught in a sudden gale in small
+boats, often lashed the oars together,  threw them overboard with
+a rope attached, and rode to them safely through a sea that would
+otherwise  have overwhelmed them. After much consideration as to
+what had best be done, he took the anchor rope,  which was some
+sixty yards in length, fastened one end to each end of the spar,
+and then lashed the middle  of the rope to the bow of the felucca;
+then, using an oar as a lever, he with great labour managed to
+launch  the spar over the bow, with the sail still attached to it.
+
+When he had completed this, he looked round at the state of the
+weather. The clouds had risen so fast that  their edge was nearly
+overhead, spanning the sky like a great arch.  Ahead of him it
+seemed almost as black  as night. He had not been out in many of the
+gales that at times sweep the eastern waters of the  Mediterranean
+with terrible violence, but had seen enough of them to know that
+it was no ordinary one that  he was about to encounter. He looked
+over the bow; the spar at present was lying in contact with the
+stem.  With an oar he pushed it across so as to be at right angles
+with the craft, and then, there being nothing else  to do, sat
+down and waited for the storm to burst. In a short time he heard a
+dull moaning sound, a puff of  wind struck the boat, but in a few
+seconds died out; it was sufficient to give the light craft stern
+way, and  she drifted backwards, the rope tightening, until the
+spar lay across her bows, and some twenty yards away.
+
+The dull moaning had grown louder; and now ahead of him he saw
+a white line. It approached with  extraordinary rapidity. Knowing
+the fury with which it would burst upon him, he leapt down, and stood
+at  the entrance to the cabin, with his head just above the deck.
+With a deafening roar the wind struck the boat,  which staggered
+as if she had on her full course struck on a rock, while a shower
+of spray flew over her.  Half blinded and deafened, Gervaise crawled
+into the cabin, closed the door, and lay down there; whatever
+happened, there was nothing he could do. He was soon conscious
+that the spar and sail were doing their  work, for the boat still
+lay head to wind. The noise overhead and around was deafening; above
+the howl of  the wind could be heard the creaking of the timbers,
+and the boat seemed to shiver as each fresh gust struck  her.
+
+In half an hour he looked out again. There was, as yet, but little
+sea; the force of the wind seemed to flatten  the water, and the
+instant a wave lifted its head it was cut off as if by a knife,
+and carried away in spray.  The boat herself was moving rapidly
+through the water, dragging the spar behind her, and Gervaise almost
+trembled at the thought of the speed at which she would have flown
+along had it not been for the restraint  of the floating anchor.
+Gradually the sea got up, but the light craft rode easily over
+it, and Gervaise, after  commending his safety to God, lay down,
+and was soon fast asleep. In spite of the motion of the vessel, he
+slept soundly for many hours. When he awoke he opened the cabin
+door and looked out. A tremendous sea  was running, but he thought
+the wind, although so strong that he could scarce lift his head
+above the shelter  of the bulwark, was less violent than it had
+been when it first broke upon him. He saw to his satisfaction  that
+the felucca breasted the waves lightly, and that although enveloped
+in spray she took no green water  over the bows.
+
+The spar and sail acted not only as a floating anchor, but as a
+breakwater, and the white crested waves,  which came on as if they
+would break upon the boat, seemed robbed of half their violence
+by the  obstruction to their course, and passed under the felucca
+without breaking. For forty-eight hours the gale  continued; at
+the end of that time it ceased almost as suddenly as it had begun.
+The sun shone brightly out,  the clouds cleared entirely away. It
+was some hours before the sea went down sufficiently for Gervaise
+to  attempt to get the spar on deck again. It was a heavy task,
+taxing his strength to the utmost, but after a deal  of labour it
+was got on board, and then raised to its position at the masthead;
+the sail was shaken out, and  the felucca again put on her course.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XX BELEAGUERED
+
+
+One morning towards the end of May, 1480, Sir John Boswell was
+standing with some other knights on St.  Stephen's Hill, near the
+city, having hurried up as soon as a column of smoke from a bonfire
+lighted by the  lookout there, gave the news that the Turkish fleet
+was at last in sight. A similar warning had been given a  month
+previously, but the fleet had sailed past the island, being bound for
+Phineka, which was the  rendezvous where Mahomet's great armament
+was to assemble. There could be but little doubt that the long
+expected storm was this time about to burst. The fleet now seen
+approaching numbered a hundred and sixty  large ships, besides a
+great number of small craft, conveying a force variously estimated
+at from seventy to  a hundred thousand men.
+
+"'Tis a mighty fleet," Sir John said; "and the worst of it is that
+we know there are more to follow; still, I  doubt not we shall
+send them back defeated. Our defences are all complete; our recent
+peace with Egypt  has enabled us to fill up our magazines with
+provisions of all kinds; the inhabitants of the Island have had
+ample warning to move into the town, carrying with them everything
+of value; so the Turks will obtain but  little plunder, and will
+be able to gather no means of subsistence on the island, as every
+animal has been  driven within the walls, and even the unripe corn
+has been reaped and brought in. However long the siege  lasts, we
+need be in no fear of being reduced to sore straits for food. Look
+over there. There is a small craft  under sail, and it comes not
+from the direction of Phineka. See!  one of the Turkish galleys
+has separated  from the rest and is making off in that direction.
+It may be that the little craft contains one or two of our  comrades
+who are late in coming to join us."
+
+"It may well be so, Sir John, for they have been straggling in by
+twos and threes for the last month."
+
+"I will get the grand master's leave to put out in one of the
+galleys," Sir John said, "for, by the way they are  bearing, the
+Turks will cut the little craft off before she can gain the port."
+
+He hurried to D'Aubusson, who was standing a short distance apart
+from the others, gazing at the Turkish  fleet.  A minute later
+he was running down the hill to the town, accompanied by three or
+four other knights;  they made direct for the outer port, where
+two galleys were lying in readiness, leapt on board one of them,
+which already contained its quota of knights, and at once rowed out
+of the port. Just as they did so the  Turkish galley fired a gun.
+
+"I fear we shall be too late," Sir John said; "the Turk is gaining
+fast on the other craft, whatever she may be.  There goes another
+gun. Row your hardest!" he shouted down to the slaves.
+
+The Turkish ship did not fire again; the wind was light, and they
+were going two feet through the water to  every one sailed by the
+other craft. The galley from Rhodes was still half a mile away when
+the Turk was  close to the boat that was trying to escape. Sir John
+and the knights chafed as they saw they would be too  late.
+
+"I can't make out why the boat did not use her oars," the former
+said. "Of course, she could not have kept  away from the galley,
+but if she had rowed it would have made some difference, and we
+might have been  nearly up."
+
+"I can only see one man on board of her, Sir John," one of the
+younger knights said; and two or three others  murmured that they
+were of the same opinion.
+
+"The others must be lying down; she cannot have less than from
+fifteen to twenty men. The Turk is close  alongside. They still
+hold on. There! She has gone about and escaped the attempt to run
+her down. Now she  is heading for us again! Brave fellows! brave
+fellows!" Sir John exclaimed, while a cheer broke from those  around
+him; "but they have done for themselves. They must have seen us
+coming out, and if they had  surrendered might have hoped to have
+been retaken. Their chance of getting quarter was truly not great,
+for  expecting -- as the Turks do -- to carry off both us and all
+the inhabitants of the Island, a dozen fishermen  would have seemed
+to them scarcely worth keeping. However, by holding on they have
+thrown away any  chance they may have had. The Turks are alongside;
+they are leaping down into the little craft. Ah! Two  more galleys
+have just left their fleet, and are heading here."
+
+"See, Sir John," one of the knights exclaimed, "there is a single
+man standing in the bow of that craft: he is  facing the Moors
+alone. See how they crowd there; you can see the weapons flashing
+in the sun. They have  to press past the mast to get at him, and
+as yet he seems to hold them all at bay."
+
+"He has chosen his post well, D'Urville. The number of his assailants
+prevents the archers on the Turkish  craft using their bows. Fire
+those bow guns!" he shouted to the knights forward: "Take steady
+aim at the  galley. It will distract their attention."
+
+"Nobly done indeed!" one of the other knights shouted. "I have seen
+him strike down four of the Turks."
+
+"Row, men, row! 'Tis useless!" Sir John muttered, as he clenched
+the hilt of his sword. "Useless! A Roland  could not long maintain
+so unequal a fight."
+
+A groan broke from those around him as suddenly the dark mass
+of the assailants made a forward move,  and the single figure was
+lost to sight. It was but for an instant; a moment later the crowd
+separated, and a  man was seen to spring overboard.
+
+"They will riddle him with their spears when he comes up; we shall
+have nothing to do but to avenge him.  To your stations, comrades!
+It is our turn now, and we have no time to lose, for the other two
+Turks will be  up in twenty minutes, and I had orders not to fight
+if it could be avoided:  but we must take this fellow."
+
+Five minutes later the galley ran alongside the Turk, to which those
+who had captured the boat had already  hastily returned. The ships
+discharged their guns into each other, and then, as the galley ran
+alongside, the  knights tried to leap on board of her. They were
+opposed by a dense mass of Turks, for in addition to her  usual
+crew the Moslem was crowded with troops. For three or four minutes
+the knights tried, but in vain, to  get a footing on board; then
+Sir John shouted to them to forbear, and gave orders to the rowers
+at once to  push off. A cloud of arrows swept across the poop as
+they did so; but for the most part these fell harmless  from the
+armour of the knights. For a time the cannon on both sides continued
+to fire, but as the Christians  increased their distance it gradually
+ceased.
+
+They had gone but a hundred yards from the Turk when a head appeared
+over the stern railing of the poop,  and a figure swung itself
+on to the deck. The man was attired in Turkish garments, but his
+head was bare,  and the exclamation, "A Christian!" broke from the
+knights.
+
+The man strode up to Sir John Boswell.
+
+"You used to say you would make matters even with me some day, Sir
+John, and you have more than kept  your word."
+
+Sir John fell back a pace in astonishment, and then with a shout,
+"By St. George, it is Tresham!" threw his  arms round Gervaise's neck,
+while the knights thronged round with exclamations of satisfaction.
+
+"And it was you whom we saw keep the Turks at bay for three good
+minutes single handed," Sir John said,  holding Gervaise at arm's
+length to gaze into his face. "Truly it seemed well nigh impossible
+that any one  who was like to be on that craft could have performed
+so doughty a deed.  And how did you escape?"
+
+"It was simple enough," Gervaise replied. "As soon as I dived
+I turned and swam along under the boat and  came up by the stern,
+and then held on by the rudder, sheltered from their sight. I saw
+that the galley would  be up in five minutes, and had no fear of
+their wasting time to look for me. Directly you came alongside her
+I dived again, and rose under your stern. I did not think that you
+would be able to take her, for all their craft  are crowded with
+troops; so I contented myself with holding on until you were out
+of reach of their arrows,  and then I climbed up."
+
+"I am delighted to see you again, Gervaise. I was feeling very
+sore at the moment, and I know the others  felt the same, at being
+obliged to sheer off without making a capture; but the grand master's
+orders were  strict. We noted your craft pursued by the Turks, and
+I asked leave to take out a galley to cut her off. He  said, 'Take
+one, Sir John, but do not adventure an attack against the Turk unless
+she is likely to fall an easy  prize to you. Her capture would be
+of little benefit to us, and would be dearly purchased at the cost
+of a  knight's life. Therefore, as soon as we engaged her, and I
+found that she was full of troops and could not be  captured without
+heavy loss, and that two of her consorts might arrive before we
+accomplished it, it was  plainly my duty to abandon the attempt,
+although, you may guess, it went sorely against the grain to give
+the order, especially as I knew that a host would be looking on
+from St. Stephen's Hill. However, your  rescue more than makes up
+for our failure; and thankful indeed am I that I made the suggestion
+that we  should put out to save that little craft, though I thought
+it contained but a few fishermen or some coasting  sailors, who had,
+in ignorance that the Turks were at hand, tried to enter Rhodes.
+One of those looking on  with me did, indeed, suggest that she
+might have on board a knight or two coming to join us, but I did
+not  give the matter a second thought."
+
+"And how go things, Sir John? And how are old friends?"
+
+"Ralph Harcourt and, I think, all your comrades in the Santa Barbara,
+except the three who fell by your side  when you were captured,
+are well, and at present on the Island, as, for the last two years,
+none have been  allowed to depart.  As to other matters, they go
+not so well as one could wish.  The commanderies have not  responded
+to our call for aid as they should have done. For this, however, they
+are not altogether to blame,  for we have been so often threatened
+with attack, and have so frequently applied for aid in money or
+men,  that they must have begun to doubt whether the danger was
+really imminent. In other respects we are well  prepared. We have
+obtained large stores of provisions from Egypt, and shall have no
+ground for uneasiness  on that score. The defences have been greatly
+strengthened, and no one fears that we shall not be able to  beat
+off an attack.  We have destroyed the principal buildings outside
+the walls, though it would have been  better could we have gone
+much further in this direction. And now let us have your adventures
+and escape."
+
+"'Tis a long story, Sir John, and I must pray you to let me defer
+it for a time. In the first place, I have two or  three wounds that
+I shall be glad to have bandaged."
+
+"Why did you not say so at once?" Sir John exclaimed.  "In those
+dark clothes, soaked with water as they  are, I did not see the
+bloodstains; but I ought to have looked for them, for surely no
+one could have gone  through that fight -- altogether unprotected
+with armour too -- without being wounded. Come below, and  we will
+attend to them."
+
+"Also order me some wine and food, Sir John; I have touched nothing
+save water for twenty-four hours,  and before that fasted somewhat
+strictly."
+
+By the time Gervaise's wounds, which were not severe, had been
+bandaged, and he had eaten a hasty meal,  the galley was alongside
+the mole, between the two harbours.
+
+He was provided with some clothes, and went with Sir John straight
+to the English auberge, where the  knight insisted that he should
+at once lie down.
+
+"I will report your return to D'Aubusson, and will tell him it is
+by my orders that you are resting. Your  wounds are not very deep,
+but you must have lost a good deal of blood, and were you to exert
+yourself  now, and be pestered with questions, it would probably
+bring on an attack of fever.  There is nothing to do  at present,
+for it must be some days before they can land and bring up their
+guns."
+
+Gervaise obeyed the orders not unwillingly, for he felt that he was
+really weak, and was greatly worn out  by want of sleep. Sir John
+Kendall, at Boswell's request, issued orders that he was on no
+account whatever  to be disturbed, and that no one was to enter his
+room unless he sounded the bell placed by the bedside.  Gervaise
+indeed, falling off to sleep a few minutes after he had lain down,
+did not awake until the following  morning. Having no idea that
+he had slept more than two or three hours, he sounded the bell in
+order to  inquire whether Ralph had returned to the auberge.  He was
+surprised to find his friend had just risen, and  that he himself
+had been asleep some eighteen hours!
+
+A few minutes later Ralph hurried into the room.
+
+"Thank God that you are back again, Gervaise!" he said, as he
+grasped the hand of his friend. "I did not  return until late in
+the evening, having been at work with a large body of slaves at
+the fortifications; and  you may guess what joy I felt at the news.
+You are changed a good deal."
+
+"I don't suppose you will think so at the end of a day or two,
+Ralph. I lost a good deal of blood yesterday,  and have been on
+short rations; but I shall very soon pick up again."
+
+"They will bring you some broth and wine directly, Gervaise. Early
+as it is, the grand master has already  sent down to inquire as to
+your health."
+
+"I will reply in person as soon as I have had a meal and dressed."
+
+"And I suppose we must all wait to hear what you have been doing
+until you return, Gervaise?"
+
+"I suppose so, Ralph. Of course it is a long story; but I must
+tell you at once that there is nothing very  exciting in it, and
+that it differed little from that of others who have been prisoners
+among the Moors, save  that I was strangely fortunate, and suffered
+no hardships whatever. And now I want to ask you about  clothes.
+Have my things been sold, or are they still in the store?"
+
+"No; the question was raised but a short time since. It was mooted,
+by the way, by that old enemy of yours,  Robert Rivers, who returned
+here some three months ago with a batch of knights from the English
+commanderies. Sir John Boswell answered him roundly, I can tell
+you, and said that they should be kept,  were it for another fifty
+years, for that he would wager his life that you would sooner or
+later make your  escape."
+
+"I am sorry that fellow has returned, Ralph. Has he got a commandery
+yet?"
+
+"No; I believe that Sir John Kendall sent home so bad a report of
+him, that even the great influence of his  family has not sufficed
+to obtain his appointment, and that he has been merely the assistant
+at one of the  smaller manors. Sir John Boswell told me in confidence
+that he understood that Rivers did not at first  volunteer to come
+out in response to the appeal of the grand master, but that the
+grand prior informed him  that unless he took this opportunity of
+retrieving his character, he might give up all hope of ever obtaining
+advancement. Ah, here is your breakfast."
+
+An hour later Gervaise presented himself at the palace, clothed in
+the suit of armour that had been given to  him by Genoa. Although
+he was engaged with several members of the council at the time,
+the grand master  ordered him to be at once admitted as soon as he
+heard that he was in attendance.
+
+"Welcome back, Sir Gervaise Tresham," he said warmly, as he entered.
+"We all rejoice greatly at your  return, and I consider it a happy
+omen for the success of our defence that so brave and distinguished
+a  knight should at the last moment have arrived to take a share
+in it."
+
+The others present all shook Gervaise cordially by the hand, and
+congratulated him on his return.
+
+"You must dine with me this evening," D'Aubusson went on, "and
+tell us the story of your captivity and  escape.  At present, as
+you may suppose, we have too many matters on hand to spare time
+for aught that is  not pressing and important. You will need a
+few days' rest before you are fit for active service, and by that
+time we will settle as to what post will best suit you."
+
+Twice that day had Gervaise to recount his adventures, the first
+time to Sir John Kendall and the knights of  his auberge, the second
+to the grand master. Most of the leading members of the Order were
+assembled at  the palace, and, among others, he was introduced to
+the Viscount de Monteuil, the elder brother of  D'Aubusson, one
+of the most famous leaders of the day. He had brought with him a
+considerable body of  retainers, and, although not a member of the
+Order, had offered his services in defence of the town. The  council
+had gratefully accepted the offer, and had unanimously named him
+Commander of the Forces.   Many other knights and soldiers had
+come from different parts of Europe, animated alike by the desire
+to  aid in the defence of Christendom against the advance of the
+Moslems, and to gain credit and honour by  taking part in a siege
+that was sure to be a desperate one.
+
+"My brother has already spoken of you to me, Sir Gervaise,"
+the viscount said, when the young knight was  presented to him;
+"although indeed there was no occasion for him to do so, since the
+name of the knight  who two years ago saved the commerce of Italy
+from ruin, and with a single galley destroyed or captured a  great
+fleet of over twenty Barbary pirates, and thus for a time put a stop
+to the depredations of the infidels,  is known throughout Europe.
+By the way, I am the bearer of a message to you. I took ship at
+Genoa on my  way hither, and stayed two or three days there while
+she was being got ready for sea.  Knowing that I was  bound hither,
+a certain very beautiful young lady of noble family, to whom I
+had the honour of being  introduced, prayed me that if you should
+by any chance have escaped from captivity -- and she said that
+she  was convinced that you would, when you heard that Rhodes was
+threatened, assuredly endeavour to escape  and to come hither to
+take a share in the defence -- I was to tell you that she trusted
+you still bore her gage,  and that she, on her part, had held fast
+to the promise she made you."
+
+"I still have her gage, Viscount; for though I was for a long
+time deprived of it, I succeeded in regaining it  when I made my
+escape," Gervaise said quietly; and De Monteuil at once turned the
+conversation to  another topic.
+
+Gervaise found that no attempt was to be made to take the offensive
+against the Turks, and that they were  to be permitted to advance
+against the city without interference.  Many of the more fiery
+spirits among the  knights chafed at this prohibition. The records
+of the past showed that armies as large as that of Mahomet  had
+suffered defeat at the hands of bodies of knights no stronger than
+that gathered for the defence of  Rhodes. D'Aubusson, however, knew
+that between the undisciplined hordes that gathered in countless
+numbers to oppose the crusaders, and the troops of Mahomet,
+well trained in warfare, who had borne his  standard victoriously
+in numerous battles, there was but little comparison. They were
+commanded, too, by  Paleologus, a general of great capacity. Under
+such circumstances, although victory might be possible, the  chances
+of defeat would be far greater, and while victory could be only
+won at a great sacrifice of life,  defeat would mean annihilation
+to the garrison, and the loss of the city upon whose fortifications
+such an  enormous amount of money and labour had been expended.
+
+On the other hand, he felt perfectly confident that the city could
+be successfully defended, and that at a cost  of life far less than
+would be attained by a victory in the open field, while the blow
+that would be inflicted  upon the prestige and power of the enemy,
+by being ignominiously compelled to retire to their ships, after
+the failure of all their attacks, would be as great as if their
+army had been defeated in the field. Therefore  the grand master,
+with the full assent of his leaders, turned a deaf ear to the
+entreaties of the younger  knights, that they might be allowed
+to make a sortie. He calmly waited behind the formidable defences
+he  had for the past ten years been occupied in perfecting, in
+anticipation of the assault of the Moslem host.
+
+Accordingly, after disembarking at their leisure, the Turkish army
+moved forward, and took their post upon  St. Stephen's Hill. From
+this eminence they commanded a full view of the town, the hills
+sloping gently  down to the foot of the walls. In later times the
+first care of a general commanding the defence would have  been
+to construct formidable works upon this commanding position. But
+the cannon of that period were so  cumbrous and slowly worked,
+and so inaccurate in their aim, that the advantage of occupying a
+position  that would prevent an enemy from firing down into a town
+was considered to be more than counterbalanced  by the weakening
+of the garrison by the abstraction of the force required to man
+the detached work, and by  the risk of their being surrounded and
+cut off without the garrison of the town being able to aid them.
+
+That the defence of St. Stephen's Hill was considered unnecessary
+for the safety of Rhodes is shown by the  fact that no attempt had
+been made to fortify it when, forty years later, the Moslems again
+besieged the city.
+
+There was no shadow of apprehension felt by the garrison of Rhodes
+as the great array of their foes was  seen moving on to the hill,
+and preparing to pitch its camp. On the summit was the great tent
+of the pasha;  round this were the marquees of the other commanders,
+while the encampments of the troops stretched far  away along the
+upper slopes of the hill.
+
+Previous to the despatch of the expedition, the sultan had made
+preparations for aiding his arms by  treachery.  The agent he
+had sent to propose a temporary truce had, during his stay on the
+Island, made  himself thoroughly acquainted with the outline of the
+works. A very accurate plan of them had also been  obtained from
+an inhabitant of Rhodes, who had abandoned Christianity and taken
+service with the Turks.
+
+In addition to this he had arranged with a renegade German, known
+as Maitre Georges, a man of very great  ability as an artilleryman
+and engineer, to desert to the city, and there do all in his power
+to assist the  besiegers, both by affording them information and
+by giving bad advice to the besieged. On the day after  Paleologus,
+who was himself a renegade Greek, had established his camp, he
+sent in a herald to summon  the city to surrender, at the same time
+making lavish promises that the lives and property of the native
+population should be respected, and that they should be allowed
+to continue to reside there, to enjoy the full  exercise of their
+religion and of all other rights they possessed. The pasha had no
+real hope that the knights  would obey the summons, but he thought
+that he might excite a spirit of disaffection among the  townspeople
+that would, when the crisis came, greatly hamper the efforts of
+the defenders.
+
+The Rhodians, however, were well satisfied with the rule of the
+Order. The knights, although belonging to  the Catholic Church,
+had allowed the natives of the Island, who were of the Greek faith,
+perfect freedom in  the exercise of their religion, and their
+rule, generally, had been fair and just. The wealth and prosperity
+of  the Island had increased enormously since their establishment
+there, and the population had no inclination  whatever to change
+their rule for that of the Turks. The summons to surrender being
+refused, the enemy  made a reconnaissance towards the walls.
+
+D'Aubusson had no longer any reason for checking the ardour of the
+knights, and a strong body of  horsemen, under the command of De
+Monteuil, sallied out and drove the Turks back to their camp.
+
+Maitre Georges, who was acting as the military adviser of the
+pasha, saw at once that the weakest point of  the defence was Fort
+St. Nicholas, at the extremity of the mole along the neck of land
+dividing the outer  from the inner port. At a short distance away,
+on the opposite side of the port, stood the church of St.  Anthony,
+and in the gardens of the church a battery was at once erected.
+The garden was but three hundred  yards from St. Nicholas, and the
+danger that would arise from the construction of the battery was
+at once  perceived, and an incessant fire opened upon it from the
+guns on the wall round the grand master's palace.   Numbers of the
+workmen were killed, but the erection of the battery was pushed on
+night and day, and ere  long three of the immense cannon that had
+been brought from Constantinople, -- where sixteen of them had
+been cast under the direction of Maitre Georges -- were placed in
+position. These cannon were eighteen feet  in length, and carried
+stone balls of some twenty-six inches in diameter.
+
+Before these were ready to open fire, Gervaise had entirely regained
+his health and strength. The grand  master, being unwilling to
+appoint him to a separate command over the heads of knights many
+years his  senior, had attached him to his person in the capacity
+of what would now be called an aide-de-camp.
+
+"I know, Gervaise, that I can rely upon your coolness and discretion.
+I cannot be everywhere myself, and I  want you to act as my eyes
+in places where I cannot be. I know that the knights, so far as
+bravery and  devotion are concerned, will each and every one do
+his best, and will die at their posts before yielding a  foot; but
+while fighting like paladins they will think of naught else, and,
+however hardly pressed, will omit  to send to me for reinforcements.
+Nay, even did they think of it, they probably would not send,
+deeming  that to do so would be derogatory, and might be taken as
+an act of cowardice. Now, it is this service that I  shall specially
+look for from you. When a post is attacked, I shall, when my
+presence is required elsewhere,  send you to represent me. I do not,
+of course, wish you to interfere in any way in the conduct of the
+defence, in which you will take such share as you can; but you
+are specially to observe how matters go, and  if you see that the
+knights are pressed and in sore need of assistance to enable them
+to hold the post, you  will at once bring the news to me, and I
+will hurry there with reinforcements."
+
+No post could have been more in accordance with the desire
+of Gervaise, for the portion of the wall  defended by the English
+langue was far removed from the point selected by the Turks for their
+first attack,  the sea front being defended half by the langue of
+Italy, and half by that of Castile. Fort St. Nicholas was  under
+the command of the Cavalier Caretto, and as soon as the Turkish
+battery was completed, Gervaise  went down there with an order from
+the grand master that he was for the present to consider himself as
+forming part of the garrison. This was pleasant for both Caretto and
+himself, for the Italian knight had  conceived a strong friendship
+for the young Englishman, and had rejoiced greatly at his return
+from  captivity, but had been so much occupied with his duty of
+placing the castle in all respects in a state of  defence, that he
+had had no opportunity for a private conversation with him since
+his return to Rhodes.
+
+Gervaise, on his part, was no less pleased. Caretto had shown so
+much tact after his release from the Moors,  and had so willingly
+aided him in any capacity allotted to him, without in the slightest
+degree interposing  his council unasked, that Gervaise had come to
+like him greatly, even before their arrival at Genoa.  Circumstances
+there had brought them closely together, and their friendship had
+been cemented during  their voyage to Rhodes. Caretto had gone back
+to Italy, where he had a commandery, a few days after  Gervaise had
+sailed on his last voyage, and had only returned to Rhodes three
+months before Gervaise  escaped from captivity.
+
+"This is turning the tables," Caretto said, with a laugh, when
+Gervaise presented the grand master's order. "I  was under your
+command last time, and now it seems that you are to be under mine.
+I suppose you applied  to come here, in order to have a fresh
+opportunity of distinguishing yourself. I heard that you had been
+placed on D'Aubusson's own staff."
+
+"Yes, and am on it still; and it is by his orders and not by my own
+solicitation that I am here. I will tell you  what my duties are.
+The grand master knows the commanders of posts have their hands so
+full that they  will have no time for sending complete reports to
+him, and he considers, moreover, that they might, in  some cases,
+however pressed, hesitate to ask for aid until too late for
+reinforcements to be brought up. My  duty will be to let the grand
+master know how matters are going, and to send to him at once if
+it seems to  me that help is needed. I should, of course, always
+send for reinforcements, at the request of a commander;  but it is
+only in the event of his being too busy in the heat of the fray to
+think of aught but resisting an  attack, that I should exercise my
+own judgment in the matter."
+
+Caretto nodded.
+
+"It is a good thought of D'Aubusson's. When one is in the thick
+of a fight in a breach, with the Moslems  swarming round, it does
+not occur to one to draw out of the fray to send off messages. For
+myself, I shall be  glad indeed to have that matter off my mind,
+though it is not every one I should care to trust with such a
+responsibility.  Some might send off for aid when it was not needed,
+others might delay so long that help  might come too late; but with
+one so cool headed as yourself I should not fear any contingency.
+And now,  as I am not busy at present, let us have a comfortable
+talk as to what has happened since we met last. I was  at the
+banquet at the grand master's on the night when you related your
+adventures. You had certainly much  to tell, but it seems to me
+for some reason or other you cut short certain details, and I could
+not see why, as  there seemed no prospect of escape open to you,
+you did not accept the offer of Suleiman Ali to ransom  you."
+
+"I saw no chance of escape at the moment, but I did not doubt that
+I could get away from the town  whenever I chose, although it was
+not clear how I should proceed afterwards. It was for this opportunity
+I  was waiting, and I felt sure that, with my knowledge of the
+language, it would come sooner or later. In the  next place, my
+captors had fixed an exorbitant sum for my ransom, and I did not
+wish to impose upon the  generosity of Suleiman. There was another
+reason -- a private one."
+
+"You don't mean to say that you had fallen in love with a Moorish
+damsel, Sir Gervaise?" Caretto laughed.
+
+"For shame, Cavalier! As if a Christian knight would care for a
+Moslem maiden, even were she as fair as  the houris of their creed!"
+
+"Christian knights have done so before now," Caretto laughed,
+greatly amused at the young knight's  indignation, "and doubtless
+will do so again. Well, I suppose I must not ask what the private
+matter was,  though it must have been something grave indeed to lead
+you, a slave, to reject the offer of freedom. I know  that when I
+was rowing in their galleys, no matter of private business that I
+can conceive would have stood  in my way for a single moment, had
+a chance of freedom presented itself."
+
+"It was a matter of honour," Gervaise said gravely, "and one of
+which I should speak to no one else; but as  you were present at
+the time, there can, I think, be no harm in doing so. At the time
+that I was captured, I  was stripped of everything that I had upon
+me, and, of course, with the rest, of the gage which the Lady  Claudia
+had given me, and which hung round my neck where she had placed
+it. It was taken possession of  by the captain of the pirates, who,
+seeing that it bore no Christian emblem, looked upon it as a sort
+of  amulet. I understood what he was saying, but, as I was desirous
+that my knowledge of Turkish should not  be suspected, I said
+nothing. I was very glad that he so regarded it, for had he taken
+it to be an ordinary  trinket, he might have parted with it, and I
+should never have been able to obtain a clue as to the person to
+whom he sold it. As it was, he put it round his neck, with the
+remark that it might bring him better luck than  had befallen me.
+He told me jeeringly months afterwards that it had done so, and
+that he would never part  with it. Given me as it was, I felt that
+my honour was concerned in its recovery, and that, should I ever
+meet Lady Claudia again, I should feel disgraced indeed, if, when
+she asked whether I still bore her gage, I  had to confess that it
+was lost."
+
+"But lost from no fault of your own," Caretto put in.
+
+"The losing was not indeed from any fault of my own, and had the
+pirate thrown it into the sea I should  have held myself free from
+disgrace; but as it was still in existence, and I knew its possessor,
+I was bound  in honour to recover it. At the time Suleiman Ali's
+messenger arrived the corsair was away, and there was  no saying
+when his ship would return; therefore, I decided at once not to
+accept the offer of freedom. Had it  not been for that, I own that
+I should have done so, for I knew that I could repay Suleiman from
+the  revenues of my commandery, which would have accumulated in my
+absence; but if I had had to wait ten  years longer to regain the
+gage, I felt that I was in honour bound to do so. It was, in fact,
+some six months  before the corsair put into that port again. The
+moment he did so I carried out the plans I had long before  determined
+upon.  I obtained a disguise from Ben Ibyn, and by a ruse succeeded
+in inducing the pirate to  meet me outside the town, believing that
+I was an Arab chief who wished to dispose of some valuable slave
+girls he had brought in. I had with me one of my old galley slaves,
+who had been taken into Ben Ibyn's  employment; and when the pirate
+came up with two of his crew, and furiously attacked me as soon as
+I  threw off my disguise, it would have gone hard with me had he
+not stood by me, and killed one of them  who was about to attack
+me in the rear. I slew the other and Hassan, and the gage is in
+its place again."
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXI THE FORT OF ST. NICHOLAS
+
+
+Well, you have proved indeed," Caretto said, when Gervaise finished
+his story, "that you are worthy of the  bestowal of a gage by a
+fair damsel. I do not think that many knights, however true they
+might be to the  donor, would have suffered months of slavery
+in order to regain a token, lost by no fault or carelessness of
+their own; and no lady could have blamed or held them in any way
+dishonoured by the loss."
+
+"I had a message by the Viscount De Monteuil from Lady Claudia
+the other day, saying that she trusted I  had kept her gage. I can
+assure you that the six months of slavery were cheaply purchased
+by the pleasure I  felt that I still possessed it; and I was glad,
+too, to learn that I had not been forgotten by her."
+
+"Of that you may well assure yourself, Tresham; my commandery is not
+far from Genoa, and I was  frequently with her, but never without
+her drawing me aside and asking me if I had heard any news of you,
+and talking over with me the chances there might be of your escape.
+I can tell you that there are not a few  young nobles of Genoa
+who would give much to be allowed as you are to carry her gage, or
+wear her  colours. You should see her now; you would scarce know
+her again, so altered and improved is she; there is  no fairer face
+in all Italy."
+
+"I hope some day to meet her again, " Gervaise replied; "although
+I own to knowing it were better that I  should not do so. Until she
+gave me her gage I had scarcely noticed her. I have, as you know,
+no experience  of women, and had so much on my mind at the time,
+what with the fuss they were making about us, and the  question of
+getting the prizes here, that in truth I paid but slight attention
+to the fair faces of the dames of  Genoa. But the gracious and
+earnest way in which, though scarce more than a child, she gave
+me her gage,  and vowed that no other knight should possess one so
+long as I lived, struck me so greatly that I own I gave  the matter
+much more thought than was right or becoming in one of our Order.
+The incident was much  more gratifying to me than all the honour
+paid me by the Republic, and during the long months of my  captivity
+it has recurred to me so frequently that I have in vain endeavoured
+to chase it from my thoughts,  as sinful thus to allow myself
+constantly to think of any woman. Do not mistake me, Sir Fabricius.
+I am  speaking to you as to a confessor, and just as I have kept
+her amulet hidden from all, so is the thought of  her a secret
+I would not part with for my life. I do not for a moment deceive
+myself with the thought that,  beyond the fact that her gift has
+made her feel an interest in me and my fate, she has any sentiment
+in the  matter: probably, indeed, she looks back upon the gift as
+a foolish act of girlish enthusiasm that led her into  making a
+promise that she now cannot but find unpleasantly binding; for it
+is but natural that among the  young nobles of her own rank and
+country there must be some whom she would see with pleasure wearing
+her colours."
+
+Caretto looked at him with some amusement.
+
+"Were you not bound by your vows as a knight of the Order, how
+would you feel in the matter?"
+
+"I should feel worse," Gervaise said, without hesitation.  "I have
+oftentimes thought that over, and I see that  it is good for me I
+am so bound. It does not decrease my chances, for, as I know, there
+are no chances; but  it renders it more easy for me to know that
+it is so."
+
+"But why should you say that you have no chances, Tresham?"
+
+"Because it is easy to see that it is so. I am, save for my
+commandery and prospects in the Order, a  penniless young knight,
+without home or estate, without even a place in my country, and
+that country not  hers. I know that it is not only sinful, but mad,
+for me to think so frequently of her, but at least I am not  mad
+enough to think that I can either win the heart or aspire to the
+hand of one who is, you say, so  beautiful, and who is, moreover,
+as I know, the heiress to wide estates."
+
+"'There was a squire of low degree, Loved the king's daughter of
+Hungarie,'" Caretto sang, with a laugh.  "You are not of low degree,
+but of noble family, Gervaise. You are not a squire, but a knight,
+and already a  very distinguished one; nor is the young lady, though
+she be a rich heiress, a king's daughter."
+
+"At any rate, the squire was not vowed to celibacy. No, no, Sir
+Fabricius, it is a dream, and a pleasant one;  but I know perfectly
+well that it is but a dream, and one that will do me no harm so
+long as I ever bear in  mind that it is so.  Many a knight of the
+Order before me has borne a lady's gage, and carried it valiantly
+in  many a fight, and has been no less true to his vows for doing
+so."
+
+"Upon the contrary, he has been all the better a knight, Gervaise;
+it is always good for a knight, whether he  belongs to the Order
+or not, to prize one woman above all others, and to try to make
+himself worthy of his  ideal. As to the vow of celibacy, you know
+that ere now knights have been absolved from their vows, and  methinks
+that, after the service you have rendered to Italy by ridding the
+sea of those corsairs, his Holiness  would make no difficulty in
+granting any request that you might make him in that or any other
+direction. I  don't know whether you are aware that, after you
+sailed from here, letters came from Rome as well as from  Pisa,
+Florence, and Naples, expressive of the gratitude felt for the
+services that you had rendered, and of  their admiration for the
+splendid exploit that you had performed."
+
+"No; the grand master has had his hands so full of other matters
+that doubtless an affair so old escaped his  memory. Indeed, he
+may have forgotten that I sailed before the letters arrived."
+
+"Do not forget to jog his memory on the subject, for I can tell you
+that the letters did not come alone, but  were each accompanied by
+presents worthy of the service you rendered. But as to the vows?"
+
+"As to the vows, I feel as I said just now, that I would not free
+myself of them if I could, for, being bound  by them, I can the
+more easily and pleasantly enjoy my dream.  Besides, what should I
+do if I left the Order  without home, country, or means, and with
+naught to do but to sell my sword to some warlike monarch?  Besides,
+Caretto, I love the Order, and deem it the highest privilege to
+fight against the Moslems, and to  uphold the banner of the Cross."
+
+"As to that, you could, like De Monteuil and many other knights
+here, always come out to aid the Order in  time of need. As to the
+vows, I am not foolish enough to suppose that you would ask to be
+relieved from  them, until you had assured yourself that Claudia
+was also desirous that you should be free."
+
+"It is absurd," Gervaise said, almost impatiently. "Do not let us
+talk any more about it, Caretto, or it will  end by turning my head
+and making me presumptuous enough to imagine that the Lady Claudia,
+who only  saw me for three or four days, and that while she was
+still but a girl, has been thinking of me seriously  since."
+
+"I do not know Claudia's thoughts," Caretto remarked drily, "but I
+do know that last year she refused to  listen to at least a score
+of excellent offers for her hand, including one from a son of
+the doge himself, and  that without any reasonable cause assigned
+by her, to the great wonderment of all, seeing that she does not
+appear to have any leaning whatever towards a life in a nunnery.
+At any rate, if at some future time you  should pluck up heart of
+grace to tell her you love her, and she refuses you, you will at
+least have the  consolation of knowing that you are not the only
+one, by a long way, whose suit has been rejected. And  now as to
+our affairs here. Methinks that tomorrow that battery will open
+fire upon us. It seems completed."
+
+"Yes, I think they are nearly ready," Gervaise said, turning his
+mind resolutely from the subject they had  been discussing. "From
+the palace wall I saw, before I came down here, large numbers of
+men rolling huge  stones down towards the church. Our guns were
+firing steadily; but could they load them ten times as fast  as
+they do, they would hardly be able to stop the work, so numerous
+are those engaged upon it."
+
+"Yes we shall soon learn something of the quality of their artillery.
+The tower is strong enough to resist  ordinary guns, but it will
+soon crumble under the blows of such enormous missiles. Never have
+I seen or  heard in Europe of cannon of such size; but indeed, in
+this matter the Turks are far ahead of us, and have,  ever since
+cannon were first cast, made them of much larger size than we in
+Europe have done. However,  there is one comfort; they may destroy
+this fort, but they have still to cross the water, and this under
+the fire  of the guns on the palace walls; when they once land,
+their great battery must cease firing, and we shall be  able to
+meet them on equal terms in the breach. Fight as hard as they may,
+I think we can hold our own,  especially as reinforcements can come
+down to us more quickly than they can be brought across the water."
+
+The next morning, at daybreak, the deep boom of a gun announced to
+the city that the great battering  cannon had begun their work. In
+the fort the sleeping knights sprang to their feet at the concussion
+that  seemed to shake it to its centre. They would have rushed to
+the walls, but Caretto at once issued orders that  no one should
+show himself on the battlements unless under special orders.
+
+"There is nothing whatever to be done until the Turks have breached
+the wall, and are ready to advance to  attack us. Every sword will
+be needed when that hour comes, and each man owes it to the Order
+to run no  useless risk, until the hour when he is required to do
+his share of the fighting."
+
+The time required to reload the great cannon was considerable, but
+at regular intervals they hurled their  heavy missiles against the
+wall, the distance being so short that every ball struck it. After
+some twenty  shots had been fired, Caretto, accompanied by Gervaise,
+went out by a small gate on the eastern side of the  tower, and
+made their way round by the foot of the wall to see what effect
+the shots had produced on the  solid masonry.
+
+Caretto shook his head.
+
+"It is as I feared," he said. "No stones ever quarried by man could
+long resist such tremendous blows. In  some places, you see, the
+stones are starred and cracked, in others the shock seems to have
+pulverised the  spot where it struck; but, worse, still, the whole
+face of the wall is shaken. There are cracks between the  stones,
+and some of these are partly bulged out and partly driven in.
+It may take some time before a breach  is effected, but sooner or
+later the wall will surely be demolished."
+
+"I will go up and make my report to the grand master."
+
+"Do so, Gervaise. I almost wonder that he has not himself come down
+to see how the wall is resisting."
+
+Gervaise, on reaching the palace, heard that D'Aubusson was at
+present engaged in examining no less a  person than Maitre Georges,
+the right hand of Paleologus, who had soon after daybreak presented
+himself  before the wall on the other side of the town, declaring
+that he had left the Turkish service, and craving to  be admitted.
+News had been sent at once to D'Aubusson, who despatched two of
+the senior knights, with  orders to admit him and receive him with
+all honour. This had been done, and the grand master, with some  of
+his council, were now closeted with the newcomer. Several of the
+knights were gathered in the  courtyard, discussing the event.
+There was no question that if the renegade came in good faith, his
+defection would be a serious blow to the assailants, and that his
+well known skill and experience would  greatly benefit the defenders.
+
+"For my part," Sir John Boswell, who formed one of the detachment
+which the English langue, as well as  all the others, contributed
+to form the garrison of the palace said, "I would have hung the
+fellow up by the  neck over the gateway, and he should never have
+set foot within the walls.  Think you that a man who has  denied
+his faith and taken service with his enemies is to be trusted,
+whatever oaths he may take?"
+
+"You must remember, Boswell," another said, "that hitherto Georges
+has not fought against Christians, but  has served Mahomet in his
+wars with other infidels. I am not saying a word in defence of his
+having  become a renegade; yet even a renegade may have some sort
+of heart, and now that he has been called upon  to fight against
+Christians he may well have repented of his faults, and determined
+to sacrifice his position  and prospects rather than aid in the
+attack on the city."
+
+"We shall see. As for me, I regard a renegade as the most contemptible
+of wretches, and have no belief that  they have either a heart or
+conscience."
+
+When Maitre Georges came out from the palace, laughing and talking
+with the two knights who had  entered with him, it was evident
+that he was well pleased with his reception by the grand master,
+who had  assigned to him a suite of apartments in the guest house.
+In reality, however, D'Aubusson had no doubt that  his object was
+a treacherous one, and that, like Demetrius, who had come under
+the pretence of bringing  about a truce, his object was to find out
+the weak points and to supply the Turks with information. Georges
+had, in his conversation with him, laid great stress on the strength
+of the Turkish army, the excellent quality  of the troops, and the
+enormous battering train that had been prepared. But every word he
+spoke but added  to the grand master's suspicions; for if the man
+considered that the capture of the city was morally certain, it
+would be simply throwing away his life to enter it as a deserter.
+
+The grand master was, however, too politic to betray any doubt of
+Georges' sincerity. Were he treated as a  traitor, Paleologus might
+find another agent to do the work. It was, therefore, better to
+feign a belief in his  story, to obtain all the information possible
+from him, and at the same time to prevent his gaining any  knowledge
+of affairs that would be of the slightest use to the Turks.
+Instructions were therefore given to the  two knights that, while
+Georges was to be treated with all courtesy, he was to be strictly
+watched, though in  such a manner that he should be in ignorance
+of it, and that, whenever he turned his steps in the direction of
+those parts of the defences where fresh works had been recently
+added and preparations made of which it  was desirable the Turks
+should be kept in ignorance, he was to be met, as if by accident,
+by one of the  knights told off for the purpose, and his steps
+diverted in another direction.
+
+Georges soon made himself popular among many of the knights, who had
+no suspicions of his real  character.  He was a man of exceptional
+figure, tall, strong, splendidly proportioned, with a handsome
+face  and gallant bearing.  He was extremely well informed on all
+subjects, had travelled widely, had seen many  adventures, was full
+of anecdote, and among the younger knights, therefore, he was soon
+regarded as a  charming companion. His very popularity among them
+aided D'Aubusson's plans, as Georges was generally  the centre of
+a group of listeners, and so had but few opportunities of getting
+away quietly to obtain the  information he sought. Gervaise delivered
+his report to the grand master.
+
+"I am free now," D'Aubusson said, "and will accompany you to St.
+Nicholas. I have been detained by the  coming of this man Georges.
+He is a clever knave, and, I doubt not, has come as a spy. However,
+I have  taken measures that he shall learn nothing that can harm
+us. No lives have been lost at the tower, I hope?"
+
+"No, sir; Caretto has forbidden any to show themselves on the
+walls."
+
+"He has done well. This is no time for rash exposure, and where
+there is naught to be gained, it is a grave  fault to run risks."
+
+On arriving at the end of the mole, D'Aubusson, accompanied by
+Caretto, made an investigation of the  effect of the Turks' fire.
+
+"'Tis worse than I expected," he said. "When we laid out our
+fortifications the thought that such guns as  these would be used
+against them never entered our minds.  Against ordinary artillery
+the walls would  stand a long battering; but it is clear that we
+shall have to depend more upon our swords than upon our  walls for
+our defence.  Fortunately, although the Turks have indeed chosen
+the spot where our walls are  most open to the assaults of their
+battery, they have to cross the water to attack the breach when it
+is made,  and will have to fight under heavy disadvantage."
+
+"Tresham was last night saying to me, that it seemed to him it
+would not be a difficult matter for one who  spoke Turkish well,
+to issue at night on the other side of the town, and to make his
+way round to the  battery, disguised of course as a Turkish soldier,
+and then, mixing with the artillery men, to drive a spike  into
+one of the touch holes.  He said that he would gladly volunteer
+for the task."
+
+D'Aubusson shook his head decidedly. "It would be too dangerous;
+and even were a spike driven in, the  Turks would have no great
+difficulty in extracting it, for the tubes are so big that a man
+might crawl in and  drive the spike up from the inside. Moreover,
+could one or more of the guns be disabled permanently,  others would
+be brought down and set in their place, so that nothing would be
+gained but a very short  delay, which would be of no advantage to
+us, and certainly would in no way justify the risking of the life
+of  so distinguished a young knight."
+
+The bombardment of St. Nicholas continued for some days. A breach
+was fast forming in the wall, and a  slope composed of the fallen
+rubbish extended from the front of the breach to the water's edge.
+The grand  master was frequently on the spot, and as this was at
+present the sole object of attack, the garrison was  strengthened
+by as many knights as could be sheltered within its walls. At night
+the shattered masonry that  had fallen inside was carried out, and
+with it a new work thrown up across the mole, to strengthen the
+defence on that side, should the enemy land between the town and
+the fort. Small batteries were planted  wherever they could sweep
+the approaches to the breach, and planks studded with nails were
+sunk in the  shallow water of the harbour, to impede the progress
+of those who might attempt to swim or wade across.  For the time,
+therefore, the functions of Gervaise were in abeyance, and he
+laboured with the rest of the  garrison at the defences.
+
+At daybreak on the 9th of June, a great number of vessels and
+boats, crowded with soldiers, bore down on  St.  Nicholas. As they
+approached, every gun on the fortifications that could be brought
+to bear upon them  opened fire; but in a dense mass they advanced.
+Some made their way to the rocks and landed the soldiers  there;
+others got alongside the mole; but the majority grounded in the
+shallow water of the harbour, and the  troops, leaping out, waded
+to the foot of the breach. On its crest D'Aubusson himself had
+taken up his  station. Beside him stood Caretto, and around them
+the most distinguished knights of the Order. With wild  shouts
+the Turks rushed up the breach, and swarmed thickly up the ruined
+masonry until, at its summit, they  encountered the steel clad
+line of the defenders. For hours the terrible struggle continued.
+As fast as the  head of the Turkish column broke and melted
+away against the obstacle they tried in vain to penetrate, fresh
+reinforcements took the place of those who had fallen, and in
+point of valour and devotion the Moslem  showed himself a worthy
+antagonist of the Christian. It was not only at the breach that
+the conflict raged.  At other points the Turks, well provided with
+ladders, fixed them against the walls, and desperately strove  to
+obtain a footing there.  From the breach clouds of dust rose from
+under the feet of the combatants,  mingling with the smoke of the
+cannon on the ramparts, the fort, and Turkish ships, and at times
+entirely  hid from the sight of the anxious spectators on the walls
+of the town and fortress, and of the still more  numerous throng of
+Turks on St. Stephen's Hill, the terrible struggle that continued
+without a moment's  intermission.
+
+The combatants now fought in comparative silence.  The knights,
+exhausted and worn out by their long  efforts beneath the blazing
+sun, still showed an unbroken front; but it was only occasionally
+that the battle  cry of the Order rose in the air, as a fresh body
+of assailants climbed up the corpse strewn breach. The yell  of
+the Moslems rose less frequently; they sacrificed their lives as
+freely and devotedly as those who led the  first onset had done;
+but as the hours wore on, the assurance of victory died out, and a
+doubt as to whether  it was possible to break through the line of
+their terrible foes gained ground. D'Aubusson himself, although,  in
+spite of the remonstrances of the knights, always in the thickest
+of the fray, was yet ever watchful, and  quickly perceived where the
+defenders were hotly pressed, and where support was most needed.
+Gervaise  fought by his side, so that, when necessary, he could
+carry his orders to a little body of knights, drawn up in  reserve,
+and despatch them to any point where aid was needed.  The cannon
+still continued their fire on  both sides. A fragment of one of
+the stone balls from a basilisk struck off D'Aubusson's helmet.
+He selected  another from among the fallen knights, and resumed
+his place in the line. Still the contest showed no signs  of
+terminating. The Turkish galleys ever brought up reinforcements,
+while the defenders grew fewer, and  more exhausted. During a
+momentary pause, while a fresh body of Turks were landing, Gervaise
+said to the  grand master,
+
+"If you will give me leave, sir, I will go out at the watergate,
+swim up the inner harbour, and in a very short  time turn a few
+of the craft lying there into fire ships, and tow them out with a
+couple of galleys. At any  rate, we can fire all these craft that
+have grounded, and create a panic among the others."
+
+"Well thought of, Gervaise! I will write an order on one of my
+tablets. Do you take my place for a minute."  Withdrawing behind
+the line, the grand master sat down on a fragment of stone, and,
+drawing a tablet from  a pouch in his girdle, he wrote on it, "In
+all things carry out the instructions of Sir Gervaise Tresham:  he
+is  acting by my orders and authority, and has full power in all
+respects."
+
+He handed the slip of parchment to Gervaise, who hurried to the
+water gate in the inner harbour, threw off  his helmet and armour,
+issued out at the gate, and plunged into the sea. He swam out some
+distance, in  order to avoid the missiles of the Turks, who were
+trying to scale the wall from the mole, and then directed  his
+course to St. Michael's, which guarded the inner entrance to the
+fort. He had fastened the parchment in  his hair, and as some of the
+garrison of the tower, noticing his approach, came down to assist
+him, he  handed it to them and was at once taken to the commander
+of St. Michael, answering as he went the  anxious questions as to
+how matters stood at the breach.
+
+"Aid is sorely needed. The Turks have gained no foot of ground as
+yet, but many of the knights are killed  and most of the others
+utterly exhausted with heat and labour.  Unless aid reaches them
+speedily, the tower,  with all its defenders, will be lost."
+
+The instant the commander knew what was required, he bade six of the
+knights embark with Gervaise in a  boat moored behind the tower,
+and row up the harbour to the spot where the shipping was all massed
+together, protected by the high ground of the fortress from the
+Turkish fire.  Gervaise waved his hand, as he  neared the end of
+the harbour, to the officer on the walls, and while the six knights
+who were with him ran  off to tell the master of the galleys to
+prepare two of them to leave the port instantly, Gervaise explained
+to  the officer in charge of the wall at that point the plan that
+he was charged to carry out, and asked for twenty  knights to assist
+him.
+
+"It will leave us very weak along here," the officer said.  "Then
+let me have ten, and send for another ten  from other parts of the
+wall. Here is the grand master's order, giving me full power and
+authority, and it is  all important that no single moment shall be
+wasted."
+
+"You shall have twenty of mine," the officer said, "and I will draw
+ten from the langue next to us to fill  their places."
+
+In a few minutes the quay was a scene of bustle and activity.
+Gervaise picked out ten of the smallest  vessels; the knights went
+among the other ships, seized all goods and stores that would be
+useful as  combustibles, and compelled the crews to carry them on
+board the craft chosen as fire ships. Then barrels  were broken
+open, old sails and faggots saturated with oil and pitch, and in
+little more than a quarter of an  hour after his arrival, Gervaise
+had the satisfaction of seeing that the ten boats were all filled
+with  combustibles, and ready to be set on fire. He now called for
+volunteers from the sailors, and a number of  them at once came
+forward, including many of the captains. He placed one of these in
+command of each  fire ship, and gave him four of the sailors.
+
+"The galleys will tow you out," he said, "and take you close to the
+enemy's ships. We shall range you five  abreast, and when I give
+the word, the one at the end of the line will steer for the nearest
+Turk, and, with  oars and poles, get alongside. The captain will
+then light the train of powder in the hold, throw the torch  among
+the straw, and see that, if possible, the men fasten her to the
+Turk; but if this cannot be done, it is not  essential, for in the
+confusion the enemy will not be able to get out of the way of the
+fire ship as it drives  down against her. At the last moment you
+will take to your boats and row back here. We will protect you
+from the assaults of any of the Turkish ships."
+
+Having made sure that all the captains understood the orders,
+Gervaise took command of one of the galleys,  the senior knight
+going on board the other. The ten fire ships were now poled out until
+five were ranged  abreast behind each craft; Gervaise requested the
+commander of the other galley to lie off the point of St.  Nicholas
+until he had got rid of his five fire ships, then to advance and
+launch his craft against the Turks.  The smoke of the guns lay
+so heavy on the water, and the combatants were so intent upon the
+struggle at  the breach, that Gervaise steered his galley into the
+midst of the Turkish vessels laden with troops ready to  disembark,
+without attracting any notice; then, standing upon the taffrail,
+he signalled to the two outside  boats to throw off their ropes
+and make for the Turkish ship nearest to them. This they did, and
+it was not  until a sheet of flame rose alongside, that the enemy
+awoke to the sense of danger.
+
+The other three fire ships were almost immediately cast off. Two
+of them were equally successful, but the  Turks managed to thrust
+off the third. She drifted, however, through the shipping, and
+presently brought up  alongside one of the vessels fast aground.
+With but ten knights, Gervaise could not attack one of the larger
+vessels, crowded with troops; but there were many fishing boats
+that had been pressed into the service, and  against one of these
+Gervaise ordered the men to steer the galley. A shout to the rowers
+made them  redouble their efforts. A yell of dismay arose from
+the Turkish troops as they saw the galley bearing down  upon them,
+and frantic efforts were made to row out of her way. These were in
+vain, for her sharp prow  struck them amidships, cutting the boat
+almost in two, and she sank like a stone, the galley, without a
+pause, making for another boat.
+
+Looking back, Gervaise saw that his consort was already in the
+midst of the Turks, among whom the  wildest confusion prevailed,
+each ship trying to extricate herself from the mass, upon which
+the batteries of  the fortress now concentrated their efforts. Two
+fresh columns of flame had already shot up, and satisfied  that
+all was going well, Gervaise continued his attack upon the smaller
+craft, six of whom were overtaken  and sunk. Three or four of the
+larger vessels endeavoured to lay themselves alongside the galley,
+but her  speed was so superior to theirs that she easily evaded
+the attempts, and, sweeping round, rejoined the other  galley which
+had just issued from among the Turks, who were already in full
+retreat. The defenders of St.  Nicholas, reanimated by the sight
+of the discomfiture of the Turkish fleet, with a loud shout rushed
+down  from the spot which they had held for so many hours, drove
+their assailants before them, and flung  themselves upon the crowd
+assembled at the foot of the breach.
+
+These had already suffered terribly from the fire of the batteries.
+Again and again they had striven to storm  the mound of rubbish,
+and had each time been repulsed, with the loss of their bravest
+leaders. Seeing  themselves abandoned by the ships, a panic seized
+them, and as the knights rushed down upon them they  relinquished
+all thoughts of resistance, and dashed into the shallow water.
+Many were drowned in the  attempt to swim across the deep channel
+in the middle, some succeeded, while others made their escape in
+the boats in which they had been brought ashore from the ships.
+
+The struggle was over. The two galleys made for the breach, and
+the knights leapt out as soon as the boats  grounded, and, wading
+ashore, joined the group that had so long and gallantly sustained
+the unequal fight.  Fatigue, exhaustion, and wounds, were forgotten
+in the triumph of the moment, and they crowded round the  grand
+master and Caretto, to whose joint exertions the success of the
+defence was so largely due.
+
+"Do not thank me, comrades," D'Aubusson said. "No man has today
+fought better than the rest. Every  knight has shown himself worthy
+of the fame of our Order. The meed of praise for our success is
+first due  to Sir Gervaise Tresham. At the moment when I began to
+doubt whether we could much longer withstand  the swarms of fresh
+foes who continued to pour against us, while we were overcome by
+heat and labour, Sir  Gervaise, who had throughout been fighting
+at my side, offered to swim into the port, to fit out a dozen of
+the merchant craft there as fire ships, and to tow them round into
+the midst of the Turkish vessels behind  the two galleys that were
+lying ready for service. I remembered how he had before destroyed
+the corsair  fleet at Sardinia with fire ships, and the proposal
+seemed to me as an inspiration sent from Heaven, at this  moment
+of our great peril. I wrote him an order, giving him full authority
+to act in my name, and in a time  that seemed to me incredibly
+short I saw him round the point with the fire ships in tow. You
+saw, as well as  I did, how completely the plan was carried out. Ten
+or twelve of the Turkish ships are a mass of flames,  and besides
+these I noted that the galley ran down and destroyed several smaller
+craft filled with soldiers.  The panic in the ships spread to the
+troops on shore, and rendered the last part of our task an easy
+one. I say  it from my heart that I consider it is to Sir Gervaise
+Tresham that we owe our success, and that, had it not  been for
+his happy thought, the sun would have gone down on our dead bodies
+lying on the summit of the  breach, and on the Turkish flag waving
+over the fort of St. Nicholas."
+
+Until now none of the defenders of the breach had known how what
+seemed to them an almost miraculous  change in the fortune of the
+fight had come about, and they thronged round Gervaise, shaking
+his hand, and  many of them warmly embracing him, according to the
+custom of the time.
+
+"It was but natural that the idea should occur to me," he said,
+"having before successfully encountered them  with fire ships; and
+as all on shore, and especially these knights, aided me with all
+their power, it took but a  brief time to get the boats in readiness
+for burning. Much credit, too, is due to the merchant captains
+and  sailors who volunteered to take charge of the fire ships and
+to manoeuver them alongside the Turks."
+
+The grand master and the knights who had borne the brunt of the
+battle now retired along the mole to the  town, bearing with them
+their most seriously wounded comrades, and assisting those whose
+wounds were  less severe. The twenty knights who had manned the two
+galleys remained in the fort. Caretto continued in  command, as,
+although he had suffered several wounds, he refused to relinquish
+his post. Gervaise, who  had, -- thanks partly to his skill with
+his weapons, but still more to the temper of the splendid suit of
+armour  presented to him by Genoa, -- escaped without a scratch,
+volunteered to remain with him until next  morning, his principal
+motive for making the request being his desire to escape from
+further  congratulations and praise for the success of his plan.
+After Caretto's wounds had been dressed by the  knights, and he
+and Gervaise had partaken of some food and wine, which they greatly
+needed, Caretto was  persuaded to lie down for a time, the knights
+promising to bring him word at once if they perceived any  movement
+whatever on the part of the enemy. Gervaise remained with him,
+feeling, now the excitement  was over, that he sorely needed rest
+after his exertions in the full heat of the summer sun.
+
+"It has been a great day, Gervaise," Caretto said, "and I only hope
+that when again I go into battle with the  infidel, I shall have
+you at hand to come forward at the critical moment with some master
+stroke to secure  victory. Claudia will be pleased indeed when she
+hears how the knight who bears her gage has again  distinguished
+himself. She will look on the gay and idle young fops of Genoa
+with greater disdain than  ever. Now you need not say anything in
+protest, the more so as I feel grievously weak, and disposed for
+sleep."
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXII THE STRUGGLE AT THE BREACH
+
+
+Two hours later Caretto and Gervaise were roused by the arrival of
+a hundred knights in place of the  previous garrison; these bore
+the news that the pasha had sent in a flag of truce to ask for an
+armistice until  sundown, to enable him to carry off for burial
+the bodies of those who had fallen in the attack. The request  had
+been willingly granted; but D'Aubusson had at the same time thought
+it well to send down a strong  reinforcement to the garrison to
+prevent any attempt at treachery on the part of the Turks.
+
+"I have seldom heard pleasanter news," Caretto said; "for just as
+I fell asleep I was wondering how we were  to rid ourselves of the
+corpses of the infidels. By tomorrow the place would have become
+unbearable; and  though, living, the Turks could not turn us out
+of the tower, they would when dead speedily have rid the  place of
+us."
+
+In half an hour a number of Moslem vessels were seen approaching.
+Caretto did not wish the Turks to  imagine that he doubted their
+good faith, and while directing the main body of knights to remain
+in  concealment near the breach, he placed two on sentry duty on
+the crest of the ruins, and, with four other  knights and Gervaise,
+went down in complete armour to salute the officer in command of
+the burying party,  as he landed from the boats. The ships anchored
+a short distance out, and a number of boats rowed from  them to
+the shore. As the Turkish officer landed, Caretto saluted him, and
+said in Arabic,
+
+"I give you courteous greeting, Sir. When the cannon cease to sound
+and swords are sheathed, there is no  longer animosity between brave
+men; and no braver than those whose bodies lie stretched there,
+breathed  the air of heaven.  If, sir, I and the knights with me
+do not uncover our heads, it is from no want of respect  for the
+dead, but solely because we dare not stand bareheaded under the
+fierce rays of the sun."
+
+The Turk answered with equal courtesy, complimenting the knights
+on their defence.
+
+"Had I not seen it with my own eyes," he said, "I should have deemed
+it altogether impossible that so small  a number of men could thus
+for hours have withstood the attacks of some of the best of the
+sultan's troops.  Tales have come down to us from our fathers of
+the marvellous prowess of the knights of your Order, and  how at
+Smyrna, at Acre, and elsewhere, they performed such feats of valour
+that their name is still used by  Turkish mothers as a bugbear to
+frighten their children. But the stories have always seemed to me
+incredible; now I perceive they were true, and that the present
+members of the Order in no way fall short of  the valour of their
+predecessors."
+
+The knights remained with the Turkish commander and some of his
+officers while the work of collecting  and carrying away the dead
+was performed, the conversation on their side being supported
+by Caretto and  Gervaise. No less than seven hundred bodies were
+carried down to the boats, besides a great many  wounded by the
+artillery fire.  None were, however, found breathing among the
+great pile of dead at the  upper part of the breach, for the axes
+and double handed swords of the knights had, in most of the cases,
+cleft through turban and skull.
+
+"This represents but part of our loss," the Turkish commander said
+sadly, as the last party came down with  their burdens to the boats.
+"At least as many more must have perished in the sea, either in
+their endeavours  to escape when all was lost, in the destruction
+of their vessels by fire, by the shot from your batteries, or by
+being run down by your galleys. Ah, Sir Knight, if it had not been
+for the appearance of your fire ships,  methinks the matter might
+have ended differently."
+
+"In that I altogether agree with you," Caretto said. "We were
+indeed, well nigh spent, and must have soon  succumbed had it not
+been that the fire ships arrived to our rescue. You have a fair
+right to claim that the  victory would have remained in your hands,
+had not those craft gone out and snatched it from you."
+
+Then, with salutes on both sides, the Turks took their places in the
+boats, and the knights returned to the  fort.  As soon as darkness
+came on, a large body of slaves were marched down from the town,
+and, under  the direction of the knights, laboured all night at the
+mound, removing great quantities of the fallen stones  and rubbish
+in a line halfway up it, and piling them above so as to form a
+scarp across the mound that  would need ladders to ascend. Another
+party worked at the top of the mound, and there built up a wall
+eight  feet high. The work was completed by daylight, and the
+knights felt that they were now in a position to  resist another
+attack, should Paleologus again send his troops to the assault.
+
+The night had passed quietly. There was a sound of stir and movement
+in the Turkish battery, but nothing  that would excite the suspicion
+of a large body of troops being in motion. When it became light
+it was seen  that the Turkish ships had sailed away to their
+previous anchorage on the other side of the Island, and  although
+at considerable intervals the great cannon hurled their missiles
+against the fort, it was evident that,  for the time at least, the
+attack was not to be pressed at that point. A fresh body of slaves,
+however, came  down from the town to relieve those who had been
+all night at work, and the repair of the defences was  continued,
+and with greater neatness and method than had been possible in the
+darkness.
+
+At eight o'clock the bells of St. John's Church gave notice that
+a solemn service of thanksgiving for the  repulse of the enemy was
+about to be held. Notice had been sent down early to the tower; and
+all the  knights who could be spared, without too greatly weakening
+the garrison, went up to attend it; the service  was conducted with
+all the pomp and ceremony possible, and after it was over a great
+procession was  formed to proceed to the shrine, where a picture
+of the Virgin held in special reverence by the Order was  placed.
+
+As it wound through the streets in splendid array, the grand master
+and officials in all their robes of state,  the knights in full
+armour and the mantles of the Order, while the inhabitants in gala
+costume lined the  streets, windows, and housetops, the ladies waving
+scarves and scattering flowers down on the knights, the  roar of
+great cannon on the south side of the city showed that the Turks
+had commenced the attack in  another quarter. Without pausing, the
+procession continued its way, and it was not until the service in
+the  chapel had been concluded that any steps were taken to ascertain
+the direction of the attack. As soon as it  was over, the knights
+hastened to the walls. During the night the Turks had transported
+their great basilisks,  with other large pieces of artillery, from
+the camp to the rising ground on the south side of the city, and
+had  opened fire against the wall covering the Jews' quarter, and
+at the same time against the tower of St. Mary  on the one hand
+and the Italian tower on the other.
+
+From other commanding spots huge mortars were hurling great fragments
+of rock and other missiles  broadcast into the town. The portion
+of the wall selected for the attack showed that the Turks had been
+well  informed by their spies of the weak points of the defence. The
+wall behind which the Jews' quarter lay, was,  to all appearance, of
+thick and solid masonry; but this was really of great age, having
+formed part of the  original defences of the town, before the
+Order had established itself there. The masonry, therefore, was ill
+fitted to resist the huge balls hurled against it by the basilisks.
+The langue of Provence was in charge of this  part of the wall,
+and, leaving them for the present to bear the brunt of the storm,
+the grand master sent the  knights who could be spared, to assist
+the inhabitants to erect shelters against the storm of missiles
+falling  in the town.
+
+Sheds with sharply sloping roofs, constructed of solid timber,
+were built against the inner side of the walls,  and beneath these
+numbers of the inhabitants found refuge. The work was performed with
+great celerity by  the inhabitants, aided by the gangs of slaves,
+and in two or three days the townspeople were all in shelter,
+either in these sheds, in the vaults of the churches, or in other
+strongly constructed buildings.
+
+Among the missiles hurled into the town were balls filled with Greek
+fire, but the houses being entirely  built of stone, no conflagrations
+of importance were caused by them, as a band of knights was organised
+specially to watch for these bombs, and whenever one of them was
+seen to fall, they hurried from their  lookout to the spot, with
+a gang of slaves carrying baskets of earth and buckets of water,
+and quenched the  flames before they had made any great headway.
+
+The roar of the bombardment was almost continuous, and was heard
+at islands distant from Rhodes, telling  the inhabitants how the
+battle between the Christians and the Moslems was raging.
+
+It was not long before the wall in the front of the Jews' quarter
+began to crumble, and it was soon evident  that it must, ere many
+days, succumb to the storm of missiles hurled against it. D'Aubusson
+lost no time in  making preparations to avert the danger. He
+ordered all the houses in rear of the wall to be levelled; a deep
+semicircular ditch was then dug, and behind this a new wall,
+constructed of the stones and bricks from the  houses destroyed,
+was built, and backed with an earthen rampart of great thickness
+and solidity.
+
+The work was carried on with extraordinary rapidity.  The grand
+master himself set the example, and,  throwing aside his robes and
+armour, laboured with pick and shovel like the commonest labourer.
+This  excited the people to the highest pitch of enthusiasm, and
+all classes threw themselves into the task.  Knights and slaves,
+men, women, and children, and even the inmates of the convents
+and nunneries, aided  in the work, and when at last the outer wall
+fell, and the Turks thought that success was at hand, the pasha
+saw with astonishment and dismay that entry to the city was still
+barred by a work as formidable as that  which he had destroyed
+at an enormous expenditure of ammunition. There was now a short
+breathing time  for the besieged; but the depression which the failure
+of their efforts excited among the Turks, was shortly  dispelled
+by the arrival of a ship, with a despatch from Constantinople, in
+which the pasha was informed  that the sultan himself was about to
+proceed to Rhodes with a reinforcement of a hundred thousand men,
+and a fresh park of artillery.
+
+Paleologus had some doubts as to whether the report was true or
+was merely intended to stimulate him to  new efforts for the speedy
+capture of the place. Knowing well that the grand master was the
+heart and soul  of the defence, and that the failure of the assault
+was mainly due to his energy and ability, he determined to  resort
+to the weapon so frequently in use in Eastern warfare -- that of
+assassination.  To this end he  employed two men, one a Dalmatian,
+the other an Albanian; these presented themselves before the walls
+as  deserters, and as there was no reason for suspecting their tale,
+they were admitted within the gates, and  welcomed as having escaped
+from enforced service. They soon spread the tale of the speedy
+coming of the  sultan with vast reinforcements, and as the pasha
+had on the previous day caused salutes to be fired, and  other
+demonstrations to be made, the news was readily credited, and caused
+the greatest dismay among the  defenders.
+
+Some of the knights of the Italian and Spanish langues believed
+the prospect of a successful defence against  so enormous a force
+was absolutely hopeless, and determined to put pressure upon
+D'Aubusson to treat for  surrender before it became too late. They
+opened negotiations with an Italian named Filelfo, one of  D'Aubusson's
+secretaries, who undertook to lay their opinion before the grand
+master.  D'Aubusson at once  summoned the knights concerned in
+the matter before him. They found him with several members of the
+council.
+
+"Sir Knights," he said, "I have heard from my secretary your
+opinions in the matter of a surrender, and  since you are in such
+terror of the Moslem sultan, you have my full permission to leave
+the town; and, more  than that, I will myself secure your safe
+departure, which might be imperilled if your comrades or even
+the  inhabitants of the town came to learn that you had advocated
+surrender; but," he went on, changing his tone  from that of sarcasm
+to sternness, "if you remain with us, see that the word surrender
+never again passes  your lips, and be assured that, should you
+continue your intrigues, in that direction, you shall meet with
+the  fate you so justly deserve."
+
+Overwhelmed by the grand master's accusation and sternness, the Italian
+and Spanish knights threw  themselves on their knees and implored
+him to grant them an early opportunity of retrieving their fault by
+battle with the infidel. Feeling that the lesson had been sufficiently
+severe, and that henceforth there would  be no renewal of intrigues
+for a surrender, D'Aubusson forgave them, and promised them a place
+in the van  when next the Moslems attacked.  The incident was not
+without its advantage, for the two pretended  deserters, believing
+that Filelfo, who had also fallen under the displeasure of the
+grand master, would be  ready to join in the conspiracy against
+his life, approached him. Filelfo, who was greatly attached to
+D'Aubusson, saw by their manner that they wished to engage him
+in some intrigue, and, feigning great  resentment and anger at
+his disgrace, led them on until they divulged the entire plot for
+D'Aubusson's  assassination, and made brilliant offers to him if
+he would afford them facilities for carrying it out,  producing, in
+proof of their power to do so, a letter of the pasha, authorising
+them to make such promises in  his name.
+
+Filelfo at once divulged the whole plot to D'Aubusson.  The two men
+were immediately arrested, tried by  the council, and sentenced to
+death. They were not, however, formally executed, for the populace,
+obtaining news of their treachery, broke in upon their guards,
+and tore them to pieces. Foiled in his attempt  on the life of the
+grand master, the pasha prepared for a renewal of the attack, and
+it was not long before the  knights on the lookout at the church
+of St. John perceived that the fort of St. Nicholas was again to be
+the  scene of the attack. It was ere long discovered that a large
+number of men were busy some distance along  the shore in building
+a long structure, that could only be intended for a floating bridge.
+Among the sailors  who had aided in the attack with the fire ships
+were several men belonging to an English trader in the port.  All
+who had done so had been handsomely rewarded for their conduct, and
+five of the Englishmen had  afterwards gone to the English auberge
+and had asked to be enrolled for service against the Turks, as
+they  were weary of remaining on board in idleness when there was
+work to be done. Their offer had been  accepted, and they had, in
+common with all the sailors in the port, laboured at the construction
+of the inner  wall. When that was completed, Sir John Boswell,
+under whose special charge they had been placed, said  to Gervaise,
+"I think that I cannot do better than send these men down to St.
+Nicholas. It is probable that  now the Turks see that they can do
+nothing at the new breach, they may try again there. Sailors are
+accustomed to night watches, and there are many of our knights who
+are not used to such work, and can be  better trusted to defend a
+breach than to keep a vigilant watch at night. Will you take these
+men down to  Caretto, and tell him that he can sleep soundly if
+he has a couple of them on watch? One of them, Roger  Jervis, who
+is the mate of their ship, can speak some Italian, and as he is
+in command of them, Caretto will  find no trouble in making them
+understand him."
+
+St. Nicholas had now been put into a fair state of defence, as a
+party had been kept steadily at work there.   Gervaise had not been
+to the tower since the morning after the assault, and saw with
+satisfaction how much  had been done to render it secure. He found
+that Caretto was fast recovering from his wounds.
+
+"As it seems probable, Sir Fabricius," he said, after the first
+greetings to the knight, "that the Turks will  favour you with another
+visit, I have brought you five watchdogs.  They are countrymen of
+mine, and were  among those who navigated the fire ships the other
+day. Sir John Boswell has sent them down; they are, of  course,
+accustomed to keep watch at night. One of them is mate of their
+vessel, and will be in command of  them; he speaks a little Italian,
+and so will understand any orders you may give him. I have been
+speaking  to him as we came down; he will divide his men into two
+watches, and will himself be on guard all night.   Will you assign
+them some quiet place where they can sleep in the daytime? They
+can erect a shelter with a  piece of sail cloth and a few bits of
+board, and they will, of course, be furnished with food."
+
+"I shall be very glad to have them, for I am always restless at
+night, lest those on watch should close their  eyes.  You see, they
+have quite made up their minds that this fort will not be attacked
+again, and so are less  inclined to be vigilant than they would
+be, did they think that an attack was impending."
+
+Now that there was reason to believe that St. Nicholas might again
+be attacked, Gervaise was frequently  there with orders or inquiries
+from the grand master. A number of vessels in the harbour were
+fitted up as  fire ships, so as to be in readiness when the attack
+came. He was about to start early one morning when he  saw Roger
+Jervis coming up with a heavy anchor on his shoulder.
+
+"Why, what are you bringing that up here for?" he asked. "Have you
+been diving; for I see your clothes are  dripping with water?"
+
+"Ay, ay, sir, I have been in the water, and that Italian commander
+told me to come straight up here to tell  the grand master all about
+the story; and right glad am I to have met you, for I should have
+made but a poor  fist of it alone; I don't know more of their lingo
+than just to talk a few words of it."
+
+"Then you had better tell me the story before I take you in."
+
+"Well, it was like this, Sir Knight: I had Hudson and Jeffreys
+posted upon the wall, and I thought I would  take a turn down on
+the rocks, for it was a dark night, and you can see much farther
+when you are by the  edge of the water than you can when you are
+at the masthead. I sat there for an hour, and was thinking that  it
+was about time to go up and turn out the other watch, when I saw
+something dark upon the water. It  wasn't a ship, that was certain,
+and if it was a boat there wasn't any one in it; but it was too dark
+to make  quite sure what it was. I watched it for a time, though I
+did not think much of the thing, taking it for a boat  that had got
+adrift, or maybe a barrel from one of the Turkish ships. Presently
+I made out that it was a good  bit nearer than when I first saw
+it.
+
+"That puzzled me. There is no tide to speak of in these seas, and
+there was no wind moving about. I could  make out now that it was
+a boat, though a very small one, but certainly there was no one
+rowing it. It  looked a very strange craft, and as I saw by the
+way it was bearing that it would come ashore about five or  six
+fathoms from where I was sitting, I slid quietly off the rock, put
+my sword down by me handy for  action, and waited. Presently the
+boat came up alongside the rock, and a fellow stood up from behind
+the  stern. I was glad to see him, for I had begun to think that
+there was witchcraft in the thing moving along by  itself, but I
+can tell you I was savage with myself for not having guessed there
+was a man swimming behind  and pushing it on.
+
+
+"He stooped over the boat, and took something heavy out; then
+he felt about among the rocks under the  water, and then laid the
+thing down there, and seemed to me to be settling it firm. I had
+half a mind to jump  up and let fly at him, but then I thought
+it would be better to let him finish what he was doing, and go off
+with the idea that no one had seen him. So I kept hid until he
+started again. He waded a short way before he  had to swim, and I
+could see that as he went he was paying out a rope over the stern.
+It was clear enough  now what he had been up to: he had been fixing
+an anchor. What he did it for, or what use it could be to  him, I
+could not say, but it was certain that he would not take all that
+trouble, with the chance of being  knocked on the head, for nothing;
+so I waited for a bit till he had got out of sight, and over to
+the other side  of the port.
+
+"Then I got up and felt about, and, chancing to get my foot under
+the rope, went right over into the water.  After that you may guess
+I was not long in finding the anchor. I unknotted the rope from
+it and carried it  ashore; then it struck me that the Turks might
+take it into their heads to give a pull on it in the morning, and
+if they did; they would find out that their game, whatever it was,
+had been found out; so I got hold of a  stone of about twenty pound
+weight, and fastened the rope's end round it. That was enough to
+prevent the  rope getting slack and make them think that it was
+still fast to the anchor; but, of course, if they pulled hard  on
+it it would come home directly. I went and reported the matter the
+first thing this morning to the  governor. He seemed to think that
+it was important, and told me to bring the anchor up to the grand
+master,  who would get one of the English knights to find out all
+about it; for he could not make out much of what I  said."
+
+"It is very important," Gervaise said, "and you behaved very wisely
+in the matter, and have rendered a great  service by your discovery.
+I will take you in at once to the grand master."
+
+Still bearing the anchor, the sailor followed Gervaise into an
+apartment where D'Aubusson was taking  council with some of the
+senior knights.
+
+"Pardon my interrupting your Highness," Gervaise said; "but
+the matter is so important that I knew you  would listen to it,
+however occupied you were." And he then repeated the narrative of
+the sailor's discovery.
+
+"This is indeed of the highest importance," D'Aubusson said, "and
+the knowledge that it gives us may  enable us to defeat an attempt,
+that might otherwise have proved our ruin. You see, knights, it
+solves the  question that we were just discussing. We agreed that
+this long floating bridge that they have been  constructing, was
+intended to enable them to cross the outer port and again attack
+St. Nicholas; and yet it  seemed to us that even by night our
+batteries would be able to keep up such a fire on the boats, towing
+the  head of the bridge across, as to render it well nigh impossible
+for them to get it over. Now you see what  their plan is. With the
+aid of this rope, the end of which they think is firmly fixed on
+our side, they mean to  haul the bridge across, and that so silently
+that they hope to be upon us almost before we have time to don
+our armour. We shall now be fully prepared, and need have no fear
+of the result."
+
+There could now be little doubt that the attack would be made
+without loss of time, especially as the Turks  believed that they
+could get their bridge across unseen. The fire ships -- which were
+altogether more  formidable than those Gervaise had improvised --
+were ordered to be made ready for action. This being  arranged,
+the admiral left the council at once, that no time should be lost
+in getting them in readiness.  D'Aubusson then turned to the English
+sailor.
+
+"You have rendered us a great service indeed by your vigilance, and
+showed great prudence by allowing  the Turk to believe that he had
+accomplished his mission unsuspected. Had he thought he had been
+observed, some other plan would have been adopted. For so great a
+service it is meet that a great reward  should be given."
+
+He then took a bag from the hands of one of his secretaries, whom
+he had sent to fetch it, while they were  discussing the matter of
+the fire ships.
+
+"Here are two hundred golden crowns," he added, handing the bag
+to the seaman. "With these you can  either settle on shore, or can
+build a stout ship and pursue your calling. Should you do so, call
+her the St.  Nicholas, in remembrance of the gratitude of the Order
+of St. John for your having saved that fort from the  Turks."
+
+Astonished and delighted at the reward, which represented a very
+large sum in those days, the sailor  stammered his thanks, and
+added, "I hope tonight that if I again have charge of a fire ship,
+I may be able to  do more to prove to your Highness how grateful
+I am for the gift."
+
+Throughout the day preparations for the defence of St. Nicholas
+went on unceasingly. Gangs of men, as  usual, worked in the breach;
+but, as it was deemed advisable that there should be no outward
+show of  activity that would lead the Turks to suspect that their
+design had been discovered, neither reinforcements  of men nor
+munitions were sent along the mole; everything being taken out by
+boats, which, rowing closely  along under the wall, were hidden from
+the view of the Turks. Barrels of Greek fire and pitch, cauldrons
+for  heating the latter, a store of firewood, great balls of cotton
+steeped in oil and turpentine, sheaves of darts,  spikes on short
+staves, that were, after darkness fell, to be thrust in among the
+fallen masonry to form a  chevaux-de-frise -- these, and all other
+matters that the ingenuity of the defenders could suggest, were
+landed at the water gate of the fort, while the garrison was
+strengthened by the addition of a large number  of knights.  Stores
+of ammunition were collected in readiness at all the batteries that
+commanded the mouth  of the outer port, and by sunset D'Aubusson
+felt that everything that was possible had been done to meet  the
+impending storm.
+
+At midnight the Turkish preparations were complete.  The attack
+by the bridge was to be assisted by a large  number of boats and
+other craft, and many armed galleys were also brought up to destroy
+or tow away the  defenders' fire ships.  Paleologus himself was down
+by the shore directing the preparations. Some of his  best troops
+were placed upon the floating bridge, and, when all was ready, the
+order was given to pull upon  the rope. No sooner, however, did
+the strain come upon it than there was a jerk, the rope slackened,
+and it  was at once evident that the anchor had been discovered and
+the well laid plan disconcerted.  Paleologus  was furious, but,
+believing that the attack he had arranged would still be irresistible,
+he ordered a number of  boats to take the bridge in tow, while
+a still larger force was to make a direct attack upon the breach.
+The  movement was to be conducted as silently as possible until it
+was discovered, and then a dash forward was  to be made.
+
+It was two o'clock before the fresh arrangements were completed
+and the boats put out. They had gone but  a short distance when
+the anxious watchers in St. Nicholas learnt by the dull, confused
+sound that came  across the water, that the attack was, in spite
+of the failure of the plan to take the bridge silently across, to
+be persevered in. A cannon was at once fired to give notice to the
+other batteries to be in readiness, and as  soon as the dark mass
+of boats was made out the guns of the fort opened a destructive
+fire upon them, and a  moment later were seconded by those from
+the fortress; these, however, were at present being fired almost
+at random, as the Turkish boats could not be made out at that
+distance. Now that all need for concealment  was at an end, the
+Turkish war cry rose shrilly in the air, and the boatmen bent to
+their oars. The great  cannon at St. Anthony's Church hurled their
+tremendous missiles at the tower, seconded by the fire of a  number
+of other pieces that had in the darkness been brought down almost
+to the water's edge.
+
+As before, the boats swept up to the foot of the breach, the Turks
+leaped out, and, undismayed by the storm  of shot, climbed up
+to the assault. The short ladders that they had brought with them
+enabled them to  surmount the escarpments so laboriously made,
+and with loud shouts of "Allah!" they flung themselves  upon the
+defenders on the crest of the breach. Here they were met by a line
+even more difficult to break  through than before. The knights
+were ranged three deep; those in the front were armed with swords
+and  battleaxes, while those in the other two lines thrust their
+spears out between the swordsmen, covering them  with a hedge
+of steel points. Others in the rear brought up buckets of blazing
+pitch and Greek fire, and,  advancing through gaps left for the
+purpose, hurled the buckets down into the struggling mass on the
+slope.  There the fire not only carried death among the assailants,
+but the lurid flames enabled the batteries to  direct their shot
+with terrible effect upon the breach, the crowded boats at its foot,
+and the bridge which  was, with immense labour, presently got into
+position.
+
+It was not long before fresh light was thrown upon the scene, as
+the fire ships, issuing out from the inner  harbour, burst into
+columns of flame, and, towed by boats, came into action. They
+were convoyed by the  two galleys, each with a full complement of
+knights, and these soon became engaged in a fierce fight with  the
+Turkish vessels that bore down to arrest the course of the fire
+ships. The scene was indeed a terrible  one, the roar of cannon,
+the shouts of the combatants, the screams of the poor wretches
+upon whom the  terrible Greek fire fell, the clash of arms and the
+shouts and cries of the Turks as they pressed across the  bridge,
+united in a din that thrilled with horror the spectators, both in
+the city and on St. Stephen's Hill.
+
+Several of the Turkish galleys, in their efforts to arrest the
+approach of the fire ships towards the bridge,  became themselves
+involved in the flames; but they were so far successful that when
+daylight broke the  bridge was still intact and the combat at the
+breach continued to rage with determination and fury on both  sides.
+The Turks there were led by a brave young prince named Ibrahim, a
+near relative of the sultan, with  whom he was a great favourite,
+and he was ever in the front line of the assailants, his splendid
+bravery  animating the soldiers to continue their efforts. As the
+daylight broadened out, however, the light enabled  the Christian
+gunners to aim with far greater accuracy than had before been
+possible, and, concentrating  their fire upon the bridge, across
+which reinforcements continued to press to the support of the
+assailants,  they succeeded in sinking so many of the boats that
+it was no longer passable.
+
+Next they turned their fire upon the Turkish galleys, four of which
+they sank. Shortly afterwards, a ball  struck the gallant young
+leader of the Turks, who, although previously several times wounded,
+had  continued to fight in the front line. He fell dead, and his
+followers, disheartened by his fall and by the  destruction of the
+bridge, at once abandoned their efforts, and rushed down to the
+foot of the breach. The  terrible scene enacted at the repulse of
+the previous attack was now repeated. The concentrated fire of the
+guns of the defenders carried destruction into the crowded mass.
+Some gained the boats that still remained  uninjured, and rowed
+for the opposite shore; the greater number rushed into the water
+and strove to recross  it either by swimming or by the aid of the
+debris of the shattered boats. Their total loss was greater even
+than that suffered by them in the first attack, between two and
+three thousand being either killed or  drowned, among them a number
+of their best officers. The amount of spoil, in the form of rich
+jewels and  costly gold ornaments, found on the bodies of the dead
+piled on the breach, was very great.
+
+For three days after this terrible repulse the Turks were inactive,
+the pasha remaining shut up in his tent,  refusing to see any one,
+or to issue orders. At the end of that time he roused himself from
+his stupor of grief  and disappointment, and, abandoning the idea
+of any further attack upon the point that had cost him so  dearly,
+he ordered the troops to move round and renew the attack upon the
+wall in front of the Jews'  quarter, and commence the construction
+of a battery on the edge of the great ditch facing the retrenchment
+behind the breach before effected.  The knights of Italy and Spain
+determined to seize the opportunity of  retrieving the disgrace
+that had fallen upon them. At night they descended into the deep
+cutting, carrying  across their ladders, and, silently mounting
+the opposite side, rushed with loud shouts into the unfinished
+battery. The Turks there, taken utterly by surprise, made but a
+slight resistance; a few were immediately cut  down, and the rest
+fled panic stricken.
+
+The knights at once set the woodwork of the battery on fire, hurled
+the guns down into the ditch, and then  returned triumphantly into
+the town, the dashing feat completely reinstating them in the good
+opinion of the  grand master and their comrades.
+
+The incident showed the pasha that he must neglect no precautions,
+and, accordingly, he commenced his  works at a distance from the
+walls, and pushed his approaches regularly forward until he again
+established  a battery on the site of that from which his troops
+had been so unceremoniously ejected. While forming the  approaches,
+the workmen had been constantly harassed by the fire from the
+guns on the walls, suffering  considerable loss of life; but their
+numerical superiority was so vast that the loss in no way affected
+the  plans of the pasha.
+
+As soon as the battery was completed, gangs of men, accustomed to
+mining operations, set to work in its  rear to drive sloping passages
+downwards, opening into the face of the great cutting, and through
+these vast  quantities of earth and stones were poured, so as to
+afford a passage across it, the depth being largely  diminished by
+the great pile of rubbish that had already fallen from the breached
+wall. This novel mode of  attack was altogether unexpected.  The
+knights had regarded the fosse that had been cut at such an
+enormous expenditure of labour as forming an altogether impassable
+obstruction, and were dismayed at  seeing the progress made in
+filling it up. D'Aubusson himself, full of resources as he was,
+saw that the  defence was seriously threatened, unless some plan
+of meeting this unexpected danger could be devised.
+
+He consulted Maitre Georges; but the latter could make no suggestion;
+his only advice being the erection of  a battery at a spot where
+it was almost self evident that it could be of no utility whatever.
+Other  circumstances combined to render the suspicions D'Aubusson
+had entertained of the good faith of the  renegade almost a certainty.
+Georges was seized, tried, and put to torture, and under this owned
+that he had  been sent into the town for the purpose of betraying
+it; and he was, the same day, hung in the great square.  His guilt
+must always be considered as uncertain. There was no proof against
+him, save his own confession;  and a confession extorted by torture
+is of no value whatever.  There are certainly many good grounds
+for  suspicion, but it is possible that Georges really repented
+his apostacy, and acted in good faith in deserting  the standard
+of Paleologus.  He was undoubtedly a man of altogether exceptional
+ability and acquirements,  and even the knights who have written
+accounts of the siege do justice to the fascination of his manner
+and  the charm of his conversation.
+
+D'Aubusson now set to work in another direction to counteract the
+efforts of the Turks. He erected an  immense wooden catapult, which
+threw huge pieces of rock into the midst of the Turkish works,
+crushing  down the wooden screens erected to hide their approaches,
+breaking in the covered ways, and causing great  loss of life
+among the besiegers. At the same time galleries were driven below
+the breach, opening into the  ditch, where their exits were concealed
+by masses of rubbish. Through these strong working parties issued
+out at night, and carried away up the passages the rocks and other
+materials that the Turks had, during the  day, brought, with immense
+labour, from a distance to the shoot. The materials so carried
+away were piled  up behind the retrenchment, greatly adding to its
+thickness and strength.
+
+For some days the Turks observed, to their astonishment, that
+the road they were constructing across the  ditch was diminishing
+instead of increasing in bulk, and at length it became so evident
+that the garrison  were in some way removing the materials, that
+the pasha determined to deliver the assault before the heap  was
+so far diminished as to become impassable. His former defeats had,
+however, taught him that success  could not be always calculated
+upon, however good its prospect might appear; and although he had
+no real  hope that the defenders would yield, he sent a formal
+summons for them to do so. This was refused with  disdain, and
+preparations were at once made for the assault.
+
+The pasha promised to his soldiers the sack of the town and all
+the booty captured, and so assured were  they of success that sacks
+were made to carry off the plunder.  Stakes, on which the knights,
+when taken  prisoners, were to be impaled, were prepared and
+sharpened, and each soldier carried a coil of rope with  which to
+secure his captive.
+
+Before ordering the assault, the way was prepared for it by a
+terrible fire from every siege gun of the Turks.  This was kept up
+for twenty-four hours, and so tremendous was the effect that the
+knights were unable to  remain on the ramparts. The Turkish troops
+moved into position for attack, their movements being covered  by
+the roar of the guns, and soon after sunrise on the 22nd of July
+the signal was given, and at a number of  different points the
+Turks rushed to the assault. All these attacks, save that on the
+breach, were merely  feints, to distract the attention of the garrison,
+and to add to the confusion caused by this sudden and  unexpected
+onslaught. The pasha's plans were well designed and carried out;
+the knights, unable to keep  their places on the ramparts under the
+storm of missiles, had retired to shelter behind the walls. There
+was  no thought of an instant assault, as they considered that
+this would not be delivered until the new wall  behind the breach
+had been demolished.
+
+Consequently, the rush of the Turks found the defenders altogether
+unprepared. Swarming across the mass  of debris in the ditch, they
+ascended the breach without opposition, and their scaling ladders
+were placed  against the new wall before the knights could hurry
+up to its defence. Even before the alarm was given in  the town,
+the Turkish standard was waving on the parapet, and the Moslems
+were crowding on to the wall  in vast numbers.  The suddenness of
+the attack, the complete surprise, the sound of battle at various
+points  around the walls, caused for a time confusion and dismay
+among the knights charged with the defence of  the wall facing the
+breach. Roused by the uproar, the inhabitants of the town rushed
+up to their roofs to  ascertain what was happening, and their cries
+of wild terror and alarm at seeing the Turkish banner on the  walls
+added to the confusion. D'Aubusson sprang up from the couch, on
+which he had thrown himself in  full armour, at the first sound of
+the alarm, and, sending off messages to all the auberges to summon
+every  man to the defence, ran down into the town, followed by a
+small party of knights.
+
+Rushing through the streets, now filled with half dressed people
+wild with terror, he reached the foot of the  wall, whose summit
+was crowded with the enemy, and saw in an instant that all was lost
+unless they could  be driven thence without delay. The effect of
+his presence was instantaneous. The knights, hitherto  confused
+and dismayed, rallied at once, and prepared for the desperate
+undertaking. The bank on the inside  was almost perpendicular, and
+those charged with its defence had used two or three ladders for
+ascending  to the rampart. These were at once seized and planted
+against the wall.
+
+The position of the contending parties was now reversed; the Christians
+were the assailants, the Turks the  defenders. D'Aubusson himself
+was the first to ascend.  Covering his head with his shield, he
+mounted the  rampart; but ere he could gain a footing on the top
+he was severely wounded and hurled backwards. Again  he made the
+attempt, but was again wounded and thrown down. Once more he mounted,
+and this time made  good his footing. A moment later, Gervaise, who
+had accompanied him from the palace, stood beside him.  Animated
+with the same spirit as his leader, he threw himself recklessly
+against the Turks, using a short,  heavy mace, which in a melee
+was far more useful than the long sword. Scimitars clashed upon
+his helmet  and armour; but at every blow he struck a Turk fell,
+and for each foot he gained a knight sprang on to the  wall and
+joined him. Each moment their number increased, and the war cry of
+the Order rose louder and  fiercer above the din. The very number
+of the Turks told against them.  Crowded together as they were they
+could not use their weapons effectually, and, pressing fiercely
+upon them, the knights drove them back  along the wall on either
+hand, hurling them down into the street or over the rampart. On
+so narrow a field of  battle the advantage was all on the side of
+the knights, whose superior height and strength, and the  protection
+afforded by their armour, rendered them almost invincible, nerved
+as they were with fury at the  surprise that had overtaken them,
+and the knowledge that the fate of the city depended upon their
+efforts.  After a quarter of an hour's desperate conflict the Turks
+were driven down the partial breach effected in the  wall by the
+last bombardment, and the Christians were again the masters of their
+ramparts. Paleologus,  however, hurried up reinforcements, headed
+by a band of janissaries, whose valour had decided many an  obstinate
+conflict. Before ordering them to advance, he gave instructions to
+a company of men of approved  valour to devote all their efforts to
+attacking D'Aubusson himself, whose mantle and rich armour rendered
+him a conspicuous object among the defenders of the breach. Advancing
+to the attack, the janissaries burst  through the mass of Turks
+still continuing the conflict, and rushed up the breach. Then the
+chosen band,  separating from the rest, flung themselves upon the
+grand master, the suddenness and fury of their attack  isolating
+him and Gervaise from the knights around.
+
+Surrounded as he was by foes, already suffering from two severe
+wounds and shaken by his falls from the  ladder, the grand master
+yet made a valiant defence in front, while Gervaise, hurling his
+mace into the face  of one of his assailants, and drawing his two
+handed sword, covered him from the attack from behind.  D'Aubusson
+received two more severe wounds, but still fought on. Gervaise,
+while in the act of cutting  down an assailant, heard a shout of
+triumph from behind, and, looking round, he saw the grand master
+sinking to the ground from another wound. With a cry of grief and
+fury Gervaise sprang to him, receiving  as he did so several blows
+on his armour and shield intended for the fallen knight, and,
+standing across him,  showered his blows with such strength and
+swiftness that the janissaries shrank back before the sweep of
+the flashing steel. More than one who tried to spring into close
+quarters fell cleft to the chin, and, ere his  assailants could
+combine for a general rush, a body of knights, who had just beaten
+off their assailants, fell  upon the ranks of the janissaries with
+a force and fury there was no withstanding, and the chosen troops
+of  the sultan for the first time broke and fled.
+
+Excited almost to madness by the sight of their beloved master
+stretched bleeding on the ground, the  knights dashed down the
+breach in eager pursuit. This action was decisive of the fate of
+the struggle. The  panic among the janissaries at once spread, and
+the main body of troops, who had hitherto valiantly striven  to
+regain the advantage snatched from them, now lost heart and fled
+in confusion.  But their escape was  barred by the great body of
+reinforcements pressing forward across the heap of rubbish that
+formed the  breach over the deep ditch. Maddened by fear, the
+fugitives strove to cut a way through their friends.  The  whole of
+the defenders of the breach now fell upon the rear of the struggling
+mass, hewing them down  almost without resistance, while the
+cannon from the walls and towers kept up an unceasing fire until
+the  last survivors of what had become a massacre, succeeded in
+gaining their works beyond the ditch, and fled  to their camp. From
+every gateway and postern the knights now poured out, and, gathering
+together,  advanced to the attack of St. Stephen's Hill. They met
+with but a faint resistance. The greater portion of the  disorganised
+troops had made no pause at their camp, but had continued their
+headlong flight to the  harbour, where their ships were moored,
+Paleologus himself, heartbroken and despairing at his failure,
+sharing their flight. The camp, with all its rich booty and the
+great banner of the pasha, fell into the hands  of the victors,
+who, satisfied with their success, and exhausted by their efforts,
+made no attempt to follow  the flying foe, or to hinder their
+embarkation; for even now the Turks, enormously outnumbering them as
+they did, might be driven by despair to a resistance so desperate
+as once again to turn the tide of victory.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIII THE REWARD OF VALOUR
+
+
+Gervaise knew nothing at the time of the final result of the battle,
+for as soon as the knights had burst  through the circle of his
+opponents, he sank insensible on the body of the grand master. When
+he came to  himself, he was lying on a bed in the hospital of the
+Order.  As soon as he moved, Ralph Harcourt, who  was, with other
+knights, occupied in tending the wounded, came to his bedside.
+"Thank God that you are  conscious again, Gervaise! They told me
+that it was but faintness and loss of blood, and that none of your
+wounds were likely to prove mortal, and for the last twelve hours
+they have declared that you were asleep:  but you looked so white
+that I could not but fear you would never wake again."
+
+"How is the grand master?" Gervaise asked eagerly.  Ralph shook
+his head.
+
+"He is wounded sorely, Gervaise, and the leech declares that one
+at least of his wounds is mortal; still, I  cannot bring myself to
+believe that so great a hero will be taken away in the moment of
+victory, after  having done such marvels for the cause not only of
+the Order, but of all Christendom."
+
+"Then you beat them back again from the breach?" Gervaise said.
+
+"That was not all. They were in such confusion that we sallied
+out, captured their camp, with the pasha's  banner and an enormous
+quantity of spoil, and pursued them to their harbour. Then we halted,
+fearing that  they might in their desperation turn upon us, and,
+terribly weakened as we were by our losses, have again  snatched
+the victory from our grasp. So we let them go on board their ships
+without interference, and this  morning there is not a Turkish sail
+in sight. The inhabitants are well nigh mad with joy. But elated
+as we  are at our success, our gladness is sorely damped by the
+state of the grand master, and the loss of so many  of our comrades,
+though, indeed, our langue has suffered less than any of the others,
+for the brunt of the  attacks on St.  Nicholas and the breach did
+not fall upon us, still we lost heavily when at last we hurried up
+to win back the wall from them."
+
+"Who have fallen?" Gervaise asked.
+
+"Among the principal knights are Thomas Ben, Henry Haler, Thomas
+Ploniton, John Vaquelin, Adam  Tedbond, Henry Batasbi, and Henry
+Anlui. Marmaduke Lumley is dangerously wounded. Of the younger
+knights, some fifteen have been killed, and among them your old
+enemy Rivers. He died a coward's death,  the only one, thank God,
+of all our langue. When the fray was thickest Sir John Boswell
+marked him  crouching behind the parapet. He seized him by the
+gorget, and hauled him out, but his knees shook so that  he could
+scarcely walk, and would have slunk back when released. Sir John
+raised his mace to slay him as a  disgrace to the Order and our
+langue, when a ball from one of the Turkish cannon cut him well
+nigh in half,  so that he fell by the hands of the Turks, and not
+by the sword of one of the Order he had disgraced.  Fortunately
+none, save half a dozen knights of our langue, saw the affair,
+and you may be sure we shall say  nothing about it; and instead of
+Rivers' name going down to infamy, it will appear in the list of
+those who  died in the defence of Rhodes."
+
+"May God assoil his soul!" Gervaise said earnestly. "'Tis strange that
+one of gentle blood should have  proved a coward. Had he remained
+at home, and turned courtier, instead of entering the Order, he
+might  have died honoured, without any one ever coming to doubt
+his courage."
+
+"He would have turned out bad whatever he was," Ralph said
+contemptuously; "for my part, I never saw a  single good quality
+in him."
+
+Long before Gervaise was out of hospital, the glad tidings that
+D'Aubusson would recover, in spite of the  prognostications of
+the leech, spread joy through the city, and at about the same time
+that Gervaise left the  hospital the grand master was able to sit
+up. Two or three days afterwards he sent for Gervaise.
+
+"I owe my life to you, Sir Gervaise," he said, stretching out his
+thin, white hand to him as he entered. "You  stood by me nobly
+till I fell, for, though unable to stand, I was not unconscious,
+and saw how you stood  above me and kept the swarming Moslems at
+bay. No knight throughout the siege has rendered such great  service
+as you have done.  Since I have been lying unable to move, I have
+thought of many things; among  them, that I had forgotten to give
+you the letters and presents that came for you after you sailed
+away. They  are in that cabinet; please bring them to me.  There,"
+he said, as Gervaise brought a bulky parcel which the  grand master
+opened, "this letter is from the Holy Father himself. That, as you
+may see from the arms on  the seal, is from Florence. The others
+are from Pisa, Leghorn, and Naples. Rarely, Sir Gervaise, has any
+potentate or knight earned the thanks of so many great cities.
+These caskets accompanied them. Sit down  and read your letters.
+They must be copied in our records."
+
+Gervaise first opened the one from the Pope. It was written by his
+own hand, and expressed his thanks as a  temporal sovereign for the
+great benefit to the commerce of his subjects by the destruction
+of the corsair  fleet, and as the head of the Christian Church
+for the blow struck at the Moslems. The other three letters  were
+alike in character, expressing the gratitude of the cities for
+their deliverance from the danger, and of  their admiration for the
+action by which a fleet was destroyed with a single galley.  Along
+with the letter  from Pisa was a casket containing a heavy gold
+chain set with gems. Florence sent a casket containing a  document
+bestowing upon him the freedom of the city, and an order upon the
+treasury for five thousand  ducats that had been voted to him by
+the grand council of the Republic; while Ferdinand, King of Naples,
+bestowed on him the grand cross of the Order of St. Michael.
+
+"The armour I had hung up in the armoury, where it has been carefully
+kept clean. I guessed what it was by  the weight of the case when
+it came, and thought it best to open it, as it might have got spoilt
+by rust. It is a  timely gift, Sir Gervaise, for the siege has
+played havoc with the suit Genoa gave you; it is sorely battered,
+dinted, and broken, and, although you can doubtless get it repaired,
+if I were you I would keep it in its  present state as a memorial
+-- and there could be no prouder one -- of the part you bore in
+the siege.  I have  seen Caretto this morning. He sails for Genoa
+tomorrow, where he will, I hope, soon recover his strength,  for
+the wounds he received at St. Nicholas have healed but slowly.  He
+said" -- and a momentary smile  crossed the grand master's face --
+"that he thought a change might benefit you also, for he was sure
+that the  air here had scarce recovered from the taint of blood.
+Therefore, here is a paper granting you three months'  leave. His
+commandery is a pleasant one, and well situated on the slopes of
+the hills; and the fresh air will,  doubtless, speedily set you up.
+I should like nothing better than a stay there myself, but there
+is much to do  to repair the damages caused by the siege, and to
+place the city in a state of defence should the Turks again  lay
+siege to it; and methinks Mahomet will not sit down quietly under
+the heavy reverse his troops have met  with."
+
+"But I should be glad to stay here to assist in the work, your
+Highness."
+
+"There are plenty of knights to see to that," D'Aubusson replied,
+"and it will be long before you are fit for  such work.  No, I
+give my orders for you to proceed with Caretto to Genoa -- unless,
+indeed, you would  prefer to go to some other locality to recruit
+your strength."
+
+"I would much rather go with Sir Fabricius, your Highness, than to
+any place where I have no  acquaintances.  I have a great esteem
+and respect for him."
+
+"He is worthy of it; there is no nobler knight in the Order, and,
+had I fallen, none who could more  confidently have been selected
+to fill my place. He has an equally high opinion of you, and spoke
+long and  earnestly concerning you."
+
+A fortnight later the ship carrying the two knights arrived at
+Genoa.
+
+"I will go ashore at once, Gervaise," Caretto said. "I know not
+whether my cousin is in the city or on her  estate; if the former,
+I will stay with her for a day or two before going off to my
+commandery, and of  course you will also be her guest. I hope she
+will be here, for methinks we shall both need to refit our  wardrobes
+before we are fit to appear in society."
+
+"Certainly I shall," Gervaise agreed; "for, indeed, I find that
+my gala costume suffered a good deal during  my long absence; and,
+moreover, although I have not increased in height, I have broadened
+out a good deal  since I was here two years ago."
+
+"Yes; you were a youth then, Gervaise, and now you are a man, and
+one of no ordinary strength and size.  The sun of Tripoli, and your
+labours during the siege, have added some years to your appearance.
+You are,  I think, little over twenty, but you look two or three
+years older.  The change is even greater in your manner  than in
+your appearance; you were then new to command, doubtful as to your
+own powers, and diffident  with those older than yourself. Now for
+two years you have thought and acted for yourself, and have shown
+yourself capable of making a mark even among men like the knights
+of St. John, both in valour and in  fitness to command. You saved
+St. Nicholas, you saved the life of the grand master; and in the
+order of the  day he issued on the morning we left, granting you
+three months' leave for the recovery of your wounds, he  took the
+opportunity of recording, in the name of the council and himself,
+their admiration for the services  rendered by you during the siege,
+and his own gratitude for saving his life when he lay helpless
+and  surrounded by the Moslems -- a testimony of which any knight
+of Christendom might well feel proud."
+
+It was three hours before Caretto returned to the ship.
+
+"My cousin is at home, and will be delighted to see you. I am sorry
+that I have kept you waiting so long,  but at present Genoa, and,
+indeed, all Europe, is agog at the news of the defeat of the Turks,
+and Italy  especially sees clearly enough that, had Rhodes fallen,
+she would have been the next object of attack by  Mahomet; therefore
+the ladies would not hear of my leaving them until I had told them
+something at least  of the events of the siege, and also how it
+came about that you were there to share in the defence. I see that
+you are ready to land; therefore, let us be going at once.  Most
+of the people will be taking their siesta at  present, and we shall
+get through the streets without being mobbed; for I can assure
+you that the mantle of  the Order is just at present in such high
+favour that I had a hard task to wend my way through the streets
+to  my cousin's house."
+
+On arriving at the palace of the Countess of Forli, Gervaise was
+surprised at the change that had taken place  in the Lady Claudia.
+From what Caretto had said, he was prepared to find that she had
+grown out of her  girlhood, and had altered much. She had, however,
+changed even more than he had expected, and had  become, he thought,
+the fairest woman that he had ever seen. The countess greeted him
+with great  cordiality; but Claudia came forward with a timidity
+that contrasted strangely with the outspoken frankness  he remembered
+in the girl. For a time they all chatted together of the events of
+the siege, and of his  captivity.
+
+"The news that you had been captured threw quite a gloom over us,
+Sir Gervaise," the countess said. "We at  first consoled ourselves
+with the thought that you would speedily be ransomed; but when
+months passed  by, and we heard that all the efforts of the grand
+master had failed to discover where you had been taken, I  should
+have lost all hope had it not been that my cousin had returned after
+an even longer captivity among  the Moors. I am glad to hear that
+you did not suffer so many hardships as he did."
+
+"I am in no way to be pitied, Countess," Gervaise said lightly.
+"I had a kind master for some months, and  was treated as a friend
+rather than as a slave; afterwards, I had the good fortune to be
+made the head of the  labourers at the buildings in the sultan's
+palace, and although I certainly worked with them, the labour was
+not greater than one could perform without distress, and I had
+naught to complain of as to my condition."
+
+After talking for upwards of an hour, the countess told Caretto
+that she had several matters on which she  needed his counsel, and
+retired with him to the next room of the suite opening from the
+apartment in which  they had been sitting. For a minute or two the
+others sat silent, and then Claudia said,
+
+"You have changed much since I saw you last, Sir Gervaise. Then it
+seemed to me scarcely possible that  you could have performed the
+feat of destroying the corsair fleet; now it is not so difficult
+to understand."
+
+"I have widened out a bit, Lady Claudia. My moustache is really a
+moustache, and not a pretence at one;  otherwise I don't feel that
+I have changed. The alteration in yourself is infinitely greater."
+
+"I, too, have filled out," she said, with a smile. "I was a thin girl
+then -- all corners and angles. No, I don' t  want any compliments,
+of which, to tell you the truth, I am heartily sick. And so,"
+she went on in a softer  tone, "you have actually brought my gage
+home! Oh, Sir Gervaise," -- and her eyes filled with tears -- "my
+cousin has told me! How could you have been so foolish as to remain
+voluntarily in captivity, that you  might recover the gage a child
+had given you?"
+
+"Not a child, Lady Claudia. A girl not yet a woman, I admit; yet
+it was not given in the spirit of a young  girl, but in that of
+an earnest woman. I had taken a vow never to part with it, as you
+had pledged yourself to  bestow no similar favour upon any other
+knight. I was confident that you would keep your vow; and  although
+in any case, as a true knight, I was bound to preserve your gift,
+still more so was I bound by the  thought of the manner in which
+you had presented it to me."
+
+"But I could not have blamed you -- I should never have dreamt of
+blaming you," she said earnestly, "for  losing it as you did."
+
+"I felt sure, Lady Claudia, that had it been absolutely beyond
+my power to regain it you would not have  blamed me; but it was
+not beyond my power, and that being so had I been obliged to wait
+for ten years,  instead of two, I would not have come back to you
+without it. Moreover, you must remember that I prized it  beyond
+all things. I had often scoffed at knights of an order like ours
+wearing ladies' favours. I had always  thought it absurd that we,
+pledged as we are, should thus declare ourselves admirers of one
+woman more  than another. But this seemed to me a gage of another
+kind; it was too sacred to be shown or spoken of, and  I only
+mentioned it to Caretto as he cross questioned me as to why I refused
+the offer of ransom; and should  not have done so then, had he not
+been present when it was bestowed. I regarded it not as a lightly
+given  favour, the result of a passing fancy by one who gave favours
+freely, but as a pledge of friendship and as a  guerdon for what
+I had done, and therefore, more to be honoured than the gifts of a
+Republic freed from a  passing danger. Had you then been what you
+are now, I might have been foolish enough to think of it in  another
+light, regardless of the fact that you are a rich heiress of one of
+the noblest families in Italy, and I a  knight with no possessions
+save my sword."
+
+"Say not so, Sir Gervaise," she said impetuously. "Are you not a
+knight on whom Genoa and Florence have  bestowed their citizenship,
+whom the Holy Father himself has thanked, who has been honoured
+by Pisa,  and whom Ferdinand of Naples has created a Knight of the
+Grand Cross of St. Michael, whom the grand  master has singled out
+for praise among all the valiant knights of the Order of St. John,
+who, as my cousin  tells me, saved him and the fort he commanded
+from capture, and who stood alone over the fallen grand  master,
+surrounded by a crowd of foes. How can you speak of yourself as a
+simple knight?"
+
+Then she stopped, and sat silent for a minute, while a flush of
+colour mounted to her cheeks.
+
+"Give me my gage again, Sir Gervaise," she said gently.  In silence
+Gervaise removed it from his neck,  wondering greatly what could
+be her intention. She turned it over and over in her hand.
+
+"Sir Knight," she said, "this was of no great value in my eyes when
+I bestowed it upon you; it was a gage,  and not a gift. Now it is
+to me of value beyond the richest gem on earth; it is a proof of the
+faith and loyalty  of the knight I most esteem and honour, and so
+in giving it to you again, I part with it with a pang, for I  have
+far greater reason to prize it than you can have. I gave it you
+before as a girl, proud that a knight who  had gained such honour
+and applause should wear her favour, and without the thought that
+the trinket was a  heart. I give it to you now as a woman, far
+prouder than before that you should wear her gage, and not blind
+to the meaning of the emblem."
+
+Gervaise took her hand as she fastened it round his neck, and
+kissed it; then, still holding it, he said, "Do  you know what you
+are doing, Claudia? You are raising hopes that I have never been
+presumptuous enough  to cherish."
+
+"I cannot help that," she said softly. "There is assuredly no
+presumption in the hope."
+
+He paused a moment.
+
+"You would not esteem me," he said, holding both her hands now,
+"were I false to my vows. I will return to  Rhodes tomorrow, and
+ask the grand master to forward to the Pope and endorse my petition,
+that I may be  released from my vows to the Order. I cannot think
+that he or the Holy Father will refuse my request. Then,  when I
+am free, I can tell you how I love and honour you, and how, as I
+have in the past devoted my life to  the Order, so I will in the
+future devote it to your happiness."
+
+The girl bowed her head.
+
+"'Tis right it should be so," she said. "I have waited, feeling
+in my heart that the vow I had given would  bind me for life, and
+I should be content to wait years longer if needs be. But I am bound
+by no vows, and  can acknowledge that you have long been the lord
+of my life, and that so long as you wore the heart I had  given
+you, so long would I listen to the wooing of no other."
+
+"I fear that the Countess, your mother -- " Gervaise began, but
+she interrupted him.
+
+"You need not fear," she said. "My mother has long known, and knowing
+also that I am not given to  change, has ceased to importune me
+to listen to other offers. Her sole objection was that you might
+never  return from captivity. Now that you have come back with
+added honours, she will not only offer no  objection, but will, I
+am sure, receive you gladly, especially as she knows that my cousin
+Sir Fabricius, for  whom she has the greatest affection, holds you
+in such high esteem."
+
+Six months later Gervaise again landed at Genoa, after having stayed
+at Rome for a few days on his way  back.  D'Aubusson had expressed
+no surprise at his return to Rhodes, or at the request he made.
+
+"Caretto prepared me for this," he said, smiling, "when he asked
+me if you might accompany him to Genoa.  The Order will be a loser,
+for you would assuredly have risen to the grand priorage of your
+langue some  day. But we have no right to complain; you have done
+your duty and more, and I doubt not that should  Mahomet again lay
+siege to Rhodes, we may count on your hastening here to aid us?"
+
+"That assuredly you may, sir. Should danger threaten, my sword
+will be as much at the service of the Order  as if I were still a
+member of it."
+
+"I by no means disapprove," D'Aubusson went on, "of knights leaving
+us when they have performed their  active service, for in civil life
+they sometimes have it in their power to render better service to
+the Order  than if passing their lives in the quiet duties of a
+provincial commandery. It will be so in your case: the lady  is a
+great heiress, and, as the possessor of wide lands, your influence
+in Northern Italy may be very  valuable to us, and in case of need
+you will, like my brother De Monteuil, be able to bring a gathering
+of  men-at-arms to our aid. Have no fear that the Pope will refuse
+to you a release from your vows. My  recommendation alone would be
+sufficient; but as, moreover, he is himself under an obligation to
+you, he  will do so without hesitation.  Since you have been away,
+your friend Harcourt has been appointed a  commander of a galley,
+and Sir John Boswell, being incapacitated by the grievous wounds
+he received  during the siege, has accepted a rich commandery in
+England, and sailed but two days since to take up his  charge.  By
+the way, did you reply to those letters expressing your thanks and
+explaining your long  silence?"
+
+"Yes, your Highness, I wrote the same evening you gave them to me."
+
+"That is right. The money voted you by Florence will be useful to
+you now, and there is still a sum sent by  your commandery owing
+to you by the treasury. I will give you an order for it. However
+rich an heiress a  knight may win, 'tis pleasant for him to have
+money of his own; not that you will need it greatly, for,  among
+the presents you have received, the jewels are valuable enough for
+a wedding gift to a princess."
+
+Gervaise was well received at Rome, and the Pope, after reading
+the grand master's letter, and learning  from him his reason for
+wishing to leave the Order, without hesitation granted him absolution
+from his  vows. A few months later there was a grand wedding at the
+cathedral of Genoa, the doge and all the nobles  of the Republic
+being present.
+
+Ralph Harcourt and nine other young knights had accompanied Gervaise
+from Rhodes by the permission,  and indeed at the suggestion, of
+the grand master, who was anxious to show that Gervaise had his
+full  approval and countenance in leaving the Order. Caretto, who
+had been appointed grand prior of Italy, had  brought the knights
+from all the commanderies in the northern republics to do honour to
+the occasion, and  the whole, in their rich armour and the mantles
+of the Order, made a distinguishing feature in the scene.
+
+The defeat of the Turks created such enthusiasm throughout Europe
+that when the grand prior of England  laid before the king letters
+he had received from the grand master and Sir John Kendall, speaking
+in the  highest terms of the various great services Gervaise had
+rendered to the Order, Edward granted his request  that the act of
+attainder against Sir Thomas Tresham and his descendants should be
+reversed and the estates  restored to Gervaise. The latter made,
+with his wife, occasional journeys to England, staying a few months
+on his estates in Kent; and as soon as his second son became old
+enough, he sent him to England to be  educated, and settled the estate
+upon him. He himself had but few pleasant memories of England; he
+had  spent indeed but a very short time there before he entered the
+house of the Order in Clerkenwell, and that  time had been marked
+by constant anxiety, and concluded with the loss of his father.
+The great estates that  were now his in Italy demanded his full
+attention, and, as one of the most powerful nobles of Genoa, he
+had  come to take a prominent part in the affairs of the Republic.
+
+He was not called upon to fulfil his promise to aid in the defence
+of Rhodes, for the death of Mahomet just  at the time when he was
+preparing a vast expedition against it, freed the Island for a long
+time from fear of  an invasion.  From time to time they received
+visits from Ralph Harcourt, who, after five years longer  service
+at Rhodes, received a commandery in England. He held it a few years
+only, and then returned to the  Island, where he obtained a high
+official appointment.
+
+In 1489 Sir John Boswell became bailiff of the English langue,
+and Sir Fabricius Caretto was in 1513  elected grand master of the
+Order, and held the office eight years, dying in 1521.
+
+When, in 1522, forty-two years after the first siege, Rhodes was
+again beleaguered, Gervaise, who had, on  the death of the countess,
+become Count of Forli, raised a large body of men-at-arms, and
+sent them, under  the command of his eldest son, to take part in
+the defence. His third son had, at the age of sixteen, entered  the
+Order, and rose to high rank in it.
+
+The defence, though even more obstinate and desperate than the
+first, was attended with less success, for  after inflicting enormous
+losses upon the great army, commanded by the Sultan Solyman himself,
+the town  was forced to yield; for although the Grand Master
+L'Isle Adam, and most of his knights, would have  preferred to bury
+themselves beneath the ruins rather than yield, they were deterred
+from doing so, by the  knowledge that it would have entailed the
+massacre of the whole of the inhabitants, who had throughout the
+siege fought valiantly in the defence of the town. Solyman had
+suffered such enormous losses that he was  glad to grant favourable
+conditions, and the knights sailed away from the city they had held
+so long and  with such honour, and afterwards established themselves
+in Malta, where they erected another stronghold,  which in the end
+proved an even more valuable bulwark to Christendom than Rhodes had
+been. There were  none who assisted more generously and largely, by
+gifts of money, in the establishment of the Order at  Malta than
+Gervaise. His wife, while she lived, was as eager to aid in the
+cause as he was himself, holding  that it was to the Order she owed
+her husband. And of all their wide possessions there were none so
+valued  by them both, as the little coral heart set in pearls that
+she, as a girl, had given him, and he had so faithfully  brought
+back to her.
+
+
+
+THE END
+
+
+
+
+*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK, A KNIGHT OF THE WHITE CROSS ***
+
+This file should be named kniwc10.txt or kniwc10.zip
+Corrected EDITIONS of our eBooks get a new NUMBER, kniwc11.txt
+VERSIONS based on separate sources get new LETTER, kniwc10a.txt
+
+Project Gutenberg eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the US
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we usually do not
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+We are now trying to release all our eBooks one year in advance
+of the official release dates, leaving time for better editing.
+Please be encouraged to tell us about any error or corrections,
+even years after the official publication date.
+
+Please note neither this listing nor its contents are final til
+midnight of the last day of the month of any such announcement.
+The official release date of all Project Gutenberg eBooks is at
+Midnight, Central Time, of the last day of the stated month.  A
+preliminary version may often be posted for suggestion, comment
+and editing by those who wish to do so.
+
+Most people start at our Web sites at:
+http://gutenberg.net or
+http://promo.net/pg
+
+These Web sites include award-winning information about Project
+Gutenberg, including how to donate, how to help produce our new
+eBooks, and how to subscribe to our email newsletter (free!).
+
+
+Those of you who want to download any eBook before announcement
+can get to them as follows, and just download by date.  This is
+also a good way to get them instantly upon announcement, as the
+indexes our cataloguers produce obviously take a while after an
+announcement goes out in the Project Gutenberg Newsletter.
+
+http://www.ibiblio.org/gutenberg/etext03 or
+ftp://ftp.ibiblio.org/pub/docs/books/gutenberg/etext03
+
+Or /etext02, 01, 00, 99, 98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90
+
+Just search by the first five letters of the filename you want,
+as it appears in our Newsletters.
+
+
+Information about Project Gutenberg (one page)
+
+We produce about two million dollars for each hour we work.  The
+time it takes us, a rather conservative estimate, is fifty hours
+to get any eBook selected, entered, proofread, edited, copyright
+searched and analyzed, the copyright letters written, etc.   Our
+projected audience is one hundred million readers.  If the value
+per text is nominally estimated at one dollar then we produce $2
+million dollars per hour in 2002 as we release over 100 new text
+files per month:  1240 more eBooks in 2001 for a total of 4000+
+We are already on our way to trying for 2000 more eBooks in 2002
+If they reach just 1-2% of the world's population then the total
+will reach over half a trillion eBooks given away by year's end.
+
+The Goal of Project Gutenberg is to Give Away 1 Trillion eBooks!
+This is ten thousand titles each to one hundred million readers,
+which is only about 4% of the present number of computer users.
+
+Here is the briefest record of our progress (* means estimated):
+
+eBooks Year Month
+
+    1  1971 July
+   10  1991 January
+  100  1994 January
+ 1000  1997 August
+ 1500  1998 October
+ 2000  1999 December
+ 2500  2000 December
+ 3000  2001 November
+ 4000  2001 October/November
+ 6000  2002 December*
+ 9000  2003 November*
+10000  2004 January*
+
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been created
+to secure a future for Project Gutenberg into the next millennium.
+
+We need your donations more than ever!
+
+As of February, 2002, contributions are being solicited from people
+and organizations in: Alabama, Alaska, Arkansas, Connecticut,
+Delaware, District of Columbia, Florida, Georgia, Hawaii, Illinois,
+Indiana, Iowa, Kansas, Kentucky, Louisiana, Maine, Massachusetts,
+Michigan, Mississippi, Missouri, Montana, Nebraska, Nevada, New
+Hampshire, New Jersey, New Mexico, New York, North Carolina, Ohio,
+Oklahoma, Oregon, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, South Carolina, South
+Dakota, Tennessee, Texas, Utah, Vermont, Virginia, Washington, West
+Virginia, Wisconsin, and Wyoming.
+
+We have filed in all 50 states now, but these are the only ones
+that have responded.
+
+As the requirements for other states are met, additions to this list
+will be made and fund raising will begin in the additional states.
+Please feel free to ask to check the status of your state.
+
+In answer to various questions we have received on this:
+
+We are constantly working on finishing the paperwork to legally
+request donations in all 50 states.  If your state is not listed and
+you would like to know if we have added it since the list you have,
+just ask.
+
+While we cannot solicit donations from people in states where we are
+not yet registered, we know of no prohibition against accepting
+donations from donors in these states who approach us with an offer to
+donate.
+
+International donations are accepted, but we don't know ANYTHING about
+how to make them tax-deductible, or even if they CAN be made
+deductible, and don't have the staff to handle it even if there are
+ways.
+
+Donations by check or money order may be sent to:
+
+Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+PMB 113
+1739 University Ave.
+Oxford, MS 38655-4109
+
+Contact us if you want to arrange for a wire transfer or payment
+method other than by check or money order.
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been approved by
+the US Internal Revenue Service as a 501(c)(3) organization with EIN
+[Employee Identification Number] 64-622154.  Donations are
+tax-deductible to the maximum extent permitted by law.  As fund-raising
+requirements for other states are met, additions to this list will be
+made and fund-raising will begin in the additional states.
+
+We need your donations more than ever!
+
+You can get up to date donation information online at:
+
+http://www.gutenberg.net/donation.html
+
+
+***
+
+If you can't reach Project Gutenberg,
+you can always email directly to:
+
+Michael S. Hart <hart@pobox.com>
+
+Prof. Hart will answer or forward your message.
+
+We would prefer to send you information by email.
+
+
+**The Legal Small Print**
+
+
+(Three Pages)
+
+***START**THE SMALL PRINT!**FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN EBOOKS**START***
+Why is this "Small Print!" statement here? You know: lawyers.
+They tell us you might sue us if there is something wrong with
+your copy of this eBook, even if you got it for free from
+someone other than us, and even if what's wrong is not our
+fault. So, among other things, this "Small Print!" statement
+disclaims most of our liability to you. It also tells you how
+you may distribute copies of this eBook if you want to.
+
+*BEFORE!* YOU USE OR READ THIS EBOOK
+By using or reading any part of this PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm
+eBook, you indicate that you understand, agree to and accept
+this "Small Print!" statement. If you do not, you can receive
+a refund of the money (if any) you paid for this eBook by
+sending a request within 30 days of receiving it to the person
+you got it from. If you received this eBook on a physical
+medium (such as a disk), you must return it with your request.
+
+ABOUT PROJECT GUTENBERG-TM EBOOKS
+This PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBook, like most PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBooks,
+is a "public domain" work distributed by Professor Michael S. Hart
+through the Project Gutenberg Association (the "Project").
+Among other things, this means that no one owns a United States copyright
+on or for this work, so the Project (and you!) can copy and
+distribute it in the United States without permission and
+without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, set forth
+below, apply if you wish to copy and distribute this eBook
+under the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark.
+
+Please do not use the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark to market
+any commercial products without permission.
+
+To create these eBooks, the Project expends considerable
+efforts to identify, transcribe and proofread public domain
+works. Despite these efforts, the Project's eBooks and any
+medium they may be on may contain "Defects". Among other
+things, Defects may take the form of incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other
+intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged
+disk or other eBook medium, a computer virus, or computer
+codes that damage or cannot be read by your equipment.
+
+LIMITED WARRANTY; DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES
+But for the "Right of Replacement or Refund" described below,
+[1] Michael Hart and the Foundation (and any other party you may
+receive this eBook from as a PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBook) disclaims
+all liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including
+legal fees, and [2] YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE OR
+UNDER STRICT LIABILITY, OR FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY OR CONTRACT,
+INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE
+OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE
+POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
+
+If you discover a Defect in this eBook within 90 days of
+receiving it, you can receive a refund of the money (if any)
+you paid for it by sending an explanatory note within that
+time to the person you received it from. If you received it
+on a physical medium, you must return it with your note, and
+such person may choose to alternatively give you a replacement
+copy. If you received it electronically, such person may
+choose to alternatively give you a second opportunity to
+receive it electronically.
+
+THIS EBOOK IS OTHERWISE PROVIDED TO YOU "AS-IS". NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ARE MADE TO YOU AS
+TO THE EBOOK OR ANY MEDIUM IT MAY BE ON, INCLUDING BUT NOT
+LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
+PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
+
+Some states do not allow disclaimers of implied warranties or
+the exclusion or limitation of consequential damages, so the
+above disclaimers and exclusions may not apply to you, and you
+may have other legal rights.
+
+INDEMNITY
+You will indemnify and hold Michael Hart, the Foundation,
+and its trustees and agents, and any volunteers associated
+with the production and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm
+texts harmless, from all liability, cost and expense, including
+legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of the
+following that you do or cause:  [1] distribution of this eBook,
+[2] alteration, modification, or addition to the eBook,
+or [3] any Defect.
+
+DISTRIBUTION UNDER "PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm"
+You may distribute copies of this eBook electronically, or by
+disk, book or any other medium if you either delete this
+"Small Print!" and all other references to Project Gutenberg,
+or:
+
+[1]  Only give exact copies of it.  Among other things, this
+     requires that you do not remove, alter or modify the
+     eBook or this "small print!" statement.  You may however,
+     if you wish, distribute this eBook in machine readable
+     binary, compressed, mark-up, or proprietary form,
+     including any form resulting from conversion by word
+     processing or hypertext software, but only so long as
+     *EITHER*:
+
+     [*]  The eBook, when displayed, is clearly readable, and
+          does *not* contain characters other than those
+          intended by the author of the work, although tilde
+          (~), asterisk (*) and underline (_) characters may
+          be used to convey punctuation intended by the
+          author, and additional characters may be used to
+          indicate hypertext links; OR
+
+     [*]  The eBook may be readily converted by the reader at
+          no expense into plain ASCII, EBCDIC or equivalent
+          form by the program that displays the eBook (as is
+          the case, for instance, with most word processors);
+          OR
+
+     [*]  You provide, or agree to also provide on request at
+          no additional cost, fee or expense, a copy of the
+          eBook in its original plain ASCII form (or in EBCDIC
+          or other equivalent proprietary form).
+
+[2]  Honor the eBook refund and replacement provisions of this
+     "Small Print!" statement.
+
+[3]  Pay a trademark license fee to the Foundation of 20% of the
+     gross profits you derive calculated using the method you
+     already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  If you
+     don't derive profits, no royalty is due.  Royalties are
+     payable to "Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation"
+     the 60 days following each date you prepare (or were
+     legally required to prepare) your annual (or equivalent
+     periodic) tax return.  Please contact us beforehand to
+     let us know your plans and to work out the details.
+
+WHAT IF YOU *WANT* TO SEND MONEY EVEN IF YOU DON'T HAVE TO?
+Project Gutenberg is dedicated to increasing the number of
+public domain and licensed works that can be freely distributed
+in machine readable form.
+
+The Project gratefully accepts contributions of money, time,
+public domain materials, or royalty free copyright licenses.
+Money should be paid to the:
+"Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+If you are interested in contributing scanning equipment or
+software or other items, please contact Michael Hart at:
+hart@pobox.com
+
+[Portions of this eBook's header and trailer may be reprinted only
+when distributed free of all fees.  Copyright (C) 2001, 2002 by
+Michael S. Hart.  Project Gutenberg is a TradeMark and may not be
+used in any sales of Project Gutenberg eBooks or other materials be
+they hardware or software or any other related product without
+express permission.]
+
+*END THE SMALL PRINT! FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN EBOOKS*Ver.02/11/02*END*
+
diff --git a/old/kniwc10.zip b/old/kniwc10.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..19cd67a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/kniwc10.zip